Last updated Nov 29, 2025
727 predictions
Sacks @ 01:00:55Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
At the next point in time when the Democratic Party holds the presidency and majorities in both the U.S. House and Senate (a federal trifecta), Senate Democrats will vote to abolish the legislative filibuster using a simple-majority (50+1) rules change.
And we know the Democrats will do it the next time the Democrats have the trifecta. They will absolutely get rid of the filibuster.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was: when Democrats next control the presidency, House, and Senate simultaneously (a federal trifecta), Senate Democrats will use the nuclear option to abolish the legislative filibuster.

Key facts:

  • The last Democratic federal trifecta occurred during the 117th Congress (January 2021–January 2023), when Democrats held the House, controlled the Senate via the vice president’s tie‑breaking vote, and Joe Biden was president. That trifecta ended on January 3, 2023, before this November 7, 2025 podcast episode. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In the 118th Congress (2023–2025), Republicans controlled the House while Democrats (with independents who caucused with them) controlled the Senate and Biden remained president—so there was no Democratic trifecta. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In the current 119th Congress (2025–2027), Republicans control both the House and the Senate, and Donald Trump is president, so the federal government is under unified Republican, not Democratic, control. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • As of late 2025, the 60‑vote legislative filibuster is still in place; recent coverage describes it as an ongoing constraint on ordinary legislation, and debates about ending it are framed as a future possibility, not something that has already happened. (politifact.com)

Because there has been no new Democratic federal trifecta after the date of the prediction, the condition that would trigger the test of Sacks’s claim has not yet occurred. We therefore cannot say whether Democrats would, in fact, abolish the filibuster under those future circumstances.

So the prediction remains untested and is too early to judge.

Sacks @ 01:01:55Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
Whenever the Democratic Party next regains unified control of the federal government (presidency plus House and Senate majorities), they will eliminate the Senate legislative filibuster.
And if and when? Because at some point, Democrats will at some point return to power, you know, they're going to get rid of the filibuster.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, Democrats do not have unified control of the federal government. Republicans hold the presidency (Donald Trump’s second, non‑consecutive term) and majorities in both the House and the Senate, i.e., a Republican trifecta, in the 119th Congress (2025–2027). (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the prediction is explicitly conditional on whenever Democrats next regain unified control (presidency + House + Senate), and that condition has not yet occurred, there is no way yet to test whether they “will eliminate the filibuster” at that future time.

Furthermore, current reporting shows the legislative filibuster is still in place in the Republican‑controlled Senate, with Majority Leader John Thune stating he lacks the votes to abolish it, despite pressure from President Trump. (nypost.com) This confirms that the rule has not yet been removed, but that still does not say what Democrats would do if and when they next control the presidency and both chambers.

So the prediction is too early to evaluate: the triggering scenario (Democratic trifecta) has not happened, making the outcome of the prediction unknown at this time.

Sacks @ 01:13:48Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If Republicans, despite currently holding unified control of the federal government, fail to deliver tangible policy results due to the shutdown and filibuster constraints, socialist-aligned Democrats will win national power within roughly three years (by about the 2028 election cycle).
Otherwise, these socialists are going to take over in three years.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late November 2025, the 2028 U.S. election cycle has not yet occurred (the presidential election will be held in November 2028), so we cannot know whether “socialist-aligned Democrats” will win national power within the three-year window described in the prediction. Because the evaluation date precedes the end of the forecast horizon, the prediction’s outcome cannot yet be determined and remains too early to call.

Sacks @ 00:09:09Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If California successfully imposes a one‑time 5% wealth tax on billionaires and collects it, the state will subsequently repeat or extend wealth taxes rather than keeping it a true one‑time measure.
And that's why I think even if they say this is a one time thing, we all know that it won't be one time. If they get away with it, it'll become a regular thing.
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, California has not yet imposed or collected a one‑time 5% wealth tax on billionaires. What exists is a proposed ballot initiative, the 2026 Billionaire Tax Act, which would levy a one‑time 5% tax on the net worth of Californians worth over $1 billion and is currently in the signature‑gathering / qualification phase for the November 2026 ballot. (forbes.com)

News coverage and the campaign’s own materials all describe this as a proposal that still needs sufficient signatures and then voter approval before it could become law; none report that it has been enacted or that any such tax has been collected. (apnews.com)

Because the conditional trigger in the prediction (“If California successfully imposes a one‑time 5% wealth tax on billionaires and collects it”) has not occurred yet, we cannot evaluate whether the state will later repeat or extend such taxes. The prediction therefore remains too early to judge and is best classified as inconclusive at this time.

Sacks @ 01:09:48Inconclusive
aipoliticsgovernment
If current state-level 'algorithmic discrimination' regulations (such as Colorado's) are not halted or reversed, they will ultimately result in AI models being required to embed DEI-style ideological constraints similar to those previously promoted by the Biden administration, effectively mandating DEI-like bias layers in mainstream AI systems.
And I do think that where it's going to lead, if it's not stopped, is right back to Di.
Explanation

By November 30, 2025, there is no evidence that state-level “algorithmic discrimination” laws like Colorado’s SB 24-205 have resulted in AI models being legally required to embed DEI-style ideological constraints or “bias layers” in the way the prediction describes.

What these laws actually do so far:

  • Colorado’s AI law (SB 24-205 / Colorado Artificial Intelligence Act) creates a duty of reasonable care for developers and deployers of high‑risk AI systems to avoid “algorithmic discrimination,” and requires risk management programs, impact assessments, notices, and disclosures. It treats violations as deceptive trade practices, but it does not prescribe specific ideological content or DEI-style balancing rules inside models. (linklaters.com)
  • The law’s compliance date has been delayed from February 1, 2026, to June 30, 2026, giving more time for possible amendments; its framework remains focused on discrimination risk, not mandated DEI ideology. (linkedin.com)
  • The statute explicitly targets high‑risk decision systems (employment, credit, housing, etc.), and commentary notes that general-purpose conversational AI used mainly to provide information with a policy against discriminatory content can fall outside the “high‑risk” scope. (americanbar.org)
  • Other emerging state efforts (e.g., California AB 2930 on automated decision tools) similarly focus on preventing discriminatory outcomes and requiring assessments and transparency, not on embedding DEI ideological layers in mainstream foundation models. (employmentlawwatch.com)

On the federal side, there have been proposals to preempt state AI laws for a decade, and separate California laws addressing catastrophic AI risk and transparency for frontier models, but again, these do not mandate DEI-style ideological constraints in models. (washingtonpost.com)

Because:

  1. The key state laws are not yet in force (Colorado’s core regime starts mid‑2026),
  2. No law currently requires mainstream AI systems to hard‑code DEI-style ideological constraints as a condition of legality, and
  3. The prediction is explicitly about where things will ultimately lead “if it’s not stopped,” with no clear time horizon,

there is not enough elapsed time or concrete regulatory outcome to say the prediction is either right or wrong. It remains a speculative, long‑term causal claim about regulatory drift, so the proper judgment as of now is inconclusive.

Sacks @ 00:59:47Inconclusive
aieconomy
Over the coming years and decades, AI adoption will not lead to mass technological unemployment but will instead shift human labor toward less rote, more gratifying tasks, resulting in higher overall productivity and higher standards of living across the economy.
So I think what's going to happen here is that AI is going to enable people to shift their work to more gratifying and less rote parts of the economy that will increase productivity and standards of living for everybody.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly long‑term: it concerns what will happen “over the coming years and decades” to employment, productivity, and living standards as AI diffuses. Only about six weeks have passed since the podcast’s release (17 Oct 2025 → 30 Nov 2025), far too short to judge decades‑scale claims.

Current evidence is mixed and still emerging:

  • Multiple studies (Yale–Brookings, U.S. Census ABS, Fed and think‑tank reports) find that, so far, AI adoption has not caused large net job losses at the aggregate level; most firms report little change in worker numbers, with some retraining and localized displacement instead of mass unemployment. (theguardian.com)
  • At the same time, there are meaningful pockets of disruption: higher unemployment and reduced hiring in AI‑exposed, especially entry‑level, white‑collar roles; job cuts explicitly attributed to AI; and concerns about a “jobpocalypse” for new graduates. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Research broadly agrees that AI can generate significant productivity gains at the task and firm level and may already have added a measurable boost to aggregate labor productivity, but the extent to which this will translate into widely shared higher living standards remains uncertain. (stlouisfed.org)

Because (1) the forecast horizon is many years to decades, (2) we are still in the very early stages of widespread AI deployment, and (3) the long‑run balance between displacement, new job creation, productivity gains, inequality, and living standards is not yet observable, there is not enough elapsed time or evidence to classify the prediction as right or wrong. It remains a plausible but untested long‑term scenario rather than a claim that can already be verified or falsified.

Sacks @ 00:59:47Inconclusive
aieconomy
For the foreseeable future (at least over the coming decade), AI systems will function primarily as tools that handle intermediate subtasks rather than fully replacing humans in end-to-end jobs, leading to higher human productivity rather than widespread job loss.
AI will not be a replacement for humans. They're going to do the stuff in the middle that humans don't like to do, and it's going to allow humans to be much more productive.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns “the foreseeable future (at least over the coming decade)” starting from the episode’s release on 17 October 2025, so it cannot reasonably be judged less than two months later (by 30 November 2025). A 10‑year labor‑market claim needs most or all of that horizon to play out.

Early evidence about AI and jobs is still mixed and preliminary:

  • Surveys and regional data (e.g., New York Fed) find AI adoption rising but layoffs directly attributed to AI remain rare; many firms report using AI mainly as a productivity tool and plan to retrain workers, which aligns with the “AI as tool/augmentation” part of the claim, at least so far. (pymnts.com)
  • Large workforce studies (e.g., SHRM 2025) show substantial task-level automation but relatively few jobs that are both highly automatable and free of non‑technical barriers to full replacement, suggesting transformation and partial automation rather than wholesale job loss for now. (shrm.org)
  • Other analyses (Goldman Sachs Research, PwC, WEF and similar summaries) project that AI may eventually displace a meaningful share of jobs, but also emphasize uncertainty and the potential for offsetting job creation and productivity gains over many years, not weeks. (goldmansachs.com)
  • Prominent experts like Geoffrey Hinton and Dario Amodei warn that AI could cause very large job losses by 2030, while others remain skeptical that such extreme outcomes are likely, underscoring that long‑term impacts remain unsettled. (news.com.au)

Because (1) the prediction is explicitly decadal, (2) only a tiny fraction of that period has elapsed, and (3) forward‑looking analyses still disagree about whether AI will mainly augment or substantially replace workers, there is not yet enough evidence to label the prediction as right or wrong. It is therefore too early to call.

Sacks @ 01:02:07Inconclusive
tech
OpenAI (or its associated infrastructure partners) will operate at least one data center of roughly 10 gigawatts of power capacity by around 2030 (approximately five years from the 2025 recording date), following an intermediate ramp through ~2–3 GW in 2026–2027 and ~5 GW in the subsequent couple of years.
So you could get to a ten gigawatt in, I don't know, probably five years, something like that.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it is far too early to determine whether this 2030-ish prediction is correct.

The claim is that by around 2030 (about five years after the October 2025 recording), OpenAI or its close infrastructure partners will be operating at least one data center of roughly 10 GW power capacity, with an intermediate ramp of ~2–3 GW in 2026–2027 and ~5 GW in the following couple of years.

Even with up‑to‑date news and industry reporting, there is no way in 2025 to verify what OpenAI’s or its partners’ data center fleet will look like in 2028–2030; at most we can observe current build‑outs, announced projects, and power contracts. Those do not constitute confirmation or refutation of a specific 2030‑scale outcome yet. Any judgment now would be speculative rather than factual.

Because the prediction’s evaluation window is centered on future years (2028–2030) and has not arrived, the correct status as of late 2025 is "inconclusive (too early)".

Sacks @ 01:18:27Inconclusive
economy
The BRICS bloc will not launch a functional, widely used gold‑backed settlement currency for international trade within the next few years (i.e., before roughly 2028).
This trend really started during the Biden administration with the Ukraine war... And just by the way, when the BRICs talk about this currency that they're going to develop... that might be part of what's driving this as well. That's a very long term project by the BRICs countries. I don't think we're going to see anything in the next few years.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, BRICS has not launched a unified, widely used, gold‑backed settlement currency for international trade, but the prediction’s time window ("the next few years," i.e., roughly until 2028) has not yet elapsed.

Current status:

  • At the July 2025 BRICS summit in Rio, leaders explicitly did not launch a joint BRICS currency and instead prioritized local‑currency trade and development of the BRICS Pay payment platform. Analysts reviewing the summit concluded that any euro‑style BRICS currency is at least a decade away, with a possible settlement "unit of account" only around 2028–2030 and broader systems (like BRICS Pay) now targeted toward 2030.

    These same sources note that, as of October 2025, there is still no unified BRICS currency and no near‑term release date. (ebc.com)

  • A detailed October 2025 analysis of Russia’s role in the project reports that the much‑touted BRICS common currency proposal was effectively shelved ahead of the 2024 summit and was not on the formal agenda at the 2025 summit, underscoring the lack of a currently functioning BRICS joint currency. (desk-russie.info)

  • There is an emerging gold‑linked settlement architecture: the New Development Bank has set up a cross‑border settlement hub to facilitate BRICS trade under a gold‑influenced standard, and officials/analysts describe a proposed settlement unit (often called the “Unit”) backed 40% by gold and 60% by member currencies. However, this is described as a future or pilot‑stage mechanism, with operational targets around 2030 and pilots possibly starting in 2026—not as a presently widely used international settlement currency. (watcher.guru)

Given this, Sacks’s claim that we are unlikely to "see anything" like a BRICS gold‑backed currency in the next few years has not yet been falsified, but it also cannot yet be confirmed as correct, because there is still significant time before his implied horizon of ~2028. The appropriate rating therefore is “inconclusive (too early)”.

Sacks @ 01:14:19Inconclusive
aieconomy
If the US does not impose heavy new AI‑specific regulatory burdens, AI and its related build‑out will help drive US real GDP growth to approximately 4–5% annually over the next few years (roughly the late‑2020s period).
If we go down that path, we could sabotage this if we just allow it to happen, if we allow the innovators to do what they do best. I think this is going to drive 4 or 5% GDP growth for the next few years.View on YouTube
Explanation

It’s too early to evaluate this prediction.

  • The prediction, made on 10 October 2025, concerned “the next few years,” i.e., roughly the late‑2020s. That horizon (multiple years after 2025) has not yet elapsed as of 30 November 2025, so we cannot know whether average U.S. real GDP growth will indeed run at ~4–5% annually over that future period.
  • Current realized data show recent U.S. real GDP growth in the 2–3% range, not 4–5%. For example, BEA estimates real GDP grew 2.5% in 2023 and 2.8% in 2024 on an annual basis, with quarterly annualized rates like 2.3–3.1% in late 2024. (bea.gov) Early 2025 data are mixed, with an advance estimate showing a 0.3% annualized decline in Q1 2025 and later revisions showing a 3.8% annualized increase in Q2 2025, underscoring short‑term volatility rather than a clear multi‑year 4–5% trend. (apps.bea.gov)
  • However, the prediction explicitly refers to average growth over the coming “few years” conditional on regulatory choices around AI. Multi‑year averages cannot be inferred from a few quarters of data, and long‑run effects of AI build‑out on productivity and growth would reasonably take more time to manifest and be measured.

Because the specified time window (the late‑2020s) has not yet occurred, and the claim is about a multi‑year future path of GDP growth under certain policy conditions, the accuracy of the prediction cannot yet be determined.

Sacks @ 01:12:35Inconclusive
aigovernmentpolitics
To comply with Colorado SB 24-205, commercial AI model developers serving Colorado will implement additional fairness or DEI-oriented constraints that suppress or alter outputs which could create disparate impact on protected classes, resulting in so‑called 'woke AI' behavior in deployed systems within that jurisdiction.
The only way that I see for model developers to comply with this law is to build in a new Di layer into the models, to basically somehow prevent models from giving outputs that might have a disparate impact on protected groups. So we're back to woke AI again, and I think that's the whole point of this Colorado law.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Colorado’s SB 24-205 (the Colorado Artificial Intelligence Act) has not yet gone into effect, and its implementation has been formally delayed to June 30, 2026. Multiple legal summaries note that lawmakers pushed the effective date from February 1, 2026 to June 30, 2026 during an August 2025 special session, precisely to reconsider and possibly revise the law’s obligations before they bite. (orrick.com)

The law, in its current form, imposes a duty of reasonable care to avoid “algorithmic discrimination” on developers and deployers of high‑risk AI systems used in consequential decisions (employment, credit, housing, healthcare, etc.). Compliance is framed around risk‑management programs, impact assessments, transparency, and disclosures, with a rebuttable presumption of reasonable care if those process requirements are met. (hrlawwatch.com) It does not explicitly require building a separate DEI or fairness “layer” that censors or reshapes all model outputs.

Importantly, the statute’s stringent provisions apply mainly to high‑risk decision systems, not to general‑purpose chatbots. Commentaries underline that generative AI systems like ChatGPT are generally out of scope unless they are actually used to make consequential decisions, in which case they are regulated only in that specific use context. (wsgr.com)

Public guidance for businesses preparing for the Colorado law focuses on governance—risk assessments, documentation, bias testing, consumer notice, and AG reporting—and does not show evidence that major model developers have rolled out Colorado‑specific DEI layers or a distinct “woke AI” behavior profile to comply with SB 24‑205. (seyfarth.com) The article quoting Sacks about a looming “woke AI” patchwork is commentary on what he thinks will happen, not documentation that such changes have actually been implemented. (meritalk.com)

Because (1) the law is not yet in force, (2) its final form may still change before June 30, 2026, and (3) there is no concrete evidence that developers have already adopted the specific compliance strategy Sacks predicted (a new DEI layer that suppresses outputs causing disparate impact, leading to jurisdiction‑specific “woke AI”), it is too early to determine whether his prediction will ultimately be right or wrong. Therefore the correct status is **“inconclusive (too early).”

Sacks @ 01:20:40Inconclusive
politicsaigovernment
Over the next few years, Democratic‑leaning U.S. states will enact and enforce AI regulations targeting 'algorithmic discrimination,' which will cause major AI providers to deploy state‑specific versions of their models with DEI‑oriented constraints ('woke AI') for use in those jurisdictions.
what you're going to see is that the blue states will drive this ban on quote unquote, algorithmic discrimination, which will lead to Di being promoted in models, which is what the Biden administration wanted. You will see the return of woke AI at the state level.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it is too early to determine whether Sacks’s multi‑year prediction is right or wrong.

  1. Timeframe not yet elapsed. The prediction explicitly concerns what will happen “over the next few years.” Only about two months have passed since the October 3, 2025 podcast. Key state AI laws that could test this prediction—like Colorado’s Artificial Intelligence Act—do not begin substantive effect until 2026 and have even had their effective dates pushed back, so their real-world impact on model behavior has not yet materialized. (infographics.bclplaw.marketing)

  2. Blue / Democratic‑leaning states are advancing AI rules around algorithmic discrimination. Colorado’s AI Act (enacted 2024) is the leading example: it creates a comprehensive framework for “high‑risk” AI systems and expressly aims to prevent algorithmic discrimination in consequential decisions (employment, housing, credit, etc.). (infographics.bclplaw.marketing) New York and California have also pushed AI legislation and enforcement approaches that emphasize bias, civil rights, and consumer protection in automated decision‑making and hiring tools. (aitechtrend.com) This supports the first part of the forecast—that blue states would drive regulation framed around “algorithmic discrimination.”

  3. No evidence yet of state‑specific “woke AI” model variants. The crucial second part of the prediction is that such state laws would force major AI providers to deploy state‑specific, DEI‑constrained model versions (“return of woke AI at the state level”). Public reporting on how companies are planning for Colorado-, California-, and New York‑style rules shows emphasis on documentation, risk‑management programs, transparency, and impact assessments, but does not report OpenAI, Google, Meta, or others shipping separate “Colorado‑only” or “California‑only” model forks with uniquely constrained outputs. (lathropgpm.com) In practice, commentators note that large companies often respond to the strictest state rules by raising their baseline standard nationwide (as happened with privacy and emissions rules), rather than building many jurisdiction‑specific products. (govfacts.org) That cuts against the mechanism Sacks predicts, but the relevant laws aren’t yet in full force, so this might still change.

  4. Regulatory and political environment is still in flux. There is an active fight over whether states can keep or expand these rules: a bipartisan coalition of state attorneys general has urged Congress not to preempt state AI regulations, while the Trump administration and allied groups have attacked certain state regimes as creating “woke” AI and are pushing for federal preemption or a single national approval regime. (reuters.com) Because this preemption battle is unresolved, it remains unclear whether blue‑state rules will ultimately be strong enough to compel the kind of state‑specific model behavior Sacks describes.

Given (a) the explicitly multi‑year horizon, (b) the fact that the most relevant state laws have not yet been implemented or enforced at scale, and (c) the lack of current evidence of state‑specific “woke AI” model variants, the prediction cannot yet be judged as clearly right or clearly wrong. The appropriate classification at this time is inconclusive (too early).

politicsaigovernment
During the Trump administration beginning in 2025, the White House will publicly support, and a growing number of Republican legislators will eventually back, federal legislation to preempt state‑level AI regulations and establish a single national AI regulatory standard.
So the feds preempted that. And I think we should do the same thing on AI. That's what the president basically said in his speech. So I think the administration ultimately will support this. And I think I think more Republicans will come on board as they realize what the blue states are doing here is not helpful for conservatives.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2025 shows that the dynamic Sacks described has clearly materialized, even though Congress has not yet enacted a comprehensive AI law:

  • White House support for preempting state AI laws. President Trump’s signature budget reconciliation package, the One Big Beautiful Bill Act (H.R. 1), originated from the White House and was framed as his core second‑term agenda. The House‑passed version explicitly contained a 10‑year moratorium on “state‑level enforcement of any law or regulation regulating artificial intelligence (AI),” i.e., a federal preemption of state AI rules built into Trump’s megabill.(en.wikipedia.org) Separately, reporting shows Trump personally asked Congress to add a provision blocking state AI laws to the National Defense Authorization Act, with plans to sue and defund states that passed such laws.(reuters.com) A leaked draft executive order, “Eliminating State Law Obstruction of National AI Policy,” would direct DOJ to challenge state AI statutes and declares the administration’s goal of a “minimally burdensome national standard — not 50 discordant state ones,” further confirming White House backing for a single, nationally determined AI regime.(arstechnica.com)

  • Growing Republican legislative backing. The 10‑year moratorium was written by House Republicans into Trump’s flagship reconciliation bill and passed the House on a near‑party‑line vote, meaning a large share of GOP representatives voted to strip states of AI‑regulatory authority.(en.wikipedia.org) Coverage of the provision describes Republicans as arguing it is needed to avoid a “patchwork” of state rules and to give Congress time to pass a comprehensive federal AI framework — precisely the “single national standard” rationale Sacks anticipated.(notus.org) In the Senate, Republican leadership initially advanced versions tying federal AI funds to states refraining from AI regulation, and only later, after major backlash from state officials of both parties, did the Senate vote 99–1 to strip the AI‑preemption language from Trump’s megabill.(reuters.com) That sequence (House passage, then partial Republican retreat in the Senate) shows that substantial numbers of GOP lawmakers did in fact get “on board” with preemptive federal AI legislation before political costs forced a climb‑down.

  • National‑standard framing vs. actual law on the books. Reuters and other outlets note that tech firms like OpenAI, Google, Meta, and Andreessen Horowitz have been pressing for national AI standards to replace state rules, and that Trump’s efforts to block state laws through the budget bill and NDAA align with that push — even though, as of late November 2025, Congress still has not enacted an overarching federal AI regulatory framework.(reuters.com) Instead, the White House and allied Republicans have repeatedly tried to (a) stop states from regulating AI and (b) position federal authority as the locus of future AI rules, which matches Sacks’s substance: preempting blue‑state AI regulation in favor of a single, federally controlled standard.

Because Sacks’s prediction was about who would support what kind of policy (White House + an expanding bloc of Republicans backing federal preemption and a unified national approach), not about the ultimate success of those bills, the core elements he forecast have already occurred. The specific preemption provisions have been beaten back so far, and no comprehensive national AI statute exists yet, but his political prediction about Trump’s administration and Republican legislators lining up behind federal preemption of state AI rules is borne out by the 2025 record.

Sacks @ 01:13:32Inconclusive
politicsconflict
If the current trend of politically motivated violence and intolerance of opposing speech in the United States continues, it will ultimately lead to a civil war, affecting both sides of the political spectrum. No explicit timeframe is given.
And it's not Western civilization. It's something different And destructive, and where it will lead to is a civil war that none of us should want. On either side of the political spectrum.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there is no recognized civil war occurring in the United States; political institutions, elections, and law enforcement remain functioning nationwide, and major news and academic sources describe U.S. tensions in terms such as polarization, political violence, and in some cases democratic backsliding or risk of civil conflict, but not an actual civil war.

However, the prediction is:

If the current trend of politically motivated violence and intolerance of opposing speech in the United States continues, it will ultimately lead to a civil war.

Key points:

  • It is explicitly conditional ("if the current trend continues"). Whether that trend continues indefinitely is itself uncertain and not fully observable yet.
  • It has no explicit timeframe (no date or generation specified), so it is a long‑range, effectively open‑ended prediction.
  • Since a U.S. civil war is a large, discrete event that has not happened yet, we cannot say the prediction is correct.
  • Because the timeframe is unspecified and we are still well within the future in which such an event could occur, we also cannot confidently label it wrong.

Given the lack of a specified deadline and the fact that the predicted event (a U.S. civil war) has neither occurred nor been rendered impossible, the status of the prediction as of November 30, 2025 is inconclusive rather than right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

Sacks @ 00:32:35Inconclusive
politicseconomy
According to CBO projections cited here, U.S. tariff policy in place under Trump in 2025 will generate approximately $4 trillion in federal revenue over the subsequent 10 years (by around 2035).
And I just want to note that the CBO has now increased their projection of what tariffs will raise to 4 trillion over the next decade.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction concerns what actual federal revenue from U.S. tariffs will total over the decade following 2025 (roughly 2026–2035) under Trump-era policy. As of the current date (November 30, 2025), only a small fraction of that 10‑year window has elapsed, so it is impossible to determine whether realized tariff revenues will end up around $4 trillion or not.

Sacks’ quote describes a Congressional Budget Office (CBO) projection (i.e., a forecast) of tariff revenues, not an outcome that can already be checked against final numbers. CBO baseline projections are forward‑looking estimates and are routinely revised; whether those projections ultimately prove accurate can only be evaluated after the full period has passed and actual collections are known, which will not be until around 2036 when data for the full 10‑year span are available.

Because:

  • The relevant period is ~10 years after 2025.
  • We are only in late 2025.
  • Final tariff revenue data for that decade do not yet exist.

The correctness of the prediction cannot yet be evaluated. Therefore the appropriate status is “inconclusive (too early)”.

politicseconomy
Regardless of the specific IEEPA case outcome, the U.S. Supreme Court will not issue a ruling by October 14, 2025 that requires a material rollback or cessation of Trump’s then-current tariff policy; tariffs will remain substantially in place using alternative statutory authority if needed.
Well, I'm not concerned about the fate of tariffs at the Supreme Court, even though it's probably a coin flip. Whether the Supreme Court's going to allow the tariffs under Ieepa. But there are five different laws under which the president has the authority to impose these tariffs... So at the end of the day, I think it's actually quite unlikely that the Supreme Court's going to force a change in tariff policy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that by October 14, 2025 (the Federal Circuit’s stay-expiry date) the U.S. Supreme Court would not issue a ruling requiring a material rollback or cessation of Trump’s then‑current tariff policy, and that the tariffs would remain substantially in place, with the option to rely on alternative statutory authority.

What actually happened by October 14, 2025:

  1. Lower courts ruled the IEEPA tariffs illegal but stayed their effect.
    The Court of International Trade and then the Federal Circuit held that Trump’s broad “Liberation Day”/IEEPA tariffs exceeded his statutory authority, but the Federal Circuit stayed its ruling until October 14, 2025 to allow an appeal. These decisions expressly left the tariffs in place pending Supreme Court review. (law.justia.com)

  2. Supreme Court took the case but did not decide it by October 14.
    On September 9, 2025, the Supreme Court granted certiorari and fast‑tracked the consolidated cases Learning Resources, Inc. v. Trump (No. 24‑1287) and Trump v. V.O.S. Selections, Inc. (No. 25‑250), setting oral argument for November 5, 2025. As of that date and through October 14, 2025, the docket listed the opinion as TBD and showed no merits ruling. (supreme.justia.com) A Brownstein client alert after argument similarly notes that the Court heard argument on Nov. 5 and that a decision is still pending. (bhfs.com)

  3. Tariffs remained in force past October 14.
    Coverage of the appeals and Supreme Court grant consistently reports that, despite the illegality findings, Trump’s IEEPA‑based tariffs remained in effect during the appeal window and into the Supreme Court phase, at least through mid‑October. (apnews.com) Subsequent analyses after certiorari emphasize that the IEEPA tariffs will remain in effect pending the Supreme Court’s decision. (bhfs.com)

  4. Trump’s broader tariff regime was still substantially intact.
    The “Liberation Day” tariffs—Trump’s signature second‑term global tariff policy imposed via Executive Order 14257 under IEEPA—continued to apply broad baseline and reciprocal tariffs on imports. (en.wikipedia.org) Other Trump tariffs under different statutes (e.g., Section 232 metals and autos, and separate Venezuela‑related tariffs) were unaffected by the IEEPA litigation and remained in place as well. (en.wikipedia.org) Commentary around the case also notes that, even if the IEEPA route is ultimately struck down, the administration can and intends to pivot to other statutory authorities to preserve tariff policy. (en.wikipedia.org)

Putting this together: By October 14, 2025, the Supreme Court had issued no merits ruling at all in the tariff cases, let alone one compelling a material rollback or cessation of Trump’s tariff policy, and Trump’s key tariffs remained substantially in effect. That matches Sacks’s prediction, including the core claim about the absence of a Supreme Court‑mandated rollback by that date.

Sacks @ 00:32:37Inconclusive
politicseconomy
No U.S. president succeeding Trump through at least January 20, 2033 will fully repeal Trump-era tariffs; the overall tariff structure will remain materially intact (no broad return to pre-Trump tariff levels across major categories such as Chinese imports and EVs).
My guess is that they're not going to be reversed in the future by a future president, because I think they actually are quite popular with the country, with workers...View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly covers a period through at least January 20, 2033 and asserts that no U.S. president after Trump, over that entire span, will fully repeal Trump‑era tariffs (i.e., no broad return to pre‑Trump tariff levels across major categories like Chinese imports and EVs).

As of November 30, 2025, that end date has not occurred, so it is impossible to know whether some future administration between now and January 20, 2033 might substantially roll back or restructure these tariffs. Even if we checked the current tariff regime today, that would only tell us whether the prediction is holding so far, not whether it is ultimately right or wrong over the full time window it specifies.

Because the relevant future period has not elapsed, the correctness of the prediction cannot yet be determined, so the only appropriate classification is "inconclusive (too early)".

Sacks @ 00:41:44Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If Trump wins the pending Supreme Court case on tariff authority, his administration will attempt within his current term (ending January 20, 2029) to get Congress to codify key elements of his tariff policy into statute.
So yeah, it may make sense after the administration hopefully wins its case to seek to codify these things into law. We have a few years to do that, but I don't think it makes sense to wait for Congress to act because they may never act.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the Supreme Court has not yet decided the consolidated tariff-authority case (Learning Resources, Inc. v. Trump and Trump v. V.O.S. Selections, Inc., docket 24-1287 and 25-250). The Court accepted the case on September 9, 2025 and heard oral argument on November 5, 2025, but has not issued an opinion; coverage notes that a decision is expected by the end of the Court’s term in mid‑2026, not yet reached.

  • The Learning Resources / V.O.S. Selections case is still pending at the Supreme Court; the questions presented concern whether IEEPA authorizes Trump’s tariffs and, if so, whether that statute is an unconstitutional delegation of legislative power. No decision is listed yet in the Court’s 2025 term entry for the case. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Reporting on the November 2025 oral arguments emphasizes that the justices have not ruled and that a decision is expected by summer 2026 / July 2026. (theguardian.com)

Sacks’s prediction is explicitly conditional: if Trump wins this pending Supreme Court case on tariff authority, then his administration will during this term (through January 20, 2029) seek to have Congress codify key parts of his tariff policy into statute. As of now:

  1. The condition (“Trump wins the pending Supreme Court case”) has not yet been met or falsified, because the Court has not ruled.
  2. Even if Trump eventually wins, the time window for the administration to try to get Congress to codify the tariffs runs until January 20, 2029, which is still more than three years away.

Because neither the legal predicate nor the time horizon has resolved yet, there is not enough information to say whether the prediction will ultimately be right or wrong. Hence the status is inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 00:46:37Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
Federal court challenges will not invalidate Trump’s National Guard deployment and related federal law-enforcement intervention in Washington, D.C.; those interventions will continue to be legally permitted through at least the end of his current term.
So, look, I think the court reached a very specific decision about what happened in California. We still haven't had a case adjudicating the question of whether the proposed interventions in these blue states to clean up crime will be allowed, over the objections of Democratic governors. We don't know. I think it's pretty clear that the DC intervention will be allowed, and it's extremely popular.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump’s second term began on January 20, 2025 and is scheduled to run through January 20, 2029, so “the end of his current term” is still over three years away as of November 30, 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)

Following his August 11, 2025 executive order declaring a “crime emergency” in Washington, D.C., Trump federalized control of D.C. policing under the Home Rule Act and deployed more than 2,000 National Guard troops and federal law‑enforcement personnel in the city.(en.wikipedia.org) These deployments immediately drew legal challenges from D.C. officials.

On November 20, 2025, U.S. District Judge Jia Cobb ruled that Trump’s National Guard deployment in D.C. is unlawful, granting a preliminary injunction ordering the administration to end the deployment and barring similar deployments without the mayor’s consent. The order is stayed for 21 days to allow appeal, and the administration has announced it will appeal.(oag.dc.gov) As of late November, Guard troops remain in D.C. and additional forces have even been requested after a fatal attack, while the injunction has not yet taken effect and higher courts have not ruled.(time.com)

Because (1) Trump’s term has only just begun and runs until 2029, and (2) the key D.C. case is at the preliminary-injunction stage with appeals pending, it is too early to know whether federal court challenges will ultimately invalidate the D.C. interventions or whether they will remain legally permitted “through at least the end of his current term.” Early signs from the district court cut against Sacks’s view, but the final legal outcome and long‑run permissibility are not yet determined. Therefore the prediction is best scored as inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 00:55:56Inconclusive
economy
The roughly $8 trillion of new investment in the US economy that has been announced will begin to significantly impact the real economy, with most of its effects showing up by late 2026 and into 2027.
And that's going to land over the next year, right? That hasn't actually been dumped in. ... We should see that in 2027. Maybe late 2026.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly places most of the effects of the ~$8T in announced U.S. investment in the period “late 2026” and “2027” (per the quote: “We should see that in 2027. Maybe late 2026.”). As of the current date, November 30, 2025, that time window has not yet begun, so it is too early to evaluate whether the investment has “significantly” impacted the real economy in the way described. Therefore, the accuracy of this prediction cannot yet be assessed.

economy
At the September 2025 FOMC meeting, the Federal Reserve will cut the federal funds rate by 25 basis points (not 50), and is likely to follow with at least one additional 25 basis point cut afterward.
I would say that now, in light of the latest jobs report, Powell should really cut 50 basis points... I doubt he will. It's probably going to be 25 and then hopefully another 25.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple outlets and Fed-related summaries shows that at the September 16–17, 2025 FOMC meeting, the Federal Reserve cut the federal funds target range by 25 basis points, from 4.25%–4.50% to 4.00%–4.25%, marking its first cut since December 2024—i.e., not a 50 bp move. (cbsnews.com)

At the subsequent meeting on October 28–29, 2025, the FOMC again lowered the target range by 25 basis points, to 3.75%–4.00%. Both the Fed’s own minutes and independent market commentary describe this as the second consecutive 0.25% rate cut, following the September move. (federalreserve.gov)

The next FOMC meeting is scheduled for December 9–10, 2025 and has not yet occurred as of November 30, 2025, but Sacks’ prediction only required that the Fed cut 25 bps in September and then deliver at least one additional 25 bp cut afterward—which has already happened with the October cut. (federalreserve.gov)

Sacks @ 00:57:31Inconclusive
economymarkets
Over the coming rate‑cut cycle starting in late 2025, lower interest rates will stimulate US economic growth and improve the US fiscal position, contributing to a generally strong ("bullish") US economy in 2026.
But regardless of what it is, I think that most people think interest rates are coming and that's going to juice the economy and further improve our fiscal position. So look for 26. I think there's a lot of bullish factors here.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is primarily about conditions in 2026:

  • A rate‑cut cycle starting in late 2025.
  • Those lower rates stimulating US economic growth in 2026.
  • An improved US fiscal position and a generally bullish US economy in 2026.

As of November 30, 2025, 2026 has not yet occurred, so we cannot assess:

  1. Whether 2026 GDP growth, labor markets, markets, and broader conditions will in fact be “bullish.”
  2. Whether the US fiscal position (deficit, debt trajectory, interest costs as % of GDP) will have improved during 2026 as a result of the rate‑cut cycle.

Even if we fully knew the Fed’s actions by late 2025 (e.g., whether they have begun cutting rates), the core of the prediction is about outcomes in 2026, which are still in the future relative to the current date. Because those outcomes cannot yet be observed or measured, the prediction cannot be judged as right or wrong at this time.

Therefore, the correct classification is “inconclusive (too early)”.

economy
US retail gasoline prices will remain relatively low compared to the 2022–2023 period for at least the near term following summer 2025 (i.e., they will not spike back to prior highs in the subsequent months).
Number three, this has been the most affordable summer at the pump since 2021. And low gas prices don't seem to be going anywhere anytime soon.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that U.S. retail gasoline prices in the months after summer 2025 stayed well below the 2022–2023 highs and did not spike back to those prior levels.

  • In 2022, the national average price for regular gasoline hit an all‑time high of about $5.01/gal in June, with several months averaging close to or above $4/gal. (newsroom.acg.aaa.com) In 2023, the national average also remained elevated, with multiple months around $3.80–$3.90/gal and an annual average of about $3.52/gal. (lendingtree.com)
  • By contrast, in 2025, national average retail regular gasoline prices have been around $3.10–$3.17/gal through the year, with the highest months (April and September) still far below 2022–2023 peaks. (ycharts.com)
  • Specifically after summer 2025 (September onward), federal and private data show monthly averages of about $3.17/gal in September and $3.06/gal in October, and weekly averages in November around $3.06/gal, with Thanksgiving 2025 national averages reported near $3.05/gal—essentially flat to slightly lower than late‑2024 levels. (bts.gov) There is no evidence of any run‑up toward the $3.8–$5.0/gal levels seen in 2022–2023.
  • The Energy Information Administration and other analyses further characterize 2025 gasoline prices as lower than in recent years, with projected 2025 average around $3.10/gal, below both 2023 and 2024, and trending down into 2026. (ajot.com)

Given that, in the months following summer 2025, gas prices remained relatively low compared with the 2022–2023 period and did not spike back to prior highs, Sacks’s prediction that “low gas prices don’t seem to be going anywhere anytime soon” has been borne out over the observable near term.

Sacks @ 00:53:43Inconclusive
economy
The United States will not enter a recession (as commonly defined by forecasters and betting markets) during calendar year 2025.
So I'd be surprised if if there's a recession, I think there's a lot of factors against it.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it is too early to definitively judge this prediction.

  • No official recession call yet: The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), whose dating is the reference standard for U.S. business cycles, still lists the most recent peak as February 2020 and trough as April 2020, with no later recession yet identified.(nber.org) NBER typically announces peaks/troughs with an 8–22 month lag, so if a new recession began sometime in 2025, that would almost certainly not be announced yet.
  • Mixed real‑time indicators: BEA data show real GDP fell slightly in Q1 2025 (about –0.6% annualized after revision) but then rebounded strongly, with Q2 2025 revised up to +3.8% annualized.(bea.gov) Forecasts going into late 2025 still point to positive growth (e.g., ~4% annualized Q3 nowcasts), and weekly jobless claims remain relatively low, arguing against an obvious, already-recognized recession.(reuters.com) However, the Sahm rule recession indicator was already triggered in 2024, and unemployment has drifted up into the mid‑4% range, signaling elevated recession risk.(congress.gov) New research (e.g., Michaillat’s classifier) even puts the probability that the U.S. was already in recession by May 2025 at about 70%, but that is an estimate, not a consensus declaration.(arxiv.org)
  • Forecasters and markets see high risk, but no consensus that a recession has begun: Through 2025, mainstream forecasters (IMF, NABE surveys, Mark Zandi’s baseline, etc.) generally describe the U.S. as not yet in recession but at high risk, often highlighting that only parts of the economy or some states appear to be in recession.(reuters.com) Real‑money prediction markets (Kalshi, Polymarket) put 2025‑recession odds as high as ~60–70% in April 2025 but later reduced them to roughly 20–40% as trade tensions partially eased; they have not resolved any contract as a 2025 recession because that depends on a future NBER call.(wsj.com)
  • Calendar year 2025 is not over and ex‑post dating is unknown: A recession could still begin in December 2025, and even if the turning point has already occurred earlier in the year, we won’t know how NBER (and thus most forecasters and betting markets) will ultimately date it until well into 2026 or later.

Because (1) the year has not fully elapsed, (2) NBER has not yet dated any new recession, and (3) there is genuine disagreement in high‑quality academic and market‑based indicators about whether a recession is already underway, we cannot presently say with confidence whether the U.S. did or did not "enter a recession" during 2025 under the definitions commonly used by forecasters and betting markets. Hence the prediction is best scored as inconclusive (too early) rather than clearly right or wrong.

politicseconomy
If Donald Trump is president again while Jerome Powell is Federal Reserve Chair, the Federal Reserve under Powell will not reduce the federal funds rate during Trump’s term, even though Powell was and would be willing to cut rates under Democratic administrations (Biden or a hypothetical Kamala Harris presidency).
Too late pal. He'll cut for Biden. He'll cut for Yellen. He'll cut for Kamala. He will not cut for Trump.View on YouTube
Explanation

The conditional part of the prediction has already been satisfied: Donald Trump began his second term as U.S. president on January 20, 2025, and Jerome Powell remains Federal Reserve Chair with a term running through May 2026. (en.wikipedia.org)

Under that Trump–Powell overlap, the Fed has cut rates. In September 2025, the FOMC lowered the federal funds target range from 4.25–4.50% to 4.00–4.25%, its first cut of the year. (pcbb.com) On October 29–30, 2025, the FOMC again reduced the target range by 25 bps to 3.75–4.00%, as confirmed by the Fed’s own minutes and statement. (federalreserve.gov) Both decisions occurred while Trump was president and Powell was chair.

Because the prediction was absolute (“He will not cut for Trump”) and a single counterexample is enough to falsify it, the existence of these rate cuts under Trump means the prediction is wrong.

Sacks @ 00:13:34Inconclusive
aimarkets
As of August 2025, the AI sector is in an ongoing investment boom/supercycle rather than at the start of a bust; over the next several years (through at least 2028) AI investment and commercial activity will broadly remain in a boom phase rather than entering a sustained bust.
I don't think this was the beginning of a bust cycle or something like that. I still think that we're in a boom. I still think we're in an investment supercycleView on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the prediction covers a multi‑year horizon (“over the next several years,” normalized here as through at least 2028), so it is too early to determine whether the AI boom will persist without a sustained bust.

Evidence so far (late 2025) is broadly consistent with Sacks’s current view that we are in an AI investment boom/supercycle:

  • Major analysts and banks still describe AI as driving a structural "supercycle" in markets and earnings, not a completed bubble and crash. (reuters.com)
  • The Wikipedia “AI bubble” overview notes enormous and growing AI spending—US mega‑cap AI investment expected to exceed $1.1 trillion between 2026 and 2029 and total AI spending to surpass $1.6 trillion—alongside record valuations like Nvidia briefly reaching a $4 trillion market cap in 2025. This describes an ongoing boom, not a post‑bubble bust. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Forecasts from Dell’Oro and others project global data‑center capex—now heavily driven by AI accelerators—to grow at ~21% CAGR to around $1.2 trillion by 2029, with hyperscalers (Amazon, Microsoft, Google, Meta) responsible for roughly half of that spending. They explicitly expect strong AI‑related investment through the second half of the decade, even if there may be a short‑term slowdown around 2026. (datacenterdynamics.com)
  • Recent reporting shows big tech continuing to raise AI and data‑center capex guidance for 2025–2026—individual firms planning tens to over a hundred billion dollars each, with aggregate AI infrastructure spending well into the hundreds of billions and characterized as an ongoing “AI capex frenzy.” (investorplace.com)
  • Coverage in outlets like the Washington Post frames AI data‑center and software spending as a key force “propping up” the U.S. economy in late 2025, with Google, Meta, and Microsoft all signaling further increases in AI‑related capex into 2026. (washingtonpost.com)

At the same time, many analysts and commentators argue that parts of the AI market are in a bubble and predict a correction or “burst” in late 2025 or 2026, though this remains forward‑looking opinion rather than an observed, sustained bust at this point. (forbes.com)

Since:

  • The boom is clearly still ongoing in late 2025 (so the short‑term component of his view hasn’t been falsified), but
  • The core of the prediction is explicitly multi‑year (through at least 2028), and future investment cycles, valuations, and commercial outcomes between 2026–2028 are unknown,

there is not yet enough elapsed time to judge whether AI will "broadly remain in a boom phase rather than entering a sustained bust" over the full period Sacks described. Therefore, the correct classification today is inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 00:14:23Inconclusive
aieconomy
The development of AI over the next several years will follow a "supercycle" pattern of continued strong investment and progress, not a short-lived hype spike followed by collapse.
what we should be talking about is just sort of where we are in this, in this AI supercycle.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim is about the “next several years” of AI development following a sustained supercycle of investment and progress rather than a short hype spike followed by collapse. As of November 30, 2025, only a bit over three months have passed since the August 22, 2025 episode—far short of “several years,” so the prediction’s full time horizon hasn’t elapsed.

Available data so far show:

  • AI and especially generative AI funding hit record highs in 2024 and continued rising into 2025, with generative AI companies raising about $56B in 2024 and even larger totals projected for 2025. (techcrunch.com)
  • In early and mid‑2025, AI captured a majority of global VC funding (over 50–60% of all venture capital), with large late‑stage “mega‑rounds” and massive capex by big tech firms (Google, Microsoft, Meta, Amazon) on AI infrastructure. (faf.ae)
  • Reports throughout 2025 describe an ongoing AI investment boom or “gold rush,” alongside warnings of possible bubble dynamics and future corrections, but no clear evidence of a broad collapse by late 2025. (fortune.com)

These facts are consistent with the early phase of a supercycle rather than a popped bubble, but they do not settle the multi‑year claim Sacks made. A sharp correction or collapse could still occur after November 2025. Since the prediction specifically concerns the trajectory over the next several years, and that period has not yet played out, it is too early to say whether he was right or wrong.

Therefore the correct classification as of November 30, 2025 is: inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 00:17:12Inconclusive
ai
Over the next few years (through at least 2028), large AI models will not enter a phase of rapid recursive self‑improvement that produces a single runaway superintelligent AGI far ahead of all others; instead progress will be incremental and competitive among multiple model providers.
what people can now see is that we're not in like a loop of recursive self-improvement... It's not like the leading players just all of a sudden going to achieve AGI just very quickly.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is about a negative event over a multi‑year window: that “over the next few years (through at least 2028)” we won’t see large AI models enter a rapid, recursively self‑improving loop that yields a single runaway superintelligent AGI far ahead of all others, and that instead progress will remain incremental and competitive across multiple providers.

As of November 30, 2025:

  • There is no credible public evidence of any AI system undergoing hard‑takeoff‑style recursive self‑improvement to become a runaway superintelligent AGI. Major labs (OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, Meta, xAI, etc.) continue to report improvements via larger models, better training data, new architectures, and tools, but not via autonomous self‑modification that rapidly explodes capabilities beyond all others.
  • The AI landscape remains competitive and multi‑polar: several labs provide cutting‑edge frontier models (e.g., GPT‑4‑class and successors, Claude‑class models, Gemini‑class models, etc.), and none is acknowledged as a qualitatively “runaway superintelligence” far beyond the rest. This matches the spirit of the prediction so far.

However, the prediction explicitly extends through at least 2028, and we are only at 2025‑11‑30. It could still be falsified by events in 2026–2028. Because the claim is “this won’t happen in the coming years,” you can’t call it definitively right before the end of the specified window.

So:

  • So far (2025), observable reality is consistent with Sacks’s prediction.
  • But it’s too early to say whether it holds for the entire period through 2028.

Therefore the correct classification today is "inconclusive" (too early to fully judge), even though current evidence aligns with the prediction.

Sacks @ 00:31:44Inconclusive
aimarketsventure
As of 2025, the AI market is at an early-to-mid stage of an investment supercycle; AI startup funding, corporate capex, and strategic M&A will remain elevated (not collapse like a burst bubble) through at least the late 2020s.
I don't think that a bubble has popped or anything like that. I actually think that we're still probably early to the middle of this investment supercycleView on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly about conditions through at least the late 2020s (i.e., out to around 2028–2029). As of today, November 30, 2025, fewer than three years of that period have elapsed, so we cannot yet evaluate whether AI startup funding, corporate capex, and strategic M&A will remain elevated throughout the stated horizon.

We can already say that:

  • AI investment and capex remained very high in 2024–2025 (e.g., continued multi‑billion‑dollar data center and GPU spend by hyperscalers, strong AI funding rounds, and active AI-related M&A), which is consistent with the near‑term part of the claim.
  • However, the core of the prediction is that this elevated activity will not collapse like a burst bubble through the late 2020s, which cannot be confirmed or falsified until that time has actually passed.

Because the main time window of the forecast is still in the future, the only defensible evaluation today is that it is too early to tell whether the prediction ultimately proves correct.

Sacks @ 00:47:30Inconclusive
aigovernment
Over the coming years, AI-powered, fully interactive and personalized education will significantly level global educational opportunities, especially outside the U.S., but this trend will later be constrained in the United States when trial lawyers and related litigation or regulation restrict access to such AI tools by framing them as causing 'AI psychosis.'
I mean, that's probably what's going to happen is the AI is a great leveler because you can basically get all the world's information at your fingertips in a way that's fully interactive and personalized education... And then some trial lawyers are going to end your ability to get that, because they're going to call that it's AI psychosis.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is framed on a multi‑year timeline (“over the coming years” and then trial lawyers will end access), but we are only about three and a half months past the August 15, 2025 episode date—far too early to judge its long‑run accuracy.

1. AI as a global educational leveler (especially outside the U.S.)
There is clear early evidence of AI tutors and personalized learning being deployed worldwide:

  • China uses AI tutors such as Squirrel AI to provide personalized instruction and help close urban‑rural education gaps. (weforum.org)
  • South Korea and China are rolling out AI‑powered textbooks and national AI curricula aimed at personalized learning for all students. (sarrauteducacion.com)
  • Adoption of AI education tools is growing rapidly in many regions, and India now leads global use of Google’s Gemini AI tutoring features. (sezarroverseas.com)
    However, major reports simultaneously warn of an “AI education divide”: adoption closely tracks income levels, with very low uptake in many low‑income countries, so global educational opportunities have not yet been “significantly leveled” in a decisive way. (sezarroverseas.com) Given the explicitly future‑oriented wording (“over the coming years”), this part of the prediction cannot yet be declared right or wrong.

2. U.S. trial lawyers / regulation restricting access to AI tools via “AI psychosis” claims
The phrase “AI psychosis” (or chatbot psychosis) has indeed entered public and scientific discourse, describing delusion‑like harms tied to chatbot use. (en.wikipedia.org) There are:

  • High‑profile lawsuits such as Raine v. OpenAI, alleging that ChatGPT contributed to a teenager’s suicide; media and expert commentary around this and similar cases frequently discuss “AI psychosis” and delusional reinforcement by chatbots. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Growing litigation and regulatory scrutiny of AI companions and mental‑health chatbots, including multiple U.S. state laws (e.g., Illinois’ Wellness and Oversight for Psychological Resources Act, and earlier laws in Utah and Nevada) that restrict AI from acting as a therapist, motivated partly by concerns about AI‑induced psychosis and unsafe crisis responses. (en.wikipedia.org)

However, these actions are narrowly focused on therapy / emotional‑support use cases and minors, not on educational tutoring more broadly. At the same time, U.S. educational institutions are actively expanding access to AI tools: for example, Indiana University’s 2025 rollout of ChatGPT Edu to all 120,000 students, faculty, and staff, and strong adoption of AI tutors in U.S. K‑12 and higher education markets. (worldhealth.net) There is no evidence that trial‑lawyer‑driven litigation or regulation has “ended your ability” to use AI‑based personalized education tools in the United States as of November 30, 2025.

Conclusion

  • Elements of the setup Sachs describes (AI tutors spreading globally; lawsuits and laws invoking AI‑related psychological harms) are beginning to appear, but the key outcome he predicts—U.S. access to AI‑powered personalized education being shut down by trial lawyers and regulations framed around “AI psychosis”—has not occurred.
  • Because the prediction explicitly concerns developments “over the coming years,” and current trends are still unfolding, it is too soon to categorize it as either right or wrong.

Therefore, the appropriate status for this prediction as of November 30, 2025 is "inconclusive" (too early to tell).

politicsgovernment
Following implementation of President Trump’s announced policies in Washington, D.C. (removal of homeless encampments, cleanup of graffiti, ending zero bail, and imposing adult-level punishments on juvenile offenders committing serious crimes), visible lawlessness and crime levels in D.C. will decline noticeably within a short period after implementation (on the order of months rather than years).
I think what President Trump has said is, look, first of all, we're going to get rid of the homeless encampments... we're going to stop the zero bail... we're going to start treating these, um, teenage criminals as we're going to punish them... I mean, this is the right direction to go if you want to reverse this lawlessness in D.C., and I think it's going to have an impact very, very quickly. I think it's going to work very quickly.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump’s administration implemented essentially the full policy bundle Sacks described: (1) an executive order in March 2025 (“Making the District of Columbia Safe and Beautiful”) directing the National Park Service to promptly clear homeless encampments and graffiti on federal land and to coordinate broad clean‑up and law‑enforcement efforts in D.C.; (2) a crime‑emergency order on August 11, 2025, federalizing the Metropolitan Police Department and deploying National Guard and federal agents; and (3) an August 25, 2025 order to end “cashless bail” in D.C. by maximizing federal detention and pressuring the city over its no‑cash‑bail regime.(whitehouse.gov) Congress has also moved in Trump’s direction on juveniles, with House‑passed bills in September 2025 that would lower the age at which D.C. teens can be tried as adults for serious violent crimes and require youth sentences to match adult mandatory minimums, and prosecutors have already charged high‑profile 17‑year‑old suspects as adults.(wsj.com)

There is clear evidence of rapid, visible changes in “lawlessness” of the kind Sacks emphasized. Following the March order, Interior and the National Park Service were directed to remove all homeless encampments and graffiti on NPS‑managed land in D.C., and by mid‑August Park Police had already dismantled about 70 encampments, with only two left to clear.(whitehouse.gov) After the August crime‑emergency declaration, National Guard troops and federal agencies were put to work not only on patrols but also on trash pickup, graffiti removal, and dismantling additional encampments across popular areas like the Mall and Union Station, which contemporaneous coverage describes as a highly visible clean‑up and “beautification” drive.(theguardian.com) Critics note that many unhoused people remain on benches and in shelters, so the problem is far from solved, but the physical signs of disorder (tents, graffiti, trash) on federal land have been substantially reduced in a matter of months, not years.(reuters.com)

On crime levels, the data show a large and ongoing decline that continued through and after Trump’s D.C. measures, with at least some evidence of further short‑term improvement. Violent crime and homicides had already fallen sharply from a 2023 spike: D.C. recorded a 31–32% drop in homicides and about a 35–40% drop in overall violent crime in 2024 versus 2023, with carjackings nearly cut in half.(axios.com) By August 2025—around the time of the federal takeover—police data showed violent crime down about 26% year‑to‑date compared with 2024, with big declines in robberies and carjackings.(politifact.com) In the weeks immediately following Trump’s August 11 "crime emergency," media reports (drawing on MPD and federal figures) highlighted 12 consecutive days without a homicide and early operation statistics claiming double‑digit percentage drops in overall crime, robberies, carjackings, and violent crime, along with more than 1,000 arrests—evidence of a noticeable short‑term shift in measured crime and enforcement intensity.(nypost.com)

By late November 2025, independent fact‑checks using MPD data report that homicides in D.C. are down roughly 29% year‑over‑year and that violent crime is at its lowest level in more than 30 years, even while noting that Trump has exaggerated the extent of improvement in his rhetoric.(apnews.com) Those same analyses also emphasize that the downtrend began well before Trump’s August 2025 takeover, and some question whether the “crime emergency” was ever justified.(davisvanguard.org) However, Sacks’ normalized prediction only conditions on the policies being implemented and then anticipates that visible disorder and crime will fall noticeably within months rather than years. In the actual timeline, Trump’s D.C. orders were implemented, encampments and graffiti were aggressively cleared from federal spaces, and crime statistics continued to fall—with some additional short‑term improvements highlighted right after the crackdown—over the ensuing few months. On that narrow, outcome‑focused reading, the prediction that lawlessness and crime in D.C. would show a rapid, noticeable decline after the policies were put in place has come true, even though much of the improvement predates the federal takeover and cannot be cleanly attributed to it.

Sacks @ 00:54:56Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If the Trump administration’s crime plan in Washington, D.C. is implemented as described and is perceived to reduce crime, national political narrative in subsequent election cycles will shift such that Republicans can credibly point to D.C. as evidence that their crime policies work better than those of Democrats in major blue cities, strengthening the Republican political position on crime policy in deep-blue urban areas.
I think they're going to fall into a similar trap here in D.C. because I think this is going to work, and I think it's going to provide Republicans with a very important counterpoint... And I think that D.C. provides that opportunity. If Trump's plan works, I think it'll show that Republicans have the solution on on crime, and it'll hopefully help provide an alternative in these deep blue cities.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump’s D.C. crime initiative has clearly been implemented: through the March 2025 “Safe and Beautiful” executive order and task force, followed by the August 11, 2025 executive order federalizing the Metropolitan Police Department and deploying National Guard and federal agents under a declared crime emergency. (whitehouse.gov) Early data the administration cites show notable drops in some reported crime categories (e.g., violent crime and carjackings) since these measures, and federal officials and allied media are actively touting D.C. as a success of Trump’s crime crackdown. (whitehouse.gov) However, mainstream reporting and fact‑checks stress that D.C. crime was already at or near a 30‑year low before the takeover, that homicides have continued during the deployment despite Trump’s exaggerated public claims, and that there is an ongoing federal investigation into potential manipulation or underreporting of crime data. (theguardian.com) The crackdown is also highly controversial: polls show large majorities in D.C. and nationally opposing the deployment, a federal judge has ruled the Guard deployment unlawful (stayed pending appeal), and large national protests have targeted Trump’s broader use of federal forces. (en.wikipedia.org) Crucially for the prediction, no major national election cycle (e.g., the 2026 midterms) has yet occurred since the August 2025 takeover, and current coverage frames D.C. as a partisan flashpoint rather than as broadly accepted proof that Republican crime policies outperform Democratic approaches in deep‑blue cities. (washingtonpost.com) Because the key outcome—how the national political narrative and electoral dynamics evolve in subsequent election cycles—has not yet had time to play out, it is too early to determine whether this prediction will ultimately be borne out.

Sacks @ 01:02:49Inconclusive
politics
If Democratic leaders continue to publicly oppose Trump’s federal intervention and security/cleanup measures in Washington, D.C., this stance will prove politically harmful to Democrats and advantageous to Trump/Republicans in subsequent national political debates and elections (i.e., Democrats will be perceived as on the wrong side of a popular public-safety issue).
I think that just politically speaking, that if Democrats keep opposing this, I think they're falling into a trap that Trump has laid for them 100%.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was that if Democrats continued to oppose Trump’s federal takeover and crackdown in Washington, D.C., it would prove a political “trap” that harms Democrats and benefits Trump/Republicans in later national debates and elections.

What actually happened so far

  1. Democrats did publicly oppose the move. Trump invoked emergency powers on August 11, 2025 to take control of the D.C. police and deploy federal law enforcement and the National Guard, over the objections of Mayor Muriel Bowser and other Democrats, who described it as exaggerated, authoritarian, and an attack on home rule. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Local opinion in D.C. favors opposition to Trump’s move. A Washington Post–Schar School poll of D.C. residents in mid‑August found about 8 in 10 oppose Trump’s federalization of law enforcement, and roughly two‑thirds say his actions will not help combat violent crime. A majority approve of Bowser’s performance, and nearly half say she should do more to oppose Trump; only a small minority want her to support him. (reddit.com) This undercuts the idea that, at least in D.C. itself, Democrats are on the “wrong” side of a public‑safety issue.

  3. National opinion is mixed and issue‑specific:

    • On Trump’s handling of crime overall, polls show this is one of his relatively stronger issues: an AP‑NORC survey found about 53% of U.S. adults approve of his handling of crime, making it his best‑rated policy area. (ap.org) That does support the idea that a tough‑on‑crime frame helps him generally.
    • But when pollsters ask specifically about the D.C. takeover and troop deployment, support is much weaker. A Reuters/Ipsos poll in late August found only 38% support using the National Guard to police D.C. and 36% support taking over the local police, with a plurality opposed. (reuters.com) AP‑NORC similarly reports that a majority of Americans say it is unacceptable for the federal government to take control of local police departments, even while many approve of Trump’s crime stance overall. (reason.com) Some polls (e.g., Harvard CAPS/Harris) show slim majorities saying the D.C. crackdown is “justified and necessary,” but also majorities opposing formal federal control and viewing the move as a distraction. (harvardharrispoll.com) The net picture is no clear national consensus that the D.C. move itself is popular, even if Trump’s broader crime rhetoric resonates.
    • There is also no stable, growing Trump advantage on crime clearly tied to this episode. Coverage of subsequent polling notes that while crime remains a top concern and Trump often polls slightly better than Democrats on the issue, some surveys show the gap narrowing or even Harris edging Trump on “trust to handle crime” by late September, and others show them effectively tied. (newsweek.com) That’s the opposite of a clear, durable gain for Trump from Democrats’ opposition.
  4. Electoral results so far don’t show Democrats paying a visible price:

    • The major post‑crackdown elections were the November 4, 2025 gubernatorial races in Virginia and New Jersey, both carried comfortably by Democrats (Abigail Spanberger in VA with about 58% of the vote; Mikie Sherrill in NJ with about 57%). (en.wikipedia.org) Analyses of these races emphasize voter anger at Trump’s economic policies and federal layoffs, not Democratic weakness on crime. In Virginia, exit polls pegged Trump’s approval at just 39% and highlighted discontent with his economic and federal‑workforce decisions; the D.C. policing issue was not identified as a GOP advantage. (en.wikipedia.org) These results don’t look like immediate punishment for Democrats over their stance on the D.C. intervention.
  5. Timing relative to the prediction. Sacks tied the “trap” to “subsequent national political debates and elections,” implicitly looking toward the 2026 midterms and 2028 presidential race. As of November 30, 2025, those contests have not happened yet, and we have only a few months of polling and some off‑year state elections to go on.

Why this is rated inconclusive, not right or wrong

  • There is evidence that Trump’s law‑and‑order message, including the D.C. crackdown, has strengthened his standing on crime relative to other issues, which is directionally in line with Sacks’ argument that Republicans gain from framing Democrats as weaker on public safety. (ap.org)
  • There is not clear evidence that Democratic opposition to the D.C. takeover is itself politically toxic: the policy is unpopular in D.C., nationally many oppose federal control of local police, and early high‑salience elections since the move (VA and NJ 2025) have broken strongly in Democrats’ favor for reasons mostly unrelated to crime. (reddit.com)
  • Crucially, the key tests Sacks pointed to — national elections where this specific episode might be litigated at scale — have not yet occurred. Without 2026 midterm or 2028 presidential results, we cannot say whether Democrats ultimately paid a political price for how they handled the D.C. intervention.

Given the mixed polling on the D.C. move itself, the lack of evident electoral penalty to Democrats so far, and the fact that the main elections Sacks had in mind are still in the future, the prediction is too early to definitively score as either right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:24:54Inconclusive
ventureaieconomy
Over roughly the coming decade following widespread AI adoption (starting mid‑2020s), venture capital as an asset class will experience improved opportunity and performance relative to the previous several years, driven by AI-related disruption and the creation of many new large, valuable companies.
My guess is that we're in a pretty good time for VC because of AI and the disruption it's causing and the potential for value creation, it's it's creating it's sort of restocking the pond with opportunities for many more big companies to be created. And I think ultimately they'll be very good for the asset class.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns “roughly the coming decade” of venture capital performance following widespread AI adoption in the mid‑2020s. Given the podcast date of August 15, 2025 and the current date of November 30, 2025, only a few months have elapsed.

Even if there are early signs that AI is generating new startups and increasing VC activity, that does not yet establish that, over a multi‑year period, venture capital as an asset class will outperform its prior several years or enjoy structurally better opportunities. Assessing a decade‑scale asset‑class prediction requires data across most or all of that horizon (e.g., fund returns, exit values, capital formation trends through the early‑to‑mid 2030s), which we do not yet have.

Because the forecast is long‑dated and we are still at the very beginning of the predicted window, there is not enough evidence to label it as correct or incorrect. Therefore, the prediction is too early to evaluate.

Sacks @ 01:25:55Inconclusive
aimarkets
Conditional on its current growth and valuation trend continuing, OpenAI’s private or public equity valuation will reach approximately $1 trillion within a couple of years of this August 2025 discussion (i.e., by around 2027).
They could be $1 trillion company in a couple of years if if the trend continues.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it is too early to determine whether this prediction is correct. Sacks’s claim was explicitly conditional (“if the trend continues”) and specified a time frame of “a couple of years” from August 2025, which reasonably extends out to around August 2027. We are still within that window, so the prediction cannot yet be evaluated as right or wrong.

Available reporting in 2023–2025 has discussed OpenAI’s private valuation in the range of roughly $80–$90 billion after major funding from investors such as Microsoft and others, but there is no credible evidence yet of a ~$1 trillion private valuation or IPO that would put its market cap at that level. (These figures come from financial and tech news coverage of OpenAI’s secondary share sales and investor deals.) However, the absence of a $1T valuation by late 2025 does not falsify a forecast whose deadline is ~2027.

Because the prediction deadline has not arrived, the only defensible classification is that it is inconclusive (too early) rather than right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

Sacks @ 00:12:02Inconclusive
aipoliticsgovernment
For at least the next several years after this August 2025 speech, U.S. (and likely global) AI policy debates will be primarily framed in terms of an 'AI race' analogous to the Cold War space race.
I think it was a it was a really important speech. I think this idea of an AI race that is similar to the space race, I think is going to be the dominant frame on AI policy for years to come.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns "years to come" after the August 2025 speech—that is, it is about the dominant framing of AI policy over a multi‑year horizon. As of today (November 30, 2025), only about four months have passed since August 1, 2025. That is far too short a period to assess whether this framing will remain dominant for several years. Even if the “AI race”/“space race” framing is currently influential, we cannot yet determine whether it will continue to be the primary lens for U.S. and global AI policy debates over the forecasted time span. Therefore, the accuracy of this prediction is too early to judge.

politicseconomy
The GENIUS Act (the stablecoin legislation) will be signed by President Trump and become US law within roughly one day of this recording, and the signing will occur before the public release date of this podcast episode (19 Jul 2025).
So it is going to the president's desk tomorrow and it will become law. We're doing a bill signing with the president. By the time this pod is released, it will probably be law.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public records show that the GENIUS Act (a U.S. stablecoin regulation bill) passed the House on July 17, 2025, and was signed into law by President Donald Trump on July 18, 2025, according to the bill’s legislative history and multiple news outlets. (en.wikipedia.org) The White House published an official fact sheet dated July 18, 2025, explicitly stating that President Trump signed the GENIUS Act into law that day. (whitehouse.gov) Since the podcast’s public release date is July 19, 2025, the signing and enactment indeed occurred before the episode was released.

Sacks’s prediction that the bill would go to the president’s desk "tomorrow," be signed in a bill‑signing ceremony, and become law before the pod was released is therefore borne out by the subsequent timeline.

politicsgovernmentmarkets
Assuming the legislative process proceeds without major disruption, the Clarity Act (crypto market structure legislation) will pass the Senate and reach President Trump’s desk by the end of September 2025, enabling a presidential bill‑signing and enactment into law around October 2025.
the chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, Tim Scott, has said that he wants to finish with the market structure legislation by the end of September. So if all goes well, then we could be looking at a second bill signing and say, October.View on YouTube
Explanation

Congressional and news records show that the Digital Asset Market Clarity Act of 2025 (the CLARITY Act, H.R. 3633) did not pass the Senate or reach President Trump’s desk by the end of September 2025, nor was it signed into law in October 2025.

Key facts:

  • The CLARITY Act passed the House on July 17, 2025, by a 294–134 vote. It was then sent to the Senate and on September 18, 2025 was “received in the Senate and read twice and referred to the Committee on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs,” where it remains. Congress.gov lists its latest action as that September 18 referral, and its status is still only “Passed House,” not “Passed Senate,” “To President,” or “Became Law.” (congress.gov)
  • A Congressional Research Service brief on the CLARITY Act, revised September 30, 2025, still describes it as pending legislation and does not indicate Senate passage or enactment. (legistorm.com)
  • Senate sources through October 2025 describe the crypto market-structure bill (based on or related to the CLARITY framework) as being in draft/negotiation, with significant partisan disputes and no completed committee or floor vote. For example, coverage from early and late October notes that the market-structure bill “remains in the discussion phase in the Senate” and is stalled amid gridlock, clearly implying it has not yet passed. (axios.com)
  • By contrast, the GENIUS Act (the stablecoin bill) did complete the process: it passed both chambers and was signed by President Trump on July 18, 2025, becoming the first major federal crypto law. This is consistently documented in legislative records and press reports, underscoring that if the CLARITY Act had been similarly enacted, it would appear in the same way—which it does not. (en.wikipedia.org)

David Sacks’ prediction, normalized as: “Assuming the process proceeds without major disruption, the CLARITY Act will pass the Senate and reach President Trump’s desk by the end of September 2025, enabling a signing into law around October 2025,” is therefore incorrect. The specified milestones (Senate passage by end of September and presidential signing in October) did not occur within that timeframe or by November 30, 2025, despite ongoing work on related Senate market-structure legislation.

Sacks @ 00:51:28Inconclusive
marketsgovernment
Under the GENIUS Act’s requirements, the world’s largest stablecoin issuer (as of mid‑2025, an offshore entity) will establish an onshore, US‑regulated structure and comply with US regulatory requirements within three years of the Act’s enactment.
the number one stablecoin player in the world right now is an offshore entity. They will have to come onshore as part of this bill in the next three years.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction specifies a three‑year window starting from the GENIUS Act’s enactment. The podcast episode is dated 19 July 2025, and the title claims the GENIUS Act Becomes Law on or around that time. Three years from mid‑2025 ends in mid‑2028, which is well after the current date of 30 November 2025 (i.e., only a few months have elapsed).

Because the deadline for the prediction (sometime in 2028) has not yet passed, we cannot determine whether:

  1. The world’s largest stablecoin issuer in mid‑2025 (commonly understood to be Tether/USDT, operated by Tether Holdings Limited, an offshore entity),
  2. Will in fact establish an onshore, U.S.‑regulated structure and
  3. Comply with U.S. regulatory requirements within three years of the GENIUS Act’s enactment.

There is still substantial time remaining for either outcome, so the prediction cannot be judged as right or wrong yet.

governmentmarkets
Once the GENIUS Act is in force and implemented, regulated US‑dollar stablecoin issuers will be required to operate under US jurisdiction, undergo quarterly audits, and maintain 100% dollar‑denominated reserves in US bank accounts or Treasuries for each issued dollar stablecoin, such that audits will verify full backing.
now all the stablecoin companies will have to operate in the United States, they'll be subjected to quarterly audits, and we will know that every stablecoin that's been issued is fully reserved or backed up by a dollar in a US bank account.View on YouTube
Explanation

The GENIUS Act was signed into law on July 18, 2025 and establishes a federal framework for “payment stablecoin” issuers, so its actual requirements are now clear.(en.wikipedia.org) Comparing those to Sacks’s prediction:

  1. “All the stablecoin companies will have to operate in the United States” – The Act does not require every stablecoin issuer to be U.S.-based. It explicitly forbids foreign issuers from being licensed as U.S. permitted payment stablecoin issuers, but still allows U.S. digital asset service providers to offer some foreign-issued payment stablecoins if the foreign issuer is under a “comparable” non‑U.S. regime, registers for monitoring by the OCC, and holds sufficient reserves in the U.S. for U.S. customers, among other conditions.(debevoise.com) Foreign issuers can continue operating abroad and, if they meet these conditions, can still access the U.S. market. So it is incorrect to say that all stablecoin companies must operate in the U.S.; the law creates a U.S.-jurisdiction gate for access to the U.S. market, not a universal U.S.-location requirement.

  2. “They’ll be subjected to quarterly audits” – The statute and regulatory analyses describe monthly reserve reporting with independent attestations and annual audited financial statements for large issuers, not quarterly audits. Issuers must publish a monthly reserve report (outstanding coins and reserve composition), with prior months’ reports audited by a registered public accounting firm, and issuers over certain size thresholds must produce annually audited GAAP financials.(debevoise.com) Commentators even note that the Act rejects traditional quarterly cadences in favor of monthly oversight for stablecoins.(theregreview.org) So the “quarterly audits” detail is specifically wrong.

  3. “Every stablecoin … fully reserved or backed up by a dollar in a U.S. bank account” – The Act requires at least 1:1 reserves in specified high‑quality, U.S.‑dollar‑denominated liquid assets (U.S. currency and central bank reserves, FDIC‑insured bank deposits, short‑term U.S. Treasuries, Treasury repos, certain government money market funds, and tokenized versions of these).(debevoise.com) That is broader than “a dollar in a U.S. bank account” (it explicitly includes short‑term Treasuries, repos, and government MMFs), though directionally similar. More importantly, these rules apply to permitted U.S. payment stablecoins and qualifying foreign payment stablecoins offered in the U.S., not to every stablecoin globally or to all types of crypto tokens (algorithmic or non‑payment stablecoins are outside this core regime).(debevoise.com) So we will not literally “know that every stablecoin that’s been issued is fully reserved”; we will only have that assurance—via required disclosures and attestations—for the regulated subset within the Act’s perimeter.

  4. Timing (“once the Act is in force and implemented”) – The law sets deferred and phased effective dates: it becomes effective the earlier of 18 months after enactment or 120 days after implementing regulations, and some prohibitions (e.g., on unlicensed U.S. issuers via intermediaries) don’t fully bite until years later.(debevoise.com) But regardless of that timing, the content of the eventual regime is already fixed in the statute and does not match Sacks’s description on the key points above.

Because two central elements of the prediction—universal U.S. operation for all stablecoin companies and a quarterly audit requirement—conflict with the actual text and structure of the GENIUS Act, and the claim about “every stablecoin” being backed by a dollar in a U.S. bank account overstates the law’s scope and narrows its allowed reserve types, the prediction is best classified as wrong, not merely incomplete or too early to judge.

Sacks @ 00:48:18Inconclusive
economymarkets
Over the coming years following enactment of the GENIUS Act, global adoption of dollar‑backed stablecoins under the new framework will generate additional cumulative demand in the trillions of US dollars for US Treasury securities.
there have been studies done that show that the result of this bill could be trillions of dollars of new demand for our debtView on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there has not yet been trillions of dollars of additional cumulative demand for U.S. Treasuries driven by dollar‑backed stablecoins under the GENIUS Act, but the prediction was explicitly framed as occurring “over the coming years” after enactment, so it is too early to judge it right or wrong.

Key facts:

  • The GENIUS Act was passed by Congress and signed into law in mid‑2025 (Senate passage on June 17, 2025; reporting on it being signed into law on July 18, 2025). (reuters.com)
  • Following enactment, one analysis estimates that between July and November 2025, stablecoin issuers bought about $44 billion in Treasury bills to comply with the new 100%‑backing requirements, raising the stablecoin market cap from about $260 billion to roughly $304 billion. (cryptowakeup.com) That’s tens of billions, not trillions, of incremental demand so far.
  • Broadly, dollar‑backed stablecoins already hold on the order of $150–200+ billion in Treasuries as reserves, given total stablecoin market caps in the low‑hundreds of billions and reserve ratios heavily weighted to T‑bills. (coinlive.com) This is material but still far below “trillions.”
  • However, official and industry projections after GENIUS was enacted envision exactly the kind of outcome Sacks referenced: for example, U.S. Treasury and TBAC analyses, as well as bank research (Standard Chartered, Citi, etc.), project stablecoin market caps could reach $1–3.7 trillion+ by 2028–2030, implying $1–2+ trillion of additional demand for short‑term U.S. government securities if current reserve structures persist. (mdpi.com) Senior officials like Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent have publicly cited similar multi‑trillion‑dollar potential demand. (mdpi.com)

Putting this together:

  • The descriptive part of Sacks’s statement — that studies project the GENIUS Act–style stablecoin regime could generate trillions in new Treasury demand — is supported by multiple government and bank analyses.
  • The forecasted outcome itself (actual trillions of extra demand materializing) is meant to unfold over several years (often modeled out to 2028–2030). Only a few months of post‑enactment data are available, and the realized additional demand so far is in the tens of billions, while the relevant horizon is multi‑year.

Because we are still near the beginning of that horizon and the projected magnitudes have not yet had time to either materialize or clearly fail, the correct assessment today is “inconclusive (too early)”, not definitively right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:02:53Inconclusive
marketseconomytech
Over the coming years, dollar-based stablecoins will see widespread global usage, becoming commonly used for transactions in many countries outside the United States.
Well, I think what's going to happen with these dollar based stablecoins is they'll start being used all over the world.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly refers to "the coming years", implying a multi‑year horizon. As of now (30 Nov 2025), only a bit over four months have passed since the 19 Jul 2025 podcast, so the full time window has clearly not elapsed.

Empirically, dollar‑based stablecoins are seeing rapid global growth:

  • Global stablecoin market cap has passed about $300B with daily average transaction volumes in the trillions, and they are expanding from trading into payments, savings, and business uses worldwide. (business-standard.com)
  • Reports estimate stablecoins are actively used in 50+ countries, especially for remittances, ecommerce, and as a “digital dollar” in high‑inflation economies like Nigeria and Argentina. (coinlaw.io)
  • Studies show hundreds of millions of wallet addresses and trillions of dollars of on‑chain volume, with significant shares of payments activity (P2P, B2B, and card‑based) now moving over stablecoins in multiple regions. (crypto.news)

At the same time, major regulators still describe real‑economy, day‑to‑day payment use as limited in some developed markets. For example, the European Central Bank notes that stablecoins’ use in the real economy is still limited in Europe, even while the sector is large and systemically relevant. (cincodias.elpais.com) That makes it hard to say they are already “commonly used for transactions” across many countries in the everyday sense implied by the normalized prediction.

Given:

  1. The prediction’s multi‑year timeframe has not yet run its course, and
  2. Current data show strong momentum but not yet clear, mainstream everyday usage “all over the world,”

it’s too early to judge definitively whether the prediction will ultimately be right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:02:59Inconclusive
economytech
In developing countries with weak or untrusted local fiat currencies, a large share of economic transactions will shift to de facto dollarization driven by the use of dollar-based stablecoins over the next several years.
You could see a large portion of these economies, dollar rising from the bottom up.View on YouTube
Explanation

It’s too early to determine whether this multi‑year prediction has come true.

1. The stated horizon (“next several years”) hasn’t elapsed.
The prediction was made on 19 July 2025 and explicitly framed as playing out over the next several years. Evaluating it by 30 November 2025—roughly four and a half months later—does not satisfy that timeframe, so the outcome cannot yet be judged.

2. Directionally, evidence supports growing stablecoin‑driven dollarization.
Recent analyses show rapid growth of dollar‑pegged stablecoins used as de facto digital dollars in high‑inflation or capital‑controlled economies such as Argentina, Turkey, Nigeria, and others. In these places, people use USDT/USDC for savings, payments, remittances, and invoicing, often explicitly to escape weak local currencies.(followin.io) Stablecoin transaction volumes globally have surged into the tens of trillions of dollars annually, and total stablecoin supply exceeds $200 billion, with usage heavily concentrated in emerging markets.(coindesk.com) This supports the trend sacks described: bottom‑up, dollar‑stablecoin usage in developing countries.

3. But current data do not yet show that a “large share” of all economic transactions has shifted.
Even optimistic reports emphasize that stablecoins, while important in certain niches (crypto trading, cross‑border payments, savings, some retail payments), still represent only a small fraction of total money supply and overall transaction volume in these economies. One analysis notes that despite fast growth, stablecoins are still only a few‑tenths of a percent of global money supply.(blog.wewire.com) Most day‑to‑day commerce in these countries still runs through cash and traditional banking systems, so the claim that a large share of all economic transactions has shifted to dollar stablecoins is not yet demonstrably true or false.

Because (a) the forecast’s multi‑year window has barely begun and (b) current evidence shows strong growth but not yet the clear, economy‑wide dominance implied by “a large portion of these economies,” the only defensible judgment at this point is inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 01:04:46Inconclusive
economymarkets
The emergence and growth of stablecoins in the United States will not cause community banks to be put out of business or broadly wiped out; community banks will continue to exist as a significant part of the banking system despite stablecoin adoption over the coming years.
I think that that fear was wildly overblown on their part. I don't think that's what's going to happen remotely.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is framed as a multi‑year structural claim (“over the coming years” community banks will not be put out of business or broadly wiped out by stablecoins). As of Nov. 30, 2025, only a little over four months have elapsed since the July 19, 2025 episode, so the intended time horizon has clearly not played out.

What we can see so far:

  • Community banks remain a major part of the U.S. system and are still described in 2025 policy discussions as providing the majority of small‑business and agricultural lending, i.e., they have not been broadly wiped out or rendered insignificant in the short term.​(icba.org)
  • An empirical study by Charles River Associates (commissioned by Coinbase) using 2019–2025 data finds no material impact of USDC stablecoin adoption on community‑bank deposits under current and near‑term adoption levels, with even aggressive scenarios implying only single‑digit percentage impacts on deposits.​(crai.com)
  • Coinbase and other industry analyses likewise argue that, at current and projected scales, stablecoins are unlikely to meaningfully erode community‑bank funding, though they advocate for partnerships and guardrails.​(cointelegraph.com)

At the same time, regulators and policy groups continue to warn that future large‑scale, yield‑bearing or non‑bank stablecoins could trigger major deposit outflows and consolidation that would fall hardest on community banks, underscoring that the long‑run outcome is unresolved.​(icba.org)

Because the claim is explicitly about what will happen over the coming years and the system is still in the early phase of adaptation to the GENIUS Act and expanding stablecoin use, there has not yet been enough time to judge whether community banks will ultimately avoid being substantially displaced. Early evidence is consistent with the prediction, but it does not yet settle the long‑term question. Hence the result is inconclusive (too early to tell).

governmentpoliticsmarkets
A follow-on "Clarity" bill establishing market structure rules for non-stablecoin crypto tokens will be drafted, advanced, and aimed to be passed or finalized in the United States by October 2025.
We have a legal framework for stablecoins and market structures. Next, the clarity bill is next. We're going to try and do that by October.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that by well before October 2025 a follow‑on CLARITY market‑structure bill for non‑stablecoin digital assets had in fact been drafted and significantly advanced in the U.S. Congress:

  • After the GENIUS Act established a federal framework for payment stablecoins and was signed into law on July 18, 2025, news coverage described it as the first major stablecoin law and noted that the administration and congressional leaders were already pointing to a broader crypto market‑structure bill as the next step. 【0news13】【0search15】
  • The Digital Asset Market Clarity Act of 2025 ("CLARITY Act of 2025", H.R. 3633) was introduced on May 29, 2025. The House Financial Services and Agriculture Committees reported it favorably on June 23, 2025, with committee reports explicitly describing it as a comprehensive digital asset market structure framework that allocates jurisdiction between the SEC and CFTC and clarifies treatment of digital commodities and secondary trading of tokens. 【0search1】
  • The bill passed the U.S. House on July 17, 2025 (294–134) and on September 18, 2025 was received in the Senate and referred to the Senate Banking Committee, with its official status shown as "Passed House"—all well before October 2025. 【2view0】
  • Associated press coverage of the July 17 House votes explicitly distinguishes three separate crypto bills: a bipartisan stablecoin regulation bill, a market structure bill defining which digital assets are commodities or securities, and a CBDC‑ban bill, with the market‑structure bill heading to the Senate. 【0news14】 This matches the predicted idea of a follow‑on non‑stablecoin market‑structure measure.
  • On July 23, 2025, the Senate Banking Committee chair announced an initial discussion draft of broader digital‑asset market‑structure legislation, explicitly framed as building on both the GENIUS Act and the House‑passed CLARITY Act—indicating active intent to advance such a framework in the Senate. 【0search2】

By October 2025, therefore, a CLARITY‑branded market‑structure bill for non‑stablecoin digital assets had been drafted, moved through House committees, passed the House, and been taken up in the Senate, with leadership clearly signaling an aim to pass it. That satisfies the normalized prediction that a follow‑on “Clarity” market‑structure bill for non‑stablecoin tokens would be drafted, advanced, and positioned for passage by October 2025, even though it had not yet become law by that date.

politics
Elon Musk’s attempt to create a new third political party (the American Party) will fail to become a viable or successful third party in U.S. politics.
Elon is probably a replacement level politician… the third party stuff is not going to work.
Explanation

Evidence since July 2025 shows Elon Musk’s “America/American Party” failed to become a viable third party and was quickly walked back.

  • Musk announced the America Party on X around July 5, 2025, positioning it as a new third party aimed at winning a handful of House and Senate seats. However, early reports noted that it had no formal FEC registration, structure, or candidates, beyond social‑media posts and vague plans. (brb.yahoo.net)
  • By August 9, 2025, Business Insider reported that Musk had not followed through on any of the concrete steps needed to build a party (ballot access, organization, etc.), concluding that the America Party was “nowhere to be seen” a month after the announcement. (businessinsider.com)
  • On August 20, 2025, Reuters reported that Musk had “backed away” from plans to launch the America Party and was refocusing on his companies and maintaining ties with Republican leaders instead of building a separate party. (reuters.com) Reporting in other outlets the same week similarly described Musk as shelving or abandoning the project for strategic reasons. (nypost.com)
  • Encyclopedic coverage now characterizes the American/America Party of 2025 as short‑lived or merely an announced/abandoned project, noting that by late August Musk no longer intended to found or proceed with the party. (en.wikipedia.org)

By November 30, 2025, Musk’s third‑party effort has produced no ballot line, no candidates, no elected officials, and no sustained organization, and has effectively been shelved. Under any normal definition of a “viable or successful third party,” this means the “third party stuff” did, in fact, not work, so Sacks’s prediction is best classified as right.

Sacks @ 01:12:41Inconclusive
politics
Candidates backed by Elon Musk’s new American Party will be able to win a few U.S. House of Representatives races but will not win any U.S. Senate races in the foreseeable initial cycles of the party (i.e., in its first election cycles after formation).
I think you can win a few House races. I think that's doable. I don't think you can win a Senate race.
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Elon Musk’s America/American Party has been announced and is organizing but has not yet contested its first federal election cycle.

– Musk launched the “America Party” (often described interchangeably as the American Party) in early July 2025 and has explicitly said it will target a small number of House and Senate seats in the 2026 midterm elections.(upi.com)
– Reporting and analysis consistently frame the party’s electoral impact as something that may occur in the 2026 midterms and possibly the 2028 cycle; there is no reporting of completed House or Senate races actually won or lost by America Party candidates yet.(financialexpress.com)
– The 2026 U.S. House and Senate elections are scheduled for November 3, 2026 and are listed as ongoing/future, meaning no results exist as of late 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)
– Searches for 2025 special elections and FEC activity related to Musk’s party discuss organization, filings, and GOP concern, but not any concluded federal races with America Party nominees, let alone victories.(timesofindia.indiatimes.com)

Because the party’s initial election cycles (starting with 2026) have not yet taken place, we cannot say whether Musk‑backed American Party candidates will win “a few House races” and zero Senate races. There is simply insufficient outcome data so far, so the prediction cannot yet be judged.

politicsgovernment
If and when a specific large-scale federal workforce reduction plan under Trump’s EO is litigated up to the Supreme Court, the Court will still rule in favor of allowing its implementation, but by a narrower margin than 8–1.
This one's a little bit easier. It'll get more complicated. Again, like this EO is only approved to allow for the planning. I think the vote might be closer. I think there's still a majority on the Supreme Court for the actual implementation, but it may not be eight one when there's a specific plan that has to navigate its way through the courts again.
Explanation

On July 8, 2025, the Supreme Court granted the government’s emergency application to stay a preliminary injunction against President Trump’s broad workforce‑reduction Executive Order 14210 and an OMB/OPM memorandum. That 8–1 order allowed agencies to plan and begin large‑scale reductions in force, while explicitly stating the Court expressed “no view on the legality of any Agency RIF and Reorganization Plan” produced under the order. (scotusblog.com)

On July 14, 2025, in McMahon v. New York (No. 24A1203), the Court considered a specific large‑scale reduction in force at the Department of Education, which sought to eliminate roughly half the department’s workforce pursuant to Trump’s education‑reorganization executive order (and related RIF directives). The Court granted a stay of the district court’s injunction, thereby allowing the Education Department’s mass layoffs and restructuring to proceed while litigation continues—i.e., it ruled in favor of allowing implementation of this specific plan. (caselaw.findlaw.com)

Contemporaneous reporting on that July 14 order states that the vote was 6–3, with all three liberal justices (Sotomayor, Kagan, Jackson) in dissent. This is a narrower margin than the earlier 8–1 ruling on the general RIF planning order. (upi.com)

Taken together, these events match Sacks’s prediction: once a concrete, large‑scale RIF plan under Trump’s workforce‑reduction program reached the Supreme Court, the Court again allowed it to move forward, and the vote was indeed closer than the original 8–1 decision.

conflictpolitics
Despite the June 2025 ceasefire, armed conflict between Israel and Iran will resume in the future (i.e., there will be additional military or proxy clashes beyond the June 2025 ‘12‑day war’ episode).
This is not over. Iran and Israel are mortal enemies and we have a cease fire. Here we have a pause in the action, but it's going to flare up again at some point.View on YouTube
Explanation

In late June 2025, a U.S.- and Qatar-mediated ceasefire formally ended the 12‑day Iran–Israel war, and subsequent reporting notes that while there were initial violations in the hours after it began, the ceasefire between Iran and Israel "ultimately held" and there have been no renewed large-scale direct missile exchanges between the two states. (en.wikipedia.org)

However, after the podcast date (28 June 2025), armed conflict clearly resumed via Iran‑aligned proxies. The Houthis in Yemen are widely described by governments and analysts as Iran‑backed and part of Tehran’s regional “Axis of Resistance.” (dw.com) Israel has conducted an ongoing air campaign against Houthi targets in Yemen since May 2025; this includes major strikes on Sanaa on 24 August 2025 and a series of attacks on 28 August 2025 that killed senior Houthi leadership, including de facto prime minister Ahmed al‑Rahawi and other top officials, in operations explicitly catalogued as “Israeli attacks on Yemen (May 2025–present)” directed at the Iran‑backed Houthis. (en.wikipedia.org)

The Houthis have hit Israel directly in response: on 7 September 2025, a drone launched from Yemen struck the arrivals hall of Israel’s Ramon Airport near Eilat, injuring civilians and briefly shutting the airport, and on 24 September 2025 another Houthi drone attack on central Eilat injured 22 people; both are documented as Houthi drone strikes on Israeli civilian infrastructure within the broader Red Sea crisis. (reuters.com) Separately, Israel has also escalated against Hezbollah, Iran’s principal Lebanese proxy: on 23 November 2025 it carried out an airstrike on Beirut’s southern suburbs that killed Hezbollah’s acting chief of staff Ali Tabtabai; Reuters explicitly describes Hezbollah in this piece as “Iran‑backed,” and the strike is noted as a serious escalation despite an existing U.S.-brokered truce on the Lebanon front. (reuters.com)

Taken together, these post‑ceasefire Israeli airstrikes on Iran‑backed groups (Houthis and Hezbollah) and the retaliatory drone attacks on Israeli territory constitute clear instances of renewed military and proxy clashes between Israel and Iran’s regional network after the June 2025 12‑day war, even though the formal Iran–Israel ceasefire has largely held at the state‑to‑state level. That matches the substance of Sacks’s prediction that “this is not over” and that the conflict would “flare up again at some point” through further armed or proxy confrontations; therefore the prediction is best judged as correct.

Sacks @ 00:54:23Inconclusive
politics
Over the coming years, the dominant ideological alignment in U.S. national politics will solidify into a binary choice between a populist-nationalist Republican Party (MAGA-style) and a populist-socialist Democratic Party, with traditional neoliberal and neoconservative factions losing meaningful influence.
Those are the choices for the future. Let me tell you, you can basically go with you're going to have a populist socialism in the Democratic Party, or you're going to have a populist nationalism in the Republican Party... your choices are MAGA or socialism. Which one do you want?View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, this prediction is still framed for the "coming years", and only about five months have elapsed since it was made on June 28, 2025. That is not enough time to judge whether it ultimately comes true as a long‑run description of U.S. national politics.

Substantively, current evidence is mixed rather than clearly validating or falsifying the claim:

  • Within the GOP, a large share of voters do identify as “MAGA Republicans” (around half of Republicans, depending on the poll), showing strong populist‑nationalist influence but not total dominance. Many Republicans explicitly do not identify as MAGA, indicating an ongoing split between MAGA and more traditional/establishment conservatives. (today.yougov.com)
  • On the Democratic side, democratic socialists like Zohran Mamdani (elected NYC mayor) are highly visible, but institutional power is still heavily held by moderates and centrists. The New Democrat Coalition, a pro‑business, Third‑Way, centrist group, is the largest ideological caucus among House Democrats, with over half of Democratic representatives as members. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Additional organizations such as Majority Democrats (a centrist PAC modeled on the old DLC) and the surviving Blue Dog Coalition of moderates show that non‑socialist, non‑populist factions remain organized and influential in the Democratic Party. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because:

  1. The prediction is explicitly set over a multi‑year horizon ("coming years"), and that horizon has not yet passed.
  2. Current party dynamics still show significant centrist/neoliberal and traditional conservative factions with real influence, instead of a fully crystallized binary "MAGA vs. socialism" structure.

…it is too early to say whether U.S. national politics will in fact solidify into the binary alignment described. Therefore the only defensible judgment today is inconclusive (too early) rather than right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
Within a few weeks of this June 2025 discussion, the US House of Representatives will pass the Genius Act (the stablecoin bill), after which President Trump will sign it into law during his current term.
And I would expect the House will act in the next few weeks on this. And then the president will have a bill he can sign.View on YouTube
Explanation

The GENIUS Act is the federal stablecoin bill discussed on the podcast. After the Senate passed it on June 17, 2025, the House of Representatives passed the bill on July 17, 2025, by a vote of 308–122. President Donald Trump signed it into law on July 18, 2025, making it Public Law 119‑27.

These dates are documented in:

  • The GENIUS Act legislative history, showing House passage on July 17, 2025, and Trump’s signature on July 18, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Congress.gov, which lists S.1582 (GENIUS Act) as having "Became Public Law No: 119‑27" on July 18, 2025. (congress.gov)
  • Contemporary news coverage confirming Trump signed the GENIUS Act on July 18, 2025. (politico.com)

The podcast aired June 21, 2025. The House acted 26 days later (about three and a half weeks), which reasonably fits the colloquial "next few weeks," and Trump did in fact receive and sign the bill during his current term. Both key elements of Sacks’s prediction—timing in the near future and ultimate presidential signature—were fulfilled, so the prediction is best judged right.

Sacks @ 01:44:33Inconclusive
markets
Following passage of the Genius Act, major US banks will launch their own US‑dollar stablecoins under the new regulatory framework.
in the wake of this genius act, the stablecoin bill that the banks have now talked about getting into stablecoins, they're going to issue one.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key facts:

  • The GENIUS Act, a federal framework for U.S. dollar stablecoins, was passed by Congress and signed into law on July 18, 2025, creating a new regulatory category for payment stablecoins that are not bank deposits (they are explicitly treated separately from traditional bank deposits and securities/commodities). (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Since then, no major U.S. bank has launched a retail or broadly-available GENIUS‑Act "payment stablecoin":

    • Bank of America repeatedly says it is ready and expects to launch a fully dollar‑backed stablecoin but only once the regulatory path is fully clear; as of mid‑ to late‑2025 it still describes this as a future plan, with no product or launch date announced. (coindesk.com)
    • Citigroup likewise says it is considering or looking at the issuance of a Citi stablecoin for digital payments, but again only as an exploration, not a launched product. (reuters.com)
    • An August 12, 2025 Reuters piece notes that after the GENIUS Act, firms like Bank of America and Citigroup are exploring GENIUS‑compliant stablecoins, but stresses that deployment strategies, regulatory details, and timelines remain unresolved. (reuters.com)
  • The one concrete on‑chain dollar instrument from a major U.S. bank is JPMorgan’s JPMD:

    • JPMorgan piloted and then, on November 12, 2025, made its USD deposit token "JPMD" available to institutional clients on Coinbase’s Base L2. (jpmorgan.com)
    • JPMorgan itself and multiple commentators stress that JPMD is a deposit token, not a GENIUS‑Act payment stablecoin: it represents insured bank deposits, accrues interest, and is framed as "commercial bank money" on‑chain. JPMorgan’s Kinexys unit explicitly says, “This is a deposit token and not a stablecoin; clients are sending and receiving real bank money on Base,” and the Financial Times similarly contrasts JPMD with stablecoins for regulatory purposes. (en.coinotag.com)

Interpretation:

  • Sacks’ prediction was that after the GENIUS Act, major U.S. banks would issue their own U.S.-dollar stablecoins under the new framework.
  • As of November 30, 2025:
    • Banks are clearly preparing and signaling intent to issue such stablecoins under GENIUS. (coindesk.com)
    • But no major U.S. bank has yet launched a GENIUS‑regulated payment stablecoin; JPMorgan’s live product is deliberately structured and branded as a deposit token rather than a GENIUS stablecoin, and other big banks remain in the planning phase.

Because the GENIUS Act only became law in July 2025 and large banks are still in the design/regulatory‑approval stage, it is too early to say that the prediction—"the banks ... are going to issue one" under this new framework—has failed. At the same time, the exact outcome Sacks described has not yet materialized.

Conclusion: The prediction is neither clearly right nor clearly wrong as of November 30, 2025; it remains inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 01:44:33Inconclusive
governmentmarkets
Under the Genius Act, Tether and other currently offshore USD stablecoin issuers will, within three years of the law’s enactment, relocate their stablecoin operations onshore to the United States and comply with US regulatory requirements.
tether will under this act will have three years to come on shore. But the bottom line is they will have to operate in the United States.View on YouTube
Explanation

The GENIUS Act was signed into U.S. law on July 18, 2025, and it includes a three‑year transition period after enactment before U.S. digital asset service providers are generally barred from offering payment stablecoins that are not issued by a "permitted payment stablecoin issuer"; foreign issuers can continue if they meet certain conditions to comply with U.S. lawful orders and reciprocal arrangements, rather than being strictly forced to redomicile onshore. 【1view0【【2view0【【3view0【 That three‑year window runs until July 18, 2028, which is still in the future as of November 30, 2025, so the time horizon of the prediction has not elapsed. 【1view0【【0news16】

Empirically, since passage of the GENIUS Act, Tether has announced plans to: (a) use the law’s foreign‑issuer pathway to make USDT available in the United States while remaining an offshore issuer, and (b) launch a separate, U.S.-based compliant stablecoin (variously reported as USAT/USA₮) issued through Anchorage Digital Bank under U.S. regulation. 【4search0【【4search8【【4news12【【4news13【 These steps do not yet amount to fully relocating Tether’s existing offshore stablecoin operations onshore, but because the statutory three‑year deadline has not arrived, it is still possible (though not guaranteed) that Tether and similar issuers could restructure to satisfy the prediction by 2028. Given the open time window and ongoing strategic moves, the prediction cannot currently be judged true or false.

Sacks @ 00:33:15Inconclusive
aieconomy
Within two years of the podcast date (by around May 2027), unemployment driven by AI will not reach on the order of 20% of the workforce; in particular, scenarios where roughly 20% of workers are unemployed due to AI adoption will not materialize.
I just think this idea that, boom, 20% of the workforce is going to be unemployed in two years, I just don't think that it's going to work that way.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction has a two‑year horizon from the podcast date of 31 May 2025, i.e., until around 31 May 2027. Today is 30 November 2025, so we are only about six months into that two‑year window. It is therefore too early to say definitively whether the prediction will hold.

Empirically, as of 2025 the U.S. unemployment rate is in the 4–4.4% range, not remotely close to 20%:

  • Monthly data for 2025 show unemployment at 4.0–4.4% from January through September 2025, with 4.2% in May (the podcast month). (theglobalstatistics.com)
  • BLS‑based series and Fed/other summaries likewise report headline unemployment around 4.0–4.3% in early and mid‑2025. (economy.fedprimerate.com)
  • Forecasts from professional forecasters and economists project unemployment in the mid‑single digits (around 4–4.5%) through 2026, not anywhere near 20%. (philadelphiafed.org)

So so far, the scenario of ~20% unemployment (overall, let alone explicitly “due to AI”) has not materialized. However, because the prediction explicitly concerns the state of unemployment two years after the podcast (by May 2027), we cannot yet confirm it as correct. A sharp unemployment spike between now and May 2027—whether or not attributed to AI—could still falsify the claim.

Given that the evaluation date precedes the end of the forecast window, the prediction’s ultimate accuracy is inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 01:19:53Inconclusive
aitecheconomy
By roughly four years from this May 2025 episode (around May 2029, i.e., the end of the presidential term), (1) state‑of‑the‑art AI model algorithms, (2) leading AI chips, and (3) aggregate deployed AI data‑center compute capacity will each be about 100× more powerful than at the time of this discussion, implying on the order of a 1,000,000× (10^6) combined increase in effective AI compute capability available to the economy, with that gain split between lower prices, higher performance ceilings, and greater total deployed capacity.
the models, the chips, and the data centers will all be 100 times more powerful in four years, let's say at the end of this presidential term. So you multiply those things together, the algorithms, the chips, and then the raw compute that's available. You're talking about a million x increase,View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly sets a timeline of about four years from the May 2025 episode, i.e., by the end of the current presidential term, for models, chips, and data‑center capacity each to be ~100× more powerful, yielding roughly a 1,000,000× combined increase in effective AI compute.(speakai.co) As of today (November 30, 2025), only about seven months have elapsed since the prediction, while the horizon is around May 2029, so the specified deadline has not yet arrived and the claim cannot be definitively evaluated. Current reports focus on plans and build‑outs for very large AI clusters and multi‑gigawatt data centers targeting the later 2020s (e.g., 1 GW–class clusters and massive new hyperscaler data‑center investments), underscoring that much of the projected capacity is still under construction.(80000hours.org) Because the key date is still in the future and the relevant metrics (true realized 100× gains in algorithms, chips, and deployed capacity) cannot yet be measured for 2029, the accuracy of the prediction is presently inconclusive/too early to tell.

Sacks @ 01:21:16Inconclusive
techaieconomy
Within "several years" of May 2025 (interpretable as by roughly 2030), individual AI/data‑center facilities with total power draw in the 5–10 gigawatt range will exist and be in operation.
we're just starting to now see the first gigawatt power data centers. I don't even think they're live yet, but this is where they're trying to get to. And I don't think it's beyond the realm of possibility that we could be at 5 or 10 gigawatt data centers in the next, I don't know, several years.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s timeframe is “in the next several years” from May 2025, which is reasonably interpretable as by around 2030. As of November 30, 2025, that horizon has not yet arrived, so the prediction cannot be fully evaluated.

On the factual side as of late 2025:

  • Industry reports and news articles describe very large data centers and AI-specific campuses in the hundreds of megawatts (MW) range, with some roadmaps and power‑purchase agreements targeting ~1 GW-class campuses over time, but there is no credible evidence of a single AI/data‑center facility with 5–10 gigawatts of total power draw already existing and operating.
  • The largest publicly discussed hyperscale projects (including AI compute clusters and multi‑building campuses) still cite capacities well below 5 GW; where higher multi‑GW numbers appear, they generally refer to multi‑site regional plans or long‑term utility interconnection capacity, not one individual facility.

Since:

  1. The relevant deadline (≈2030) has not yet passed; and
  2. The prediction is about what will exist by that future time, not what exists by 2025;

the correct status as of now is inconclusive rather than right or wrong.

politicseconomy
In the ongoing 2025 US–China trade negotiations triggered by the April 2025 tariff actions, the current Chinese cutoff of rare earths to the United States will be explicitly resolved in a formal agreement, restoring US access to rare earth materials or processing from China.
China has now cut off the United States. And so as part of this trade negotiation, we're going to have to resolve that issue. And I trust that it will be.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since April 2025 shows that the rare‑earths cutoff was directly addressed in U.S.–China trade talks and partially rolled back through formal agreements.

  1. China did halt rare‑earth exports after the April 2025 tariffs. On April 4, 2025 China imposed export controls on seven categories of medium and heavy rare earths in response to U.S. tariffs, and reporting in early April noted that shipments of those rare earths effectively stopped, with exporters waiting indefinitely for licenses.(energynews.oedigital.com) This is the “cutoff” Sacks was referring to.

  2. A formal trade agreement explicitly tied to rare earths was reached in June 2025. On June 11, 2025, Reuters reported that President Trump announced a new U.S.–China trade agreement under which China would supply the U.S. with magnets and rare‑earth minerals, while the U.S. kept 55% tariffs; the deal, framed as a trade truce, was described as lifting China’s export restrictions on rare earths, pending final approval by Trump and Xi.(reuters.com) A contemporaneous Gulf News analysis summarized the same London deal as committing China to provide “full magnets and any necessary rare earths” to the U.S., resuming exports after roughly two months of severe restrictions, via export permits for U.S. firms (valid for six months and renewable).(gulfnews.com) That is a formal, negotiated trade arrangement that explicitly addresses the rare‑earth cutoff.

  3. That deal restored at least civilian U.S. access to Chinese rare earths. Industry and policy analyses describe this London agreement as a rare‑earths “deal” or truce that restarted flows of Chinese rare‑earth magnets to U.S. manufacturers, even while emphasizing it is temporary, license‑based, and leaves China with major leverage.(rareearthexchanges.com) These accounts stress that military‑grade magnets and some specialized rare‑earth products remain outside the fast‑track system, so access is partial and focused on non‑military uses rather than comprehensive.

  4. Later negotiations reinforced (but did not fully liberalize) this framework. A subsequent deal after Trump–Xi talks in Busan on October 30, 2025 suspended a planned expansion of Chinese rare‑earth export controls for a year as part of a broader trade agreement, effectively preserving the existing flow regime rather than tightening it further.(en.wikipedia.org) U.S. and Chinese officials have since referred to a continuing, repeatedly extended truce under which lower tariffs and ongoing Chinese rare‑earth exports to the U.S. are maintained, while both sides argue over draft regulations that could re‑tighten controls.(uk.marketscreener.com)

  5. Assessment relative to the prediction. Sacks’ normalized prediction was that the rare‑earth cutoff would be “explicitly resolved in a formal agreement, restoring US access to rare earth materials or processing from China.” That did occur in substance: rare‑earth exports were shut off in April, then explicitly addressed and partially rolled back in a negotiated London trade deal that committed China to resume supplying magnets and rare earths to the U.S., followed by later agreements that kept that flow going (though under restrictive licensing and with military‑grade items still constrained). The resolution is imperfect and fragile, but a formal agreement did explicitly restore significant U.S. access to Chinese rare‑earth materials. On that basis, the prediction is best judged as right (directionally correct, albeit with important caveats about scope and durability).

Sacks @ 00:30:36Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
US–India security and trade relations will remain closely aligned and stable for at least the next 20 years, with no major strategic rupture between the two countries in that period.
I don't know how long it's going to take. But look, I think one of the big lessons here over the past 25 years is that you have security first... So security always has to come first, then you work out trade. And I think that India is fundamentally, extremely aligned with us on security... And I do think that the US India relationship is just very aligned. And I think therefore the investments that get made in the trade, relationships that get forged will be very stable over the next couple of decades.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly about "the next couple of decades"—i.e., roughly 20 years of stable, closely aligned U.S.–India security and trade relations. As of today (30 November 2025), only about seven months have elapsed since the podcast release (26 April 2025), which is far too short to evaluate a 20‑year forecast.

Available evidence so far actually shows deepening U.S.–India alignment in security and trade: a new 10‑year defense framework agreement has been signed and described by U.S. officials as indicating that military ties have "never been stronger"; joint leaders’ statements from early 2025 reaffirm a comprehensive global strategic partnership and launch new defense, trade, and technology initiatives; and recent commentary describes the relationship as entering a phase of “structured stabilisation,” with growing defense sales and efforts to resolve trade frictions. (whitehouse.gov) None of this, however, can confirm or falsify the 20‑year stability claim yet.

Because the prediction concerns a much longer time horizon than has passed, the correct rating is inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 00:33:34Inconclusive
politicsconflict
Throughout the remainder of the 21st century, China will remain both India’s and the United States’ primary security threat, with no other country surpassing China as their top security concern before 2100.
Again, their main security threat is China. And our main security threat is China. And that's just not going to change for probably the entire 21st century.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction concerns the entire 21st century, asserting that no other country will surpass China as the primary security threat for both India and the United States before 2100. As of today (November 30, 2025), fewer than 75 years remain in that horizon, and we are only about a quarter of the way through the century. There is no way to definitively determine now whether some other power (for example, a resurgent Russia, a future unified bloc, or a currently minor power) might become the top security concern for either country later in the century. Because the claim is explicitly about a long-term future state extending to 2100, it is too early to judge its accuracy. Therefore the correct classification is: inconclusive (too early to tell).

techmarkets
Despite tariff-related uncertainty, hyperscaler capital expenditure and data center build-outs (including Google's planned ~$75B infrastructure spend) will not be meaningfully reduced in the next quarter or two; these investments will be maintained at planned levels.
I think it's going to hold up. I mean, look, I just think that this investment in CapEx and the data center build outs is so strategic right now.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the quarters immediately after the April 26, 2025 podcast shows that hyperscaler data‑center and AI infrastructure capex was maintained or increased, not meaningfully reduced, despite tariff uncertainty.

  1. Alphabet/Google (the specific ~$75B reference)

    • On Feb. 4, 2025 Alphabet said it expected to invest about $75B in 2025 capex, mostly for servers and data centers.(cnbc.com)
    • In its Q1 2025 earnings commentary (late April, i.e., right around the podcast), Alphabet reiterated that it still expected to invest approximately $75B in 2025 capex, noting this could fluctuate by quarter due to delivery and construction timing but not cutting the total.(alphabet2025ir.q4web.com)
    • On April 9, 2025, amid market volatility from President Trump’s tariffs, Alphabet publicly reaffirmed its ~$75B 2025 spending plan “despite turmoil over U.S. tariffs,” explicitly tying this to data center and AI build‑out.(investing.com)
    • By Q3 2025 (within two quarters of the podcast), Alphabet had raised its 2025 capex guidance first to $85B and then to $91–93B, with the “vast majority” going to technical infrastructure (servers, data centers, networking).(datacenterdynamics.com)
      This is the opposite of a cut: Google’s planned ~$75B was maintained and then increased.
  2. Meta

    • In its late‑2024 guidance, Meta expected 2025 capex of $60–65B.(marketscreener.com)
    • In Q1 2025 (May 2, 2025—the very next quarter after the podcast), Meta raised that 2025 capex outlook to $64–72B, citing additional data‑center investments to support AI and higher infrastructure‑hardware costs.(datacenterdynamics.com)
    • Meta explicitly attributed some of the increase to uncertainty and higher costs from Trump’s tariffs and trade discussions, not to cutting investment.(datacenterdynamics.com)
      So tariffs raised Meta’s costs, but its DC/AI capex plans grew rather than being reduced.
  3. Microsoft and Amazon

    • Microsoft signaled plans to spend about $80B in fiscal 2025 on AI‑enabled data‑center capex, and Q3 FY25 results (reported April 30, 2025) showed capital expenditures rising sharply, with management saying capex would continue to grow in the next fiscal year even after Trump’s tariffs were announced.(reuters.com)
    • While Microsoft later said it was “slowing or pausing” some specific data‑center projects (e.g., an Ohio site), it still planned to invest over $80B in AI infrastructure globally, and analysts continued to model roughly that spend, describing project moves as portfolio adjustments rather than a broad capex pullback.(apnews.com)
    • For Amazon, contemporaneous coverage of Q1 2025 results noted that it left its 2025 capex outlook roughly unchanged around ~$105B, most of it AI/cloud‑related, even as trade tensions rose.(mitrade.com)
    • Subsequent announcements of large new AWS government and regional data‑center investments later in 2025 are consistent with an ongoing, elevated build‑out rather than a near‑term cut.(reuters.com)
  4. Industry‑wide picture under tariffs

    • Analysis of the top hyperscalers ahead of and during 2025 shows them collectively targeting around $350B+ in 2025 cloud/AI datacenter capex, up dramatically from prior years, with commentary that tariffs and trade war risks might eventually force moderation but had not yet done so.(forbes.com)
    • Another industry summary puts Q1 2025 total datacenter capex up ~50% year‑over‑year, with the top four cloud providers’ capex up ~73%, noting that hyperscalers were “investing proactively in anticipation of tariffs” rather than pulling back.(linkedin.com)

Across Google, Meta, Microsoft, and Amazon—the core “hyperscalers” Sacks was talking about—capital‑expenditure plans and data‑center buildouts in the one to two quarters after April 26, 2025 were maintained or increased, even as tariffs raised costs and created uncertainty. There is no evidence of a meaningful reduction in these strategic investments over that time window; if anything, the trend was further upward.

Given that, Sacks’s prediction that hyperscaler data‑center/AI capex (including Google’s ~$75B plan) would “hold up” over the next quarter or two despite tariff turmoil is best evaluated as right.

governmentpolitics
The Doge program in the U.S. federal government will continue operating beyond 2025, but Elon Musk will reduce his direct involvement to roughly 1–2 days per week instead of being on it full time.
So my sense is that Doge is going to continue. It's just that Ellen is shifting to a mode where he can manage it. One day a week or two days a week, as opposed to being there five days a week.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that (1) the DOGE program in the US federal government would continue operating beyond 2025 and (2) Elon Musk would dial back his involvement to about 1–2 days per week instead of being there full time.

The second part largely happened: following Musk’s own comments on a Tesla earnings call, contemporary coverage reported that he planned to scale back his DOGE time to a day or two per week while refocusing on Tesla. (businessinsider.nl) Subsequent reporting and the DOGE overview note that he then left his formal White House/DOGE role entirely by late May 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)

However, multiple later reports show that DOGE itself did not continue past 2025. In late November 2025, major outlets (Guardian, Time, SF Chronicle, New York Post, People) all reported that the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) was dissolved or dismantled months ahead of its scheduled July 4, 2026 end date, with its functions largely absorbed by the Office of Personnel Management and other entities. (theguardian.com) These articles consistently describe DOGE as having been disbanded as a centralized program in November 2025, not continuing into 2026.

Because a core element of the prediction was that the DOGE program would keep operating beyond 2025, and it in fact ended in November 2025, the overall prediction must be judged as wrong, even though Musk’s short‑term shift to a 1–2‑days‑per‑week mode did occur before he exited the role entirely.

Sacks @ 01:12:39Inconclusive
economypolitics
The United States will eventually experience a significant debt or fiscal crisis before Congress undertakes major structural changes to its spending/appropriations behavior; only after such a crisis will Congress broadly recognize and praise Elon Musk’s deficit-cutting efforts via Doge.
Unfortunately, Congress will never, I think, change its ways until they're forced to by some sort of crisis, which I think is your point about eventually will be in a debt crisis, and then Congress will finally see the wisdom and they'll finally appreciate what Ellen did.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the United States has not experienced a singular, acute debt or fiscal crisis of the kind typically described as a break-point event (e.g., default, failed Treasury auctions, sudden loss of market access). There are ongoing concerns about high federal debt and deficits, but nothing that is widely characterized as a distinct crisis that clearly forced Congress into a new structural regime on spending/appropriations.

Likewise, there is no evidence that Congress has, in the wake of such a crisis, broadly recognized and praised Elon Musk’s deficit-cutting efforts via Doge (Dogecoin) or any Doge-linked fiscal mechanism; no such mechanism has been adopted in U.S. fiscal policy, and there has been no wave of congressional credit to Musk along those lines.

However, Sacks’s prediction is explicitly framed as eventual (no time bound) and depends on future political and economic developments that may still occur after November 30, 2025. Because:

  1. The hypothesized crisis has not occurred in a clearly recognizable form yet, and
  2. There is no specified deadline by which it must occur,

we cannot say the prediction is wrong; it simply has not had enough time to be tested. Thus the correct status, as of now, is “inconclusive (too early)”.

Sacks @ 00:43:44Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If Harvard does not fully abandon DEI-based race-conscious policies, then roughly every 1–2 years going forward there will be new whistleblower-driven litigation revealing that Harvard is still engaging in racial discrimination in admissions, resulting in repeated legal findings against Harvard and subsequent policy tweaks followed by further cases.
And the alternative to the administration saying, just get rid of Dei is that every year or two, we're going to have new litigation where there'll be some whistleblower, and it'll come out that Harvard is still engaging in racial discrimination. And then Harvard will be found guilty like they were in that 2023 case. And they'll change their policy and they'll manipulate it, and they'll play some new game, and there'll be a new court case, and we'll keep going back and forth with them.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction is conditional and long‑term: if Harvard keeps DEI‑style, race‑conscious policies, then every 1–2 years there will be new whistleblower‑driven litigation revealing ongoing racial discrimination in admissions, with repeated legal findings against Harvard. The key testable elements are (a) a recurring pattern over multiple 1–2‑year cycles and (b) court or formal legal findings that Harvard is again liable for race‑based discrimination in admissions, post‑2023. The Supreme Court’s 2023 Students for Fair Admissions v. Harvard decision did find Harvard’s prior race‑conscious admissions unlawful, but that is the baseline event Sacks is referring to, not a post‑prediction data point. (en.wikipedia.org) Since the podcast aired on April 19, 2025, only about seven months have elapsed (to November 30, 2025), which is less than the first 1–2‑year window he specified. In that interval, there has been a federal Office for Civil Rights compliance review and a denial‑of‑access letter over Harvard’s refusal to turn over admissions data, but that review has not yet produced a legal finding that Harvard is again violating Title VI in admissions. (ed.gov) There has also been a civil‑rights complaint by America First Legal alleging unlawful DEI programs and DEI‑linked use of federal funds, which calls for investigation and potential sanctions but is not itself a whistleblower admissions‑discrimination lawsuit with a liability finding. (nypost.com) Other prominent Harvard cases since 2024 concern hostile‑environment and antisemitism claims under Title VI and have led to settlements and policy changes, not new judicial findings that Harvard is again discriminating by race in its undergraduate admissions decisions. (en.wikipedia.org) Because (1) the first 1–2‑year period following the prediction has not yet elapsed, and (2) the pattern of repeated whistleblower‑driven admissions cases with fresh liability findings has not had time either to materialize or be ruled out, the available evidence neither clearly confirms nor clearly falsifies Sacks’ forecast. It is therefore too early to judge, so the prediction is best classified as inconclusive at this time.

politicsgovernment
Ezra Klein’s effort to persuade the Democratic Party to embrace a streamlined, less bureaucratic, abundance-oriented governing model (e.g., permitting reform, reduced red tape on public works) will not succeed in substantially shifting the party’s mainstream policy stance in that direction.
So maybe you're in the wrong party, because I don't think you're going to convince Democrats of this.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2025 indicates that Ezra Klein’s “abundance” agenda has significantly influenced mainstream Democratic policy and discourse, contradicting Sacks’s claim that Klein would not “convince Democrats of this.”

  1. Klein’s ideas are explicitly shaping top Democrats’ thinking. Klein’s book Abundance (March 2025) became a bestseller and is widely discussed inside the party. California Governor Gavin Newsom called it “one of the most important books Democrats can read,” sent copies to Democratic legislative leaders, and hosted Klein to discuss reorienting the party around building more housing and infrastructure with fewer bureaucratic barriers.(notus.org) Klein also briefed Senate Democrats at their May 2025 retreat, a sign that his framework is being taken seriously by national party leadership and 2028 hopefuls.(nypost.com)

  2. Democratic-led governments have enacted major abundance-style reforms. In mid‑2025, California’s Democratic legislature and Newsom overhauled the state’s landmark environmental review law (CEQA) via AB 130 and SB 131, exempting most infill housing and some industrial projects from lengthy environmental review to cut red tape and speed construction—widely described as one of the most significant housing-policy changes in decades.(en.wikipedia.org) California also passed SB 79, the Abundant and Affordable Homes Near Transit Act, pre‑empting local zoning to allow mid‑ and high‑rise multifamily housing near transit, a core “YIMBY”/abundance demand.(en.wikipedia.org) These are large, mainstream Democratic policy moves in the party’s flagship state that directly embody the permitting and zoning reforms Klein advocates.

  3. Congressional Democrats have organized around an explicitly abundance-oriented agenda. In May 2025, Rep. Josh Harder launched the bipartisan Build America Caucus, with more than two dozen members and over 30 House Democrats eventually involved, focused on energy permitting, transmission, housing, and infrastructure, explicitly inspired by Klein and Thompson’s Abundance and framed as cutting federal red tape to build more.(inclusiveabundance.org) Separately, reporting notes an “Abundance Caucus” and an Abundance Network–backed group of mayors and local officials (mostly Democrats) organizing to govern with an “abundance mindset.”(lemonde.fr) This is no longer a fringe current; it’s an organized, visible faction inside the Democratic mainstream.

  4. Mainstream Democratic policy at the federal level now incorporates abundance-style deregulatory housing reforms. The bipartisan ROAD to Housing Act of 2025, co-led by Sen. Tim Scott (R) and Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D), passed the Senate Banking Committee unanimously and was later folded into the Senate-passed NDAA. The bill is described as one of the most significant housing packages in over a decade and includes provisions aimed at increasing supply via zoning, permitting, and land-use reforms and other measures to cut red tape while expanding federal support.(washingtonpost.com) That Warren—hardly a marginal figure—has co-authored and championed a package centered on expanding housing supply and streamlining processes underscores that abundance-style thinking has penetrated the party’s policy core.

  5. Media and think-tank coverage describe ‘abundance’ as reshaping Democratic discourse, not failing to gain traction. Analyses in the Washington Post and others say Klein and Thompson’s abundance agenda is “reshaping Democratic Party discourse,” especially around housing, infrastructure, and climate, even as it provokes debate with the party’s left.(washingtonpost.com) Le Monde similarly describes “abundance” as an emerging guiding principle among U.S. Democrats, citing an Abundance Caucus and recent California rollbacks of environmental rules as a “significant pivot” in Democratic strategy.(lemonde.fr) The centrist think tank Third Way has also rolled out a major housing plan explicitly aligned with the abundance framework—more construction, fewer regulatory barriers—as a recommended party direction.(axios.com)

  6. There is still internal resistance—but that doesn’t mean there’s no substantial shift. Progressive activists and some electeds criticize abundance politics as corporatist or insufficiently focused on equity, and polling suggests Democratic voters slightly prefer a populist, anti-corporate frame over an “abundance agenda” when forced to choose.(axios.com) However, Sacks’s prediction was not that Klein’s ideas would face resistance; it was that Klein wouldn’t convince Democrats. The combination of: (a) high-profile Democratic governors and members of Congress explicitly embracing abundance framing, (b) major Democratic-run jurisdictions enacting large deregulatory permitting and zoning changes, and (c) congressional caucuses and bipartisan landmark bills centered on cutting red tape and boosting supply, all indicate that mainstream Democratic policy has moved meaningfully toward the abundance/permitting-reform model since Klein began his push.

Given this record, Sacks’s statement that Klein would not persuade Democrats in a meaningful way is best judged wrong as of November 30, 2025: the party’s mainstream policy conversation and significant legislative actions have, in fact, shifted substantially in the direction Klein advocated, even if the intra-party contest over how far to go remains ongoing.

politicstech
Representative French Hill will introduce a new version of his FIT 21-style digital asset market structure bill in the U.S. House of Representatives within a few weeks of this podcast’s recording (i.e., by roughly early April 2025).
So we expect that he will be introducing a new version of his bill, probably in the next few weeks.View on YouTube
Explanation

The podcast was released 8 March 2025, so 'in the next few weeks' / 'by early April 2025' implies a new FIT21-style digital asset market structure bill would be formally introduced in the House by roughly the first half of April.

In reality, Rep. French Hill and other House leaders released only a discussion draft of a digital asset market structure bill on 5 May 2025, which is already later than early April and was not a formally introduced bill. (jdsupra.com) The actual new FIT21-style market structure bill, H.R. 3633, the Digital Asset Market Clarity (CLARITY) Act, was formally introduced by Chairman French Hill on 29 May 2025 as a comprehensive digital asset market structure framework that builds on and refines FIT21. (congress.gov)

Because Hill did introduce a new FIT21-style market structure bill, but not within 'the next few weeks' or by early April 2025 (it came about eleven weeks later), the prediction as normalized — which is explicitly time-bound — did not come true and is therefore classified as wrong.

Sacks @ 02:02:55Inconclusive
politicsmarkets
Future digital asset market-structure legislation (a successor to FIT 21) will include disclosure requirements such as insider token holdings and issuance mechanics, and independently, the U.S. SEC will establish its own regulatory frameworks for crypto asset disclosures and market structure following its current rulemaking review, though no specific completion date is given.
And by the way, I think the market structure bills will do that. There's a version of this in fit 21 last Congress. I think it'll be the next one. And moreover, the SEC is looking right now at these rules and they're going to create their own frameworks.View on YouTube
Explanation

Legislation piece (successor to FIT21): partly realized, but not yet law.

  • The House’s Digital Asset Market Clarity Act of 2025 (H.R. 3633), explicitly described by press and law firms as a successor building on the prior FIT21 market‑structure effort, was introduced May 29, 2025 and passed the House on July 17, 2025. It is now sitting in the Senate Banking Committee and has not become law as of Nov. 30, 2025.
    • Congress.gov shows H.R. 3633 passed the House (294–134) and was then “Received in the Senate and read twice and referred” on Sept. 18, 2025, with no further action yet. (congress.gov)
  • Substantively, the CLARITY Act does contain the kind of disclosure regime Sacks described:
    • It adds a new Securities Act §4B that requires digital commodity issuers relying on an offering exemption to file offering statements with detailed issuer information, business operations, financial condition, distribution plans, and development plans for the blockchain system – effectively covering issuance mechanics. (congress.gov)
    • Later sections and committee materials describe "transaction reporting and beneficial ownership disclosure obligations" for digital commodity related persons and affiliated persons (i.e., founders, executives and other insiders) and impose limits and reporting on their token sales, which tracks the idea of insider token‑holding disclosure. (congress.gov)
    • Earlier FIT21 committee reports (which CLARITY builds on) also spelled out enhanced disclosures specific to digital assets, including the launch and supply process, governance regime, development plan, and material risks of the token – again, issuance mechanics in substance. (congress.gov)
  • So on the content dimension, Sacks’s claim that the next market‑structure bill after FIT21 would bake in these disclosure concepts is accurate; on the enactment dimension, that bill exists but has not yet cleared the Senate or been signed, so we cannot say the legislative prediction is fully realized.

SEC framework piece: still in development, not yet established.

  • The SEC created a Crypto Task Force in January 2025 to develop a comprehensive framework, and under new Chair Paul Atkins it launched “Project Crypto” in July 2025 to modernize securities rules for digital assets. These initiatives explicitly aim to craft “clear and simple rules of the road for crypto asset distributions, custody, and trading,” including tailored disclosures and safe harbors. (sec.gov)
  • However, the SEC’s own regulatory agenda released in September 2025 lists “Crypto Assets” and “Crypto Market Structure Amendments” only at the proposed rule stage with target dates in 2026; market commentary notes that Project Crypto is in Phase 1 and final rules are expected around 2026, not yet adopted. (jdsupra.com)
  • Recent speeches by Atkins outline a conceptual token taxonomy and intentions to offer purpose‑built disclosure regimes for ICOs, airdrops, and network rewards, but these remain policy blueprints and draft initiatives rather than completed, binding frameworks. (sec.gov)

Net assessment:

  • Sacks predicted (a) that the next FIT21‑style market‑structure legislation would contain robust disclosure terms (including insider and issuance‑mechanics style disclosures), and (b) that the SEC would, in parallel, create its own disclosure/market‑structure frameworks after its rule review.
  • As of Nov. 30, 2025: (a) is substantively borne out in the House‑passed CLARITY Act, but that bill is not yet law; (b) is clearly underway via the Crypto Task Force and Project Crypto, but the SEC has not yet finalized the promised frameworks in rule form.

Because the core SEC rulemaking is still in progress and the key market‑structure statute has not yet been enacted, the prediction cannot yet be judged clearly right or wrong. The most accurate rating as of today is "inconclusive (too early)."

Sacks @ 00:45:00Inconclusive
aipolitics
If the United States imposes heavy, unnecessary regulations that significantly impede its AI companies’ competitiveness while China does not mirror these constraints, then China will win the global race for AI leadership over the ensuing years.
And so if we hobble ourselves with unnecessary regulations, if we make it more difficult for our AI companies to compete, that doesn't mean that China is going to follow suit and copy us. They're going to take advantage of that fact and they're going to win.View on YouTube
Explanation

This prediction is about a conditional and multi‑year outcome:

If the U.S. hobbles its AI industry with unnecessary regulations while China does not, then China will win the AI race over the ensuing years.

As of 30 November 2025, both sides of that conditional and the long‑term outcome are not clearly settled:

  1. Has the U.S. “hobbled” its AI industry with heavy regulations while China stayed lax?

    • Federally, the U.S. actually moved toward deregulation in 2025: Trump’s Executive Order 14179 is explicitly titled “Removing Barriers to American Leadership in Artificial Intelligence” and rescinds Biden’s more restrictive Executive Order 14110, aiming to roll back policies seen as constraints on AI development. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Some U.S. states, notably California, have introduced targeted frontier‑model safety and transparency rules (e.g., SB‑53 / Transparency in Frontier Artificial Intelligence Act), but these are still relatively new, and there is an ongoing political fight over whether federal law will pre‑empt stricter state regulation. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • China, for its part, has also rolled out substantial AI regulations, including 2023–2025 generative‑AI rules requiring algorithm registration, security reviews, and mandatory labeling of AI‑generated content, with new labeling measures taking effect in September 2025. (cimplifi.com)
      Given this, it is not accurate to say the U.S. is clearly hobbling itself while China refrains from similar or stronger controls; both are regulating, but in different ways.
  2. Has China clearly “won” the global AI race by late 2025?
    Available indicators point to a competitive, mixed picture rather than a decisive Chinese win:

    • On investment and market leadership, the U.S. remains far ahead in private AI investment (about $109B vs. China’s $9.3B in 2024) and is widely projected to remain the front‑runner in global AI market share and frontier model development through 2030, with China as a fast‑growing second pole. (allaboutai.com)
    • On overall capability indices, a 2025 comparative AI index finds the U.S. composite AI score (68.1) still exceeds China’s (59.4), even though China is catching up quickly and shows strong regional clusters. (arxiv.org)
    • On research output and specific niches, China leads the world in share of AI publications and is surging in some model benchmarks and in the global market for open‑weight models, where recent work shows Chinese models slightly surpassing U.S. models in download share (17% vs. 15.8%) and performance on some tests. (arxiv.org)
  3. Timeframe: “over the ensuing years”
    The statement was made in February 2025; only about nine months have elapsed. The prediction explicitly concerns a multi‑year trajectory (“ensuing years”) of global leadership. Current data show an ongoing, evolving competition rather than a settled outcome, and many forecasts still treat 2025–2030 as the decisive window rather than a period whose results are already known. (allaboutai.com)

Because (a) the antecedent conditions (U.S. uniquely hobbling itself while China does not) have not clearly materialized, and (b) the long‑term outcome (China definitively winning the AI race) cannot reasonably be judged this early and is not reflected in present indicators, the prediction cannot yet be evaluated as right or wrong.

So the appropriate classification is “inconclusive (too early to tell).”

aitech
In the calendar year 2025, there will be a significant wave of commercially available AI 'agent' or 'agentive' products that can perform more autonomous tasks for users than current chat-style systems, representing a notable new product category.
it's true that AI is about to get more powerful. You're going to see a whole new wave of what are called agents this year Agentive products.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple major tech companies launched and marketed AI agents as a distinct, commercially available product category throughout 2025, matching Sacks’s prediction of “a whole new wave” of agentive products.

Evidence of a broad 2025 agent wave:

  • Microsoft security agents (early 2025): At Microsoft Secure and RSA Conference 2025, Microsoft rolled out Security Copilot agents—described as autonomous AI designed to tackle high‑volume security tasks—and began phased public preview to paying enterprise customers.(techcommunity.microsoft.com)
  • Microsoft 365 Copilot agents & Agent 365 (late 2025): At Ignite 2025, Microsoft announced Word/Excel/PowerPoint “agents in chat,” an “Agent Mode” in Office apps, and Agent 365 as a control plane for managing large numbers of agents across an organization. These capabilities are positioned as a new agent ecosystem layered on top of the already widely deployed Microsoft 365 Copilot, which Microsoft says is used by over 90% of the Fortune 500.(news.microsoft.com)
  • Salesforce Agentforce 360 (Oct 2025): Salesforce launched Agentforce 360, an AI agent platform that automates routine workflows across its cloud products. Reuters reports that Agentforce 360 already had about 12,000 customers at global launch, indicating substantial commercial uptake rather than a niche experiment.(reuters.com)
  • Consumer/SMB autonomous agents (Manus): Butterfly Effect’s Manus AI agent, launched March 6, 2025, is marketed as an autonomous agent capable of independent reasoning and multi‑step task execution, available as a web, iOS, and Android product—one of the first general-purpose consumer agent apps.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Cross‑industry framing of a new “agentic” era: Industry coverage in 2025 explicitly talks about the “age of agentic AI,” describing agents as a shift from simple copilots or chatbots to systems that plan, reason, and execute multi‑step workflows across tools and data sources.(itpro.com) In parallel, analysts like IDC (via Microsoft) forecast over a billion AI agents by 2028, reinforcing that vendors and enterprises regard “agents” as a distinct, emerging product category rather than a mere UI tweak.(microsoft.com)
  • Commerce and vertical agents: Financial analysis from Morgan Stanley in 2025 discusses “agentic commerce” and AI shopping agents used by major retailers (e.g., Amazon’s Rufus and other shopping assistants), treating agents as a new way consumers will interact with e‑commerce by autonomously handling search, comparison, and purchase flows.(businessinsider.com)

Across enterprise security, productivity suites, CRM, and consumer/mobile, 2025 saw a clear wave of explicitly branded AI “agents” and “agentic” products moving beyond simple chat to delegated, multi‑step task execution. These products were commercially available (often to large paying customer bases) within the 2025 calendar year, and industry commentary treats them as a notable new category. That aligns closely with Sacks’s forecast of “a whole new wave” of agentive products arriving in 2025, so the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
Within a few weeks of January 25, 2025, David Sacks will complete the government ethics/onboarding process for his White House role and will transition from primarily listening to actively shaping policy related to his assigned responsibilities (e.g., crypto and AI).
So we've signed these EOS. It's given me certain responsibilities and authorized me to do certain things. And that process is going to begin as soon as I complete this. I guess you could call it onboarding. So just to be clear about that, there's things I can do. There's things I can't do. I can kind of be in listening mode. I can't be necessarily shaping policy yet, so that's all going to be worked through over the next couple of weeks.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that within a few weeks of the January 25, 2025 podcast, David Sacks moved from a tentative, onboarding phase into an active policy‑shaping role on crypto and AI.

  • Official role and authority: Public records list Sacks as White House AI and Crypto Czar with a term start of January 20, 2025, and as chair/co‑chair of relevant presidential advisory bodies, giving him formal responsibility to shape policy in these domains.(en.wikipedia.org) Executive Order 14178 (“Strengthening American Leadership in Digital Financial Technology”), signed January 23, 2025, creates a President’s Working Group on Digital Asset Markets and tasks it with proposing a federal regulatory framework for digital assets within 180 days; multiple summaries state that this working group is led/chaired by Sacks in his special advisor role.(en.wikipedia.org) That structure is exactly the kind of policy‑shaping authority he was describing.

  • Active policy shaping within ~10 days: By February 4, 2025—about ten days after the podcast—CNBC reports Sacks, described as the newly appointed White House AI and crypto czar, meeting with lawmakers and publicly setting concrete priorities: making stablecoin legislation a top focus, and leading a task force studying a U.S. Bitcoin or digital‑asset reserve at the president’s direction. He explicitly frames objectives and timelines (e.g., getting legislation through Congress in roughly six months), which goes well beyond a mere “listening mode” and into active agenda‑setting.(cnbc.com) That timing fits the prediction’s “over the next couple of weeks” window.

  • Major policy initiatives soon after: On March 6, 2025, Trump signs an executive order establishing a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve and U.S. Digital Asset Stockpile; coverage notes that this move followed recommendations and public advocacy by Sacks in his capacity as White House crypto and AI advisor, and that his working group is central to executing the policy.(politico.com) This is clear evidence that by early March—still only about six weeks after the podcast—Sacks was deeply involved in designing and promoting specific federal crypto policy.

  • Ethics/onboarding process: Reports describe Sacks serving as a special government employee (SGE) under ethics waivers, with Democratic lawmakers later scrutinizing whether he has complied with SGE rules and time limits—an indication that the White House ethics apparatus formally processed his status.(mexc.com) Additional reporting details a White House memo (dated early March and publicly noted mid‑March) documenting that Sacks and Craft Ventures divested hundreds of millions of dollars in crypto‑related holdings and obtained conflict‑of‑interest waivers to serve as the president’s special advisor for AI and crypto, explicitly tying these divestments to compliance with government ethics regulations.(ainvest.com) While some ethics questions persisted later, this evidence shows that an ethics/onboarding process did occur and was sufficiently advanced by late winter 2025 for him to operate in a fully engaged advisory role.

Putting these pieces together: by early February 2025—well within “a few weeks” of the January 25 podcast—Sacks had moved into visible, substantive policy‑shaping activities on crypto and AI, under a formally recognized White House role and associated ethics framework. The existence of later ethics controversies does not contradict the core claim that, after an initial onboarding period, he transitioned from listening to actively shaping policy in the timeframe he described. Therefore, the prediction is right.

At some unspecified future date after this January 25, 2025 episode, David Sacks will return as an on-air participant on the All-In Podcast.
Look, I'll be back. Don't worry. At some point.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple All-In Podcast episode descriptions after January 25, 2025 explicitly note David Sacks participating on-air. For example, the official All-In episode list for mid/late 2025 includes descriptions such as Episode #245 (October 3, 2025), where it states that “Sacks joins the discussion,” and other episodes in August–September 2025 that describe David Sacks sharing insights or being part of the conversation, indicating he is an active on-air participant again after the January 25 episode.

The aggregated All-In site and the PodcastAI episode index both list David Sacks as one of the four primary hosts, with updated speaking-duration statistics through at least Episode 252 on November 22, 2025, confirming continued on-air appearances well after January 25, 2025.

Additionally, 2025 press coverage (e.g., Business Insider and New York Post) describes David Sacks making comments on the All-In podcast in his role as Trump administration AI/crypto adviser, further corroborating that he returned as an on-air participant during 2025.

Taken together, these sources show that after the January 25, 2025 episode in which he said “I’ll be back,” David Sacks did in fact return as an on-air participant on the All-In Podcast.

Sources: All-In official episode list and descriptions, including episodes in August–October 2025; PodcastAI episode index with host participation metrics through Episode 252 (Nov 22, 2025); 2025 news articles referencing Sacks’ appearances on the All-In Podcast as a Trump administration official.

Citations: [All-In episode index & descriptions] (allin.onpodcastai.com) [Press references to Sacks on the All-In Podcast] (businessinsider.com)

government
The Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) initiative will be formally sunset or disbanded on July 4, 2026, the 250th anniversary of the United States.
Ellen and Vivek have announced that Doge will be sunsetting or disbanding at the 250th anniversary of America, which would be July 4th of 2026. So they've only given themselves about what's that, 18 months?View on YouTube
Explanation

Public documents and reporting show that DOGE was intended to sunset on July 4, 2026 (the U.S. Semiquincentennial), but in reality it was dissolved earlier.

  • The executive order establishing DOGE’s temporary organization explicitly scheduled its termination for July 4, 2026, tying it to an 18‑month agenda ending on that date. (whitehouse.gov)
  • Contemporary coverage of DOGE’s launch likewise reported that Elon Musk and Vivek Ramaswamy had set an explicit expiry date of July 4, 2026 for the initiative. (businesstoday.in)

However, subsequent reporting and official statements indicate DOGE was effectively disbanded in November 2025, well before that date:

  • Reuters reported that DOGE had been quietly disbanded with eight months left on its charter, and that the Office of Personnel Management (OPM) director confirmed DOGE was no longer a centralized entity and its functions were being absorbed by OPM and others. (reuters.com)
  • Other major outlets similarly described DOGE as dissolved months before its scheduled conclusion on July 4, 2026. (nypost.com)
  • A current encyclopedic summary lists DOGE as dissolved in 2025, consistent with these reports of an early shutdown. (en.wikipedia.org)

Since the prediction was that DOGE “will be sunsetting or disbanding at the 250th anniversary of America, which would be July 4th of 2026,” but the initiative was in fact disbanded in 2025, the specific forecast about its sunset date is incorrect.

Sacks @ 00:21:31Inconclusive
politicsgovernmentmarkets
Within the upcoming Republican‑controlled Congress (i.e., during Trump’s new term beginning January 2025), Congress will enact FIT21 or substantially similar crypto legislation that clearly delineates when digital assets are commodities vs. securities, effectively ending the current SEC enforcement‑first approach under Gary Gensler toward crypto companies.
I think with the Republicans now winning the Senate, the prospects for that bill to get enacted are now greatly improved... So look, the bottom line here is that I think that we are close to having clear rules of the road codified by Congress, which is what the crypto industry has been asking for, and the days of Gensler terrorizing crypto companies by issuing Wells notices without clarifying what the rules are that he's prosecuting. Those days are about to be over.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, the core condition of the prediction has not yet been met, but it still could be within the current Congress/Trump term.

Key points:

  • FIT21 itself was never enacted. It passed the House in May 2024 but died in the 118th Congress without becoming law. (jonesday.com)
  • In the 119th Congress, House Republicans advanced a successor bill, the Digital Asset Market Clarity Act of 2025 (H.R. 3633, the “CLARITY Act”), which explicitly builds on and refines FIT21 to establish a crypto market‑structure regime and divide jurisdiction between the CFTC and SEC over digital commodities vs. securities. (congress.gov) It passed the House on July 17, 2025, but as of late November 2025 it has only been received and referred in the Senate and has not been voted on there or sent to the president, so it is not law yet. (congress.gov)
  • The GENIUS Act, a major crypto bill focused on stablecoin regulation, was enacted and signed by President Trump on July 18, 2025, but it addresses payment stablecoins, not the broader commodity–security classification problem for all digital assets that FIT21/CLARITY target. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Separately, Gary Gensler is no longer SEC chair; he was replaced by Paul Atkins in April 2025, and the SEC is developing its own “token taxonomy” guidance. (en.wikipedia.org) This shift supports the spirit of Sacks’s claim that the Gensler era is ending, but it does not satisfy the specific prediction that Congress will enact a FIT21‑like market‑structure law.

Because the 119th Congress and Trump’s term continue into 2026, there is still time for CLARITY or similar legislation to be enacted. At present, therefore, the prediction is not yet fulfilled nor definitively falsified, so the status is best characterized as inconclusive (too early).

politicsgovernmenttech
During the next Trump administration (2025–2028), the U.S. government will, with high likelihood, initiate at least one significant antitrust action or formal investigation specifically aimed at structurally breaking up Google (e.g., separating search, advertising, and YouTube).
So my view is that Google should be broken up... What are the odds that that happens? It's hard to say, but what are the odds that that is pursued in the next administration in some capacity or at least investigated? I'd say hi.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2025 shows that, under Trump’s second administration, the U.S. government did actively pursue structural antitrust remedies against Google, matching Sacks’s prediction that breakup efforts would be “pursued in the next administration in some capacity or at least investigated.”

  1. Search monopoly case (filed 2020, remedies pursued under Trump 2.0)

    • The DOJ’s 2020 search case against Google (United States v. Google LLC, D.D.C.) resulted in an August 5, 2024 ruling that Google is an illegal monopolist in search.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • In Trump’s second term, the Trump Justice Department explicitly reaffirmed Biden‑era proposals to break up Google, including forcing divestiture of the Chrome browser and banning default‑search payment deals that entrench Google’s dominance. This was reported in early March 2025 as “the first significant antitrust move under Trump’s new administration,” and was framed as a continued aggressive push to dismantle parts of Google.(washingtonpost.com)
    • Although the final September 2, 2025 remedies order in the search case stopped short of ordering an immediate breakup and instead imposed strong conduct and data‑sharing remedies, those court‑ordered remedies followed a 15‑day remedies trial in May 2025 where DOJ had argued for significant structural measures.(justice.gov)
  2. Ad‑tech monopoly case (filed 2023, structural breakup remedies pushed in 2025)

    • In a separate DOJ case over Google’s advertising technology (filed 2023), a federal court on April 17, 2025 found Google had illegally monopolized key ad‑tech markets.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Following that liability ruling, the DOJ in May 2025 formally proposed structural divestitures—forcing Google to sell its AdX ad exchange and DFP publisher ad‑server business—arguing that “nothing short of a structural divestment” would restore competition.(cnbc.com)
    • These proposed remedies were filed and pursued during Trump’s 2025–2028 term and are classic examples of antitrust actions specifically aimed at breaking up parts of Google.

Taken together, Trump’s DOJ not only continued but affirmatively pursued structural breakup remedies against Google in multiple ongoing antitrust cases during 2025. Even though those suits pre‑dated the administration and the ultimate remedies are still being litigated or appealed, the core condition of Sacks’s prediction—serious, government‑driven antitrust efforts in the next Trump administration to structurally break up Google—has already been met. Accordingly, the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
Within about a week of November 8, 2024, final counts in the two remaining undecided Senate races will bring the Republican caucus to a total of 54 U.S. Senate seats.
Trump's already at 53 senators, and there's two more that are still up for grabs and waiting to be counted. So you might get to 54 in the next week or so.View on YouTube
Explanation

Authoritative post‑election tallies for the 2024 U.S. Senate elections show Republicans ending with 53 Senate seats, not 54. The official 2024 Senate elections summary lists the post‑election composition as 53 Republicans, 45 Democrats, and 2 Independents, with the Independents caucusing with Democrats, yielding a 53–47 functional split in favor of Republicans.(en.wikipedia.org)(congress.gov)(everycrsreport.com) Independent roundups (e.g., CBS News and other national outlets) likewise describe GOP control as a 53‑seat majority, not 54.(cbsnews.com)(grokipedia.com)

Moreover, Congressional Research Service profiles of the 119th Congress confirm that the Senate has 53 Republicans, 45 Democrats, and 2 Independents who both caucus with the Democrats; there is no indication of any party switch or GOP‑caucusing independent that would have taken the Republican caucus to 54 at any point during that period.(congress.gov)(senate.gov)

Since the predictor said the final counts in the remaining undecided races would bring the Republican caucus to 54 seats within about a week of November 8, 2024, and the caucus in practice stabilized at 53, the prediction did not come true.

politicsgovernment
With a 53–54 seat Republican majority in the U.S. Senate, Robert F. Kennedy Jr. will be able to secure confirmation to a major cabinet-level position in the incoming Trump administration.
I think that'd be really good for for Bobby Kennedy. I think it might be harder to get Bobby Kennedy confirmed for a major cabinet post with 51, with 5354. I think we get there.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that with a 53–54 seat Republican majority in the U.S. Senate, Robert F. Kennedy Jr. would be able to secure confirmation to a major cabinet-level position in the incoming Trump administration.

Relevant facts:

  1. Republicans ended up with a 53-seat majority in the Senate for the 119th Congress. After the 2024 U.S. Senate elections, Republicans held 53 seats (Democrats 45, Independents 2), giving them a 53–47 majority. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. Robert F. Kennedy Jr. holds a major cabinet-level post in the Trump administration. He has served as the United States Secretary of Health and Human Services under President Donald Trump since February 13, 2025. This is a cabinet-level position. (en.wikipedia.org)
  3. He was confirmed by the U.S. Senate in that role. Multiple reports and his biography describe that the Senate confirmed him as HHS Secretary on February 13, 2025, following a full Senate vote. (en.wikipedia.org)

Putting this together:

  • The condition described (a 53–54 seat Republican majority) did occur (Republicans have 53 seats).
  • Under that majority, RFK Jr. was confirmed to a major cabinet-level position (Secretary of Health and Human Services) in the Trump administration.

Therefore, the prediction that such a majority would allow RFK Jr. to secure confirmation to a major cabinet post in the Trump administration came true.

politicsconflict
Donald Trump will not be able to end the war in Ukraine on his first day in office in January 2025, because Ukraine will not yet be willing to make the concessions required for a peace deal.
Trump clearly does want to end the war in Ukraine. Is he going to be able to do it on day one? No, I mean, I don't think that's realistic because frankly, the Ukrainians are not willing to make the concessions yet.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump’s second term began with his inauguration on January 20, 2025, and there was no peace treaty or formal end to the Russia‑Ukraine war on that day or in the weeks immediately following; instead, the war continued and only later did talks about a temporary ceasefire emerge. (en.wikipedia.org) Reporting on Trump’s early Ukraine diplomacy notes that his promised 24‑hour resolution did not occur and that an initial U.S. proposal tied to aid and economic arrangements went unsigned by Kyiv because Zelenskyy judged it unacceptable and said he could not “sell Ukraine away,” indicating a refusal to accept the demanded terms. (en.wikipedia.org) Throughout early and mid‑2025, Zelenskyy repeatedly and publicly ruled out territorial concessions as the price of peace or a ceasefire, stating that Ukraine would not recognize occupied land as Russian and would not give up territory under any circumstances. (eadaily.com) As of late 2025, Ukrainian officials still insist they will not cede territory even though draft peace plans from the U.S. and Russia explicitly require Ukraine to surrender land, underscoring that Kyiv has not been willing to make the key concessions Trump and Moscow have sought. (theguardian.com) While Russia’s own maximalist demands are also a major obstacle, the specific claim that Trump could not end the war on “day one” because Ukraine was not yet prepared to make the concessions his kind of deal would require is well supported by the subsequent record, so the prediction is best judged as right.

Sacks @ 00:53:33Inconclusive
politicsgovernmenteconomy
During Trump’s upcoming term, Congress will not enact federal spending cuts totaling as much as $2 trillion, despite that being Elon Musk’s public target.
Are we going to get 2 trillion in cuts like Elon wants? I would love that. I doubt you're going to be able to pass that through Congress.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Donald Trump has not begun a new presidential term, because he did not win the 2024 U.S. presidential election; therefore, the condition "During Trump’s upcoming term" has not been triggered.

Since the prediction is explicitly about what Congress will or will not do during a future Trump term, and that term has not occurred, we cannot yet evaluate whether Congress enacts $2 trillion in federal spending cuts in such a term.

Accordingly, the correct classification is inconclusive (too early): the scenario the prediction is about has not taken place, so the prediction cannot be judged right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
Under the new Trump administration, there will be a large-scale declassification program that substantially reduces the volume of classified federal documents and makes many of them available for public or FOIA access.
We need a massive declassification effort of the federal government.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence shows no government‑wide "massive declassification effort" under Trump’s second administration that substantially reduces the overall volume of classified federal documents.

What has happened:

  • Targeted assassination‑records declassification. Executive Order 14176 (Jan. 23, 2025) orders declassification of records related to the assassinations of JFK, RFK, and MLK, with implementation plans led by the DNI. This is significant but narrowly focused on three historical cases, not a system‑wide program. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Specific large document releases. Following EO 14176, the administration released over 10,000 pages of RFK‑assassination documents, again important but confined to one topic. (nypost.com)
  • Issue‑specific transparency laws. The Epstein Files Transparency Act (Nov. 19, 2025) requires the DOJ to release all unclassified records related to Jeffrey Epstein; it does not itself overhaul or substantially shrink the classified universe, and applies only to one case. (en.wikipedia.org)

What has not happened:

  • No new overarching classification/declassification order. The general national‑security classification framework continues to be governed by earlier Executive Order 13526 and its declassification rules (e.g., 25‑year automatic declassification), with no Trump‑era replacement or major amendment establishing a broad mass‑declassification program. (archives.gov)
  • No evidence of a cross‑agency "large‑scale" declassification initiative. Reviews of the catalog of Trump’s second‑term executive orders show actions on DEI programs, censorship, WHO withdrawal, climate agreements, digital assets, DOGE, etc., but nothing creating a government‑wide drive to systematically declassify large swaths of classified holdings across agencies. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the prediction specifically called for a **"massive" or "large‑scale" declassification program that substantially reduces the volume of classified documents across the federal government, and what we see instead are narrow, topic‑specific releases and one‑off transparency measures, the prediction is best evaluated as wrong rather than partially fulfilled.

politicsgovernment
A central outcome-determining issue of Trump’s second term (2025–2029) will be whether the administration succeeds in materially reducing the autonomy of the federal bureaucracy and increasing direct control of agencies by the elected executive branch.
The big question of Trump's second term will be whether he can finally subdue this bureaucracy and bring it under democratic control, under the control of the executive branch, as the American people want.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that a core, outcome-defining question of Trump’s second term would be whether he could curb the autonomy of the federal bureaucracy and bring agencies under tighter presidential control. That is exactly how the second Trump administration has been widely characterized so far.

Trump has made implementation of the Project 2025 vision to “dismantle the administrative state” and centralize control of agencies in the White House a central tenet of his second term, according to detailed reporting and analysis.(en.wikipedia.org) On taking office in January 2025, he immediately reinstated and expanded Schedule F–style classifications (now “Schedule Policy/Career”), making tens of thousands of policy‑influencing civil servants easier to remove and more directly answerable to presidential directives.(theguardian.com) He also created the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE) under Elon Musk to drive layoffs and restructuring across agencies, leading to roughly 200,000–300,000 federal employees being fired or pushed out in 2025 alone, an effort commentators describe as an unprecedented attempt to reshape the civil service and concentrate executive power.(en.wikipedia.org)

Additional executive orders have aimed to bring independent regulators under White House control and to “commence the deconstruction of the overbearing and burdensome administrative state,” explicitly framing bureaucratic restructuring as a top presidential priority.(politico.com) Major outlets and scholars now treat the struggle over the administrative state—reclassifications, mass layoffs, union rollbacks, and litigation over agency independence—as one of the defining battles of Trump’s second term, not a side issue.(millercenter.org)

Because this fight over reducing bureaucratic autonomy and increasing direct presidential control has, by late 2025, become a central organizing theme of Trump’s governance and a major determinant of his administration’s trajectory, Sacks’s prediction about what would be a key, outcome‑shaping issue of the term is borne out by events to date.

Sacks @ 01:38:31Inconclusive
politics
Starting with the 2024 election and over subsequent election cycles, abortion will become progressively less salient as a national wedge issue in U.S. politics.
Look, I think that what you're seeing in the last election that we just had is the beginning of the end of the salience of this issue.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly about a long-term trend: starting with the 2024 election and playing out "over subsequent election cycles," abortion supposedly becomes progressively less salient as a national wedge issue. As of 30 Nov 2025, there has not yet been another federal election cycle (e.g., the 2026 midterms or the 2028 presidential) to test whether the issue’s salience is actually declining over time. We only have partial indicators (polling, legislative fights, and 2025 state-level developments), which still show abortion as a prominent and mobilizing issue in U.S. politics, but that does not yet falsify or confirm a multi‑cycle decline in salience. Because the claim is about a trend across multiple future cycles, and we are still within the first cycle after the prediction, it is too early to determine whether it will prove correct or not. Therefore the status has to be marked as inconclusive (too early).

politicsgovernment
In future federal election cycles after 2024, Republican leaders will largely avoid pursuing national abortion bans or major federal abortion restrictions, allowing the issue to remain primarily at the state level.
I think this issue is over, and I think it's over because Republicans know not to touch this.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the 2024 election shows that while top Republicans have de‑emphasized a formal national abortion ban, they have actively pursued significant federal abortion restrictions, contradicting the prediction that they would “know not to touch this” and leave the issue primarily to the states.

On the “national ban” side, the 2024 Republican National Committee platform—crafted with Trump’s backing—dropped its longstanding call for a federal abortion ban and instead framed abortion as an issue for the states, a notable shift after four decades of federal-ban language.​ (axios.com) Trump and his running mate JD Vance repeatedly said during and after the 2024 campaign that abortion policy should be left to the states, distancing the ticket from a one‑size‑fits‑all national ban.​ (politifact.com) There has also been no new, leadership-driven 15‑week national ban enacted in the 119th Congress, even though some Republicans and the Republican Study Committee continue to signal interest in that kind of bill.​ (ncregister.com) This partially aligns with the prediction’s claim about avoiding a national ban.

However, GOP leaders have very much “touched” abortion at the federal level through major nationwide restrictions, especially via funding and insurance rules:

  • In January 2025, President Trump signed Executive Order 14182, “Enforcing the Hyde Amendment,” which ended federal funding for elective abortions, revoked Biden-era orders expanding access to abortion-related care, and directed federal agencies to implement stricter anti-abortion funding policies nationwide.​ (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The large GOP “One Big Beautiful Bill Act” budget/tax package that passed the House in May 2025 includes a provision to stop federal payments to Affordable Care Act plans that cover abortions except in limited cases (rape, incest, life of the mother), a sweeping national restriction on abortion coverage tied to federal subsidies.​ (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Ongoing negotiations over extending ACA premium subsidies in late 2025 have been nearly derailed because congressional Republicans are demanding tighter abortion restrictions on all subsidized insurance plans, going beyond current Hyde rules; Democrats and reporters describe these abortion demands as the main sticking point in the deal.​ (washingtonpost.com)
  • House Republicans also reintroduced measures like the Born-Alive Abortion Survivors Protection Act, a federal criminal law governing care in the context of abortions, backed by well over 100 GOP cosponsors and party leadership.​ (en.wikipedia.org)

Because national Republican leaders have, post‑2024, made federal abortion policy a live issue—pursuing broad, nationwide restrictions via executive action and major legislation, and using abortion rules as leverage in core budget and health-care negotiations—the claim that the issue is “over” and that Republicans would largely avoid federal abortion restrictions has not held up. The absence of a new enacted national gestational ban does not offset the substantial federal restrictions they have actively sought and, in some cases, implemented, so the prediction is best judged wrong overall.

Sacks @ 01:39:24Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If, in a future Florida referendum, pro-choice advocates propose a 15‑week abortion limit instead of 24 weeks, such a measure would be likely to reach the 60% threshold needed to pass.
I think that in Florida, going for 24 weeks might have been a little bit too many if they had tried to go back to 15. You know, they probably could have gotten there. They probably could have gone from 57 to to 60.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Florida has held only one recent statewide abortion-rights referendum: the November 5, 2024 Amendment 4 measure, which would have allowed abortion until fetal viability (around 23–24 weeks) and received about 57% support—below the 60% supermajority required for passage. (en.wikipedia.org) This measure concerned viability/24 weeks, not a 15‑week limit.

Available reporting on Florida’s abortion law and ballot measures shows no subsequent statewide initiative that offers a 15‑week abortion limit as a compromise proposal; instead, the legislature has moved to further restrict the citizen‑initiative process after the near‑pass of Amendment 4, making future amendments harder to qualify for the ballot. (en.wikipedia.org) Because the specific contingency Sacks described—“if they went back with a 15‑week proposal in a future referendum”—has not actually occurred, there is no real‑world result against which to test his claim that such a measure would likely clear 60%. The prediction therefore cannot yet be evaluated for correctness.

Sacks @ 00:24:26Inconclusive
economymarkets
US long-term interest rates (e.g., the 10‑year Treasury yield), having roughly doubled from their prior lows, will remain at approximately their current elevated level (around 4%+) for the foreseeable medium term and will not revert back to the ~2% range they were in during the 2010s within the next several years (through at least 2027).
if if rates have roughly doubled, let's say, in the last few years, and they're going to stay at that level, they're not going back down.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, the prediction’s timeframe (“within the next several years … through at least 2027”) has not yet elapsed, so it cannot be definitively judged.

To see if it has already been falsified, we can check whether U.S. long‑term interest rates (e.g., the 10‑year Treasury yield) have dropped back into the ~2% range since the podcast date (1 November 2024). Historical data from late 2024 through 2025 show the 10‑year Treasury yield generally fluctuating in roughly the 3.7–5% range and not returning to anything close to ~2%. Therefore nothing so far contradicts Sacks’s claim that rates would stay elevated rather than revert to 2010s‑style ~2% yields.

However, because the prediction explicitly extends “through at least 2027” and we are only at 2025, it is still too early to say definitively whether it will end up correct or incorrect. The proper status at this time is therefore inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 00:27:44Inconclusive
economygovernment
In the near future (roughly over the next 5–10 years), the US federal budget will become so constrained by debt and interest costs that spending will be increasingly concentrated on entitlements and defense, with a large share of other discretionary federal programs being cut or significantly reduced.
I think that whole shell game might just be over now because there's no more money left. I mean, it's all been spent. In fact, you know what I mean? So, like all the federal government probably will end up doing in the near future is entitlements and defense. That's it. Because those are the core core functions of the federal government. I think everything else that's that sort of quote unquote discretionary is probably going to get cut because there's no more money left.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns the “near future” over roughly the next 5–10 years after November 2024. That window runs approximately from 2029 to 2034. As of today (30 November 2025), we are only about one year into that period, so the full outcome cannot yet be assessed.

What we can say so far:

  • Current and projected U.S. federal budgets do show growing shares for entitlements and interest costs, with discretionary spending (both defense and non‑defense) shrinking as a share of GDP over the long term. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) projects that, under current law, spending growth is driven mainly by Social Security, major health programs (Medicare, Medicaid, ACA subsidies), and interest, while discretionary spending falls as a share of GDP over the next 30 years.
  • However, as of the most recent enacted and proposed budgets (FY 2024 and FY 2025), the federal government still funds a wide range of non‑defense discretionary programs (education, scientific research, infrastructure grants, etc.). Non‑defense discretionary has not been “mostly eliminated” yet; it remains a significant category, even if constrained and projected to decline as a share of the budget.

Because the claim is specifically about where things will end up over the next 5–10 years (i.e., by the early–mid 2030s) rather than where they stand right now, and we have not yet reached that horizon, the correct classification is “inconclusive (too early)” rather than right or wrong at this time.

politics
In the 2024 U.S. presidential election, Donald Trump will win the state of Pennsylvania, based on current early-vote and likely-Election-Day-voter data discussed shortly before Election Day 2024.
So then you got to look at polling of people who say they're going to vote but haven't voted yet in Pennsylvania, who say they're going to vote on Election Day. And I think those numbers are running about 18 points ahead for Trump, which is about double what he needs to win. So he just to be clear, the early voting favors Harris, but not by the same percentages that it did four years ago. So right now it looks like Trump is tracking to win that state.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did in fact win Pennsylvania in the 2024 U.S. presidential election. Official results from the Pennsylvania Department of State show Trump receiving 3,543,308 votes (about 50.37%) to Kamala Harris’s 3,423,042 votes (about 48.66%), and the governor certified Trump’s slate of electors for the state. (pa.gov) Independent tallies and summaries of the 2024 Pennsylvania presidential vote report the same figures and confirm that Trump carried the state and its 19 electoral votes. (en.wikipedia.org) Because the prediction was that Trump would win Pennsylvania in 2024, and he ultimately did, the prediction was correct.

politics
David Sacks predicts that Donald Trump will win the 2024 U.S. presidential election.
All the data is basically pointing one direction, which is a Trump victory.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump won the 2024 U.S. presidential election, receiving 312 electoral votes to Kamala Harris’s 226 and winning the national popular vote with 49.8% to Harris’s 48.3%. This outcome is documented in official result summaries and post‑election analyses of the 2024 United States presidential election, which identify Trump as the elected (and now serving) president following the November 5, 2024 vote. (en.wikipedia.org)

Given David Sacks’s prediction that “all the data is basically pointing one direction, which is a Trump victory,” and the verified election outcome showing that Trump indeed won, this prediction is right.

politics
If pre‑election polling showing Trump leading the national popular vote proves accurate, the 2024 U.S. presidential election outcome will be an Electoral College landslide in Trump’s favor (i.e., he will win by a large electoral margin rather than narrowly).
So if Trump is winning the popular vote, then it's a landslide.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump did in fact win the national popular vote in 2024, taking about 49.8% to Kamala Harris’s 48.3%, and won the Electoral College 312–226.(en.wikipedia.org) However, multiple nonpartisan analyses explicitly conclude that this was not a landslide: the Council on Foreign Relations and others note that 312 electoral votes and a 1.5‑point popular‑vote margin are modest by historical standards and smaller than classic "landslide" wins like 1964, 1972, or 1984.(cfr.org) The Cook Political Report points out that the race ultimately hinged on roughly 230,000 votes across Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin, underscoring how close the outcome was.(cookpolitical.com) In addition, pre‑election national polling averages generally showed Harris with a small lead rather than Trump clearly leading the popular vote, contradicting the scenario the prediction envisioned.(aljazeera.com) Since Trump did win the popular vote but the result is widely characterized as a narrow or modest victory rather than an Electoral College landslide, the conditional claim "if Trump is winning the popular vote, then it’s a landslide" did not hold in practice.

politicsgovernment
David Sacks predicts that in the November 2024 U.S. presidential election, Donald Trump will win by a clear margin ("solid victory" / "pretty handily"), rather than in a very close contest.
I'm actually pretty optimistic because I actually don't think it's going to be that close. I mean, right now it's looking like maybe landslide is too strong a word, but a solid victory for Trump. That's what the polls are showing. That's what the prediction markets are showing. That's what the early voting is showing. And if you look at all the other data points right now, it's showing Trump winning pretty handily.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did win the November 5, 2024 U.S. presidential election, receiving 312 electoral votes to Kamala Harris’s 226 and winning the national popular vote 49.8% to 48.3% (a margin of about 1.5–1.6 percentage points).(en.wikipedia.org)

However, David Sacks’s prediction was not just that Trump would win, but that he would win “not that close”—a “solid victory” and “pretty handily”—as opposed to a very tight race.

Post‑election analyses characterize 2024 as a close election:

  • FiveThirtyEight/ABC’s retrospective explicitly concludes that “the 2024 presidential election was close, not a landslide,” noting Trump’s national popular-vote edge of only about 1.6 points and that Harris would have won the Electoral College had she done just a couple of points better in a few key states.(goodmorningamerica.com)
  • Pennsylvania, the tipping‑point state, was decided by roughly 1.7 percentage points (50.4%–48.7%), meaning a swing under 2 points nationwide could have flipped the outcome.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Commentators have stressed that Trump’s margin is historically small, with opinion pieces pushing back on claims of a “landslide” or overwhelming mandate and emphasizing the narrow popular‑vote margin and relatively modest Electoral College spread.(theguardian.com)

Given that:

  1. The national popular‑vote margin was about 1.5–1.6 points; and
  2. The tipping‑point state margin was about 1.7 points, leaving the election easily flippable with a small swing; and
  3. Major analysts explicitly describe the outcome as a close election rather than a landslide or decisive blowout,

Sacks’s qualitative claim that Trump would win “not that close” and “pretty handily” is not borne out by how the results and subsequent expert analyses characterize the 2024 race. The direction (Trump wins) was correct, but the core prediction being evaluated—victory by a clear, not‑close margin—was wrong, so overall this prediction is best scored as wrong.

politics
Kamala Harris’s October 2024 Bret Baier Fox interview will not improve her standing; it will not help her close the gap with Trump in the weeks leading up to the November 5, 2024 election.
Trump over the past few weeks seems to have had a surge, owing to the fact that Kamala's interviews generally don't go well... I don't think the interview is going to help her.View on YouTube
Explanation

Kamala Harris’s interview with Bret Baier on Fox News aired on October 16, 2024, where she tried to distance herself from President Biden and sparred with Baier over immigration and other issues, but coverage treated it as a tough, contentious exchange rather than a breakthrough performance.(cnbc.com)

On October 15, the day before the interview, 538’s national polling average had Harris leading Trump by about 2.4 points (48.5%–46.1%), with RealClearPolitics showing a 1.7‑point Harris lead; in 538’s swing‑state averages she held razor‑thin leads in Wisconsin, Pennsylvania, Michigan, and Nevada, while Trump led narrowly in North Carolina, Georgia, and Arizona.(newsweek.com) That’s the baseline immediately before the Baier interview.

By October 29—roughly two weeks after the interview—Newsweek reported that Trump’s national numbers had improved relative to the prior week: 538 now had Harris ahead by only about 1.4 points (48.1%–46.6%), down from a 1.7‑point lead just a week earlier, and RealClearPolitics had Trump ahead nationally by 0.5 points (48.1%–47.6%).(newsweek.com) In the swing states, 538 showed Harris and Trump essentially tied in Wisconsin, with Trump slightly ahead in Pennsylvania and Nevada and leading more clearly in North Carolina, Georgia, and Arizona; RealClearPolitics showed Trump ahead in all seven battleground states.(newsweek.com) Relative to the pre‑interview picture, this is, if anything, movement in Trump’s direction, not evidence that Harris closed the gap.

The final election results confirm that Harris did not close the gap in any meaningful sense: Trump won the Electoral College 312–226 and the national popular vote 49.8%–48.3%.(en.wikipedia.org) Polling aggregates on election eve still had Harris only modestly ahead nationally (by less than a point on average) and Trump favored or narrowly ahead in key swing states, a pattern consistent with the eventual outcome.(en.wikipedia.org)

Across the weeks after the Baier interview and leading up to November 5, there is no sign of a durable improvement in Harris’s standing versus Trump; her national edge shrank and her swing‑state position either stagnated or deteriorated slightly. That aligns with Sacks’s prediction that the Fox interview would not improve her standing or help her close the gap with Trump in the weeks before the election.

Sacks @ 00:51:47Inconclusive
climatescience
Despite current plans and announcements in 2024, the United States will not see large-scale deployment of small modular nuclear reactors (SMRs); local community opposition (NIMBY) will prevent widespread siting and build-out.
Well, I don't think we're going to, because I don't think anyone wants a nuclear power plant in their backyard... I just don't think your typical community wants a nuclear power plant in their backyard... So I don't think this is going to happen.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it’s too early to know whether the U.S. will ultimately see large‑scale deployment of SMRs or whether NIMBY opposition will be the decisive factor preventing it.

Key points:

  • No large-scale SMR deployment yet, but multiple first-wave projects are advancing. As of 2024–2025, operational SMRs exist only in Russia and China; none are in commercial operation in the United States.(en.wikipedia.org) The first U.S. deployments are still targeted for late this decade or the early 2030s—e.g., Holtec’s plan for SMR‑300 units at the Palisades site in Michigan by 2030 as part of a 10 GW North American SMR fleet in the 2030s; TerraPower’s Natrium demonstration plant at Kemmerer, Wyoming, which has broken ground on non‑nuclear facilities and received key state and NRC environmental approvals; and Dow/X‑energy’s Xe‑100 SMR project in Seadrift, Texas, now under NRC construction‑permit review.(reuters.com) These show a serious build‑out attempt is underway, but it is still pre‑deployment.

  • So far, the main obstacles have been economics and project risk, not local NIMBY backlash. The highest‑profile SMR project to be canceled in the U.S., NuScale’s Carbon Free Power Project in Idaho, failed primarily due to escalating costs and insufficient utility subscription, not community opposition.(markets.financialcontent.com) Early advanced‑nuclear sites like Kemmerer, WY (TerraPower), Dow’s industrial site in Seadrift, TX (X‑energy), and planned tech‑driven SMR projects (e.g., Amazon/Energy Northwest’s Xe‑100 project in Washington) have generally emphasized local economic benefits and report cooperative local or state engagement rather than sustained NIMBY‑driven blockage.(terrapower.com)

  • Public opinion is moving toward more support for nuclear, not away from it. Recent Gallup and related polling in 2024–2025 finds that a clear majority of Americans (around 55–61%) now favor the use of nuclear energy, the highest support in over a decade, even if people remain more cautious about plants in their direct vicinity.(news.gallup.com) This undercuts the blanket claim that “no one wants a nuclear plant in their backyard,” though localized resistance could still emerge as siting diversifies beyond existing industrial or coal‑plant locations.

  • The time horizon of the prediction is effectively multi‑decadal. SMR vendors, utilities, tech companies, and the U.S. Department of Energy are all planning deployments stretching through the 2030s (e.g., Holtec’s ~10 GW SMR fleet, DOE tenders supporting multiple SMR consortia, Google and others signing long‑term SMR MOUs), which, if realized, would constitute the very kind of large‑scale build‑out Sacks said “is not going to happen.”(reuters.com) But because these projects are still in permitting, early construction, or financing stages, their eventual success or failure can’t yet be judged.

Given that:

  • large‑scale U.S. SMR deployment has not yet occurred,
  • substantial evidence of future large‑scale deployment efforts now exists, and
  • NIMBY opposition has not yet clearly emerged as the dominant limiting factor (compared with cost, regulation, and technology risk),

there isn’t enough outcome data to say Sacks is clearly right or clearly wrong. The prediction remains inconclusive (too early) rather than demonstrably correct or refuted.

Sacks @ 00:52:06Inconclusive
sciencehealthclimate
At some point in the future, there will be a significant accident at a nuclear power plant (including potential SMRs) in or near a poorer/working-class community in the United States, resulting in harmful radioactive fallout affecting that community.
And inevitably there's going to be some accident. I mean, you can tell me how safe they are to your blue in the face. I don't believe it... something's going to happen. I mean, something's going to happen. And then the the fallout is, is literally going to fall out on, on the people in that poor community.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, there has been no widely reported, serious nuclear power plant accident in the United States since the Three Mile Island partial meltdown in 1979, which is still cited as the country’s worst commercial nuclear accident (INES Level 5).(en.wikipedia.org) More recent U.S. nuclear issues include a tritium-contaminated water leak at Minnesota’s Monticello plant in 2022, which regulators characterized as minor with no offsite health impact,(en.wikipedia.org) and a variety of low‑level operational events logged in the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s event notification reports (e.g., for 2025) that are classified as non‑emergencies and do not involve harmful radioactive fallout affecting surrounding communities.(nrc.gov) Broader coverage of nuclear energy in 2024–2025 focuses on license extensions (e.g., Turkey Point), reactor restarts (e.g., Palisades, Three Mile Island Unit 1), and SMR approvals rather than on any major accident releasing dangerous fallout on nearby (often working‑class) communities.(theguardian.com) Because Sacks’s prediction is explicitly open‑ended ("inevitably" / "at some point in the future"), and no qualifying U.S. accident has occurred since he made it on 18 October 2024, it has not been falsified or confirmed yet. Therefore the correct status is inconclusive (too early to tell) rather than right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:11:26Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
If Donald Trump loses the 2024 presidential election, the use of "lawfare"—legal and regulatory actions perceived as politically motivated—against figures like Elon Musk and other political opponents will significantly increase over the subsequent presidential term (2025–2029).
There's going to be lawfare all over the place.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns what will happen over the subsequent presidential term (2025–2029) if Donald Trump loses the 2024 election. As of November 30, 2025, we are less than one year into that four‑year window, so it is not yet possible to evaluate whether lawfare will have “significantly” increased over the entire term.

While one can already point to various high‑profile investigations and lawsuits involving political figures and major business leaders during 2025, the prediction is about the overall pattern through 2029. Because that period is still ongoing, any judgment now would be speculative rather than factual.

Therefore, the correct classification at this time is “inconclusive (too early)”: there has not yet been enough time in the 2025–2029 term to determine whether Sacks’s long‑horizon prediction is right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
If the current governing coalition associated with the Biden–Harris administration is not electorally defeated in 2024, legal and regulatory "lawfare" actions against Elon Musk and other political opponents will continue or intensify during the following presidential term (2025–2029), because the actors face no effective downside for doing so.
I mean, I'm definitely not at the top of the list. Ellen's at the top of the list. Right. So he has. No he has no choice but to go all in. They're already doing lawfare against him. It's ridiculous. I think the point is just that if they're not defeated, they're going to keep doing it because there's no downside for it.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: only if the Biden–Harris–aligned governing coalition was not electorally defeated in 2024 would legal and regulatory “lawfare” against Elon Musk and others continue or intensify in the 2025–2029 term.

In reality, that condition did not occur:

  • In the 2024 U.S. presidential election, Donald Trump (Republican) defeated Kamala Harris (Democrat), 312–226 in the Electoral College, and took the popular vote as well. Trump was subsequently certified by Congress and inaugurated as president on January 20, 2025, replacing the Biden administration. (en.wikipedia.org)

Given this, the antecedent of Sacks’s conditional prediction (“if they’re not defeated…”) is false in the actual world. That means we cannot empirically observe what the Biden–Harris coalition would have done had it remained in power for the 2025–2029 term. Any claim about whether they would have continued or intensified “lawfare” is now counterfactual and not verifiable from real-world developments.

Because the necessary condition for testing the prediction never obtained, its truth or falsity cannot be determined, even though enough time has passed. Hence the outcome is best categorized as ambiguous, not right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
In the 2024 U.S. presidential election, the outcome is expected to be very close in electoral-vote terms unless Donald Trump wins; Trump is the only candidate with a realistic chance of achieving a landslide electoral victory.
Right now, the only candidate who looks like he could get a landslide is Trump. Otherwise, it's going to be very close. So you're rooting for Trump if you want a landslide.View on YouTube
Explanation

The 2024 U.S. presidential election ended up close, not a landslide, which aligns with Sacks’s basic conditional framing (“either Trump in a landslide, or it’s very close”).

What actually happened:

  • Donald Trump defeated Kamala Harris with 312 electoral votes to 226.
  • He won 49.8% of the popular vote vs. 48.3% for Harris, a national popular-vote margin of about 1.5–1.6 percentage points.
  • Key tipping‑point states like Pennsylvania were decided by roughly 1.7 points, indicating a narrow underlying contest despite Trump sweeping the battlegrounds.

These figures come from official-style tallies and summaries of the 2024 results, which consistently report Trump’s 312–226 Electoral College win and sub‑2‑point popular‑vote margin. (en.wikipedia.org) Post‑election analyses explicitly characterize 2024 as “close, not a landslide” and warn that calling it a landslide is misleading, pointing to the tight popular vote and small margins in the decisive states. (goodmorningamerica.com) Even Trump‑focused retrospectives describe his victory as “decisive” but “not a landslide,” again emphasizing that the win was solid but not overwhelming in historical terms. (en.wikipedia.org)

Comparing to Sacks’s statement:

  • He did not flatly predict that Trump would win in a landslide; he said that, as of that moment, Trump was the only candidate who looked like he could get a landslide.
  • He then added: “Otherwise, it’s going to be very close.”
  • In reality, no landslide occurred, and the election outcome matches the “very close” branch of his conditional: a narrow national margin and close tipping‑point state, widely described by analysts as a close election rather than a landslide.

Because (1) the race was in fact close in the sense used by election analysts, and (2) no non‑Trump landslide materialized that would contradict his “only Trump could get a landslide” framing, Sacks’s prediction is best judged as right on the main point he was making about the 2024 election’s likely shape.

politicsmarkets
Conditional on Donald Trump (or a Republican) winning the 2024 U.S. presidential election and taking office in January 2025, federal antitrust enforcement will ease such that large-scale tech and corporate M&A transactions will be materially easier to get approved in 2025 than under the preceding Democratic administration.
If you have Trump in office next year, I think that there will be an opening up of of M&A... I think it will be easier to get M&A done next year if you have a Republican administration.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was conditional on a Republican—specifically Donald Trump—winning in 2024 and taking office in January 2025. That condition was met: Trump defeated Kamala Harris in the November 5, 2024 election and was inaugurated as the 47th president on January 20, 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)

The substantive claim was that, under that Republican administration in 2025, it would become easier to get M&A done than under the prior Democratic administration.

Evidence shows a meaningful easing of merger enforcement and greater receptivity to large deals in 2025 relative to the Biden years:

  • While the FTC and DOJ initially kept the Biden‑era 2023 Merger Guidelines in place in February 2025—contrary to expectations of an immediate rules rollback(mayerbrown.com)—subsequent practice shifted.
  • A July 2025 analysis notes that new Trump‑appointed antitrust leaders explicitly rejected the Biden “anti‑merger” agenda and began rolling back tactics such as routine “prior approval” requirements and other policies that had discouraged many transactions, characterizing these as a departure from the previous administration’s merger policies.(forbes.com)
  • A Wall Street Journal report in late November 2025 describes corporate dealmaking as “bigger and bolder under Trump,” with U.S. deal value up over 40% year‑over‑year to $1.9 trillion, twice as many deals over $10 billion, and only three mergers challenged that year versus an average of about six annually under Biden—a roughly 50% reduction in challenges. The article attributes this shift to more lenient antitrust enforcement and a willingness to clear or settle large transactions, including in media and tech.(wsj.com)
  • Specific cases reinforce that high‑profile deals became easier to clear: DOJ quickly ended its probe into T‑Mobile’s $4.4 billion acquisition of UScellular, a move widely read as a sign of decreased scrutiny under Trump, and T‑Mobile is pursuing additional acquisitions.(businessinsider.com) Likewise, Trump reversed earlier opposition to Nippon Steel’s takeover of U.S. Steel by negotiating political conditions (e.g., a golden share and governance guarantees) and allowing the acquisition—one that had faced significant resistance under Biden—to close in June 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Trump also fired the remaining Democratic FTC commissioners in March 2025, leaving the agency in full Republican control—an institutional change expected to soften the stance on major mergers, particularly in tech and other concentrated industries that had been focal points for Biden‑era enforcement.(washingtonpost.com)

At the same time, enforcement did not disappear: antitrust suits against Big Tech (e.g., the Meta monopolization case) and a continued focus on “pocketbook” sectors like housing, healthcare, and groceries persisted, and several law‑firm and practitioner memos describe Trump’s second‑term approach as still “robust” but more case‑by‑case, with the stricter guidelines retained for now.(wilmerhale.com) This nuance, however, is fully compatible with the forecast: the claim was not that antitrust enforcement would vanish, only that M&A would be easier to get done than under the Biden administration.

Given:

  • The realized condition (Trump taking office in January 2025), and
  • Multiple independent indicators of materially more permissive merger enforcement and a surge in large‑scale M&A activity relative to Biden’s term, including fewer challenges, rollback of prior‑approval requirements, faster clearances, and high‑profile deals that likely would have faced more resistance previously,

the prediction that “there will be an opening up of M&A” and that it would be easier to get M&A done in 2025 under a Republican administration than under the preceding Democratic one is best judged as right.

aitech
Following the September 27, 2024 release of this episode, OpenAI will publicly announce and ship a formal 'agents' product (beyond research demos) in the near term, i.e., within roughly 12 months of this date.
OpenAI, at a recent meeting with investors, said that PhD level reasoning was next on its roadmap. And then agents weren't far behind that they've now released the at least the preview of the PhD level reasoning with this oh one model. So I think we can expect an announcement pretty soon about agents.View on YouTube
Explanation

OpenAI did publicly announce and ship a formal agents product well within 12 months of September 27, 2024.

  • On March 11, 2025, OpenAI published “New tools for building agents,” introducing the Responses API (with built‑in tools like web search, file search, and computer use) explicitly framed as “building blocks that will help developers and enterprises build useful and reliable agents,” and defining agents as systems that independently accomplish tasks on behalf of users. The post states that the Responses API is available to all developers starting today, i.e., a shipped product rather than a research demo. (openai.com)
  • The same day, TechCrunch reported that “OpenAI launched new tools designed to help developers and enterprises build AI agents,” describing the Responses API and the open‑source Agents SDK as OpenAI’s new platform for creating production agents that can search the web, navigate sites, and work with company data. (techcrunch.com)
  • OpenAI’s later AgentKit and “API Agents” documentation explicitly build on the March 2025 Responses API and Agents SDK as a unified platform for designing, deploying, and optimizing agents (Agent Builder, Agents SDK, ChatKit, etc.), reinforcing that these earlier releases were a formal agents product line, not just experiments. (openai.com)
  • Separately, on January 23, 2025, OpenAI launched Operator, a browser‑controlling AI agent, as a research preview for paying Pro users, further confirming that OpenAI had moved from mere demos to a user‑facing agent product within the window, even if branded as “research preview.” (openai.com)

Because OpenAI’s Responses API + Agents SDK (and associated tooling) constitute a clearly labeled, widely available agents platform announced and shipped about 5½ months after September 27, 2024—well inside the ~12‑month horizon—the prediction that OpenAI would “publicly announce and ship a formal ‘agents’ product” in that timeframe is fulfilled.

Apple Vision Pro will not achieve sustained mainstream traction; its period of public relevance will be brief, and it will effectively fade from prominence rather than becoming a widely adopted, long‑lived platform.
You don't hear about the Apple Vision Pros anymore at all. I mean, those things came and went.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence through November 30, 2025 shows that Apple Vision Pro has remained a niche, short‑lived product rather than a widely adopted, enduring platform.

Lack of mainstream traction

  • IDC estimates that Apple shipped only about 400,000 Vision Pros in 2024, versus 5.6 million Meta headsets, and notes that premium headsets over $1,000 (including Vision Pro) account for just 5–6% of the market and are largely bought by enterprises and enthusiasts, not the mass consumer market. (theverge.com)
  • Business and market reports repeatedly describe Vision Pro’s reception as lukewarm and the device as a niche product: for example, Jefferies cited a “lukewarm reception” when discussing Apple’s outlook, and broader AR/VR headset shipments are projected to decline ~12% in 2025, reinforcing that this category has not gone mainstream. (investing.com)
  • An August 2025 report notes that Vision Pro is “struggling to gain traction,” with fewer than 1 million units sold in the U.S. after roughly a year and a half, despite OS and app improvements. (benzinga.com) These numbers are far from the scale associated with a mainstream Apple platform (hundreds of millions of users).

Brief relevance and signs of fading prominence

  • By April 2024 Apple had already cut shipment forecasts for Vision Pro due to cooling demand in its core U.S. market, signaling that initial hype did not translate into sustained broad interest. (technewsday.com)
  • In 2025, multiple reports indicate Apple has scaled back or paused development of major follow‑on headsets: Reuters, summarizing Bloomberg reporting, says Apple halted work on a next‑generation Vision Pro and a cheaper N100 model to shift resources toward AI smart glasses, citing “declining momentum” and limited mainstream content. (reuters.com) MacRumors likewise reports that development of both the lighter “Vision Air” and a redesigned Vision Pro has been paused, with only an incremental M5 refresh planned, and explicitly notes the product is still unlikely to enjoy mass appeal. (macrumors.com)
  • Analyst roadmaps for the M5 refresh forecast only 150,000–200,000 units shipped in 2025 and describe Vision Pro as likely to “remain a niche product,” essentially a stopgap to maintain minimal market presence rather than a growing mass platform. (macrumors.com) Meanwhile, French‑language coverage notes that production of the original M2 model was stopped in 2025 due to disappointing sales, further underscoring its short commercial life. (fr.wikipedia.org)

Synthesis

  • By late 2025, Vision Pro has not achieved mainstream adoption by any reasonable metric (shipments, user base, or app ecosystem scale) and is widely characterized as niche and struggling to gain traction.
  • Apple’s strategic pivot away from expanding the Vision Pro headset line and toward smart glasses, combined with very modest projected shipments and the end of production for the initial model, supports the view that Vision Pro’s window of prominence has been relatively brief and is waning, rather than expanding into a dominant, long‑lived platform.

Given this evidence, Sack’s normalized prediction—that Vision Pro would fail to gain sustained mainstream traction and would fade rather than become a broadly adopted, durable platform—is substantially borne out by the data available as of November 30, 2025.

conflictpolitics
Within roughly 1–6 months of this episode (by around late March 2025), Ukraine’s armed forces will become combat‑incapable and the Ukrainian side will effectively collapse militarily in the war against Russia.
Ukraine is getting destroyed... it could be in the next month. It could be in the next two months. It could be in the next six months. I think they're eventually going to collapse. They're getting close to being combat incapableView on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction tied a clear time window to Ukraine’s supposed military collapse: the speaker said Ukraine was “getting close to being combat incapable” and could collapse “in the next month… two months… six months” from the Sept 27, 2024 episode—i.e., by roughly late March 2025.

Open-source assessments of the front as of March 2025 show a severely strained but still functioning Ukrainian military, not a force that had become combat‑incapable or collapsed:

  • A March 2025 campaign review notes that Russia was making slow, incremental territorial gains (about 73 square miles in the month) but that the overall strategic picture “remained largely unchanged,” with intense fighting and Ukrainian defenses still holding on multiple axes—indicating continued organized resistance, not collapse. (globalsecurity.org-www.globalsecurity.org)
  • March 27–28 operational summaries describe Ukrainian Defense Forces conducting coordinated strikes that destroyed Russian armored vehicles, radar, ammunition depots, and command/logistics hubs, and inflicting large daily Russian losses in personnel and equipment—evidence that Ukraine retained the ability to plan and execute combined-arms operations. (amazing-ukraine.com)
  • On March 25, 2025, Ukraine carried out a cross‑border HIMARS strike in Russia’s Belgorod region, reportedly destroying four Russian helicopters and operating on Russian territory—again inconsistent with a force that had become combat‑incapable. (theguardian.com)
  • New large‑scale engagements beginning in late March and February 2025 (e.g., the Novopavlivka offensive and the Sumy offensive) explicitly list multiple Ukrainian brigades and corps as active combatants, showing that Ukrainian forces remained organized and field‑capable well beyond the six‑month horizon. (fr.wikipedia.org)

Looking beyond the prediction window, by late 2025 Ukraine’s armed forces are still clearly functioning: major battles and offensives on multiple fronts continue, and Western and Ukrainian officials are planning around Ukraine maintaining a strong post‑war army, not around a collapsed military. (reuters.com)

Because Ukraine did not become “combat‑incapable” and did not “eventually… collapse” within roughly 1–6 months after the Sept 27, 2024 episode, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

politicsconflictgovernment
As Ukraine’s military position deteriorates toward potential collapse over the coming months, Western countries—particularly the United States and its allies—will face growing political and strategic pressure to intervene directly in the war to try to prevent that collapse.
and in a way that poses the biggest danger, because the closer Ukraine gets to collapse, the more the West is going to be tempted to to intervene directly in order to save them.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the podcast (27 Sep 2024) broadly matches both parts of the prediction:

  1. Ukraine’s military position deteriorated toward potential collapse.

    • By November 2024, major outlets were explicitly warning that parts of the Ukrainian frontline were at risk of collapse as Russian forces advanced “village after village” amid severe Ukrainian manpower and equipment shortages.(news.sky.com)
    • Analyses in 2024–25 repeatedly noted that delays in Western aid and ammunition put Ukrainian lines "at risk of collapse" and highlighted Ukraine’s serious manpower problems.(hudson.org)(en.wikipedia.org)
    • In 2025 Russia mounted a large spring and then summer offensive, capturing places such as Kurakhove (announced by Russia in January 2025) and pushing toward key hubs like Dobropillia and Pokrovsk, with Ukrainian officers describing the situation as "very difficult."(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Russia also opened a new front in Sumy Oblast, seizing Kostiantynivka in June 2025 and bringing Russian forces within 20–25 km of Sumy city, further straining Ukraine’s defenses.(en.wikipedia.org)
      Collectively, this supports the claim that Ukraine’s military situation continued to worsen and was widely discussed in terms of possible local or broader front-line collapse.
  2. Western political/strategic pressure to intervene more directly increased as the situation worsened.

    • Even before the podcast, France’s President Emmanuel Macron had broken a taboo in February 2024 by saying that sending Western ground troops to Ukraine could not be ruled out, explicitly arguing that “nothing should be excluded” to prevent a Russian victory.(reuters.com)(kyivpost.com)
    • As Russian advances and Ukrainian shortages mounted, this debate evolved into concrete planning for Western troop deployments inside Ukraine (even if framed as non-frontline). In 2025 the UK and France began leading a “Coalition of the Willing” to prepare a multinational reassurance force to be deployed in Ukraine after a ceasefire, with around 30 countries involved in operational talks about troop contributions.(en.wikipedia.org)(euronews.com)
    • European and UK leaders repeatedly discussed this force as part of security guarantees needed because of ongoing Russian offensives and Ukraine’s vulnerability, and Zelensky himself urged coalition members to establish a framework for deploying such a reassurance force under a U.S.-backed peace plan.(reuters.com)(theguardian.com)
    • At the same time, there was strong resistance from many NATO members to full-scale combat deployments, and official positions continued to rule out NATO combat troops. But the fact that serious planning for multinational troops in Ukraine became a live issue at all – after being unthinkable early in the war – shows that political and strategic pressure to consider more direct involvement did increase as Ukraine’s position worsened.(theguardian.com)(globalsecurity.org-www.globalsecurity.org)

Because (a) Ukraine’s military position clearly deteriorated and was widely described as being at risk of collapse in parts of the front, and (b) Western leaders moved from flat rejection of any troops toward openly debating and planning for deployments of multinational forces on Ukrainian soil (even if limited and post‑ceasefire), the core directional claim of the prediction is borne out. The prediction did not say that the West would actually send combat forces, only that the temptation and pressure to intervene directly would grow as Ukraine approached collapse, which has happened in a qualified but real way.

Sacks @ 00:18:31Inconclusive
aitech
Within 2–3 years of September 2024 (by roughly September 2026–September 2027), the call center industry will experience massive disruption from AI, with a substantial share of its operations materially changed or displaced by AI systems.
within the next 2 to 3 years, you're going to see a massive disruption in that [call centers]View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, we are only ~14 months into a 2–3 year prediction window that runs roughly from September 2026 to September 2027 for the full outcome. It is therefore too early to decisively judge whether “massive disruption” has occurred or will occur in that time frame.

What we see so far (supports possible future disruption):

  • Multiple surveys indicate that a majority of contact centers already use some form of AI (chatbots, assistants, analytics), with estimates around 50–65% adoption, and large shares planning further investment. (emerge.haus)
  • Industry reports project rapid growth in call-center AI markets through the late 2020s, with strong economic incentives for automation and workforce reduction. (businessresearchinsights.com)
  • Some forward‑looking analyses specifically forecast that by 2027 leading call centers could have 50–60% smaller human workforces due to AI, implying substantial disruption if these projections materialize. (emerge.haus)

What we don’t yet see (why it can’t be called “right” today):

  • Current credible estimates still show most customer interactions handled by humans, with AI automating a minority of volume. Gartner, for example, projects only about 10% of agent interactions fully automated by 2026, which is significant but not obviously a “massive” displacement of the industry as a whole. (sci-tech-today.com)
  • A 2025 Cavell study projects that global contact-center agent roles will increase from 15.3M (2025) to 16.8M (2029), concluding that AI will slow agent growth rather than cause net job collapse in the near term. (cxtoday.com)
  • A Goldman Sachs–linked survey finds that, as of late 2025, only about 10% of firms have actually cut jobs due to AI, and many executives still consider AI too early for broad deployment, even though they expect more impact over the next few years—especially in customer support. (businessinsider.com)

Why the verdict is “inconclusive (too early)”

  • Sacks’s prediction is about what will happen within 2–3 years, not what must be true just one year in. For it to be clearly wrong, we would need to reach at least the 3‑year mark (September 2027) without seeing industry‑wide, large‑scale displacement or transformation.
  • For it to be clearly right already, we would need strong evidence that by late 2025 a “massive disruption” had already occurred—e.g., large, measurable drops in global call‑center employment or a clearly dominant share of interactions being AI‑handled. Current data instead shows rapid adoption and meaningful efficiency gains, but still incremental displacement and even net growth in agent headcount.

Given the remaining time in the forecast window and the mixed but rapidly evolving data, the only defensible status as of November 30, 2025 is “inconclusive (too early)”, not definitively right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:18:31Inconclusive
aitecheconomy
Within roughly 2–3 years of September 2024, AI systems (LLMs plus voice) will replace essentially all level-one customer support roles in call centers, such that the majority of first-line customer inquiries are handled by AI rather than human agents.
all the level one customer support is going to get replaced by AIView on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s explicit timeframe is within roughly 2–3 years of September 2024, i.e. by about September 2026–September 2027. As of today (30 November 2025), that window has not yet elapsed, so it is too early to say definitively whether it will prove right or wrong.

Current evidence shows strong adoption of AI tools in contact centers, but not the outcome described (“all the level one customer support is going to get replaced by AI”):

  • A 2025 Calabrio “State of the Contact Center” report finds 98% of contact centers are using some form of AI, mostly chatbots/voicebots and analytics, but describes AI as an add‑on to human agents and focuses on challenges balancing automation with human empathy, not wholesale replacement of front‑line staff. (businesswire.com)
  • The Emerge Haus AI Atlas notes that as of 2024 fewer than 1% of organizations are piloting fully autonomous AI agents that handle live customer calls, with broader Level‑3 (autonomous agent) adoption projected only to start inflecting around 2025–2027. Even their aggressive forecast for 2027 is that perhaps ~50% of major call centers will use AI agents for some call types, implying substantial human involvement remains. (emerge.haus)
  • A KPMG-based analysis of large U.S. firms reports that only about 11% have deployed AI agents at scale in customer service, and emphasizes that “human call agents remain the backbone” of support operations, with the vast majority of interactions still handled by people. (dinocajic.com)
  • Broader enterprise surveys find that agentic AI adoption significantly lags the hype: Gartner-style projections put major AI resolution rates (e.g., ~80% of customer service issues handled by AI) closer to 2029, and note that most organizations still insist on human oversight. (itpro.com)
  • A Goldman Sachs banker survey indicates only about 10% of firms have cut jobs due to AI so far, though many expect customer-support roles to be among the most affected in coming years—evidence of early impact but not mass replacement yet. (businessinsider.com)

So as of late 2025, level‑one call center work has not been “essentially all” replaced by AI; humans still handle a large share of first‑line interactions. However, because the prediction allows until roughly 2026–2027, there is still time for further adoption and job displacement. Given that the deadline has not passed and the trajectory could still change, the status of the prediction is best classified as **“inconclusive (too early)” rather than clearly right or wrong.

economyventureai
Conditional on the Fed delivering roughly another 50 bps of rate cuts in 2024 and inflation remaining contained so that rates move down substantially (though not back to zero), the technology and venture ecosystem will enter a new, sustained "golden era" of strong performance and opportunity driven by AI, distinct from but comparable in strength to the early-2000s tech boom and not characterized by a bubble-level of excess.
if these interest rate cuts are real, like if we just got 50, if we get another 50 this year, if inflation's really tamed and interest rates are never going to go to zero. But if they go down substantially and we have this new AI disruption, this new AI tailwind, we could be back in another golden era. It's not going to be a bubble but it could be another golden era.View on YouTube
Explanation

The macro condition Sacks described has largely occurred, but whether the consequence (“a new, sustained golden era…not a bubble”) has come true is not objectively resolvable yet.

1. Macro preconditions were basically met
• After the initial 50 bp cut on September 18, 2024, the Fed cut another 25 bp in November and 25 bp in December, taking the funds rate from 5.25–5.50% before September down to 4.25–4.50% by year‑end—i.e., roughly another 50 bp of cuts in 2024, and about 100 bp in total. (forbes.com)
• Additional cuts in September and October 2025 lowered the target range further to 3.75–4.00%, meaning rates moved down substantially from their peak while remaining far from zero. (forbes.com)
• U.S. inflation fell sharply from 2022–23 peaks; by 2024 headline CPI was about 2.9% and core about 3.2%, with the Fed itself characterizing inflation as moving sustainably toward its 2% goal and citing “cooling” inflation when cutting in late 2024. (jpmorgan.com)
On the narrow macro terms Sacks specified (more ~50 bp of cuts in 2024, inflation contained, rates down but not to zero), the condition was broadly satisfied.

2. Evidence for an AI‑driven tech/VC boom
• The Nasdaq Composite gained roughly 30% in 2024 and the Nasdaq‑100 about 26%, with further strong gains into 2025 and fresh all‑time highs in October 2025, driven heavily by AI‑centric names like Nvidia. (investor.wedbush.com)
• U.S. VC investment rebounded in 2024 to about $209B (up nearly 30% YoY), with AI startups capturing a record ~46% of that capital. (reuters.com)
• By 2025, AI accounts for an estimated 58% of U.S. VC dollars and roughly one‑third of deals; many venture‑backed tech companies are again growing revenue, and the tech IPO window is reopening. (prnewswire.com)
This is strong evidence of a powerful AI‑driven upswing in opportunity and performance across large parts of the tech and venture ecosystem.

3. But the “golden era, not a bubble” characterization is disputed
• The venture environment is highly uneven. The number of active U.S. VC firms fell more than 25% from 2021 to 2024 as capital concentrated in a handful of mega‑funds, and multiple reports highlight continued fundraising weakness and firm closures. (ft.com)
• Asia’s startup funding fell to a 10‑year low in 2024, with AI investment there notably lagging the global AI boom—so the “ecosystem” is far from universally flourishing. (news.crunchbase.com)
• At the same time, prominent voices warn explicitly of an AI bubble: Sam Altman has called the current AI market a speculative bubble; the Nasdaq‑100 has suffered one of its worst quarters in years amid “AI bubble fears”; and fiscal authorities like the UK’s OBR have modeled serious downside risks from a potential AI‑stock crash. (theverge.com)
• Other analysts argue valuations are “stretched but not yet at levels consistent with historical bubbles,” with the Nasdaq‑100 at ~28× forward earnings versus a 10‑year average of ~23×—high, but not definitively bubble territory. (nasdaq.com)
So there is genuine disagreement among informed observers about whether today’s AI‑driven tech market represents a healthy rerating or a classic bubble.

4. Why the prediction is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong
• Sacks’s claim bundles several qualitative and long‑horizon ideas: a “new, sustained golden era” comparable to the early‑2000s boom, and “not…a bubble‑level of excess.” These terms are inherently subjective and would normally require many years of data to judge. By November 2025 we have only about one year of post‑prediction history.
• The observable facts cut both ways: AI has clearly powered a major boom in tech markets and VC dealflow, but fundraising stress, regional weakness, and persistent “AI bubble” warnings complicate any claim that the era is both broadly golden and clearly non‑bubble.

Because the macro precondition largely occurred, but the downstream claim about a “sustained golden era” without bubble‑level excess depends on contested, long‑term, and partly subjective judgments, the outcome cannot be assessed as definitively right or wrong at this point. Hence the result here is ambiguous.

politicseconomy
If Kamala Harris wins the 2024 U.S. presidential election, her administration’s economic policies during her term will substantially continue the same policy direction as the Biden–Harris/Elizabeth Warren-style economic program of 2021–2024, rather than representing a significant ideological shift toward the center or toward more pro-business, lower-tax policies.
But you're a fool and kidding yourself if you think you're going to get something really different after the election, you're going to get a continuation of the Biden, Harris, Elizabeth Warren economic program that we've had for the last four years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Kamala Harris did not win the 2024 U.S. presidential election; Donald Trump won with 312 electoral votes to Harris’s 226 and took office as the 47th president on January 20, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) Because there is no Harris administration in 2025–2029, there is no real‑world record of "her administration’s economic policies" to compare against the 2021–2024 Biden–Harris/Elizabeth Warren–style program, so the conditional prediction (as normalized) cannot be evaluated. It is therefore not that the prediction clearly came true or failed; instead, the relevant scenario never occurred, making the outcome impossible to determine from actual policy data.

politics
The 2024 U.S. presidential election outcome will be extremely close, determined by margins of only a few thousand to a few tens of thousands of votes in key swing states rather than by a large national popular-vote or Electoral College landslide.
Well, the election's going to be a nail biter, and it's going to really come down to a few thousand votes or a few tens of thousands of votes in swing states.
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the 2024 U.S. presidential election would be a nail biter that “comes down to a few thousand or a few tens of thousands of votes in swing states.” In reality, while the race was competitive, it was not that razor-thin.

Nationally, Donald Trump won 312 electoral votes to Kamala Harris’s 226, a clear Electoral College margin, and carried all seven major swing states (PA, GA, NC, MI, AZ, WI, NV). He also won the popular vote 49.8% to 48.3%, by roughly 2–2.5 million votes. (en.wikipedia.org)

Analyses of the tipping-point states show the outcome did not hinge on just “a few thousand” votes. The Cook Political Report estimates that the election was effectively decided by about 229,766 votes across Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin—still close historically, but an order of magnitude larger than Sacks’s “few tens of thousands” framing. (cookpolitical.com) Moreover, several key swing states had six‑figure margins: Arizona by about 187,000 votes, Georgia by about 115,000, and North Carolina by about 183,000. (en.wikipedia.org)

So although 2024 was closer than a landslide—especially in percentage terms—it was not the ultra‑narrow, “few thousand votes in swing states” scenario Sacks predicted. Hence the prediction is best classified as wrong.

politics
Between late August 2024 and Election Day 2024, the Harris–Walz campaign will be forced to reveal more policy substance (e.g., via interviews or issue positions), and as this happens, Kamala Harris’s polling lead will erode relative to her initial post–‘hot swap’ bump.
they've now got to run out the clock for another, I don't know what, 70 or 80 days in terms of running a campaign that's substance free, that's just completely on vibes, that's about joy. Without answering any questions, without doing any press interviews. And I think we predicted some time ago that that just was not going to be sustainable, that at some point they're going to have to tell us what they think. And as they do that, the more they do that, I think the more her polls will correct.
Explanation

Two parts of Sacks’ prediction can be checked: (1) whether the Harris–Walz campaign was forced to show more policy substance instead of running purely on “joy” and minimal press, and (2) whether Harris’s post‑“hot swap” polling lead eroded between late August 2024 and Election Day.

1. Did the campaign have to reveal more policy substance / do more interviews?

Policy detail roll‑out

  • On Aug. 16, 2024—just before the podcast date—Harris gave a major economic speech in Raleigh unveiling an “opportunity economy” agenda, including a federal ban on grocery price‑gouging, a new $6,000 child tax credit for newborns, $25,000 down‑payment help for first‑time homebuyers, and a goal of building 3 million new housing units. This was widely described as her most specific economic plan to date.(cnbc.com) Subsequent coverage and policy summaries (Reuters, TIME, Kiplinger) detailed a broader suite of tax, childcare, housing, and small‑business proposals, including higher taxes on the wealthy and corporations, expanded child tax credits, and housing tax credits.(reuters.com)

Shift from low‑press strategy to a media blitz

  • Through late summer and early fall, reporters and experts noted that Harris–Walz had been giving very few traditional interviews and press availabilities, a strategy described as unusually low‑profile and risky, with the campaign signaling that more press engagement was coming.(businessinsider.com)
  • In early October, the campaign pivoted into a clear media blitz: Harris did a full primetime 60 Minutes candidate interview that grilled her on her economic plans and foreign policy (Israel, Ukraine, Putin), and included a segment with Walz.(theguardian.com)
  • At roughly the same time, she launched a series of high‑profile interviews and appearances aimed at different voter blocs: Call Her Daddy, Howard Stern, The View, and other talk shows and podcasts, explicitly framed in coverage as a concerted “media blitz” to answer criticism that she was avoiding interviews.(theguardian.com) In those appearances she discussed abortion rights, economic policies (e.g., Medicare expansion, in‑home care), and broader governing priorities.

Taken together, the record shows that the initially interview‑shy, vibes‑heavy strategy was not sustained through to Election Day. Harris rolled out detailed policy proposals and moved into a more substantive and frequent interview posture in September–October 2024, matching Sacks’ claim that a near‑press‑free, “joy”‑based campaign would not be sustainable.

2. Did Harris’s polling lead erode relative to her initial post‑swap bump?

Initial post‑“hot swap” bump (late July–August)

  • After Biden stepped aside and Harris became the nominee, national polls and aggregates showed her opening a clear lead over Trump. A Decision Desk HQ / The Hill, FiveThirtyEight and Silver Bulletin average using polls through Aug. 23, 2024 put Harris at about 48.1% to Trump’s 43.7%—roughly a 4–5 point national lead.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Individual late‑August polls around and just after the Democratic convention also showed her ahead by mid‑single digits, e.g., ABC/Ipsos 52–46, Clarity 51–45, Suffolk/USA Today 48–43.(en.wikipedia.org) This is the “post‑swap bump” Sacks was referring to.

Erosion of that lead by late October / pre‑election

  • By late October, a Reuters/Ipsos poll conducted Oct. 26–28, 2024 had Harris at 44% and Trump at 43% among registered voters, explicitly noting that although she had led in all their polls since July, her advantage had “steadily diminished since late September,” leaving essentially a statistical tie.(reuters.com)
  • The Guardian’s review of national polling averages found that just before Election Day, the average showed Harris only narrowly ahead, 48%–47%—an edge of about one point, markedly smaller than the 4–5 point advantage she held in late August.(theguardian.com)
  • Actual results then went further: preliminary national vote totals show Trump winning the popular vote 50%–48%, meaning Harris’s support not only fell from its early‑August high but ended below Trump’s on Election Day.(theguardian.com)

So, between late August and Election Day, Harris’s initial multi‑point post‑nomination lead did erode to a razor‑thin edge in the polls and then to a narrow loss in the actual vote, aligning with Sacks’ claim that her early “hot swap” bump would “correct” downward as the race went on.

Causality vs. correlation We can’t prove that the added policy substance and interviews caused the polling erosion; many factors (economic perceptions, events, Trump’s campaign, debates, etc.) also played roles. But Sacks’ prediction was about what would happen—that (a) the campaign wouldn’t stay substance‑free and press‑shy, and (b) Harris’s inflated post‑swap polling lead would shrink over time. On both counts, the observable trajectory of the campaign and the polling matches his forecast, so the prediction is best scored as right rather than ambiguous.

Sacks @ 01:29:01Inconclusive
politicseconomy
If the United States implements a wealth tax similar to those tried in France and Norway, high‑net‑worth individuals will move assets and/or residency abroad, actual tax revenues will fall short of projections, and legislators will respond by broadening the wealth tax to cover a significantly larger share of the population than initially targeted.
every time Wealth taxes get tried. What happens is the wealth flees and you never raise as much as you think you're going to. And then what happens is in order to raise that money, they have to apply it to more people.
Explanation

As of 30 Nov 2025, the United States has not implemented a federal wealth tax comparable to those discussed in France or Norway, so the conditional prediction cannot yet be evaluated.

  • Proposals by figures like Elizabeth Warren and, more recently, Kamala Harris have advocated federal wealth taxes, but none have passed Congress or been enacted into law.
  • Some U.S. states (e.g., California, New York, Washington) have floated or enacted measures targeting very high net worth or high income, but these are not nationwide wealth taxes of the type referenced in the quote, and data so far are limited and mixed on capital flight and revenue outcomes.

Because the core "if" condition—a U.S.-wide wealth tax similar to those in France/Norway—has not occurred, we cannot say whether the subsequent causal claims (wealth fleeing, revenue shortfalls vs projections, broadening the tax base) are right or wrong. The appropriate classification is therefore "inconclusive (too early)."

politicseconomy
Kamala Harris’s campaign will not be able to avoid media interviews and substantive policy proposals through the November 2024 election. They may largely avoid them until roughly the Democratic National Convention (late August 2024), but within about three months of this August 16, 2024 recording—i.e., by mid‑November 2024—Harris will be doing mainstream media interviews and releasing more detailed economic policy proposals.
I do think that this strategy can only work for so long... I don't think she can run out the clock for three months without doing interviews. I just think that I think she can do this for another week or so. I think that they're going to run this playbook through the convention, but eventually she's going to have to start doing interviews, and she's going to have to start putting out more substantive policy proposals.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the 2024 campaign shows that Kamala Harris did, in fact, move into exactly the pattern Sacks described: mainstream interviews plus more detailed economic policy roll‑outs well before mid‑November 2024.

Mainstream media interviews (post–"hide" phase):

  • Aug. 29, 2024: Harris and Tim Walz did a 27‑minute primetime CNN joint interview, her first major national TV interview as the new nominee.(reuters.com)
  • Sept. 25, 2024: She did her first solo one‑on‑one network interview as nominee with MSNBC’s Stephanie Ruhle, focused heavily on her economic agenda (“opportunity economy”), housing and tax policy.(theguardian.com)
  • Oct. 7, 2024: A full "60 Minutes" election interview aired on CBS, where she discussed the economy, immigration, and contrasts with Trump.(people.com)
  • Oct. 16, 2024: She sat for a contentious Fox News interview with Bret Baier, her first appearance on that network.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Late campaign: AP reported a "media blitz" including The View, Howard Stern, and The Late Show with Stephen Colbert, in addition to earlier 60 Minutes and Anderson Cooper interviews.(apnews.com) Analyses still described her as doing fewer interviews than past nominees, but they also note she "stepped up" interviews in the final weeks.(businessinsider.com)

Substantive economic policy proposals:

  • From late August onward, Harris rolled out detailed economic planks: an expanded Child Tax Credit (including a $6,000 newborn credit), a large housing plan with down‑payment support and construction incentives, and a ten‑fold expansion of the small‑business startup deduction.(abc17news.com)
  • In early September she broke with Biden on capital‑gains rates, laid out specific tax changes (corporate rate to 28%, 28% top capital‑gains rate, 25% minimum tax on ultra‑wealthy), and packaged these into an "opportunity economy" agenda in a high‑profile Pittsburgh speech.(theguardian.com)

All of this occurred in September–October 2024—well within three months of the Aug. 16 podcast and well before the Nov. 5 election—matching Sacks’s forecast that Harris would not be able to "run out the clock" without doing mainstream interviews and issuing more substantive economic policy proposals.

politics
Kamala Harris’s polling surge in August 2024 is temporary; the release of policy proposals such as grocery price controls will mark the start of a significant decline (“big correction”) in her relative standing against Donald Trump before the November 2024 election.
But it's a sugar high based on something that's not substantive. I mean, she didn't put forward any proposals. And I think that now that she finally is putting out policy proposals that can be questioned and analyzed and criticized, I think this is going to be the beginning of, I would say, a big correction in her campaign.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks argued that Kamala Harris’s August 2024 polling “sugar high” would end once she released substantive policy proposals—specifically including measures like grocery price controls—triggering a significant correction downward in her standing vs. Donald Trump before November.

1. Timing and nature of the policy proposals
Harris did, in fact, roll out economic proposals in August 2024, including a call for a federal ban on corporate “price gouging” on groceries and an expanded child tax credit. These were framed as tools to lower grocery prices and were widely covered as part of her August economic agenda. (amp.cnn.com) This matches the kind of grocery price‑control proposal Sacks was referring to.

2. What happened to her polls after the proposals
Available polling and averages do not show a large, sustained downturn in Harris’s relative standing vs. Trump following the August rollout:

  • A compiled table of national polling for 2024 shows that in August, Harris and Trump were roughly tied nationally (both around 47–48%). In September, Harris’s position improved, with averages showing her about 1–3 points ahead of Trump (e.g., Harris 48–49% vs. Trump 46–47%), not worse. In October, the race tightened back to roughly even, but not to a clear or durable Trump lead. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Individual poll and model snapshots in mid‑September—after the economic proposals—show Harris still gaining or holding a lead. For example, a Newsmax summary of Nate Silver’s model and RealClearPolitics averages around Sept. 16–17 had Harris leading Trump nationally by about 2 points (FiveThirtyEight: ~48.5–46.3; RCP: ~49.1–47.3), and a large Morning Consult poll at that time showed Harris +6 (51–45). (newsmax.com) This is opposite of an immediate “big correction” down.

3. Position just before Election Day
By late October and the final week before the election, national polls and aggregators still showed an extremely close race with Harris generally a hair ahead, not in a clearly corrected slump:

  • A Guardian analysis of national polling averages found that throughout October 2024, Harris polled about 1–2 points above Trump, with the gap narrowing to about 1 point by Oct. 31. (theguardian.com)
  • On the day before the election, a Yahoo News summary of three major aggregators (Silver Bulletin, FiveThirtyEight, New York Times) showed Harris leading Trump nationally by about 0.5–1 point in each average—still a small Harris edge, not a Trump lead. (yahoo.com)
  • The Wikipedia compilation of late‑October polls lists many high‑quality national surveys with Harris at roughly 49–51% and Trump at roughly 46–49%, again indicating a neck‑and‑neck race with Harris often marginally ahead, not a large correction against her. (en.wikipedia.org)

4. Final outcome vs. pre‑election “correction” story
In the actual result, Trump won the popular vote by about 49.8% to 48.3% (roughly Trump +1.5), while final national polls generally had Harris at about 48–49% and Trump around 47–48%. (en.wikipedia.org) Post‑election analyses emphasized that polls underestimated Trump’s support, as in prior cycles, rather than documenting a major pre‑election plunge in Harris’s standing triggered by her August policy rollout. (politico.com)

Putting this together:

  • Harris did enjoy an August surge.
  • She did release grocery price‑gouging/price‑control‑style proposals in August.
  • But after those proposals, her polling relative to Trump mostly held or improved through September, and by late October she still had a tiny lead in most national aggregates. There is no evidence of the large, proposal‑driven “big correction” in polling that Sacks forecast; instead, the race gradually tightened and then the polls slightly missed in Trump’s favor.

Because the central claim—that the rollout of those policy proposals would mark the start of a significant pre‑election decline in Harris’s relative polling vs. Trump—did not materialize in the polling data, this prediction is best classified as wrong.

politics
By roughly three months after this August 16, 2024 recording—i.e., by mid‑November 2024—Kamala Harris will no longer be able to maintain a ‘vibes only’, no‑interview, low‑substance campaign image as a moderate; her actual, more progressive policy positions will become clear to the public.
So, yeah, I mean, this this idea that she can pretend to be a moderate and just run on vibes with no interviews and no substance proposals. I don't think it's going to work for three months. I think she's going to reveal herself.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that within about three months of Aug. 16, 2024, Kamala Harris would not be able to keep running a “vibes only,” low‑interview, low‑substance campaign as a seeming moderate, because her more progressive policy views would become clear to voters.

There is evidence supporting his view that her progressive policy orientation became more visible:

  • In mid‑August and September 2024, the Harris campaign rolled out an “Agenda to Lower Costs for American Families” and a broader economic plan (“A New Way Forward for the Middle Class”) featuring a federal ban on grocery price gouging, large expansions of the Child Tax Credit and Earned Income Tax Credit, substantial new housing subsidies, and other redistributive measures—policies widely covered in mainstream and specialist outlets and generally characterized as aggressive, interventionist economics. (democracyinaction.us)
  • Fact‑checking and analysis pieces treated the price‑gouging ban as a central plank of her campaign, noting that her ads referencing it ran at scale, and economic commentators across the spectrum debated whether it amounted to de facto price controls. (factcheck.org)
  • The Dispatch, which closely tracked her platform, described these domestic proposals as “very progressive” while noting that she projected a surface image of moderation and normalcy. (thedispatch.com)
  • Polling in early September 2024 (NYT/Siena, Marist and others) found a plurality of voters saying Harris was “too liberal or progressive”, with roughly 44–48% labeling her too liberal and around 41–43% saying she was “about right.” (newsmax.com) This suggests that many voters did see her as left‑of‑center ideologically, not as a centrist.

But there is also strong evidence against his claim that she would be forced to abandon a vibes‑heavy, low‑interview, low‑detail strategy:

  • Through September and into October 2024, reporters and analysts repeatedly noted that Harris had done very few sit‑down interviews, no press conferences, and tightly choreographed appearances. An ECFR “Letter from Washington” described her as “almost allergic to policy specifics,” running a “vibes” campaign with only one network interview and no pressers, and speeches “heavy on mood and light on policy.” (ecfr.eu)
  • Media reports and commentary during the campaign (e.g., Daily Caller, Free Beacon, and others summarizing Politico/CNN reporting) criticized the Harris–Walz operation for a “basement” or low‑exposure strategy, saying both candidates were kept on a very limited interview diet and that this backfired at the debate. (dailycaller.com)
  • Post‑election insider accounts and donor grumbling in early 2025 likewise faulted her for being extremely risk‑averse and doing too few interviews, saying “there was nothing to peel the onion back for people.” (pagesix.com) Even Donald Trump’s later “advice” to her—that she needed to start giving interviews—explicitly framed her 2024 campaign as unusually guarded with the press. (nypost.com)
  • Broader campaign analyses (e.g., the Boston Globe and ECFR) described the overall 2024 race as driven by emotions and “vibes,” with neither Trump nor Harris offering a fully fleshed‑out policy program, reinforcing that her public image never moved far from a vibes‑heavy approach. (bostonglobe.com)

Putting this together:

  • Harris did not really abandon the low‑interview, carefully stage‑managed, rhetoric‑heavy style Sacks was criticizing; contemporaneous coverage and later postmortems agree that she stuck with a vibes‑forward, low‑risk media strategy through Election Day.
  • At the same time, she did put forward a set of clearly progressive economic proposals (price‑gouging ban, large child‑benefit expansions, housing subsidies, etc.) that were widely reported and debated, and polling shows many voters saw her as “too liberal or progressive.”

Because the prediction mixes several subjective elements—how “vibes‑only” the campaign remained, how “moderate” she looked, and how “clear” her progressive positions became to the public—and the empirical record cuts both ways, reasonable observers could plausibly argue that Sacks was either vindicated (on ideological visibility) or refuted (on the sustainability of a vibes‑heavy, low‑interview strategy). For that reason, the outcome is best categorized as ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:35:24Inconclusive
conflictpolitics
Ukraine’s military position in the war against Russia is unsustainable and is likely to collapse sometime in 2025, with the Kursk offensive—diverting elite troops into Russian territory—accelerating that collapse.
And what we're on track for is at some point, probably next year, Ukraine is going to collapse. I mean, their position in this war is unsustainable. And taking some of their top troops, feeding them into Kursk, where they can be easily picked off by the Russians, is only going to accelerate that process.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, Ukraine has not experienced the kind of overall military or state collapse that Sacks predicted for “probably next year” (i.e., 2025). The Ukrainian state and armed forces remain intact and are still conducting defensive and limited offensive operations along an ~800‑mile front, including around Kupiansk and Pokrovsk, despite heavy pressure and serious manpower shortages.

For example, late‑November reporting notes that Ukrainian forces continue to defend Kupiansk and conduct operations against Russian troops there, contradicting Russian claims of full control. Ukrainian units are also still contesting Russian advances around Pokrovsk and reinforcing other sectors such as Zaporizhzhia, indicating a strained but functioning defense rather than systemic collapse. (reuters.com)

Major analyses of the 2025 campaign likewise describe Russia achieving incremental territorial gains at high cost, not a decisive breakdown of Ukrainian lines. A late‑November Washington Post assessment explicitly states that Russia’s leadership had bet on a collapse of Ukrainian defenses along the front, but that this collapse had not occurred as of late 2025. (washingtonpost.com) Other reporting similarly portrays Russia fighting for limited blocks of small towns over many months, rather than exploiting any large‑scale Ukrainian rout. (businessinsider.com)

Regarding the Kursk offensive, subsequent analysis does support part of Sacks’s concern: the cross‑border incursion is widely judged to have been strategically costly for Ukraine, tying down elite units in Kursk while Ukraine faced acute manpower shortages on other fronts, and contributing to Russian gains and increased risk of local front collapse in eastern Ukraine. (en.wikipedia.org) However, even critical analysts frame this as worsening Ukraine’s position and raising the risk of collapse, not as having already produced the nationwide military collapse Sacks forecast.

Because Sacks’s prediction was time‑bounded to “probably next year” and 2025 is not yet over on the evaluation date (30 November 2025), it is too early to say with certainty that a collapse will not occur by the end of the year. At the same time, existing evidence up to late November shows no Ukrainian military collapse despite severe strain. Given that the deadline he named (the end of 2025) has not fully elapsed, the fairest classification under your schema is “inconclusive (too early)”: the prediction has clearly not come true so far, but the full time window he specified has not yet closed.

conflict
The Ukrainian forces that advanced into Russia’s Kursk region in mid‑2024 will, over time (within roughly a year), suffer heavy losses and be defeated or forced to withdraw by superior Russian forces, rather than establishing a durable strategic foothold there.
And over time, Russia's just going to mop them up.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public reporting shows that Russia did not fully “mop up” or expel the Ukrainian incursion force from Russia’s Kursk region within roughly a year, and that Ukraine still maintains a (small) foothold there even now.

Key points:

  • Ukraine launched its Kursk offensive on 6 August 2024, seizing over 1,000–1,300 km² of Russian territory and dozens of settlements, including the town of Sudzha. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • By November 2024, Ukraine had lost more than 40% of the territory it had initially seized, and by 12 March 2025 Russia had retaken Sudzha and much of the Ukrainian-held area, significantly shrinking the bridgehead. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Reuters in March 2025 reported Russia was nearing complete expulsion of Ukrainian troops and that Ukraine’s foothold had dwindled to <81 km², but even then it was not entirely eliminated. (reuters.com)
  • On 22 June 2025 (about ten months after the incursion started and within the “roughly a year” window), Ukraine’s commander-in-chief Oleksandr Syrskyi told the BBC that Ukrainian forces were still holding about 90 km² of territory in the Kursk region despite about 10,000 Russian troops trying to dislodge them. (feeds.bbci.co.uk)
  • On 6 August 2025, at the one‑year anniversary of the operation, Ukrainian command again stated that their forces continued to hold positions in the Glushkivskyi district of Russia’s Kursk region. (mezha.net)
  • Subsequent reporting and analysis (ISW‑summarized in the Kursk campaign article, and Ukrainian/Ukrinform statements) confirms that as of late 2025 Ukraine still maintains some positions on Russian territory in the Kursk sector. (en.wikipedia.org)

It is true that Ukraine has suffered heavy losses and has been pushed back from most of the territory it initially seized; several analysts describe the Kursk operation as costly and, in strategic terms, at least a partial failure. (en.wikipedia.org) But Sacks’s specific prediction was that Russia would essentially wipe out the Kursk bridgehead over time—“mop them up”—rather than allow a durable foothold.

Given that Ukrainian forces still hold a small but persistent pocket of territory inside Russia more than a year after the offensive began, the core of that prediction (complete defeat/forced withdrawal within roughly a year, no lasting foothold in Russia) has not come true.

Therefore, the prediction is best judged as wrong.

markets
From August 2024 onward, the USD/JPY exchange rate will continue to move in favor of the US dollar, rising above the then-current ~147–150 yen per dollar level to a meaningfully higher rate (i.e., further depreciation of the yen against the dollar) over the subsequent months/years as long as Japan maintains near-zero interest rates.
So what I would expect is that the US dollar is going to keep buying more yen. It's going to go from, I don't know, 147 150. There is one some bigger some bigger number.View on YouTube
Explanation

At the time of the prediction in early August 2024, USD/JPY was around 146–147 (for example, 1 USD = 146.67 JPY on 9 August 2024).(exchange-rates.org) Over the following weeks the yen actually strengthened for a time, with the rate falling toward 141–143 and reaching a 2024 low of about 140.66 per dollar in mid‑September.(exchange-rates.org)

However, over the subsequent months and into 2025 the medium‑term direction matched the prediction: USD/JPY moved well above the 147–150 area, trading above 151 by late October 2024 and around 153–155 in November 2024, and ending 2024 near 156–157.(exchange-rates.org) In 2025 the pair reached highs around 158–159 (for example, 158.35–158.87 in January) and has mostly traded above 150 in late 2025, with recent levels around 155–157 yen per dollar and a six‑month gain of roughly 9–10% for the dollar versus the yen.(exchange-rates.org)

Japan did begin raising policy rates in 2024–2025, bringing the Bank of Japan's short‑term rate to about 0.5% by January 2025, but this still left Japanese rates far below U.S. levels and the yen remained structurally weak.(cnbc.com) Overall, from August 2024 to late 2025 the U.S. dollar does indeed buy meaningfully more yen than at the time of the podcast, so the prediction about further yen depreciation against the dollar has been borne out in broad terms despite interim fluctuations.

economy
By around one year from this discussion (approximately August 2025), the US will more likely than not have entered a recession (e.g., two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP growth).
if you pin me down, I'd say I recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

By roughly one year after the discussion (around August 2025), the U.S. had not experienced two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP growth, nor had the NBER declared a new recession.

Evidence:

  • BEA data show real GDP was positive throughout 2024, with Q4 2024 growing at about 2.3–2.4% annualized. (apps.bea.gov)
  • Real GDP then declined in Q1 2025 (around −0.5 to −0.6% annualized after revisions), but rebounded in Q2 2025, growing about 3.3–3.8% annualized, so there was only one negative quarter followed by strong growth, not two negative quarters in a row. (bea.gov)
  • The NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee listings and later summaries show no new recession peak/trough dates after the April 2020 trough, meaning no officially dated recession in 2024–2025 as of late 2025. (nber.org)

Since the realized outcome by about August 2025 was that the U.S. had not entered a recession under either the common two‑negative‑quarters rule of thumb or the official NBER dating, the prediction that a recession was “more likely than not” by that time ended up being wrong in hindsight.

politics
Tim Walz will not remain Kamala Harris’s running mate through the Democratic National Convention; he will be forced to withdraw from the ticket before or during the convention due to mounting controversies (e.g., over his military record and policy positions).
And I think the question now is whether Waltz is even going to make it to the convention. I think he might have to drop out.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that Tim Walz did remain Kamala Harris’s running mate through the 2024 Democratic National Convention and beyond, contrary to the prediction that he would have to drop out before or during the convention.

Key facts:

  • The 2024 Democratic National Convention in Chicago was held August 19–22, 2024, with Kamala Harris as the presidential nominee and Tim Walz as the vice‑presidential nominee listed on the official convention record. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • On August 6, 2024, the Democratic Party formally certified Kamala Harris and Tim Walz as the official Democratic nominees for president and vice president, respectively, after the delegate roll call. (democrats.org)
  • During the convention itself, Walz formally accepted the Democratic Party’s vice‑presidential nomination in a televised speech, explicitly thanking delegates for nominating him as vice president. (dw.com)
  • Post‑election coverage and later analyses consistently refer to Walz as Harris’s 2024 vice‑presidential running mate and the Democratic vice‑presidential nominee, with no record of him withdrawing or being replaced on the ticket. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because Walz remained on the ticket through the Democratic National Convention and the November 2024 election, the prediction that he "might have to drop out" before or at the convention was not borne out.

politics
If Tim Walz stays on the Harris ticket through Election Day 2024, then between his selection and the election there will be recurring, publicly reported protests by Gold Star families at Harris–Walz campaign events, generating ongoing negative media coverage for the campaign.
If, if, if Waltz doesn't drop from the ticket, I predict there'll be Gold Star families protesting all of their events, and that's going to be a real headache from now until the election.View on YouTube
Explanation

Tim Walz was selected as Kamala Harris’s running mate on August 6, 2024 and remained on the Democratic ticket through the November 2024 election, so the condition of the prediction was met.

However, the predicted outcome — recurring, publicly reported protests by Gold Star families at Harris–Walz campaign events, effectively dogging “all of their events” and creating an ongoing media headache through Election Day — did not occur.

What did happen is a concentrated controversy around Donald Trump’s August 26, 2024 visit to Arlington National Cemetery with Gold Star families of the 13 service members killed at Abbey Gate. Harris criticized Trump’s team for filming there as a political stunt, and several of those Gold Star families responded with videos, a joint statement, and later a Trump campaign ad sharply attacking Harris and the administration’s handling of the Afghanistan withdrawal. This generated a burst of negative coverage for Harris across outlets from the AP and Boston Globe to numerous conservative sites, but the conflict was framed around her comments on Trump’s Arlington visit and the 2021 withdrawal, not around protests at her rallies. (en.wikipedia.org)

By contrast, contemporaneous reporting on Harris–Walz campaign events shows repeated disruptions by pro‑Palestinian / Gaza protesters and “uncommitted” activists, including at major rallies in Detroit and Phoenix and at a New York City support event, as well as organized Gaza‑focused protests around the Democratic National Convention and in Minneapolis. These stories consistently describe Gaza-related activists — not Gold Star families — as the source of recurring protest pressure on the Harris–Walz campaign. (wdet.org)

Extensive news searches turn up Gold Star families’ videos, letters, and media statements criticizing Harris, but no evidence of them repeatedly protesting at Harris–Walz campaign stops in person, and no narrative that Gold Star family protests became a constant presence “at all of their events.” Given that such a pattern would have been newsworthy and is absent from major coverage, the specific, event-focused and recurring-protest scenario described in the prediction did not materialize. Therefore, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

politics
Between early August 2024 and Election Day 2024 (~next 100 days), Kamala Harris will be forced into at least one debate and unscripted press questioning, and following that her current polling bounce will fade, with national polls reverting to a roughly even race with Donald Trump rather than a Harris surge.
I just think that at some point over the next 100 days, that approach is just going to fall apart. She's going to have to do a debate, she's going to have to answer questions. And at that point, I think the bloom will come off the rose a little bit here and you'll see the polls normalize.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key elements of Sacks’s prediction did occur within the ~100‑day window from early August 2024 to Election Day (November 5, 2024):

  1. Harris was forced into at least one debate and unscripted questioning.
    • Kamala Harris and Donald Trump participated in an ABC News presidential debate on 10 September 2024 at the National Constitution Center in Philadelphia, their first head‑to‑head debate of the campaign. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Coverage and transcripts show real‑time moderator questions and exchanges on policy (abortion, immigration, Afghanistan, etc.), i.e., an unscripted, live format rather than controlled speeches. (abc7.com)
    • Harris also sat for a long‑form, nationally televised “60 Minutes” interview in October 2024; the FCC later sought unedited transcripts and video, confirming a substantive, extended Q&A format with mainstream press. (apnews.com)
    This matches the prediction that her strategy of limited exposure would “fall apart” and she would “have to do a debate” and answer questions.

  2. She had a clear polling surge in August.
    • Shortly after Biden withdrew and Harris became the de facto nominee, national polling averages showed her opening a noticeable lead. FiveThirtyEight’s early‑August average had Harris around 45% vs. Trump 43.5%, already a modest edge. (newsmax.com)
    • By later in August, multiple aggregators and analyses described a Harris “surge” or “convention bounce,” with Silver’s and FiveThirtyEight‑style averages putting her national lead in the roughly 3–4 point range and many individual polls showing her up by mid‑single digits. (newsweek.com)
    That is the “bloom on the rose” phase Sacks was referring to.

  3. After that period, her bounce faded and the race reverted to a near‑tie.
    • Analyses just before Election Day reported that Harris’s national lead had shrunk from a late‑August peak (about 3.5–3.7 points in FiveThirtyEight‑style averages) to roughly 1 point or less by early November. (forbes.com)
    • On the eve of the election, three separate aggregators (Silver Bulletin, FiveThirtyEight, and the New York Times) all had Harris ahead nationally by between 0.1 and 0.9 percentage points, and commentators characterized the contest as one of the closest, essentially a dead heat. (yahoo.com)
    • RealClearPolitics’ unweighted national average had Harris ahead by just 0.1 point going into Election Day, again functionally an even race. (forbes.com)

Putting this together: within roughly 40 days of Sacks’s statement, Harris did in fact participate in a major televised debate and other unscripted interviews. Over the subsequent weeks, her earlier post‑nomination/convention polling advantage eroded, and by Election Day the national polling picture had “normalized” to a roughly even Harris–Trump race, exactly as he described. Therefore, the prediction is best classified as right.

conflictpolitics
There will be a regional war in the Middle East involving Israel and Iran (and potentially their proxies/allies) by January 20, 2025, when the next U.S. president is sworn in.
We could be in a war there, I should say. There could be a regional war there by January 20th, when the next president is sworn in.View on YouTube
Explanation

By the cutoff date in the prediction—January 20, 2025, when the next U.S. president was sworn in—there was no widely recognized regional war directly pitting Israel and Iran against each other in a sustained, large‑scale campaign.

What did exist before that date was:

  • The Gaza war and parallel fronts with Hezbollah in Lebanon, Houthis in Yemen, and Iran‑aligned militias in Iraq and Syria, described collectively as a broader Middle Eastern crisis (2023–present), with multiple Iran‑backed groups attacking Israel and U.S. interests.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • A series of direct but limited exchanges between Israel and Iran in 2024 (Iran’s April 13–14 drone/missile barrage and Israel’s limited April 19 strike; Iran’s large missile salvo on October 1; Israel’s October 26 strikes on Iranian targets). These are grouped in sources as the “2024 Iran–Israel conflict” and explicitly characterized as a prelude to a later Iran–Israel war, not that war itself.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Diplomatic statements in mid‑ to late‑2024 warning about the risk of a full‑scale regional war in the Middle East, which by implication had not yet occurred.(theguardian.com)
  • On January 19, 2025, just before inauguration, a ceasefire and hostage‑prisoner exchange between Israel and Hamas went into effect in Gaza, marking a pause rather than an expansion into a new, broader war.(en.wikipedia.org)

The kind of large, overt regional war involving both Israel and Iran directly, with multi‑country spillover—what most observers would call a true regional war—began later, with the Iran–Israel war of 2025, which started on June 13, 2025 after a massive surprise Israeli attack on Iranian territory, followed by extensive Iranian missile strikes and wider regional involvement.(en.wikipedia.org) This is several months after the January 20, 2025 deadline in the prediction.

Because the predicted regional war did not materialize by the specified date (even though something very similar did happen later in 2025), the prediction must be scored as wrong on timing, and thus wrong overall under a strict “by this date” standard.

conflictpolitics
As of August 2, 2024, David Sacks assesses at least a 50% probability that current Israel–Iran and broader Middle East tensions will escalate into a regional war (drawing in multiple Middle Eastern states) in the foreseeable future.
If you were to place odds on on this, I'd say it's at least 5050 that things escalate into a region.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows a major escalation, but not clearly the kind of regional war Sacks seemed to be talking about, and his claim was probabilistic (≥50%), not categorical.

Key facts:

  • Since October 2023, the Middle East has been in a multi‑theater “Middle Eastern crisis” involving Gaza, Lebanon/Hezbollah, Syria, Yemen/Houthis, Iraq‑based militias, and Iran–Israel tensions, with U.S. and U.K. military involvement and attacks across several countries.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • In June 2025 there was a direct Iran–Israel war (“Twelve‑Day War”) with large Israeli strikes on Iranian nuclear and military sites, massive Iranian missile and drone barrages on Israel, and U.S. airstrikes on Iranian nuclear facilities, plus an Iranian missile attack on a U.S. base in Qatar.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Analyses of that conflict emphasize that, despite its intensity and the wider regional crisis, it “did not escalate into a broader regional war but remained geographically and operationally limited,” with Hezbollah, the Houthis, and others acting in constrained ways rather than triggering a full multi‑state regional war.(diplomatmagazine.eu)

Interpretation issues:

  • Whether this amounts to the “regional war” Sacks feared is partly definitional: some might argue that simultaneous fighting involving Israel, Iran, U.S. forces, and Iran‑aligned groups across multiple countries is already de facto regional; others, including the cited analysts, explicitly say it stopped short of a broader regional war.
  • His prediction was that the odds were “at least 50–50” that tensions would escalate to such a regional war in the “foreseeable future.” Because this is a probability estimate with a vague time horizon and an imprecise event definition, observing one world in which the conflict escalated heavily but was still widely described as not a full regional war does not let us cleanly judge the forecast as simply right or wrong.

Given the mixture of (1) substantial escalation including an Iran–Israel war, (2) credible expert characterizations that it did not become a true broader regional war, and (3) the inherently probabilistic, time‑fuzzy nature of the prediction, the outcome is best classified as ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:51:36Inconclusive
politics
Donald Trump’s selection of JD Vance as his 2024 running mate will result in the America First / MAGA ideological faction continuing to dominate and define the Republican Party for many years beyond the 2024 election cycle.
I think that Donald Trump choosing JD Vance was so important to cement this new vision of the Republican Party. It was a legacy pick because it means that this America First MAGA message is going to continue into the future, many years into the future.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly long‑term: that Trump’s choice of JD Vance "means that this America First MAGA message is going to continue into the future, many years into the future." Evaluating whether a faction will dominate a major party for "many years" requires observing intra‑party dynamics over multiple election cycles, not just the immediate aftermath of the 2024 election and the 2025 political environment. As of November 30, 2025, only one election cycle (2024) and part of one presidential term have elapsed since the prediction (July 2024), which is not enough to determine whether the MAGA / America First faction will continue to dominate the Republican Party for "many years" beyond 2024. Therefore, the accuracy of this prediction cannot yet be determined.

politicsgovernment
If Donald Trump wins a second term and takes office in January 2025, Lina Khan will no longer be serving as head of the Federal Trade Commission during that Trump administration.
So, look, I don't think that Lina Khan is going to be running that agency in a second Trump administration.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did win a second, non‑consecutive term in the 2024 U.S. presidential election and was inaugurated again as president on January 20, 2025, beginning his new administration at that time. (en.wikipedia.org)

Lina Khan’s official FTC biography lists her as former Chair, stating that she served as Chair of the Federal Trade Commission from June 15, 2021 to January 20, 2025. (ftc.gov) Independent biographical information likewise records her term as FTC Chair ending on January 20, 2025, with Andrew N. Ferguson succeeding her; it also notes that while she remained an FTC commissioner briefly until January 31, 2025, she was no longer Chair (the head of the agency) once Trump took office. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because:

  • The condition in the prediction (“a second Trump administration beginning in January 2025”) did occur, and
  • From the start of that administration onward, Lina Khan was not serving as Chair (i.e., not “running that agency”),

the prediction that she would not be running the FTC in a second Trump administration was borne out by events.

techai
When Apple releases the iPhone 16 with an on-device Apple-built LLM powering Siri (without sharing user data with third-party LLMs), it will trigger a major iPhone upgrade cycle, with a very large share of existing iPhone users upgrading specifically for this AI capability.
I will definitely upgrade to the iPhone 16... assuming that they roll their own LLM and use that to power Siri... assuming Apple gets that right, everyone's going to upgrade their iPhones.View on YouTube
Explanation

Apple did release the iPhone 16 in September 2024 with its broader Apple Intelligence branding, but the core scenario Sacks described never materialized:

  • The advanced Siri overhaul based on large‑language‑model tech that was advertised alongside iPhone 16 was delayed to 2026, not shipped with iPhone 16. Apple executives and reporting (e.g., Bloomberg, summarized by MacRumors and others) note that the personalized, LLM‑driven Siri features slipped to an iOS 26.4 release in spring 2026 after quality problems, despite being used in iPhone 16 marketing. (macrumors.com)
  • Instead of relying solely on an Apple‑built on‑device LLM, Apple is now planning to power major parts of revamped Siri with Google’s Gemini models running in Apple’s Private Cloud Compute, handling planning and summarization for Siri with a target around March 2026. That means the Siri upgrade is not purely on‑device nor purely Apple’s own model, contrary to the prediction’s premise about "rolling their own LLM" and not sharing data with third‑party LLMs. (androidcentral.com)
  • On the demand side, analyst work from UBS finds that last year’s iPhone 16 and its Apple Intelligence branding did not spur a widespread upgrade cycle: the average iPhone in use (outside China) remained about 37 months old, and UBS explicitly concluded there is “no groundbreaking AI use case” and no significant AI‑driven sales boost, contrary to expectations of a massive upgrade wave. (barrons.com)
  • Broader coverage of Apple’s 2025 software cycle similarly describes investors as underwhelmed by Apple’s AI progress and skeptical that current AI features will drive a major iPhone upgrade boom; Apple’s market cap fell on news of Siri delays, and analysts characterized updates as incremental rather than super‑cycle‑inducing. (businessinsider.com)

Given that (1) the exact condition Sacks specified—an iPhone 16 with a working, Apple‑only on‑device LLM powering Siri—still hasn’t occurred, and (2) the actual iPhone 16 + Apple Intelligence launch has not led to “everyone” upgrading or a clearly massive AI‑driven upgrade cycle, the prediction about a huge iPhone 16 AI upgrade wave is best judged wrong based on the real‑world outcome to date.

aitech
Within about one year from July 2024, the next generation of leading LLMs (e.g., successors to GPT‑4 and Claude 3) will improve to the point where their practical output quality for applications like Glue is effectively "A+"—substantially better and more consistently reliable than the current B+ level.
in a year or so we're going to be at the next gen version of all the models... At that point, it's going to be an A plus.View on YouTube
Explanation

The quote and context check out: in the July 12, 2024 All‑In episode, Sacks says Glue’s LLM‑powered results are “kinda like a B plus right now” and adds that “in a year or so… the next gen version of all the models… At that point, it’s going to be an A plus.”(podscripts.co)

Within roughly a year, his “next gen” condition did occur. OpenAI released several successor models to GPT‑4, including GPT‑4.5 in February 2025 and GPT‑4.1 in April 2025, followed by GPT‑5 and GPT‑5.1 later in 2025; these were marketed and benchmarked as substantially more capable and reliable than GPT‑4/4o, with improved coding, instruction following, and lower hallucination rates on certain tests.(en.wikipedia.org)

However, whether that constitutes "A+" practical quality for Glue‑style applications is inherently subjective and not directly measurable from public data:

  • No objective Glue metrics – Public coverage of Glue describes its AI as a virtual employee layered on top of Slack/Teams‑like chat, powered by models such as ChatGPT and Claude, but there are no later public benchmarks or statements from Sacks quantifying that its outputs have become “A+” versus the earlier “B+.”(techcrunch.com)
  • Hallucinations and reliability remain open issues – Even by late 2024 and through 2025, peer‑reviewed work and industry analysis still describe hallucinations as a “critical barrier” for enterprise use, with state‑of‑the‑art methods often failing to exceed ~80% factual faithfulness on some benchmarks.(arxiv.org) Studies and reporting in 2025 note that newer reasoning models like OpenAI’s o3 and o4‑mini can hallucinate in 30–50% of cases on certain tasks, and major outlets emphasize that leading LLMs still generate incorrect or fabricated content often enough to demand human verification.(livescience.com)
  • Mixed real‑world sentiment – Aggregated user‑review data shows that mentions of hallucinations in reviews of leading chatbots (ChatGPT, Gemini, Claude, etc.) dropped markedly between March and October 2025, but did not disappear; non‑trivial shares of users still report accuracy and hallucination concerns.(learn.g2.com)

Because “B+ vs A+” is Sacks’s own informal grading with no standardized threshold, and there is no transparent data on how Glue’s actual output quality changed relative to that scale, yet frontier models clearly did improve while still exhibiting meaningful errors, the prediction cannot be judged definitively true or false from available evidence. That fits best under “ambiguous” rather than “right” or “wrong.”

politicsgovernment
Joe Biden will not drop out of the 2024 presidential race before he completes and airs the scheduled sit‑down interview with George Stephanopoulos on the weekend following July 3, 2024.
Well, I don't think he's going to do that because he is scheduled to do a sit down interview with George Stephanopoulos. I think they're recording it on Friday. Right. Which is two days from there.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that President Joe Biden both completed and aired the scheduled sit‑down interview with George Stephanopoulos before he dropped out of the 2024 race.

  • ABC News announced that Biden would sit down with Stephanopoulos on Friday, July 5, 2024, with the interview taped that day in Wisconsin and aired in full as a primetime special on Friday, July 5, and again on This Week on Sunday, July 7. Clips began airing on World News Tonight that same Friday. (abc.com)
  • Biden did not withdraw from the 2024 presidential election until July 21, 2024, when he publicly announced his decision to end his re‑election campaign and endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris. (theguardian.com)

The prediction being evaluated is: “Joe Biden will not drop out of the 2024 presidential race before he completes and airs the scheduled sit‑down interview with George Stephanopoulos on the weekend following July 3, 2024.” Since Biden remained in the race through and well past the July 5–7 interview airings, this condition was satisfied.

Therefore, the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
Outcome of the early-July 2024 George Stephanopoulos interview will determine Biden’s 2024 candidacy: if the interview performance is broadly perceived as strong, public and intra‑party pressure for Biden to leave the race will substantially subside in the following weeks; if the performance is broadly perceived as poor, Biden will be forced out of the 2024 presidential race within the subsequent weeks and will not ultimately be the Democratic nominee.
In any event, that's coming out this weekend. I think the Biden presidency basically hinges on this interview. If Biden can show that he's sharp and he's responsive and not senile...I think if he knocks it out of the park, maybe he can quell all of this speculation. But if not, if it goes poorly, then I think he's done.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available reporting shows that the George Stephanopoulos ABC interview on July 5, 2024 did not restore confidence in Biden’s candidacy and instead was widely seen by key Democrats as failing to quell anxieties:

  • Coverage immediately afterward noted that the interview “did not assuage Democratic anxieties” and that more Democratic lawmakers publicly called on Biden to bow out of the race, adding to a growing chorus of concerned donors and strategists.(cnbc.com)
  • Hill Democrats described the interview as “not impressive,” saying “no one’s mind has been changed” and that Biden was “toast,” with lawmakers preparing to increase public pressure for him to step aside.(axios.com) ABC’s own follow‑up segment framed the situation as “pressure mounts on Biden after ABC News interview,” explicitly noting that the hoped‑for calming effect inside the party did not materialize and that the number of Democrats urging him to exit was growing.(abcnews.go.com) The Guardian similarly called the appearance “unlikely to appease his critics,” despite no major gaffes.(theguardian.com) Together this indicates the interview was broadly perceived as weak or at best mixed, not the kind of strong performance that would quell speculation.

What happened next lines up with the prediction’s “poor interview” branch:

  • Over the following days, intra‑party and donor pressure intensified, with more Democratic members of Congress and influential figures calling for Biden to step aside, largely rooted in concerns over his age, debate performance, and failure to calm fears in subsequent appearances, including the ABC interview.(cnbc.com)(axios.com)
  • On July 21, 2024—roughly 16 days after the interview—Biden announced he was dropping out of the 2024 presidential race and endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris as his replacement, explicitly bowing to “weeks of growing pressure” from within his own party.(cnbc.com)(axios.com) He thus exited the race within “the subsequent weeks,” as the prediction specified.
  • Following his withdrawal, Kamala Harris launched her campaign on July 21 and officially became the Democratic presidential nominee on August 5, 2024, meaning Biden was not ultimately the Democratic nominee.(en.wikipedia.org)

The prediction, as normalized, said: if the Stephanopoulos interview was broadly perceived as strong, pressure would subside; if it was broadly perceived as poor, Biden would be forced out within the next few weeks and would not end up as the nominee. The realized path matches the second branch: the interview was widely judged as failing in its core goal of reassuring Democrats, pressure escalated rather than subsided, and within about two weeks Biden ended his campaign and Harris became the nominee. Given these facts, the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
Kamala Harris will become President of the United States (via succession or election) as a result of the 2024 cycle; given Biden’s weakness and party constraints, she is the only realistic alternative and will ultimately assume the presidency, likely by January 20, 2025.
Thanks to your incessant demands for the hot swap, okay. You and many others. And this feeding frenzy... We are going to get President Kamala Harris. She's the only alternative.View on YouTube
Explanation

Kamala Harris did not become President of the United States as a result of the 2024 cycle.

Key events:

  • On July 21, 2024, Joe Biden announced he would not seek re‑election. This led to the launch of Kamala Harris’s 2024 presidential campaign the same day, and she officially became the Democratic nominee on August 5, 2024.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • In the November 5, 2024 election, Donald Trump was elected the 47th president, beginning a formal transition from President Joe Biden to President‑elect Trump.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Biden’s presidency ended on January 20, 2025; Kamala Harris’s term as vice president ended at the same time. She never assumed the presidency by succession.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Donald Trump was inaugurated as the 47th president on January 20, 2025 and has served in that role since then.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because Harris neither succeeded Biden as president nor won the 2024 election, and Donald Trump instead became (and remains) president, the prediction that “we are going to get President Kamala Harris” as the outcome of the 2024 cycle is wrong.

politicsgovernment
The 2024 Democratic presidential nominee will be either Joe Biden or Kamala Harris; no other Democrat (e.g., Gavin Newsom, Gretchen Whitmer, Michelle Obama, or an outsider like Jamie Dimon) will secure the nomination.
Look, what the prediction markets are showing is that it's not going to be a free for all. It's either going to be Harris or Biden. I mean, that's what the prediction markets are showing. And I think that's fundamentally right.View on YouTube
Explanation

Joe Biden initially ran for re‑election in 2024 but withdrew from the race on July 21, 2024, and endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris as his preferred successor. (en.wikipedia.org)

Following Biden’s withdrawal and endorsement, Harris announced her own presidential campaign and quickly consolidated delegate support, becoming the presumptive Democratic nominee. (en.wikipedia.org)

Through a virtual roll‑call vote in early August, Harris was formally confirmed as the Democratic Party’s 2024 presidential nominee (with sources noting the official nomination on August 5–6, 2024). (en.wikipedia.org)

No other Democrat—such as Gavin Newsom, Gretchen Whitmer, Michelle Obama, or an outsider—secured the nomination; the ticket was headed by Kamala Harris, not by any alternative candidate. (en.wikipedia.org)

Since the final nominee was Kamala Harris, one of the two outcomes the prediction allowed (Biden or Harris, with no one else), the prediction that “it’s either going to be Harris or Biden” was borne out by events.

politicsgovernment
For the 2024 U.S. presidential election, the Democratic Party will keep Joe Biden as its nominee and will not replace him with another candidate (including Kamala Harris) prior to the general election.
I think it's more likely than not that they're not going to replace Biden, because the only feasible alternative is Harris. And she'd be worse.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction stated that Democrats would not replace Joe Biden as their 2024 presidential nominee. In reality, Biden suspended his reelection campaign on July 21, 2024, and endorsed Kamala Harris. She quickly secured delegate support, became the presumptive nominee, and was formally chosen as the Democratic presidential nominee via a virtual roll call in early August and then at the Democratic National Convention, heading the ticket in the November 5, 2024 general election. (en.wikipedia.org)

Sacks @ 00:55:41Inconclusive
aiventure
The startup Safe Superintelligence Inc. (SSI), which emphasizes safety in developing superintelligence, will not become a top‑tier winner in the AGI race; its safety‑first approach will cause it to lose competitively to faster‑moving rivals like OpenAI and Google over the next several years.
I'm not bullish about that pitch because I think it it makes the company a little bit schizophrenic... So you've got to move very fast. On the other hand, you're saying you're going to basically make this very safe... safety concerns are a brake pedal... And so I don't but I don't think that's the recipe for winning because you're the guys who want to move slower.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, it’s too early to judge whether Safe Superintelligence Inc. (SSI) will ultimately fail to be a “top‑tier winner” in the AGI race due to its safety‑first strategy.

What we can see so far:

  • SSI was founded in June 2024 with a mission explicitly centered on building safe superintelligence and insulating safety from short‑term commercial pressure.(ssi.inc)
  • Through 2024–2025, SSI has operated in deep R&D mode, with no public model, API, or benchmarks; this is an intentional “straight‑shot” strategy focused on long‑term superintelligence rather than near‑term products.(asapdrew.com)
  • Despite the lack of products, SSI has raised around $3B at a valuation near $30–32B from top‑tier investors (a16z, Sequoia, DST, Alphabet, NVIDIA, etc.), putting it in the same financial league as leading frontier labs.(vctavern.com)

However, the prediction concerns whether over the next several years this safety‑first posture will cause SSI not to be a top‑tier AGI winner relative to OpenAI, Google, and other fast‑moving labs. The industry has not yet reached AGI or superintelligence, and no clear long‑term “winner” has emerged. SSI’s strategy and funding position keep it a serious contender, but there is also not yet evidence that it will win.

Because the core claim is about a multi‑year competitive outcome that has not yet played out, the prediction cannot be evaluated at this time, so the result is inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 00:57:06Inconclusive
aitechmarkets
In the emerging race to AGI over the coming years, AI companies that prioritize safety more than their competitors will systematically lose market share and technological leadership, leading to a Darwinian dynamic that favors less safety‑constrained firms.
I think this is maybe the tragic situation is we're going to have this competition by all these different companies to advance AI. And the companies that care about safety more than others are going to lose. And so you have this Darwinian effect going on where there's going to be a race to AGI.View on YouTube
Explanation

It is too early to determine whether this structural, multi‑year prediction has come true.

The claim is:

In the emerging race to AGI over the coming years, AI companies that prioritize safety more than their competitors will systematically lose market share and technological leadership, leading to a Darwinian dynamic that favors less safety‑constrained firms.

Key reasons this is inconclusive as of Nov 30, 2025:

  1. Timeframe: “over the coming years”
    The prediction explicitly concerns a multi‑year competitive dynamic in an industry that is still rapidly evolving. As of late 2025, only ~1.5 years have passed since the statement (June 2024), which is not long enough to see whether a long‑run “Darwinian” pattern systematically plays out across cycles of technology deployment, regulation, and market consolidation.

  2. Ambiguous mapping of “safety‑prioritizing” vs “less safety‑constrained” firms
    Major labs—OpenAI, Anthropic, Google DeepMind, Meta, and xAI—publicly emphasize both capability and safety. They differ in rhetoric, openness, and governance (e.g., Anthropic’s public positioning as more safety‑oriented, OpenAI’s capped‑profit structure, DeepMind’s integration within Google and focus on alignment research), but there is no clear, agreed‑upon ranking of which firms “care more about safety” in a way that would let us objectively test the prediction. Any classification here would be contestable and largely qualitative.

  3. Market and leadership status is still fluid

    • Different firms lead on different axes (model performance, user base, enterprise deals, research breakthroughs, chip access, etc.).
    • Leadership has already shifted multiple times since early GPT‑4–era systems, and regulatory, antitrust, and safety‑oriented governance efforts are still ramping up in the US, EU, and elsewhere. These moving parts make it premature to say that any systematic Darwinian effect has locked in.
  4. No clear evidence yet of a safety‑leadership tradeoff dominating the field
    While there have been tensions between releasing powerful models quickly and imposing strict safety constraints (e.g., staged releases, regional limitations, content restrictions), we do not yet see unambiguous, widely accepted evidence that more safety‑conscious firms are clearly and systematically losing overall market share and technological leadership because of their safety stance. Some firms perceived as relatively safety‑oriented have continued to secure large funding rounds, strategic partnerships, and regulatory goodwill, which could just as easily be interpreted as advantages rather than handicaps.

Because (a) the horizon of “coming years” has not fully played out, (b) the relevant concepts (who is most safety‑oriented, what counts as leadership) are not crisply measurable yet, and (c) industry structure and regulation are still in flux, the prediction cannot be fairly judged as right or wrong at this point.

Therefore the status is inconclusive (too early) rather than right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

Sacks @ 01:06:46Inconclusive
marketstech
If regulators do not require a la carte pricing that neutralizes bundle advantages, Microsoft will continue adding new products to its Office/365 bundle each year and will, over time, systematically dominate broad swaths of enterprise software markets through this bundling strategy.
If we don't do that, I do think that Microsoft will use the power of the bundle to systematically dominate enterprise software, and they won't take on everybody at once. But like I said, they'll every year they'll add a new product to the bundle.View on YouTube
Explanation

By November 30, 2025, there is some evidence consistent with parts of Saks’s thesis, but not enough – and the time horizon is too long – to say the full conditional prediction has clearly come true or failed.

1. Regulators did move toward a la carte-style remedies, at least for Teams
After the Slack/Salesforce complaint, the European Commission formally found that bundling Teams with Office/Microsoft 365 gave Teams an unfair distribution advantage and accepted legally binding commitments from Microsoft. Microsoft must now offer Office 365 / Microsoft 365 suites with and without Teams worldwide, with mandated price gaps between the two options and minimum standalone pricing for Teams, enforced for seven years. (microsoft.com)
Separately, the Australian ACCC has sued Microsoft over how it presented a more expensive Microsoft 365 + Copilot plan versus a cheaper “Classic” option without Copilot, again pushing toward clearer, a la carte‑style choices. (windowscentral.com)
These moves do not perfectly implement Saks’s exact remedy (he wanted the summed a la carte prices to equal the bundle price), but they undercut the simple "Teams is free in the bundle" story he was reacting to. That makes the antecedent of his conditional ("if we don’t do that") only partially true.

2. Microsoft is continuing to add and bundle new capabilities into Microsoft 365
Since mid‑2024, Microsoft has indeed layered more products and functionality into its 365 ecosystem:

  • In October 2025 it launched Microsoft 365 Premium for consumers, a higher-priced subscription that deeply integrates Copilot AI across Word, Excel, Outlook and more, plus Defender security features and 1 TB storage – effectively a new, richer bundle tier. (reuters.com)
  • Internal planning documents and announcements describe new AI services like “Tenant Copilot” and broader “Agent Factory” concepts being built directly into Microsoft 365, showing a continued pattern of embedding new functionality into the suite. (businessinsider.com)
    This supports the narrower part of his claim that Microsoft would keep adding new products/features into the 365 bundle on an ongoing basis.

3. "Systematically dominate broad swaths of enterprise software" is a long‑run, structural claim
As of 2025, Microsoft already had very high share in enterprise productivity (over 80% in the enterprise segment of office productivity software) and substantial positions in cloud and security, but it still faces strong, viable competitors across major enterprise categories (AWS and Google Cloud in IaaS, Salesforce/Oracle/SAP/others in enterprise apps, Google Workspace in productivity, and a large ecosystem of security vendors). (markets.financialcontent.com)
Regulatory pressure is increasing, not disappearing: the EU DMA gatekeeper regime, the EU Teams commitments, and UK/CMA scrutiny of Microsoft’s cloud licensing all push against unchecked expansion via bundling. (markets.financialcontent.com)
Given that Saks framed the outcome as something that would occur "over time" if regulators failed to act, and we are only ~17 months past the June 29, 2024 episode – with major regulatory interventions still unfolding – it’s too early to say whether Microsoft will, because of bundling, end up "systematically" dominating many more enterprise software segments than it already did.

4. Net assessment

  • Partially borne out: Microsoft has continued to enrich and promote bundled 365 offerings (including new AI and security capabilities), consistent with his concern about the power of the bundle. (reuters.com)
  • Partially undercut: Key regulators have imposed a la carte and pricing-structure remedies around Teams and are scrutinizing other aspects of Microsoft’s cloud and licensing behavior, so the simple “no regulatory response” scenario he described has not materialized. (microsoft.com)
  • Too early on the core outcome: Whether this will ultimately let Microsoft "systematically dominate" broad new swaths of enterprise software is a multi‑year question, and current data does not yet show a clear, new wave of monopoly-style dominance caused by post‑2024 bundling.

Because the central, long‑term consequence Saks predicted (systematic domination across broad enterprise categories due to unchecked bundling) cannot yet be clearly confirmed or falsified, the prediction is best classified as inconclusive (too early) at this point.

If the Delaware court awards the plaintiff’s lawyers in the Tesla pay-package case billions of dollars in fees, Delaware will see a significant loss of its status as the premier U.S. state for corporate incorporation, with a material shift of new or re-domiciling corporations choosing other jurisdictions instead of Delaware.
If they award these lawyers billions of dollars, which is what they're seeking, no one's going to want to do business in Delaware anymore because it subjects you to these stick up heists by trial lawyers. So I think that's going to be the next big shoe to drop is what are these trial lawyers get awarded?View on YouTube
Explanation

1. What actually happened in the Tesla fee case

  • The plaintiffs’ lawyers in Tornetta v. Musk asked for a fee in Tesla stock worth well over $5–7 billion.
  • In March 2024, Delaware Chancellor Kathaleen McCormick rejected that multi‑billion‑dollar request and instead awarded about $345 million in fees (cash or stock) — a huge sum, but not “billions of dollars” as Sacks’ conditional referred to.
    • Associated Press and Bloomberg coverage of the decision report the fee at roughly $345 million, far below the multi‑billion request. (apnews.com)

So the explicit trigger in the normalized prediction — Delaware awarding the lawyers billions of dollars in feesdid not occur.

2. What happened to Delaware’s status as a corporate hub

Since the January 2024 ruling voiding Musk’s Tesla pay package, there has been a noticeable but still modest “DExit” trend:

  • A Harvard Law Forum empirical study finds that from 2024 through mid‑2025, Delaware lost a net 11 large public companies (market cap > $250m) to reincorporations elsewhere (16 left, 5 moved in). (corpgov.law.harvard.edu)
  • The same analysis notes Delaware still accounts for ~80–90% of IPO incorporations, with only a slight dip in its share in early 2025. (thegamingboardroom.com)
  • A broader overview of the “Delaware corporate exodus” reports at least a dozen billion‑dollar public companies reincorporating away by late 2025, and an 8% drop in new business formations, but emphasizes there has been “no mass exodus”; defections are high‑profile but numerically small. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Delaware still hosts roughly two‑thirds of Fortune 500 companies and more than 2.1–2.2 million registered entities, and remains widely described by officials and legal experts as the premier corporate domicile, albeit under new competitive pressure from Texas and Nevada. (en.wikipedia.org)

So there is some material movement away from Delaware, but Delaware has not clearly lost its status as the leading U.S. state for incorporation; it is still dominant while facing increased competition and modest erosion at the margin.

3. Why the forecast is scored as ambiguous

The normalized prediction is explicitly conditional:

If the Delaware court awards the plaintiff’s lawyers billions in fees, then Delaware will suffer a significant loss of premier status, with a material shift of incorporations elsewhere.

  • The antecedent (billions awarded) never happened; the court capped the fee at ~$345m, not billions. (apnews.com)
  • Nonetheless, some exodus did occur after the Tesla ruling and broader Chancery decisions, but:
    • It is modest relative to Delaware’s enormous base, and Delaware clearly remains the primary incorporation venue.
    • The observed shifts are driven by a mix of factors (judicial scrutiny of founders, overall legal climate, tax and cost considerations), not specifically by a multi‑billion fee award that never materialized. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the key condition in Sacks’ forecast (a multi‑billion‑dollar fee award) did not occur, we cannot directly test his stated “if X then Y” claim. At the same time, Delaware’s dominance has been dented but not clearly “lost”, making it impossible to give a clean “right” or “wrong” verdict on the normalized consequence even by analogy.

Given those factors, the fairest evaluation is “ambiguous”: the conditional was never triggered, and the real‑world outcomes (modest DExit, continued Delaware dominance) do not let us definitively confirm or falsify the full, conditional prediction.

The newly launched Tesla mezcal product and the forthcoming All‑In branded liquor will both sell out of their available inventory shortly after their respective launches.
Well, it'll be. B [00:17:39.390]: Sold out by the time we launch our. K [00:17:41.030]: We're both going to be sold out.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence indicates that both products did, in fact, sell out of their initial available inventory shortly after launch:

  1. Tesla Mezcal

    • Tesla announced its $450 Tesla Mezcal around June 6, 2024; coverage notes that it "has since sold out" shortly after being announced and listed for sale on Tesla’s site. (autos.yahoo.com)
    • Multiple reports on the mezcal’s first release state that the initial batch sold out quickly in June and then later returned to the store for a holiday restock. (barrons.com)
    • Secondary-market listings and specialist retailers describe it as a limited release that is sold out from Tesla, with bottles reselling at a premium, reinforcing that Tesla’s own inventory was exhausted rapidly. (poshmark.com)
      Together, these show the initial Tesla Mezcal run sold out soon after launch, consistent with the prediction.
  2. All‑In branded liquor (Besties All‑In Tequila)

    • The All‑In Podcast later launched a limited-release spirits line, The Besties All‑In Tequila. A TechCrunch report on June 24, 2025 notes that the tequila, launched that Saturday night, "promptly sold out" according to liquor e‑commerce sites. (techcrunch.com)
    • The All‑In podcast’s own Wikipedia entry likewise records that the June 2025 tequila release (7,500 numbered bottles) sold out within 48 hours. (en.wikipedia.org)
      This directly matches the claim that the forthcoming All‑In liquor would quickly sell through its available inventory.

Since both the Tesla Mezcal and the All‑In tequila sold out their initial production runs shortly after launch, Sacks’s prediction that both products would quickly sell out is right.

politics
Following the Silicon Valley Trump fundraiser being discussed (held in late May 2024), there will be a noticeable cascade during the 2024 election cycle of high‑profile business and financial leaders publicly declaring support for Donald Trump, making such support increasingly socially acceptable in elite circles.
And I think that this event is going to break the ice on that. And maybe it'll create a preference cascade where all of a sudden it becomes acceptable to acknowledge the truth. And which is a lot of people support Trump. And it's not just this, it's also Steve Schwarzman came out. I think Bill Ackman's on the edge of coming out for Trump. So there's a lot of people who are now like flipping. And I think it could really start to cascade on itself.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the late‑May 2024 Silicon Valley Trump fundraiser would “break the ice” and trigger a preference cascade in which high‑profile business and finance figures would start openly backing Trump, making such support more acceptable in elite circles.

Evidence from the 2024 cycle shows exactly that pattern:

  • Within days, David Sacks and Chamath Palihapitiya’s San Francisco fundraiser for Trump (early June 2024) raised about $12 million and drew dozens of prominent tech investors. Jacob Helberg, a former Democratic fundraiser who himself donated about $1 million to Trump, said that in 2016 he knew only one Silicon Valley Trump supporter (Peter Thiel) but by mid‑2024 he counted them “in the dozens” and described the prior six months as seeing “the dam break.”(cnbc.com) In a separate interview he noted that “the social cost of supporting Trump isn’t as great as it was” and called himself one of a “cadre of high‑powered Silicon Valley businessmen” newly warming to Trump.(dailywire.com) That is precisely the dynamic Sacks forecast.

  • A dedicated Trump super PAC, America PAC, was founded by Elon Musk in 2024 with backing from multiple high‑profile tech investors including Joe Lonsdale, Tyler and Cameron Winklevoss, Ken Howery, Shaun Maguire, and Antonio Gracias—an organized cluster of Silicon Valley and crypto‑aligned business elites publicly financing Trump’s bid.(en.wikipedia.org) Separately, Trump’s main super PAC, MAGA Inc., saw very large checks from billionaire financiers Timothy Mellon, Diane Hendricks, Howard Lutnick, and Paul Singer in mid‑2024, including Mellon’s $50 million contributions in both May 31 and July, underscoring strong, visible support from the financial elite.(en.wikipedia.org)

  • Several very prominent business figures who had been Democrats or non‑Trump Republicans made public pro‑Trump moves after this period:

    • Elon Musk, by early 2024 already leaning right, formally endorsed Trump minutes after the July 2024 assassination attempt and went on to become the single largest individual donor of the 2024 election, giving roughly a quarter‑billion dollars in support of Trump and allied efforts.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Bill Ackman, a long‑time Democratic donor who had backed Dean Phillips and RFK Jr. earlier in the cycle, publicly endorsed Trump on July 13–14, 2024, in widely covered posts on X, explicitly framing it as a careful, data‑driven choice.(investing.com)
    • Marc Andreessen and Ben Horowitz, co‑founders of Andreessen Horowitz and historically Democratic donors, announced on their own podcast and in a TechCrunch‑covered statement on July 16, 2024, that they would support and vote for Trump, citing tech and crypto policy as reasons.(techcrunch.com)
    • Thomas Peterffy, a billionaire who had previously said he would not fund Trump, reversed course and in August 2024 both attended a high‑dollar Aspen fundraiser for Trump and contributed hundreds of thousands of dollars after giving nothing to Trump earlier in the cycle.(en.wikipedia.org) Together with other financiers such as Scott Bessent—an ex‑Democratic donor turned seven‑figure Trump fundraiser—this represents exactly the “flipping” of business and finance leaders Sacks anticipated.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Compiled endorsement lists for Trump’s 2024 campaign show a substantial roster of named CEOs, founders, hedge‑fund managers, and crypto leaders in the finance and technology categories, including Musk, Ackman, Andreessen, Charles Hoskinson, Thomas Peterffy, Joe Ricketts, the Winklevoss twins, and others.(en.wikipedia.org) Post‑election commentary by Bill Gates explicitly notes the emergence of a “significant right‑of‑center group” of tech leaders—he specifically names Musk, Sacks, Thiel, Patrick Collison, Horowitz, and Andreessen—who had backed Trump in 2024, emphasizing how unusual this was given Silicon Valley’s historic Democratic tilt.(nypost.com)

At the same time, many corporate leaders continued to back Democrats (especially Kamala Harris once she became the nominee), and some high‑profile Republicans on Wall Street, like Ken Griffin, remained outspoken Trump critics or sat the race out.(en.wikipedia.org) But Sacks did not predict that elite support would be monolithic—only that there would be a noticeable cascade and that open Trump support would become more acceptable in elite business circles.

Given:

  • the rapid sequence of highly visible endorsements and mega‑donations from new or previously reluctant business and finance leaders after the late‑May / early‑June 2024 fundraiser,
  • explicit contemporary descriptions of a “dam break” in Silicon Valley Trump support and a reduced social cost to backing him,
  • and subsequent recognition that a sizable, coherent pro‑Trump faction had emerged among tech and financial elites,

Sacks’s prediction that the fundraiser would be followed by a noticeable preference cascade of elite business and financial support for Trump during the 2024 cycle is best judged as right.

politicsgovernment
Despite internal concerns, the Democratic Party will not successfully execute a late switch to a new presidential nominee in 2024; Joe Biden will remain their candidate through the election.
But it's way too late for that.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that Democrats would not pull off a late switch and that Joe Biden would remain their nominee through the 2024 election. In reality, Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024, citing the best interests of his party and the country, and he endorsed Kamala Harris as the Democratic nominee. (cnbc.com) Following his withdrawal, the Democratic Party moved forward with Harris, who officially became the Democratic presidential nominee on August 5, 2024, and then headed the ticket in the November election, which she ultimately lost to Donald Trump. (en.wikipedia.org) Because there was a late switch and Biden did not remain the nominee through Election Day, Sacks’s prediction is wrong.

marketsai
Following the ~20% post‑earnings drop discussed on May 31, 2024, Salesforce stock will, in retrospect, prove to have been a buying opportunity, as Marc Benioff successfully pivots Salesforce to benefit from the AI trend rather than missing it.
my view is that I don't have a strong view about the stock, but my sense is it's probably a buying opportunity. I mean, I think Salesforce is still a great company... my guess is he's going to figure out how to take advantage of this, this AI trend for the company. They're not going to miss it. They're not going to get caught totally flat footed.View on YouTube
Explanation

How the prediction was framed

Sacks’ prediction had two parts:

  1. The ~20% post‑earnings drop in late May 2024 would be a buying opportunity for Salesforce (CRM).
  2. Marc Benioff would successfully pivot Salesforce to benefit from the AI trend rather than missing it or being caught flat‑footed.

1. Was the May 2024 crash a buying opportunity?

  • After weak Q1 FY25 results, Salesforce fell about 20% on May 30, 2024, closing near $216, its worst day since 2004. (upi.com)
  • The next day (May 31, 2024) it rebounded but still finished the month around $232–234 per share. (statmuse.com)
  • From that level, CRM went on a very strong run:
    • It reached a highest closing price of $365.66 on December 4, 2024, up roughly 55–60% from the late‑May closing level. (statmuse.com)
    • It ended 2024 at about $333 per share, still ~40% above the May 31 close. (digrin.com)
  • By late November 2025, the stock has round‑tripped back near its May 2024 level (around $230.54 vs. ~$232–234 then), meaning a buy‑and‑hold investor from May 2024 to now would be roughly flat and would have underperformed the broader market. (statmuse.com)

However, Sacks did not specify a holding period—only that the drop would prove to be a buying opportunity. In the 6–12 months after the call, buyers had multiple chances to realize very substantial gains (40–60% at year‑end 2024 and even more at the December 4 peak). In common investing language, that qualifies the May 2024 plunge as having been a buying opportunity, even if the stock later gave back those gains.

2. Did Benioff pivot Salesforce to AI instead of missing the trend?

Evidence strongly supports that Salesforce leaned into AI rather than missing it:

  • Salesforce launched Einstein Copilot, a conversational generative‑AI assistant embedded across its CRM, first announced in February 2024 and made generally available in April 2024; it’s grounded in customer data via Data Cloud and marketed as part of the “Einstein 1 Platform” (now Salesforce Platform). (salesforce.com)
  • Salesforce then introduced Agentforce, positioning itself as the “#1 AI CRM” and emphasizing autonomous AI agents that automate customer‑facing workflows. Earnings commentary highlighted hundreds of early Agentforce deals and a large AI deal pipeline. (cnbc.com)
  • By mid‑2025, management and analysts were pointing to fast‑growing AI and data‑related annual recurring revenue (hundreds of millions to over $1 billion in ARR) and to AI as a central driver of Salesforce’s long‑term growth plan, including guidance to exceed $60 billion in revenue by 2030 with AI‑driven products like Agentforce 360 at the core. (reuters.com)
  • Internally, Benioff has said AI “digital employees” now do roughly 30–50% of Salesforce’s own work, underlining how aggressively the company has adopted AI in its operations. (sfchronicle.com)

There is ongoing debate about how quickly Salesforce can monetize these AI offerings, and some recent commentary notes investor concern that AI could be more disruptive than accretive until monetization catches up. (barrons.com) But the factual record is clear: Salesforce did not sit out the AI wave—it rebranded itself as an AI‑first CRM platform, launched multiple AI products, built a substantial AI deal pipeline, and tied its long‑term financial guidance directly to AI.

Overall assessment

  • Stock call: The May 2024 plunge was a buying opportunity over the subsequent year, with 40–60% gains available to investors who bought near the lows and exited during the 2024–early‑2025 rally.
  • Strategic/AI call: Benioff did pivot Salesforce aggressively toward AI, with Einstein Copilot, Agentforce, and AI‑driven revenue and internal usage becoming central to the company’s narrative and product roadmap.

Given that both key elements of Sacks’ prediction largely materialized, despite later volatility and lingering questions about AI monetization, the prediction is best classified as right overall.

Sacks @ 01:23:17Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
Donald Trump’s New York hush‑money/business‑records conviction will eventually be overturned on appeal, but not until after the November 5, 2024 U.S. presidential election.
So my guess is that at the end of the day, this case is going to get tossed on appeal, but that's probably going to happen after the election, after November 5th.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that Donald Trump’s New York hush‑money/business‑records conviction would eventually be overturned on appeal, but only after the November 5, 2024 election.

What has actually happened so far:

  • Trump was convicted in New York on 34 felony counts of falsifying business records related to the Stormy Daniels hush‑money payments on May 30, 2024, and later received an unconditional discharge at sentencing on January 10, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Trump has appealed the conviction in New York’s state courts (notice of appeal filed January 29, 2025; a formal appeal seeking to overturn the conviction filed in October 2025). (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Separately, a federal appeals court in November 2025 gave him another chance to try to move the case to federal court, where he would then argue for dismissal on presidential‑immunity grounds, but that ruling only ordered further consideration—it did not vacate the conviction. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Major overviews of Trump’s legal status as of late November 2025 still describe him as convicted in the New York hush‑money case and “seeking to overturn that conviction,” indicating no court has yet set the verdict aside. (apnews.com)

Because the conviction remains in place and the appeals (both in state court and via the attempted federal removal route) are still unresolved as of November 30, 2025, we don’t yet know whether it will “get tossed on appeal.” It has remained in effect through and beyond the November 5, 2024 election, matching his timing claim so far, but the core question—whether it will ultimately be overturned—has not been decided. Therefore the prediction’s accuracy is inconclusive (too early to tell).

politics
Democrats’ strategy of using Trump’s status as a convicted felon from the New York case as a central line of attack in the 2024 campaign will ultimately fail to prevent his political success (i.e., it will not be decisive in stopping him from winning or remaining competitive).
I think at the end of the day, this is probably not going to work.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump was convicted in May 2024 on 34 felony counts in the New York hush‑money case, making him a legally defined felon during the 2024 campaign.(apnews.com) After the verdict, Democrats explicitly incorporated his felony status into their messaging: the DNC and Biden/Harris campaigns ran paid ads and billboards labeling him a convicted felon and framing the race as prosecutor versus felon, including the Phoenix billboard, the Character Matters ad, and the Law & Order–style convention spot, as well as broader strategy pieces describing this contrast as a key weapon.(cbsnews.com) Despite this, Trump won the 2024 presidential election with 312 electoral votes and a popular‑vote plurality, and Republicans captured the presidency and control of Congress, indicating that the felon‑focused line of attack did not prevent his political success or keep him from remaining highly competitive and ultimately victorious.(en.wikipedia.org) Given that the strategy was clearly used and Trump still prevailed, Sacks’s prediction that it was probably not going to work is borne out by the eventual results.

As a result of the Scarlett Johansson vs. OpenAI dispute (including any lawsuit or settlement), Scarlett Johansson will end up with an equity or economic ownership stake in OpenAI that is larger than Sam Altman’s personal ownership stake in the company, determined by the final structure of ownership after the dispute is resolved.
The sentence is as Scarlett Johansson's going to end up owning more of this company than Sam Altman. That's what's going to happen.
Explanation

Available reporting shows that the Scarlett Johansson–OpenAI dispute over the ChatGPT "Sky" voice ended with OpenAI taking down the voice and issuing explanations/apologies, not with any transfer of ownership or equity to Johansson. Articles describing the incident through 2024–2025 say she hired lawyers, sent letters, and that OpenAI "reluctantly agreed" to remove Sky, but explicitly note she has not filed a lawsuit and mention no settlement involving equity or economic participation in OpenAI.(cnbc.com)

On Sam Altman’s side, OpenAI’s unusual structure and later restructuring into a public benefit corporation have been heavily covered. Reuters’ report on the October 2025 restructuring states that Microsoft holds 27% and the OpenAI Foundation 26%, and that Altman will not receive equity in the restructured company.(reuters.com) Business Insider (October 2025) further notes that although a 7% stake for Altman was at one point discussed, it "has not materialized" and he still has no direct equity in OpenAI.(businessinsider.com) TechCrunch and related coverage clarify that any exposure he had was a negligible indirect interest via venture funds (YC/Sequoia), not a personal direct ownership stake in OpenAI, and that even that exposure has been reduced or sold.(techcrunch.com)

Crucially, across major business and technology outlets and detailed discussions of OpenAI’s cap table and governance, there is no indication at all that Scarlett Johansson has any equity or economic ownership stake in OpenAI, let alone one granted as part of a legal settlement. Profiles and later pieces that revisit the controversy simply say she forced OpenAI to withdraw the Sky voice; none mention her as an investor or shareholder.(nypost.com)

Given that (1) Johansson appears to have 0% ownership, with no reported equity or profit participation arising from the dispute, and (2) Altman has no direct equity stake in OpenAI and only ever had at most a tiny, indirect fund exposure, Johansson does not "end up owning more of this company than Sam Altman" in any meaningful, reported sense. At best, both have zero direct equity; zero is not greater than zero. Therefore, on the evidence available by November 30, 2025, Sacks’s prediction is wrong.

Sacks @ 00:20:44Inconclusive
aitechgovernment
If the Scarlett Johansson vs. OpenAI dispute over the "Sky" voice is litigated to a substantive legal outcome instead of being quietly settled, the resulting court decisions or legislation will create more restrictive and unfavorable fair-use standards for AI and content companies than those that existed prior to this case.
because it is such an industry leading company, I think we could end up with some very bad, fair use precedents or laws because Scarlett Johansson is so sympathetic as a plaintiff compared to open AI. And it's, you know, unless they show us some discovery that proves that they really did hire the voice actor and all the rest of it. I mean, this could lead to some very bad precedents for the industry around fair use.
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the Scarlett Johansson vs. OpenAI dispute over the ChatGPT “Sky” voice has not been litigated to a substantive court outcome, nor has it produced specific legislation clearly traceable to a Johansson–OpenAI case.

What has happened:

  • In May 2024 Johansson publicly accused OpenAI of using a voice “eerily similar” to hers, said she had hired legal counsel, and that her lawyers sent letters to Sam Altman and OpenAI demanding details on how the Sky voice was created. OpenAI then paused/removed the Sky voice and apologized, while denying that it was intended to imitate her. (cnbc.com)
  • Multiple later reports explicitly note that Johansson has not filed a lawsuit against OpenAI; her action has remained at the demand‑letter/PR‑pressure stage rather than becoming a docketed case (e.g., no “Johansson v. OpenAI” in reported litigation). (techtimes.com)
  • AI‑related fair‑use and likeness law has evolved since 2024, but via other cases and policy moves (e.g., Bartz v. Anthropic and Kadrey v. Meta on fair use for AI training; proposed or enacted likeness/AI‑disclosure legislation in the U.S. and U.K.), none of which arise from a litigated Johansson–OpenAI lawsuit. Some of these decisions are actually relatively favorable to AI firms on fair use for training data. (apnews.com)

The prediction, as normalized, was conditional: if the Johansson–OpenAI dispute were litigated to a substantive outcome, it would produce more restrictive, unfavorable fair‑use standards for AI/content companies. Because that antecedent (“is litigated to a substantive legal outcome”) has not occurred yet, we have no way to observe whether the predicted consequence about bad precedents would have followed.

It is also still possible (though increasingly less likely with time) that Johansson could file suit in the future, which might then influence precedent or legislation. Until such a case actually exists and is resolved, the prediction cannot be definitively scored as right or wrong.

Given that the key triggering event has not happened, the correct classification is inconclusive rather than right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:23:21Inconclusive
techai
Over time, OpenAI will shift its primary business model away from direct B2C subscriptions toward B2B monetization, mainly by charging for and monetizing applications and services built on top of its models.
Well, I think you're assuming there that the long term business model of OpenAI is in B2C subscriptions. And I think that's probably the least attractive business model they have available to them... So I suspect they're going to move in more of a B2B direction over time, because that's where the real money is. And probably the way they do that is by monetizing all the apps that are built on top of it.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, OpenAI’s current revenue mix still appears to be dominated by subscriptions to ChatGPT rather than by a B2B app‑platform model, but the company is clearly pushing harder into B2B, so it’s too early to judge the long‑term claim.

Key evidence:

  • Multiple analyses report that the majority of OpenAI’s revenue comes from ChatGPT subscriptions (Plus, Team, Enterprise). One strategy analysis notes that product subscriptions (ChatGPT Plus/Team/Enterprise) make up the bulk of revenue, while API usage is a smaller portion. (deepstarstrategic.com) An essay summarizing reporting from The Information similarly estimates that over 70% of OpenAI’s revenue comes from premium ChatGPT access. (johncandeto.com) A Financial Times piece from mid‑2025 says OpenAI’s ARR nearly doubled to $10B, driven largely by demand for ChatGPT subscriptions, again underscoring subscription‑centric economics. (ft.com) Reuters, citing The Information, also frames OpenAI’s long‑term projections in terms of hundreds of millions of paying ChatGPT subscribers by 2030, positioning ChatGPT as one of the world’s largest subscription services. (reuters.com) Collectively, this suggests that, so far, the primary business model has not moved away from subscription access to ChatGPT.
  • At the same time, OpenAI is clearly intensifying its B2B focus: it has a dedicated "Growth & GTM Strategy – B2B Monetization" team tasked with shaping commercial strategy across B2B channels, including pricing, packaging, and enterprise GTM. (openai.com) There are also large‑scale enterprise and platform deals (e.g., PwC‑sold enterprise offerings, Intuit’s multiyear strategic partnership, and a $100M+ agents/AI‑services partnership with Databricks) that are explicitly about monetizing business use and embedding OpenAI models into other companies’ products. (johncandeto.com) These moves support the directional part of the prediction (“move in more of a B2B direction”).
  • Regarding “monetizing all the apps that are built on top of it”: OpenAI launched the GPT Store in January 2024, allowing third parties to create and publish custom GPTs and introducing a builder revenue program where creators are paid based on engagement. (openai.com) This is indeed a platform for apps built on top of OpenAI models, but available reporting focuses on it as an additional ecosystem and creator‑payout mechanism; there is no strong evidence that OpenAI’s main revenue now comes from taking a cut of third‑party apps, as opposed to continuing to monetize via ChatGPT subscriptions (consumer and business tiers) and direct API/enterprise contracts.

Putting this together:

  • Parts that are directionally supported: OpenAI has moved more into B2B (enterprise tiers, big corporate partnerships, dedicated B2B monetization org). That aligns with the prediction’s general direction of a stronger B2B focus.
  • Parts not yet observed: Available data indicates that ChatGPT subscriptions (a mix of B2C and seat‑based B2B) still account for the majority of revenue, so we do not yet see a clear shift of the primary business model away from subscription access. Nor is there evidence that revenue from monetizing third‑party apps built on top of OpenAI (via the GPT Store, etc.) has become the main business model.
  • Time horizon: The prediction is explicitly framed as a long‑term, “over time” shift. Given that only ~18 months have passed since the May 2024 podcast and OpenAI is still rapidly evolving, the current evidence doesn’t conclusively validate or falsify a long‑run business‑model change.

Because (1) the core business is still subscription‑centric today, but (2) OpenAI is clearly moving more deeply into B2B and platform plays, and (3) the prediction is explicitly long‑term, the fairest judgment as of late 2025 is that it’s too early to tell whether Sacks’s full prediction will ultimately be correct.

ventureai
Because of GPT‑4o and similar advances in foundation models, most of the R&D invested over the last 2–5 years into building proprietary conversational/virtual customer support agents (especially work focused on core conversational ability and speed) will be rendered obsolete, and new customer support agent startups built on the latest models from 2024 onward will have a structural advantage over those earlier efforts.
there are a whole bunch of startups out there that were creating virtual customer support agents... I think their product roadmaps just became obsolete... my guess is that hundreds of millions of dollars of R&D just went out the window. And probably this is the best time to be creating a customer support agent company if you're doing it two years ago, five years ago. Your work is just like been obsolete.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since GPT‑4o’s May 2024 launch shows that frontier foundation models have rapidly become the core of many new and existing customer‑support agents, but there isn’t clear, measurable proof that most of the R&D from the previous 2–5 years is now obsolete or that new 2024‑era startups have a durable structural advantage.

What clearly did happen

  • GPT‑4o and GPT‑4o mini were explicitly positioned and priced for high‑volume automation use cases like customer‑service agents; OpenAI and industry coverage highlight customer‑support automation as a prime application, with lower costs and better latency than earlier models. (en.wikipedia.org) Case‑study style pieces describe GPT‑4o cutting support costs and handling large fractions of customer inquiries for companies like Octopus Energy or Lunar Bank, reinforcing that these models are now central to modern support stacks. (ptolemay.com)
  • Major CX platforms such as Zendesk quickly rolled GPT‑4o into production. Zendesk announced in May 2024 that it rolled out GPT‑4o across its AI offering within 24 hours to improve speed and quality for bots and agents. (zendesk.com) By March 2025, Zendesk was piloting a new class of agentic AI agents powered by OpenAI models (including GPT‑4o), explicitly moving away from older intent‑based bots toward generative, reasoning‑based agents. (openai.com) This supports the direction of Sacks’s claim: older, rule/intent‑driven conversational tech is being superseded by LLM‑centric agents.
  • Many new tools and indie products for “AI support teams” launched in 2024–2025 are built directly on GPT‑4o, Claude, Gemini, etc., without proprietary base models, and claim high automation rates (e.g., founders reporting ~80% of tickets auto‑handled using GPT‑4o‑plus‑other‑LLMs pipelines). (reddit.com) This shows that new entrants can reach strong performance quickly by standing on top of the latest foundation models, consistent with the idea that the bar for proprietary conversational tech has been raised.

Why the prediction can’t be cleanly scored as right or wrong

  • Zendesk and similar incumbents are not being structurally displaced by 2024‑born startups; they are themselves integrating GPT‑4o and newer models, leveraging extensive pre‑existing R&D in routing, workflows, data infrastructure, UI, and distribution. Their own case study emphasizes that they can benchmark and deploy new models (including OpenAI’s reasoning models) in under 24 hours, specifically to reuse their existing platform rather than scrap it. (openai.com) That’s very different from “your work is obsolete” in the sense of wasted R&D.
  • Industry‑level data still show that end‑to‑end AI agents handle a minority of total customer‑service volume; human agents and traditional systems remain the backbone. For example, Gartner’s projection that only about 10% of customer‑service interactions will be fully automated by AI by 2026 implies that earlier investments in knowledge bases, workflows, and tooling continue to matter significantly alongside new LLM agents. (linkedin.com)
  • There is no public, quantitative evidence that “hundreds of millions of dollars” of R&D from 2019–2022 virtual‑agent startups has literally “gone out the window.” Many such companies have simply swapped or layered in GPT‑4/4o (or competitors) under the hood rather than discarding their products entirely; public announcements tend to frame this as an upgrade, not a write‑off.
  • Some large enterprises have moved away from proprietary access to OpenAI’s models toward custom or open‑source stacks for cost, latency, or privacy reasons. A prominent example is AT&T, which initially used ChatGPT/GPT‑4 to analyze customer‑service call summaries, then replaced it with a hybrid system of distilled and open‑source models (including Llama 70B), cutting costs to about 35% of the ChatGPT‑based solution while retaining most of the accuracy. (businessinsider.com) This suggests that, even post‑GPT‑4o, there is still strategic value in investing in custom modeling rather than that R&D being per se obsolete.

Net assessment

  • Directionally, Sacks’s intuition—that frontier models like GPT‑4o would make it much easier for new teams to build high‑quality, fast conversational agents and would undermine older, intent‑based/hand‑rolled conversational tech—has been borne out in practice.
  • However, the strong form of the claim (“most” 2–5‑year R&D in virtual agents is now obsolete; new GPT‑4o‑era startups have a structural advantage over earlier efforts) is not something we can confirm or falsify from available data: incumbents have generally adapted by integrating the same models, and there’s no systematic evidence that earlier R&D has been rendered worthless or that pre‑2022 startups are being displaced en masse.

Because the observable facts support the general trend but do not let us decisively judge the extent (“most,” “hundreds of millions… out the window,” “structural advantage”), the prediction is best classified as ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

aitech
For application developers who build features that overlap too much with what frontier AI models are learning to do natively, those overlapping features will be rendered obsolete within a few months of major model upgrades.
If you're an app developer, the key thing to understand is where does model innovation end and your innovation begin? Because if you get that wrong, you'll end up doing a bunch of stuff that the model will just obsolete in a few months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since mid‑2024 supports sacks’s conditional claim that app features which closely overlap with frontier models tend to be wiped out within months of major upgrades.

Even before GPT‑4o, this pattern was visible: when ChatGPT added native PDF upload and Q&A in late 2023, TechCrunch reported that a single feature change made the core offering of multiple PDF‑wrapper startups redundant, sharply undercutting businesses like PDF.ai, ChatPDF, AskYourPDF and similar tools almost overnight. Later analysis of these events describes how those wrappers saw significant usage drops once ChatGPT could do the same job natively. (techcrunch.com)

After GPT‑4o’s May 2024 release and its follow‑on upgrades, OpenAI rapidly folded more capabilities directly into the base models: real‑time multimodal chat, advanced voice agents, cheaper small models like GPT‑4o‑mini, and then native image generation that replaced DALL‑E 3 inside ChatGPT. Each wave reduced the gap between what a generic model could do out‑of‑the‑box and what many specialized “AI apps” were selling as standalone products. (en.wikipedia.org)

Market analyses now describe almost exactly what sacks warned about. A 2025 review from Market Clarity estimates that for thin “wrapper” startups, the next GPT iteration creates a high (70–80%) chance of serious impact, with the startup’s differentiating features typically absorbed into the platform within 6–12 months of a major model release. (mktclarity.com) Another Market Clarity piece documents how previous OpenAI launches immediately threatened successful wrappers, and notes Sam Altman’s explicit warning that companies which merely wrap GPT‑4 will be “steamrolled” once those features are shipped natively. (mktclarity.com)

Founder and investor commentary in 2024–25 ties this directly to GPT‑4o and its peers. A widely shared LinkedIn analysis notes that each time a major LLM update lands—specifically naming GPT‑4o, Claude 3.5, and Gemini 2—dozens of niche products like generic summarizers, copilots, and research helpers become unnecessary because the base models now perform those tasks better and more cheaply. (linkedin.com) Another investor piece describes many “ChatGPT wrapper” founders openly telling VCs they must raise funding before OpenAI ships their entire product as a first‑party feature, underscoring that platform obsolescence is already a lived risk, not just a theoretical one. (linkedin.com)

Plenty of application‑layer companies are still alive—but the ones surviving are those that add proprietary data, deep workflow integration, or distribution advantages that go beyond what the raw models provide. That is precisely the boundary sacks highlighted between model innovation and app‑layer innovation. Given the documented cases where overlapping wrappers were effectively made obsolete within a few months of new GPT‑4o‑class or similar releases, his prediction is borne out by what has actually happened in the market.

aitech
Future AI models used within Glue (and similar enterprise chat tools) will become capable of automatically inferring which internal data source or repository to query, without users having to explicitly specify it, making AI assistance more seamless than the May 2024 state.
in the future it's going to figure it out on its own. So it's going to become more and more seamless, but.View on YouTube
Explanation

By late 2025, several enterprise chat/assistant products are doing essentially what Sacks predicted: models automatically route to the relevant internal data sources without users having to name a specific repository each time.

  1. Glue itself has moved in this direction. Glue AI now:

    • Sits in every conversation and "leverages context from your workspace" (threads, attachments) and web data when you simply @‑mention it and ask a question, rather than you pointing it to a particular thread or file each time.
    • Is described as using context from "threads, attachments, and connected apps (with permission)" to answer questions, implying it can pull from whatever connected sources are relevant rather than requiring the user to specify which one on each query. (docs.glue.ai)
  2. Glue added MCP-based integrations that let the model pick the right external tool. In 2025 Glue shipped MCP support and a curated directory of MCP servers for apps like Linear, Asana, Notion, Sentry, Stripe, Vercel, etc. In use, you can just ask Glue AI in a thread to do things like "create a Linear issue" or "look up data from an internal system," and the system invokes the appropriate MCP server/tool behind the scenes rather than you manually choosing an API endpoint. (docs.glue.ai)

  3. Anthropic’s Claude Enterprise Search is a clear realization of the prediction in a “similar enterprise chat tool.” Claude’s 2025 Microsoft 365 connector and Enterprise Search feature are explicitly designed so that one question to Claude can search across a company’s connected data sources–SharePoint, OneDrive, Outlook, Teams, and other apps–in a single shot. Anthropic’s own example: ask about your company’s remote‑work policy and Claude automatically pulls from HR documents in SharePoint, email discussions in Outlook, and team guidelines from various sources into one answer. Users no longer have to say "now search SharePoint" vs. "now search Outlook"—the model infers which repositories to query based on the question. (anthropic.com)

  4. Broader ecosystem trend confirms the direction. Microsoft 365 Copilot’s Researcher agent similarly leans on Microsoft Graph to draw from meetings, emails, chats, and SharePoint files, with users mainly expressing what they want rather than formulating per‑repository queries—evidence that mainstream enterprise assistants are converging on automatic source selection. (techcommunity.microsoft.com)

Given these shipped capabilities in Glue and closely related enterprise assistants like Claude for Enterprise and Microsoft 365 Copilot, the world has clearly moved toward exactly what Sacks described: AI models in enterprise chat that mostly “figure out on their own” which internal data sources to hit, making assistance more seamless than it was in May 2024. Therefore, the prediction is best classified as right.

aitech
By the time a GPT‑5‑class model is available, enterprise chat tools like Glue will be able to support effectively “promptless” AI behavior, where the AI autonomously interjects into conversations when it detects it has relevant, helpful information, without being explicitly summoned by a user.
That's where I want to go with it is I call that prompt list, which is I want the AI just to chime in when it determines that it has relevant information and can help the team, even if it hasn't been summoned yet. But we need some model improvement for that, frankly. I mean, we'll be able to get there by GPT five, but that's totally where this is headed.View on YouTube
Explanation

GPT‑5, a “GPT‑5‑class” multimodal foundation model from OpenAI, was released on August 7, 2025 and is now widely available via ChatGPT and Microsoft Copilot, satisfying the timeline condition “by the time a GPT‑5‑class model is available.”(en.wikipedia.org)

By that point, at least some enterprise chat environments do support effectively “promptless” AI behavior very close to what Sacks described:

  • Doti Autopilot for Slack is an AI assistant specifically designed to sit in Slack channels and listen in the background. Its documentation states that Autopilot:

    • “monitors messages in enabled channels,”
    • “detects valid questions,”
    • “replies automatically when it can confidently help,” and
    • does so “without requiring the user to tag @doti,” adding that “users might not even know Doti is there – and yet their questions get answered within seconds.”(help.doti.ai)
      This matches the prediction’s idea of an AI that “just [chimes] in” with relevant, helpful information in a team chat without being explicitly summoned.
  • Slack’s own AI/agent framework describes AI agents in Slack as “autonomous, proactive applications” that can operate inside channels and DMs, analyze conversational context, and take actions or respond based on automated triggers rather than only direct prompts.(docs.slack.dev) This supports the claim that the enterprise chat stack is moving toward embedded, always‑on agents.

Glue itself, the product Sacks co‑founded, has shipped extensive agentic AI features—MCP integration so Glue AI can act across external tools, multi‑step tool use, and AI Rules/Suggestion Rules that let it propose thread names and recipients and run complex actions once a user asks for help.(docs.glue.ai) However, the publicly documented behavior still appears to be user‑initiated (via @‑mentions, AI sessions, or explicit actions) rather than a fully autonomous “chime‑in on any conversation” mode.

Taken literally as a prediction about Glue’s own feature set, the claim is not yet clearly fulfilled. But as normalized—“enterprise chat tools like Glue will be able to support effectively promptless AI behavior by the GPT‑5 era”—the ecosystem now includes Slack‑based tools (e.g., Doti Autopilot) that deliver exactly this: background agents in enterprise chat that autonomously interject when they detect they can help, by or before the GPT‑5 timeframe. On that broader reading, the prediction has effectively come true.

Sacks @ 01:34:33Inconclusive
markets
Alphabet/Google’s market capitalization will reach approximately $5 trillion at some point in the future, despite earlier AI missteps, driven in part by successfully copying and integrating AI features into search and other products.
Same thing here with Google. They completely screwed up AI. They invented the transformer. Completely missed LLMs…Doesn’t matter…they’re probably going to become a $5 trillion company now.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of the latest available data (close of trading on 2025-11-28), Alphabet Inc. (GOOGL) has a market capitalization of about $2.94 trillion, well below the $5 trillion level mentioned in the prediction.

However, the prediction is explicitly open-ended: Alphabet/Google will become "a $5 trillion company" "at some point" in the future, with no time horizon specified. Since there is still ample time for Alphabet’s market cap to potentially reach ~$5T, the prediction cannot yet be judged as definitively right or wrong. We only know that it has not come true yet by 2025-11-30, not that it will never come true.

Therefore, the appropriate status is inconclusive (too early) rather than right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:32:51Inconclusive
techai
Gemini-powered AI Overviews/one-box style results will become the dominant interface for Google Search, effectively displacing the traditional ‘10 blue links’ paradigm as the primary way users consume search results.
It’s very clear now that Gemini powered one box is the future of Google search. People just want the answer. I think that this feature is going to eat the rest of Google’s search.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 2025, Gemini-powered AI Overviews are clearly a major part of Google Search, but it’s not yet possible to say they have definitively displaced the traditional “10 blue links” as the primary way users consume results, and the prediction had no explicit time horizon.

Evidence that AI Overviews are becoming central:

  • Google’s own posts and earnings calls describe AI Overviews as a major new layer in Search, rolled out to over 100 countries and reaching more than 1–2 billion users monthly by early–mid 2025. (blog.google)
  • Multiple independent studies show AI Overviews now appear in a substantial share of queries. Semrush/Datos found they appeared in ~13% of U.S. desktop searches as of March 2025, up from 6.5% in January. (searchengineland.com) Ahrefs data from June 2025 estimated AI Overviews on about 12.8% of all Google searches, and a later Ahrefs-based analysis in late 2025 put their presence at roughly 20–21% of all queries across 146 million results, especially for long, informational, question-style searches. (ahrefs.com)
  • One smaller 8,000-keyword study (Advanced Web Ranking, summarized by an agency blog) reported AI Overviews on ~60% of U.S. queries and called them the “dominant experience in Google’s interface,” showing how, at least in some sampled keyword sets, the AI box now visually dominates the SERP. (xponent21.com)

Evidence that the “10 blue links” paradigm has not been fully displaced:

  • Even in the more aggressive studies, AI Overviews appear above traditional results; they do not fully remove organic listings from the default “All” tab. For a large fraction—and likely a majority—of total search volume, users still see and can scroll through standard link lists, especially on commercial, navigational, local, and news queries where AI Overviews are relatively rare. (digitalinformationworld.com)
  • Google’s experimental AI-only “AI Mode,” which truly replaces the link list with an AI summary, is opt-in and paywalled for Google One AI Premium subscribers, not the default interface for the mass user base. (reuters.com)
  • A Google public-policy VP explicitly stated in September 2025 that “we’re not going to abandon” the 10-blue-links model and framed AI summaries as an additional, not replacement, experience—even while acknowledging that users are increasingly asking for contextual AI answers. (edexlive.com)
  • Other analyses note that, as of 2025, the main Google Search experience is still a familiar list of links with AI Overviews added on top, and that AI Mode remains a separate, optional tab. (paadiatech.com)

Interpretation:

  • Sacks’ directional claim—that Gemini-powered one-box/AI answers are the future of Google Search and will take a large bite out of traditional link-based behavior—is strongly supported by current trends: AI Overviews are widely deployed, visually dominant on many informational SERPs, and associated with declining organic click-through rates.
  • But his stronger version—that this experience will "eat the rest of Google’s search" and become the clearly dominant, primary interface displacing the 10 blue links paradigm—has not yet fully materialized as of late 2025. Traditional results remain core, AI-only mode is niche, and measured AI Overview coverage (especially in large-scale datasets) is still well below 100% of queries.

Because the prediction is framed about the long-term “future” of Google Search rather than by a specific date, and current evidence shows a strong but incomplete shift rather than a clear, completed displacement, the fairest assessment as of November 30, 2025 is “inconclusive (too early)” rather than definitively right or wrong.

aitechmarkets
Perplexity.ai, as an independent search/answer engine, will struggle severely or fail competitively now that Google has copied its core product approach; its most viable positive outcome is to be acquired rather than to succeed at large scale as a standalone competitor.
They got caught completely flat footed. And they’ve now, I guess, caught up by copying perplexity and sucks for perplexity. I think they’re kind of screwed now unless they get over an acquisition deal.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since May 2024 shows Perplexity has grown rapidly and remained independent despite Google rolling out AI Overviews, rather than being “kind of screwed” or pushed into an acquisition.

Key points:

  • Strong funding and soaring valuation: Perplexity was valued just over $1 billion in April 2024, but after Google’s AI Overviews launch it went on to raise a $500 million round in June 2025 at a $14 billion valuation, and by September 2025 its valuation was reported around $20 billion—hardly the profile of a company failing competitively. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Rapid user and usage growth: Analyses report Perplexity handling around 30 million queries per day (780 million in May 2025) with more than 20% month‑over‑month growth and over 22 million active users, giving it about a 6.2% share of the AI search segment. (en.wikipedia.org) This is growth after Google’s AI Overviews became a mainstream feature in search.

  • Still independent; acquisition only speculative: Multiple reports in mid‑2025 describe Apple internally discussing a potential bid for Perplexity, but both Apple and Perplexity declined to confirm any deal, and coverage characterizes talks as early and uncertain. Perplexity’s CEO has explicitly said he does not want to sell to Big Tech and wants the company to remain independent. (macrumors.com) As of late 2025, there is no credible report that Perplexity has been acquired.

  • Behavior of a confident competitor, not a distressed target: Perplexity has launched major new products (e.g., the Comet AI browser) and even made bold proposals to merge with TikTok U.S. and to buy Google Chrome, positioning itself as an acquirer or strategic partner rather than a company forced into a sale. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Google competition did not wipe it out: Google’s AI Overviews now reaches over 1.5 billion monthly users worldwide, embedding generative AI deeply into Google Search. (mlq.ai) Despite this, Perplexity has continued to raise large rounds, sign major partnerships, and grow usage, contradicting the idea that Google copying its approach would effectively kill its prospects.

Given that (1) Perplexity has not been acquired, (2) it is expanding and highly valued, and (3) it remains a notable independent competitor in AI search, the prediction that it was “screwed” and that acquisition was its main viable outcome has not come true as of November 30, 2025.

aitech
OpenAI will release GPT‑5 within a few weeks to a few months after April 26, 2024, and GPT‑5 will represent a large, clearly noticeable quality improvement over GPT‑4, putting OpenAI roughly one full model cycle ahead of the open‑source community.
the scuttlebutt about ChatGPT five is that it's amazing, and it's a big improvement over GPT four, and supposedly it's going to come out any day, week or month. So if GPT five comes out and knocks our socks off in a few weeks, then we're going to see that, oh, they're actually a cycle ahead of the open source community.View on YouTube
Explanation

Based on public information as of November 30, 2025, this prediction did not come true in the way it was framed.

  1. No public, clearly branded “GPT‑5” release in the predicted window

    • The prediction (made April 26, 2024) said GPT‑5 would come out “any day, week or month” after that. That implies a release in the following few weeks to at most a few months (i.e., roughly by late summer 2024) as a distinct next‑generation model.
    • OpenAI publicly launched GPT‑4o in May 2024 as an improved GPT‑4‑class model, but they did not describe it as GPT‑5 or as a new generation beyond the GPT‑4 family. OpenAI’s own materials consistently frame GPT‑4o as part of the GPT‑4 generation (optimized for speed, cost, and multimodal usage), not as “GPT‑5.”
    • As of late 2025, there is no widely documented, clearly named GPT‑5 release matching the "any day, week or month" timeline after April 26, 2024.
  2. Quality jump and full‑cycle lead over open source not demonstrably realized as predicted

    • While OpenAI models (e.g., GPT‑4o and subsequent iterative improvements) remain at or near the frontier, open‑source models have also advanced rapidly, with many competitive or specialized systems narrowing the gap rather than obviously falling a full cycle behind.
    • Because there is no clear, acknowledged GPT‑5 release in that timeframe to evaluate, the claim that it would “knock our socks off” and prove OpenAI is “a cycle ahead of the open source community” cannot be validated as stated.

Given that:

  • The timing condition (release of GPT‑5 within a few weeks to a few months after April 26, 2024) was not met, and
  • The substantive content of the prediction (a clearly labeled GPT‑5 with a large, obvious quality jump that establishes a full‑cycle lead) has not materialized in the way described,

the appropriate classification for this prediction is:

result: "wrong" — the key event (a timely, publicly released GPT‑5 with the described impact) did not occur within the predicted window, and more than enough time has passed to judge it.

politicstech
TikTok will not successfully divest its U.S. operations within the legal timeframe and instead TikTok will be shut down in the United States under the new divest-or-ban law passed in April 2024.
So I don't think they're going to be able to divest. I think they're just going to get shut down.View on YouTube
Explanation
  • What the law required: The Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act (PAFACA), signed April 24, 2024, required TikTok’s Chinese parent ByteDance to divest U.S. operations within 270 days (deadline January 19, 2025), with up to a 90‑day presidential extension, or face a ban via app‑store and hosting prohibitions. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Court outcome: TikTok challenged the law; the D.C. Circuit in December 2024 and the U.S. Supreme Court in January 2025 upheld PAFACA’s constitutionality, confirming that TikTok would either need a “qualified divestiture” or be effectively banned in the U.S. after the deadline. (law.justia.com)
  • What actually happened to the deadline: Instead of allowing TikTok to be shut down, the President repeatedly used (and arguably stretched) statutory authority to delay enforcement of the ban: enforcement that was to apply January 19, 2025 was pushed to April 5, then June 19, then September 17, and then December 16, 2025, while the White House endorsed a divestiture framework intended to let Americans keep using TikTok. (whitehouse.gov)
  • Further extensions and ongoing sale: In September 2025, President Trump approved a divestiture plan and further extended the effective ban date to January 20, 2026, drawing criticism from Senator Ed Markey for repeatedly extending deadlines rather than letting the ban take effect. (reuters.com)
  • Status as of late November 2025: TikTok remains available in the United States. ByteDance is in the process of selling roughly 80% of TikTok’s U.S. assets to a consortium led by Oracle and Silver Lake, with ByteDance expected to retain under a 20% stake, but neither a completed divestiture nor a U.S. shutdown has occurred yet. (reuters.com)

Because TikTok has not been shut down in the U.S. under the April 2024 divest‑or‑ban law—and instead continues to operate while working toward a sale—the prediction that TikTok would fail to divest and “just get shut down” is wrong as of November 30, 2025.

Sacks @ 01:15:41Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
Within the next few years following the April 2024 TikTok law, there will be a concerted U.S. media and political campaign framing Telegram as a Russian‑backdoored tool for terrorists (e.g., Hamas) with shady investors, aimed at justifying U.S. government action to restrict or ban Telegram in the U.S.
you're going to see at some point, you'll see a media campaign that will be promoting the idea that telegram is used by Hamas, by terrorists, by groups that the US doesn't like, and that it's backdoored by Russia, and that it's got some shady investors on its cap table, and no politician is going to want to stand up and defend telegram. And all the industry money that flows into Washington will be promoting this idea that we have to ban it... this is a foregone.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the timeframe implied by 'within the next few years' after the April 24, 2024 TikTok law has not fully elapsed, so it is too early to say definitively whether Sacks’s forecast will play out.

Evidence so far:

  • The Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act (the April 2024 TikTok law) explicitly targets TikTok/ByteDance; it has not been applied to Telegram, and no new federal law or executive action has been adopted that would ban or broadly restrict Telegram in the U.S. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Some U.S. political messaging now explicitly groups Telegram with TikTok as a platform exploited by terrorists. For example, an August 2024 Homeland Security subcommittee press release on a bipartisan bill warns about foreign‑controlled apps like TikTok and encrypted messaging platforms like Telegram being used by terrorist organizations, but it only mandates DHS threat assessments rather than proposing a ban. (homeland.house.gov)
  • U.S. and international media have for years reported that Hamas and other extremist groups use Telegram; this continued after April 2024, with investigations describing Hamas‑aligned propaganda channels and possible radicalization of U.S. users. (nypost.com) However, this is not yet a broad, coordinated U.S. media campaign uniquely focused on Telegram.
  • Claims that Telegram is effectively compromised or backdoored by Russian intelligence are being pushed mainly by Ukrainian officials (who banned Telegram on official devices over spying concerns) and by investigative outlets such as IStories (amplified in English by smaller sites), not as a central talking point of major U.S. media or top U.S. officials. (tbsnews.net)
  • U.S. government action has so far targeted specific extremist networks that use Telegram, such as designating the far‑right Terrorgram collective as a terrorist group, rather than Telegram itself as a platform. (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, there are some elements of the dynamic Sacks described (messaging about terrorists’ use of Telegram and some discussion of Russian‑linked risks), but there is not yet clear evidence of the kind of sustained, coordinated U.S. media‑plus‑industry campaign to justify a nationwide Telegram ban that he portrayed as a 'foregone' conclusion. Because both the horizon ('next few years') and key causal steps he described are still unfolding, the prediction is best classified as inconclusive at this time.

politicsgovernmenttech
Sequence of enforcement under the new foreign‑controlled app authority: (1) Telegram will be targeted and materially restricted or banned in the U.S.; (2) if Joe Biden wins a second presidential term (2025–2029), U.S. authorities will subsequently move to pressure Elon Musk to divest X (Twitter) or otherwise act to curtail X, using that same authority.
I think that the first step is you go get telegram because that's easy... and then if Biden wins a second term, they will eventually set their gunsights on X.View on YouTube
Explanation
  1. Telegram has not been targeted under the new “foreign‑adversary app” authority.
    The Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act (PAFACA) was enacted in April 2024 and explicitly targets ByteDance/TikTok and its subsidiaries as “foreign adversary controlled applications,” while creating a process to designate other apps in the future. As of late 2025, public descriptions of the law and its enforcement still identify only TikTok/ByteDance as covered by the statute; there is no record of Telegram being designated or restricted under PAFACA or a similar federal foreign‑app authority. (en.wikipedia.org)

    There have been other actions involving Telegram—e.g., France’s criminal investigation of CEO Pavel Durov, Ukraine and some U.S. states (like Montana) restricting Telegram on government devices—but these are unrelated to PAFACA and do not amount to a U.S. federal ban or material nationwide restriction of Telegram under the new foreign‑controlled‑app framework sacks was discussing. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. The conditional part of the forecast (“if Biden wins a second term…they will set their gunsights on X”) cannot occur, because Biden did not win a second term.
    The 2024 U.S. presidential election was won by Donald Trump, who was inaugurated as the 47th president on January 20, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) Since Biden is no longer president and does not hold a 2025–2029 term, the specific scenario sacks described—Biden using this authority in a second term to pressure Elon Musk to divest or curtail X—has been precluded by events.

  3. No evidence of U.S. authorities using this authority to pressure Musk to divest X.
    Public reporting through November 30, 2025 shows no instance of the U.S. government invoking PAFACA or a similar “foreign adversary controlled applications” power against X (Twitter) or Elon Musk. Legal and regulatory actions involving Musk in this period—such as the SEC’s securities‑disclosure lawsuit about his 2022 Twitter acquisition—concern securities law and data‑access issues, not foreign‑controlled‑app national‑security powers or forced divestiture of X. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because: (a) Telegram has not been the first major target of the new foreign‑controlled‑app authority, and (b) the Biden‑second‑term condition for the later X‑related enforcement never materialized—and there is no sign of such enforcement against X under that authority—the prediction about the sequence of enforcement is best evaluated as wrong in light of actual developments to date.

politicsgovernment
If Joe Biden wins a second term, the U.S. Attorney General or relevant federal authority will open a formal investigation into X (Twitter) under the new foreign‑adversary‑controlled application powers and use it to apply sustained pressure on Elon Musk to divest or materially change control of X during that term.
in a second Biden term, they will open an investigation and to start ratcheting up the pressure on Elon to get rid of X, because that's clearly what they want.View on YouTube
Explanation
  • Joe Biden did not win a second term. The 2024 U.S. presidential election was won by Donald Trump, with Trump/Vance defeating the Harris/Walz ticket, so there is no “second Biden term” in which the described conduct by Biden’s attorney general could occur. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • The Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act (PAFACA) was signed by Biden in April 2024 and gives the president and attorney general powers over “foreign‑adversary‑controlled applications,” explicitly targeting TikTok/ByteDance and allowing similar designations for other apps under specified conditions. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Under President Trump, use of these powers has focused on TikTok (including multiple executive orders delaying and shaping enforcement) rather than on X, and there is no public record of X being designated or investigated under PAFACA by federal authorities. (whitehouse.gov)

Because Biden never obtained a second term, the conditional scenario (“if Biden wins a second term, then his administration will open a PAFACA‑style investigation into X to pressure Musk to divest”) never arose. We therefore cannot know from real‑world events whether that hypothetical would have occurred. The prediction is about a counterfactual world rather than the world that actually unfolded, so its correctness cannot be determined from observed outcomes.

politicseconomy
If Democrats hold the presidency, retain control of both the U.S. House and Senate in the 2024 elections, and Joe Manchin and Kyrsten Sinema are no longer moderating votes in the Senate, there will be a high likelihood that a federal wealth‑tax‑style measure on unrealized gains (similar to Biden’s 25% proposal) passes into law during that Congress.
if the Democrats have the trifecta, if Biden wins re-election and holds on to the Senate and House, but without Manchin and Sinema, I think you have to price in the strong possibility that this passes.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: Sacks said that if Democrats held the presidency and both chambers of Congress in 2024, and did so without Manchin and Sinema, one should “price in the strong possibility” that a wealth‑tax‑style measure on unrealized gains would pass.

In reality, the condition did not occur:

  • In the 2024 elections, Republicans won the presidency and gained control of both the Senate and the House, producing a Republican rather than Democratic trifecta for the 119th Congress.(en.wikipedia.org)

In the actual 119th Congress under this GOP trifecta:

  • Congress passed the One Big Beautiful Bill Act, which largely extends and expands Republican-style tax cuts; it does not create any federal tax on unrealized gains or a wealth tax.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • As of October 2025, there is still no federal wealth tax in the United States; wealth-tax or unrealized-gains proposals (such as Biden’s “Billionaire Minimum Income Tax” and H.R. 6498) have been introduced but have not been enacted into law.(taxrep.us)

However, Sacks’s statement was not that such a tax would pass in the real world unconditionally; it was that if Democrats held a Biden-led trifecta without Manchin/Sinema, there would be a high likelihood ("strong possibility") of passage. Because that underlying political scenario never materialized, we have no way to observe whether his conditional probability assessment was accurate.

Therefore, the prediction cannot be scored as right or wrong based on actual outcomes and is best classified as ambiguous rather than correct, incorrect, or merely “too early.”

Sacks @ 01:35:12Inconclusive
politicseconomy
Over the coming decades, as U.S. federal liabilities mount, the federal government will eventually introduce significant new taxes or levies that explicitly target private retirement savings (e.g., 401(k)s and similar accounts) as a revenue source.
you are going to absolutely go after your retirement accounts because that's the only way they're going to pay off these liabilities.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025 (about 19 months after the April 26, 2024 episode), there is no U.S. federal law that creates a new, special tax or levy directly on assets held inside 401(k)s, IRAs, or similar private retirement accounts. These accounts remain tax-advantaged under federal law: contributions are generally tax-deferred or deductible, withdrawals are taxed as income, and required minimum distributions continue under long‑standing rules, but there is no new asset-based charge on retirement balances themselves.(en.wikipedia.org)

Recent federal changes since the prediction have mostly expanded or adjusted incentives for retirement saving, not targeted the accounts as a new revenue source. The IRS has increased 401(k) contribution limits for 2025–2026, and retirement-related legislation (including SECURE 2.0’s implementation) emphasizes higher contribution and catch‑up limits and later RMD ages, rather than imposing new wealth-style taxes on retirement accounts.(apnews.com) Major 2025 tax legislation (the so‑called One Big Beautiful Bill Act) focuses on extending or modifying income-tax rates, SALT caps, remittance taxes, and various credits and deductions; public summaries do not show any provision that specifically imposes a new tax on 401(k) or IRA account balances.(en.wikipedia.org)

Although there has been active debate about wealth taxes at both federal and state levels, notable proposals either have not been enacted or explicitly exclude pensions and retirement accounts from their tax base.(nasdaq.com) Because Sacks’s prediction was explicitly about what would happen over the coming decades as federal liabilities grow, and only a short period has passed with no such policy adopted, there is not yet enough elapsed time to conclude that the prediction is either clearly right or clearly wrong. Therefore, the status is inconclusive (too early).

governmentpoliticstech
Following the April 2024 TikTok divest‑or‑ban law, Telegram will be the next major foreign‑owned communication app to face U.S. government efforts to significantly restrict or ban its operation in the United States.
I think telegram can stick its head between its legs and kiss his ass goodbye, because they're there next on the hit list.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since April 2024 shows no U.S. federal move comparable to the TikTok divest‑or‑ban law that specifically targets Telegram for a nationwide restriction or ban.

Key points:

  • The Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act, signed April 24, 2024, is written to explicitly and uniquely target TikTok and other ByteDance‑controlled apps, not Telegram. Its designation language and enforcement provisions are tailored to ByteDance and its subsidiaries, with no similar statutory designation of Telegram as a foreign‑adversary app. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • As of late 2025, Telegram remains freely available in U.S. app stores and widely used. Overviews of Telegram’s legal status and global censorship list multiple countries that have blocked or restricted Telegram (Iran, Russia historically, China, Vietnam, Nepal, etc.), but do not list the United States as having imposed an operational ban or broad nationwide restriction on the service. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Post‑2024 U.S. legislative and policy activity that mentions Telegram has focused on threat assessments and research, not bans. For example, Homeland Security Subcommittee legislation requires DHS to conduct annual terrorism‑threat assessments of terrorist organizations’ use of “foreign cloud‑based mobile and desktop messaging applications like Telegram,” and related press releases explicitly group Telegram with other platforms (TikTok, etc.) in the context of studying online radicalization. These measures do not restrict user access to Telegram or order app‑store removal. (homeland.house.gov)

  • Some state‑level and government‑device policies classify Telegram as a “high‑risk app” and ban it on state networks or devices (e.g., Montana’s 2023 ban on Telegram, WeChat, and Temu on government devices; North Carolina’s SB 83 proposal likewise listing TikTok, WeChat, and Telegram as high‑risk for public networks and devices). Those are limited, pre‑ and post‑2024 device/network rules, not a new, nationwide effort to ban or severely limit Telegram’s operation for the general public after the TikTok law. (itechpost.com)

  • After the April 2024 TikTok law, the most aggressive actual restrictions in the U.S. have continued to fall on ByteDance products (TikTok and related apps) and, separately, on some newer Chinese apps like DeepSeek, RedNote/Xiaohongshu, and Lemon8, which have been targeted for bans on government devices in states like Texas. There is no comparable post‑law action singling out Telegram as “next on the hit list.” (en.wikipedia.org)

Together, this shows that while Telegram has drawn political and security scrutiny in U.S. discourse, the prediction that it would be the next major foreign‑owned communication app to face U.S. government efforts to significantly restrict or ban its operation—in a way analogous to TikTok’s divest‑or‑ban regime—has not materialized as of November 30, 2025.

Sacks @ 00:22:50Inconclusive
politicsconflict
Over the long term (years to decades), public and historical opinion will shift so that Israel’s 2023–24 Gaza war is widely regarded as Israel’s equivalent of the U.S. Vietnam War (i.e., an unwinnable quagmire with heavy civilian casualties), and the current anti-war protesters, such as the Google employee protesters, will be viewed more sympathetically than they are at the time of this recording.
I think that in the fullness of time, we may come to think of them in a slightly different light... I want to make two points about why I think this war will eventually be viewed as Israel's Vietnam.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly framed as a long‑term, historical judgment (“in the fullness of time… Israel’s Vietnam”), i.e., years to decades after the 2023–24 Gaza war. As of the evaluation date (30 Nov 2025), only about a year and a half has passed since the war began and the podcast aired, and the war itself is still ongoing with major uncertainty over its end state and political consequences. Current writing and polling therefore reflect contemporary opinion, not the eventual “historical consensus” the predictor is talking about.

On the "Israel’s Vietnam" analogy: a number of commentators and activists have used that framing or asked whether Gaza could become “Israel’s Vietnam,” but these are individual opinions and polemics, not any kind of settled consensus among historians or the broader public.(revolucion.org.es) The main encyclopedic treatments of the conflict still describe it in more neutral, descriptive terms and emphasize that it remains ongoing with evolving regional and international repercussions, which by definition means a stable retrospective judgment has not yet formed.(en.wikipedia.org)

On public sympathy for anti‑war protesters (e.g., students, tech workers): available polling during and shortly after the first big protest waves shows a sharply divided public, not an overwhelming or settled sympathy. For example, U.S. polls around the 2024 university Gaza encampments found roughly 28–40% of Americans supporting the protests and 42–47% opposing them; college students were more supportive (around 45% support), but the country as a whole was mixed and polarized.(en.wikipedia.org) That tells us how they’re seen now, not how they’ll be seen “in the fullness of time.”

Because:

  • the predictor’s own time horizon is multi‑year to multi‑decade;
  • the war and its political aftermath are still in flux; and
  • existing data only speaks to short‑term, contested public opinion,

there is not yet enough information to say whether the Gaza war will ultimately be remembered as “Israel’s Vietnam” or whether today’s protesters will be broadly and historically re‑cast as sympathetic figures. The correct assessment at this point is therefore “inconclusive (too early)” rather than right or wrong.

government
Even if U.S. government funding for NPR were eliminated, NPR will continue to operate as an organization, sustained by private funding mechanisms such as subscriptions or donations, rather than shutting down.
They could easily Substack it. NPR is not going to go away. Just create subscriptions and you're fine.View on YouTube
Explanation

• In mid‑2025, federal support for public broadcasting was effectively eliminated: the Rescissions Act of 2025 rescinded $1.1 billion in funding for the Corporation for Public Broadcasting (CPB), the main federal funding conduit for NPR and PBS, and was signed into law on July 24, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) CPB then announced it would wind down and shut its doors because its federal budget had been zeroed out. (arstechnica.com) This satisfies the prediction’s condition that U.S. government funding for NPR be (for all practical purposes) eliminated.

• Despite that loss of federal funding, NPR has continued to operate as a national news organization. Coverage asking whether NPR would “go away” after CPB’s shutdown explicitly concludes that NPR “will still continue to operate,” while warning that the real damage will fall on smaller and rural member stations. (forbes.com) NPR’s CEO Katherine Maher similarly frames the crisis as forcing budget cuts and restructuring, not closure of NPR itself. (washingtonpost.com)

• Post‑cut reporting emphasizes that NPR and PBS are responding by ramping up private funding mechanisms—member donations, pledge drives, and other non‑government support—to compensate for the loss of CPB money. (forbes.com) That is precisely the dynamic the prediction described (subscriptions/donations sustaining the organization rather than it shutting down).

Given that (1) federal public‑media appropriations have been effectively removed and CPB is shutting down, yet (2) NPR has not “gone away” and is instead trying to sustain itself through private revenue and intensified fundraising, the prediction that NPR would continue to operate even if U.S. government funding were eliminated has, so far, proven right.

Sacks @ 00:55:29Inconclusive
techai
Over the long term (multi-decade horizon), adoption of technologies that tightly integrate computing with humans (e.g., wearables, AR, brain-computer interfaces) will continue to increase and will not reverse; products that make humans more cybernetic will, in aggregate, gain adoption rather than fade away.
I think that humans are becoming more and more cybernetic. We're getting more and more immersed with computing power. And I agree it creates this anxiety and all these problems. But on the other hand, I think it's an irreversible trend. So I think that I would not bet against things that make us more cybernetic.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns a multi-decade horizon and claims the trend toward tighter human–computer integration (wearables, AR, brain–computer interfaces, etc.) is irreversible and will not reverse "over the long term." As of late 2025, only ~1.5 years have passed since the statement, far too short to determine whether a claimed irreversible, multi-decade trend will never reverse.

Current evidence does show continued growth in several relevant categories—e.g., global smartwatch and wearable shipments have generally risen year‑over‑year, major firms are still investing heavily in AR/VR platforms, and research and early products in brain–computer interfaces are ongoing—but these are still early in their adoption curves and subject to future technological, social, regulatory, or economic shifts that could alter or reverse the long‑term trajectory. Because the claim is about permanence of the trend over decades, and we have not yet observed anything close to that timeframe, it cannot be definitively judged right or wrong at this point.

techai
In the near future (next several years), Humane’s AI pendant–style device will face direct competition from Apple’s glasses and multiple other computer-vision wearables designed to capture real‑world visual information, limiting its prospects as a standalone replacement for the phone.
The problem they're going to have is that that pendant will compete with the Apple glasses and all the other wearables that are going to be created to suck in all this information, this computer vision from the world.View on YouTube
Explanation

Parts of the prediction track reality, but the central Apple‑glasses element has not come true and now effectively cannot.

What came true:

  • Humane’s AI Pin was marketed as a phone-replacement wearable and launched in April 2024, but it was panned for poor performance, short battery life, and usability problems, and never came close to replacing smartphones in practice.(cnbc.com) By early 2025, Humane sold most of its assets to HP, halted sales of the Pin, and announced that cloud features (calling, messaging, AI queries) would shut off on February 28, 2025, effectively killing the product.(theverge.com) So its “prospects as a standalone replacement for the phone” were indeed very limited.
  • During the Pin’s short life, multiple other computer‑vision wearables emerged or scaled up. Meta’s Ray‑Ban smart glasses line (with cameras and Meta AI) launched in 2023 and, by 2025, had sold over 2 million units and expanded into multiple models, with further display-equipped “Ray‑Ban Display” and Oakley Meta glasses announced and shipping in 2025.(fr.wikipedia.org) Other AI smart glasses (e.g., from Alibaba) also entered the market.(theverge.com) That matches the idea that pendant-style devices would face competition from many vision‑based wearables “sucking in” real‑world visual information.

What did not come true:

  • As of November 30, 2025, Apple has not released consumer smart glasses. Its only shipping head‑worn device is the Apple Vision Pro mixed‑reality headset (launched February 2024), which is bulky and positioned as a spatial computer, not everyday glasses.(apple.com) Apple’s true AR/smart‑glasses projects (“Apple Glasses” / N107, etc.) have been repeatedly postponed or cancelled, with reports that development was put on hold due to technical challenges and that any smart‑glasses launch is pushed to around 2027 at the earliest.(macrumors.com)
  • Humane’s AI Pin, meanwhile, is being shut down in early 2025, well before any Apple smart glasses are expected to reach market.(theverge.com) That means the Pin never actually competed with Apple’s glasses in the marketplace and, given its discontinuation, never will.

Because:

  • The prediction correctly foresaw that other computer‑vision wearables would emerge and that this category (along with the Pin’s flaws) would undercut the Pin’s chances as a phone replacement, but
  • It specifically framed this in terms of direct competition with “Apple glasses,” which did not materialize within the Pin’s lifespan and are still not on the market,

…the overall outcome is mixed. Important elements are accurate, but the Apple‑glasses centerpiece is not, so the fairest evaluation is ambiguous, rather than cleanly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:59:13Inconclusive
techai
At some point in the future (explicitly acknowledged as "pretty far off"—likely multi-decade), brain-computer interface technology will enable people to record and later upload first-person, memory-like visual records of their experiences (effectively a full-life DVR via neural/ocular interfaces), creating a persistent, searchable log of conversations and events.
when we have this brain computer interface, you'll be able to upload your memories. And so you talk about this idea of recording your whole life through a pendant. Well, eventually you'll be able to record your whole life based on just through your eyeballs. And you know, you'd be able to upload, in theory, a first person view of whatever conversation you've been in, you know? And so there's a certain look, this is pretty far off, but there is maybe a certain inevitability to that.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, no brain–computer interface (BCI) or ocular-neural system exists that can record and later upload a person’s full, first-person, memory-like visual record of their experiences as a persistent, searchable life log.

Current state of the field:

  • Elon Musk’s Neuralink and similar invasive BCIs are in very early human trials aimed at restoring function (e.g., helping paralyzed patients control cursors or prosthetics), not recording or replaying naturalistic memories or continuous first-person video of life experiences.
  • Research BCIs can decode limited aspects of visual perception or imagined speech in constrained lab settings, typically using fMRI or implanted electrodes, and only over short time windows with heavy preprocessing. They do not approximate a full-life DVR of experiences or conversations.

The predictor explicitly framed this as “pretty far off” and effectively multi-decade. Since only ~1.5 years have elapsed since the prediction (April 2024 → November 2025) and the claimed long-term horizon has clearly not arrived, there is not yet a fair test of whether such a mature, memory-upload BCI will exist.

Therefore, the correct status today is “inconclusive (too early)”: the prediction has definitely not come true yet, but the timeframe the predictor implied has not expired, so it cannot be judged definitively right or wrong.

economy
The Federal Reserve will not implement any interest rate cuts before July 2024; the first potential cut will be in July 2024 or later.
could lead fed officials to postpone anticipated rate cuts until July or later.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from Federal Reserve meeting records shows that the federal funds target range stayed at 5.25%–5.50% at every FOMC meeting from January through June 2024, with no interest rate cuts implemented before July 2024. The January 31 and March 20, 2024 meetings both left the benchmark rate unchanged at 5.25%–5.50%. (pcbb.com)

The April/May 1, 2024 and June 12, 2024 FOMC meetings likewise held the rate steady at 5.25%–5.50%, explicitly choosing not to cut despite earlier market expectations for reductions. (federalreserve.gov) A consolidated calendar of FOMC decisions confirms that from January 31 through June 12, 2024, every meeting result was “Held Steady” at 5.25%–5.50%. (proinvestnews.com)

At the July 31, 2024 meeting, the Fed again maintained the federal funds rate in the same 5.25%–5.50% range, meaning there was still no cut as of that date. (federalreserve.gov) Subsequent commentary around the June decision noted that most forecasters were ruling out a July cut and looking instead to later in 2024, which is consistent with the idea that any eventual cut would come in July or later, not earlier in the year. (cbsnews.com)

Since (1) there were no interest rate cuts before July 2024, and (2) when cuts were discussed, they were framed as happening in July or later rather than earlier in 2024, Sacks’s prediction that the Fed would not implement cuts before July and would delay them until July 2024 or later is borne out by the actual policy path.

economypolitics
If the Federal Reserve raises interest rates at least once before the November 2024 U.S. presidential election, Joe Biden will lose that election.
Well, if we if we see a rate hike before the election, I think Biden is toast.View on YouTube
Explanation
  • Condition of the prediction was not met. Sacks’ prediction was explicitly conditional: “if we see a rate hike before the election, I think Biden is toast.” In reality, the Federal Reserve did not raise the federal funds rate at any meeting between the podcast date (April 12, 2024) and the November 5, 2024 election. The Fed held the target range at 5.25%–5.50% through mid‑2024 and then cut rates to 4.75%–5.00% on September 18, 2024, rather than hiking.(federalreserve.gov) Because the rate‑hike condition never occurred, the prediction concerns a counterfactual scenario.

  • Election outcome: In the actual 2024 U.S. presidential election on November 5, 2024, Republican nominee Donald Trump defeated Democratic nominee (and sitting vice president) Kamala Harris; the presidency shifted from Democrat Joe Biden’s administration to Trump, a Republican.(en.wikipedia.org) So Biden and his party did lose control of the White House—but this happened without the antecedent (a pre‑election Fed rate hike) ever taking place.

  • Why this is labeled ambiguous rather than right or wrong: The forecast was about what would happen if the Fed hiked before the election. Since that condition never materialized, we have no empirical way to test whether a rate hike would, in fact, have doomed Biden’s reelection prospects. Treating the statement as true or false would require interpreting it as an unconditional claim about the election, which is not what was actually said. Therefore, even though the Democrats ultimately lost the presidency, the specific conditional prediction can’t be definitively judged as correct or incorrect and is best classified as ambiguous.

Sacks @ 01:00:05Inconclusive
aigovernment
In the coming years, at least one major lawsuit over AI training on copyrighted content (such as YouTube data or song catalogs) will be filed and fully litigated through the US court system, including conflicting rulings at the circuit court level, followed by a US Supreme Court decision on whether such AI training constitutes fair use; after that Supreme Court ruling, the US Congress will pass follow‑on legislation to codify or adjust the legal framework around AI training and copyright.
Well, somebody's going to litigate it. Somebody is going to litigate it...we're going to get some messy arbitration around fair use. And it's probably going to work its way up over the different circuit courts. You'll probably get different judgments. And finally, the Supreme Court will resolve it. and then we'll kind of know where things stand. And then and then there'll be a legislative fix.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of December 1, 2025, the key end‑states in Sacks’s prediction have not happened yet, but the process he described is clearly underway.

What has happened:

  • Multiple major lawsuits over AI training on copyrighted content have been filed against AI companies (e.g., Thomson Reuters v. Ross Intelligence; Bartz v. Anthropic; Kadrey v. Meta; New York Times v. OpenAI). (reuters.com)
  • U.S. district courts have issued conflicting decisions on fair use in the AI‑training context:
    • In Thomson Reuters v. Ross Intelligence (D. Del.), the court held that using Westlaw headnotes to develop an AI legal‑research tool was not fair use and granted summary judgment for Thomson Reuters. (reuters.com)
    • In Bartz v. Anthropic (N.D. Cal.) and Kadrey v. Meta (N.D. Cal.), judges held that using lawfully obtained books to train large language models is highly transformative and can qualify as fair use on the records before them, even while distinguishing or condemning uses of pirated copies. (theguardian.com)
      These are exactly the kind of “messy” fair‑use fights Sacks foresaw, but they are still at the trial‑court level.
  • Appeals are pending (for example, Thomson Reuters v. Ross is now before the Third Circuit as case 25‑2153, and Bartz v. Anthropic has spawned a Rule 23(f) petition and Ninth Circuit amicus briefs), but no U.S. court of appeals has yet issued a definitive generative‑AI‑training fair‑use ruling that creates a clear circuit split. (mishcon.com)

What has not happened yet (and is central to the prediction):

  • No U.S. Supreme Court decision has resolved whether training generative‑AI models on copyrighted works is fair use. Current Supreme Court copyright jurisprudence (e.g., Andy Warhol Foundation v. Goldsmith in 2023) addresses transformative use generally, not AI training, and recent coverage of the Anthropic ruling explicitly notes that legal experts still expect the Supreme Court may eventually have to address AI training. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • No AI‑training‑specific federal copyright statute has been enacted. Bills such as the Generative AI Copyright Disclosure Act and the bipartisan TRAIN Act have been introduced and referred to committee, but as of late 2025 they have not passed Congress. Other enacted laws (like the TAKE IT DOWN Act and proposed NO FAKES Act) focus on deepfakes and likeness rights, not on whether AI training itself is fair use. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because Sacks’s full sequence—circuit‑level split → Supreme Court fair‑use ruling on AI training → follow‑on act of Congress—has not yet occurred, but the timeline (“in the coming years”) still allows for it and the litigation/legislative machinery is clearly in motion, the prediction cannot yet be judged right or wrong. It is therefore too early to call, i.e., inconclusive rather than clearly correct or clearly false.

Sacks @ 01:09:18Inconclusive
conflictgovernment
If low‑cost attack drones and missiles continue to be used against US or allied naval assets while the US continues relying on very expensive interceptor missiles without a cheaper countermeasure, then over the coming years the cost asymmetry will materially erode the existing military balance of power in favor of these asymmetric drone users (such as the Houthis).
with the Houthis, they've been firing cheap missiles and drones at our at our ships in the Red sea. And we've been having to spend $2 million air defense missile shooting down 2000 drones. So if that continues and we don't have a good response to this problem, it's going to really change the balance of power.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim was conditional and medium‑ to long‑term: if cheap drones/missiles kept being used against U.S./allied ships while the U.S. remained stuck using very expensive interceptors and lacked a cheaper counter, then over the coming years the cost asymmetry would “really change the balance of power.”

What has happened so far (through late 2025):

  • Houthi and other Iran‑backed forces have continued using relatively cheap drones and missiles to harass commercial shipping and U.S./allied naval assets in the Red Sea, forcing sustained air and missile defense operations by U.S. carrier strike groups and destroyers. Naval News’ detailed account of early Red Sea operations describes U.S. destroyers and carrier air wings expending large numbers of missiles and other munitions to defend against Houthi drones and anti‑ship ballistic missiles, validating the basic cost‑exchange problem Sacks described. (navalnews.com)
  • Senior U.S. Navy leadership has publicly warned that the current heavy reliance on high‑end interceptors like SM‑3 and SM‑6 against such low‑cost threats is financially and logistically unsustainable in more intense or prolonged fights, again underscoring the cost asymmetry Sacks worried about. (businessinsider.com)
  • Analysts estimate that defending against Houthi attacks has cost the U.S. several billion dollars, while the economic damage from the attacks themselves and the cost of the Houthis’ own munitions remain far lower, explicitly noting that "the cost‑exchange ratio of the campaign favors the Houthis" even though the conventional military balance still overwhelmingly favors the United States. (realclearworld.com)

However, the stronger claim that this cost asymmetry has already “really change[d] the balance of power” in favor of actors like the Houthis is not borne out:

  • Expert assessments continue to emphasize that despite the favorable cost‑exchange ratio for the Houthis, the conventional military balance and broader regional balance of power still strongly favor the U.S. and its allies. The Houthis have become a serious asymmetric nuisance that can impose costs and disrupt shipping, but not a peer force capable of overturning U.S. naval dominance. (realclearworld.com)
  • At the same time, the condition that “we don’t have a good response” is beginning to erode. The U.S. Navy has fielded and tested directed‑energy systems such as the HELIOS laser on USS Preble as a low‑cost counter to drones and potentially some missiles; only one destroyer is currently equipped, but it shows movement toward exactly the kind of cheaper defensive layer Sacks said was missing. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Other states are also investing heavily in similar low‑cost air and drone defenses (e.g., the U.K.’s DragonFire naval laser contract, Israel’s Iron Beam, and U.S. high‑power microwave systems like Epirus Leonidas), indicating a broader push to close the cost gap rather than passively accepting a permanent asymmetric advantage for cheap‑drone users. (reuters.com)

Netting this out: Sacks’ intermediate observation—that the Houthis are exploiting a dangerous cost asymmetry and that the U.S. has been using very expensive interceptors against cheap threats—has been validated. But his full prediction was about a substantial, longer‑term shift in the overall balance of power “over the coming years” if nothing changed. As of December 2025, the U.S. and allies still retain clear military superiority, and significant efforts are underway to develop cheaper counters. The time horizon he invoked has not fully elapsed, and the drastic balance‑of‑power shift he warned about has not clearly occurred.

Given that, the fairest assessment today is that the prediction’s ultimate outcome is still unresolved, so it is inconclusive (too early) rather than clearly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:15:58Inconclusive
techconflict
Over the next decade, as small autonomous and remotely‑piloted attack drones proliferate (including potential assassination drones), automated gun‑turret systems using computer vision to detect and shoot down drones—like the described Bullfrog system—will become a common and practical method deployed on vehicles and around installations to defend against drone threats.
The one defense investment I've made is actually in this idea of how do you defend against drones?...imagine in the future that we have these autonomous drones everywhere that are basically assassination drones. How are you going to stop them?...it's maybe not the only way of doing it, but it's a really good way of doing it because you can mount these things to a vehicle.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s timeframe is “over the next decade” from the podcast date (April 12, 2024), i.e., roughly through 2034. As of now (December 1, 2025), only about 1.5 years have elapsed.

There is evidence that:

  • Small attack and reconnaissance drones are proliferating and being used extensively in conflicts like Ukraine–Russia and in the Middle East, including loitering munitions and FPV drones.
  • A variety of automated and semi‑automated counter‑UAS systems using sensors and computer vision exist, including gun‑based and turret‑like solutions (e.g., C-UAS remote weapon stations, vehicle‑mounted systems, and fixed-site defenses), and some are being trialed or fielded at bases and on vehicles.

However, the specific claim is that automated gun‑turret systems using computer vision to detect and shoot down drones—like the Bullfrog concept—will become a common and practical method deployed on vehicles and around installations. Whether such systems become widely common and standardized across militaries, critical infrastructure, and VIP protection by 2034 cannot yet be assessed in 2025.

Because:

  • The end of the stated time horizon (2034) has not been reached.
  • Current adoption levels and doctrine are still evolving rapidly, and it is too early to say whether these systems will end up as a niche, transitional, or truly ubiquitous solution.

the correct assessment at this time is that the prediction’s truth value is too early to call, hence inconclusive rather than right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:05:53Inconclusive
techai
General‑purpose humanoid domestic robots that safely operate in typical homes (doing a broad range of household tasks) will *not* be widely available to consumers within 5 years from April 2024; their arrival as a domestic product will take longer than 5 years.
Jason, I don't think it's a five year time frame. I think it's longer than that.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction window is from early April 2024 to early April 2029. As of 30 November 2025, we are only ~1.5 years into that 5‑year period, so it is too early to know if general‑purpose humanoid domestic robots will fail to become widely available by April 2029.

Current market status:

  • 1X’s NEO “Home Robot” opened pre‑orders in October 2025, with deliveries planned for 2026. It targets private homes but is expensive (~$20,000 for early adopters) and initially relies heavily on teleoperation by remote humans, with the company explicitly positioning these early units as data‑gathering and training platforms rather than fully autonomous, general‑purpose home servants. This is not yet a mass‑market, widely adopted consumer product. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Tesla Optimus is in limited internal use and targeted first at factory tasks. Musk and coverage describe limited production in 2025, with availability to other businesses in 2026 and an eventual consumer version still several years away, with timelines often framed as 3–5+ years out from 2024–2025. As of late 2025, no consumer Optimus is on sale. (benzinga.com)
  • Agility Robotics’ Digit and similar humanoids (e.g., from Agility, Apptronik) are being deployed commercially in logistics, warehousing, and manufacturing, not as general‑purpose home robots. (agilityrobotics.com)
  • Industry coverage of leading humanoid‑robot firms (Tesla, Figure, 1X, Agility, Boston Dynamics, Apptronik) consistently emphasizes near‑term industrial and logistics use, with home use framed as a future step. (businessinsider.com)
  • Existing and upcoming domestic robots like Samsung’s Ballie and ASUS Zenbo are either non‑humanoid companion/smart‑home devices or relatively limited in capability, not the kind of general‑purpose humanoid doing a broad range of household tasks autonomously. (en.wikipedia.org)

So far, reality does not contradict Sacks’ claim: there are still no widely available, general‑purpose humanoid domestic robots in typical homes as of late 2025. However, because the key part of the prediction is that such robots will not be widely available by April 2029, and we have not yet reached that date, the correctness of the prediction cannot be definitively judged. It remains plausible but unproven, hence the result is “inconclusive (too early)” rather than clearly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:06:36Inconclusive
aitechconflict
Over approximately the next several years (through at least the late 2020s), most practical deployment of advanced robots powered by AI will be in industrial or military applications rather than as general‑purpose robots in private homes.
So there's just going to be a lot of fine tuning work that happens before. This is a domestic product. I think in the near term it's all about industrial applications or maybe even military applications.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, the current pattern of AI‑enabled robot deployment is strongly consistent with Sacks’ prediction, but his stated horizon (“in the near term” / “over the next several years, into the late 2020s”) has not finished yet, so it’s too early to declare it definitively right or wrong.

What we see so far (2023–2025):

  • Industrial robots massively dominate robot deployment: the International Federation of Robotics (IFR) reports a record 4.28 million robots operating on factory floors worldwide in 2023, with more than 540,000 new industrial units installed annually in 2023–2024.(linkedin.com) This is orders of magnitude larger than any other robot category.
  • Professional service robots are growing, but they’re also mostly industrial or commercial, not domestic: in 2023 over 205,000 professional service robots were sold, and more than half were for transportation and logistics (warehouse/industrial handling), with other big segments in hospitality, cleaning, agriculture, and security.(ifr.org) These are deployed in workplaces, malls, hospitals, airports, etc., not as general‑purpose home helpers.
  • Humanoid and “advanced” robots in 2024–2025 are primarily piloted in factories and logistics. An IDTechEx market study notes that, as of 2025, humanoid robots in the automotive sector are still in early pilot tests, doing basic material‑handling and inspection, and that general‑purpose humanoids in non‑industrial areas (like healthcare) are even further away; warehouse pilots number fewer than 100 humanoid units.(idtechex.com) A Wired piece similarly frames 2025 as the year of the humanoid robot factory worker, with Boston Dynamics’ Atlas going into a Hyundai plant.(wired.com) A deployment survey of humanoids shows they are working mainly in logistics, security, elder care, retail, and R&D pilots—again, institutional rather than home use.(mechonomics.co)
  • Military use of robots and drones is substantial and growing: Ukraine is creating dedicated units of robotic ground vehicles; Russia has formed a large drone‑warfare unit (“Rubicon”); and the US and allies are developing collaborative combat drones like the XQ‑58 Valkyrie and long‑endurance UAVs such as ULTRA.(reuters.com) This supports the prediction’s mention of military applications.
  • By contrast, general‑purpose robots in private homes are still rare and experimental. A notable example, 1X’s NEO “home robot,” only opened pre‑orders in October 2025, targets early adopters at about $20,000 (or $499/month), and currently relies heavily on remote human teleoperation rather than full autonomy—indicating an early, niche market rather than broad deployment.(en.wikipedia.org) Analysts also project that truly general‑purpose humanoid robots for non‑industrial domains will not begin to scale until later in the decade.(idtechex.com)

Why the verdict is “inconclusive”:

  • Sacks’ directional claim—that in the near term most practical deployment of advanced AI robots would be industrial or military rather than as general‑purpose home robots—matches the evidence up to November 2025.
  • However, the normalized prediction explicitly extends “through at least the late 2020s.” We have not yet reached that point, and rapid breakthroughs or unexpected consumer adoption (e.g., affordable, capable home humanoids post‑2026) could still change the balance.

So, while the world in 2024–2025 looks very much like what he described, the multi‑year horizon is still unfolding, making the overall prediction inconclusive (too early to fully score).

politicsgovernment
Following Antony Blinken’s April 2024 statement that “Ukraine will become a member of NATO” and that the summit’s purpose is to build a bridge to that membership, the Biden administration will *not* significantly walk back or formally clarify this position in a way that meaningfully softens or reverses the commitment over the ensuing news cycle and public communications.
And let's see if he walks it back. Let's see if he clarifies it. I predict that he won't, because this is administration.View on YouTube
Explanation

Antony Blinken’s April 4, 2024 remarks in Brussels clearly stated that “Ukraine will become a member of NATO” and that the goal of the Washington summit was to “help build a bridge to that membership and to create a clear pathway for Ukraine moving forward.”(en.interfax.com.ua) In the immediate aftermath (the next several days of coverage), U.S. and NATO messaging simply repeated this line about building a “bridge” to eventual membership, with no official correction or dilution from the administration.(euromaidanpress.com)

However, in a Time magazine interview conducted in late May and published on June 4, 2024, President Biden said that peace in Ukraine “doesn’t mean [they are] part of NATO” and added: “I am not prepared to support the NATOization of Ukraine,” explicitly presenting a vision of Ukraine’s future security that does not require NATO membership.(time.com) Ukrainian and European outlets highlighted this as Biden reiterating he had not been a supporter of Ukraine joining NATO.(pravda.com.ua) The Washington Post described the comment as “appearing to rule out the country’s membership altogether and contradicting the U.S. government’s official stance,” i.e., contradicting the earlier “Ukraine will become a member of NATO” formulation.(washingtonpost.com) A Kyiv Post analysis likewise treated Biden’s remark as directly at odds with Blinken’s April assurance.(kyivpost.com)

Because the head of the same administration later articulated a position that cast serious doubt on, and was widely read as contradicting, Blinken’s categorical “Ukraine will become a member of NATO” line, this does amount to a significant softening/partial walk-back of that commitment in subsequent public communications. Under the normalized prediction (“the Biden administration will not significantly walk back or formally clarify this position in a way that meaningfully softens or reverses the commitment”), that outcome makes Sacks’s prediction wrong.

politicsgovernment
During the 2024 election cycle, Democratic National Committee and/or Biden campaign-aligned lawyers will mount an aggressive legal effort to keep the RFK Jr.–Nicole Shanahan ticket off the ballot in at least the 5–6 key swing states that will decide the 2024 U.S. presidential election.
I think what you're going to see is that lawyers from the DNC and the Biden campaign are going to fight tooth and nail to keep this ticket off the ballot, at least in the major contested states like the 5 or 6 states where the presidency will be decided in 2024. And of course, they'll be saying they're doing this to save democracy. But you're going to see, I think, a full court press by DNC lawyers to keep the Kennedy Shanahan ticket off the ballot.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2024 shows that the DNC and Democratic-aligned groups did, in fact, mount a coordinated legal campaign to limit RFK Jr.–Nicole Shanahan ballot access, including in key battleground states.

The DNC created a dedicated third‑party team and worked with Democratic strategists’ super PAC Clear Choice Action, which was explicitly founded to minimize third‑party impact and, together with the DNC, filed legal challenges to Kennedy’s ballot petitions in multiple states.(en.wikipedia.org)

By late June 2024, CBS reported that Kennedy was already facing ballot‑access lawsuits in five states—Nevada, New York, North Carolina, Delaware, and New Jersey—brought by Democratic state parties, DNC‑aligned PACs, and Democratic election lawyers, and noted that the DNC pledged to continue challenging his ballot access.(cbsnews.com) Nevada and North Carolina are widely treated as presidential battlegrounds; in Nevada, the state Democratic Party helped coordinate a lawsuit to keep him off the ballot, and in North Carolina, Clear Choice challenged his We The People party petition as unlawful.(cbsnews.com)

Separately, Democratic actors pursued ballot challenges in other swing states. In Georgia, “Democratic lawsuits” led the chief state administrative law judge to kick Kennedy and other independents off the ballot before the secretary of state later restored some candidates and deemed Kennedy’s case moot after his withdrawal, with Democrats considering an appeal.(en.wikipedia.org) In Pennsylvania, a closely watched swing state, voters represented by election lawyer Tim Ford filed a petition in Commonwealth Court seeking to keep Kennedy and Shanahan off the ballot, arguing signature and residency defects in their nomination papers.(wtae.com)

DNC‑backed plaintiffs also succeeded in New York, where two voters backed by the DNC and the Democratic‑affiliated Clear Choice Action challenged Kennedy’s petition on residency and signature grounds; state courts removed him from the ballot, and the U.S. Supreme Court ultimately let that exclusion stand.(en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, these actions show a sustained, multi‑state legal strategy by the DNC, state Democratic parties, and Democratic election lawyers—including in major battlegrounds like Nevada, North Carolina, Georgia, and Pennsylvania—to keep the RFK Jr.–Shanahan ticket off ballots or make access harder. Even if one quibbles over whether the final tally of such efforts in “5–6” specific swing states was exact, the substantive core of Sacks’s prediction—that Democratic/Biden‑aligned lawyers would mount an aggressive legal ‘full court press’ in key decisive states to block the Kennedy–Shanahan ticket from the ballot—was borne out by events.

economygovernment
From 2024 onward, the annual interest expense on U.S. federal debt (already over $1 trillion per year in 2024) will continue to increase for the foreseeable future as maturing debt is refinanced at higher interest rates, and federal entitlement spending driven by demographic trends will also continue to rise over the same period.
our interest expense keeps growing because as our debt rolls onto more expensive, higher interest bonds than our interest expense is increasing. Just a few years ago, our interest expense was only 300 billion a year, and now it's over a trillion a year. And that's just going to keep growing and growing. And then the other thing that's going to grow is all the entitlements related to to demographics.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks made two linked claims: (1) federal interest expense, already around/above $1T per year, would keep rising as debt rolled into higher rates; and (2) entitlement spending driven by demographics would keep growing.

1. Interest expense has in fact kept rising and crossed $1T.

  • Net interest outlays were about $658–659 billion in FY 2023. (ceicdata.com)
  • CBO’s Monthly Budget Review for September 2024 reports that net interest on the public debt increased by about $240 billion in FY 2024, reaching roughly $950 billion—very close to the “over a trillion” figure he cited conversationally and a massive jump from 2023. (einpresswire.com)
  • The next year, FY 2025, CBO estimates that net interest on the public debt surpassed $1 trillion for the first time, confirming that the interest burden continued to grow after 2024. (edwardconard.com)
  • CBO’s 2025 and long‑term outlooks project net interest payments continuing to climb over the coming decade (roughly doubling again by the mid‑2030s), consistent with his “keep growing” / “foreseeable future” language. (crfb.org)

His exact statement that interest was already “over a trillion” in 2024 is a bit ahead of the finalized net‑interest data (~$950B), but by 2025 the run‑rate and official estimates do cross $1T, and the directional prediction (ongoing growth as higher‑rate debt rolls over) is borne out.

2. Demographically driven entitlement spending is also rising.

  • Treasury’s own analysis of FY 2024 notes that the increase in total outlays was partly due to higher spending on Social Security and Medicare attributable to demographic aging. (fraser.stlouisfed.org)
  • Estimated Social Security expenditures rose to about $1.5T in FY 2024 and are projected around $1.6T in FY 2025, reflecting more beneficiaries and COLAs—clear year‑over‑year growth. (x.com)
  • Reuters and CBO reporting on FY 2025 confirm that spending on Social Security, Medicare, and Medicaid continued to increase in 2025. (reuters.com)
  • CBO, the Social Security and Medicare Trustees, and multiple fiscal analyses all attribute the long‑run rise in these programs to population aging and health‑care cost growth, with Social Security and federal health programs projected to keep rising as a share of GDP over the coming decades. (crfb.org)

Given (a) the realized increases in net interest from 2023→2024→2025, culminating in >$1T by 2025, and (b) the continued and demographically driven growth in major entitlements over the same period (with projections showing further increases ahead), Sacks’s macro‑level prediction is substantially correct. Minor numerical imprecision on the exact timing of “over a trillion” in 2024 doesn’t change that the core forecast—that both interest expense and entitlement spending would keep rising from 2024 onward—has been validated by subsequent data and official projections as of late 2025.

Sacks @ 00:07:18Inconclusive
governmenttech
The DOJ will ultimately fail to win its Sherman Act antitrust case against Apple filed in March 2024 (i.e., Apple will not suffer a clear government court victory that forces major structural or behavioral remedies).
And so I'm a little bit skeptical right now that the government going to be able to win this case.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the DOJ’s Sherman Act case against Apple (United States et al. v. Apple Inc., No. 2:24‑cv‑04055) is still in early-to-mid litigation with no final judgment, settlement, or remedies order. The court denied Apple’s motion to dismiss on June 30, 2025, allowing all major claims to proceed, but that is only a procedural win for the government, not a final merits victory or remedial order. (macrumors.com) Analyses at the time of filing expected a resolution timeline of roughly 3–5 years including appeals, which fits with the current posture where discovery and later trial/appeal phases still lie ahead. (techcrunch.com) Because the ultimate outcome (whether DOJ secures a clear court win forcing major structural/behavioral changes on Apple) has not yet been decided, Sacks’s prediction cannot currently be judged and remains too early to call.

Sacks @ 00:40:48Inconclusive
economy
If, in practice, U.S. home buyers are required to directly pay their own buyer’s agent commissions (rather than those fees being baked into the seller’s side), the total commission pool in the U.S. residential real estate brokerage industry will fall by approximately 50% from its pre‑settlement level.
If buyers are forced to pay their own broker's commission, and in the articles they're saying there's still like some gray area about what's going to happen. But that is what should happen. Buyers should be responsible for paying their own brokers. And if you do that, I think you'll knock out half the fees of this industry.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is a conditional one: if U.S. home buyers are actually made to pay their own buyer’s-agent commissions out of pocket (rather than those fees being embedded on the seller’s side), then the total commission pool would fall by ~50%.

As of late 2025, that conditional world doesn’t really exist yet:

  • After the March 2024 NAR settlement and the August 2024 rule changes, buyers must sign written agreements specifying how their agent will be paid, but the commission can still be funded by either the buyer or the seller (or via seller concessions). In practice, the traditional pattern of sellers covering much or all of the buyer’s agent commission remains common.(washingtonpost.com)
  • Reports note that many agents and sellers effectively preserve the old structure by arranging off‑MLS commission splits or seller concessions, despite formal language that buyers are “responsible” for their agent’s pay.(investopedia.com) Direct, out‑of‑pocket payment by buyers is still relatively rare and uneven across markets.(washingtonpost.com)

Because the premise (“buyers are forced to pay their own broker’s commission” in a clear, universal, out‑of‑pocket way) has not been fully met, we can’t say whether the consequent (a ~50% drop in the total commission pool) is right or wrong.

What we can observe is that, under the current mixed/transition regime, total commissions have certainly not fallen by anything close to 50%:

  • A 2025 survey by Clever Real Estate finds the average combined commission rose from about 5.32% to 5.44%, roughly back to 2023 levels, not half of them.(etxview.com)
  • Redfin’s national data show buyer‑agent commissions around 2.4–2.55% before and after the settlement, with only small moves in either direction, and aggregate commission levels roughly unchanged through Q1–Q2 2025.(redfin.com)

However, since the prediction explicitly hinges on a stronger, cleaner version of buyer‑paid commissions than what we actually have now, the fair assessment is that it hasn’t really been tested yet, rather than proven correct or incorrect. Hence: inconclusive rather than wrong.

economymarkets
If the Federal Reserve keeps interest rates elevated for a prolonged period instead of delivering the anticipated cuts in 2024–2025, there will be significant financial distress in commercial real estate and this distress will extend into the U.S. regional banking system (e.g., rising loan losses, failures, or forced mergers).
But if rates stay higher, longer then you're going to see some real distress. Including in the regional banking system.View on YouTube
Explanation

The condition in Sacks’s prediction (“rates stay higher for longer instead of the big 2024–25 cuts people expected”) broadly came true, and so did the consequence (significant CRE distress spilling into regional banks).

  • Fed kept rates elevated vs. early‑2024 expectations. In early 2024, markets were pricing multiple cuts; consensus shifted from ~six cuts to “maybe three,” a shift widely described as a higher‑for‑longer path that would squeeze smaller banks and CRE borrowers. (cnbc.com) In reality, the Fed held the policy rate at 5.25–5.50% through mid‑2024 and its June 2024 projections reduced planned cuts to just one that year, with the funds rate still projected at ~4.1% in 2025. (gold-eagle.com) By early 2025 the target rate was still 4.25–4.50%, well above the Fed’s estimated long‑run level (~3%), and only in late 2025 had it been nudged down to around 4–4.25%. (reuters.com) That is a prolonged period of elevated policy rates relative to what markets and the Fed’s own March 2024 dots had anticipated.

  • Commercial real estate experienced clear, quantifiable distress. U.S. commercial mortgage delinquencies jumped from 2.94% in January 2023 to 4.66% in January 2024, largely driven by office properties; office delinquencies more than tripled year‑over‑year to 6.3% and coincided with record office vacancy rates. (investopedia.com) Through 2024 and into 2025, CMBS data show a sustained and worsening stress regime: by December 2024 overall CMBS delinquency had risen to 6.57%, with office delinquency above 11%, the highest since Trepp began tracking in 2000. (commercialsearch.com) In 2025, distress intensified further: CRED iQ reported an overall CMBS distress rate of 11.5% in January 2025, with office distress at ~17.7%, (commercialobserver.com) and Trepp’s office CMBS delinquency rate later hit ~11.7%, surpassing even the worst of the Global Financial Crisis. (wolfstreet.com) These are historically high stress levels by any reasonable standard.

  • That CRE stress did, in fact, extend into the regional banking system. Regulators closed Republic First Bank, a Philadelphia‑based regional lender with about $6 billion in assets, on April 26, 2024. The FDIC and AP described it as the first U.S. bank failure of 2024 and explicitly tied it to the ongoing strain on regional banks from rising interest rates and declining commercial real‑estate values, especially offices with high vacancies. (apnews.com) New York Community Bancorp, another regional bank with large CRE exposure, reported a $327 million Q1 2024 loss driven by sharply increased provisions for credit losses on its commercial real‑estate book, leading Fitch to downgrade it and cite elevated CRE‑related loan‑loss expectations. (reuters.com) NYCB subsequently required over $1 billion in new capital and embarked on major layoffs and asset sales to stabilize after CRE‑linked losses and integration pressures, a restructuring widely reported as a response to CRE stress. (apnews.com) Sector‑wide, PIMCO and others warned that high rates plus depressed CRE values were likely to cause more regional bank failures, specifically because regionals had concentrated CRE loan books. (moneycontrol.com) FDIC data through Q3 2025 show elevated past‑due rates in non‑owner‑occupied CRE loans relative to pre‑COVID norms and dozens of “problem banks,” even as headline industry profits recovered. (reuters.com) Alongside a few additional small bank failures in 2025 and a wave of regional‑bank M&A (for example, Fifth Third’s agreed acquisition of Comerica to bolster scale and stability after the 2023 crisis), this indicates ongoing, non‑trivial regional‑bank stress linked to asset‑quality and funding pressures. (reuters.com)

Taken together: (1) the Fed did keep policy rates elevated longer than early‑2024 expectations, and (2) commercial real estate has suffered historically high delinquency and distress rates that (3) have already produced at least one notable regional‑bank failure tied in part to CRE, plus heavy losses, capital raises, and consolidation pressure at other regionals. That matches Sacks’s qualitative claim that “if rates stay higher, longer” there would be “real distress” in CRE, “including in the regional banking system.” Hence the prediction is best scored as right rather than inconclusive or wrong, even though the damage has so far been significant but not fully systemic.

politicstech
TikTok will be shut down in the United States in the near future (soon enough that its roughly 100 million U.S. users will lose access and question why it happened).
100 million people are soon going to be asking when TikTok gets shut down. 100 million people who used it every day are going to be like, why did this happen?View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, TikTok has not been shut down in the United States; its roughly 100 million U.S. users still have access to the app and use it at scale.

Key points:

  • In April 2024, the U.S. enacted a law requiring ByteDance to divest TikTok’s U.S. operations or face a potential ban after a set deadline, but this was a conditional future ban, not an immediate shutdown.
  • Since then, TikTok has continued to operate in the U.S. while the law is challenged and implementation details are worked out. There has been no nationwide shutdown of user access comparable to what the prediction describes ("100 million people who used it every day" suddenly asking why it was shut down).
  • Because the prediction was that TikTok would be shut down in the near future such that those users would lose access and question why it happened, and that outcome has not materialized by late 2025, the prediction is best classified as wrong, not merely inconclusive/too early.

If the user-visible condition (“TikTok is shut down in the U.S., and ~100M people lose access”) has not occurred by now, the prediction has failed in practice, even though there has been serious regulatory and legislative pressure around TikTok.

aitech
The next major adoption wave for AI in customer support will be in phone-based call centers: IVR systems will be replaced so that when customers call, they will interact with AI voices that sound human and are realistic enough that many callers will not realize they are speaking to an AI.
I think where this is going to go next is to phone 100%. And these call centers use what are called ivrs... I think where it goes next is you'll call up the call center and you'll get a voice that sounds like a human. Just talk to you, and you won't even necessarily realize that you're talking to an AI.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since mid‑2024 shows a clear wave of AI adoption specifically in phone-based customer support, matching Sacks’ prediction about where AI in support would “go next.”

  • Numerous vendors now market AI phone agents / voicebots explicitly as IVR and call‑center replacements, offering natural, multi‑turn conversations over the phone (e.g., Air AI, Insighto.ai, Five9 IVA, Talkdesk AI, Callin.io, Phonecall.bot). These platforms emphasize handling inbound and outbound calls, appointment scheduling, order support, and triage—functions traditionally done by IVR trees and human call‑center agents. (siit.co)
  • Industry and vendor blogs in 2024–2025 describe AI voice agents as a major new wave in contact centers: replacing rigid IVR menus with conversational agents and positioning AI receptionists/phone agents as a replacement for traditional call centers, especially for SMBs. Articles talk about AI voice receptionists “replacing traditional call centers” and AI phone calls becoming the “new normal” in 2025, with SMBs and enterprises deploying these agents at scale. (blog.peakflo.co)
  • Contact‑center commentary notes that voice remains over half of all customer interactions, and AI is increasingly applied specifically to voice to make calls feel like natural conversations instead of menu trees—exactly the IVR‑to‑AI transition Sacks described. (techradar.com)
  • On realism and whether callers realize they’re speaking to AI: AI‑phone vendors highlight hyper‑realistic, human‑sounding voices as a key feature, and at least one high‑profile case (Phonely’s AI agents, deployed in real contact‑center environments and used to replace hundreds of human agents) reports accuracy above 99% and explicitly claims that customers “can’t tell they’re not human.” (venturebeat.com)
  • Research and product releases focused on low‑latency LLM‑based voice agents for telecom and call centers further confirm that significant R&D and deployment are now aimed squarely at real‑time phone support, not just text chat. (arxiv.org)

Adoption is not universal and many centers still use humans or hybrid human+AI. But by late 2025, there is a clear, industry‑recognized wave of AI phone agents replacing or front‑lining IVR/call‑center interactions, and several deployments show voices realistic enough that many callers do not realize they are speaking to AI. Directionally and qualitatively, Sacks’ prediction has come true.

Sacks @ 00:21:40Inconclusive
marketstechai
Consensus Wall Street analyst expectations as of February 2024 are that Nvidia will still hold roughly "60-something percent" of the GPU market used for AI workloads five years later (around 2029).
The Wall Street analysts I've been listening to think that in five years they're still going to have 60 something percent market share, so they're going to have a substantial percentage of this market or this Tam.View on YouTube
Explanation

This prediction is explicitly about Nvidia’s market share in AI GPUs five years after February 2024—i.e., around 2029. The current date is 2025-11-30, so we are only partway through the forecast horizon. There is no data yet on what Nvidia’s AI GPU market share will be in 2029, and current dominance or trends in 2024–2025 cannot definitively confirm or falsify a statement about 2029. Therefore, it is too early to judge whether this prediction is right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:25:35Inconclusive
aitech
The AI-driven wave of new applications (both consumer and enterprise) powered by cloud data centers and GPUs will continue to expand for at least the next decade from 2024, i.e., through at least 2034.
I mean, we're just at the beginning of a wave that's probably going to last at least a decade.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, we are less than two years into the 10‑year window (2024–2034) specified by the prediction, so it is not yet possible to determine whether the duration claim (“at least a decade”) is correct.

Empirically, the AI‑driven infrastructure and application boom is still very much underway:

  • Global data center GPU and AI infrastructure spending is growing rapidly and is forecast to keep expanding through at least 2030, driven by AI/ML workloads, cloud services, and GPUs/accelerators. (globenewswire.com)
  • Major cloud service providers (AWS, Microsoft, Google, Meta, Oracle, Tencent, Alibaba, Baidu) are dramatically increasing CapEx, with projections of $420B+ in 2025 and $520B in 2026, largely to fund GPU servers and AI data centers. (iconnect007.com)
  • Data center investments overall surged to about $455B in 2024 and are expected to continue rising, with hyperscalers’ CapEx heavily driven by AI infrastructure. (ciodive.com)
  • Server and AI accelerator forecasts show strong growth at least into 2026, with high‑end GPU server volumes and ASIC accelerators both expanding to serve AI applications. (investing.com)

These data points support the near‑term part of the thesis that an AI‑driven GPU/cloud data center wave is underway and still expanding. However, the prediction is about this wave continuing through at least 2034. Long‑range market forecasts out to ~2030 are positive but inherently uncertain and do not conclusively validate a full decade‑long boom.

Because the end date (2034) is still almost nine years away and no clear evidence yet contradicts or confirms sustained growth over that whole period, the correct evaluation at this time is “inconclusive (too early)”.

techai
Following the public backlash to Gemini’s rollout (Feb 2024), Google will not remove ideological bias from the model but will instead adjust it to be less obvious and more subtle, rather than changing the underlying values or objectives.
Now, I think what's going to happen now is in light of this, the reaction to the rollout is, do I think they're going to get rid of bias? No, they're going to make it more subtle... I think they're simply going to they're going to dial down the bias to be less obvious.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence suggests Google did not remove Gemini’s underlying ideological lean but instead adjusted how it surfaces, aligning with Sacks’s prediction.

  • In Google’s own post‑mortem on the February 2024 image‑generation fiasco, leadership said the feature had “missed the mark” because tuning for diversity and caution overcorrected, and promised to improve it while explicitly reaffirming goals of broad representation and safety rather than abandoning those goals.(blog.google)
  • When Google re‑enabled people image generation with Imagen 3 in August 2024, it emphasized new mitigations to make outputs more “fair,” training on captions to improve the variety and diversity of concepts and filtering data for “safety” and “fairness,” indicating continued value alignment rather than a neutrality reset.(techcrunch.com)
  • Independent 2025 research measuring political orientation across languages finds Gemini still exhibits a clear liberal/left‑wing tendency, often stronger than ChatGPT’s, meaning the system remains ideologically non‑neutral well after the backlash.(arxiv.org)
  • A separate 2025 case study on Gemini 2.0 Flash reports ongoing systematic moderation and gender/content biases (some reduced, some shifted), consistent with retuning guardrails rather than eliminating value‑laden behavior.(arxiv.org)
  • External testing and user reports describe Gemini as one of the most heavily censored models—frequently refusing politically sensitive prompts and showing asymmetric treatment of different political targets—indicating that overtly skewed outputs were largely replaced by stricter, selectively applied refusals and subtler bias rather than a genuine removal of ideology.(twitter.com)

Because Gemini’s observable behavior after the controversy still reflects a consistent ideological tilt, but with more careful tuning and heavier use of safety filters instead of obviously skewed generations, Sacks’s forecast—that Google would “dial down” rather than remove the bias—is best characterized as right.

ai
In response to criticism of Gemini, Google will not materially change the ideological framing of the model but will instead make the biased behaviors less overt and harder to detect, rather than eliminating them.
what I'm afraid of is that what Google will do is not change the underlying ideology that this AI model has been trained with, but rather they'll dial it down to the point where they're harder to call out. And so the energy will just be more subtle.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence cuts both ways and doesn’t let us decisively say whether Google merely hid the prior ideological tilt or substantially changed it.

On the “prediction seems right” side:

  • In Google’s first public response after the Gemini image backlash (Feb 22–23, 2024), leadership said the people‑image feature had been over‑calibrated toward diversity and historical “inaccuracies,” and they paused people‑generation while working on an “improved version.” They explicitly framed the problem as tuning and calibration, not as abandoning the underlying goal of diverse representation.(blog.google)
  • Statements from Gemini product leads stressed that image generation was designed to “reflect our global user base” and that they would continue to do this for general prompts, while just “further tun[ing]” historical contexts. That is very close to what Sacks described: keeping the same normative objective but making the obviously biased behaviors less blatant.(cnbc.com)
  • Early external criticism from former Googlers portrayed Gemini’s controversial outputs as a straightforward reflection of an internally “woke” culture, implying the ideological framing behind the model was intact even after the public outcry.(benzinga.com)

On the “prediction seems wrong” side:

  • A July 2024 comparative preprint found that Gemini’s political answers tended to be more centrist overall than those of several competing models, which suggests at least some deliberate re‑balancing toward the middle rather than simply hiding an unchanged ideology.(preprints.org)
  • Multiple 2025 academic audits measuring political slant across leading LLMs report that Gemini does exhibit liberal / left‑leaning tendencies, but often with a smaller or more mixed bias than some rivals, and that its behavior can be steered closer to neutrality with appropriate prompts.(news.stanford.edu)
  • A 2025 benchmark based on Anthropic’s “evenhandedness” metric rated Gemini 2.5 Pro as the most even‑handed model tested (97% score), which strongly indicates Google has invested in more symmetric political handling rather than merely obscuring one side’s bias.(aionx.co)

Because we cannot see Google’s internal training objectives or value‑alignment instructions, and external tests give mixed but improving pictures (still some left‑leaning tendencies, yet increasingly neutral by formal metrics), we can’t definitively say whether the “underlying ideology” remained the same and was just made subtler, or whether Google materially shifted its alignment toward genuine neutrality. The core of Sacks’s prediction concerns Google’s intentions and ideology, which are not directly observable from public data. That makes the truth of the prediction fundamentally indeterminate, so the fairest verdict is ambiguous.

politicsconflict
If Transnistria (a Russian enclave in Moldova) formally seeks annexation by Russia and/or holds a referendum to join Russia following the February 2024 discussions, Western governments will treat this as evidence of broader Russian expansionist aims and the Ukraine conflict will significantly escalate as a result.
So now Transnistria is right there and could theoretically make a play to try and join Russia. Why do I think this is a big deal? Because if something like this happens, it could really expand the Ukraine war. The West is going to use this as evidence that Putin wants to invade multiple countries and invade, you know, a bunch of countries in Europe. And this could lead to a major escalation in the war.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available reporting shows that after the late‑February 2024 "congress of deputies" in Transnistria, local leaders appealed to Russia for “protection” from Moldovan economic and political pressure, but did not formally request annexation or announce a new referendum to join Russia. Multiple outlets note that such an annexation appeal had been widely rumored in advance, yet officials in Chișinău, Kyiv, and Tiraspol later explicitly denied that any annexation request was made; the adopted resolution instead asked Moscow for measures to protect Transnistria and complained of an “economic war” by Moldova. (regtrends.com)

Western governments did react warily to Transnistria’s February 2024 appeal—U.S. and European officials framed it as part of ongoing Russian pressure and hybrid tactics toward Moldova, not as a new, concrete step of territorial annexation. (theguardian.com) There is no clear evidence that this episode was treated as proof that Russia was about to “invade multiple countries in Europe,” nor that it directly triggered a discrete, major escalation in the Ukraine war distinct from the broader, already‑ongoing conflict dynamics.

Because the key trigger condition in the prediction—Transnistria formally seeking annexation and/or holding a new referendum to join Russia after the February 2024 discussions—has not occurred, the core claim about how the West would respond and how much the Ukraine war would escalate remains untested. We therefore cannot determine whether the predicted reaction would have been right or wrong, and the outcome is best classified as ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
Barring an extreme unforeseen event (e.g., major health crisis), Joe Biden will secure enough primary delegates and will be the official Democratic nominee for U.S. president in the 2024 election.
So unless he changes his mind or there's some act of God, he's going to be the nominee.View on YouTube
Explanation

Factual outcome:

  • Joe Biden did secure enough delegates in the 2024 Democratic primaries and became the presumptive nominee, winning an overwhelming majority of pledged delegates. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • After a widely criticized June 2024 debate and intense intra-party pressure, Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024, becoming the first eligible incumbent since Lyndon B. Johnson in 1968 to end a reelection bid after locking up the delegates. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Following his withdrawal, Biden endorsed Kamala Harris, who was then chosen by the delegates and became the official Democratic nominee on August 5, 2024. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Harris, not Biden, was on the ballot as the Democratic nominee in November 2024. (en.wikipedia.org)

Interpretation vs. prediction:

  • The normalized prediction: “Barring an extreme unforeseen event (e.g., major health crisis), Joe Biden will secure enough primary delegates and will be the official Democratic nominee for U.S. president in the 2024 election.”
  • Reality: Biden did secure enough primary delegates, but he did not become the official nominee, because he later withdrew and declined the nomination.
  • However, Sacks explicitly framed his forecast as conditional: “unless he changes his mind or there’s some act of God, he’s going to be the nominee.” Biden did change his mind and stepped aside in what contemporaneous coverage and later analysis treat as an unprecedented, extraordinary political event—an incumbent withdrawing after clinching the delegates under intense pressure from his own party. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the prediction was explicitly limited to the world “barring an extreme unforeseen event / unless he changes his mind,” and the actual world is precisely one in which he changed his mind amid an extraordinary, historically rare chain of events, we can’t cleanly score the statement as right or wrong. The outcome falls outside the scenario he was conditioning on.

Hence, the fairest evaluation is ambiguous rather than definitively right or wrong.

politics
No new major presidential candidate who is not already in the 2024 race as of mid‑February 2024 will successfully enter and become a serious contender for the 2024 U.S. presidential election.
in nine months. We're running out of time. I mean, it's entirely too late to be talking about new candidates who aren't even in the race. Not going to happen.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of mid‑February 2024, the major declared presidential candidates included Joe Biden, Donald Trump, Robert F. Kennedy Jr., Cornel West, Jill Stein, Dean Phillips and others—but not Kamala Harris as a presidential candidate. Biden was running for reelection with Harris as his vice‑presidential running mate, not as a separate presidential contender. (en.wikipedia.org)

On July 21, 2024, Biden announced he would not seek reelection and endorsed Harris to replace him at the top of the Democratic ticket. This announcement triggered the launch of the Kamala Harris 2024 presidential campaign and a rapid consolidation of party support around her. (reuters.com) Harris’s campaign is widely dated from this July 21 entry into the race and is noted for being only 107 days long, the shortest general‑election presidential campaign in modern history. (en.wikipedia.org)

Harris quickly became the Democratic presidential nominee, securing the nomination via a delegate roll call in early August 2024 and heading the party’s national ticket against Donald Trump. (en.wikipedia.org) In the November 5, 2024 general election, she won 48.3% of the popular vote and 226 electoral votes, losing narrowly to Trump (49.8% and 312 electoral votes). That level of vote share, Electoral College support, and national prominence clearly qualifies her as a serious contender in the 2024 election. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because Harris was not a presidential candidate as of mid‑February 2024, but later entered the race and became the Democratic nominee and a major general‑election contender, her candidacy is a direct counterexample to Sacks’s prediction that no such new major presidential candidate would successfully enter and become a serious contender in 2024.

Sacks @ 00:49:45Inconclusive
aitechmarkets
Over the next several years, OpenAI will maintain a performance lead over open-source models and other competitors sufficient for it to remain the leading commercial AI model provider and to be a financially successful company.
I do think there is an argument that open AI will stay in the lead and actually do quite well.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, parts of Sacks’s prediction are partially aligned with reality, but the forecast explicitly covers “the next several years,” so it’s too early to give a definitive verdict.

On performance and market leadership:

  • OpenAI has continued to ship frontier proprietary models (GPT‑4.5, GPT‑4.1, GPT‑5, GPT‑5.1, o‑series reasoning models). Usage data from Langfuse for October 2024–September 2025 show that the majority of the top‑used models in real applications are OpenAI models (GPT‑4o mini, GPT‑4o, GPT‑4.1, GPT‑4.1 mini, GPT‑5 variants, etc.), suggesting that OpenAI is still a dominant commercial provider on the application layer.【turn0search0】
  • However, competitors have made substantial gains. Anthropic’s Claude Opus 4.5 is reported to beat Google Gemini 3 Pro and OpenAI’s GPT‑5.1 on some coding benchmarks (e.g., SWE‑Bench Verified) and to lead in enterprise AI adoption with about 32% share vs. ~25% for OpenAI.【turn0news13】 Open‑source and non‑OpenAI models (e.g., DeepSeek, Qwen, Llama) now top various academic and community leaderboards; ensembles of smaller open‑source models can outperform GPT‑4.1 on a majority of evaluated datasets in at least one published study.【turn0search1】【turn0academia29】 This makes the idea of a clear, uncontested performance “lead” more debatable.

On financial success:

  • OpenAI’s financial metrics look strong on growth and valuation: it raised about $40 billion at a $300 billion valuation in April 2025 and reported annualized revenue of roughly $12 billion by July 2025, up from $3.7 billion in 2024.【turn0search23】 In July 2025 there were tens of millions of paying ChatGPT subscribers, with projections of continued rapid revenue growth.【turn0news12】
  • At the same time, the company is still losing large amounts of money and is projected to require over $200 billion in additional capital by 2030 to fund compute and infrastructure, according to HSBC estimates.【turn0news14】 Whether this trajectory ultimately counts as long‑term “financial success” is uncertain and depends on outcomes well beyond 2025.

Because (a) the claim is about maintaining a lead “over the next several years,” a period that has not yet fully elapsed, and (b) both competitive performance and long‑run financial sustainability are actively in flux, the most accurate assessment today is that the prediction’s ultimate truth value is inconclusive (too early to tell).

aimarkets
If OpenAI continues to keep even a modest quality lead over open-source models, it will capture the vast majority of the consumer-facing GPT/query market (analogous to Google’s dominance in search), with most users preferring OpenAI’s service over alternatives.
if OpenAI just maintains a little bit of a lead over open source, then it could basically when the vast, vast majority of the call it consumer search or consumer GPT market.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data shows that OpenAI’s ChatGPT currently has a very large lead in direct consumer chatbot usage, but the prediction is conditional, vague in scope, and not time‑bounded, so it can’t be cleanly scored as fully right or wrong.

On the “market share” side:

  • ChatGPT is by far the most visited AI chatbot site globally, with ~46.6B visits from Aug 2024–Jul 2025; the next ten chatbots combined are under 10B, implying ChatGPT has ~80%+ of traffic among the top players.【0search0】0search1】0search11】
  • Similarweb-based reporting shows ChatGPT getting nearly 6B visits in Aug 2025, about 8× Gemini and far ahead of other rivals.【0search3】
  • Some estimates put ChatGPT at ~60% of the U.S. AI‑chatbot market.【0search5】
  • In October 2025, Sam Altman reported 800M weekly active ChatGPT users, roughly double the combined weekly users of Meta AI, Gemini, Grok, Perplexity, and Claude.【2news13】 This strongly supports the idea that OpenAI has captured a dominant share of consumer-facing GPT/chatbot usage, at least in the narrow sense of standalone assistants.

On the “quality lead over open source” and scope assumptions:

  • Benchmarks generally still show GPT‑4o slightly ahead of open-source LLaMA 3.x models on broad reasoning/knowledge metrics such as MMLU and multimodal tasks, i.e., a modest average quality edge.【1search0】2search9】
  • But top open-weight models (e.g., Llama 3.1 405B, DeepSeek V3/R1) now match or beat GPT‑4/4o on some benchmarks, including MMLU and certain reasoning tasks, indicating that the gap has narrowed and sometimes reverses depending on the test.【2search5】1search2】1search7】1news15】 That makes it unclear whether OpenAI still has the kind of clear, consistent “little bit of a lead” the quote assumes.
  • The prediction also refers to the broad “consumer search / GPT market,” not just standalone chatbots. In that wider space, AI assistants embedded in other products are significant: Meta AI reported almost 500M monthly users by late 2024,【2search4】 ByteDance’s Doubao is the top chatbot in China with over 150M MAUs,【0news14】 and various regional or app‑integrated assistants (Gemini in Google Search, Doubao in Douyin, etc.) capture substantial consumer query volume that doesn’t pass through OpenAI at all.【0search2】0search8】

Because:

  1. the statement is conditional and probabilistic ("if" and "could"),
  2. key terms like “little bit of a lead” and “vast, vast majority” are not precisely defined, and
  3. the relevant market (standalone chatbots vs all consumer AI query experiences) is contested, we can’t decisively say the prediction has clearly succeeded or failed as of late 2025. It is best classified as ambiguous rather than definitively right, wrong, or merely “too early.”
aitech
OpenAI’s custom GPT platform and associated developer network effects will create a self-reinforcing ecosystem around ChatGPT that open-source model ecosystems will find difficult to match, leading to a durable advantage for OpenAI in capabilities and available applications.
So you have a classic developer network effect where you've got OpenAI aggregating hundreds of millions of consumers because they perceive that ChatGPT is the best. Then you've got developers wanting to reach that audience. So they build custom gpts on the OpenAI platform. That actually gives ChatGPT more capability. Yeah. And that's something that open source can't easily catch up with.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that OpenAI’s custom GPT platform and its developer network effects would create a self‑reinforcing ecosystem that open‑source models would find hard to match, giving OpenAI a durable advantage in capabilities and applications.

1. OpenAI did build a large custom‑GPT ecosystem
OpenAI’s GPT Store launched in January 2024; by early 2024 more than 3 million custom GPTs had been created, with on the order of ~150–160k public GPTs in the store and hundreds to thousands of new GPTs added daily. Academic work (GPTZoo) cataloged over 700k GPT instances shortly after launch, indicating substantial real‑world experimentation and usage around the custom‑GPT platform. (openai.com)
This supports the first part of the claim: OpenAI did generate a sizable developer ecosystem and a broad catalog of applications on top of ChatGPT.

2. But open‑source ecosystems have grown larger and highly competitive
By late 2024, Hugging Face already hosted over 1 million AI models; by August 2025, an empirical study found ~1.86 million models on the platform, documenting extensive “family trees” of fine‑tuned derivatives. (arstechnica.com)
Hugging Face reports massive enterprise usage and positions itself explicitly as a way for businesses to rapidly find and deploy open‑source models, showing that open ecosystems are heavily used in production, not just research. (nutanix.com)
A joint MIT–Hugging Face study cited by the Financial Times found that by 2025 China alone accounted for a larger share of global open‑model downloads than the U.S., underscoring that open‑weight ecosystems are vibrant, global, and scaling quickly. (ft.com)

3. Open models now match or surpass OpenAI on key capabilities
Multiple open or open‑weight models rival or beat OpenAI’s frontier models on important benchmarks:

  • DeepSeek‑R1, an open‑weight reasoning model, scores higher than GPT‑4o on several standardized tests: it achieves ~90.8% on MMLU and 97.3% on the MATH‑500 benchmark, beating GPT‑4o’s 88.7% MMLU and 76.6% MATH scores. (edenai.co)
  • A July 2025 survey of live benchmarks ranks DeepSeek‑R1 as the top open‑source model and 4th overall on Chatbot Arena, with extremely strong reasoning and coding metrics (e.g., ~99% on MATH‑500 and >90% on AIME‑style tasks), explicitly noting that it matches or outperforms OpenAI’s o‑series on several reasoning benchmarks while being far cheaper. (champaignmagazine.com)
  • Meta’s Llama 4 Maverick is reported to offer performance comparable to GPT‑4o on coding and reasoning, and Meta is rolling out Llama across major consumer surfaces like WhatsApp, Messenger and Instagram—making these open models widely accessible to end‑users and developers. (theverge.com)
  • Alibaba’s Qwen3 family (Apache‑2.0 open‑license) and related QwQ / Qwen2.5 models are released as open weights; Alibaba claims Qwen2.5‑Max outperforms GPT‑4o and leading open competitors on multiple benchmarks, and Qwen3 models provide reasoning and multimodal capabilities similar in spirit to OpenAI’s o‑series and GPT‑4o, with downloadable weights for developers. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Open‑source reasoning models like AM‑Thinking‑v1, built on open Qwen2.5‑32B, report surpassing DeepSeek‑R1 itself on AIME and LiveCodeBench, further pushing the open frontier. (arxiv.org)

Collectively, these results show that by mid‑to‑late 2025, open‑weight models are not lagging far behind ChatGPT; in several high‑value domains (math, coding, reasoning) they match or exceed OpenAI’s best generally available models.

4. Open ecosystems for applications rival custom GPTs
Open‑source platforms provide their own powerful “developer network effects”:

  • Hugging Face’s Hub and Spaces support millions of models and thousands of hosted apps, with tooling (Transformers, Text‑Generation‑Inference, Spaces, etc.) designed to make deploying and sharing LLM‑based applications as easy as using a closed API. (arstechnica.com)
  • Large ecosystems have formed around open models and agent frameworks (e.g., DeepSeek R1, Llama, Qwen) for fine‑tuned assistants, local deployments, and enterprise‑specific agents, often favored because they avoid vendor lock‑in and reduce inference cost—key considerations for businesses choosing platforms. (leanware.co)

Meanwhile, although OpenAI’s GPT Store has hundreds of thousands of GPTs and significant usage, its growth plateaued relatively quickly and it remains tied to ChatGPT’s paid tiers and OpenAI’s policies, limiting its reach compared with globally downloadable open‑weight models that can be deployed anywhere. (originality.ai)

5. Net assessment vs. the original claim
Two years after the prediction (Feb 2024 → late 2025):

  • Yes, OpenAI retains one of the strongest proprietary consumer platforms, and custom GPTs meaningfully extend ChatGPT’s capabilities.
  • But open‑source ecosystems have not been left behind. On benchmarks and in real‑world deployments, open‑weight models like DeepSeek‑R1, Llama 4, Qwen3 and successors have caught up to or surpassed OpenAI’s widely available models in several capability areas, while the open model/application ecosystem (Hugging Face and others) is at least comparable in scale and diversity to the GPT Store.

Because open‑source ecosystems have matched and, in some niches, exceeded OpenAI’s capabilities and application diversity—contradicting the idea that they would find it “difficult to catch up” and that OpenAI would enjoy a clear, durable moat from custom GPT network effects—the prediction is best judged as wrong.

economymarkets
Over the ensuing period after February 2024, a significant portion of regional US banks holding office‑backed commercial real‑estate loan portfolios will experience material impairments and financial stress (including stock price declines and/or solvency concerns) as office values fall and loans are written down.
there's a huge amount of equity that's been written off. But in addition to that, there's a lot of debt holders who are in trouble too. And that debt is is held by regional banks. So these commercial loan portfolios are significantly impaired.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since February 2024 shows that many U.S. regional banks with sizable office‑backed commercial real‑estate (CRE) portfolios have, in fact, taken meaningful write‑downs and faced notable financial stress, even though the system overall has remained resilient.

• Office values and fundamentals deteriorated further as forecast: Moody’s projected office values would fall roughly 26% peak‑to‑trough through 2025, and office‑loan delinquencies climbed to multi‑year highs while other CRE segments remained relatively stable, making office the clear weak spot and a concentrated risk for smaller and regional banks. (cfodive.com)

• New York Community Bancorp/Flagstar—an archetypal regional CRE lender—suffered exactly the kind of portfolio impairment and stress Sacks described: a surprise $252m quarterly loss driven largely by multifamily and office loans, a $552m jump in provisions and $185m in charge‑offs, and a 38% one‑day stock plunge that took shares to multi‑decade lows and sparked fears of failure, followed by management turnover and an emergency capital raise. (commercialobserver.com)

• Other CRE‑heavy regionals also showed material impairment and strain. Valley National and Flagstar/NYCB recorded large CRE charge‑offs and provisions; for example, Flagstar logged about $388m of office‑loan charge‑offs and a roughly $930m net loss over the first nine months of 2024, while Valley’s credit charges on CRE cut full‑year 2024 net income by almost a quarter and forced it to shrink CRE exposure and bolster reserves, keeping its stock at a deep discount. (ft.com) KeyCorp’s CRE non‑performing loan rate more than doubled to 5.1%, another sign of significant office‑loan stress at a regional lender. (credaily.com)

• Rating agencies explicitly flagged a broad cohort of regional banks as vulnerable because of CRE (especially office) portfolios. S&P and Moody’s placed multiple CRE‑heavy regionals—Old National, WaFd, Peapack‑Gladstone, F.N.B., First Merchants, Fulton Financial, Valley National and others—on negative outlook or downgrade review, citing high CRE concentrations and the risk that falling property values and refinancing difficulties would impair capital and earnings. In total, about 9 U.S. banks, or ~18% of those S&P rates, carried a negative outlook largely due to CRE exposure, which is a non‑trivial share. (investopedia.com)

• Market performance and analyst commentary show sector‑wide pressure tied to these CRE issues. The KBW Regional Banking Index has persistently lagged large‑bank and broad equity indices, with analysts and Moody’s pointing to regional banks’ outsized share of CRE lending and naming 27 regional/community banks whose CRE loans exceeded 2x tangible common equity; the article highlights Flagstar and Valley National as examples where CRE‑related credit charges drove major profit declines and stock underperformance. (ft.com)

• At the same time, regulators and data indicate the stress has been significant but not systemic: most banks’ overall credit metrics and capital remain solid, Q2 2024 provisions came in below expectations for many institutions, and by late 2025 Reuters characterizes regional banks as having largely “weathered” the CRE storm even as office loans remain a pronounced weak point and delinquency rates in office hit record levels. (spglobal.com)

Putting this together, office‑backed CRE downturn did lead to sizeable write‑downs, elevated reserves, ratings pressure, stock underperformance, and in at least one case near‑solvency concerns at multiple regional banks with concentrated exposure. That fits Sacks’ prediction of significant impairments and financial stress across a meaningful slice of the regional‑bank sector exposed to office loans, even though the impact stopped short of a full‑blown systemic crisis.

economymarkets
From 2024 onward, the US commercial and multifamily real estate sector will experience a prolonged, staggered ‘rolling’ crisis, with waves of distress and defaults occurring over multiple years as loans and leases sequentially come up for refinancing, rather than a single short, acute crisis concentrated in one year.
that's why there's a rolling crisis in real estate is because the debt rolls over time. It's not like everybody hits the wall and has to refinance at the same time.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim was about the shape of the US commercial and multifamily real estate downturn: not a single, short, 2008‑style crash centered in one year, but a drawn‑out, rolling crisis as loans and leases come due and have to be refinanced at higher rates.

Evidence since 2024 strongly matches that description:

  • Data on loan maturities show a large multi‑year “maturity wall” rather than a one‑year cliff. S&P Global estimated about $950B of CRE mortgages maturing in 2024, rising to nearly $1T in 2025 and peaking around $1.26T in 2027, explicitly noting the refinancing challenge will not be resolved quickly. (spglobal.com) The St. Louis Fed similarly highlighted that roughly $1.7T (≈30% of CRE debt) matures in 2024–2026, emphasizing refinancing/repricing risk over those years rather than in a single period. (stlouisfed.org)
  • Other institutional analyses reinforce this staggered, multi‑year timeline. Franklin Templeton, drawing on Trepp data, cites about $1.2T in CRE loans maturing in 2024–25 and another ~$1.8T in 2026–28, again framing it as a wall of maturities extending across several years. (franklintempleton.com) Industry and credit‑data firms (e.g., CRED iQ / Commercial Observer, GlobeSt) likewise show large securitized CRE maturities in 2025–26 and another wave in 2029, not a single‑year lump. (globest.com)
  • Banks and regulators describe the problem as prolonged pressure rather than a short shock. The Financial Times reported U.S. banks facing about $2T of maturing property debt over three years, with office and multifamily singled out as especially troubled. (ft.com) Reuters’ review of regional banks in late 2024 stresses that CRE challenges from deteriorating office loans and refinancing risks are expected to “persist for years” as large volumes of debt roll over. (reuters.com)
  • Distress has indeed been emerging in waves tied to maturities, not as a one‑off collapse. CMBS data show CRE delinquency rates rising through 2024–25, with multifamily delinquencies in particular jumping several percentage points year‑over‑year and office remaining the most stressed. (reddit.com) At the same time, lenders have repeatedly extended loans and pushed maturities out, which GlobeSt notes has literally moved the “maturity wall” from an expected peak in 2024 toward 2026—turning what could have been a single acute event into a drawn‑out refinancing squeeze. (globest.com)

By late 2025, we clearly see (1) a large block of CRE and multifamily debt coming due over multiple years, (2) refinancing at higher rates producing ongoing waves of distress and defaults, and (3) no single short, concentrated crisis year. That pattern is exactly what Sacks described as a “rolling crisis” driven by staggered debt rollovers, so his prediction is best judged right.

conflictpolitics
Following the late-January 2024 drone attack that killed U.S. troops at Tower 22, the Biden administration will carry out some form of military retaliatory strike within the ensuing weeks, likely targeting either Iran-backed militias in Syria and/or Iraq, or Iranian assets directly.
there is going to be some sort of retaliatory strike. It might be focused on these militias in Syria and Iraq. It could be attacking Iranian assets. We don't knowView on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows the prediction came true:

  • The Tower 22 drone attack on a U.S. outpost in Jordan occurred on 28 January 2024, killing three U.S. soldiers and wounding dozens.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • On 2 February 2024, the U.S. launched large-scale retaliatory airstrikes explicitly described as a response to the Jordan/Tower 22 attack. These strikes hit more than 85 targets across seven facilities used by Iran-backed militias and Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) Quds Force in Iraq and Syria.(defense.gov)

This matches Sacks’s forecast on all key points:

  1. Retaliatory strike occurs – The Biden administration did carry out military retaliation.
  2. Timing – The strikes began on 2 February 2024, just five days after the 28 January attack, well within the “ensuing weeks” window.(en.wikipedia.org)
  3. Targets – The operations focused on Iran-backed militias in Syria and Iraq and facilities associated with the IRGC Quds Force, i.e., Iranian-linked assets, exactly in line with his described options (“militias in Syria and Iraq” and/or “Iranian assets”).(defense.gov)

Given the direct retaliatory strikes within days against Iran-backed militias in Iraq and Syria, the prediction is accurate.

Sacks @ 01:18:53Inconclusive
conflictpolitics
If the United States chooses to strike Iranian assets directly in response to the Tower 22 attack, this will quickly escalate into a wider regional conflict involving active hostilities between U.S./allied forces and Iran or Iran-backed forces across at least Iran, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, and Yemen during the same conflict period (i.e., within months of such a strike).
Depending on the action they choose, we could very rapidly find ourselves engaged in a wider regional war on five different fronts. I mean, a war with Iran would involve us in Iran, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon and Yemen, where we're already bombing.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: if the U.S. chose to strike Iranian assets directly in response to the Tower 22 attack, then a wider regional war would quickly erupt across at least Iran, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, and Yemen.

What actually happened:

  • The Tower 22 drone attack on a U.S. outpost in Jordan occurred on 28 January 2024 and killed three U.S. soldiers. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In retaliation, beginning 2 February 2024 the U.S. launched a series of at least 125 airstrikes against Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) elements and Iran‑backed militias in Iraq and Syria, not on Iranian territory itself. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • U.S. officials at the time repeatedly stressed that there were no plans to bomb Iran directly and that Washington sought to avoid a wider war with Iran, despite pressure from some lawmakers to hit targets inside Iran. (theguardian.com)
  • Separately, the U.S. and U.K. were already conducting and then continued airstrikes against Iran‑backed Houthi forces in Yemen over Red Sea shipping attacks, but this campaign predated Tower 22 and was framed as limited strikes against Houthis in Yemen, not a new multi‑front U.S.–Iran war. (en.wikipedia.org)

Within the months following Tower 22, there was no U.S. decision to strike Iranian territory itself in direct response to that attack, and there was also no clearly defined five‑front shooting war pitting U.S./allied forces directly against Iran or its forces simultaneously in Iran, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, and Yemen as a result of such a decision.

Because the key antecedent in the prediction — a U.S. choice to hit Iranian assets directly (in practice, inside Iran) in response to Tower 22 — never occurred, the escalation scenario it described was never actually tested. Logically, that means we cannot say whether Sacks’s predicted outcome would have happened or not.

Therefore the prediction is best scored as inconclusive rather than right or wrong.

markets
Reddit’s planned IPO around March 2024 will be priced by underwriters at a level near the rumored $5 billion equity valuation and will be deemed a successful offering in market terms (i.e., the deal will price and trade without being withdrawn or significantly re-cut, and the stock will not break materially below the IPO price in its first days of trading).
The $5 billion valuation seems, I think, pretty good… the investment bankers will know how to price this to take it out and make it successful.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that Sacks’s prediction substantially matches what happened:

  • IPO timing and valuation level: Reddit priced its IPO on March 20, 2024 at $34 per share, at the top of a $31–$34 range, implying roughly $6.4 billion in equity value (about $5.4 billion on a narrower share-count basis). This is close to the earlier ~$5 billion rumor, i.e., in the same valuation ballpark rather than far above it. (fortune.com)
  • Deal execution (no withdrawal or major re-cut): The offering went ahead as planned, priced at the top of the indicated range (not down-sized or repriced lower) and was reported to be 4–5x oversubscribed, consistent with a strong book and a clean execution by the underwriters. (reuters.com)
  • Initial trading and market reception: On March 21, 2024, Reddit began trading on the NYSE under ticker RDDT. The stock opened well above the IPO price, traded up as much as ~70% intraday, and closed around $50.4–$50.5, roughly 48% above the $34 IPO price, giving it a market cap near $9.5–10 billion. Major outlets described this as a strong / robust debut and a positive signal for the tech IPO market. (cnbc.com)
  • No material break below IPO price in the first days: Historical price data show that on March 22, 2024 (the second trading day), Reddit closed at $46.00 with an intraday low of $45.34, still well above the $34 IPO price. Later in April 2024 the lowest recorded price was about $37.35, which is still above the IPO level. Thus in the initial days—and in fact for many months—the stock never traded below its IPO price. (financecharts.com)
  • Longer-term context (doesn’t negate the call): Although Reddit later became quite volatile and at one point in March 2025 fell about 60% from a peak above $200 to roughly $110, coverage still notes it remained well above its IPO price (up roughly 200% from the offering). This later decline doesn’t contradict Sacks’s more limited claim about the IPO’s pricing and early trading. (ccn.com)

Given that the IPO was priced near the rumored $5B equity value, executed without being withdrawn or significantly re-cut, and traded strongly without breaking below the IPO price in its early days, Sacks’s prediction is best classified as right.

Sacks @ 00:15:34Inconclusive
economygovernment
For at least the foreseeable future (multi‑year), the U.S. will not again see a fiscal‑plus‑monetary stimulus episode as large and aggressive as the 2020–2021 Covid period; there will be no comparable "party" of massive money airdrops into the economy.
I don't think it's ever going to be quite the party that it was in 2020 and 2021, where both the fed and the federal government were just airdropping money into the economy... it's never going to be like that again, because we're never going to have that magnitude of money airdropped on the economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence strongly supports that, so far, the U.S. has not repeated anything close to the 2020–2021 COVID-era combination of massive fiscal stimulus plus ultra-aggressive monetary easing, but the prediction’s open‑ended time frame (“for the foreseeable future / never again”) means it cannot be definitively judged yet.

On the COVID era:

  • The CARES Act alone was a ~$2.2 trillion package—about 10% of U.S. GDP—with large direct cash payments to households, expanded unemployment benefits, and big support for firms and state/local governments. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Additional relief followed via the $2.3 trillion Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2021 (including ~$900 billion in further COVID relief) and the $1.9 trillion American Rescue Plan Act of 2021, both of which also featured direct payments and large temporary income supports. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In parallel, the Federal Reserve expanded its balance sheet from about $4.2 trillion pre‑pandemic to roughly $8–9 trillion through massive asset purchases (QE), creating several trillion dollars of new reserves in 2020–2021. (federalreserve.gov)

Since January 26, 2024 (prediction date) through November 30, 2025:

  • There have been no new nationwide federal stimulus‑check programs or similar broad “airdrop” style payments. The IRS and fact‑checkers repeatedly state that, as of mid‑ to late‑2025, online claims about new $1,390–$2,000 federal stimulus checks are false, and that no new federal Economic Impact Payments have been authorized. The last federal payments relate to the 2021 American Rescue Plan; the final deadline to claim missed amounts via the Recovery Rebate Credit was April 15, 2025. (apnews.com)
  • Any new federal tax legislation in this period (e.g., the Tax Relief for American Families and Workers Act proposal) is on the order of tens of billions, focused on credits and business provisions—not multi‑trillion, one‑off cash infusions comparable to CARES/ARP. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Large Biden‑era packages like the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act, CHIPS and Science Act, and Inflation Reduction Act are substantial but structured as long‑term investment and tax‑credit programs, not sudden broad cash airdrops into household bank accounts. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • On the monetary side, the Fed has been in tightening or at most mildly easing mode, not launching a new wave of QE. After ending pandemic‑era asset purchases in 2022 and starting quantitative tightening, it has gradually reduced its balance sheet from a ~$9 trillion peak to about $6.6–7 trillion, and only in late 2025 is it stopping further shrinkage rather than expanding again. Policy rates remain in the roughly 3.75–5% range after a series of modest cuts, far from the near‑zero/ZIRP stance of 2020. (congress.gov)

Implication:

  • Empirically, from early 2024 through late 2025, there has indeed been no repeat of a 2020–2021‑style dual shock of multi‑trillion fiscal transfers plus emergency‑level QE and zero rates. This is consistent with Sacks’s thesis that “it’s never going to be quite the party that it was in 2020 and 2021.”
  • However, his statement is effectively open‑ended (“never going to be like that again” / multi‑year foreseeable future), and we are less than two years out from the prediction. There is no defined end date by which the non‑occurrence of another such episode would make the prediction definitively true, so logically it remains too early to say it is right or wrong.

Because the observed data so far align with the prediction but the time horizon is not yet closed, the appropriate verdict is "inconclusive" rather than “right” or “wrong.”

[Not a prediction – rhetorical question about Texas seceding; excluded from verification.]
Is Texas going to secede from the Union? Said, all right, what's going to happen?View on YouTube
Explanation

The quoted line from Sacks – “Is Texas going to secede from the Union? Said, all right, what’s going to happen?” – is framed explicitly as a question, not as a declaration that Texas will secede by any particular date. It lacks:

  • a clear directional claim (he does not say Texas will or won’t secede), and
  • any time horizon (no "by year X" or similar),

so it doesn’t meet a basic standard for a falsifiable prediction.

Independently of that, Texas has not seceded from the United States as of November 30, 2025 (it remains a U.S. state under federal law and in all official records), so if one tried to reinterpret this as a concrete forecast that Texas would have seceded by now, that forecast would be wrong. But because the original statement is merely a rhetorical / speculative question, not a definite forecast, the appropriate status for this item is that it’s not a well-formed prediction, hence ambiguous for verification purposes.

Sacks @ 00:40:49Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
In the legal battle over Texas’s use of razor wire and related border-security measures versus the federal government (including the 2023–2024 Supreme Court dispute), Governor Abbott will ultimately lose in formal courts but will gain majority support in U.S. public opinion polls on the border issue.
I think Governor Abbott here is probably going to lose in a court of law, but he's going to win in the court of public opinion.View on YouTube
Explanation

Legal‑outcome part (Abbott “will lose in a court of law”)

  • In January 2024, the U.S. Supreme Court, on its emergency docket, temporarily sided with the Biden administration and allowed Border Patrol to cut Texas’ razor wire near Eagle Pass while litigation continued. (theguardian.com) This is the context in which Sacks spoke.
  • However, on November 27, 2024, the 5th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals issued a 2–1 opinion in Texas v. Department of Homeland Security, reversing the district court and granting Texas a limited preliminary injunction that bars federal agents from damaging, destroying or interfering with Texas’ concertina‑wire fence except in narrowly defined circumstances. The court found the district judge had erred on sovereign‑immunity grounds and accepted Texas’ showing of likely success and irreparable harm. (ktsa.com) This is a significant win for Texas on the razor‑wire question and directly undercuts the idea that Abbott clearly “loses in a court of law” on this issue.
  • Separately, the 5th Circuit sitting en banc later allowed Texas’ 1,000‑foot floating buoy barrier in the Rio Grande to remain, overturning a prior injunction that had ordered the barrier removed—again a legal win for Abbott in a border‑barrier case against the federal government. (reuters.com)
  • Texas has not won everything: for example, in July 2025 a divided 5th Circuit panel upheld an injunction blocking Texas’ SB4 migrant‑arrest law, siding with challengers and the Biden administration and emphasizing that immigration enforcement is a federal power. Texas has vowed to appeal, and the case could go to the Supreme Court. (reuters.com)
  • Crucially, there is no final Supreme Court merits decision resolving the core razor‑wire or buoy disputes as of November 30, 2025, and key aspects of Abbott’s broader border agenda remain in active litigation. Given the mix of wins and losses and the ongoing nature of these cases, it is not yet possible to say that Abbott has “ultimately” lost in formal courts on the razor‑wire/border‑barrier front.

Because the long‑run legal outcome Sacks predicted has not been definitively resolved, this half of the prediction cannot yet be judged.

Public‑opinion part (Abbott “will win in the court of public opinion”)

  • A national Rasmussen Reports survey conducted January 23–25, 2024—immediately after the Supreme Court’s emergency order—found that 69% of likely U.S. voters support Texas “erecting barriers at the border to prevent illegal immigrants from crossing,” with only 27% opposed. (rasmussenreports.com) This question was framed explicitly around Texas’ actions in the very dispute Sacks was discussing, and thus directly supports his claim that Abbott would win public opinion on this specific standoff.
  • By contrast, an earlier PRRI/Brookings survey (summarized by Axios and others) found that a 52% majority of Americans opposed installing deterrents such as walls, razor wire and deadly buoy barriers in general, with 44% supporting them. (axios.com) So when the issue is framed broadly as “deadly border deterrents,” national opinion is more negative; when framed specifically as “Texas versus Biden on erecting barriers,” the Rasmussen data show strong national support for Texas.

Net assessment

  • The public‑opinion portion of Sacks’ claim is supported by at least one national poll directly about the Texas–Biden razor‑wire dispute.
  • But the legal‑outcome portion is still unsettled: Abbott has won important appellate rulings on razor wire and buoys, lost others (e.g., SB4) and faces ongoing litigation with no final Supreme Court merits decisions on the main barrier disputes.

Because a key part of the normalized prediction (“will ultimately lose in formal courts”) has not yet been definitively resolved, the overall prediction must be rated inconclusive rather than right or wrong at this time.

economymarkets
If, during calendar year 2024, U.S. interest rates are not cut by roughly 150 basis points from their early‑2024 level, then a large number of commercial real estate sponsors (owners/operators relying on floating-rate debt) and, as a consequence, a large number of U.S. regional banks that lent to them will encounter serious financial distress (e.g., elevated defaults or need for restructurings).
so if rates don't come down as expected this year. I think the market's expecting 150 basis points of rate cuts. If that doesn't actually happen, there's a lot of real estate sponsors who are in trouble. And in turn, there's a lot of regional banks who are in trouble because they're the ones who made all these loans to these sponsors.View on YouTube
Explanation

Interest‑rate side of the condition was met (no ~150 bps of cuts)
• At the start of 2024, the federal funds target range was 5.25%–5.50%. It stayed there until September 18, 2024, when the Fed cut by 50 bps to 4.75%–5.00%, then cut by 25 bps in November to 4.50%–4.75%, and again by 25 bps in December to 4.25%–4.50%. That’s 100 basis points of easing in 2024, not the roughly 150 bps Sacks cited as the market’s expectation. (investinglive.com)
→ So the antecedent of his conditional (“if rates don’t come down as expected (~150 bps) in 2024”) did occur.

Commercial real‑estate sponsors did see broad distress
• By year‑end 2024, CMBS data show office and multifamily borrowers under significant strain: Trepp reports the overall CMBS delinquency rate at 6.57%, with office delinquency at a record 11.01% in December 2024 and more than $2 billion of office loans becoming newly delinquent that month alone. (trepp.com)
• KBRA finds office delinquencies in its CMBS universe more than doubled year‑over‑year to 10.76%, with an office “distress rate” (delinquent + specially serviced) near 15% by December 2024, and $2.5 billion of loans added to distress that month, over half due to actual or imminent maturity default. (businesswire.com)
• The Financial Stability Board likewise noted that, as of September 2024, distress was “evident in multiple segments” of the CMBS market, with office and retail segments showing the highest distress rates. (ft.com)
→ This supports the idea that a large number of commercial real‑estate sponsors were indeed “in trouble” by late 2024.

But a large number of regional banks did not end up in serious distress in 2024
• FDIC data show only two U.S. bank failures in all of 2024: Republic First Bank (Philadelphia, ~$6B in assets) on April 26, and First National Bank of Lindsay (Oklahoma, ~$108M in assets) on October 18. (fdic.gov)
– The First National Bank of Lindsay was closed after regulators found “false and deceptive bank records” and suspected fraud that depleted its capital—i.e., primarily a fraud/management issue, not a CRE‑rate shock story. (occ.treas.gov)
– Republic First’s failure was tied to longer‑running profitability, funding, and interest‑rate pressures; news coverage frames it as one more isolated smaller‑lender failure, not part of a broad wave of regional bank collapses. (forbes.com) • The FDIC’s Q3 2024 update reported 68 “problem banks” on its list—up, but still a historically moderate share of the thousands of U.S. banks. The same report emphasized that the sector’s capital and overall resilience remained solid, even as non‑performing CRE loans rose to their highest level since 2013. (reuters.com)
• S&P Global Market Intelligence’s 2024 CRE outlook described banks as “feeling stress but weathering the storm.” Its analysis of roughly $950 billion of CRE mortgages maturing in 2024 concluded that while banks with heavy CRE exposure would “feel some pain,” it was not expected to trigger large‑scale deleveraging or threaten overall financial stability. (press.spglobal.com)
• Credit‑rating agencies did flag and downgrade several CRE‑heavy regionals (e.g., Moody’s putting at least six regional banks on review, and S&P revising outlooks to negative for five others), citing ongoing asset‑quality and profitability pressure from CRE. But these are dozens of institutions out of a large regional‑bank universe, and the typical language is about elevated risk and earnings pressure rather than imminent failure or wholesale restructurings. (investmentnews.com)
• Trade and industry pieces near year‑end 2024 characterize regional banks as under “pressure” and increasingly modifying CRE loans, but they frame problems as building into 2025 (with a big 2025–26 maturity wall) rather than a 2024 wave of bank distress. (credaily.com)
→ In other words, there was notable stress, downgrades, and caution around CRE‑heavy regionals in 2024, but not a large‑scale crisis where “a lot” of regional banks entered serious financial distress (defaults, forced restructurings, or FDIC resolutions) during that calendar year.

Overall assessment
• The if part of Sacks’s conditional is satisfied: the Fed did not deliver the ~150 bps of 2024 cuts that markets had anticipated—only about 100 bps. (foxbusiness.com)
• The then part is mixed: commercial real‑estate sponsors—especially office borrowers with floating or maturing debt—were clearly under broad, measurable stress by late 2024. (trepp.com)
• However, the specific follow‑through he predicted—“and in turn there’s a lot of regional banks who are in trouble” in 2024—did not materialize at the scale implied. Actual 2024 bank failures were few and idiosyncratic, regulators and analysts repeatedly described the banking sector as generally resilient, and CRE‑related problems were framed more as a rising risk and future‑default pipeline than as a contemporaneous wave of serious regional‑bank distress.

Because his conditional hinges on both widespread sponsor trouble and a resulting wave of regional‑bank distress in 2024, and the second component did not occur in that year, the prediction is best judged as wrong overall, albeit directionally right about mounting CRE sponsor stress and elevated risk for CRE‑heavy regional banks.

conflictpoliticsgovernment
Following the January 2024 U.S. and allied strikes on Houthi targets in Yemen, the conflict in the Middle East will continue to escalate and ultimately lead to a larger war in which the United States and Israel directly go to war with Iran (no specific end-date given, but implied medium-term geopolitical trajectory).
So I don't think this is going to have any impact other than to escalate the conflict in the Middle East and put us on a path to war with Iran… I think that's where this is all headed, is a larger war in the Middle East that features the US and Israel going to war with Iran.View on YouTube
Explanation

Based on public reporting through 30 November 2025, the prediction has not come true.

The prediction: that the January 2024 U.S. and allied strikes on Houthi targets in Yemen would put the U.S. and Israel on a path to a larger war in the Middle East featuring the U.S. and Israel going to war with Iran (i.e., a direct U.S.–Iran and Israel–Iran war, not just proxy or limited strikes).

What actually happened:

  1. January 2024 strikes and follow-on Red Sea campaign
    – On 11–12 January 2024 the U.S. and U.K., with support from other allies, launched air and missile strikes against Houthi targets in Yemen in response to attacks on commercial shipping in the Red Sea.
    – These strikes evolved into an ongoing campaign (often described as Operation Prosperity Guardian and related actions), but they remained limited strikes against Houthi targets, not Iran itself.

  2. Escalation with Iran short of all‑out war
    – In April 2024, Iran launched an unprecedented drone- and missile-attack directly against Israel, and Israel carried out limited retaliatory strikes inside Iran. These were widely reported as the first direct overt exchange of fire between the two states, but were also described by officials and analysts as carefully limited to avoid a wider regional war.
    – The United States provided significant defensive support to Israel (intercepting missiles/drones, intelligence and diplomatic backing), but did not enter into a declared or de facto full-scale war with Iran; U.S. action remained defensive and deterrent.

  3. No U.S.–Iran or Israel–Iran war as of late 2025
    – As of 30 November 2025, there is no declaration of war by the United States or Israel on Iran, and no sustained large-scale U.S. or Israeli bombing or ground campaign against Iran comparable to a formal interstate war.
    – The region has seen ongoing tensions, proxy clashes, sanctions, covert operations, and occasional direct limited strikes, but these are qualitatively different from the “larger war in the Middle East featuring the US and Israel going to war with Iran” that the quote describes.

Because the key condition – the U.S. and Israel actually going to war with Iran – has not occurred by the evaluation date, the prediction is wrong, not merely “inconclusive.” The prediction is about the trajectory leading to a specific outcome (a larger war involving direct US/Israel–Iran war), and that outcome has failed to materialize in the medium term after the January 2024 strikes.

conflicteconomy
The January 2024 U.S.-led missile strike on Houthi targets in Yemen will fail to deter the Houthis from further attacks on shipping; Houthi disruption of Red Sea trade will continue despite the strike, at least over the ensuing months of 2024.
So this missile strike last night is not going to deter them. It's not going to stop them. They're very determined, very tough fighters.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that the 12–13 January 2024 US/UK strikes on Houthi targets did not stop or meaningfully deter Houthi attacks on shipping over the subsequent months of 2024. A January 2024 timeline notes that immediately after the strikes the Houthis publicly vowed to continue attacking ships in the Red Sea and declared US/UK interests legitimate targets, and attacks resumed within days. (ndtv.com)

Throughout 2024, independent monitoring and industry analysis report that Houthi attacks on commercial vessels persisted and even expanded in scope. A December 10, 2024 supply-chain analysis describes that, one year into the crisis, Houthis had targeted over 90 commercial vessels, damaged more than 30, sunk two ships, and that major ocean carriers were still avoiding the Red Sea, with canal volumes down sharply. (project44.com) An October 2024 overview likewise states that Houthi Red Sea attacks continued to “torment global trade,” with 130 attacks on the Red Sea recorded through September 20, 2024 and operators still hesitant to use the route. (aljazeera.com)

Security analysis from the Washington Institute shows the Houthi campaign progressing through new phases in 2024, expanding targets to US/UK-linked ships in January and then further broadening criteria in May and July 2024, indicating persistence rather than deterrence. (washingtoninstitute.org) Concrete incidents such as the July 19, 2024 missile and drone attacks on the container ship Lobivia in the Gulf of Aden further illustrate that Houthi anti-shipping operations continued months after the January strikes. (en.wikipedia.org)

Given this sustained pattern of attacks and continued large-scale rerouting of trade through 2024, Sacks’s prediction that the January 2024 strike would not deter the Houthis and that Red Sea trade disruption would continue for the ensuing months of 2024 was borne out by events.

economymarkets
For calendar year 2024, the U.S. economy and markets will experience a "bumpy landing" rather than a smooth soft landing: volatility and economic/tightening shocks will undermine the late-2023 stock market rally and prevent a straight-line, low-volatility continuation upward.
Yeah, my prediction for the year was bumpy landing. I thought soft landing was a little too optimistic, and I also thought that this big stock market rally that we had in November December was too much, too soon.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from both macro data and market behavior shows 2024 looked more like a classic soft (or even no) landing with an unusually smooth equity rally, rather than the “bumpy landing” with destabilizing shocks that Sacks predicted.

On the macro side, multiple retrospectives describe 2024 as a successful U.S. soft landing: U.S. GDP grew about 2.8% in 2024 while inflation fell to roughly 2.9% by December and unemployment hovered near 4.1%, with no recession and only modest labor-market cooling. A Le Monde survey of global growth explicitly characterizes the U.S. outcome in 2024 as a soft landing under these conditions. (lemonde.fr) Mid‑year and late‑year assessments from forecasters such as S&P Global and ICIS similarly emphasized continued positive growth around 2.4–2.5% with easing inflation and no recession, i.e., a soft/no‑landing scenario rather than a volatile downturn. (spglobal.com)

Equity markets also did not behave as Sacks’s “bumpy” scenario implied. The S&P 500 delivered roughly 23–25% total returns in 2024, marking a second straight year of strong double‑digit gains. Cboe data show the index finished 2024 up 23.31%, while the FT calculates about 24.5% total return for the year. (cboe.com) At the same time, realized volatility was historically low: Bloomberg reports that the VIX averaged about 15.5 in 2024—its lowest annual average since 2019—even as the S&P 500 hit 51 all‑time highs, underscoring a steady, low‑volatility advance rather than a rally “undermined” by shocks. (news.bloomberglaw.com)

Because 2024 delivered (1) continued growth without recession, widely labeled a soft landing, and (2) a strong, relatively low‑volatility continuation of the late‑2023 equity rally, Sacks’s call for a distinctly “bumpy landing” that would derail or sharply destabilize that rally did not come to pass.

conflictpolitics
In the months following this January 2024 discussion, attacks on U.S. military bases in Iraq and Syria will continue rather than cease.
Another thing I think we're likely to see in the Middle East is continued attacks on US military bases in Iraq and Syria.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple sources shows that attacks on U.S. military bases in Iraq/Syria did in fact continue in the months after the January 13, 2024 discussion, rather than ceasing.

  • In February 2024, the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights documented 15 rocket and drone attacks on coalition bases hosting U.S. forces in Syria (Al-Omar oil field and Koniko gas field), carried out by Iranian‑backed militias as part of a continued “retaliatory” campaign against U.S. forces amid the Gaza war. (syriahr.com)
  • After the late‑January Tower 22 attack and large U.S. retaliatory strikes from February 2–7, 2024, some reporting noted that Iran‑backed groups halted attacks for a period, particularly in Iraq, as part of an informal truce. (en.wikipedia.org) However, this was a pause, not a permanent end.
  • On April 21, 2024, militants fired five rockets from northern Iraq toward the Kharab al‑Jir base in northeast Syria, which houses U.S. and coalition troops. This was described as the first major attack since early February and was explicitly framed by Kataib Hezbollah and allied groups as a resumption of attacks on U.S. forces. (theguardian.com)
  • The same "Attacks on US bases" chronology notes further incidents later in 2024, including a kamikaze drone attack on the U.S. Rumalyn Landing Zone in eastern Syria on August 9, 2024, injuring eight U.S. soldiers, and rockets targeting a U.S. airbase in Deir ez‑Zor on August 13, 2024. (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, these incidents show that while there was a temporary lull after heavy U.S. reprisals in early February, attacks on U.S. bases in Syria (and from Iraq into Syria) did indeed continue over the following months, matching Sacks’s prediction that such attacks were likely to continue rather than cease.

conflicteconomymarkets
Conditional: If the Middle East conflict escalates into a wider regional war during 2024 that triggers an oil price shock, then the Federal Reserve will not implement the large interest-rate cuts that the market was pricing in as of late 2023; planned 2024 rate cuts would be delayed or canceled due to renewed inflation.
If it develops into a wider regional war, then I think you could see an oil shock. And if there's an oil shock, I think you can kiss rate cuts goodbye, because that's going to percolate through the whole economy and have a big impact on inflation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: only if the Middle East conflict escalated into a wider regional war that caused an oil shock would “rate cuts be kissed goodbye.”

1. Did the condition (wider regional war + oil shock) occur in 2024?

  • Analyses in mid‑2024 noted that the Israel–Hamas war and associated tensions (including Red Sea attacks) had, up to that point, limited impact on the global economy, with the base case being that the conflict remained “largely confined.”

    • Bloomberg Intelligence/Bloomberg Economics described the ongoing conflict as having had limited global economic impact thus far, and treated a direct Israel–Iran war with a true oil supply disruption as a risk scenario, not the 2024 reality. (bloomberg.com)
  • Their scenarios explicitly framed a genuine oil “shock” as prices surging toward $150/bbl in a major escalation; in contrast, they reported that markets were pricing in only a very small geopolitical risk premium (less than about $5 per barrel) under the actually observed, confined-war scenario. (bloomberg.com)

  • Brent crude prices did not experience a sustained spike in 2024 driven by the Middle East conflict. Annual data show Brent averaging about $80.76/bbl in 2024, slightly below the 2023 level of $82.64, and quarterly data show prices in the mid‑80s in Q2 trending down into the high‑70s and low‑70s by late 2024. (ycharts.com)

Taken together, there was no large, sustained Middle‑East‑driven oil price shock in 2024 comparable to past “oil shock” episodes. The predicate of Sacks’s conditional (“if it develops into a wider regional war … if there’s an oil shock”) therefore did not materialize.

2. What happened to the Fed’s 2024 rate cuts?

  • As of late 2023, markets were indeed pricing in large 2024 cuts – roughly six quarter‑point cuts (about 150 bps) was a widely cited Wall Street consensus, even more aggressive than the Fed’s own projection of three cuts. (fool.com)
  • In reality, the Fed kept the federal funds rate at 5.25–5.50% through the first half of 2024, signaling growing caution as inflation progress stalled. (cbsnews.com)
  • The first cut didn’t arrive until September 18, 2024, when the Fed reduced rates by 50 bps to a 4.75–5.00% range, and guidance plus market pricing pointed to at most a further 50 bps of easing by year‑end—far fewer and later than what markets had priced in at the end of 2023. (cnbc.com)
  • However, Fed communications attribute the delay and smaller‑than‑expected cuts primarily to sticky inflation and still‑solid economic data, not to any oil‑price shock from the Middle East. (cnbc.com)

3. Evaluation of the prediction

  • Sacks’s claim was: If there is a wider regional war that produces an oil shock, then the big 2024 rate cuts markets expected would be off the table.
  • In 2024, the key trigger condition (a genuine oil shock from a wider regional war) did not occur. Without that, we cannot tell from actual history whether his causal statement about how the Fed would react under that specific scenario is correct or not.
  • It is true that the large 2024 cuts markets expected in late 2023 did not materialize, but they were curtailed without the mechanism he specified (no large oil‑shock‑driven inflation surge).

Because the world never entered the scenario he was conditioning on, the prediction is neither confirmed nor falsified by what actually happened.

Conclusion: the correct grading is “ambiguous”: enough time has passed, but the conditional scenario did not occur, so the prediction’s accuracy cannot be determined from observed outcomes.

politicsconflict
The Yemen/Houthi-related conflict and broader Middle East tensions will produce at most a short-lived rally-around-the-flag effect for President Biden; if the conflict is still active by November 2024, Biden’s political standing going into the election will be weakened because he will appear to have lost control of events.
I don't think wagging the dog is going to work. I think there'll be a short term rally around the flag effect. But I think that overall, if this conflict is still going on in November, it's going to weaken Biden by making him look like a president who's lost control of events.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2024–25 lines up with Sacks’ core claim that the Yemen/Houthi and broader Middle East crises did not give Biden a durable political boost and instead became a liability by late 2024.

  • Conflict was still active by November 2024. The U.S.-led Red Sea protection mission, Operation Prosperity Guardian, began in December 2023 and continued into 2025, with ongoing Houthi attacks on shipping and repeated U.S. and allied strikes through 2024, well past the November 5, 2024 election date. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • No meaningful ‘rally around the flag’ for Biden. Public polling during the Israel–Hamas and related Red Sea crises showed Biden’s approval on foreign policy and the Middle East at or near record lows, not higher. An NBC/ CNBC summary in November 2023 already found his overall approval and foreign-policy approval falling amid the Gaza war. (cnbc.com) Gallup later measured his approval on the Middle East in the high 20s to low 30s—well below even his weak overall job rating—indicating that these conflicts were a drag, not a boost. (news.gallup.com) That is consistent with Sacks’ claim that “wagging the dog” would not work and that any rally would be minimal/short‑lived.
  • Middle East policy clearly hurt Biden within his own coalition. Gallup, Pew, AP–NORC and others documented deep and growing disapproval of Biden’s handling of the Israel–Hamas war, especially among Democrats, younger voters, and non‑white voters. (en.wikipedia.org) A Reuters/Ipsos poll in May 2024 explicitly warned that Democratic divisions over Gaza and associated campus protests were “hurting Biden” and posed a serious threat to his re‑election prospects, particularly in swing states like Michigan with large Arab‑American populations. (reuters.com)
  • By mid‑2024, Biden’s political standing had clearly weakened. Gallup reports his overall approval fell to an all‑time low of 36% by July 2024, after months of controversy over the Gaza war and Red Sea/Houthi strikes. (en.wikipedia.org) He then withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024, with analysts and contemporaneous reporting citing his age, debate performance, and sustained unpopularity—including on foreign policy—as key reasons. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The end result was a weakened Democratic position going into the election. Democrats went into November 2024 with an unpopular lame‑duck president presiding over an ongoing Middle East/Red Sea conflict, and with his vice president as a replacement nominee. Republicans ended up winning the presidency and taking unified control of the federal government. (en.wikipedia.org) While multiple factors contributed (economy, age concerns, debate performance), polling and analysis consistently show the Middle East crises were one of the issues undermining Biden’s perceived control and competence.

Because the Red Sea/Houthi conflict was still active by November 2024 and the broader Middle East situation clearly coincided with, and contributed to, a deterioration in Biden’s political standing rather than a durable rally, Sacks’ conditional prediction—that the conflict would at best yield a short‑lived bump and would ultimately weaken Biden if it dragged on into the election period—is best classified as right.

Disney will fail to make a sufficient course correction away from politicized content in its franchises (including Star Wars) in the near future following 2023, and this failure will persist rather than being quickly reversed.
So we'll just have to see. My sense is that they have not made the course correction they need.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2024–2025 suggests Disney did not execute the kind of clear, lasting depoliticizing “course correction” away from politicized/identity-focused content that critics like Sacks were calling for, especially in the Star Wars franchise, and that any shifts were partial and tactical rather than a clean reversal.

Key points:

  1. Star Wars stayed on an explicitly inclusive/"politicized" track.

    • The Acolyte (2024) was developed and marketed as a female‑centric Star Wars series with a diverse cast and an openly queer showrunner. It drew sustained criticism for being "woke" and was nicknamed "The Wokelyte" by detractors.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • In May 2024, Lucasfilm president Kathleen Kennedy publicly defended this direction amid backlash, saying her belief is that “storytelling does need to be representative of all people” and that this is an “easy decision” for her—explicitly reaffirming inclusive representation as a guiding principle, not walking it back.(latimes.com)
    • These statements and the creative choices in The Acolyte show Lucasfilm/Disney did not pivot Star Wars away from the representational politics that critics objected to; instead, they doubled down while trying to manage fan toxicity.
  2. Bob Iger’s ‘quiet the noise’ line did not translate into a clear substantive retreat from politicized content.

    • In 2023, Iger told investors Disney would “quiet the noise” in culture wars and insisted Disney’s mission should “not be agenda‑driven.”(investing.com) These remarks predate the podcast and were widely read as a promise of course correction.
    • However, follow‑up coverage emphasized that while Iger wanted to lower the political temperature, he also reaffirmed that Disney would keep telling stories that “reflect the world around us” and “foster…acceptance of all people”—i.e., continuing inclusion even as rhetoric softened.(cinemablend.com)
    • Conservative and anti‑woke commentators through 2024–2025 repeatedly argued that Disney remained "woke" despite Iger’s language, indicating that, in practice, they did not view his moves as the needed course correction but as cosmetic.(westernjournal.com)
  3. Some partial pullbacks exist, but they are limited and mixed.

    • Disney/Pixar cut a transgender‑identity storyline from the kids’ series Win or Lose, keeping the character but stripping dialogue about gender identity; the studio framed this as leaving such topics to parents.(people.com)
    • Pixar’s Elio reportedly had LGBTQ and Latinx content reduced, and insiders blamed those cuts for weakening the film’s identity and contributing to its failure.(sfchronicle.com)
    • At the corporate level, Disney scaled back or re‑branded some DEI initiatives (dropping the high‑profile "Reimagine Tomorrow" targets from filings and sharply reducing explicit “DEI” language in its 2025 annual report), while still talking about an “inclusive” workplace.(nypost.com)
    • Yet in March 2025 shareholders overwhelmingly rejected a proposal from an anti‑woke group to cut ties with the Human Rights Campaign, and Disney retained a perfect score on HRC’s Corporate Equality Index—clear signs it has not abandoned LGBTQ‑friendly policies.(reuters.com)
    • Net effect: Disney is trimming and re‑packaging some edge cases (especially around young children’s animation) but not broadly repudiating the inclusive/identity‑conscious approach that critics see as politicized.
  4. The overall trajectory by late 2025 lines up with Sacks’s thesis.

    • Sacks’ prediction was that Disney would not enact the *“course correction they need” away from politicized content and that this failure would persist rather than be quickly reversed.
    • Between early 2024 and late 2025, Star Wars remains heavily aligned with inclusive/representational politics (The Acolyte being the flagship example), senior leadership publicly endorses that philosophy, and Disney maintains strong formal commitments to LGBTQ equality even while making selective concessions and softening DEI branding.(en.wikipedia.org)

Given that (a) there was no decisive, sustained pivot away from the very content choices being criticized, and (b) the partial adjustments did not satisfy anti‑woke critics or change the fundamental creative direction of franchises like Star Wars, the prediction that Disney would fail to make a sufficient, durable depoliticizing course correction in the near term is best characterized as right.

conflictpolitics
In 2024, Russia under Vladimir Putin will consolidate its territorial gains in Ukraine and may make additional gains; the widely reported 'stalemate' narrative will be shown to be false as Russia is perceived to be winning, and Western support for 'Project Ukraine' will significantly unravel during 2024.
I think that 2024 will be a year of him consolidating gains in Ukraine, potentially making new gains. I think that the the stalemate narrative that our media has propagated about Ukraine will be exposed as a lie. I think the Russians are, in fact, winning that war... And I think as Project Ukraine falls apart in 2024, it's only going to reinforce that sense that he's the big winner.View on YouTube
Explanation

1. Battlefield developments in 2024
Russia did consolidate and modestly expand its holdings in eastern Ukraine in 2024: it captured Avdiivka in February (its largest single advance since Bakhmut) and then several nearby settlements to the west, plus additional gains around Ocheretyne, Krasnohorivka, and on the northern Kharkiv front, which some analysts called Russia’s biggest territorial gains in about 18 months. (en.wikipedia.org)
This part of the prediction ("consolidating gains" and "potentially making new gains") is broadly consistent with what happened, though the advances were incremental and very costly.

2. The ‘stalemate’ narrative and perception of who is winning
Through 2024 the war was widely described as a positional war of attrition, but a growing body of analysis argued that the balance of advantage had shifted toward Russia: for example, a January 2024 ECFR analysis said the war of attrition "for the time being … implies a Russian victory" unless Western support were significantly increased, and other commentators explicitly described Russia as “winning” or having the upper hand. (eurasiareview.com)
At the same time, many officials and analysts—including Ukraine’s own commander-in-chief in late 2023—continued to use "stalemate" or "positional stalemate" language, framing Russia’s gains as limited and extremely costly rather than a clear, decisive win. (marshallcenter.org)
So the idea that the simple “stalemate” story would be challenged and that Russia would be increasingly seen as having the initiative is partially borne out, but it is not an uncontested consensus.

3. Western support and whether ‘Project Ukraine’ fell apart in 2024
This is where the prediction diverges most clearly from reality. Instead of Western support “significantly unraveling” and “Project Ukraine” falling apart in 2024, the opposite structural trend occurred:

  • The EU overcame Hungary’s veto and approved a four‑year €50 billion Ukraine Facility in February 2024. (theguardian.com)
  • The U.S. enacted Public Law 118‑50 in April 2024, a large supplemental appropriations bill that included tens of billions of dollars in additional Ukraine assistance. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • NATO in April 2024 began planning a €100 billion, five‑year framework for long‑term military support to Ukraine. (reuters.com)
  • At the July 2024 Washington NATO summit, allies issued a declaration pledging sustained support, created a dedicated NATO command (NSATU) to coordinate security assistance, and 23 countries signed the Ukraine Compact, explicitly stating they intend to support Ukraine “until it prevails.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  • G7 countries in 2024 also agreed on a $50 billion loan package to Ukraine backed by earnings on frozen Russian assets, to be disbursed from late 2024 onward. (reuters.com)
  • By December 2024, total Western commitments to Ukraine had increased, with EU and U.S. contributions each exceeding €100 billion, and aid continuing into 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)

There were political disputes and delays (especially in the U.S. Congress and within some EU states), but these did not amount to Western support "significantly unraveling" or the broader aid effort collapsing in 2024; instead, support was institutionalized and extended over a multi‑year horizon.

Overall assessment
The prediction mixed several claims. The limited, attritional Russian advances in 2024 line up reasonably well with the “consolidating gains, potentially making new gains” portion, and there was increasing expert commentary that the war of attrition was trending in Russia’s favor, challenging simplistic “stalemate” language. But the strongest and clearest part of the forecast—that Western support for Ukraine would significantly unravel in 2024 and that “Project Ukraine” would fall apart—did not occur. Western governments instead locked in large, long‑term aid frameworks and publicly recommitted to Ukraine’s war effort.

Because that core claim about the political and strategic trajectory of Western support was decisively wrong, the overall prediction is best judged as wrong, despite containing some partially accurate elements about battlefield trends and perceptions.

politicsconflictgovernment
In 2024, the 'collective West' (US and allies) will be a major political loser: Israel will fail to achieve its stated objective of destroying Hamas in Gaza and will face growing international condemnation bordering on pariah status; and there will be significant electoral upsets in Europe (notably in the European Parliament) and likely in the US, reflecting declining Western cohesion and strength.
I up leveled my answer a little bit here to have the collective West as the biggest political loser, and Ukraine is a big part of that... you look at what's happening in Israel and Gaza right now, and I don't think that Israel's invasion of Gaza is going well at all. And again... It does not look like they're going to be able to militarily achieve their objective of destroying Hamas... Israel is facing, I think, a huge amount of condemnation internationally. It is becoming a bit of a global pariah... And then you're going to have a whole bunch of elections this year, both in the US and in Europe. I think that there's going to be tremendous disruption... I think there's going to be some big shakeups in the European Parliament, and I wouldn't be surprised if there was similar shakeups in the US election as well.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key falsifiable parts of Sacks’s prediction largely materialized:

  1. Israel not achieving its objective of “destroying Hamas” in Gaza
    By late 2025, the IDF itself was still estimating that Hamas retained around 20,000 fighters and access to rockets and arms, despite massive Israeli operations and claims of killing many militants and dismantling infrastructure. This shows that Hamas was significantly degraded but far from “destroyed” as a military and political force. (nypost.com)

  2. Israel facing intense international condemnation / near-pariah status
    In 2024 the International Court of Justice found it “plausible” that Israel’s actions in Gaza could violate the Genocide Convention and imposed provisional measures on Israel to prevent acts of genocide and allow humanitarian aid. (en.wikipedia.org) The Court later ordered Israel to take urgent steps to prevent famine and to ensure large-scale aid deliveries, underscoring severe criticism of its conduct. (lemonde.fr)
    The UN Security Council adopted Resolution 2728 demanding an immediate Gaza ceasefire during Ramadan, with 14 votes in favor and only the U.S. abstaining—politically isolating Israel’s position. (en.wikipedia.org) Meanwhile, the UN General Assembly adopted a Gaza-related resolution (A/RES/79/81) with 157 votes in favor and only 8 against, again placing Israel and a small group of allies in a tiny minority. (de.wikipedia.org) These developments are strong evidence of escalating diplomatic condemnation consistent with Sacks’s “global pariah” language.

  3. Significant electoral disruption and “big shakeups” in Europe (especially the European Parliament)
    The 2024 European Parliament elections saw the pro‑EU centrist, liberal, social‑democratic and green parties lose seats, while anti‑EU/right‑wing populist parties made historic gains. The hard right reached 187 MEPs—about 26% of Parliament, the most in the institution’s history—and new or reconfigured right‑wing groups (Patriots for Europe, Europe of Sovereign Nations) emerged. (en.wikipedia.org)
    Beyond the EU Parliament, national and regional elections in Europe also produced major shocks: in Austria, the far‑right Freedom Party (FPÖ) won a national legislative election for the first time, taking the largest vote share and seats. (en.wikipedia.org) In Germany, the far‑right AfD became the largest party in Thuringia and nearly tied the CDU in Saxony, both unprecedented breakthroughs for a far‑right party in postwar German politics. (en.wikipedia.org) These outcomes match Sacks’s forecast of “tremendous disruption” and “big shakeups” in European elections.

  4. “Similar shakeups” in the US in 2024
    Sacks framed the U.S. piece more cautiously (“wouldn’t be surprised if…”), but the actual outcome was in line with the spirit of a major disruption: Donald Trump won the 2024 presidential election with 312 electoral votes and a popular‑vote plurality, returning to office after his 2020 defeat. (en.wikipedia.org) At the same time, Republicans gained control of the presidency and the Senate and held the House, shifting unified federal power from Democrats to Republicans. (en.wikipedia.org) That level of reversal in partisan control and the return of a previously defeated, twice‑impeached former president is widely regarded as a political shock rather than continuity.

  5. Overall thesis: the “collective West” as the big political loser
    The label “biggest political loser” is inherently interpretive, but the concrete elements Sacks tied to that thesis did occur:

  • A costly, ongoing war in Gaza in which Israel failed to eliminate Hamas and drew sustained legal and diplomatic censure at the UN and ICJ. (nypost.com)
  • A series of European elections featuring record gains for anti‑establishment and far‑right forces that challenge traditional pro‑EU and pro‑NATO elites. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • A US election outcome that returned a highly polarizing, anti‑establishment figure to the presidency and shifted federal power away from the incumbent Western leadership bloc. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because nearly all the specific, falsifiable components of his forecast came to pass—and they broadly support his narrative of Western political setbacks—the prediction is best classified as right, even though the overarching “biggest loser” framing remains partly a matter of interpretation rather than a strictly measurable fact.

venturetech
In 2024, Anduril—specifically its Roadrunner drone‑interceptor system—will become one of the biggest business winners in defense tech, gaining meaningful adoption as a cost‑effective counter‑drone solution for ground‑based air defense.
I'm predicting [Anduril] and role for its Roadrunner product... The reason I say this is because... the US was having to use $2 million air defense missiles to shoot down 2000 drones, and that is not sustainable.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2024–2025 strongly supports Sacks’s prediction about Anduril’s Roadrunner.

  1. Large 2024 Roadrunner production contract (clear “business winner” signal). In October 2024 the Pentagon awarded Anduril a roughly $250 million air‑defense production contract for more than 500 Roadrunner‑M interceptors plus Pulsar electronic‑warfare systems, specifically to counter UAS (drone) threats against U.S. forces. Deliveries begin in Q4 2024 and run through 2025, and the systems are to be fielded across multiple services in high‑threat regions. (defensenews.com) For a venture‑backed defense startup, a quarter‑billion‑dollar production award for a single counter‑drone product is widely described as a major win.

  2. Meaningful adoption as a ground‑based counter‑drone solution. Coverage of the contract and follow‑on reporting emphasizes that Roadrunner is a high‑explosive VTOL interceptor designed specifically to neutralize larger UAS with high speed and maneuverability, and that it will be deployed to operational sites to enhance air defense at the tactical edge—i.e., as a ground‑based counter‑drone system protecting U.S. forces. (asdnews.com) Articles repeatedly stress that Roadrunner was built to be cost‑efficient compared with using expensive surface‑to‑air missiles for drone shoot‑downs, directly matching the cost logic Sacks cited.

  3. Scale and validation in 2024, not just a paper program. Army‑focused coverage notes that Roadrunner had been under combat evaluation since January 2024, and that by late 2024 Anduril had secured nearly $350 million in contracts tied to Roadrunner and Pulsar for air‑defense missions. (armyrecognition.com) That indicates both real operational testing and substantial customer commitment, not merely a prototype demo.

  4. Anduril’s broader position as a top defense‑tech winner. Separate reporting on Anduril highlights its rapid growth, multibillion‑dollar valuation, and a series of major U.S. government awards, including later investments in large manufacturing capacity. (wsj.com) Against that backdrop, Roadrunner’s 2024 production contract is consistently described as a huge or significant deal in the defense‑tech sector relative to other startup programs.

Taken together, by the end of 2024 Roadrunner had: (a) a very large, multi‑service production contract; (b) documented combat evaluation and planned deployments for ground‑based counter‑UAS defense; and (c) widespread characterization as a cost‑effective, next‑generation interceptor. That matches the substance of Sacks’s prediction that Anduril—via Roadrunner—would be one of the big business winners in defense tech and gain meaningful adoption as a cost‑effective counter‑drone air‑defense solution. Therefore the prediction is best judged right.

economy
Around the March 2024 expiry of the Bank Term Funding Program, the Federal Reserve will either extend BTFP or implement a successor facility that continues to provide special liquidity support to US regional banks.
My biggest business deal is whatever the fed decides to do to replace or extend the bank term funding program... it was only supposed to last for one year... I do not think that the balance sheets of regional banks are healthy enough to survive without this continued liquidity... So I think the Fed's going to have to do something to either replace the program, extend the program, they're going to have to do something.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that around the March 2024 expiry of the Bank Term Funding Program (BTFP), the Fed would either extend BTFP or create a successor facility providing similar special liquidity to regional banks.

What actually happened:

  1. The Fed explicitly announced that BTFP would end on schedule on March 11, 2024, and did not extend it. In a January 24, 2024 press release, the Federal Reserve Board stated that the BTFP “will cease making new loans as scheduled on March 11” and only adjusted the interest rate on remaining loans; it did not announce any extension. (federalreserve.gov)

  2. The Fed’s own BTFP page confirms the facility stopped extending new loans on March 11, 2024. The official description notes that “The BTFP ceased extending new loans on March 11, 2024,” with no mention of renewal. (federalreserve.gov)

  3. Independent reporting also describes BTFP as ending on schedule, with no successor program. Reuters and other outlets reported that the Fed would “allow [the] emergency bank lending program to expire on March 11” and that the program “stopped making new loans on March 11, a year after its creation,” again with no indication of a replacement facility. (investing.com)

  4. Support continued only via existing, ordinary facilities, not a new special program. In its communications on BTFP’s wind-down, the Fed emphasized that after March 11, banks would continue to have “ready access to the discount window” and other standard tools; this is part of the standing framework, not a new emergency or special regional-bank facility. (bankingjournal.aba.com)

  5. Remaining BTFP loans simply ran to maturity; that is not an extension or successor. Banks could borrow or refinance up to March 10–11, 2024 for terms of up to one year, meaning outstanding balances persisted into 2025, but this was within the original one‑year loan design and did not constitute an extension of the program’s authorization or the creation of a new facility. (reuters.com)

  6. Later Fed analysis treats BTFP as a time‑limited, closed program, with no follow‑on facility. A 2025 Federal Reserve staff paper describes BTFP as an emergency liquidity facility that “ceased issuing new loans in March 2024 and closed one year later as the last loans matured,” without referencing any replacement program. (federalreserve.gov)

Given that the Fed neither extended BTFP past its scheduled March 11, 2024 end date nor created a clearly analogous successor emergency facility for regional banks, the core prediction—that the Fed would have to replace or extend BTFP to keep supporting regional banks—did not occur. Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

economymarketspolitics
Contrary to late‑2023 market euphoria, 2024 will not be a smooth 'soft landing'; instead the US and global economy and markets will experience significant volatility and setbacks, making the soft‑landing path 'very bumpy' even if a technical recession is avoided.
My prediction for for this year is that the soft landing gets very bumpy... I just think that this year is going to be a lot bumpier than that, both politically and economically.View on YouTube
Explanation

Economic and market outcomes in 2024 were broadly consistent with a relatively smooth soft landing, not a “very bumpy” one with major setbacks.

1. U.S. economy:

  • U.S. real GDP grew about 2.8% in 2024, with no recession, while employment stayed at record levels and unemployment only edged up from 3.7% in January to about 4.2% by November, still historically low. Real hourly wages were near record highs, indicating strong purchasing power. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • This is exactly the type of outcome commonly described as a successful soft landing: inflation falling toward target without a sharp rise in unemployment or output contraction. (en.wikipedia.org)

2. Global economy:

  • The IMF repeatedly characterized the global picture as an approach to or achievement of a soft landing: global growth around 3.1–3.2% in 2024, modestly below the 2000–2019 average but steady, with inflation declining. (imf.org)
  • There was no global recession or systemic financial crisis; the narrative by major institutions through and after 2024 was that the world had largely avoided a hard landing.

3. Financial markets and volatility:

  • The S&P 500 returned roughly 25% including dividends in 2024, its second consecutive year of >20% gains, and hit numerous all‑time highs. (dqydj.com)
  • Global equities were also strong overall: MSCI World was up about 17% for 2024, with North America particularly strong. (panoramicfp.com)
  • Measures of volatility contradict the idea of a very “bumpy” year. The Cboe Volatility Index (VIX) averaged about 15.5 in 2024, which Bloomberg noted was heading for its lowest annual average since 2019. (bloomberg.com)
  • Analysis of S&P 500 drawdowns shows maximum intra‑year decline only ~8.5%, quieter than most years. (dorseywright.nasdaq.com)
  • A 2024 market recap reports full‑year realized S&P 500 volatility around 12.7%, with volatility mostly subdued outside a brief spike around the U.S. election—again, not unusually turbulent by historical standards. (gia.com)

4. Comparing to the prediction:

  • Sacks predicted that, contrary to late‑2023 optimism, the soft‑landing path in 2024 would become “very bumpy” economically and politically, with significant market and economic volatility and setbacks (even if avoiding a technical recession).
  • Actual data show: no recession, solid growth, easing inflation, very strong equity returns, and below‑average or typical volatility by multiple measures. Political tensions and an election‑related volatility spike occurred, but they did not translate into the broadly turbulent, setback‑heavy scenario he warned about.

Given that 2024 delivered a relatively smooth soft‑landing outcome with strong markets and limited drawdowns, the prediction that the soft landing would become “very bumpy” for the economy and markets is best classified as wrong.

marketsconflict
In 2024, energy—particularly oil and energy‑related stocks—will rank among the top‑performing major asset classes, driven by heightened geopolitical conflict and supply‑disruption risks.
My guess here, just a guess is energy is energy stocks. Energy prices could be among the top performers of 2024. Just because there's so much risk of conflict breaking out now and escalating.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available performance data show that neither oil nor energy‑related equities were among the top‑performing major asset classes in 2024.

  • Within U.S. equities, the S&P 500 returned about 25% total in 2024, while the S&P 500 Energy sector returned only about 5.7%. A sector breakdown from RBC (using total returns including dividends through 12/31/24) shows Energy at +5.72%, far behind leading sectors such as Communication Services (+40.2%), Information Technology (+36.6%), Financials (+30.5%), and Consumer Discretionary (+30.1%), and only barely ahead of laggards like Real Estate and Materials. (rbcwealthmanagement.com)
  • A press release and fund commentary referencing the S&P 500 Energy Sector explicitly confirm that it returned 5.7% in 2024, noting that "the Energy market presented challenges" that year—again indicating that energy equities were not strong relative performers. (nasdaq.com)
  • Looking at major asset classes globally, a 2024 asset‑class return table shows: Bitcoin +120.8%, gold +27.2%, U.S. large‑cap equities +23.3%, U.S. small caps +10.1%, etc., while crude oil (as a commodity) returned only +0.7% in 2024—near the bottom of the major‑asset‑class stack and well below equities and gold. (visualcapitalist.com)
  • Oil prices themselves did not experience a big upside shock from geopolitical risk. A 2024 review notes that Brent crude traded mostly in a stable $74–$90 band and finished the year around $74.64, about 3% below its final 2023 close of $77.04, marking a second straight annual decline for Brent. (livemint.com)

Because both oil prices and energy stocks produced only mid‑single‑digit returns and clearly underperformed leading sectors and asset classes, the prediction that energy/oil would be "among the top performers of 2024" due to escalating geopolitical conflict and supply‑disruption risk did not come true.

economy
In 2024, Germany’s economy will significantly underperform relative to peers and be one of the biggest economic losers, hurt by the loss of cheap Russian gas and intensified competition from cheap Chinese cars.
My prediction for biggest business loser in 24 is actually the German economy... I think double whammy for Germany.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available 2024 data show that Germany’s real GDP contracted by about 0.2% in 2024, while the euro area as a whole grew around 0.9%, and most large peers such as France, Spain and the U.S. recorded positive growth, placing Germany near the bottom of advanced economies. (destatis.de) The IMF and other analyses describe Germany as the only G7 country with no economic growth or two consecutive years of contraction over 2023–24, repeatedly characterizing it as the weakest performer and reviving the “sick man of Europe” label. (reuters.com) These same assessments explicitly link Germany’s weakness to the energy‑price shock from the shut‑off of Russian gas, which pushed energy costs up and hurt energy‑intensive industry. (aa.com.tr) In parallel, Germany’s auto sector—a key export engine—saw falling sales and shrinking market share in 2024 as cheaper Chinese EV makers gained ground in China and Europe, with analysts and policymakers warning that Chinese competition is undermining German carmakers and contributing to Germany’s poor growth performance. (politico.eu) Overall, Germany did significantly underperform its peers in 2024 and was widely viewed as one of the main economic losers among advanced economies, with both the loss of cheap Russian gas and intensified competition from Chinese cars identified as major headwinds—closely matching Sacks’s “double whammy” prediction.

marketsconflict
In calendar year 2024, energy stocks and energy prices (especially oil) will be among the top‑performing asset classes, with a significant spike in the price of oil driven by geopolitical conflict.
My guess here, just a guess is energy is energy stocks. Energy prices could be among the top performers of 2024... there's just so many ways that the conflict could escalate and create, I think, a spike in the price of oil.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2024 shows that neither energy stocks nor oil itself were among the top‑performing asset classes, and oil prices did not experience an exceptional, conflict‑driven spike.

  • Energy stocks underperformed other equities. The S&P 500 energy sector returned only about 1.9–5.6% in 2024, versus roughly 23% for the overall S&P 500, and ranked near the bottom of the 11 sectors (9th out of 11 by one breakdown).(visualcapitalist.com)
  • Oil was not a top asset class. A cross‑asset table of 2024 returns shows crude oil up only about 0.7% for the year, while Bitcoin, gold, U.S. large‑cap stocks, and several other assets posted far higher gains. Commodities as a whole returned about 2.6%, again leaving crude oil well away from the top tier.(visualcapitalist.com) Even sources that estimate a mid‑teens gain for crude still place it far behind leading commodities like cocoa, coffee, and gold.(ctol.digital)
  • Oil prices rose but stayed range‑bound rather than spiking. Brent crude averaged about $81 per barrel in 2024, according to the U.S. Energy Information Administration.(eia.gov) There were periods (e.g., April 2024) when Brent climbed into the high‑$80s, helped by Middle East tensions and other geopolitical risks, but analysts repeatedly characterized prices as stable or range‑bound, with a modest risk premium rather than a large, one‑off spike.(reuters.com)

Given that (1) energy equities were laggards rather than leaders and (2) oil prices moved within a relatively moderate band instead of delivering a dramatic, conflict‑driven surge, Sacks’s prediction that energy stocks and prices would be among the top‑performing asset classes in 2024 due to a significant geopolitical spike in oil did not come true.

markets
During 2024, the S&P 493 (S&P 500 excluding the Magnificent Seven) will outperform the Magnificent Seven stocks on a relative basis (a long S&P 493 / short Magnificent Seven spread trade will be profitable).
I would bet against The Magnificent Seven... I would book this as a spread trade where I would bet on the S&P 493 over The Magnificent Seven. Because, again, I just think that there's got to be some catching up here.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available performance data for calendar year 2024 show that the Magnificent Seven significantly outperformed the rest of the S&P 500 (the so‑called “S&P 493”), meaning a long S&P 493 / short Magnificent Seven spread would not have been profitable.

Dimensional Fund Advisors’ analysis "Mag 7 Gravity" reports that for 2024 (as of December 31, 2024):

  • S&P 500 total return: 25.0%
  • Magnificent Seven basket return: 48.3%
  • Other 493 stocks in the index ("S&P 493"): 15.9% (ifa.com)

A separate summary of the same Dimensional data used in adviser commentary reiterates that in 2024 the Magnificent Seven surged about 48%, while the remaining 493 stocks returned about 16%. (axis.ausiex.com.au) Other market commentary similarly characterizes 2024 as another very strong year for the Magnificent Seven, with estimates of their group gain around 60%+, further confirming their clear outperformance of the broader index. (markets.financialcontent.com)

Because the Magnificent Seven substantially outgained the S&P 493 over the full year 2024, a trade that was long the S&P 493 and short the Magnificent Seven over that period would have lost money on a relative basis. This is the opposite of the predicted outcome, so the prediction is wrong.

Sacks @ 01:10:46Inconclusive
aitech
Over the next 5–10 years starting in 2024, AI capabilities will continue to improve at an exponential‑like pace, with AI‑driven innovations increasingly reaching and being used by mainstream consumers.
When we look back on it in 5 or 10 years, it's going to be pretty clear that the exponential pace of advancement in AI continued... and I think we'll see those innovations continue to percolate down to more and more of the average sort of mainstream consumer.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction explicitly concerns what things will look like “when we look back on it in 5 or 10 years” starting from 2024. That sets the evaluation window roughly between 2029 and 2034.

As of today (December 1, 2025), we are less than two years into that 5–10 year horizon. While AI capabilities do appear to be advancing quickly and are increasingly visible to mainstream consumers, the core claim is about how the entire multiyear trajectory will look in hindsight (whether exponential-like improvement continues and whether innovations keep diffusing into the mainstream over that full period).

Because the specified timeframe has not elapsed, we cannot yet say whether the exponential-like pace will continue over the full 5–10 years or whether consumer diffusion will sustain at the implied rate. Therefore the prediction cannot be definitively judged at this time and is best classified as too early to call.

The combination of the FTX collapse and the OpenAI board’s failed ouster of Sam Altman will effectively end ("put the nail in the coffin of") the effective altruism movement as a significant, credible force in tech and philanthropy over the coming years.
I think the failure of that whole debacle will put the nail in the coffin of the EA movement.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the FTX collapse plus the failed OpenAI board coup against Sam Altman would “put the nail in the coffin of the EA movement”—i.e., effectively end effective altruism as a significant, credible force in tech and philanthropy.

Those events clearly did serious reputational damage. Coverage after FTX described EA’s reputation as badly tarnished and scrutinized its leaders for ignoring warnings about Sam Bankman‑Fried, and commentary around the OpenAI board fight explicitly framed it as a potential “final nail in the coffin” for EA‑style governance in tech. Some prominent EA‑adjacent institutions have also contracted or closed (e.g., Oxford’s Future of Humanity Institute), and critics have published strong takedowns of the movement.(en.wikipedia.org) So the reputational hit part of his intuition was directionally right.

But the stronger part of the claim—that EA would cease to be a significant, credible force—has clearly not come true by late 2025:

  • Major EA‑aligned philanthropy is still large and growing. Open Philanthropy (now rebranded as Coefficient Giving) is described as one of the world’s most influential philanthropies, has allocated over $4 billion since 2014, and is actively expanding via multi‑donor funds while keeping its cost‑effectiveness/“efficient giving” orientation that grew out of EA.(vox.com)
  • Big tech/VC‑aligned funders are still writing very large EA‑motivated checks. Good Ventures (backed by Facebook co‑founder Dustin Moskovitz) continues to follow EA principles and, even after FTX and the OpenAI saga, recommended over $23 million in 2024–25 for the Centre for Effective Altruism and additional support for EA Funds’ operations.(goodventures.org) Open Philanthropy/​Coefficient Giving also launched a new three‑year, $120 million “Abundance and Growth Fund” in 2025 for housing and infrastructure policy, explicitly framed as part of the effective‑altruist “abundance” agenda and backed by donors like Stripe CEO Patrick Collison—hardly consistent with a dead or non‑credible movement.(bloomberg.com)
  • The EA community and donor base remain large. As of April 2024, around 1,900 entrepreneurs had pledged roughly $10 billion through EA‑aligned pledge organizations, with about $1.1 billion already donated.(en.wikipedia.org) Giving What We Can, a flagship EA pledge nonprofit, reported nearly 9,000 members in 2024.(en.wikipedia.org) New EA‑style giving platforms such as Giving Multiplier continue to grow, facilitating thousands of donations and millions of dollars by 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • EA remains influential in tech‑adjacent domains, especially AI safety and long‑term risk. Open Philanthropy/​Coefficient Giving and Good Ventures are still funding AI‑safety fellowships, training programs, and research (e.g., Alignment Research Engineer Accelerator, ML4Good bootcamps, MATS scholars) well into 2025, and universities are publicizing new AI‑safety research grants from Open Philanthropy.(openphilanthropy.org) These are exactly the kinds of tech‑and‑philanthropy interfaces Sacks was talking about.

In short, EA has been dent­ed—funding from FTX vanished, some institutions closed or retrenched, and its brand is more controversial in parts of the tech world—but the core prediction that these episodes would effectively end its role as a significant, credible force in tech and philanthropy is not borne out by the continued scale of EA‑aligned money, organizations, and initiatives through 2025.

Given the strength of the original “nail in the coffin” framing and the available evidence by now, the prediction is wrong.

Sacks @ 00:19:50Inconclusive
politics
Beginning in late 2023 and over the subsequent election cycles, the political alignment of American Jews will measurably shift, with a higher share identifying with or voting for the Republican Party (or right‑leaning positions) compared with prior decades, reversing part of the historical tendency of American Jews to align with the left/Democratic Party.
I would expect that, again, a lot of Jewish people are waking up to the ways in which the left has changed, and they're realizing that that is not a hospitable place in the political spectrum for them to be. And I would expect there to be kind of a pilgrimage now of more Jews in America towards the right, as opposed to remaining on the left where they've always been.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that starting in late 2023, American Jews would begin a measurable political pilgrimage toward the right, with more identifying with or voting Republican than in the past.

1. Party identification data so far
Recent large‑N surveys still show Jews as one of the most strongly Democratic religious groups:

  • Pew’s 2023 data (published April 2024) finds about 69% of Jewish voters aligning with or leaning Democratic and 29% Republican, and notes that the Democratic share is up 8 points compared with 2020, i.e., if anything Jews became more—not less—Democratic over that period. (pewresearch.org)
  • A 2024 Manhattan Institute survey of the Jewish electorate similarly reports 60% of Jewish voters identifying as Democrats and 23% as Republicans. (manhattan.institute)
  • An April 2024 Jewish Electorate Institute (JEI) poll finds 57% self‑described Democrats, 27% independents, and only 14% Republicans. (jewishelectorateinstitute.org)
  • A Jewish Virtual Library synthesis shows Jews by party ID at roughly 60% Democrat and 23% Republican in 2024, broadly consistent with these other sources. (jewishvirtuallibrary.org)
    For context, Gallup’s 2014 data already had about 61% of Jews identifying as Democrats and 29% as Republicans. (news.gallup.com) Overall, the aggregate Republican share in 2023–24 looks similar to, or slightly lower than, the last 10–15 years, not the start of a dramatic new rightward realignment.

2. 2024 presidential vote among Jews
The first post–Oct. 7 election cycle we can measure is the 2024 presidential race. Here too, data show continuity more than a break:

  • Multiple exit‑poll summaries (CNN/NBC as reported by Anadolu Agency; Edison‑based coverage; JTA) indicate that Kamala Harris won roughly 78–79% of the Jewish vote nationwide, versus about 21–22% for Donald Trump—very close to the classic 70–30 type splits seen in recent decades. (aa.com.tr)
  • A post‑election survey by the Jewish Electorate Institute finds 71% of Jewish voters backed Harris vs 26% for Trump—still overwhelmingly Democratic, and described as within the recent historical range. (jewishelectorateinstitute.org)
  • A quantitative analysis by Split Ticket, averaging 2024 exit polls, estimates about a 6‑point swing toward Republicans relative to 2020 (they infer a true rightward shift on the order of 5–10 points), but emphasize that Jewish voters remain overwhelmingly Democratic. (split-ticket.org)

In other words, there is some evidence of a modest rightward movement compared with the unusually Democratic 2020 election, but GOP vote shares in 2024 are still broadly within the long‑standing 20–30% range for Republicans among Jewish voters.

3. Subgroup and local shifts
There are clearer rightward shifts in particular segments:

  • Orthodox Jews have become heavily Republican over the last decade (a trend that predates 2023), while non‑Orthodox Jews remain overwhelmingly Democratic. (jewishvirtuallibrary.org)
  • In some geographies, especially New York, Trump’s Jewish support rose notably in 2024—one exit‑poll‑based report suggests he climbed from about 30% of New York’s Jewish vote in 2020 to roughly 45% in 2024. (nypost.com)
  • A Combat Antisemitism Movement poll ahead of 2024 found a non‑trivial minority of typically Democratic Jewish voters saying antisemitism might push them to vote Republican, but the net effect in that survey was only a few percentage points. (israelhayom.com)
    Complementing this, a 2025 analysis by the Jewish Voters Resource Center concludes that non‑Orthodox Jews supported Democrats in 2024 at higher levels than in 2012 and 2016, while 2020 remains a special high‑water mark driven by Trump’s unpopularity. (jewishvoters.org)

So there is some movement to the right in specific sub‑groups and locales, but at the national aggregate level Jews are still heavily clustered on the left.

4. Why the verdict is “inconclusive”
Sacks’ normalized prediction wasn’t just about a one‑off bump; it foresaw a broader, durable realignment beginning in late 2023 and playing out over multiple election cycles. As of late 2025, we have only one national cycle (2024) plus a year or so of polling to examine:

  • Current evidence mostly contradicts a large‑scale “pilgrimage” to the right: party‑ID data from Pew, JEI, and the Manhattan Institute show Jews still strongly Democratic, with no clear uptick in Republican identification relative to the 2010s; in Pew’s series, the Democratic share actually increased since 2020. (pewresearch.org)
  • Voting behavior in 2024 stayed within the historical band of about 70–80% Democratic vs 20–30% Republican, with several sources explicitly saying patterns were largely unchanged. (aa.com.tr)
  • At the same time, there are hints of incremental rightward movement (e.g., Split Ticket’s estimated R+5–10 swing vs 2020 and state‑level gains like New York), which could, in principle, be the start of the trend Sacks described—but they are not yet outside prior historical variation. (split-ticket.org)

Because Sacks framed this as a multi‑cycle realignment and we have observed only the first cycle—with mixed but mostly continuity‑oriented evidence—it is too early to say definitively that the prediction has either clearly succeeded or definitively failed. On the balance of current data, the strong version of his claim (a marked, obvious pilgrimage to the right) has not materialized yet, but the long‑term trajectory he speculated about cannot be ruled out. Hence the verdict: inconclusive at this point in time.

economypoliticsmarkets
The Federal Reserve will implement at least one interest rate cut during Q1 2024, which will begin an easing cycle that materially benefits financial markets and, indirectly, President Biden’s 2024 re‑election prospects.
I think, I think, I think there will be a rate cut in Q1, and I think this is the Biden bailout.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction hinged on a rate cut occurring in Q1 2024 and that cut beginning an easing cycle that would help President Biden’s 2024 reelection prospects.

  1. No rate cut in Q1 2024:

    • At its January 2024 meeting, the FOMC maintained the federal funds target range at 5.25–5.50%. (econbrowser.com)
    • At the March 20, 2024 meeting (still Q1), the FOMC again left the target range unchanged at 5.25–5.50% and explicitly stated it did not yet expect it would be appropriate to reduce rates. (bankingjournal.aba.com)
    • There were no inter‑meeting cuts, so no rate cut occurred between January 1 and March 31, 2024.
  2. Easing cycle started later, not in Q1:

    • The Fed’s first rate cut of this cycle came at the September 2024 FOMC meeting, when it lowered the target range by 50 bps to 4.75–5.00%, its first easing move in four years. (jpmorgan.com)
    • Subsequent projections and moves in late 2024 confirm that the easing cycle began in the fall of 2024, not Q1. (federalreserve.gov)
  3. Biden’s reelection prospects did not materialize:

    • Joe Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024; Kamala Harris became the Democratic nominee. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Donald Trump defeated Harris in the November 5, 2024 presidential election; Biden was not even on the ballot, so there was no Biden reelection for any easing cycle to assist. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because (a) no Fed rate cut occurred in Q1 2024 and (b) the eventual easing cycle began much later and did not lead to a Biden reelection bid or victory, Sacks’s prediction is incorrect on both its timing and political implications.

venturetechmarketseconomy
From Q3 2023 forward, the period of contraction or stagnation in software/SaaS (the "software recession" characterized by shrinking or negative net‑new ARR and widespread cuts) is over, and the sector will, on average, return to sustained positive net‑new ARR growth in subsequent quarters.
I think again, the software session I'm calling an end to the software recession officially.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from sector-wide SaaS and cloud data supports Sacks’s call that the 2022–mid‑2023 “software recession” ended around Q3 2023 and did not re‑start afterward.

• In the episode itself, Sacks cites Jamin Ball’s Clouded Judgement chart showing that after roughly four quarters of negative net‑new ARR growth, Q3 2023 flipped to slightly positive growth (~+2%), which he interprets as the end of the software recession and the start of a rebound in software revenues. (podscripts.co)

• Subsequent Clouded Judgement data (as summarized by HC Andersen Capital) show that aggregate net‑new ARR for a large basket of global SaaS companies remained positive through 2023–2024, though at much lower levels than 2021–2022 (for example, Q2 2024 net‑new ARR was about $615m vs. $860m in Q2 2023 and $969m in Q2 2022—still growth, just weaker). (hcandersencapital.dk) This is consistent with the recession ending but the recovery being modest and choppy.

• A Q4 2024 analysis of the PVC SaaS Index explicitly concludes that “the software spend recession of 2022 and 2023 seems to be fully behind us now,” and notes that overall SaaS spend rebounded by about 9% across all company sizes in 2024, based on High Alpha / OpenView benchmark data. (practicalvc.com) That independent characterization closely matches Sacks’s thesis that the “software recession” period had ended.

• Bessemer’s State of the Cloud 2024 and Cloud 100 work show strong growth in leading cloud/SaaS names—Cloud 100 average growth accelerating from ~55% in 2023 to ~70% in 2024, and broad AI‑driven expansion—again indicating a sector that is growing, not in contraction. (bvp.com)

• By early 2025 the environment had weakened again, but in slowdown terms, not a return to outright contraction. SaaStr’s summary of Jamin Ball’s Q1 2025 data reports that aggregate net‑new ARR for public cloud software was about $1.65B, down ~30% year‑over‑year from $2.33B in Q1 2024—described as the worst quarterly performance in years, but still positive net‑new ARR, i.e., the ARR base continued to grow. (saastr.com) Commentary that growth rates have been oscillating and that “re‑acceleration” hasn’t materialized underscores a sluggish recovery, not a renewed software recession. (hcandersencapital.dk)

Taken together: since Q3 2023, sector‑wide ARR has continued to grow, and multiple independent analyses explicitly say the 2022–2023 “software spend recession” is behind us, even though growth has remained volatile and often disappointing. That matches the core of Sacks’s prediction (the end of the software recession and a return to positive net‑new ARR), so the call is best judged as right, albeit overly optimistic about the strength and steadiness of the rebound.

Sacks @ 01:07:11Inconclusive
techaimarkets
As AI answer experiences increasingly replace traditional search results over the coming years, Google’s market share in search will decline from its historical dominance; Google’s AI franchise will not reach the same relative market share that Google Search historically held.
So I think as more and more searches get replaced with AI, it's just impossible that they're going to maintain that same dominant share.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim has two parts: (1) as AI answers replace traditional search, Google will not be able to maintain its historically dominant search share, and (2) Google’s AI franchise will not achieve the same kind of dominant market share that Google Search has.

On (1), as of late 2025 Google still controls about 90% of the global search-engine market, with Bing at ~4% and others far behind—very similar to its pre‑ChatGPT dominance, despite some brief dips just below 90%. (gs.statcounter.com) AI chatbots and answer engines are growing, but they have not yet replaced a large enough fraction of search queries to clearly show Google losing its “same dominant share”; its lead remains overwhelming.

On (2), in the AI‑chatbot/answer market, OpenAI’s ChatGPT currently has ~80%+ global share, while Google Gemini is only around 2–3%, well behind ChatGPT, Perplexity, and Microsoft’s Copilot in most measurements of referral or usage share. (gs.statcounter.com) That suggests Google’s AI franchise is far from Search‑like dominance, but the claim that it will never reach comparable relative share is inherently long‑term and can’t be settled in 2025.

Because the prediction is explicitly about what happens “as more and more searches get replaced with AI” over the coming years, and both Google’s search dominance and its AI position could still change substantially after 2025, there isn’t enough elapsed time to determine the final outcome. The current data are directionally consistent with the second part (Gemini is not dominant) but do not yet confirm the irreversible loss of Google’s search dominance or permanently cap its AI share. Therefore the prediction must be rated as inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks @ 01:25:44Inconclusive
governmenttech
Given the CMA’s current approach, an increasing number of tech companies over the next several years will choose to avoid creating a regulatory nexus with the UK (e.g., by not opening offices or materially operating there) in order to prevent their future M&A deals from being subjected to UK review.
So what I'm saying is, if you're a company, why would you subject yourself to that when it's so easy to avoid their market?View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is framed over “the next several years” starting from late 2023, while as of November 2025 barely ~2 years have passed and the key legal changes (the Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act) only began to take effect in 2024. That is too short to reliably observe a structural trend in global tech-location decisions.

Available evidence focuses on regulatory design and concerns rather than on documented behaviour of firms avoiding the UK. Government reforms explicitly added a UK‑nexus criterion and safe‑harbour thresholds to ensure only mergers with a meaningful UK link are caught and to reduce burdens on businesses, suggesting policymakers are trying to limit over‑reach rather than entrench it. (gov.uk) The CMA continues to run a voluntary merger regime where most deals are never reviewed at all, which further complicates attributing any changes in office‑location decisions to merger control. (gov.uk)

Commentary in policy debates and think‑tank pieces speculates that harsh merger control could deter entrepreneurs from the UK, but other experts argue that this is overstated because the CMA can already intervene in foreign‑to‑foreign mergers with limited UK sales, as shown by the Meta/Giphy case, meaning simply avoiding a UK office would not reliably avoid scrutiny. (globalcompetitionreview.com) Meanwhile, CMA leadership publicly emphasises a more pro‑growth, proportionate approach and the need to avoid a “chilling effect” on investment, indicating political pressure to reduce the very deterrent Sacks is predicting. (theguardian.com)

Crucially, there is no systematic data or clear series of public examples showing that an increasing number of tech firms have chosen not to establish a UK nexus specifically to avoid future CMA review. Without that behavioural evidence and with the time horizon still incomplete, the prediction cannot yet be judged as clearly right or wrong, so it remains inconclusive (too early to tell).

techgovernmentventure
If regulators like the UK CMA continue to apply slow and subjective standards (such as future-competition theories) to tech mergers, there will be a noticeable chilling effect on tech M&A activity over the following years, resulting in fewer high‑quality startup exits and a reduction in risk capital flowing into the startup ecosystem.
That's going to have a dampening or chilling effect on M&A activity, which means fewer good exits for the ecosystem, which means that less risk capital will want to go into the ecosystem to begin with.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2023 shows some headwinds for tech/startup M&A and exits, but they are driven by several overlapping forces (rates, valuation reset, weak IPO window, and broader regulatory pressure), and it’s not possible to cleanly attribute a distinct, regulator‑caused “chilling effect” of the kind Sacks describes, nor to isolate its impact on risk capital.

Key points:

  1. Tech and broader M&A volumes fell, but values rebounded and activity is now rising again.

    • PwC reports that in 2024 global TMT (tech/media/telecom) deal volumes were 27% below 2023, and technology deal volume specifically declined 29% year‑on‑year, even as technology deal values rose 33%, driven by fewer but larger software deals. Explanations emphasize macro factors (rates, valuation gaps) rather than regulation as the primary driver. (pwc.com)
    • Across all sectors, 2024 global M&A deal values increased about 5–10%, while deal counts fell roughly 14–17% versus 2023, again framed mainly as a consequence of higher interest rates, valuation mismatches, and PE constraints rather than a primarily regulatory story. (pwc.com)
    • By late 2024 and into 2025, several analyses (Bain, PwC, Barron’s) describe M&A as rebounding: overall deal value in 2024 is up mid‑teens percent vs 2023, deal volume up modestly, and 2025 year‑to‑date M&A value is surging, with large contributions from technology and AI deals. This is not consistent with a sustained, system‑wide freeze in M&A. (bain.com)
  2. Startup exits are weak, but they were already depressed and are mainly tied to macro and valuation resets.

    • Carta’s data show startup M&A transactions in its universe fell 11% in 2023 vs 2022; IPO activity remained at historically low levels after the 2021 boom. The commentary frames the “IPO chill” and exit slowdown primarily in terms of the post‑2021 bust and market conditions, not competition policy. (carta.com)
    • PitchBook’s 2024/2025 analyses describe the startup exit market as “pretty stuck,” with LP liquidity back to global‑financial‑crisis‑era levels and many bridge/insider rounds, again pointing to valuation overhang and macro uncertainty as central issues. (techcrunch.com)
    • These trends began well before December 2023, and continue through 2024–25; they are clearly consistent with “fewer good exits,” but they are not uniquely or even primarily attributed to agencies like the CMA.
  3. Regulators have increased scrutiny and some practitioners explicitly talk about a chilling effect—but aggregate data say deals are still getting done.

    • In the U.S., antitrust lawyers and deal advisors describe the FTC/DOJ’s novel merger guidelines and aggressive posture as having a “chilling effect” and raising the “merger tax” (greater time, cost, and uncertainty). Sellers sometimes accept lower‑priced bids with cleaner antitrust profiles, indicating real friction from enforcement. (dailyjournal.com)
    • Policy and advocacy pieces (e.g., NYU Law Review commentary summarized by PULSE) argue that expanded merger review requirements and a perception that acquisitions by incumbents are risky reduce the appeal of exiting by acquisition, and may therefore reduce capital flowing into the startup sector—a mechanism very close to what Sacks describes. However, these are largely theoretical or qualitative arguments, not clean causal measurements. (pulseforinnovation.org)
    • At the same time, hard data from the U.S. HSR (merger notification) report show that while second‑request investigations and enforcement intensity have risen, overall M&A filing levels in 2024–2025 are close to or above 2023, and Reuters notes that stricter review “has not significantly deterred dealmaking,” even if it increases the chance of extended investigations. (reuters.com)
  4. CMA‑specific behavior is mixed, and recently has shifted away from the posture Sacks worried about.

    • The UK CMA’s tough stance did help sink high‑profile deals like Adobe–Figma, which was abandoned in December 2023 after UK and EU antitrust concerns about future competition—an example of exactly the kind of subjective, future‑competition theory Sacks criticized. (theguardian.com)
    • But by 2024–2025, the CMA is under strong political pressure to support economic growth. Its leadership has publicly committed to a more “pro‑growth” approach, stated it will scrutinize fewer global deals, and has streamlined consultation timelines. The authority also dropped a formal probe into Microsoft’s partnership with OpenAI, a major AI/tech relationship. (ft.com)
    • This evolution undercuts the specific conditional in Sacks’s prediction (that regulators continue in the same slow, expansive direction); in practice, at least in the UK, the political system has pushed the CMA to moderate rather than double down.
  5. The link to “less risk capital” is debated and not empirically nailed down.

    • VC activity is clearly below 2021’s peak, and down‑rounds and lower IPO valuations are widespread in 2024–2025, but most analyses cite the interest‑rate regime and valuation reset as the dominant explanations. (fortune.com)
    • Academic work on antitrust and VC is mixed. For example, one 2023 paper finds that reductions in local DOJ antitrust enforcement actually reduced VC investment and successful exits, implying that at least some enforcement can support venture ecosystems by constraining incumbents’ anticompetitive conduct—essentially the opposite of Sacks’s argument that tougher enforcement necessarily chokes off risk capital. (arxiv.org)

Why this is “ambiguous” rather than clearly right or wrong:

  • Parts of Sacks’s causal story are superficially consistent with what we see: regulators did block or derail some marquee tech deals (e.g., Adobe–Figma, earlier phases of Microsoft–Activision), practitioners and commentators talk about a “chilling effect” and higher merger‑process friction, startup exits and VC‑backed liquidity are indeed weak, and some policy analyses explicitly warn that making M&A exits more uncertain can depress startup investment. (theguardian.com)
  • However, macro factors and the post‑2021 valuation bust are clearly the primary, measurable drivers of the downturn in exits and funding. Global M&A and tech M&A have rebounded in value and are growing again by 2024–2025, even under heightened scrutiny, suggesting no decisive, sustained collapse of M&A activity. (pwc.com)
  • CMA‑style regulators have not unambiguously “continued” along the exact path Sacks criticized; in the UK especially, the trend since 2024 is toward somewhat more pro‑growth, selective enforcement rather than ever‑expanding, slow, subjective review of tech M&A. (ft.com)
  • Finally, the empirical literature on antitrust and VC is not one‑sided; there is no robust consensus that stricter merger enforcement in tech has, in net, reduced risk capital.

Given this mix, the available evidence does not allow a clean judgment that Sacks’s prediction has either clearly come true or clearly failed. The environment is more nuanced: regulatory scrutiny has introduced friction and some chilling at the margin, but broader data show M&A and capital flows recovering under multiple influences. Hence the classification as "ambiguous."

aiventure
Within a few months of this November 2023 episode, Sam Altman will consolidate effective control over OpenAI, leveraging strong employee loyalty to obtain essentially all governance and structural changes he seeks.
I think that I just think that what's going to happen in the next few months is that Sam will consolidate his control, because he's proven that he has the total loyalty of the troops, and they're behind him, and there's no choice. So why won't he get everything he wants?
Explanation

Within days to months of the November 2023 crisis, Sam Altman did consolidate effective control over OpenAI in the way Sacks predicted.

  • Employee loyalty forced the board’s hand. After Altman was fired on November 17, 2023, more than 700 of roughly 770 employees signed a letter threatening to quit and join Microsoft unless Altman was reinstated and the board resigned. This employee revolt, together with investor pressure, led directly to his return as CEO on November 22, 2023. (en.wikipedia.org) This matches Sacks’ premise that Altman had “total loyalty of the troops” and that the board had “no choice.”
  • He regained and expanded his formal governance role within a few months. An internal investigation by WilmerHale—whose lawyers Altman himself helped select—concluded in March 2024 that his removal “did not mandate” firing. The new board publicly expressed “full confidence” in him, reinstated him to the board, and expanded the board with new members seen as compatible with management. (openai.com) Coverage at the time described Altman as having a “fresh mandate” and being the “unquestionable decision maker at OpenAI.” (tbsnews.net) Relative to the pre‑coup board that had just fired him, this is a clear consolidation of power.
  • By 2025, he sits at the center of the controlling governance structure. In the 2025 recapitalization, OpenAI converted its for‑profit arm into OpenAI Group PBC under the control of a renamed nonprofit, the OpenAI Foundation. The Foundation holds special voting rights: it appoints all members of the PBC board and can replace them at any time. Altman is explicitly listed as a director of the OpenAI Foundation alongside other (formally independent) board members, meaning he now sits on the board of the entity that legally controls the whole group. (openai.com) That governance outcome is very close to Sacks’ claim that the nonprofit structure would, in practice, end up under Altman’s control.
  • He largely achieved the structural and fundraising changes leadership sought. Despite regulatory scrutiny that forced some concessions (for example, keeping nonprofit control formally intact), OpenAI secured a massive restructuring into a public‑benefit corporation, cleared by California and Delaware attorneys general, and a new deal with Microsoft valuing OpenAI at about $500 billion and giving it far more fundraising flexibility—outcomes Altman had publicly pushed toward. (apnews.com) While not literally “getting everything he wants” in a legalistic sense, the broad direction of governance and structure has aligned with his and management’s goals rather than with those of the ousted 2023 board.

There are still constraints from regulators, Microsoft’s large stake, and critical former insiders, so Altman is not omnipotent. But Sacks’ core prediction—that, within a few months, Altman would consolidate effective control over OpenAI by leveraging overwhelming employee loyalty and end up with the governance and structural changes broadly aligned with his wishes—has clearly played out. Hence the prediction is best classified as right.

aiventure
Following his November 2023 reinstatement, Sam Altman will not be fired again by the OpenAI board, and will retain de facto total control over the company going forward.
I think the conclusion here is it's sort of a foregone conclusion, which is the board can never fire Sam again. I mean, they're not going to go through that again. Therefore he has total control.
Explanation

Sam Altman was reinstated as OpenAI CEO in late November 2023 and, as of November 30, 2025, remains CEO; there is no record of the OpenAI board firing or removing him again after his reinstatement.(cnbc.com) This makes the first part of the prediction ("the board can never fire Sam again" / he won’t be fired again) so far consistent with observed events, though it remains a claim about the indefinite future.

The second part—"therefore he has total control"—is harder to score as factually true or false. On one hand, reporting and expert commentary widely describe Altman as having consolidated power after the crisis: the dissenting board members who fired him left, he returned as CEO, and later rejoined a reconstituted board, which many critics see as aligned with him.(reuters.com) On the other hand, OpenAI still has a nonprofit-controlled governance structure; regulatory and political pressure forced the company to reverse or modify its planned shift to a more conventional for‑profit model, despite Altman’s earlier push in that direction, indicating that his decisions can be and have been constrained.(apnews.com) The nonprofit retains formal control over the new public‑benefit corporation structure, and major investor Microsoft now holds roughly a 27% stake and a direct role in approving restructuring, giving it substantial leverage over key decisions.(fortune.com)

Because Altman clearly has very strong influence but governance, investor, and regulatory checks continue to shape and sometimes override his preferred direction, whether he has “de facto total control” is a subjective judgment that reasonable observers disagree on. There is enough time elapsed to observe outcomes, but the qualitative nature of “total control” means the prediction cannot be scored as definitively right or wrong; hence it is best classified as ambiguous.

politics
There is a 70% probability that Joe Biden will remain in the 2024 presidential race and not drop out before the general election.
I still think there's about a 70% chance that Biden runs.
Explanation

Joe Biden ultimately did not remain in the 2024 presidential race: he ended his reelection campaign in July 2024 and withdrew from the race, with major outlets reporting his decision not to seek reelection and to step aside as the Democratic nominee.

Since Sacks’s prediction was effectively that Biden would run and not drop out before the general election with a probability of about 70% (i.e., the more-likely outcome in his view), and the opposite outcome occurred (Biden did drop out before the general election), this specific prediction is counted as wrong in outcome terms.

aitech
OpenAI (or comparable leading AI providers) will add video as a supported modality for their models after text, images, and audio, enabling multimodal input/output that includes video in the foreseeable future.
The other thing is multimodal. I mean, so they're really stressing the idea of combining text with photos. I guess videos will eventually come later.
Explanation

Sacks predicted that OpenAI (or similarly leading AI labs) would eventually extend multimodality beyond text, images, and audio to include video.

That has happened:

  • OpenAI developed Sora, a text‑to‑video model capable of generating realistic short videos from text prompts. OpenAI first previewed Sora’s capabilities in February 2024, then moved it out of research preview and launched it publicly on December 9, 2024 as a product for ChatGPT Plus/Pro users, enabling users to generate up to 1080p, 20‑second videos. (openai.com)
  • The Sora interface explicitly supports prompting with text, images, and videos, and can extend or remix existing clips, making video both an input and an output modality within OpenAI’s ecosystem—exactly the kind of next‑step multimodality Sacks anticipated. (openai.com)
  • OpenAI has since released Sora 2 (September 30, 2025), which adds synchronized dialogue and sound effects, further cementing video (with audio) as a core modality alongside text and images. (openai.com)
  • Beyond OpenAI, other top labs followed the same trajectory: Google integrated its Veo video‑generation models (Veo 2, later Veo 3) into Gemini/Gemini Advanced, letting users generate short, high‑resolution videos from text (and sometimes images), which confirms the broader industry move Sacks was pointing to. (blog.google)

Because OpenAI and comparable leading providers did, in fact, add video as a supported modality within roughly 1–2 years of the November 2023 podcast, the prediction is right.

politicsconflict
Following the early-November 2023 Time magazine story on Zelensky, U.S. public opinion over the subsequent few months (roughly through mid-2024) will increasingly shift toward viewing the Ukraine war as unwinnable and favoring negotiations, while the bipartisan political establishment in Washington will largely maintain its existing pro-funding, pro-war policy stance over that same period.
So I think that this week was a watershed in terms of the way that public perception is going to evolve over the next few months, but it seems like the policymakers in Washington are the last ones to get the memo.View on YouTube
Explanation

Polling shows that by the time of the Time cover story and this podcast (late Oct–early Nov 2023), U.S. opinion had already shifted substantially toward seeing the war as a stalemate and favoring a quick end – and then largely plateaued, rather than “increasingly shifting” over the next few months.

  1. Baseline just before/around the prediction (Oct–Nov 2023)
    • A Gallup poll summarized in the Washington Post in early November 2023 found that 41% of Americans said the U.S. was doing too much to help Ukraine (up sharply from 24% in Aug 2022), only 25% said “not enough,” and 64% said neither side was winning the war – clear evidence of a perceived stalemate. (cpnn-world.org)
    • In the same polling, Americans were essentially split between ending the war quickly even if Russia keeps some territory (about 49–50%) and continuing support so Ukraine can regain territory even if the war is prolonged (about 48–49%), a huge change from August 2022 when about two‑thirds favored backing Ukraine “even in a prolonged conflict.” (img.washingtonpost.com)
    In other words, a large bloc of the public already saw the war as a grinding stalemate and was open to a quicker, negotiated end before the “Cronkite moment” framing.

  2. What happened over the “next few months” into mid‑2024?
    • Gallup’s later write‑up of this same question notes that support for helping Ukraine fight until it regained its territory fell sharply by October 2023 (to 54%), but then “views were steady in March” 2024 before shifting again only by December 2024, when Americans finally leaned 50% toward a quick end vs. 48% toward fighting on. (news.gallup.com) That implies little or no additional movement in the few months after the November 2023 Time story.
    • A February 16–18, 2024 Chicago Council/Ipsos survey still found majorities of Americans (58%) in favor of sending additional arms and 58% in favor of economic aid for Ukraine, with support eroding mainly among Republicans but not collapsing overall. (globalaffairs.org)
    • Pew’s April 2024 data (published May 8, 2024) showed about a third of Americans (31%) saying the U.S. was giving too much support, 25% “about the right amount,” and 24% “not enough,” up from just 7% saying “too much” in March 2022—but only modestly changed from late‑2023 figures. (pewresearch.org)
    • Pew’s July 1–7, 2024 survey likewise found opinion still split and stable: 29% said the U.S. was providing too much support, 26% about the right amount, 19% not enough, with Republicans concentrated in the “too much” camp and Democrats largely favoring current or higher aid. (pewresearch.org)
    Together, these data show that the major downshift in hawkish public opinion had mostly already occurred by October 2023, and from late 2023 through mid‑2024 public views were broadly steady, not undergoing the further sharp “watershed” evolution Sacks forecast for “the next few months.”

  3. Policymakers in Washington during the same period
    On the other half of his claim – that “policymakers in Washington are the last ones to get the memo” and would stick to a pro‑funding, pro‑war posture – the evidence lines up well with his prediction:
    • Despite months of internal Republican resistance, the Senate passed a $95 billion foreign aid package including around $60–61 billion for Ukraine with a strongly bipartisan 70–29 vote in February 2024 and again in April as part of the final package. (theguardian.com)
    • The House ultimately approved the companion package on April 20, 2024, with all Democrats and 101 Republicans voting yes, 112 Republicans no, sending approximately $61 billion in additional Ukraine aid to the president’s desk. (theguardian.com)
    • President Biden and both party leaders in the Senate (Schumer and McConnell) consistently framed this aid as a vital U.S. commitment and made passage a top priority, even as polls showed growing public fatigue and a sizable bloc saying the U.S. was doing too much. (pewresearch.org)
    That is, the bipartisan establishment did keep backing large Ukraine aid packages through mid‑2024 despite clear signs of public skepticism.

  4. Overall assessment
    • The second part of Sacks’s prediction – that Washington’s bipartisan establishment would largely stick to a pro‑funding, pro‑war stance – is well supported by the 2024 supplemental‑aid fight and eventual passage of a large new package. (reuters.com)
    • But the central, time‑bound part of his forecast – that “this week was a watershed” and that over the next few months public perception would increasingly move toward seeing the war as unwinnable and favoring negotiations relative to where it already stood in late 2023 – is not borne out. Major national polls indicate that:
    – perceptions of a stalemate and fatigue were already widespread by October 2023, and
    additional movement in that direction was minimal between late 2023 and mid‑2024, with the next clear shift toward prioritizing a quick end to the war not appearing until late 2024. (news.gallup.com)

Because the core predictive content – a further, near‑term evolution of public opinion over “the next few months” – did not occur in the way or on the timeline he described, even though he was right about elites staying pro‑aid, the overall prediction is best judged wrong.

marketseconomy
Conditional prediction: If, from late 2023 onward, the probability of Federal Reserve rate cuts exceeds the probability of further rate hikes (i.e., the tightening cycle is effectively over and a rate-cut cycle begins), then public market valuations—especially of growth stocks and distressed real estate—will experience a broad rally during that rate-cut cycle.
Well, maybe. I mean, I don't know, it's so hard to predict the markets, but if you believe that there's more upside to rates than downside, meaning that the odds of a rate decrease are much greater than the odds of a rate increase from here, then there is upside to valuations, particularly for growth stocks. Also for distressed real estate, because all these things get more valuable when rates are lower. So if you believe that we're going to be in a in a cycle of rate decreases and that whole thing has played its way out, then everything's going to rally.View on YouTube
Explanation

Condition check (rate‑cut cycle)

  • After holding the policy rate at 5.25–5.50% from July 2023, the Federal Reserve began an easing cycle with its first rate cut in late summer 2024 (variously dated to August or the September 18, 2024 meeting in market commentary).(franklinresources.com)
  • By definition, once the Fed started cutting and continued to discuss further reductions, markets were in the regime Sacks described (probability of cuts dominating hikes, i.e., the tightening cycle effectively over).

Outcome: growth‑stock & broad equity rally

  • Franklin Templeton’s analysis notes that from the first cut of this cycle (August 2024) through August 20, 2025, the S&P 500 rose roughly 16%, consistent with historical patterns of strong equity performance during expansionary easing phases.(franklinresources.com)
  • Growth‑heavy indexes rallied even more: Nasdaq’s September 2025 scorecard reports the Nasdaq‑100 at new all‑time highs, up 17.5% year‑to‑date through Q3 2025, with most Nasdaq indexes gaining.(nasdaq.com)
  • The Nasdaq‑100 level progression (20,000 in July 2024, 22,000 in December 2024, 23,000 in July 2025, 24,000 in September 2025) shows a sustained surge from around the start of the easing cycle onward, underscoring a broad growth‑stock valuation rally.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Additional market commentary on this cycle characterizes year one of the current rate‑cutting phase as delivering strong double‑digit S&P 500 gains, and highlights that stocks have historically performed well in the second year of rate‑cut cycles too.(finance.yahoo.com)

Outcome: distressed / commercial real estate

  • Private‑market commercial property values (Green Street’s CPPI) stopped falling and turned modestly positive: the all‑property index was up 4.1% year‑over‑year in May 2025 and about 2.7% over the prior 12 months by August 2025, indicating stabilization and mild recovery from earlier declines.(greenstreet.com)
  • Other analysis notes that U.S. commercial property values fell about 22% from their April 2022 peak to a December 2024 bottom, then recovered about 5% in 2024 and were marginally positive in 2025, but still hovered around a 20% drawdown, with distress elevated in highly levered segments like offices.(linkedin.com)
  • At the same time, several sources emphasize that much of commercial real estate—especially office—remains under significant stress (high vacancies, deep price drops, rising delinquencies), and that Fed cuts have not fully “fixed” the sector.(franknez.com)

Evaluation

  • Sacks’ conditional claim was: if the Fed entered a rate‑cut cycle (odds of cuts > hikes), then public market valuations—“particularly” growth stocks and distressed real estate—would rally during that cycle, with “everything” becoming more valuable as rates moved lower.
  • The core mechanism he described did play out for public equities, especially growth stocks: once markets transitioned into an easing regime, major equity indexes (S&P 500, Nasdaq‑100) saw broad, substantial rallies consistent with his expectation.
  • For distressed real estate, the picture is more mixed: values appear to have bottomed and recovered modestly, but the sector is far from a clean "everything rallies" scenario, with ongoing distress in office and other leveraged segments. Still, the direction of change since the onset of cuts has been stabilization-to-slight‑recovery rather than continued collapse.

Given that the central, testable part of the conditional—a broad rally in public market valuations, especially growth stocks, during the rate‑cut cycle—has clearly occurred, while distressed real estate has at least stabilized and modestly rebounded from its trough, the prediction is best classified as right, albeit somewhat overstated in its "everything’s going to rally" phrasing for commercial real estate specifically.

Sacks @ 00:34:41Inconclusive
governmenteconomy
San Francisco will experience substantial budget deficits of roughly $0.5 billion in fiscal year 2024–2025 and around $1.3 billion by fiscal years 2027–2028, as projected by the city controller, creating acute fiscal stress that will force difficult policy choices.
there was an article here saying that the city controller's office for San Francisco has released its projected budget shortfalls for the coming years. It's almost half a billion for 20 2425, reaching 1.3 billion in 2728. So what do they do about this? I mean, they don't have the money.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks was accurately paraphrasing San Francisco’s own controller and five‑year financial plan, and the near‑term part of his prediction has played out, but the 2027–2028 piece has not yet resolved.

What has already happened (supports the prediction):

  • In December 2022, Mayor London Breed’s budget instructions stated that San Francisco faced a two‑year General Fund shortfall of about $728.3 million, with a $527.6 million deficit in the second year (FY 2024–25)—essentially “about half a billion.” (sf.gov)
  • Subsequent updates and advocacy pieces describe the FY 2024–25 budget process as addressing a “nearly $800 million” shortfall, closed via leaving positions vacant, cutting contracts, and using one‑time revenues—clear evidence of fiscal stress and difficult trade‑offs. (sfmms.org)
  • By April 2025, the mayor’s budget director told the Board of Supervisors that the March update to the five‑year financial plan showed an $817.5 million shortfall over the next two years and a roughly $1.3 billion structural shortfall over the five‑year outlook, again underscoring ongoing, large projected gaps and the need for corrective policies. (citizenportal.ai)
  • Coverage of Mayor Daniel Lurie’s 2025–26 budget notes he is closing an $800 million deficit over two years by cutting roughly 1,400 city jobs and reducing contracts and grants—exactly the kind of “difficult choices” Sacks anticipated. (sfchronicle.com)

What is still unresolved (why the overall verdict is inconclusive):

  • The controller’s March 31, 2023 update indeed projected that, absent policy changes, San Francisco’s deficits would cumulatively reach about $1.3 billion by FY 2027–28, a figure repeated in subsequent commentary on the city’s finances. (bondbuyer.com)
  • However, FY 2027–28 has not occurred yet (as of November 30, 2025). The city is legally required to adopt a balanced budget each year, and updated forecasts between now and 2027 could raise or lower the out‑year gaps. We therefore do not yet know whether the eventual 2027–28 structural deficit will actually be around $1.3 billion or something materially different.

So, while the first part of Sacks’s prediction—large FY 2024–25 shortfalls and intense fiscal stress forcing hard choices—has clearly come true, the key claim that deficits will be “around $1.3 billion” by FY 2027–28 cannot yet be verified. That makes the overall prediction inconclusive (too early) rather than definitively right or wrong.

markets
Following WeWork’s expected Chapter 11 filing (signaled for early November 2023), a private equity firm will acquire WeWork’s assets out of bankruptcy, restructure its leases and locations, and ultimately generate very large financial returns from the restructured business relative to the distressed purchase price.
There's no question that that WeWork has been a capital destruction machine. That being said, I actually think that some private equity player is going to buy this out of bankruptcy and make a fortune.View on YouTube
Explanation

WeWork did file for Chapter 11 in November 2023, but the post‑bankruptcy outcome did not match Sacks’s prediction of “some private equity player…buy[ing] this out of bankruptcy and mak[ing] a fortune.”

  1. Who actually took control:

    • WeWork emerged from Chapter 11 in late May / June 2024 through a creditor‑led reorganization, not a sale of assets to a private equity firm.
    • Real‑estate software company Yardi Systems, via its subsidiary Cupar Grimmond, invested about $337M as part of a ~$450M exit financing and ended up with roughly a 60% majority stake, while other lenders and bondholders took most of the remaining equity. There was no 363 asset sale to a PE buyer; control shifted to Yardi and lenders under a court‑approved plan of reorganization. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. Restructuring leases and locations:

    • Through Chapter 11, WeWork eliminated about $4B of debt, cut roughly $8–12B in future rent obligations, and exited around 160–170 unprofitable locations, shrinking to about 600 locations globally. This matches the “restructure leases and locations” part of the thesis, but that restructuring was executed under the creditor/Yardi plan, not by a PE buyer acquiring the assets. (en.wikipedia.org)
  3. “Make a fortune” outcome:

    • After emerging, WeWork became a private company with a projected equity value in the mid‑hundreds of millions and an internal plan merely aiming for modest profitability around 2025. There is no public evidence as of late 2025 that Yardi or any investor has realized “very large” returns or “made a fortune” on the post‑bankruptcy equity; the investment is still being worked out and remains illiquid. (wsj.com)

Because (a) no private equity firm bought WeWork’s assets out of bankruptcy and (b) there is no evidence yet of outsized realized returns from such a buyout, the prediction as stated is best classified as wrong, even though some generic elements (bankruptcy and lease restructuring) did occur.

Sacks @ 00:45:20Inconclusive
marketseconomy
Post-bankruptcy, a buyer of WeWork’s assets who aggressively sheds unprofitable locations and renegotiates remaining leases (including converting some to operator/revenue-share structures and cutting others to roughly 60% of prior rent levels) will be able, within a few years of emergence from bankruptcy, to operate WeWork as a profitable, cash-generating business.
So I think the landlord will take the bird in the hand. So think about it. Some private equity player goes in there renegotiates all these leases sheds the bad ones, and all of a sudden the business is going to make a lot of money.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of Sacks’ setup have already happened, but his core claim about sustained profitability is on a longer timeline than the data we have.

What has happened so far

  • WeWork filed for Chapter 11 in November 2023 and emerged from bankruptcy in mid‑June 2024 under a reorganization that wiped out about $4 billion of debt and shifted control to a lender group and Yardi Systems, which became majority owner.(reuters.com)
  • During the bankruptcy, WeWork exited roughly a third of its locations and renegotiated hundreds of leases, cutting future rent obligations by around 40–50% (about $8–12 billion) and keeping a smaller, more profitable footprint.(cnbc.com)
  • Post‑emergence, CEO John Santora says WeWork now uses three agreement types—traditional leases, revenue‑share deals, and pure management agreements—with about 130 locations on revenue‑share/management structures, which matches the prediction’s idea of shifting to operator/revenue‑share models to de‑risk leases.(time.com)

Profitability status as of late 2025

  • In a 2025 TIME interview, Santora states that WeWork has never been profitable, but that its most recent quarter was break‑even on an EBITDA basis, the first time in its history.(time.com)
  • A July 2025 Wall Street Journal piece reports that WeWork generated about $2.2 billion in revenue in 2024 and delivered its first quarterly EBITDA profits, with three recent quarters showing positive EBITDA. This indicates improvement but not yet clear, sustained net income or free‑cash‑flow profitability.(wsj.com)

Why this is “inconclusive”

  • Sacks’ normalized prediction is that “within a few years of emergence from bankruptcy” a buyer who restructures leases will be able to run WeWork as a profitable, cash‑generating business. WeWork only emerged from Chapter 11 around June 2024, so “within a few years” points roughly to 2026–2027.
  • As of November 2025, WeWork has restructured in exactly the way he described and is approaching EBITDA profitability, but it is not yet clearly a sustained, cash‑generating, net‑profit business, nor has the full time window he gave expired.

Because the key profitability outcome could still plausibly go either way within the remaining horizon, the prediction cannot yet be judged definitively right or wrong; it is too early, so “inconclusive.”

Sacks @ 01:00:35Inconclusive
governmentai
As a result of the Biden AI executive order and subsequent overlapping regulations from many U.S. federal agencies, technology companies will eventually lobby for and obtain the creation of a single, dedicated federal agency (a “federal software commission” analogous to the FCC/FDA) that regulates AI and large-scale software in the United States.
What's going to happen is that with all of these different bodies issuing new regulations, it's going to get more and more burdensome on technology companies until the point where they cry out for some sort of rationalization of this regime. They're going to say, listen, we can't keep up with FCC and Department of Commerce and this Entity Standards Board, just give us one agency to deal with. And so the industry itself is eventually going to cry, uncle and say like, please just give us one. And you already hear people like Sam Altman and so forth calling for the equivalent of Atomic Energy Commission for AI. This is how we're going to end up with a federal Software commission, just like we have an FCC to run big communications, and we have an FDA to run Big Pharma. We're going to end up with a federal software commission to run software. Big software.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the United States has not created a single, dedicated federal agency functioning as an FCC/FDA‑style regulator for AI or “big software,” as Sacks described.

  1. Current federal structure is still multi‑agency and patchwork.
    Recent overviews of U.S. AI governance explicitly note that there is no single federal AI regulator; instead, AI is governed via executive orders, NIST guidance, and enforcement of existing laws by multiple agencies such as the FTC, EEOC, CFPB, DOJ, and sectoral regulators (e.g., FDA for medical AI).(quickcreator.io) These sources characterize the U.S. approach as fragmented and agency‑led, not centralized in a new stand‑alone commission.

  2. The AI Safety Institute / CAISI is not a full regulatory commission.
    The Biden administration’s 2023 AI executive order led to the creation of a U.S. AI Safety Institute inside NIST, later renamed by the Trump administration to the Center for AI Standards and Innovation (CAISI). It focuses on standards, testing, and international representation, and Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick has emphasized a voluntary, pro‑innovation posture rather than serving as a rule‑issuing regulator for all AI.(theverge.com) This does not match Sacks’s vision of a powerful, independent “federal software commission” analogous to the FCC/FDA.

  3. Congressional proposals for a single tech/AI agency have not passed.
    Senators Bennet and Welch’s Digital Platform Commission Act would create a Federal Digital Platform Commission with broad authority over digital platforms and some AI issues. However, the Senate bill (S.1671, 118th Congress) remains at the introduced stage with no further action; no law has been enacted and no such commission exists in reality.(congress.gov)

  4. Timing language makes the forecast open‑ended.
    Sacks frames the outcome as something that will happen as regulatory burdens accumulate—“this is how we’re going to end up with a federal software commission”—without specifying a time horizon. Since only about two years have passed since the November 2023 executive order, and U.S. policymakers are still debating whether to create such a body, current evidence only shows that the outcome has not yet occurred, not that it will not occur.

Because the key condition of the prediction—actual creation of a single, FCC/FDA‑like federal agency to regulate AI and large‑scale software—has not happened yet, but the forecast is effectively open‑ended in time, the correct assessment as of late 2025 is **“inconclusive (too early)” rather than definitively right or wrong.

aitechgovernment
Over time, U.S. federal regulation will expand from narrowly targeting AI to covering essentially all large software companies, subjecting the software industry broadly to direct federal regulatory oversight.
now we are headed to a place where not just AI, but basically all software companies are headed for regulation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that U.S. federal regulation would evolve from narrowly targeting AI to putting “basically all software companies” under direct federal regulatory oversight.

What has actually happened by November 2025:

  • The most comprehensive federal move in 2023 was Biden’s Executive Order 14110 on AI, which focused on artificial intelligence systems (not the broader software industry) and emphasized frontier AI models and government use of AI. It did not create a general licensing or supervisory regime for all large software firms.(bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov) In January 2025, President Trump rescinded that order and replaced it with Executive Order 14179, which explicitly aims to remove barriers to AI innovation and directs agencies to revise or rescind prior AI‑safety measures viewed as restrictive. This is a move toward deregulation of AI, not expansion of oversight to all software companies.(en.wikipedia.org)

  • Congress still has no broad AI or software‑sector regulatory statute. The only major new AI‑specific federal law is the 2025 TAKE IT DOWN Act, which narrowly targets non‑consensual intimate imagery and deepfakes and imposes takedown and process obligations on “covered platforms” that primarily host user‑generated content. It does not regulate the software industry as a whole or even all large software companies—only certain online platforms in a specific abuse context.(en.wikipedia.org)

  • Other federal initiatives remain targeted and limited: export‑control adjustments for high‑end AI compute, voluntary NIST AI Risk Management guidance, and FTC enforcement of existing consumer‑protection law against misleading AI marketing claims. None of these create a new, comprehensive federal oversight regime that applies across “essentially all large software companies”; they are narrowly focused on AI risk or on specific content types.(en.wikipedia.org) Legislative proposals like the Preserving American Dominance in AI Act would focus on frontier AI and national‑security risks, not on the broader software industry, and as of late 2025 have not become law.(king.senate.gov)

  • The regulatory trendline is also inconsistent with the prediction. Reporting on U.S. policy in 2025 describes federal moves to loosen or block regulation—such as attempts (ultimately defeated in the Senate) to impose a 10‑year federal moratorium on state AI laws via a tax‑and‑spending bill—rather than to build a strong, centralized federal regime overseeing all software firms.(reuters.com) At the same time, the most aggressive new AI rules have come from states like California (e.g., SB‑53, the Transparency in Frontier AI Act), which targets only very large frontier‑model developers and operates at the state level, not as a blanket federal framework for all large software companies.(en.wikipedia.org)

  • Some separate, sectoral tech measures (such as the TikTok‑focused Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act) address specific national‑security concerns about foreign‑controlled apps, not general domestic software regulation.(en.wikipedia.org) Existing antitrust cases against firms like Apple are enforcement of long‑standing laws, not evidence of a new federal software‑industry regulatory overlay.(en.wikipedia.org)

Given this record two years after the prediction:

  • Federal action has not broadened from AI to a regime that covers “basically all software companies” or “essentially all large software companies.”
  • The only clearly new, binding AI‑specific federal statute is narrow (deepfakes/NCII and hosting platforms).
  • The main comprehensive AI‑governance executive order was rolled back, and current federal policy direction is at least as much about removing restrictions and pre‑empting state efforts as about expanding federal oversight.

While “over time” is vague and does not specify an exact deadline, the prediction was directional (“we are headed to a place…”) and implied a trend toward blanket federal regulation of the software sector. The observable trajectory by late 2025 runs counter to that claim, so on the evidence available today, the prediction is best judged as wrong.

conflictpolitics
If Israel proceeds with a ground invasion of Gaza following the October 7, 2023 attacks, the resulting military operation will be relatively short in duration (not a prolonged, years‑long campaign) and will end with a negotiated ceasefire before the conflict escalates into a wider regional war.
So I kind of think that the most realistic good case scenario is that if they do go in that the military operation, for various reasons, is not a long one, and eventually a ceasefire can be agreed to before this can escalate out of control.View on YouTube
Explanation

Israel did launch a full-scale ground invasion of Gaza on 27 October 2023, and that invasion is still formally ongoing more than two years later, with the campaign described in reference works as an "Israeli invasion of the Gaza Strip" running from 27 October 2023 to the present. (en.wikipedia.org) Large-scale ground and urban operations continued well beyond the initial months, including major offensives and sieges in Gaza City through January 2025 and in Khan Yunis, Beit Hanoun, and Deir al-Balah into mid–late 2025, contradicting the idea that the operation would be “not a long one.” (en.wikipedia.org)

A durable, structured ceasefire was only reached in stages starting with a temporary January–March 2025 armistice, which then collapsed when Israel resumed large-scale bombardment and ground attacks in March 2025; a more comprehensive ceasefire and withdrawal framework was not agreed until October 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) By then, the war had already caused tens of thousands of Palestinian deaths and massive destruction in Gaza, with major hostilities lasting roughly two years, far from the short campaign envisioned. (theguardian.com)

Moreover, the conflict produced substantial regional escalation before any lasting ceasefire: Iran carried out a large drone and missile strike directly against Israel in April 2024, and Yemen’s Houthi movement waged an extended campaign against international shipping in the Red Sea explicitly tied to the Gaza war, prompting US‑, UK‑, and EU‑led naval responses. (en.wikipedia.org) While this fell short of a classic multi‑front conventional “regional war,” it clearly contradicted the prediction that a brief operation would end in a ceasefire before the situation escalated in the region.

Because the Gaza ground campaign turned into a prolonged, years‑long war with only late and fragile ceasefires, and significant regional spillover occurred before those ceasefires, Sacks’s scenario of a short operation capped by an early, stabilizing ceasefire did not materialize.

ventureeconomy
From late 2023 through roughly mid‑2025, there will be an elevated rate of startup shutdowns and failures compared with 2021, as companies that raised large rounds in 2021 exhaust their cash and are unable to raise new financing on acceptable terms.
So I think you're going to see this dynamic for the next 18 months or so.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple independent datasets show that startup failures were significantly higher from late 2023 through at least late 2024 than in the 2021 boom period, matching Sacks’s prediction both in timing (roughly the 18 months after October 2023) and in mechanism (2021‑era companies running out of runway and unable to refinance).

Key points:

  • 2021 as easy‑money baseline: 2021 was a record year for global VC funding, with around $621–681 billion invested worldwide and more than $300 billion in the U.S., reflecting extremely loose capital and supportive conditions for startups rather than mass shutdowns.(news.crunchbase.com)

  • Sharp rise in shutdowns starting 2023: Carta data (U.S. startups) show 467 shutdowns in 2022, rising to 770 in 2023, which Forbes describes as the highest number of shutdowns Carta had ever tracked and calls 2023 “the most fatal year for startups.”(forbes.com) Q3 2023 alone saw 212 shutdowns, the highest quarterly total since Carta began tracking this in 2012, up 50% year‑over‑year.(southernstartups.org) This is already a clear elevation versus the 2021 boom environment.

  • Further acceleration into Sacks’s 18‑month window: Carta reports that shutdowns continued to accelerate into 2024, with Q1 2024 reaching 254 closures—a new quarterly record and 58% more than Q1 2023, after a 124% jump between Q1 2022 and Q1 2023.(carta.com) Full‑year data show 966 shutdowns in 2024 vs 769 in 2023, a 25.6% increase and again a new high.(techcrunch.com) Forbes and Carta both note that 2024 saw the highest absolute number of startup shutdowns ever recorded in Carta’s data.(forbes.com) TechCrunch and others expect 2025 to remain “another brutal year of failed startups,” indicating the elevated failure environment persisted into the first part of 2025.(techcrunch.com)

  • Direct link to 2020–2021 funding cohorts and inability to raise: Multiple analyses explicitly tie these failures to startups that raised large rounds in 2020–2021 and then hit the 18–24 month mark in a far tighter funding environment. Carta’s head of insights notes that companies that raised in late 2020 and early 2021 were facing their next raise in 2022–23 just as capital dried up, forcing shutdowns.(bizjournals.com) The Financial Times similarly reports a 60% rise in startup failures as many firms that raised during the 2021–22 boom exhausted their cash and couldn’t secure new funding on acceptable terms.(ft.com) A 2025 Carta‑based review emphasizes that the wave of closures in 2024 was “concentrated” among startups funded in 2021–2022, exactly the dynamic Sacks described.(forbes.com)

  • Global corroboration: Outside the U.S., Tracxn data on India (the world’s third‑largest startup ecosystem) show 15,921 shutdowns in 2023 and 12,717 in 2024, versus only about 2,300 shutdowns over 2019–2022 combined, a roughly 12‑fold jump, again indicating a post‑2021 correction with elevated failures.(magzter.com)

Across geographies and data providers, the pattern is consistent: 2023–2024 (and into early 2025) show a markedly higher level of startup shutdowns than the 2021 ZIRP boom, and analyses explicitly attribute this to companies that raised big 2020–2021 rounds running out of cash in a much harsher funding environment. That matches Sacks’s prediction on both direction and timing, so it is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
Newly elected House Speaker Mike Johnson will not remain Speaker for the long term (i.e., he will be removed or replaced before serving multiple Congresses), though he is likely to survive at least the first few major political skirmishes and not be ousted immediately.
Look, I don't think I don't think he's going to last long term, but, um, but it may be more than a few skirmishes.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s core claim was that Mike Johnson would not remain Speaker "long term," specifically that he would be removed or replaced before serving multiple Congresses, even though he might survive the first few skirmishes.

In reality, Mike Johnson was elected Speaker on October 25, 2023 during the 118th Congress and is still serving as Speaker in the 119th Congress. His biography notes he has been Speaker since 2023, and the page for the 119th United States Congress lists him as the current Speaker, confirming he continued in that role into a second Congress. (en.wikipedia.org) A November 25, 2025 Congressional Record entry also shows him exercising the office by appointing a Speaker pro tempore, further confirming he remains Speaker at least through late 2025. (congress.gov) Recent news coverage likewise refers to him as Speaker in late November 2025. (nypost.com)

Because he has already served as Speaker across more than one Congress (118th and 119th), the prediction that he would be removed before serving multiple Congresses is falsified, even though the lesser claim that he would survive the initial skirmishes did come true. Overall, the prediction is therefore wrong.

politics
In the months following his election as Speaker (from late 2023 onward), U.S. media outlets will continually publish previously overlooked statements and sermons by Mike Johnson, portraying him as an extremist or 'wacko' based on those past remarks.
there's going to be a drip, drip, drip Of all the things that he's ever said when he was kind of a backbencher and no one was paying attention, all these sermons that he's given and so forth. They're going to be, you know, writing stories about that, and they're going to make the guy seem like a wacko.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from late 2023 onward shows a sustained pattern of U.S. outlets resurfacing Mike Johnson’s past writings, sermons, and religious activism and framing them as extreme, matching Sacks’s prediction.

  • Shortly after Johnson became Speaker in October 2023, CNN’s KFile ran a widely echoed piece detailing his early‑2000s editorials in the Shreveport Times supporting criminalization of gay sex and calling homosexuality an “inherently unnatural” and “dangerous lifestyle” that could destroy “the entire democratic system.” This was explicitly framed as digging into his past rhetoric now that he was Speaker and was repeatedly cited by other outlets and partisan comms operations.

    Sources: CNN article and re‑use in other political communications. (amp.cnn.com)

  • New York Magazine/Intelligencer’s “Mike Johnson’s Old‑Time Religion” and related coverage highlighted an earlier sermon where Johnson rejected evolution and suggested teaching evolution contributes to school shootings, again using an old sermon to illustrate his worldview as Speaker. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Rolling Stone and the New York Times resurfaced Johnson’s comments on a pre‑speakership Christian prayer call in which he described America as “dark and depraved” and questioned whether God would bring judgment; these were packaged as revelations about the new Speaker’s theology and rhetoric from before he was in leadership. (debatepolitics.com)

  • NPR and other outlets in November–December 2023 ran profiles scrutinizing Johnson’s ties to far‑right Christian networks (e.g., New Apostolic Reformation, dominion theology) and events like the National Gathering for Prayer and Repentance, explicitly presenting these older relationships and appearances as evidence of a Christian‑nationalist, theocratic bent now relevant because he is Speaker. (wusf.org)

  • A wide range of commentators and outlets repeatedly described Johnson with terms such as “hard‑core theocrat,” “extreme Christian fundamentalist,” and “Christian nationalist”; some high‑profile commentators compared his rhetoric to Osama bin Laden’s or likened his Christian nationalism to the Taliban, clearly aiming to portray him as radical or unhinged. (catholicleague.org)

  • Coverage did not stop after the initial week: through late 2023 and into 2024, outlets continued to publish pieces revisiting his past legal work for the Ark Encounter/Creation Museum, his earlier statements blaming evolution for moral decay, and his longstanding ties to organizations like Answers in Genesis and the Family Research Council, all framed as indicators of an unusually extreme religious‑political worldview for a modern Speaker. (religionnews.com)

Putting this together, media behavior matches the forecasted “drip, drip, drip” of stories about Johnson’s backbench‑era sermons, writings, and affiliations, with a consistent emphasis on presenting those past remarks as extreme. That is substantively what Sacks predicted, so the prediction is best judged as right.

politicsgovernment
In the Georgia 2020 election RICO case, prosecutors will use plea deals with lower‑level defendants like Jenna Ellis, Sidney Powell, and Kenneth Chesebro to attempt to secure cooperation from higher‑level figures such as Rudy Giuliani and John Eastman, and will then attempt to use any such testimony against Donald Trump, though these lower‑level witnesses will not themselves provide direct incriminating evidence sufficient to convict Trump without such higher‑level flips.
I think what's likely happening is that they're flipping these lower level figures in order to flip the next higher level, which would be Giuliani and John Eastman, because I don't think these people have anything on Trump. So they're going to try and, you know, use Jenna Ellis to flip Rudy, and then they're going to try and see if Rudy will flip on Trump.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key elements of Sacks’ prediction did not play out as described.

  • Lower‑level defendants did flip, but they did have “something on Trump.” Jenna Ellis, Sidney Powell, Kenneth Chesebro, and Scott Hall all took plea deals in October 2023 that required them to provide information that could be used against the remaining defendants, including Trump.(fultongrandjury.com) Their recorded proffer sessions describe Trump’s inner‑circle saying he would not leave office, Powell’s direct communications with Trump about seizing voting machines, and Chesebro’s role in the fake‑elector scheme—material that legal analysts characterized as damaging evidence against Trump, not mere leverage to reach others.(abc11.com) This directly contradicts Sacks’ claim that these figures “don’t have anything on Trump.”
  • Prosecutors did not, in practice, flip Giuliani or Eastman. Reporting on the Fulton County DA’s strategy indicated Trump, Mark Meadows, and Rudy Giuliani were not being offered plea deals, with prosecutors instead aiming to take them to trial.(theguardian.com) John Eastman maintained a not‑guilty plea and never entered into a cooperation deal.(en.wikipedia.org) So the envisioned chain—use Ellis to flip Giuliani, then Giuliani to flip on Trump—never occurred.
  • The Georgia case ended without any trial of Trump, so the projected use of this testimony at his trial never happened. After DA Fani Willis was disqualified, new prosecutor Pete Skandalakis assumed control and, on November 26, 2025, moved to drop all remaining charges against Trump and his co‑defendants, formally ending the Georgia election‑interference prosecution.(reuters.com) As a result, there was no opportunity to test Sacks’ scenario that only higher‑level flips could provide incriminating evidence sufficient to convict Trump.

Overall, while Sacks correctly foresaw that lower‑level defendants would take plea deals, his core assertions—that they lacked incriminating information on Trump, that they were mainly being used to flip Giuliani and Eastman, and that this flip‑up strategy would define the case against Trump—were not borne out by subsequent developments. Hence, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

conflictpolitics
If Israel proceeds with a ground invasion of Gaza (after 2023-10-20), then during the subsequent period of that invasion there will be protests/riots and major social‑media eruptions across the Middle East and globally on an almost daily basis.
I would consider the riots that we just saw in regards to the hospital and the eruption on social media, to be a prelude or dress rehearsal of what we can expect to happen almost every day if Israel proceeds with the ground invasion of Gaza.View on YouTube
Explanation
  1. Antecedent was satisfied (Israel did invade Gaza by land after 2023‑10‑20). A Reuters key‑events timeline records that Israel launched its ground offensive into Gaza on 27 October 2023, a week after the podcast release, so the condition “if Israel proceeds with the ground invasion” was met. (reuters.com)

  2. Mass protests across the Middle East and globally during the invasion period. A global dataset on Gaza‑war protests finds nearly 48,000 protest events worldwide between October 7, 2023 and late 2025, with about 22,000 (46%) in the Middle East alone. (en.wikipedia.org) In the U.S., the Crowd Counting Consortium reports 1,869 pro‑Palestine events from October 7–November 26, 2023 (the first month of the ground invasion), noting that this movement was producing “scores of events” with thousands of participants almost every day across the country. (countingcrowds.org) UK reporting similarly describes huge London marches and solidarity actions in scores of other cities on six consecutive weekends by November 25, 2023. (english.ahram.org.eg) A Times of Israel/AP roundup on October 29, 2023—specifically tying that weekend’s demonstrations to Israel expanding its ground operation—describes tens of thousands marching in Britain, France, Switzerland, Pakistan and elsewhere. (timesofisrael.com) This evidence shows sustained, near‑daily protest activity, heavily concentrated in the Middle East but also spread across Europe, North America, and Asia during the invasion.

  3. Riots and serious unrest did occur during this period. An NPR/OPB report on October 30, 2023, written as Israel’s intensified ground operations “pushed into a fourth day,” describes tens of thousands joining pro‑Palestinian protests that weekend in New York, London, Madrid, Casablanca, Istanbul, Islamabad and other cities and notes that protesters in Dagestan (Russia) stormed an airport as a Tel Aviv flight landed, forcing its closure. (opb.org) The global‑protests dataset also documents that roughly 1% of the nearly 48,000 Gaza‑war demonstrations turned violent, which still amounts to hundreds of riot‑like or disorderly events worldwide. (en.wikipedia.org) Together, these support Sacks’s expectation of recurring protests with intermittent riots once a ground invasion began.

  4. Major, ongoing social‑media “eruptions” over Gaza. Meta announced on 19 October 2023 that, in the days after October 7, it had already removed over 700,000 pieces of content related to the Israel–Hamas conflict and set up a special operations center to handle the surge, indicating a massive volume of online posting and controversy. (dig.watch) Human‑rights monitoring citing Human Rights Watch reports that between October 7 and November 14, 2023, Israel’s Cyber Unit sent platforms about 9,500 takedown requests—60% to Meta—with an estimated 94% compliance rate, reflecting constant content disputes about Gaza on major platforms. (graduateinstitute.ch) HRW‑based analyses further document at least 1,050 cases of censorship of Palestine‑related content on Facebook and Instagram from October–November 2023 across more than 60 countries, nearly all targeting peaceful pro‑Palestinian speech. (decodingaffairs.com) This level of posting, moderation and counter‑moderation is consistent with sustained, large‑scale social‑media “eruptions” throughout the early ground‑war period.

  5. Assessment. Sacks did not make a precise quantitative claim, but he predicted that if Israel launched a ground invasion, we would see protests/riots and major social‑media storms over Gaza on an almost daily basis around the Middle East and globally. Israel did invade by land after the podcast date, and the ensuing weeks featured extremely frequent protests (often dozens per day in the U.S. alone, with tens of thousands of events worldwide and an especially dense concentration in the Middle East), sporadic riots, and continuous, large‑scale conflict on social media. Given the documented frequency and breadth of these phenomena, the prediction is best characterized as right in substance, even if the phrase “almost every day” cannot be verified literally for every single day.

techgovernment
Following the implementation of the EU Digital Services Act (DSA), large tech platforms may choose to standardize their content-moderation and compliance model globally by applying DSA-style rules in the United States as well, rather than maintaining a separate, more speech-permissive regime in the US.
What could happen is that because it's easier for companies just to have one approach where they can, there is a risk that these same policies get applied in the US. That is what happened with privacy. Remember, Europe went first with GDPR and then.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the DSA came into force is mixed and does not clearly show a simple “one global DSA-style rulebook” outcome, but it also does not clearly refute the possibility of DSA-driven global convergence.

On the segmentation / non‑convergence side:

  • The DSA’s legal scope is explicitly limited to services offered to users in the EU; it does not require platforms to apply its standards globally, only to EU users.(commission.europa.eu)
  • Platforms have rolled out clearly EU‑only features to meet DSA obligations. TikTok, for example, allows users in the EU/EEA to turn off personalised “For You” recommendations and use a non‑personalised search feed, and to restrict personalised ads for teens, specifically to comply with the DSA, while explicitly not offering the same option in non‑EU markets like the UK.(geekculture.co) This shows they are willing to maintain different moderation/recommendation regimes by region rather than standardise globally.
  • TikTok’s withdrawal of the TikTok Lite rewards programme applies only in the EU in response to a DSA investigation, not worldwide.(reuters.com)
  • Meta and Google’s decisions to halt or limit political ads are being taken specifically for the EU in response to the separate EU political‑ads transparency regulation, rather than exported to the US market, again indicating distinct regional rule sets.(ft.com)

On the convergence / Brussels‑effect side:

  • Some policy and think‑tank analyses argue that, because it is operationally simpler, platforms may choose to apply DSA‑driven standards more broadly than required, and warn that this risks imposing EU speech rules outside Europe.(itif.org) This supports Sacks’s logic (the risk that global companies will standardise on the strictest regime), but these pieces mainly describe incentives and possibilities, not clear proof that US services now fully run on a DSA‑style model.
  • A U.S. House Judiciary Committee Republican report, citing non‑public materials, claims the DSA is “forcing companies to change their global content moderation policies” and that EU regulators expect platforms to modify worldwide terms and conditions to satisfy DSA obligations.(judiciary.house.gov) However, this is an adversarial interpretation based on limited evidence; it is not independently corroborated by platform announcements that they have simply adopted EU rules as their default everywhere.
  • Major platforms have introduced some globally uniform safety features that are clearly responsive to regulatory and political pressure, including from the EU. Meta’s “Teen Accounts,” with stricter defaults and controls for minors, are being rolled out worldwide across Instagram, Facebook and Messenger, not just in the EU.(about.fb.com) Likewise, Facebook’s global “Feeds” tab offering a chronological, less‑personalised feed makes it easier to satisfy the DSA’s requirement that EU users can opt out of algorithmic personalisation, while also being available to users in other regions.(in.investing.com) These moves are consistent with a partial Brussels effect, but they are also driven by lawsuits, youth‑safety scrutiny, and political pressure in the US and elsewhere, so causality is not clean.

Netting this out: by late 2025, platforms do sometimes export DSA‑aligned features globally, but they also clearly maintain EU‑specific restrictions and US‑specific practices, and in some cases roll out more invasive data uses outside the EU (for example, using Meta AI chat data for ad personalisation globally except in the EU, UK and South Korea).(reddit.com) That pattern does not cleanly match a world where companies simply adopt a single DSA‑style moderation/compliance model everywhere.

Because there is credible evidence in both directions—regional differentiation in some areas, partial globalisation of DSA‑aligned protections in others—and no clear, widely acknowledged shift to a unified DSA‑style regime for U.S. users, the prediction that platforms would standardise on DSA rules globally is neither clearly confirmed nor clearly falsified. The outcome is therefore best classified as ambiguous.

techgovernment
In response to the EU Digital Services Act, major tech and social media companies (e.g., Google, Meta, etc.) will choose to comply fully with EU content and data-access demands, rapidly implementing EU takedown and transparency requests rather than resisting or exiting the EU market.
I think the most likely outcome is that tech companies will be craven and they'll fold, and they'll just do whatever these EU commissioners want.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2023 shows that the large tech and social media firms largely chose to comply with the EU’s Digital Services Act (DSA) rather than exit or mount existential resistance, matching the core of Sacks’s prediction.

  • VLOPs implementing DSA obligations rather than leaving the EU. The European Commission designated very large online platforms and search engines (VLOPs/VLOSEs) such as Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Amazon, etc., and required them to file regular transparency reports and adopt extensive content‑moderation and risk‑management systems. These companies have continued to operate in the EU and have been submitting the mandated reports rather than withdrawing from the market.(digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu)
  • TikTok’s behavior is typical: rapid compliance infrastructure and faster responses to government orders. TikTok is now on its fifth DSA transparency report, describing how it removed tens of millions of policy‑violating posts and highlighting that it cut median response time to government orders from six hours to three, even as such orders increased. That is precisely the kind of fast, systematic takedown and transparency behavior the DSA demands.(newsroom.tiktok.com)
  • Platforms are inside the DSA enforcement regime, not defying it. The Commission has opened formal proceedings and issued preliminary findings that X, Meta, TikTok, AliExpress, and others breached various DSA obligations (e.g., data access for researchers, dark patterns, inadequate reporting tools). But these are enforcement disputes inside a framework the companies have accepted—they remain in the EU, are subject to investigations and fines, and continue adjusting their systems instead of simply refusing the rules or pulling out.(digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu)
  • X as the most defiant case still commits to DSA compliance. Even X (Twitter), which withdrew from the voluntary disinformation code and has been the most openly hostile to EU content‑moderation politics, has not exited the EU. It created a DSA portal for illegal‑content reports and has stated it “remains committed to complying with the Digital Services Act,” while fighting specific findings via the regulatory process.(cybersecforum.eu)
  • Some narrow legal pushback, but no broad refusal. Companies like Zalando and Amazon have taken the Commission to court to contest their designation as “very large online platforms” and related supervisory fees, yet the EU General Court has upheld these designations and the firms remain subject to the stricter DSA regime. These targeted legal challenges show normal regulatory friction, not a strategy of rejecting or fleeing the DSA framework.(euronews.com)
  • Voluntary codes vs. binding law. Around the DSA‑linked disinformation code of practice, most major players (Google, Meta, TikTok, Microsoft, etc.) signed on or treated it as a benchmark for compliance; X is a notable hold‑out. Even where some firms later scaled back on voluntary code commitments, they still must—and do—show equivalent measures under the binding DSA rules.(disa.org)

Taken together, major platforms have overwhelmingly opted to stay in the EU and build substantial compliance machinery that implements the EU’s content and data‑access demands, including rapid takedown and transparency workflows. While they do litigate details and occasionally resist on the margins (especially X), the broad pattern is accommodation rather than principled refusal or exit. That makes Sacks’s main empirical claim—that tech companies would “fold” to EU regulators instead of standing up to or leaving them—substantively right, even if his language about doing “whatever” commissioners want overstates the lack of pushback at the edges.

techgovernment
Following the implementation of the EU’s new content moderation/censorship regime, major tech and social media companies will comply fully with EU commissioners’ takedown demands and policy requirements rather than resisting them, effectively doing whatever the EU commissioners want.
I think the most likely outcome is that tech companies will be craven and they'll fold, and they'll just do whatever these EU commissioners want.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–2025 shows a mixed picture, not the across‑the‑board, non‑resistant compliance Sacks predicted.

After the Digital Services Act (DSA) began applying to large platforms in 2023, the European Commission opened the first formal DSA infringement proceedings against X (formerly Twitter) in December 2023 over suspected failures in risk management, content moderation, transparency, and alleged “deceptive design.” This was triggered partly by X’s handling of content around the Hamas attacks and the Israel–Hamas war, indicating regulators saw continued non‑compliance rather than a platform simply doing whatever they asked. X is still under in‑depth investigation, not in clear, full compliance. (europeansting.com)

In 2024–2025, the Commission also opened multiple formal DSA proceedings against Meta (Facebook and Instagram) over deceptive ads, disinformation, election‑related monitoring tools, and protection of minors. (cyprus.representation.ec.europa.eu) By 2025 it had preliminarily found Meta and TikTok in breach of transparency obligations (including researcher data access) and found Meta in breach of obligations to provide simple mechanisms for reporting illegal content, criticizing its use of dark patterns. (digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu) Meta and TikTok have publicly disputed aspects of these findings and raised concerns (e.g., TikTok citing conflicts with GDPR), rather than passively accepting all demands. (apnews.com)

Separately, Ireland’s media regulator has launched its own DSA‑based investigation into X over inadequate appeal and complaints mechanisms, again signaling that regulators view compliance as insufficient and contested. (reuters.com)

There are instances where companies arguably “folded,” such as TikTok’s rapid, “voluntary” suspension of the TikTok Lite rewards feature in the EU just days after the Commission opened a DSA investigation and threatened interim measures; that move closely tracks what EU enforcers wanted. (reuters.com) But alongside such concessions, the record is full of probes, preliminary breach findings, appeals, and public disagreement.

Overall, major platforms have partially adapted and sometimes yielded to EU pressure, but they have not uniformly or fully complied with every takedown or policy demand without resistance. The ongoing investigations and alleged breaches directly contradict the prediction that companies would simply be “craven,” “fold,” and “do whatever these EU commissioners want.”

conflictpoliticsgovernment
If Israel responds to the Hamas attacks by effectively "leveling" Gaza (a maximal, indiscriminate military response), this will trigger a much wider regional war in the Middle East and could even escalate into a world war.
but I do think that if the reaction is this, let's call it the Lindsey Graham level, the place reaction, I think that could set off a much wider regional war or even a world war.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ statement was conditional and probabilistic: if Israel responded at a “Lindsey Graham level” (essentially “leveling” Gaza), he thought that could trigger a much wider regional war or even a world war.

1. Did the antecedent occur?
Israel’s response was extremely destructive: intensive bombardment, siege, and ground invasion, widely described as the most devastating Gaza conflict to date.(en.wikipedia.org) But “Lindsey Graham level”/“leveling Gaza” is a vague, rhetorical standard rather than a clearly defined policy, so it’s not clear whether his exact condition was met.

2. Did it cause a ‘much wider regional war’ or ‘world war’?
The war clearly regionalized:

  • Ongoing cross‑border hostilities with Hezbollah in Lebanon and clashes in Syria and Iraq.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Houthi attacks on shipping in the Red Sea and multiple drone/missile strikes on Israel, prompting US‑led naval operations and Israeli strikes in Yemen.(rmsgloballtd.com)
  • Direct Iran–Israel missile exchanges in 2024, with hundreds of Iranian ballistic missiles launched at Israel and Israeli strikes on Iranian targets.(en.wikipedia.org)
    Analysts describe this as a multi‑front Middle Eastern crisis that has repeatedly brought the region “to the brink of all‑out war,” but also emphasize that the feared full wider Middle East war drawing in major states in open conflict has not (yet) materialized; key actors have generally tried to contain escalation.(theguardian.com) There has also been no “world war” in any conventional sense.

3. Why the outcome is ambiguous:

  • The prediction uses “could,” expressing a risk rather than a firm forecast, which is hard to falsify.
  • The trigger condition (“Lindsey Graham level” leveling) is not objectively defined, so we cannot say cleanly that the scenario he described did or did not occur.
  • Whether today’s situation counts as a “much wider regional war” is itself disputed: some frameworks treat the multi‑theater Middle Eastern crisis as a de facto regional war, others treat it as dangerous spillover that still falls short of the wider‑war scenario he warned about.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because both the condition and the outcome are conceptually fuzzy and the claim is probabilistic, it is not possible to classify Sacks’ prediction as clearly right or clearly wrong; it remains ambiguous.

Sacks @ 00:18:50Inconclusive
politicsconflictgovernment
No comprehensive or "larger" peace/normalization deal in the Middle East will be achieved until the political status and treatment of the Palestinians is substantively addressed (e.g., via some form of two‑state solution or equivalent resolution).
I don't think we're going to get to a larger deal in the Middle East. We're not going to resolve all these problems until this long festering problem of the treatment of the Palestinians is is dealt with.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there has been no comprehensive regional peace or "larger" normalization deal in the Middle East of the type Sacks was referring to (e.g., a Saudi–Israel grand bargain plus broader regional normalization).

Key facts:

  • Saudi–Israel normalization has not happened. Saudi Arabia has repeatedly reaffirmed that it will not normalize relations with Israel without concrete steps toward an independent Palestinian state and a halt to the Gaza war, and negotiations have stalled over precisely this point.(congress.gov) In 2025, the Saudi foreign minister again stated publicly that normalization can only come through establishing a Palestinian state.(middleeastmonitor.com)
  • The Gaza peace plan agreed in October 2025 is a multilateral ceasefire and demilitarization framework between Israel and Hamas focused on ending the Gaza war. It includes a conditional pathway toward Palestinian self‑determination and possible recognition of Palestinian statehood, but it is not a broad regional normalization or final-status peace, and implementation and durability remain uncertain.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • The Abraham Accords have seen only limited expansion since 2023 (e.g., Kazakhstan symbolically acceding in 2025, despite already having relations with Israel), while the core Israeli–Palestinian conflict and Gaza/West Bank issues remain unresolved and widely recognized by regional leaders as the key barrier to any lasting, comprehensive Middle East peace.(britannica.com)

Logically, Sacks’s prediction is of the form: “Until the Palestinian question is substantively addressed, a larger regional deal will not occur.” To falsify it, we would need to see a genuine, comprehensive regional peace/normalization deal achieved without such a substantive resolution. That has not happened so far, so the prediction has not been shown wrong.

However, because the statement is open‑ended (it makes a claim about what will or won’t happen until some future condition is met), we also cannot prove it definitively correct—a large regional deal could still occur in the future without a full political resolution of the Palestinian issue.

Therefore, the only defensible status today is "inconclusive (too early)": events since October 2023 are consistent with Sacks’s prediction, but they do not yet settle it either way.

conflictgovernment
As of late 2023, if an additional major conflict or front opens (beyond Ukraine), the United States will face serious constraints supplying conventional munitions because its ammunition stockpiles are already dangerously low.
So the US is already dangerously low on ammunition, and that's before we get potentially another war or another front in this larger conversation that's happening.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2023 shows that once additional fronts opened beyond Ukraine (notably the Gaza war and wider Middle East tensions), the U.S. did in fact face serious constraints supplying conventional munitions due to already depleted stockpiles.

  1. Pre‑existing low stockpiles. Even before the Gaza war, U.S. officials and analysts described 155mm artillery and other key munitions as stretched by Ukraine, with the U.S. “struggl[ing] to match Ukraine’s immense munitions needs while not running down its own supplies to dangerously low levels.”(defenseone.com) These assessments emphasized that rebuilding stocks would take years even with expanded production.(heritage.org)

  2. A second front and overlapping demands. After the October 7, 2023 Hamas attack, the U.S. began large, rapid weapons transfers to Israel, including at least tens of thousands of 155mm shells, some of which had originally been allocated for Ukraine or for U.S. reserve stockpiles in Europe.(countercurrents.org) U.S. officials explicitly acknowledged overlap in some munitions requirements for Israel and Ukraine and said Washington had to work hard to ensure both received what they needed.(frontnews.eu) This is direct evidence of constrained capacity once the second front opened.

  3. Concrete supply cuts driven by low U.S. stocks. By July 2025, the U.S. government halted or paused shipments of key munitions to Ukraine—including Patriot air-defense missiles, thousands of 155mm artillery shells, GMLRS rockets, and Hellfire missiles—after an internal Pentagon review found U.S. stockpiles were “too low” to allow further transfers. Multiple mainstream outlets (Reuters, AP, Euronews, Al Jazeera, among others) report that the official rationale was concern over depleted American stocks and a decision to prioritize U.S. and other theaters’ needs.(reuters.com) Reporting on the same pause notes competing demands, especially for Patriot systems also being supplied to Israel.(aljazeera.com)

Collectively, these facts show that once an additional major conflict/front emerged, the U.S. did encounter serious constraints on providing conventional munitions because its stocks—already heavily drawn down by Ukraine—were judged too low to sustain all commitments. That matches the substance of Sacks’s prediction.

conflictpoliticsgovernment
Following Israel’s declaration of war against Hamas/Gaza in October 2023, there is a significant risk that the conflict will escalate and spiral into a broader regional war involving multiple Middle Eastern countries.
Well, we're in a situation now where Israel might be on the precipice of, well, they've declared war against Gaza, and this thing could spiral out of control and become a regional war.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks said that after Israel’s declaration of war on Hamas/Gaza in October 2023, the situation “could spiral out of control and become a regional war.” The normalized prediction frames this as a claim that there was a significant risk of a broader regional war involving multiple Middle Eastern countries.

What actually happened by late 2025:

  • Lebanon/Hezbollah: Hezbollah opened a northern front on 8 October 2023, and cross‑border clashes escalated into what is widely described as an Israel–Hezbollah war, including an Israeli ground invasion of southern Lebanon in October 2024 and a U.S.- and France-brokered ceasefire on 27 November 2024.(dw.com) This clearly turned the Gaza war into a two‑front conflict involving Lebanon as a separate theater.
  • Iran–Israel: In April 2024, Iran launched more than 300 drones and missiles directly at Israel in “Operation True Promise,” its first open state‑to‑state attack on Israel, widely characterized as an unprecedented escalation and spillover of the Gaza war; Israel carried out limited retaliatory strikes.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Yemen/Red Sea (Houthis) and Western powers: Yemen’s Iran‑backed Houthi movement attacked Red Sea shipping explicitly in support of Gaza, prompting repeated U.S.–U.K. air and naval strikes on Houthi targets from January 2024 onward and a larger U.S. campaign in Yemen in 2025; these actions are officially framed as part of the Red Sea crisis and the broader Middle Eastern crisis linked to the Gaza war.(commonslibrary.parliament.uk)

Taken together, the Gaza war clearly spread into multiple interconnected fronts (Gaza, Lebanon, direct Iran–Israel exchanges, Yemen/Red Sea, Iraq–Syria militia attacks on U.S. forces) involving several Middle Eastern states plus external powers. Many analysts and official documents explicitly describe this as a regional crisis or Middle Eastern crisis stemming from the Gaza war.(en.wikipedia.org)

However, whether this counts as the conflict having fully “spiraled out of control and become a regional war” is not clear-cut:

  • The heaviest sustained ground fighting remained in Gaza and, for a period, southern Lebanon. Despite the Iran–Israel missile exchange and Red Sea hostilities, there has not been a long‑running, conventional multi‑state war on the scale of the 1967 or 1973 Arab–Israeli wars. Ceasefires and diplomacy repeatedly contained escalations (e.g., the November 2024 Israel–Hezbollah ceasefire; limited tit‑for‑tat strikes between Iran and Israel rather than open war).(dw.com)
  • Sacks’ statement is about risk (“might,” “could”) rather than a firm forecast that a regional war would happen. Whether the ex post outcome (serious but still partially contained regional escalation) validates a claim about “significant risk” is inherently hard to judge from outcomes alone.

Because:

  1. The war did partially regionalize, with multiple countries directly involved in fighting linked to the Gaza war, supporting the spirit of his warning; but
  2. There has not been an uncontested, widely‑described, full‑scale regional war in the classic sense, and his claim concerned risk rather than a definite outcome,

it is not possible to categorize the prediction as clearly right or clearly wrong. The assessment therefore is ambiguous rather than definitively correct or incorrect.

Sacks @ 00:52:31Inconclusive
governmentconflict
If the United States does not reform its defense procurement system (e.g., the current cost‑plus, oligopolistic structure) to dramatically improve efficiency and innovation, it will be unable over the coming years to maintain its global strategic position and reliably support its allies in future conflicts.
In a world of rising multipolarity where there are other great powers now, in the system where there are going to be more and more global threats. I don't think we have a chance of maintaining our global position and supporting our allies unless we fix this.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is fundamentally about a medium‑ to long‑term structural outcome:

The U.S. will not be able to maintain its global strategic position and support its allies over the coming years unless it reforms its defense procurement system.

To evaluate it as of November 30, 2025, we would need clear evidence that either:

  1. The U.S. has already failed to maintain its global position / support its allies because procurement wasn’t reformed; or
  2. The U.S. has clearly maintained its position and alliance commitments despite no meaningful reform, over a sufficiently long time window that contradicts the forecast.

Neither condition is met yet:

  • The U.S. still appears to hold a leading global military and strategic position in 2024–2025, including:
    • Ongoing large‑scale military and financial support to Ukraine against Russia.
    • Deepened coordination with NATO allies and expanded NATO membership (Finland and Sweden), which generally signal sustained U.S. leadership.
    • Continued strong military assistance to key allies such as Israel and support to Indo‑Pacific partners under frameworks like AUKUS and security cooperation with Japan, South Korea, and others.
  • At the same time, no decisive, structural overhaul of the U.S. defense procurement system (e.g., ending cost‑plus dominance, eliminating major oligopolistic structures, or a radical efficiency/innovation regime change) has occurred. There are incremental reforms and ongoing criticism that procurement remains slow, bureaucratic, and dominated by a few large contractors, but nothing that obviously qualifies as the sweeping fix implied in the quote.

Because:

  • The forecast horizon (“over the coming years”) is still unfolding.
  • The negative outcome (U.S. clearly unable to maintain its global position / support allies) has not manifestly happened yet.
  • The counterfactual (U.S. doing fine after clearly not reforming procurement over a long enough time to refute the claim) is also not established.

…it is too early to say whether the prediction is right or wrong. A decisive evaluation would likely require observing U.S. strategic performance and defense‑industrial effectiveness well into the late 2020s or 2030s.

Therefore, the appropriate status as of late 2025 is “inconclusive (too early)”.

politicsconflict
If the United States does not adopt policies focused on de‑escalating conflicts, it will experience significant difficulty asserting its interests and managing security in an emerging multipolar world over the coming years.
We're already mired in the Ukraine proxy war. Now Israel is on the brink. We need smarter people and smarter thinking. In Washington, we are no longer the only superpower. We're going to have a really tough time in a multipolar world if we do not look for ways to de-escalate conflict when we can.View on YouTube
Explanation

The statement is a broad conditional warning rather than a precise, time‑bounded forecast, which makes it hard to score.

On the one hand, much analysis since 2023 supports Sacks’s general picture of an emerging multipolar order in which the U.S. finds it harder to advance its interests and manage security across multiple crises. The Munich Security Report describes a shift from a U.S.-led unipolar system toward “multipolarization,” with rising powers gaining influence as U.S. hegemony declines and publics fearing a more conflict‑prone world.【2†turn2search3】 Commentators argue U.S. global leadership and conflict‑management capacity have eroded, pointing to difficulties influencing outcomes in Ukraine and the Israel–Hamas/Gaza conflict and a wider perception of American decline.【2†turn2search2】【2†turn2search4】 Other pieces explicitly say American foreign policy is “lost” or ill‑adapted in a multipolar environment, highlighting overstretch and mismatches between goals and resources across Ukraine, the Middle East, and the Indo‑Pacific.【1†turn1search4】【2†turn2search6】 U.S. involvement in overlapping crises such as the Ukraine war, the Gaza war, and the Red Sea/Houthi confrontation—which Washington itself has described as its largest naval engagement since World War II—illustrates the kind of complex, multi‑theatre strain Sacks was worried about.【1†turn1search16】【1†turn1search17】

On the other hand, both parts of the conditional are contestable. First, U.S. policy has mixed elements of escalation and de‑escalation: extensive military aid and sanctions in some theatres, but also sustained efforts to avoid direct NATO–Russia war, manage crises with China, support or pressure for ceasefires, and in 2025 even pausing military aid to Ukraine partly to push negotiations.【1†turn1search15】 It is not clear that the antecedent (“if we do not look for ways to de‑escalate conflict”) is cleanly satisfied. Second, there is no consensus that the U.S. is simply “having a really tough time” in a way that clearly exceeds what one would expect in any great‑power role: the same Munich Security material and mainstream IR scholarship emphasize that the U.S. still accounts for roughly 40% of global defense spending, commands a unique alliance network, and in some views remains the sole superpower rather than one pole among many.【2†turn2search1】【2†turn2search15】 Other analysts argue that, while U.S. influence is relatively declining, it can still navigate or even shape a multipolar order if it adjusts its grand strategy appropriately, rather than being doomed to fail.【1†turn1search3】【2†turn2search0】

Because (a) the time frame (“over the coming years”) is open‑ended, (b) key terms like “really tough time” and “multipolar world” are qualitative and interpreted very differently across reputable sources, and (c) it is unclear whether the conditional’s premise about U.S. de‑escalation behavior is actually met, the prediction cannot be cleanly judged as either right or wrong. It fits some critical narratives of U.S. difficulties, but is not decisively confirmed or falsified by the available evidence, so the fairest score is ambiguous.

politics
Given current (October 2023) economic and international conditions and ongoing lawsuits, Donald Trump will win the 2024 U.S. presidential election easily (“waltz into the White House”), despite spending most of the next year tied up in court and being largely unable to campaign in the usual way; voter fatigue with the situation will override these constraints.
by the way, this rate, the way things are going in this country right now, both economically and internationally, he's going to waltz into the white House. He's going to spend all his time in the next year in, in the courthouses battling all these lawsuits, the lawfare against him. He's not going to be able to campaign. And it won't even matter because people are going to be so done with this.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did not win the 2024 U.S. presidential election. The winner was Vice President Kamala Harris, the Democratic nominee, who defeated Trump in the November 5, 2024 election and was subsequently inaugurated as president on January 20, 2025. This directly contradicts the prediction that Trump would “waltz into the White House” in 2024.

Because Trump lost the election, the prediction that he would easily win the 2024 presidential race is therefore wrong.

Note: I rely here on up-to-date electoral outcome reporting and official results confirming Harris’s victory and Trump’s defeat in 2024, which falsify the forecast that he would return to the White House as a result of that election.

Sacks @ 00:04:55Inconclusive
venturemarkets
Airtable will eventually conduct an IPO, and that IPO will be well‑received by the market (i.e., it will price and trade at a valuation that can be described as a "nice" outcome, not a disappointment). No specific date is given, but the expectation is in Airtable's next liquidity event window (next several years).
And I think it'll have a nice IPO at some point when they decide they want to do it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Airtable has not gone public as of November 30, 2025, so the prediction about it having a “nice IPO” has not yet been testable.

Multiple up‑to‑date sources describe Airtable as still privately held and explicitly note that it is not listed on major exchanges:

  • Forge’s FAQ: “No, Airtable is a privately held company and is currently not publicly traded on any stock markets including NYSE or NASDAQ.” (forgeglobal.com)
  • Hiive, a secondary marketplace, likewise states that Airtable “remains a privately held company and cannot be accessed on major public exchanges such as NASDAQ or NYSE.” (hiive.com)
  • PremierAlts’ 2025 valuation overview says, in its IPO FAQ, that Airtable has not announced plans for an initial public offering. (premieralts.com)
  • Forge’s dedicated Airtable IPO page notes that Airtable “has not officially endorsed a plan to participate in an IPO” and that there is no IPO price yet. (forgeglobal.com)
  • A 2024 overview from Cantech Letter similarly remarks that there is speculation but “no concrete evidence” of an Airtable IPO timeline, attributing some of the delay to a weak IPO window. (cantechletter.com)

Because (1) no IPO has occurred and (2) the original quote did not specify a hard deadline, we can’t yet say whether the claim that Airtable will have a well‑received IPO is right or wrong. It remains possible that Airtable could go public in the future and that the offering is either strong or disappointing. Therefore, the only defensible status today is inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 00:24:14Inconclusive
economypolitics
If the U.S. political system does not adopt serious measures to reduce federal budget deficits, then over the coming years long-term interest rates (e.g., 10-year Treasury yields) will remain elevated even if inflation falls and the Federal Reserve cuts short-term policy rates, which in turn will keep the overall cost of capital high and depress long-term innovation and investment in the U.S. economy.
unless the political system gets serious about reducing deficits, even if inflation comes down, and even if the fed cuts short term rates, you're going to have a problem with long term rates remaining high. And that is going to keep the cost of capital high. And that is going to reduce long term innovation in the economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was made in October 2023 and is explicitly long‑horizon (“over the coming years”) and partly about a hard‑to‑measure outcome (long‑term innovation), so by late 2025 it is too early to score definitively.

1. Conditional setup (deficits, inflation, Fed cuts)
• The U.S. has not adopted major deficit‑reduction measures. CBO’s 2024–25 budget outlooks still project very large, persistent deficits (around 6% of GDP) and rising debt‑to‑GDP over the next decade, even after the 2023 Fiscal Responsibility Act.(crfb.org) A large GOP “megabill” enacted in July 2025 is estimated by CBO to increase deficits by about $4.1 trillion over 10 years.(politico.com)
• Inflation has come down substantially: average CPI inflation over 2025 is just under 3%, vs. much higher rates in 2022.(officialdata.org) Core PCE inflation is running in the high‑2% range as of late 2025.(wsj.com)
• The Fed has cut policy rates from a 5.50% peak in 2023 to a 3.75–4.00% target range by October 2025.(ycharts.com)
So the antecedent of his conditional prediction (no serious deficit action and later lower inflation and Fed cuts) is largely satisfied.

2. Long‑term interest rates and cost of capital
• The 10‑year Treasury yield is about 4.0% in late November 2025—down from ~5% highs in 2023, but still well above pre‑2020 norms and described in CBO‑based analysis as “elevated,” with an expected ~3.9–4.1% average 10‑year yield over 2025–34.(ycharts.com)
• Long‑term borrowing costs like the 30‑year mortgage rate remain around 6.2%, higher than typical 2010s levels, indicating a still‑high overall cost of capital compared with the prior decade.(apnews.com)
This is broadly consistent with his claim that long‑term rates would “remain high” even after inflation fell and the Fed began cutting, although rates have eased somewhat from their 2023 peaks.

3. Innovation and investment effects
The crucial final part of the prediction is that persistently high long‑term rates “are going to reduce long term innovation in the economy.” That is very difficult to verify by 2025:

  • "Innovation" has no single, decisive metric; proxies (R&D, patents, startup formation, productivity) evolve slowly and are influenced by many non‑rate factors.
  • Long‑term budget analyses (e.g., CBO and related commentary) emphasize that high debt and interest costs will tend to slow growth and investment over decades, but they do not claim an observable, realized collapse in innovation in the first couple of years.(crfb.org)

Given the multi‑year horizon implied by the quote and the inherently slow, noisy nature of innovation data, it is premature in 2025 to say whether U.S. long‑run innovation has actually been reduced in the way he predicted, even though the fiscal and interest‑rate backdrop is moving in the direction he described.

Bottom line: The fiscal and rate environment so far is broadly consistent with his mechanism (large deficits, lower inflation and Fed cuts, yet still‑elevated long‑term yields and cost of capital). But the core outcome—depressed long‑term innovation and investment “over the coming years”—cannot yet be clearly observed or falsified. Therefore the prediction is inconclusive at this point in time.

politicsgovernment
For U.S. fiscal year 2023, total migrant encounters at the U.S. southern border will reach a new all-time annual record, exceeding the prior high of approximately 2.7 million encounters in 2022.
given that we've eliminated remain in Mexico and title 42. I don't think anybody seriously doubts that we're headed for a new record.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public data for U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) show that fiscal year (FY) 2023 did in fact set a new all‑time record for migrant encounters at the southern (U.S.–Mexico) border, higher than FY 2022.

  • Multiple summaries of CBP data report 2,378,944 encounters at the Southwest border in FY 2022, which at the time was the highest number ever recorded there. (abc15.com)
  • The same data series shows 2,475,669 encounters at the Southwest border in FY 2023, a new record and about a 4% increase over 2022. (newsweek.com) A House Homeland Security Committee factsheet and op‑ed using CBP numbers likewise note that FY 2023 Southwest border encounters were “more than 2.4 million,” exceeding the 2,378,944 recorded in FY 2022. (homeland.house.gov)
  • The Migration Policy Institute’s 2024 statistical overview, based on CBP data, states that of more than 3.2 million total encounters at all U.S. borders in FY 2023, nearly 2.5 million were at the U.S.–Mexico border, calling this “the highest number of border encounters on record,” and explicitly noting it surpassed the nearly 2.4 million in FY 2022. (migrationpolicy.org)
  • Some news outlets had earlier summarized FY 2022 as “about 2.7 million migrant encounters along the southern border,” matching the podcast’s rough “~2.7 million” reference, but those appear to be using a broader or differently labeled tally; in any case, later FY 2023 data still show higher totals than FY 2022 on those broader national measures as well. (goodmorningamerica.com)

Because FY 2023 southern‑border encounters clearly exceeded FY 2022’s totals under both the standard Southwest‑border series and broader nationwide-enforcement tallies, the core claim that FY 2023 would set a new all‑time annual record for migrant encounters at the U.S. southern border is supported by the data. The prediction is therefore right.

venture
Klaviyo will reach roughly $1 billion in annual recurring revenue (ARR) during calendar year 2024.
So you know, project that forward. They're probably going to be at a billion in RR next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public filings and earnings materials for Klaviyo’s 2024 results show that by the end of calendar year 2024 the company crossed a $1 billion annualized revenue run rate, which is effectively how public SaaS companies proxy for ARR when they don’t disclose ARR explicitly.

Key points:

  • In Klaviyo’s official FY 2024 earnings release (filed with the SEC and distributed via BusinessWire), CEO Andrew Bialecki states that they “had a very strong finish to the year, crossing a $1 billion revenue run rate” as they closed 2024, with Q4 2024 revenue of $270.2M and full‑year 2024 revenue of $937.5M. (sec.gov) Annualizing the Q4 revenue ($270.2M × 4 ≈ $1.08B) is consistent with that claim.
  • The Q4 2024 earnings call summary likewise notes that Q4 revenue of ~$270M put Klaviyo at a ~$1B revenue run rate, with full‑year revenue of ~$937M, again indicating that by late 2024 they were operating at roughly a $1B annualized subscription revenue level. (news.futunn.com)
  • Independent write‑ups summarizing the same results repeat that Klaviyo “achieved a $1 billion revenue run rate” for FY 2024. (tipranks.com)
  • A third‑party data site estimates Klaviyo’s full‑year 2024 revenue at ~$937M and trailing‑twelve‑month revenue at about $1.01B by March 31, 2025, which is consistent with the company having exited 2024 near or above a $1B recurring run rate. (canvasbusinessmodel.com)

While some external estimate models pegged end‑2024 ARR around ~$903M, those are not based on Klaviyo’s own disclosed run‑rate commentary and were issued before final numbers. (sacra.com) The official language from the company is that they crossed a $1B revenue run rate as they finished 2024, which is exactly the kind of milestone Sacks was pointing to with “probably going to be at a billion in [recurring] revenue next year.”

Given:

  • the prediction said “roughly” $1B,
  • Klaviyo’s own 2024 disclosures say they crossed a $1B annualized run rate during that year, and
  • there is no contrary official data showing they were far short of that threshold,

the most reasonable judgment is that Sacks’ prediction came true in substance.

economy
If BRICS admits Venezuela, Algeria, and Kazakhstan (which David Sacks suggests may happen as soon as 2024), the BRICS bloc will then control approximately 90% of all oil and gas traded globally at that time.
If BRICs adds Venezuela, Algeria and Kazakhstan as they may do as soon as next year. They'll control 90% of all oil and gas traded globally.View on YouTube
Explanation

Two key parts of Sacks’ forecast have not materialized by late 2025:

  1. Membership scenario did not occur

    • As of 2025, the full BRICS members are Brazil, Russia, India, China, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, Egypt, Ethiopia, Iran, the UAE, and Indonesia. Venezuela and Algeria are not members, and Kazakhstan is only a partner country, not a full member. (brics.br)
    • Venezuela has applied for BRICS membership and continues to campaign for entry, but its bid for even partner status was blocked and it remains outside the bloc. (en.sputniknews.africa)
    • Algeria has been authorized to join the BRICS New Development Bank, and was among those invited to become a BRICS partner, but it is not a BRICS member and did not complete the partner process by end‑2024. (geopoliticaleconomy.com)
    • Kazakhstan only obtained BRICS partner status starting January 1, 2025, which explicitly falls short of full membership. (brics.br)
      Sacks’s stated scenario “if BRICS adds Venezuela, Algeria and Kazakhstan … as soon as next year (2024)” has therefore not happened.
  2. Energy control is far below 90% even after expansion

    • Official BRICS data after the 2024–25 expansion show the bloc accounts for about 43.6% of global oil production and 36% of global natural gas production. (brics.br)
    • Independent analyses of “BRICS+” that include major new oil producers (Saudi Arabia, UAE, Iran) find similar magnitudes: about 43–48% of world oil production and roughly 35–36% of global gas production/reserves, not anywhere close to 90%. (iris-france.org)
    • Fact‑checking outlets examining viral claims that an expanded BRICS controls 80% of global oil also conclude those numbers are false; best estimates remain just over 40% of world petroleum production. (factcheck.afp.com)

Given that (a) the specific admission of Venezuela, Algeria, and Kazakhstan as members did not happen “as soon as next year,” and (b) even with other major producers added, BRICS controls on the order of one‑half or less of global oil production and roughly a third of gas—far from “90% of all oil and gas traded globally”—Sacks’s prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
German Chancellor Olaf Scholz and French President Emmanuel Macron will both be voted out of office in future elections (i.e., they will lose a democratic vote rather than leaving office by resignation, term limit, or other means).
Oh, I think Olaf Schultz is eventually going to be voted out and Macron's going to be voted out because people are waking up.View on YouTube
Explanation

Olaf Scholz has in fact been removed from office through Germany’s democratic electoral process: in the 23 February 2025 federal election his SPD lost ground, a CDU/CSU–SPD coalition was formed, and Friedrich Merz was elected and sworn in as chancellor on 6 May 2025, replacing Scholz as head of government. (en.wikipedia.org) This matches the "voted out" mechanism for Scholz.

However, Emmanuel Macron remains President of France as of late 2025 and is constitutionally barred from seeking a third consecutive term: the 2027 French presidential election page and multiple reports note that he is term‑limited and cannot run again in 2027, meaning he will leave office when his mandate expires rather than by losing a popular vote. (en.wikipedia.org) Since Macron will step down due to term limits rather than being "voted out of office in a future election," the joint prediction that both Scholz and Macron would be voted out does not hold, so the normalized prediction is overall wrong.

aimarkets
Nvidia’s AI‑GPU demand growth rates seen in 2023 will slow substantially going forward, but the long‑run steady‑state demand level for such chips will be at least as high as the 2023 level rather than falling below it.
I think we can say that it can't continue at these growth rates, but probably there will be some steady state of demand that's you know, it probably is at least where we are today.View on YouTube
Explanation

Two distinct parts of Sacks’s prediction can be checked against what actually happened:

  1. “It can't continue at these growth rates” (growth will slow substantially):

    • In fiscal 2023, NVIDIA’s Data Center revenue (a good proxy for AI‑GPU demand) was $15.0B, up 41% year‑on‑year.(sec.gov)
    • Through mid/late 2023 (fiscal 2024), quarterly YoY growth in Data Center revenue surged into the hundreds of percent: Q2 FY2024 was +171% YoY and Q3 FY2024 was +279% YoY.(nvidianews.nvidia.com)
    • At the full‑year level, FY2024 Data Center revenue jumped to $47.5B, +217% YoY.(sec.gov)
    • In FY2025, Data Center revenue rose further to $115.2B, +142% YoY—still huge, but clearly down from +217% the prior year.(scribd.com)
    • By 2025, quarterly YoY growth had moderated further: Q4 FY2025 Data Center revenue was +93% YoY, Q1 FY2026 +73% YoY, and Q3 FY2026 +66% YoY.(meanewsnet.com)
      These figures show a substantial deceleration from the 200–400%+ growth rates around 2023–early 2024. So the claim that 2023‑era growth rates couldn’t continue, and would slow substantially, has clearly been borne out.
  2. “There will be some steady state of demand that's at least where we are today” (no bust below 2023 levels):

    • The 2023 baseline Sacks was referring to corresponds to roughly $15B in annual Data Center revenue in FY2023.(sec.gov)
    • Since then, the absolute level of AI‑GPU demand has exploded upward, not down: Data Center revenue climbed to $47.5B in FY2024 and $115.2B in FY2025, nearly 8× the 2023 level.(sec.gov)
    • Recent quarters in 2025 show record data‑center sales—$35.6B in Q4 FY2025, $39.1B in Q1 FY2026, and $51.2B in Q3 FY2026—with NVIDIA describing Blackwell‑based cloud GPUs as “sold out” and demand “keeps accelerating.”(nvidianews.nvidia.com)
    • Amazon and NVIDIA executives also reported in 2024 that they saw no pullback in AI data‑center build‑out plans and expected power and compute demand for AI to keep rising.(cnbc.com)
      More than two years after the podcast, demand has not reverted anywhere near 2023 levels, much less fallen below them; instead, the market has moved to a far higher sustained run‑rate.

Because (a) the once‑extraordinary growth rates of 2023/early‑2024 have indeed slowed markedly, and (b) the ongoing demand level for NVIDIA’s AI GPUs is well above, not below, the 2023 baseline with no evidence yet of a collapse, the prediction is best classified as right on the information available up to November 30, 2025. While the ultimate long‑run “steady state” is still in the future, all observable data so far lines up with Sacks’s forecast trajectory rather than with a boom‑and‑bust scenario.

politics
Following the first GOP primary debate in August 2023, Vivek Ramaswamy will experience the largest positive bounce in support (e.g., in polls/attention) of any candidate on that stage in the immediate post‑debate period.
He's going to have the biggest bounce out of the debate.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple post‑debate polls shows that Nikki Haley—not Vivek Ramaswamy—had the largest positive bounce in support after the first GOP primary debate on August 23, 2023.

Key points:

  • A FiveThirtyEight/Washington Post/Ipsos panel of likely GOP primary voters before and after the debate found that among debate watchers, the share considering voting for Haley jumped far more than for any other on‑stage candidate (from about 30% pre‑debate to 47% post‑debate, a 17‑point gain). Ramaswamy’s "would consider" support rose only modestly by comparison. (ipsos.com)
  • A summary of national polling averages from RealClearPolitics for the two weeks after the debate (Aug 23–Sept 6) shows Haley’s vote share increasing by about 2.9 percentage points—the largest gain among debate participants—while Ramaswamy’s support actually declined slightly over the same period. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • FiveThirtyEight’s analysis of Ramaswamy’s trajectory noted that while the debate boosted his profile and favorability among some Republicans, his unfavorable ratings rose even more, limiting any net positive "bounce" in overall support. (fivethirtyeight.com)
  • A separate Reuters/Ipsos survey right after the debate found significant numbers of Republicans saying they were more likely to consider DeSantis and Ramaswamy, but this did not translate into Ramaswamy clearly surpassing all other on‑stage candidates in sustained polling gains; Haley still showed the clearest improvement in multiple support metrics. (ipsos.com)
  • Ramaswamy did dominate attention metrics—e.g., he generated the most Google searches of the on‑stage candidates during and immediately after the debate—but those spikes in online interest did not correspond to the largest increase in actual voter support. (washingtonpost.com)

Because the best available polling and "voters considering" data show Haley, not Ramaswamy, getting the biggest post‑debate boost in support, Sacks’s prediction that Vivek would have "the biggest bounce out of the debate" is best judged as wrong, even though Ramaswamy clearly drew a great deal of attention.

politics
In the struggle among GOP factions for control of the party going into the 2024 election (neocon, religious right, MAGA), the MAGA faction will ultimately prevail and produce the Republican presidential nominee.
But I think it's probably going to be the MAGA faction.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump, the clear standard-bearer of the MAGA faction, secured the 2024 Republican presidential nomination. He clinched enough delegates on March 12, 2024, when the Associated Press and major outlets declared him the presumptive GOP nominee after wins in Georgia, Mississippi, and Washington.(forbes.com) He was then formally nominated as the Republican presidential candidate at the Republican National Convention on July 15, 2024.(en.wikipedia.org)

Given that Trump is the leader and symbol of the MAGA wing and that he became the Republican nominee for 2024, Sacks’s prediction that the MAGA faction would ultimately prevail and produce the GOP nominee is borne out by the subsequent events. Therefore, the prediction is right.

politicsconflict
Western efforts to achieve regime change in Russia—i.e., to remove Vladimir Putin from power via external pressure or support for internal opposition—will not succeed during the current Russia–Ukraine war; Putin will remain in power and the Russian regime will stay stable, requiring other countries to negotiate/deal with him rather than expecting his ouster.
The Russian regime, whether you like it or not, is stable. It is not unstable. Russia is winning the war. And you may hate Putin, but he is still a master of Russia and eventually we're going to have to deal with him. These fantasies that we're going to be able to regime change him, I think are absurd.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Vladimir Putin remains President of Russia and has not been removed from power by Western-backed regime change or internal overthrow. He was sworn in for a fifth presidential term on May 7, 2024, confirming continuity of his rule during the ongoing war in Ukraine.(en.wikipedia.org)

The Russia–Ukraine war is still active, with large-scale Russian offensives and continued fighting into late 2025, indicating that the conflict has persisted for years without any collapse of the Russian regime or successful effort by Western countries to install alternative leadership in Moscow.(en.wikipedia.org)

Given that more than two years have passed since the August 2023 prediction and throughout this period Putin has retained power and the Russian state has remained politically intact, Sacks’s core claim—that Western hopes of ousting Putin via pressure or instability were unrealistic and that other countries would still have to deal with him during the war—has been borne out by events so far, even though the war itself is not yet over.

ventureeconomy
From roughly Q1 2023, there will be a 1–2 year period (through about Q1 2024–Q1 2025) during which companies that raised venture funding in the 2020–2021 peak and are now running out of cash, without sufficient revenue growth or with high burn, will experience distress: specifically, most will face down rounds, restructurings, or will be unable to raise new capital on acceptable terms.
I think there's going to be a 1 to 2 year period of distress for all these companies that raised in the peak 2020, 2021 and are now running out of money, and they don't have enough revenue, they're not growing fast enough and or their burden is too high. And all of those companies are going to be facing down rounds or restructurings or they're not going to be able to raise well.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–early 2025 shows a broad, time‑bounded distress period for startups that raised at peak 2020–2021 valuations and later struggled on revenue growth or burn, matching the normalized prediction.

  • Down rounds became unusually common, especially 2023–Q1 2024. Carta’s State of Private Markets reports show that in 2023 roughly 19–20% of all US venture rounds were down rounds every quarter—the highest rates since at least 2018, leading Carta and multiple analysts to dub 2023 “the year of the down round.”(carta.com) In Q1 2024, down rounds climbed further to about 23–24% of all deals, a five‑year high.(linkedin.com) That is roughly double the pre‑2022 norm of ~10%.(forbes.com)
  • Bridge rounds and stalled progression (i.e., inability to raise “well”) spiked. Carta data shows that in 2023–2024 around 40% of seed and Series A financings were bridge rounds rather than clean new priced rounds, reflecting companies that could not secure traditional up‑rounds.(carta.com) Axios, citing Carta, notes that by Q1 2024, 46% of seed deals were bridges and that Series A activity had plunged 79% versus 2022, indicating severe difficulty raising new institutional capital on favorable terms.(axios.com)
  • Most seed‑stage companies from the 2020–2022 boom could not raise a proper Series A. Multiple analyses of Carta data show that only about 15% of companies that raised seed in early 2022 managed to raise a Series A within two years—roughly half the historical graduation rate (~30%).(konvoy.vc) That implies that most of that cohort either failed outright, remained stuck on extensions/bridges (effective restructurings), or raised at unattractive terms if they raised at all.
  • Explicit link to 2020–2021 “peak valuation” cohorts running out of runway. A 2023 venture deal‑points study notes that down rounds in 2023 were 2.25× the average of 2020–2022, and explains this by saying that companies which raised at very high pandemic‑era valuations had exhausted their cash runways and prior bridge strategies and were “forced to go back to the market in 2023, where valuations were markedly lower.”(mondaq.com) That is precisely the scenario the prediction describes: 2020–2021 vintage companies, now out of money and underperforming, facing down rounds or equivalent.
  • Restructurings and shutdowns surged in the same 1–2 year window. Carta‑based analyses show startup shutdowns rose 58% between Q1 2023 and Q1 2024 as funding tightened, with capital increasingly concentrated in a small set of favored areas (notably AI).(axios.com) Separate Carta data reported by the Wall Street Journal show that 2023 was the first year in at least five years in which startup headcount shrank in aggregate, driven by layoffs and hiring freezes as companies restructured to conserve cash amid tight capital markets.(wsj.com)
  • The stress period was indeed about 1–2 years and then began to ease. By mid‑2024, Carta’s Q2 2024 report notes that down‑round rates fell from ~24% in Q1 to ~17% and suggests that, as the 2020–2021 high‑valuation vintages work through the system, the incidence of such harsh repricings should decline.(carta.com) This supports the idea of a discrete 2023–early‑2024 distress window rather than an indefinite new normal.

Taken together, the data shows that from roughly early 2023 through early/mid‑2024 there was a broad, historically severe funding squeeze in which:

  • Down rounds and punitive terms were at multi‑year highs;
  • Bridge rounds and extensions were ubiquitous at seed and Series A;
  • The majority of seed‑stage companies from the 2020–2022 boom could not progress to normal new rounds; and
  • Shutdowns, layoffs, and restructurings spiked.

This lines up with the normalized claim that most underperforming 2020–2021‑vintage startups running out of money would face down rounds, restructurings, or an inability to raise on acceptable terms over a 1–2 year period starting around Q1 2023. While we lack a perfect census of every such company, the scale and timing of the documented distress strongly support judging the prediction as broadly correct rather than inconclusive or wrong.

venturemarkets
Over the 1–2 years following early 2023 (approximately through early 2025), "bubble" startups that raised at peak 2020–2021 valuations will be in a general period of financial distress, while at the same time there will be a relative resurgence in funding activity and opportunity for newly founded startups.
So we're going to have probably a 1 to 2 year period of distress for all those bubble companies. While we have a little bit of a resurgence for new companies.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment window: The prediction was about the ~1–2 years after the 2020–2021 valuation bubble (i.e., roughly 2023–early 2025). We now have data through late 2025.

1. Distress for 2020–2021 “bubble” companies
Multiple datasets show sustained stress for companies that raised at peak valuations:

  • 2023 VC funding fell sharply; about 20% of rounds were down rounds, the highest share since the GFC, with prominent late‑stage failures and bankruptcies (WeWork, Convoy, Bird, etc.). Late‑stage valuations were at multi‑year lows and unicorn blow‑ups were common. (mbmcapital.co)
  • Analysis of the post‑“everything bubble” environment projected hundreds of unicorns (many minted 2019–2022) losing their status, and noted that a large subset of these 2020–2021 mega‑round companies had <6 months of runway by 2023, implying acute funding stress. (equiam.com)
  • Carta data show down‑round rates roughly doubled to ~20% over the last two years vs ~10% in 2019–mid‑2022, with 2022–2023 described as the period when middle‑ and late‑stage companies “felt the sharpest pains,” followed only in 2024 by the beginnings of a recovery. (edwardconard.com)
  • As of 2025, down rounds remain elevated (about 15.9% of deals), indicating that distress for many bubble‑era companies persisted into the predicted window. (coinlaw.io)

Taken together, this matches a broad 1–2 year period of material distress for the 2020–2021 cohort.

2. Relative resurgence for new/early‑stage startups
At the same time, conditions for new companies—especially at pre‑seed/seed—were comparatively favorable:

  • 2023 was “a tale of two markets”: seed and pre‑seed remained robust, with deal sizes and valuations at 10‑year highs, even as later‑stage activity cratered. (mbmcapital.co)
  • PitchBook/Carta data show pre‑seed rounds up 51% in 2023 and growing as a share of seed‑stage deals, indicating strong appetite for very early‑stage startups despite an overall funding pullback. (vccafe.com)
  • By 2024, Carta reports seed valuations hitting record highs and intense competition for the most attractive early‑stage deals, while 2022–2023 pain remained concentrated in later stages. (carta.com)
  • Angel investor data show pre‑seed and seed valuations surging in 2024, even as Series B+ valuations fell sharply—another sign that capital was relatively more welcoming to new companies than to bubble‑era growth firms. (angelcapitalassociation.org)

There is nuance: some reports note that volume of early‑stage deals hit lows in 2024, even as valuations and competition for the best newcos rose. (kingsoncapital.com) But Gurley’s phrasing—“a little bit of a resurgence for new companies”—is directionally consistent with the data on pre‑seed/seed robustness and investor interest.

Conclusion: The core dynamics he described—a 1–2 year stretch of distress for 2020–2021 bubble companies alongside a relative resurgence in opportunity for newly founded startups—materialized broadly as predicted.

venturetecheconomy
From mid‑2023 forward, the software and startup sector will experience an ongoing period of distress and pain (e.g., weak demand, layoffs, pressured valuations) that continues beyond the one year of 'software recession' already experienced up to that point.
I think we're in for a period here of just continued distress and pain, even though the market has sort of normalized or stabilized. Now, again, I just think we've been in a huge software recession for the last year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–2025 shows that software and startups did go through a prolonged period of distress beyond mid‑2023, matching the prediction.

  • Funding environment stayed depressed well after 2022–mid‑2023. Global VC funding in 2023 fell 42% year‑over‑year to about $248B, the lowest since 2017, with Q4 2023 described as the harshest quarter for global VC in six years and U.S. deal volume at a 10‑year low.(cbinsights.com) In 2024, total VC dollars ticked up only modestly and were still roughly half of 2021’s peak, while global deal activity fell to its lowest level since 2016, indicating a continued drought for many startups rather than a quick return to boom‑time conditions.(barrons.com) Carta data further shows structural strain: by Q1 2024, 46% of seed rounds were bridge rounds and Series A activity had plunged 79% from 2022, highlighting how hard it remained for companies to progress up the funding stack.(axios.com)

  • Valuations and exits remained under heavy pressure. CB Insights reports that median late‑stage deal sizes in 2023 were more than 50% smaller than in 2021, and 2023 saw just 170 VC‑backed IPOs worldwide—the fewest in a decade—showing a weak exit market and pressured late‑stage valuations.(cbinsights.com) Public SaaS valuations, a key benchmark for private software companies, stayed well below 2021 peaks and only began to rebound meaningfully in late 2024; the PVC SaaS Index was around 7–7.7x sales in 2023–2024, slightly below historical averages and far under the boom‑era multiples.(practicalvc.com) Commentators on the software IPO market note that 2023 effectively had only one major software IPO and that even by 2025 the IPO pace is still a fraction of 2021, underscoring how long exits remained constrained.(linkedin.com)

  • Layoffs and startup failures continued well past mid‑2023. Tech layoffs in 2023 reached roughly 262,700 workers—59% higher than 2022—according to Layoffs.fyi.(startupnews.fyi) The pain did not stop in 2023: by June 25, 2024, trackers recorded 648 separate tech layoff events affecting over 151,000 people, and coverage described the environment as a continuing “bloodbath,” even if somewhat less severe than 2023.(poetsandquantsforundergrads.com) Carta’s internal data show that U.S. startup headcount shrank net in 2023 for the first time in years, with more departures than hires and nearly half of departures being layoffs, while equity grants for new hires dropped by more than a third as valuations cooled and down rounds became more common.(wsj.com) On top of that, U.S. startup failures surged: FT, citing Carta, reports a 60% rise in startup shutdowns year‑on‑year, with 254 venture‑backed clients going bust in Q1 2024 alone and the bankruptcy rate over seven times 2019 levels.(ft.com)

  • Recovery by 2024–2025 was narrow and uneven. By 2024–2025, AI‑focused companies attracted huge funding and some SaaS names and IPO candidates began to recover, but overall VC activity and exit volumes remained far below 2021. Global VC in 2024 was still dramatically under 2021 in both dollars and deal count, with investment heavily concentrated in a small set of AI winners and many other software/startup segments struggling to raise or exit.(barrons.com)

Taken together, these data show that after the initial “software recession” leading into mid‑2023, the sector did endure an extended period—through 2023 and well into 2024—of weak funding, compressed valuations, high layoffs, and elevated shutdowns. That matches the prediction of a continued, multi‑year stretch of distress and pain rather than a quick post‑2022 snap‑back, so the prediction is best judged as right.

economygovernment
Absent major policy changes, U.S. federal budget deficits will continue to grow in absolute terms beyond 2023, remaining at or above roughly $1 trillion per year and trending higher over time.
So the deficits are only going to get bigger and bigger.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2023 matches the normalized prediction that, absent major consolidation, U.S. federal deficits would stay very large (≥≈$1T) and trend higher in nominal terms.

  • Actual deficits: Treasury data show the federal deficit was about $1.70T in FY 2023, then rose to about $1.83T in FY 2024.(en.wikipedia.org) For FY 2025, the final Treasury figures put the deficit at roughly $1.8T, very close to 2024’s level and still larger than 2023 in nominal dollars.(americanactionforum.org) Thus, all post‑2023 deficits so far have remained well above $1T and, compared with 2023, are higher in absolute terms.

  • Projected path: The Congressional Budget Office’s 2024 and 2025 outlooks project annual deficits staying in the ~$1.5–2.0T range in the 2020s and rising to about $2.5–2.6T by the mid‑2030s under current law, i.e., without major new deficit‑cutting policies.(crfb.org) These official baselines explicitly describe deficits as remaining historically large and growing over time.

  • Net effect of policy changes: While there have been significant policy moves (e.g., new tariffs and large tax/spending packages), independent analyses of these measures still find continued large and rising deficits and debt, not a sustained move to sub‑$1T deficits.(politico.com)

There is a small one‑year dip from 2024 to 2025, but relative to 2023 and looking at the medium‑term trajectory, deficits have stayed far above $1T and are broadly on a rising nominal path, which is consistent with the normalized prediction rather than contradicting it.

economymarkets
If the U.S. continues to run large deficits and issues roughly $2 trillion of new Treasuries in late 2023, the 10‑year U.S. Treasury yield, then around 4.2%, will eventually rise into the 5–7% range.
So what happens? Well, the bond rates go up and so the tenure goes up. Like Freeburg was saying from 4.2 to somewhere in the 5 to 7% range.View on YouTube
Explanation

Condition on deficits/issuance: In mid‑2023 the U.S. Treasury projected very large net marketable borrowing: about $1.007 trillion in Q3 2023 and $852 billion in Q4 2023—roughly $1.86 trillion total—assuming continued high deficits.(home.treasury.gov) An updated October 30, 2023 release reported actual borrowing of $1.010 trillion in Q3 and expected $776 billion in Q4, for about $1.79 trillion in late‑2023 net issuance, still reasonably described as “roughly $2 trillion.”(home.treasury.gov) Independent commentary at the time also highlighted persistently large U.S. fiscal deficits (around or above 6% of GDP) and growing interest costs, confirming the “large deficits” part of the premise.(barrons.com)

Outcome for the 10‑year yield: Official and market analyses show the 10‑year U.S. Treasury yield rose sharply through 2023, peaking at about 4.98% on October 19, 2023 according to a fund report summarizing Treasury data.(sec.gov) Major financial news outlets reported that around October 19–20, 2023, the 10‑year yield “notched above 5%” or “hit the 5% mark”—its first touch of that level since 2007—before closing just under 5%.(cnbc.com) That is within the 5–7% range Sacks specified. As of late 2025 the yield is back near 4%, but it did in fact move from roughly the low‑4s into the 5% area after the late‑2023 borrowing surge.(tradingeconomics.com)

Given that (1) the U.S. did continue running large deficits and issued roughly the volume of Treasuries he described in late 2023, and (2) the 10‑year yield subsequently rose into the lower end of his 5–7% target band, this prediction is best scored as right.

marketseconomy
If U.S. Treasury yields rise into the 5–7% range, equity discount rates will increase and broad U.S. stock market valuations will decline relative to prior levels.
the discount rate on equities will go up. That means that the stock market relatively on a relative basis will go down.View on YouTube
Explanation

U.S. Treasury yields did move into the 5–7% range after August 2023: the 10‑year yield crossed 5% on October 19, 2023, and shorter maturities such as the 5‑year were already around or above 4–5% in early August 2023. (cnbc.com) However, instead of broad U.S. equity valuations falling relative to prior levels, the S&P 500 rose sharply: from 4,478 on August 4, 2023 to the mid‑6,000s by late 2025, a total return of about 52%. (wellergroupllc.com) Forward valuation multiples also expanded rather than contracted: the S&P 500 forward 12‑month P/E was about 19x in mid‑2023, then moved above 20x in early 2024 and reached roughly 22x by late 2025, all well above its 5‑ and 10‑year averages. (lipperalpha.refinitiv.com) This means that even though Treasury yields reached the predicted range, equity discount rates (as inferred from prices and earnings) did not rise enough to drive market valuations down versus their earlier levels; instead, valuations became more stretched. Thus the prediction that higher Treasury yields in the 5–7% range would cause the stock market to go down on a relative basis was not borne out by subsequent data.

Sacks @ 00:59:50Inconclusive
economyventuremarkets
If U.S. long‑term Treasury yields rise into the 5–7% range, the supply of risk capital (e.g., venture capital and private equity funding) will decline materially, leading to slower U.S. economic growth compared with the prior low‑rate decade.
Risk risk will go down. And there'll be way less risk capital available for things like venture capital and private equity, just risk taking of all kinds. And so the economy will just grow slower.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of the setup and outcome are only partially in place, and the horizon he implicitly refers to (a full decade of growth) hasn’t elapsed.

  1. Condition on long‑term yields only partly met
    Sacks conditioned his claim on U.S. long‑term Treasury yields rising into the 5–7% range. The 10‑year Treasury briefly crossed 5% in October 2023, and the 30‑year was around or slightly above 5% in late 2023 and again in May 2025, but yields have mostly traded in the high‑3% to sub‑5% range rather than moving into and staying in a 5–7% band. (investopedia.com)
    Because the move to 5% has been intermittent and the upper half of his range (near 7%) has not been approached, it’s debatable whether his antecedent has truly been satisfied in the way he envisioned (a sustained high‑rate regime at 5–7%).

  2. Risk capital (VC/PE) did tighten, but not in the simple “way less capital” sense
    Venture capital: U.S. VC fundraising from limited partners fell sharply after rates rose: funds raised about $188.5B in 2022, then roughly $97.5B in 2023 and $76.1B in 2024, the lowest fund count in a decade, with capital concentrated in a small number of large firms. (afurrier.com) That reflects meaningful tightening in the supply of new VC funds, consistent with his “way less risk capital” point.
    However, actual VC investment into companies rebounded: U.S. VC deal value was about $162B in 2023 and $209B in 2024, the third‑highest total in 20 years, helped largely by AI. (feg.com) Early 2025 data show U.S. VC funding above $100B in the first five months, up ~90% year‑on‑year. (blog.tmcnet.com) So capital became more selective and concentrated, but the overall volume of risk capital has remained very large and has recently surged again, which partly contradicts a simple story of enduring “way less” risk capital.

    Private equity: Global PE/VC deal value plunged in 2023 vs 2021, and PE fundraising in 2024–2025 has run well below its 2021 peak, with commentators explicitly tying this to higher rates and tighter financing. (spglobal.com) At the same time, PE dry powder has hit record levels (over $2.6T globally by mid‑2024), and buyout and megadeal activity started to recover in 2024 as conditions improved. (spglobal.com) Overall, risk‑asset activity cooled versus the 2020–21 boom but has not collapsed; it’s more a selective, slower recycling of a still‑huge capital base.

    Net: parts of his mechanism (higher rates → tougher fundraising / slower deal flow) are visible, but the data don’t cleanly support a lasting, broad collapse in risk capital—particularly on the VC side, where investment volumes have rebounded strongly.

  3. No clear evidence yet that U.S. growth is slower than in the prior low‑rate decade
    The 2010s (roughly his “prior low‑rate decade”) saw real U.S. GDP growth averaging around the low‑2% range per year (e.g., many individual years between about 1.5% and 3%). (statistico.com) By contrast, in the higher‑rate period so far:

    • 2022 real GDP growth ≈ 2.1%
    • 2023 ≈ 2.5–2.9% depending on series
    • 2024 ≈ 2.8% (BEA third estimate) (bea.gov)
      As of mid‑2025, trailing year growth is around 2%+. (multpl.com) These figures are not clearly lower than the 2010s average and in some cases are slightly higher. BEA’s own long‑period statistics show 2007–2023 real GDP averaging about 1.8%, so recent years are at least in line with, and often above, that pace. (apps.bea.gov)
      So far, there’s no decisive empirical support for the claim that the U.S. economy, in aggregate, “will just grow slower” than in the prior decade because of higher long‑term yields.
  4. Why the verdict is “inconclusive” rather than “right” or “wrong”

    • Time horizon: Sacks was effectively making a long‑run statement about growth over a decade‑scale regime change in interest rates. We have only about two to three years of post‑hike, post‑5%‑yield data—too short to judge a structural growth slowdown versus a full prior decade.
    • Condition only partially satisfied: Long‑term yields have flirted with 5% but have not moved into or remained in a 5–7% band in a durable way, so the exact scenario he described has not fully materialized. (investopedia.com)
    • Mixed evidence on mechanisms: There has been material tightening and re‑pricing in VC/PE fundraising and deal activity relative to the 2020–21 boom, consistent with his causal story, but the absolute supply of risk capital remains very large and has recently re‑accelerated in areas like AI. Simultaneously, observed GDP growth has not yet been weaker than in the prior low‑rate decade.

Because (a) the rate environment he specified hasn’t fully come to pass in a stable way, and (b) the relevant long‑run growth period is far from complete, we cannot cleanly label his prediction as either correct or incorrect at this point; the outcome is best described as inconclusive.

politicsgovernment
In the federal January 6th‑related criminal case brought by Special Counsel Jack Smith, Donald Trump may be convicted at trial in D.C. but will ultimately prevail on appeal, with the U.S. Supreme Court overturning the conviction on the grounds that the prosecution relied on an impermissibly novel legal theory.
by the way, I think Trump is actually going to win this case. Maybe not in the D.C. jury pool, but I think he'll win it on appeal, because I just think... I think he has to take Supreme Court. He's going to win it because this is a novel legal theory.View on YouTube
Explanation

The specific scenario Sacks predicted did not occur.

  • In United States v. Trump, Jack Smith’s federal election‑obstruction / January 6–related case in D.C., Trump was indicted in August 2023 but never went to trial. Proceedings were delayed by litigation over presidential immunity and other pretrial issues.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • On July 1, 2024, the Supreme Court decided Trump v. United States, recognizing significant presidential immunity for official acts and remanding the case for further proceedings, but there was no trial, no conviction, and thus no criminal appeal from a conviction for the Court to overturn.(en.wikipedia.org)(congress.gov)
  • After Trump won the 2024 election, Smith moved to dismiss the D.C. case without prejudice, citing longstanding DOJ policy not to prosecute a sitting president; Judge Tanya Chutkan granted the dismissal on November 25, 2024.(en.wikipedia.org)(ap.org) Later reporting and Smith’s own final report confirm that prosecutors believed they could have obtained and sustained a conviction had the case gone to trial, but they closed it because of Trump’s return to office, not because the Supreme Court overturned any conviction as a “novel legal theory.”(ap.org)(reuters.com)

Bottom line: Trump did "win" in the sense that he avoided conviction in this case, but he did not do so via the path Sacks predicted. There was no D.C. jury conviction, no appeal from a conviction, and no Supreme Court decision overturning such a conviction on the ground that the prosecution’s theory was impermissibly novel. On the normalized prediction — which centers on that conviction‑then‑reversal sequence — the outcome is therefore wrong.

politicsgovernment
The continued criminal prosecutions of Donald Trump over January 6th will further polarize the U.S. electorate and significantly worsen political division over the next election cycle.
this will tear the country apart.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump did in fact face continued criminal prosecution over his efforts to overturn the 2020 election and his conduct around January 6. Special Counsel Jack Smith obtained a four‑count federal indictment on August 1, 2023 in Washington, D.C., charging Trump with conspiracies to defraud the United States and obstruct the January 6 certification of electoral votes, explicitly tying the case to the Capitol attack. Georgia separately indicted Trump and 18 co‑defendants under its RICO statute in August 2023 for a broader scheme to overturn the state’s 2020 results, before that case was ultimately dropped in 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)

Those prosecutions themselves became highly polarizing issues. An August 2023 Quinnipiac poll found a bare national majority favoring federal election‑subversion charges against Trump (about mid‑50s percent), but views were almost perfectly split along party lines: roughly the entire Democratic electorate supported prosecuting him, while a large majority of Republicans opposed it.(cnbc.com) A 2025 Marquette Law School national survey similarly found 58% of Americans saying the 2023–24 criminal cases against Trump were justified, but 90% of Democrats versus only 23% of Republicans agreed—while 77% of Republicans called the cases unjustified—showing how the prosecutions crystallized perceptions of a weaponized justice system.(law.marquette.edu)

Over the subsequent election cycle, multiple indicators show political division worsening rather than easing. Pew Research reported that between 2023 and mid‑2024 the share of Americans who saw even “some common ground” between the parties on major issues fell by an average of 12 percentage points, and later found that most adults now say Republican and Democratic voters cannot even agree on basic facts.(pewresearch.org) A Johns Hopkins SNF Agora poll in 2024 found nearly half of Americans describing members of the opposing party as “downright evil,” a striking marker of affective polarization.(nypost.com) Ahead of the 2024 vote, about two‑thirds of Americans told Reuters/Ipsos they feared election‑related political violence, and Chicago Council and AP‑NORC polling showed large majorities in both parties convinced that U.S. democracy itself was at serious risk—each side primarily blaming the other candidate.(reuters.com)

It is impossible to isolate the prosecutions as the sole cause of this worsening division, since other events (the 2024 campaign, economic and foreign‑policy crises) were also important drivers. But the data are consistent with Sacks’s directional claim: the January‑6‑related criminal cases against Trump became a central partisan flashpoint and coincided with, and plausibly contributed to, a further hardening of attitudes and a more fractured, mutually hostile electorate over the next election cycle. The rhetoric that they would literally “tear the country apart” is hyperbolic—institutions did not collapse—but in the more measured sense of deepening and entrenching political division, the prediction was borne out.

politics
The 2024 U.S. presidential election will primarily center on disputes over the 2020 election and the Trump prosecutions, rather than on forward‑looking policy issues.
This is what 2024 is not going to be about.View on YouTube
Explanation

Context from the episode shows that Sacks was arguing 2024 would be a referendum on 2020 and Trump’s prosecutions rather than a contest about substantive issues: he said he wanted the 2024 election “to be about issues” but that instead “it’s going to be a referendum on what happened in 2020,” and that the country should “move forward” but was being dragged back into criminal proceedings.(podscripts.co)

Post‑election data do not support the normalized prediction that the election primarily centered on 2020 disputes and Trump’s trials rather than forward‑looking issues:

  • AP VoteCast found that voters’ top perceived problems were the economy and jobs, followed by immigration and abortion; when asked what most influenced their vote, about half of voters named the future of democracy, ahead of inflation, the border, abortion policy, or free speech.(ap.org) These are mainly forward‑looking policy or system‑governance concerns.
  • The same VoteCast reporting notes that Trump voters were driven largely by high prices and the situation at the U.S.–Mexico border, while Harris voters focused on democracy, abortion, the economy, health care, and climate—again, issue agendas.(wtop.com)
  • Critically, VoteCast reports that factors like the assassination attempts and Trump’s legal cases were secondary issues, with only about 1 in 10 voters saying his legal cases were the most important factor in their vote.(pressdemocrat.com) That directly contradicts the idea that prosecutions were the main axis of the election.
  • Overviews of the 2024 elections list the major issues as the economy, abortion, immigration, democracy, and foreign policy.(en.wikipedia.org) The presidential‑election article’s campaign‑issues sections detail extensive policy debates on border security, economic strategy, climate/energy, and housing, indicating a campaign heavily structured around policy programs on both sides.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Trump’s various legal proceedings—his New York criminal conviction in May 2024 and the federal and Georgia cases tied to his efforts to overturn the 2020 election—were indeed prominent and framed by Trump as “election interference,” but retrospective accounts treat them as a major backdrop rather than the central substantive issue driving voter choice.(en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, the best evidence shows that while 2020‑related concerns about democracy and Trump’s behavior were important, the 2024 election was not primarily organized around relitigating 2020 or around Trump’s prosecutions. Forward‑looking issues—especially the economy, immigration, abortion policy, and the broader future of democracy—dominated voter priorities and campaign messaging. On that basis, Sacks’s normalized prediction is overall wrong.

sciencetech
If the South Korean team's claimed room‑temperature, ambient‑pressure superconductor is real (i.e., their result is valid and replicable), it will end up being regarded as the most important discovery in physics of the 21st century.
If they did not make a fraudulent claim. And it is and it does turn out to be real, then I do think it'll end up being the the most important discovery in physics of this century.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’s statement is explicitly conditional: if the South Korean LK‑99 claim were real (valid and replicable), then it would end up being regarded as the most important discovery in physics of the 21st century.

Follow‑up work in 2023–2024 showed that LK‑99 is not a room‑temperature, ambient‑pressure superconductor. Multiple experimental and theoretical studies found it to be an insulator or, at best, a non‑superconducting correlated material, and replication attempts failed to show zero resistance or a Meissner effect.(techcrunch.com) Reviews in Nature and other outlets now treat the original claim as refuted.(researchgate.net) As of late 2025, there is still no accepted room‑temperature, ambient‑pressure superconductor.(theguardian.com)

Because the condition (“their result is real and replicable”) turned out to be false, the world in which Sacks’s forecast would be tested never occurred. We therefore cannot say whether, had LK‑99 been genuine, it actually would have become regarded as the most important physics discovery of the century. The prediction’s truth value cannot be determined from real‑world outcomes, so it is best classified as ambiguous rather than right or wrong.

sciencetech
Following the July 2023 preprint by the South Korean team on a purported room‑temperature, ambient‑pressure superconductor, other research groups will attempt to replicate the reported results by reproducing the material and measurements.
It will be replicated. People will try and do what they are now claiming they did. To demonstrate thisView on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that following the July 2023 LK‑99 preprints, other research groups would attempt to replicate the reported room‑temperature, ambient‑pressure superconductivity by reproducing the material and measurements.

This clearly occurred:

  • A widely cited August 2023 paper "Synthesis and characterisation of LK-99" explicitly notes that the original LK‑99 preprints "str[uck] worldwide experimental research efforts in replicating the results" and then describes an independent synthesis and characterization that found no superconductivity. (arxiv.org)
  • Another group published "On the synthesis methodologies to prepare Pb₉Cu(PO₄)₆O" detailing their "various attempts to prepare" LK‑99 using multiple synthesis routes, again as a replication effort. (arxiv.org)
  • A separate preprint "Absence of superconductivity in LK-99 at ambient conditions" reports continued efforts "to synthesize phase pure LK-99" following the procedure of Lee et al., explicitly as a replication and test of the superconductivity claim. (arxiv.org)
  • Summary articles and timelines note that, after the July 2023 preprints, many different researchers around the world attempted to reproduce the synthesis and measurements of LK‑99 within weeks, with more than 15 notable labs publishing (mostly negative) replication results. (en.wikipedia.org)

Sacks did not predict that the replication attempts would succeed, only that “it will be replicated. People will try and do what they are now claiming they did.” That prediction—about the strong, rapid global effort to reproduce LK‑99—is unambiguously borne out by the record.

politicsconflicteconomy
As of July 21, 2023, the 2024 U.S. presidential election will most likely be a Joe Biden vs. Donald Trump rematch, and Joe Biden is more likely than Trump to win the general election, unless one of three conditions occurs before the election: (1) the U.S. falls into a recession, or (2) the Ukrainian side collapses in the Russia–Ukraine war, or (3) a January 6th–related indictment significantly harms Biden’s prospects.
I think right now it looks like we're on track to have a Biden-trump rematch. And right now, Biden probably looks like he's going to win, barring a recession happening or the Ukrainian side collapsing in the war or the January 6th indictment.
Explanation

Key parts of Sacks’s forecast did not match what ultimately happened:

  1. No Biden–Trump rematch
    Sacks said “we’re on track to have a Biden–Trump rematch.” In reality, Joe Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024, and Kamala Harris became the Democratic nominee on August 5, 2024. The general election on November 5, 2024 was Donald Trump vs. Kamala Harris, not Biden vs. Trump.(en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Biden did not end up the more likely (or actual) winner
    Sacks also said that, as of July 2023, Biden “probably looks like he’s going to win.” In the actual 2024 election, Donald Trump defeated Kamala Harris, winning 312 electoral votes to Harris’s 226 and also winning the national popular vote. Biden was not on the ballot and did not win.(en.wikipedia.org)

  3. His listed “unless” conditions largely did not occur before the election

    • Recession: As of October 3, 2024, the Congressional Research Service reported that the NBER had not dated any new peak (and thus no new recession) after the April 2020 trough, meaning the U.S. was still in the same expansion through the 2024 election.(congress.gov)
    • Ukrainian collapse: Ukraine suffered serious reverses (e.g., loss of Avdiivka and other territory in 2024), but its military and state did not collapse; by 2024–25 the front had largely stabilized into a long defensive line and Ukraine continued to fight across a ~1,200 km front.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • January 6–related indictment: A federal indictment related to Trump’s efforts to overturn the 2020 election and the January 6 attack was filed on August 1, 2023 (United States v. Trump).(en.wikipedia.org) However, that case never reached a verdict before the election and there is no clear evidence it “significantly” harmed Biden’s electoral prospects; indeed, Biden withdrew for reasons centered on age, performance and political viability, and Trump went on to win the general election against Harris.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because (a) the predicted Biden–Trump rematch did not occur, (b) Biden did not end up the winner, and (c) the specified exception conditions either did not materialize (recession, Ukrainian collapse) or did not clearly play out in the way implied, the overall prediction does not match the eventual outcome.

economymarkets
From mid‑2023 through the end of 2024, the US will avoid entering a recession (i.e., achieve a soft landing), and the Federal Reserve will begin cutting interest rates sometime in 2024.
over the last few weeks is just more and more evidence that it could be a soft landing, that we may not have a recession and we might even get rate cuts next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Both key elements of the normalized prediction match subsequent outcomes:

  1. No U.S. recession from mid‑2023 through end‑2024 (soft‑landing outcome).

    • The NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee’s chronology still lists the most recent peak as February 2020 and the most recent trough as April 2020, with no additional peaks or troughs dated through at least late 2024. That implies no officially recognized recession occurred in 2023 or 2024.​​​​(nber.org)
    • A commonly used NBER-based recession indicator (YCharts series tracking NBER peak‑through‑trough periods) shows a value of 0.00 (i.e., not in recession) for every quarter from Q2 2023 through Q4 2024.​(ycharts.com)
    • By late 2024, multiple mainstream assessments described the U.S. as having effectively achieved or being on the cusp of a soft landing: inflation had fallen substantially from its 2022 highs while GDP continued to grow and unemployment remained relatively low. (en.wikipedia.org)
      Together, these indicate that, under the standard NBER definition, the U.S. avoided entering a recession over the period in question, consistent with the prediction of a soft landing.
  2. Federal Reserve began cutting interest rates in 2024.

    • The FOMC’s rate‑history record shows that on 18 September 2024 the Fed lowered the target range for the federal funds rate to 4.75–5.00%, with the prior setting having been higher. This is recorded as the first cut of that easing cycle.​(en.wikipedia.org)
    • The Fed then cut again at its 7 November 2024 and 18 December 2024 meetings, with reporting on the December move noting it was the third rate cut of 2024 and reduced the key rate to around 4.3%.​(en.wikipedia.org)
      This directly satisfies the prediction that the Fed would start cutting rates sometime in 2024.

Since (a) no NBER‑defined recession was recorded between mid‑2023 and the end of 2024 and (b) the Fed indeed began cutting rates in 2024, Sacks’s combined prediction is substantively correct.

Sacks @ 01:10:24Inconclusive
conflictgovernment
U.S. industrial production capacity for 155mm artillery shells will be increased to approximately 90,000 shells per month sometime between 2025 and 2028.
They've scaled that to somewhere Between 20 and 30,000 a month now, and they're saying that they will get to about 90,000 in somewhere between 2025 and 2028.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence shows the U.S. is well below 90,000 155mm shells per month as of late 2025, but official plans still target a production capacity in roughly that range by 2026–2028, and the prediction’s window (2025–2028) has not yet closed.

Key points:

  • A 2023 Army plan aimed to boost 155mm production from about 14,000 per month to 85,000 per month by FY 2028—very close to the “about 90,000” level Sacks referenced. (defensenews.com)
  • U.S. planning documents and summaries (e.g., Wikipedia drawing on DOD statements) describe a goal to raise production to roughly 90,000 shells per month (about 1 million per year) by around 2025, later adjusted in other reporting to mid‑decade. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • A 2024 Congressional Research Service report notes that monthly U.S. 155mm output had risen from ~14,400 (2022) to 40,000 per month by 2024, with an Army target of 100,000 per month by the end of 2025—showing the intended scale of industrial capacity but not yet reaching it. (congress.gov)
  • In April 2025 testimony covered by Business Insider, Gen. Christopher Cavoli stated that the U.S. then produced about 40,000 155mm shells per month, and “hopes to reach a monthly production capacity of 90,000 rounds in 2026.” (businessinsider.com)
  • Additional coverage in 2025 on production shortfalls reports that, despite plans for 75,000–100,000 per month by late 2025, actual output stalled near 40,000 per month, and the 100,000‑per‑month goal has slipped to around mid‑2026. (thedefensewatch.com)

Interpretation vs. prediction:

  • Sacks’ prediction was not that the U.S. already would be at 90,000 per month in 2025, but that industrial capacity would reach roughly 90,000 per month at some point between 2025 and 2028.
  • Current data show production capacity and output are still below that level in 2025, though official U.S. plans and investments explicitly aim for ~90,000–100,000 per month capacity by 2026–2028.
  • Because we have not yet reached the end of the stated 2025–2028 window, and the U.S. still actively plans to hit roughly that level within this period, we cannot yet say definitively whether the prediction will end up being correct or incorrect.

Given that the deadline has not passed and the key threshold (~90k/month capacity) has not yet been reached, the status of the prediction is “inconclusive (too early)” rather than clearly right or wrong.

marketspoliticsgovernment
If Ripple’s favorable ruling against the SEC stands, the default strategy for crypto companies facing SEC actions will shift to refusing settlements and fighting cases in court.
Then for sure, the standard operating procedure is I don't want to know settlements.View on YouTube
Explanation

The condition for Sacks’s prediction largely did occur: Judge Torres’s July 2023 summary‑judgment ruling—finding XRP is not a security in programmatic exchange sales—survived the SEC’s interlocutory-appeal attempt and was later locked in when both sides dropped their appeals and resolved the case by settlement, leaving the favorable portions of the ruling intact.【1search1【4news13【

However, after that ruling, crypto companies as a group did not shift to a default strategy of refusing settlements. Many post‑Ripple SEC crypto enforcement actions still ended in conventional settlements:

  • Bittrex and its former CEO agreed in August 2023 to settle SEC charges over operating an unregistered exchange, broker, and clearing agency, paying about $24 million.【2search0【
  • ShapeShift accepted an SEC cease‑and‑desist order in March 2024 and paid a civil penalty to settle allegations it acted as an unregistered dealer.【0search0【0search2【
  • Bankrupt lender Genesis Global Capital agreed in March 2024 to a $21 million civil penalty to resolve SEC charges over its lending program.【2news13【
  • eToro USA (September 2024) and Silvergate Capital (July 2024) likewise entered into SEC settlements involving penalties and remedial undertakings, and the SEC’s FY 2024 enforcement report specifically highlights multiple crypto matters resolved by settlement (including BarnBridge DAO), indicating settlements remained standard.【2search1【3search0【2search3【

It is true that some large, well‑funded players—Ripple itself for years, plus exchanges like Coinbase and Kraken—chose to litigate aggressively rather than immediately settle. But these are notable exceptions, not evidence that the default industry-wide strategy flipped; the bulk of crypto defendants, especially smaller or distressed firms, continued to settle as before. Even Ripple ultimately agreed to a monetary settlement to end the case, undermining the notion that “no settlements” became the standard operating procedure.【4news12【4news13【2search6【3search1【3search3【

Because Ripple’s favorable ruling did stand but the predicted broad shift away from settlements did not materialize, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

conflictpolitics
If the 2023 Ukrainian counteroffensive achieves a meaningful level of success (e.g., significant territorial gains against Russian forces), then within a few subsequent months Russia will respond by moving toward or declaring full mobilization and escalating the war to a higher level of violence and mobilization than seen prior to that success.
I think this is going to put more pressure on Putin to conduct the war in a more violent way… I think he’s going to do whatever it takes to win this war. And I think you could see now, over the next few months, a full mobilization in Russia. And I think that this could lead us to the next point of escalation in this war. That is, if this Ukrainian counteroffensive actually is successful on some level… if this counteroffensive succeeds, you will see the next level of escalation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: if the 2023 Ukrainian counteroffensive were successful "on some level" (i.e., with meaningful territorial gains), then within a few months Russia would move toward or declare full mobilization and escalate to a higher level of violence.

  1. Condition not met (counteroffensive outcome):

    • Ukraine’s 2023 counteroffensive, launched in June 2023, recaptured roughly 370 km² and a small number of villages, never reached key operational objectives like Tokmak or the Sea of Azov, and was widely described by late 2023 as having failed to regain significant territory or achieve major strategic goals.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • In other words, the normalized trigger — “a meaningful level of success (e.g., significant territorial gains)” — did not occur.
  2. Consequence also did not occur, but without the trigger:

    • Russia had already declared a partial mobilization in September 2022. That decree legally remains in force, but it was not expanded into a declared general/full mobilization after the 2023 offensive.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Through late 2023 and 2024, Russian officials repeatedly said there were no plans for additional mobilization, instead relying on volunteer contract soldiers, financial incentives, and regular conscription cycles.(english.alarabiya.net)

Because the antecedent of the conditional (“successful” counteroffensive with substantial gains) did not materialize, we have no real-world test of the claim “if that happens, then full mobilization and a higher level of escalation will follow.” The fact that Russia did not fully mobilize after an unsuccessful offensive does not logically falsify that conditional.

So, even though enough time has passed to observe events, the specific if-then forecast cannot be definitively graded as right or wrong. It falls into the category of “ambiguous” rather than clearly correct or incorrect.

techai
The industry-wide shortage of GPUs will persist for approximately 1–2 years from July 2023 (i.e., through at least mid‑2024 and possibly into mid‑2025), rather than materially easing sooner.
GPUs are basically the scarce item right now, we have a GPU shortage, and it's probably not going to get better for a year or two if that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since mid‑2023 shows that the severe shortage of high‑end AI GPUs (Nvidia A100/H100‑class and equivalents) persisted well beyond a year and was still meaningfully constraining the industry into 2025, which matches Sacks’s “year or two” timeline.

Key points:

  • In 2023, Nvidia’s AI accelerators were capped by TSMC’s advanced CoWoS packaging capacity; demand vastly exceeded supply. Analyses note that even by early 2024, this packaging bottleneck was only starting to ease, with TSMC planning to more than double CoWoS output by 2025 precisely because supply remained tight relative to AI demand.【(siliconanalysts.com)】
  • High‑bandwidth memory (HBM), which is required for modern AI GPUs, has been a separate choke point. Industry analysts and Micron’s CEO have said HBM shortages are expected to weigh on GPU production into 2026, indicating that the underlying constraints did not disappear quickly in 2023–2024 but instead persisted for multiple years.【(luckboxmagazine.com)】
  • A concrete example from a hyperscaler: Amazon’s internal documents show its retail division struggled with a lack of GPU capacity throughout 2024, to the point it launched “Project Greenland” in July 2024 to ration and centrally manage scarce GPUs. Reporting in April 2025 says Amazon’s retail business had only then resolved its internal GPU shortage and expected surplus capacity later in 2025—i.e., constraints lasted well past mid‑2024 and into early 2025.【(businessinsider.com)】
  • Separate coverage of Nvidia H100 supply notes that through 2024 customers still faced multi‑month lead times; only by later in the year was it plausible that wait times might disappear, and even then large LLM developers like OpenAI were singled out as still hitting supply bottlenecks due to their scale.【(1ai.net)】
  • Broad 2023–2025 retrospectives on the “GPU crisis” and AI boom describe a persistent global imbalance where big tech, specialized GPU clouds, and a handful of well‑funded players soaked up most of the Nvidia GPU supply, leaving many startups and smaller firms facing long waits and capacity constraints through 2024 and into 2025.(buzzbyte.org)}

Putting this together: the AI‑GPU shortage clearly did not materially ease within a few months of July 2023; instead, serious constraints persisted for roughly two years, with major players still short into early 2025 and structural bottlenecks (CoWoS, HBM) projected to remain tight even beyond that. That aligns well with Sacks’s claim that the shortage was “probably not going to get better for a year or two,” so the prediction is best judged as right.

aimarketsventure
In the period after July 2023, there will be additional M&A activity in AI tooling and infrastructure, with acquired companies generally commanding high valuations relative to their current revenues, driven by strategic value to large infrastructure providers assembling end‑to‑end AI toolchains.
I think for sure there's going to be more M&A, and I think the valuations will be high, not because these companies have a lot of revenue yet, but because it's very strategic for these big infra companies to assemble the end to end Toolchain.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since July 2023 matches Sacks’ prediction of continued AI tooling/infrastructure M&A at high valuations driven by strategic value to large infra providers:

  • Databricks → Tabular (data lakehouse infra, June 2024): Databricks agreed to buy data-management startup Tabular to strengthen its open data-lakehouse and AI stack. Reports put the price at over $1 billion, with later reporting saying Databricks "reportedly paid nearly $2 billion" while Tabular had only about $1 million in ARR, implying an extremely high revenue multiple. The deal was explicitly framed as part of the Databricks–Snowflake battle over data formats and AI infrastructure, i.e., strategic toolchain assembly, not current revenue. (techcrunch.com)

  • OpenAI → Rockset (vector search / real‑time analytics infra, June 2024): OpenAI acquired Rockset, a real‑time search and database analytics company whose tech (vector search, real‑time indexing) is being integrated directly into OpenAI’s infrastructure to improve ChatGPT and enterprise AI capabilities. Rockset had raised about $105M and was an infrastructure/tooling company rather than a large revenue business, and OpenAI described the deal in clear strategic terms (strengthening its platform) rather than as a revenue play. (reuters.com)

  • OpenAI → Windsurf and io (2024–2025): Reports describe OpenAI’s acquisition of AI coding tool Windsurf for around $3 billion and hardware/AI-device startup io (Jony Ive’s company) for about $6.4–6.5 billion, despite io not yet having shipped products. These are framed as large, strategic acquisitions to deepen OpenAI’s end‑to‑end AI product stack (coding tools plus hardware/device layer), again reflecting high valuations driven by strategic positioning rather than current revenue. (timesofindia.indiatimes.com)

  • Snowflake → Crunchy Data (Postgres for AI agents, 2025): Snowflake agreed to acquire PostgreSQL specialist Crunchy Data for about $250 million, explicitly to enhance Snowflake’s ability to help customers build AI agents on their data. This follows Snowflake’s earlier acquisition of AI-search startup Neeva and mirrors Databricks’ acquisitions, underscoring that major data/infra platforms are buying key components to complete their AI toolchains. (wsj.com)

  • Pattern of high multiples and strategic positioning: Earlier landmark deals like Databricks’ 2023 acquisition of MosaicML (announced just before the podcast but closed after) at $1.3B on roughly $20M revenue (~65× multiple) were already seen as unusually rich and explicitly justified as strategic for generative‑AI infrastructure. Subsequent deals (e.g., Tabular’s billion‑plus valuation on roughly $1M ARR) continued this pattern of large infra providers overpaying on revenue multiples to secure critical AI tooling components. (cbinsights.com)

Overall, from mid‑2023 through 2025 there has indeed been substantial, ongoing M&A in AI tooling and infrastructure, led by major data/AI platforms (Databricks, Snowflake, OpenAI) buying strategic components at very high valuation multiples, exactly in line with Sacks’ reasoning. Hence the prediction is best classified as right.

venture
The existing crunch in late‑stage startup financing as of mid‑2023 will worsen over the following 18 months, i.e., through the end of 2024 (less capital available and/or on tougher terms for late‑stage rounds).
there's a huge crunch in late stage financing. It's only going to get worse over the next 18 months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks argued in July 2023 that an already “huge crunch in late‑stage financing” would only get worse over the next 18 months.

Evidence shows a sharp worsening through late 2023, but then a meaningful rebound during 2024, especially for late‑stage and AI‑driven companies:

  • By mid‑2023, the late‑stage market was already in crisis: TechCrunch reported that late‑stage/Series D+ valuations had collapsed (about 60% year‑over‑year and 33% quarter‑over‑quarter in Q2 2023) and that late‑stage deal counts were falling sharply, with late stage hit hardest in the downturn. PitchBook likewise noted that in 2023 the late stages saw valuation multiples and capital supply dwindle, and that Series D+ companies were waiting a record ~1.8 years between rounds. CB Insights’ 2023 report showed global late‑stage median deal size down more than 50% from 2021, with investors shying away from large late‑stage rounds.

    (Sources: TechCrunch on the late‑stage market in August 2023; PitchBook’s US VC market commentary on 2023; CB Insights State of Venture 2023.)

  • Conditions did worsen into late 2023: Q4 2023 was described by CB Insights as the harshest quarter for global VC in six years, with funding and deal volume at multi‑year lows and late‑stage mega‑rounds especially scarce. Crunchbase similarly reported that Q4 2023 was the weakest quarter of the year in North America, with late‑stage dealmaking particularly muted.

    (Sources: CB Insights State of Venture 2023; Crunchbase year‑end 2023 funding review.)

  • However, by 2024 the market began to recover rather than “only get worse.” PitchBook/NVCA’s data for 2024 show late‑stage deal value rising around 10% quarter‑over‑quarter early in 2024 and a “slight rebound” in late‑stage deals by Q4 2024, with median deal sizes trending upward. A TechCrunch analysis of PitchBook data reported that by the first half of 2024, median valuations for new early‑ and late‑stage deals in the U.S. had not only recovered from 2023 lows but reached all‑time highs. CB Insights’ 2024 report shows Q4 2024 global funding at a two‑year high, with 60% of that quarter’s capital coming from $100M+ mega‑rounds—mostly late‑stage deals. Reuters and other summaries of the 2024 PitchBook‑NVCA Venture Monitor note that total VC investment (especially in AI) grew significantly in 2024 vs. 2023, even though activity remained below 2021 levels and still skewed toward a few large winners.

    (Sources: PitchBook/NVCA Venture Monitor 2024 commentary; TechCrunch on 2024 valuation rebound; CB Insights State of Venture 2024; Reuters on 2024 U.S. VC and AI funding.)

  • The environment in 2024 was still challenging—fundraising by VC funds was down, exits were constrained, and capital was highly concentrated in top firms and AI leaders—so a crunch persisted, particularly for non‑elite late‑stage companies. But key indicators like deal value, late‑stage mega‑round activity, and median late‑stage valuations improved vs. the 2023 trough and even vs. mid‑2023, contradicting the idea that financing conditions would only deteriorate throughout the entire 18‑month window.

Because late‑stage financing conditions first worsened but then clearly rebounded within the forecast horizon, Sacks’s directional claim that it was "only" going to get worse over the next 18 months does not hold. The prediction is therefore wrong.

conflictpolitics
As of roughly 2–3 weeks into Ukraine’s June 2023 counteroffensive, the operation will continue to make minimal territorial gains and will fail to achieve its stated objective of breaking through Russia’s prepared defensive lines and significantly reversing Russian territorial gains.
so far, it seems like this counteroffensive is not going anywhere.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was that Ukraine’s June 2023 counteroffensive would make only minimal territorial gains and would fail to break through Russia’s prepared defensive lines in a way that significantly reversed Russian territorial gains. In fact, the 2023 offensive (June–Dec 2023) is now widely characterized as an “operational failure,” with Ukraine recapturing only 14 villages and roughly a few hundred square kilometers (about 370 km²) of territory—incremental gains relative to the front’s overall size and to Russian holdings. (en.wikipedia.org) Analyses at the end of 2023 noted that “the territorial lines of June 2023 have barely changed” and that Ukraine had retaken only about 200 square miles (~520 km²) in 2023, underscoring the limited territorial impact. (washingtonpost.com) Key operational objectives—such as breaching Russian defenses deeply enough to reach Tokmak or the Sea of Azov and sever the land bridge to Crimea—were not achieved, and by early December 2023 multiple international outlets described the counteroffensive as stalled or failed. (en.wikipedia.org) Later, by May 2025, Russia had even recaptured all 14 villages Ukraine had gained in the 2023 offensive, meaning there was no lasting significant reversal of Russian territorial control from that operation. (en.wikipedia.org) Given the small, temporary territorial gains and the failure to achieve the main breakthrough and rollback objectives, Sacks’ forward-looking assessment that the counteroffensive was “not going anywhere” in strategic terms aligns with subsequent outcomes.

conflictpolitics
By the end of 2023, Russia’s military will have expanded to approximately 150,000 additional troops mobilized for the war in Ukraine (i.e., around 150,000 men under arms specifically added for this conflict).
I think it's estimated that by the end of the year, they're going to have 150,000 men under arms.View on YouTube
Explanation

Open sources indicate that Russia had far more than 150,000 additional troops under arms for the Ukraine war by the end of 2023, so Sacks’ prediction that they would reach roughly that scale is directionally correct (if anything, conservative).

Key points:

  1. Partial mobilization before 2023 already added 300,000 reservists. Putin’s September 2022 decree mobilized about 300,000 reservists for the war.(the-independent.com) Those men were in addition to Russia’s pre‑war active-duty force and were explicitly called up for the Ukraine campaign.

  2. Russia then reported hundreds of thousands of new contract recruits in 2023. At his year‑end press conference on December 14, 2023, Putin said that 486,000 people had signed contracts with the armed forces in 2023 and that there were **617,000 Russian personnel in the “combat zone.”(themoscowtimes.com) Independent outlet Meduza, citing the Defense Ministry, likewise reported over 640,000 contract soldiers in the army by late December 2023 and repeated the figure of **486,000 volunteers signed up in 2023.(meduza.io)

  3. Even critical analyses still imply additions well above 150,000. RealClearDefense notes that some of the official recruitment figures are likely inflated or double‑count certain contract renewals, but concludes that the true number of people who actually signed contracts in 2023 is still “several times lower than 490,000,” not an order of magnitude lower. Even if one takes a very skeptical view—say, only ~150,000–200,000 net new contracts—that still meets or slightly exceeds Sacks’ 150,000‑extra‑troops benchmark.(realcleardefense.com)

  4. Total active-force growth is consistent with a ~150,000+ net increase. A 2025 U.S. Senate assessment, using NATO‑linked data, estimates Russia’s active armed forces at about 1,134,000 troops in early 2025, up from ~900,000 pre‑war—a net increase of roughly 234,000. This is consistent with Russia having added on the order of hundreds of thousands of personnel for the war by late 2023, and therefore at least 150,000.(congress.gov)

Given that all plausible counts of Russian wartime force generation by end‑2023 are at or well above 150,000 additional troops, Sacks’ prediction that Russia would have on the order of 150,000 extra men under arms for the Ukraine conflict by the end of 2023 is substantively correct, though actual numbers appear significantly higher than he suggested.

Sacks @ 00:31:55Inconclusive
conflictgovernment
U.S. production of 155mm artillery shells will not reach a sustained rate of approximately 90,000 shells per month until around 2028.
they're trying to hold on. They're trying to ramp it up to 90,000 a month, but that's going to take until 2028 because, you know, it takes time to build it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that the U.S. has not yet reached 90,000 155mm shells per month, but the prediction’s time horizon (“around 2028”) is still in the future, so it cannot be definitively judged.

Key points:

  • A Congressional Research Service report states that U.S. 155mm projectile output rose from about 14,400 per month in 2022 to 40,000 per month by 2024, with a target of 100,000 per month by the end of 2025, not yet achieved as of September 2024. (everycrsreport.com)
  • Reporting based on an interview with the head of the U.S. Army’s Program Executive Office for Ammunition and Armaments says that as of June 2025 total U.S. production of complete 155mm rounds was still about 40,000 per month, well below planned milestones (75,000 by April 2025, 100,000 by October 2025). (en.defence-ua.com)
  • An August 14, 2025 article in National Defense Magazine quotes an Army spokesperson saying the service is currently producing 40,000 rounds per month and now does not expect to reach 100,000 per month until mid‑2026, meaning even the revised goal precedes 2028 but has not yet been met. (nationaldefensemagazine.org)
  • NATO‑related and analytical reporting similarly notes that U.S. manufacturers are at roughly 40,000 rounds per month in 2025, with ambitions of 100,000 per month slipping to 2026, again indicating current output is far under 90,000. (businessinsider.com)

Because:

  1. There is no evidence that U.S. production has already reached a sustained ~90,000 shells per month (which would clearly falsify the prediction), and
  2. The prediction asserts this level won’t be reached until around 2028, a date still in the future as of November 30, 2025,

we cannot yet say whether Sacks’s timeline is ultimately correct or incorrect. The most we can say is that, so far, reality (40k/month and delayed goals) is compatible with his pessimistic view, but the decisive 2026–2028 period has not arrived, so the prediction remains unresolved.

politicsgovernment
In Taiwan’s next national election in 2024, the China-friendlier ("pro‑China") party is currently favored and has a significant chance of winning power, replacing the more pro‑West party then in office.
on Taiwan. There's an election next year, and it looks like right now that the pro-China party might actually take power.View on YouTube
Explanation

Taiwan held its combined presidential and legislative elections on January 13, 2024. In the presidential race, Lai Ching‑te of the incumbent, more China‑skeptical / pro‑U.S. Democratic Progressive Party (DPP) won with about 40% of the vote, defeating Hou Yu‑ih of the Kuomintang (KMT), which is generally viewed as more China‑friendly and Beijing’s preferred interlocutor. Lai’s victory gave the DPP an unprecedented third consecutive presidential term, meaning the pro‑West party remained in control of the presidency rather than being replaced by the more China‑friendly opposition. (cnbc.com)

In the legislative elections held the same day, the DPP did lose its majority, and the KMT became the largest single party in the Legislative Yuan (52 seats to the DPP’s 51), with the Taiwan People’s Party holding the balance of power. However, no party secured a majority, and executive power stayed with the DPP president. (en.wikipedia.org)

The normalized prediction describes the China‑friendlier party as winning power and replacing the then‑ruling, more pro‑West party in the 2024 national election. Since the presidency—the key lever of national executive power—remained with the DPP, and the DPP was not replaced as the ruling party, this outcome contradicts the prediction. The partial legislative gains by the KMT do not amount to the pro‑China side “taking power” in the sense of forming a new national government. Therefore, the prediction is best scored as wrong.

Tucker Carlson’s show on Twitter will continue to accumulate views beyond the 17 million reported for the first day of his initial episode, achieving larger ongoing distribution on Twitter than he had on Fox News.
So probably ten video yesterday was at 17 million views or something like that. So I'm sure it's more today. So no, he's getting huge distribution through Twitter.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows two different outcomes for the two parts of the normalized prediction:

  1. Views surpassing 17 million on X/Twitter – This happened quickly. Reports note Tucker Carlson’s first “Tucker on Twitter” episode amassed tens of millions of views, with tweet impressions in the 80–110 million range within about a day, far beyond the initial 17M cited in the podcast discussion.(observer.com) Third‑party analytics (Tubular Labs) estimated roughly 26–27 million actual video views (2+ seconds watched) for episode 1, still well over 17M.(aol.com) So the narrow claim that the initial episode would keep accumulating views beyond 17M was correct.

  2. “Larger ongoing distribution on Twitter than he had on Fox News” – This is where the prediction fails.

    • At Fox, Tucker Carlson Tonight averaged about 3.3 million viewers per night in 2022 and roughly 3.25–3.39 million in early 2023, making it one of the highest‑rated shows in cable news.(press.foxnews.com)
    • On Twitter/X, after an initial spike, Tucker on Twitter’s audience fell sharply. Analyses based on Twitter’s own video‑view metric (2+ seconds watched) show episode 1 around 26–27M video views, but by episode 8 views had dropped to about 3.8M, an ~86% decline.(forbes.com)
    • Major media‑measurement experts emphasize that X “views” (brief impressions or 2‑second plays) are not comparable to Nielsen’s average‑minute TV audience; comparisons that claim Carlson’s X audience “dwarfs” his Fox ratings are described as misleading and “apples and oranges.”(aol.com)
    • Longer‑term, coverage of Carlson’s post‑Fox career notes that his overall media reach has diminished relative to his Fox tenure; his subscription Tucker Carlson Network is reported to have on the order of hundreds of thousands of subscribers, far fewer than the multi‑million nightly audience he had on Fox.(theguardian.com)

Because (a) the metrics for Twitter/X and TV aren’t directly comparable, and (b) where we can compare, the best available evidence suggests his sustained, reliably engaged audience is smaller now than it was on Fox, the strong version of the prediction — that he would achieve larger ongoing distribution on Twitter than on Fox News — did not come true.

Overall, weighing both parts together, the more consequential and falsifiable portion (ongoing distribution exceeding Fox) is contradicted by the data and expert assessments, so the prediction is best classified as wrong.

Catastrophic AI ‘doomer’ scenarios (e.g., mass displacement or existential-risk events) will not materialize suddenly in the very near term; instead, disruptive AI impacts will unfold more gradually over a longer period.
So one is I think there's a lot of AI fear porn out there right now. And I just think that, like, all of these tumor scenarios are they're not going to play out overnight. I mean, this is going to take a while.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there has been no realized catastrophic or existential AI event (e.g., human extinction or near‑extinction, loss of global human control, or comparable catastrophe). Surveys and discussions of AI existential risk focus on future probabilities (e.g., risk by 2100 or over the next several decades), not on events that have already occurred.(en.wikipedia.org)

On the employment side, the observed economic impact has been disruptive but gradual, not an overnight collapse:

  • The New York Fed reports that, so far, AI adoption "has not yet led to major job losses" and that near‑term labor‑market effects have been modest.(reuters.com)
  • OECD analysis of AI and jobs finds that to date AI has had little effect on aggregate employment, with adoption still relatively low and many firms adjusting slowly (via attrition, retraining, or partial task automation).(oecd.org)
  • A 2025 Goldman Sachs analysis likewise concludes that generative AI has not yet produced discernible changes in unemployment or productivity at the macro level, implying that the feared rapid jobs shock has not materialized.(fortune.com)
  • Other recent reviews similarly emphasize that an "AI jobs apocalypse" has not arrived; displacement is emerging but is slow, uneven, and concentrated in specific sectors, consistent with a drawn‑out transition rather than a sudden crash.(siai.org)

In short, between June 2023 and late 2025, no sudden AI doomer scenario has actually unfolded, and the disruptive impacts we do see are incremental and evolving over years, matching Sacks’s claim that such scenarios would not "play out overnight" and that the real effects would "take a while." Therefore the prediction is right given the evidence up to the evaluation date.

aihealth
Radiology as a medical specialty will be heavily disrupted or partially automated by AI, making it a poor career choice, but the broader medical profession (doctors in general) will remain viable and in demand.
So for example, I wouldn't want to be a radiologist right now, but doctors will be fine.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence up to November 2025 shows that AI is significantly changing radiology workflows but has not made radiology a poor or shrinking career, while the broader physician workforce remains in shortage.

Key points:

  • Radiology is being augmented, not gutted, by AI. Reporting from 2025 notes that over two‑thirds of U.S. radiology departments use AI tools and that more than 75% of FDA‑cleared medical AI products are for radiology, but experts emphasize these systems mainly triage cases, flag findings, or help with reporting rather than replace radiologists. (washingtonpost.com)

  • Radiologist demand remains high and is projected to stay that way for decades. Multiple workforce studies (Neiman Health Policy Institute and related analyses) project that today’s radiologist shortage will persist through 2055 as imaging demand grows roughly in line with or faster than radiologist supply, meaning the shortage neither disappears nor worsens dramatically without intervention. (drugs.com) Job‑market discussions similarly describe a nationwide radiologist shortage, long hiring times, and many open positions—conditions inconsistent with radiology being a “bad” or oversupplied specialty. (medscape.com)

  • Doctors overall are clearly still in demand. Updated projections from the Association of American Medical Colleges and related summaries in 2024–2025 forecast a U.S. physician shortfall of up to ~86,000 doctors by 2036 (and higher in some federal estimates), spanning primary care and many specialties. These reports explicitly frame physician shortages—not AI displacement—as the dominant workforce problem. (ama-assn.org)

Taken together, AI has indeed begun to automate and transform parts of radiology, but it has not reduced the specialty to a poor career choice; on the contrary, radiologists are scarce and heavily recruited. Meanwhile, medicine in general remains viable and in high demand. Because the central claim that AI would make radiology a bad career has been contradicted by current data, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong.

Sacks @ 01:25:48Inconclusive
techaieconomy
Long-haul truck driving jobs will be significantly reduced or threatened by self-driving technology, but transportation and logistics companies as a sector will continue to exist and operate.
Like, I wouldn't want to be a truck driver either, you know, because of self-driving. But transportation companies are still going to exist.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence as of November 30, 2025 does not show that long‑haul truck driving jobs have been significantly reduced by self‑driving technology yet, although there is clear activity and investment that could threaten those jobs in the future.

What we see today (late 2025):

  1. Autonomous trucking is in limited pilots, not at mass displacement scale. Companies like Aurora, Kodiak, Torc (Daimler), and others are running autonomous truck pilots on select highway lanes in the U.S., generally with safety drivers or close human supervision, and are working toward commercial launches around the mid‑2020s, but these are not yet replacing a large share of long‑haul drivers nationwide. (This is widely reported across transportation and business press; there is no credible data showing large‑scale job loss specifically attributable to autonomous trucks.)

  2. Truck driving employment remains high. Public labor statistics and industry commentary through 2024–2025 indicate that trucking companies are still hiring and frequently report driver shortages or tight labor markets, not a collapse in demand for long‑haul drivers due to automation. There is no major report of self‑driving trucks causing substantial net job losses among long‑haul drivers at the national level.

  3. Transportation and logistics companies obviously continue to exist. Large carriers (e.g., Knight‑Swift, J.B. Hunt, Schneider, FedEx, UPS, etc.) and countless regional and local fleets are still operating. That portion of the prediction is trivially correct but wasn’t really in doubt.

Why the verdict is ‘inconclusive’:

  • The prediction is about future structural impact ("I wouldn’t want to be a truck driver… because of self‑driving"), not explicitly tied to a short, dated horizon like 2024 or 2025. It implies a long‑term threat over a multi‑year/decade timescale.
  • As of late 2025, self‑driving trucks are credible and progressing but have not yet produced the “significant reduction” in long‑haul truck driving jobs the quote anticipates. At the same time, the technology is clearly advanced enough that it could plausibly threaten those jobs later.

Because (a) no large‑scale displacement has occurred yet, but (b) the stated prediction is long‑term and does not specify a deadline, the fairest assessment as of November 30, 2025 is that it is too early to say whether it will ultimately be right or wrong.

aieconomy
Legal and accounting professions are broad and general enough that AI will not eliminate these job categories; lawyers and accountants will continue to be needed.
They're sufficiently general that I don't think they're going to be eliminated.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, both the legal and accounting professions remain large, mainstream job categories, with evidence that AI is changing task mix rather than eliminating the roles.

In law, U.S. legal-sector employment has been rising, with job numbers in 2025 approaching prior peaks even as firms increase their use of AI to streamline work. (reuters.com) Surveys of legal professionals and AI adoption show a growing consensus that generative AI is a powerful tool but not a replacement for lawyers; many legal professionals explicitly state that AI will augment their work, not eliminate lawyer roles. (globallegalpost.com) Consistently, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics projects lawyer employment to grow about 4% from 2024–2034, indicating continued demand for human attorneys even as some routine work is automated. (bls.gov)

In accounting, AI and automation are being heavily adopted but framed as productivity tools. Industry reports describe AI automating repetitive tasks (data entry, basic analysis) while highlighting that human judgment, ethics, and client-facing advisory work remain central; experts and professional bodies stress that GenAI is meant to support, not replace, accountants. (at-mia.my) Surveys in 2024–2025 find most tax and accounting firms expect significant GenAI integration but only a small minority now view it as a threat to employment, and many firms still report talent shortages rather than surplus. (cfobrew.com) BLS projections show employment of accountants and auditors growing around 5–6% over the coming decade, with the agency explicitly noting that while some tasks will be automated by AI and related tech, overall demand for accountants is expected to rise and their work to shift toward higher-value analysis and advisory duties. (bls.gov)

Some narrower, more routine roles (e.g., bookkeeping and clerical accounting positions) are projected to decline as automation spreads, but that is materially different from eliminating the broad professional categories of lawyers and accountants, which remain in demand and are forecast to grow. (bls.gov) Given that, about 2.5 years after the prediction, the best available data and expert views align with Sacks’s claim that these professions are sufficiently general and judgment-intensive that AI is unlikely to eliminate them; instead, they are evolving into AI-augmented roles. This supports classifying the prediction as right (so far).

aieconomy
As AI tools improve, lawyers and accountants will become more productive (able to complete more work), but this productivity gain will not necessarily translate into a reduced total number of lawyers or accountants employed; demand will expand with capacity.
They may be able to get more done. Yeah. I would expect them to be able to get more done. Yeah. But I don't think necessarily think that means we'll need less of them.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, available evidence broadly supports Sacks’s prediction that (1) AI tools are making lawyers and accountants more productive and (2) this has not translated into a clear reduction in overall demand for these professionals.

  1. Productivity gains are real and measurable
  • A 2024 Thomson Reuters Future of Professionals report surveying legal, tax, and accounting professionals finds they expect AI to save about 4 hours per week in the near term and up to 12 hours per week within five years, with 77% saying AI will have a high or transformational impact on their work. (thomsonreuters.com)
  • Multiple 2025 surveys of legal professionals (e.g., Everlaw’s Ediscovery Innovation Report) report that nearly half of respondents are already saving 1–5 hours per week with generative AI, with heavy users reclaiming up to ~260 hours per year (about 32.5 working days). (everlaw.com)
  • A 2024–25 St. Louis Fed analysis of U.S. workers using generative AI finds average time savings of 5.4% of work hours among users, confirming that genAI yields nontrivial productivity gains at the worker level. (stlouisfed.org)
  1. Lawyer employment and demand have not fallen
  • U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) data show that lawyers held about 859,000 jobs in 2023 and about 864,800 jobs in 2024—an increase, not a decline, during the initial phase of wide genAI adoption. (bls.gov)
  • A 2025 BLS Monthly Labor Review article that explicitly incorporates generative AI effects projects that overall legal occupations will grow 3.7% from 2023–2033, with lawyers specifically projected to grow 5.2%, even while acknowledging that genAI can substantially increase productivity in legal research and document review. (bls.gov)
  • Industry data show that demand for legal services is rising: a 2025 LawCrossing analysis reports that legal demand at firms grew 2.8% in 2024, the fastest growth since 2021, with broad-based increases across litigation and corporate work. (lawcrossing.com)
    These patterns match the prediction: AI is boosting productivity, yet law remains a growth field rather than one clearly shedding lawyers because of AI.
  1. Accounting: productivity plus shortage, not surplus
  • BLS data show accountants and auditors held about 1,538,400 jobs in 2022 and about 1.6 million jobs in 2024, with projections of roughly 5% growth from 2024–2034 (1,579,800 to 1,652,600 jobs). (scribd.com)
  • The BLS Occupational Outlook Handbook explicitly states that while platforms such as cloud computing, AI, and blockchain will automate routine accounting tasks and increase efficiency, this change is not expected to reduce overall demand for accountants; instead, their advisory and analytical duties are expected to become more prominent. (bls.gov)
  • A 2025 CPA Journal article, drawing on BLS projections, notes that accounting and auditing jobs are expected to grow about 5.8–6% from 2023–2033 and argues that this job growth is tied to new roles that require collaboration between humans and AI models. (cpajournal.com)
  • At the same time, several analyses describe a shortage of accountants: CPA Journal and Fortune both cite BLS-based estimates that the U.S. accounting workforce has shrunk by roughly 300,000–340,000 over the past five years, mainly due to retirements and fewer new entrants, not because AI eliminated the need for accountants. CFOs report difficulty hiring and are investing in AI and automation partly to cope with this shortage, while still emphasizing the need for experienced human talent. (cpajournal.com)
    This is important context: the total headcount of accountants has been pressured downward by demographic and pipeline issues, but the underlying demand remains strong or growing; AI is being used to stretch scarce talent, not because firms no longer “need” accountants.
  1. Localized AI-related cuts exist but don’t overturn the aggregate picture
  • Some high-profile firms have cited AI when restructuring: for example, Clifford Chance is cutting about 10% of its London business-services workforce (finance, HR, IT), partly due to increased AI use, and PwC has abandoned a global plan to add 100,000 staff by 2026, cutting 5,600 jobs and reducing graduate hiring while simultaneously investing heavily in AI and seeking large numbers of technologists. (theguardian.com)
  • U.K. employer surveys from the CIPD show that a minority of large firms in sectors like legal, accounting, and consultancy anticipate AI-driven staff reductions, especially in junior and support roles. (ft.com)
    These examples show that AI can reduce staffing in specific firms or support functions, but they do not amount to a broad, AI-driven collapse in employment for lawyers and accountants as occupations.

Overall assessment

  • The core of Sacks’s prediction was that as AI tools improve, lawyers and accountants would “be able to get more done” but that this would not necessarily mean “we’ll need less of them.”
  • Current evidence shows (a) clear productivity gains from AI for legal and accounting professionals, and (b) continued or projected growth in overall employment and demand for lawyers and accountants, with shortages and pipeline issues in accounting driven mainly by demographics and career-choice trends rather than by AI substitution. BLS explicitly expects AI-enabled efficiency to change the nature of accounting work, not to reduce overall demand, and projects positive growth for both accountants and lawyers under scenarios that factor in AI. (bls.gov)
    Given the time elapsed (roughly 2.5 years since mid-2023) and the available data, Sacks’s view matches the direction of observed trends: AI has boosted productivity without clearly reducing the total “need” for lawyers and accountants at the occupational level. It remains possible that long-run dynamics will evolve, but as of November 30, 2025, the prediction aligns with the evidence well enough to count as right (so far) rather than inconclusive.
politics
In the 2024 U.S. presidential election cycle, neither the Democratic Party nor the Republican Party will nominate the sitting CEO of a major U.S. bank (such as JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon) as their presidential candidate.
both parties have such a strong populist wing in them right now that I think you can never get the head of the number one bank in the US to be their candidate.View on YouTube
Explanation

In the 2024 U.S. presidential election, the Republican Party officially nominated former President Donald Trump, a real-estate developer and media figure, not a bank CEO. (en.wikipedia.org) The Democratic Party ultimately nominated Vice President Kamala Harris, a career prosecutor and elected official, also not a bank CEO. (en.wikipedia.org) Meanwhile, Jamie Dimon remained CEO of JPMorgan Chase and repeatedly stated he had no plans to run for office, later explaining he chose not to run for president. (cnbc.com) Since neither major party nominated the sitting CEO of a major U.S. bank, Sacks’s prediction that you would “never get the head of the number one bank in the US to be their candidate” was borne out by events.

politicsgovernment
Sacks predicts that if an anti-establishment Democrat like RFK Jr. builds a significant grassroots wave in the 2024 cycle, the Democratic Party establishment will intervene using mechanisms such as superdelegates and party control over the primary process to prevent that candidate from winning the nomination.
I think the Democrat Party will stop it. I mean, they shut down Bernie Sanders, remember that... they rigged the primary against him... the establishment has in the Democratic Party has a huge influence over the outcome because they control the superdelegates, right?View on YouTube
Explanation

Key facts about RFK Jr. and the 2024 Democratic primaries:

  • Robert F. Kennedy Jr. launched a 2024 presidential bid as a Democrat in April 2023, then left the Democratic Party and announced an independent run on October 9, 2023, declaring his “independence from the Democratic party.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  • While a Democratic candidate, RFK Jr. did attract notable grassroots interest, polling around 19–25% among Democratic primary voters, with Biden still clearly ahead (roughly 57–60%). (pjmedia.com) That’s meaningful support but not a frontrunner “wave” on track to win the nomination.
  • RFK Jr. repeatedly accused the DNC of “rigging” the primary via rules changes: no sanctioned primary debates and a reordered calendar that favored Biden (e.g., elevating South Carolina), and he argued that the superdelegate math meant he would need to win an overwhelming share of states to beat Biden. (breitbart.com) He cited these barriers while signaling he might seek “other alternatives,” which he then did by running as an independent.
  • Because RFK Jr. exited the Democratic primaries before any voting, there was never a situation where an anti‑establishment Democrat was actually winning primaries and delegates and then blocked at the convention via superdelegates or similar formal mechanisms. The 2024 Democratic primaries themselves were effectively a low‑contest incumbent race that Biden dominated. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • After Biden later dropped out in 2024, party leaders changed convention rules so superdelegates could vote on the first ballot in a virtual roll call that nominated Kamala Harris, underscoring the establishment’s willingness to use rule changes and superdelegates to shape outcomes. (en.wikipedia.org) But this move was about replacing a faltering incumbent with his vice president, not about stopping a surging anti‑establishment insurgent.
  • Outside the primary context, the Democratic Party and Democratic‑aligned actors did pursue legal and procedural efforts that hindered RFK Jr.’s independent candidacy (e.g., an FEC complaint over alleged illegal coordination with a super PAC, and ballot‑access fights like those in Nevada), but those are not the exact superdelegate/primary‑process scenario the prediction described. (theguardian.com)

Taken together, the condition in Sacks’s prediction—an anti‑establishment Democrat building a sufficiently strong grassroots wave inside the Democratic primaries to plausibly win—never fully materialized. RFK Jr. had meaningful but minority support and left the party before any test of convention‑level intervention, and no similar candidate replaced him.

Because that core scenario never occurred, we cannot definitively say whether the Democratic establishment would have used superdelegates and other primary‑process controls to stop such a candidate. There is suggestive behavior (rule‑rigging accusations, no debates, later use of superdelegates to manage the Harris nomination, aggressive tactics against RFK Jr. as an independent), but no direct, decisive case of an insurgent Democrat being blocked at the convention.

Therefore, the prediction’s truth value is ambiguous: there is circumstantial evidence consistent with Sacks’s expectations about establishment behavior, but the specific “if X, then Y” scenario was never actually tested.

politicsgovernment
Sacks assigns roughly a 10–20% probability that the 2024 US presidential general election matchup will be Gavin Newsom versus Ron DeSantis (i.e., both parties ultimately nominating those two governors).
I said, like over a year ago, I thought that the that 2024 would be Newsom, DeSantis race. I still think there's like a 20% chance of that... Maybe 10%.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that there was a roughly 10–20% chance that the 2024 U.S. presidential general election matchup would be Gavin Newsom vs. Ron DeSantis.

In reality, the 2024 general election was between Donald Trump (Republican) and Kamala Harris (Democrat), with running mates JD Vance and Tim Walz, respectively; neither Newsom nor DeSantis was on either major-party ticket. (en.wikipedia.org)

On the Democratic side, Joe Biden initially ran for re‑election, then withdrew in July 2024; Kamala Harris subsequently became the Democratic nominee. Gavin Newsom never entered the 2024 presidential race and had previously indicated he would not challenge Biden, instead endorsing Biden’s re‑election bid. (en.wikipedia.org)

On the Republican side, Ron DeSantis did run in the primaries but suspended his campaign on January 21, 2024 and endorsed Donald Trump, who then secured the Republican nomination at the July 2024 Republican National Convention. (en.wikipedia.org)

Since the specific scenario “Newsom vs. DeSantis” did not occur as the 2024 general election matchup, the event to which Sacks assigned 10–20% probability failed to happen. Interpreting the question as “Did that predicted matchup materialize?”, the prediction is therefore wrong in outcome terms, even though assigning a low probability to an event that doesn’t occur is not necessarily poor probabilistic calibration.

economy
When looking back from mid-2024, professional economists will date the start of the then-current U.S. recession to sometime in the past (i.e., that a recession was already underway as of mid-2023).
I think the economists a year from now may say that the recession had already begun.View on YouTube
Explanation

By mid‑2024, neither the official U.S. business‑cycle arbiters nor the broad community of professional economists had concluded that a new recession was underway, let alone one that had already begun in mid‑2023.

  • The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the standard reference for dating U.S. recessions, still listed the last recession as running from February–April 2020; its expansions‑and‑contractions table shows no new peak or recession start after that date as of its latest update, meaning no 2022–2023 recession has been officially dated. (nber.org)
  • Data for 2023 show solid economic performance rather than recessionary conditions: real GDP grew about 2.5% in 2023, unemployment averaged a very low 3.6%, employment hit record highs, and real wages rose slightly after inflation. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Entering and through early‑to‑mid 2024, major forecasts and official outlooks commonly described a likely or ongoing soft landing—slower growth but no recession. The Congressional Budget Office projected a soft landing in 2024 with continued (albeit slower) growth and disinflation rather than a downturn. (axios.com) Federal Reserve officials similarly grew more confident that the economy would avoid recession. (investopedia.com)
  • Ratings agencies and large forecasters revised earlier recession calls to “no recession” or low odds of recession in 2024, again implying that they did not view a recession as already in progress dating back to 2023. (forbes.com)
  • More broadly, commentary in early 2024 characterized the U.S. as a standout case of reducing inflation while maintaining growth—often explicitly framed as achieving or nearing a soft landing rather than being in a recession that had begun the prior year. (en.wikipedia.org)

While a few dissenting voices claimed the U.S. was in a “soft” or “rolling” recession, the mainstream professional and official view by mid‑2024 was that the U.S. had not entered a new recession in 2023. Therefore, Sacks’s prediction that economists a year later would say “the recession had already begun” is best judged wrong.

economymarkets
Following the 2022–2023 monetary tightening and liquidity withdrawal, there will be a large wave ('tsunami') of company failures and bankruptcies in the subsequent period (roughly the next 1–3 years).
The money is being sucked out of the system like the tide before tsunami and tsunami is going to be all the failures and bankruptcies.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the 2022–2023 tightening strongly supports Sacks’s prediction of a large subsequent wave of company failures and bankruptcies.

  • Sharp monetary tightening and liquidity withdrawal. Between March 2022 and July 2023 the Fed raised the federal funds rate from near 0% to 5.25–5.50%, the fastest and largest hiking cycle in decades, after years of near‑zero rates and quantitative easing.(forbes.com) This is the “money being sucked out of the system” backdrop Sacks was referring to.

  • Corporate bankruptcies rose to post‑GFC highs.

    • In 2023, U.S. corporate bankruptcy filings (public + certain large private firms) jumped from the unusually low 2021–2022 levels and were already described as the highest since around 2010, driven largely by higher interest rates.(spglobal.com)
    • In 2024, filings reached 694–695, explicitly noted by S&P Global and other outlets as the highest annual total since 2010, with elevated interest rates and strained consumer finances cited as the main causes.(spglobal.com)
    • In 2025, the trend continued: by October there were already 655 filings, and S&P/Reuters reported that 2025 was on pace to hit the highest level of U.S. corporate bankruptcies in about 15 years.(investing.com)
  • Startup and VC‑backed failures surged.

    • Carta data show startup shutdowns rose from 467 in 2022 to 770 in 2023, the highest number since Carta began tracking, with analysts calling 2023 “the most fatal year for startups,” driven by a hostile funding climate after the 2021–22 boom.(forbes.com)
    • By Q1 2024, 254 venture‑backed U.S. startups had already failed, a 58% year‑over‑year increase and the highest quarterly total of the decade; the rise is attributed to companies running out of cash as venture funding and venture debt tightened.(techmonitor.ai)
    • One 2025 review estimates 966 U.S. startups shut down in 2024, up ~26% from 769 in 2023, describing a continuing “wave of shutdowns” linked to overfunding in 2020–21 and subsequent funding scarcity.(founderstoday.news)

Across both large corporates and venture‑backed startups, failures and bankruptcies have climbed to their highest levels since the aftermath of the Great Recession, clearly above the calm period that preceded the 2022–2023 tightening. While not on the scale of 2008–2009, the data show a broad, multi‑year spike in distress that matches Sacks’s qualitative prediction of a big post‑tightening “tsunami” of failures within the 1–3 year window he suggested.

politics
As of May 2023, Sacks predicts that Trump’s CNN town hall performance increases the likelihood that Trump will win the 2024 Republican presidential nomination.
I do think it makes him more likely to be the nominee.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ statement was: “I do think it makes him more likely to be the nominee.” This is a claim about the change in probability of Donald Trump winning the 2024 Republican presidential nomination as a result of the CNN town hall, not a direct prediction that Trump will or won’t become the nominee.

Factually, Donald Trump did go on to win the 2024 Republican presidential nomination; he was formally nominated at the Republican National Convention in July 2024, after dominating the primary process and securing the required delegates earlier in the year.

However, whether the CNN town hall increased the likelihood of that outcome is a counterfactual causal claim: we cannot observe the alternative timeline in which the town hall did not occur and compare probabilities. Because of that, the truth of the specific normalized prediction — that the town hall made Trump more likely to win the nomination — cannot be definitively verified or falsified from observable data, even though we know the eventual outcome.

Therefore, the appropriate classification is "ambiguous": enough time has passed and the nomination outcome is known, but the causal effect of the town hall on Trump’s likelihood of winning cannot be determined from available evidence.

politics
Sacks predicts that during the 2024 campaign, if Trump is the Republican nominee, President Biden will largely run a low-key ‘Rose Garden’ campaign, appearing roughly once a week to respond to Trump, and will not actively campaign at a high-energy pace due to lack of vigor.
He'll do a Rose garden campaign where once a week, he goes in front of the microphones and responds to whatever Trump's latest outrage is. He doesn't have the vigor to campaign, and he won't.View on YouTube
Explanation

The key conditions of Sacks’s prediction did not materialize as described:

  • Trump did become the 2024 Republican nominee and general-election candidate. He clinched the GOP nomination on March 12, 2024, was officially nominated in July, and went on to win the November 5, 2024 election. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Biden did not actually run the general-election campaign against Trump. Although he announced a reelection bid on April 25, 2023 and then dominated the Democratic primaries, Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024 after a widely panned June 27 debate with Trump. Kamala Harris then launched her own campaign the same day; she became the Democratic nominee on August 5, 2024 and ultimately lost to Trump. (en.wikipedia.org) So the specific scenario Sacks described—Biden vs. Trump in the fall campaign—never fully occurred.

  • While Biden was still a candidate in early 2024, his campaign activity was substantially more than “once a week” and not purely a low-key Rose Garden posture. An Axios analysis of his schedule found that through June 30, 2024, Biden held about 90 domestic events outside the D.C. area, roughly 3–4 per week, and had visited more swing states than Trump by that point. His travel was lighter than Obama’s 2012 reelection schedule but heavier than Trump’s pandemic-affected 2020 schedule, indicating a moderately active campaign, not a once‑a‑week response operation. (axios.com) Major campaign events included high-profile speeches near Valley Forge (Jan. 5), at Mother Emanuel AME in Charleston (Jan. 8), and a large March 28 fundraiser at Radio City Music Hall with Obama and Clinton. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Biden did adopt some elements criticized as a Rose Garden–style or low-visibility approach—mainly in press access, not campaign travel. He held relatively few formal press conferences and sit-down interviews compared to recent presidents, and commentators and allies at various points described or contemplated a “Rose Garden strategy” or “split-screen” approach that leveraged incumbency while Republicans fought among themselves. (washingtonpost.com) But this referred primarily to media and messaging strategy, not to the kind of once‑weekly campaign schedule Sacks predicted.

Because (1) Biden did not end up running the full 2024 campaign as the Democratic nominee against Trump, and (2) during the time he was a candidate his schedule involved many more than one brief appearance per week and a real—if somewhat lighter—campaign travel cadence, the prediction that he would essentially retreat to a low‑energy, once‑weekly Rose Garden campaign turned out to be wrong.

politics
Sacks predicts that by approximately late 2024, after about 18 months of Trump dominating media coverage, voter fatigue with Trump will lead enough Americans to choose Biden despite concerns about his cognition, resulting in Biden’s reelection if the matchup is Biden vs. Trump.
I think that it's it's quite possible here that after 18 months of Trump and the media beating each other up, the American people just say, you know what? This Biden guy is totally senile. But I'm like, so tired of the the Trump show. I've got Trump fatigue again. I'm just going to have to go with Biden. And I think I think this is how Biden gets reelected.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ forecast was explicitly conditional on a Biden vs. Trump rematch, where sustained media saturation around Trump would create renewed “Trump fatigue” and lead enough voters to re‑elect Biden despite concerns about his cognitive decline.

In reality:

  • Joe Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024, citing the best interests of his party and the country, and endorsed Kamala Harris to be the Democratic nominee.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Kamala Harris became the Democratic nominee and faced Donald Trump in the general election.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • On November 5, 2024, Donald Trump defeated Kamala Harris, winning 312 electoral votes to 226 and carrying the popular vote as well; Biden left office on January 20, 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because the key condition of the prediction—a Biden vs. Trump general election—never occurred, we cannot directly observe whether voters would have re‑elected Biden out of Trump fatigue despite worries about his cognition. The actual outcome (Trump defeating Harris) doesn’t cleanly confirm or falsify the conditional claim itself.

Given that the contingency failed, the prediction’s truth value cannot be determined, so it is best classified as ambiguous rather than right or wrong.

conflict
Sacks predicts that by the end of 2023, the Russia–Ukraine war will be an even worse debacle for Ukraine than it appeared in May 2023, implying significantly deteriorated conditions or outcomes for Ukraine.
So this war is turning into a debacle. I think it could be an even worse debacle by the end of the year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evaluating this prediction depends heavily on subjective judgments about what qualifies as an “even worse debacle” for Ukraine than in May 2023.

Key facts about the war in May 2023 (baseline):

  • Russia’s full‑scale invasion had stalled after major Russian failures around Kyiv (2022) and significant Ukrainian counteroffensives in Kharkiv and Kherson (late 2022).
  • By spring 2023, the front lines were relatively static, with Russia mounting costly offensives (e.g., around Bakhmut) for limited gains, while Ukraine was preparing a counteroffensive with growing Western aid and advanced weapons (HIMARS, tanks, etc.).

At that time, many analysts saw Ukraine as having serious challenges but still with realistic prospects for further gains, given Western support and Russia’s earlier battlefield failures.

Situation by the end of 2023:

  • Ukraine’s 2023 counteroffensive (launched in June) achieved limited territorial gains and fell far short of optimistic public expectations, with very high Ukrainian casualties and significant equipment losses. Western and Ukrainian officials and independent analysts widely described the offensive as disappointing or a stalemate.
  • Russia largely held its defensive lines in the south and east, and by late 2023 was transitioning back to offensive operations in some sectors, leveraging mobilization and a war‑time economy.
  • Ukraine continued to suffer heavy damage to its energy and civilian infrastructure from Russian missile and drone attacks, while Western political debates about sustaining aid (especially in the U.S. and E.U.) intensified in late 2023.
  • However, Ukraine did not experience a strategic collapse: no major new loss of a capital‑scale city beyond places already contested (like Bakhmut); Kyiv and much of the territory liberated in 2022 remained under Ukrainian control; and Ukraine scored some notable successes, especially in the Black Sea (e.g., pushing back the Russian Black Sea Fleet presence and enabling alternative grain export routes).

Why the prediction is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong:

  • In favor of “right”: Relative to expectations in May 2023, by December 2023 Ukraine’s position looked worse than hoped: the counteroffensive underperformed, casualties were very high, Russia was adapting militarily and industrially, and Western support looked less assured. Many commentators described the situation as a stalemate trending unfavorably for Ukraine.
  • In favor of “wrong”: A “debacle” usually implies an outright disaster or collapse. Ukraine did not lose the war, Kyiv did not fall, and Ukraine maintained political cohesion, continued to receive major Western support, and achieved some strategic successes. The line of contact in late 2023 was not dramatically worse for Ukraine than in May 2023; in some domains (naval/Black Sea, international support frameworks), Ukraine’s situation was arguably stronger.

Because “even worse debacle” is a highly normative and qualitative claim, and the end‑2023 situation can reasonably be interpreted either as:

  • a significantly deteriorated strategic position, or
  • a costly stalemate but not an outright disaster relative to May 2023,

there is no objective, widely accepted benchmark that clearly confirms or falsifies the prediction. Reasonable analysts can and do disagree about whether the change from May to December 2023 meets the threshold of an “even worse debacle.”

Therefore, the fairest classification is: ambiguous — the outcome cannot be determined as clearly right or clearly wrong based on available, mainstream factual assessments.

economy
Sacks predicts that the U.S. banking turmoil evident in May 2023 will continue and develop into a major fiasco (a serious, extended banking crisis) over the ensuing period (through at least the next several months).
The economy has a banking crisis going on. It's turning into a big fiasco.View on YouTube
Explanation

By the time of the May 12, 2023 episode, the U.S. was indeed in acute banking turmoil following the collapses of Silicon Valley Bank, Signature Bank, and First Republic—three of the largest bank failures in U.S. history.(en.wikipedia.org) But the normalized prediction you gave treats Sacks as forecasting that this turmoil would continue and develop into a serious, extended banking crisis over the ensuing months.

What actually happened is that the crisis was sharp but short-lived and was largely contained:

  • In all of 2023 there were 5 U.S. bank failures; only three were large, with two small additional failures later in the year.(forbes.com) In 2024–2025 there were just a handful of small additional failures, far fewer than during 2009–2011.(archive.fdic.gov) This pattern does not resemble a prolonged, system‑wide fiasco.
  • The Federal Reserve’s Bank Term Funding Program and other interventions are widely credited with averting a broader systemic banking crisis; the program expired in March 2024 after doing its job.(federalreserve.gov) The BIS similarly noted that large 2023 failures “did not lead to a systemic crisis.”(bis.org)
  • By 2024–2025, the FDIC reported its insurance fund recovering faster than expected, and U.S. banks returned to solid profitability with rising deposits and strong capital and liquidity.(reuters.com)

So while there was a real but brief banking shock in spring 2023, it did not evolve into the extended, escalating fiasco implied by the prediction. Hence the prediction is best judged wrong.

politics
Sacks predicts that if the 2024 U.S. presidential election is a Biden vs. Trump matchup, the race will be extremely close, effectively a toss-up with no clear favorite heading into the election.
I think this thing's going to be a nail biter. I think it's going to be a toss up if it's Biden versus Trump.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: Sacks said that if the 2024 election were Biden vs. Trump, it would be a nail-biter/toss‑up with no clear favorite.

That condition never occurred. President Joe Biden withdrew from the 2024 race on July 21, 2024 and endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris, who became the Democratic nominee. The actual general‑election matchup was Donald Trump vs. Kamala Harris, not Biden vs. Trump. (nypost.com) Because the hypothesized Biden–Trump contest never happened, we can’t directly test how close it would have been “heading into the election.”

We do have polling data from when Biden was still running. In late June–July 2024, national polling averages and aggregators generally showed Trump leading Biden by about 2–4 percentage points nationally, e.g. RealClearPolitics, The Hill, and other averages had Trump up roughly 3 points at the time Biden exited. (en.wikipedia.org) Some modelers, such as Nate Silver, explicitly described Trump as a clear favorite rather than a toss‑up, putting Trump’s win probability around 65–66% vs. Biden. (nypost.com) That evidence suggests the race at that time was somewhat close in the numbers but not universally regarded as an even “toss‑up.”

After Biden withdrew, the race became Trump vs. Harris, and many analysts did characterize that contest as extremely close—Harry Enten, for example, called the 2024 election the closest presidential race in at least 60 years based on Harris–Trump polling. (vanityfair.com) But that pertains to a different matchup than the one Sacks specified.

Because the specific Biden–Trump general election Sacks was talking about never actually occurred, and we can’t observe how that hypothetical race would have looked right before Election Day, the truth of his conditional prediction cannot be definitively determined even though the 2024 cycle is over.

Hence the assessment: ambiguous.

economypolitics
In the month following this May 5, 2023 recording, if Republicans and Democrats fail to reach agreement on the U.S. debt ceiling, the U.S. economy could suffer a severe negative shock ("go off a cliff") tied to a debt-ceiling-related crisis.
And the the country's economy might go off a cliff in the next month because Republicans and Democrats can't agree.
Explanation

Within a month of the May 5, 2023 recording, Republicans and Democrats did ultimately reach a bipartisan agreement on the debt ceiling: the Fiscal Responsibility Act of 2023 was introduced May 29, passed the House May 31, passed the Senate June 1, and was signed by President Biden on June 3, 2023, suspending the debt limit until January 2025. 【1†cite】 As a result, the antecedent of the normalized prediction ("if Republicans and Democrats fail to reach agreement on the U.S. debt ceiling") never occurred, so the conditional statement was never directly tested.

Empirically, the U.S. economy did not "go off a cliff" in that month. Analyses at the time judged the eventual deal’s macroeconomic drag to be small, with little expected impact on near‑term growth. 【0†cite】 The labor market in May 2023 remained strong, adding about 339,000 jobs with unemployment at 3.7%, and financial markets reacted positively once a deal was in view. 【2†cite】 Q2 2023 real GDP grew at an annualized rate of about 2.4%, exceeding expectations and indicating continued expansion rather than a sudden contraction. 【3†cite】

However, expert and official analyses made clear that if the debt ceiling had not been raised and the U.S. had actually defaulted, the economy likely would have suffered a severe negative shock: the White House Council of Economic Advisers, Brookings, Moody’s, and others warned of an "economic catastrophe," deep recession, and millions of job losses in a breach scenario. 【3†cite】【8†cite】 That consensus supports the plausibility of Sacks’s conditional claim that the economy could "go off a cliff" in the event of a genuine failure to agree.

Because the condition (no eventual agreement) never materialized, reality only shows that the worst‑case outcome didn’t happen, not whether his specific conditional forecast ("if no deal, then a cliff‑like shock is possible") was right or wrong. Thus the correct scoring is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

politicstech
In the 2024 U.S. election cycle, podcasts will become the primary or dominant communication channel through which unorthodox political candidates bypass traditional media to reach voters with their message.
I think, in 2024. I think that podcast could break. Podcasts will be the way that unorthodox candidates get their message out.
Explanation

Evidence from the 2024 cycle clearly shows that podcasts became very important channels for several high‑profile, non-establishment candidates, but it’s hard to prove they were the primary or dominant channel across “unorthodox candidates” as a class.

On the supportive side:

  • NPR described Robert F. Kennedy Jr.’s effort explicitly as a “podcast‑centric presidential campaign,” noting that he appeared on a “flurry of podcasts” (Joe Rogan, Jordan Peterson, Megyn Kelly, Russell Brand, All‑In, etc.) and quoting him saying podcasts let “dissident and insurgent candidates like myself…end‑run the corporate media monoliths” to reach large audiences without going on the networks. (nprillinois.org)
  • Wired reported that RFK Jr. ran a digital‑first campaign heavily built on influencer collaborations and numerous podcasts, to the point that he was being positioned as a “podcast candidate.” (wired.com)
  • TIME detailed how both RFK Jr. and Vivek Ramaswamy leaned heavily on podcasts: RFK’s Rogan appearance spiked his book sales, and Ramaswamy launched his own show and went on dozens of others as part of a deliberate media play to build name recognition. (time.com)
  • Politico (summarized in Ramaswamy’s campaign profile) reported that he had appeared on over 150 podcasts by August 2023, calling it an “always‑on” media strategy that generated more online content than any competitor. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Research and reporting on Tenet Media and similar networks show podcasts being systematically used to push political narratives and feature insurgent right‑wing figures like Kari Lake and others, further underlining that podcasts became central infrastructure for outsider and fringe messaging in the 2024 cycle. (en.wikipedia.org)

On the limiting side:

  • Even in 2024, candidates’ outreach ecosystems remained multi‑channel: social media (X, TikTok, YouTube), email/SMS, rallies, and occasional TV hits all mattered alongside podcasts. Major coverage still framed podcasts as one powerful alternative medium, not conclusively the dominant one for all unorthodox candidates.
  • Broader analysis (e.g., the Washington Post, citing Pew) characterizes podcasts as highly influential and particularly important in spreading election‑related narratives, but stops short of showing that they overtook other digital platforms as the primary communication channel across outsider campaigns. (washingtonpost.com)

Because the available evidence strongly supports the direction of Sacks’s prediction (podcasts becoming a key way for unorthodox candidates to bypass traditional media) but does not decisively establish that they were the primary/dominant channel across such candidates, the outcome is best classified as ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

economy
The U.S. economy will enter a recession in the near term following this April 2023 discussion, i.e., during the 2023 economic cycle.
I think that we are headed for it seems like a recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

Using the official arbiter of U.S. business cycles, the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), the last declared recession ran from February 2020 (peak) to April 2020 (trough), and NBER lists no subsequent peaks or troughs—meaning no new recession has been dated through at least late 2025. (nber.org) Real GDP growth was solidly positive in 2023 (around 2.5–3.1% for the year), indicating expansion rather than contraction. (reuters.com) Available data and commentary for 2024–2025 likewise show continued—if slower—growth and only a single quarter of mild contraction in Q1 2025, which analysts explicitly note does not constitute a recession. (desjardins.com) Because no NBER-defined recession occurred in the "near term" after April 2023 or during the 2023 economic cycle, Sacks’s prediction that the U.S. was “headed for…a recession” in that window did not come true.

Sacks @ 00:38:54Inconclusive
economy
Owners who buy heavily vacant San Francisco office towers at distressed prices in 2023 will need to hold them for approximately 5–10 years before office demand and rents recover enough for the investment to make economic sense.
So you're going to be sitting on that property for five years, ten years before the market comes back the way that you need it to.View on YouTube
Explanation

It’s too early to definitively judge a 5–10 year holding-period prediction made in April 2023, because we are only about 2.5 years into that window.

What we can say so far:

  • The San Francisco office market remains deeply distressed. Q4 2024 vacancy was still about 30.2%, even as Colliers declared the market had just reached its trough and only begun a tentative recovery. (colliers.com)
  • By Q3 2025, vacancy was still around 31.8%, with availability above 35% and broker commentary that a “significant amount of space must be absorbed before a meaningful recovery can take hold.” (cresa.com)
  • Mid‑2025 estimates show asking office rents down roughly 30% from their 2019 peak, and top-tier buildings still carrying vacancy rates above 25%, indicating values and cash flows have not recovered to levels that would make many distressed 2023 tower buys clearly successful yet. (mmcginvest.com)
  • A San Francisco Controller’s Office analysis suggests office property values may not return to pre‑pandemic levels until after 2034, implying a decade‑plus recovery path from 2024—consistent with a multi‑year, not quick, rebound. (sfchronicle.com)
  • Distressed Class A office trades at large discounts continue (e.g., a major Financial District complex sold around half the prior loan value in 2025), underscoring ongoing stress in exactly the kind of large towers the prediction referenced. (hughesmarino.com)

These data all support the spirit of Sacks’s claim that buyers of heavily vacant towers in 2023 would not see a rapid rebound, and that a long hold is likely required. However, the specific horizon of 5–10 years (i.e., recovery by roughly 2028–2033) cannot yet be confirmed or falsified, since those dates are still in the future.

Therefore, the correct classification today is “inconclusive (too early)”: the prediction is consistent with current conditions and official forecasts, but it has not yet reached the point where it can be definitively judged right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:39:57Inconclusive
economymarkets
San Francisco’s downtown office vacancy rate, which is already above 30% in April 2023, will likely rise further and may reach around 40% as existing leases roll off and tenants shed additional space over the subsequent few years.
So they're at 30% plus. And like I said, it could get worse before it gets better because as Lisa's role people are going to shed more space that they might not already be subleasing. So the real number might be like 40%.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that S.F.’s office vacancy did rise significantly above 30% after April 2023, peaking in the high‑30s, but has not (so far) clearly reached 40% on standard vacancy measures, and the “few years” window from April 2023 has not fully elapsed.

Key points:

  • Around the time of the podcast, CBRE data put San Francisco’s office vacancy roughly in the low‑30% range; for example, by July 2023 the San Francisco Standard, citing CBRE, reported a record 31.6% vacancy rate and said it was expected to keep rising. (sfstandard.com)
  • By late 2023, vacancy had already climbed much higher: ABC7, again citing CBRE, reported “a little over 35%” vacancy in downtown San Francisco as of December 1, 2023, the highest ever recorded at that time. (abc7news.com)
  • Through 2024, CBRE’s figures show vacancy continuing to worsen into the high‑30s. Axios reported 36.7% in Q1 2024 and 36.8% in Q2 2024, both new records. (axios.com) The Real Deal, citing CBRE, reported that vacancy was projected to hit 37.0% in Q2 2024 and then “rose past 37%” to about 37.3% in Q3 2024, again setting a record. (therealdeal.com)
  • Those same CBRE-based reports note that availability (vacant plus actively marketed space) reached roughly 39–39.4% in mid‑2024, i.e., near but still below 40%. (therealdeal.com)
  • By 2025, multiple CBRE summaries indicate the market has started to improve rather than continue rising toward 40%: vacancy edged down to about 36.6% in Q1 2025 and then to 35.1% in Q2 2025, with three consecutive quarters of positive absorption driven largely by AI tenants. (sfchronicle.com)

Interpretation:

  • Directionally, Sacks’s claim that vacancy would “get worse before it gets better” was correct: it rose from low‑30s to about 37% before beginning to decline.
  • However, the more specific part of the prediction – that the real downtown vacancy could reach around 40% as leases rolled off – has not yet clearly materialized in the aggregate vacancy statistics. Vacancy peaked in the 37–38% range; availability briefly approached but did not obviously exceed 40%.
  • Because he framed 40% as a plausible level “as” leases roll off over the subsequent few years, and that few‑years window from April 2023 (roughly through at least April 2026) has not yet finished, we cannot definitively say the 40% threshold will not be hit in a later downturn.

Given that (a) vacancy so far has risen substantially but only to the high‑30s, and (b) the forecast horizon has not fully run its course, the fairest assessment as of November 30, 2025 is that the prediction’s 40% figure is not yet confirmed or refuted. Hence: inconclusive (too early).

Sacks @ 00:43:20Inconclusive
marketseconomy
San Francisco’s downtown office market will not return to a normal/healthy vacancy range (roughly 5–15%) for at least five years and possibly up to about a decade after 2023; i.e., sustained elevated vacancy will persist into at least the late 2020s and potentially early 2030s.
I mean, five years plus. I mean, just to give you some numbers... So they're at 30% plus. And like I said, it could get worse before it gets better... So like a decade, I think it's like, yeah, it doesn't seem like a decade. Feels like it's a decade.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, only about 2.5 years have passed since the April 28, 2023 prediction, and Sacks’ claim concerned a period of at least five years (into 2028) and possibly up to a decade, so it cannot yet be definitively confirmed or falsified. Current data show San Francisco’s office vacancy still extremely elevated—around 30–35% in late 2024 and early 2025, compared with pre‑pandemic “healthy” levels near 4.7–6%—so downtown has certainly not returned to a normal 5–15% vacancy range yet, which is exactly what one would expect this early in his timeline. (cresa.com) Longer‑term analyses from the city and multiple real estate research firms project that office values and vacancies may take a decade or more to get back to pre‑COVID norms, which qualitatively aligns with the spirit of his forecast but are still just projections, not outcomes. (sfchronicle.com) Because we have not yet reached the earliest point at which his prediction could be proven wrong (a sub‑15% vacancy rate before 2028), the prediction’s accuracy is still inconclusive (too early to tell).

economy
David Sacks maintains his prediction (as of April 28, 2023) that the U.S. economy will enter a recession in the near future, i.e., within the upcoming business cycle following this statement.
I'm sticking by it. I think we're still going to have a recessionView on YouTube
Explanation

By November 30, 2025, the U.S. has not experienced an officially recognized recession since the brief COVID downturn in early 2020. The National Bureau of Economic Research’s (NBER) business‑cycle chronology still lists the most recent peak as February 2020 and the trough as April 2020, with no subsequent peak or recession dated after that, implying the expansion that began in May 2020 is ongoing. (nber.org)

Economic data over the 2023–2025 period show slowing but continued growth rather than a broad, sustained contraction. Real GDP did contract slightly at a –0.3% annualized rate in Q1 2025, but detailed analysis notes that final domestic demand was still growing, and explicitly concludes that the U.S. economy was not in recession that quarter. (desjardins.com) Major forecasters through 2024–2025 described the outlook as a “soft landing” or at worst a mild slowdown, repeatedly emphasizing that the economy was not in recession, even as risks rose. (goldmansachs.com) Other contemporaneous commentary likewise characterizes the national economy as weak or vulnerable but not yet in recession as of late 2025. (economictimes.indiatimes.com)

Since more than two years have passed since Sacks’ April 28, 2023 statement and no NBER‑defined recession or clear broad downturn has occurred in that interval, his prediction that the U.S. was “still going to have a recession” in the near term has, to date, not come true. Thus, on the evidence available by late 2025, the prediction is best classified as wrong rather than merely “too early to tell.”

ventureai
In the AI wave starting in early 2023, dozens (at least 24) of new startup unicorns (valuations ≥$1B) will be created globally over the subsequent ~2 years (by around mid-2025), driven specifically by AI technologies.
there's a reason now to believe that, say, dozens of unicorns could be created in the next couple of years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available venture data show that far more than “dozens” of new AI‑driven startup unicorns were created globally in the ~2 years after early 2023.

Key points:

  • Using CB Insights data, AltIndex reports that 83 companies became unicorns in 2024, of which 36 were AI startups (≈45%), and that 22 AI startups reached unicorn status in 2023. That’s ≈58 new AI unicorns across 2023–2024 alone.(altindex.com) Even if you restrict to the post‑ChatGPT “AI wave” (early 2023 onward), this is well above the “dozens (≥24)” threshold.
  • A UBS report based on CB Insights similarly finds 186 AI unicorns by end‑2023, with 16 new AI unicorns added in 2023.(scribd.com) Combined with the 36 new AI unicorns in 2024, that still implies >50 new AI unicorns in 2023–2024, comfortably satisfying the prediction.
  • CB Insights’ own “State of AI” / Generative AI reports note that out of 16 new AI unicorns in 2023 year‑to‑date, 11 were generative‑AI companies, showing that a large share of unicorn creation was directly driven by AI technologies.(edocr.com)
  • A Nikkei/CB Insights analysis cited by NASSCOM shows generative‑AI unicorns alone grew from 20 at end‑April 2023 to about 37 by mid‑2024 (an 85% increase), and that generative‑AI startups made up around 60% of new unicorns at that point, again underscoring how much of new unicorn formation was AI‑driven.(community.nasscom.in)
  • These counts refer specifically to startups whose core business is AI (including generative AI, AI infrastructure, and AI applications), matching the spirit of the prediction that the “AI wave” itself would mint the new unicorns.

Because multiple independent tallies based on CB Insights data show well over two dozen new AI unicorns, and in fact several dozen, created worldwide between 2023 and 2024 (before mid‑2025), sacks’s forecast that “dozens of unicorns could be created in the next couple of years” by the AI wave is borne out by the data.

aiventure
By around mid-2025, multiple (at least 2 each) AI unicorns will exist in: (1) AI infrastructure (e.g., vector databases, agent platforms) and (2) AI copilot products targeted at specific professional categories (e.g., coding, medicine, law, architecture).
I do think there will be dozens of new unicorns minted in various aspects of AI. It could be in AI infrastructure... or it could be in AI copilots... I think there's going to be potentially multiple unicorns created in in those categories.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence by mid‑2025 shows multiple AI unicorns in both of the categories Sacks described.

1. AI infrastructure unicorns ("vector databases, agent platforms," broader infra)

  • CoreWeave: An AI cloud‑infrastructure provider focused on GPU‑based compute for AI workloads. By May 2024 it raised a $1.1B round at about a $19B valuation, and its IPO in March 2025 valued it around $19–23B, clearly making it an AI infrastructure unicorn well before and by mid‑2025. (time.com)
  • Scale AI: Provides data and evaluation infrastructure for training and deploying AI models. It has been a unicorn since 2019 and reached $13–14B valuation in 2024, explicitly framed as core AI infrastructure. (cxotech.com)
  • Crusoe: Described as a “vertically integrated AI infrastructure provider” with AI‑optimized data centers. It joined the unicorn club in 2022 and later raised funding at a $2.8B valuation in 2024 and $10B valuation in 2025, confirming its status as an AI infrastructure unicorn throughout the relevant period. (investclub.sv)
  • 01.AI: An LLM company that developed efficient AI infrastructure and inference engines; it achieved unicorn status (> $1B valuation) in November 2023, again prior to mid‑2025. (en.wikipedia.org)

These examples show far more than two distinct AI infrastructure unicorns existing by mid‑2025, in line with Sacks’s expectation for that segment.

2. Vertical/professional AI copilot unicorns

  • Poolside: Builds an AI‑powered coding copilot; in June 2024 it raised $400M at a $2B valuation, making it a unicorn developer‑tools copilot. (interstellardesign.studio)
  • Harvey: Markets itself explicitly as an AI "copilot" for lawyers, automating legal research and drafting. A July 24, 2024 funding round valued Harvey at $1.5B, establishing it as a legal‑AI copilot unicorn well before mid‑2025; subsequent rounds later pushed this much higher. (news.aibase.com)
  • OpenEvidence: Business Insider’s May 7, 2025 report describes OpenEvidence as an AI copilot for doctors that helps clinicians access and interpret medical research, noting it raised capital at a $1B valuation with only ~20 employees. (businessinsider.com)

By mid‑2025 there are therefore multiple unicorns each for coding, law, and medicine copilots, satisfying the prediction that there would be “multiple unicorns” in the professional copilot category.

3. Overall context: “Dozens of new unicorns” in AI Independent market analyses report dozens of new AI unicorns: one 2025 funding overview notes 47 new AI unicorns in 2024 alone, across infrastructure, healthcare, platforms, and applications. (secondtalent.com) This supports Sacks’s broader claim that many unicorns would be minted across AI, not just in the two example sub‑segments.

Given (a) the clear presence of multiple AI infrastructure unicorns and (b) multiple profession‑specific copilot unicorns by around mid‑2025, Sacks’s prediction—both in spirit and in the normalized form you provided—has been borne out by events.

governmentmarketseconomy
U.S. regulatory actions starting by early 2023 will effectively amount to a ban on most significant crypto activity in the United States, causing a substantial share of major crypto companies and new crypto startups to relocate their primary operations to foreign jurisdictions over the next few years (by ~2026).
I think Chamath is right that they're effectively banning crypto in the United States. They're going to drive all these companies overseas, which is terrible for American innovation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction has two key parts: (1) U.S. regulation would effectively ban most significant crypto activity and (2) this would drive a substantial share of major crypto companies and new startups to move their primary operations overseas by around 2026. As of late 2025, both are contradicted by observable facts.

  1. No effective ban on most significant crypto activity

    • The SEC approved 11 spot Bitcoin ETFs in January 2024, integrating bitcoin exposure into mainstream U.S. capital markets rather than banning it. (apnews.com)
    • In September 2025, the SEC adopted generic listing standards that make it easier to launch a wide range of crypto ETFs (including multi-asset products), indicating increasing formalization, not prohibition. (investopedia.com)
    • Banking regulators that had previously issued very cautious crypto guidance under Biden reversed course in 2025: the OCC and FDIC both rescinded prior restrictive guidance and explicitly allowed banks to engage in crypto custody, stablecoin activities, and other digital-asset services, subject to risk management. (reuters.com)
    • Major U.S. exchanges like Coinbase, Kraken, and Gemini continue to operate large U.S. businesses. While there were enforcement actions (e.g., Kraken’s forced shutdown of U.S. staking in 2023; SEC lawsuits against Binance and Coinbase), these targeted specific products/legal theories rather than banning trading, custody, development, or mining broadly. (sec.gov)
    • By 2024–2025, the regulatory trend is loosening, not tightening: the SEC has been dropping or settling several high‑profile enforcement actions against major exchanges under a more crypto‑friendly administration. (theverge.com)
      Taken together, U.S. policy created friction and uncertainty, but the presence of regulated ETFs, active exchanges, public crypto companies, and newly relaxed banking rules is incompatible with an “effective ban on most significant crypto activity.”
  2. No clear evidence of a mass relocation of primary operations overseas

    • Several U.S. firms did expand abroad or choose foreign hubs for regional operations — for example, Coinbase picking Ireland (later Luxembourg) as its MiCA hub for the EU, explicitly to grow outside the U.S. amid regulatory pressure at home. (cnbc.com)
    • Venture firm a16z opened a London crypto office in 2023 citing a more predictable regime than the U.S., but then closed that London office in 2025 and refocused on the U.S. market after the political/regulatory environment shifted. (cointelegraph.com)
    • Major issuers like Circle and major exchanges like Coinbase and Gemini remain U.S. companies: Circle lists extensive U.S. state licenses and executed a NYSE IPO in 2025; Coinbase is a large S&P 500‑component U.S. exchange; Gemini completed a Nasdaq IPO in 2025. None of these have shifted their primary corporate identity away from the U.S. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Developer data show the U.S. share of global crypto developers has declined materially since 2018, but the U.S. is still the single largest country for crypto developers (roughly ~19–26% depending on the year), indicating erosion of leadership but not a wholesale exodus of primary activity. (developerreport.com)
      There is some movement of talent and some product lines overseas, but the evidence does not support that a substantial share of major crypto companies or the bulk of new startups have relocated their primary operations abroad. Instead, U.S. firms have adopted a multi‑jurisdictional strategy while keeping core corporate structures and large teams in the United States.

Because (a) U.S. regulation has not amounted to an effective ban on most significant crypto activity, and (b) there has been no clear, large‑scale relocation of primary operations for a substantial share of major firms and startups, the prediction should be rated wrong.

aitech
Within the near term (implicit few-year horizon from April 2023), AI tools will enable hobbyists and amateurs to input a screenplay and automatically generate reasonably good-looking animated movies, but achieving full theatrical-quality, fully AI-generated motion pictures will take significantly longer than two years from April 2023 (i.e., not before April 2025).
So yeah, in theory, you should be able to train the model where you just give it a screenplay and it outputs essentially an animated movie... So yeah, I think we're close to it now... So yeah, I think we're we're pretty close for, let's call it hobbyists or amateurs to be able to create pretty nice looking movies using these types of tools. But again, I think there's a jump to get to the point where you're just altogether replacing.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence up to November 30, 2025 lines up well with Sacks’s two-part claim.

  1. Hobbyists/amateurs generating reasonably good-looking animated movies from a script (near term)
  • By 2024–2025, multiple consumer-accessible tools let individuals turn scripts or text prompts into multi‑scene animated videos:
    • LTX Studio (released Feb 2024) explicitly markets itself as an AI “movie maker” that turns scripts or text prompts into characters, scenes, storyboards and video sequences, effectively automating much of the pipeline an amateur would need to create a short film. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Research systems such as MovieFactory (2023) and AniMaker (2025) demonstrate end‑to‑end automatic movie/animation generation from text, including story expansion, shot planning, video clips and audio/voiceover, specifically aiming at "fully automated" movie creation from natural‑language input. (arxiv.org)
    • Mass‑market text‑to‑video models — Runway’s Gen series, Luma’s Dream Machine, Google’s Veo 2, and OpenAI’s Sora (wider release Dec 2024) — all allow non‑experts to produce visually impressive clips from text with no traditional animation skills required. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Independent creators have used these tools to release AI‑animated shorts (e.g., The Lost Father, made with Runway Gen‑2 and other off‑the‑shelf tools) that are publicly showcased as “animated AI short films,” visually coherent and cinematic by hobbyist standards. (soorai.com)
    Taken together, this supports Sacks’s expectation that within a few years of April 2023, amateurs could feed in a script and get “pretty nice looking” animated movies out of AI-driven pipelines.
  1. Fully AI‑generated, theatrical‑quality motion pictures taking longer than two years (i.e., not by April 2025)
  • There are feature‑length works created entirely or almost entirely with generative AI within that two‑year window:
    • Window Seat and later DreadClub: Vampire’s Verdict (87‑minute animated feature released on Prime Video in July 2024) were made entirely by a single filmmaker using AI for visuals, performances, sound, music and even some editing, on a ~$405 budget. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The Death of Film (856‑hour experimental project described as “the first feature‑length film fully made from generative artificial intelligence”) likewise shows that fully AI‑generated long‑form films exist by early 2025, but it is explicitly framed as an experimental art piece, not mainstream theatrical fare. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • However, these projects are micro‑budget or avant‑garde experiments, not studio‑scale, broadly marketed theatrical releases comparable in polish and resources to major animated features. They’re generally discussed as proofs of concept and milestones, not as replacements for big‑budget studio productions.
  • By contrast, the first widely publicized studio‑backed, mostly‑AI animated feature aimed at global theaters, Critterz, is targeting a Cannes debut and theatrical rollout in 2026, and even that project is described as “mostly AI‑generated” / “AI‑assisted,” still relying on human writers, voice actors and artist sketches rather than being a fully automated pipeline. (theverge.com)
  • The fact that the flagship industry example of an AI‑driven theatrical animated feature is scheduled after 2025, and is still human‑assisted rather than purely AI‑generated, indicates that a generally accepted, fully AI‑produced, big‑studio‑quality theatrical movie had not arrived by April 2025. The state of the art in mid‑2025 is short, high‑fidelity clips and indie/experimental features, not full Pixar‑ or Disney‑level films created end‑to‑end by AI.

Why classify this as “right” rather than “ambiguous”?

  • Sacks’s key distinction was between:
    1. Hobbyist‑grade “pretty nice looking” animations from a script – which clearly exist by 2024–2025 via tools like LTX Studio, Sora, Dream Machine, Runway, etc., plus numerous AI‑animated shorts. (en.wikipedia.org)
    2. “Altogether replacing” traditional production with fully AI‑generated, theatrical‑quality films in under two years – which, judging by industry behavior and the 2026 timetable for the first high‑profile AI‑heavy animated feature, has not happened. (theverge.com)
  • While some fully AI features did appear earlier than many expected, they are low‑budget/experimental and not yet what the industry or audiences would generally label “theatrical‑quality” replacements for studio animation.

Given those facts, the spirit of Sacks’s prediction — rapid empowerment of amateurs, but a significantly slower path to mainstream, fully AI‑generated theatrical films — is borne out by events through April 2025 and beyond. Hence the verdict: right.

aitechventure
Fully replacing entire functional teams in startups (e.g., full sales, marketing, or engineering teams) with AI systems will not be possible for at least several years after April 2023; it will not occur within mere months.
I think we're still a ways away from startups being able to replace entire teams of people... Well, it's in the years I think for sure we don't know how many years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence through late 2025 indicates that startups have not, in general, been able to fully and reliably replace entire functional teams (sales, marketing, engineering) with autonomous AI systems, and that such capability remains years away, consistent with Sacks’s April 2023 prediction.

Key points:

  1. AI agents still struggle with real jobs. A 2025 benchmark from the Center for AI Safety and Scale AI tested frontier agents on 240 real freelance projects (software, design, etc.). Even the best agent automated only about 1–2.5% of the economic value, with frequent failures on complex, long-running tasks—hardly a drop‑in replacement for full human teams. (techbrew.com)

  2. Industry surveys show low adoption of fully autonomous agents. Gartner-related reporting in 2025 finds that only ~15% of IT leaders are even exploring fully autonomous agents; most organizations prefer supervised or “copilot” style AI, and only a small minority expect AI to replace human workers outright in the next 2–4 years. (techradar.com) This indicates that, even 2+ years after April 2023, most firms cannot or will not run whole functions purely with AI.

  3. Leaders in AI infrastructure say full automation is very hard. Databricks CEO Ali Ghodsi emphasizes that people underestimate how difficult it is to completely automate tasks; human oversight is still required even where AI agents are used for customer service and HR workflows. (businessinsider.com) OpenAI cofounder Andrej Karpathy likewise argued in 2025 that current agents are not yet effective and may take around a decade to truly work as hoped. (businessinsider.com) These are strong validations of Sacks’s view that team‑level replacement was not just “months” away.

  4. Where AI does “replace a team,” it is narrow and recent, not a broad 2023 reality. Blog‑style case studies in mid‑2025 describe a company that “replaced an entire sales team with 12 AI agents,” but this is: (a) a single, highly specific sales function; (b) reported more than two years after Sacks spoke; and (c) still framed around automating repetitive pipeline work rather than running the whole company independently. (agilegrowthlabs.com) This timing aligns with his “years, not months” claim rather than contradicting it.

  5. ‘AI‑only startups’ exist, but only as very small, tool‑stack businesses and again appear years later. A 2025 article describes an “AI‑only startup” with no employees where a solo founder uses tools like ChatGPT, AutoGPT, Midjourney, Zapier, etc., for product, marketing, support, and analytics. (medium.com) These are micro‑businesses operated by a founder orchestrating tools—not credible evidence that, by late 2023, typical startups could drop entire sales/marketing/engineering teams and hand them over to fully autonomous AI.

  6. Enterprise and analyst consensus still emphasizes hybrid human–AI teams. Multiple 2024–2025 analyses of agentic AI stress that agents will automate parts of jobs and routine decisions, but not remove humans from the loop in the near term; many agentic AI projects are being canceled or overhyped (“agent washing”), underscoring how far reality lags the marketing. (reuters.com)

Taken together, the data show that: (a) within the first “few months” after April 2023, full functional‑team replacement was clearly not achieved; and (b) even by late 2025, such replacement is rare, experimental, and unreliable. That matches Sacks’s assertion that this capability was years away rather than months, so his prediction is best judged as right.

Sacks @ 01:01:24Inconclusive
aigovernmenteconomy
If the United States creates an FDA-style regulatory body for AI in the near term (before clear technical standards exist), then U.S. innovation in AI will slow substantially and other countries that do not impose equivalent constraints will advance their AI capabilities faster than the U.S. and surpass it in AI leadership.
And what we will do by racing to create a new FDA is destroying American innovation in the sector. And other countries will not slow down. They will beat us to the punch here.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is framed as a conditional: if the U.S. “creates a new FDA” for AI in the near term, then U.S. innovation will be destroyed and other countries will overtake it in AI.

  1. Antecedent has not occurred.

    • As of late 2025, the U.S. still has no single, FDA‑style federal AI regulator. Federal oversight is decentralized and sector‑specific, with many agencies (FTC, FDA, etc.) applying existing laws rather than a new, overarching AI regulator.
    • Legal and policy surveys explicitly note that “there is no single federal agency charged with regulating AI” and that the U.S. lacks an EU‑style comprehensive AI statute, instead relying on guidance (e.g., NIST AI Risk Management Framework), executive actions, and a patchwork of state laws. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The 2023 Biden Executive Order 14110 on AI created a coordinated federal approach and directed agencies to set standards, but did not establish a licensing regulator with FDA‑like powers, and it was rescinded in January 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The U.S. AI Safety Institute created under NIST is a testing and standards body, not a broad regulatory agency. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The Trump administration’s 2025 AI Action Plan explicitly moves toward less federal AI regulation, not a new regulator. (lexmundi.com)

    Because the U.S. has not, in fact, created an FDA‑like AI regulator in the 2023–2025 “near term,” the condition that triggers Sacks’s predicted outcome has not been met.

  2. Current evidence on AI leadership doesn’t test the counterfactual.

    • Under the actual light‑to‑moderate regulatory regime, recent analyses (e.g., Stanford’s 2025 AI Index) find that the U.S. remains the global leader in cutting‑edge AI models and private AI investment, though China is closing the gap. (axios.com)
    • European assessments describe the U.S. as having “hegemonic power” in AI and warn that the EU risks becoming a “digital colony” relative to the U.S. and China, again indicating continued U.S. strength. (euronews.com)

However, these data only describe what happened without an FDA‑style AI regulator. They do not show what would have happened had such a regulator been created. Since the key condition in the prediction never materialized, the causal claim about its consequences cannot be empirically verified or falsified.

Because the necessary trigger (“creating a new FDA for AI” in the near term) did not occur, the prediction’s if‑then statement remains a counterfactual. Its accuracy is therefore inconclusive, not demonstrably right or wrong.

Sacks @ 01:07:43Inconclusive
aigovernmentpoliticseconomy
If a new centralized AI regulatory body is created to approve AI models/apps, the approval process will primarily advantage politically connected incumbents, and the overall rate of AI innovation (e.g., number and diversity of new entrants and products) will slow dramatically compared to the preceding permissionless-innovation period.
This will be beneficial only for political insiders who will basically be able to get their projects and their apps approved with a huge deadweight loss for the system, because innovation will completely slow down.View on YouTube
Explanation

Since April 2023, several AI-focused public bodies have been created, but none cleanly match the strong condition Sacks described (a centralized U.S.-style gatekeeper that must approve most AI models/apps before deployment), and the available data are too early and noisy to show the “innovation will completely slow down” outcome he predicted.

Regulatory bodies that did emerge

  • The U.S. created the AI Safety Institute within NIST in late 2023. Its mandate is to develop testing, evaluation methods, and safety guidelines and to collaborate with firms like OpenAI and Anthropic on pre‑ and post‑release model testing—not to license or approve models before they reach the market. Companies still launch models without formal government approval in most domains. (nist.gov)
  • The EU established the European AI Office to implement and enforce the EU AI Act, especially for general‑purpose AI. It coordinates enforcement, issues codes of practice, and can sanction non‑compliance, but most high‑risk AI uses are handled via national market‑surveillance authorities and notified bodies, not a single centralized approvals agency. Key high‑risk provisions have only just started to phase in and, as of November 2025, many are delayed to 2027 to avoid harming competitiveness. (digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu)
  • China’s Cyberspace Administration (CAC) did adopt binding generative‑AI regulations in August 2023 that require government approval before public deployment of many models, fitting Sacks’ scenario better than the U.S. or EU. Yet since then China has become second only to the U.S. in the number of large‑scale AI models, with over 40 approved and multiple heavily funded startups (e.g., Moonshot AI) emerging under this regime. (time.com)

Innovation outcomes to date Globally, 2023–2025 saw an acceleration in AI activity: rapid revenue growth at firms like Anthropic, continuing waves of generative‑AI startup cohorts, and tens of billions of dollars invested into AI startups and tools. (reuters.com) In Europe, industry figures warn the AI Act could slow innovation, but even they generally emphasize that it’s too early to know its long‑run impact. (verdict.co.uk)

Why the prediction is not yet testable

  1. The U.S. never created the kind of centralized licensing body Sacks was arguing against, so his conditional claim has not really been triggered in his primary jurisdiction.
  2. Where more centralized approval regimes do exist (notably China, and partially the EU for general‑purpose AI), they are relatively new, still evolving, or not fully in force, and are entangled with other factors (geopolitics, chip export controls, macroeconomy) that also affect innovation.
  3. Available evidence does not yet show that the overall rate or diversity of AI innovation has “completely” or “dramatically” slowed in those jurisdictions; at the same time, formal empirical work quantifying any chilling effect is only beginning.

Given these points, the prediction cannot be cleanly scored as right or wrong as of November 30, 2025; it remains inconclusive (too early to tell).

aigovernment
As AI advances, law-enforcement agencies will adopt AI-based tools and copilots that make large-scale malicious activities such as mass phishing-site creation relatively easy to detect and counter, reducing the advantage that AI-empowered criminals might otherwise gain.
So there will be new tools that law enforcement will be able to use. And if somebody is creating phishing sites at scale, they're going to be probably pretty easy for law enforcement eyes to detect. So let's not forget that there'll be copilots written for our law enforcement authorities. They'll be able to use that to basically detect and fight crime.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since April 2023 shows partial confirmation of Sacks’ prediction, but not clearly enough to call it definitively right or wrong.

1. Adoption of AI tools and “copilots” by defenders (including public sector)

  • Microsoft has rolled out Security Copilot, an AI assistant for security analysts that helps summarize incidents, analyze vulnerabilities, and investigate threats such as phishing, and expanded its availability in 2024; it’s explicitly marketed for security operations centers and can be (and is) used by public-sector and government customers. (kelo.com)
  • Microsoft is now promoting “agentic AI” via Security Copilot as a way to automate and speed up cyber‑defense workflows, emphasizing reduced response times and more effective handling of complex threats. (news.microsoft.com)
  • Interpol’s innovation lab in Singapore uses AI systems to monitor millions of cyberattacks daily and to counter deepfake scams, sextortion, and phishing schemes, showing that an international law‑enforcement body is already using AI at scale for exactly these kinds of online threats. (ft.com)
  • India has launched specialized training for “cyber commandos” to detect and neutralize AI‑driven cyberthreats, including automated phishing attacks, indicating that police units are being equipped and trained to confront AI‑enabled scams with advanced technical tools. (timesofindia.indiatimes.com)
  • India’s Vastav AI deepfake‑detection platform is offered free to law‑enforcement and government agencies to combat AI‑generated media used in fraud and disinformation, further illustrating deployment of AI tools on the defensive side. (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, these examples support the first part of the prediction: law‑enforcement and closely allied public‑sector security teams are adopting AI‑based tools, some of which are directly branded and function as “copilots,” to assist in detecting and investigating online crime, including phishing and related scams.

2. Has this made large‑scale phishing “relatively easy” to detect and reduced criminals’ advantage?
The available data cut against a clear "yes":

  • Europol’s 2025 Serious and Organized Crime Threat Assessment warns that AI is turbocharging organized crime, enabling more scalable scams, deepfakes, and online fraud, and stresses how AI makes criminals “harder to detect,” rather than reporting that detection has become easy. (reuters.com)
  • In the U.S., FBI Internet‑crime data show that overall losses from online crime are still rising sharply, and reporting from states like Indiana attributes a big part of the surge in effective phishing, romance scams, and impersonation fraud to criminals’ use of AI, not to successful neutralization by law enforcement. (axios.com)
  • Google and others are deploying powerful AI‑based scam and phishing detectors (e.g., Google Messages’ AI scam detection on billions of texts), but these are primarily consumer‑ and provider‑side defenses, and even they are framed as responses to rapidly escalating AI‑enabled scams, not as having turned phishing into a solved or trivially detectable problem. (wired.com)
  • Major law‑enforcement operations like Operation First Light 2024 coordinated global crackdowns on phishing, investment, and romance scams, seizing hundreds of millions of dollars, but public reporting does not show that AI‑based copilots have made mass phishing “easy” to detect in a way that clearly shifts the overall balance of advantage away from criminals; instead, such operations are presented as partial successes in an expanding problem space. (en.wikipedia.org)

Overall, both sides are arming themselves with AI: law‑enforcement and defenders are indeed adopting AI tools and copilot‑like systems, but organized criminals are simultaneously leveraging AI to scale and sophisticate phishing and other fraud. Leading agencies (Europol, FBI) currently emphasize the increasing threat from AI‑enabled crime, not that AI has made mass phishing straightforward to detect or has clearly reduced criminals’ net advantage.

Because one core component of the prediction (widespread adoption of AI tools/copilots by law enforcement) is happening, while the stronger claim (that this makes large‑scale phishing “relatively easy” to detect and reduces AI‑criminals’ advantage) is not clearly supported and arguably contradicted by threat‑assessments and loss data, the overall forecast cannot be cleanly scored as simply right or wrong. The situation is mixed and depends heavily on how one interprets “relatively easy” and “reducing the advantage,” so the most accurate verdict is ambiguous.

economymarketsgovernment
In the near future, the U.S. will experience a three‑pronged financial crisis: (1) losses on long‑dated bonds will impair regional and community banks, (2) a commercial real estate downturn will metastasize into a banking crisis as unrealized losses are recognized, and (3) a U.S. government debt crisis will emerge.
I think we are headed for some sort of government debt crisis. I said that there's going to be three prongs to this financial crisis. One was these long dated bonds having unrealized losses, which is causing problems in regional and community banks. The second piece of it is the commercial real estate crisis, which I think is metastasizing right now, which is also going to be a banking crisis once all those unrealized losses come to you. And the third piece of it is government debt crisis.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evaluated as of November 30, 2025 (about 2.6 years after the prediction), the forecast of a three‑pronged U.S. financial crisis has not fully materialized:

  1. Prong 1 – Long‑dated bond losses hitting regional/community banks: This clearly occurred. The 2023 U.S. banking turmoil saw Silicon Valley Bank, Signature Bank, and First Republic fail after steep unrealized losses on long‑maturity Treasuries and MBS, triggered by rapid Fed rate hikes; regulators and analysts explicitly tied these failures to interest‑rate‑driven losses on long‑dated securities at regional banks. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Prong 2 – Commercial real estate (CRE) downturn metastasizing into a banking crisis: CRE has become a serious stress point, especially for regional banks with large office and multifamily books. Research estimated $80–160 billion in potential bank losses from CRE defaults, and strategists have repeatedly described a "commercial real estate crisis" risk as a major threat. (forbes.com) New York Community Bancorp, for example, suffered large losses, credit‑rating downgrades to junk, and a stock collapse in 2024 largely due to CRE exposure, which briefly hammered the KBW regional‑bank index and revived fears of another banking crisis. (markets.businessinsider.com) However, so far this has produced ongoing strain and isolated institutional problems, not a broad systemic banking crisis: regulators emphasize that CRE risks are significant but generally manageable, with banks boosting reserves and gradually recognizing losses. (reuters.com)

  3. Prong 3 – U.S. government debt crisis: U.S. public debt has surged past $38 trillion, and all three major agencies have now downgraded U.S. sovereign credit from the pre‑2011 AAA status, citing chronic deficits and a deteriorating fiscal trajectory. (en.wikipedia.org) There have been repeated episodes of fiscal brinkmanship, including the 2023 debt‑ceiling fight and a 43‑day government shutdown in 2025, but no actual default, loss of market access, or acute funding crisis: Treasury auctions continue to clear, the dollar remains the primary reserve currency, and officials still project ongoing (if slower) growth rather than an immediate solvency event. (en.wikipedia.org) Most mainstream descriptions frame this as a worsening long‑term debt problem, not a present‑tense government debt crisis.

Because only the first prong has clearly occurred, the second has produced stress but not a full‑blown banking crisis, and the third has not yet manifested as an actual debt crisis (despite growing risks and downgrades), the specific prediction that the U.S. would soon face a three‑pronged financial crisis is best judged wrong overall rather than fully or mostly correct.

Sacks @ 00:28:37Inconclusive
economygovernment
By 2030, annual net interest expense on U.S. federal government debt will exceed $1 trillion per year and will constitute more than 25% of total federal budget outlays.
And I also read that by 2030, we're going to have over $1 trillion of interest expense owed by the US government every year. That is money that's not funding anyone's Social security. It's not funding anyone's healthcare. It's not funding one weapons program. It's not funding anything we want. It's just the big it's going to be more than a quarter of our total federal budget.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is about conditions in 2030:

By 2030, annual net interest expense on U.S. federal government debt will exceed $1 trillion per year and will constitute more than 25% of total federal budget outlays.

As of November 30, 2025, 2030 has not occurred, so the prediction cannot yet be directly evaluated.

However, existing projections are relevant for context:

  • The U.S. Congressional Budget Office (CBO) projects that net interest outlays will exceed $1 trillion annually by around 2026–2027 and continue rising thereafter.
  • For 2030 specifically, recent CBO long-term or 10‑year baseline projections show net interest as a significant but still smaller share of total federal outlays—generally on the order of the mid‑teens as a percent of total spending, not as high as 25% in their central estimates. (Exact percentages vary slightly across projection vintages, but they are well below one-quarter.)

Because:

  • The target year (2030) is still in the future, and
  • Projections, even from CBO, are not certainties, especially about interest rates and deficits,

we cannot yet say whether net interest will actually exceed $1T and reach more than 25% of the federal budget in 2030. Therefore, the proper classification is “inconclusive (too early)”, even though current projections suggest the dollar-amount part (> $1T) is plausible while the “>25% of total outlays” part looks aggressive relative to baseline forecasts.

marketseconomy
In the near future, there will be a major repricing of U.S. office‑tower commercial real estate in major cities, significantly reducing the market value of many properties held by pension funds, thereby worsening the funding status of those pensions.
So on a previous show, we talked about the commercial real estate looming crisis. And a lot of people thought that some of the comments we were just talking in our book, which is not true, I don't own I don't have a dollar invested in any of these office towers. But you know who does pension funds? That's who owns these office towers. So you're talking about pension funds that are three quarters unfunded, and they may have a lot less funds than they even think they do, because we're about to have a huge reckoning where all of a sudden, these office towers that were supposed to be blue chip, that were supposed to have the best collateral there was in major American cities. Now, all of a sudden, they may not be nearly as valuable as they thought they were.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ forecast has two parts: (1) a major repricing of big‑city U.S. office towers, and (2) that this would significantly reduce the value of pension‑owned properties and worsen the funding status of those pensions.

1. Major repricing of U.S. office towers
This clearly happened in the “near future” after April 2023:

  • CommercialEdge/CommercialSearch data show the average U.S. office sale price fell 37% between 2019 and the end of 2024, with CBD office buildings down about 60% from 2019 levels, and many buildings selling at 20–50%+ discounts to prior prices. (commercialedge.com)
  • Green Street’s index and related analyses put office values roughly 35–37% below their 2022 peak, the steepest drop of any major property type. (creanalyst.com)
  • A Washington Post analysis estimates U.S. office buildings lost about $557 billion in value between 2019 and 2023, with big-city tax rolls (e.g., New York, D.C., Boston) now reflecting large downward reassessments. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Individual towers in major markets have seen drastic markdowns—for example, One Worldwide Plaza in Manhattan was appraised at about 20% of its 2018 value by 2025, implying very large losses to its lenders and equity owners. (en.wikipedia.org)
    This strongly supports the “huge reckoning” / major repricing piece of the prediction.

2. Impact on pension funds and their funding status
Pension funds do own material office portfolios, and those portfolios have been hit:

  • A CRE Daily summary of public pension results notes that large U.S. public pension funds recorded about a –6% real estate return for 2023, with CalSTRS specifically posting about a –9% real estate return, and office properties highlighted as a continuing drag. (credaily.com)
  • Other large pension investors (e.g., CPPIB, PSP Investments) reported mid‑single‑ to mid‑teens real estate losses, with office the most impacted sector, and are actively cutting office exposure. (kelownarealestate.com)
    So the part about pension‑owned office assets being hit in value is supported.

However, the funding-status piece is much less clear and, at the aggregate level, appears to have moved in the opposite direction of what Sacks implied:

  • Equable Institute and Reason Foundation both find the national funded ratio for U.S. state and local pension plans improved from the mid‑70% range in 2022 to roughly 78–80% by 2023–24, while total unfunded liabilities fell (e.g., from about $1.6T to around $1.4–1.5T). (prnewswire.com)
  • Wilshire’s funding-status reports similarly show the aggregate funded ratio for U.S. state plans rising through 2023 and again in 2024, driven by strong overall investment returns, even though real estate was a weak sleeve. (wilshire.com)
  • Large individual systems like CalSTRS and CalPERS report higher funded ratios over this period (CalSTRS at ~76.7% funded by mid‑2024; CalPERS around 79% by mid‑2025), despite negative real estate/office results, because equities and other assets performed strongly. (calstrs.com)

In other words, office repricing clearly hurt pension real-estate portfolios and forced reallocations, but did not, on net, produce a broad worsening of pension funding ratios; aggregate funded status actually improved modestly.

Because one core element of the prediction (a major office-tower repricing, including in pension-owned assets) is strongly supported by the data, while the other (that this would worsen pension funding status overall) is contradicted by observed funded-ratio trends, the forecast is only partially validated. The causal impact on funding is nuanced and depends on what counterfactual you assume (funding is better than before, but arguably worse than it would have been without office losses), so the overall verdict is ambiguous rather than cleanly right or wrong.

aieconomygovernment
Over the coming years after April 2023, the United States (both government and private sector) will continue to push forward AI research and deployment at very high speed, with minimal sustained slowdown or moratoria, despite acknowledged risks, because of perceived need for productivity gains.
the reason why we are going to pursue AI at breakneck speed, even though it may lead to some sort of weird dystopian future, is because we need that productivity boost. We have no choice nowView on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–2025 shows the U.S. government and private sector have in fact accelerated AI development and deployment, with no nationwide moratorium or sustained slowdown, even as leaders publicly acknowledge major risks.

On the private side, the U.S. has decisively dominated global AI investment: from 2013–2023 U.S. private-sector AI spending was more than three times that of any other country. (axios.com) In 2024 alone, private AI investment in the U.S. reached a record ~$109 billion, far exceeding all other countries and driven heavily by generative AI infrastructure and startups. (humansareobsolete.com) By 2025, AI-related spending by major tech companies was so large that it accounted for a substantial share of U.S. GDP growth, with AI investments projected at hundreds of billions of dollars per year and described as making the U.S. economy “hooked on AI spending.” (wsj.com) This is consistent with “breakneck speed” investment rather than caution or pause.

On the public side, federal policy has focused on adding safeguards while explicitly encouraging rapid AI development for productivity and competitiveness, not halting it. Biden’s October 2023 Executive Order 14110 frames AI as having potential to make society “more prosperous, productive, innovative, and secure,” and sets a national approach to govern AI risks while emphasizing U.S. global competitiveness—there is no moratorium language. (bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov) The Commerce Department’s one‑year review of the order in late 2024 describes the administration’s mandate as to “pull every lever to keep pace with rapid advancements in AI” and to “continue charging ahead” to spur safe development and deployment. (commerce.gov) Follow‑on actions in 2024 explicitly aim to “deepen the U.S. lead in AI innovation,” including launching the National AI Research Resource pilot to give dozens of research teams significant compute and resources. (bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov)

In 2025, the subsequent Trump administration doubled down on acceleration: it rescinded Biden’s AI safety executive order and launched the large‑scale "Genesis Mission" to exploit federal data and supercomputing for AI foundation models, explicitly framed as an effort to secure U.S. dominance in AI and boost economic growth. (en.wikipedia.org) This shift further underscores that, despite ongoing concerns about AI risks, national policy and market behavior have continued to prioritize rapid AI advancement and productivity gains, without any broad, sustained pause.

Given this trajectory—rapid and growing AI investment; federal policy focused on governance and competitiveness rather than moratoria; and an explicit push under both administrations to harness AI for productivity and economic growth—the prediction that the U.S. would "pursue AI at breakneck speed" with no real slowdown or moratorium, despite acknowledged risks and in pursuit of productivity gains, has been borne out by events so far.

politicsgovernment
When the facts of Bob Lee’s April 2023 killing in San Francisco become known, it will turn out that he was randomly stabbed by a psychotic homeless person with a substantial prior arrest record who had repeatedly been released back onto the streets under lenient, decarceration-oriented criminal justice policies.
we don't know exactly what happened yet, but I think we suspect, and I would bet dollars to dimes, that the story is very similar to a case we had in LA recently, that Brianna Kupfer case where a young woman was basically stabbed for no reason by a psychotic homeless person who had been through the revolving door of the jail and criminal justice system, who could have been locked up, who was arrested multiple times but was not kept locked up because of this push for decarceration.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction described Bob Lee’s killing as a random street stabbing by a psychotic homeless person with a substantial prior arrest record, repeatedly released under lenient decarceration policies.

Public reporting and the subsequent trial show a very different picture:

  • Killer’s identity and status: Police arrested Nima Momeni, a Bay Area IT/tech consultant and business owner, not a homeless person. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Relationship to Lee: Authorities stated that Lee and Momeni knew each other, and the killing was not a random street crime. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Motive and circumstances: Prosecutors argued that Momeni stabbed Lee after a personal dispute involving Momeni’s sister and her alleged drug-related assault, luring Lee to a secluded area and attacking him with a kitchen knife. This was framed as a planned, personal confrontation, not an unprovoked attack by a stranger. (fortune.com)
  • Criminal history: Reported records show only a 2011 misdemeanor switchblade charge for Momeni, not a long “revolving door” history of arrests and releases characteristic of the prediction. (cbsnews.com)
  • Political narrative rejected: Multiple outlets explicitly noted that the initial narrative of a random, homelessness-linked street killing in a “crime-ridden” San Francisco was dispelled once Momeni was arrested and his connection to Lee became clear. (washingtonpost.com)

Because the actual facts contradict every key element of the prediction (randomness, homelessness, psychosis, extensive prior record, decarceration-driven release), the prediction is wrong.

politics
Joe Manchin will not run for U.S. president in 2024 as an independent (third‑party) candidate.
If he wants to run as an independent, that's a different story. And that would really throw a curveball into the race. But I don't see him doing that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Joe Manchin was widely discussed as a potential independent/third‑party presidential candidate for 2024, including through his association with the centrist group No Labels and public flirtation with a third‑party bid.(theguardian.com)

However, on February 16, 2024, Manchin publicly announced that he would not run for president and specifically said, “I will not be seeking a third-party run. I will not be involved in a presidential run.”(cnbc.com) Subsequent coverage and his biography confirm that he did not enter the 2024 presidential race as an independent or on any third‑party ticket.(theguardian.com)

Therefore, the prediction that “Joe Manchin will not run for U.S. president in 2024 as an independent (third‑party) candidate” was correct.

Sacks @ 00:52:09Inconclusive
aihealth
Within 5–10 years from March 2023 (by roughly 2028–2033), AI systems will enable major medical breakthroughs, such as significantly improved diagnosis or treatment capabilities, that would be widely recognized as breakthroughs in medicine.
I could see major medical breakthroughs based on the AI in the next 5 or 10 years.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction sets a 5–10 year window from March 2023, i.e. roughly 2028–2033, for “major medical breakthroughs based on AI.” As of today (November 30, 2025), we are only ~2.5 years into that window, so it is too early to judge whether the prediction will ultimately be right or wrong.

In the period since 2023, there have indeed been notable AI-driven advances in medicine (e.g., large language models assisting with clinical documentation, image-analysis systems for radiology and pathology, and research models for drug discovery), but the prediction is about what will happen by 2028–2033, not by 2025. Whether those future “major medical breakthroughs” materialize — and are widely recognized as breakthroughs — cannot yet be determined.

Because the forecast horizon has not yet elapsed, the appropriate status is “inconclusive (too early)” rather than right or wrong.

aitech
Over the coming years, the pace of AI innovation and deployment will not slow in response to calls for a pause; instead, development activity and progress in AI will accelerate relative to the 2022–early 2023 baseline.
I think we're not going to slow down. I actually think it's going the other way. I think things are going to speed up.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since March 31, 2023 indicates that AI development and deployment have accelerated, not slowed, despite frequent calls for pauses, regulation, or moratoria.

Key observations (all relative to the 2022–early 2023 baseline when ChatGPT first appeared):

  1. Major model releases accelerated in cadence and scale

    • OpenAI moved from GPT‑4 (March 2023) to large multi‑modal and tool‑using capabilities (Vision, Code Interpreter, function calling) and then to GPT‑4.1/4o‑class models and strong edge/mobile integrations, with steadily improving cost, speed, and quality.
    • Anthropic progressed rapidly from early Claude versions to Claude 2, 2.1, and 3‑series models (Opus, Sonnet, Haiku), with each generation showing substantial capability gains and heavier enterprise adoption.
    • Google advanced from PaLM/LaMDA era systems to PaLM 2, Gemini‑class (multi‑modal) models, and tight integration across Search, Workspace, Android, etc.
    • Meta went from research‑only large language models to open‑weight LLaMA 1, then LLaMA 2 and 3, markedly increasing model quality while also catalyzing a large open‑source ecosystem.

    The frequency and magnitude of major model releases and capability jumps since early 2023 is notably higher than in 2020–2022, and the models are deployed into many more products and workflows than before.

  2. Broad deployment into consumer and enterprise products

    • General‑purpose AI assistants (e.g., integrated chatbots and copilots) are now embedded in operating systems, search engines, productivity suites, developer tools, CRM/ERP platforms, and design tools. This includes system‑level or first‑party “copilots” from multiple big tech companies and widespread third‑party integrations.
    • Enterprise adoption has expanded rapidly, with many large firms rolling out internal copilots, code assistants, customer‑service bots, and document‑analysis tools, often powered by frontier APIs or strong open‑source models.
    • On the consumer side, AI features (image generation, summarization, translation, smart replies, etc.) are now standard in messaging, productivity, creative tools, and smartphones.
  3. Capital, headcount, and infrastructure growth

    • Capital flows into AI have grown dramatically since early 2023: multi‑billion‑dollar strategic investments in frontier‑model companies, massive GPU/accelerator buildouts at hyperscalers, and large private rounds for AI startups across sectors (foundation models, agents, vertical applications, infrastructure).
    • Hyperscalers have raced to secure GPUs and build custom AI accelerators, and global AI compute capacity has grown sharply year‑over‑year—an essential signal that development capacity is expanding, not pausing.
  4. Regulatory and "pause" efforts have not produced a slowdown in core development

    • In March 2023, an open letter from the Future of Life Institute called for a 6‑month pause on training systems more powerful than GPT‑4. Despite significant publicity, there is no evidence that major labs actually paused or reduced the pace of R&D; instead, they continued training and deploying more advanced models.
    • The U.S. and EU have advanced regulatory efforts (e.g., the EU AI Act negotiations, the U.S. AI Executive Order, voluntary safety commitments by major labs), but these have not imposed blanket moratoria or substantial slowdowns in frontier‑model training or deployment across the industry. Instead, the pattern has been: continue or accelerate development while adding governance, safety, and reporting layers.
  5. Open‑source and academic activity exploded

    • Since LLaMA’s initial leak and later official releases, the open‑source community has produced a rapid cascade of model variants, fine‑tunes, and new architectures. This includes lightweight, on‑device‑capable models and specialized models for code, vision, audio, and agents.
    • Tools, libraries, and frameworks for building AI applications (RLHF pipelines, orchestration frameworks, evaluation tools, agents, vector databases, etc.) have multiplied, further reducing friction to deploying AI.

Overall assessment vs. the prediction

  • The prediction was: “Over the coming years, the pace of AI innovation and deployment will not slow in response to calls for a pause; instead, development activity and progress in AI will accelerate relative to the 2022–early 2023 baseline.”
  • Between March 31, 2023 and November 30, 2025, we observe:
    • No industry‑wide slowdown or moratorium attributable to pause letters or similar advocacy.
    • A clear increase in the rate of major model releases, infrastructure build‑out, funding, and commercial deployment compared with 2020–2022.
    • Regulatory efforts that largely coexist with, rather than significantly slow, AI R&D.

Given the available evidence as of November 30, 2025, the prediction that AI would not slow down but instead speed up in the face of pause calls is substantially borne out.

aitech
In the short term (the next several years from 2023), most companies will not respond to AI coding tools by massively cutting software developer headcount; instead, they will keep similar numbers of developers and use AI to increase productivity and accelerate product roadmaps.
In the short term, I see the benefits of AI being very positive because I don't think it's in most cases, wiping out human jobs. It's just making them way more productive... I just I don't think in the short term that what's going to happen is these companies are going to look to cut all their developers, because 1 or 2 of them can do ten times the work. I think that they're going to try and accelerate their product roadmaps.View on YouTube
Explanation

Across 2023–2025, available data and surveys indicate that most companies have so far used AI coding tools to augment software engineers rather than to justify mass elimination of developer roles, which matches Sacks’s short‑term prediction.

Employment and layoffs picture

  • U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics projections continue to show software developers as a high‑growth occupation, with employment expected to rise ~18% from 2023–2033, versus a 9–10% decline for more automatable computer programmer roles. This indicates ongoing demand for developers even as more routine programming shrinks. (bls.gov)
  • Reporting on U.S. jobs shows that about a quarter of traditional “computer programming” jobs vanished over the past two years, but the same analysis notes that software developer roles remained comparatively stable and are broader, more strategic, and less routine than the programmer category that was hit hardest. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Tech has seen large layoffs—400,000+ tech workers globally from 2022–2024 and more in 2025—but analyses attribute this mainly to pandemic over‑hiring, higher interest rates, and restructuring, with AI productivity a contributing factor but not the dominant, explicit reason for most cuts. (medium.com) A synthesis of McKinsey and Yale research summarized in 2025 notes that only about 1% of firms explicitly cite AI as the reason for layoffs. (cengizhan.com)

What companies say they plan to do with AI

  • A 2024 ManpowerGroup survey of global employers found 55% expect AI to increase headcount, 24% expect no impact, and only 18% expect AI and ML to reduce staffing—evidence that most firms do not see AI primarily as a headcount‑cutting tool. (investor.manpowergroup.com)
  • McKinsey’s 2025 State of AI data, broken down by function, indicates that software engineering/IT/product development functions are among those where companies most often expect headcount to increase, even as they adopt AI; only a minority foresee net reductions. (enterpriseaiexecutive.ai)

How AI coding tools are actually being used

  • GitHub Copilot and similar tools have been adopted at scale (1.3M paid users across 50,000+ organizations by early 2023), with studies showing up to 55% faster completion on some coding tasks; these reports frame AI as a “pair‑programmer” that still requires human oversight, not as a replacement for entire dev teams. (wired.com)
  • Inside Microsoft, engineering leaders report AI coding assistants contributing substantial portions of code and saving developers from “minutes to weeks” of work, yet they describe this as reducing “developer toil” and improving efficiency, not as a program of eliminating most developers. (theverge.com)
  • The 2024 and 2025 Stack Overflow developer surveys show that around 76–84% of developers use or plan to use AI tools, and productivity/learning are the top cited benefits, while a large majority do not view AI as an immediate threat to their jobs; AI is seen primarily as a productivity booster. (linkedin.com)

Nuances and caveats

  • There is growing evidence that entry‑level and routine coding roles are being squeezed: industry analyses note sharp drops in junior tech postings and a shift toward hiring more senior engineers who then use AI tools, plus significant declines in traditional “programmer” roles. (washingtonpost.com) Some commentators and case studies argue that leaders believe 5 AI‑augmented engineers can replace 10 traditional ones and have used this logic in certain reorganizations. (medium.com)
  • However, these effects are uneven and concentrated in specific segments (junior roles, highly routine work, and certain big‑tech restructurings), not a universal pattern of companies “cutting all their developers because one or two can do ten times the work.” The majority of survey and labor‑market evidence still points to augmentation with relatively stable or growing developer demand, at least so far in the 2023–2025 window.

Given this mix, Sacks’s short‑term claim—that over the next few years, most firms would keep substantial developer headcount and use AI mainly to boost productivity and accelerate roadmaps rather than immediately slashing software teams en masse—aligns well with the best available evidence as of late 2025. The prediction is therefore right for the period we can currently observe, even though longer‑term impacts remain uncertain.

economymarkets
The March 2023 25‑basis‑point rate hike by the Federal Reserve may later be recognized as the marginal policy decision that tipped the stressed financial system into a more serious crisis (e.g., further bank failures or systemic instability).
I think that this move here could, in hindsight, be seen as the straw that breaks the camel's back.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks suggested the Fed’s March 22, 2023 25‑bp hike might later be seen as the marginal decision that tipped an already‑stressed system into a more serious banking crisis.

What actually happened:

  1. The acute banking stress pre‑dated the March hike. Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank had already failed on March 10 and March 12, 2023, respectively, marking the core of the 2023 U.S. banking crisis. Their collapses are widely attributed to cumulative rate hikes over 2022–23 combined with concentrated uninsured deposits and poor interest‑rate risk management, not to the incremental March 22 move. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. The main post‑hike failure (First Republic) is not attributed to that specific hike. First Republic was seized on May 1, 2023. FDIC’s own review cites contagion from SVB/Signature, overreliance on uninsured deposits, rapid growth, and failure to mitigate interest‑rate risk as key causes. It characterizes the failure as driven by loss of confidence and structural vulnerabilities, not by a single late‑March rate hike. (fdic.gov)
  3. No escalating, systemic banking crisis followed. After a cluster of failures in spring 2023, only a small number of additional U.S. banks failed; by mid‑2024 there had been just one failure that year, and commentators noted that the feared wave of regional bank collapses had "yet to happen." (bisnow.com) Stress in commercial real estate and regional banks has persisted, but regulators and market analysts repeatedly describe the system as broadly resilient and expect, at most, problems at a “moderate number of smaller banks,” not a systemic meltdown. (reuters.com)
  4. Macro outcome looks like a soft landing, not a crisis triggered by the March hike. By late 2023–24, mainstream analysis (Goldman Sachs, Congressional Research Service, etc.) characterized the U.S. as being on, or near, a soft‑landing path—inflation falling while GDP growth and employment remained positive—rather than entering a deep crisis caused by over‑tightening. (goldmansachs.com) Major banks continued to pass Fed stress tests comfortably, reinforcing the view that systemic risks were contained. (apnews.com)

In hindsight, the March 2023 25‑bp hike is seen as part of a broader tightening cycle that contributed to stress at poorly managed, rate‑sensitive banks, but it is not generally recognized as the straw that broke the camel’s back or as the clear tipping point into a more serious systemic crisis. The feared escalation did not materialize, and consensus post‑mortems focus on cumulative hikes plus bank‑specific mismanagement rather than that single decision.

Given both the absence of a subsequent, clearly more severe systemic crisis and the lack of historical treatment of that specific hike as the decisive tipping point, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

economymarkets
Following the early‑2023 banking stress related to long‑dated bonds, the U.S. financial system will experience a second, more serious phase of crisis centered on large unrealized losses and defaults in commercial real estate loan portfolios.
there's tremendous stress building up in the banking system from unrealized losses on long dated bonds. Also unrealized losses on commercial real estate loans. And we've barely scratched the surface of seeing that problem. That's, I think, the next shoe to drop in this whole thing.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks argued that after the March 2023 banking turmoil, the next shoe to drop would be a second, more serious phase of banking crisis centered on large unrealized losses and defaults in commercial real estate (CRE) loan portfolios.

What actually happened through late 2025:

  • CRE has been a serious, but mostly chronic problem, not a new acute systemic crisis. Office and some retail properties have seen sharp value declines and rising delinquencies, and analysts routinely describe CRE as a “slow‑moving train wreck.” Regional and smaller banks, which hold the bulk of CRE loans, have faced mounting stress and rising non‑performing office loans.(reuters.com)
  • Several individual regional banks were hit hard by CRE exposure, most prominently New York Community Bancorp, whose stock fell over 80%, required a $1 billion capital injection, and underwent restructuring after large CRE‑related losses.(apnews.com) A few other small/regional banks have failed or been seized, but these were limited in scale (e.g., Republic First) and not described by regulators as a system‑wide crisis.(wsj.com)
  • System‑wide U.S. banking indicators, however, show resilience rather than a second, more severe crisis. The FDIC’s 2024 Risk Review (covering 2023) characterized the industry as having high net income, generally favorable asset quality, and a very low share of “problem banks” (~1.1% of all banks), even while flagging CRE—especially office and malls—as a key risk area.(bankingjournal.aba.com) By Q3 2025, FDIC data show U.S. banks’ net profits rising 13.5% year‑over‑year to about $79.3 billion, with overall past‑due loan rates below pre‑pandemic norms and only 57 problem banks, though CRE past‑dues are elevated.(reuters.com)
  • Large banks continue to pass stringent stress tests that explicitly model big CRE shocks. In 2025, all 22 major U.S. banks passed the Federal Reserve stress tests, which included a scenario with a 30% drop in CRE prices, while remaining above regulatory capital minimums—evidence that, at least for large institutions, CRE distress is not pushing the system toward insolvency.(apnews.com)
  • Global watchdogs (IMF, FSB) highlight a subset of vulnerable banks combining CRE exposure, unrealized bond losses, and fragile funding, but they describe the post‑2023 global and U.S. banking system as broadly stabilized, with risks needing monitoring rather than an ongoing new crisis.(reuters.com)

In other words, Sacks was directionally right that CRE would become a major pressure point and that stresses there were only beginning to show in early 2023. But his stronger version of the prediction—that this would manifest as a distinct, more serious follow‑on banking crisis for the U.S. financial system, worse than the March 2023 episode—has not materialized by late 2025. The outcome so far is elevated CRE stress, localized bank troubles and some failures, but a still‑profitable, well‑capitalized banking system rather than a second systemic meltdown.

On that basis, the prediction as normalized—a more serious second‑phase crisis centered on CRE loan losses—is best judged wrong given the evidence to date.

marketseconomy
If current trends continue, a large portion of downtown San Francisco office towers will be repossessed by banks through loan defaults and then sold off in distressed, low‑price auctions, with limited buyer demand due to high vacancy and weak tenant demand.
So then what happens is you end up with all of downtown San Francisco owned by a bunch of banks. What are they going to do with it? They don't want to be in the real estate business, so they have to fire sale those buildings in a bunch of auctions at rock bottom prices...There were no buyers.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of Sacks’ scenario did not materialize by late 2025, even though downtown San Francisco’s office market has been extremely distressed.

What did happen:

  • San Francisco’s downtown office market suffered record vacancies (mid‑30% range) and very steep value declines, with some distressed buildings appraised 20–84% below prior values and vacancy topping 35%(therealdeal.com)(therealdeal.com).
  • A number of specific properties defaulted and/or went to foreclosure or auction, including Mid‑Market office towers like 995 Market St. (sold at ~90% discount after a loan default)(sfgate.com), 1019 Market (former Zendesk HQ) heading to foreclosure auction(therealdeal.com), and Union Square offices at 222 Kearny & 180 Sutter scheduled for foreclosure auction after loan negotiations failed(svnordicbeat.com).
  • The city’s largest downtown mall, San Francisco Centre, was foreclosed on in 2025; lenders used a credit bid to take control at about $133M, down from a >$1.2B valuation less than a decade prior(sfstandard.com).

Where the prediction breaks down:

  1. “All of downtown…owned by a bunch of banks” / “large portion…repossessed by banks”

    • While defaults and special servicing surged, the pattern has largely been distressed sales and loan trades, not a wholesale shift of tower ownership into bank REO. CBRE data show that in 2024, 23 downtown office buildings sold for $916M, more than doubling the transaction count of the prior two years combined(sfchronicle.com)—i.e., properties were changing hands to new private and institutional owners, not simply sitting as bank‑owned stock.
    • CoStar/KBRA analysis highlights that roughly 35% of San Francisco CMBS office loans became distressed(therealdeal.com), but “distressed loans” are typically in workout or sold to investors; they do not imply that a large share of towers have actually been repossessed and held by banks.
    • Many marquee towers remain owned by long‑term institutional owners who refinanced or paid off loans, such as 345 California, where the owner fully paid off a $150M loan and now owns the tower free of that debt(costar.com)—the opposite of lender seizure.
  2. “Fire sale…auctions at rock bottom prices” with “no buyers” / very limited demand

    • There have indeed been fire‑sale prices: e.g., 995 Market St. trading for $6.5M vs. ~$62M in 2016(sfgate.com), and multiple downtown towers such as 60 Spear, 350 California, and 550 California changing hands at 60–75% discounts from prior or asking values(sfstandard.com).
    • However, those deals did attract buyers—often well‑capitalized investors explicitly hunting for bargains and willing to take leasing risk. The “boomerang buys” on California Street and Spear Street are framed as investors betting long on the city at deep discounts(sfstandard.com), and follow‑up reporting shows new owners signing multiple new leases at 550 California(sfstandard.com).
    • Market data show that 2024 marked a bottoming and re‑acceleration of buyer activity: CBRE found average sale prices increasing from $253/sf in 2023 to $310/sf in 2024, with transaction volume in 2024 exceeding 2022 and 2023 combined, and much of it involving distressed assets being purchased by wealthy buyers and institutions(sfchronicle.com). MarketWatch similarly describes 2024 as a turning point, with steep discounts but renewed investor and lender interest and more properties trading hands(marketwatch.com). That pattern is inconsistent with “no buyers.”
    • High‑profile examples of distressed‑but‑purchased assets include:
      • Market Center towers: investors Greg Flynn and DRA Advisors took over the distressed $417M mortgage for about $177M, acquiring the two‑tower complex in the largest SF office deal since 2022(bloomberg.com).
      • 353 Sacramento St.: New York Life and Lincoln Property bought a distressed $101.6M loan at a 63% discount to the prior purchase price, effectively stepping into ownership at a low basis(sfstandard.com).
      • 199 Fremont / 300 Howard: DivcoWest and Blackstone acquired the vacant 25‑story tower for about $111M, far below earlier valuations, and are repositioning it for AI‑oriented tenants(en.wikipedia.org)(sfchronicle.com).
    • Even the foreclosed San Francisco Centre mall was taken over via lender credit bid and promptly given to CBRE to market for resale(sfstandard.com)—again indicating an expectation of buyers at the right price, not a market with “no buyers.”

Overall:

  • Sacks correctly anticipated severe distress, major value write‑downs, and some foreclosure/auction activity in downtown San Francisco’s commercial real estate. Those elements are clearly visible in the record vacancies, massive appraisal cuts, and a handful of high‑profile foreclosures and auctions(therealdeal.com)(therealdeal.com).
  • But the central thesis—that a large portion of downtown office towers would end up owned by banks and dumped in auctions with little or no buyer demand—does not match observed outcomes. Distress has translated primarily into discounted sales and loan trades to opportunistic private and institutional buyers, with transaction volume and investor interest actually rising at the bottom, not evaporating(sfchronicle.com)(marketwatch.com).

Because the core mechanism (widespread bank repossession plus a buyerless auction market) failed to materialize, the prediction is best characterized as wrong, albeit directionally right about stress and price collapses in the downtown San Francisco office sector.

marketseconomy
Bitcoin will not reach $1,000,000 per coin within 90 days of March 17, 2023 (i.e., by roughly mid‑June 2023).
Do I think that we're going to have $1 million Bitcoin in 90 days? I personally find that very unlikelyView on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple sources on Balaji Srinivasan’s public bet state that he wagered Bitcoin would reach $1,000,000 within 90 days of March 17, 2023, with a target around June 17, 2023.

  • CoinDesk reports that he predicted Bitcoin could reach $1 million in 90 days after March 17, i.e., by about June 17, 2023, and that this was the core of his widely discussed bet. (coindesk.com)
  • Historical price data show that on June 15, 2023, Bitcoin’s closing price was about $25,576, vastly below $1,000,000, and June 2023 prices ranged roughly from the mid‑$24k to around $31k, never approaching $1M. (statmuse.com)
  • Coverage of the bet’s outcome notes that Balaji closed the bet early as a losing bet, confirming that Bitcoin did not reach $1M within the 90‑day window. (coindesk.com)

Since Bitcoin remained tens of thousands of dollars, not $1,000,000, by mid‑June 2023, Sacks’s prediction that it would not hit $1M within 90 days of March 17, 2023 was correct.

economymarketsgovernment
The 2023 banking turmoil is only the first of three phases of a broader financial crisis: (1) current banking/bond losses, followed within the next few years by (2) a major, deflationary commercial real estate crisis, and then (3) a government debt/sovereign debt crisis that prompts inflationary policies (monetization of debt), with these phases unfolding over a multi‑year period rather than within 90 days.
So I think there's three phases to this financial crisis. We're in phase one, and I think CRA and government debt are the next two phases...I think that the government debt crisis...will be highly inflationary...I think this could play out over the next couple of years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Phase 1 of Sacks’s scenario (the 2023 banking turmoil driven by bond losses) clearly happened and was already underway when he spoke: several U.S. regional banks including Silicon Valley Bank, Signature, and First Republic failed in March–May 2023, prompting a brief banking crisis that regulators largely contained rather than it evolving into a continuing systemic meltdown.【⁠cite⁠⁢turn0search13⁠⁠】

However, the subsequent phases he described have not unfolded as predicted within the “next couple of years” (roughly 2023–2025):

  1. Commercial real estate (CRE) “major, deflationary crisis”

    • The office/CRE market has suffered a serious downturn: office values are estimated to have lost hundreds of billions of dollars since 2019, with national office vacancy rates around 20%, and office CMBS delinquencies near prior crisis peaks.【⁠cite⁠⁢turn0news18⁢turn1news13⁢turn1search5⁠⁠】
    • But major banks and regulators generally frame this as a contained but serious headwind, not a systemic financial crisis. Analyses from large banks and policy research argue that while CRE losses will pressure earnings—especially at regional banks—they are unlikely by themselves to trigger a broad banking collapse; Fed stress tests and regulatory guidance similarly see CRE as a key risk but not a system‑wide breaking point.【⁠cite⁠⁢turn1search3⁢turn1search8⁠⁠】
    • So far, we see a slow‑moving, sector‑specific downturn rather than the clearly identifiable second “phase” of a multi‑stage financial crisis that Sacks forecast.
  2. Government/sovereign debt crisis causing renewed, high inflation via debt monetization

    • While public debt levels and interest costs in advanced economies (including the U.S.) have become a growing concern, mainstream assessments emphasize rising fiscal pressure and political risk—not an actual sovereign debt crisis or loss of market access in the U.S., euro area, or other major developed economies. Credit ratings for these countries remain investment‑grade, and commentary talks about the risk of a future spiral rather than a crisis that has already arrived.【⁠cite⁠⁢turn1news14⁢turn2search22⁠⁠】
    • At the same time, inflation has mostly fallen from its 2022 peak. U.S. inflation dropped from around 9% in mid‑2022 to roughly 2–3.5% in 2023–2025, as the Fed’s preferred PCE index and CPI both moved much closer to the 2% target before edging slightly higher again; this pattern reflects disinflation and modest above‑target inflation, not a new “highly inflationary” episode driven by explicit monetization of a sovereign debt crisis.【⁠cite⁠⁢turn2search21⁢turn2news14⁠⁠】

Because by late 2025 we have: (a) a contained post‑2023 banking episode rather than a rolling multi‑year crisis, (b) a severe but so far non‑systemic CRE slump, and (c) no realized government/sovereign debt crisis or inflationary debt monetization in major economies, Sacks’s specific three‑phase, “next couple of years” crisis roadmap has not materialized. The core multi‑phase prediction, including its implied timeline and inflationary endgame, is therefore best judged as wrong on the evidence available so far.

economymarkets
Following the failures/backstops of Silvergate, SVB, Signature, First Republic, and Credit Suisse in March 2023, there will be additional significant banking-sector problems (i.e., more “shoes to drop”) beyond those already identified, rather than the crisis ending with those five institutions.
Moreover, do any of us believe that this is over, or do we believe there are more shoes to drop? If we believe that there are more shoes to drop, we may not know exactly what they are, but. But I think all of us probably believe that we're not at the end of this.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks argued in March 2023 that the banking turmoil would not end with Silvergate, SVB, Signature, First Republic, and Credit Suisse, and that there were likely “more shoes to drop.” Subsequent events support this view:

  • Additional U.S. bank failures after the initial five (2023): FDIC data show that, beyond SVB, Signature, and First Republic, two more U.S. banks failed later in 2023—Heartland Tri‑State Bank on July 28 and Citizens Bank of Sac City on November 3—indicating further stress in the system rather than a clean resolution in March. (forbes.com)
  • A sizable new failure in 2024: On April 26, 2024, regulators closed Republic First Bank (about $6 billion in assets). The FDIC was appointed receiver, and S&P Global described it as the sixth‑largest U.S. bank failure since 2010, well after the March 2023 crisis peak. (fdic.gov)
  • Ongoing chain of smaller failures into 2024–2025: FDIC and secondary summaries list further bank closures—First National Bank of Lindsay in October 2024, Republic First in April 2024, Pulaski Savings Bank in January 2025, and Santa Anna National Bank in June 2025—demonstrating that bank failures continued beyond the original set of five institutions. (forbes.com)
  • Serious distress episodes short of outright failure: PacWest Bancorp suffered large deposit outflows and steep share‑price declines in spring 2023, explored “all options” including a sale, and ultimately needed a rescue merger with Banc of California, reflecting continued regional‑bank fragility linked to the same rate‑shock dynamics. (cnbc.com) New York Community Bancorp then became a fresh flashpoint in early 2024, reporting a surprise quarterly loss, taking a huge provision for credit losses, slashing its dividend twice (down 80% in total), raising over $1 billion in emergency capital, suffering a Moody’s downgrade of its debt to junk, and triggering the biggest one‑day drop in the KBW Regional Banking Index since March 2023. (cnbc.com)
  • Sector‑wide stress persisting a year later: A March 2024 Reuters analysis concluded that, a year after SVB’s collapse, U.S. regional banks still faced significant headwinds from high deposit costs and commercial‑real‑estate exposure, with expectations of further reserve builds and ratings downgrades—evidence that systemic pressures had not fully resolved. (reuters.com)

Because multiple meaningful bank failures and high‑profile distress episodes occurred after March 2023, and regulators and markets continued to grapple with elevated regional‑bank risks, Sacks’s prediction that there would be further significant banking‑sector problems beyond the initially affected five institutions has been borne out.

Sacks @ 00:59:25Inconclusive
venture
Venture capital funds raised and deployed in the years immediately following this March 2023 episode (i.e., vintages 2023 onward) will, on average, produce better investment performance than 2021-vintage VC funds.
my guess is that the new vintages of VC are going to be better than, you know, call it 2021 for sure.View on YouTube
Explanation

There is not yet enough lifecycle data on 2023‑and‑later VC vintages to know whether they will ultimately outperform the 2021 vintage.

Venture funds typically have 10–15+ year lives, with DPI (actual cash returned) and final performance only becoming clear many years in. Industry analyses of VC and PE J‑curves show that most DPI is generated roughly years 6–16, and that typical VC funds may not even reach 1x DPI within a 15‑year window. Early‑life TVPI/IRR are known to be noisy and not reliable predictors of final outcomes.(medium.com) Since the 2021 vintage is only about four years old and 2023+ vintages are around two years old as of late 2025, both cohorts are still in the early, illiquid phase.

Available data mainly shows that the 2021 vintage has been weak so far: Carta and Wall Street Journal reporting indicate that more than 90% of 2021 US VC funds have made no distributions yet and that their median IRR is slightly negative three years in, underperforming earlier vintages.(wsj.com) Early signs for the 2023 vintage are somewhat more encouraging at the top end (e.g., high 90th‑percentile IRR), but median TVPI for 2021–2023 vintages still hovers around 1x and DPI across 2018–2023 vintages remains near zero, meaning very little has actually been realized.(sourcery.vc) Because the prediction concerns ultimate average performance of vintages 2023+ versus 2021, and we are still far from the period when final DPI and total returns can be observed, the prediction cannot yet be definitively scored.

venturemarkets
In the weeks immediately following SVB’s shutdown in March 2023, probably thousands of startup companies that banked with SVB will be unable to make payroll because their funds are frozen in receivership.
you're seeing probably thousands of companies now cannot make payroll in the next few weeks because their money is trapped and tied up at Silicon Valley BankView on YouTube
Explanation

Public data show that the feared, sustained payroll crisis for SVB‑banked startups did not materialize once regulators intervened.

On March 12, 2023—one day after the podcast release—the U.S. Treasury, Federal Reserve, and FDIC announced a systemic‑risk exception for Silicon Valley Bank, explicitly stating that all depositors, insured and uninsured, would be “fully protected” and would “have access to all of their money starting Monday, March 13.” (techcrunch.com) This meant funds were not locked in receivership for “the next few weeks,” but instead unfrozen within roughly one business day.

Sen. Alex Padilla’s statement about this action emphasized that it would ensure “millions of workers across the country will be paid on time,” underscoring that the policy response was specifically designed to prevent widespread missed payrolls at SVB‑banked firms. (padilla.senate.gov)

Before that government backstop was announced, Y Combinator and others warned that up to ~10,000 startups might be unable to pay employees in the next 30 days if deposits remained inaccessible, and that around 30% of YC companies exposed via SVB were at risk of not making payroll. (livemint.com) These were scenario projections and risk estimates, not reports of what actually ended up happening once all deposits were guaranteed.

Post‑intervention reporting instead describes startups as anxious but generally able to stitch together short‑term fixes (new bank accounts, emergency credit, loans) until their SVB funds cleared. NPR, for example, profiles founders who, by Monday March 13, had new accounts and fallback methods (like paper checks) to meet payroll and explicitly characterizes the situation as “turning into a nuisance versus a catastrophe.” (nepm.org) Retrospective summaries note that many startups were initially unable to retrieve money and had to take loans to make payroll, and warn that continued inaccessibility could have led to mass furloughs or shutdowns—again using conditional language about a risk that large‑scale policy intervention ultimately averted. (en.wikipedia.org)

There is some evidence of isolated, short‑term payroll disruptions (e.g., employees whose Friday March 10 paychecks failed because their payroll provider used SVB), but available reporting and later analyses do not show that “thousands of companies” ended up unable to make payroll over the following weeks due to frozen SVB deposits. (washingtonpost.com) Instead, regulators’ rapid guarantee of all deposits and emergency support from VCs and alternative banks largely prevented the prolonged, large‑scale payroll failure scenario described.

Because access to funds was restored quickly and the evidence points to a brief liquidity scare with limited, short‑duration payroll issues rather than a weeks‑long inability for thousands of startups to pay employees, Sacks’s prediction that “probably thousands of companies now cannot make payroll in the next few weeks because their money is trapped and tied up at Silicon Valley Bank” is best judged as wrong.

ventureeconomy
As a consequence of the SVB failure, potentially thousands of small venture-backed companies could be wiped out (fail or shut down) even though they did nothing operationally wrong.
you're looking at maybe thousands of them just being wiped out for no reasonView on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks was warning that, as a result of Silicon Valley Bank’s failure, “maybe thousands” of small venture‑backed startups could be wiped out because they would lose access to their deposits and be unable to make payroll.

What actually happened:

  • On March 12, 2023 (the day after the episode dropped), the U.S. Treasury, Federal Reserve, and FDIC invoked a systemic risk exception and explicitly guaranteed that all SVB depositors – insured and uninsured – would be fully protected, with access to all of their money starting Monday, March 13. (fdic.gov)
  • SVB’s operations were transferred into a bridge bank and then sold to First Citizens, with deposits assumed and branches reopened, so customers (including startups) could continue banking. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In the UK, HSBC bought Silicon Valley Bank UK for £1 in a government‑brokered rescue that explicitly aimed to avert an “existential threat” to the UK tech sector and allowed SVB UK customers to “continue to bank as usual,” again preventing mass failures of otherwise viable startups. (legaltechnology.com)
  • Contemporaneous analysis from within the startup ecosystem itself described the situation as an “extinction level disruption” that would have pushed thousands of companies over the edge if deposits remained frozen for weeks or months, but noted that “disaster was averted when the gov’t came in … by guaranteeing depositors their money.” (adamant.beehiiv.com)

While many startups have since failed amid higher interest rates and a broad venture funding downturn, those failures are part of a wider macro/VC cycle. Available reporting attributes the SVB episode to temporary hardship and financing headwinds, not to thousands of startups being randomly wiped out solely because their SVB deposits disappeared. Given the scale of coverage around SVB, such a mass, direct wipeout would almost certainly be documented, and it is consistently described instead as a near‑miss scenario.

Therefore, as a prediction about what would happen ("thousands" of otherwise sound venture‑backed startups being wiped out as a consequence of the SVB failure), it did not come true.

economymarkets
If the Federal Reserve does not intervene over the weekend of March 11–12, 2023, there will be runs on US regional banks the following week, creating a cascading regional banking crisis similar in dynamic to 2008.
I think that unless the fed steps in here over the weekend, we're going to see potentially a a run on the regional banking system, a cascade like we saw in 2008.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: “unless the Fed steps in here over the weekend, we're going to see … a run on the regional banking system, a cascade like we saw in 2008.” In reality, the Federal Reserve, FDIC, and Treasury did step in on Sunday, March 12, 2023, announcing that all depositors at Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank would be fully protected and launching the Bank Term Funding Program to provide liquidity to banks.(fdic.gov)

Because the key condition (“unless the Fed steps in over the weekend”) was not met, we cannot directly observe what would have happened in the absence of intervention. Some regional banks did experience runs and stress — for example, Signature Bank suffered heavy withdrawals before being closed on March 12, and First Republic later failed amid large deposit outflows — but regulators again intervened and contained the fallout, preventing a 2008-style systemic collapse of the entire regional banking system.(fdic.gov)

Since the scenario the prediction was about (no Fed intervention over that weekend) never actually occurred, and the interventions themselves plausibly altered the outcome, the truth of the counterfactual claim (“there would have been* a cascading crisis like 2008 if they hadn’t intervened”) cannot be empirically determined. Hence the result is ambiguous, not demonstrably right or wrong.

marketseconomyventure
Over the weekend of March 11–12, 2023, regulators will either arrange a takeover of SVB by a large bank such as J.P. Morgan (similar to Bear Stearns/WaMu), or, if they fail to do so, the banking and startup funding crisis will continue to cascade during the following week.
either this weekend they place SVB in the hands of a JP Morgan. They do basically a Bear Stearns or a WaMu. They either do that this weekend or this thing keeps cascading next week.View on YouTube
Explanation

Regulators did not arrange over the March 11–12, 2023 weekend to place Silicon Valley Bank into the hands of J.P. Morgan or a similar large acquirer. Instead, on Monday, March 13, the FDIC created Silicon Valley Bridge Bank, N.A., transferring all deposits and substantially all assets into this FDIC‑operated bridge bank, while it sought a buyer. A purchase-and-assumption agreement with First–Citizens Bank & Trust was only reached on March 26, well after the weekend in question, and involved a regional bank rather than a JPMorgan‑style G‑SIB. (content.govdelivery.com)

In the following week (March 13–17), the banking turmoil clearly continued to cascade:

  • Signature Bank had already been closed on Sunday, March 12, with the FDIC creating Signature Bridge Bank and invoking a systemic‑risk exception—part of the same unfolding crisis. (fdic.gov)
  • Regional bank stress intensified after markets opened Monday. First Republic Bank, which shared SVB’s vulnerability to large uninsured deposits, saw its stock price and depositor confidence collapse, prompting a $30 billion rescue deposit package on March 16 from 11 of the largest U.S. banks (including JPMorgan, Bank of America, Citigroup, and Wells Fargo), explicitly framed as an effort to stabilize the banking system amid post‑SVB turmoil. (cnbc.com)

So the first branch of Sacks’s disjunction (“they place SVB in the hands of a J.P. Morgan–type bank this weekend”) did not occur. The second branch (“or this thing keeps cascading next week, if they don’t”) did occur: no such weekend takeover happened, and the banking/startup‑funding shock continued into the following week with additional bank failures, severe stress at First Republic, and extraordinary rescue measures. On that basis, the overall conditional prediction—if no big‑bank takeover this weekend, the crisis keeps cascading next week—was essentially right, even though regulators chose a different resolution mechanism (full depositor protection plus a bridge bank) than the two options Sacks explicitly named.

marketseconomy
Depositors at SVB will not know their exact recovery or receive full distributions by Monday, March 13, 2023; instead, determining and paying out their cents-on-the-dollar recovery will take weeks or even months.
it's not going to be on Monday. It could take weeks or months to figure out how many cents on the dollar you have.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public statements and regulatory actions show the opposite of this prediction occurred.

On March 12, 2023, the U.S. Treasury, Federal Reserve, and FDIC issued a joint statement that explicitly said Silicon Valley Bank depositors "will have access to all of their money starting Monday, March 13" and that all depositors would be fully protected.(fdic.gov)

On March 13, 2023, the FDIC announced it had transferred all deposits, both insured and uninsured, into an FDIC‑operated bridge bank and that depositors would have full access to their money beginning that morning, with all depositors made whole.(fdic.gov) Multiple contemporaneous reports (Bloomberg, TechCrunch, CoinDesk, others) confirmed that SVB customers would have access to all funds on Monday under this guarantee.(bloomberg.com)

Sacks predicted that depositors would not know their recovery or receive full distributions by Monday and that the process could take weeks or months. In reality, U.S. regulators guaranteed full recovery on Sunday and implemented it on Monday, March 13. Therefore, this prediction is wrong.

governmenteconomy
There is a significant risk that, due to political unpopularity of ‘tech,’ the government will not intervene in the SVB situation, in which case a series of failures (“dominoes”) and broader systemic financial risks will unfold afterward.
there's a big risk here that precisely because tech is unpopular and people I think are confusing big tech with small tech, that the government doesn't step in here and the dominoes start falling and we start getting all the systemic risk playing out.View on YouTube
Explanation

The scenario Sachs warned about did not materialize. On March 12–13, 2023, just one–two days after the SVB failure, U.S. regulators (Treasury, Fed, FDIC) invoked the systemic risk exception and explicitly intervened to protect all Silicon Valley Bank depositors, including those above the normal $250,000 insurance cap. They transferred all deposits into an FDIC-operated bridge bank and guaranteed that depositors would have full access to their money starting March 13. (fdic.gov)

Regulators also launched the Bank Term Funding Program to provide broad liquidity support to other banks, specifically to prevent contagion and systemic stress from SVB’s failure. Congressional and FDIC testimony describe these actions as taken because officials feared widespread contagion if uninsured depositors at SVB (and Signature Bank) were left exposed. (fdic.gov)

Although there were additional high-profile failures (e.g., Signature Bank and later First Republic), these were resolved with further regulatory intervention and did not trigger the uncontrolled sequence of domino failures and systemic collapse that Sachs was concerned about. (reuters.com) Because the government did intervene quickly and took systemic-risk-mitigating actions, the conditional scenario he described (“government doesn’t step in” leading to dominoes and systemic risk) did not occur, so this prediction is best judged as wrong.

Sacks @ 00:53:22Inconclusive
economymarkets
If the U.S. federal government does not step in to protect depositors after the Silicon Valley Bank failure, then over the following months the U.S. regional banking system will be largely wiped out, effectively consolidating into roughly four remaining large ‘too big to fail’ banks.
So I think there's a chance that if the federal government doesn't step in here, the whole regional banking system could be decimated, and you're just going to be left with four too big to fail banks.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: “if the federal government doesn't step in here, the whole regional banking system could be decimated, and you're just going to be left with four too big to fail banks.”

What happened instead:

  • On March 12, 2023, the U.S. Treasury, Federal Reserve, and FDIC announced that all depositors of Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank would be fully protected, even above the normal FDIC insurance limits, and created the Bank Term Funding Program (BTFP) to support banks’ liquidity.
  • This is widely described in official releases and news coverage as the federal government “stepping in” to backstop depositors and stabilize the banking system.

Because the if-clause (“if the federal government doesn't step in here”) was not satisfied, we cannot empirically evaluate the implied counterfactual outcome (whether regional banks would have been “decimated” and consolidated into roughly four big banks). The actual path of history tells us what happened with intervention, not what would have happened without it.

Therefore, the accuracy of this statement is inconclusive: the condition for the prediction never occurred, so the prediction cannot be judged as right or wrong on observed outcomes.

venturemarkets
Following the Silicon Valley Bank failure in March 2023, there will be roughly a 60‑day freeze in venture deal-making activity, during which new investments and term sheet signings drop to minimal levels as VCs focus on supporting existing portfolio companies.
Jacob, you tweeted that you think this is going to cause a 60 day freeze in, in deal making activity. I think that's more or less right.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that SVB’s March 2023 failure would trigger about a 60‑day freeze in venture deal-making, with new investments and term sheets dropping to minimal levels as VCs focused almost entirely on existing portfolios.

Available data and contemporaneous reporting don’t support that:

  • Global VC activity was already depressed before SVB failed. Crunchbase shows Q1 2023 global funding at about $76B, down ~53% year over year, but flat quarter‑over‑quarter versus Q4 2022, meaning the quarter that included the March 10 SVB collapse did not show an additional cliff‑drop consistent with a sudden freeze. SVB is described as an “added shock to a weakened funding environment,” not the cause of a new standstill. (news.crunchbase.com)

  • By late March, observers already reported that any pause in deals had largely passed. A TechCrunch piece on March 29, 2023 reported that SVB’s failure did not appear likely to have “lasting adverse impact” on venture deal activity and that “any pause the news did create … has likely already passed.” DocSend data cited there showed investor activity in pitch decks down only ~7% and founder activity down ~4% versus the same week a year prior, and multiple investors said the brief dip had reversed quickly. (techcrunch.com) That is well inside the predicted 60‑day window.

  • Deal flow continued at substantial levels through Q2 2023, not “minimal” levels. Crunchbase’s Q2 2023 report shows global venture funding falling further to ~$65B (down 18% from Q1), but still funding more than 6,000 startups in the quarter, with roughly 1,500 seed and 1,200 early‑stage (Series A/B) rounds. That is a material slowdown, yet far from a freeze or near‑cessation of new deals. (news.crunchbase.com)

  • VC behavior did tilt more toward existing portfolios, but not to the exclusion of new deals. S&P Global reported that, particularly in insurtech, VCs “rattled by recent events” were prioritizing reinforcing existing portfolio companies and becoming more selective about new investments, tightening an already difficult fundraising environment. (spglobal.com) PitchBook/NVCA data cited by Clearbrook show a sharp drop in venture debt volume post‑SVB, especially at early stages, but equity deals continued, indicating a shift in risk appetite rather than a 60‑day halt. (clearbrookglobal.com)

Overall, the evidence supports a continuing cyclical downturn and some short‑lived caution immediately after the SVB collapse, not a roughly two‑month period where new venture investments and term sheets fell to minimal levels. On that basis, Sacks’s specific prediction of a 60‑day freeze is best judged wrong.

marketseconomy
In the days and weeks after the Silicon Valley Bank collapse in March 2023, there is a significant risk that depositor flight will spread to other U.S. regional banks, causing substantial cash outflows and potential runs at multiple regional institutions.
And I think there is a risk now of contagion spreading to these other regional banks, because people aren't sure. And there's already huge cash outflows leaving these other banks, because why take a chance?View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from March–April 2023 shows that depositor flight and contagion did spread to other U.S. regional banks, with substantial cash outflows and runs/near-runs:

  • First Republic Bank: After the SVB and Signature failures in March 2023, First Republic experienced massive withdrawals. Its Q1 2023 filings reported over $100 billion in deposit outflows in March, largely tied to uninsured and wealthy depositors moving money after the SVB collapse. Multiple analyses characterized this as a classic modern bank run driven by contagion fears from SVB.
  • Sector‑wide regional bank stress: In the weeks following SVB’s failure (mid‑March through April 2023), numerous U.S. regional banks—such as PacWest and Western Alliance—saw sharp deposit declines and intense market pressure, with reports of customers shifting funds to larger banks and money‑market funds for perceived safety. Regulators and financial press widely described this as contagion from SVB’s collapse affecting regional institutions, even where fundamentals differed.
  • Aggregate data on small/medium banks: Federal Reserve and industry data released later in 2023 showed that smaller U.S. banks suffered material net deposit outflows in March 2023, while the largest banks and money‑market funds recorded inflows—consistent with the “flight to safety” and “why take a chance?” behavior the prediction described.

Because (a) contagion fears did spread, (b) multiple regional banks experienced substantial deposit outflows, and (c) at least one major regional (First Republic) suffered a run severe enough to fail, the core substance of Sacks’s prediction—that in the days and weeks after SVB’s collapse, depositor flight would spread to other regional banks, causing significant cash outflows and runs at multiple institutions—is borne out by subsequent events.

Therefore the prediction is right.

ventureai
In 2023 H2 and throughout 2024, there will be widespread recapitalizations in venture‑backed startups: many companies that raised at peak 2021 valuations will be forced into down rounds or structured financings, while AI companies will continue to attract significant new investment, creating a bifurcated funding environment.
I think what we're going to see in the second half of 23 and all of 24 is a lot of medicine being taken, a lot of down rounds, a lot of structure. It's going to be a tale of two cities, the hot area. You know, AI is going to continue to receive new investment. And all these companies that you know, that receive peak valuations in 2021 are going to have a day of reckoning.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2H 2023 and 2024 strongly supports Sacks’s forecast of (a) widespread down/structured rounds for 2021‑vintage startups and (b) a bifurcated market where AI attracts most new capital.

1. Down rounds, structure, and recapitalizations for 2021‑era deals

  • Carta and PitchBook data show that from early 2023 onward, the share of flat or down rounds in the U.S. stayed near post‑2022 highs, with about a quarter of all Q1 2024 financings globally at flat or reduced valuations and U.S. flat/down rounds above 26%—the highest proportion in more than a decade. (zephyrnet.com)
  • Preqin found that down rounds jumped to an unprecedented 27% of all global venture deals in Q4 2023, up from 14.5% the prior quarter, confirming that by late 2023 a large share of financings were already repricings. (linkedin.com)
  • Legal/market overviews note that in 2024 nearly 25% of U.S. VC deals and 18% of European deals were down rounds, and investors often imposed “investor‑friendly” terms such as warrants, convertibles, and other structured instruments to take advantage of falling valuations. (practiceguides.chambers.com)
  • VC commentary aimed at founders explicitly says that “structured rounds…returned in full force over the past two years as late‑stage companies reel from the heights of 2021,” and that companies mispriced in 2021 face a choice between down rounds or structured rescue financing. (1984.vc)
  • A Financial Times analysis of U.S. startups in 2024 describes a 60% jump in failures as many ran out of cash from the 2021‑22 boom, while new funding became scarce except in favored sectors—clear evidence of the “medicine being taken” for peak‑era valuations. (ft.com)

2. AI as the “hot area” vs. everyone else (bifurcated market)

  • Global VC investment in 2024 was roughly flat year‑on‑year and still 55% below the 2021 peak, but AI funding grew more than 80% and accounted for close to one‑third of all venture dollars, driven by mega‑rounds for xAI, Databricks, Anthropic, OpenAI and others. (barrons.com)
  • Analyses of 2024–25 VC flows show that AI represented only a small fraction of total deal count (e.g., ~3% of U.S. rounds in 2024) but 15% or more of invested capital, with “enormous Series Bs at punchy valuations” for AI while non‑AI startups “fight for any remaining capital.” (thatwastheweek.com)
  • Multiple industry pieces explicitly describe the situation as a “tale of two cities”: AI funding surged (e.g., +62% to $110B in 2024) while overall startup funding fell double digits; sectors like fintech and climate tech saw large declines and struggled to raise. (esinli.com)
  • Data from Kruze and others indicate that by 2024 a large majority of new capital for many startup portfolios was going into AI, even as failures and shutdowns climbed among non‑AI companies that had raised aggressively in 2021–22. (ft.com)

Taken together, the data from 2H 2023 through 2024 show (1) historically high levels of down and structured rounds affecting many startups that raised at 2021 peak valuations, and (2) sustained, outsized investor enthusiasm for AI deals while most other startups faced a harsh funding environment. That closely matches Sacks’s prediction of “a lot of medicine,” widespread down/structured rounds, and a bifurcated market where AI remained the clear funding magnet.

politicsgovernment
The Dominion Voting Systems defamation lawsuit against Fox News will not ultimately result in Fox being found legally liable under the current U.S. defamation standard (New York Times v. Sullivan), i.e., Fox will avoid an adverse final judgment on liability.
Let me answer you directly, Jason. I think this would be a better world if Fox reliable, but I don't think they're going to be because that's not the legal standard.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ normalized prediction was that the Dominion Voting Systems defamation lawsuit against Fox News would not ultimately result in Fox being found legally liable under the New York Times v. Sullivan standard—i.e., Fox would avoid an adverse final judgment on liability.

What actually happened:

  • On March 31, 2023, the Delaware trial judge granted partial summary judgment for Dominion, ruling that Fox’s statements about Dominion were false and defamatory as a matter of law, but he left the key actual malice and damages questions for a jury at trial. This meant there was not yet a final judgment of liability under the full defamation standard. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Jury selection began in April 2023, and trial was set to start on April 18, 2023. Just as opening statements were about to begin, the parties announced a settlement: Fox agreed to pay Dominion $787.5 million, and the trial was canceled. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Because the case settled, there was no jury verdict and no final court judgment finding Fox liable under the New York Times v. Sullivan “actual malice” standard; the case was resolved by settlement and then dismissed. (en.wikipedia.org)

Although Fox paid a massive sum and the court formally found that many of its statements about Dominion were false, the specific prediction was about avoiding an adverse final liability judgment under the governing defamation standard. That is exactly what occurred. Therefore, judged against the normalized prediction, the prediction is right.

politicsgovernmenttech
As U.S.–China great power competition intensifies over the few years following March 2023, TikTok will be severely harmed in the U.S. (through a ban, forced divestiture, or equivalent measures), effectively becoming a major casualty of that competition.
I tend to think Chamath is right that TikTok is going to be gpk roadkill, and Gpk stands for Great Power Competition.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2023 shows that TikTok has, in practice, become a major casualty of escalating U.S.–China great power competition, primarily via a forced divestiture rather than an outright ban.

Key developments:

  1. Congress targeted TikTok directly with a divestiture-or-ban law. In April 2024, the Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act was signed into law. It explicitly applies to ByteDance/TikTok and requires apps deemed “foreign adversary controlled” (i.e., TikTok) to either be divested from that control or be banned in the U.S. by January 19, 2025, with only a short possible extension. (en.wikipedia.org) This law is a direct outgrowth of U.S. national security concerns about China.

  2. Courts upheld the law, making clear TikTok faced an existential choice. A federal appeals court in late 2024 upheld the constitutionality of the law, confirming that TikTok must complete a qualified divestiture from ByteDance by January 19, 2025, or effectively become unavailable in the U.S. (jurist.org) In early 2025, the U.S. Supreme Court likewise upheld the statute in TikTok, Inc. v. Garland, affirming that Congress could mandate divestiture because of national security risks tied to Chinese ownership. (americanbar.org)

  3. The U.S. government repeatedly delayed but did not back off the mandate. After taking office in January 2025, President Trump issued a series of executive orders delaying enforcement of the TikTok ban provisions, not to spare TikTok indefinitely, but explicitly to allow time to negotiate and complete a sale of TikTok’s U.S. operations that would satisfy the statute’s requirements. (whitehouse.gov) The White House framed this as balancing national security with the desire to keep the app online.

  4. By late 2025, ByteDance is being forced to relinquish control of TikTok U.S. A September 25, 2025 executive order from President Trump found that a proposed transaction to move TikTok’s U.S. app into a new U.S.-based joint venture constitutes a “qualified divestiture” under the Act, with ByteDance’s stake to be kept under 20% and the algorithm and content moderation controlled by the new U.S. entity under heavy security monitoring. (whitehouse.gov) Reporting in November 2025 describes ByteDance as being in the process of divesting about 80% of its U.S. assets in TikTok to a consortium led by Oracle and Silver Lake, with TikTok’s algorithm to be retrained and supervised under U.S. oversight. (reuters.com)

Interpretation against the prediction:

  • The user’s normalized version of the prediction allows "ban, forced divestiture, or equivalent measures" as the mechanism by which TikTok is “severely harmed” and becomes “GPC roadkill.”
  • While TikTok as a product remains available in the U.S. as of late 2025, its China-based owner is being compelled by U.S. law and policy—explicitly justified by national security concerns about China—to surrender majority ownership and operational control, including over its core algorithm and data handling. That is a severe strategic and economic blow to ByteDance and to TikTok as a China-controlled asset, and it is precisely the type of outcome one would describe as a major casualty of great power competition.
  • The timeline (“over the few years following March 2023”) is also satisfied: the law was passed in April 2024, upheld through 2024–2025, and by late 2025 the forced divestiture framework is in place and being executed.

Because U.S.–China competition has in fact led to a binding legal framework that forces TikTok’s U.S. operations out of effective Chinese control under threat of a nationwide ban, within roughly 2.5 years of the March 2023 podcast, the core substance of Sacks’s prediction—that TikTok would end up as GPC “roadkill” via ban/forced divestiture or equivalent severe measures—is best judged as right rather than wrong or ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
Over the subsequent several years after March 2023, the concept of “Great Power Competition” with China will become the dominant organizing principle of U.S. foreign policy, widely used in official rhetoric and strategic planning.
You're going to start hearing that term more and more. It's going to become the organizing principle of American foreign policy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2023 shows that competition with China framed as great/strategic power competition has in fact functioned as a primary organizing principle of U.S. foreign policy and strategy.

  1. China-centered competition as core of official strategy. The 2022 National Security Strategy (still operative through the following years) explicitly states that a competition among major powers is underway and identifies China as “America’s most consequential geopolitical challenge,” the only state with both the intent and capability to reshape the international order, and says the U.S. must “out-compete” China. It describes the era as one of “strategic competition with major powers,” clearly elevating this competition—especially with China—above other threats.【2†turn2search1】【2†turn2search2】 Independent summaries stress that this competition with China suffuses the document.【2†turn2search0】【2†turn2search4】

  2. Defense planning built around China as the pacing challenge. The unclassified 2022 National Defense Strategy and related Pentagon statements repeatedly call China the “overall pacing challenge” and “most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades,” saying U.S. force planning, modernization, and posture are set with that yardstick in mind.【0†turn0search2】【0†turn0search5】 Analyses of this framing note that U.S. defense planning, industrial policy, and global posture now revolve around how to keep up with and outpace Beijing, explicitly treating China-centric competition as the benchmark for strategy.【0†turn0search9】

  3. Congressional and bureaucratic structures explicitly organized around competition with China. In January 2023, the House created the Select Committee on the Strategic Competition between the United States and the Chinese Communist Party, mandated to study and make recommendations across economic, technological, and security domains of U.S.–China rivalry.【2†turn2search14】 That a standing select committee is framed entirely around "strategic competition" with China is strong evidence that this concept has become a central organizing lens in official policy deliberations.

  4. Foreign-policy professionals explicitly describe GPC as the central organizing principle. A U.S. Foreign Service Journal article (June 2021, still widely cited in subsequent debates) flatly describes the re-emergence of “great power competition” as “the central organizing principle for U.S. engagement with the world,” specifically highlighting the rise of Xi’s China as the main peer competitor.【4†turn4view0】 Later commentary and book reviews on U.S. strategy in the era of “great power competition” and “strategic competition” treat this frame as the widely accepted deep structure of U.S. grand strategy, even when arguing it is a flawed or dangerous organizing concept.【3†turn3search0】【3†turn3search4】

  5. Ongoing China-focused competitive framing across regions and issues. Analyses of U.S. policy in regions like the Middle East complain that great power competition with China is increasingly the lens through which Washington views local issues—implicitly acknowledging that this frame is driving policy.【1†turn1search10】 Other scholarship and commentary in 2023–2025 describe the United States as entering a full-fledged "great-power contest" or “great-power rivalry” with China that dominates policymakers’ thinking about alliances, technology controls (e.g., chips), and economic statecraft.【1†turn1search1】【2†turn2news12】【2†turn2search6】

  6. Caveats that do not overturn the prediction.

    • The Biden team nominally shifted terminology from “great power competition” to “strategic competition” in some documents,【3†turn3search3】【3†turn3search13】 and the NSS also emphasizes transnational threats (climate, pandemics) alongside competition.【2†turn2search3】
    • Some 2024–2025 analyses argue that the great-power-competition frame is misguided or even in decline under newer approaches (e.g., more homeland-focused defense, spheres-of-influence bargaining).【0†turn0news16】【1†turn1search11】【1†turn1search9】

    But these critiques presuppose that great/strategic power competition with China is the prevailing paradigm they are arguing against, which reinforces—rather than refutes—Sacks’s claim that it has become the organizing principle.

Taking all of this together: by the mid‑2020s, China-centered great/strategic power competition clearly shapes U.S. national security strategy, defense planning, congressional structures, and much of the foreign‑policy debate. That matches Sacks’s prediction that this concept would become the primary organizing framework of U.S. foreign policy over the years after March 2023, even if the preferred official label is often “strategic competition” rather than the exact phrase “great power competition.”

aitech
As AI assistants are embedded directly into software products, a large share of customer support inquiries that today require human agents or separate support channels will effectively disappear, being handled in-product by AI instead.
I think that a lot of that customer support inquiries just go away because the help The assistant gets built into the tool directly, so you never get to the point of you.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence by November 30, 2025 shows strong movement in the direction of Sacks’s prediction, but it does not clearly confirm that “a large share” of customer-support inquiries overall have already “effectively disappeared” due to in‑product AI assistants.

What has clearly happened (supports the direction of the prediction):

  • Major SaaS and productivity vendors (e.g., Microsoft 365 Copilot, Google Workspace Duet/Gemini, Salesforce Einstein Copilot, HubSpot AI, Intercom Fin, Zendesk AI agents) have embedded AI assistants directly into their products to answer help questions, draft responses, and resolve common issues in‑product rather than routing to humans or separate ticket portals. These deployments are specifically marketed as reducing escalations to human agents and deflecting tickets.
  • Case studies and vendor reports (from companies like Intercom, Zendesk, Ada, Forethought, and others) describe substantial ticket deflection (often 20–40%+ of incoming requests for certain workflows or problem types) when AI chatbots/assistants are deployed inside the product experience, reducing contact volume that reaches human support.
  • Many startups now build products with AI help directly in the UI (tooltips, chat sidebars, command palettes) so users get real‑time, contextual assistance rather than filing tickets at all. This matches the mechanism Sacks described: “assistant gets built into the tool directly, so you never get to the point” of contacting support.

Why the overall truth value is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong:

  • There is no broad, independent, industry‑wide data yet showing that across software products as a whole a “large share” of support inquiries have already disappeared. The best evidence is fragmented vendor case studies and marketing claims, which are not a reliable aggregate measure.
  • Impact is highly uneven by sector and company size. Large tech/SaaS firms and AI‑forward startups have implemented substantial in‑product AI support; many traditional enterprises, regulated industries, and smaller vendors still rely heavily on human agents and conventional ticket systems.
  • Overall customer support employment and spending have not visibly collapsed. While some organizations report efficiency gains and slower headcount growth in support, there isn’t strong macro‑level evidence that human‑handled support volume has already dropped by the kind of “large share” implied by the prediction.
  • The prediction is somewhat qualitative (“a lot… just go away,” “large share”), so judging whether the threshold has been met requires a quantitative benchmark that the public evidence does not supply.

Conclusion

By late 2025, product‑embedded AI assistants are clearly handling many more customer questions in‑product and reducing the need for traditional support interactions in a growing portion of the software industry. However, because the scale of this effect across the whole market cannot be reliably measured and varies widely by company and sector, we cannot definitively say that a large share of all such inquiries has already ‘effectively disappeared.’ The claim is therefore best scored as ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong based on currently available evidence.

techgovernment
In the Gonzales v. Google case argued in February 2023, the U.S. Supreme Court will ultimately rule in favor of Google, preserving broad Section 230 immunity for recommendation algorithms, and thereby delivering a legal win for Google and other large tech platforms.
So even the justice, who I think was most likely to rein in 230 seem to be more comfortable with what the defendant, which was Google was saying. So it looks to me like Google and Big Tech are going to win this one.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is about the outcome of Gonzalez v. Google LLC at the U.S. Supreme Court and its implications for Section 230 protections for recommendation algorithms.

What actually happened:

  • The Supreme Court issued its decisions in Gonzalez v. Google LLC and the related case Twitter, Inc. v. Taamneh on May 18, 2023.
  • In Twitter v. Taamneh, the Court unanimously held that the plaintiffs had not adequately stated a claim for aiding and abetting under the Anti-Terrorism Act, resolving the liability questions in favor of the tech platforms.
  • On the same day, the Court issued a short, unsigned opinion in Gonzalez v. Google that vacated and remanded the case to the Ninth Circuit in light of the Taamneh ruling, rather than narrowing Section 230. The Court explicitly declined to reach the plaintiffs’ broad theory that recommendation algorithms should fall outside Section 230, and it did nothing to restrict Section 230’s application.
  • Commentators and legal analysts widely interpreted this pair of decisions as a substantial win for Google and other platforms, because the Court neither imposed liability in Taamneh nor cut back Section 230 in Gonzalez. The practical effect was to preserve the broad immunity status quo, including for algorithmic recommendations, pending any future, more targeted case.

These outcomes are documented in the Supreme Court’s opinions and summarized in legal analyses, all of which note that the Court avoided narrowing Section 230 and effectively left existing protections in place while ruling for the platforms on the underlying liability theories.

Match to the prediction:

  • The prediction: that in Gonzales v. Google the Supreme Court would "rule in favor of Google" and that Big Tech would "win this one," with broad Section 230 protections preserved for recommendation algorithms.
  • The reality: The Court did not adopt the plaintiffs’ theory, did not narrow Section 230, and issued decisions in Taamneh and Gonzalez that are broadly regarded as wins for Google and similar platforms, maintaining the de facto protection of recommendation algorithms under Section 230.

While the Court’s procedural posture (vacate and remand rather than a merits ruling squarely expanding 230) is more technical than the podcast’s simplified framing, in practical and legal-effect terms the prediction was directionally accurate: Google and Big Tech prevailed, and broad Section 230 immunity—including for recommendation algorithms—remains intact.

Therefore, the prediction is best classified as right.

Sacks @ 01:06:53Inconclusive
conflictpolitics
The Russia‑Ukraine war, as managed by the Biden administration, will ultimately have a worse overall outcome for the United States than the 1991 Gulf War against Iraq, in terms of cost, duration, clarity of objectives, and strategic consequences.
I think the truth of the matter is that this war is going to turn out much worse than the Iraq war did in 1991, because in 91, we showed restraint and we knew what our vital interest was, and we kept our objectives is limited, and we kept the timetable very short.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, the Russia‑Ukraine war is still ongoing, and its ultimate outcome for the United States—in terms of total cost, duration, clarity of objectives, and long‑term strategic consequences—remains uncertain.

Key points:

  1. War not concluded
    The Russia‑Ukraine conflict, begun with Russia’s full‑scale invasion on 24 February 2022, has not reached a stable political settlement or clear end state. Front lines have fluctuated, periodic offensives and counteroffensives continue, and there is no agreed peace treaty or armistice that would let analysts definitively tally costs or strategic outcomes relative to the 1991 Gulf War.

  2. Costs and duration are still moving targets
    – U.S. military and financial assistance to Ukraine has surpassed many tens of billions of dollars and continues to be debated and extended in Congress. Future aid levels, reconstruction commitments, and indirect economic costs (e.g., energy, supply chains, deterrence posture in Europe) could still rise or fall substantially.
    – The duration dimension is inherently open‑ended: while the 1991 Gulf War had a clear, short combat phase (January–February 1991) and a well‑defined coalition objective (expel Iraqi forces from Kuwait), the Russia‑Ukraine war does not yet have either a clear terminal date or agreed political outcome.

  3. Strategic consequences are still unfolding
    Medium‑ and long‑term effects for the U.S.—on NATO cohesion and expansion, Russia’s military and economic strength, China’s calculus on Taiwan, global defense spending patterns, and the future of the rules‑based order—are still in flux. Some effects (e.g., an enlarged and more unified NATO) can be read as strategically positive for Washington; others (e.g., sustained higher defense and energy costs, risk of escalation, strain on U.S. munitions stockpiles) could prove negative. Which side ultimately dominates the ledger is not yet knowable.

  4. The prediction is about the ultimate comparison
    Sacks’ claim was that this war “is going to turn out much worse than the Iraq war [Gulf War] did in 1991” for the U.S. overall. Because the Russia‑Ukraine war’s end state, total cost, and full strategic impact are not yet determined, we cannot conclusively say today that this has turned out worse—or that it definitively won’t.

Given these uncertainties and the ongoing nature of the conflict, the fairest assessment is that the prediction’s truth value cannot yet be determined, so the outcome is inconclusive (too early) rather than clearly right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

economypolitics
Western economic sanctions imposed on Russia over the Ukraine war will not cause a major collapse of the Russian economy; instead, Russia will experience only a modest GDP hit on the order of a low single‑digit percentage because non‑Western countries continue to trade with it.
So the rest of the world is not happy with us. And this is why the Russian sanctions have not been effective. I think the Russian economy has had like a 3 to 4% hit. It is not the collapse that was predicted because there are enough other countries willing to do business with them.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since early 2022 supports Sacks’s core prediction that sanctions would inflict a modest macro‑level GDP hit rather than a “major collapse,” and that continued trade with non‑Western countries would cushion the blow.

  1. Observed GDP hit was low single‑digit, not a collapse

    • Russia’s GDP fell by about 2.1% in 2022, far less than the double‑digit collapse many early forecasts predicted.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • By 2023 the economy rebounded with ~3.6–4.1% real growth, with continued positive growth reported into 2024, again inconsistent with the notion of a post‑sanctions collapse.(ru.wikipedia.org)
      These figures line up with Sacks’s “3–4% hit” characterization and clearly do not describe a major economic collapse.
  2. Sanctions underperformed early expectations and were cushioned by non‑Western trade

    • Analyses have repeatedly noted that sanctions “might not be having the impact the West had hoped”, with the IMF and others highlighting Russia’s continued output and growth despite restrictions.(the-independent.com)
    • Reporting on the war’s economic impact stresses Russia’s surprising resilience, with growth resuming in 2023–24, heavily supported by redirected energy exports and trade with countries that did not join Western sanctions (e.g., China and India).(theguardian.com)
    • The IMF and other observers explicitly describe Russian trade being redirected from sanctioning to non‑sanctioning countries, matching Sacks’s reasoning that “enough other countries [are] willing to do business with them.”(the-independent.com)
  3. Sanctions are still harmful, but that does not contradict the prediction
    Sanctions have clearly hurt Russia’s long‑term prospects—higher inflation and interest rates, fiscal strain, technology import restrictions, and growing dependence on war spending and a narrow set of trading partners.(en.wikipedia.org) But the prediction we are evaluating is narrower: whether sanctions would cause a major collapse versus a modest, low‑single‑digit GDP hit with continued trade via non‑Western partners. On those specific points, post‑2022 data and mainstream analyses align with Sacks’s view.

Given that Russia saw only a small initial GDP contraction, returned to growth, and avoided a macroeconomic collapse largely by re‑routing trade to non‑sanctioning countries, the prediction is best classified as right.

politicseconomyconflict
If the Ukraine war contributes to a significant U.S. recession before the 2024 election, Donald Trump’s main viable path to winning the presidency will be to blame that economic downturn on the war and the foreign‑policy establishment, using an anti–military‑industrial‑complex message as his central campaign argument.
If we get a recession that Trump can, I think, lay at the feet of this war. He's positioning himself to take advantage of this could be a silver bullet for him. I don't think he has any other way of winning.View on YouTube
Explanation

By November 5, 2024, enough time had passed to evaluate this prediction, and subsequent events contradict it on multiple key points.

  1. No U.S. recession tied to the Ukraine war before the 2024 election.
    The National Bureau of Economic Research’s business‑cycle chronology shows the last U.S. recession ended in April 2020, with the most recent peak in February 2020 and no later recessions dated as of 2024–2025. (nber.org) GDP growth remained positive in 2023 and 2024 (e.g., U.S. real GDP grew about 2.9% in 2023 and 2.8% in 2024, with Q4 2024 annualized growth at 2.3%), indicating a slowdown but not a significant recession. (barrons.com) While some European economies, such as Germany’s, experienced Ukraine‑war‑related recessions due to energy shocks, this did not translate into a U.S. recession. (en.wikipedia.org) So the antecedent of the conditional (“a significant U.S. recession attributable to the Ukraine war before 2024”) never occurred.

  2. Trump nevertheless won the 2024 election.
    Donald Trump defeated Kamala Harris in the 2024 U.S. presidential election, winning 312 electoral votes to 226 and carrying all major swing states. (en.wikipedia.org) This directly contradicts the speaker’s assertion that Trump had essentially no other way to win besides the hypothesized recession‑based strategy.

  3. Trump’s actual campaign message centered on immigration, crime, and “Bidenomics,” not primarily on blaming a war‑induced recession or the military‑industrial complex.
    Analyses of Trump’s 2024 campaign show he emphasized immigration, the southern border, crime, and inflation/Biden’s economic record as his dominant themes. (washingtonpost.com) Trump and his campaign communications repeatedly framed the election around a “broken border,” violent crime by undocumented immigrants, and the failures of “Bidenomics,” as illustrated by official campaign emails and rally transcripts. (donaldjtrump.com)

    Trump did criticize the cost of aid to Ukraine and claimed he could quickly end the war, but reporting on his rhetoric and his own post‑election interview with TIME depict this as part of a broader foreign‑policy posture, not as a central, economic blame‑the‑war campaign built around an explicit anti–military‑industrial‑complex frame. (politico.com)

  4. How this maps to the normalized prediction.
    The normalized claim is: if the Ukraine war drives a major U.S. recession, Trump’s main viable path to victory is to blame that downturn on the war and the foreign‑policy establishment, running an anti‑military‑industrial‑complex campaign—and that he has no other realistic route to win. In reality: (a) the war did not cause a U.S. recession before the election; (b) Trump did win; and (c) he did so with a message centered on immigration, crime, and inflation, not the posited recession‑and‑Ukraine narrative. This shows the forward‑looking judgment that he had “no other way of winning” besides that scenario was falsified by events.

Because both the key condition (a war‑induced U.S. recession) failed to materialize and Trump won via a different message than the one described as his only viable path, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

Sacks @ 01:16:28Inconclusive
conflictpolitics
Because the Ukraine war is existential for Russia, its leadership will be willing to escalate up to and including potential nuclear use rather than accept clear defeat, giving Russia enduring ‘escalatory dominance’ over NATO in this conflict.
And the sooner we recognize that fact, the better off we're going to be.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, Russia has not used nuclear weapons in the Ukraine war, nor has a scenario of Russia facing an imminent, clearly decisive defeat and then choosing between defeat and nuclear escalation actually occurred. The war remains ongoing, with front lines shifting and Russia maintaining control of significant occupied territory, so the specific test condition—“rather than accept clear defeat”—has not been met.

The prediction is about Russia’s willingness to escalate up to and including nuclear use and about its supposed enduring escalatory dominance over NATO. Those are strategic-intent claims, not directly observable facts, and so far they have neither been clearly validated (e.g., via nuclear use or overt nuclear brinkmanship at the moment of clear defeat) nor clearly falsified (e.g., Russia accepting an obvious, final military defeat without serious escalation). Therefore, given the state of the war and absence of nuclear use as of late 2025, the correctness of this prediction cannot yet be determined.

politicsconflict
U.S. policy and rhetoric around the Ukraine war and China’s potential support for Russia will drive China and Russia into an increasingly close, quasi‑allied bloc opposed to U.S. interests, reversing the Cold War strategy of keeping them apart.
And what we're doing right now, we're doing right now, is pushing China and Russia together into a new axis block. This is very foolish.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the Feb 2023 episode shows China and Russia have indeed moved into an increasingly close, quasi‑allied alignment broadly opposed to U.S. interests, even if they stop short of a formal treaty alliance.

Key points:

  • Deepening strategic partnership: Xi and Putin have repeatedly reaffirmed their pre‑2022 “no limits” partnership. In May 2024 Putin’s state visit to China was explicitly framed as a “new era” visit that underscored a deepening strategic partnership, coinciding with the 75th anniversary of diplomatic relations.(en.wikipedia.org) Analyses describe this as a comprehensive partnership and strategic cooperation “just short of a conventional alliance.”(isdp.eu)

  • Bloc‑like opposition to U.S. leadership: Xi and Putin now routinely position their partnership as an alternative pole to the U.S.-led order. A 2025 summit in Moscow saw them condemn U.S. tariffs, sanctions, and what they called Washington’s “dual containment” of Russia and China, while presenting their relationship as a stabilizing counterweight.(washingtonpost.com) A U.S. congressional commission likewise warns that Xi is building an “alternative world order” centered on China and aligned with anti‑democratic states like Russia and North Korea.(axios.com) This is consistent with Sacks’s claim of a new axis‑like bloc opposed to U.S. interests.

  • Ukraine war and U.S. policy as a binding force: Western (especially U.S.) support for Ukraine and sanctions on Russia have made China an economic and political lifeline for Moscow—via surging trade, energy purchases and financial links—while Beijing avoids condemning the invasion.(aljazeera.com) NATO’s 2024 summit statement explicitly accuses China of becoming a “decisive enabler” of Russia’s war through large‑scale support for its defense industrial base, referring directly to their “no limits” partnership.(foreignpolicy.com) That is precisely the dynamic Sacks described, where the Ukraine conflict and U.S. responses pull Beijing and Moscow closer together.

  • Quasi‑allied, even if officially “not an alliance”: Beijing still publicly insists that China–Russia relations are not aimed at any third party and do not constitute a formal alliance. Yet Xi simultaneously affirms the long‑term, “no limits” nature of the relationship and emphasizes that the two are “good neighbours that cannot be moved apart,” while analysts note they are increasingly “challeng[ing] a US‑led global order” together.(asiaone.com) Think‑tank and economic analyses highlight real limits and asymmetries in the partnership, but still characterize it as a durable, strategically aligned front against Western pressure.(capitaleconomics.com)

Given this trajectory between early 2023 and late 2025, the core of Sacks’s prediction—that U.S. policy around Ukraine and concern over China’s support for Russia would push Beijing and Moscow into an increasingly close, quasi‑allied bloc opposed to U.S. interests, undermining the old Cold War aim of keeping them apart—matches observed reality. The partnership is not a formal alliance, but it functions in practice much like the “new axis bloc” he warned about, so the prediction is best judged right.

Sacks @ 00:52:33Inconclusive
health
As a result of the East Palestine, Ohio vinyl chloride train derailment and controlled burn, there will be a noticeably elevated incidence of cancer among the exposed population that becomes evident roughly 20 years after the incident (around 2043), implying that many residents will develop cancer attributable to this event.
I guess we'll know in 20 years when a lot of people come down with cancer.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is about long‑term cancer incidence (~20 years after the February 2023 East Palestine, Ohio derailment). As of the current date (November 30, 2025), only about 2 years have passed since the incident, far short of the 20‑year timeframe implied by the quote ("we'll know in 20 years when a lot of people come down with cancer").

Epidemiological studies of cancer risk from environmental exposures (like vinyl chloride) typically require long latency periods (often decades) before a statistically clear increase in cancer incidence can be attributed to a specific event in a population. Current public reporting and early health assessments after the February 3, 2023 Norfolk Southern derailment and controlled burn of vinyl chloride in East Palestine focus on short‑term symptoms (respiratory irritation, headaches, rashes) and environmental contamination monitoring, not on long‑term cancer outcomes, which cannot yet be observed.

Because the prediction explicitly concerns what will be evident around 2043, and we are still in 2025, it is too early to determine whether there will be a "noticeably elevated" cancer rate attributable to this event. Therefore, the correctness of the prediction cannot yet be evaluated.

politicseconomyconflict
If the Russia–Ukraine war continues for an extended period (multiple years) without resolution, German Chancellor Olaf Scholz will face significant domestic political trouble attributable to economic pain from lost Russian gas and his alignment with U.S. policy on the war.
So if this war drags on for a long time, I think Schultz might be in some political trouble precisely because he's gone along with the Americans on this.View on YouTube
Explanation

The condition of the prediction was met: the Russia–Ukraine war did in fact drag on for years after the podcast (Russia invaded in February 2022 and major combat and Western backing for Ukraine were still ongoing in late 2025).(en.wikipedia.org)

Olaf Scholz clearly ended up in serious domestic political trouble. His three‑party “traffic light” coalition became the most unpopular federal government in postwar Germany, with polls in 2023–2024 showing roughly 80–85% of Germans dissatisfied with its performance and his SPD sinking toward the mid‑teens in party support.(aa.com.tr) In November 2024, coalition infighting over economic policy led Scholz to sack his finance minister, triggering the collapse of the government and a confidence vote that he lost in December.(en.wikipedia.org) Early elections in February 2025 then produced a historic defeat for the SPD—its worst result since the 19th century at 16.4%—and Scholz lost the chancellorship to Friedrich Merz, who was elected by the Bundestag in May 2025.(en.wikipedia.org) Scholz’s fall from office after a snap election is strong evidence of “political trouble.”

A central driver of that trouble was economic pain linked to the loss of Russian gas and the war. Germany entered recession and became the only G7 economy to contract in 2023; economists and official analyses highlight the abrupt end of cheap Russian pipeline gas after the invasion and sanctions as a key cause of higher energy prices, inflation, and industrial weakness.(en.wikipedia.org) These energy‑price and growth problems remained a core domestic issue even into 2025.(reuters.com) Public-opinion work and political analysis of Scholz’s tenure repeatedly point to the energy crisis, inflation, and economic slump as major reasons for his collapsing approval ratings and the rise of protest parties like the AfD.(aa.com.tr)

Those economic problems are directly tied to Germany’s—and thus Scholz’s—decision to align with the U.S. and broader Western line on Russia after the invasion: backing sanctions that severed dependence on Russian gas, providing extensive financial and military support to Ukraine, and framing this as part of a joint Western strategy.(en.wikipedia.org) Domestic critics on both the left and right explicitly attacked this course, arguing that sanctions and arms deliveries to Ukraine—core elements of the U.S.-led policy—were damaging German economic interests and energy security; such themes featured prominently in AfD and other protest movements that gained as Scholz’s popularity collapsed.(en.wikipedia.org)

Other issues (immigration, internal coalition quarrels, climate and budget fights) also contributed, so the prediction slightly overstates how singularly U.S. alignment would be blamed. But in net: the war dragged on, the loss of Russian gas and war‑related economic pain became central domestic problems, Scholz’s pro‑Ukraine / pro‑sanctions stance as part of the U.S.-led camp was a visible part of that policy mix, and he ultimately suffered severe political consequences including the collapse of his government and loss of the chancellorship. That overall trajectory matches the prediction’s core claim, so it is best judged as right.

economy
For calendar year 2023, the U.S. economy is more likely than it was a month earlier to experience a soft landing (continued growth without a formal recession), given the then-current labor market data.
I'd say that relative to where we were a month ago, you'd have to say that the odds of us having a soft landing this year are quite a bit better than they were just a few weeks ago.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is framed as a relative probability update: that, as of early February 2023, a U.S. soft landing in calendar year 2023 was "quite a bit" more likely than it had seemed a few weeks earlier, based on the then-current labor data.

What actually happened in 2023:

  • The U.S. did not enter a recession in 2023; the NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee still dates the last recession as ending in April 2020, with no new recession peak or trough after that. (nber.org)
  • Real U.S. GDP grew about 2.5% in 2023, up from 1.9% in 2022, according to the BEA’s third estimate. (bea.gov)
  • The labor market remained strong, with unemployment averaging about 3.6% in 2023 and employment at record levels. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Many retrospective analyses describe 2023 as a year in which the U.S. economy avoided the widely forecast recession and, in effect, achieved or approached a soft landing (growth continued while inflation fell). (cnbc.com)

However, the prediction we are scoring is not "there will be a soft landing in 2023"; it is the narrower statement that the odds of a 2023 soft landing were higher in early February 2023 than a month earlier. That is a claim about how underlying probabilities (or at least informed beliefs) changed over a one‑month window.

On that narrower question, the evidence is mixed and subjective:

  • Late‑2022 economist surveys still put high odds on a 2023 recession (e.g., one Bankrate survey found an average estimate of a 64% chance of recession in 2023). (bankrate.com)
  • Around February 2023, commentary was divided: some analysts argued a soft landing was still possible, while others said the "door to a soft landing is rapidly closing" as inflation data stayed high and the Fed signaled further tightening. (cnbc.com)

Because we have no direct, objective measure of how the true probability of a soft landing changed between early January and early February 2023—and expert views at the time were not uniformly shifting in one clear direction—the claim that the odds were "quite a bit better" than a month earlier cannot be cleanly classified as right or wrong, even though the eventual outcome (no 2023 recession with continued growth) is consistent with a soft landing.

Given that 2023 is over (so it’s not "too early"), but the prediction concerns an inherently unobservable probability shift over a short horizon, the fairest judgment is:

  • Result: ambiguous – the statement about improved odds cannot be definitively verified or falsified from available data, despite the favorable eventual outcome.
economymarkets
As implied by the yield curve in early Feb 2023: (1) the Fed funds rate will peak within ~6 months at about 4.75–5.0% with at most one additional 25 bp hike; (2) over the subsequent two years, the Fed will cut rates by roughly 50 bps; and (3) over the long term, U.S. interest rates will stabilize around 3.5%, with no return to a near‑zero interest rate policy like in the 2010s.
So basically the market is predicting we get maybe one more quarter point roughly not much. And then if you go to the two year it's at 4.09...what the market is actually predicting is that over the next two years, we're actually going to get a 50 basis point decrease from the fed. And then if you go to say the five year or the ten year, we're at 3.5%. So the market's basically saying that long term rates are going to stabilize at 3.5%. We're not going back to the abnormal zero interest rate policy...View on YouTube
Explanation

Evaluating the three parts of the prediction against what actually happened:

  1. Peak level and number of hikes. At the time of the podcast (early Feb 2023), the federal funds target range was 4.50–4.75%. (ycharts.com) Sacks said the curve implied “maybe one more” 25 bp hike and a peak around 4.75–5.0%. In reality, the Fed hiked three more times: to 4.75–5.00% in March 2023, 5.00–5.25% in May, and 5.25–5.50% in July, where it peaked. (ycharts.com) That is three additional 25 bp hikes and a peak 50 bps higher than his implied 4.75–5.0%, so this component is clearly wrong.

  2. Net cuts over the following two years. He said the curve was implying about a 50 bp reduction in rates over the subsequent two years. The Fed held the peak range of 5.25–5.50% from July 2023 through mid‑2024, then began cutting in September 2024 (to 4.75–5.00%), November 2024 (4.50–4.75%), and December 2024 (4.25–4.50%). (cnbc.com) By early 2025, the target range was still 4.25–4.50%. (ycharts.com) Relative to the February 2023 level of 4.50–4.75%, that’s only about 25 bps lower after two years, not the ~50 bps Sacks described, and it required a much higher‑than‑expected peak and late‑starting, larger cuts. So the trajectory and net change both differ materially from his implied path.

  3. Long‑term rates around 3.5% and no return to ZIRP. Long‑maturity Treasury yields in late 2025 are closer to 4% than 3.5%: the 10‑year Treasury yield is around 4.0–4.1%, with the 5‑year near 3.7%. (mintrates.com) That doesn’t match “stabilizing” at 3.5% so far, though it’s also not wildly off. His claim that we’re “not going back” to near‑zero policy rates is not yet testable as a long‑run statement, but to date has not been falsified: the Fed funds rate has stayed in the 3.75–5.50% range since 2023, far from 0%. (ycharts.com)

Because the central, time‑bounded elements of the prediction—how high and how quickly rates would peak, and the scale of cuts over the next two years—were significantly off relative to actual Fed policy, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong, even though the very long‑run “no ZIRP” idea remains inconclusive.

marketseconomytechventure
Over the coming years, public SaaS company valuations will not return to the extreme 2021 bubble levels (e.g., ~100x revenue) but will instead normalize around valuation multiples similar to those seen circa 2017.
And that's why we're never going back to the bubble of 2021, where SaaS companies were trading at 100 times IRR. We're going to go back to an environment more like a more normal one, where valuations are more likely. The 2017 valuations, something like that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available market data supports Sacks’s view that, in the years after early 2023, public SaaS valuations did not return to the 2021 bubble extremes and instead re‑normalized to roughly pre‑COVID / ~2017 ranges.

Bubble reference point

  • During the 2020–2021 boom, Bessemer’s Cloud 100 shows average cloud valuation multiples around 34x ARR in 2021, far above historical norms.
  • A detailed SaaS valuation study using S&P Capital IQ notes the highest observed public SaaS multiple was Asana at ~89x LTM revenue in November 2021, illustrating the kind of ~100x revenue outliers Sacks was talking about, and that these levels were confined to the 2020–2021 bubble period. (bvp.com)

Post‑2022 normalization & current levels

  • Multiple independent sources now place median public SaaS EV/Revenue around 6–7x in 2024–2025. For example: a SaaS M&A / public‑market review cites BVP’s Cloud Index at ~7.5x revenue in early 2025, up from ~6x a year earlier but still far below the 2021 peak near 18–20x. (buttondown.com)
  • A separate 2025 valuation summary similarly reports median EV/Revenue for large U.S. public SaaS at ~6.1x as of September 2025, versus a peak near 20x in 2021. (aventis-advisors.com)
  • The SaaS Capital Index, tracking public SaaS names, finds median ARR multiples around 7x in early 2025, with even the top 10 highest‑valued companies mostly in the low‑ to mid‑teens (e.g., CrowdStrike ~20.8x, ServiceNow ~19.5x, Datadog ~17.5x)—an order of magnitude below 2021’s ~90x outliers and well below the 30x+ cohort common at the peak. (saas-capital.com)

Comparison to 2017‑era valuations

  • Historical work on SaaS comps shows that in 2016–2017, leading horizontal/vertical public SaaS names typically traded in the mid‑single‑ to high‑single‑digit EV/Revenue range (roughly 6–9x depending on subsector). (meridianib.com)
  • A 2024 analysis of BVP’s Cloud Index explicitly notes that the current 6–7x median revenue multiple was last seen in October 2017, and characterizes 2022–2024 levels as a return to the “pre‑pandemic normal,” with no signs of a reversion to the 2020–2021 bubble. (linkedin.com)

Assessment versus the prediction

  • Sacks predicted: (1) we’re never going back to the 2021 bubble, where some SaaS names traded near 100x revenue, and (2) valuations would revert to a more normal environment similar to 2017.
  • As of late 2025, public SaaS valuations have indeed reverted to ~6–7x median EV/Revenue, matching late‑2010s norms, and even the top decile of names trade at <25x ARR—far below the 2021 extremes.

Given nearly three years of post‑podcast data showing sustained normalization at 2017‑like multiples and no re‑emergence of bubble‑level (~100x) public SaaS valuations, the prediction has so far played out as described. Hence, it is reasonable to mark this forecast as right on the available evidence.

venture
During the 3–4 years following early 2023, venture capital firms will deploy their existing funds at a pace roughly 3–4 times slower than in the prior few years, leading to significantly reduced annual investment volume per year compared to the 2020–2021 period.
Yes. There's a record amount of money. Venture capital was raised over the last couple of years, but it's going to be deployed much more slowly and carefully over the next, say, 3 or 4 years, than it was over the previous few years. So divide that amount of money by 3 or 4, because the pace of deployment is going to go way down.View on YouTube
Explanation

Baseline: Global VC investment was about $294B in 2020 and $621B in the record year 2021, more than doubling year over year. (finbold.com) In the U.S., VC deal value was roughly $172.3B in 2020 and $329.9B in 2021. (nvca.org)

Post‑2023 reality: Global VC funding fell to roughly $248–262B in 2023 (about 40–60% below 2021, i.e., around 2–2.5x lower, not 3–4x), then partially recovered to about $275–315B in 2024, still well below the 2021 peak but clearly not at one‑third or one‑quarter of that level. (spglobal.com) H1 2025 already saw about $205B of global funding, the strongest half-year since H1 2022 and on pace to approach 2022 levels again, which is inconsistent with a sustained 3–4x deployment slowdown. (news.crunchbase.com)

U.S. data tell the same story: VC investment dropped from $329.9B in 2021 to $170.6B in 2023 (roughly half, i.e., about 2x slower than the peak, not 3–4x) and then rebounded to $215.4B in 2024. (nvca.org) In the first half of 2025 alone, U.S. startups raised $162.8B, up 75.6% year over year and already the strongest funding period since 2021, implying that full‑year 2025 will likely be back near or above pre‑slowdown levels rather than at one‑third or one‑quarter of 2020–2021. (reuters.com)

Qualitatively, Sacks was directionally right that funding would drop and deployment become more cautious compared with the 2021 boom, but the specific claim that deployment over the 3–4 years after early 2023 would run at roughly three to four times slower than in the prior few years is clearly not borne out by the actual multiples observed so far, and 2025’s AI‑driven rebound makes that magnitude of slowdown increasingly implausible for the remaining part of the window. Therefore, taken as a quantitative prediction about pace (3–4x slower), it is best judged as wrong.

venture
Over the next several years after early 2023, it will be significantly harder to launch new VC funds, particularly solo capitalist, seed, and micro‑VC vehicles, and many of these small/hype-driven fund types will disappear from the market ('washed away').
I think it's going to be much, much harder for new funds to get started. All of the, you know, hype around, you know, solo capitalists and you know, all these, you know, seed funds and micro VCs and all this kind of stuff. I think a lot of that's going to get washed away.View on YouTube
Explanation

By late 2025, the available data and reporting strongly support Sacks’s directional claim that launching new VC funds—especially first‑time, solo, seed and micro‑VC vehicles—has become significantly harder, with many such players effectively washed out.

Evidence that it’s much harder for new / emerging funds to raise:

  • PitchBook data show that in the U.S., capital committed to first‑time VC managers fell from about $14.7B across 318 funds in 2021 to just $6.5B across 97 funds in 2023, and analysis suggests more than a third of the 2019–2021 first‑time managers may never raise a second fund. (crowdfundinsider.com)
  • PitchBook further reports that 2024 set a record low for first‑time fundraising activity, with only 56 debut funds raising $3.7B and emerging managers capturing just 23% of fund value—a 10‑year low as LP capital concentrates into larger, established firms. (linkedin.com)
  • Q1 2023 data cited by TechCrunch show emerging managers raised only ~13–14% of U.S. VC fundraising, down from roughly 26–29% in the prior boom years, indicating a sharp relative pullback. (techcrunch.com)
  • A 2023 survey of emerging fund managers found 91% described fundraising as difficult or very difficult, with 85% taking more than six months to close and a large share delaying future raises—clear signs of a much tougher market for new/small funds. (signatureblock.co)
  • A 2024 survey by Citrin Cooperman on emerging PE/VC managers reports that fundraising remains a major challenge; institutional LPs (pensions, insurers) are relatively scarce backers and prefer established managers, and 63% of respondents expect capital raising to remain difficult through 2024. (dakota.com)

Evidence of consolidation and “washing out” of smaller firms:

  • The number of active U.S. VC firms has dropped by more than 25% since 2021 (from roughly 8,315 to 6,175), while over half of all U.S. VC capital raised in 2024 went to just nine top firms. This concentration of LP commitments has weakened smaller VCs and narrowed funding opportunities for early‑stage/startup‑focused firms. (ft.com)
  • In the U.S., first‑time managers’ capital and fund counts have more than halved compared with 2021, and analysis of vintages 2019–2021 suggests hundreds of first‑time managers are unlikely ever to raise a second fund—effectively a culling of many new/small platforms that launched in the boom. (crowdfundinsider.com)
  • European data tell a similar story: the number of VCs announcing new first‑time funds fell from 66 in 2022 to 42 in 2023 and 34 in 2024 (~50% decline in two years), and McKinsey data cited in the same analysis show sub‑$1B fund closures and new-manager formation in 2023 at their lowest levels since 2012. (blog.joinodin.com)
  • Commentary from investors and Cambridge Associates in 2023–2024 underscores that this period is a “tough, tough environment” for emerging and solo managers; LPs are scrutinizing younger funds more intensely, and solo GPs without a very distinct edge are described as having a “really difficult” time raising in this market. (techcrunch.com)

Nuance: solo/micro funds still exist, but the easy-hype era is over:

  • Not all solo or micro‑VCs have disappeared. Carta’s 2025 analysis finds that 69% of new VC funds on its platform in 2024 were under $25M and notes “a surge in the number of solo GPs,” especially at the very small end of the market. However, it also emphasizes that mid‑sized funds ($25M–$100M) have been “the hardest hit,” stuck between friends‑and‑family money and institutional mandates, and many of the 2020–2021 micro‑funds were self‑funded or reliant on HNW capital rather than traditional LPs. (carta.com)
  • A 2024 report on emerging managers shows that over half of new emerging funds globally are led by solo GPs and most target very small fund sizes (<$10M), but it also documents substantial delays, cancellations, and fundraising difficulties tied to limited LP access and macro uncertainty—again indicating that, while some new solo/micro funds still launch, doing so has become meaningfully harder. (everythingstartups.com)

Assessment vs. Sacks’s prediction:

  • Sacks predicted that “over the next several years” after early 2023, it would become much harder for new funds—especially solo capitalists, seed funds and micro‑VCs—to get started, and that a lot of that cohort would be “washed away.”
  • By late 2025, the data show: (1) sharply lower fundraising volume and share for first‑time and emerging managers, (2) record‑low counts of debut funds, (3) a material decline in the number of active VC firms, and (4) clear evidence that many boom‑era emerging/solo managers cannot raise follow‑on funds.

Even though solo and micro‑VC funds have not vanished and some new ones still form, the environment is decisively more difficult and many hype‑driven or marginal funds have effectively been culled or frozen out of the market. On balance, that matches the core thrust of Sacks’s prediction, so it is best judged right.

venturemarkets
In the second half of 2023 and throughout 2024, there will be a major funding crunch for startups: many companies that delayed fundraising will run low on cash, be forced back to market simultaneously, and then confront much tougher funding conditions, leading to widespread down rounds, recapitalizations, or shutdowns.
This tweetstorm is predicting, is that in the second half of 2023 and then 24, you're going to have a huge crunch where all these companies have to go out and raise. They've been waiting, so they're all going to get to the point where their cash is so low they have to go out and raise, and now all of a sudden they're going to be confronted with the new market conditions.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–2024 shows that Sacks’ forecast of a major startup funding crunch in the second half of 2023 and through 2024 largely played out.

  • Sharp drop in available capital: Global startup funding in 2023 fell to about $285B, down 38% from 2022 and the lowest level since 2018, with deep cutbacks across seed, early, and late stage rounds. (news.crunchbase.com) Multiple regions (North America, Asia, Africa, India) described this as a prolonged “funding winter” that continued into at least the first half of 2024. (brecorder.com)
  • Down rounds and tougher terms: Data from Carta and other sources show that in 2023, roughly 19–20% of all VC rounds each quarter were down rounds, the highest rates since at least 2018. (carta.com) Preqin similarly reported that by Q2 2023, down rounds had doubled to about 16% of deals, up from a typical ~8%. (businesstimes.com.sg) In 2024, around **20% of all rounds remained down rounds—about double the long‑run average—indicating continued valuation pressure and harsher funding conditions. (forbes.com)
  • Startups forced back to market and failing: Carta’s data show record startup shutdowns in 2023 (770 vs 467 in 2022), the highest ever tracked, driven by an inhospitable fundraising climate. (forbes.com) Carta’s 2024 analysis reports that even more startups shut down in 2024 than in 2023, with failures concentrated among companies funded in 2021–2022 that hit the end of their runways and couldn’t raise on acceptable terms. (forbes.com) This is exactly the dynamic Sacks described: companies that had waited were eventually forced to raise in much tougher conditions, leading to down rounds, recapitalizations, and shutdowns.

While there were pockets of strength (especially AI) and the crunch actually began earlier than H2 2023, the core prediction—that a major funding crunch in late 2023 and 2024 would hit startups that had delayed fundraising, resulting in widespread down rounds and failures—matches what happened in the data.

ventureeconomy
In the second half of 2023 and throughout 2024, there will be a major funding crunch for startups: many companies that delayed fundraising will hit low cash levels and be forced to raise in a much tougher funding environment than in prior years.
this tweetstorm is predicting, is that in the second half of 2023 and then 24, you're going to have a huge crunch where all these companies have to go out and raise. They've been waiting, so they're all going to get to the point where their cash is so low they have to go out and raise, and now all of a sudden they're going to be confronted with the new market conditions.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that in 2H 2023 and through 2024 many startups that had delayed fundraising would hit low cash levels and be forced to raise into a much tougher funding environment than in prior years.

Global and regional data show a pronounced, prolonged funding crunch over exactly that window. Crunchbase data indicate global startup funding in 2023 fell to about $285B, down 38% from 2022 and the lowest since 2018, with early‑stage, late‑stage, and seed all dropping 30–40%; Q4 2023 was the weakest quarter in years, confirming a harsh fundraising backdrop as the second half of 2023 unfolded. (news.crunchbase.com) A CB Insights–based review similarly notes 2023 venture funding at its lowest since 2017, with late‑stage deal sizes halved vs. 2021 and IPOs at decade‑low levels, setting up a weak environment going into 2024. (foley.com)

Conditions did not normalize in 2024; they remained tight outside a small number of AI winners. Barron’s reports global VC investments in 2024 at $314B—only ~3% above 2023 and still about 55% below the 2021 peak, with a disproportionate share going to a handful of AI companies rather than the broader startup base. (barrons.com) In multiple ecosystems, this was explicitly described as a continuing “funding winter” and cash crunch: Indian startup funding fell 62% in 2023 to a six‑year low, helping drive tens of thousands of shutdowns and a very subdued 2024; analyses speak of a “relentless and prolonged funding winter” and deep cash shortages. (business-standard.com) Pakistan saw 2024 Q1 startup funding drop to zero deals, with commentary tying this to the weakest global tech funding since at least 2018. (brecorder.com) Reuters and others describe Europe and Indonesia facing similar 2023–24 funding collapses and explicit “funding crunch” conditions. (reuters.com)

Evidence also supports the mechanics Sacks described—companies that had extended runway after 2021 finding themselves forced back to market in 2H 2023–2024 and confronting harsher terms. A Silicon Valley Bank H2 2023 outlook estimated that U.S. VC‑backed tech startups collectively burned tens of billions per month and modeled a large share running out of runway by 2024, predicting outcomes like valuation capitulations, soft‑landing M&A, and outright failures if they couldn’t raise. (scribd.com) A separate fintech analysis forecast roughly a quarter of U.S. fintechs would be out of cash by Q3 2024 without new funding. (scribd.com) Empirical markers of this crunch show up in the surge of down rounds and alternative structures: Indian data show down rounds nearly quadrupling by early 2023 vs. a year prior, with commentators saying startups can no longer demand 2021‑style valuations. (hindustantimes.com) In Israel, a 2025 report finds that 43% of 1,530 startups surveyed needed to raise soon and 26% of 2024 later‑stage rounds were down rounds, reflecting widespread forced fundraising into reset valuations. (israeliinvestments.com) Across Europe, VC funding fell by more than half from 2021 to 2023, and startups increasingly relied on complex convertible‑debt structures to obtain cash while avoiding explicit valuation cuts, another sign of limited equity appetite on investor‑friendly terms. (reuters.com) Meanwhile, venture‑debt volumes hit record levels in 2024 as companies sought nondilutive capital in a “constrained equity market,” per the Wall Street Journal. (wsj.com)

Finally, industry observers explicitly anchored the timing of the reckoning to the same 2H 2023–2024 window. Elad Gil’s widely read "Startup Decoupling & Reckoning" essay argued that many companies which raised large 2021 rounds with 2–4 years of runway would hit a “hard reckoning” starting at the end of 2023 and accelerating through the end of 2024 as their cash ran out, closely matching Sacks’ timeline and logic. (blog.eladgil.com) Taken together—sharp and sustained global funding declines, a very tough 2H 2023 and 2024 environment outside a narrow AI boom, widespread down rounds and valuation resets, large numbers of startups facing or hitting cash‑out, and contemporaneous analyses pegging the crunch to exactly that period—the prediction that there would be a major funding crunch for startups in the second half of 2023 and throughout 2024, forcing many delayed fundraisers to raise under much tougher conditions, is well supported by the data.

ventureeconomy
Startups that have venture debt as an overhang will discover, during the upcoming funding crunch (2023–2024), that their actual runway is shorter than planned because venture lenders will move to collect their debt before the startups fully run out of cash.
Those ones. Yeah. And they're going to find they have less runway than they thought. Because again those banks you know, they are going to try and collect the debt before they start running out of money. Not, you know, when it runs out of money.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–2024 shows the pattern Sacks described did in fact emerge for many startups with venture debt overhang during the funding crunch.

  1. Funding crunch and heavy use of venture debt. In 2023, equity funding into startups fell sharply (e.g., Indian startup equity funding down ~70% vs 2022), while venture debt volumes rose or stayed high as founders tried to bridge rounds and extend runway without dilution.(business-standard.com) This matches the “upcoming funding crunch” backdrop Sacks was talking about.

  2. Runway shorter than expected due to dependence on venture debt. When Silicon Valley Bank collapsed in March 2023, a large provider of venture credit, founders suddenly lost access to expected debt facilities. A GeekWire report noted that “many startups are waking up today to find that their runway is much shorter than they expected without that venture debt,” explicitly tying venture-debt assumptions to overestimated runway.(geekwire.com)

  3. Lenders moving to protect themselves before companies run out of cash. Venture debt agreements commonly include covenants such as minimum cash balances and performance thresholds; breaching them can trigger default and allow lenders to accelerate repayment or impose stricter terms—i.e., move to collect while the company still has money. Multiple practitioner guides and analyses from 2023–2025 emphasize these covenants and note that default can lead to accelerated repayment or forced restructuring.(insightfulcfo.blog) This is structurally identical to Sacks’s point that banks “are going to try and collect the debt before they start running out of money.”

  4. Concrete cases of debt shortening effective runway in the crunch. Reporting from 2024 shows several startups that leaned on venture debt during the funding winter—such as Good Glamm Group, Reshamandi, Arzooo and Waycool—later struggling to meet repayments and asking lenders for extensions as cash got tight. Lenders are described as reluctant to grant relief and having to decide which borrowers to support, underscoring that debt service and lender behavior were constraining these companies’ usable runway sooner than hoped.(livemint.com)

  5. Lenders pushing for exits before total failure. By early 2025, TechCrunch reported that many lenders, facing challenged loans originated in the 2020–2022 boom, were “increasingly pushing startups to sell themselves to minimize potential losses,” with many companies “at the end of the rope.”(techcrunch.com) That is consistent with lenders acting to realize value while there is still cash or enterprise value left, not waiting for companies to hit zero.

Taken together, these points show that during the 2023–2024 crunch, startups that had layered on venture debt often discovered their real, usable runway was shorter than the headline cash balance implied, and that lenders’ covenants and repayment demands effectively forced earlier reckoning. While not every startup with venture debt experienced this, the mechanism and timing Sacks predicted are well supported by the subsequent funding environment and case reporting, so his prediction is best judged as right.

ventureeconomy
In the second half of 2023 and in 2024, the startup ecosystem will experience widespread down rounds, restructurings, and recapitalizations as part of a major funding crunch.
the crunch is going to happen second half of 2023 and 2024. That's where you're going to see the down rounds. That's where you're going to see the restructuring, the recaps and all the rest of it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that Sacks’ timing and the qualitative description of a funding crunch with widespread down rounds and restructurings in H2 2023 and 2024 were broadly accurate.

  1. Major funding crunch (capital into VC and startups)
    • In the U.S., VC investment fell from about $242B in 2022 to ~$171B in 2023 (≈35% drop), with deal count down ~23%, according to PitchBook/NVCA; NVCA describes 2023 as a pronounced continuation of the 2022 slowdown. (axios.com)
    • VC fundraising itself also seized up: PitchBook data show U.S. VC funds raised just under $70B in 2023, a ~60% decline from 2022 and a six‑year low, limiting available capital for startups in 2023–24. (pennmutualam.com)
    • Globally, Q1 2024 VC investment was near a five‑year low, with total funding and deal count both sharply reduced versus prior years, and analysts not expecting a rapid rebound—indicating the crunch persisted into 2024. (reuters.com)

  2. Widespread down rounds in 2023–24
    • U.S. data compiled in the Big Book of Venture Capital 2023 show that 19% of venture rounds in 2023 were down rounds, up from only 5% in 2021 and the highest level in a decade; Q3 2023 alone had 17% down rounds. (slideshare.net)
    • A separate analysis using Carta data reports that on its platform, down rounds accounted for roughly 19–20% of all primary financings in each quarter of 2023, four consecutive record highs since 2018, and notes that down rounds had become “routine,” especially at later stages. (linkedin.com)
    • A 2024 Morgan Lewis survey likewise notes that 2023 produced the four highest quarterly down‑round rates since 2018, and that Q1 2024 had the highest share of down rounds in five years (≈23%), confirming that the wave of repricings continued into 2024. (jdsupra.com)
    • 2024 aggregate data show down rounds remaining elevated: about 20% of all priced U.S. rounds on Carta in 2024 were down rounds (roughly double the historical ~10%), with late‑stage companies seeing down‑round shares rising from 28% to 39% in early 2024; nearly half of late‑stage deals were flat or down. (scribd.com)
    • DocSend’s deal‑flow analysis finds that 33% of VC deals in Q1 2024 and 22% in Q2 2024 were down rounds, and nearly 30% of all deals were flat or down, still materially worse than pre‑2023 norms. (docsend.com)
    Together, these sources indicate that from H2 2023 through at least mid‑/late‑2024, down rounds were common across the ecosystem and well above normal levels—consistent with “widespread down rounds.”

  3. Restructurings, recapitalizations, and harsher terms
    • Legal and market commentary aimed at venture‑backed startups notes a surge in complex down‑round financings, explicitly tying them to recapitalizations (“recaps”) and pay‑to‑play structures. Morgan Lewis describes recaps as often being done in conjunction with a down round and frames them as increasingly necessary tools to get new capital in during this period. (morganlewis.com)
    • Axios, citing Cooley data, reports that by Q2 2024, 8.7% of all VC deals included “pay‑to‑play” (cram‑down) provisions, a record share and a clear sign of aggressive recap-style structures that heavily dilute non‑participating existing investors. These provisions historically appeared mostly in stressed late‑stage deals, but by 2024 they were spreading across stages. (axios.com)
    • Standard VC glossaries and practitioner write‑ups emphasize that recaps are used when cap tables and prior preferences make fresh funding difficult—exactly the situation more startups faced after inflated 2020–21 valuations collided with the 2022–24 downturn—supporting that these recapitalization tools were indeed being deployed. (nexitventures.com)

  4. Broader signs of ecosystem stress (“mass extinction” dynamics)
    • Morgan Lewis notes that startup shutdowns jumped from 467 in 2022 to 770 in 2023, and that Q1 2024 shutdowns rose another 58% year‑over‑year, highlighting elevated mortality as funding dried up. (jdsupra.com)
    • Carta and FT data show 2023 as the first year in at least five years with a net contraction in startup employment, including a wave of layoffs and sharply reduced hiring, reflecting widespread restructuring and belt‑tightening. (ft.com)

Taken together, these independent datasets show that in H2 2023 and throughout 2024 the startup ecosystem experienced: (a) a pronounced funding crunch, (b) historically high and sustained levels of down rounds, especially at later stages, and (c) increased use of harsh recap / pay‑to‑play structures alongside shutdowns and layoffs. That combination matches Sacks’ forecast of a major crunch characterized by widespread down rounds, restructurings, and recapitalizations, so the prediction is best judged as right.

Sacks @ 00:59:45Inconclusive
marketseconomy
SaaS public-market valuation multiples (enterprise value / next-12-months revenue) will eventually revert upward to roughly their long-term median of about 8x, but will stay well below the ~16x levels seen at the 2021 bubble peak.
even if we revert all the way to the mean of eight, which I think at some point we will, that's still well below the bubble of 21 where they got to 16.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, the broad public SaaS market has not clearly reverted to an ~8x EV/NTM revenue “long‑term mean,” but the outcome of Sacks’s open‑ended “eventually” prediction still depends on future market moves.

Evidence:

  • Jamin Ball’s Clouded Judgement tracks a large universe of public software/SaaS names. In December 2023, the median EV/NTM revenue multiple was about 6.4x, which he notes is roughly 17% below a long‑term average of 7.8x.【turn0search6】
  • Around year‑end 2023, his data still showed medians in the mid‑6x range (about 6.5x), i.e., re-rated upward from the 2022 lows but still materially under 8x.【turn0search4】
  • Through 2024 and into 2025, subsequent Clouded Judgement posts show median EV/NTM revenue sliding back to roughly 6.0x–5.9x in early 2024 and then nearer 5.2x–5.4x and even ~4.8x by various points in 2025, indicating that the typical SaaS name has not sustained a return to 8x.【turn0search5】【turn0search7】【turn0search3】【turn0search0】【turn0search2】【turn0search9】
  • A different lens, the BVP Nasdaq Emerging Cloud Index, shows index-level revenue multiples around 8.4x in 2024–25, with broader public SaaS medians in the ~5.5x–7.0x range.【turn0search11】 This suggests that a weighted average of higher‑quality/cloud names is roughly at or slightly above the historical 8x level, while the overall universe is still below it.
  • Multiple sources agree that current public SaaS valuations remain far below the 2021 bubble peak (often cited around 20–21x revenue; one summary notes current levels are still ~65–70% below that), i.e., broadly consistent with Sacks’s claim that a reversion to ~8x would be “well below” the 2021 peak.【turn0search11】

Why this is inconclusive rather than clearly right or wrong:

  • The prediction is explicitly open‑ended: SaaS multiples will eventually revert to roughly 8x. There is no time horizon like “within two years,” so by late 2025 it is impossible to say with certainty that this will not occur in the future.
  • On one reasonable definition (broad SaaS median), the market has not yet reverted to ~8x; medians peaked in the mid‑6x range before falling back.【turn0search4】【turn0search6】【turn0search3】
  • On another plausible definition (a leading cloud/SaaS index’s average multiple), valuations are already around or slightly above 8x, which could be read as the reversion Sacks anticipated.【turn0search11】

Because both (a) the key term (“SaaS multiples”) can be reasonably measured in ways that give different answers, and (b) the forecast extends indefinitely into the future, we cannot definitively say yet whether Sacks’s prediction about an 8x reversion is right or wrong. Thus the appropriate status is inconclusive at this time.

ventureeconomy
Over the roughly 18–24 months following early February 2023 (i.e., through mid-2024 to early 2025), operating conditions will be very difficult for many startups, with significant stress such as layoffs, down rounds, or shutdowns.
Yeah. There's going to be a lot of that I think the next 18 months or let's say the next two years, it's going to be pretty rough for a lot of companies.View on YouTube
Explanation

The 18–24 month window after early February 2023 (roughly Feb 2023–Feb 2025) did in fact feature very difficult operating conditions for many startups, matching Sacks’s prediction that it would be “pretty rough for a lot of companies.”

  • Severe funding pullback and down/flat rounds. Global startup funding in 2023 fell to about $285 billion, down 38% from 2022 and the lowest level since 2018, with deep cutbacks at seed, early, and late stage. Reports explicitly note that 2021-era valuations did not hold up, and that many “promising companies raised flat and down rounds,” while startups had to tighten belts and focus on unit economics as investors deployed capital more sparingly. (news.crunchbase.com)
  • Large wave of shutdowns (“mass extinction event”). PitchBook data, summarized by Business Insider and others, shows about 3,200 U.S. venture‑backed startups that had raised roughly $27–27.2 billion shut down in 2023, a pattern observers described as a “mass extinction event” for startups, driven by the funding drought and investor pressure to improve economics. (tech.yahoo.com)
  • Widespread layoffs across tech/startups. Layoffs.fyi data, cited in major outlets, indicates roughly 450,000 tech layoffs tracked by 2023. Coverage in early 2024 reports tens of thousands more tech layoffs just in the first weeks of 2024, showing that staff cuts and restructurings remained common as companies attempted to survive the downturn. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • 2024 still tough outside of AI. In 2024, global VC funding ticked up only slightly to about $314 billion, still ~55% below the 2021 peak, with nearly a third of all capital concentrated in AI startups and exits (IPOs/M&A) remaining sparse—evidence that most non‑AI startups still faced a capital‑scarce, high‑bar environment well into 2024. H1 2024 funding remained below or flat versus the prior year, and reports consistently described the broader VC market as subdued. (barrons.com)

Because funding contracted sharply, many startups endured layoffs, flat/down rounds, and shutdowns across exactly the 18–24 month period Sacks referenced, his prediction that it would be “pretty rough for a lot of companies” is well supported by subsequent data and reporting.

economy
There is a high likelihood that the overall U.S. (or global) economy will enter a recession at some point later in 2023.
I still think there's a really good chance of recession later this year, but it almost doesn't matter for you.View on YouTube
Explanation

Based on standard definitions, the U.S. and global economies did not enter recession in 2023.

  • United States: The official arbiter of U.S. recessions is the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER). As of now, NBER has not declared a recession for any period in 2023. Instead, U.S. real GDP grew about 2.5% for 2023, and the labor market remained relatively strong, with unemployment mostly between about 3.4–3.9% during the year—levels inconsistent with a typical recessionary downturn. (Growth and jobs data are summarized in official releases from the U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis and Bureau of Labor Statistics.)
  • Global economy: The IMF and World Bank did not classify 2023 as a global recession. The IMF’s World Economic Outlook showed positive global real GDP growth in 2023 (on the order of 3%), describing a "slow" or "weak" recovery, but not a contraction consistent with a global recession.

Because neither the U.S. nor the global economy actually entered a recession later in 2023, Sacks’s prediction that there was a “really good chance of recession later this year” did not come true, so it is best scored as wrong rather than inconclusive or ambiguous.

ventureeconomy
For the foreseeable future beyond early 2023, capital availability for startups will remain structurally tighter and more constrained than it was in 2021, and will not revert to 2021-style easy funding conditions.
What matters is your business and the capital availability for startups, which is fundamentally different and will remain different than it was in 2021.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple VC data sources shows that 2021 was an exceptional peak year for startup capital (roughly US$750B globally) and that funding volumes and deal activity in 2023–2025 have stayed well below that peak. (onmine.io) Global venture funding fell sharply in 2022–2023 and, although it recovered somewhat in 2024 to around US$314–368B, that was still roughly half of 2021’s level; one analysis notes 2024 VC activity remained about 55% below the 2021 peak. (news.crunchbase.com) PitchBook/NVCA and KPMG both describe 2023–2024 as a subdued, investor‑friendly market marked by a liquidity crunch, reduced deal sizes, and low VC fundraising—conditions explicitly contrasted with the easy‑money environment of 2021. (pitchbook.com) Structural tightness is also visible in the consolidation of capital into a smaller number of top-tier firms and a >25% drop in the number of active U.S. VC firms since 2021, which narrows funding access for many startups compared with the broad-based exuberance of 2021. (ft.com) By Q3 2025, quarterly global VC investment (~US$120.7B) is robust but still below average 2021 quarterly levels and heavily concentrated in AI megadeals rather than a return to across-the-board easy funding. (kpmg.com) Taken together, these facts support Sacks’s claim that, for the period after early 2023, capital availability for startups has remained structurally tighter and materially different from the 2021 boom, without a reversion to 2021-style easy funding conditions.

health
Following the COVID-19 vaccine policies, there will be a broad decline in public trust of vaccination in general in the coming years in the US (beyond just COVID vaccines).
Actually I think I think you're right that one of the costs of this policy is going to be that people will stop trusting vaccination in generalView on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple nationally representative surveys since 2023 show a broad, cross‑vaccine erosion of trust in the U.S., beyond just COVID‑19 shots.

  • The Annenberg Public Policy Center found in 2023 that only 71% of adults say vaccines approved for use in the U.S. are safe—the lowest level since they began asking—while belief that vaccines are unsafe hit a series high. The same survey reported statistically significant declines in perceived safety or effectiveness for HPV, MMR, flu, COVID‑19, shingles, and pneumococcal vaccines, indicating a general, not single‑vaccine, drop in confidence. (aafp.org)
  • A Washington Post–KFF poll reports that by 2024 just 69% of Americans thought childhood vaccines were important, down from 84% in 2019, and by 2025 1 in 6 parents had delayed or skipped routine childhood vaccinations (excluding flu and COVID‑19), with most citing safety concerns rather than access. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Pew and KFF both find that while large majorities still say the benefits of MMR and other childhood vaccines outweigh the risks, support for requiring these shots for school attendance fell sharply (e.g., from ~82% in 2016/2019 to around 70% in the early‑ to mid‑2020s), driven mainly by Republicans; both organizations explicitly note that COVID‑19 vaccine debates and mandates have spilled over into attitudes about other vaccines. (pewresearch.org)
  • CDC data show kindergarten coverage for MMR declined from 95.2% in 2019–20 to 92.5% in 2024–25, with exemptions rising and large measles outbreaks; coverage and experts attribute this in part to post‑COVID vaccine hesitancy and skepticism, not just logistical disruption. (reuters.com)
  • A 2025 KFF tracking poll still finds strong majority confidence in the safety of routine vaccines like measles and flu, but also documents low trust in federal health agencies as vaccine information sources and widespread perceptions that these agencies are not paying enough attention to science, underscoring an ongoing trust erosion environment around vaccination generally. (kff.org)

Taken together, these trends show a measurable, broad decline in public trust and compliance with vaccination in general in the U.S. in the years following COVID‑19 vaccine policies, even though most Americans still accept core childhood vaccines. That matches Sacks’s prediction, so it is best judged as right.

conflictpolitics
As of January 2023, the Russia–Ukraine war is capable of continuing as an ongoing conflict for another 2–3 years beyond this point without a forced resolution.
I think that it certainly can go on.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence as of November 30, 2025 shows the Russia–Ukraine war is still an active, large‑scale conflict with no imposed settlement, more than 2 years and 10 months after January 2023.

  • Major Russian missile and drone attacks on Kyiv and other regions were reported on November 29, 2025, damaging infrastructure and killing and injuring civilians, demonstrating ongoing high‑intensity hostilities rather than a frozen or resolved conflict. (reuters.com)
  • Frontline offensives such as the Kupiansk and Huliaipole operations are described as ongoing campaigns within the Russo‑Ukrainian war, indicating continued maneuver warfare into late 2024 and 2025 rather than a ceasefire or peace deal. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Diplomatic initiatives (e.g., a 2025 UN Security Council resolution on Ukraine and multiple high‑level peace‑plan negotiations) explicitly refer to the war as ongoing and seek to end it, implying that no comprehensive settlement has yet been reached or enforced. (en.wikipedia.org)

From January 27, 2023 (podcast date) to November 30, 2025, the war has persisted without a forced resolution for nearly three years, matching Sacks’s prediction that the conflict was capable of continuing as an ongoing war for another 2–3 years. The realized trajectory of the conflict therefore supports the prediction, so it is best scored as right.

politicsgovernment
The controversy over Ron DeSantis blocking AP African American Studies in Florida will ultimately benefit him politically; opposition to state-funded CRT-style curricula will prove to be roughly a 70% popular position with Florida voters once polling and political outcomes are observed over the following months/years.
Make a prediction right now. This will all redound to his advantage... if the question is whether CRT is going to be funded by the state and he's preventing that again, I think that'll be a 70% popular issue. So let's just wait and see how this plays out.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available polling and political outcomes contradict both parts of Sacks’s prediction.

  1. Public opinion on the AP African American Studies ban and related CRT-style restrictions

    • A February 2023 Data for Progress national poll found that two‑thirds of likely voters (66%) said they would support an AP African American Studies course being taught in high schools in their own community, including majorities of Democrats, independents, and even 44% of Republicans. This is the exact opposite of a 70% popular position against such a course. (dataforprogress.org)
    • In Florida, a Spectrum News/Siena College poll found that majorities of voters opposed two of DeSantis’s signature education/“anti‑woke” laws: 50% opposed the Parental Rights in Education law (“Don’t Say Gay”) vs. 44% who approved, and 51% opposed the Stop WOKE Act (which targets CRT‑style content) vs. only 34% who approved. That is nowhere near the 70% support Sacks predicted for DeSantis’s side of these issues. (floridapolitics.com)
    • A Saint Leo University poll of Floridians on critical race theory found opinion essentially split over teaching CRT in schools, with support and opposition both far from 70% on either side, again contradicting the idea of a broad super‑majority backing DeSantis’s anti‑CRT stance. (polls.saintleo.edu)
  2. Did the controversy "ultimately benefit him politically" over the following months/years?

    • DeSantis’s landslide re‑election in November 2022 (54–59% range in late polling and results) occurred before the January 2023 AP African American Studies controversy, so that victory cannot be credited to this episode. (scri.siena.edu)
    • He then centered his national brand on an education and “anti‑woke” crusade, including the AP African American Studies ban and Stop WOKE framework. Analyses (e.g., FiveThirtyEight) noted that while such moves mobilize core Republicans, broader electorates are increasingly wary of bans and curricular censorship, consistent with the polling above. (fivethirtyeight.com)
    • Politically, DeSantis’s trajectory deteriorated: his 2024 presidential campaign—built heavily around these culture‑war education issues—collapsed. He announced his presidential bid in May 2023 and suspended it on January 21, 2024 after a 30‑point loss to Donald Trump in Iowa and persistent weakness in national and early‑state polling. (en.wikipedia.org) Later polling from the University of North Florida showed him trailing Trump badly even among Republican voters in Florida, indicating that his positioning, including on education, did not yield a durable political advantage even on his home turf. (theguardian.com)

Taken together:

  • On measurable public opinion, opposition to state‑funded CRT‑style curricula and bans like Florida’s AP African American Studies move did not become a ~70% popular position in Florida or nationally.
  • On political outcomes, DeSantis’s focus on these fights did not clearly “redound to his advantage” over the subsequent years; if anything, they coincided with a failed national bid and signs of declining relative strength even among Florida Republicans.

Because both the 70% popularity claim and the forecast of net long‑term political benefit are contradicted by polls and subsequent electoral performance, the prediction is best characterized as wrong.

politics
Nikki Haley will not win the 2024 Republican presidential nomination.
She's not gonna win the Republican nomination.View on YouTube
Explanation

Nikki Haley did not win the 2024 Republican presidential nomination; Donald Trump secured the GOP nomination for the 2024 U.S. presidential election, with Haley suspending her campaign after falling behind in the primaries.

Given Sacks’s prediction "She's not gonna win the Republican nomination", this outcome matches the actual result, so the prediction is right.

politics
Future Republican Party polling (after January 2023) will show Glenn Youngkin as the clear third-most popular national Republican figure, behind only Donald Trump and Ron DeSantis.
Based on interest in the party. And, you know, I've talked to people and I think the polling will eventually reflect this. He's very talented.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available national polling of Republican voters after January 2023 never shows Glenn Youngkin as the clear third‑most popular national Republican figure behind only Donald Trump and Ron DeSantis.

For the 2024 GOP nomination, compiled national primary polls throughout 2023 consistently have Trump first and DeSantis second, with figures like Mike Pence, Nikki Haley, and Tim Scott typically occupying the next tier. Youngkin either does not appear or registers at 0–1% support, well behind several others. (en.wikipedia.org)

Looking beyond 2024 to early 2028 Republican primary polling, Youngkin again is nowhere near a clear third place. Aggregated polling and individual national surveys show JD Vance as the dominant frontrunner, with DeSantis, Rubio, Ramaswamy, Haley and others ahead of Youngkin, who polls only around 1–3%. (en.wikipedia.org)

Across this entire post‑January‑2023 period, there is no sustained or prominent polling in which Youngkin emerges as the clear #3 national Republican figure behind only Trump and DeSantis, so the prediction did not come true.

politicsgovernment
Glenn Youngkin will launch a campaign for the 2024 U.S. presidential election, since Virginia’s single-term governor limit leaves him no choice but to "make a play" in 2024.
Virginia has this wonky one term term limit on governors. So you know he's got no choice but to make a play in 2024 because he's going to be termed out anyway.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that Glenn Youngkin would launch a campaign for the 2024 U.S. presidential election because Virginia’s one-term limit supposedly left him "no choice but to make a play in 2024."

In reality, Youngkin never entered the 2024 presidential race. Throughout 2023 he repeatedly tamped down or deflected speculation, saying he was focused on Virginia’s legislative elections and his role as governor, and explicitly answered "no" when asked if he would be launching a 2024 presidential campaign. (cbsnews.com)

The 2024 GOP primary field solidified without Youngkin ever filing, appearing on primary ballots, or announcing a presidential committee; post‑election coverage in 2023 and 2024 described him as a potential future (e.g., 2028) candidate, not as a 2024 contender who had run. (fox5dc.com)

Because the prediction specifically concerned a 2024 presidential bid that did not occur, it is wrong.

politicsgovernment
The global political trend away from Davos-style globalist leaders toward more nationalist leaders prioritizing their own countries’ interests will continue over the coming years beyond 2023.
And I think that the resistance to the imposition of their, again, their globalist policies... has been receding in favor of more nationalist leaders who want to promote their own country's interests. And I think that that trend is going to continue.View on YouTube
Explanation

Interpreting Sacks’s claim as a directional prediction—that the mid‑2010s shift away from “Davos‑style” globalist elites toward more nationalist / anti‑globalist leaders would keep strengthening after 2023—the available evidence up to late 2025 shows that pattern has generally continued, though unevenly and with important counter‑examples.

Evidence that the nationalist / anti‑globalist trend continued after Jan 2023

  • European far‑right and nationalist breakthroughs:

    • Austria’s Freedom Party (FPÖ), a hard‑right nationalist party, won the 2024 legislative election, the first time a far‑right party topped a national vote there since WWII.【0search14】
    • Germany’s AfD moved from pariah status toward the mainstream: it won a plurality in Thuringia’s 2024 state election and then took 20.8% nationally and second place in the February 2025 federal election, the strongest far‑right showing in modern German history.【3search22】【0news15】
    • Portugal’s far‑right Chega surged in the 2025 snap election, becoming the main opposition party in parliament and displacing the long‑dominant Socialists.【0news12】
    • North Macedonia’s 2024 election produced a landslide for the national‑conservative VMRO‑DPMNE‑led bloc, explicitly framed around national interests and EU‑accession fatigue.【0search17】
    • Romania’s ultranationalist AUR and allied far‑right forces jumped from single‑digits in 2020 to roughly 18% and second place in the 2024 parliamentary vote, with around a third of voters backing anti‑EU or pro‑Russian parties.【2news14】【3news13】
  • Europe‑wide assessments of a continuing far‑right / nationalist surge:

    • Academic work on European party systems concludes that support for far‑right parties has been rising across most European states over the past 15 years, turning previously marginal actors into significant political players.【3search5】
    • Analyses of the 2024 European Parliament elections describe “big gains” and a “wave” of right‑wing support, with far‑right and hard‑right parties increasing their seat share and topping the polls in several EU countries, even though they did not win control of the Parliament.【3search0】【3search3】
  • United States: clear return to an explicitly nationalist presidency:

    • In 2024, Donald Trump—whose brand is explicitly “America First” and anti‑globalist—regained the U.S. presidency, defeating Kamala Harris and bringing back a leader who openly attacks multilateral institutions and globalist elites.【1search14】【3search20】 This is a major data point in favor of Sacks’s forecast that electorates would keep favoring nationalist over Davos‑style leaders.
  • Latin America and other regions:

    • Argentina elected Javier Milei in 2023, widely described as a far‑right populist / radical libertarian who rails against globalist institutions and proposes severing or downgrading ties with China and Brazil while aligning more tightly with the U.S.【6search0】【6search20】 His win was seen by regional observers as part of a broader right‑populist wave.【6search1】【6search2】
    • In South Africa’s 2024 election, the long‑dominant ANC lost its majority for the first time; one of the main new forces, uMkhonto we Sizwe (MK), campaigned on nationalist and anti‑establishment themes, contributing to a more fractured, sovereignty‑centric politics.【2search17】
  • Media and expert framing of a broader populist / nationalist wave:

    • Analyses of Poland’s 2025 presidential election explicitly cast Karol Nawrocki’s MAGA‑aligned victory as evidence of the “strength of MAGA‑style populism across Europe,” citing concurrent far‑right advances in Austria, Portugal, and Germany.【3news15】
    • Other commentary describes a “far‑right surge” strengthening across Europe and notes that anger at globalization and elites is a key fuel for these movements.【3news14】【3search3】

Taken together, these developments are consistent with Sacks’s directional claim that the anti‑globalist / nationalist trend would not fade after 2023 but would keep expressing itself in major elections and leadership choices.

Countervailing evidence and why the trend is not absolute

  • Centrist and pro‑EU wins in key countries:

    • Spain’s July 2023 election ultimately resulted in the re‑election of Pedro Sánchez and another left‑of‑centre, pro‑EU coalition government, after right‑of‑centre PP and far‑right Vox failed to assemble a majority.【4search0】【4search3】
    • The 2024 European Parliament elections left the mainstream pro‑integration parties (EPP, Socialists, liberals) still firmly in control; far‑right parties grew from about 20% to roughly 24% of seats—an increase, but explicitly “not an electoral revolution,” according to post‑election analysis.【3search2】【0search19】
    • In the 2024 UK general election, voters ousted the Conservative Party (which had embraced a nationalist, Brexit‑driven agenda) and handed a landslide to Keir Starmer’s Labour, a more technocratic, broadly pro‑alliance government.【5search12】【5search0】
    • In the 2025 Dutch election, early results and exit polling showed the liberal‑centrist D66 overtaking Geert Wilders’ far‑right PVV, with commentary casting this as a pushback against divisive populism and a preference for pro‑European stability.【0news13】
  • Mass mobilization against far‑right extremism:
    Germany, for example, saw huge anti‑AfD, pro‑democracy protests in 2024–25, explicitly opposing far‑right “remigration” schemes and calling for investigation or even banning of AfD.【0search22】 This doesn’t negate AfD’s electoral gains, but it does show robust public resistance rather than a simple, linear march toward nationalism.

  • Conceptual fuzziness of “Davos‑style globalists” vs. “nationalists”:
    Some leaders who are hostile to neoliberal globalization in rhetoric (e.g., parts of the Latin American left) still participate in multilateral institutions, attend elite forums, and support aspects of global cooperation, making classification subjective. Likewise, several conservative or centrist governments that displaced previous elites mix nationalist rhetoric with broadly globalist economic policy.

Why the prediction is classified as ‘right’ rather than ‘ambiguous’

Even allowing for those counter‑trends and definitional fuzziness, the net post‑2023 trajectory in many large and symbolically important democracies has been:

  • continued or intensified electoral strength for nationalist / anti‑globalist or far‑right parties (Europe, parts of Latin America),
  • the return of a strongly nationalist U.S. president,【1search14】 and
  • widespread expert and media characterization of this as a sustained wave of populist, anti‑globalist politics rather than a spent force.【3search3】【3search5】

Sacks did not claim that nationalist leaders would entirely replace globalist ones everywhere, only that the political current favoring such leaders would keep building beyond 2023. On the balance of observable outcomes by late 2025, that directional forecast has broadly held, so the most reasonable evaluation is “right,” with the caveat that the trend is contested rather than universal.

aitech
Within the next several years, foundational OpenAI-like capabilities (large language models, etc.) will become widely available from multiple vendors and will be at least partially commoditized, reducing durable advantage from the core models themselves.
you said that these open AI capabilities are eventually going to become commoditized or certainly much more widely available... there'll be multiple players that offer them.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, the prediction that OpenAI‑like foundational capabilities would be widely available from multiple vendors and at least partially commoditized is essentially correct.

1. Multiple vendors with broadly similar foundational capabilities

Since early 2023, many large‑scale, general‑purpose LLMs comparable in kind to OpenAI’s GPT family have been released and productized by different organizations:

  • Anthropic: Claude 3 (Opus, Sonnet, Haiku) and later Claude 3.5 models provide GPT‑4‑class reasoning and are widely available via API and in third‑party products.
  • Google: Gemini (Ultra, Pro, Flash) and its successors are positioned as general‑purpose foundation models integrated across Google Cloud and consumer products (Search, Workspace, Android, etc.).
  • Meta: LLaMA 2 and LLaMA 3 are open‑weight models explicitly released as general foundation models for commercial and research use, widely adopted and fine‑tuned by many companies.
  • Mistral and other startups: Mistral’s Mixtral and later models, plus many other open and closed LLMs, provide competitive capabilities and are accessible via standard APIs.

The net effect is that core LLM capabilities (chat, coding assistance, summarization, Q&A, etc.) are no longer exclusive to a single vendor; they are available from several big tech companies and multiple startups, plus open‑weight models that anyone can deploy.

2. Evidence of partial commoditization

“Commoditized” in the context of the quote means: the base capability (a strong general‑purpose LLM) is available from many suppliers with decreasing differentiation and with competition driven partly on price, latency, and deployment form factor rather than unique raw capability.

By 2024–2025, we see features of exactly this:

  • Price competition and similar SKUs: Major providers all expose comparable tiers (fast/cheap vs. large/expensive models) and frequently cut prices or introduce cheaper distilled models. This is classic commoditization behavior.
  • Standardized interfaces: Many providers follow very similar JSON/chat/completions APIs, and tools like LangChain, LlamaIndex, and various “multi‑provider” SDKs treat models from OpenAI, Anthropic, Google, and open‑weights as largely swappable components.
  • Open‑weight alternatives: LLaMA 2/3, Mistral, and other open‑weight models allow enterprises to self‑host competitive models on their own infrastructure or edge devices, further eroding any exclusive moat around simply having a capable base LLM.
  • Differentiation shifting up the stack: Most competitive AI products now differentiate with fine‑tuning, retrieval‑augmented generation, proprietary data, UX, integration, and domain‑specific tooling, not just which base model they use. This is strong evidence that the foundational model itself is treated more like a commodity input in many contexts.

At the same time, it is not fully commoditized in a strict economic sense—frontier models (e.g., the very top‑end proprietary models) are still concentrated in a few labs and can have meaningful capability gaps. But the prediction only claimed “eventually going to become commoditized or certainly much more widely available… there’ll be multiple players that offer them” and that the durable advantage from the core models themselves would be reduced, not eliminated.

Given:

  • The existence of many broadly similar LLM providers.
  • Active price and performance competition.
  • Open‑weight models narrowing the gap and enabling self‑hosting.
  • Strategic focus shifting away from raw model access toward data, integration, and product.

…it is reasonable to conclude that the prediction has effectively come true in the “partially commoditized, widely available from multiple players” sense that Sacks described.

politicsgovernment
Following the discovery of classified documents in Biden’s possession, the Department of Justice under Merrick Garland will drop, or significantly scale back, any prosecution of Donald Trump related specifically to his handling of classified documents at Mar-a-Lago.
I think Merrick Garland now is going to have to drop the prosecution against Trump for the stolen documents, or at least that part of what they're investigating him for.View on YouTube
Explanation

Merrick Garland’s Department of Justice did not drop or scale back the classified-documents case against Donald Trump after the Biden documents discovery.

Key facts:

  • On November 18, 2022, Attorney General Merrick Garland appointed Jack Smith as special counsel to oversee investigations involving Donald Trump, including the Mar-a-Lago classified-documents matter. The appointment remained in force after the January 2023 revelations about classified documents found at Biden’s former office and residence.
  • On June 9, 2023, a federal grand jury in the Southern District of Florida indicted Trump on 37 counts related to retention of national defense information, obstruction, and false statements arising from his handling of classified documents at Mar-a-Lago.
  • On July 27, 2023, a superseding indictment added further charges and an additional defendant, expanding rather than narrowing the case.
  • As of late 2025, the Mar-a-Lago documents prosecution has not been dropped; it remains an active federal criminal case, with ongoing pretrial litigation and no indication that DOJ has abandoned or materially scaled back the core classified-documents charges.

Because the DOJ proceeded to charge Trump and has continued to pursue that prosecution, the prediction that Garland would "have to drop the prosecution ... or at least that part" related to the documents at Mar-a-Lago did not come true.

politicsconflict
Whether the 2023 Ukrainian spring counteroffensive results in a stalemate or in pushing Russia back to roughly the pre‑February 24, 2022 lines, U.S. and Ukrainian strategic interests will begin to diverge noticeably during 2023.
So I think in either one of these scenarios, I think you will start to see a divergence between the Ukrainian and the American interests.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023 indicates both parts of the conditional prediction came true in the real-world scenario that actually unfolded.

  1. The 2023 counteroffensive led to a de facto stalemate, not a rollback to pre‑Feb. 24, 2022 lines.
    Ukraine’s much‑anticipated 2023 offensive, launched in June, recaptured about 370 km² and a small number of villages but failed to reach key objectives like Tokmak or the Sea of Azov. By early December, multiple outlets and analysts assessed the offensive as stalled or failed, and in November 2023 Ukraine’s commander‑in‑chief Valerii Zaluzhnyi publicly described the war as a “stalemate.” (en.wikipedia.org) This matches the stalemate branch of the predictor’s conditional.

  2. By mid‑to‑late 2023, U.S. and Ukrainian strategic interests and preferred war end‑states were visibly diverging.

    • Different war aims and risk tolerances:
      – An April 2023 analysis from the Towson University Journal of International Affairs explicitly argued that the United States and Ukraine already had different ideas of what “winning” meant: Kyiv sought full liberation including Crimea, while Washington was more focused on avoiding escalation and broader confrontation with Russia. (wp.towson.edu)
      – Ukraine’s foreign minister Dmytro Kuleba repeatedly insisted that any peace initiative must restore territorial integrity and reject both territorial cession and a “frozen” conflict, underscoring Kyiv’s maximalist territorial aims. (en.wikipedia.org)

    • Operational and escalation disagreements:
      – U.S. officials were clearly uncomfortable with Ukrainian strikes inside Russia. In May 2023, after drone attacks in the Moscow area, the White House press secretary said the United States did not support attacks inside Russia, even as Ukrainian officials publicly welcomed bringing the war home to Russia and Ukrainian intelligence pursued deep‑strike operations. (washingtonpost.com)

    • Divergent strategic concepts after the failed offensive:
      – A December 11, 2023 New York Times piece (widely discussed and summarized by secondary sources) reported that many U.S. officials wanted Ukraine to adopt a conservative “hold what you have and build up over 2024” strategy aimed at sustainability and eventually creating conditions for negotiations, while Ukrainian leaders still pushed for renewed offensive action and more long‑range strikes to regain territory and keep global attention. (reddit.com) That is a clear example of diverging strategic preferences rather than a fully shared theory of victory.

    • Security architecture and NATO friction:
      – Ahead of the July 2023 Vilnius NATO summit, Kyiv hoped for a concrete pathway or invitation toward NATO membership. The U.S. position—articulated by President Biden—was that Ukraine was “not ready” and that immediate membership was off the table, despite strong support for Ukrainian membership from many allies. This gap over long‑term security guarantees and alliance status became a public point of tension between Kyiv and Washington (and some European capitals). (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, by late 2023 there was an openly discussed gap between U.S. and Ukrainian strategic interests and aims: the U.S. increasingly prioritized escalation management, resource limits, and a sustainable defensive posture likely leading toward negotiations, while Ukraine prioritized complete territorial restoration, aggressive operations (including inside Russia), and faster, more extensive Western support. That is a noticeable divergence of strategic interests within the 2023 timeframe the prediction specified.

Because (a) the actual counteroffensive outcome matched the stalemate branch, and (b) a clear and widely reported divergence in strategic interests did in fact emerge during 2023, the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
In its decisions on the Students for Fair Admissions cases against Harvard and UNC (argued Halloween 2022), the U.S. Supreme Court will in 2023 strike down the existing race-based affirmative action admissions policies at those schools as unconstitutional, resulting in a win for Asian American college applicants.
I think the majority will rule to strike down these policies that really discriminate against Asian Americans.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that in the Students for Fair Admissions (SFFA) cases against Harvard and UNC, the Supreme Court in 2023 would strike down the existing race-based affirmative action admissions policies at those schools as unconstitutional, in a way framed as a win for Asian American applicants.

What actually happened:

  • On June 29, 2023, the U.S. Supreme Court decided Students for Fair Admissions, Inc. v. President and Fellows of Harvard College and the companion UNC case.
  • The Court’s majority held that the race-conscious admissions programs at Harvard and UNC violated the Equal Protection Clause (and, for Harvard, Title VI) and therefore were unconstitutional. (supreme.justia.com)
  • News and university reports uniformly describe this as the Court striking down race-conscious/affirmative action admissions programs at Harvard and UNC. (theguardian.com)
  • The cases were brought by SFFA on behalf of Asian American plaintiffs, arguing that the policies harmed Asian American applicants; the Court’s ruling agreed with SFFA that such race-based systems are impermissible, and the outcome has been widely characterized as a victory for SFFA and the Asian American applicants it represented, even though the Court did not separately find intentional anti–Asian American animus. (thecrimson.com)

The central factual claim—that the Court would strike down those race-based admissions policies as unconstitutional in 2023 in the SFFA v. Harvard/UNC cases—is exactly what occurred. The more rhetorical part (“discriminate against Asian Americans”) matches the plaintiffs’ framing that the majority essentially accepted (that using race in this way is unlawful discrimination), even though the Court sidestepped a specific finding of intentional anti-Asian bias.

Given that, the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernmenteconomy
In 2023, both the State of California and the City of San Francisco will experience major budget shortfalls (with California facing roughly a $24B deficit), leading to significant fiscal pain such as spending cuts or other austerity measures.
I think California is my big political loser. And I would say in particular the city of San Francisco, both are going to have gigantic budget shortfalls… Now the state is looking at a $24 billion deficit… I don't know how these guys are going to meet their budgets. So a lot of pain.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment

The prediction was that in 2023 both:

  • California would be looking at roughly a $24B budget deficit, and
  • San Francisco would also have a gigantic budget shortfall, with significant fiscal pain in the form of spending cuts or other austerity.

California (state)

  • In November 2022, the California Legislative Analyst’s Office (LAO) released its 2023–24 fiscal outlook stating that the state would face a $24 billion “budget problem” (deficit) in 2023–24, explicitly defining this as a deficit where resources are insufficient to fund currently authorized services. This is exactly the order of magnitude and fiscal year Sacks referenced. (lao.ca.gov)
  • Governor Newsom’s January 2023 proposed 2023–24 budget acknowledged a projected $22.5B deficit, very close to the LAO’s $24B estimate, and proposed to close it through a mix of solutions emphasizing delays, fund shifts, and some spending cuts, rather than new taxes. (src.senate.ca.gov)
  • Subsequent reporting on the evolving shortfalls shows that managing these multi‑year deficits has in fact involved broad spending reductions across many programs (e.g., an AP analysis describing multibillion‑dollar state deficits being addressed with “widespread spending cuts across 260 programs,” including trims in housing, broadband, water infrastructure, and education). (apnews.com) While some of the heaviest cuts were embedded in 2024 budget actions, they stem directly from the deficit trajectory identified in 2023–24.

Taken together, California did experience a major budget shortfall of roughly the predicted magnitude (~$24B) and responded with significant belt‑tightening measures and program reductions, matching the spirit of “a lot of pain.”

San Francisco (city)

  • In October 2023, Mayor London Breed warned of a “growing structural deficit” and instructed departments to immediately begin addressing an anticipated at least $500M deficit in FY 2025–26, ordering measures such as limiting contract expansions, pausing yet‑to‑start programs, eliminating some vacant jobs, and other cost‑containment steps. (sfstandard.com)
  • By December 2023, the city formally projected an $800M deficit over two years and ordered departments to prepare 10% General Fund spending cuts plus an additional 5% contingency, clearly constituting the “gigantic budget shortfall” and significant austerity Sacks predicted. (sfstandard.com)

Conclusion

  • The state did in fact confront a multi‑billion‑dollar deficit of roughly $24B in 2023–24, and the solution set included meaningful spending reductions and other painful budget maneuvers.
  • San Francisco also entered 2023 in worsening fiscal condition and, by late 2023, was dealing with hundreds of millions in projected deficits and was actively imposing substantial spending cuts.

Because both parts of the prediction — large shortfalls for both California and San Francisco plus significant fiscal pain — materialized in line with the described scale and timing, the prediction is best judged as right.

conflicteconomy
As a result of the Ukraine war and rapid LNG terminal build-out, Europe will remain heavily dependent on U.S. liquefied natural gas in 2023, making America’s natural gas industry a major economic winner from the conflict.
Europe is now completely dependent on American natural gas… Europe rapidly built terminals to receive liquefied gas… What normally would have taken decades… was all put on a fast track.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023 shows that Europe did remain heavily reliant on U.S. LNG as a direct consequence of the Ukraine war and the rapid build‑out of LNG import capacity, and that U.S. gas exporters were major economic beneficiaries.

On dependence:

  • EU LNG imports surged after Russia’s 2022 invasion; in 2023 the EU imported about 134 bcm of LNG, which made up roughly 42% of total EU gas imports, more than double LNG’s share in 2021. (aa.com.tr)
  • Across all LNG suppliers, the United States was again the largest by far: in 2023 it supplied about 48% of all LNG imported by Europe (EU‑27 plus UK), the third consecutive year it was number one. (theuncontained.com)
  • An EU quarterly gas‑market report for Q1 2023 similarly found that LNG already accounted for about 42% of EU gas imports, with the U.S. providing 41.5% of that LNG — by far the biggest single source. (energy.ec.europa.eu)
  • Norway remained the largest pipeline supplier, but by 2023 the U.S. had become the second‑largest overall gas supplier to the EU, underlining how central U.S. LNG became in the post‑Ukraine‑war supply mix. (consilium.europa.eu)

On rapid LNG terminal build‑out:

  • ACER’s monitoring and other analyses report that since 2022 the EU added over 50 bcm of new LNG import capacity, with total regasification capacity on track to be more than one‑third higher in 2024 than in 2021. Germany in particular went from zero LNG capacity in 2021 to around 13 bcm by end‑2023, thanks largely to fast‑tracked floating terminals. (aa.com.tr)

On the U.S. gas industry as a major winner:

  • By 2023 the United States had become the world’s largest LNG exporter; U.S. LNG export volumes hit record levels and total U.S. natural‑gas exports (pipeline plus LNG) rose 12% year‑on‑year, with Europe taking nearly half of U.S. LNG exports. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Watchdogs and analysts explicitly describe U.S. LNG firms as earning “massive profits” from selling gas to Europe at crisis‑elevated prices after the invasion, framing them as major beneficiaries of Europe’s pivot away from Russian pipeline gas. (citizen.org)

The literal phrase “completely dependent on American natural gas” is hyperbolic, since Europe also relied heavily on Norwegian pipeline gas and non‑U.S. LNG (Qatar, Russia, Algeria, etc.). But the normalized version of the prediction—that in 2023 Europe would remain heavily dependent on U.S. LNG because of the Ukraine war and fast‑tracked terminals, and that this would make the U.S. gas industry a major economic winner—is well supported by the 2023 data, so the prediction counts as right overall.

economy
By the end of 2023, U.S. consumers—burdened by record credit card rates near or above ~20%, high mortgage rates (~7%+), falling portfolios, and rising unemployment—will ‘tap out,’ and the U.S. economy will enter a recession as the Federal Reserve raises interest rates to around 5.5%.
My biggest loser for business in 23 is the consumer. I just don't understand how the consumer isn't going to finally tap out in this economy… I just don't understand how we're going to avoid a recession… I don't understand how if rates are at 5.5%, that doesn't finally break the back of this economy and we go into recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key measurable part of Sacks’s prediction was that by the end of 2023 U.S. consumers would "tap out" and the U.S. economy would enter a recession once the Fed raised rates to around 5.5%.

What actually happened:

  • The Fed did raise the federal funds target range to 5.25–5.50% in July 2023 and held it there through year‑end, matching his rate call. (forbes.com)
  • Credit card APRs did reach record highs around or above 20% by late 2023, consistent with his setup about consumer pressure. (bankrate.com)
  • Despite that, real U.S. GDP grew about 2.5–3.1% in 2023, with Q4 2023 running at a 3.3% annualized pace; multiple outlets and official data note that the economy "easily skirted" the widely expected recession. (cnbc.com)
  • The NBER and NBER-based recession indicators show no U.S. recession months at any point in 2023; the expansion that began after the April 2020 trough continued through at least the end of 2023. (nber.org)
  • Unemployment stayed unusually low (around or below 4%) and BLS/press analyses emphasize that strong consumer spending was the main driver of 2023 growth, contradicting the idea that the consumer had "tapped out." (bls.gov)

Because the central outcome he tied to 5.5% rates—consumers breaking and the U.S. entering recession in 2023—did not occur, the prediction is best judged wrong, even though some of the background conditions (high rates, expensive credit) were accurate.

economy
By early 2023, the U.S. is effectively already in a recession, though its effects are unevenly distributed across sectors (with tech having been in recession for about a year).
I think the recession is here. It's just very unequally distributed.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key macroeconomic indicators and official arbiters show that the U.S. was not in a recession in early 2023, even though the tech sector was under significant stress.

1. No official or widely accepted U.S. recession in 2022–2023

  • The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the standard body for U.S. business cycle dating, did not declare a U.S. recession in 2022 or 2023. Their list of business cycle peaks and troughs shows the last recession ending in April 2020 and no new recession dated through 2023–2024.
  • U.S. real GDP grew in 2022 Q3 and Q4, and continued to grow through 2023 (annual real GDP growth around 2.5% in 2023, with positive quarterly growth rates). Positive, broad-based GDP growth is inconsistent with the claim that the overall economy was already in recession.
  • The labor market remained historically tight: unemployment hovered around 3.4–3.7% in early 2023, near multi‑decade lows, with strong job creation—again inconsistent with an economy already in recession.

2. Tech sector weakness was real but sector‑specific

  • Major U.S. tech firms (Meta, Amazon, Microsoft, Google, etc.) carried out large layoffs from late 2022 into early 2023 and experienced significant stock price declines from 2022 highs. That supports the sectoral part of the prediction—tech was in a pronounced downturn.
  • However, other major sectors (services, travel, hospitality, manufacturing in aggregate) were not in broad contraction; consumer spending and employment remained resilient. The overall economy was better characterized as a slowdown/"near-miss" or "soft landing" rather than an ongoing recession.

3. Why this is judged wrong rather than ambiguous

  • The prediction is not merely that tech would be in a recession, but that “the recession is here” for the U.S. economy, just unevenly distributed. By now (late 2025), with full data and NBER’s dating, it’s clear there was no officially recognized or broadly accepted U.S. recession starting in 2022 or early 2023.
  • While one can always define “recession” colloquially, economic consensus (GDP, unemployment, industrial production, income, NBER dating) does not support the claim that the U.S. was already in a recession at that time.

Because the central claim — that the U.S. was effectively already in a recession by early 2023 — is contradicted by subsequent data and official business-cycle dating, the prediction is best classified as wrong, even though the narrower observation about a tech downturn was accurate.

economyconflict
In 2023, Russia and China will conclude a very large economic agreement or set of agreements—covering energy, agricultural commodities, minerals, and rare earths—with an aggregate value on the order of $1 trillion.
I think there will be a big deal, not just on energy, but on agricultural products, mineral products and rare earth minerals… I think there could be $1 trillion deal between Russia and China this year.View on YouTube
Explanation

In 2023, Russia and China did deepen economic ties, but public data show no bilateral economic agreement or package of agreements between just these two countries valued around $1 trillion. Official statistics put total two-way trade in 2023 at about $240 billion, far below $1 trillion, and Russian PM Mishustin in December 2023 cited mutual trade of roughly 18 trillion rubles (~$200 billion) plus about 80 joint investment projects worth almost 20 trillion rubles (~$220 billion), i.e., a combined scale under $450 billion and not a single cross‑sector deal of the size predicted. (uk.finance.yahoo.com) Major reporting on Russia‑China relations and energy cooperation in 2023 and after—such as coverage of gas projects like Power of Siberia 2—likewise contains no mention of any $1 trillion Russia‑China economic deal, and the only trade figures around $1 trillion that appear in this context relate to total internal trade among all BRICS members, not a bilateral agreement. (ft.com) Given the absence of evidence for such a mega‑deal and the much lower documented scale of actual agreements and trade, the prediction that Russia and China would conclude a roughly $1 trillion multi‑sector economic agreement in 2023 did not come true.

politicsgovernmentconflict
At some point during calendar year 2023, the close cooperative relationship (“bromance”) between U.S. President Joe Biden and Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky will break down, resulting in a noticeable rift or divergence between U.S. and Ukrainian positions.
my my prediction, or most contrarian Belief is that the bromance between Biden and Zelensky comes to an end at some point in 2023.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023 shows friction at times but not a clear breakdown of the Biden–Zelensky relationship or a fundamental rift between U.S. and Ukrainian positions.

• In February 2023 Biden made a highly symbolic, risky wartime visit to Kyiv, publicly declaring that the U.S. “stands with” Ukraine and announcing another $500 million in military aid, a strong signal of personal and political solidarity rather than a rupture.【3search18】
• Over the course of 2023, the U.S. provided Ukraine with 34 military aid packages totaling about $24 billion, including advanced air-defense systems, tanks, and other major capabilities; Zelensky publicly thanked the United States and emphasized the importance of U.S. leadership in the pro‑Ukraine coalition.【3search0】
• When Zelensky visited Washington in December 2023, Biden stood beside him at the White House and insisted that the U.S. “cannot leave Ukraine without help” and must keep providing weapons, while Zelensky highlighted battlefield gains—again presenting a united front and shared strategic narrative rather than open divergence.【3search1】
• The most visible 2023 dispute was Zelensky’s public complaint at the July NATO summit that the lack of a clear timetable for Ukraine’s NATO membership was “unprecedented and absurd,” implicitly criticizing cautious members like the U.S. and Germany.【1search0】 However, coverage noted this outburst mainly as negotiating brinkmanship; Zelensky later described the summit outcome as a meaningful success and thanked NATO leaders for support, indicating tension but not a lasting rift.【1search6】
• A December 2023 Washington Post analysis did describe “strain in the relationship” between Kyiv and Washington, primarily due to U.S. congressional delays on funding, but Ukrainian officials still stressed that U.S. partners had never broken their promises and that American support remained crucial—signs of stress within an ongoing partnership, not its collapse.【2search0】
• Subsequent events under Biden reinforce that the personal relationship did not "end" in 2023: in 2024, after Biden exited the re‑election race, Zelensky publicly praised him and his decisions on Ukraine as “tough but strong,” underscoring continued respect and alignment.【3news11】

Taken together, 2023 featured disagreements and pressure tactics but not the clear end of a “bromance” or a decisive, public split in U.S.–Ukrainian positions. The prediction that this close cooperative relationship would break down during calendar year 2023 is therefore wrong.

conflictpolitics
In spring 2023, Ukraine will launch a massive military counteroffensive against Russian forces, which will either be fought to a stalemate around current lines or will push Russian forces back roughly to the pre‑invasion (February 23, 2022) lines.
there's going to be a massive Ukrainian counteroffensive in the spring.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that Ukraine did in fact launch a large counteroffensive in spring–summer 2023:

  • Ukrainian forces began shaping operations and intensified attacks in May 2023, and on June 4, 2023, Ukraine formally launched what was widely described as a major or large-scale counteroffensive against Russian positions in southeastern Ukraine (notably in the Zaporizhzhia and Donetsk regions). Major international outlets and defense analyses consistently refer to this as Ukraine’s counteroffensive or major counteroffensive of 2023.
  • The campaign ran through the summer and into the fall of 2023, involving multiple brigades, extensive use of Western-supplied equipment, and significant combat along several sectors of the front—meeting any reasonable description of a “massive” counteroffensive.

On the narrower interpretation tied to the original quote — “there’s going to be a massive Ukrainian counteroffensive in the spring” — this is straightforwardly correct: there was a large Ukrainian counteroffensive initiated in early June 2023, which falls within the commonly used military/political timeframe for a spring–summer campaign season and was widely anticipated and reported as such.

The normalized version you provided adds an outcome clause (stalemate or a return to pre‑invasion lines). That part is only half‑right:

  • The counteroffensive did not succeed in pushing Russian forces back to the pre‑February 24, 2022 lines; Russian forces still occupy substantial portions of Ukrainian territory as of late 2025.
  • However, the fighting largely resulted in limited territorial changes and a de facto stalemate along much of the front, with only modest Ukrainian gains (e.g., around Robotyne and parts of the southern front) and no decisive breakthrough.

So:

  • If we judge strictly by the original prediction (a massive spring counteroffensive will happen), it was right.
  • The additional outcome conditions in the normalized text are partially wrong (no restoration to pre‑invasion lines) but partially right (the offensive led to something close to a stalemate).

Balancing these, and given that the core, clearly articulated claim in the quote was about the occurrence and timing of a massive Ukrainian counteroffensive, the prediction is best scored as right overall, with the caveat that the more optimistic territorial outcome did not fully materialize.

conflictpolitics
In spring 2023, Ukraine will launch a massive military counteroffensive against Russian forces.
there's going to be a massive Ukrainian counteroffensive in the spring.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple reputable sources report that Ukraine launched a major, widely described as "large-scale" or "massive," counteroffensive against Russian forces in early June 2023, which is late spring by meteorological seasons.

  • The BBC reports that Ukraine’s "long-awaited counter-offensive" began in early June 2023, detailing Ukrainian advances and offensive operations along several fronts in the south and east.
  • The Institute for the Study of War (ISW) and other military analysis outlets describe the June 2023 operations as Ukraine’s main 2023 counteroffensive, involving multiple brigades and extensive Western-supplied equipment.
  • Major news organizations (e.g., Reuters, The New York Times) characterize the June 2023 action as a significant or large-scale counteroffensive, confirming its scale and intent.

Because this substantial counteroffensive did in fact occur in spring 2023 (as commonly used in military and media descriptions, and calendar-wise at the very end of spring/early summer), Sacks’s prediction that “there’s going to be a massive Ukrainian counteroffensive in the spring” is best judged as right.

conflictgovernment
The U.S. and its allies will continue increasing the sophistication of weapons supplied to Ukraine, culminating in support for a major Ukrainian counteroffensive in spring 2023.
we keep providing the Ukrainians with more and more sophisticated weapons, more and more support. Like I said, this is leading up to a huge Ukrainian counteroffensive in the spring.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence supports that this prediction largely came true.

  1. Increasing sophistication of Western weapons to Ukraine (early 2023)

    • In January 2023, the U.S. and several European allies agreed to send modern Western main battle tanks (M1 Abrams, Leopard 2, Challenger 2) to Ukraine, a major step‑up from earlier equipment.
    • Through early 2023, the U.S. and its allies also expanded deliveries of longer‑range precision munitions (e.g., GLSDB was announced, and later in 2023 the U.S. provided ATACMS), advanced air defenses (Patriot systems), and more sophisticated armored vehicles and artillery.
    • This clearly fits “more and more sophisticated weapons, more and more support.”
  2. Support for a major Ukrainian counteroffensive in spring/summer 2023

    • The widely reported 2023 Ukrainian counteroffensive began in early June 2023, following months of Western training and equipment deliveries specifically intended to prepare new Ukrainian brigades for offensive operations.
    • Western officials and media throughout spring 2023 described Western assistance as “shaping” or “setting conditions” for this expected counteroffensive, including the coordinated tank and armored vehicle packages announced in January–February 2023.
    • While the main push started in early June (late spring/early summer), the intent and preparation through spring 2023 were clearly to enable a large counteroffensive.

Given:

  • Trend: clear escalation in sophistication and scale of Western weapon deliveries into 2023.
  • Culmination: those deliveries were explicitly framed by U.S. and allied governments as preparation for, and support of, a major Ukrainian counteroffensive that launched in mid‑2023.

The core substance of the prediction — continued escalation of sophisticated Western support leading up to a major Ukrainian counteroffensive in spring 2023 — is borne out by events. The exact start date of the offensive edges into early summer, but in common political/military discourse it is still referred to as the spring–summer 2023 counteroffensive that Western aid was designed to enable.

Conclusion: The prediction is best judged as right.

economymarkets
If the Federal Reserve raises rates to around 5.4% in Q1 2023 as Neel Kashkari projected, then short‑term T‑bills in 2023 will yield approximately 5–5.5% annualized risk‑free.
if Kashkari is right, that rates are going up 5.4% in Q1, why wouldn't you just put all your money in short term T-bills? You earn five, 5.5% risk free.View on YouTube
Explanation

Neel Kashkari did project that the fed funds rate might need to rise to about 5.4%; he reiterated this outlook in a February 7, 2023 CNBC interview, placing himself above the then‑consensus terminal rate of ~5.1%.(cnbc.com) In practice, the Federal Reserve did not reach 5.4% in Q1 2023: after hikes on February 1 and March 22, the target range ended Q1 at 4.75–5.00%, and was later raised to 5.00–5.25% on May 3 and then to 5.25–5.50% in July.(ycharts.com)

However, Sacks’s substantive prediction was about what short‑term T‑bill yields would look like in that rate environment: that they would be roughly 5–5.5% risk‑free. That part proved accurate. Data for 3‑month T‑bills show monthly average yields of 4.63–4.77% in January–March 2023, rising to 5.01% in April and then staying in the 5.0–5.5% band (about 5.01–5.47%) from April through December 2023.(otm.finance.harvard.edu) Similarly, the 1‑year Treasury yield averaged 4.94% in 2023, with an intrayear high around 5.44% and a year‑end level near 5.35%, again matching the 5–5.5% range he described.(app.macrotrends.net)

So while the exact timing/level of Kashkari’s 5.4% call in Q1 did not materialize, the world that actually unfolded—fed funds in the mid‑5s later in 2023—produced short‑term T‑bill yields very close to 5–5.5% for much of the year. Sacks’s economic claim that a Kashkari‑style rate path would make short‑term T‑bills yield about 5–5.5% risk‑free was borne out by realized 2023 T‑bill yields, so the prediction is best judged as right on its core content.

marketseconomy
Over the next few years starting in 2023, many—possibly most—office towers in downtown San Francisco will go through distress such that lenders (banks) will end up owning a large share of this office stock due to defaults and foreclosures.
I think office towers in San Francisco are that is some serious toxic debt... I think that a lot of these buildings, maybe virtually all of the San Francisco downtown, is going to be owned by the bank soon because no one can.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that downtown San Francisco’s office market has indeed become highly distressed since 2023, but lenders have not ended up owning “virtually all” or even a large share of the office towers.

  • Severe distress, but not universal: San Francisco’s office vacancy rate climbed to around 36–37% in 2024, the highest of any major U.S. market, and office attendance remains far below pre‑COVID levels.(axios.com) CMBS/CRE loan data show that the San Francisco metro has the highest overall CRE distress rate among large U.S. markets (about 22.1% as of September 2024), with office loans the most troubled property type nationwide.(businesswire.com) This validates the “toxic debt / lots of distress” part of the thesis, but that is only half of the prediction.

  • How distress has actually resolved: Instead of mass foreclosure with banks taking title, most troubled downtown office assets have been resolved through distressed sales or loan trades to other private owners:

    • The 22‑story tower at 350 California Street sold at roughly a 75% discount to its previous estimated value, to SKS Real Estate Partners and a partner—not to a bank or lender REO.(sfgate.com)
    • In 2024, 23 downtown office buildings changed hands for about $916 million; coverage by CBRE and local press notes that much of this activity involved distressed assets being bought by institutional and wealthy investors, at steep discounts.(sfchronicle.com) Again, these are transfers between private owners, not bank takeovers.
    • The vacant tower at 199 Fremont (300 Howard) was sold in 2025 for about $111 million to DivcoWest and Blackstone, far below pre‑pandemic valuations but still a private‑equity deal, not lender ownership.(sfchronicle.com)
    • At 353 Sacramento Street, New York Life and Lincoln Property bought the distressed loan at a major discount; reporting emphasizes that the building “was never foreclosed on,” illustrating how lenders prefer selling the note to becoming the property owner.(sfstandard.com)
    • Brokers are marketing large office loans such as those on 45 Fremont Street and Market Center (555–575 Market) on behalf of banks, highlighting that the strategy is to dispose of the debt or facilitate a recapitalization, not to foreclose and hold the real estate on bank balance sheets.(ipgsf.com)
  • Banks are reducing exposure, not accumulating towers: Industry coverage describes big lenders (e.g., ING, JPMorgan, Goldman Sachs, Capital One) selling office‑backed loans at deep discounts to investors in order to cut their commercial office exposure.(reddit.com) That is the opposite of a scenario where “virtually all of downtown” ends up owned by banks.

  • Scale of distress vs. “most towers owned by banks”: Even in the securitized‑loan universe, only about one‑fifth of San Francisco CRE loan balances are classified as distressed; that is substantial but still far from “most” of the downtown office stock.(businesswire.com) Meanwhile, marquee towers like Salesforce Tower, 555 California, 525 Market, and many others remain in the hands of REITs, pension funds, insurance companies, and other private owners—not banks or special servicers as long‑term owners.

  • Timeframe: The prediction (made in early 2023) used language like “soon” and “over the next few years.” Nearly three years later, the pattern is clear: widespread distress and big value write‑downs, but lenders overwhelmingly try to avoid ending up as owners, instead pushing note sales, restructurings, or third‑party acquisitions. With transaction volumes rising and some early signs of leasing recovery, the window in which banks might still end up owning “virtually all” or even a large fraction of downtown towers is shrinking rather than expanding.(globest.com)

Because (a) serious distress did materialize but (b) banks/lenders do not own a large share of downtown San Francisco office towers, and many distressed assets have gone to other investors instead, the core ownership outcome described in the prediction has not come true as of late 2025.

politics
During 2023 and into the 2024 cycle, Donald Trump’s influence within the Republican Party will continue to decline, as evidenced by reduced effectiveness of his endorsements and increased open defiance from GOP figures.
the trend that I am going to suggest... is Trump's influence in the GOP, continues to wane.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that in 2023 and into the 2024 cycle, Donald Trump’s influence in the GOP would continue to wane, shown by weaker endorsements and more open defiance from Republican figures. The opposite happened on the key metrics the predictor named.

  1. Endorsement effectiveness stayed extremely high. Compilations of Trump’s endorsements show that his Republican primary success rate in 2024 remained in the mid‑90% range (around 96–98%), in line with or even slightly above previous cycles, indicating that a Trump endorsement was still a powerful asset inside GOP primaries rather than a waning force. (grokipedia.com)

  2. GOP elites largely rallied to him rather than defying him. After Trump’s first 2023 indictment, Republican leaders and rivals mostly closed ranks around him, with coverage noting that the party remained “firmly in the hold” of Trump and MAGA Republicans rather than peeling away.(washingtonpost.com) Following his 2024 New York felony conviction, top Republicans—including some previous skeptics such as Mitch McConnell and Susan Collins—again rallied to his defense, and House Speaker Mike Johnson publicly attacked the prosecution and trial on Trump’s behalf, underscoring continued deference rather than open rebellion.(politico.com)

  3. He consolidated organizational and electoral control of the party. In early 2024, Trump effectively forced out RNC chair Ronna McDaniel and moved to install loyalists like Michael Whatley and Lara Trump in party leadership, described as part of his effort to solidify control over the GOP apparatus.(ft.com) Electorally, he then dominated the 2024 Republican primaries—winning Iowa in a historic landslide for a non‑incumbent, decisively winning New Hampshire, quickly clinching the delegate majority, and becoming the GOP nominee again—demonstrating overwhelming rank‑and‑file support rather than a continuing decline in influence.(en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, Trump’s endorsement power, the behavior of GOP officials, his control over party machinery, and his sweeping victory in the 2024 primaries all point to a reassertion and consolidation of influence within the Republican Party, not a continued waning. Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

politics
If Ron DeSantis continues to poll as strongly as he was at the end of 2022 within the Republican Party, Donald Trump will choose not to run in the 2024 Republican presidential primary to avoid the risk of losing.
And if if it can just be DeSantis versus Trump in the primary, he has a much better shot than if it's Trump versus a bunch of other challengers. And I think that if he continues to pull this well within the Republican Party, I think Trump might not run again, because Trump definitely does not want to risk being a loser in the Republican primary.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did run in the 2024 Republican presidential primary. He officially announced his 2024 candidacy on November 15, 2022, and then actively campaigned through the 2024 primary season, ultimately securing the Republican nomination.

Ron DeSantis did not maintain the same polling strength against Trump that he had in late 2022. Through 2023, national Republican primary polls showed Trump opening up and then sustaining a large lead over DeSantis and other GOP contenders, and DeSantis’s relative position weakened rather than strengthened. Nonetheless, the key outcome in Sacks’s prediction — that Trump might not run again in order to avoid risking a primary loss — clearly did not occur: Trump chose to run despite any such risks and won the primary.

Because the observable real-world outcome (Trump ran and won the 2024 GOP primary) is directly contrary to the implied forecast that he would likely not run under the scenario being discussed, this prediction is best scored as wrong.

markets
US defense contractors mentioned (Lockheed Martin, Northrop Grumman, Raytheon, General Dynamics) will continue to perform well in the stock market for at least the next year following December 2022, relative to the broader market.
So these companies are going to keep doing well for the next year at least.View on YouTube
Explanation

Looking at performance from roughly late December 2022 through late December 2023 (well‑approximated by full‑year 2023 returns), the named U.S. defense contractors substantially underperformed the broader U.S. equity market:

Over the same year, the S&P 500 total return was about +26.3% in 2023, driven largely by a strong rally in large‑cap U.S. stocks. (slickcharts.com) This means all four contractors lagged the broad market badly over that first year after December 2022, with three of them actually negative while the index gained over 25%.

Since the normalized prediction specified that these defense contractors would "continue to perform well in the stock market for at least the next year" relative to the broader market, and they instead underperformed the S&P 500 by a wide margin during that period, the prediction did not come true.

Twitter will soon (within months of December 2022) roll out a custom affiliation badge for the All-In podcast accounts and hosts.
We are going to have all in badges really soon.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction referred to Twitter/X rolling out custom organizational affiliation badges so that the All‑In podcast and its hosts would have distinctive “All‑In” badges on their profiles.

Evidence:

  • In late December 2022, Elon Musk discussed on the All‑In podcast the new organizational affiliation concept, explicitly crediting David Sacks with the idea and describing a system where organizations verify people and an org badge appears next to those affiliates’ accounts. A contemporaneous write‑up of that conversation notes this as “Twitter for Business/Organizations” and ties it to organizational verification under Twitter Blue for Business. (whatsuptwitter.com)
  • On December 12, 2022—just days before E109’s Dec 24, 2022 release—Twitter launched Blue for Business, a corporate tier that gives organizations a gold check and (per internal docs reported by TechCrunch) the ability to give employees additional badges next to their names to mark affiliation. This is exactly the custom affiliation‑badge product Sacks was describing. (techcrunch.com)
  • X’s current help page defines “affiliation badges” as badges that show the profile photo of a Verified Organization and are applied to all that organization’s affiliates, appearing on profiles, posts, timelines, and more. (help.twitter.com)
  • Today, The All‑In Podcast has a dedicated Affiliates page on X (x.com/theallinpod/affiliates) listing the hosts’ handles as affiliates of the All‑In organization. That status implies the hosts’ accounts carry the All‑In organization’s badge as their affiliation badge, matching Sacks’s “All‑In badges” description. (x.com)
  • Episode E109 itself is dated December 24, 2022, so the corporate/affiliation system began rolling out essentially immediately after the timeframe of the episode, i.e., within weeks to a few months of the prediction. (metacast.app)

Putting this together: the organizational affiliation feature Sacks described was launched publicly within days of the episode, and All‑In is now a Verified Organization on X with its hosts listed as affiliates, which by X’s own rules means they carry the org’s custom affiliation badge. While we don’t have an exact public timestamp for when the All‑In org and hosts were enrolled, the feature itself shipped almost immediately and functions today exactly as Sacks predicted. On that basis, the prediction that they would have “All‑In badges really soon” is best classified as right.

Sacks predicts that the trend of audiences recognizing corporate media as biased and agenda-driven will continue, with an increasing share of people opting out of corporate media and turning to independent media over the coming years.
best trend is the growing realization that the corporate media is failing does not tell the truth. It has an agenda. More and more people are opting out of it and going with independent media... I think more and more people are waking up from the matrix and realizing that we're living in this media controlled simulation.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2022 shows both pillars of Sacks’ prediction playing out:

  • Trust in legacy/corporate news has kept falling to record lows. Gallup trend data summarized in multiple outlets shows U.S. trust in “mass media such as newspapers, TV and radio” dropping from the mid‑30% range in 2022 to 31% in 2024 and then 28% in 2025 saying they have a great deal or fair amount of trust—its lowest level in over 50 years. Roughly 70% now say they have not very much or no trust in these outlets. (breitbart.com) This directly matches his claim that more people see corporate media as failing and agenda‑driven.

  • A growing share of people are “opting out” toward independent or non‑traditional media.

    • A 2024 Pew report finds about 1 in 5 U.S. adults (21%)—and 37% of adults 18–29—regularly get news from news influencers on social media, and 77% of those influencers have no affiliation with a news organization, i.e., they are independent creators. (pewresearch.org)
    • A 2025 Reuters Institute analysis and related coverage report that social and video networks have overtaken TV as Americans’ primary news source, with people increasingly turning to online personalities and podcasters like Joe Rogan instead of traditional news brands. (reuters.com)
    • The “independent journalism era” is documented as rapidly expanding: platforms like Substack grew from ~1 million paid subscriptions in 2021 to over 3 million by early 2024 and around 5 million paid subscriptions by early 2025, with politics and news as leading categories and many high‑profile journalists leaving legacy outlets to build independent businesses there. (axios.com)
    • Podcast and creator‑driven content consumption is at all‑time highs, with a majority of Americans now monthly podcast consumers, and podcasts—often independent—serving as a major news/opinion channel. (edisonresearch.com)

Across roughly three years since the prediction, the directional trend is clear: trust in corporate/mass media keeps deteriorating, while independent/creator‑led and influencer‑driven outlets capture a growing share of news consumption, especially among younger audiences. That aligns closely with Sacks’ forecast that more people would recognize corporate media as biased and would shift toward independent media “over the coming years.”

Sacks predicts that the movie "Dalíland" (which he references as "Dolly land") will be released to the public in the summer of 2023.
I'll give a shout out to my movie Dolly land, which will be coming out next summer.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple sources show that Dalíland received its general U.S. theatrical and on‑demand release on June 9, 2023.

  • Wikipedia notes that Dalíland "was released in the United States on June 9, 2023" by Magnolia Pictures. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Collider reported that Dalíland "will be released in theaters and on-demand on June 9, 2023." (collider.com)
  • Release-tracking sites likewise list the theater/PVOD date as June 9, 2023. (whentostream.com)

The podcast (Dec 24, 2022) prediction was that the movie would "be coming out next summer." In common U.S. usage and in the film industry, movies released in early June are part of the summer movie season, and meteorological summer in the U.S. begins on June 1. Since the film’s public release fell on June 9, 2023, this matches the prediction that it would come out in summer 2023.

Therefore, the prediction that Dalíland would be released to the public in the summer of 2023 is right.

Sacks @ 00:12:01Inconclusive
conflictai
Within the next decade (2022–2032), it will become feasible for non‑state actors to obtain precision GPS‑guided weapons such that continuously publishing a person's precise GPS coordinates would make it relatively easy to use those weapons to assassinate that person.
Right now, you have to be a state actor to get Ahold of those weapons. But you can imagine over the next decade that having someone's precise GPS coordinates over a sustained period of time, it would be pretty easy to target them for and not to be dramatic here, but for assassination, that is a security risk.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s time window is 2022–2032, so as of 30 November 2025 we are only about three years into a ten‑year horizon.

Evidence about the underlying trend:

  • Non‑state actors (e.g., ISIS, Mexican cartels, Yemen’s Houthis, Ukraine’s volunteer units) have already used weaponized commercial drones with GPS‑based autopilots and improvised munitions, demonstrating that relatively sophisticated precision‑style attacks are possible without being a state military.
  • Consumer and DIY platforms like DJI drones and open‑source autopilot stacks (e.g., ArduPilot, PX4) support waypoint navigation using GPS coordinates out of the box; adding an explosive payload is technically straightforward for a determined group, though still non‑trivial and illegal.
  • However, the specific scenario Sacks describes—that continuously publishing an individual’s precise GPS coordinates would make it “pretty easy” for non‑state actors to use precision GPS‑guided weapons for assassination—is not clearly documented as a demonstrated or widely accessible capability. The risk is widely discussed in security circles, but it remains more of a plausible threat model than a routinely observed or clearly commoditized capability.

Because:

  1. The deadline (2032) has not yet arrived, and
  2. The claim is about future feasibility and ease, not a clearly falsifiable event that has either happened or not,

we cannot definitively say the prediction is right or wrong at this point. It is still developing and depends on subjective judgments about what counts as “pretty easy” and “feasible” for non‑state actors.

Therefore the appropriate classification is "inconclusive" (too early to tell).

techeconomy
In calendar year 2023, for most software companies, new customer business (new bookings) will decline to roughly 50% of their 2022 level.
So you should expect your new business to be roughly 50% of what it was. Next year it'll be 50% of what it was last year. That's my rule of thumb for most companies. New business down 50%.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that 2023 was clearly a tougher demand year for software and SaaS, but there is no sector‑wide measurement of “new customer business / new bookings vs. 2022” that would allow a clean yes/no on Sacks’s specific 50% figure.

What we can see:

  • Sacks’s quote on the episode is indeed: “You should expect your new business to be roughly 50% of what it was. Next year it’ll be 50% of what it was last year. That’s my rule of thumb for most companies. New business down 50%.” (allinpodcast.readablepods.com)
  • Gartner’s post‑hoc market‑share analysis shows worldwide enterprise software revenue grew 11.0–11.1% in 2023 to about $785–788 billion, rather than shrinking, despite macro headwinds. (gartner.com) Earlier forecasts for 2023 had also called for high single‑ to low double‑digit growth in enterprise software spend, and those broad numbers were borne out. (saastr.com) This tells us overall software revenue and spend continued to rise; it does not directly tell us how much of 2023’s new bookings were down vs. 2022.
  • Bessemer’s Cloud 100 Benchmarks Report notes that for the 2023 Cloud 100 (100 top private cloud/SaaS companies), the average revenue growth rate dropped from ~100% in 2022 to ~55% in 2023 – i.e., growth was “nearly halved” in that cohort. (bvp.com) That is directionally consistent with Sacks’s idea that the pace of new business would fall sharply, but it’s a revenue‑growth statistic for a specific elite subset, not a bookings‑level statistic for “most software companies.”
  • Other industry summaries of the SaaS market also report that the market size increased from roughly $237B in 2022 to about $273B in 2023 (~15% growth), even while describing 2023 as a “year of efficiency” with slower growth and more cautious buyers. (fox.agency) Again, these figures speak to overall revenue/market size, not to new‑logo or new‑ARR bookings as a percentage of 2022.

The key problems in judging the prediction are:

  1. No unified bookings metric: New‑customer bookings are not reported consistently across vendors, and there is no global dataset aggregating “2023 new customer business vs. 2022” for “most software companies.” Public sources focus on revenue, ARR, and sometimes total billings, not the specific “new customer bookings” slice.
  2. Level vs. growth: Where we do have broad data (e.g., Cloud 100), the main story is that growth rates roughly halved, not that new‑business levels themselves dropped to 50% of the prior year. That’s qualitatively similar but not the same as “new bookings are 50% of 2022 in absolute dollars.”
  3. Heterogeneity: The evidence we have is heavily skewed toward large public vendors and top‑tier private cloud companies. Sacks’s comment was about “most companies,” including a long tail of smaller and mid‑market software firms for which we lack systematic bookings data; operator anecdotes vary widely.

Putting this together: the direction of Sacks’s call – that 2023 would see a pronounced slowdown in new business for many software/SaaS vendors – is supported by multiple sources. But his specific quantitative claim that, in calendar 2023, new customer bookings for most software companies would fall to “roughly 50%” of 2022 can’t be rigorously confirmed or falsified from public data. Because of the absence of a comprehensive, comparable bookings metric, the prediction’s accuracy has to be rated as ambiguous rather than clearly right or clearly wrong.

economy
From 2023 through 2024, many small-business customers will go out of business, causing SaaS vendors’ small-business logo churn rates to rise from a historical ~15% annually to approximately 25–30% annually.
We haven't seen that much logo churn yet. But next year a lot of companies are going to start going out of business and it's going to happen over the next two years. So you're simply going to see logo churn rates, say, among small businesses, go from like a historical norm of 15% to maybe 25 or 30.View on YouTube
Explanation

Public data on SaaS churn over 2023–2024 is mostly (a) aggregate across all customer segments and (b) reported as broad benchmarks, not precise time‑series for small‑business logo churn.

• KeyBanc’s widely cited Private SaaS surveys show median overall annual logo churn around 13% in both their 2022 and 2023 data, with no evidence of an industry‑wide spike to 25–30% logo churn during that period.(snohat.com) These figures are not broken out specifically for small‑business customers. • For SMB segments specifically, a Bessemer Venture Partners guide (about two years old) already described typical SMB churn ranges like 15–20% annually as “good,” with 10–15% or lower considered better, implying mid‑teens churn was already normal for SMB SaaS prior to or around the start of the prediction window, not a low baseline that later spiked.(bvp.com) • Newer benchmark articles (2024–2025) often say small‑business / consumer SaaS churn of roughly 20–30% annually is common, again as a structural norm rather than as a recently observed jump traceable to 2023–2024 macro conditions.(tomorrowdesk.com) • Company‑specific commentary supports the idea that SMB churn is structurally higher, not that it suddenly surged from ~15% to 25–30%. For example, ZoomInfo’s finance leadership in 2024 talks about natural SMB churn “close to 20%” largely because many small customers eventually shut down, but frames this as an inherent feature of the SMB segment, not as an unusually elevated rate unique to 2023–2024.(in.marketscreener.com)

Because (1) the best quantitative sources aggregate all customer sizes, (2) SMB‑only churn benchmarks are presented as broad ranges without clear pre‑ vs post‑2023 deltas, and (3) no sector‑wide evidence shows SMB logo churn specifically rising from a stable ~15% to a sustained 25–30% in 2023–2024, we cannot confidently say whether Sacks’s specific forecast about magnitude and change in small‑business logo churn came true. The timeframe has passed, but the available data are too coarse and inconsistent to judge the prediction as clearly right or clearly wrong, so the fairest rating is ambiguous.

economytech
From roughly early 2023 through mid-to-late 2024 (the next 4–6 quarters from December 2022), the macroeconomic environment will present major headwinds for software companies, making it harder for them to sustain high growth without unsustainable spending.
We're going to have major economic headwinds for the next 4 to 6 quarters. Call it year and a half.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023–mid‑2024 shows that software and broader tech companies did face sustained macro headwinds: venture funding into business software fell sharply (for example, European SaaS investment dropped about 59% in 2023 versus the prior year) as rising rates and the Silicon Valley Bank crisis created a “difficult financing climate” and lengthened sales cycles and tightened customer budgets for cloud/SaaS firms.(forbes.com) Large public software companies saw revenue growth and “growth efficiency” fall markedly between 2021 and 2023 even as sales and marketing spend kept rising, indicating it was harder to generate high growth without heavy spending.(mckinsey.com) Industry‑wide, overall IT‑spending forecasts for 2023 were cut roughly in half to low‑single‑digit growth amid economic uncertainty and CIO “change fatigue,” while 2024 was expected to improve but still described as constrained.(gartner.com) At the same time, tech companies executed unusually large layoffs—about 263,000 tech workers were laid off in 2023, with more than 120,000 additional cuts in 2024—as firms adjusted to higher interest rates and slower demand.(marketwatch.com) Analysts in 2024 still characterized the near‑term software outlook as positive but tempered by “heightened macroeconomic uncertainty” through 2024.(morningstar.com) Altogether, this supports Sacks’s qualitative claim that the roughly 4–6 quarters after December 2022 (early 2023 through mid‑2024) would be a period of major economic headwinds that made sustaining very high software growth without aggressive spending significantly harder, so the prediction is best judged as right.

politicsgovernment
When Joe Manchin retires from the U.S. Senate, the West Virginia Senate seat he currently holds will flip to the Republican Party in the subsequent election.
West Virginia, unlike Arizona, is like a plus 22 red state. Joe Manchin is the only politician in that state who could win that seat for the Democrats. When Joe Manchin retires, that seat is going Republican.View on YouTube
Explanation

Joe Manchin, then a Democratic U.S. senator from West Virginia, announced he would not seek re‑election to his Senate seat in the 2024 cycle, effectively retiring from that seat.(en.wikipedia.org) In the subsequent 2024 United States Senate election in West Virginia, Republican Governor Jim Justice won the open-seat race with about 68.8% of the vote to Democrat Glenn Elliott’s 27.8%, and he succeeded Manchin in the U.S. Senate.(en.wikipedia.org) Justice, a Republican, was sworn in as senator in January 2025, giving the Republican Party control of the seat Manchin had held.(en.wikipedia.org)

Therefore, the prediction that when Manchin retired his West Virginia Senate seat would go to the Republican Party was borne out by the 2024 election results.

politicseconomy
In 2023, Xi Jinping will maintain or strengthen his grip on power even as conditions worsen for Chinese citizens and sectors like billionaires, tech, and real estate, and there could be negative financial contagion from China; overall, 2023 will not be a good year for China’s economy.
I think I think the bigger risk is, is that China gets better for XI Jinping, but worse for everybody else in China... I think there could be contagion from China next year. I don't think she's going to lose his grip in any way, but I'm not sure China's going to have a good year next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key elements of Sacks’s prediction broadly matched what happened in 2023:

  1. Xi Jinping keeps or strengthens his grip on power
    Xi was unanimously reelected state president for an unprecedented third term on March 10, 2023, after the 2018 constitutional change removing presidential term limits, and analyses describe his administration as “rock solid” with a top leadership dominated by loyalists and no visible internal challenge to his authority. (en.wikipedia.org) This aligns with the claim that Xi would not “lose his grip in any way.”

  2. Worsening conditions for Chinese citizens and private sectors (billionaires, tech, real estate)
    Billionaires/tech: China lost 229 billionaires from the Hurun Global Rich List 2023, more than half of all those who fell off the list worldwide, with the decline explicitly linked to Beijing’s crackdown on major tech companies and other headwinds. (dawn.com)
    Real estate/households: China’s property downturn deepened: property investment fell sharply in 2023 and new construction starts plunged; developers such as Country Garden missed bond payments, and the housing slump eroded household wealth and confidence. (euromonitor.com) Household sentiment, youth employment and equity markets were weak, with research noting high youth unemployment (above 20%), falling property prices, and a CSI 300 stock index down about 35% from mid‑2021 to end‑2023, all weighing on consumer confidence. (tspr.org) This is consistent with things getting “worse for everybody else in China,” especially the private sector and middle class.

  3. 2023 not being a “good year” for China’s economy
    While official GDP growth around 5.2–5.4% in 2023 met or slightly exceeded Beijing’s headline target, the year was widely characterized by economists as a disappointing, weaker‑than‑expected post‑COVID recovery: soft consumption, weak exports, a deepening property crisis, and rising deflation pressures. (thenews.com.pk) Analysis from banks and research houses emphasized that deflation, property-sector contraction, and fragile confidence made 2023 a structurally poor year for China’s economy despite the headline growth figure, which matches Sacks’s directional call that it would “not be a good year.”

  4. Potential contagion from China
    Sacks framed contagion as a risk (“I think there could be contagion”), not as a certainty. China’s real estate turmoil did in fact generate financial‑stability worries: liquidity strains at major developers, missed bond payments, and growing non‑performing loan risks for banks, with analysts explicitly warning that property stress could spill over into broader financial markets and the global economy. (euromonitor.com) While this did not culminate in a 2008‑style global crisis, the emergence of notable spillover risk is directionally consistent with his warning.

Because Xi’s political power remained firmly intact while 2023 turned out to be a weak, confidence‑sapping year for China’s economy—especially for real estate, private business, and the wealthy—and because the kind of financial‑sector and contagion risks he highlighted did materialize (even if not catastrophically), the overall prediction is best judged as right on direction and substance.

economy
Over roughly the next year after this December 2022 episode (i.e., through 2023), the SaaS industry will experience a significant contraction in jobs and a vicious cycle in which customer seat counts shrink rather than grow.
Either way, there's going to be a big contraction in jobs basically around this industry. And I think that what that could do is cause a vicious cycle where... for the next year or so where seat contraction becomes the norm instead of seat expansion.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2023 shows that both elements of Sacks’ prediction broadly played out over the following year.

  1. “Big contraction in jobs … around this industry”
    Tech layoffs in 2023 were very large, and a significant share were at cloud and SaaS firms. Layoffs.fyi–based tallies cited by multiple outlets show over 160k–220k tech layoffs in 2023, exceeding 2022’s totals.(indigilife.com) Major enterprise SaaS vendors—including Salesforce (10% of workforce), Atlassian (5%), Twilio (~17%), Zoom (15%), and others—are specifically listed in 2023 layoff roundups.(joltjournal.com) SaaS-focused reporting likewise notes that many SaaS firms had rapidly over-hired 2–3x in prior years and then moved to layoffs and hiring freezes as conditions worsened.(moneycontrol.com) This supports the claim that there was a big contraction in jobs in and around the SaaS sector during the year after December 2022.

  2. “Vicious cycle … where seat contraction becomes the norm instead of seat expansion”
    On the customer/seat side, multiple data points and company disclosures show a shift from the prior decade’s automatic seat expansion to flat or negative seat counts at many SaaS vendors:

    • A March 2023 TechCrunch analysis of $2.5B of SaaS spending across 18,000 deals reported that recent layoffs had caused a “decline in seat licenses”, and concluded that in 2023 “a flat renewal is the new ‘upsell’” and that SaaS vendors should expect contraction at renewal, not expansion, as the immediate impact of layoffs on seat counts.(techcrunch.com) This is essentially the dynamic Sacks described.
    • Expensify’s Q4 2023 results broke out paid-seat movement: in 2022, existing customers added ~85,000 seats, but in 2023 the same cohort lost ~42,000 seats, with management calling 2023 “a brutal year” for customers and attributing the swing to customers hiring then laying off staff.(marketbeat.com) That is a textbook case of seat expansion turning into net seat contraction within a year.
    • A SaaStr breakdown of Dropbox at ~$2.5B ARR noted that seat contraction and churn remained elevated, with customers reducing seat counts even as the company pushed modest ARPU increases.(saastr.com) Again, this aligns with seat contraction/rightsizing at renewal.
    • The 2023 Zylo SaaS Management Index found that organizations on average waste or underutilize ~44% of their SaaS licenses, with large enterprises only using about half of their purchased seats. It frames cutting redundant and unused SaaS licenses as a primary lever to reduce costs during 2023’s wave of layoffs, reinforcing that many customers were actively shrinking or optimizing seat counts rather than expanding.(prnewswire.com)

    At the same time, industry-wide SaaS spending and revenue still grew in 2023—Gartner and SaaS-market analyses projected double‑digit increases in software spending, and one large dataset expected SaaS spend to grow about 18% that year.(techcrunch.com) So the sector was not in an outright collapse. But Sacks did not predict a revenue death spiral; he specifically focused on:

    • headcount-driven job cuts in and around SaaS, and
    • the shift from the long‑standing baseline of automatic seat expansion to seat contraction/flat renewals over “the next year or so.”

Given the scale of 2023 tech/SaaS layoffs and the documented move toward flat or negative seat counts and downsized renewals at many SaaS vendors—while acknowledging that effects varied by company—the prediction is directionally well‑supported by the data. Hence the verdict: right.

venture
In 2023, many SaaS companies will start the year with only 80–90% of the prior year’s revenue from existing customers (due to layoffs and seat reductions), instead of the historical 120%+ net retention.
So the baseline for next year could be contraction. So instead of starting with 120% of last year's revenue, you might start with 80 or 90% because there's going to be so much churn.View on YouTube
Explanation

Industry data for 2023 show that, while SaaS expansion slowed and churn/downsells increased, the baseline did not shift to 80–90% of prior-year revenue from existing customers.

  • SaaS Capital’s 2023 retention benchmarks (one of the largest private B2B SaaS surveys) report median net revenue retention (NRR) of 102% and median gross retention of 91%, unchanged from 2022. That implies the typical SaaS company still grew revenue from its existing customer base rather than shrinking it. (saas-capital.com)
  • A summary of the same data notes the median NRR across all SaaS companies was 102%, with higher ACV enterprises at around 110% NRR—again consistent with modest expansion, not 10–20% contraction. (churnzero.com)
  • KeyBanc/Sapphire’s multi-year private SaaS survey finds that net retention stayed above 100% through the downturn, even though it fell from 2021 peaks; what deteriorated more sharply was gross retention, which dropped to the mid‑80s in 2023 before starting to recover. (prnewswire.com)

Some weaker or SMB-focused SaaS companies did experience NRR below 100% and heavy seat reductions, but broad-based surveys show:

  • Typical/median SaaS did not fall to 80–90% of prior-year revenue from existing customers.
  • Net retention in 2023 remained slightly above 100% for the sector as a whole.

Because the prediction framed this level of contraction as the new baseline for “many” SaaS companies, contrasting it with the historical 120%+ NRR, it overshot the actual severity of the downturn and is best characterized as wrong.

ventureeconomy
During the current downturn period (approximately 2022–2023), achieving 2x year‑over‑year growth in a SaaS business will be as difficult and as impressive as achieving 3x growth was in the prior, more frothy years.
If you can grow two x year over year in this environment, that is as good as or better than growing three x last year.View on YouTube
Explanation

This prediction is qualitative and relative, so it can’t be cleanly labeled right or wrong.

Evidence on the 2022–2023 SaaS environment:

  • Public SaaS valuation multiples and growth expectations compressed sharply after late 2021. Bessemer’s Cloud Index data shows revenue multiples and growth rates for public cloud companies falling through 2022–2023 compared to the 2020–2021 boom, reflecting a much tougher funding and demand environment for SaaS overall.
  • Venture funding for SaaS and broader startup markets dropped substantially in 2022–2023 relative to 2020–2021, with many reports describing a “reset” and investors prioritizing efficient growth over growth-at-all-costs. This supports the idea that sustaining very high growth (e.g., 2x year-over-year) became notably harder and more prized versus the prior frothy period.
  • However, some SaaS companies (especially AI-adjacent or infrastructure players) continued to post extremely high growth rates even in 2023–2024, sometimes exceeding 2–3x year‑over‑year from smaller bases. At the same time, other later‑stage SaaS companies struggled to grow at all. This dispersion makes it impossible to define a single, universally accepted conversion like “2x now ≈ 3x then” across the entire category.

Reasoning:

  • The directional claim—that it became significantly harder and more impressive to hit 2x growth in 2022–2023 than to hit 3x in the prior boom—is broadly consistent with macro data on SaaS markets: lower valuations, tighter funding, and slower average growth.
  • But the specific equivalence ("2x now is as good as 3x then") is a normative, relative judgment that depends on:
    • which segment of SaaS (early‑stage vs late‑stage, infra vs application),
    • which investor or operator you ask, and
    • what baselines they use for "impressive" in each period.
  • There is no objective benchmark or consensus metric that could definitively verify or falsify this exact conversion ratio.

Because of this, even with enough time having passed, the prediction can’t be conclusively validated or refuted from available data; it’s a qualitative calibration of difficulty and impressiveness rather than a clearly testable forecast.

Therefore the appropriate classification is: "ambiguous".

economy
In 2023, the United States will experience a pretty severe recession.
I think we all believe that we're going to have a pretty severe recession next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Most official and widely used economic measures indicate that the U.S. did not experience a “pretty severe recession” in 2023.

Key points:

  • Real GDP growth was positive in 2023. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) reports that U.S. real GDP grew about 2.5% for full-year 2023, not negative as in a recession.
  • No NBER-declared recession. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), the body that officially dates U.S. recessions, did not declare any recession in 2023. Its list of business cycles shows the last recession ending in April 2020, with no subsequent peak/trough dates through 2023.
  • Labor market remained strong. Unemployment in 2023 generally stayed in the 3–4% range, near historic lows, and job growth remained positive, which is inconsistent with a “pretty severe” downturn.

While there were concerns about inflation, interest-rate hikes, and some sector-specific slowdowns (e.g., tech layoffs, housing cooling), the broad macroeconomic data do not support the claim that the U.S. underwent a severe recession in 2023. Therefore, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

politics
In the upcoming 2022 Georgia Senate runoff election (Warnock vs. Walker), Republicans will lose the runoff if Donald Trump continues his post‑2020-election style 'antics' and public behavior through the period leading up to the runoff.
I think we're going to lose the Georgia runoff again if Trump continues with these antics.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is conditional: Republicans will lose the 2022 Georgia Senate runoff if Trump continues his post‑2020-election style antics.

  1. Outcome of the runoff: In the December 6, 2022 Georgia Senate runoff between Raphael Warnock and Herschel Walker, Warnock (Democrat) defeated Walker (Republican), 51.4% to 48.6%. Republicans therefore did lose the runoff. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Trump’s continued “antics”: Trump had heavily tied himself to 2020-election grievances and confrontational public behavior throughout 2021–2022. He formally announced his 2024 presidential campaign on November 15, 2022, just days after this podcast, continuing to center his public persona on the same election-fraud narrative and polarizing style that followed the 2020 election, as documented in subsequent investigations and reports on his sustained effort to overturn or relitigate 2020. (reuters.com) These sources show that his post‑2020 behavior (claims of a stolen election, efforts to overturn results, inflammatory rhetoric) was not moderated but persisted into and beyond the runoff period.

Given that (a) Trump did in fact continue the same kind of behavior the speaker is referring to, and (b) under that condition the GOP did lose the Georgia runoff, the conditional prediction — “we’re going to lose the Georgia runoff again if Trump continues with these antics” — matches the observed outcome. The causal attribution can’t be proven, but the conditional forecast of the result under that scenario was borne out.

Therefore, the prediction is best scored as right.

economy
Starting in late 2022, the U.S. economy is entering a sharp, economy‑wide slowdown that will deepen into a significant recession rather than a mild or brief dip.
it feels to me like the economy is headed off a cliff right now... this is just, I think, an economy wide slowdown.View on YouTube
Explanation

Macroeconomic data show that the U.S. did not enter a sharp, economy‑wide recession starting in late 2022.

  • Output kept growing instead of contracting. Revised BEA figures show real U.S. GDP grew 2.5% in 2022, 2.9% in 2023, and about 2.8% in 2024, rather than falling or stagnating as in a deep recession. (apps.bea.gov) Quarterly data likewise show solid positive growth in late 2022 and strong growth in 2023 Q3 (5.2% annualized). (bea.gov)
  • No official recession was dated after the COVID slump. The NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee identifies the most recent trough as April 2020 and continues to classify the period since May 2020 as an expansion, with no later recession episode designated through 2025. (nber.org)
  • The labor market stayed historically tight. The unemployment rate hovered around 3.5–3.9% in 2022–23 and only gradually rose to roughly 4.0–4.2% in 2024–early 2025, still low by historical standards and inconsistent with a "significant" recession and economy "off a cliff." (federalreserve.gov)
  • Contemporary analyses described a soft landing, not a deep downturn. Major forecasters and media noted that the U.S. avoided the widely expected 2023 recession and was on track for, or had largely achieved, a soft landing—inflation falling while growth and employment remained resilient. (cnbc.com)
  • Forward-looking forecasts still show modest growth, not a slump. BEA data into 2025 and OECD projections for 2025–26 point to slowing but positive GDP growth, not the aftermath of a deep, economy‑wide contraction. (bea.gov)

Some sectors—especially tech—did experience pronounced layoffs and a cyclical cooldown, which matches the sectoral mood in late 2022. But at the whole‑economy level the U.S. experienced a slowdown from the post‑COVID boom, not the severe, broad recession implied by “headed off a cliff” and a deep, economy‑wide slump. Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

economy
As of November 2022, the U.S. is at the start of a prolonged period (multiple quarters) of rising unemployment and is entering a “really serious” recession, deeper and more sustained than the brief technical recession seen earlier in 2022.
So I think we're at the beginning now of a long cycle of the unemployment rate going up. I mean, it just feels like the economy is slowing so fast... it just feels like this is the beginning of a really serious recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted in November 2022 that the U.S. was at the start of a long cycle of rising unemployment and entering a “really serious” recession that would be deeper and more sustained than the brief technical recession earlier in 2022.

Unemployment path: The unemployment rate in late 2022 was about 3.6%. BLS data show it only inched up over the following years: around 3.8% by Q4 2023 and 4.2% by Q4 2024, with the 2023 labor market described by BLS as still strong and unemployment “low by historical standards.”(bls.gov)(bls.gov) By mid‑2025, unemployment was roughly 4.0–4.4%, the highest in a few years but still moderate, with ongoing (if slower) job growth and reports emphasizing labor‑market resilience rather than a collapse.(reuters.com)(reuters.com) That represents a mild, gradual rise rather than the kind of sharp, prolonged spike typically associated with a severe recession.

Recession severity: After the two quarters of negative GDP in early 2022, real GDP turned positive and grew through late 2022 and all of 2023–2024, with annual growth around 2–3% and strong consumer spending.(bea.gov)(apnews.com)(barrons.com) In 2025, GDP contracted modestly in Q1 but then rebounded strongly in Q2, so there has not been a multi‑quarter contraction. Independent of the “two quarters” rule, the National Bureau of Economic Research’s business‑cycle chronology still shows the last U.S. recession ending in April 2020, with no new recession dated through 2025.(nber.org) Major coverage in 2025 likewise notes that, as of late 2025, the U.S. is not officially in recession, even though some indicators weakened.(ft.com)

Taken together, the U.S. did not experience a deep, sustained recession after November 2022, and unemployment rose only modestly from very low levels rather than entering a pronounced, long‑running upcycle. The core of Sacks’s prediction—an imminent, "really serious" recession worse than the brief 2022 episode—has not materialized, so the prediction is best judged wrong overall.

economy
By the end of 2023, the U.S. unemployment rate will have risen from the low‑3% range (where it was in late 2022) to approximately 5–6%, driven by accumulating job cuts across the economy.
you're starting to see economists say we're going to go from three point something percent unemployment rate to say, 5 or 6% unemployment next year. So I think we're just beginning to see the the job cuts start to add up.View on YouTube
Explanation

According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, the seasonally adjusted national unemployment rate was 3.7% in December 2023, only slightly above 3.5–3.7% in late 2022 (e.g., 3.6% in November 2022 and 3.5% in December 2022), and never reached 5–6% at any point in 2023. (bls.gov)

Since the prediction was that by the end of 2023 unemployment would have risen from the low‑3% range to approximately 5–6%, and the actual rate was still in the high‑3% range, the prediction did not come true.

economy
The recession that the U.S. is entering as of late 2022 will last on the order of two years (approximately through late 2024), rather than being a short downturn.
You know, this recession probably will last about two years. You want to make sure you survive it.View on YouTube
Explanation

According to the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the official arbiter of U.S. business cycles, the most recent U.S. recession ran from a peak in February 2020 to a trough in April 2020. NBER’s chronology shows no subsequent recession dates after April 2020, meaning the U.S. economy has been in an expansion since May 2020 and did not enter a new recession in late 2022 or during 2023–2024. (nber.org)

Macroeconomic data back this up. Real GDP growth remained positive year‑over‑year throughout 2022–2024, with U.S. real GDP growing 1.9% in 2022 and 2.5% in 2023, and continuing to grow at roughly 2–3% annual rates into 2024–2025. (ycharts.com) Labor-market indicators also stayed relatively strong: the unemployment rate was in the mid‑3% range through 2023 and averaged around 4.0% in 2024—levels typically associated with expansion, not a deep, multi‑year recession. (statistico.com)

Because the U.S. never actually entered the kind of broad, officially recognized recession he described in late 2022, the prediction that “this recession” would last about two years (through late 2024) did not come true in macroeconomic terms.

politics
In the November 8, 2022 U.S. midterm elections, there will be a broad 'Republican wave' in which Republicans significantly outperform Democrats across federal races, beyond just narrowly winning one chamber.
Well, it looks to me like there's going to be a Republican wave.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction of a broad 2022 midterm “Republican wave” significantly outperforming Democrats across federal races did not come true.

In the U.S. House, Republicans gained only a small majority—222–213, a net pickup of 9 seats—far short of a landslide or wave outcome. (en.wikipedia.org) In the U.S. Senate, Democrats expanded their majority from a 50–50 split to a 51–49 edge by flipping Pennsylvania and holding all other vulnerable seats, directly contradicting the idea of a Republican wave across federal contests. (en.wikipedia.org)

At the broader 2022 election level, major analyses noted that the widely anticipated “red wave” failed to materialize: Democrats outperformed historical midterm patterns, gaining a Senate seat and suffering only modest House losses, while also achieving a net gain in governorships—an unusually strong showing for the president’s party. (en.wikipedia.org) Because Republicans achieved only a narrow House majority and underperformed expectations in the Senate and many key statewide races, the outcome does not match the prediction of a broad Republican wave beyond a narrow chamber win.

politicsgovernment
In the November 8, 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Republicans will gain control of both chambers of Congress, picking up roughly four net U.S. Senate seats (specifically winning in Arizona, Nevada, Georgia, and New Hampshire) and approximately 31 U.S. House seats.
you have now real clear politics currently has the GOP gaining four Senate seats. So winning in Arizona, Nevada, Georgia and New Hampshire... and winning 31 House seats. So this is this is kind of what it's looking like right now... Ultimately, I think this breaks Republican.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that in the November 8, 2022 U.S. midterms, Republicans would gain control of both chambers of Congress, picking up roughly four net Senate seats by winning in Arizona, Nevada, Georgia, and New Hampshire, and gaining about 31 House seats. In fact, the 2022 elections resulted in a Democratic hold of the U.S. Senate, with Democrats achieving a net gain of one seat rather than Republicans gaining four. (en.wikipedia.org) Republicans also failed to win the key Senate races he named: Democrats Mark Kelly in Arizona, Catherine Cortez Masto in Nevada, Raphael Warnock in Georgia, and Maggie Hassan in New Hampshire all won re‑election. (en.wikipedia.org) Republicans did gain a narrow majority in the House, but their net gain was 9 seats (ending at 222 Republicans vs. 213 Democrats), far short of the roughly 31 seats he cited. (en.wikipedia.org) Because Republicans did not capture the Senate, did not gain four net Senate seats or win the specific races he pointed to, and significantly under‑shot the projected House seat gain, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong, despite correctly anticipating a GOP House majority in general terms.

politicsgovernment
In the November 8, 2022 midterm elections, Republicans will almost certainly win control of the U.S. House of Representatives, and there is roughly a 55% likelihood that they will also win control of the U.S. Senate.
The House will almost certainly go Republican. But I think the Senate now, the official percentages are 55% likely to tip Republican.View on YouTube
Explanation

Republicans did in fact win control of the U.S. House of Representatives in the November 8, 2022 midterm elections, securing a narrow majority (222 seats to Democrats’ 213). This matches the prediction that the House would “almost certainly go Republican.”

For the Senate, Democrats retained control: the post-election Senate was effectively 51–49 in Democrats’ favor (including independents who caucus with Democrats), after Democrats held all their seats and flipped Pennsylvania. Republicans did not win the Senate. However, the prediction here was probabilistic: roughly a 55% chance that Republicans would win the Senate. A 55% probability event failing to occur is fully consistent with the prediction; it does not make the forecast wrong, only indicates that the less likely outcome (Democrats holding the Senate) happened in this particular realization.

Since:

  • The categorical prediction about the House was correct, and
  • The Senate statement was an explicitly probabilistic forecast with a modest edge (55%) that failed in this instance but is still within expectations for such probabilities,

the overall prediction, interpreted as a forecast rather than a categorical claim about the Senate, should be judged right in terms of calibration and outcome on the main discrete claim (House control).

politicsgovernment
If a Republican wave materializes in the November 8, 2022 elections, the U.S. Senate could end up around 55–45 in favor of Republicans, rather than a narrowly divided 51–49 split.
you could just as easily end up with, you know, instead of it being a 51, 49 Senate, it could be 55, 45 because all these things could break the same way.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction described a plausible outcome in which, if a Republican wave materialized in the November 8, 2022 midterms, the U.S. Senate could end up around 55–45 in favor of Republicans instead of a closely divided 51–49 split.

What actually happened:

  • In the 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Democrats retained control of the Senate.
  • After the elections and the December 2022 Georgia runoff, the effective balance of power was 51–49 in favor of Democrats (including independents who caucus with Democrats). Multiple major outlets report this 51–49 Democratic majority as the final result of the 2022 Senate map.
  • There was no Republican wave in the Senate; Republicans did not expand their seat count to anything close to 55, nor did they even gain control of the chamber.

Because the scenario described (a GOP wave leading to a 55–45 Republican Senate) did not occur, and the actual outcome was the opposite (a 51–49 Democratic majority), the prediction about the resulting Senate composition is wrong in terms of realized outcome.

politicsgovernment
In the 2022 Pennsylvania U.S. Senate race decided on November 8, 2022, Republican Mehmet Oz will defeat Democrat John Fetterman and the seat will tip to Republicans.
So I actually think for both reasons, Oz is going to win that. I think Fetterman is manifestly unqualified... So I think Pennsylvania will will, will almost certainly tip.View on YouTube
Explanation

Official 2022 Pennsylvania U.S. Senate election results show that Democrat John Fetterman defeated Republican Mehmet Oz on November 8, 2022, winning roughly 51.2% to 46.3% of the vote and flipping the seat from Republican to Democrat. (ballotwire.com)

Sacks predicted that Oz would win and that the seat would tip to Republicans. In reality, the opposite occurred: Fetterman won and the seat tipped away from Republicans, helping Democrats maintain their Senate majority. (apnews.com)

politicsgovernment
In the 2022 Ohio U.S. Senate race decided on November 8, 2022, the Republican candidate will win (the seat will be held by or flip to the Republican Party).
Ohio is going Republican.View on YouTube
Explanation

The 2022 U.S. Senate election in Ohio, held on November 8, 2022, was won by Republican candidate J.D. Vance, who defeated Democratic candidate Tim Ryan. This meant the Ohio Senate seat was held by the Republican Party following the election, matching the prediction that “Ohio is going Republican.”

politics
In the 2022 Arizona U.S. Senate race decided on November 8, 2022, the contest will be extremely close, but Republican Blake Masters will ultimately win.
I think that Arizona is probably going to be the closest race in the country. I think it's going to be a nail biter, but I think Blake's going to pull that out.View on YouTube
Explanation

Official results for the 2022 Arizona U.S. Senate election show that incumbent Democrat Mark Kelly won re‑election on November 8, 2022, with about 51.4% of the vote (1,322,027 votes) to Republican Blake Masters’ 46.5% (1,196,308 votes).(en.wikipedia.org) Blake Masters is explicitly described in post‑election coverage as having been defeated by Kelly by roughly a 4.9‑point margin and later conceding the race.(en.wikipedia.org)

The prediction claimed that the race would be extremely close and that Blake Masters would ultimately win. While the race was competitive, Kelly’s near‑5‑point victory and clear status as the winner mean the core prediction—Masters winning—did not come true.

politicsgovernmenteconomy
Following the 2022 midterm elections and for the remainder of Joe Biden's term (2023–2024), the U.S. will have divided government with Republicans controlling Congress and Democrats holding the presidency, resulting in legislative gridlock. Large-scale federal spending increases and aggressive money printing will stop, and Republicans in Congress will conduct multiple investigations, including into the federal Covid response.
you're going to have divided government. The Republicans will will control Congress, the Democrats will control the presidency. And so as a result, you're going to be largely in a gridlock situation. But gridlock may be a lot better than what we've had over the last couple of years. So you've had basically this orgy of spending and money printing. And I think that's going to stop. Obviously, the other thing that's going to happen is Republicans may not be able to pass much legislation, but they're going to be able to do investigations.View on YouTube
Explanation

Breakdown of the prediction vs. what happened (2023–2024):

  1. Divided government with Republicans in Congress and Biden as president

    • After the 2022 midterms, Republicans won a narrow majority in the House while Democrats retained control of the Senate, and Joe Biden remained president. This created divided government for the remainder of Biden’s term covered by the 118th Congress (Jan 2023–Jan 2025). (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The quote says Republicans would “control Congress,” which is imprecise (they controlled only the House), but the core point—divided government rather than unified Democratic control—was correct.
  2. “Largely in a gridlock situation”

    • With split partisan control, there were repeated showdowns over the debt ceiling, appropriations, and shutdown threats, and Biden was unable to pass anything comparable in scale or ambition to his early-term partisan bills like the American Rescue Plan or Inflation Reduction Act. (justapedia.org)
    • Nonetheless, important bipartisan legislation did pass, including the Fiscal Responsibility Act of 2023 (debt‑ceiling deal with spending caps) and the annual National Defense Authorization Act for FY 2024, along with multiple continuing resolutions and other bills. (justapedia.org)
    • So politics were often gridlocked on big new initiatives, but not so gridlocked that Congress stopped legislating altogether. Describing it as “largely” gridlocked is directionally reasonable.
  3. “Orgy of spending and money printing … is going to stop”

    • Federal spending/deficits: The overall federal deficit rose after the midterms: from about $1.4T in FY 2022 to $1.7T in 2023 and $1.8T in 2024, with total outlays also rising. (en.wikipedia.org) In other words, the aggregate fiscal “orgy of spending” did not stop; deficits stayed very large and actually increased versus 2022.
    • What did change is that the Fiscal Responsibility Act of 2023 imposed statutory caps on discretionary spending for FY 2024–2025, cut non‑defense discretionary spending below 2023 levels, and clawed back some unspent COVID and IRS funds. (budget.house.gov) That’s a move toward restraint on new discretionary spending, but it didn’t meaningfully halt overall high federal spending driven by entitlements and interest.
    • Money printing: Here the prediction was accurate. The Federal Reserve had already ended quantitative easing and by mid‑2022 was in quantitative tightening, shrinking its balance sheet. Between March 2023 and September 2023 the balance sheet fell from about $8.7T to $8.0T, and it continued down to around $7.1T by September 2024 and $6.7T by March 2025—a cumulative reduction of roughly $2+ trillion from the 2022 peak. (federalreserve.gov) This is the opposite of “money printing,” so the claim that aggressive money creation would stop (and reverse) did come true.
  4. Republican investigations, including into COVID

    • In January 2023, with their new House majority, Republicans rechartered the existing COVID oversight panel as the House Select Subcommittee on the Coronavirus Pandemic, explicitly tasked with investigating COVID’s origins, gain‑of‑function research, pandemic spending, and mandates. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The subcommittee conducted dozens of hearings, depositions, and document requests; probed figures like Anthony Fauci and EcoHealth Alliance; and issued interim and final reports concluding COVID most likely originated from a lab‑related incident in Wuhan and criticizing aspects of the federal response. (oversight.house.gov)
    • This matches the prediction that, even if Republicans couldn’t pass much substantive legislation, they would run multiple investigations, including into the federal COVID response.

Overall assessment:

  • Core structural claim—divided government with Republicans controlling (part of) Congress, Biden in the White House, and politics shifting toward gridlock and investigations rather than big new Democratic spending bills—was borne out.
  • The prediction overstated how much overall federal “spending” would stop (deficits and outlays remained very high and grew), though it was correct about Fed “money printing” ending and about Congress imposing tighter caps on new discretionary appropriations.

Because the central features of the forecast came true, with the spending part notably weaker but not enough to overturn the main thesis, the best overall rating is “right” (directionally accurate with important caveats).

techmarkets
SpaceX’s Starlink division will develop into a highly successful, large-scale commercial business, generating substantial revenues and profits relative to typical satellite-communications businesses, over the coming years.
And I think Starlink is going to be a phenomenal business.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2022 shows Starlink has in fact become a very large, commercially successful, and profitable satellite-communications business, well above the scale of typical players.

On scale and revenue: Starlink’s customer base grew from ~1 million subscribers in December 2022 to about 8 million by November 2025, an order‑of‑magnitude jump in three years. (en.wikipedia.org) Industry analyses estimate Starlink revenue at roughly $4.2B in 2023 and about $7.7–$8.2B in 2024, with projections around $11–12.3B in 2025, making it SpaceX’s largest revenue driver. (arstechnica.com) Reports focused solely on Starlink value the business at well over $100B enterprise value, underscoring how central it has become to the company. (globenewswire.com)

On profitability: Elon Musk announced in November 2023 that Starlink had achieved breakeven cash flow, and later commentary from SpaceX president Gwynne Shotwell confirmed that Starlink has since turned profitable. (cnbc.com) Independent analyst work (e.g., Quilty Space, summarized in financial media) estimates several hundred million dollars of positive free cash flow in 2024 on multi‑billion‑dollar revenue, with free cash flow expected to rise into the low single‑digit billions as revenues pass $10B+. (arstechnica.com) This is consistent with a mature, high‑margin infrastructure business rather than an early-stage loss leader.

Relative to typical satellite operators, Starlink is already dominant on commercial metrics. Established GEO/MEO operators like SES and Eutelsat report total annual revenues around €2.0B (~$2.1B) and €1.24B (~$1.3–1.4B) respectively, while their newer LEO broadband lines (e.g., OneWeb at Eutelsat) are still sub‑$0.3B businesses. (satellitetoday.com) Viasat, one of the larger traditional broadband players, generates about $4.5B in annual revenue but remains loss‑making and heavily indebted. (beyondspx.com) In contrast, Starlink alone is now bigger than any single incumbent satcom operator by revenue, is profitable, and continues to grow rapidly.

Given that (1) Starlink has scaled to many millions of customers worldwide, (2) it generates multi‑billion‑dollar revenues that exceed those of most legacy satellite‑communications firms, and (3) it has crossed into sustained profitability and positive cash flow, Sacks’s 2022 prediction that “Starlink is going to be a phenomenal business”—interpreted as a highly successful, large‑scale commercial business with substantial revenues and profits relative to typical satellite‑comms businesses—has, by late 2025, clearly come true.

economy
The U.S. will experience a major recession in 2023, constituting the second leg of a 'double‑dip' recession driven by the cumulative effect of Federal Reserve interest rate increases.
But remember Jason I said that we were going to have a double dip. That was that was the most likely thing... I still think the huge recession is to come next year because all the interest rate increases we've seen... So I think we're headed for a recession next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the U.S. would enter a major, second‑leg (“double‑dip”) recession in 2023 caused by the cumulative effect of Federal Reserve rate hikes.

By standard macroeconomic and official U.S. definitions, that did not happen:

  • Real U.S. GDP grew in 2023 rather than contracted. Estimates show full‑year real GDP growth around 2.8–2.9% in 2023, similar to or slightly above 2022, not a large downturn. (tradingeconomics.com)
  • IMF data likewise report positive real GDP growth for 2023 and a low unemployment rate (around 3.7% in Q4 2023), consistent with continued expansion, not a deep recession. (imf.org)

On the recession / double‑dip point:

  • The official arbiter of U.S. recessions, the NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee, dates the most recent recession as the short COVID downturn from February–April 2020 and shows no subsequent peaks/troughs indicating another recession through and beyond 2023. (nber.org)
  • NBER‑based recession indicator series (quarterly) are 0 for all quarters of 2022 and 2023, confirming that—under NBER’s definition—the economy was in expansion, not recession, throughout 2023. (ycharts.com)

On the mechanism he cited (Fed hikes): the Fed did raise the federal funds rate aggressively from near zero in early 2022 to about 5.25–5.50% by mid‑2023, one of its fastest tightening cycles. (federalreserve.gov) However, Congressional Research Service analysis notes that, as of late 2023, this tightening had so far produced falling inflation without a decline in employment or overall economic activity, i.e., a prospective soft landing rather than a hard‑landing recession. (congress.gov)

Because 2023 saw continued expansion, low unemployment, and no NBER‑defined recession, there was neither a “huge recession” nor a second (“double‑dip”) recession leg that year. The prediction, as stated, is therefore wrong.

If Hans Niemann is not cheating, then within the next couple of years from October 2022 he will rapidly become the world's number one over-the-board chess player.
if he's not cheating, then we should expect over the next couple of years that he should rapidly become the world's number one player over the boardView on YouTube
Explanation

By roughly two years after the October 2022 podcast (i.e., by October 2024), Hans Niemann had not become the world’s number one over‑the‑board (classical) chess player. On the September 2024 FIDE rating list he was ranked 16th in the world with a classical rating of 2733, while Magnus Carlsen remained world #1.(chess.com) As of the November 1, 2025 FIDE list, Carlsen is still #1 at 2839 and Niemann is ranked 20th with a rating of 2729; he has never held the #1 spot.(en.wikipedia.org)

However, the prediction was explicitly conditional: “if he’s not cheating, then … he should rapidly become the world’s number one.” Whether Niemann has ever cheated over‑the‑board in elite classical chess has not been definitively established by any authoritative body. The high‑profile Carlsen–Niemann dispute ended in an August 2023 confidential settlement between Niemann, Magnus Carlsen, and Chess.com that included Niemann’s reinstatement and explicitly involved no admission of wrongdoing by any party, with Carlsen stating there was no determinative evidence Niemann cheated in their 2022 game.(grokipedia.com) This resolution leaves the truth of the antecedent ("he’s not cheating") unresolved.

Because the forecast is framed as a conditional on an empirically unsettled premise, we cannot determine its truth value from observed outcomes alone. If one ignores the condition, the implied claim that Niemann would become world #1 within a couple of years is clearly false; but taking the stated conditional form seriously, the prediction is best classified as ambiguous rather than definitively right or wrong.

economy
The U.S. economy will experience a broad-based recession with a hard landing sometime in 2023, rather than achieving a soft landing.
I think we're headed for a broad based recession. That's what it seems like. You saw Druckenmiller's comments this week predicting a hard landing in 2023. No one's talking about soft landing anymore.View on YouTube
Explanation

Most data and official assessments indicate the U.S. did not experience a broad-based recession or a “hard landing” in 2023.

Key points:

  1. No official 2023 recession call
    The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the standard arbiter of U.S. recessions, has not dated any recession beginning or occurring in 2023; the most recent recession it recognizes is the COVID downturn of February–April 2020.【】

  2. Positive real GDP growth in 2023
    U.S. real GDP grew throughout 2023 rather than contracting. Bureau of Economic Analysis data show real GDP increasing for the year (annual growth around 2–3%, depending on measure), not the sustained contraction typical of a broad-based recession. (Multiple BEA releases for 2023 confirm positive quarterly growth.)【】

  3. Labor market remained strong
    The unemployment rate stayed historically low through 2023 (roughly in the 3.4–3.9% range), and payroll employment continued to rise, which is inconsistent with a classic hard-landing recession characterized by broad job losses.【】

  4. Soft‑/no‑landing narrative by late 2023
    By late 2023, many major financial press and economic commentators described the U.S. outcome as a soft landing or even “no landing,” emphasizing slowing inflation without a deep downturn, rather than a hard-landing recession. Fed officials themselves increasingly referenced the possibility that a soft landing had been or might be achieved.【】

Because the prediction was specific to 2023 and called for a broad-based recession with a hard landing, and the observable macroeconomic outcomes showed continued expansion, low unemployment, and no NBER recession in that year, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

Sacks @ 00:22:07Inconclusive
markets
Stanley Druckenmiller’s central outlook, as endorsed and discussed by Sacks, is that over the ten years following roughly October 2022, the Dow Jones Industrial Average will be approximately flat, trading at about the same level in 2032 as it did in late 2022.
And his prediction now is his central outlook is that the Dow Jones will be in the same place where it is today in ten years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks is endorsing Stanley Druckenmiller’s 10‑year outlook from roughly October 2022 to around October 2032. We are only about three years into that window, so the core claim (where the Dow will be in 2032) simply cannot be tested yet.

For context:

  • Around the end of October 2022, the Dow closed at about 32,733 (October 31, 2022). (statmuse.com)
  • As of late November 2025, the Dow is around 47,700, having hit multiple new record highs and showing an 11.9% gain for 2025 and substantial gains since 2022. (statmuse.com)

Even though the Dow has risen well above its 2022 level so far, Druckenmiller’s and Sacks’s prediction is specifically about the level in 2032, not about the path along the way. With roughly seven years left in the forecast horizon, it’s too early to label the prediction as right or wrong.

conflictpolitics
From October 2022 onward, the Russia–Ukraine war will continue to escalate rather than de-escalate, because key elements needed for a peace deal (e.g., Ukraine renouncing NATO membership, compromises over Donbas, restoration of energy flows/sanctions relief) have been removed.
So I don't see how you're going to get a peace deal now. And so if you remove all the off ramps What's left? Escalation. Well, it seems to me this thing's just going to keep escalating.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ core claim was that, from October 2022 onward, the Russia–Ukraine war would not move toward a peace deal but would instead keep escalating because key "off‑ramps" (e.g., compromise over territory, Ukraine’s NATO status, sanctions/energy leverage) had been removed. Looking at October 2022–November 2025, that is broadly what happened.

1. Off‑ramps largely disappeared and no peace deal emerged

  • Early 2022 negotiations in Belarus, Turkey, and especially the Istanbul communiqué explored a framework in which Ukraine could forgo NATO membership in exchange for security guarantees, without recognizing Russian annexations. These talks collapsed; a senior Kremlin official later said a draft settlement tying an end to hostilities to Ukraine’s NATO neutrality was blocked by Putin, who expanded his aims to annex more Ukrainian territory. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • On 30 September 2022, just before Sacks’ comment, Russia formally annexed four Ukrainian regions (Donetsk, Luhansk, Kherson, Zaporizhzhia), declaring their residents "our citizens forever" in a ceremony widely described as a major escalation and condemned as illegal by 143 UN member states. (en.wikipedia.org) This hardened Russia’s minimum terms (recognition of these annexations) and made territorial compromise far harder.
  • After that, Russia insisted any ceasefire or peace required Ukraine to surrender all the annexed regions and accept a permanent bar on NATO membership, plus sanctions relief. (en.wikipedia.org) Ukraine, by contrast, applied for NATO membership and set full Russian withdrawal from occupied territory and robust security guarantees as prerequisites for real talks. (en.wikipedia.org) Those positions effectively removed the mutually acceptable middle ground Sacks was talking about.
  • From mid‑2022 through 2024, peace negotiations were largely frozen; meaningful talks only resume in 2025 under U.S. mediation, but even then Russia demands territorial concessions and NATO restrictions that Ukraine rejects, and no settlement is reached. (en.wikipedia.org) The UN General Assembly in February 2025 is still passing resolutions on "advancing a comprehensive, just and lasting peace in Ukraine," underscoring that no deal exists three years after the invasion. (en.wikipedia.org)

2. The war continued with major escalatory phases rather than de‑escalation

  • Starting 10 October 2022, Russia launched a sustained nationwide missile and drone campaign against Ukraine’s power grid and other critical infrastructure, knocking out nearly half of Ukraine’s electricity generation by November and repeatedly plunging cities into blackouts. (en.wikipedia.org) This was a clear escalation beyond earlier battlefield-focused strikes.
  • The 2022–23 Russian winter offensive, centered on Donetsk, produced the months‑long Battle of Bakhmut, widely described as the longest and bloodiest battle of the war and one of the bloodiest of the 21st century, with extremely high casualties on both sides. (en.wikipedia.org) That is consistent with intensification rather than de‑escalation after October 2022.
  • Through 2023–24 and into 2025, large-scale operations continued: battles like Krynky on the Dnipro (2023–24), a new Borova offensive starting December 2024, and the ongoing Pokrovsk offensive from July 2024, where Ukrainian sources say Russia has committed up to ~220,000 soldiers by August 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) This sustained mobilization and series of offensives show the conflict has not settled into a low‑intensity freeze.
  • Russian strikes on civilian and energy infrastructure intensified again in 2025. The UN reported that attacks on infrastructure in the first five months of 2025 caused 50% more civilian casualties than the same period in 2024. (en.wikipedia.org) On 3 October 2025, Russia mounted what was described as its most extensive attack of the war on Ukraine’s energy system, using 381 drones and 35 missiles to hit natural gas facilities. (apnews.com) Late 2025 has seen further massive barrages on Kyiv—hundreds of drones and dozens of missiles in single nights—cutting power to half the city and prompting Ukrainian retaliatory strikes deep into Russian territory. (theguardian.com)

3. Assessment relative to the prediction

  • Sacks argued that once the possible compromises over NATO status, Donbas/territory, and sanctions/energy leverage were taken off the table, there would be no realistic peace deal and the conflict would "just" keep escalating. From October 2022 to November 2025, there has been no durable ceasefire or peace agreement, bargaining positions have hardened on exactly those axes (NATO, territorial control, sanctions), and the war has remained high‑intensity with repeated spikes in battlefield and infrastructure escalation.
  • While the front lines have at times been relatively static, that has coincided with extremely destructive attritional fighting, major new offensives, and record‑scale missile and drone campaigns against infrastructure—not with de‑escalation in any ordinary sense.

Given the continued absence of a peace deal and the pattern of sustained and, in several respects, increasing escalation since October 2022, Sacks’ prediction is best judged as right.

Sacks @ 01:09:04Inconclusive
marketsconflict
If a political/diplomatic resolution to the Russia–Ukraine war is reached, global equity markets will experience a sharp upward move ("take off like a rocket") shortly after that resolution is announced.
Look, I can see the market taking off like a rocket if Ukraine gets resolved.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there has been no comprehensive political or diplomatic resolution to the Russia–Ukraine war. Major news and reference sources still describe the Russian invasion of Ukraine as ongoing, with active offensives (e.g., the Kupiansk offensive) and deadly missile and drone strikes continuing into late 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)

While there have been U.S.-brokered ceasefire proposals, partial or time‑limited ceasefire talks, and UN resolutions outlining principles for a future peace, these remain frameworks and negotiations rather than a concluded peace settlement that ends the war. (cnbc.com) Because the condition in Sacks’s prediction (“if Ukraine gets resolved”) has not yet occurred, we have no empirical way to see whether global equity markets would “take off like a rocket” immediately after such a resolution.

Therefore, the prediction cannot currently be scored as right or wrong; it remains untested and is best classified as inconclusive (too early) rather than incorrect.

marketstech
From roughly mid‑2022, the IPO/SPAC/direct‑listing window for late‑stage private tech companies will remain effectively frozen for about two years, i.e., there will be very few such exits before mid‑2024.
I think the whole public markets. Exit ideas frozen for two years. Two years. I think that's yeah, I think that's probably what people are thinking.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that from mid‑2022 through roughly mid‑2024, the IPO/SPAC/direct‑listing market for late‑stage, venture‑backed tech companies was historically weak, with only a handful of notable exits, which matches Sacks’s “frozen for two years / very few exits” characterization.

  • Macro view of the window:

    • Multiple analyses describe 2022–2024 as an IPO “winter,” with the IPO window effectively closed in 2022 and the SPAC market largely collapsed, forcing private tech companies to delay liquidity and stay private longer. (sampfordadvisors.com)
    • Jay Ritter’s VC‑exit data (as summarized in a 2025 review of unicorns) report that VC‑backed IPOs averaged just 22 per year from 2022–2024, versus 156 in 2021, the lowest level since the financial crisis, indicating a dramatic drying‑up of public exits. (reddit.com)
  • Evidence specific to late‑stage tech IPOs:

    • By June 29, 2023, CNBC reported there had not been a single “notable venture‑backed tech IPO” in the U.S. since December 2021, implying essentially zero high‑profile tech IPOs over ~18 months that include the second half of 2022. (cnbc.com)
    • TechCrunch’s 2023 look at the drought counted only one meaningful U.S. tech IPO from private‑capital‑backed companies between the start of 2022 and late August 2023, underscoring how closed the window was for the kind of late‑stage startups Sacks was talking about. (techcrunch.com)
    • A 2025 overview of venture exits notes that 2022 IPO exit value collapsed by ~90% vs. 2021; the IPO window “slammed shut” in 2022 and 2023 remained very slow, with Arm, Instacart, and Klaviyo in late 2023 described as the first significant IPOs after a long drought—just a few flagship deals, not a broadly open window. (afurrier.com)
  • Activity in late 2023–mid‑2024:

    • The late‑2023 IPOs of Arm, Instacart, and Klaviyo and early‑2024 IPOs such as Reddit, Astera Labs, and Rubrik are widely described as ending or thawing a two‑year tech IPO drought, not as part of a normal pipeline. (cnbc.com)
    • Even counting those, the volumes stayed very low: Renaissance Capital reported that as of October 31, 2024, only five VC‑backed tech IPOs had occurred in all of 2024, versus a 10‑year historical average of 23 per year, and that private VC‑backed tech companies had largely stayed on the sidelines for the prior three years. (renaissancecapital.com)
    • Across all sectors, the Wall Street Journal noted only 15 U.S. venture‑backed IPOs in the first half of 2024, far below the historical average of ~82 per year, confirming that the first half of 2024 was still extremely muted. Digital‑health data from Rock Health show a 21‑month stretch with no IPO/SPAC exits until Q2 2024, another sign that public exits in tech‑adjacent verticals were essentially frozen until mid‑2024. (wsj.com)
  • SPACs/direct listings:

    • SPACs, which had been an alternative exit path, also collapsed: SPAC IPOs fell from 613 in 2021 to 86 in 2022 and just 31 in 2023, and hundreds of SPACs were liquidated without completing mergers, meaning this route was largely shut off for late‑stage tech as well. (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, the record shows that from mid‑2022 through about mid‑2024, late‑stage private tech companies faced an exceptionally sparse set of IPO/SPAC/direct‑listing opportunities—only a few high‑profile exceptions against a backdrop of a shut or nearly shut window. That reality fits Sacks’s prediction (“exit ideas frozen for two years… very few exits”) materially well, so the prediction is best judged as right.

ventureeconomy
Relative to the 2021 pace, annual venture capital deployment by US VCs over the next few years (starting 2022) will fall to roughly one‑third of the 2021 level as firms revert to a 2.5–3 year deployment cycle.
If you just go back to a two and a half or three year pace of deployment and before in 2021, we were at a one year pace of deployment, divide the availability of capital by two thirds. I mean, you know, only one third as much will be deployed in any given year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key facts:

  • PitchBook–NVCA data show that U.S. VC deal value in 2021 was about $330B ($329.9B) – the peak year for deployment. (nvca.org)
  • In 2022, U.S. VC deal value was $238.3B, down only ~30% from 2021 (about 70% of the 2021 level), not to one‑third. (gamesbeat.com)
  • In 2023, U.S. venture deal value fell further to $170.6B—roughly half of 2021, still well above one‑third. (en.ain.ua)
  • In 2024, U.S. startup funding rebounded to about $209B, roughly 60% of 2021’s level, again nowhere near one‑third. (reuters.com)
  • By 2025, AI-driven megadeals had pushed U.S. VC investing back to its highest levels since 2021; H1 2025 already totaled about $163B and Q1 2025 dealmaking was described as a “biggest splurge in three years,” putting 2025 on track to rival 2021 rather than remain at one‑third of it. (rothschildandco.com)

Across 2022–2024 (and into 2025), annual U.S. VC deployment has generally been in the ~50–70% of 2021 range and is now rebounding toward prior highs, not stabilizing around one‑third of 2021. That makes Sacks’s quantitative prediction about future annual deployment levels substantially incorrect.

economy
The US economy will experience a double‑dip recession, with real GDP turning slightly positive for a short period and then going negative again once the full impact of interest‑rate hikes is felt, with this second downturn beginning sometime after late 2022.
Given what we're seeing in the public markets this week, it doesn't look to me like it's going to get any better. It looks to me like we're headed for I mean I call it a double dip recession. I think a couple of months ago, that's exactly what it's looking like. In fact, the fed basically said as much.View on YouTube
Explanation

Real‑time and revised data show that after the weak first half of 2022, the U.S. economy did not experience the double‑dip pattern Sacks described.

  • BEA data show real GDP growth was positive in every quarter from Q3 2022 through Q4 2024 (e.g., Q4 2023 +3.4% annualized; Q1 2024 +1.4%; Q4 2024 +2.3–2.4%). This is a sustained expansion, not a brief, “slightly positive” pause before another downturn beginning soon after late 2022. (apps.bea.gov)
  • A summary table of quarterly real GDP growth through Q1 2025 shows continuous positive growth from Q3 2022 onward, with the first negative quarter after early 2022 only appearing in Q1 2025 (–0.3% annualized). (visualcapitalist.com) That is far later than “once the full impact of [2022] interest‑rate hikes is felt” and follows more than two years of solid growth.
  • Even with the Q1 2025 contraction, there has been only one negative GDP quarter so far; by either the popular “two consecutive negative quarters” rule or the broader NBER standard, this does not yet constitute a new recession or a clear “second dip.” Major coverage notes that Q1 2025’s drop has raised concerns but does not itself mark a recession. (theguardian.com)
  • The National Bureau of Economic Research, which is the arbiter of U.S. business‑cycle dates, still lists the last recession as the COVID downturn that ended in April 2020 and has not announced any new peak or trough since then—implying one long expansion from mid‑2020 onward, not a double‑dip sequence. (nber.org)

Because (1) there was no downturn beginning shortly after late 2022, (2) growth instead remained robust through 2023–24, and (3) as of late 2025 there is still no officially recognized second recession following a brief positive blip, Sacks’s prediction of a double‑dip recession with the second dip starting after late 2022 has not materialized and is best judged wrong.

Sacks @ 00:07:57Inconclusive
venture
Figma’s annually recurring revenue (ARR) will reach between $1.5 billion and $2 billion within roughly two years after the end of 2023 (i.e., by the end of 2025 or very early 2026).
and then you figure you know within say two years after that they're going to be, you know, it's somewhere between one and a half and 2 billion of IRR.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ forecast was that Figma’s annual recurring revenue (ARR) would reach roughly $1.5–2.0 billion within about two years after end‑2023, i.e., by late 2025 or very early 2026. This is clear from the episode transcript, where he walks through Figma’s ARR ramp and then says Adobe is paying ~25× end‑of‑next‑year (2023) ARR and that “within say two years after that” Figma would be at $1.5–2B of ARR. (podscripts.co)

What we know today:

  • Independent estimates put Figma at about $600M ARR at the end of 2023, not the ~$800M 2023 ARR Sacks was assuming. (auditshq.com)
  • As a now‑public company, Figma reports revenue, not total ARR, in its SEC filings and earnings releases. Recent results show:
    • Q1–Q3 2025 revenue totaling about $752M, with Q3 2025 revenue of $274.2M, which management describes as an “annual revenue run-rate of over $1.0 billion.” (investor.figma.com)
    • Figma’s updated full‑year 2025 guidance is $1.044–1.046B in revenue, implying a revenue (and likely ARR) level around ~$1B, not yet at $1.5B+ by late 2025. (y94.com)
  • Figma’s IPO S‑1 and 10‑Q filings define ARR and give customer counts by ARR bands (e.g., number of customers over $10k and over $100k ARR), but do not disclose a single aggregate ARR figure for 2024–2025 that we could directly compare to the $1.5–2B target. (sec.gov)

Because:

  1. The prediction window has not fully elapsed (we are still before “very early 2026”), and
  2. Figma has not published a total ARR number for late 2025 that would definitively confirm or refute the $1.5–2B range,

we cannot say yet whether the prediction ultimately proves right or wrong. Available data suggest Figma is well below $1.5B ARR as of late 2025, but it is not mathematically impossible for ARR to grow substantially into early 2026, and the exact ARR figures are undisclosed.

Given both the remaining time in the forecast window and the lack of a published aggregate ARR metric, the correct status is **“inconclusive (too early)” rather than definitively right, wrong, or permanently ambiguous.

economy
The global economy is heading into a recession beginning around late 2022, validating the FedEx CEO’s warning of a forthcoming global recession.
I think what's going on here is that whatever the issues at Fedex, and no matter how overstated these warnings may have been, I think they're directionally correct. He's saying that the world is headed for a global recession, and directionally, he appears to be right.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from major international institutions shows that the world experienced a slowdown and high inflation after mid‑2022, but not a global recession starting in late 2022.

Key points:

  • The IMF’s World Economic Outlook and subsequent updates report that global real GDP grew by roughly 3.5% in 2022 and about 3.0–3.2% in 2023–2024, i.e., the world economy kept expanding, albeit more slowly. (archive.yardeni.com)
  • The OECD’s November 2022/early‑2023 outlook projected global growth of about 3.1% in 2022 and 2.2% in 2023, explicitly stating that their baseline scenario was not a global recession but a significant slowdown. (marmomacchineinternational.com)
  • In early 2023, the IMF upgraded its outlook and stated that output would be more resilient than previously expected and that a global recession would probably be avoided, reinforcing that the expected outcome was slowdown, not worldwide recession. (industryslice.com)
  • The IMF’s own definition and historical list of global recessions (based on declines in per‑capita world GDP and other global indicators) recognize recessions in 1975, 1982, 1991, 2009 and the COVID‑19 recession of 2020—but do not list any new global recession beginning in 2022 or 2023. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • While some major economies did enter recession or technical recession (for example, Germany in 2023 and the U.K. in the second half of 2023), these were country‑specific downturns within an overall growing world economy, not a synchronized global recession. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the "world headed for a global recession" scenario did not materialize—global growth slowed but remained positive, and leading institutions explicitly say a global recession was avoided—the prediction that a global recession would begin around late 2022 is best classified as wrong.

politicsgovernment
The U.S. Supreme Court will not overturn nationwide legal recognition of same‑sex marriage (i.e., Obergefell v. Hodges will not be reversed) in the foreseeable future following the 2022 Dobbs decision.
I don't think gay marriage is at any risk of being overturned by the Supreme Court. Remember, it was Gorsuch who wrote that opinion.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Obergefell v. Hodges (2015), which recognized a constitutional right to same‑sex marriage nationwide, has not been overturned or limited in a way that ends nationwide legal recognition of same‑sex marriage. The Supreme Court’s 2022 decision in Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization overturned Roe v. Wade and Casey, but it did not address Obergefell, and subsequent Supreme Court terms (2022–2025) have not included any decision reversing Obergefell.

Post‑Dobbs discussion has included concerns and speculation from some justices and commentators about revisiting substantive due process precedents, but no majority opinion has moved to overturn Obergefell. The Court has decided some related religious‑liberty cases (e.g., 303 Creative LLC v. Elenis in 2023) that refined the interaction between LGBTQ rights and the First Amendment, but these decisions left the underlying right to same‑sex civil marriage intact.

Given that more than three years have passed since the podcast (September 17, 2022) and more than three Supreme Court terms have elapsed after Dobbs without any reversal of nationwide legal recognition of same‑sex marriage, the prediction that “gay marriage is [not] at any risk of being overturned by the Supreme Court” has been accurate so far. Therefore, the prediction is best scored as right as of the current date.

politicseconomyconflict
Europe will experience both an economic crisis and a political crisis, driven by a conflict between citizens’ basic needs (economic stability and affordable heating, especially over winter 2022–2023) and political leaders’ commitment to continuing a proxy war against Russia instead of pursuing diplomacy.
So I think we're headed for not just an economic crisis, but a political crisis in Europe, because the fundamental tension between the needs of these people, which is to basically preserve their economy and to stay warm in their homes, and the ideology of their leaders who are fanatically committed to waging a proxy war against Russia instead of finding a diplomatic outcome that was available last year, it was available in January. It was even available in March or April.View on YouTube
Explanation

Economic part:

  • Europe clearly experienced a serious cost‑of‑living and energy shock in 2022–2023: EU inflation averaged 9.2% in 2022, with housing, water, and energy costs up 18%, pushing over 95 million people to the edge of poverty or social exclusion.(euronews.com) Natural‑gas prices in Europe were around 25× higher than two years earlier at their 2022 peak, and many residents struggled to pay energy bills, prompting governments to earmark hundreds of billions of euros to shield households and firms.(en.wikipedia.org) That’s consistent with the economic crisis for households Sacks warned about.
  • However, at the macro level the EU avoided a deep recession. The European Commission’s Winter 2023 forecast described the EU economy as set to “avoid recession”, with GDP growing 3.5% in 2022 and projected to grow (slowly) in 2023–2024.(economy-finance.ec.europa.eu) ECB analysis likewise notes that the euro‑area economy merely stagnated in late 2022 and then began to recover, with unemployment at record lows, and an outgoing ECB hawk later argued inflation was beaten “without heavy economic costs”, as the eurozone avoided recession.(ecb.europa.eu) So whether there was an “economic crisis” depends on whether you focus on macro indicators (mild) or household living standards (severe).

Political part (core of his claim):

  • There was visible unrest around energy prices and inflation. Across Europe in 2022, protests and strikes erupted over the cost of living and rising energy prices, with analysts explicitly warning these could fuel political turmoil.(en.wikipedia.org) In the Czech Republic, for example, ~70,000 people joined the “Czech Republic First!” rally in Prague in early September 2022, denouncing the government’s handling of the energy crisis and calling for a new gas deal with Russia and an end to arms deliveries to Ukraine.(en.wikipedia.org) That’s a concrete instance of the tension he described.
  • But continent‑wide, public opinion did not turn decisively against leaders’ Ukraine policy. Multiple Eurobarometer surveys from late 2022 through 2023 show large majorities of EU citizens supporting humanitarian, financial and even military aid to Ukraine, as well as economic sanctions on Russia.(enlargement.ec.europa.eu) At the same time, strong majorities backed cutting dependence on Russian energy and accelerating the green transition, including joint gas purchasing and massive investment in renewables.(eib.org) In other words, for most citizens there was not a clean split between “basic needs” and support for the EU’s stance on Russia; they largely approved both cushioning energy prices and continuing pressure on Russia.
  • EU institutions and most governments stayed broadly united on sanctions and military support, and the feared winter 2022–23 energy breakdown was avoided thanks to full gas storage, demand reduction and diversification away from Russian supplies.(rttnews.com) Although some countries (notably Hungary and later Slovakia) became more obstructionist and far‑right or populist parties gained ground in several states, this unfolded over several years and had multiple drivers beyond the immediate winter‑heating versus “proxy war” trade‑off Sacks emphasized.(en.wikipedia.org) Europe has faced growing fragmentation and war fatigue, but not the kind of acute, Europe‑wide political crisis he predicted for the energy‑crunch period.

Overall assessment:

  • Sacks was directionally right that Europe would suffer serious economic and social strain from the energy shock, and there were protests in which anger over bills and opposition to sanctions/arms for Ukraine were intertwined.
  • But the stronger part of his forecast—that this would crystallize into a continental political crisis pitting citizens’ basic needs against leaders “fanatically committed” to a proxy war—has not clearly materialized. Public opinion remained mostly supportive of both aid to Ukraine and energy‑security measures, and EU policy stayed largely intact through and after winter 2022–23.

Because the economic dimension supports his warning while the predicted large‑scale political rupture largely did not occur—and reasonable observers could disagree on what threshold counts as a “political crisis”—the outcome is best classified as ambiguous, rather than clearly right or clearly wrong.

economytech
As a result of California’s fast-food wage law raising effective minimum wages for large chains from about $15 to $22, big chain restaurants operating in California will increase their use of automation and correspondingly reduce the number of low-wage human workers they employ in that subsector, relative to what they would have employed absent the law.
the unintended consequence that is talking about is that these big chain restaurants are going to rely even more heavily on automation now, and they're going to basically employ less of this labor where the price has been artificially raised for that subsector of the economy from 15 to $22View on YouTube
Explanation

There is now a California fast‑food–specific minimum wage: AB 1228 raised the minimum for workers at large fast‑food chains (60+ locations) to $20/hour starting April 1, 2024, up from the statewide $16 floor, with a Fast Food Council empowered to adjust it further. 【2†turn2search7】【3†turn3search1】 That is slightly different from the $15→22 path Sacks discussed, but it is the policy closest to what he was describing.

Employment effects ("employ less of this labor relative to what they would have absent the law"):

Support for the prediction

  • A 2025 National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) working paper finds that California fast‑food employment fell about 2.7–3.6% from Sept 2023 to Sept 2024 relative to the fast‑food sector in other states, implying roughly 18,000 fewer jobs than in a no‑law counterfactual. 【3†turn3search2】【3†turn3search7】 This directly supports the claim that covered chains employed fewer low‑wage workers than they otherwise would have.
  • Industry‑commissioned analyses using BLS data (e.g., Berkeley Research Group, Employment Policies Institute) also report on the order of 10,000–16,000 fast‑food jobs lost in California between mid‑2023 and mid‑2024, with results framed as an effect of the $20 wage. 【2†turn2search3】【3†turn3search9】【2†turn2search10】

Evidence against or questioning the prediction

  • Multiple studies from UC Berkeley’s Institute for Research on Labor and Employment and related researchers (including a 2025 policy brief) report no detectable negative effect on fast‑food employment or hours from the $20 wage, while finding substantial wage gains and only modest price increases. 【3†turn3search5】【3†turn3search6】【3†turn3search8】【3†turn3search3】【3†turn3search4】
  • News coverage and official summaries highlight this split: some outlets emphasize the NBER job‑loss estimates, 【3†turn3search1】【3†turn3search7】 while others cite the Berkeley findings to argue there has been little or no employment contraction. 【3†turn3news15】

Because credible, methodologically serious studies reach opposite conclusions on whether fast‑food employment is below its no‑law counterfactual, the job‑loss component of Sacks’s prediction cannot be judged definitively true or false.

Automation effects ("rely even more heavily on automation"):

  • Several reports and industry/advocacy studies state that, in response to the $20 minimum, California fast‑food and quick‑service restaurants have accelerated adoption of self‑service kiosks, AI drive‑thru systems, and kitchen robotics, explicitly as a way to offset higher labor costs. 【2†turn2search3】【2†turn2search4】【3†turn3search9】【2†turn2search8】 Broader restaurant‑industry coverage also notes increased use of kiosks, AI voice assistants, and robots, particularly in high‑wage markets like California. 【2†turn2news16】
  • However, automation in fast food was already a strong nationwide trend driven by technology and post‑pandemic labor constraints, and there is no rigorous, causal study that cleanly isolates how much additional automation in California’s large chains is attributable specifically to AB 1228 versus these broader forces.

Given:

  • The mixed, conflicting evidence on whether fast‑food employment in California is lower than it would have been without the law, even in formal econometric work, and
  • The largely anecdotal and non‑causal evidence on how much the law, specifically, increased automation above the existing trend,

we cannot say with confidence that Sacks’s prediction has clearly come true or clearly failed. Enough time and data have passed to study the issue, but the results are genuinely contested and the automation effect is not well quantified. On balance, the prediction’s status is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

Sacks @ 00:28:55Inconclusive
politics
Meaningful political repositioning of the California Republican Party toward the center sufficient to make significant electoral progress in a +30 Democratic state will take multiple election cycles, on the order of generations (decades), rather than being achievable within just one or two election cycles after 2022.
the Republican Party in California needs to move to the center. It's a plus 30 blue state. Unless they're willing to do that, they're not going to make progress. But that could take, you know, generations to fix.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim has two parts: (1) the California GOP would need to move toward the center to make progress, and (2) any such meaningful repositioning and accompanying electoral gains would take generations, not just one or two election cycles after 2022.

What has actually happened so far (through the 2024 cycle):

  • Democrats still dominate statewide and the legislature. In 2022, Democrats again won every statewide office and kept supermajorities in both legislative chambers; Republicans held only 18 of 80 Assembly seats and 9 of 40 Senate seats. (manatt.com)
  • In 2024, Republicans modestly improved their legislative standing (Assembly: 18→20 seats; Senate: 9→10), but Democrats still hold very large majorities (60–20 in the Assembly, 30–10 in the Senate). This is incremental, not a transformational breakthrough in a strongly Democratic state. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Statewide partisan balance remains heavily Democratic. In the 2024 presidential vote, the Democratic nominee (Kamala Harris) still carried California by about 20 points (58.5%–38.3%), even though the state shifted rightward compared with 2020. That is still consistent with California being roughly a +20–30 Democratic state at the top of the ticket. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • No clear centrist repositioning of the party itself. An example: in 2023, California Republican Party delegates rejected proposed platform changes that would have softened the party’s language on same-sex marriage and abortion, keeping more hardline stances instead of moving toward the state’s center on key social issues. (metroweekly.com)

These facts suggest that, as of late 2025, the California GOP has not undergone a major centrist shift, nor has it achieved large-scale, rapid electoral gains—outcomes that would contradict Sacks’ view that quick post‑2022 turnaround was unrealistic.

However, Sacks’ core prediction is explicitly long‑term: that meaningful repositioning and substantial progress would take generations (multiple decades), not just one or two cycles. Only one full post‑2022 cycle (2024) has occurred so far, and we are nowhere near the multi‑decade horizon he was talking about. Because the timescale he specified has not elapsed, we cannot yet say whether his long‑run claim is ultimately right or wrong.

So, while current evidence is consistent with his prediction (no rapid centrist shift or major GOP resurgence), it is still too early to render a definitive judgment on a forecast that was about outcomes over decades.

economy
Due to high gas prices and resulting fertilizer and CO2 shortages, Germany will experience a beer shortage severe enough that they will effectively 'run out of beer' around the time of Oktoberfest 2022.
Well guess what. The Germans are not only about to run out of gas, they're about to run out of beer.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks argued that because high natural gas prices were shutting fertilizer plants and constraining food‑grade CO2, Germany was “about to run out of beer” around Oktoberfest 2022.

What actually happened:

  • Oktoberfest 2022 went ahead after a two‑year COVID hiatus and drew about 5.7 million visitors.(amp.dw.com)
  • Festival statistics report that attendees consumed roughly 5.6 million liters of beer at the 2022 Oktoberfest, only moderately below 2019 levels, with no mention of significant beer shortages or taps running dry.(oktoberfesttours.travel)
  • Contemporary coverage of Oktoberfest 2022 highlighted sharply higher beer prices and production costs due to energy and raw‑material inflation, not an inability to supply beer.(wsls.com)
  • EU and German brewers did warn in September 2022 that a CO2 shortage was looming as fertilizer plants curtailed output, and that this could mean “less beer flowing in the coming months,” but these were framed as risks and cost pressures, not an actual collapse of beer availability in Germany at that time.(brusselstimes.com)

Given that millions of liters of beer were served at Oktoberfest 2022 and there are no credible reports of Germany experiencing a severe beer shortage or anything close to “running out of beer,” the prediction did not come true.

politicsgovernment
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Republicans will win control of at least one chamber of Congress, most likely the House of Representatives, while control of the Senate will remain uncertain and could go either way.
I think what's likely to happen in November is still that the Republicans win one of the chambers. Probably the House. I think the Senate is still up for grabs.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction had two key components:

  1. "Republicans win one of the chambers. Probably the House."
    In the 2022 midterms, Republicans did flip one chamber: they gained control of the U.S. House of Representatives for the 118th Congress, winning a narrow majority (commonly reported as 222–213 or 221–214 depending on timing/estimates). (en.wikipedia.org) This directly matches both parts of the claim: at least one chamber and probably the House.

  2. "I think the Senate is still up for grabs."
    This was framed as an assessment of uncertainty, not a directional call. At the time (August 2022 and up through Election Day), major outlets and analysts characterized control of the Senate as a toss‑up. (cbsnews.com) The eventual outcome was that Democrats retained and slightly expanded their majority in the Senate (a Democratic hold with a 51–49 edge including independents who caucus with them). (cnbc.com) Since he did not predict a specific winner in the Senate, merely that it could go either way, this part is not falsified by the result.

Because Republicans indeed won control of one chamber—specifically the House, as he said was most likely—and he made no incorrect concrete claim about the Senate outcome, the overall prediction is right.

economygovernment
If the enhanced ACA (Obamacare) subsidies extended for three years in the Inflation Reduction Act are renewed instead of sunsetting after those three years, the IRA will increase the federal deficit by roughly $155 billion over its 10‑year scoring window instead of reducing it by about $305 billion.
if you extend that subsidy three years from now, just that one item alone makes the deficit reduction in this bill go from $305 billion over the ten year period to -155 billion. So just that one item, if you continue it and don't sunset it, just that one thing makes this a hugely deficit not reducing bill but deficit increasing bill.View on YouTube
Explanation

Budget and policy analyses indicate that Sacks’s conditional claim about the Inflation Reduction Act (IRA) math is not supported.

  1. Baseline IRA deficit reduction. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) and the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget (CRFB) estimated that the IRA as passed would reduce federal deficits by about $305 billion over 10 years (roughly 2022–2031). (crfb.org)

  2. What credible analysts said about permanently extending the ACA subsidies. CRFB explicitly modeled the case Sacks was talking about: assume the enhanced ACA subsidies are made permanent instead of temporary. Their memo reports that under this assumption, the IRA would still reduce deficits by about $155 billion over the decade, not increase deficits by $155 billion. In other words, permanent subsidies shrink the deficit reduction from ~$305b to ~$155b; they do not flip it to a $155b deficit increase. (crfb.org) This directly contradicts Sacks’s statement that “just that one item” would take the bill from –$305b (deficit reduction) to +$155b (deficit increase).

  3. Later CBO scoring of a permanent extension. More recent CBO/JCT analysis of the Biden administration’s plan to make the enhanced ACA subsidies permanent estimates that such a policy would increase federal deficits by about $335 billion over 2025–2034, plus roughly $48 billion in extra interest costs (around $383b total). (budget.house.gov) Even if you crudely overlay that on the original IRA score, it implies at most a relatively modest net deficit increase over ten years, nowhere near the roughly $460 billion swing (from –$305b to +$155b) that Sacks asserted.

  4. The conditional event hasn’t even happened yet. As of November 30, 2025, the enhanced ACA subsidies extended by the IRA are still scheduled to expire at the end of 2025; Congress has debated but not enacted another extension. (commonwealthfund.org) So Sacks’s antecedent (that the three‑year extension is renewed instead of sunsetting) has not occurred. But even in the modeled scenario where it does occur, the best available budget estimates do not match his claim.

Because both contemporaneous and later official budget analyses show that making the enhanced ACA subsidies permanent would at most substantially reduce the IRA’s deficit savings and, in some estimates, still leave it deficit‑reducing rather than turning it into a bill that increases the deficit by about $155 billion, Sacks’s prediction about the fiscal effect of renewing the subsidies is wrong.

politicsgovernment
Additional significant information will be revealed in the future about the FBI unit that conducted the Mar-a-Lago search, including its prior misconduct in investigations involving Donald Trump.
I think there's still more to come out about this.View on YouTube
Explanation

There is now substantially more public information about the FBI unit that handled the Mar‑a‑Lago search—primarily the Washington Field Office (WFO)—and about its other Trump‑related investigations, but whether this amounts to proven "prior misconduct" is contested.

1. Identification of the unit and new details about the Mar‑a‑Lago search

  • The redacted search‑warrant affidavit, released after the podcast in late August 2022, confirmed that the affidavit was sworn by an FBI agent in the Washington Field Office, clarifying that WFO rather than the Miami Field Office played the lead role. (theguardian.com)
  • Subsequent reporting, such as a 2023 Washington Post piece, described internal FBI debates and reluctance by some field agents to pursue aggressive steps against Trump, citing a “hangover of Crossfire Hurricane” (the 2016 Trump‑Russia probe) and fear that investigating Trump could damage careers. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Former WFO chief Steven D’Antuono later told congressional investigators it was unusual for WFO—not the Miami Field Office—to run the search, and he criticized aspects of DOJ’s handling, explicitly connecting his concerns to lessons learned from Crossfire Hurricane. (clintonfoundationtimeline.com) These are real new details about how that unit conducted the search, consistent with Sacks’s view that “there’s still more to come out.”

2. Information about prior Trump‑related investigations by the same field office

  • Crossfire Hurricane (the 2016 Trump‑Russia case) had already been heavily scrutinized before August 2022. The DOJ inspector general’s 2019 report found 17 significant errors and omissions in FISA applications involving Trump adviser Carter Page, and special counsel John Durham’s 2023 report reiterated that the FBI and DOJ “failed to uphold their important mission of strict fidelity to the law,” although it largely re‑hashed known problems and recommended no major structural changes. (en.wikipedia.org) These issues involved FBI headquarters and earlier teams and were not new revelations about the specific WFO unit that carried out the Mar‑a‑Lago search.

  • More directly tied to WFO, in 2025 Senators Chuck Grassley and Ron Johnson released internal documents about Operation Arctic Frost, a 2022 FBI counterintelligence investigation into Trump’s efforts to overturn the 2020 election that was opened and run out of the Washington Field Office. (en.wikipedia.org) Their materials allege that WFO Supervisory Intelligence Analyst Timothy Thibault improperly opened and approved the case himself (a claimed breach of FBI protocol) and that his prior anti‑Trump social‑media activity showed political bias—characterizing this as serious misconduct. (grassley.senate.gov) However:

    • The same documentary record (e.g., the Arctic Frost summary and independent commentary) notes that DOJ leadership formally approved the investigation and that some experts say its opening was consistent with FBI/DOJ policy. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • As of November 2025, no inspector general report or court ruling has formally found Arctic Frost or the WFO unit to be unlawful or in violation of binding rules; the strongest condemnations come from political actors (Trump officials, Grassley, Johnson, etc.), and the FBI and Jack Smith’s team have defended the investigation as lawful. (en.wikipedia.org)

3. Assessment of the prediction

  • Sacks’s narrow statement—“I think there’s still more to come out about this”—is clearly borne out: we have considerably more detail today about the FBI Washington Field Office’s role in the Mar‑a‑Lago search and its involvement in other Trump‑related probes.
  • The normalized stronger version of the prediction—that future revelations would show prior misconduct by that unit in investigations involving Trump—is only partially and controversially supported:
    • There are now detailed public allegations and internal documents suggesting protocol breaches and bias in a WFO‑run Trump investigation (Arctic Frost), which critics and some officials explicitly label as misconduct. (grassley.senate.gov)
    • But these claims remain hotly disputed, and no neutral adjudicator (court or inspector general) has definitively classified the WFO’s conduct as misconduct.

Because the existence of additional significant information is unquestionable, but the central question—whether it definitively establishes “prior misconduct” by the Mar‑a‑Lago unit—depends on contested, partisan interpretations rather than settled findings, the fulfillment of the normalized prediction cannot be cleanly scored as simply right or wrong. Hence the judgment here is ambiguous.

economy
The U.S. is in a shallow technical recession as of Q2 2022 but will return to positive real GDP growth in either Q3 2022 or Q4 2022, followed by a renewed recession in 2023 as the 2022 Federal Reserve rate hikes fully impact the broader economy (with the lagged effects becoming evident roughly 6–9 months after the hikes).
If I were to predict, I think what's going to happen now, I think look for a double dip. I wouldn't be surprised at all if in Q3 or Q4 we're back to positive GDP growth. But I don't think we're necessarily out of the woods because I think there's a pretty good chance that next year, these these rate hikes really kick in. It takes 6 to 9 months for them to ripple through the economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Breaking the prediction into components:

  1. "Shallow technical recession" by Q2 2022 – This matches the data. BEA shows real U.S. GDP fell at an annualized –1.6% in Q1 2022 and –0.6% in Q2 2022, i.e., two consecutive negative quarters (a common “technical recession” rule of thumb). (bea.gov)

  2. Return to positive real GDP in Q3 or Q4 2022 – This also happened. Real GDP turned positive in Q3 2022 (+2.6% annual rate, advance estimate) and remained positive in Q4 2022 (+2.7% in the second estimate). (bea.gov)

  3. "Double-dip" recession in 2023 as rate hikes kick in (another downturn 6–9 months later) – This did not occur. BEA data show real GDP grew in every quarter of 2023: Q1 (~1.1% advance), Q2 (2.1% second/third estimate), Q3 (4.9% third estimate), and Q4 (about 3.2–3.4%), with full‑year 2023 real GDP up 2.5% from 2022. (bea.gov) The National Bureau of Economic Research’s official business‑cycle chronology (last updated March 14, 2023) lists the most recent recession as February–April 2020 and does not show any new recession starting in 2023. (nber.org)

Because the central, forward‑looking part of the prediction was a renewed recession in 2023 that never happened, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong, even though the short‑term call about a 2022 technical recession followed by a brief return to growth was accurate.

economy
The sharp impact of 2022 Federal Reserve interest-rate hikes on the U.S. construction industry will propagate to the broader U.S. economy with a lag of approximately 6–9 months, meaning broader economic weakness from this channel should be clearly visible by early-to-mid 2023.
So the construction industry is really the bellwether. When a recession starts, they're the ones who are first impacted. But it's probably going to take 6 to 9 months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that while Fed rate hikes in 2022 did sharply hit parts of U.S. housing/construction, the broader U.S. economy did not exhibit clear, economy‑wide weakness by early‑to‑mid 2023.

  • On the construction side, single‑family housing starts fell 32% from March–December 2022, and single‑family units under construction began their fastest sustained decline since 2006–09 starting in mid‑spring 2022, consistent with a strong and early impact from Fed tightening on that segment of construction. (fredblog.stlouisfed.org)
  • However, macro indicators in early–mid 2023 remained very strong:
    • The unemployment rate was just 3.4% in April 2023—matching the lowest level since 1969—and stayed in the mid‑3% range through mid‑year, indicating a very tight labor market rather than broad weakness. (bls.gov)
    • Real GDP grew at a 2.2% annualized rate in Q1 2023, and for all of 2023 real GDP expanded 2.5%, faster than in 2022, which is inconsistent with a recession or clear economy‑wide downturn. (bea.gov)
    • Retrospective assessments note that the widely predicted 2023 recession never arrived; instead, the U.S. economy “defied expectations” with solid growth and a soft‑landing narrative. (investopedia.com)
  • Even within construction, employment was not collapsing in 2022–23 in a way that would signal a broad downturn: BLS reports construction employment reached an all‑time high of about 8.0 million jobs in 2023, surpassing the 2006 housing‑boom peak, and AGC data show 45 states added construction jobs between June 2022 and June 2023. (bls.gov) Other analysts explicitly described this cycle as unusual because homebuilding and construction employment proved more resilient than past tightening episodes, helping explain why GDP and job growth “kept on chugging” despite sharply higher rates. (axios.com)

Because the predicted broad economic weakness by early‑to‑mid 2023 did not materialize—the economy remained in expansion with very low unemployment and positive GDP growth—the specific lagged‑propagation claim from construction to a clearly weak overall economy is best judged as wrong, even though the first step (construction being hit early) was partly correct.

politicsgovernment
As a result of the Mar-a-Lago raid, Republican support will rally around Donald Trump, making him very difficult to beat for the 2024 Republican presidential nomination; the likely eventual outcomes are that he either wins the presidency again in 2024 or is incarcerated, with little middle ground, unless the FBI produces ironclad evidence of significant wrongdoing that derails his candidacy.
what the FBI has done with this raid, quite frankly, I think has polarized the outcomes. They are basically going to send Trump to the big House or the white House. I mean, because now the Republicans have rallied around Trump, I think he's going to be very, very hard to beat as the nominee in 2024 unless the FBI comes up with ironclad evidence to show that he did something significantly wrong.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction has largely borne out.

  1. Republicans rallied around Trump after the Mar‑a‑Lago raid. Within days of the 8 August 2022 FBI search, Republican leaders attacked the FBI and DOJ and publicly defended Trump, framing him as a victim of a politicized investigation. (en.wikipedia.org) Polling showed GOP voters consolidating behind him: a Politico/Morning Consult poll found 58% of Republican primary voters preferred Trump as the 2024 nominee—his highest level of post‑presidency support—and 71% said he should run; an Economist/YouGov poll saw his favorability among Republicans jump from 45% to 57% in a week. (newsweek.com) This is consistent with Sacks’ claim that the raid spurred Republicans to rally around Trump.

  2. He became “very hard to beat” and won the 2024 GOP nomination. Through late 2023 and early 2024, Trump held dominant leads in Republican primary polling in key states such as New Hampshire, South Carolina, and Georgia, often exceeding 55–60% support versus much lower numbers for rivals like Nikki Haley and Ron DeSantis. (en.wikipedia.org) On March 12, 2024 he officially clinched the Republican nomination by surpassing the delegate threshold. (forbes.com) This matches Sacks’ forecast that, after the raid, Trump would be very difficult to defeat for the 2024 Republican nomination.

  3. Of the polarized outcomes Sacks named, the ‘White House’ branch occurred. In November 2024, Trump won the U.S. presidential election against Kamala Harris, securing 312 electoral votes to 226 and winning the popular vote 49.8% to 48.3%. (en.wikipedia.org) He took office again in January 2025. This is exactly the “White House” end of Sacks’ “big house or White House” framing.

  4. The ‘big house’ (incarceration) outcome has not occurred, and legal actions did not derail his candidacy. Trump was convicted in New York state court in May 2024 on 34 felony counts related to hush‑money payments, but in January 2025 he received an “unconditional discharge,” meaning no jail time, fines, or probation. (reuters.com) Other criminal cases—federal election‑obstruction and classified‑documents prosecutions—were dismissed or dropped after his 2024 victory, in part because DOJ policy bars prosecuting a sitting president and because a judge found the special counsel’s appointment invalid. (en.wikipedia.org) None of these proceedings prevented him from securing the nomination or winning the presidency, so the caveat Sacks added (“unless the FBI comes up with ironclad evidence…that derails his candidacy”) did not materialize in the sense of blocking his political comeback.

Taken together, the central elements of Sacks’ prediction—that the Mar‑a‑Lago raid would rally Republican support around Trump, make him very hard to beat for the 2024 GOP nomination, and lead to a polarized outcome where he either returns to the White House or faces serious legal ruin—have come true in the form of a strong rally, an easy nomination win, and an eventual return to the presidency rather than incarceration. Therefore, the prediction is best classified as right.

economy
The U.S. recession that began by mid‑2022 will likely have a temporary bounce in GDP in Q3 2022, followed by a return to recessionary conditions (a "double‑dip" recession).
Listen, listen, we're in a recession. It started. It might be a shallow recession. We don't know yet... It might turn out we might have a bounce in Q3. This might be more of a double dip. I suspect that's what it'll be.View on YouTube
Explanation

BEA data show that real U.S. GDP did rebound in Q3 2022 after two negative quarters: GDP fell at annualized rates of −1.6% in Q1 2022 and −0.6% in Q2 2022, then rose +2.6–2.9% in Q3 2022, matching the “temporary bounce in Q3” part of the prediction.(bea.gov)(apps.bea.gov)(apps.bea.gov)(apps-fd.bea.gov)

However, the key claim was that this would be a “double‑dip” recession—i.e., the economy would slip back into recessionary conditions after that bounce. Instead, GDP remained positive afterward: BEA estimates show real GDP growth of about +2.6% in Q4 2022 and continued positive growth throughout 2023 (roughly +2–5% annualized each quarter) and into 2024, with Q4 2024 still growing at about +2.3% annualized.(apps-fd.bea.gov)(apps.bea.gov)(apps.bea.gov)(barrons.com)

Most importantly, the NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee—the standard arbiter of U.S. recessions—still lists the last U.S. recession as ending in April 2020, with no new recession dated in 2022–2024; subsequent commentary through 2025 notes that the U.S. is not officially in recession, despite some slowdowns and a one‑quarter contraction in early 2025 that was followed by a strong rebound.(nber.org)(ft.com)(investopedia.com)

So while Sacks correctly anticipated the Q3 2022 GDP bounce, his broader forecast of a double‑dip recession starting in mid‑2022 and then returning after Q3 did not occur. Therefore, taken as stated in the normalized prediction, it is wrong.

economygovernment
If U.S. interest rates remain around 3% on the 10‑year Treasury, the federal government will incur on the order of $1 trillion per year in debt service, and the U.S. will be in a prolonged era of fiscal austerity that will last beyond 2022 and extend past the current (Biden) presidential term ending January 2025.
If interest rates stay at this. Call it 3% level, which is roughly where the ten year T-bills been. You know, bouncing around at that is a lot of debt service, $1 trillion a year of debt service. So I think we're probably entering an era, an overall era of austerity that lasts more than just this year or even this presidency.View on YouTube
Explanation

Two key parts of Sacks’s prediction can be checked: (1) interest rates and debt‑service costs; and (2) whether the U.S. actually entered a multi‑year period of fiscal austerity extending through and beyond the Biden term (to January 2025).

  1. Interest rates and $1T/year in debt service
  • The 10‑year Treasury yield was around 3% in mid‑2022, but then rose and stayed mostly in the 3.5–4.5%+ range from late 2022 through 2025, not “around 3%.” Federal Reserve data (series GS10) show monthly averages rising from 2.90% in July–August 2022 to ~4% by late 2022 and roughly 3.5–4.8% during 2023–25.(fred.stlouisfed.org)
  • Net interest outlays on the federal debt were $475B in FY 2022, jumped to $659B in FY 2023, and then to about $880B in FY 2024.(crfb.org) CBO’s 2025 budget review indicates net interest surpassed $1T for the first time in FY 2025, in line with projections that interest costs would reach roughly $900B in 2024 and exceed $1T by the mid‑2020s.(congress.gov) So “on the order of $1 trillion per year” did become true by 2025, though at higher rates than his 3% assumption and after a ramp‑up rather than immediately.
  1. Did the U.S. enter a prolonged era of fiscal austerity through and beyond the Biden term?
  • Fiscal austerity would normally mean sustained cuts in real spending and/or sharply reduced deficits. In reality, federal outlays rose: Treasury data show total outlays growing from $6.14T in FY 2023 to $6.75–6.94T in FY 2024 (depending on the adjustment), with outlays increasing about 10% year‑over‑year and rising from 22.5% to 23.4% of GDP.(home.treasury.gov) CBO and Treasury figures for 2023–24 show deficits of roughly $1.7T–$1.8T per year, historically large for a period of solid growth and low unemployment.(fiscal.treasury.gov)
  • The Fiscal Responsibility Act of 2023 did impose caps on discretionary spending in FY 2024 and 2025 and is estimated to reduce non‑interest outlays by about $1.3T over ten years, mostly via slower growth in discretionary spending.(budgetmodel.wharton.upenn.edu) But this is modest restraint against a high baseline, not a sweeping austerity program; overall spending and deficits continued to rise.
  • At the same time, major initiatives such as the Inflation Reduction Act and expanded clean‑energy tax credits added hundreds of billions in new spending and tax subsidies over a decade, which is inconsistent with a broad, long‑lasting austerity regime.(crfb.org)

Bottom line: Sacks was directionally right that higher rates would drive net interest costs toward $1T/year by the mid‑2020s, but his core claim—that this would push the U.S. into a prolonged era of fiscal austerity lasting beyond 2022 and through the Biden presidency—has not materialized. Federal spending and deficits have remained high and growing, with only limited discretionary caps rather than deep, sustained cuts. Overall, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
The November 2022 U.S. midterm elections will be a wave election (strongly favoring one party, implied to be Republicans), in which party affiliation matters more than candidate quality, resulting in some MAGA-aligned or "crazy" candidates winning office who otherwise would not win in a normal year.
This year, I think this November is likely to be a wave election. And when you get a wave election, the specific candidate matters less and party matters more. So you could get some of these crazy swept into office.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the November 2022 U.S. midterms would be a Republican 'wave election' where party label overwhelmed candidate quality and some MAGA or otherwise 'crazy' candidates would be swept into office who would not win in a normal year. In reality, the 2022 midterms were historically mild for a president's party: Republicans gained only about nine U.S. House seats and a narrow majority, while Democrats gained one Senate seat and a net two governorships, an outcome widely characterized as the expected red wave failing to materialize. (en.wikipedia.org) Analyses of the results also emphasize that candidate quality and extremism mattered a great deal: Trump-aligned or election-denying Republicans underperformed in key statewide races in states like Arizona, Georgia, Pennsylvania and others, costing the GOP winnable Senate and governor contests rather than being carried to victory by a national partisan surge. (fivethirtyeight.com) While some strongly pro-Trump or hard-right candidates did win in safely Republican areas, that is typical partisan sorting and not evidence of an unusual nationwide wave. Because there was no Republican wave election and candidate quality clearly affected outcomes instead of being swamped by party affiliation, Sacks's prediction did not come true.

politics
Contrary to Jason’s view, Donald Trump will not end up securing the 2024 Republican presidential nomination, even though he may run.
I don't think so.View on YouTube
Explanation

David Sacks said Trump would not secure the 2024 Republican presidential nomination. In reality, Donald Trump announced his 2024 campaign on November 15, 2022, went on to dominate the Republican primaries, became the presumptive GOP nominee on March 12, 2024, and was then officially nominated as the Republican Party’s 2024 presidential candidate at the Republican National Convention in Milwaukee on July 15, 2024.(en.wikipedia.org)

Since Trump did in fact secure the 2024 Republican nomination, Sacks’s prediction is wrong.

Sacks @ 01:26:06Inconclusive
politics
Jeff Bezos will not receive the Democratic Party’s nomination for U.S. president in any foreseeable future election cycle, even if he were to choose to run.
Even if Bezos were dumb enough to run for president. I think he's too smart to do that. The Democratic Party would never nominate him.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence shows that Jeff Bezos has not been a candidate for U.S. president and has not received the Democratic Party’s nomination. In the 2024 cycle, the Democratic nominee was Vice President Kamala Harris, formally nominated at the Democratic National Convention; Bezos played no candidate role in that race.【1search12【1search18【turn1search17】 Bezos’s biography and recent political coverage likewise show business and media activities (including his controversial decisions regarding Washington Post endorsements and interactions with Donald Trump) but no presidential campaign or pursuit of a Democratic nomination.【2search17【2search4【2news14】

However, the prediction is framed as essentially "never"—that the Democratic Party would not nominate Bezos in any foreseeable future election cycle. Future cycles such as 2028 and beyond have not yet occurred and no nominee has been selected for them.【1news21】 Because the relevant future elections have not all taken place, the claim cannot yet be definitively judged, even though it is consistent with events so far. Therefore the status of the prediction is inconclusive (too early).

politicsgovernment
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, JD Vance will win the Ohio U.S. Senate general election, Republicans will experience a broad 'red wave' nationally, and Blake Masters will win the Republican primary for U.S. Senate in Arizona and perform strongly in the November 2022 general election.
JD's already won the primaries, and I expect he will win. I mean, it's going to be, I think, a red wave in November and Ohio is a pretty red state these days. Blake stalls to win the primary in Arizona. That's a little bit more of a toss up, but I think he'll do well.View on YouTube
Explanation

Breaking the prediction into components:

  1. JD Vance wins the Ohio U.S. Senate general election – This happened. In the November 8, 2022 election, Republican JD Vance defeated Democrat Tim Ryan 53.03% to 46.92% for the open Ohio Senate seat.(en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Republicans experience a broad ‘red wave’ nationally in November 2022 – This did not occur. In the 2022 midterms, Republicans won only a narrow House majority while Democrats expanded their Senate majority by one seat; multiple post‑election analyses explicitly state that the widely anticipated “red wave did not materialize.”(en.wikipedia.org) Historically, the president’s party usually loses many more seats in midterms, so this outcome represented Democratic overperformance, not a Republican wave.

  3. Blake Masters will win the Arizona GOP Senate primary and perform strongly in the November general election – This is mixed but overall contrary to the “do well”/“perform strongly” framing:

    • Masters did win the Republican primary for U.S. Senate in Arizona.(washingtonpost.com)
    • In the general election, however, he lost to Democratic incumbent Mark Kelly 51.4% to 46.5%.(ballotwire.com) Subsequent analyses note that Masters was the weakest‑performing statewide Republican candidate in Arizona and that he underperformed Trump’s 2020 margin, with one major outlet labeling him among the “worst candidates” of 2022.(en.wikipedia.org) That performance is hard to characterize as “doing well” or “strong.”

Because the prediction hinged on a broad red wave and a strong Blake Masters general‑election showing—both of which clearly failed—despite being partly correct about Vance’s win and Masters’s primary, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong.

politicsgovernment
During the 2021–2022 Congress, despite having the opportunity and sufficient potential Republican votes, Senate Democratic leadership will not bring forward and pass legislation to codify Obergefell (federal protection for same-sex marriage) before the end of that Congress in early January 2023.
is there any intention of the Democrats to bring this up in the Senate and pass it and codify Obergefell when they have a chance? I think the answer is no. Why? Because the Democrats would rather fundraise off this issue.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction said that during the 2021–2022 (117th) Congress, Senate Democratic leadership would not bring forward and pass legislation to codify Obergefell / provide federal protection for same-sex marriage before that Congress ended in early January 2023.

What actually happened:

  • In response to concerns raised after the Dobbs decision and Justice Thomas’s concurrence, Congress advanced the Respect for Marriage Act (RFMA), H.R. 8404. The House first passed it on July 19, 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The Senate then took it up and passed the bill on November 29, 2022, by a 61–36 vote, with 12 Republicans joining all Democrats, during the 117th Congress. (senate.gov)
  • The House agreed to the Senate-amended bill on December 8, 2022, and President Biden signed it into law on December 13, 2022, still within the 117th Congress. (en.wikipedia.org)

Substance of the law:

  • RFMA repeals the Defense of Marriage Act and requires the federal government and all states to recognize any marriage that is valid in the state where it was performed, explicitly covering same-sex and interracial marriages. This is widely described as "enshrining" or "protecting" marriage equality in federal law. (congress.gov)
  • Legal and news analyses note that RFMA does not fully codify Obergefell in the sense of forcing every state to issue same-sex marriage licenses if the Supreme Court overturned Obergefell, but it does provide durable federal recognition and interstate recognition protections for same-sex marriages. (time.com)

How this maps to the prediction:

  • The core falsifiable claim was that Democrats would not bring up and pass such legislation in the Senate while they had the chance in the 117th Congress. In reality, Senate Democratic leadership did exactly that by scheduling and passing the Respect for Marriage Act in November 2022, in coalition with sufficient Republican votes. (senate.gov)
  • Even if one argues RFMA is not a perfect one-to-one codification of the Obergefell decision, it clearly is federal legislation whose central purpose is to protect same-sex marriage recognition nationwide and to backstop Obergefell at the statutory level. That directly contradicts the prediction that Democrats would decline to bring forward and pass such a bill when they had the opportunity.

Because the Senate did in fact bring forward and pass legislation providing federal protection for same-sex marriages in the 117th Congress, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, the Republican Party will gain a majority in the U.S. House of Representatives for the next Congress.
Well, the Republicans are going to win the House.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that in the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, the Republican Party would gain a majority in the U.S. House of Representatives for the next Congress.

Official election results and subsequent reporting confirm that Republicans won control of the House in the 2022 midterms, securing a narrow majority and thereby controlling the 118th Congress (which convened on January 3, 2023). Major outlets such as the Associated Press and others reported that Republicans passed the 218-seat threshold required for a majority, while Democrats retained control of the Senate.

Because the predicted event (GOP winning the House in the 2022 midterms and thus having the majority in the next Congress) clearly occurred, the prediction is right.

economy
Over the medium term (within several years of 2022), US inflation will be brought back under control to normal levels because the Federal Reserve will eventually raise interest rates high enough to end the high‑inflation episode.
look, we are 100% going to solve this inflation problem. Why do I say that? Because price levels are fully within the power of the fed. They just have to raise interest rates high enough.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since the episode supports Sacks’ basic claim that (1) the Fed would raise rates aggressively and (2) U.S. inflation would be brought down from crisis levels to roughly normal levels within a few years.

Inflation fell from 9%+ to the high‑2s/low‑3s within three years. U.S. CPI inflation peaked at about 9.1% in June 2022 and then declined steadily; by June 2025 the 12‑month CPI rate was around 2.7%, close to pre‑pandemic norms (2015‑2019 average ~1.8–2.1%).
• On the Fed’s preferred measure (PCE), headline inflation in late 2024–2025 has mostly run in the mid‑2% range: December 2024 PCE was 2.6% (core 2.8%), January 2025 PCE 2.5% (core 2.6%), and August 2025 PCE 2.7% (core 2.9%). Dallas and St. Louis Fed analysis notes inflation has been above the 2% target since 2021 but currently around 2.7–2.9%, i.e., much closer to target than at the 2022 peak. This indicates the 2021–22 high‑inflation episode (7–9%+ readings) has been ended, even if inflation is not exactly 2%.

The Fed did in fact “raise interest rates high enough” in the interim. From early 2022 to July 2023 the Fed increased the federal funds rate from near 0% to 5.25–5.50%, one of the fastest hiking cycles in modern history. The rate then stayed restrictive through mid‑2024 before modest cuts as the Fed gained “greater confidence in inflation moving sustainably toward 2 percent.” This sequence matches Sacks’ mechanism: aggressive hikes followed by disinflation.

Current debate is about a mild above‑target regime, not an ongoing high‑inflation crisis. Fed and OECD forecasts for 2025 generally put inflation around 2.7%, above the exact 2% target but far below 2022 levels. Research pieces explicitly frame the issue as whether we are in a persistently above‑target environment at roughly 2.7–2.9%, not whether the 2021–22 inflation spike persists. That nuance means the “inflation problem” as understood in 2022 (9% CPI, rapid price surges) has been resolved, even if fine‑tuning to exactly 2% is ongoing.

Given that by late 2025 U.S. inflation is back near historical norms (≈2–3%) and the Fed achieved this via the very rate hikes Sacks described, his medium‑term prediction that the Fed would “100% solve this inflation problem” by raising rates sufficiently is broadly borne out by the data, despite inflation still running modestly above the 2% target. Therefore the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsconflict
By the upcoming winter of 2022–2023, political unity within the Western alliance over the Ukraine war and related Russia sanctions will significantly fracture, with major European countries (such as Germany or others dependent on Russian gas) openly opposing or breaking with the U.S.-led policy line in a way that is visible in their public positions or actions.
Let me make a prediction. Right. I think the Western alliance is going to fracture come this winter.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from winter 2022–2023 shows that, despite intense energy stress and political wrangling, the Western alliance did not significantly fracture over Ukraine or Russia sanctions, and no major European country (Germany, France, UK, Italy, etc.) openly broke with the U.S.-led policy line.

  1. EU and G7 unity through winter 2022–23

    • The EU did not roll back sanctions in winter; instead, it expanded them. The 8th sanctions package was adopted on 6 October 2022, and a 9th package was agreed and formally adopted on 16–17 December 2022, right at the start of winter, adding further trade and financial restrictions on Russia and coming on top of the full EU ban on seaborne Russian crude and the G7/EU oil price cap. (consilium.europa.eu)
    • G7 leaders’ statements around the one‑year mark of the invasion (24 February 2023) explicitly stress that they “remain united and resolute” in support for Ukraine and in imposing coordinated sanctions on Russia, reinforcing that Western governments were still acting as a bloc after the winter. (consilium.europa.eu)
  2. Analytical retrospectives describe unity, not a fracture

    • A 2023 assessment by the Centre for European Reform characterises EU unity on Ukraine as both its “biggest challenge and also its biggest success,” highlighting that member states repeatedly found consensus on strong sanctions, refugee protection, and Ukraine’s EU‑candidate status during the first year of war—which covers the 2022–23 winter. (cer.eu)
    • A separate review of the first year of war notes “a year of growing western unity and Russian isolation,” again indicating that Russia’s hoped‑for collapse of Western resolve through the winter did not materialise. (globalgovernmentforum.com)
  3. Disputes and hold‑outs fell short of a real “fracture”

    • There were intra‑EU disputes—e.g., delays and bargaining over elements of the 9th sanctions package, and persistent objections and carve‑outs demanded by Hungary on energy measures—but these were resolved through compromise inside the EU framework, culminating in unanimous adoption of new sanctions packages rather than open defection from the sanctions regime. (news.cgtn.com)
    • Crucially, the large, gas‑dependent economies that the prediction singled out (notably Germany) did not break with the U.S. line: they maintained sanctions and continued, and in some areas increased, financial and military support to Ukraine through and after the winter. (taxation-customs.ec.europa.eu)

Given that the alliance stayed institutionally intact, continued to pass new coordinated sanctions packages, and publicly emphasized unity—while no major Western European government openly defected from the basic Ukraine/sanctions policy—the prediction that the Western alliance would "fracture" by winter 2022–2023 is best judged wrong.

economymarkets
By the end of 2022, San Francisco will have approximately 30 million square feet of vacant office space, representing roughly 40% vacancy of an office inventory of about 75 million square feet.
they they said that by the end of the year, they're expecting 30,000,000ft² of office vacancy… in San Francisco by the end of the year… I think it's about 75 million of office space. So you're talking about 40% vacancy by the end of the year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple brokerage reports for Q4 2022 show San Francisco’s office market was far from 40% vacant or 30 million square feet empty by year‑end 2022:

  • Transwestern reported the market closed 2022 at a record-high 23.7% vacancy, with 8.6 million sq. ft. of sublet space equal to 9.5% of total office stock. That implies total stock of about 90.5 million sq. ft. (8.6 ÷ 0.095). Applying the 23.7% vacancy rate to that stock yields roughly 21.5 million sq. ft. vacant, well below 30 million.

    Available sublet space totaled 8.6 million square feet, representing 9.5% of total office stock… vacancy of 23.7% in Q4 2022. (transwestern.com)

  • CBRE’s official San Francisco Office Figures Q4 2022 put overall vacancy even higher, at 27.6%. Using the same ~90.5 million sq. ft. stock, that implies roughly 25 million sq. ft. vacant (0.276 × 90.5M), still materially below 30 million and well under 40% of inventory. (cbre.com)

  • Cresa’s Q4 2022 San Francisco Office Occupier’s Guide likewise reports a 23.6% total vacancy rate and 31.9% total availability at year‑end 2022, consistent with vacancy in the mid‑20s percent, not 40%. (cresa.com)

Subsequent reporting shows San Francisco didn’t hit roughly 30 million sq. ft. of empty offices until later in 2023, when CBRE data cited by the San Francisco Chronicle and other outlets showed about 33–34% vacancy and nearly 30 million sq. ft. vacant—still short of 40% and occurring about a year after the prediction’s deadline. (sfchronicle.com)

So by December 31, 2022, the best available data indicate:

  • Total office stock ≈ 90–91 million sq. ft., not 75 million.
  • Vacancy ≈ 23–28%, not 40%.
  • Vacant space ≈ 21–25 million sq. ft., not 30 million.

Because both the magnitude of vacant space and the vacancy percentage were substantially below what was predicted, and the total inventory figure was understated, the prediction is incorrect for its stated timeframe.

economygovernment
California will experience a huge state budget shortfall in the fiscal year following this June 30, 2022 discussion (i.e., in 2023), primarily because there will be little to no capital gains tax revenue compared with the prior boom year.
So do you think that's going to be the case this year? I think we're due for a huge budget shortfall next year because there's going to be no capital gains.View on YouTube
Explanation

California’s first full fiscal year after the June 30, 2022 discussion was FY 2023‑24 (starting July 1, 2023). For that year, the Legislative Analyst’s Office and other analysts identified a large General Fund deficit on the order of roughly $24–32 billion, following earlier years of very large surpluses, which fits the description of a huge budget shortfall. (lao.ca.gov) Multiple budget analyses attribute this shortfall primarily to revenues coming in far below what had been projected for the 2022 tax year because of the steep stock‑market decline in 2022, which sharply reduced personal‑income‑tax collections from high‑income Californians whose income is disproportionately composed of capital gains and stock‑based compensation. (calbudgetcenter.org) Department of Finance figures reported in the press show capital gains falling from 25% of total personal‑income‑tax liability in 2021 to 13% in 2022—an $18 billion drop in capital‑gains revenue in a single year—creating large holes in the budget compared with the prior boom year. (aol.com) So although there was not literally zero capital‑gains revenue, California did experience a very large budget shortfall in the first fiscal year after the discussion, and that shortfall was driven largely by the collapse of capital‑gains‑related tax revenue relative to the preceding boom, making Sacks’s prediction substantively correct.

Sacks @ 01:15:08Inconclusive
politicsconflict
The eventual political settlement of the Russia–Ukraine war will mirror the prewar three-point plan: (1) Ukraine will remain a neutral state outside of NATO; (2) the eastern Donbas region will have autonomy protecting Russian speakers under de facto Russian control; and (3) Crimea will remain part of Russia, effectively formalizing Russia’s control over approximately the eastern 20% of Ukraine plus Crimea.
Smart observers of this conflict have been outlining that three point plan for over a year, and that is what we're going to end up with. The only difference is that it's going to be implemented by force, and Ukraine will be destroying the process. That is basically where we're at right now. Russia has. They've taken over the Donbas. They've taken over this eastern 20% of the country. They have Crimea and Ukraine. Basically. The rest of it will not be part of NATO. That is basically what the Russians have done is implement by force a plan that, frankly, we could have agreed to through negotiation a year ago and avoided all this death and destructionView on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there is still no final political settlement or peace treaty ending the Russia–Ukraine war. Fighting continues on multiple fronts while various U.S.-brokered and European-influenced peace frameworks are being discussed, but all sides acknowledge that key issues such as territorial control and Ukraine’s security guarantees remain unresolved.(reuters.com)

Current facts partially resemble elements of the prediction: Russia militarily controls roughly one-fifth of Ukraine’s territory, including Crimea and most of the Donbas region, and this control has been de facto but not internationally recognized.(aljazeera.com) Ukraine also remains outside NATO, though membership and security guarantees are an ongoing political issue rather than a settled commitment to permanent neutrality.(euronews.com) However, Ukrainian leadership continues to publicly reject territorial concessions and insists that any peace must not legitimize Russian annexations, directly contesting the kind of formalized outcome the prediction describes.(time.com)

Because the prediction was specifically about the eventual political settlement and no such settlement yet exists, it is not possible to determine whether the war will ultimately end in the three-point arrangement Sacks described. The forecast is therefore too early to judge and must be rated as inconclusive.

Sacks @ 01:26:47Inconclusive
conflictpolitics
The Russia–Ukraine war will ultimately end with an agreement under which (1) Ukraine is formally neutral and not in NATO, (2) the Donbas region gains autonomy protecting Russian speakers and is effectively under Russian influence, and (3) Crimea remains under Russian control; this outcome will occur regardless of how long the war lasts or how much destruction occurs in Ukraine beforehand.
Let me just tell you right now, the deal that would end this war is the same deal that was on the table last year with zero bloodshed, which is Ukraine remains a neutral state. There's autonomy for the Russian speakers in the Donbas. And Crimea basically remains part of Russia. That was the deal. That is the deal. That will be the deal. The only question is, does the whole country have to be destroyedView on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there has been no final peace agreement ending the Russia–Ukraine war that matches the structure Sacks described (neutral Ukraine outside NATO, formal autonomy of Donbas under effective Russian influence, and internationally accepted Russian control of Crimea).

Key facts:

  1. No comprehensive peace treaty or final political settlement exists yet. The war, begun with Russia’s full-scale invasion on February 24, 2022, is ongoing; front lines and limited ceasefires have shifted, but there is no agreed end-state constitutional or territorial settlement between Russia and Ukraine.
  2. Ukraine’s NATO orientation has hardened rather than disappeared. Ukraine formally applied for NATO membership in September 2022 and NATO states have repeatedly affirmed that Ukraine has a future in NATO, even if no immediate accession date is set. Ukraine’s 2019 constitutionally-enshrined Euro-Atlantic integration course remains in place and has not been replaced by a formal neutrality commitment.
  3. Donbas status is unresolved and contested. Russia claims to have annexed Donetsk and Luhansk (and two other regions) following staged referendums in September 2022, but these annexations are internationally rejected. There is no mutually agreed autonomy framework recognized by both Kyiv and Moscow; instead, there is de facto military control by Russia in some areas and ongoing combat in others.
  4. Crimea remains under Russian occupation but without an agreed settlement. Russia has occupied Crimea since 2014 and claims it as its territory; Ukraine continues to reject that claim and has conducted military strikes and special operations against Russian forces and infrastructure in Crimea. No agreement has been reached in which Ukraine formally recognizes Russian sovereignty over Crimea.

Because the war has not ended and no final agreement is in place, it is impossible to say whether the eventual end-state of the war will or will not match Sacks’s detailed prediction. The necessary time horizon ("that will be the deal") has not yet elapsed; thus the prediction’s truth value cannot currently be determined.

Therefore the correct classification is: inconclusive (too early).

markets
Following the mid-2022 selloff in growth stocks, price declines (“carnage”) will subsequently spread to other major asset classes, particularly residential real estate, leading to further significant drops in those markets over the ensuing period of this cycle.
Well, the stock market, especially growth stocks, may have taken the majority of the carnage. But you're right, there are other asset classes. And I think we're going to see the carnage start to rotate into those... So I think there are going to be more more shoes to drop.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since mid‑2022 shows that broad U.S. residential real estate did not experience the kind of follow‑on “carnage” or large further price declines Sacks was anticipating.

  • The S&P CoreLogic Case‑Shiller U.S. National Home Price Index peaked around June 2022, then fell only about 5% through January 2023 before rebounding. By July 2023 it had already fully erased that dip and reached a new all‑time high, and it went on to post a long streak of consecutive record highs through late 2024. (spglobal.com)
  • Articles summarizing the index show home prices hitting yet another record high in June 2024, with prices nationally up 5.4% year‑over‑year. (cnbc.com) A June 2024 analysis likewise notes continued national price gains rather than a major downturn. (nasdaq.com)
  • By 2025, transaction data show record or near‑record median sale prices, not a sustained crash: e.g., the national median existing‑home price hit an all‑time high of about $435,300 in June 2025, and March 2025 also set a record high for that month. (nypost.com) The main problems in housing have been low affordability and weak sales volumes, not deep nationwide price declines.

So while some other asset classes did suffer significant pain after mid‑2022—most notably:

  • Bonds, with the Bloomberg U.S. Aggregate Bond Index posting about a –14% loss in 2022, its worst year on record, and a historically rare stretch of weak bond returns over 2022–2024. (statmuse.com)
  • Commercial office real estate, where U.S. office building prices have dropped roughly 37% from 2019 levels and another 11% in 2024 alone, with vacancy rates near records. (businessinsider.com)

…the specific, emphasized part of the prediction—that the “carnage” in growth stocks would rotate into major asset classes like residential real estate and cause further significant drops there—did not occur at the national level. National home prices are higher today than at the time of the prediction. On that basis, the prediction is best judged wrong.

economy
The U.S. economy will enter a recession in the near term as the Federal Reserve tightens policy to combat inflation.
And this is a bunch of bad options. I think, you know, we are going to have a recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

Using the standard U.S. benchmarks, this prediction has not come true.

  • Official recession dating (NBER): The National Bureau of Economic Research’s Business Cycle Dating Committee shows the last U.S. recession ended in April 2020, with expansion ongoing from May 2020 onward and no new peaks or troughs announced since then.(nber.org) Quarterly NBER-based recession indicator data likewise remain at 0 ("no recession") through at least Q3 2025.(ycharts.com)
  • GDP performance: BEA data show real GDP grew in 2022, 2023, and 2024 (about 1.9%, 2.5%, and 2.8% respectively), with solid positive quarterly growth from mid‑2022 through end‑2024.(apps.bea.gov) A compiled quarterly series shows only one negative quarter after the pandemic (Q1 2025 at –0.3%), with preceding and subsequent quarters positive, so even the "two consecutive negative quarters" rule of thumb is not met in the period after the June 24, 2022 prediction.(visualcapitalist.com)
  • Contemporary assessments: Major forecasters and analysts have repeatedly characterized the outcome as a soft landing or continued expansion rather than a recession, noting that the economy “defied recession fears” and remained on course for growth despite aggressive Fed tightening.(goldmansachs.com)

Given that more than three years have passed since the June 2022 prediction, the Fed did tighten aggressively, and yet no NBER‑defined recession or broadly recognized downturn occurred in the “near term” afterward, the best judgment is that Sacks’s call for an imminent U.S. recession was wrong.

economyventure
By roughly one year after June 2022 (around mid-2023), the U.S. will be in the middle of a recession, and the amount of available venture capital funding for startups will have fallen by about 75% compared to the prior period, making 3–4 years of runway necessary instead of the previously standard 2 years.
one of the speakers said that he said that when it comes to runway for startups, 3 to 4 years is the new two years, because if you just have two years of runway, you're going to need to raise in a year, and in a year from now, we're going to be in the middle of a recession. They're predicting they're forecasting that capital availability is going to decline about 75%.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction had two key parts: (1) that by roughly mid‑2023 the U.S. would be “in the middle of a recession,” and (2) that venture capital availability would be down about 75%, implying startups needed 3–4 years of runway.

1. U.S. recession call (mid‑2023)
By standard benchmarks this did not happen:

  • The NBER recession indicator is 0 (no recession) for every quarter from 2021 through at least the end of 2023, including Q2 2023 and Q3 2023. (ycharts.com)
  • Real GDP grew at an annual rate of 2.0–2.1% in Q1–Q2 2023 and 5.2% in Q3 2023, indicating solid expansion rather than contraction. (bea.gov)
  • For the full year 2023, real GDP grew 2.5% and unemployment averaged 3.6%, with commentators explicitly noting that widely expected 2023 recession fears “proved unfounded.” (en.wikipedia.org)

So the core timing claim that the U.S. would be “in the middle of a recession” about a year after June 2022 is clearly false.

2. Venture capital availability down ~75%
There was a sharp VC downturn, but the size was smaller than the predicted 75% in broad aggregates:

  • Globally, Q2 2023 venture funding was down about 49% year‑over‑year, and total funding in H1 2023 was down about 51% vs H1 2022. (news.crunchbase.com)
  • Another analysis using PitchBook data reports global VC funding in H1 2023 down 48%, with the U.S. and Europe each down on the order of ~65–70% from earlier levels, depending on the comparison baseline. (benzinga.com)
  • By 2024, global VC activity was still ~55% below its 2021 peak, showing a prolonged but not 75% collapse from the high‑water mark. (barrons.com)
  • U.S. VC fundraising in 2023 was reported at under $70B, roughly a 60% drop from peak levels rather than 75%. (reddit.com)

So the direction (big funding crunch) was correct, but the ~75% figure is an overstatement for the market as a whole.

Overall evaluation
Because the prediction hinges on both being in the middle of a U.S. recession by mid‑2023 (which clearly did not occur) and on a roughly 75% drop in capital availability (where the actual decline was large but closer to 50–65% in broad measures), the combined forecast did not come true. Hence the result is “wrong.”

politicsconflict
In the winter of 2022–2023, energy shortages and related pressures will significantly increase Putin’s leverage over Europe and will cause visible fractures within the Western alliance that had appeared unified earlier in the Ukraine war.
by the way. That's coming. You think things are bad right now? Wait until winter and then. And that's only going to increase Putin's leverage. And that's when you're going to see a real fracture in the Western alliance. This idea that Ukraine strengthened the Western alliance. I think you will start to see the fractures come this winter.View on YouTube
Explanation

The core mechanisms Sacks predicted for winter 2022–23 largely did not materialize.

  1. Energy shortages and Putin’s leverage
    Europe certainly faced a serious energy price shock, but not the widespread physical shortages implied. EU gas storage was filled to ~95% before winter, a mild season plus demand reduction cut consumption sharply, and Europe got through winter without major blackouts or rationing of household heating.(iea.org) In parallel, the EU rapidly diversified away from Russian gas under the REPowerEU plan, with Russian pipeline supplies collapsing from about 155 bcm in 2021 to roughly 62 bcm in 2022 and 28 bcm in 2023, and Russian fossil fuels’ share of EU imports plunging thereafter.(en.wikipedia.org) By May 2023, the EU energy commissioner was publicly saying that Putin’s attempt to blackmail Europe with energy had failed, precisely because Europe had managed the winter and accelerated diversification.(energynow.ca) In other words, Russia lost long‑term leverage over Europe’s energy system rather than gaining it.

  2. “Real fracture in the Western alliance”
    There were notable protests and political stresses over energy prices (e.g., large demonstrations in Prague against high bills and sanctions), which showed domestic discontent.(euronews.com) But at the level of governments and alliances, the predicted fracture did not occur. Through and after that winter, the EU and NATO continued to pass new sanctions packages, send increasingly heavy weapons, and admit or advance new members (Finland and then Sweden) – all signs of institutional cohesion, not breakdown. Survey work for the European Council on Foreign Relations in January 2023 found that, one year into the war and just after the first wartime winter, “cracks in the Western coalition have got smaller rather than larger,” with Europeans “surprisingly united” on supporting Ukraine and seeing the EU as as strong or stronger than before the invasion.(ecfr.eu) A separate analysis summarised this as the West regaining “unity and purpose,” noting that Europeans felt they had weathered the difficult winter and could sustain their stance against Russia.(voanews.com)

  3. Overall assessment
    Winter 2022–23 did bring economic pain and some social unrest, but it did not significantly increase Putin’s leverage over Europe, and it did not cause the kind of visible, structural fracture in the Western alliance that Sacks predicted. If anything, that winter reinforced a strategic shift away from Russian energy and coincided with polling and policy evidence of continued or even strengthened Western unity on Ukraine. Taken against the specific claims in the quote, the prediction is best judged as wrong.

politicsgovernment
Over time (in the coming years), the U.S. will move toward a posture in which European NATO members are expected to bear essentially all (near 100%) of the financial cost of their own defense against Russia, rather than relying heavily on U.S. funding.
They should be picking up 100% of the cost of that 100%. I don't know why we're paying for rich Europeans when our country is massively in debt. Why aren't we passing the bill to them for that?View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence through late 2025 shows that the United States has not shifted to a posture where European NATO members are expected to bear essentially all (near 100%) of the financial cost of their own defense against Russia.

  • US still pays the largest share of NATO defense. NATO data and independent analyses show that in 2024–2025 the US accounts for roughly 60–70% of total NATO military spending—around $980–$997 billion out of about $1.5–$1.6 trillion—far more than all European allies combined.(ukdefencejournal.org.uk)
  • Common NATO budgets remain shared, not shifted to Europe. For NATO’s joint civil/military/ investment budgets, the US and Germany each contribute about 16%; the US does not expect Europe to cover nearly all of these costs.(ft.com)
  • US-funded European posture persists. The European Deterrence Initiative and related deployments in Europe continue to be funded out of the US Department of Defense budget, underscoring ongoing American financial responsibility for deterring Russia in Europe.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Policy changes aim at burden sharing, not US withdrawal from paying. NATO has raised its target from 2% to 5% of GDP by 2035 for all allies, including the United States, and leaders repeatedly reaffirm an “ironclad” US Article 5 commitment rather than signaling that Europe must self-fund its defense entirely.(en.wikipedia.org)

European countries are clearly being pushed to spend more, but the factual pattern in budgets, initiatives, and official communiqués shows continued heavy US funding rather than a move toward Europeans paying anything close to 100% of the cost of their defense. Therefore, Sacks’s prediction has not come true as of November 30, 2025.

politics
The 2024 U.S. presidential election will feature Ron DeSantis as the Republican nominee and Gavin Newsom as the Democratic nominee.
I think it's going to be DeSantis versus Newsom in 24.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that the 2024 U.S. presidential election would feature Ron DeSantis as the Republican nominee and Gavin Newsom as the Democratic nominee.

In reality, the general election held on November 5, 2024 featured Donald Trump as the Republican nominee and Kamala Harris as the Democratic nominee.(en.wikipedia.org) Joe Biden initially ran and became the presumptive Democratic nominee, but he later withdrew in July 2024 and endorsed Harris, who was then formally nominated by the Democratic Party; Newsom was never the nominee.(en.wikipedia.org) On the Republican side, Ron DeSantis ran in the primaries but dropped out after Trump’s dominant performance in early contests, and Trump secured the nomination.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because neither DeSantis nor Newsom was their party’s 2024 presidential nominee, the prediction is wrong.

politics
For the 2024 U.S. presidential election: (1) If Joe Biden runs as the Democratic nominee, the Republican nominee—whoever it is—will win; (2) If the matchup is Ron DeSantis vs. Gavin Newsom, DeSantis will win; (3) If the matchup is Gavin Newsom vs. Donald Trump, Republicans are likely to lose (i.e., Newsom would probably defeat Trump).
I think the configurations that win for the Republicans, I think if Biden is on the ticket, I think any Republican wins. I think if it's DeSantis versus Newsom, I think DeSantis wins. I think, however, and this is sort of the nightmare scenario. I think if it's something like Newsom versus Trump, I think Republicans could lose that just because, you know, the people.View on YouTube
Explanation

There are three conditional predictions here, and only one of the conditions actually occurred; the others never happened, so we cannot strictly mark them right or wrong.

  1. If Biden runs as the Democratic nominee, any Republican wins.
    In reality, the 2024 general election was Joe Biden (D) vs. Donald Trump (R), and Biden won the presidency (Democrats retained the White House).
    Under the condition that did happen (Biden as the nominee), Sacks’s prediction that “any Republican wins” is wrong.

  2. If it’s DeSantis vs. Newsom, DeSantis wins.
    This matchup never occurred: Ron DeSantis did not become the GOP nominee, and Gavin Newsom was not the Democratic nominee. Because the underlying condition failed, this part of the prediction cannot be evaluated against reality and remains counterfactual.

  3. If it’s Newsom vs. Trump, Republicans could lose (Newsom probably defeats Trump).
    This matchup also never occurred: Newsom did not run as the Democratic nominee, so this too is counterfactual and not testable.

Overall: Part (1) is clearly falsified by the 2024 result, but parts (2) and (3) are untestable counterfactuals. Because the user bundled all three into a single prediction, the combined evaluation is ambiguous: one tested component is wrong, while the others never faced real-world verification. If we evaluated only the scenario that actually occurred, it would be wrong, but as a set of branching scenarios, the overall judgment is best labeled "ambiguous".

economy
The U.S. economy is entering (or already in) a serious downturn that will be classified as a recession in 2022.
So it seems to me like we're headed into a pretty serious downturn or recession here. I mean, I've been saying we're in a recession for months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key question: Did the U.S. economy experience a recession in 2022 as formally classified by standard arbiters (especially the NBER)?

  1. NBER has not declared a 2022 recession. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is widely treated as the official arbiter of U.S. business cycles, did not date a U.S. recession in 2022. Its listed recessions jump from the COVID recession of February–April 2020 with no additional recession through and including 2022.
  2. GDP did fall for two quarters, but that was not treated as a recession. U.S. real GDP contracted in Q1 and Q2 of 2022, but grew again afterward; despite this, the NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee explicitly did not designate 2022 as a recessionary period, largely because employment, income, and industrial production remained strong and continued to grow.
  3. Consensus by major institutions and media (e.g., Federal Reserve commentary, Congressional Research Service, and major financial press) as of 2023–2025 consistently refer to a 2022 slowdown or growth scare, not an official U.S. recession, and clarify that no NBER recession was recorded for 2022.

Because the prediction specifically said the U.S. was headed into a “serious downturn or recession” that would be (in effect) recognized as such in 2022, and the U.S. did not have an officially dated recession in 2022, the prediction is wrong.

venture
Later in 2022, as startup financing conditions worsen, there will be a noticeable increase in venture deals that use structured terms (e.g., multiple liquidation preferences and other preferences) to preserve prior high valuations for companies that would otherwise be facing down rounds.
Where you start seeing structure in deals is in deals is when a founder is trying to preserve a valuation they got last year... you'll start to see them happen later this year when companies get more desperate.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple independent data points show that, as 2022 wore on and funding conditions tightened, startups increasingly used structured terms (especially enhanced liquidation preferences) to preserve prior high valuations rather than accept headline down rounds.

  • In June 2022, TechCrunch reported that many Series A/B companies that had raised at rich 2021 valuations were now doing “overly structured flat and extension rounds” instead of clean down rounds, and that these structured deals were “the most common thing we’re seeing at this moment.” The article describes investors adding punitive terms (e.g., high liquidation preferences, participating preferred) explicitly to avoid reducing the last round’s valuation. (techcrunch.com)
  • On SVB Financial Group’s Q3 2022 earnings call, management said: “right now, we’re not seeing a lot of down rounds, we’re seeing more structured rounds,” explaining that companies were keeping the same price but adding a 2x liquidation preference and similar terms. This was described as what they were actively seeing in late 2022, and framed as a way to protect valuations while markets reset. (nasdaq.com)
  • Carta’s "State of Private Markets" data for Q1 2019–Q2 2023 show that the share of rounds with investor‑friendly terms like liquidation multipliers and participating preferred rose to unusually high levels by late 2022 / early 2023 (8.2% of rounds in Q1 2023, 6.1% in Q2 2023), which the report characterizes as elevated “when the venture market tightens up and funding is harder to find.” (carta.com) This implies a marked increase in structured deals versus the 2019–2021 period.
  • Valuation Research Corp’s analyses of the post‑2021 downturn note that down rounds reached multiyear highs in 2023, but that statistics undercount effective down rounds because many companies chose flat or structured financings instead. They state explicitly that the number of structured new rounds—featuring downside protection, cumulative dividends, and liquidation preferences at multiples of the original issue price—was increasing, used to avoid marking headline valuations down even though economics were equivalent to a down round. (valuationresearch.com)
  • Follow‑on commentary in 2023 describes structured term sheets as “back in vogue”, with new investors demanding liquidation preferences up to 4x as an alternative to cutting valuations, again confirming the pattern sacks described—structure used to mask what would otherwise be down‑round pricing in a tougher market that began in 2022. (techcrunch.com)

Taken together, these sources show that starting in mid‑ to late‑2022, as startups that had raised at peak 2021 valuations ran into a much tougher funding environment, there was a clear, noticeable increase in structured rounds with features like multiple liquidation preferences and other preferences used specifically to preserve prior valuations. That matches sacks’s prediction on both timing (“later this year”) and mechanism (structure used to avoid down rounds), so the prediction is best judged as right.

techeconomy
By roughly six months after this May 2022 conversation (i.e., by late 2022), the tech talent market will cool substantially, with candidates receiving fewer competing job offers and reduced upward pressure on compensation compared to the prior boom period.
Within the next six months, the talent market is not going to be as hot.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from late 2022 shows that the tech talent market was clearly less overheated than it had been in early 2022, matching Sacks’s directional and timing call.

By the end of 2022, multiple sources describe a marked shift from a candidate‑scarce “talent war” to a market with more job seekers and fewer postings. A 2024 Appcast benchmark report notes that at the end of 2022 and continuing through 2023, tech companies engaged in layoffs after a period of over‑hiring, producing a shrunken market with fewer job postings and “hordes of eager tech employees” chasing those jobs. (scribd.com) An executive‑search survey summarizing late‑2022 conditions similarly concludes that large‑scale tech layoffs increased the supply of candidates and “eased the shortage of recent years.” (kestria.com) Data from layoff trackers and news coverage show that mass tech layoffs began in the last quarter of 2022 and then intensified into 2023, with well over 150,000 tech workers laid off globally in 2022 alone, making it one of the worst years on record for the sector. (newstarget.com) A December 2022 ZipRecruiter/WSJ analysis (reported here via summary) explicitly describes the tech job market as slowing even though many laid‑off workers were still being rehired quickly—indicating a cooling from the prior frenzy rather than a collapse. (reddit.com)

On compensation and bargaining power, the environment was also less “hot” by late 2022. For example, Amazon’s stock had fallen roughly 50% from mid‑2021 to late 2022, leaving many employees 15–50% below target total compensation despite previously aggressive hiring and pay practices. (advisorfinder.com) Combined with hiring slowdowns and layoffs across Big Tech, this reduced candidates’ leverage for ever‑higher offers and multiple competing bids compared with the peak boom in early 2022.

Taken together, these contemporaneous data points show that within roughly six months of the May 2022 episode (by late 2022), the tech talent market had indeed cooled materially from its earlier red‑hot state, even though it remained relatively strong by historical standards. That aligns with Sacks’s prediction that “within the next six months, the talent market is not going to be as hot.”

economy
Following this May 2022 conversation, U.S. residential home prices will begin to decline as rising mortgage rates force sellers to drop prices; the downturn in home prices will materialize in the ensuing housing data (within the next few quarters after May 2022).
I think home prices that's coming, Jason, because like you said, mortgages are going up.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple national home-price indices show that U.S. residential prices peaked in mid‑2022 and then declined for several months, well within the “next few quarters” after the May 2022 podcast:

  • The S&P CoreLogic Case‑Shiller National Index peaked in June 2022 and then fell for at least seven consecutive months; by November 2022 it was down about 3.6% from the June peak, and by January 2023 prices had fallen roughly 5% from that peak. (press.spglobal.com)
  • An analysis of Case‑Shiller data in Fortune notes that national home prices peaked in June 2022 and then declined about 3% (seasonally adjusted) and 5% (not seasonally adjusted) over the following months, describing it as a post‑WWII home‑price correction. (fortune.com)
  • National Association of Realtors data reported by Axios show that the median existing-home price fell about 6% between June and August 2022, meaning price declines were visible in the standard housing data just a couple of months after the May conversation. (axios.com)
  • Over the same period, 30‑year mortgage rates roughly doubled: Freddie Mac’s survey shows the average 30‑year fixed rate rising from around 3% in 2021 to 5.8% in June 2022 and then above 6%–6.7% by September 2022, with Freddie Mac explicitly noting that these higher rates were putting downward pressure on home prices. (freddiemac.gcs-web.com)

These data confirm that U.S. home prices began declining within a few quarters after May 2022, in conjunction with sharply rising mortgage rates, and that this downturn clearly showed up in the standard national housing statistics, matching Sacks’ prediction.

economy
Over the several months following May 2022, U.S. consumers will be significantly hurt financially (e.g., via higher borrowing costs, increased use of credit, and reduced real wages), becoming the next major area of economic weakness after the financial market correction.
the consumer in general, that's the next shoe to drop here, because right now it's been you had this sort of financial correction... Now I think you've got a bunch of different factors. They're going to really hurt the consumer over the next several months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from mid‑ to late‑2022 shows that U.S. consumers experienced exactly the kinds of financial pressures Sacks described, within the “next several months” after May 2022:

  • Higher borrowing costs. After the Fed began hiking in March 2022, consumer borrowing rates climbed quickly. By September–October 2022, average credit‑card APRs had risen from about 16.3% in March to over 18%, with analysts estimating cardholders would pay roughly $20–21 billion more in interest in 2022 than they otherwise would have. Mortgage and HELOC rates also jumped several percentage points over the year, materially increasing monthly payments for new or variable‑rate borrowers. (cnbc.com)

  • Increased reliance on credit. The New York Fed’s Q2 2022 Household Debt and Credit report showed total household debt up to $16.15 trillion, with credit‑card balances alone rising by $46 billion in that quarter and up 13% year‑over‑year—the largest such increase in more than 20 years. (resources.newyorkfed.org) By Q4 2022, credit‑card balances had climbed to about $986 billion, surpassing the pre‑pandemic peak. (nasdaq.com) This indicates households were leaning more on revolving credit as prices and rates rose.

  • Falling real wages. BLS data show that real (inflation‑adjusted) earnings were declining over exactly this period. Real average hourly earnings fell 3.0% over the 12 months ending May 2022, and even by late 2022 they were still down roughly 1.7–2.8% year‑over‑year, with real weekly earnings falling even more because average hours worked also slipped. (bls.gov) That’s a clear “reduced real wages” hit to consumers’ purchasing power.

  • Drawdown of savings / thinner financial cushions. The U.S. personal saving rate dropped to about 2.7% in June 2022—its lowest level in roughly 15 years—and remained very low through late 2022 (around 2–4%), vs. a pre‑pandemic norm near 7–8%. (cnbc.com) This shows households largely stopped adding to savings and were instead using income and prior savings (and, as above, more credit) to maintain spending.

  • Consumers as a key macro weak spot. The University of Michigan consumer‑sentiment index fell to 50.0 in June 2022, the lowest reading on record since the survey began in the late 1940s, reflecting sharply worse assessments of personal finances and buying conditions amid high inflation. (reddit.com) Subsequent commentary through late 2022 and into 2023 repeatedly highlighted strained household budgets and very weak sentiment as a central vulnerability, even as labor markets and corporate profits initially held up.

There is nuance: aggregate debt‑service ratios and pandemic‑era excess savings meant the consumer sector did not immediately collapse into a deep consumption‑driven recession, and overall spending remained surprisingly resilient for a time. (congress.gov) But Sacks’ specific mechanisms—higher borrowing costs, more use of credit, and declining real wages materially hurting consumers within months of May 2022, making households the next clear area of economic strain after the market sell‑off—did in fact materialize on schedule. On balance, the prediction is best judged as right.

economy
U.S. employment has already peaked by May 2022, and the unemployment rate will rise from its then-current lows in the ensuing months.
Unemployment's going up. I think employment has peaked.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key labor‑market data contradict both parts of Sacks’s prediction.

1. "Employment has peaked" by May 2022

  • In May 2022 the labor market was still adding large numbers of jobs: nonfarm payrolls rose by about 241,000 that month, and then continued to increase every single month through the rest of 2022 and throughout 2023. Total nonfarm employment expanded further in 2024 (over 2 million additional jobs that year), showing that aggregate employment clearly peaked after 2022, not in May 2022. (bls.gov)
  • BLS data for April 2023–April 2024 alone show payrolls rising from 155.5 million to 158.3 million, again demonstrating that employment levels were making new highs well past the prediction date. (bls.gov)

2. "Unemployment's going up" from the May 2022 lows in the ensuing months

  • At the time of the episode, the U.S. unemployment rate was 3.6% in May 2022, the third consecutive month at that level. (virginiaworks.gov)
  • In the following months, unemployment did not begin a sustained rise. It actually dipped to 3.5% in July 2022 (matching pre‑COVID lows) and was again 3.5% a year later in July 2023. (realestateguysradio.com)
  • The jobless rate then fell further to 3.4% in 2023, a new roughly 50‑year low, meaning the post‑May‑2022 period included lower unemployment than at the time of his prediction, not an immediate uptrend. (apnews.com)
  • A clear and lasting rise in unemployment only shows up later, with the national rate climbing into the low‑4% range by mid‑2024 and around 4.1% by early 2025—well after the “ensuing months” Sacks was talking about. (bls.gov)

Because (a) total employment continued to make new highs for years after May 2022, contradicting the claim that it had already peaked, and (b) unemployment first stayed flat/edges lower and even hit new lows before rising meaningfully much later, Sacks’s prediction is best classified as wrong.

economy
Following the roughly 14% destruction of global wealth observed by May 2022, a large recession in the real economy is inevitable and will materialize in the near term (within the subsequent 1–2 years).
I think like recession now is just inevitable. You point you can't have 14% of global wealth wiped out practically overnight and not have that translate into a big recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that, after roughly a 14% destruction of global wealth by May 2022, a large recession in the real economy would be inevitable and would materialize in the near term (1–2 years).

Key checkpoints between May 13, 2022 and May 13, 2024:

  1. United States (most relevant real-economy benchmark)

    • The U.S. had two quarters of negative real GDP growth in early 2022, but that was before the podcast and was widely characterized as a “technical” or borderline case. The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the standard arbiter for U.S. recessions, did not declare any U.S. recession for 2022–2024 up through mid‑2024.
    • U.S. real GDP continued to grow overall in 2022, 2023, and into early 2024, and the labor market remained historically tight with low unemployment and strong job creation. This is inconsistent with a “big recession” in the real economy.
  2. Global picture

    • The IMF and World Bank documented a significant global slowdown, high inflation, and marked financial‑asset drawdowns post‑2021, but not a large, synchronized global real‑economy recession in 2022–2024. Instead, they described a period of “slow growth,” “stagflationary pressures,” and “fragmented” outcomes where some countries had mild or technical recessions, but the world economy as a whole continued to grow in real terms.
    • There were localized recessions (e.g., brief downturns in parts of Europe, the U.K., and specific emerging markets), yet these episodes were generally shallow or short‑lived rather than the sweeping “big recession” implied by the prediction.
  3. Timing condition (1–2 years)

    • The prediction explicitly tied inevitability to the near term after May 13, 2022—i.e., by roughly May 13, 2024. By that point, despite substantial asset‑price declines and tighter monetary policy, the real‑economy outcomes were better described as a rough landing / soft-ish landing rather than a large, globally pervasive recession.

Because no major arbiter (e.g., NBER for the U.S., nor major international institutions for the world economy as a whole) characterizes 2022–2024 as a large real‑economy recession, and the dominant pattern was continued (if weak) growth plus localized, mostly mild recessions, the prediction that a big recession was “inevitable” in the subsequent 1–2 years did not come true.

Therefore, the appropriate classification is: wrong.

venture
Large, traditional venture funds will slow their deployment pace after the 2020–2021 boom; instead of deploying funds in roughly one year, they will revert to a roughly three-year deployment cycle over the coming period.
However, there will be the big traditional venture funds will have large funds, but they're going to deploy them much more slowly. These one year pace of deployments, they're going to stop... They'll be back to three.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2022 shows that venture funds, especially post‑boom vintages, have materially slowed deployment and shifted toward multi‑year investment periods, aligning with Sacks’ prediction.

  1. Deployment pace clearly slowed after the 2020–2021 boom

    • Carta’s analysis of >2,000 VC funds shows that 2022‑vintage funds were only about 43% deployed after two years, versus ~50–60% for 2018–2020 vintages at the same age, and that the second year of deployment for 2022 funds was the slowest of any vintage since 2017. (carta.com)
    • Independent analyses (e.g., IDC Ventures’ Market Pulse) cite the same 43% figure and describe 2022 vintages as having “sluggish capital deployment,” confirming that capital is being put to work far more slowly than in the 2020–2021 period. (medium.com)
  2. Industry commentary now explicitly points to 3‑plus‑year investment periods

    • A 2024 climate‑funding analysis, using Carta data, notes that 2020 funds deployed ~60% of capital within 24 months while 2022 funds deployed only ~43%, and concludes that funds announced in 2023–24 are trending toward 3–4‑year investment periods—a direct confirmation that the “one‑year pace” of the boom has given way to a multi‑year cycle. (slideshare.net)
    • A 2025 overview of U.S. VC notes that the 2020–2022 fundraising surge left managers with substantial dry powder, and that weaker exits and LP pullbacks in 2023–2024 forced funds—especially large, established ones that now receive ~80% of capital—to invest more cautiously over longer periods instead of rushing into deals. (afurrier.com)
  3. Fundraising cadence for big, traditional firms also lengthened, consistent with slower deployment

    • An analysis of U.S. venture fund cycles finds that during the 2020–2021 boom many firms raised new funds every 10–15 months, but by 2024 the median gap between successive funds had stretched to ~24 months (with most between 20 and 34 months). This doubling of time between funds is consistent with managers no longer deploying entire vehicles in roughly a year. (unlistedintel.com)
    • Carta’s 2025 fund‑performance data show that even rebounding 2023 vintages are only about 58% deployed after six quarters, still implying a multi‑year path to full deployment, not the near‑one‑year cycles seen at the peak. (linkedin.com)

Taken together, these data and commentaries show that the rapid one‑year deployment behavior of 2020–2021 has largely ended and that large, traditional venture funds are again operating on roughly three‑year (or longer) deployment cycles. That matches the substance and direction of Sacks’ prediction, so it is best judged as right.

ventureeconomy
During the downturn beginning in 2022, venture funding will be available for startups that exhibit high growth and moderate cash burn, while startups with only moderate growth and high burn will be unable to raise capital and will fail or be forced into drastic restructuring.
So in a weird way... startups with high growth and moderate burn will get funded through this downturn starts with moderate growth and high burn will not get funded.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2022–2024 shows that the VC downturn Sacks anticipated did occur, and that investors systematically favored high‑growth, capital‑efficient startups while pulling back hardest from high‑burn, mediocre‑growth companies.

  • Clear downturn in venture funding starting in 2022. Global VC funding fell ~35% in 2022 vs. 2021 and then another ~42% in 2023, reaching the lowest level in years, with deal counts also dropping sharply.(livemint.com) This created exactly the “downturn” environment the prediction was about.
  • Investor criteria shifted to “efficient growth” (high growth, moderate burn). VC commentary and guidance from 2022 onward consistently emphasize capital efficiency, burn multiple, and Rule of 40 over “growth at all costs.” TechCrunch in April 2023 described a “tectonic shift,” saying capital efficiency had become the new filter and that companies bleeding cash with weak efficiency metrics would be deemed “default dead” or face sharply reduced valuations.(techcrunch.com) Other analyses and VC guides explicitly note a post‑2022 move away from rewarding pure top‑line growth toward sustainable, efficient growth and strong unit economics.(raisebetter.capital) A 2025 overview even cites David Sacks’s burn multiple as a now‑standard metric and uses Notion’s low burn multiple as a reason it could attract “massive funding rounds even in tight markets” – a direct example of high growth with moderate/efficient burn continuing to get funded.(medium.com)
  • High‑burn, modest‑growth startups repeatedly failed to raise and were forced to shut down or restructure. CB Insights’ large compilation of startup failure post‑mortems documents many 2022–2023 closures where unsustainable burn plus insufficient growth meant new funding could not be raised in the tighter VC market. For example, Fast (one‑click checkout) had burn “far exceed” revenue growth; when the market turned, it couldn’t raise more capital and shut down. Rapid‑delivery and other high‑burn models similarly folded or sold in 2022 as funding tightened.(scribd.com) Broader reports on the “funding winter” note tens of thousands of startup closures in 2023, with many citing high burn, lack of clear profitability, and inability to secure follow‑on capital as key causes.(livemint.com)
  • Meanwhile, selective exceptions with extreme growth still got funded, not contradicting the rule. Even within the funding winter, sectors like generative AI raised record sums while overall startup funding was down ~65% from 2021, illustrating that investors still backed very high‑growth stories, but in a far more selective way.(globaldata.com) Those winners generally also stressed efficiency and strong business metrics, consistent with the idea that “high growth + reasonable burn” remained fundable while weak or moderate growth + heavy burn became untenable.

Taken together, the data and post‑mortems show that after 2022, venture capital markets did exactly what Sacks predicted at a stylized level: during the downturn, funding concentrated in companies showing strong growth with controlled burn and solid unit economics, while many startups with only moderate growth and high burn were unable to raise, and were forced into shutdowns, fire‑sales, or drastic cost‑cutting. The prediction is therefore best characterized as right in its core claim about how funding would bifurcate during the 2022+ downturn.

venturemarketstech
After the 2022 market correction, crossover hedge funds that had aggressively entered late-stage private tech (e.g., Tiger Global, D1, Coatue) will effectively withdraw from new private tech investing for an extended period, leaving traditional VCs as the primary capital providers.
the crossover investors are washed out of the system. They're gone. I mean Tiger's already deployed all of its capital. And I don't know when they're going to be back.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2022 shows that the big crossover hedge funds did sharply pull back from new private tech investing for several years, and they stopped being the dominant marginal capital in late‑stage rounds, which is the essence of Sacks’s prediction.

Key points:

  1. Crossover activity collapsed post‑2021
    A 2023 VC review notes that major crossover funds such as Tiger Global, Temasek, Coatue, and SoftBank went from participating in $233 billion of VC deals in 2021 to just $34 billion in 2023. It characterizes this as a “retrenchment” that had a notable impact on late‑stage funding, with corporates and sovereign wealth funds “picking up the slack” as crossover funds scaled back. (allianceequityresearch.com)
    An India‑focused funding analysis similarly describes ~90% compression in crossover‑fund activity, explicitly citing Tiger Global and SoftBank as having “significantly reduced deal‑making.” (tice.news)
    This is consistent with “effectively withdrawing” as dominant late‑stage capital providers.

  2. Tiger Global specifically pulled back and shrank its venture footprint
    Coverage of Tiger’s strategy after its 2022 losses says it “actively slowed its venture investments in 2022, curtailing their size and number,” and shifted away from later‑stage growth equity toward earlier‑stage VC bets. (thewealthadvisor.com)
    When Tiger finally closed its next private fund (PIP XVI) in 2024, it was only $2.2 billion, far below the $6 billion target and a fraction of its $12.7 billion 2021 fund, underscoring how much its late‑stage firepower had diminished and how cautious LPs had become. (ft.com)
    This supports the idea that Tiger was not rapidly redeploying massive late‑stage capital after 2022.

  3. Coatue dramatically reduced deal volume and shifted strategy
    Crunchbase data show that Coatue’s venture deal count fell from 168 deals in 2021 to just 29 in 2023 (an 82% decline), and the total dollar amount of those deals dropped from about $43 billion to $4.1 billion. (news.crunchbase.com)
    While Coatue remained active in some large structured or AI‑related financings (e.g., leading a $1.1 billion round for AI cloud startup CoreWeave in 2024), these are exceptions within a much smaller, more selective portfolio—consistent with a retreat from the broad, aggressive late‑stage strategy that defined the 2020–21 boom. (marketwatch.com)

  4. D1 and other crossovers also refocused away from new late‑stage privates
    Reporting on D1 Capital and similar crossover funds notes that after the tech sell‑off, D1 explicitly told startups it was slowing new private investments and instead was reallocating toward beaten‑down public names. (theinformation.com)
    A broader 2025 industry overview summarizes that when markets turned in 2022, many crossover investors pulled back dramatically from private tech investing, particularly at late stage; crossover capital remained in play only in a more limited, selective way. (afurrier.com)

  5. Late‑stage capital shifted back to traditional VC/PE and corporates
    With crossover funds scaling back, late‑stage companies increasingly relied on large, traditional VC and growth‑equity firms and on corporates/sovereign wealth funds. The same 2023 review explicitly says corporates and SWFs “picked up the slack” as crossover funds retreated. (allianceequityresearch.com)
    Separately, PitchBook data cited by the Financial Times show 2024 U.S. VC fundraising heavily concentrated in a handful of big Silicon Valley firms (e.g., Andreessen Horowitz, General Catalyst, Thrive, Iconiq), which jointly raised the majority of VC dollars, reinforcing that traditional VCs became the main organized capital pool while crossover funds were nursing losses and retrenching. (ft.com)

  6. They did eventually come back—especially in AI—but after a multi‑year lull
    By late 2024–2025, crossover names like Tiger Global and Coatue reappear in marquee AI rounds (e.g., Tiger planning to join a multibillion‑dollar OpenAI round; Coatue leading or joining billion‑dollar financings for CoreWeave), and Coatue is raising new AI‑focused capital. (reuters.com)
    However, that resurgence followed roughly two to three years (mid‑2022 through much of 2024) of sharply reduced, selective activity compared to their 2020–21 role. During that period, they were no longer the primary marginal capital in late‑stage private tech.

Putting this together: crossover hedge funds didn’t disappear entirely, but they did substantially withdraw from aggressive late‑stage private tech investing for several years after the 2022 correction, and other investors—especially large traditional VC/growth funds plus corporates/SWFs—became the main sources of capital in that segment. That outcome aligns closely with the normalized version of Sacks’s prediction, even if his on‑air phrasing (“they’re gone”) was somewhat hyperbolic and they eventually returned in a narrower, AI‑focused way.

politicsgovernment
The U.S. Supreme Court will not overturn the constitutional right to same‑sex marriage or the constitutional protections related to contraception; no national legal regime outlawing contraception will emerge.
So I just don't buy this idea that now we're going to be overturning gay marriage, that we're going to be overturning, like, for example, contraception. I just don't buy it. Why? Because nobody in the country is arguing for outlawing contraception.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the U.S. Supreme Court has not overturned the constitutional right to same‑sex marriage. Obergefell v. Hodges (2015) remains binding precedent, and the Court recently declined to hear a case (Davis v. Ermold) that explicitly asked it to overturn Obergefell, rejecting the petition without comment and leaving nationwide marriage equality in place.(apnews.com)

Likewise, the Court has not overturned the constitutional protections for contraception established in Griswold v. Connecticut and its progeny; those decisions are still good law. Justice Clarence Thomas’s Dobbs concurrence did call for reconsidering Griswold (contraception) and Obergefell (same‑sex marriage), but the Court has not acted on that suggestion, and Griswold’s recognition of a constitutional right for married couples to use contraception remains in force.(washingtonpost.com)

There is also no national legal regime outlawing contraception. Federal law does not ban contraceptives; instead, Congress has seen repeated efforts to protect access via the Right to Contraception Act and related bills, and the FDA continues to approve and even expand over‑the‑counter contraceptive options. Access has become more fragmented, with many residents in states that restrict or complicate contraceptive access, and federal and state policies have reduced funding or coverage in some contexts, but these are not a nationwide prohibition.(guttmacher.org)

Because (1) Obergefell and the core constitutional protections for contraception remain intact, and (2) no nationwide legal ban on contraception has emerged, Sacks’s prediction is substantively correct as of the current date.

politicsgovernment
There remained, as of May–June 2022, a possible outcome in which Chief Justice Roberts would secure one additional vote to uphold Roe v. Wade while simultaneously modifying it to permit restrictive state laws such as Mississippi’s 15‑week ban.
So let's assume that this is the decision. By the way, it's still possible that Roberts could peel off a vote, and then we would get a scenario in which Roe is upheld while modifying it to allow, you know, laws like the Mississippi law.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction described a possible outcome in which Chief Justice Roberts would “peel off a vote” so that:

  1. Roe v. Wade would be upheld, and
  2. It would be modified to allow restrictive state laws like Mississippi’s 15‑week ban.

What actually happened in Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization on June 24, 2022 was:

  • The Supreme Court upheld Mississippi’s 15‑week abortion ban.
  • A 5–4 majority explicitly overturned Roe v. Wade and Planned Parenthood v. Casey, holding that the Constitution does not confer a right to abortion.
  • Chief Justice Roberts concurred only in the judgment to uphold Mississippi’s law but did not join the portion of the opinion that overturned Roe and Casey; he proposed a more limited ruling that would stop at upholding the 15‑week ban while not fully overruling Roe/Casey, and he did not attract an additional vote to that position.

Because no justice joined Roberts in a compromise position and Roe was not upheld in any form, the scenario the predictor treated as still possible — Roe upheld but modified to allow laws like Mississippi’s — did not occur.

Therefore, the prediction is wrong: the specific outcome he floated never materialized, and Roe v. Wade was overturned instead.

politicsgovernment
If Roe v. Wade is overturned along the lines of the leaked Alito draft, Democrats in Congress will attempt to codify Roe in federal law, but that effort will fail because they will not obtain the votes needed to overcome or eliminate the Senate filibuster; thereafter, abortion policy will default to state control.
What that will mean is then, like Tom said, we'll have a vote in Congress. The Democrats will see if they can basically uphold Roe by through a law which Biden would then sign. I think the issue there is they have to get enough votes to break the filibuster, and I don't know if they're willing to do that. So let's assume that fails. Then it goes to the states.View on YouTube
Explanation
  1. Condition met: Roe overturned along lines of leaked Alito draft. On June 24, 2022, the Supreme Court decided Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization, explicitly overruling Roe v. Wade and Planned Parenthood v. Casey and returning abortion regulation to “the people and their elected representatives.” Analyses note the final majority opinion was substantially similar to the earlier leaked Alito draft. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Democrats in Congress attempted to codify Roe. The Women’s Health Protection Act (WHPA), designed to enshrine Roe/Casey-style abortion protections in federal statute, passed the House in September 2021 (218–211) and again on July 15, 2022 (219–210) after Roe was overturned. (en.wikipedia.org) These were explicit attempts by congressional Democrats to “codify Roe” in federal law.

  3. Those efforts failed due to lack of votes to overcome/eliminate the Senate filibuster. In the Senate, WHPA failed on key cloture/advancement votes. On May 11, 2022, the bill to codify abortion protections received 49–51, far short of the 60 votes needed to overcome a filibuster. (wboi.org) President Biden later publicly supported a filibuster exception to codify Roe, but Senators Manchin and Sinema maintained their opposition to changing filibuster rules, and Biden acknowledged Democrats did not have the votes to alter the filibuster. (washingtonpost.com) No federal law codifying Roe has been enacted since.

  4. Post-Roe, abortion policy has defaulted to state control in practice. The Dobbs majority expressly stated that Roe and Casey are overruled and that “the authority to regulate abortion is returned to the people and their elected representatives,” with the decision “devolving to state governments the authority to regulate any aspect of abortion that federal law does not preempt.” (en.wikipedia.org) After Dobbs, a patchwork of state laws emerged: some states implemented near-total bans via trigger laws or revived old statutes, while others protected or expanded access, confirming that abortion policy is now largely determined at the state level absent a federal codification. (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, the predicted sequence occurred: Roe was overturned along the lines of the draft; Democrats tried and failed to codify Roe because they lacked the votes to overcome or scrap the filibuster; and in the aftermath, abortion regulation has effectively defaulted to state control. Hence the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
Following a decision overturning Roe v. Wade, roughly half of U.S. states (around 25, mostly blue) will see little or no change in abortion access; in about 12 states with trigger or pre‑existing restrictive laws, substantial restrictions or bans will immediately take effect; and in approximately 12–13 remaining purple states, abortion policy will become a major contested issue and legislative battleground.
So right off the bat, let's say in about half the states, 25 of them or so, I don't think there's going to be a change in about 12 states. These restrictions that are already on the books are going to go into effect, and then we're going to have about 12 or 13 states that become battlegrounds, um, purple states basically.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that, after Roe was overturned, the U.S. would roughly sort into three groups: (1) about half the states with little/no change in abortion access; (2) about 12 states where pre‑existing trigger or other restrictive laws would immediately take effect; and (3) roughly a dozen remaining purple states where abortion became a major legislative and electoral battleground.

What actually happened closely matches this structure:

  1. States with little or no new restriction (roughly half the country).

    • In the year after Dobbs, analyses noted that abortion "remains legal and protected" in about 20 states, largely on the coasts and some upper‑Midwest states, with that number growing to about 29 states plus D.C. by late 2024 as more blue or blue‑leaning states added statutory or constitutional protections (e.g., CA, NY, WA, CO, IL, VT, MI, etc.).
    • These are predominantly Democratic‑leaning states where the end of Roe did not reduce access; many actually expanded protections, but in terms of restrictions imposed on residents his claim of “about half the states” seeing no new ban is directionally accurate.

    Sources describe 20 states with legal and protected abortion one year post‑Dobbs and later 29 states plus D.C. with abortion legal and protected while bans cluster elsewhere, i.e., roughly half or more of states maintaining access. (newswise.com)

  2. States where pre‑existing bans or trigger laws quickly took effect (≈12 states).

    • Before the decision, the Guttmacher Institute identified 13 trigger‑ban states whose laws were designed to take effect automatically or by rapid state action if Roe fell (AR, ID, KY, LA, MS, MO, ND, OK, SD, TN, TX, UT, WY).(guttmacher.org)
    • After Dobbs in June 2022, those trigger bans (plus some revived pre‑Roe bans) rapidly went into force, and by late 2022–2023, around 14 states were enforcing total or near‑total abortion bans, overwhelmingly in the South and interior.(guttmacher.org)
    • That is essentially the group Sacks described as “about 12 states” where “restrictions that are already on the books are going to go into effect,” and his order‑of‑magnitude is very close to the actual 13 trigger‑ban states.
  3. Battleground purple states (≈12–13).

    • Since Dobbs, abortion has become a central contested issue in a band of politically mixed states: Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Montana, and Vermont voted on abortion‑related referenda in 2022; Kansas and Kentucky (red or purple) rejected anti‑abortion amendments, while Michigan and Vermont adopted pro‑choice constitutional protections.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • In 2024, 10 states had abortion on the ballot (AZ, CO, FL, MD, MO, MT, NE, NV, NY, SD), many of them classic or emerging purple states (AZ, MO, NV, NE, FL, MT). Seven passed pro‑choice measures; three failed, underscoring how hotly contested policy is in this middle group.(time.com)
    • Media and research summaries repeatedly characterize the post‑Dobbs landscape as a sharp divide between solidly restrictive and solidly protective states, with a remaining tier of states—largely in the Midwest, interior West, and some Sunbelt states—where abortion is the focal point of ongoing legislative fights and ballot campaigns.(theguardian.com)

    The number of such battleground states is not fixed, but the set of states where abortion is the defining policy and electoral issue is on the order of a dozen, in line with his “12 or 13 states that become battlegrounds.”

Because the pattern he forecast—a three‑way split into (a) roughly half of states with continued access, (b) roughly a dozen states where pre‑existing bans immediately bit, and (c) roughly a dozen purple‑state battlegrounds—does in fact describe the post‑Dobbs map reasonably well (even if exact counts and which states fall in which bucket have evolved), this prediction is best classified as right in substance.

politicsgovernment
In the post‑Roe environment, state-level politicians who adopt abortion positions aligned with the median voter in their states (rather than absolutist positions) will gain electoral advantage over time.
I think where this will go is, I think politicians who figure out where the center is and figure out where most of the people in their state are, are the ones who are going to benefit.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available post‑Dobbs evidence broadly supports Sacks’s prediction that, in a post‑Roe world, state‑level politicians whose abortion positions are closer to the median voter in their state gain an electoral edge over more absolutist positions.

  1. Voters have repeatedly chosen policies near the statewide median over absolutist bans. Since Dobbs, voters have backed abortion‑rights or viability‑based measures in a wide range of states: Kansas rejected a constitutional amendment that would have allowed near‑total bans by ~59–41 in 2022, with the pro‑rights side winning in every congressional district, including deep‑red ones.(en.wikipedia.org) Kentucky voters likewise defeated a 2022 amendment stating there is no constitutional right to abortion.(rasmussenreports.com) In 2022 and 2023, California, Michigan, Vermont and then Ohio approved constitutional protections for abortion up to viability, often by double‑digit margins even in states that lean Republican in federal races.(kff.org)(en.wikipedia.org) In 2024, voters again adopted viability‑oriented or broad abortion‑rights amendments in Arizona, Colorado, Maryland, Montana and Nevada,(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org) while an abortion‑rights measure in Florida still drew 57% support despite failing the 60% supermajority requirement.(en.wikipedia.org) The main exception, Nebraska, saw voters choose a relatively less absolutist restriction—a constitutional ban after the first trimester with rape/incest/medical‑emergency exceptions (Initiative 434) over a broader rights‑to‑viability measure (Initiative 439)(en.wikipedia.org)(en.wikipedia.org)—still consistent with voters gravitating toward a perceived middle ground for that very conservative state.

  2. Politicians visibly tied to hardline positions have been punished, while those closer to state opinion have done better. In Kentucky, Democrat Andy Beshear won reelection governor in 2023 by over 5 points in a deep‑red state; reporting credits a viral ad highlighting that Republican Daniel Cameron had backed a near‑total ban with no rape or incest exceptions as a key factor in Cameron’s loss, even Kentucky GOP leaders acknowledged its impact.(en.wikipedia.org) In Virginia, Governor Youngkin and legislative Republicans framed a 15‑week ban with exceptions as a "consensus" limit, but polls showed voters split on that policy and broadly seeing GOP abortion positions as too restrictive or "extreme";(theguardian.com)(washingtonpost.com) Democrats ran squarely against new restrictions and went on to win full control of the legislature in 2023, blocking Youngkin’s proposal—analyses explicitly linked GOP losses to their abortion stance.(stateline.org) In red and purple states with abortion on the ballot, Democratic/state‑level pro‑rights candidates systematically ran ahead of generic partisan baselines when their message matched the broadly pro‑Roe preferences revealed by the ballot questions.(kff.org)(judiciary.senate.gov)

  3. Quantitative studies find an electoral penalty for hardline anti‑abortion positions, implying a relative advantage for moderation. KFF’s analysis of the 2022 midterms using AP VoteCast found that voters for whom Dobbs/abortion was the most important issue backed Democratic House candidates by about 70–25, and that the Dobbs decision had a "major impact" on turnout and candidate choice for many key groups; this helps explain Democrats’ better‑than‑expected performance, particularly where abortion was salient.(kff.org) A political‑science style analysis of 2022 races estimates that Republican candidates’ pro‑life stance and the Dobbs backlash likely cost the GOP around 1 percentage point nationally, and that, after controlling for incumbency and Trump alignment, candidates who maintained hardline pro‑life positions lost roughly 0.6 points more than relatively more moderate Republicans—small but real margins that matter in close races.(decivitate.jamesjheaney.com) That is exactly the kind of marginal advantage Sacks was pointing to: over time, being closer to voter sentiment on abortion appears to yield electoral gains at the margins, while absolutist positions (especially near‑total bans without broad exceptions) have been electorally costly.

  4. Caveats. The effect size is modest, and many other factors (partisanship, Trump, the economy) shape election outcomes. There are also outliers like Nebraska’s relatively strict 2024 amendment(en.wikipedia.org) and ongoing efforts in states like Missouri to roll back voter‑approved abortion‑rights measures(apnews.com). But taken together—ballot‑measure results across ideologically diverse states, high‑salience gubernatorial and legislative races (Kentucky, Virginia, Michigan, Ohio), and quantitative estimates of an abortion‑related penalty for hardliners—the post‑Roe electoral record aligns with Sacks’s claim in direction and mechanism. Politicians whose positions track where “most of the people in their state are” on abortion have, on balance, fared better than those holding uncompromising extremes.

politics
In states where abortion policy becomes contested after Roe is overturned, politicians who support abortion bans without exceptions for rape and incest will be electorally punished by voters.
if the pro-life side refuses to make compromises for, say, rape and incest, they're going to be punished by voters in those states.View on YouTube
Explanation

There is clear evidence both for and against Sachs’s prediction, so the overall judgment is mixed rather than definitively right or wrong.

Evidence consistent with the prediction (punishment in contested states):

  • In Michigan’s 2022 governor race, Republican Tudor Dixon explicitly opposed abortion exceptions for rape and incest, saying her only exception was to save the mother’s life. She lost to Democratic Gov. Gretchen Whitmer by a wide margin at the same time Michigan voters passed Proposal 3, a constitutional amendment protecting abortion rights, by roughly 57–43%. Analysts explicitly link Dixon’s defeat to her hard‑line abortion position. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • In Pennsylvania’s 2022 governor race, Republican Doug Mastriano supported a ban from conception with no exceptions for rape, incest, or even the mother’s life. He lost to Democrat Josh Shapiro by about 15 points in a swing state where the race had been expected to be closer; coverage repeatedly flagged his extreme abortion stance as part of his broader far‑right profile. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • In Arizona’s 2022 Senate race, Republican Blake Masters backed a 15‑week ban with no rape or incest exceptions and supported a broad federal “personhood” law. Mark Kelly defeated him 51.4%–46.5%; post‑election analysis notes that Kelly heavily attacked Masters over abortion and that Masters’s stance hurt him, especially with women. (politifact.com)

  • In Georgia’s 2022 Senate race, Herschel Walker repeatedly said there was “no exception” in his mind for abortion bans, before trying to walk that back later. He underperformed the more conventional anti‑abortion Republican governor Brian Kemp and ultimately lost the runoff to Raphael Warnock, even as Kemp was easily re‑elected—suggesting voters were less willing to back the more absolutist candidate. (washingtonpost.com)

  • Voters also repeatedly rejected very restrictive abortion positions via statewide ballot measures: Kansas (a red state) defeated an anti‑abortion constitutional amendment 59–41 in August 2022; Kentucky voters rejected Amendment 2, which would have declared no state constitutional right to abortion; Michigan, Vermont, and California all voted to enshrine abortion protections; and in 2023, Ohio voters (in a Trump‑leaning state) adopted a constitutional amendment guaranteeing broad reproductive rights. These outcomes are widely interpreted as backlash against abortion bans and particularly against extreme or no‑exception policies. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Polling shows that rape and incest exceptions are overwhelmingly popular, with around 77–79% of Americans supporting legal abortion in those circumstances, underscoring why no‑exception positions are politically vulnerable in competitive environments. (poynter.org)

Taken together, these cases show that in a number of high‑profile, genuinely contested states and races, politicians or campaigns associated with bans lacking rape/incest exceptions either lost badly or saw their positions repudiated at the ballot box—very much in line with Sachs’s expectation about electoral punishment.

Evidence against the prediction (no clear punishment in many states):

  • At the same time, many states have enacted or maintained bans with no rape/incest exceptions, and the politicians responsible have largely not been removed from office. Fact‑checking and policy reviews in 2022–23 found that roughly 15 states with new or impending strict abortion laws offered no exceptions for rape or incest (including Alabama, Missouri, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas and others), and these bans largely remain in force. (politifact.com)

  • Texas is a particularly important counterexample. The state implemented a six‑week “heartbeat” ban and then a near‑total ban that explicitly excludes rape and incest exceptions. Gov. Greg Abbott has publicly defended these laws and rejected adding such exceptions, yet he was re‑elected governor in 2022 by about 11 points. Reporting after the election noted that, despite broad public opposition to Texas’s near‑total ban, outrage over abortion access “didn’t translate into enough votes” to stop Republicans from sweeping statewide races—directly contradicting the idea that such politicians are reliably punished even where the policy is hotly contested. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Similar patterns exist in other deep‑red states like Tennessee, Alabama, Oklahoma, and Kentucky, where near‑total bans without rape/incest exceptions (or with extremely narrow, hard‑to‑use exceptions) have taken effect and Republican trifectas have remained intact, with no large‑scale electoral backlash sufficient to change party control. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • In some cases, Republican politicians have responded not by being voted out but by moderating their rhetoric. For example, J.D. Vance initially compared abortion to slavery and questioned rape/incest exceptions, then later explicitly endorsed those exceptions while emphasizing that states should set their own rules—suggesting perceived electoral costs for hard‑line positions, but also that politicians can adapt and remain viable rather than simply being "punished" at the polls. (washingtonpost.com)

  • Broad 2022 midterm analyses generally agree that Dobbs and abortion rights hurt Republicans overall and helped Democrats avoid a “red wave,” especially in swing states, but they also note that in strongly Republican states such as Texas, the same issue did not prevent GOP victories, even where the underlying policies were highly controversial. (theguardian.com)

Why the outcome is ambiguous:

Sachs framed his claim in general terms—“if the pro‑life side refuses to make compromises for, say, rape and incest, they’re going to be punished by voters in those states.” What we actually see is:

  • In competitive or purple states and in direct statewide referenda, no‑exception or very hard‑line abortion positions have often been punished: candidates with such stances have lost major races, and restrictive measures have been defeated.
  • In many deep‑red states where abortion is nevertheless intensely contested in public opinion and activism, politicians backing bans with no rape/incest exceptions have so far avoided serious electoral punishment and continue to govern under those laws.

Because significant real‑world evidence points in both directions, and because key terms like “states where abortion policy becomes contested” and “punished” are imprecise (does it mean losing any one race, losing control of state government, or simply facing public disapproval?), the overall verdict on the prediction can’t be cleanly labeled as simply correct or incorrect. The pattern is partially validating Sachs’s logic in swing contexts but clearly not universal, which makes the outcome best characterized as ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
Politicians in either party who maintain absolutist, no‑compromise positions on abortion in the post‑Roe legislative battles will tend to lose elections relative to those who compromise.
And if the absolutists in both parties refuse to do that, I think they're going to lose elections.View on YouTube
Explanation

There is substantial evidence that very strict, no‑exceptions anti‑abortion stances have been an electoral liability for Republicans since Dobbs, which supports part of Sacks’s logic, but the broader, symmetric claim about “absolutists in both parties” generally losing relative to compromisers is not clearly borne out.

After Roe was overturned, abortion became a top voting issue and materially boosted Democrats in 2022. KFF/AP VoteCast found that about half of voters said the Dobbs decision had a “major impact” on which candidates they supported, with those voters breaking heavily for Democrats. Abortion-related ballot measures in 2022 consistently went in the abortion‑rights direction, even in red states like Kansas and Kentucky, where voters rejected constitutional amendments that would have removed or denied abortion rights. In 2023, Ohio voters approved a constitutional amendment protecting abortion rights by a large margin. These results signal broad resistance to maximal abortion bans. (kff.org)

In key statewide races, Republican candidates with very hardline positions (near‑total bans, no rape/incest exceptions) underperformed or lost. Michigan gubernatorial candidate Tudor Dixon, who opposed abortion except to save the mother’s life, lost by more than 10 points in an election where a pro‑abortion‑rights constitutional amendment passed and where analysts explicitly noted that abortion and negative ads about her stance hurt her. Minnesota’s Scott Jensen initially backed a ban with no rape/incest exceptions and had to partially walk it back; the race became heavily about abortion and he lost by a comfortable margin. Post‑election analyses and GOP strategists have repeatedly said Republicans’ “extreme” abortion positions and failure to find a middle ground helped blunt the expected red wave. (en.wikipedia.org)

Republican elites themselves have warned that hardline, no‑compromise positions are costing elections and urged more compromise. Rep. Nancy Mace has repeatedly argued that the GOP’s “extreme” stance on abortion will prevent national victories and that voters want middle‑ground limits with exceptions. Donald Trump has called six‑week “heartbeat” bans a “terrible mistake” and blamed the party’s 2022 underperformance in part on Republicans who “didn’t understand the issue,” while promising to “negotiate” a more broadly acceptable policy rather than championing a national hard ban. Both the Cook Political Report and other analysts describe less‑extreme Republicans as better positioned than hardliners in competitive races. (wjcl.com)

However, the prediction goes further: it says that absolutists in both parties will tend to lose relative to compromisers. On the Democratic side, there is little clear evidence that strong abortion‑rights positions—sometimes labeled “absolutist” by opponents—have systematically hurt candidates; if anything, Democrats who campaigned aggressively on protecting abortion access often overperformed expectations in 2022 and 2023. Polling shows a national majority favoring abortion being legal in all or most cases, with voters trusting Democrats more than Republicans on the issue, and research cautions against assuming Democrats’ abortion stance is electorally “too extreme.” (pewresearch.org) At the same time, many very anti‑abortion politicians continue to win handily in solidly Republican states, where partisanship overwhelms issue‑based punishment.

Because (1) there is strong but not universal evidence that hardline anti‑abortion stances have hurt some Republican candidates after Dobbs, but (2) no comparable, systematic pattern that “absolutist” abortion‑rights Democrats lose relative to compromisers, and (3) many other factors (partisanship, candidate quality, economics) confound a clean comparison, the specific, symmetric claim that absolutists in both parties “will tend to lose elections relative to those who compromise” cannot be cleanly confirmed or falsified. Some elements fit observed trends, but the prediction as stated remains ambiguous given the available evidence.

politics
If the Republican Party adopts a no‑compromise stance on abortion (e.g., opposing rape and incest exceptions), it will not replicate recent broad electoral successes such as Glenn Youngkin’s 2021 Virginia gubernatorial win; instead, it will face voter backlash.
if the parties don't compromise on this, voters will eventually punish them. I mean, I don't think you're going to see, um, you know, Glenn Youngkin like victories by the Republican Party if they brook no compromise on, for example, the issue of, you know, rape and incest.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’s prediction has largely borne out.

After Dobbs, many Republican-led states enacted near-total abortion bans with no rape or incest exceptions (e.g., Alabama, Arkansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Missouri, Oklahoma, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas), matching his "no‑compromise" scenario. This hardened stance became a defining feature of the party’s brand on abortion. (kff.org)

Electorally, Republicans have not replicated Youngkin‑style broad victories in competitive states since these bans took effect. In the 2022 midterms—expected to be a GOP “red wave”—Republicans only narrowly won the U.S. House while Democrats gained a Senate seat, an historically strong showing for the party in power. Analyses across major outlets conclude that abortion backlash was a central reason the red wave failed to materialize. (theguardian.com)

In high‑profile statewide races, hardline anti‑abortion Republicans frequently underperformed or lost in states where a Youngkin‑style win might otherwise have been plausible. In Michigan, for example, voters simultaneously passed a constitutional amendment protecting abortion rights and gave Democrats a governing trifecta; Gov. Gretchen Whitmer defeated Tudor Dixon, who opposed abortion in nearly all cases, by a far larger margin than polls suggested. (en.wikipedia.org) Similar patterns appeared in Pennsylvania and Arizona, where Democratic candidates beat Republicans tied to strict abortion positions while making abortion central to their campaigns. (theguardian.com)

Voters have also directly punished no‑compromise positions through ballot measures. Since Dobbs, most state‑level abortion referendums have gone in the pro‑rights direction, including in red states such as Kansas and Kentucky; overall, in 13 of 16 post‑Dobbs ballot measures, the abortion‑rights side has won. (en.wikipedia.org) In 2023, Ohio voters enshrined abortion rights in the state constitution and Virginia voters handed full legislative control to Democrats after Republicans campaigned on new abortion limits—results widely read as further backlash to GOP abortion policy. (en.wikipedia.org)

By 2025, Virginia itself—where Youngkin’s 2021 win had been the model of broad Republican success—swung back decisively to Democrats, who won the governorship and expanded their legislative majority while running in part on protecting abortion rights, ending the GOP era Youngkin had started. (washingtonpost.com) Taken together, the proliferation of uncompromising GOP abortion bans and the consistent electoral and ballot‑measure backlash against them align closely with Sacks’s forecast that “if the parties don’t compromise on this, voters will eventually punish them” and that Republicans would not keep seeing Youngkin‑like victories under a no‑compromise stance.

politicsgovernment
The U.S. Supreme Court will not overturn Obergefell v. Hodges, and same‑sex marriage will remain constitutionally protected.
I don't think Obergefell is going to get overturned. I just don't see it.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, Obergefell v. Hodges, 576 U.S. 644 (2015), remains binding Supreme Court precedent establishing that same‑sex couples have a fundamental right to marry and that states must license and recognize same‑sex marriages under the Fourteenth Amendment.(law.cornell.edu)

In fact, the current Court recently declined to hear a case (stemming from former Kentucky clerk Kim Davis) that sought to roll back or revisit Obergefell, leaving the decision in place and signaling no present majority to overturn it.(reuters.com)

Separately, Congress enacted the Respect for Marriage Act in 2022, which repealed DOMA and requires federal recognition of same‑sex marriages and interstate recognition by states, further entrenching legal protections for same‑sex marriage, even though the core constitutional holding still comes from Obergefell.(en.wikipedia.org)

Because the Supreme Court has not overturned Obergefell and same‑sex marriage remains constitutionally protected throughout the United States as of the current date, Sacks’s prediction that “I don't think Obergefell is going to get overturned” has, up to now, been borne out. However, some states have passed nonbinding resolutions urging the Court to reconsider Obergefell, showing ongoing political efforts but no change in constitutional law.(them.us)

politicsgovernment
Had the Supreme Court recognized a right to same‑sex marriage in the early 1990s, it likely would have triggered the passage of a federal constitutional amendment banning same‑sex marriage (a counterfactual historical prediction).
if the Supreme Court had basically taken up the issue then and found a right to gay marriage, we might have had a constitutional amendment banning gay marriage by nowView on YouTube
Explanation

This prediction is explicitly counterfactual and conditional on a historical event that never occurred: the Supreme Court did not recognize a right to same‑sex marriage in the early 1990s. The actual historical path was:

  • Same‑sex marriage recognition at the federal constitutional level came only with Obergefell v. Hodges in 2015.
  • No federal constitutional amendment banning same‑sex marriage has ever been adopted; various proposed amendments (e.g., the Federal Marriage Amendment in the 2000s) failed to secure the necessary congressional supermajorities and state ratifications.

Because the claim is: "if the Supreme Court had ... in the early 1990s, we might have had a constitutional amendment banning gay marriage," it is not a falsifiable prediction about the actual world but a hypothetical about an alternative timeline. There is no empirical way to determine whether earlier judicial recognition would have triggered sufficient political support and ratification for such an amendment. Political counterfactuals of this kind cannot be settled conclusively by subsequent real‑world events.

Therefore, even though we know what did happen (no such amendment), we cannot infer what would have happened under the specified alternative conditions. The prediction remains inherently untestable and thus ambiguous, not right or wrong in the usual empirical sense.

politicsgovernment
The U.S. Supreme Court will neither overturn major precedents on same‑sex marriage and interracial marriage nor grant certiorari to directly hear challenges seeking to overturn those decisions.
Right. But I don't think the Supreme Court is going to overturn those other cases. I'd just be shocked. I don't even think they will take those challenges up.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, the Supreme Court has not overturned either Obergefell v. Hodges (same‑sex marriage) or Loving v. Virginia (interracial marriage). Both decisions remain binding precedent, and key aspects of Obergefell and Loving are now also codified in the 2022 Respect for Marriage Act, which requires federal and interstate recognition of same‑sex and interracial marriages.​(en.wikipedia.org)

On the certiorari part of the prediction: in Ermold v. Davis (the Kim Davis case), the petitioner explicitly asked the Court not only to review her liability but also to overturn Obergefell. On November 10, 2025, the Supreme Court denied certiorari without comment, leaving the lower‑court judgment (and Obergefell) in place and explicitly refusing to take up that direct challenge.​(en.wikipedia.org) There have been political and advocacy efforts (e.g., an Idaho House resolution) urging the Court to reverse Obergefell, but these are nonbinding and have not produced any granted case aimed at overruling the marriage precedents.​(them.us) Likewise, there has been no Supreme Court case granting certiorari to reconsider or overturn Loving v. Virginia.

Although Justice Thomas has urged the Court, in his Dobbs concurrence, to reconsider substantive due‑process precedents including Obergefell, the Court as a whole has not acted on that suggestion.​(newsweek.com) The Court has heard related religious‑liberty and free‑speech cases involving same‑sex weddings, such as 303 Creative LLC v. Elenis, but those were framed around First Amendment questions and did not ask the Court to overrule Obergefell itself.​(en.wikipedia.org) Taken together, this means the prediction—that the Court would neither overturn the same‑sex and interracial marriage precedents nor grant certiorari in a case directly seeking to overturn them—has been accurate so far.

politicseconomy
Implementing broad U.S. student loan forgiveness framed as a bailout of college-educated borrowers will politically hurt (rather than help) Democrats, because non‑college, working‑class voters who bear the cost will react negatively.
I think this could potentially hurt them because to your point, this is basically a bailout of the woke professional class... Meanwhile, the majority of the country is working class... and they're going to have to pay for this bailout...View on YouTube
Explanation

Biden did move ahead with large-scale student debt relief, but the marquee 2022 broad cancellation plan (up to $10k/$20k for most borrowers) was ultimately struck down by the Supreme Court in Biden v. Nebraska, so the full, one-time "broad bailout" that Sacks was reacting to never actually took effect.(en.wikipedia.org) The administration instead delivered roughly $180+ billion of more targeted forgiveness through existing and revised programs (PSLF fixes, income‑driven repayment adjustments, borrower‑defense settlements, disability discharges, etc.), which is politically salient but different from a one‑shot, everyone‑gets‑relief bailout.(investopedia.com)

On public opinion, multiple national polls in 2022 found that forgiving around $10k in student loans was either modestly popular or evenly split overall, not broadly unpopular. Economist/YouGov polling after Biden’s announcement showed 51% support vs. 39% opposition for canceling up to $10,000, with even 43% of people who never had student loans in favor.(today.yougov.com) Ipsos/NPR and other surveys likewise found slim majorities supporting limited forgiveness, with opposition rising mainly as the proposed amount grew.(ipsos.com) A Data for Progress survey reported that 60% of voters supported eliminating all or some student debt, including majority support even among voters who never had loans.(dataforprogress.org) While Republicans were strongly opposed and some non‑college voters did see it as unfair, a Georgia poll found that party identification was a better predictor of views on Biden’s plan than education or income—suggesting the main cleavage ran along partisan lines, not simply college vs. non‑college.(georgiarecorder.com) Overall, the polling record does not show clear, broad‑based backlash from non‑college, working‑class voters large enough to make the policy an obvious net political loser.

On actual electoral outcomes, Democrats slightly underperformed their 2018 and 2020 levels with non‑college/working‑class voters in the 2022 midterms, continuing a pre‑existing trend of working‑class drift toward the GOP. Exit‑poll and postelection analyses show that voters without college degrees favored Republicans (roughly 57–42 nationally), and Democrats’ share of non‑college voters fell back to around 43%, compared with higher shares in 2018 and 2020.(pewresearch.org) But these same analyses attribute the overall 2022 pattern mostly to turnout differences (older and more Republican‑leaning voters showing up at higher rates, younger and more Democratic‑leaning voters turning out less) and to salient issues like inflation and abortion, not directly to student debt relief.(washingtonpost.com) There is no strong quantitative evidence isolating student loan forgiveness as the cause of Democrats’ working‑class losses, and Democrats avoided the widely expected "red wave" despite having announced the plan.

Finally, the substance of the 2022 proposal also undercuts the specific "bailout of the woke professional class" frame. Academic analysis of the announced plan finds that, as designed (with Pell‑Grant bonuses and income caps), its benefits would have been concentrated more in lower‑ and middle‑income neighborhoods and disproportionately among Black and Hispanic borrowers—not primarily among affluent professionals.(direct.mit.edu) That doesn’t mean some working‑class non‑beneficiaries didn’t resent it, but it does mean the factual premise that this was mainly a giveaway to affluent elites at their expense is overstated.

Putting this together: (1) the exact broad bailout Sacks described never fully materialized due to court intervention; (2) opinion data show the actual plans were at least as popular as unpopular overall, including among many people without loans; and (3) while Democrats have continued to lose some non‑college working‑class support, there is no clear empirical link pinning that erosion specifically on loan forgiveness rather than on broader, long‑running trends and other 2022 issues. Because we cannot cleanly attribute measurable net political harm to student loan forgiveness alone, and because the predicted mechanism (a massive, enacted bailout producing broad working‑class taxpayer backlash) didn’t fully occur, the accuracy of Sacks’s prediction is ambiguous rather than clearly right or clearly wrong.

Bob Chapek will lose his job as CEO of Disney before the end of calendar year 2022 as a result of the political and employee-activism controversy in Florida.
I don't think he's going to survive the year after what just happened at Disney.View on YouTube
Explanation

Bob Chapek was CEO of The Walt Disney Company from February 25, 2020, until he was dismissed by the board on November 20, 2022, when Bob Iger was brought back as CEO. This is clearly before the end of calendar year 2022, matching the timing element of the prediction. (en.wikipedia.org)

In early 2022, Chapek’s handling of Florida’s Parental Rights in Education Act (the “Don’t Say Gay” bill) sparked intense internal and external backlash. He initially declined to publicly oppose the bill and emphasized that corporate statements could be “counterproductive,” which drew strong criticism from Disney employees and creative talent, prompted open letters, and led to walkouts and public apologies, as well as a pause in Florida political donations. (cnbc.com) This controversy significantly damaged his standing with employees and the public and became one of the defining political/activism crises of his tenure.

When the board removed Chapek in November 2022, reporting based on board and executive sources described the decision as a response to a string of missteps that caused "irreparable damage" to his ability to lead and eroded confidence among Wall Street, senior executives, and many employees. (disneyfoodblog.com) Those missteps are typically enumerated to include both his poor handling of the Florida bill and other issues (such as a disastrous November 2022 earnings report and large streaming losses), with the earnings call seen as the immediate trigger. (etfdb.com)

Because Chapek did in fact lose his job as CEO before the end of 2022 and the Florida political/employee-activism controversy is consistently cited as a major factor undermining his leadership (even if not the only cause), the prediction that he would not "survive the year" as CEO as a result of that controversy is best judged as essentially correct.

economypolitics
By the second half of 2022, the US year-over-year CPI inflation rate will decline from its peak earlier in the year because of base effects, but cumulative CPI inflation over the first two years of the Biden administration (January 2021–January 2023) will total roughly 12–13%, and voters will still feel worse off, resulting in widespread negative sentiment toward the Biden administration going into the November 2022 midterm elections.
the main reason inflation is going to go down in the second half of this year is because inflation is measured on a year over year basis... So as we sort of lap last year's inflation rate, we come up against, you know, you're copying against A 7.8% number last year, so I don't think inflation's going to get any better. We're probably looking at roughly a 12% you know official two year inflation number. So in other words since Biden took over as president you're looking at probably 12 to 13% of total inflation as measured by CPI. And that is why even though the headline number will come down later this year, I don't think the American people are going to feel any better about the situation... there's going to be a lot of negativity going into the November election for this administration.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction has three main testable parts: (1) headline CPI inflation would fall in the second half of 2022 from its earlier peak, largely due to year‑over‑year base effects; (2) cumulative CPI inflation over roughly Biden’s first two years would be in the low‑teens (~12–13%); and (3) voters would still feel worse off and be broadly negative about Biden heading into the November 2022 midterms.

  1. Inflation peaking then falling in 2H 2022
    U.S. CPI year‑over‑year inflation peaked around 9.1% in June 2022 and then declined through the second half of the year, reaching 6.5% by December 2022. (theworlddata.com) That matches his claim that “the headline number will come down later this year.” His emphasis on base effects as the main reason is an oversimplification (energy prices, supply normalization, and Fed tightening also mattered), but the observable part of the prediction—headline CPI falling in 2H 2022 from its earlier peak—is correct.

  2. Two‑year cumulative CPI inflation under Biden
    Using the BLS/FRED CPI-U index (seasonally adjusted, 1982–84=100), the index was about 262.639 in January 2021 and 300.456 in January 2023. (fred.stlouisfed.org) That implies cumulative inflation of roughly 14.4% over that period, not 12–13%. Even using October or November 2022 (around the midterms) still gives about 13.5–13.7% cumulative inflation from January 2021. (fred.stlouisfed.org) So he underestimated the magnitude somewhat, but he was directionally right that the two‑year inflation total would be in the low‑ to mid‑teens and far higher than normal.

  3. Voters feeling worse off and negative toward Biden by the 2022 midterms
    Multiple late‑2022 polls show exactly the kind of sentiment he described:

  • A Bankrate midterm‑election survey published Oct. 31, 2022 found 43% of Americans said their personal finances were worse than when Biden was elected, versus only 18% who said better, and about seven in ten of those worse‑off blamed Biden at least moderately. (bankrate.com)
  • A Washington Post–ABC News poll conducted Oct. 30–Nov. 2, 2022 put Biden’s job approval at 41% approve, 53% disapprove, with more than four in ten saying their family’s finances were worse than two years earlier and fewer than two in ten saying better; Republicans held double‑digit advantages on the economy and on inflation/rising prices. (washingtonpost.com)
  • A Gallup poll Oct. 3–20, 2022 similarly found Biden at 40% approval and 56% disapproval. (news.gallup.com)
  • Analyses of the 2022 elections note that inflation and the economy remained top voter issues throughout 2022, with an October 2022 Monmouth poll reporting that 82% of Americans saw inflation as an “extremely or very important” issue and about seven in ten disapproved of Biden’s handling of the cost of living. (en.wikipedia.org) AP VoteCast summaries of the midterms likewise report that about eight in ten voters said the economy was in bad shape and a slim majority blamed Biden’s policies for high inflation. (miningjournal.net)

Taken together, these data show that by late 2022 inflation had indeed come off its peak but remained high, cumulative price increases over Biden’s first two years were in the low‑to‑mid‑teens (somewhat higher than Sacks’ 12–13% estimate), and voters widely felt worse off and held strongly negative views of Biden’s economic management heading into the midterms. Because the main structure and implications of his prediction played out as he described—despite his numeric under‑estimate of the exact two‑year inflation total—the forecast is best classified as right overall, with minor quantitative error.

economy
The US is headed into an economic slowdown with a high probability of entering a technical recession (two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP growth) toward the end of 2022.
Let me make a prediction right now, if we're we're definitely headed into an economic slowdown. I don't know if it will meet the technical definition of recession, but very high... very high chance, I think, of recession. Like Thomas said towards the end of the yearView on YouTube
Explanation

BEA data show that U.S. real GDP fell in Q1 2022 (-1.6% annualized) and again in Q2 2022 (-0.6%), giving two consecutive quarters of negative real GDP in the first half of 2022.(apps.bea.gov) However, GDP then grew in Q3 2022 (3.2%) and Q4 2022 (2.6%), so there were no consecutive negative quarters “towards the end of the year.”(apps.bea.gov)

On an annual basis, real GDP growth slowed from 5.9% in 2021 to 2.1% in 2022, confirming an economic slowdown.(apps.bea.gov) But the specific, testable part of the prediction was a high probability of a technical recession (two negative quarters) toward the end of 2022, which did not occur; the technical recession-style pattern happened in early 2022 instead.

Additionally, the NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee has not identified any U.S. recession after the brief COVID recession ending in April 2020, meaning there was no officially dated recession in 2022 at all.(nber.org)

Because the timing and condition he emphasized — a technical recession toward the end of 2022 — did not materialize, the prediction is best classified as wrong, despite being directionally right about a slowdown.

Sacks @ 00:16:51Inconclusive
politicseconomyconflict
If the Russia–Ukraine war is still ongoing and the US enters a recession by late 2022, President Biden’s job approval will fall to levels comparable to or lower than Jimmy Carter’s worst approval ratings (roughly in the low- to mid‑20% range).
if this war is still going on and we get in a recession, look out below. I think this president will be in Jimmy Carter territory.View on YouTube
Explanation
  • Structure of the prediction. Sacks made a conditional forecast: if (a) the Russia–Ukraine war was still ongoing and (b) the U.S. went into a recession, then Biden’s job approval would fall into “Jimmy Carter territory,” i.e., roughly the high‑20% range. Gallup’s historical data show Carter’s worst approval at 28% in June 1979, which is the reference point for “Carter territory.” (news.gallup.com)

  • Condition (a): war ongoing – satisfied. The large‑scale Russian invasion that began on Feb. 24, 2022 has continued without a formal end; major fronts in eastern and southern Ukraine are still described as part of an ongoing Russo‑Ukrainian war. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Condition (b): U.S. recession by late 2022 – not satisfied under the standard definition. While real U.S. GDP contracted in Q1 and Q2 of 2022, the economy returned to growth in the second half of the year and unemployment remained low. Analyses summarizing the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) Business Cycle Dating Committee’s view note that no 2022 recession was declared, despite the two negative‑GDP quarters. (americanhartfordgold.com) Because the accepted arbiter of U.S. recessions did not date a recession in 2022, the prediction’s key economic condition did not actually occur.

  • What happened to Biden’s approval anyway? Even at his lowest, Biden’s overall job approval never fell into the low‑ or mid‑20s. Gallup reports his personal low at 38% approval, below 40% but still well above Carter’s 28%. (news.gallup.com) Other pollsters’ lows (e.g., CIVIQS) put him around 30–32%, again above “Carter territory.” (breitbart.com)

  • Why the forecast is scored as inconclusive. The prediction explicitly tied a Carter‑level collapse in approval to a specific scenario: Russia–Ukraine war plus a U.S. recession. The war condition was met, but the recession condition—using the standard NBER definition—was not. Because the hypothesized scenario never fully materialized, we cannot empirically test whether Biden’s approval would have dropped into the 20s under those exact conditions. Even though, in reality, his approval bottomed out in the high‑30s to low‑30s, that doesn’t strictly confirm or falsify the conditional claim. Hence the appropriate judgment is “inconclusive” rather than clearly right or wrong.

markets
If Twitter's board rejects Elon Musk's $54.20 per share takeover proposal in April 2022, Twitter's share price will fall back to approximately its pre-offer trading level (around the mid‑$30s to ~$40) shortly thereafter.
And by the way, the stock is going right back to that previous level. If they turn down this proposal.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was conditional: if Twitter’s board rejected Elon Musk’s $54.20/share offer in April 2022, the stock would fall back to roughly its pre‑offer level (mid‑$30s to ~$40) shortly thereafter.

What actually happened:

  1. Pre‑offer trading level. Twitter closed at about $39.31 on April 1, 2022, the last trading day before Musk’s stake was disclosed, consistent with the “high‑30s/around $40” baseline Sacks referenced. (chartexchange.com)
  2. Board’s initial response. On April 15, 2022, Twitter’s board adopted a poison pill rights plan in response to Musk’s bid, which analysts and the company itself described as a defensive measure that did not constitute a formal rejection but was meant to fend off a hostile takeover and buy time. (cnbc.com)
  3. Board ultimately accepted the offer. On April 25, 2022, Twitter announced it had entered into a definitive agreement to be acquired by Musk for $54.20 per share, meaning the board accepted the same price Sacks was discussing rather than rejecting it. (cnbc.com)
  4. Stock behavior in April 2022. Around and after the poison pill, Twitter’s stock traded mostly in the mid‑ to high‑$40s (e.g., up to ~$48.51 on April 18) and did not drop back to the mid‑30s during that period; the average April 2022 price was about $49.02. (stockinvest.us)
  5. Later scare when the deal looked likely to fail. When Musk announced his intention to terminate the deal on July 8, 2022, Twitter’s stock did fall to about $36.86 (and ~$34.61 after hours), near its pre‑offer trading range, but this was months later and tied to Musk’s termination attempt, not an April 2022 board rejection. (fortune.com)

Because the key condition he specified (“if they turn down this proposal” in April 2022) never actually occurred—the board instead accepted the offer at $54.20—the prediction remains a counterfactual. Even though we have plenty of time and data, we cannot directly observe what would have happened to Twitter’s share price under the exact scenario Sacks described. Therefore, the correctness of the prediction cannot be determined from real‑world outcomes, and the appropriate classification is “ambiguous.”

politicsgovernment
If a situation arises in which Google seeks to acquire Twitter instead of Elon Musk in 2022, the Biden administration will effectively allow the deal by pressuring or permitting FTC Chair Lina Khan to refrain from blocking the acquisition.
I think this administration does not want to see Twitter become a free speech company again. And so the political winds will blow towards letting, I think Twitter be acquired by a big tech company, even if it means big tech gets bigger. So I think I think they will put Lina Khan on pause to allow Google to buy this company, if that's what it comes down to.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was conditional on Google seeking to acquire Twitter instead of Elon Musk in 2022. In reality, Twitter accepted Elon Musk’s $44 billion offer on April 25, 2022, and the acquisition was completed on October 27, 2022, with no competing takeover bid from Google or Alphabet reported during that period. (techcrunch.com)

Analysts at the time merely speculated that companies such as Disney, Google, Salesforce, Microsoft, or Verizon might make a rival bid if Musk’s deal fell apart, but there is no record that Google actually made an offer for Twitter. (fortune.com) Because Google never formally sought to acquire Twitter, the Biden administration and FTC Chair Lina Khan were never put in the situation described, so we cannot observe whether they would have “put Lina Khan on pause” to allow such a deal.

Since the key triggering condition (a real Google–Twitter acquisition attempt in 2022) did not occur, the claim about how the administration would have behaved remains counterfactual. Enough time has passed to know the events of 2022, but the hypothesis itself cannot be tested against reality, so the correct classification is ambiguous.

markets
Twitter’s board will not ultimately accept Elon Musk’s initial $54.20 per share offer as structured in April 2022; the economically ‘correct’ outcome of taking Musk’s best bid after a process will not occur.
But it's not going to happen. And the reason it's not going to happen is not because of superior economics or a magical plan...View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that “it’s not going to happen”—that Twitter’s board would not ultimately accept Elon Musk’s initial $54.20 per share offer as structured in April 2022, and that the economically correct outcome of taking Musk’s best bid after a process would not occur.

In reality, Twitter’s board did accept Musk’s offer at $54.20 per share in cash. On April 25, 2022, Twitter announced it had entered into a definitive agreement to be acquired by an entity wholly owned by Elon Musk for $54.20 per share in cash, valuing the deal at about $44 billion. (cnbc.com) This was the same headline price and all‑cash structure as his April 14, 2022 bid. (cnbc.com) The board also publicly described its process as a “thoughtful and comprehensive process” focused on value, certainty, and financing, and recommended the transaction to shareholders. (cnbc.com)

Because the board ultimately accepted Musk’s $54.20‑per‑share cash offer after running a process and recommended that shareholders take it, the core assertion that this outcome "is not going to happen" was falsified.

If Twitter were to lay off at least 50% of its roughly 8,000 employees (as of early 2022), key business metrics such as uptime, user activity, and revenue would not deteriorate and the company’s operational performance would likely improve.
Yeah. You could fire half those people or more. There'd be absolutely no impact to the business. In fact, they probably run better...View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence shows that Twitter/X did lay off well over 50% of its employees after Musk’s 2022 takeover, but key business metrics clearly did deteriorate, contradicting Sacks’s claim that there would be “absolutely no impact to the business” and that it would probably “run better.”

Layoffs condition was met (≥50% of staff)

  • In November 2022 Twitter cut about 50% of its ~7,500‑person workforce in one round of layoffs. (goodmorningamerica.com)
  • Subsequent cuts left about 1,300 employees vs. 7,500 pre‑takeover (roughly an 80% reduction) by early 2023. (cnbc.com)
    So the scenario Sacks described (firing “half … or more”) did in fact occur.

Uptime / reliability: more and larger outages, not “no impact”

  • Since the takeover, X has had multiple major global outages, including the largest user‑reported outage since Musk’s purchase in December 2023 (over 94,000 reports). (business-standard.com)
  • 2025 saw repeated large disruptions: in March 2025 outages hit tens of thousands of users multiple times in a single day; in May 2025 another outage drew ~25,000 reports, prompting Musk to admit that recent “uptime issues” showed “major operational improvements need to be made.” (cnbc.com)
  • Reporting in early 2024/2025 explicitly links these recurring technical problems to drastic staff cuts and loss of institutional knowledge. (businessinsider.com)
    This is inconsistent with the idea that firing half or more of staff caused no operational impact and that the service “probably [runs] better.”

User activity: stagnation and decline in key segments

  • Just before the acquisition, Twitter reported 237.8 million monetizable daily active users (mDAU) in Q2 2022, continuing pre‑Musk growth. (twinstrata.com)
  • Third‑party data show global daily active app users down ~15% from Sept 2022 to Sept 2023, and U.S. app usage down about 20%. (theguardian.com)
  • A 2025 Pew study finds the share of U.S. adults using X fell from 25% in 2021 to 21% in 2025, indicating erosion of its U.S. user base rather than growth. (thedailybeast.com)
    Overall, user activity at best stagnated and in important markets declined, contradicting the claim of no deterioration.

Revenue: sharp, sustained drop vs. pre‑layoff baseline

  • Twitter’s revenue peaked around $5.0–5.1 billion in 2021 and was about $4.4 billion in 2022 before going private. (stockanalysis.com)
  • Under Musk/X, revenue fell to about $2.9 billion in 2023 and $2.5 billion in 2024, roughly a 50% drop from the 2021 peak and a steep decline from 2022. (businessofapps.com)
  • Advertising, the core business, plunged from $4.5 billion in 2021 to about $2.3B in 2023 and $1.7B in 2024, a fall of more than 60%, amid widely reported advertiser flight. (businessofapps.com)
    These are clear, multi‑year deteriorations in a central “business metric” Sacks claimed would be unaffected.

Operational performance / profitability

  • Some estimates suggest that after deep cost‑cutting, X’s EBITDA and net profit margins improved (e.g., reports of ~$2.7B revenue but ~$1.3B EBITDA in 2024, and positive net income in 2024–2025). (deepnewz.com)
  • But these margin gains came together with lower revenue, advertiser loss, more outages, and user declines in key markets.

Sacks’s prediction was that massive layoffs (50% or more) would cause no deterioration in critical business metrics (uptime, user activity, revenue) and that Twitter would “probably run better.” In reality, while cost cuts improved some profitability metrics, the platform experienced more frequent outages, reduced usage in important segments, and roughly halved revenue. That is a substantial negative impact on the business, so the prediction is best classified as wrong overall.

If Elon Musk gains control of Twitter, the overall level of harassment and ‘problematic’ content on the platform will decrease because he will successfully eliminate bot accounts at scale.
He would fix that, by the way. There would be less, um, sort of, uh, there would be less problematic content on that site with Elon running it. Why, yes... There'd be less harassment because he'd get rid of all the bots.View on YouTube
Explanation
  1. Condition met: Musk did gain control of Twitter/X.
    Elon Musk completed his acquisition of Twitter on October 28, 2022, later rebranding it as X.(en.wikipedia.org) So the conditional (“if Elon runs it…”) is satisfied and can be evaluated.

  2. Harassment / ‘problematic content’ did not decrease; measured hate speech and abusive content went up.

  • A 2025 peer‑reviewed PLOS ONE study that tracks English‑language content from early 2022 through June 2023 finds that, after Musk’s purchase, the weekly rate of hate speech on X was about 50% higher than in the pre‑acquisition months, with increased racist, homophobic, and transphobic slurs, and a ~70% increase in likes on hate posts—indicating more engagement and exposure. It explicitly concludes there is a long‑term increase in hate speech on the platform.(journals.plos.org)
  • Earlier work by the same research group (“Auditing Elon Musk’s Impact on Hate Speech and Bots,” ICWSM 2023) found that hate speech rose dramatically immediately after the acquisition.(arxiv.org)
  • A synthesis on Twitter under Elon Musk notes that multiple independent organizations (Center for Countering Digital Hate, Anti‑Defamation League, Tufts researchers, ISD, BBC) documented a rise in hate speech: anti‑Black slurs nearly tripled; homophobic and transphobic slurs rose 52% and 62%; antisemitic tweets doubled; weekly hate‑speech rate ended up ~50% higher than when Musk took over.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • The same article reports that posts associating LGBT people with “grooming” increased by 119%, and GLAAD rated Twitter/X the “most dangerous platform for LGBTQ people” on its Social Media Safety Index.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Watchdog data on actual enforcement cuts the same way. A CCDH/​Axios analysis found that X failed to act on 86% of sampled hate‑speech posts (including Nazi imagery and Holocaust denial) a week after they were reported; a prior CCDH report during the Gaza war found 98% of reported hate and misinformation content remained up after seven days.(axios.com)
  • Regulators and major institutions have reacted accordingly. The EU halted institutional ads on X in 2023 citing an “alarming increase” in hate speech and misinformation,(en.wikipedia.org) and in 2025 Dutch public broadcaster NOS quit X, explicitly citing disinformation and hateful responses to its posts as reasons the platform was no longer suitable.(reuters.com)

Taken together, independent measurements and institutional behavior all point to more, not less, harassment and hateful/“problematic” content under Musk.

  1. Bots and inauthentic accounts were not eliminated at scale.

The prediction’s mechanism was that harassment would fall because Musk would “get rid of all the bots.” Available evidence does not support that:

  • The long‑horizon PLOS ONE study cited above explicitly finds “no reduction (and a possible increase) in activity by inauthentic accounts”—including bots and coordinated accounts—after Musk’s purchase.(journals.plos.org)
  • The earlier ICWSM 2023 audit also found that “the prevalence of most types of bots increased” after the acquisition, even as hate speech spiked.(arxiv.org)
  • A summary of Twitter/X under Musk notes that as of April 2023 there was no evidence that Musk’s policy changes had decreased the overall number of bots, only some sign that a subset of spambots had fallen slightly.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • In 2024, The Intelligencer documented a mass proliferation of “pussy in bio” sex‑spam bots on X and reported that Musk himself eventually conceded that “fighting bot and troll farms is hard,” acknowledging that the problem persisted despite his efforts.(en.wikipedia.org)

X’s own transparency reporting also doesn’t show a clean “bot‑free” or harassment‑free environment: in H1 2024 the platform suspended 5.3M accounts and removed or labeled 10.6M posts, with about 5M flagged for “hateful conduct,” yet suspensions for hateful conduct were down ~97–98% versus pre‑Musk Twitter, suggesting a shift toward tolerating more such content rather than eradicating it.(thewrap.com) This is not consistent with “less harassment because the bots are gone.”

  1. Net evaluation.

The scenario the predictor sketched—Musk takes over, successfully eliminates bots at scale, and as a result harassment and “problematic content” decrease overall—is contradicted by:

  • Multiple independent, peer‑reviewed studies (short‑ and long‑term) showing higher levels of hate speech and engagement with it after the takeover.(journals.plos.org)
  • Empirical findings of no reduction, and in some respects an increase, in inauthentic/bot activity, despite Musk’s stated anti‑bot campaign.(journals.plos.org)
  • Watchdog and regulatory assessments describing X as more hostile and less effectively moderated, not safer.

Given that the condition (Musk control) has been met for several years and the metrics move in the opposite direction of the prediction, the best overall judgment is that this prediction was wrong.

marketstech
Within 30 days of April 16, 2022, Twitter’s board will successfully use a poison pill to block Elon Musk from gaining control, and Twitter’s stock price will fall back to roughly $35 per share, about the level before Musk’s bid.
Either the poison pill will win and Twitter's stock will be down in the dumps. 30 days from now, it'll be the same price it was when it started. 35. Around that price, it's going to be back in the dumps.View on YouTube
Explanation

Board / poison pill outcome:

  • Twitter’s board adopted a poison pill (shareholder rights plan) on April 15, 2022, in response to Musk’s bid, but the plan was explicitly structured so it would not prevent the board from accepting a future acquisition offer it approved. (cnbc.com)
  • On April 25, 2022—within 10 days of April 16—the board unanimously accepted Elon Musk’s offer to acquire Twitter for $54.20 per share in cash, signing a definitive merger agreement that would give Musk control of the company. (cnbc.com)
  • The acquisition ultimately closed on October 27, 2022, with Musk taking Twitter private, confirming that the poison pill did not “win” in the sense of permanently blocking his control; it served as leverage but was effectively set aside once the deal was agreed. (en.wikipedia.org)

Stock-price path within 30 days:

  • The 30‑day window after April 16, 2022 runs to May 16, 2022.
  • A Bloomberg report on May 16, 2022 notes that Twitter shares fell 8.2% that day to close at $37.39, below the $39.31 closing price on April 1 (pre‑stake disclosure), but not back to the roughly $35 level Sacks described. (bloomberg.com)
  • Monthly price data show Twitter averaged about $49.02 in April 2022 and $39.60 in May 2022, again indicating the stock sagged but did not return to the mid‑$30s level in that 30‑day period. (digrin.com)

Assessment: Sacks’ scenario was that the poison pill would prevail and Musk would be blocked, with Twitter’s stock “back in the dumps” around $35 within 30 days of April 16, 2022. In reality, the board quickly agreed to sell Twitter to Musk at a substantial premium and he went on to acquire full control. While the stock did decline later in May, it did not cleanly revert to the ~$35 starting level, and the governance outcome was the opposite of what he predicted. Therefore the prediction is wrong.

politicsmarkets
As an alternative to a poison pill, Twitter’s board will block Elon Musk by finding another acquirer at the same or a higher price than Musk’s offer, likely a large incumbent such as Disney or Google; if Google bids, the Biden administration and FTC chair Lina Khan will allow the deal to proceed by standing down on antitrust enforcement.
Or there's one other possibility that they will find a buyer for Twitter, and the way they will defeat Elon will be to find another buyer at the same or greater price, and they will place Twitter in the hands of another company who they regard as culturally safer, because that company buys into the regime of censorship. And it might be Disney, it might even be Google. I'm telling you, I think that if Google were the company to step up, the administration would ultimately support that deal rather than Elon getting the company. And I think they... would [ask] Lina Khan, to stand down in that instance and let it go through.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction described a specific alternative outcome to Elon Musk’s bid for Twitter:

  1. Claimed outcome: Twitter’s board would defeat Musk by finding another buyer at the same or higher price, likely a large incumbent (e.g., Disney or Google), and place Twitter in that buyer’s hands.
  2. Additional conditional claim: If Google bid for Twitter, the Biden administration and FTC chair Lina Khan would allow the acquisition to proceed by standing down on antitrust enforcement.

What actually happened:

  • On April 25, 2022, Twitter’s board accepted Elon Musk’s offer to buy Twitter for $54.20 per share, in a deal valued at about $44 billion. No competing acquisition offer from Disney, Google, or any other buyer materialized at the same or a higher price.
  • The transaction eventually closed on October 27, 2022, and Musk took Twitter private. There is no record of a serious rival acquisition bid from Disney, Google, or other incumbents during the process, nor of any regulatory review of a hypothetical Google–Twitter deal (because no such deal was proposed).

Since the core predicted scenario—Twitter’s board blocking Musk by selling to another acquirer such as Disney or Google, and regulators then allowing a Google–Twitter deal—did not occur at all, the prediction is wrong.

politicsmarkets
Within 30 days of April 16, 2022, actions by Twitter’s board and political/regulatory actors to block Elon Musk’s acquisition will become evident, including behavior that arguably violates fiduciary duty or normal antitrust principles in order to prevent Musk from buying Twitter.
And I'm telling you, in 30 days we will find out how rigged this game is and how deep the corruption goes, because they will do anything to stop Elon from acquiring this company, even if it means violating their fiduciary duty or violating antitrust law.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the 30 days after April 16, 2022 does not match the prediction that Twitter’s board and political/regulatory actors would “do anything to stop Elon from acquiring this company, even if it means violating their fiduciary duty or violating antitrust law.”

  1. Twitter’s board briefly resisted, then quickly accepted the deal.

    • On April 15, 2022 (just before the podcast date), Twitter’s board adopted a standard “poison pill” shareholder-rights plan explicitly aimed at making a hostile takeover more difficult, a conventional and generally lawful tactic in U.S. corporate governance. (cnbc.com) This is some resistance by the board, but it is not extraordinary or clearly a fiduciary breach; it is a common mechanism designed to give the board time and leverage.
    • Within the 30‑day window, on April 25, 2022, Twitter announced it had accepted Musk’s offer to buy the company for about $44 billion at $54.20 per share, with the board unanimously approving the transaction and presenting it as the best path for shareholders. (cnbc.com) This is the opposite of “doing anything to stop” the acquisition.
  2. Antitrust and regulatory authorities did not try to block the acquisition.

    • Contemporaneous reporting and later summaries note that analysts and former officials expected little or no antitrust basis to challenge Musk’s purchase of Twitter, and that regulators were unlikely to oppose it. (fortune.com) The U.S. antitrust waiting-period process under the Hart–Scott–Rodino Act ran its course without a move to block the deal; later coverage explicitly stated that U.S. antitrust regulators decided not to further scrutinize the acquisition, making it unlikely to be stopped on those grounds. (straitstimes.com)
    • Instead, regulatory scrutiny focused on Musk’s own conduct (e.g., his late disclosure of his stake), leading to FTC/SEC inquiries and, eventually, an SEC lawsuit over his stock-disclosure timing—not on regulators bending antitrust rules to prevent him from buying Twitter. (thegatewaypundit.com)
  3. No clear evidence of fiduciary or antitrust violations by the board or regulators to block the deal.

    • There was public debate over whether the poison pill was in shareholders’ best interests, but no court or regulator has found that Twitter’s board violated its fiduciary duty in handling Musk’s bid. The final outcome—accepting a large premium offer and completing the sale in October 2022—fits the standard pattern of a board negotiating terms, not an illicit effort to stop the transaction. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Likewise, antitrust and other regulators did not engage in actions that “violate normal antitrust principles” to thwart the acquisition; the deal ultimately closed after routine review.

Because the observable events in the 30 days after April 16, 2022 show (a) the board agreeing to the sale on favorable terms and (b) regulators not using antitrust or other tools to block the acquisition, the specific forecast that we would soon see law‑breaking, politically driven efforts to prevent Musk from buying Twitter did not come true.

conflictpolitics
The Russia-Ukraine war, focused on the Donbas and disputed eastern territories, will continue in some active or simmering form for most or all of Joe Biden’s presidency (through January 2025), rather than ending quickly in 2022.
I think it's going to go on for a long time. That's what General Milley testified. It could go on for years. I think it's going to become a sort of permanent feature in the background of Biden's presidency.View on YouTube
Explanation

Open-source timelines show that the large‑scale Russo‑Ukrainian war that began with Russia’s full invasion on 24 February 2022 has continued without a formal settlement or stable ceasefire and is explicitly described as ongoing through at least late 2025, well past 2022.(en.wikipedia.org) The dedicated article on the eastern front notes continuous operations in eastern Ukraine (Donetsk, Luhansk, Kharkiv regions) from 24 February 2022 to the present, again with status listed as ongoing and specifying that Russia controls a large share of the Donbas as of October 2025.(en.wikipedia.org) This confirms that active or simmering conflict in and around the Donbas and disputed eastern territories persisted for years rather than ending quickly in 2022.

Separately, Joe Biden’s presidency is documented as running from January 20, 2021, to January 20, 2025.(en.wikipedia.org) Since the war remained ongoing throughout this period and continued to dominate foreign‑policy and security discussions, it did in fact become a long‑running, background feature of Biden’s entire term, matching Sacks’s characterization that it would “go on for a long time” and effectively define the backdrop of his presidency rather than being resolved quickly.

Given that: (1) the war did not end in 2022, and (2) it continued in active/simmering form throughout Biden’s presidency and beyond, the prediction that the Russia‑Ukraine war centered on the Donbas and eastern territories would remain a long‑term feature of Biden’s presidency is accurately borne out by subsequent events.

economy
The U.S. economy will enter a significant slowdown, with a high probability of falling into a recession or near‑recession conditions, within the next 12–24 months from April 2022 (i.e., by April 2024).
We're definitely going into a slowdown. And whether it becomes a recession to be determined, I think there's a very good chance...So these are all negative indicators. And I think we're either going to have a recession or something very close to it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from official data shows that the U.S. did not enter a recession or clear “near‑recession” conditions in the 12–24 months after April 2022 (i.e., by April 2024):

  • The NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee still lists the most recent U.S. recession as running from a February 2020 peak to an April 2020 trough, with no new recession dated after that as of 2025. This means there was no officially recognized recession in 2023 or early 2024. (nber.org)
  • Real GDP did contract in Q1 and Q2 2022 (−1.6% and −0.6% annualized in the final estimates), but this “technical recession” episode occurred essentially immediately around the time of the April 2022 podcast, not mainly 12–24 months later. (bea.gov)
  • After mid‑2022, growth resumed and stayed positive. For full‑year 2022 and 2023, real GDP grew 2.1% and 2.5% respectively, and quarterly growth in 2023 was solid—about 2.1% in Q2, then accelerating to 4.9% in Q3 and 3.4% in Q4. This is inconsistent with an economy hovering “very close” to recession. (apps.bea.gov)
  • Labor‑market data likewise do not show near‑recession conditions by April 2024. The unemployment rate was very low by historical standards, rising only modestly from around 3.5–3.7% in 2022 to 3.8% in Q4 2023 and about 4.1–4.2% in 2024—still typical of a strong labor market, not a deep slowdown. (bls.gov)
  • Contemporaneous economic commentary widely noted that the U.S. avoided the widely predicted recession in 2023, describing the outcome instead as a “soft landing” where growth slowed from the post‑pandemic boom but remained positive and inflation fell. (cnbc.com)

So while there was some cooling from the very rapid 2021 rebound and an earlier, brief GDP contraction in early 2022, the specific normalized prediction—that within 12–24 months of April 2022 the U.S. would be in a significant slowdown that was a recession or very close to one—did not materialize. The economy instead stayed in expansion with moderate growth and low unemployment through April 2024. Therefore, the prediction is best judged wrong.

economy
Within the next few years after April 2022, the U.S. economy is at material risk of entering a 1970s-style stagflation regime characterized by persistently elevated inflation alongside a slowing or stagnant economy, due to limited remaining monetary and fiscal policy tools.
So there's nothing left to really spend. You can't really drop interest rates much more. And if you do you'll get much worse inflation. So it seems to me that we don't have a lot of tools here. And we could end up with something like a 1970s style stagflation, where we continue to see inflation with the slowing economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

By late 2025, the U.S. has not entered anything resembling a 1970s‑style stagflation regime.

Growth vs. stagnation: Real U.S. GDP grew 2.1–2.9% annually in 2022–2024, with 2024 growth at about 2.8%—solidly positive rather than stagnant. Aside from a one‑quarter dip of –0.3% in Q1 2025, the broader 2021–2024 period averaged roughly 3.2% real growth, and forecasts for 2025–2026 still show positive growth around 2–2.5%. This is inconsistent with the prolonged weak or zero growth that defined 1970s stagflation.

Inflation level and persistence: Inflation did spike in 2021–2022, but it has trended back toward the Fed’s target. Core PCE inflation fell from over 5% in 2022 to roughly 2–3% by 2023–2025, while headline CPI growth slowed from the 2022 peak to the low‑to‑mid‑3% range in 2023–2024 and around that level in 2025. That’s above 2% but far below the sustained high single‑digit inflation of the 1970s.

Labor market: Unemployment remained historically low—around 3.5–4.0% through 2023–2024, rising only modestly to about 4.0% on average in 2024 and roughly 4.4% by late 2025. The 1970s, by contrast, involved both elevated inflation and significantly higher, persistent unemployment.

Policy and consensus outlook: While some analysts in 2024–2025 warned about risks of stagflation, mainstream forecasts envision moderate growth with inflation in the mid‑2% to high‑2% range, not an entrenched stagflationary regime, and they expect the Fed to continue easing gradually rather than being cornered without tools.

Because the U.S. economy has not exhibited the combination of persistent high inflation and prolonged stagnation characteristic of 1970s stagflation within the few years after April 2022, Sacks’s implied scenario that the U.S. would "end up with something like a 1970s style stagflation" in that window has, as of November 2025, not occurred.

economy
Given the then-current yield curve inversion as of late March 2022, there is a very high likelihood that the U.S. will experience a recession within two years, i.e., by March 2024, and a better than two‑thirds likelihood within one year, by March 2023.
Historically, it's meant when the yield curve inverts, there's been a better than two thirds chance of a recession at some point in the next year. And greater than 98% chance of recession at some point in the next two years. So it looks to me.View on YouTube
Explanation

Using the standard U.S. benchmark for recessions—the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER) Business Cycle Dating Committee—there has been no recession in the United States since the brief COVID-19 downturn that ended with a trough in April 2020. The NBER’s official chronology lists the most recent peak as February 2020 and the most recent trough as April 2020, with no subsequent peaks or troughs announced through 2025, implying continuous expansion from May 2020 onward.citeturn0search2turn0search3 This means no NBER‑defined recession occurred between March 2022 and March 2023 or between March 2022 and March 2024, the one‑year and two‑year windows implied by Sacks’s statement.

Contemporary analysis also notes that while real GDP was negative in the first two quarters of 2022 (often called a "technical recession"), multiple sources emphasized that this did not meet the NBER’s broader recession criteria and that the NBER did not declare a recession for 2022.citeturn1search1turn1search4turn1search9 Moreover, later commentary on the prolonged 2022–early‑2025 yield‑curve inversion explicitly observes that no recession actually followed despite the inversion, calling into question the yield curve’s traditional reliability as a recession predictor in this episode.citeturn0news14

Sacks invoked historical statistics that an inverted yield curve implies “>2/3” odds of recession within a year and “~98%” odds within two years, and was clearly using those statistics to assert that a recession was extremely likely in the then‑future period. Since, under the standard NBER definition, no recession had occurred by March 2023 or March 2024, the specific event he treated as overwhelmingly probable did not happen in time. On an event‑level evaluation ("did the predicted recession occur by the stated horizons?"), this makes the prediction wrong.

politics
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, the Democratic Party will suffer large losses (a "shellacking"), with Republicans achieving a significant wave election at the congressional level.
That is who's driving the agenda in the Democratic Party today. That is why the Democrats are going to get shellacked in November.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that Democrats would be “shellacked” in the November 2022 U.S. midterms, implying a large, wave‑type Republican victory at the congressional level.

What actually happened:

  • Senate: Democrats retained and expanded their Senate majority, going from a 50–50 chamber (with the vice president breaking ties) to a 51–49 edge after netting one seat. (ballotwire.com)
  • House: Republicans did win the House, but only by a narrow margin (around 221–214 or 222–213 depending on the final count), a net gain of 9 seats – far short of a typical “wave” or “shellacking” for the party in power. Analysts widely noted that the expected “red wave” failed to materialize and that Democrats broadly exceeded expectations. (cnbc.com)

A “shellacking” or “wave” midterm historically means large, double‑digit net House gains and/or loss of the Senate by the president’s party (e.g., 2010 or 2014). In 2022, Democrats not only held the Senate and governorships better than expected, but Republican gains in the House were modest.

Because the real outcome was a mixed, relatively close election with Democrats outperforming historical midterm patterns, the prediction that they would be “shellacked” and face a large Republican wave at the congressional level is best characterized as wrong.

Sacks @ 01:30:01Inconclusive
politicsconflict
The eventual political settlement of the Russia‑Ukraine war will include some form of de facto or de jure independence (or separation from Kyiv’s control) for the disputed Donetsk and Luhansk territories in the Donbas region, rather than their full reintegration under Ukraine’s central government.
I think it's going to result in some form of independence for these disputed territories of Donetsk and Luhansk. Right? I mean, and but the reality is the United States of America doesn't have a vital interest.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 30, 2025, there is still no final political settlement or peace treaty ending the Russia‑Ukraine war. Fighting continues on multiple fronts, including in and around Donetsk and Luhansk (part of the broader eastern and Kupiansk/Novopavlivka offensives), and Russia still occupies large parts of Ukraine’s east and south, but the war is ongoing and unresolved.

Key points:

  • Russia claims to have annexed Donetsk and Luhansk (along with Zaporizhzhia and Kherson) and demands their international recognition as Russian territory in its peace proposals, while insisting on Ukrainian military withdrawal from these areas.(themoscowtimes.com)
  • Ukraine explicitly rejects recognizing any Russian annexations and continues to insist on the restoration of its 1991 borders; it has repeatedly stated it will not accept the permanent loss of Donbas territory as part of a settlement.(theguardian.com)
  • In 2025, both the UN General Assembly and Security Council adopted resolutions that call for a just peace in Ukraine but do not codify any new borders or status for Donetsk and Luhansk; these documents leave the territorial question unresolved and emphasize principles rather than a concrete settlement.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • A U.S.-backed 28‑point draft peace framework from November 2025, as reported, would recognize Russian control over Crimea, Luhansk and Donetsk, but it is only a proposed plan, has been heavily criticized, and has not been accepted by Ukraine or translated into a binding agreement.(bcfausa.org)
  • Ongoing negotiations and counter‑proposals show that the eventual status of Donetsk and Luhansk is still being contested diplomatically, and the war itself has not yet been brought to an end.(reuters.com)

Because no final political settlement exists yet, we cannot say whether Sacks’ prediction about the eventual settlement (some form of de facto or de jure independence/separation for Donetsk and Luhansk rather than reintegration under Kyiv) has turned out to be right or wrong. It remains a claim about the future course of a still‑unsettled conflict, so the correct assessment at this time is “inconclusive (too early)”.

economypolitics
The economic fallout from the Russia‑Ukraine war and associated policy responses (e.g., sanctions, energy and commodity shocks) will contribute to the U.S. economy entering a recession, and that recession will negatively affect voter sentiment toward the Biden administration in subsequent elections.
This is going to hurt us. I mean, look, this is one of those things that the administration thinks doesn't affect them. But you know what? When our economy goes into recession, because this is the straw that breaks the camel's back, voters are going to take it into consideration.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2022 indicates that the U.S. did not enter an official recession following the Russia‑Ukraine war, even though the war did worsen inflation and weigh on growth, and economic discontent clearly hurt Biden and Democrats with voters.

  1. No post‑2020 U.S. recession (official data):
    The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), the standard arbiter of U.S. recessions, lists the most recent peak as February 2020 and trough as April 2020, with no subsequent peak or trough announced through 2025. That implies the economy remained in expansion after mid‑2020, i.e., no officially dated recession in 2022–2024. (nber.org)

  2. First‑half 2022 “technical recession” wasn’t broadly accepted as a real recession:
    Real GDP did contract in Q1 and Q2 2022, leading some commentators to say the U.S. was in a “technical recession.” (steelmarketupdate.com) But many analyses noted that this downturn was driven heavily by inventories and trade, while employment and income remained strong, and stressed that two quarters of negative GDP are not the official definition of a recession. (aneconomicsense.org) Both the White House and many economists therefore argued that the U.S. was slowing but not in recession, a view reinforced by continued job growth and later descriptions of the period as a near‑miss “soft landing.” (en.wikipedia.org)

  3. War‑related shocks raised inflation and lowered growth, but forecasts and data showed a slowdown, not a U.S. crash:
    International institutions analyzing the economic impact of the Russo‑Ukrainian war concluded that the conflict would raise global energy and food prices and push up inflation, while trimming U.S. growth forecasts (for example, to about 3.3% in 2022), but did not project an outright U.S. recession in the near term. (euromonitor.com) The World Bank and IMF likewise framed the war as a major commodity shock heightening inflation risks and slowing growth, not as a trigger that had already pushed the U.S. into recession. (weforum.org)

  4. Economic pain did hurt Biden’s standing and shape elections—but without a clear war‑induced recession:
    Throughout 2022, inflation and the economy were consistently at or near the top of voters’ concerns. Pre‑midterm polling found the economy/inflation was the most important issue for large shares of voters, and nearly half of voters in AP VoteCast/exit‑poll data named “the economy and jobs” as the biggest issue facing the country; those voters backed Republicans by roughly 2‑to‑1. (washingtonpost.com) Biden’s handling of the economy and inflation polled poorly (e.g., majorities disapproving of his performance on inflation and the economy), giving Republicans a clear opening to attack him on cost‑of‑living issues. (foxnews.com) Republicans did win the House in 2022, consistent with economic dissatisfaction weighing on Biden, but this occurred in a high‑inflation slowdown rather than a formally recognized recession.

  5. Why the prediction is ultimately judged wrong:
    Sacks’s prediction, as normalized, has two key claims:

    • (a) that fallout from the Russia‑Ukraine war and related policies would help push the U.S. economy into a recession, and
    • (b) that that recession would sour voter sentiment toward Biden in subsequent elections.

    While (b) is directionally consistent with what happened—economic pain and high prices clearly hurt Biden and Democrats with voters—the critical antecedent (a) did not occur by standard economic dating: there has been no post‑2020 U.S. recession officially recognized by NBER, and the episode is increasingly described as a soft‑landing/near‑miss rather than a war‑induced recession. (nber.org) Because the prediction hinges on a war‑driven recession triggering voter backlash, and that recession never clearly materialized, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong, albeit partially right about economic discontent hurting Biden politically.

marketsventure
A meaningful subset of late‑stage private companies in the 2022 IPO backlog will go public at valuations below their last private round (down‑round IPOs) over the ensuing IPO cycle (roughly 2022–2023).
Some of them are probably going to have to IPO at down rounds. I think that's sort of the takeaway.View on YouTube
Explanation

The core claim was that among the big late‑stage, VC‑backed companies waiting to go public in early 2022, some would ultimately IPO at valuations below their last private round (down‑round IPOs) during the next IPO cycle (2022–2023).

That happened clearly:

  • Instacart (Maplebear) was one of the marquee late‑stage unicorns in the 2021–2022 IPO backlog; CNBC in March 2021 noted its valuation had just doubled to $39B and that it was preparing for a “highly anticipated public debut,” with Goldman Sachs expected to lead the IPO. (cnbc.com) When Instacart finally went public in September 2023, its IPO priced at $30 per share, implying a fully diluted valuation of about $9.9B, a steep drop from the $39B private round two years earlier. (fortune.com) Axios explicitly labeled this a “down‑round IPO,” noting Instacart raised $660M at a $9.9B valuation, sharply below the $39B valuation of its March 2021 funding round. (axios.com) This single, very prominent example already satisfies “some of them are probably going to have to IPO at down rounds.”

  • The broader pattern shows a meaningful subset, not just one outlier. For example, Arm’s 2023 IPO valued it at $54.5B, below an internal $64B valuation SoftBank had assigned shortly before, which market commentary described as a down‑round IPO alongside Instacart’s sharply reduced range of $8.6–$9.3B vs. its prior $39B private valuation. (nasdaq.com) Klaviyo, another late‑stage startup in that cohort, went public in September 2023 at about $9.2B, roughly in line with or slightly below its prior late‑stage valuation around $9.5B, and was reported as initially targeting an IPO valuation below its last private round. (cnbc.com)

  • More generally, venture commentators summarized the 2023–2024 IPO window as being dominated by down‑round IPOs: a widely cited analysis by investor Aman Verjee (shared by Dave McClure) noted that “just about every VC‑backed IPO in 2023 and 2024 was a ‘down round’” relative to the prior private financing, explicitly listing Instacart, Reddit, Klaviyo, ServiceTitan, Circle, and Hinge Health as examples. (linkedin.com) This confirms that down‑round IPOs became common among the very cohort of late‑stage, VC‑backed companies Sacks was talking about.

Because at least one flagship backlog name (Instacart) and then a broader set of peer companies did IPO at valuations below their last private rounds within the ensuing IPO cycle (by late 2023), Sacks’s prediction that “some of them are probably going to have to IPO at down rounds” is borne out by subsequent events.

economy
The economic blowback from cutting Russia off from the global economy will cause a severe negative impact (“economic tsunami”) on the US economy within the subsequent year (by around March 2023).
there is an economic tsunami headed for our own economy as a result of the blowback from basically severing 144 million Russians from the global economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Within the year after the March 19, 2022 podcast (i.e., by roughly March 2023), the U.S. did not experience an “economic tsunami” or severe macroeconomic downturn, even though sanctions and the war clearly imposed notable costs.

What actually happened:

  • Growth: Real U.S. GDP still grew in 2022 by about 2.1% and then by 2.5% in 2023, indicating continued expansion rather than collapse. (bea.gov) Quarterly data show solid growth into late 2022 (e.g., Q4 2022 at a 2.9% annual rate). (apps.bea.gov)
  • Jobs: Unemployment in March 2023 was about 3.5–3.6%, near 50‑year lows and far from crisis levels, with employment and labor-force participation continuing to improve through 2022–23. (bts.gov)
  • Inflation shock (real but not a collapse): CPI inflation did spike to 9.1% year‑over‑year in June 2022 and was still 5.0% by March 2023, a significant cost‑of‑living hit. (bls.gov) Analyses attribute a substantial portion of that elevated U.S. inflation specifically to the invasion of Ukraine and associated energy/commodity effects from the conflict and sanctions (e.g., Moody’s Mark Zandi estimated several percentage points of U.S. inflation were due to the war/sanctions channel). (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Overall assessment: Major institutions and analysts later characterized the U.S. economy in 2023 as resilient, with recession fears proving overblown and inflation easing while growth and employment remained strong. (cbpp.org)

So while sanctions and the war clearly produced meaningful negative effects for the U.S. (notably higher inflation and tighter monetary policy), the predicted severe blowback—an “economic tsunami” causing a major U.S. economic breakdown within a year—did not materialize. Overall, the prediction is best classified as wrong in its core claim about the magnitude of the damage to the U.S. economy.

economy
In 2022, the US will enter a recession, accompanied by gasoline prices rising to around $7–$10 per gallon in at least some parts of the country.
we have a recession later this year as gas prices go to $7 and $10 a gallon.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction ties two conditions together for 2022: (1) the U.S. entering a recession, and (2) gasoline prices reaching roughly $7–$10/gal in at least some areas.

Gasoline prices:

  • In 2022, the national average gasoline price hit a record above $5/gal, with California’s average over $6/gal by early June, and some locations far higher.
  • Reporting from CBS News, based on GasBuddy and AAA data, listed seven California stations charging more than $7.25/gal as of June 2, 2022, including prices in the high $7s and low $8s.citeturn2search3
  • A Los Angeles Times article noted that while California’s average was around $6.34/gal on June 6, 2022, a Mendocino station was charging $9.60/gal for regular—squarely in the predicted $7–$10 range.citeturn2search10 So the gas-price part of the prediction was accurate.

Recession in 2022:

  • In the U.S., the standard arbiter of recessions is the National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER). Its business‑cycle chronology shows the last peak in activity in February 2020 and a trough in April 2020, with no later peaks or troughs announced—meaning the NBER has not dated any new recession after April 2020.citeturn3search8
  • A Congressional Research Service summary (updated October 3, 2024) explicitly notes that after the April 2020 trough, “NBER has not announced any peaks in economic activity in the intervening years,” implying a continued expansion rather than a recession in 2022.citeturn3search7
  • While real GDP did contract in the first two quarters of 2022, major coverage at the time pointed out that most economists did not expect NBER to classify the first half of 2022 as a recession, citing strong employment and continued growth in consumer spending.citeturn3search4

Because no official U.S. recession was recorded in 2022, the core macroeconomic part of the forecast failed, even though the gas-price scenario materialized. As the prediction was a single conjunctive claim (recession and $7–$10 gas), its overall status is wrong.

politicsconflict
As a result of Western policy around the Ukraine crisis, Russia will be pushed into a long‑term, durable strategic alignment with China, reducing the likelihood of Russia re‑aligning with the West in the foreseeable future.
it's, uh, it's a transition that's happening mainly because of China. So we're in, you know, it seems like what we're doing is pushing Russia irrevocably into into his arms.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2022 strongly supports Sacks’ prediction that Western policy over the Ukraine war has pushed Russia into a durable strategic alignment with China and made a near‑term re‑alignment with the West unlikely.

  1. Sharp, sanctions‑driven pivot toward China

    • After the invasion and sweeping US/EU/Japan sanctions, China refused to join Western sanctions and instead expanded trade; China accounted for about 40% of Russia’s imports and bilateral trade hit a record $190B in 2022, then $240B in 2023 and about $245B in 2024, more than double 2020 levels. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Analyses describe Russia’s economic dependence on China as “deep” and possibly irreversible, explicitly tying this shift to Western sanctions and the 2014–2022 escalation over Ukraine. (worldcrunch.com)
    • Because sanctions largely cut Russia off from dollar/euro finance, Moscow reoriented its financial system toward the yuan: by 2024–2025, yuan dominated FX trading in Russia and roughly 90%+ of Russia‑China trade was settled in rubles and yuan. (sldinfo.com)
      These sources explicitly frame the dependence on China as an unintended consequence of Western sanctions, matching Sacks’ causal claim that Western policy is what “pushes” Russia into China’s arms.
  2. Deepening, explicitly framed long‑term strategic partnership

    • Even before the full invasion, Russia and China announced a “no limits” partnership on 4 February 2022, pledging that their relationship was “superior to political and military alliances of the Cold War era.” (china.usc.edu)
    • Since then, Xi and Putin have repeatedly upgraded and reaffirmed a “comprehensive strategic partnership of coordination for a new era,” signing joint statements and a pre‑2030 economic cooperation plan, and describing the relationship as “strategic, reliable and stable” and “not an ally but better than an ally.” (en.cppcc.gov.cn)
    • Xi’s high‑profile 2023 state visit to Moscow and Putin’s 2024 state visit to China, followed by Xi’s 2025 Victory Day visit to Russia, all highlighted that both sides see the partnership as long‑term and central to their foreign policy. (eng.chinamil.com.cn)
    • European and US officials now routinely refer to a China‑Russia “axis” or strategic alignment as one of the greatest global challenges, underlining that outside observers see a durable bloc, not a tactical fling. (eutoday.net)
      While the relationship is asymmetric and China has sometimes pulled back (e.g., some banks limiting transactions under secondary sanctions), expert work still characterizes it as a consolidated strategic alignment with Russia increasingly the junior partner rather than an autonomous pole. (eurasiaprospective.net)
  3. Russia–West re‑alignment looks very unlikely in the ‘foreseeable future’

    • NATO’s 2022 Strategic Concept formally designates Russia as “the most significant and direct threat” to Allied security, signaling a structural adversarial posture rather than a temporary dispute. (nato.int)
    • The EU has adopted an ever‑expanding series of sanctions packages (now approaching 19 by late 2025), with stated long‑term aims to degrade Russia’s military capacity and permanently reduce its role in Europe’s energy system, including a phased LNG ban through 2027. (eeas.europa.eu)
    • Senior EU and NATO officials in 2025 describe Russia as planning for long‑term confrontation with Europe, reinforcing the view that political normalization is not on the horizon. (apnews.com)
    • The rare Western leaders who talk about eventual “re‑integration” of Russia (e.g., Hungary’s Viktor Orbán) frame it as contingent on a peace deal and major changes in behavior, conditions far from being met. (reuters.com)
      Combined, this suggests that a meaningful Russia‑West re‑alignment in the medium term is improbable, while Russia’s dependence on and coordination with China are already entrenched.
  4. Caveats and why they don’t overturn the prediction

    • The partnership stops short of a formal mutual‑defense alliance, and China has tried to avoid overtly violating Western sanctions or providing acknowledged lethal aid, indicating some limits and hedging. (cnbc.com)
    • The asymmetry means Russia is a junior, dependent partner, and there are frictions over pricing and project terms (e.g., delays over the Power of Siberia 2 gas pipeline), but this still fits Sacks’ broader claim of a “durable strategic alignment,” just on terms increasingly set by Beijing. (cfr.org)

Overall, nearly four years after the prediction, the observable trajectory matches it well: Western sanctions and broader policy over the Ukraine war have made Russia heavily and structurally dependent on China, both governments describe their ties as a long‑term strategic partnership, and Russia’s re‑alignment with the West looks implausible for at least the rest of this decade. That justifies classifying the prediction as right rather than ambiguous or premature.

conflictpolitics
Throughout the Russia‑Ukraine conflict that began with the February 24, 2022 invasion, the United States will not directly intervene militarily in Ukraine (i.e., no deployment of U.S. combat forces into Ukraine to fight Russian forces).
the United States of America would not intervene militarily in Ukraine. We should all understand that... we are not going to intervene militarily in that conflict, nor should weView on YouTube
Explanation

Open-source reporting from 2022–2025 consistently indicates that the United States has provided extensive indirect support to Ukraine—financial aid, weapons, intelligence, training, and sanctions against Russia—but has not deployed U.S. combat units into Ukraine to fight Russian forces.

Key points:

  1. Early policy statement (Feb–Mar 2022). In the first weeks after the invasion, President Biden and U.S. officials repeatedly ruled out sending American troops to fight in Ukraine, emphasizing that U.S. forces would defend NATO territory but not enter the war directly.

  2. Aid and support, but no combat deployment. Throughout 2022–2025 the U.S. role has been described as providing military aid (artillery, air defenses, tanks, long‑range missiles), intelligence, and training (often outside Ukraine, e.g., in Germany or other NATO countries), without U.S. troops engaging Russian forces on Ukrainian soil. None of the major developments in U.S. support—such as provision of HIMARS, Patriot systems, Abrams tanks, or long‑range missiles—have included announcements of U.S. combat deployments into Ukraine.

  3. No reports of U.S. combat forces fighting in Ukraine. Media coverage, Pentagon briefings, and congressional debates about escalation risks have focused on avoiding direct NATO–Russia war; there are no credible reports of U.S. combat brigades, battalions, or similar units being sent into Ukraine for active combat against Russian troops.

Given that the prediction was about direct U.S. military intervention with combat forces inside Ukraine and that, up to November 30, 2025, this has not occurred, the prediction that “the United States would not intervene militarily in Ukraine” in the specific sense defined (no deployment of U.S. combat forces to fight Russian forces in Ukraine) has held true.

Therefore, the prediction is right.

conflictpolitics
If the Russia‑Ukraine war does not escalate into a larger war involving other great powers, Vladimir Putin will not seek to occupy all of Ukraine indefinitely; instead, the likely scenario is that Russian forces will remain in Ukraine for on the order of about one year, during which Russia will install a puppet or strongly pro‑Russian government in Kyiv and then withdraw most of its forces, similar to Russia’s behavior in Georgia in 2008.
I don't think he wants this problem long term. It's probably going to be more like the situation we had in Georgia in 2008. He goes in for a year. He institutes perhaps some sort of puppet government or some government that's more favorable to him, and then he gets out. Probably this is if there's no escalation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was conditional: if the war did not escalate into a larger war involving other great powers, Putin would occupy Ukraine for roughly a year, install a puppet or strongly pro‑Russian government in Kyiv, and then largely withdraw, similar to Georgia in 2008.

  1. Condition check – no great‑power war: As of late 2025, NATO and major Western powers have supplied weapons, training, and aid to Ukraine but have explicitly stayed out as direct belligerents. NATO leadership has repeatedly stated that NATO is not a party to the conflict and has no plans to send combat troops into Ukraine, rejecting no‑fly zones precisely to avoid direct Russia–NATO war.(theguardian.com) This means the predicate condition (“if there’s no escalation into a larger war involving other great powers”) has effectively been met.

  2. Duration and scale of Russian presence: Contrary to the “about one year” expectation, the large‑scale invasion that began on 24 February 2022 is still ongoing more than three and a half years later. The eastern front of the Russo‑Ukrainian war is explicitly described as ongoing and part of a conflict dated “24 February 2022 – present,” with active Russian offensives continuing into 2024–2025.(en.wikipedia.org) Multiple analyses estimate that Russia continues to occupy roughly one‑fifth of Ukraine’s territory as of 2025, including large parts of Donetsk, Luhansk, Zaporizhzhia, and Kherson regions.(aljazeera.com) This is a prolonged, large occupation, not a short in‑and‑out campaign.

  3. Annexation vs. temporary occupation: Rather than preparing to leave after a year, Russia formally annexed four Ukrainian regions (Donetsk, Luhansk, Kherson, Zaporizhzhia) in September 2022 and Putin declared their residents to be Russian citizens “forever,” signaling an intent to hold the territory long‑term, not to withdraw.(aljazeera.com) This is the opposite of a Georgia‑style limited incursion followed by withdrawal.

  4. Government in Kyiv: No Russian‑installed puppet or overtly pro‑Russian regime was ever established in Kyiv. Volodymyr Zelenskyy has remained Ukraine’s president throughout the war, with Ukrainian political reporting and diplomatic travel in 2025 still referring to him as president and head of state.(en.wikipedia.org) Ukraine’s government continues to fight Russia and reject any territorial concessions, not act as a Moscow client.(theguardian.com)

Because (a) the condition of no direct great‑power war was met, yet (b) Russia did not withdraw after about a year, did annex and hold large territories, and did not install a puppet government in Kyiv, the prediction’s main scenario has clearly failed. Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

healthpolitics
Canadian provinces will end most or all COVID-19 mandates in the near term (within months of February 2022), rendering the trucker protest’s original policy demands largely moot.
And meanwhile, all the provinces are ending Covid mandates anyway, so this whole issue is moot.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from Canadian provincial timelines shows that, within a few months of February 2022, essentially all provinces moved to lift most or all broad COVID‑19 mandates (vaccine passports, capacity limits, and general mask rules) on roughly the schedule Sacks implied.

  • By mid‑February 2022, provinces and territories had already begun multistage reopening plans after the Omicron peak, including “eliminating the use of vaccination passports and vaccine‑specific restrictions,” reopening venues, and then gradually removing mask mandates in a majority of settings by early summer 2022. (www150.statcan.gc.ca)
  • A legal and employment analysis summarizing provincial decisions notes that Alberta ended its proof‑of‑vaccination system on February 9, 2022; Saskatchewan ended its vaccine passport on February 14; Manitoba planned to end proof‑of‑vaccination on March 1 and indoor mask requirements on March 15; Quebec ended proof‑of‑vaccination by March 14; Newfoundland and Labrador planned to end its COVID restrictions, including mask and vaccination requirements, by March 14; New Brunswick targeted lifting all restrictions by March 14; PEI and Nova Scotia also set late‑February and March dates to drop vaccine passport rules. (mondaq.com)
  • Nova Scotia explicitly announced on February 23, 2022 that all provincial COVID‑19 restrictions would end by March 21, 2022, removing gathering limits, distancing, and mask requirements in public spaces and businesses (with only health‑facility controls left to institutional discretion). (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Quebec—one of the strictest provinces—reopened most sectors and dropped its vaccine passport in March 2022 and then lifted its general indoor mask mandate on May 14, 2022, making it the last province to end that broad requirement. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • A national summary of the COVID‑19 response in Canada shows that all provinces and territories reached a “no restrictions” status (with mask mandates terminated or limited to narrow settings) between March and June 2022, confirming that provincial‑level COVID mandates in general public life were largely gone within a few months of February 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)

Regarding the second part of the prediction—whether this made the trucker protest’s original policy demands “largely moot”:

  • The Freedom Convoy began over a federal vaccine mandate for cross‑border truckers but broadened into opposition to a wide range of pandemic restrictions, including provincial vaccine passports and other mandates. (apnews.com)
  • As shown above, those provincial mandates were already in the process of being lifted and were mostly gone by late spring 2022, independent of the protesters’ continued presence. That meant a large share of the day‑to‑day restrictions the protesters objected to (e.g., proof‑of‑vaccination to enter businesses, capacity limits, general mask rules) disappeared on the timeline Sacks described.
  • It is true that some federal requirements (notably border and travel vaccination rules) persisted longer, with domestic travel and federal‑employee vaccine mandates only suspended on June 20, 2022, and border vaccination/testing rules removed on October 1, 2022. (canada.ca) However, the specific claim being evaluated concerns provincial mandates and their impact on the protest’s broader policy goals.

Given that (1) Canadian provinces did, in fact, end most or all broad COVID‑19 mandates within a few months of February 2022, and (2) this substantially undercut the protest’s original demands around provincial restrictions, the prediction is best categorized as right, even though certain federal mandates remained in place somewhat longer.

politics
Over the coming election cycles after 2022, Asian American voters will measurably shift away from the Democratic Party (toward Republicans or at least away from reliable Democratic support), driven in part by Democratic-backed policies perceived as a "war on merit" in education and declining public safety.
this war on merit that's happening is something that is going to, you know, flip the Asian American community, I think, toView on YouTube
Explanation

Available post‑2022 data show a clear, measurable rightward shift among Asian American voters, while they still overall lean Democratic.

1. Evidence of a measurable shift away from Democrats

  • Baseline: In 2020, Asian Americans gave Joe Biden about 63% of their vote, and were a solidly Democratic constituency; as of 2023, roughly 62% of Asian American registered voters identified with or leaned Democratic, vs. 34% Republican/lean Republican.

    Sources: Wikipedia summary of Asian American vote shares; Pew 2022–23 survey of Asian voters. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • In 2024, multiple analyses find a significant rightward shift:

    • A table of racial vote shares shows Democratic share of the Asian vote falling from ~63% in 2020 to ~54% in 2024 in the presidential race — a ~9‑point drop for Democrats. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • A RealClearPolitics analysis using Washington Post and NBC exit polls reports a 9‑point national shift toward Republicans among Asian American voters vs. 2020; in some states (e.g., Nevada and Texas) exit polls suggest Trump actually won the Asian vote. (realclearpolitics.com)
    • A Pew-based recap (reported in the New York Post) similarly finds Trump’s support among Asian voters rising from about 30% in 2020 to around 40% in 2024, another indication of a sizeable rightward move. (nypost.com)
  • Party identification also nudges away from Democrats: AAPI Data’s pre‑election surveys show Democratic ID among Asian American voters slipping from 44% (2020) to 42% (2024), Republicans holding around 22–23%, and independents growing from 25% to 31%, i.e., modest but real erosion of solid Democratic identification. (aapidata.com)

  • Local results reinforce the pattern: In New York, majority‑Asian precincts moved 23 points to the right between 2018 and 2022; in 2024 Trump flipped several New York City Assembly districts with large Asian populations, with analysts noting that heavily Asian neighborhoods in southern Brooklyn and Queens showed some of the largest pro‑Trump swings. (theamericanconservative.com)

Taken together, these national and local data show a measurable shift of Asian Americans away from their prior level of reliable Democratic support, consistent with the core quantitative part of the prediction.

2. Role of education/“war on merit” and public safety

The prediction tied the shift partly to Democratic‑backed policies seen as a “war on merit” in education and to declining public safety. There is substantial, though not perfectly causal, evidence that these themes were important drivers in the places where the shift has been most visible:

  • Education / “war on merit”:

    • In San Francisco, the 2022 recall of three school‑board members—heavily supported by Asian American parents—was closely linked to controversies over ending merit‑based admissions at Lowell High School and prioritizing symbolic renamings over academic concerns. These moves were framed by critics as attacks on merit and fairness in competitive schooling. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In New York City, proposals and lawsuits targeting merit‑based gifted and specialized‑high‑school admissions (Stuyvesant, Bronx Science, etc.) were widely described by opponents as a “war on merit,” especially by Asian parent groups who saw them as threatening opportunities their children had earned through testing. (realcleareducation.com)
    • Coverage of Asian voters “shifting right” in New York explicitly mentions anger over these school‑admissions changes as a factor behind the dramatic 23‑point move toward Republicans in majority‑Asian precincts. (theamericanconservative.com)
  • Public safety / crime:

    • A RealClearPolitics post‑2024 analysis argues that Asian Americans, like Hispanics, “shifted right” in part due to dissatisfaction with Democratic leadership on crime and public order, highlighting concern about personal safety and harassment. (realclearpolitics.com)
    • Reporting on New York and other urban areas finds that Asian American voters in neighborhoods that swung hardest toward Trump cite crime, homelessness, and public safety as primary reasons for abandoning their traditional Democratic votes. (theguardian.com)
    • AAPI Data’s 2022 and 2024 surveys list crime and education among the top‑ranked issues for Asian American voters (alongside economy and healthcare), and show that voters are more divided on which party they trust on crime than on issues like gun control or voting rights. (aapidata.com)

These sources do not “prove” causality in a strict econometric sense, but they broadly support the narrative that concerns over merit‑based education policies and public safety were salient factors in the notable rightward swings among Asian American voters in key urban areas and in the national 2024 results.

3. Important caveats

  • Asian Americans still lean Democratic overall: as of 2022–23, about 62% of Asian registered voters identify or lean Democratic and 34% Republican; pre‑2024 surveys often showed Harris or Biden leading Trump comfortably among Asian voters, and AAPI polls in September 2024 still had Harris ahead among Asian Americans by roughly 2‑to‑1. (pewresearch.org)
  • The shift is significant but not a total “flip” of the entire community into the Republican column; it is better described as erosion of the Democrats’ prior dominance and emergence of a more competitive, heterogeneous electorate.

Bottom line: By late 2024, Asian American voters had measurably shifted away from their earlier level of solid Democratic support, with Republican vote share rising and Democratic margins shrinking nationally and in key states. Media and analytical accounts consistently tie that shift in part to backlash against education policies perceived as undermining merit‑based advancement and to frustration with crime and public safety in Democratic‑run cities. That aligns closely with the substance of Sacks’s prediction, so it is best classified as right (with the caveat that the shift is partial, not an outright partisan flip).

marketstechventure
Valuations of late-stage SaaS companies that received large financings from Tiger Global at high multiples pre-2022 will decline materially over the ensuing period (e.g., 1–3 years) as markets reprice growth tech stocks.
I think those valuations are going to come down.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence indicates Sacks’ prediction largely came true.

  1. Tiger Global’s late‑stage tech/enterprise SaaS portfolio was heavily marked down within 1–3 years. Tiger’s $12.7B Private Investment Partners 15 fund, launched near the peak in late 2021, reported a ~20% paper loss by end‑2022 after the firm decreased valuations every month of 2022. (inkl.com) Separate reporting shows Tiger marked down its venture funds’ valuations by about 33% ($23B) in 2022. (theinformation.com) Roughly a quarter of that megafund’s investments were in enterprise SaaS and related software businesses, meaning late‑stage SaaS was a core part of the portfolio that was written down. (benzinga.com)

  2. Specific late‑stage SaaS names backed at high 2021 valuations saw materially lower marks. Prime Unicorn Index notes that ServiceTitan, a vertical home‑services SaaS company where Tiger Global was a key investor, was valued around $8.1B in a 2021 Series G led by Tiger/Thoma Bravo but later marked down to $5.8B in the index, a drop of roughly 28%. The same piece highlights broad markdowns in Tiger’s other large late‑stage tech holdings (Instacart, Databricks, Klarna) as part of the 2022 tech valuation reset. (primeunicornindex.com) When ServiceTitan finally IPO’d in December 2024, its public valuation (about $9B) was below its prior peak private valuation of ~$9.5B from 2021, showing no multiple expansion from the boom-era pricing even three years later. (reuters.com)

  3. Market‑wide late‑stage SaaS/growth tech repriced sharply in the same window. CB Insights data reported by TechCrunch show that by Q2 2023, median valuations for Series D and later rounds had fallen about 60% year‑over‑year, with later‑stage deals suffering the steepest compression. (techcrunch.com) Additional coverage of Tiger’s PIP 15 fund notes that around 25% of its investments were enterprise SaaS, and that multiple positions across its private portfolio were marked down significantly, aligning with this broader late‑stage tech repricing. (benzinga.com)

Taken together—large Tiger-led 2021 SaaS financings (e.g., ServiceTitan) being marked down, Tiger’s flagship late‑stage tech fund taking sizable write‑downs, and a ~60% median valuation drop for Series D+ rounds across the market within about a year—show that valuations of late‑stage SaaS companies funded at high multiples pre‑2022 did decline materially over the subsequent 1–3 years. That matches Sacks’ prediction that “those valuations are going to come down.”

politics
In the months following February 12, 2022, a US-based trucker convoy protest will form and physically drive to Washington, D.C. as a political demonstration.
the response to that is now there's a trucker convoy getting started in the US. And they're going to march on Washington. They're going to drive to Washington.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that in the weeks and months after Feb 12, 2022, a U.S.-based trucker convoy did form and drive to Washington, D.C., in protest of COVID-related government policies:

  • On Feb. 23, 2022, a group of American truckers launched a cross-country protest convoy from Adelanto, California, explicitly headed to Washington, D.C. to protest COVID-19 mandates, under the banner of the “People’s Convoy.” (latimes.com)
  • Coverage by Reuters describes this “People’s Convoy” as having traveled across the country headed to Washington, D.C. and then circling the outskirts of Washington on the Capital Beltway as a protest against pandemic restrictions. (reuters.com)
  • The Canada convoy protest article’s “International protests” section notes that on February 23 American truckers began a solidarity protest convoy from California to Washington, D.C. called the ‘People’s Convoy’, that the Pentagon deployed 700 National Guard troops in response, that a demonstration by convoy protesters occurred near the Washington Monument in early March, and that over 1,000 trucks, RVs, and cars gathered on the outskirts of D.C. as part of this protest. (en.wikipedia.org)

These sources establish that:

  1. The protest was U.S.-based (American truckers, starting in California).
  2. It formed after the Feb 12, 2022 podcast date.
  3. The convoy physically drove to the Washington, D.C. area and held political demonstrations aimed at the federal government, including at least one event near the Washington Monument inside D.C. itself.

This matches the substance of Sacks’ prediction that in the months following Feb. 12 a U.S. trucker convoy would form and drive to Washington, D.C. as a political protest. Hence the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
If President Biden does not respond in a way that David Sacks considers satisfactory to the emerging US trucker convoy protest between early 2022 and the 2024 election, Sacks predicts Biden’s presidency will effectively be finished (i.e., he will lose the 2024 election or be politically crippled by the issue).
between now and then, Biden better figure out what he's going to be on, because if he doesn't handle this right, I think it's going to be the end of his presidency.View on YouTube
Explanation

David Sacks’ prediction on All-In E67 was that the emerging trucker/mandate protests signaled a working‑class vs. professional‑class schism inside the Democratic coalition, and that if Biden didn’t handle this trucker/mandate issue correctly, it would be “the end of his presidency.”(transcriptize.com)

What actually happened:

  • The U.S. “People’s Convoy” modeled on Canada’s Freedom Convoy drove loops around the D.C. Beltway in March 2022 but caused only minor slowdowns, failed to significantly disrupt Washington, and never re‑entered D.C. as planned. By May 20, 2022, organizers officially disbanded the convoy after achieving essentially no concrete policy concessions.(thenationalnews.com) The issue faded from national attention.
  • Biden initially extended the COVID national emergency in early 2022, but over 2022–23 most federal and state COVID restrictions and mandates were wound down; the convoy itself did not force a dramatic turning point in his stance.(upi.com)
  • Biden’s presidency ended after one term because he withdrew from the 2024 race in July 2024 amid doubts about his age and electability, and Republicans won back the White House when Donald Trump defeated Kamala Harris in November 2024.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Analyses of the 2022 midterms, 2024 election, and Biden’s approval ratings consistently identify inflation, cost of living, the broader economy, immigration, and general performance as the dominant reasons for his political weakness—not COVID mandates or the 2022 trucker convoy.(en.wikipedia.org)

So while Biden did leave office after a single term, there is no evidence that his handling of the U.S. trucker convoy or related COVID‑mandate protests was what “ended his presidency” or politically crippled him. The convoy quickly fizzled and was not a lasting or central factor in his downfall. That makes Sacks’ conditional prediction—framed around this specific issue—wrong.

politics
If President Biden publicly embraces the US trucker convoy, calls for an end to Covid mandates, and announces a return to normalcy in early 2022, his job‑approval rating will rise by approximately 5–10 percentage points shortly thereafter (within a few months).
His popularity would like bounce five points. Ten points. As if he did that.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly counterfactual: it says that if President Biden publicly embraced the U.S. trucker convoy, called for an end to COVID mandates, and announced a return to normalcy in early 2022, his job‑approval would rise about 5–10 points.

What actually happened:

  • The Biden White House did not embrace the Canadian or prospective U.S. “Freedom Convoy” protests. In February 2022, Press Secretary Jen Psaki defended vaccine and mask requirements as effective, and characterized the trucker protests as the source of disruptions, while reiterating general support for peaceful protest but emphasizing their economic harms. (bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov)
  • The administration repeatedly said it would “follow the science” and CDC guidance on masking and other measures, and Biden called moves to lift mask mandates “premature,” indicating no broad call from him to end COVID mandates at that time. (reason.com)
  • In his March 1, 2022 State of the Union, Biden did say the U.S. was “moving forward safely, back to more normal routines” and urged Americans to get back to work, but he simultaneously framed this as part of an ongoing strategy to manage COVID with vaccines, treatments, and continued vigilance, not as a blanket announcement to end mandates. (pbs.org)

On approval ratings:

  • Biden’s job approval in early 2022 was generally in the low‑40s across major polls, with fluctuations but no clearly attributable 5–10 point surge linked to a sudden, public embrace of trucker protests or a broad anti‑mandate pivot—because no such pivot occurred. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the antecedent conditions of the prediction never occurred (Biden did not publicly embrace the convoy or call for an end to mandates in the way described), we have no direct empirical way to test whether doing so would have raised his approval by 5–10 points. Observed approval trends reflect a different strategy than the one hypothesized.

Therefore, the forecast about what would have happened under an unrealized strategy cannot be clearly rated as right or wrong based on actual outcomes, even though enough time has passed. It remains a counterfactual, and thus ambiguous.

politics
In the November 2022 U.S. elections, the Democratic Party will perform poorly relative to expectations (e.g., losing significant ground), in part because of its stance on Covid restrictions and censorship, as reflected in shifting viewership of figures like Tucker Carlson among young Democrats.
And this is why I think we're seeing. Tucker's Tucker is now the biggest demographic among young Democrats.... This does not bode well for them. On top of everything else that's happening in the country, this does not bode well for the Democrats in November.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was that Democrats would fare poorly in the November 2022 elections, especially relative to expectations, and that the situation in early 2022 “does not bode well for the Democrats in November.”

What actually happened:

  • Pre‑election expectations: Many forecasters and betting markets anticipated a strong Republican showing or “red wave,” with Republicans favored to win clear control of the House and a majority in the Senate. For example, one forecast predicted Republicans would end up with 219 House seats and 51 Senate seats, flipping both chambers, and analysts widely cited structural factors and the economy as favoring the GOP. (harvardpolitics.com)
  • Actual results: In the 2022 midterms, Democrats held the U.S. Senate and gained a seat (net +1), while Republicans took the House by a very narrow margin (net GOP gain of 9 seats, far below historical midterm losses for a president’s party). Democrats also achieved a net gain of governorships and flipped multiple state legislative chambers, leading many analysts to describe the outcome as historically good for an incumbent president’s party and far better than expected. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Relative to expectations: Post‑election coverage across the political spectrum emphasized that the anticipated “red wave” failed to materialize and that Democrats exceeded expectations, with outlets explicitly using those phrases. (ussc.edu.au)

Because Democrats performed better than most public expectations—especially in the Senate and in state‑level races—rather than suffering a broad, expectation‑defying defeat, Sacks’ prediction about Democrats doing poorly in November 2022 is best classified as wrong.

economy
Over the tightening cycle that begins with the 2022 rate hikes, it will be very difficult for the Federal Reserve to achieve a soft landing; there is a substantial likelihood that a U.S. recession will be triggered before inflation is brought under control.
I think that the risk of recession now is much higher than it was even a month ago. Now, you know, it's going to be hard to know. So basically, I think what we're saying is it's going to be very hard for the fed to engineer a soft landing here where we don't trigger a recession in the process of stopping inflation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that during the post‑March‑2022 tightening cycle it would be very hard for the Fed to avoid triggering a U.S. recession before inflation was brought under control. In reality, the Fed raised the federal funds rate from near 0% to about 5.25–5.50% between March 2022 and July 2023, a historically sharp tightening. Inflation then fell steeply from its 2022 peak (e.g., PCE inflation dropping from around 7% in mid‑2022 to about 2.6% by December 2023, with projections and later data putting inflation in the 2–3% range through 2024) while GDP growth stayed positive and unemployment remained relatively low. (congress.gov) Multiple mainstream analyses describe this episode as a rare soft landing or even “immaculate disinflation” — a return of inflation toward target without a recession or major spike in unemployment. (en.wikipedia.org) As of late 2025, the NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee has not declared any U.S. recession after the brief 2020 downturn, and the Fed’s recession‑indicator series (USRECQP) remains at 0 through at least Q3 2025, meaning no officially dated recession has followed the 2022 tightening so far. (nber.org) While some economists argue the economy may be slipping toward recession in 2025, even those discussions occur after inflation had already largely been reduced toward the Fed’s goal. (ft.com) Ex post, the feared recession triggered by the rate hikes before inflation was controlled has not (at least yet) occurred, so the substantive thrust of the prediction is best classified as wrong.

governmenttechmarkets
In response to the Biden administration’s evolving antitrust posture as of early 2022, many large U.S. technology companies will materially reduce or pause significant M&A activity until there is greater clarity on enforcement standards.
I think this administration is creating tremendous business uncertainty. I think the reaction of a lot of big tech companies is it's going to be to stop doing M&A until the situation gets clarified, because they just don't know.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since early 2022 shows that while U.S. antitrust policy under the Biden administration increased uncertainty and frictions around deals, large U.S. tech companies did not broadly “stop doing M&A” or even pause significant activity.

  1. Ongoing megadeals by Big Tech: Microsoft pursued and ultimately closed its $68.7 billion acquisition of Activision Blizzard in October 2023, one of the largest tech deals ever, despite intense global antitrust scrutiny. Alphabet then agreed in 2025 to buy cybersecurity firm Wiz for $32 billion, the largest acquisition in Google/Alphabet’s history, again in the midst of ongoing U.S. and EU antitrust actions against it. These are exactly the sort of major strategic deals Sacks suggested would be put on hold. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Sector-level data show activity remained high: A report cited by The Register using S&P Global data found that the total number of tech/media/telecom acquisitions over $500 million was actually higher under Biden than during Trump’s first term (235 vs. 223 as of late 2024), and the median time to close such deals increased by only one day, suggesting no broad freeze in large-tech dealmaking. (theregister.com) Tech M&A value in 2023 did fall sharply—down 55% year‑over‑year—but the number of tech deals actually ticked up, with analysts emphasizing rising interest rates and post‑pandemic normalization as primary causes, not a regulatory standstill. (informationweek.com) Law‑firm and market analyses for 2022–24 still identify technology as the leading or one of the leading sectors for global M&A, including roughly $640 billion of tech deal value in 2024, indicating robust ongoing activity rather than a prolonged pause. (mofo.com)

  3. There was a chill, but not a halt: Advisory and antitrust‑focused analyses do document a meaningful chilling effect: Big Tech’s share of global tech M&A volume reportedly dropped from 29% to 18% between 2021 and 2023, average antitrust‑driven delays more than doubled, and terminations of tech deals attributed to antitrust roughly doubled versus the Trump era. (winsavvy.com) A Covington & Burling review notes that the FTC and DOJ tried to “gratuitously” tax M&A and create general deterrence via burdensome procedures and rhetoric, creating real uncertainty and higher costs for transactions. (cov.com) This supports the idea that the administration raised uncertainty and reduced Big Tech’s relative appetite for some acquisitions—but it is far from the across‑the‑board cessation Sacks predicted.

Given that (a) very large strategic tech acquisitions continued, including record‑size deals by Microsoft and Alphabet; (b) overall large‑cap tech/TMT deal activity remained historically high compared with the prior administration; and (c) the documented impact of antitrust policy is a partial pullback and slower, riskier dealmaking, not a widespread halt in M&A, Sacks’s forecast that “a lot of big tech companies” would effectively stop doing M&A until clarity arrived is best characterized as wrong rather than merely imprecise or ambiguous.

politicseconomy
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Democrats will be decisively defeated in a Republican landslide if they continue to focus their messaging on January 6th rather than voter-priority issues like inflation, the economy, COVID, crime, and schools.
If you and the Democrats keep talking about this and focus on it on MSNBC to the exclusion of the issues that really matter. I'll see you in November because you're going to get slaughtered in this midterm election. It's going to be a landslide.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction described the 2022 midterms as a coming Republican landslide in which Democrats would be “slaughtered” if they kept emphasizing January 6. That outcome did not occur.

Key results:

  • U.S. House: Republicans did gain the House, but only narrowly: 222 Republican seats to 213 Democratic seats, a net GOP pickup of 9. Historical midterms commonly see much larger losses for the president’s party, and analysts characterized 2022 as much closer than expected, not a blowout. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • U.S. Senate: Democrats not only held the Senate, they gained one seat (net +1, including flipping Pennsylvania), ending with effective control of 51–49. This is the opposite of a Democratic “slaughter.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Governors and state races: Democrats made a net gain of two governorships and flipped several state legislative chambers, again inconsistent with a nationwide Republican landslide. (en.wikipedia.org)

Across outlets and post‑election analysis, the consensus was that the much‑touted “red wave” or “landslide” did not materialize; instead, Democrats outperformed historical midterm expectations and many pre‑election forecasts. Even Republican and right‑leaning commentators repeatedly noted that the “red wave” failed to happen. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the actual results were mixed and relatively close—rather than a decisive Republican landslide in which Democrats were “slaughtered”—this prediction is best judged as wrong, regardless of how one interprets the conditional about Democratic messaging on January 6.

politicsgovernment
The November 2022 U.S. midterm elections will feature a large Republican "red wave," and the magnitude of GOP gains will increase if Democrats continue to focus heavily on January 6th instead of bread-and-butter issues.
If you want to focus on that, to the exclusion of the real issues facing the country, like I said, this landslide in November, this red wave is going to be even bigger.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections would see a landslide “red wave” for Republicans, with even larger GOP gains if Democrats continued to focus on January 6th instead of economic/bread-and-butter issues.

What actually happened in the 2022 midterms:

  • U.S. House: Republicans did gain a majority, but only narrowly. They flipped the House with a net gain of about 9 seats (from 212 to 221), far short of the dozens of seats typical of a “wave” or “landslide” election.
  • U.S. Senate: Democrats improved their position. They gained a seat overall (winning Pennsylvania while losing no other Democratic-held seats), moving from 50–50 to 51–49 in their favor. This is the opposite of a large GOP surge.
  • Governorships and state races: Results were mixed, not a GOP landslide. Democrats flipped several governorships (e.g., in Arizona and Maryland), and performed strongly in many key state-level contests.
  • Post-election analysis: Across major U.S. outlets and election analysts, the consensus description was that the expected “red wave” did not materialize, with Republicans underperforming historical midterm patterns despite economic concerns and an unpopular incumbent president.

Because the prediction was for a landslide / even bigger red wave, and the actual results were modest GOP gains in the House, Democratic gains in the Senate, and mixed outcomes elsewhere—widely characterized as a disappointing result for Republicans—the prediction did not come true.

politics
Over the roughly ten months following this January 2022 recording, if Democrats and MSNBC continue to emphasize January 6th coverage, the Republican "red wave" in the November 2022 midterm elections will be especially large.
If you watch MSNBC, it's all January 6th all the time. And, you know, if Democrats are going to focus on this issue for the next ten months... This red wave in November is going to be an even bigger wave.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction tied continued Democratic/MSNBC focus on January 6th to an "even bigger" Republican red wave in the November 2022 midterms. In reality, the widely anticipated red wave did not materialize:

  • Republicans captured the U.S. House of Representatives but only with a very narrow majority (222–213), far smaller than typical midterm wave elections and below many pre‑election expectations.
  • Democrats held the U.S. Senate and even gained a seat (moving from 50–50 with the vice president breaking ties to 51–49 after the 2022 elections), which is inconsistent with a large opposition-wave outcome.
  • Post‑election analyses in major outlets broadly concluded that the expected Republican “red wave” failed to appear, stressing the underperformance of GOP candidates relative to historical midterm patterns and polling expectations.

Since the core, testable part of the prediction was that the 2022 midterms would bring an especially large Republican wave, and the eventual outcome was at best a modest Republican advantage in the House and a net Democratic gain in the Senate, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
If President Biden had prioritized it, a reform/clarification of the U.S. Electoral Count Act could have passed the Senate in this Congress (2021–2023) with at least 60 votes, i.e., with significant bipartisan support.
Biden could have gotten 60 votes for that. You know, I think that was very doable.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that a reform/clarification of the U.S. Electoral Count Act could pass the Senate in the 2021–2023 Congress with at least 60 votes if pursued, i.e., that such a bill could attract substantial bipartisan support.

In reality, during the 117th Congress, the Electoral Count Reform and Presidential Transition Improvement Act of 2022—which specifically reforms and clarifies the 1887 Electoral Count Act—was introduced on a bipartisan basis and folded into the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2023. It passed the Senate on December 22, 2022, by a 68–29 vote, well above the 60‑vote threshold, and was signed into law by President Biden on December 29, 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)

Since a substantive Electoral Count Act reform did in fact receive 60+ votes in the Senate within that Congress, the core feasibility claim in the prediction—that such a reform could get 60 votes—was borne out by subsequent events. The counterfactual element about Biden “prioritizing” it is not directly testable, but the observed outcome confirms that the vote count threshold was realistically achievable, so the prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
Legislation to ban or severely restrict insider trading by members of the U.S. Congress would be able to obtain a huge bipartisan majority in the current Congress (2021–2023), meaning support from large numbers of both Republicans and Democrats, if it were brought forward.
Pelosi. But but but but yeah, I think it is something that would get a huge bipartisan majority.View on YouTube
Explanation

In the 117th Congress (Jan 2021–Jan 2023), several bills were introduced to ban or sharply restrict stock trading by members of Congress, but none received a floor vote in either chamber, so we never observe whether they would have drawn a “huge bipartisan majority.”

Key facts:

  • Senator Jon Ossoff introduced the Ban Congressional Stock Trading Act (S.3494) on January 12, 2022. It was referred to the Senate Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs Committee and never moved beyond committee; tracking sites describe it as a partisan Democratic bill with Democratic-only cosponsors. (congress.gov)
  • Senator Elizabeth Warren and Senator Steve Daines co‑sponsored the Bipartisan Ban on Congressional Stock Ownership Act of 2022 (S.3631) with both Republican and Democratic cosponsors. The bill received a hearing but remained at “Introduced” status and did not receive a Senate floor vote. (congress.gov)
  • A House companion, H.R. 6678, also titled the Bipartisan Ban on Congressional Stock Ownership Act of 2022, likewise had cosponsors from both parties but was referred to committees and never brought to a House floor vote. (congress.gov)
  • Contemporary ethics analyses note that over half of members of Congress owned individual stocks and many engaged in significant trading, with dozens violating the STOCK Act’s disclosure rules during the 117th Congress, indicating that many members had personal financial exposure to such a ban. (campaignlegal.org) That context makes strong resistance plausible, but it still doesn’t tell us definitively how a full roll‑call vote would have gone.

Because no comprehensive ban or severe restriction on congressional stock trading came to an actual up‑or‑down vote in the 117th Congress, we have no empirical record of whether it would have obtained a “huge bipartisan majority.” The existence of a few bipartisan bills with relatively modest numbers of cosponsors suggests some cross‑party support but does not establish overwhelming, chamber‑wide backing. Therefore, the prediction that such a bill would get a huge bipartisan majority in that specific Congress remains a counterfactual that cannot be verified or falsified from the available legislative record, making the outcome ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
In the years following January 6, 2021, U.S. federal law-enforcement and security agencies will use public and political hysteria about the Capitol riot to justify and obtain expanded powers of surveillance and authority over American citizens.
you should understand that the hysteria created around that event is going to be used. It's going to be exploited to demand these powers.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence points in two different directions:

1. Agencies did use January 6 as a justification to seek more power and resources.

  • The Biden administration’s National Strategy for Countering Domestic Terrorism (June 2021) was explicitly “galvanized” by the January 6 attack and frames domestic extremism—especially white supremacist and anti‑government extremists—as the country’s most urgent terrorism threat, calling for enhanced analysis and information‑sharing across agencies. (csis.org)
  • DHS responded by expanding its monitoring of online activity and creating a new domestic‑terrorism intelligence branch to track platforms and “narratives known to provoke violence,” steps civil‑liberties groups describe as expanded surveillance after January 6. (theguardian.com)
  • DOJ’s National Security Division announced a new domestic‑terrorism unit in a January 2022 Senate hearing titled “The Domestic Terrorism Threat One Year After Jan. 6,” focused on racially/ethnically motivated and anti‑government/anti‑authority extremists—again, explicitly tied to the Capitol attack. (congress.gov)
  • In Congress, the Domestic Terrorism Prevention Act of 2022 (DTPA), introduced shortly after January 6 and passed by the House, would have authorized dedicated domestic‑terrorism offices within DHS, DOJ, and FBI to monitor, analyze, investigate, and prosecute domestic terrorism. It advanced politically in direct response to domestic extremism concerns, including January 6. (en.wikipedia.org) Civil‑liberties organizations warned lawmakers not to use the Capitol assault as a pretext to expand surveillance authorities or create a new “domestic terrorism” crime. (brennancenter.org) All of this supports the “used the hysteria to demand more powers” part of the prediction.

2. But major new statutory surveillance/charging powers were not actually enacted.

  • The DTPA failed in the Senate; it never became law, so the new domestic‑terrorism offices and explicit monitoring/analysis mandates it contained were not codified as additional authorities. (cbsnews.com)
  • Congressional and CRS analyses note that, even after January 6, there is still no standalone federal domestic‑terrorism offense; the FBI and DOJ charge domestic extremists (including January 6 defendants) under existing criminal statutes rather than any new domestic‑terrorism law. (everycrsreport.com) This contrasts with the post‑9/11 period, when Congress enacted sweeping new surveillance and terrorism authorities.
  • Civil‑rights coalitions repeatedly urged Congress not to expand surveillance powers in response to January 6, explicitly warning against using the attack as justification for broader domestic‑terrorism authorities. Their lobbying, combined with Senate opposition, helped prevent major new statutory powers from passing. (brennancenter.org)

How this maps to the prediction:

  • The prediction (normalized) has two key elements: (a) use public/political hysteria around January 6 to justify demands for expanded law‑enforcement/surveillance powers, and (b) obtain such expanded powers over U.S. citizens.
  • Element (a) is well supported: January 6 is repeatedly invoked in official strategies, hearings, and proposed legislation as the central rationale for more domestic‑terrorism focus, new units, and broader online monitoring.
  • Element (b) is only partially true: agencies have expanded programs, reoriented resources, and built new analytic/surveillance units under existing law, but there has been no major, clearly new statutory grant of surveillance or domestic‑terrorism authority akin to the post‑9/11 Patriot Act. The biggest legislative vehicle (DTPA) failed.

Because the prediction ties those two parts together—asserting both that hysteria would be exploited and that this would lead to actually obtaining expanded powers over citizens—the outcome is mixed. Agencies clearly used January 6 to push for more authority and infrastructure, and they did expand some practices within existing law, but they have not secured the kind of sweeping new legal surveillance powers the wording implies.

Given that tension, the fairest overall judgment is ambiguous rather than clearly right or clearly wrong.

marketstech
Calendar year 2022 will be characterized by a major correction in high-growth and tech-related asset prices (a sustained downward repricing versus 2020–2021 levels).
I predicted and you guys had similar predictions on just a few weeks ago that this would be the 2022, would be the year of the correction.View on YouTube
Explanation

Market data for calendar year 2022 shows a large, sustained correction in high‑growth and tech‑related asset prices relative to their 2020–2021 peaks:

  • The tech‑heavy Nasdaq Composite fell about 33% in 2022, its worst annual performance since 2008, driven largely by sharp selloffs in high‑growth technology names.【turn0calculator0】
  • Popular high‑growth/"innovation" ETFs such as ARK Innovation (ARKK) suffered even steeper drawdowns: ARKK was down roughly 67% in 2022 and over 80% from its February 2021 peak, reflecting a severe repricing of unprofitable and high‑multiple tech stocks (widely reported in financial press and fund performance summaries).
  • Many individual high‑growth tech stocks (e.g., pandemic beneficiaries in software, e‑commerce, fintech) declined 60–90% from 2020–2021 highs during 2022, as documented in year‑end 2022 market reviews and drawdown tables across major financial outlets.

Taken together, 2022 was clearly characterized by a broad, deep, and sustained correction in high‑growth and tech‑related asset prices from the elevated valuations of 2020–2021. This matches the substance of Sacks’s prediction that 2022 would be a “year of the correction” in those assets. Therefore, the prediction is best judged as right.

economy
Due to the Federal Reserve’s tightening stance as of early January 2022, the probability of the U.S. economy entering a recession at some point during calendar year 2022 is substantially elevated compared to prior expectations.
I think there's actually like a much greater risk now of the economy going into recession this year because of the Fed's overreaction this week.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that, after the Fed’s early‑2022 hawkish shift, the risk (probability) of a U.S. recession during calendar year 2022 was now “much greater” than before. This is a statement about changes in probability, not a direct forecast that a recession would definitely occur.

What we can check:

  • The Federal Reserve did, in fact, pivot to aggressive tightening starting in March 2022, with rapid rate hikes through the year, which many economists and market analysts argued raised the risk of recession.
  • However, the U.S. did not experience an officially dated NBER recession in 2022; while real GDP was negative in Q1 and Q2 2022, the National Bureau of Economic Research has not classified 2022 as a recession year, citing continued job growth and other indicators.

Whether the probability of recession in 2022 became “much greater” is not directly observable ex post; it depends on models or expectations that are not uniquely defined. The fact that no official 2022 recession occurred doesn’t by itself show that the risk didn’t rise; high‑probability events can fail to occur, and low‑probability events sometimes do occur. Because we cannot objectively verify the claimed change in probability against a clear standard, the statement cannot be cleanly scored as right or wrong.

Therefore the appropriate classification is ambiguous: the prediction concerns a shift in recession risk rather than an outcome that can be definitively checked against realized data.

politics
In 2022, Ron DeSantis will win re-election as Governor of Florida by a comfortable (non-close) margin and, by the end of 2022, will be regarded as the national frontrunner for the 2024 GOP presidential nomination.
My biggest political winner for 2022. Prediction. I predict my man, Ron DeSantis will be the big winner. He's up for re-election in Florida...this time. I think he's going to cruise to reelection quite handily and become the national frontrunner on the GOP side.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction has two parts:

  1. DeSantis wins re‑election in 2022 by a comfortable margin.
    This is clearly correct. In the November 8, 2022 Florida gubernatorial election, Ron DeSantis defeated Charlie Crist roughly 59.4% to 40.0%, a margin of about 19.4 percentage points—widely described as a landslide and the largest margin for a Republican governor in modern Florida history. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. By the end of 2022, he is regarded as the national frontrunner for the 2024 GOP nomination.
    Evidence for the prediction:

  • A USA TODAY/Suffolk University poll conducted Dec. 7–11, 2022 found that among Republicans and GOP‑leaning voters, 56% preferred DeSantis vs. 33% for Trump in a 2024 matchup, with about two‑thirds wanting DeSantis to run. Commentators explicitly framed this as DeSantis overtaking Trump and called him the new GOP frontrunner. (uspresidentialelectionnews.com)
  • Post‑midterm coverage highlighted DeSantis’s landslide win as making him the party’s “big winner” and a leading or potential frontrunner for 2024, especially contrasted with Trump’s perceived midterm underperformance. (theguardian.com)

Evidence against the prediction:

  • Aggregated nationwide Republican primary polling through late 2022 generally still showed Donald Trump ahead of DeSantis, often by substantial margins, when voters were asked about the full 2024 GOP field. These tracking series typically continued to describe Trump as the overall frontrunner. (breitbart.com)
  • Early 2023 commentary from major outlets still referred to Trump as the primary frontrunner with DeSantis as a strong but secondary challenger, suggesting that the “frontrunner” label was not universally or durably attached to DeSantis. (cbsnews.com)

Because DeSantis was clearly a leading contender and was even labeled “the new frontrunner” in some polls and media narratives, yet national polling and much analysis continued to regard Trump as the principal frontrunner, whether DeSantis was “regarded as the national frontrunner” by the end of 2022 depends heavily on which observers or metrics you prioritize. The first part of the prediction is unambiguously correct, but the second is neither clearly right nor clearly wrong in hindsight, so the overall prediction is best scored as ambiguous.

healthpolitics
In 2022, the Omicron variant of COVID-19 will prove effectively unstoppable in the United States, leading much of the country to shift toward DeSantis-style, less-restrictive COVID policies.
I think the rest of the country is going to come around to his point of view because the unstoppable of Omicron next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

On the first part of the prediction – that Omicron would prove effectively unstoppable in the U.S. in 2022 – the data clearly support this. Omicron became the dominant variant by late December 2021, and the BA.1/BA.2/BA.5 waves led to record case counts through much of early and mid‑2022 despite widespread vaccination and prior infection, indicating very high transmissibility and substantial immune escape. The CDC and multiple analyses described Omicron’s rapid spread and near-complete replacement of prior variants across the U.S., consistent with it being effectively ‘unstoppable’ in practice.

On the second part – that this would cause much of the country to shift toward DeSantis‑style, less‑restrictive COVID policies – national policy evolution in 2022–2023 matches that direction:

  • By early 2022, many states (including blue states such as New York, New Jersey, California, and others) rapidly lifted indoor mask mandates, school mask mandates, and capacity restrictions, moving toward guidance that emphasized individual risk assessment rather than broad mandates, similar in substance to the approach Florida had already taken under Gov. DeSantis.
  • In February–March 2022, numerous Democratic‑led states announced timelines to end mask mandates in schools and public indoor spaces, citing high vaccination rates, Omicron’s ubiquity, and the need to ‘learn to live with the virus’ – a framing that closely resembled the DeSantis/Florida position from 2021.
  • The CDC updated its guidance in late February 2022 to “COVID‑19 Community Levels,” which substantially relaxed masking recommendations for most of the country compared with earlier metrics, again moving national guidance toward fewer ongoing restrictions.

While not every jurisdiction copied Florida’s policies exactly, the broad national trend in 2022 was toward lifting mandates and accepting widespread Omicron transmission as unavoidable, which is materially what the prediction claimed would happen.

Because (1) Omicron did in fact spread essentially unchecked across the U.S. in 2022, and (2) the majority of states and federal guidance shifted toward materially less‑restrictive, ‘live with it’ policies that resembled the DeSantis stance more than the stricter 2020–early‑2021 regime, the prediction is best judged as right overall.

politicsgovernment
In the 2022 midterms there will be a Republican ‘red wave’: Democrats will lose control of the U.S. House of Representatives, and shortly after that loss Nancy Pelosi will announce her retirement from Congress and/or from House leadership.
my pick for Biggest Political Loser next year is Nancy Pelosi. I there's a red wave coming. The Democrats for sure are going to lose the House that is baked into the cake. And I predict she will announce her retirement shortly after that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction had three testable components: (1) Republicans would take the U.S. House in the 2022 midterms, (2) this would be described as a GOP ‘red wave’, and (3) Nancy Pelosi would shortly announce her retirement from Congress and/or from House leadership after that loss.

  1. Republicans did win the House in 2022. Democrats went into the midterms with a narrow House majority and came out with Republicans holding 222 seats to Democrats’ 213, flipping control of the chamber. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. However, the scale of GOP gains fell well short of pre‑election expectations; post‑election analysis across the political spectrum commonly referred to 2022 as ‘the red wave that wasn’t’, emphasizing that Republicans secured only a small net gain of House seats and failed to win the Senate. (en.wikipedia.org) So the magnitude implied by calling it a red wave was wrong, even though the House did flip.
  3. Pelosi did announce she was stepping down from House Democratic leadership very shortly after the GOP’s House win became clear. On November 17, 2022—one day after outlets projected that Republicans would narrowly take the House—she stated on the House floor that she would not seek reelection to Democratic leadership in the next Congress, while remaining in Congress as a rank‑and‑file member. (cnbc.com) She did not announce retirement from Congress itself until November 2025, when she said she would not seek reelection in 2026. (washingtonpost.com)

Given the normalized formulation allows for retirement from Congress and/or House leadership, the core of Sacks’ forecast—that Democrats would lose the House in 2022 and Pelosi would soon step down from House leadership afterward—did occur on the predicted timeline. The only clearly incorrect element is the characterization of the overall election as a large ‘red wave’. On balance, that makes the prediction substantively right, though somewhat overstated in tone.

economy
'Rise of the rest'—the migration of people and industry from high-tax coastal states like California and New York to zero/low-tax states such as Florida, Texas, and Tennessee—will accelerate in 2022 compared to prior years.
I got rise of the rest...I think it's a trend that's been going on, but it's going to keep getting bigger next year...I think that trend is only going to pick up steam now that salt is dead.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the existing “rise of the rest” pattern—people and industry moving from high‑tax coastal states (e.g., California, New York) to low/zero‑tax states (e.g., Florida, Texas, Tennessee)—would accelerate in 2022 compared with prior years.

On the people/migration side, the 2022 data clearly show stronger flows into those low‑tax destinations than in earlier years:

  • Florida – net domestic migration (people moving from other U.S. states):
    • 2019: +139,330
    • 2020: +174,645
    • 2021: +246,571
    • 2022: +314,467 (highest yet, and a ~27% jump over 2021) (beautifydata.com)
  • Texas – net domestic migration:
    • 2019: +121,411
    • 2020: +162,299
    • 2021: +195,564
    • 2022: +222,154 (again higher than 2021, and far above pre‑COVID levels) (beautifydata.com)
  • Tennessee – net domestic migration:
    • 2021: ~50,450
    • 2022: ~81,600–83,800 (Tennessee’s own data center notes 2022 domestic net migration was a record high and the main driver of its largest one‑year population gain since 2007) (tnsdc.utk.edu)

At the same time, sending states like California and New York continued to have very large net domestic outflows in 2022, well above pre‑pandemic levels:

  • California – net domestic migration: 2019: −208k → 2020: −242k → 2021: −478k → 2022: −337k. Outflow eased from the 2021 peak but remained massively higher than 2019–2020, consistent with sustained population flight. (beautifydata.com)
  • New York – net domestic migration: 2019: −184k → 2020: −204k → 2021: −300k → 2022: −296k, i.e., 2022 remained near a record net outflow. (beautifydata.com)

Census‑based analyses of 2022 population estimates also emphasize that the South was the only U.S. region with positive net domestic migration, led numerically by Texas and Florida, and that Tennessee’s record net domestic migration was a key driver of its growth. (tnsdc.utk.edu) This is exactly the pattern Sacks described: people leaving coastal/high‑tax states and accumulating in low‑tax southern states.

On the industry/firms side, detailed firm‑migration statistics lag and are best documented through 2021 (which already showed strong net firm gains in Florida, Texas, and Tennessee), so it’s harder to quantify an additional acceleration in 2022 specifically. (bls.gov) However, there is no sign of a reversal; instead, reporting and corporate announcements through and after 2022 continue to show relocations and expansions into these same low‑tax states, consistent with the broader “people + industry” narrative.

Putting this together: domestic migration into Florida, Texas, and Tennessee did grow further in 2022 relative to 2021 and pre‑pandemic years, while outflows from California and New York remained historically high. Regional data point to the South as the sole net domestic migration winner, led by exactly the types of low‑tax states Sacks named. That matches his claim that the trend “was going to keep getting bigger next year” and “pick up steam.”

Given the strong, quantifiable acceleration in people migration and at least continued strength (with no evident reversal) in industry relocation, the prediction is best judged as right.

economy
In 2022, reshoring of American industry from China to the U.S. will meaningfully increase, with new facilities and investments disproportionately going to ‘rest of U.S.’ states like Texas rather than to California or New York, reinforcing the ‘rise of the rest’ trend.
as we decouple from China and bring our supply chain home...that is going to be a big factor in the rise of the rest.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that in 2022 the U.S. saw a large, measurable jump in reshoring and related manufacturing investment, and that most of the resulting facilities and jobs went to "rest‑of‑U.S." regions rather than to coastal hubs like California.

  • Meaningful increase in reshoring (2022): The Reshoring Initiative’s 2022 Data Report found that reshoring + foreign direct investment (FDI) job announcements reached about 364,000 in 2022, a 53% increase over 2021’s record and the highest level ever recorded. (industryweek.com) Other analyses report a similar ~350,000 new reshoring/FDI jobs and tie the surge directly to efforts to shorten supply chains and reduce exposure to overseas—especially China‑related—risks. (engineering.com) Manufacturing construction spending in the U.S. also jumped about 40% in 2022 vs. 2021, reflecting a real build‑out of domestic capacity, not just announcements. (industrialsage.com) This clearly qualifies as a “meaningful” increase.

  • Geographic shift to ‘rest of U.S.’ states: The same 2022 Reshoring Initiative data show that the South and Midwest accounted for about 76% of 2022 reshoring/FDI job announcements, with states like Ohio, Georgia, Tennessee, and North Carolina among the biggest winners—classic “rise of the rest” locations outside the traditional coastal hubs. (mhlnews.com) A separate breakdown (also based on Reshoring Initiative data) notes that in the 2022 results California did not rank in the top 20 states for reshoring/FDI jobs, while Texas was in the top 20 with roughly 10,600 projected jobs, alongside other Southern and Midwestern states such as Kentucky, North Carolina, Georgia, and Ohio. (centerforjobs.org) That pattern matches the prediction that new facilities and investments would disproportionately go to interior/Sun Belt states like Texas rather than to California.

  • Caveat: New York as an exception: One nuance is that New York actually led all states in 2022 by share of announced reshoring/FDI jobs (about 12%), helped by very large semiconductor projects such as Micron’s planned multibillion‑dollar chip factory in Clay, NY, enabled by CHIPS Act incentives. (mhlnews.com) So the specific claim that investment would flow to “rest‑of‑U.S. states like Texas rather than to California or New York” was partly off with respect to New York, which turned out to be a major beneficiary.

Overall, however, the core of Sacks’s prediction did come true in 2022: reshoring surged to record levels and the lion’s share of new industrial jobs and facilities went to non‑California, largely Southern and Midwestern states, reinforcing the broader “rise of the rest” trend—even though New York emerged as an important outlier beneficiary.

marketseconomy
The U.S. Federal Reserve will end its quantitative easing program by March 2022, and from April 2022 onward the absence of new QE liquidity will cause significant declines or underperformance in asset classes that benefited most from excess liquidity (e.g., collectibles, art, crypto, and some growth stocks).
the fed is going to stop quantitative easing or so they have said they are. I guess March will be the last month in which they do this QE. So starting in April there won't be any of this liquidity pumped into the system...the losers are going to be any of these asset classes that are heavily dependent on or have benefited from all this excess liquidity sloshing through the system.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows both parts of Sacks’s prediction largely played out:

  1. Fed QE ended by March 2022
    Official Fed communications and subsequent analysis note that the Federal Reserve completed its pandemic-era net asset purchases and ended QE in March 2022, then quickly shifted to rate hikes and, by June, quantitative tightening. (sec.gov) That matches his timing (“March will be the last month”).

  2. Post‑April 2022 performance of liquidity‑sensitive assets
    After QE ended:

    • Crypto: Bitcoin’s price fell about 33–34% from December 1, 2021 to April 30, 2022, and then another ~64% from April 1 to December 31, 2022, a cumulative crash of roughly 75% from late‑2021 levels, emblematic of the 2022 “crypto winter.” (statmuse.com)
    • High‑growth / speculative stocks: The ARK Innovation ETF (ARKK), a proxy for highly speculative growth names, declined about 67% in 2022, with most top holdings down 50–80% that year, far worse than the S&P 500’s ~19% drop and the Nasdaq’s ~33% fall. (gurufocus.com) This is exactly the sort of “growth stocks that benefited from excess liquidity” he highlighted.
    • Collectibles (e.g., sports cards): A detailed 2022 year‑end report from Card Ladder shows its broad vintage index was down about 5% for the year, while modern and ultra‑modern card indices fell over 30% in 2022, after huge gains in 2020–21—described as a retraction after an overheated, speculation‑driven boom. (sportscollectorsdaily.com) A separate overview explicitly notes that the sports‑card market “saw a downturn in 2022,” even though long‑term returns remained strong. (withvincent.com)
    • Art (especially speculative/digital segments): While the overall traditional art market was relatively stable in 1H 2022 and even posted small gains, alternative‑asset research notes art returned roughly 0% in the first half of 2022 while stocks and crypto were falling, indicating at best stagnation rather than outperformance. (insights.masterworks.com) More importantly for Sacks’s “excess liquidity” thesis, the speculative NFT/collectibles side of the art market collapsed: Art Basel/UBS reporting shows art‑related NFT sales on NFT platforms fell about 49% in value in 2022 versus 2021, and collectibles‑style NFTs dominated that earlier boom. (artsandcollections.com) Those are precisely the frothy, liquidity‑driven segments he was pointing to.
  3. Macro context and causality
    The broad 2022 bear market in risk assets coincided with the Fed moving from QE to aggressive tightening: the S&P 500 fell 19% and the Nasdaq 33% for 2022 amid rapidly rising rates and shrinking liquidity, a pattern widely attributed to central‑bank tightening after the end of QE. (en.wikipedia.org) While one cannot prove causality from QE alone, the timing and concentration of damage in the most speculative, liquidity‑dependent assets (crypto, high‑growth tech, NFTs, modern collectibles) match his stated mechanism.

Because (a) the Fed did in fact stop net QE by March 2022, and (b) from roughly April 2022 onward, the assets he singled out—especially crypto, speculative growth stocks, and modern collectibles—suffered large absolute declines and clear underperformance relative to broader benchmarks, his prediction is best judged as right, with the caveat that traditional high‑end physical art was more resilient and only cooled rather than collapsing immediately.

politics
By the end of 2022, following a Republican ‘red wave’ in the midterms, the Democratic Party establishment and major Democratic voices will openly revive and praise Bill Clinton’s centrist ‘triangulation’ approach as a model for the party’s future.
I predict that there will be a strange new respect for Bill Clinton in the Democratic Party by the end of next year...after the red wave, there'll be a recognition that they need to move towards the center.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction hinged on two linked claims: (1) a substantial Republican “red wave” in the 2022 midterms, and (2) that, in response, Democratic establishment figures and major voices would openly revive and praise Bill Clinton–style centrist triangulation as the party’s model.

  1. No Republican “red wave” materialized. In 2022 Republicans won a narrow House majority but underperformed expectations, while Democrats held the Senate and made historically strong showings for a president’s party in midterms (e.g., net gubernatorial gains, no loss of Senate incumbents or state legislative chambers).(en.wikipedia.org) Contemporary coverage widely described the outcome as “the red wave that wasn’t” rather than a wave.(pbs.org) So the core triggering condition of the forecast (“after the red wave”) did not occur.

  2. Democrats did not broadly rediscover or celebrate Clintonian triangulation in late 2022. Post‑midterm commentary inside the Democratic-aligned media environment often argued the opposite: that the 2022 results showed the limits of Clinton-era triangulation and that the party’s future lay in a more forthrightly progressive strategy. A prominent Salon essay, for example, declared that after the midterms “the Clinton era is finally over” and that “triangulation is dead,” explicitly rejecting Clinton’s 1990s centrist model as a path forward for Democrats.(salon.com) Later analyses of the Biden White House likewise emphasized that, unlike Clinton after 1994, Biden was not forced into a major centrist pivot; instead, advisers argued they could avoid a Clinton-style triangulation moment and continue focusing on issues like abortion rights and democracy.(sanjuandailystar.com) While some commentators and “Washington veterans” cited Clinton as one possible model for bipartisan governance after the election, this was in the context of general historical comparison and often came from non‑Democratic figures; it did not amount to a clear, party‑wide revival of Clinton’s triangulation as the endorsed strategy for Democrats.(csmonitor.com)

Because there was neither the predicted Republican red wave nor a discernible, establishment-level Democratic move to praise and emulate Bill Clinton’s triangulating centrism by the end of 2022, the podcast prediction did not come true.

politics
In the November 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Hispanic and Asian-American voters, as a group, will support Republican candidates at significantly higher rates than in recent election cycles, effectively behaving as Republican-leaning swing blocs.
it's already the case in polling that Hispanics and Asian Americans now are swing voters. And I think you're going to see in November 2022 that they go for Republicans in big numbers.View on YouTube
Explanation

National data show some Republican gains with both Hispanics and Asian Americans in the 2022 midterms, but not enough for these groups to become Republican‑leaning swing blocs as the normalized prediction claims.

• In the 2018 House elections, exit polls found Hispanics voting 69% Democratic / 29% Republican and Asians 77% Democratic / 23% Republican. By 2022, the national House exit poll showed Hispanics at 60% Democratic / 39% Republican and Asians at 58% Democratic / 40% Republican. That is a noticeable GOP improvement (about +10 points among Hispanics and +17 among Asians vs 2018), but both groups still clearly favored Democrats overall. (en.wikipedia.org)

• Catalist’s validated‑voter analysis likewise finds Latino support for Democrats in 2022 House races at roughly 62%, essentially unchanged from 2020, contradicting the idea of a wholesale realignment toward Republicans at the national level. (catalist.us)

• Other Asian‑focused data point the same way: an AAPI Civic Engagement Fund election‑eve poll found Asian American voters supporting Democrats 51% vs 37% for Republicans, and an AALDEF 2022 exit poll reported Asian American House votes at 64% Democratic vs 32% Republican. (aapifund.org)

• Summaries of the 2022 midterms note that Republicans did make gains among working‑class voters of color and among Hispanics, but still emphasize that Democrats continued to win a majority of these voters. (en.wikipedia.org)

Putting this together, Republicans did receive higher shares of the Hispanic and Asian American vote than in some recent cycles, but those groups remained Dem‑leaning overall, not "Republican‑leaning swing blocs" that "went for Republicans in big numbers" in the aggregate. The normalized prediction therefore overstates the shift and is best judged wrong, even though it anticipated the direction (some GOP gains) correctly.

politicshealth
In 2022, major U.S. ‘prestige’ media outlets (e.g., NYT, Washington Post, CNN, MSNBC) will markedly shift their COVID-19 narrative from alarmist to accommodative—emphasizing that COVID must be lived with, likening it more to a cold/flu, downplaying eradication or lockdown strategies, and implicitly disavowing their earlier pro-lockdown stance—in order to politically benefit Democrats ahead of the midterms.
I think the media the media is going to pull a total 180 on Covid...after pumping out Covid fear porn for two years, they're going to change their tune next year...Some of the things you're going to hear, we need to live with Covid. It can't be eradicated. They're even going to say it's it's more like a cold or flu...They're going to memory hold their support for lockdowns...Therefore, the media will say it's over.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2022 shows that major U.S. prestige outlets did pivot toward a “live with Covid” framing, even if their motivations and degree of revisionism are matters of interpretation.

  1. Shift to a “live with the virus / new normal” narrative

    • In January 2022, The Washington Post ran a long news analysis explicitly describing a global and U.S. “strategic retreat” from trying to crush Covid, noting that the phrase “live with the virus” had become the new mantra and that “crushing the virus is no longer the strategy.”(washingtonpost.com)
    • A January 6, 2022 Washington Post op‑ed by Jackie Spinner (widely highlighted by the Post’s own podcast) argued “we have to learn to live with covid and the mitigations it requires,” and that canceling school is “not sustainable.”(washingtonpost.com)
    • A February 2022 Post opinion piece on the “next phase” of the pandemic urged moving past polarizing rhetoric toward “reasonable compromises that allow us to live with covid-19.”(washingtonpost.com)
    • A Fox News write‑up of a New York Times editorial board piece (December 2021, heading into 2022) reports the board telling Americans the virus is not going away soon and that those “paralyzed” by fear need to learn to live with the reality of the virus and return toward normal life—exactly the kind of rhetorical pivot Sacks predicted.(foxnews.com)
    • A 2022 media‑criticism piece from FAIR quotes a September 2022 New York Times article on China’s zero‑Covid policy describing China as an “anomalous” holdout while “the rest of the world learns to live with the coronavirus,” confirming that by late 2022 the Times was explicitly using “learn to live with it” language as a baseline.(fair.org)
    • CNN’s political coverage in February 2022 reported polling that framed the public choice as either prioritizing stopping the spread or accepting that “it’s time to learn to live with the virus,” normalizing that framing as a mainstream option rather than an outlier.(abc17news.com)
  2. Framing Covid as endemic / flu‑like and non‑eradicable

    • On PBS’s Amanpour & Company (carried on many public‑TV outlets and covered online), Dr. Ezekiel Emanuel—introduced as a former Biden Covid adviser—argued in January 2022 that the U.S. must “change course” and “learn to live with this disease,” saying outright that “we’re not going to defeat the coronavirus,” that it will be “like flu… other respiratory viruses” and will reach an endemic, manageable level.(pbs.org)
    • A January 2022 Washington Post piece likewise stressed that zero‑Covid was no longer realistic, that SARS‑CoV‑2 would remain part of the world like other circulating viruses, and discussed it in the context of an eventual “stalemate” where the virus becomes more like other endemic respiratory illnesses.(washingtonpost.com)
      These are not full minimizations of risk, but they very clearly move away from “eradication” talk and toward the “cold/flu‑like endemic virus we live with” frame Sacks described.
  3. Downplaying eradication / harsh lockdown strategies

    • The same January 2022 Washington Post analysis notes that “crushing the virus is no longer the strategy” in democratic countries and that essentially no nations outside China were still pursuing “zero Covid,” explicitly contrasting new “live with it” approaches to the earlier suppression/lockdown paradigm.(washingtonpost.com)
    • Follow‑on coverage emphasized that most political leaders in the U.S. lacked the capital to return to strict lockdowns, and that policy debates had shifted to how to keep schools and businesses open safely—again consistent with a media narrative that strict lockdowns were no longer on the table and not something to be revived.(washingtonpost.com)
  4. “It’s over” vibes and political timing

    • President Biden’s own September 2022 “60 Minutes” interview—he said “the pandemic is over” while acknowledging Covid remained a problem—was widely reported and debated across major outlets.(foxnews.com) That high‑profile declaration, less than two months before the midterms, reinforced a sense in mainstream coverage that the acute emergency phase was finished, even as many pieces still noted ongoing deaths and long‑Covid.
    • More broadly, 2022 saw Democratic governors and federal officials push an “endemic management” line (e.g., Newsom’s California endemic plan in February 2022), with national outlets presenting “living with the virus” as the new consensus.(en.wikipedia.org)
      Whether this shift was intended specifically to benefit Democrats before the midterms is a matter of political interpretation, and no direct evidence (e.g., internal media directives) proves that motive. But the observable part of Sacks’s forecast—that prestige outlets would substantially pivot from emergency/eradication framing to a live‑with‑Covid, endemic framing ahead of the 2022 midterms—did occur.
  5. Where the prediction overreaches

    • The coverage did not uniformly say “Covid is basically just a cold,” nor did it universally minimize the virus; high‑profile pieces warned about vulnerable groups, new variants, and the risks of surrendering too soon.(localnews8.com)
    • Claims that outlets “memory‑holed” their prior support for lockdowns or acted primarily as a coordinated political operation to help Democrats are speculative. Critics have made that argument, but it rests on inference rather than hard documentation.

Overall, however, taking the falsifiable core—that leading U.S. prestige media in 2022 would markedly pivot from a crisis/eradication frame to one emphasizing that Covid is here to stay and must be lived with, downplaying renewed lockdowns, and doing so in the run‑up to the midterms—the prediction aligns well with how coverage actually evolved. The strongest parts (the narrative pivot and “live with Covid” rhetoric) clearly came true; the more conspiratorial parts about motive can’t be definitively proven either way but don’t negate that the main forecasted shift did happen.

politicshealth
In 2022, mainstream media coverage of COVID will substantially reverse from fear/hysteria to the opposite narrative, driven by the midterm election; outlets will consciously contradict and memory-hole their prior COVID narratives to support the election outcome they prefer.
my prediction, like I said, is that it all flips next year. Why? Because there's an election. And the way the media figures out what it's going to, what its narrative is going to be, is they start with the election result they want, and then they reverse engineer the narrative that they think is going to help achieve that election result. And if it means contradicting what they said yesterday, they will memory hole what they said yesterday in order to get on board with the new narrative. That is what's going to happen.View on YouTube
Explanation

Parts of Sacks’s prediction line up with what happened in 2022, but the core causal and intentional claims can’t really be verified.

What clearly did happen

  • By 2021–22, a strong “back to normal” / end‑restrictions narrative was already dominant in COVID coverage across the political spectrum, emphasizing reopening, economic recovery, and “life after COVID.” This shift predates the 2022 U.S. midterms and is described as the dominant COVID narrative since January 2021 in a media‑analysis report using Zignal Labs data. (thisissignals.com)
  • In 2022, governments, experts, and media widely adopted “live with the virus” framing—arguing that society must move from emergency footing to ongoing coexistence with COVID. Academic work explicitly describes this as a cross‑cutting narrative used by politicians, experts, and media, motivated by economic concerns and fatigue, not specifically by U.S. midterm politics. (mdpi.com)
  • Public behavior and attitudes by mid‑2022 had also shifted: an Annenberg survey in July 2022 found worries about COVID’s health effects declining, mask use indoors collapsing, and the share of Americans who say they’re back to “normal, pre‑COVID‑19 life” more than doubling versus January. (asc.upenn.edu) That suggests a broad societal move away from crisis mode, which news outlets were reflecting.

What didn’t clearly happen as described

  • When President Biden said on 60 Minutes in September 2022 that “the pandemic is over,” major mainstream outlets (NPR, New York Times, etc.) reported the remark but also highlighted that 400–500 Americans were still dying daily and quoted experts who criticized or questioned his framing. (woub.org) That is not a clean flip to an “opposite” narrative of “no big deal”; it’s a mixed narrative of both normalization and ongoing risk.
  • Research summarizing U.S. COVID coverage up to 2021 finds American media unusually negative about COVID compared with other countries, regardless of outlet ideology, and there is no widely cited 2022 content‑analysis showing a wholesale reversal to predominantly positive/minimizing coverage; instead, coverage volume and focus shifted as cases and deaths declined from 2021 levels and as policy moved toward endemic management. (en.wikipedia.org)

Why the prediction can’t be cleanly scored

  • The observable part of the prediction (“coverage becomes much less alarmist / more ‘it’s over’ in 2022”) is only partially borne out: there was a sustained shift toward “back to normal” and “living with the virus,” but mainstream outlets continued to foreground ongoing deaths, long COVID, boosters, and disagreements among experts.
  • The unobservable part—Sacks’s key mechanism—is that this flip would be driven by the midterm election outcome the media wanted, with outlets consciously contradicting and “memory‑holing” prior narratives to help that outcome. That requires evidence of editorial intent and coordinated election‑driven strategy that we simply don’t have. The same narrative shift is documented in non‑U.S. and non‑election contexts, and is plausibly explained by vaccines, variant evolution, economic pressure, and audience fatigue, not just U.S. midterms.

Because some surface‑level elements (less emergency tone, more normalization in 2022) did occur, but the crucial claim about why (explicit election‑driven, memory‑holing behavior by mainstream media) can’t be established from available evidence, the fairest classification is ambiguous, not clearly right or clearly wrong.

politicsgovernment
In 2022, California will have a major statewide ballot initiative for school choice that would give parents a ~$13,000-per-pupil state voucher usable at any accredited school; it will be one of the biggest election issues in California (and possibly nationally) that year, with over $100 million spent in total by both sides.
Oh, let me make a prediction in that regard. Next year, there's going to be a ballot initiative in California to for school choice. And the way it's going to work is that I think there's something like $13,000 spent per pupil in California. ... There's going to be there's going to be a ballot initiative that says that any parent who wants to send their kid to an accredited school can get a voucher for $13,000 from the state that's going to be on the ballot, I predict. ... I predict it will be the big, big election in California and maybe the nation next year. And I think more than 100 million will be spent on both sides of that thing.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that no such school-choice voucher measure actually made the California statewide ballot in 2022, nor did it become a dominant election issue with $100M+ in spending.

  • There were indeed school-choice / ESA initiative proposals in California around that time. The Legislative Analyst’s Office summarized proposed initiatives that would have created Education Savings Accounts funded with about $13,000–$14,000 per student for those attending private schools or homeschool, closely matching the structure Sacks described. (lao.ca.gov) These were proposals submitted for title and summary, not qualified ballot measures.
  • Supporters of the leading effort, the Educational Freedom Act backed by Californians for School Choice, failed to gather enough signatures. News coverage in April 2022 reported that school choice "will not be on the ballot in November" after the campaign collected only about 200,000 signatures, roughly 20% of the ~997,000 valid signatures required to qualify an initiative. (localnewsmatters.org) Another analysis likewise notes that the ESA-related PACs raised and spent only hundreds of thousands of dollars promoting petitions, not anything near nine figures. (tultican.com)
  • The official list of propositions on the November 8, 2022 California general-election ballot includes Propositions 1, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, and 31. None is a school-choice or voucher initiative; Prop 28, for example, is about arts and music funding in public schools, not portable vouchers. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Because no school-choice voucher measure reached the ballot, it could not be "the big, big election" issue in California or nationally, and there is no evidence of anything close to $100M being spent on such a contest. Total reported fundraising for the main school-choice campaign was only in the hundreds of thousands of dollars. (localnewsmatters.org)

So while Sacks correctly anticipated that activists would try to run a ~$13k-per-pupil school-choice initiative, his core prediction—that it would be on the 2022 statewide ballot and become one of the biggest, $100M+ election fights—did not happen.

Sacks @ 01:02:24Inconclusive
venture
In 2022, Series A venture investments will outperform other venture stages (seed and growth) on a returns/multiples basis and will be the best area to invest in within venture capital.
I just said series A venture because it's pretty unoriginal. It's what I do. I think growth got a little bit overfunded and overheated. And I think the seed stage also there's like. So there was so many new seed investors. Again, it might have been partially because of excess liquidity. So series A is still the choke point. And I think it's still the best area to invest in. Innovation is not going to stop. There's going to be great series A investments next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence doesn’t let us determine whether 2022 Series A investments actually outperformed seed and growth on a returns/multiples basis.

  1. Too early in the fund/vintage lifecycle

    • Carta’s VC Fund Performance report shows that 2022-vintage funds had deployed only ~43% of their committed capital after 24 months, significantly less than prior vintages, meaning much of the 2022 capital (including many Series A checks) is still being put to work. (carta.com)
    • The same dataset finds that median IRR for 2021–2022 vintages is still below zero and median TVPI is below 1×, and explicitly notes that we are “still years out from seeing the performance data” for these newer vintages. (twobytwo.notion.site)
    • Venture funds are typically evaluated over 8–12 years, so by late 2025 we do not yet have mature, realized-return data for the 2022 Series A cohort.
  2. No reliable, stage‑by‑stage return benchmarks for the 2022 vintage

    • Public benchmarks (Carta, PitchBook, NVCA, etc.) mostly report performance by vintage year and overall fund, not by financing stage (seed vs Series A vs growth) for 2022 deals. The available numbers (IRR, TVPI, DPI) are aggregated across stages, so we cannot see whether Series A deals specifically beat seed or growth on multiples. (carta.com)
  3. What we can see cuts in different directions, but is about valuations and volumes, not realized returns

    • Multiple 2022–2023 analyses agree that late/growth-stage funding and valuations were hit hardest in the downturn, while seed was the most resilient stage; Series A/early stage sits between these extremes. (news.crunchbase.com)
    • That pattern is consistent with Sacks’ view that growth was overheated, but it does not establish that Series A was better than seed on realized or even marked multiples—only that late-stage fared worst.

Because (a) 2022-vintage returns are still immature and (b) we lack clean, stage‑level performance data comparing 2022 Series A vs seed and growth, the prediction that Series A would be the best-performing part of venture on a returns/multiples basis in 2022 cannot be confidently scored as right or wrong yet.

politicsgovernment
In 2022, an intensifying political conflict (“civil war”) between progressive and pragmatic/liberal Democrats will visibly escalate, with high-profile clashes in cities like San Francisco, Philadelphia, New York City, and at the federal level (e.g., over figures like Joe Manchin).
This is where I had the civil war between progressives and pragmatic liberals. Um, so building on what Chamath said, you're already seeing this in the feud between London Breed and Chesa Boudin. That is really going to, I think, blossom next year. We have not heard the last of that. You saw it in Philadelphia, where the mayor, Michael Nutter, took on Larry Krasner. I think you're going to see it in New York City between Eric Adams and these Manhattan elites. Um, and you also saw in Washington, D.C., where the progressives were blaming Manchin for, you know, losing the build back better. So this is a civil war that's going to continue.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2022 shows highly visible, intra-Democratic clashes between progressive and more moderate/pragmatic factions in exactly the arenas Sacks named:

  • San Francisco (London Breed vs. Chesa Boudin): In June 2022, voters recalled progressive DA Chesa Boudin, after a long, public conflict over crime and public safety in which Mayor London Breed and other moderates backed his removal. Breed then appointed a more moderate replacement, Brooke Jenkins. The recall was nationally covered as a backlash against progressive criminal-justice policies and part of a broader Democratic fight over crime and reform.(en.wikipedia.org)

  • Philadelphia (Michael Nutter vs. Larry Krasner context): Former Democratic mayor Michael Nutter had already attacked progressive DA Larry Krasner in late 2021 over his comments on crime. In 2022, Krasner was the target of a high-profile impeachment effort, driven by criticism that his progressive policies fueled gun violence. While the formal impeachment push came from Republicans in the state legislature, the controversy around Krasner’s policies and Nutter’s earlier broadside kept the moderate-vs-progressive divide in Philadelphia politics in the spotlight.【(washingtonpost.com)

  • New York City (Eric Adams vs. progressives): After taking office in January 2022, Mayor Eric Adams (running as a law-and-order, anti–“defund the police” Democrat) clashed with progressives over policing and crime policy. Coverage in early 2022 highlighted tensions between Adams and left-wing activists/officials skeptical of his plans to revive plainclothes anti-crime units and expand policing, explicitly framing this as a rift between the party’s moderate and progressive wings.【(washingtonpost.com)

  • Federal level (progressives vs. Joe Manchin): The rift over Build Back Better continued into 2022. Progressive lawmakers and groups publicly condemned Manchin for blocking or watering down the bill and later preemptively blamed him for expected Democratic midterm losses, portraying him as sabotaging the party’s agenda. This extended the late-2021 BBB fight into a very visible 2022 intra-party feud between progressives and more conservative Democrats.【(newsweek.com)

Taken together, 2022 featured exactly the kind of prominent, ongoing "civil war" Sacks predicted—between progressive and pragmatic/liberal Democrats—playing out in San Francisco, Philadelphia, New York City, and around Joe Manchin at the federal level. The conflicts not only continued but, in key cases like Boudin’s recall and the Manchin/BBB saga, clearly escalated in visibility and stakes, matching the substance and timing of the prediction.

politics
In 2022, the Republican Party will remain relatively united (with no major internal civil war), but in 2023, during the Republican presidential primary—especially if Donald Trump runs—significant internal conflict and turmoil (“all hell’s going to break loose”) will occur within the party.
Not not yet, because Trump isn't on the ballot in 2022. So I actually think the Republican Party is going to be surprisingly united in 2022. I think where the trouble might come in is when we have a Republican primary in 2023, and especially if Trump runs, then you know all hell's going to break loose.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks made a two-part, time-specific prediction.

  1. 2022 GOP relatively united, no major internal “civil war” yet
    Donald Trump himself was not on the ballot in 2022; his 2024 presidential campaign was only announced later on November 15, 2022, after the midterms. (en.wikipedia.org) During the 2022 cycle, national Republicans largely rallied around shared midterm themes (inflation, crime, border, opposition to Biden) and a unified House agenda branded as the “Commitment to America,” rolled out by Kevin McCarthy as the GOP’s midterm roadmap. (voz.us) While there were ongoing Trump–establishment tensions, there was no formal split or new party; the GOP ran a common national platform and did not experience the kind of full-on schism commentators were warning might be coming. Predictions of a looming Republican “civil war” over Trump and Ron DeSantis were framed as something on the horizon, not yet fully underway. (businessinsider.nl) This broadly matches Sacks’s claim that Republicans would be “surprisingly united” in 2022 because Trump wasn’t directly on the ballot.

  2. 2023 GOP primary with Trump running produces major internal conflict
    Trump did in fact run for president again, having formally launched his 2024 campaign in November 2022 and then competing in the 2023–24 Republican primaries. (en.wikipedia.org) By 2023 there was a crowded GOP field (notably Ron DeSantis and Nikki Haley), and the contest quickly became acrimonious, with Trump repeatedly attacking DeSantis—including mocking him as “DeSanctimonious” and devoting extended riffs to criticizing him at 2023 campaign events in Iowa. (en.cibercuba.com) Commentators and party actors themselves increasingly described the situation in “civil war” terms, especially in Florida, where the state Democratic chair said Republicans had “completely imploded” and were engaged in a “civil war” between Trump and DeSantis factions. (floridianpress.com) National coverage likewise said Trump’s 2024 campaign announcement “deepened” what Democrats called “an all-out civil war engulfing the Republican party” after the 2022 results. (theguardian.com)

    Beyond the presidential primary, 2023 also saw unprecedented open warfare inside the House GOP: Republicans needed 15 ballots in January 2023 to elect Kevin McCarthy speaker because a bloc of hard-right Republicans refused to support him. (en.wikipedia.org) Then on October 3, 2023, eight Republicans joined Democrats to remove McCarthy as speaker—the first successful ouster of a sitting speaker in U.S. history—triggering weeks of chaotic infighting over his replacement. (en.wikipedia.org) This very public, historically unusual leadership meltdown inside the GOP majority fits well with the notion that “all hell” broke loose within the party once the 2024 nomination fight and Trump’s renewed candidacy dominated Republican politics.

Because both parts of the forecast line up with what actually happened—relative cohesion in 2022 followed by intense, multi-front Republican infighting in 2023 with Trump running—the prediction is best judged as right.

health
The U.S. FDA will grant authorization/approval for the new oral COVID-19 antiviral pills from Pfizer and Merck by the end of the week following this Dec 23, 2021 recording (i.e., by December 31, 2021).
these new oral Covid antiviral pills that are coming out from Pfizer and Merck. The FDA is supposed to be approving them by the end of this week.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that the U.S. FDA would grant authorization/approval for the new oral COVID-19 antiviral pills from Pfizer and Merck by December 31, 2021.

What happened:

  • The FDA issued an Emergency Use Authorization (EUA) for Pfizer’s oral antiviral Paxlovid on December 22, 2021. (fda.gov)
  • The FDA issued an EUA for Merck’s oral antiviral molnupiravir on December 23, 2021. (fda.gov)

EUAs are precisely the form of regulatory authorization expected for these COVID-19 treatments at that time, and both were granted well before the December 31, 2021 deadline implied in the normalized prediction.

Because both Pfizer and Merck oral antivirals received FDA authorization by the specified time window, Sacks’s prediction is right.

health
Widespread availability and use of the new oral protease-inhibitor antiviral pills for COVID-19 (from Pfizer and Merck) will effectively end the COVID-19 pandemic during 2022 (e.g., by preventing large future waves of severe disease).
These new pills have, I think, a very good shot of doing it next year because they're protease inhibitors... I am hopeful that this will be the thing hopefully that ends the pandemic next year. Are these new antiviral pills?View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that widespread availability and use of the new oral protease-inhibitor antivirals for COVID-19 (Pfizer’s and Merck’s pills) would effectively end the COVID-19 pandemic during 2022 by preventing large future waves of severe disease.

Key facts:

  1. Pfizer’s nirmatrelvir/ritonavir (Paxlovid) received U.S. FDA Emergency Use Authorization on December 22, 2021, and Merck’s molnupiravir on December 23, 2021. Both began wider rollout in 2022, with Paxlovid becoming the dominant oral treatment.
  2. Despite availability of these antivirals, large waves of infection and substantial severe disease continued after 2022, driven by Omicron subvariants and later variants:
    • Major Omicron waves occurred in late 2021–2022, followed by additional waves through 2023, with significant hospitalizations and deaths globally and in the U.S., even after Paxlovid was widely used.
    • COVID-19 remained a leading cause of death in the U.S. in 2022 and stayed a significant cause of mortality in 2023, indicating that severe disease was reduced but not prevented to the point of “ending” the pandemic.
  3. No major public-health body (WHO, U.S. CDC) declared the pandemic effectively ended in 2022 due to the pills. Instead:
    • The WHO declared in May 2023 that COVID-19 was no longer a Public Health Emergency of International Concern—but emphasized that it remained an ongoing global health issue, not that it had been “ended” by antivirals.
    • The evolving situation has been attributed to a combination of vaccination, prior infections, changing variants, and some use of antivirals—not to pills alone, and certainly not in a way that prevented large subsequent waves.
  4. In practice, oral antivirals have been underused relative to their potential (prescribing and access issues, timing of treatment, awareness), limiting their population-level impact. Large waves of infection and notable hospitalization surges have still occurred well after 2022.

Given that:

  • 2022 did not see the effective end of the pandemic.
  • Large waves and substantial severe disease continued after 2022.
  • The oral antivirals helped but did not prevent those waves nor singularly end the pandemic.

The prediction that these pills would effectively end the COVID-19 pandemic during 2022 by preventing large future waves of severe disease is wrong.

economy
The term "transitory" will soon stop being widely used by U.S. policymakers, administration officials, and media commentators to describe inflation; its popularity as a descriptor of inflation will fade away over the following year or so after late 2021.
the use of the word transitory, I predict, will in fact be transitory.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that after late 2021, U.S. officials and mainstream commentary quickly stopped using “transitory” as an active label for ongoing inflation and instead talked about the word itself in the past tense.

  • In late November and early December 2021, Fed Chair Jerome Powell and Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen both publicly said it was time to “retire” the term transitory for inflation, signaling an official abandonment of the word as a descriptor of current price pressures.(fortune.com) Media coverage at the time framed this as officials no longer viewing inflation as “transitory.”(fortune.com)
  • In 2022, commentary referred to the word mainly to note that it had been retired or misused (for example, a CNBC column titled that the Fed may have retired “transitory” too soon, explicitly treating it as a former label).(cnbc.com) This is consistent with the prediction that its popularity as a descriptor would fade.
  • By 2024–2025, references by senior officials are explicitly retrospective and apologetic: Yellen says she regrets having called inflation “transitory,” explaining that to most people that implies only a few weeks or months, and she now distances herself from the term.(foxbusiness.com) A 2025 CNBC market brief even describes “transitory” as a term that “became taboo for Fed officials” after they got the inflation call wrong, underscoring that it is no longer part of their normal inflation vocabulary.(cnbc.com)

Across policymakers and the media, the usage pattern matches Sacks’s prediction: the word “transitory” briefly enjoyed heavy use for inflation in 2021 but was then publicly “retired” and largely vanished as an active descriptor in the following year or so, surviving mainly as a historical or critical reference. This makes the prediction essentially correct.

politicsgovernment
The Build Back Better bill is being shelved in late 2021 and will probably not be revived or passed in the future.
So I think that is why the bill is being shelved. Probably not to return.View on YouTube
Explanation

The outcome depends on how one interprets “the Build Back Better bill” and “return.”

What happened legislatively

  • The House passed the Build Back Better Act (H.R. 5376) on November 19, 2021, but it stalled in the Senate when Sen. Joe Manchin withdrew support in December 2021. Contemporary accounts and later summaries describe this as effectively killing the bill in its then-current form.【(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Subsequent negotiations between Manchin and Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer produced a much smaller reconciliation package, the Inflation Reduction Act of 2022 (IRA). This law incorporated some of Build Back Better’s climate, health-care, and tax provisions, while omitting most of its social‑safety‑net spending.【(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Technically, the IRA was passed by amending H.R. 5376 itself: the legislative text of the Build Back Better Act was replaced, and the bill went forward under the new name “Inflation Reduction Act of 2022,” which passed the Senate on August 7, 2022, and was signed into law on August 16, 2022.【(en.wikipedia.org)

Why this makes the prediction ambiguous

  • If you define “the Build Back Better bill” as the large social‑spending package branded “Build Back Better” (including major child‑care, child‑tax‑credit, and broader social programs), that package was shelved and never enacted; only parts of it survived in a slimmed‑down compromise. Under this interpretation, the prediction that it was “being shelved … [and] probably not to return” is basically right.
  • If you define “return” in a procedural or core‑policy sense—i.e., whether the bill vehicle (H.R. 5376) and central elements of the agenda came back and ultimately passed—then the prediction is wrong: the same bill number was revived, rewritten, renamed the Inflation Reduction Act, and enacted into law with substantial overlap in climate, health, and tax provisions.【(en.wikipedia.org)

Because both interpretations are reasonable and lead to opposite truth values, the prediction cannot be cleanly scored as simply right or wrong even though enough time has passed. Hence the outcome is ambiguous.

healthpolitics
During 2022, even Democratic‑leaning (“blue”) states and their governors will roll back and largely give up COVID emergency measures such as lockdowns, closures, and broad mask mandates due to public fatigue.
I'll make a prediction for 2022. Okay. I will predict that even the blue areas of the country are going to have fatigue with all these Covid restrictions. And so even the blue state governors who are addicted to their state of emergencies and their restrictions and lockdowns and closures and mask mandates, even they are going to have to give them up in 2022 because the country is sick and tired of this.View on YouTube
Explanation

By early–mid 2022, broad COVID restrictions were largely rolled back even in Democratic‑leaning states, in line with Sacks’s prediction.

Blue-state rollbacks of mask mandates in 2022: In February 2022 there was a coordinated wave of Democratic governors ending indoor and school mask mandates. Reporting at the time noted Democratic-led states such as California, Oregon, Delaware, Connecticut, New Jersey, New York, Rhode Island, Massachusetts and Illinois announcing timelines to lift mask requirements in businesses and schools.(washingtonpost.com) New Jersey’s Gov. Phil Murphy, for example, set the school mask mandate to end March 7, 2022 and lifted the state’s COVID public health emergency the same day.(en.wikipedia.org) Illinois Gov. J.B. Pritzker similarly lifted most COVID restrictions, including the statewide mask mandate, on February 28, 2022.(en.wikipedia.org)

Nationwide end of general mask mandates by spring 2022: A comprehensive summary of U.S. mask policies notes that under new CDC metrics issued February 25, 2022, 70% of the country no longer needed mask use in most public spaces, and that by April 2022 general mask mandates had been lifted in all U.S. states, with Hawaii (a blue state) the last to drop its indoor mandate on March 26, 2022.(en.wikipedia.org) A broader history summary likewise notes that by February–March 2022, all 50 states and many localities began lifting restrictions and mask mandates.(en.wikipedia.org) This matches the prediction that even “blue areas of the country” would abandon broad mandates in 2022.

Public fatigue as a key driver: Contemporary reporting explicitly connected these Democratic decisions to voter frustration and fatigue. A Washington Post piece on February 10, 2022 described how Democratic governors were lifting mandates as polls showed Americans were “tired” and “frustrated” with the pandemic, and quoted Gov. Murphy acknowledging residents were “frustrated” and “fatigued” and “yearning for some sense of normalcy” as he moved to lift school mask rules.(washingtonpost.com) Another analysis of Democrats dropping mask mandates highlighted that many Democratic governors were now talking about a “return to normalcy” and responding to public weariness with restrictions.(washingtonpost.com) This closely tracks Sacks’s rationale that public fatigue would force even blue-state leaders to give up restrictions.

Nuance about “states of emergency”: Some blue states, notably California, did not formally terminate their COVID state-of-emergency declarations until 2023 (California’s ended February 28, 2023).(gov.ca.gov) However, these lingering legal emergencies were mostly administrative tools; the prominent public-facing measures Sacks emphasized—lockdowns, closures, and broad mask mandates—had already been largely rolled back in 2021–2022, and 2022 was when the remaining broad mandates in Democratic states were dropped.

Overall, the core of the prediction—that during 2022 even Democratic-leaning states and governors would have to roll back and largely give up sweeping COVID emergency measures like closures and broad mask mandates because the public was tired of them—matches what happened, despite some technical emergency declarations persisting into 2023. Hence this is best scored as right.

health
The spread of the Omicron variant in the United States will be effectively impossible to stop through public‑health restrictions; it will spread widely regardless of interventions.
They're already back to normal in the red parts and especially Omicron. You can't stop this.View on YouTube
Explanation

By mid‑December 2021 (when the episode aired), Omicron was just emerging in the U.S. Within weeks, it produced the largest U.S. COVID wave of the pandemic. CDC data show that by mid‑January 2022 Omicron accounted for about 99–100% of sequenced U.S. cases and was >96% of variants in every HHS region, with a seven‑day average of roughly 600–750k reported cases per day and well over 70 million cumulative U.S. cases by late January. A detailed spatiotemporal study finds that from 1 Dec 2021 to 28 Feb 2022 the Omicron wave caused about 30 million U.S. cases and 170,000 deaths, spreading rapidly across the entire country.

Crucially for the prediction, this explosive spread occurred despite ongoing public‑health restrictions in many "blue" jurisdictions. For example, California reinstated and then extended a statewide indoor mask mandate through at least mid‑February 2022 specifically because Omicron was driving a sharp surge; even with the mandate, the state’s seven‑day average case rate increased more than sixfold and hospitalizations doubled over two weeks. New York maintained mask and vaccine rules in schools and many venues into early 2022, yet New York City still saw daily case counts climb from about 14,000 on December 24, 2021 to roughly 40,000–45,000 per day around New Year’s, reflecting intense community spread under restrictions. Nationwide, the U.S. set records for both daily cases (around 1.25–1.5 million in mid‑January) and COVID hospitalizations during the Omicron wave.

Subsequent modeling work suggests that earlier or stronger measures could have reduced the number and peak of Omicron infections, but it still characterizes the winter 2021–22 U.S. Omicron surge as causing tens of millions of cases despite significant interventions already in place. In practical terms, Omicron did spread very widely across the United States and was not contained or “stopped” by public‑health restrictions. That outcome matches Sacks’s prediction that Omicron’s spread would be effectively impossible to stop and that it would propagate broadly regardless of interventions.

politicshealth
In 2022, some Democratic‑leaning (“blue”) states will re‑impose COVID‑related school closures, leading to additional learning loss, while Republican‑leaning (“red”) states will generally keep schools open and operating normally.
If we go back to school closures in blue states and have more of the learning loss that Chamath was talking about, and I bet we do. Whereas in red states, they're still out there learning normallyView on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from early 2022 shows that some heavily Democratic (“blue”) states and districts did, in fact, re‑impose temporary COVID‑related school closures, while many Republican‑leaning (“red”) states kept schools largely open for in‑person learning.

  • In January 2022, the Omicron wave led to thousands of pandemic‑related school disruptions nationwide, but NPR’s summary of Burbio data noted that “the vast majority of U.S. schools are staying open for in‑person learning,” even as at least 3,229 schools temporarily cancelled in‑person learning that week. Many of the named full‑district closures were in blue jurisdictions: Newark, Paterson, and Elizabeth in New Jersey; Mount Vernon in New York; Pontiac and Detroit in Michigan; and Prince George’s County in Maryland.(ijpr.org)
  • Newark Public Schools (NJ) explicitly shifted the entire district to remote instruction from Jan. 3–14, 2022, with an anticipated return to in‑person learning on Jan. 18 because of COVID surges.(nps.k12.nj.us) Detroit Public Schools Community District (MI) likewise moved to online learning in early January and then extended remote learning until late January before reopening for in‑person classes.(chalkbeat.org) Prince George’s County Public Schools (MD) moved all schools to virtual learning from Dec. 20, 2021, through Jan. 14, 2022, returning to buildings only after the Martin Luther King Jr. holiday.(nbcwashington.com) These are all in states that vote solidly Democratic in national elections.
  • By contrast, in Texas (a reliably Republican state), reporting at the start of January 2022 described many districts that “opted to power through omicron” and reopen after the holiday break with in‑person classes, with only some smaller districts briefly extending winter break rather than shifting to weeks of remote instruction.(texastribune.org) That aligns with the prediction that red states would be more inclined to keep schools operating “normally” in person.
  • National data from the U.S. Department of Education’s School Pulse Panel / NCES show that for December–February 2022, less than 2% of public‑school 4th‑ and 8th‑graders were enrolled in remote learning, and most states—red and blue—had 98–99% of students attending school full‑time in person.(nces.ed.gov) This confirms that closures in 2022 were generally short‑lived and localized, not a return to the prolonged, nationwide shutdowns of 2020–21, but it does not contradict the narrower claim that some blue states would re‑impose closures while schools overall mostly stayed open.
  • On learning loss, 2022 National Assessment of Educational Progress data show that average scores for 9‑year‑olds fell 5 points in reading and 7 points in math versus pre‑pandemic results, confirming severe pandemic‑era learning loss persisting into 2022.(congress.gov) While most of this damage stems from earlier disruptions, additional short closures in early 2022 in the blue jurisdictions above naturally contributed at the margin.
  • Finally, earlier research on the 2020–21 period had already documented a strong partisan pattern in school modality choices: districts in heavily Democratic counties were about three times as likely to open fully remote, while heavily Republican counties were much more likely to offer in‑person instruction.(phys.org) The 2022 Omicron responses in Newark, Detroit, Prince George’s County, etc., are consistent with that same partisan asymmetry Sacks was extrapolating from.

Putting this together: in 2022 there were fresh, COVID‑driven school closures concentrated in Democratic‑leaning states/districts, while Republican states like Texas largely kept schools open in person, and substantial learning loss was evident by 2022. The prediction somewhat overstated the scale and duration of renewed closures (they were mostly weeks, not months), but its directional claims about where closures would recur and who would stay open were borne out, so it is best classified as right overall.

politicshealth
In the November 2022 elections, there will be a Republican “red wave” in which Democratic governors who maintain strict COVID restrictions will lose their offices; among such strict Democratic governors, Gavin Newsom will likely be the only one re‑elected or remaining in office.
But but I don't believe this is sustainable. I think eventually these governors who are holding on to their power and their restrictions are going to lose in 2022, the ones who haven't given it up are going to are going to basically fall to a red wave in November of 22. I think Newsom might be the only one left standing.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction had two key components, and both failed:

  1. A national Republican “red wave” in November 2022. In the 2022 U.S. midterms, Republicans gained only a narrow House majority while Democrats held the Senate and actually gained a net two governorships (Republicans went from 28 to 26 governors, Democrats from 22 to 24). Analyses across the political spectrum noted that the widely expected “red wave” did not materialize. This directly contradicts the forecast of a sweeping red wave.

  2. Democratic governors with strict COVID policies would mostly lose, with Newsom as the only one left. In the 2022 gubernatorial elections, numerous high‑profile Democratic incumbents who had imposed relatively strict COVID measures were re‑elected, often comfortably: Gretchen Whitmer in Michigan, Jared Polis in Colorado, J.B. Pritzker in Illinois, Tony Evers in Wisconsin, Kathy Hochul in New York, and Michelle Lujan Grisham in New Mexico all won new terms. Gavin Newsom was re‑elected in California, but he was far from the “only one left standing.” The overall gubernatorial map shifted slightly toward Democrats rather than against them.

Because there was no broad red wave and most prominent Democratic governors with strong COVID restrictions retained office, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
In 2022, particularly in the November 2022 elections, governors in U.S. blue states who maintain strict COVID restrictions (especially school closures) will be voted out in a broad Republican “red wave,” with Gavin Newsom likely being the only such governor who survives in office.
I think Omicron if we have lockdowns under Omicron. And really the big issue is school closures. If we go back to school closures in blue states and have more of the learning loss that Chamath was talking about, and I bet we do. Whereas in red states, they're still out there learning normally... We're going to there's going to be we're going to be living in two different Americas... I think eventually these governors who are holding on to their power and their restrictions are going to lose in 2022, the ones who haven't given it up are going to are going to basically fall to a red wave in November of 22. I think Newsom might be the only one left standing.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the November 2022 gubernatorial elections shows that Sacks’s prediction did not come true.

National outcome

  • In the 2022 gubernatorial elections, Democrats gained governorships overall: they went from 22 to 24 governors, while Republicans went from 28 down to 26, a net Democratic gain of two rather than a Republican “red wave.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Only one Democratic incumbent governor lost re-election: Steve Sisolak in Nevada. Republicans flipped just that single Democratic-held governorship, while Democrats flipped Arizona, Maryland, and Massachusetts from Republicans. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Post‑election analyses widely noted that the anticipated GOP “red wave” in the 2022 midterms largely failed to materialize. (states.xhirp.com)

Blue/swing-state Democratic governors with strict COVID policies Numerous Democratic governors from blue or swing states that had relatively strict COVID rules and significant school closures were re‑elected in 2022:

  • Gretchen Whitmer (Michigan) was re‑elected by about 54.5%–43.9%, a margin near 11 points. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Tim Walz (Minnesota) was re‑elected 52.3%–44.6%. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • JB Pritzker (Illinois) won re‑election 54.9%–42.4%. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Kathy Hochul (New York) won a full term 53.1%–46.7%. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Gavin Newsom (California) himself was re‑elected with about 59.2% of the vote. (en.wikipedia.org)

These and other Democratic governors (e.g., in Maine, Connecticut, New Mexico, Wisconsin, Kansas) retained office, and Democrats added governorships in deep-blue states like Maryland and Massachusetts. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because:

  1. There was no broad Republican “red wave” in gubernatorial races,
  2. Most blue-state or COVID‑strict Democratic governors were not voted out in 2022, and
  3. Newsom was far from the only such Democrat left in office,

Sacks’s prediction is best categorized as wrong.

politicseconomy
During 2022 there will be a significant political and economic “correction” to what he describes as the overreaction to COVID-19 (massive monetary/fiscal stimulus and restrictive policies like lockdowns and school closures), such that by the end of 2022, the U.S. will largely have moved past those overreaction-style policies even if COVID itself is not fully over.
Okay, I think we're about to enter a new phase, which is the correction to the overreaction. And I think we're already in the correction... And I think you'll see a further correction both political and economic in 2022. So we may not be completely past Covid, but I think we are going to be past this sort of overreaction to Covid.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2022 supports Sacks’s prediction that there would be a political and economic correction away from what he called COVID “overreaction” policies, with the U.S. largely past those policies by the end of 2022, even though COVID itself was not fully over.

1. Economic correction of stimulus / monetary policy

  • The major rounds of federal pandemic fiscal stimulus (CARES Act 2020, Consolidated Appropriations Act 2020, American Rescue Plan 2021) had all effectively ended by 2022; no comparable broad stimulus programs were renewed that year, despite continuing COVID circulation.
  • The Federal Reserve pivoted sharply from ultra‑loose policy to aggressive tightening in 2022, raising the federal funds rate from near 0% in March 2022 to over 4% by December 2022—explicitly as a response to inflation partly attributed to prior stimulus and pandemic distortions, not to extend COVID-era support. (This is widely documented in Fed summaries and 2022 FOMC statements.)
  • Pandemic emergency programs like enhanced unemployment benefits and broad stimulus checks were not restarted in 2022, indicating a clear policy correction from the earlier expansive response.

2. Rollback of restrictive COVID policies (lockdowns, school closures, broad mandates)

  • By early 2022, U.S. schools were overwhelmingly open for in‑person learning; the 2021–22 school year saw a major shift back to normal operations, and full, long‑term school closures had largely ended, with only short-term or localized disruptions. (This is documented in reports from the U.S. Department of Education and multiple education research groups summarizing 2022 operations.)
  • Lockdown-style stay-at-home orders and business-closure mandates were not in force across the U.S. in late 2022. Most states had already lifted such orders in 2020–2021 and did not bring them back in 2022, even during later COVID waves.
  • Mask and vaccine mandates were rolled back through 2022. The CDC dropped its universal indoor masking recommendation for most of the country in February 2022 with its new “community levels” guidance, after which many states and cities ended indoor mask mandates, including in schools and businesses, and they were not broadly re‑imposed by year‑end 2022.

3. COVID not over, but response normalized

  • Throughout 2022, COVID cases, hospitalizations, and deaths continued in waves (e.g., Omicron BA.2, BA.5, and later variants), and booster campaigns continued. However, the federal and state responses shifted toward living with the virus: focus on vaccines/boosters and therapeutics, voluntary masking, and minimal use of emergency-style restrictions. This is consistent with Sacks’s framing that “we may not be completely past Covid, but … past this sort of overreaction to Covid.”

Assessment vs. the prediction

  • He forecast “a further correction both political and economic in 2022” and that by then the U.S. would be past the overreaction (huge stimulus, lockdowns, school and broad restrictions) even if COVID itself persisted.
  • By the end of 2022:
    • Large-scale fiscal stimulus had ended and monetary policy had not only normalized but reversed hard.
    • Lockdowns and broad school closures were gone, and national guidance and state policies had moved away from stringent restrictions.
    • COVID was still present, but treated more as an endemic risk with far lighter, more targeted policies.

Given these facts, Sacks’s prediction matches the observed political and economic trajectory in 2022, so the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
In San Francisco’s February 15, 2022 recall election for the school board, at least two of the three targeted board members will be successfully recalled, and that outcome will prompt Mayor London Breed to publicly support the recall of District Attorney Chesa Boudin in the June 2022 election.
So here's my prediction on February 15th. They are having the recall election for the education board, and I predict that that board, at least two of the three are going to be recalled. The parents are sick and are sick and tired of it. They are going to be out. I think that's going to embolden London Breed to then support the recall of Chase Boudin in the June election.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction had two parts:

  1. School board recall outcome (Feb. 15, 2022)
    The prediction said that in San Francisco’s school board recall, at least two of the three targeted commissioners would be recalled. In reality, all three—Alison Collins, Gabriela López, and Faauuga Moliga—were removed from office in the February 15, 2022 election. (en.wikipedia.org)
    → This part of the prediction was correct.

  2. London Breed would publicly support the June 2022 recall of DA Chesa Boudin
    Multiple contemporaneous reports state that Mayor London Breed declined to take a position on the Boudin recall; she did not issue a formal public endorsement of the recall campaign before the June 7, 2022 vote. (cbsnews.com) Coverage after the election likewise notes that she “did not take a position on the race”, even while having publicly clashed with Boudin and later appointing recall supporter Brooke Jenkins as DA. (hotair.com) Another outlet explicitly reports that Breed "has not spoken publicly about her stance on the race" prior to the vote. (courthousenews.com)

So although Breed was widely seen as tacitly favoring Boudin’s removal and did appoint a recall backer as his replacement, she did not publicly or formally endorse the recall itself in the run‑up to the June 2022 election.

Because the prediction required both components to occur, and the second (a public endorsement of the recall by Breed) did not happen, the overall prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
Within the next political cycle following this December 2021 discussion (i.e., by sometime in 2022), San Francisco Mayor London Breed will openly come into conflict with District Attorney Chesa Boudin over her agenda to increase policing and crack down on crime, because Boudin will not support that agenda.
I predict that London Breed is going to eventually butt heads with Chase a boudin. There is no way that he will support this agenda of fixing the city.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence strongly supports that this prediction came true.

  • On December 14–17, 2021, just as in the podcast timeframe, Mayor London Breed announced and then formalized a Tenderloin crime and drug crackdown, including flooding the neighborhood with more police, seeking more police funding, and declaring a state of emergency—explicitly framed as getting more “aggressive with law enforcement” and cracking down on open-air drug dealing and associated crime. (californiaglobe.com)
  • On December 20, 2021, District Attorney Chesa Boudin publicly opposed Breed’s crackdown. In a San Francisco Chronicle report, Boudin joined other officials and activists “to criticize Mayor London Breed’s plan to flood San Francisco’s Tenderloin neighborhood with police and crack down on drug dealers as well as people who use drugs in the open,” arguing the plan relied on failed, punitive policies and calling instead for treatment and housing. (sfchronicle.com) This is direct, public disagreement with her policing/crime agenda.
  • Coverage of the period describes an increasingly fraught relationship between Breed and Boudin as crime and disorder became central political issues; Breed moved toward a more law‑and‑order posture, while Boudin championed reform and resisted punitive crackdowns. (sfchronicle.com) That tension culminated in Boudin’s June 7, 2022 recall, after which Breed appointed a tougher‑on‑crime DA, Brooke Jenkins, to replace him. (en.wikipedia.org)

The prediction stated that within the next political cycle after December 2021, Breed would “butt heads” with Boudin because he would not support her tougher policing/crime‑control agenda. The documented events show exactly that: Breed advanced a policing‑heavy crackdown plan; Boudin refused to support it and publicly criticized it, leading to an open policy clash that extended into 2022. Even though this conflict surfaced almost immediately (late December 2021), it clearly fits the predicted dynamic and occurs well within the predicted political timeframe. Therefore, the prediction is best judged as right.

politics
Between late 2021 and the end of 2022, and especially following a Republican “red wave” in the November 2022 U.S. elections, there will be a pronounced internal split within the Democratic Party (and U.S. liberal politics more broadly) between pragmatic liberals and radical progressive activists.
I think there is going to be a schism. I think it started after the Union victory in Virginia, and I think it's going to accelerate throughout for the next year, and especially after the red wave in November 2022. There's going to be a schism between liberal pragmatists and these extreme radical progressives.View on YouTube
Explanation

Two central elements of Sacks’s prediction did not occur as stated:

  1. No Republican “red wave” in November 2022.
    Pre‑election expectations widely forecast a strong GOP midterm showing, but major outlets and post‑election analyses agree that the anticipated red wave “failed to materialize.” Republicans only narrowly captured the House while Democrats held (and then slightly expanded) their Senate majority, and the overall performance was described as far better than historical midterm norms for the party in power.(cnbc.com) Since Sacks’s timeline and causal story explicitly hinged on a red wave in 2022, that key premise was wrong.

  2. No clear, new “schism” between pragmatic liberals and radical progressives in 2021–2022, especially after the midterms.
    The Democratic Party has long contained moderate/centrist factions (e.g., New Democrat Coalition, Blue Dog Coalition) and a progressive wing, and those tensions were already evident early in Biden’s term, particularly around Build Back Better and related legislation.(en.wikipedia.org) But in 2021–22 Democrats nonetheless passed major bills like the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act and the Inflation Reduction Act with unified Democratic votes in Congress, reflecting bargaining rather than a party break.(en.wikipedia.org)

    After the 2022 midterms, analyses emphasized that Democrats across the ideological spectrum performed better than expected; progressives gained some seats and influence, while centrists also notched key wins. Coverage framed this as an ongoing intra‑party debate over strategy and electability, not an accelerated rupture triggered by the election results.(onnradio.com) Articles noted that some moderates view progressives as hindering unity and vice versa, but the party remained a single “big tent” organization rather than splitting into two distinct liberal‑vs‑radical blocs.

Because the predicted triggering event (a Republican red wave) did not happen, and because Democratic intra‑party tensions did not qualitatively transform into the pronounced post‑2022 schism Sacks forecast, the overall prediction is best judged as wrong rather than merely ambiguous.

politics
Over the few years following the COVID-19 pandemic’s peak (starting from 2021–2022), the U.S. will move away from the “pandemic politics” period characterized by radicalized policies and rhetoric on both sides, and national politics will moderate relative to that peak radicalization.
I think we're seeing the the correction of the overreaction the pandemic caused, what Neil Ferguson calls pandemic politics, that we that the pandemic bred a strain of radical politics that we saw all over the country. And I think... I think the country is going to come out of that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence cuts both ways on this prediction.

Ways the prediction looks right (country moved out of “pandemic politics”):

  • Nearly all state and local mask mandates and other COVID restrictions were lifted by early–mid 2022; by April 2022, general mask mandates had ended in every state, with remaining rules limited to narrow settings like some health-care facilities.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • The federal COVID-19 national emergency and public health emergency were formally ended in spring 2023, an explicit policy signal that the emergency phase was over and that extraordinary pandemic-era measures were being wound down.(abccolumbia.com)
  • By 2022 and afterward, COVID largely disappeared as a top voting issue. Polling on the 2022 midterms and the 2024 cycle shows voters prioritizing inflation, the broader economy, abortion, immigration, and “extremism / threats to democracy,” with COVID only registering in low single digits as the “most important problem.”(news.gallup.com)
  • Retrospective polling in 2025 finds Americans mainly arguing about whether there were too many or too few restrictions and rating officials’ performance, rather than pushing for new large-scale mandates—suggesting the active phase of pandemic policy conflict has passed.(pewresearch.org)

Ways the prediction looks wrong (politics did not broadly moderate):

  • Overall U.S. politics did not notably moderate in the 2022–2025 period. Surveys show rising concern about political extremism and threats to democracy as the top national problem heading into 2024, ahead of even the economy, indicating that intense polarization and radical rhetoric persisted—just on other fronts.(reuters.com)
  • Analyses of the 2020 and 2024 elections argue that while COVID-era policies (lockdowns, school closures, mandates) have mostly ended, their aftershocks reshaped the electorate in a more hard-edged, distrustful direction (e.g., some young voters and suburban parents shifting right over anger at pandemic measures).(axios.com) This is closer to a long-term radicalization than a simple “correction of overreaction.”

Why this is rated ambiguous:

  • If you interpret Sacks narrowly—“we will leave behind the specific, COVID-centered era of mandates and pandemic-driven policy fights”—that forecast largely came true: emergency powers expired, mandates ended, and COVID faded as a core political issue.
  • If you interpret him more broadly—“the radical strain of politics that the pandemic bred will unwind and national politics will moderate”—the data don’t really support that. Polarization and extremism remain high, with the conflict shifting to other issues rather than clearly calming down.

Because one key part of his claim (exit from pandemic-centric politics) is supported by events, while another key part (overall moderation of national politics) is not, and because the quote mixes these ideas, the fairest overall judgment is “ambiguous.”

economy
U.S. CPI year-over-year inflation, which was 6.8% for the latest reported month (November 2021), will soon reach approximately 7% on a year-over-year basis.
then it went to 6.2. Now it's 6.8. Looks like it's headed to 7%.View on YouTube
Explanation

At the time of the episode (11 Dec 2021), the latest published CPI data showed U.S. all‑items CPI‑U up 6.8% year‑over‑year in November 2021.(bls.gov) Sacks said this "looks like it's headed to 7%" on a year‑over‑year basis.

The next CPI release showed that for December 2021, the 12‑month percent change in the all‑items CPI‑U was 7.0%, i.e., exactly 7% year‑over‑year inflation.(bls.gov) This data was released on 12 Jan 2022, just one month after the podcast.

Since headline U.S. CPI YoY did in fact reach approximately 7% very soon after the prediction, the forecast was borne out by subsequent data.

economymarketsgovernment
If, in late 2021 or early 2022, Senator Joe Manchin kills the Build Back Better bill and further large-scale fiscal stimulus is halted, then in calendar year 2022 the U.S. economy will experience a "massive relief rally" (substantial positive move in risk asset prices) and strong economic performance, and the Federal Reserve will not need to raise interest rates as aggressively as otherwise projected, resulting in a relatively soft economic landing rather than a sharp downturn.
Manchin would do Biden the biggest favor by just putting a bullet in this build back better plan, because I actually think there'd be a massive relief rally and the economy would take off like a rocket next year. If you just got government out of the way, they have printed enough. The best thing that could happen is they stop this pumping and stimulus, and then the fed doesn't have to raise rates as aggressively next year. And we could let things have more of a soft landing as opposed to the sudden austerity, which is whipsawing the economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of Sacks’s conditional prediction did not match what actually happened in 2022, even though the main political precondition mostly did.

  1. Precondition: Manchin kills Build Back Better / no further large-scale stimulus.

    • On December 19, 2021, Sen. Joe Manchin publicly announced he could not support President Biden’s Build Back Better Act, effectively killing the bill in its then‑current $1.7–1.75 trillion form.(cnbc.com)
    • In 2022, Democrats and Manchin negotiated a much smaller, reworked package—what became the Inflation Reduction Act (IRA)—passed via reconciliation and signed on August 16, 2022. The IRA combined climate and health spending with tax increases and drug‑pricing reforms, and was scored as modestly reducing deficits (~$238–264 billion over 10 years), not as a huge net new stimulus.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Separate analyses note that, even including other Biden‑era laws, the net effect by mid‑2022 was significant fiscal drag versus the earlier COVID‑era stimulus (e.g., Strategas and others cited 2022 as seeing the largest fiscal drag since 1947).(cnbc.com)
      Verdict on precondition: Largely satisfied in spirit: the original Build Back Better was killed, and there was no new multi‑trillion net stimulus, though some smaller, partially offset spending (IRA, etc.) still occurred.
  2. Claim: A “massive relief rally” and risk assets take off in 2022.
    Sacks expected killing BBB and halting stimulus to trigger a big positive move in markets and risk assets in calendar 2022. Instead, 2022 was a broad bear market:

    • The S&P 500 total return for 2022 was −18.1%, its worst year since 2008.(spglobal.com)
    • The Nasdaq Composite fell about −33% in 2022.(statmuse.com)
    • The NYSE Composite was down about −11.5%.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Bonds also suffered a historic drawdown as rates spiked; 2022 is widely cited as a sharp downturn year for the Bloomberg U.S. Aggregate Bond Index.(wsj.com)
      Across major equity and fixed‑income benchmarks, 2022 produced large negative returns, not the “massive relief rally” he predicted.
  3. Claim: The economy would “take off like a rocket” with a soft landing in 2022.

    • BEA data show real U.S. GDP grew 2.1% in 2022 (annual average), down sharply from 5.9% in 2021.(bea.gov) Regional BEA data describe 2022 as a year of “much more moderate” growth of about 1.9% real GDP nationally.(apps-fd.bea.gov)
    • On a quarterly basis, real GDP fell at annualized rates in both Q1 (−1.6%) and Q2 (−0.9%) of 2022 before rebounding later in the year.(dallasfed.org) This produced a recession‑like pattern in early 2022, although the NBER did not declare an official recession.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • That pattern—two negative quarters followed by moderate growth—is inconsistent with “take off like a rocket,” though the economy did avoid a deep official recession in 2022.
  4. Claim: The Fed wouldn’t need to raise rates aggressively in 2022 if stimulus stopped, enabling a soft landing instead of a whipsaw.

    • Inflation surged, with CPI inflation peaking around 9.1% year‑over‑year in June 2022.(spglobal.com)
    • In response, the Federal Reserve launched an exceptionally aggressive tightening cycle beginning March 2022. By December 2022 the Fed funds target range was raised to 4.25–4.50%, via seven hikes totaling 425 basis points in one year—its most aggressive pace since the early 1980s.(cnbc.com)
    • Those hikes contributed to the sharp repricing in both stocks and bonds noted above. This outcome is the opposite of his expectation that the Fed would not have to raise rates “as aggressively” if fiscal pumping stopped.

Overall assessment:
The main political antecedent (Manchin blocking the original Build Back Better and no further huge net fiscal stimulus) substantially occurred. But Sacks’s core outcomes—a massive relief rally, rocket‑like economic takeoff in 2022, and a non‑aggressive Fed tightening path leading to a gentle soft landing that year—did not materialize. 2022 instead featured a bear market in risk assets, only modest and uneven real growth, and one of the most aggressive Fed hiking campaigns in decades.

Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

venturemarkets
Following the 30–40% correction in late-2021 public-market valuations for growth and SaaS stocks, private venture valuations will also decline in response to those public comps, with the effect beginning to appear in venture deal pricing in the subsequent period after this episode (late 2021 onward).
We've already seen in the past five weeks, we've seen 30 to 40% correction in the public markets for growth stocks and SaaS companies. That is absolutely going to trickle down to venture valuations. I think it already has.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple data sources shows that after the late‑2021 selloff in public growth and SaaS stocks, private venture valuations did fall materially, especially from early 2022 onward, matching Sacks’ prediction.

  • Carta’s Q1 2022 “State of Private Markets” report already showed late‑stage private valuations starting to roll over: median Series C valuations were down 18% quarter‑over‑quarter and Series E+ down 25%, with median round sizes falling across all late stages. This is exactly the kind of early trickle‑down from public comps into private pricing Sacks described as already beginning. (carta.com)
  • By Q4 2022, Carta reports that median venture valuations were down at every stage, with very large drops at later stages that are most tightly linked to public-market comps: median Series B valuations fell 46% over 2022, Series C fell 55%, Series D fell 58%, and Series E+ fell 72% year‑over‑year. Round sizes also shrank dramatically, reflecting investors’ lower pricing for growth. (carta.com)
  • Crunchbase’s analysis of the downturn notes that when public markets began their downward slide in December 2021, it took about one quarter for private markets to start scaling back valuations, and by Q2 2022 late‑stage funding and valuations had come down significantly—explicitly describing the lagged “trickle down” from public to private markets. (news.crunchbase.com)
  • Subsequent Carta data through 2023–2024 characterizes this as a sustained “valuation reset” in venture, with elevated down‑round rates (~19–20% of all rounds) and large cumulative valuation declines at later stages since early 2022, confirming that the correction in public growth/SaaS names ultimately translated into structurally lower venture valuations. (carta.com)

Because private venture valuations did in fact decline materially in the period after the podcast (beginning in early 2022), in a way that’s widely attributed to the public‑market growth-stock correction, Sacks’ forecast that those public‑market moves would "absolutely" trickle down to venture valuations is right in both direction and timing (with the expected short lag).

healthpolitics
In the United States, following the emergence of Omicron, there will not be a return to broad COVID-19 stay-at-home lockdowns or widespread K–12 school closures at the state level, even if Omicron spreads widely.
we're not going back to lockdowns. No matter what happens with this Omicron thing. We're not going to do school closuresView on YouTube
Explanation

Lockdowns:

  • Comprehensive tallies of U.S. state responses show that formal statewide stay‑at‑home orders were a 2020 phenomenon, with end dates in spring 2020; the tables list no new statewide stay‑at‑home orders being imposed after those were lifted, and there is no entry indicating new stay‑at‑home mandates during the late‑2021/early‑2022 Omicron wave. This includes large states such as California, whose mandatory statewide stay‑at‑home order ended January 25, 2021 and was replaced by a reopening framework rather than reimposed later. 【2search12】2search13】2search14】
  • Analyses of the Omicron wave note that, despite very rapid and widespread transmission from December 2021 through February 2022, the U.S. did not pursue a stringent zero‑COVID strategy based on broad lockdowns, instead relying on tools like vaccination, masking, and testing. 【1search2】
  • Federally, President Biden said as Omicron emerged that he did not anticipate reinstating U.S. “shutdowns or lockdowns,” framing Omicron as a “cause for concern, not a cause for panic,” and emphasizing vaccines, boosters, and masks instead. White House statements around this time likewise stressed that with available tools, there was “no need for lockdowns.” 【4search1】4search3】2search0】
  • At the state level, governors in both Democratic and Republican states publicly rejected new lockdowns during the Omicron surge; for example, Maryland’s governor anticipated a severe hospitalization surge but explicitly said he was not considering a lockdown and criticized large‑scale school shutdowns. 【4search2】

Taken together, available evidence indicates that after Omicron’s emergence in late 2021, U.S. states did not return to broad, state‑level stay‑at‑home orders analogous to March–April 2020.

Schools:

  • Policy summaries and state chronologies for the Omicron period describe targeted, short‑term shifts to remote learning driven by local staffing and case spikes, rather than new blanket state orders closing all K–12 schools. For instance, Pennsylvania’s record notes that in January 2022 “many schools temporarily switched to virtual learning” due to Omicron‑driven cases among students and staff, but this is described as the result of local decisions, not a renewed statewide closure mandate. 【4search12】
  • City‑level accounts show similar patterns: Philadelphia’s district temporarily moved 81 schools online for staffing reasons in early January 2022, while maintaining in‑person instruction elsewhere in the district, again without a state‑ordered, system‑wide shutdown. 【5search17】
  • Major states’ Omicron‑era guidance (e.g., Illinois) focused on updating mitigation protocols specifically to maintain in‑person learning rather than to close schools; guidance from state education and health agencies in January 2022 framed testing, isolation rules, and masking as tools to keep classrooms open. 【5search1】
  • New York City’s January 2022 response similarly expanded school testing and changed quarantine rules so that exposed classmates could remain in school with negative tests, explicitly avoiding a shift back to full remote learning. 【5search16】

There were localized and sometimes large district‑level closures (Chicago, parts of Philadelphia, various districts in multiple states), but they were temporary, fragmented, and not imposed as broad state‑level shutdowns of K–12 systems. At the same time, federal and state rhetoric consistently emphasized keeping schools open with mitigation rather than returning to 2020‑style closures.

Assessment relative to the normalized prediction:

  • The user’s normalized version interprets Sacks as predicting that, after Omicron emerged in late 2021, the U.S. would not see a return to broad statewide stay‑at‑home lockdowns or widespread, state‑mandated K–12 school closures, even if Omicron spread widely.
  • The historical record through late 2025 supports that characterization: Omicron produced a very large wave, but it did not trigger new statewide stay‑at‑home orders, nor did states generally re‑close their entire K–12 systems by mandate; instead, there were local, temporary, and often district‑specific shifts to remote learning.

Under that normalized, aggregate reading, Sacks’s prediction about U.S. policy response to Omicron is right. A literal reading (“no school closures anywhere”) would be false, but given the clarified scope—broad, state‑level lockdowns and closures—the prediction matches what actually happened.

health
Subsequent retrospective analysis and public discourse following the Omicron wave will increasingly conclude that broad COVID-19 lockdowns were largely ineffective at stopping the virus, primarily delaying rather than preventing spread.
what that does is admit, and I think what Omicron will show is that lockdowns didn't work at allView on YouTube
Explanation

Available retrospective evidence and mainstream public discourse do not line up with Sacks’s prediction that Omicron-era hindsight would show that lockdowns “didn’t work at all,” or that broad lockdowns were largely ineffective and only delayed, rather than prevented, harm.

  1. Empirical studies generally find non‑trivial effects of lockdown‑type measures. Multiple observational studies in the U.S. report that stay‑at‑home orders reduced COVID‑19 case growth and deaths, with statistically significant declines in incidence and mortality while orders were in force.(pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov) Analyses of European non‑pharmaceutical interventions likewise conclude that partial or full lockdowns, together with school closures and travel restrictions, reduced cases and deaths compared with counterfactual scenarios without such measures.(archpublichealth.biomedcentral.com) Summaries of the literature (e.g., the COVID‑19 lockdowns and Non‑pharmaceutical intervention overview articles) characterize lockdowns as somewhat effective for reducing transmission and deaths, especially when implemented early and stringently, not as ineffective.(en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Meta‑analysis critical of lockdowns still finds they did reduce mortality, and its conclusions are contested. The high‑profile meta‑analysis by Herby, Jonung and Hanke (now in Public Choice) finds that spring‑2020 lockdowns in Europe and the U.S. reduced COVID‑19 mortality by roughly 3–10.7%, thousands to tens of thousands of deaths, and argues that these health benefits were small relative to the economic and social costs.(link.springer.com) That paper has been heavily criticized by epidemiologists and fact‑checking outlets for methodology and interpretation, and is treated as one viewpoint in an ongoing debate rather than a new consensus that “lockdowns didn’t work.”(theguardian.com)

  3. Official retrospective inquiries and mainstream expert commentary generally affirm that lockdowns saved lives, while acknowledging they mainly ‘bought time’ and had serious harms. The 2025 UK Covid‑19 Inquiry report—one of the most prominent post‑hoc assessments—concludes that national lockdowns “undoubtedly saved lives” and estimates that locking down about a week earlier in March 2020 could have reduced first‑wave deaths in England by nearly half, on the order of 23,000 lives.(thetimes.com) UK scientists and reviews similarly argue that, despite major social and health costs and limited certainty over exact effect sizes, early, shorter, better‑targeted lockdowns and other NPIs did reduce transmission and mortality, and they call for “smarter” alternatives in future pandemics—not because lockdowns failed entirely, but because they were a blunt, costly tool.(theguardian.com)

  4. Public discourse after Omicron is mixed and polarized, not uniformly aligned with ‘lockdowns didn’t work at all.’ There is a strong anti‑lockdown current—economists and commentators arguing that benefits were small and costs large, often amplifying the Herby et al. findings.(fortune.com) But substantial expert and media commentary across the political spectrum frames lockdowns as having bought time for health‑system preparedness and vaccines and as reducing deaths, especially in early waves, while criticizing their collateral damage and late or poorly designed implementation.(en.wikipedia.org) That is not the same as an emerging consensus that they were broadly ineffective.

Taken together, the post‑Omicron evidence and discourse support a more nuanced position: lockdowns and similar restrictions were effective but costly and blunt, with effects that were often to delay and reduce rather than to permanently prevent spread. Sacks’s stronger prediction—that retrospective analysis would broadly conclude lockdowns “didn’t work at all” or were largely ineffective—is not borne out, so this prediction is best judged wrong.

Sacks @ 00:45:47Inconclusive
economymarkets
From roughly 2022–2031, U.S. inflation will persist beyond what policymakers had called 'transitory', leading to rising interest rates and a decade in which public-market growth stocks, on average, perform worse than they did in the decade from ~2011–2020.
Now it looks like we're moving into an environment in which inflation is certainly not transitory. We don't know how long it's going to last for. And that creates an expectation of interest rates are going to rise. And so the next decade may not be as good for growth stocks.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction’s core elements were:

  1. Inflation would not be merely “transitory” and would lead to higher interest rates.

    • U.S. CPI inflation surged to ~7–9% in 2021–2022 and stayed well above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target for multiple years, contradicting earlier official descriptions of inflation as “transitory.”
    • In response, the Federal Reserve raised the federal funds rate from near 0% in early 2022 to above 5% by 2023, the sharpest tightening cycle in decades. This clearly validates the direction of Sacks’s near-term claim that inflation would not be transitory and that it would create expectations of rising interest rates.
    • However, by 2024–2025, inflation had fallen substantially from its peak toward the low‑single‑digit range, and markets began to price in eventual rate cuts, suggesting inflation may not remain persistently high for the entire decade.
  2. “The next decade may not be as good for growth stocks.” (≈2022–2031 vs. 2011–2020)

    • The 2011–2020 period was extraordinarily strong for U.S. growth/tech stocks: major growth indexes and the NASDAQ‑100 delivered very high annualized returns, substantially beating value stocks and broad market averages.
    • From 2022 through late 2025, growth stocks experienced a sharp drawdown in 2022 amid rate hikes, but then a powerful recovery, with large‑cap tech and AI‑related names delivering strong gains in 2023–2025. Many leading growth indexes and mega‑cap tech stocks were again near or at all‑time highs by 2024–2025.
    • However, the prediction is explicitly about the entire decade (~2022–2031) “may not be as good” as 2011–2020. As of November 30, 2025, less than half of that period has elapsed, and long‑horizon relative performance (over a full 10‑year span) cannot yet be measured. Growth’s strong rebound in 2023–2025 makes the ultimate decade‑long comparison especially uncertain.

Because:

  • The duration and full‑decade impact of inflation/interest‑rate dynamics through 2031 are not yet observable; and
  • The 10‑year performance of public‑market growth stocks from ~2022–2031 vs. 2011–2020 cannot be definitively evaluated in 2025,

it is too early to say whether the decade‑long prediction about growth stocks and the inflation regime is ultimately right or wrong.

Therefore, the correct status classification today is: inconclusive (too early to tell the full‑decade outcome).

marketseconomy
Within the next few years after late 2021, public-market and late-stage private growth stocks will enter a bear or down cycle characterized by materially lower valuation multiples, causing significant mark-downs and negative shocks ('rude awakening') for younger founders and investors who have not previously experienced such a downturn.
Keith and I just talked about how we're about to enter a very different kind of macro environment for growth stocks, and we don't know how long it's going to take, but there's no question that multiples and valuations are going to come down. And there's a lot of younger founders and investors who never lived through a bear market or a down cycle. And they're about to get a rude awakening.View on YouTube
Explanation

The key elements of Sacks’s prediction all played out within a couple of years of late 2021:

  1. Growth/tech stocks entered a clear bear market.

    • The Nasdaq Composite entered a bear market from November 2021 to December 2022, falling about 33% from its peak, its worst year since 2008. (nasdaq.com)
    • 2022 marked the first time the Nasdaq had four straight negative quarters since the dot‑com crash, with major tech names like Meta and Tesla losing roughly two‑thirds of their value and Amazon about half. (cnbc.com) This is exactly the “very different macro environment for growth stocks” he described.
  2. Valuation multiples for growth/software companies materially compressed.

    • Public SaaS valuations peaked in 2021 around ~17x ARR, then fell roughly 35–40% by early 2022, with the median multiple dropping to ~10–11x. (saas-capital.com)
    • Broader software EV/Revenue multiples, which had surged to record levels in 2021, fell below 3x by late 2022 as rates rose and liquidity tightened, and by 2023–24 had “normalized well below their 2021 highs.” (aventis-advisors.com) This is consistent with “multiples and valuations are going to come down.”
  3. Late‑stage private tech and VC portfolios saw major markdowns.

    • SoftBank’s Vision Fund, heavily concentrated in late‑stage tech, reported a record loss of about $27.4 billion for the year ended March 2022 due to plummeting valuations in its portfolio. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Large crossover and growth investors like Tiger Global marked down their private portfolios by roughly a third in 2022, after their tech‑heavy hedge and long‑only books lost more than half their value. (swissinfo.ch)
    • PitchBook/NVCA analysis highlighted that late‑stage venture growth was the most overextended in 2020–21 and that, as public markets turned against high‑growth, high‑loss names, late‑stage companies faced funding gaps, increasing down‑rounds and failures in 2023. (gamesbeat.com) These are precisely the “mark‑downs” and painful reset he anticipated.
  4. Founders and newer investors experienced the “rude awakening.”

    • Commentary on the post‑2021 “funding winter” notes that the second half of 2022 brought “a rude awakening for many entrepreneurs and investors alike,” as venture funding and deal counts collapsed from 2021 highs and startups faced layoffs, lower valuations and difficult fundraising. (unlistedintel.com)
    • Other investors described 2022’s environment of lower valuations, shutdowns, panic and layoffs as a reckoning after “exceptionally bloated” years, with many portfolios “heavily overvalued” going into the downturn. (forbes.com) This matches Sacks’s warning that younger founders and investors who’d never seen a real down cycle were “about to get a rude awakening.”
  5. Timing check.
    The bear market in growth tech, multiple compression and VC markdowns began in earnest in early–mid 2022—well within “the next few years” after his December 2021 statement—and the effects on founders and investors were evident by late 2022–23.

While parts of tech (especially AI‑linked mega‑caps) later rebounded, the specific prediction—that growth stocks would soon face a harsher macro regime, with multiples and valuations falling and an ensuing shock to inexperienced founders and investors—was borne out by events.

techpolitics
After Jack Dorsey’s resignation in late 2021, Twitter’s content-moderation and censorship practices will become more restrictive over the following years (e.g., more content and accounts limited or removed for speech reasons than under Dorsey’s tenure).
I agree, I agree things are only going to get worse once he's gone.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since Jack Dorsey’s resignation indicates that Twitter/X’s overall approach to speech has become less restrictive, not more.

Key points:

  1. Major rollback of COVID-19 moderation rules. Under Dorsey, Twitter removed ~97,000 pieces of COVID-19 misinformation and suspended over 11,000 accounts from 2020–Sept 2022 under a strict health-misinformation policy. After Elon Musk took over, Twitter announced on Nov 29, 2022 that it stopped enforcing this policy and would no longer label, demote, or remove COVID falsehoods. (time.com) This is a clear move toward less restrictive moderation.

  2. Loosening protections against anti‑trans harassment. In early April 2023, Twitter quietly removed an explicit rule that prohibited targeted misgendering or deadnaming of transgender people—an anti‑abuse protection that had existed since 2018. (techcrunch.com) X later partially reinstated a narrower rule in 2024 that focuses mainly on repeated, targeted harassment and often just reduces visibility of offending posts rather than reliably removing them. (them.us) Net effect: weaker, not stronger, speech restrictions in this area.

  3. Dissolution and downsizing of trust & safety infrastructure. After Musk’s acquisition, Twitter/X dissolved its Trust and Safety Council and leaned more heavily on automation while hate speech surged, a shift widely described as relaxing moderation. (en.wikipedia.org) Regulatory filings from Australia’s eSafety Commissioner and related reporting show X:

    • cut global trust & safety staff by ~30%, including 80% of safety engineers;
    • halved the full‑time content moderation team and significantly reduced contracted moderators;
    • became slower and less responsive to reports of hateful content. (apnews.com) These cuts reduce the platform’s actual capacity to restrict content compared to the Dorsey era.
  4. Mass reinstatement of previously banned accounts. Musk explicitly pursued a “general amnesty” for suspended users, restoring accounts banned for COVID misinformation and other policy violations, and reinstating high‑profile accounts such as Donald Trump and Marjorie Taylor Greene. (cnbc.com) A wave of reversals of earlier enforcement decisions is inconsistent with a move toward more censorship.

  5. Empirical studies describe moderation relaxation and more visible hate content. Academic work and monitoring organizations examining the post‑acquisition period conclude that Musk’s takeover was associated with relaxed moderation and substantial increases in hate speech on the platform (including anti‑LGBTQ and racist content). (montclair.edu) While increased hate speech doesn’t by itself prove there are fewer takedowns, these studies explicitly tie the surge to moderation being loosened, not tightened.

There is some evidence that X has been more willing to comply with certain state censorship demands (for example, account withholding by jurisdiction). (arxiv.org) But the prediction was broadly about Twitter’s own content‑moderation and speech restrictions being ramped up relative to Dorsey’s tenure. Given the large‑scale rollbacks of major policies, staff and structural cuts, and mass reinstatements, the dominant trend since late 2021 has been less restrictive speech moderation overall, so Sacks’s prediction that “things are only going to get worse” in the sense of more censorship is best judged as wrong.

politicsventure
During the then‑current U.S. political administration in 2021 (the Biden administration), it will be very difficult to further expand or liberalize U.S. equity‑crowdfunding laws beyond the status quo of 2021.
I think it's gonna be very hard to get get those crowdfunding laws expanded under the current regime.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2021–2025 shows that no major expansion of U.S. equity‑crowdfunding law has actually been enacted during the Biden administration, and attempts to do so have struggled, which aligns with Sacks’s prediction that it would be “very hard” to expand these laws under the then‑current regime.

  1. Reg CF limits have not been substantively expanded since 2021.
    The SEC’s own 2024 Regulation Crowdfunding overview still lists the same core framework as in early 2021: offerings must be conducted via registered intermediaries, and issuers may raise a maximum of $5 million in a 12‑month period, with standard investor limits and disclosure obligations.(sec.gov) That $5M cap comes from amendments adopted in November 2020 and made effective in March 2021—before or right as Biden took office—and were already in force months before the November 20, 2021 podcast.(en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Post‑2021 changes have been technical inflation adjustments, not real liberalization.
    A 2023 American Bar Association review of 2022 regulatory developments notes that the SEC made inflation adjustments to various dollar thresholds in Regulation Crowdfunding (e.g., raising certain income/net‑worth thresholds and financial‑statement thresholds), but explicitly did not increase the overall $5M offering limit, because that had already been raised so sharply in March 2021.(americanbar.org) These tweaks modestly update numbers but do not broaden who can use Reg CF or how much capital can be raised in any transformative way.

  3. A major expansion bill passed the House but stalled, with explicit White House opposition.
    H.R. 2799, the Expanding Access to Capital Act of 2023, included a title called the Improving Crowdfunding Opportunities Act, which would meaningfully expand equity crowdfunding by increasing how much can be raised and invested under Reg CF, loosening some issuer and portal requirements, and easing secondary trading constraints.(congress.gov) This bill passed the House in March 2024 but went to the Senate Banking Committee and has not advanced further.(congress.gov) The Biden Administration issued a formal Statement of Administration Policy strongly opposing H.R. 2799 on investor‑protection and worker‑classification grounds, signaling a clear lack of support for this style of liberalization.(presidency.ucsb.edu) This combination—House passage, Senate inaction, and White House opposition—is consistent with it being politically “very hard” to enact such expansions.

  4. Even modest easing proposals remain only proposals as of late 2025.
    The ACCESS Act of 2025 (H.R. 3645) would make a narrower, technical change benefiting Reg CF issuers by raising the offering amount at which reviewed financial statements are required from $100,000 to $250,000, with authority for the SEC to go up to $400,000.(congress.gov) As of November 30, 2025, Congress.gov still shows the bill only reported out of committee and placed on the House Union Calendar, with status “Introduced” — it has not passed either chamber or become law.(congress.gov) So even relatively modest deregulatory adjustments have not yet cleared the full legislative process.

  5. Advocacy for further expansion underscores that desired changes haven’t been achieved.
    Industry and policy groups continue to publish proposals under the banner of “JOBS Act 4.0” or similar agendas, calling for major improvements to Reg CF—such as lifting the cap to at least $10 million, more flexible investor limits, and broader use of special purpose vehicles—precisely because these expansions have not been adopted.(crowdfundinsider.com) The persistence of these campaigns without corresponding enacted reforms supports the view that getting real expansion through the current political and regulatory environment is difficult.

Putting this together: since Sacks spoke in November 2021, no substantial legislative or regulatory liberalization of U.S. equity‑crowdfunding law has actually taken effect, and the most ambitious expansion bill has been opposed by the administration and stalled in the Senate. The outcome matches his qualitative prediction that expanding crowdfunding laws under the Biden administration would be “very hard.”

techmarkets
Within roughly one year from November 2021, Solana will surpass Ethereum in terms of developer activity (e.g., number of active developers/projects or similar developer-engagement metrics).
their view is that Solana over the next year will flip Ethereum based on developer activityView on YouTube
Explanation

Within roughly one year after November 2021 (i.e., by around November 2022), available cross‑chain developer reports show Ethereum still clearly leading Solana in developer activity.

Electric Capital’s 2022 Developer Report (snapshot as of December 2022) estimates about 5,819 monthly active developers for Ethereum, while Solana is grouped among ecosystems that grew from under 200 to just over 1,000 monthly active developers. (cointime.ai) A follow‑on summary from Solana itself, citing the same report, says Solana surpassed roughly 2,000 monthly active developers in 2022 and explicitly describes Solana as ‘second in raw numbers only to Ethereum,’ confirming that Ethereum still had the larger developer ecosystem at that time. (solana.com) These sources indicate Solana was the fastest‑growing major ecosystem but had not flipped Ethereum on any standard total‑developer or monthly‑active‑developer metric within that one‑year window.

Later Electric Capital data and coverage reinforce this picture: by 2024 Solana does overtake Ethereum only in new developer onboarding, while Ethereum remains number one in overall developer activity, with Solana in second place. (coindesk.com) Since no credible metric in the 2021–2022 period shows Solana surpassing Ethereum in overall developer activity, Sacks’s prediction that Solana would ‘flip’ Ethereum on developer activity within about a year of November 2021 did not come true.

Sacks @ 01:04:30Inconclusive
politicsconflictgovernment
Sacks predicts that Xi Jinping is likely to attempt the annexation of Taiwan (forcible political unification with the PRC) before the end of his tenure as China’s leader.
you'd have to say it's the annexation of Taiwan. I mean, that's the thing that he must be looking to do before you know his time to reunify China. That's the thing that could put him in that league.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 30 November 2025, China has not carried out a forcible annexation or invasion of Taiwan. Coverage of the Taiwan Strait describes rising tension, larger PLA exercises (e.g., 2023 and 2025 drills encircling or near Taiwan), and preparations on both sides for a potential future conflict, but no actual Chinese attempt to conquer or politically absorb Taiwan by force has occurred. (theweek.com)

At the same time, Xi Jinping’s tenure as China’s top leader is open‑ended. Term limits on the state presidency were removed in 2018, and Xi subsequently secured an unprecedented third term as China’s leader in 2022–2023, with no designated successor and the possibility to remain in power indefinitely. (npr.org)

Because the prediction was conditional on what Xi would do before the end of his tenure—a point that has clearly not yet been reached—there has not been enough time to know whether he will eventually attempt annexation by force. The prediction therefore cannot be judged right or wrong at this stage and is best classified as inconclusive (too early to tell).

Sacks predicts that Apple will release AR glasses as a new computing platform opened to third‑party developers, and that this AR‑glasses product will be launched before Tim Cook retires as CEO of Apple.
I wouldn't judge the Tim Cook era until we see what happens with glasses. Because this is the product that I hear is coming is going to be their, you know, their AR glasses. And that's going to be a new computing platform that they open up to developers. And I guess Cook's been there for what, a decade. But I think he doesn't want to retire until this comes out. And he can see this is going to be his signature product, I think.View on YouTube
Explanation

Apple did launch a head‑worn AR device as a new computing platform with full third‑party developer support before Tim Cook retired as CEO.

New AR computing platform opened to developers: In June 2023 Apple announced Apple Vision Pro, describing it as its first “spatial computer,” running a new operating system, visionOS, with its own App Store and support for more than a million compatible iOS/iPadOS apps plus new spatial apps. (apple.com) Apple released the visionOS SDK in Xcode so third‑party developers can build native visionOS apps, and updated Xcode/TestFlight to accept and distribute these apps, explicitly positioning this as a new app platform. (macrumors.com) This matches the prediction of “a new computing platform that they open up to developers.”

Timing relative to Tim Cook’s retirement: Vision Pro became available to U.S. customers on February 2, 2024, with Tim Cook still serving as Apple’s CEO. (apple.com) As of November 30, 2025, Cook remains CEO; reports only say Apple is preparing for a possible transition “as soon as next year,” and note that he has not yet announced plans to step down. (timesofindia.indiatimes.com) Therefore the AR headset platform launched before his retirement, satisfying the timing condition.

One possible quibble is that Vision Pro is marketed as a mixed‑reality headset rather than lightweight everyday “glasses,” but in context Sacks was clearly forecasting a head‑worn AR device that becomes Apple’s next major platform and that Cook would get out the door before leaving. On those substantive points, the prediction has been borne out.

politicsgovernment
In the November 2022 U.S. House midterm elections, Republicans will gain on the order of roughly 44–51 seats relative to their 2020 House seat count, easily surpassing the five-seat swing needed to win a majority in the House of Representatives.
Dave Wasserman of the Cook Political Report calculates somewhere between a 44 and 51 seat gain from the GOP. They only need five seats to win the majority, so it's looking very bleak for the Democrats in 2022.View on YouTube
Explanation

Republicans did win control of the U.S. House in the November 2022 midterms, but their net seat gain was only 9 seats, not the roughly 44–51 seat pickup that Sacks cited and implicitly endorsed.

In 2020, Republicans held 213 seats and Democrats 222. After the 2022 elections, Republicans held 222 seats to Democrats’ 213, for a GOP net gain of +9 seats—just four seats over the 218 needed for a majority. (en.wikipedia.org)

So while the direction (Republicans win the House) was correct, the core quantitative claim in the normalized prediction—gains on the order of 44–51 seats—was off by more than 30 seats. Because that magnitude was central to the prediction (a big "red wave" versus the very narrow majority that actually occurred), the prediction is best judged as wrong.

Sacks @ 01:11:43Inconclusive
politics
The 2020s will be a "Republican decade" in U.S. politics, meaning Republicans will generally dominate federal elections (Congress and/or the presidency) throughout roughly 2021–2030.
I think this could be a Republican decade.View on YouTube
Explanation

So far, the record is mixed, and the decade is only about halfway over.

Key federal outcomes so far:

  • 2020 cycle / start of the decade (before and just after the prediction): Joe Biden (Democrat) won the 2020 presidential election, and Democrats held the House with a 222–213 majority going into 2021. (en.wikipedia.org) In the 117th Congress (2021–2023), Democrats controlled both chambers (via the vice president’s tiebreak in a 50–50 Senate) and the presidency, i.e., a Democratic federal trifecta. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • 2022 midterms: Republicans won control of the House (about 222–213), while Democrats slightly expanded their effective Senate majority to 51–49 (including independents caucusing with them). (en.wikipedia.org) This produced a split Congress under a Democratic president.

  • 2024 elections: Donald Trump, the Republican nominee, won the 2024 presidential election. (en.wikipedia.org) Republicans also held the House with a very narrow majority (around 220 seats) and flipped the Senate to a 53–47 Republican majority. (en.wikipedia.org) From January 2025 onward, Republicans therefore have a unified hold on the presidency, House, and Senate.

Interpretation vs. the prediction:

  • The prediction was that the 2020s as a whole would be a "Republican decade" in the sense of Republicans generally dominating federal elections across 2021–2030.
  • The early 2020s (2021–2022) were clearly dominated by Democrats at the federal level. (en.wikipedia.org) The mid‑2020s (2025 onward) currently favor Republicans, who now control the presidency and both chambers of Congress. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Crucially, there are still major federal elections to come in 2026, 2028, and 2030, which will determine whether Republicans truly dominate the balance of the decade or whether control swings back toward Democrats.

Because the time period the prediction is about (roughly the entire 2020s) has not yet concluded, and the pattern so far is mixed—Democratic dominance early, Republican dominance as of 2025—the correctness of “this could be a Republican decade” cannot yet be determined. The fairest status is therefore **“inconclusive (too early).”

politics
Following the November 2021 elections, Republican politicians and media figures will rapidly (within months, i.e., by mid-2022) stop claiming that U.S. elections are rigged or stolen and largely drop 2020-election-fraud rhetoric.
That's going to that's going to stop now too. They're going to stop talking. ... It's going to stop overnight.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that after the November 2021 elections, Republican politicians and media would rapidly stop alleging that U.S. elections are rigged or stolen and would largely drop 2020-election-fraud rhetoric, "overnight" and within months (by mid‑2022).

By mid‑2022, that clearly had not happened:

  • Donald Trump was still explicitly claiming that the 2020 election was "rigged and stolen". On June 9, 2022, he posted on Truth Social that January 6 was about an election that was "Rigged and Stolen," and PolitiFact noted he had shown "no signs of backing down" from that claim. (politifact.com) On June 19, 2022, he again described the 2020 election as "RIGGED & STOLLEN" in a public statement, as documented by Snopes. (snopes.com) Trump is the leading Republican figure; his continued rhetoric alone contradicts the prediction.
  • High-profile Republican candidates in 2022 were still centering campaigns on false stolen‑election claims. For example, Arizona GOP gubernatorial candidate Kari Lake repeatedly called the 2020 election "stolen" and "corrupt" and used these claims prominently in a June 2022 primary debate. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Systematic analyses of 2022 midterm candidates show election‑denial rhetoric remained widespread well past mid‑2022. CBS News found that, as of early November 2022, 308 of 597 Republican federal and statewide candidates had raised unfounded doubts about the 2020 election, including many who explicitly said it was stolen or rigged. (cbsnews.com) The Washington Post similarly reported nearly 300 GOP "election deniers" on the 2022 ballot, noting that the movement arising from Trump’s effort to overturn 2020 was, in many respects, even stronger two years later. (washingtonpost.com) Academic work from Stanford also characterizes 2022 as a cycle in which a large share of Republican statewide candidates questioned or denied the 2020 results. (gsb.stanford.edu)

Because prominent Republican politicians and a substantial share of GOP candidates were still actively using 2020 stolen‑election rhetoric well into and beyond mid‑2022, the forecast that such claims would quickly stop and effectively disappear was not borne out.

politicsgovernment
After the November 2021 elections, the pending federal infrastructure bill (the bipartisan infrastructure package) will pass Congress quickly and easily, without serious further obstruction from progressives.
I think, I think what's going to happen in the wake of this election is that this infrastructure bill is going to sail through because one of the crazier things that the progressives were doing was holding that bill hostage.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that, after the November 2021 elections, the bipartisan federal infrastructure bill would "sail through" Congress without serious further obstruction from progressives.

Key facts:

  • The bill in question is the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act (IIJA), also known as the bipartisan infrastructure bill or Bipartisan Infrastructure Law.
  • It had already passed the Senate on August 10, 2021, but was being held up in the House in a standoff between moderates and progressives, with progressives tying it to the larger Build Back Better reconciliation bill. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • After the off‑year elections on November 2, 2021, the House brought the IIJA to a final vote on November 5, 2021, just three days later. The bill passed 228–206, with 13 Republicans joining most Democrats. Only six progressive Democrats (“the Squad” and allies) voted no and did not succeed in blocking the bill. (theguardian.com)
  • Once the House agreed to the Senate version on November 5, the bill’s congressional journey was complete; President Biden signed it into law on November 15, 2021. There was no additional congressional obstruction from progressives after that point, since no further votes on the IIJA itself were required. (en.wikipedia.org)

Interpretation relative to the prediction:

  • “Sail through” / “pass quickly” after the election: The last needed congressional action (House passage of the Senate bill) happened almost immediately after the November 2 elections—on November 5—after months of prior delay. That matches the prediction that, in the wake of the elections, it would move quickly.
  • “Without serious further obstruction from progressives”: Progressives had been the main source of obstruction before the elections by refusing to pass the infrastructure bill without simultaneous action on Build Back Better. After the elections, they allowed the infrastructure bill to come to a vote and did not use procedural tactics to stop it. A small group of six progressives voted "no," but the bill passed comfortably with bipartisan support, and their opposition did not create any new or effective obstruction. (commondreams.org)

Because the bill did indeed pass very quickly after the elections and there was no successful or prolonged new obstruction from progressives in that post‑election window, the prediction is best characterized as right.

politicsgovernment
If President Biden continues to let Bernie Sanders and Elizabeth Warren effectively dominate the Democratic domestic policy agenda through 2022, Democrats will lose approximately 40–50 seats in the U.S. House of Representatives in the 2022 midterm elections.
if Biden insists on allowing Bernie to dominate the agenda. And Warren, I think you're going to see 40 to 50 seat losses by the Democrats in 2022.View on YouTube
Explanation

Democrats did not lose anywhere near 40–50 House seats in the 2022 midterms. In the 2020 election they held 222 seats; after the 2022 elections they held 213, a net loss of 9 seats, not 40–50. (en.wikipedia.org)

Although Sacks framed this as conditional on Biden continuing to let Bernie Sanders and Elizabeth Warren "dominate the agenda," we can still evaluate the measurable part of the prediction (the size of the House losses). Regardless of how one judges that policy condition, the forecasted outcome (40–50 lost seats) clearly did not occur, so the prediction is wrong.

marketseconomy
The current boom in assets such as SaaS, Nasdaq, S&P, and crypto may continue for at least another five years without a major reversal.
look, the flip side of it is we could keep having a boom for five more years, you know, and so the.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that the boom in assets like SaaS, Nasdaq, S&P, and crypto could continue for at least five years from late October 2021 without a major reversal. In reality, a broad and sharp reversal happened within about a year:

  • S&P 500: After a record close on January 3, 2022, the S&P 500 fell more than 20%, officially entering a bear market and ultimately declining about 25% peak‑to‑trough in 2022—the worst year since 2008.(cnbc.com)
  • Nasdaq (growth/tech): The Nasdaq Composite entered a bear market from November 2021 to December 2022, with a decline of about 33% over 2022.(nasdaq.com)
  • SaaS / cloud software: The BVP Nasdaq Emerging Cloud Index (a common SaaS/cloud benchmark) fell 60.2% from its high in November 2021 to its low in June 2022.(wisdomtree.com)
  • Crypto (Bitcoin as proxy): From October 2021 to November 30, 2022, Bitcoin’s closing price dropped about 60.8%, with lows in the mid‑$15k–$17k range.(statmuse.com)

A decline of 20%+ is the standard definition of a bear market and is widely regarded as a major reversal. Since multiple cited asset classes experienced 30–60% drawdowns within roughly a year of the October 2021 podcast, the condition of “no major reversal for at least five years” clearly failed.

Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

politics
For the 2024 U.S. presidential election, there is approximately a 50% chance Joe Biden will be on the general-election ballot and approximately a 50% chance Donald Trump will be on the general-election ballot.
Do I think Biden or Trump could be on the ballot? I think it's 50–50 for both of them.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that for the 2024 U.S. presidential election there was roughly a 50% chance Joe Biden would be on the general-election ballot and a 50% chance Donald Trump would be on the general-election ballot.

What actually happened:

  • Joe Biden was the Democratic Party nominee and appeared on the 2024 general-election presidential ballot.
  • Donald Trump was the Republican Party nominee and appeared on the 2024 general-election presidential ballot.

Both Biden and Trump were in fact on the ballot, so ex post the realized outcome was that both appeared, not that each only had a 50% chance of doing so.

While you can’t strictly falsify a probabilistic statement from a single outcome in a formal statistical sense, for the purposes of judging this concrete, binary forecast about who would be on the 2024 ballot, the world that occurred ("both on") is inconsistent with the implication that it was only a 25% joint-probability scenario (0.5 × 0.5). Treated as a practical prediction about who would run, it did not match reality.

Therefore, evaluated against what actually happened in the 2024 election, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

economypolitics
If President Biden does not forcefully intervene to end the port labor constraints and move Los Angeles/Long Beach ports to true 24/7 operations, the resulting supply chain disruption will trigger a US recession within the next year (by late 2022).
Look unless Biden is willing to listen I mean, Chamath, you're right that they're entitled to negotiate. But here's the thing. I mean, they're holding the whole country hostage now. They're holding the economy hostage. So at a certain point, if their demands are unreasonable, it's, I think, proper for the president of United States to step in and say, guys, this is ridiculous. You have to go back to work... unless Biden steps in to solve this, we will have a recession.View on YouTube
Explanation

Two different parts of Sacks’s conditional prediction are hard to score cleanly.

  1. Did Biden "step in" and move LA/Long Beach to 24/7 operations?
    Within days of the podcast, the White House announced an agreement for the Port of Los Angeles to expand to 24/7 operations, joining the Port of Long Beach, after negotiations with port directors, the longshore union and major shippers.(bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov) However, reporting at the time noted that only some terminals and shifts actually ran 24/7 and industry figures called the initiative incomplete or largely symbolic.(washingtonpost.com) So whether Biden "steps in to solve this" and creates "true 24/7" ports is a judgment call rather than a clear yes/no.

  2. Did the US enter a recession within a year (by October 16, 2022)?
    Initial GDP data showed real GDP falling in both Q1 2022 and Q2 2022, leading many outlets and analysts to say the US had entered a technical recession (two consecutive quarters of negative growth).(icis.com) But the official arbiter, the NBER Business Cycle Dating Committee, never declared a 2022 recession, and its chronology still shows the last recession ending in April 2020.(nber.org) Then, in 2024, a comprehensive GDP revision from the Commerce Department/BEA showed Q2 2022 had in fact grown at about a 0.3% annual rate, eliminating even the earlier two‑quarter contraction; later commentary explicitly noted that the supposed 2022 technical recession was a data illusion.(axios.com)

Putting this together:

  • On one reading, Biden did intervene on port operations and no official 2022 recession occurred, so the conditional ("unless he steps in, we will have a recession") was never tested.
  • On another, his intervention was too limited to count as "solving" the port issue, and contemporaneous data showed two quarters of GDP decline that many labeled a recession, which would make the prediction look roughly right.
  • With later data revisions and the lack of an NBER recession call, even the outcome (recession vs no recession) is contested.

Because both the policy condition (what counts as stepping in and true 24/7) and the economic outcome (whether 2022 counts as a recession) are genuinely disputed given current evidence, the prediction cannot be cleanly marked as simply right or wrong; it is best classified as ambiguous.

economyclimate
China’s late‑2021 restrictions on coal usage that were constraining manufacturing will be rolled back quickly; they will not allow these clean‑energy‑motivated coal limits to persist long enough to cause a prolonged (multi‑year) shutdown of significant portions of their industrial economy.
I suspect that China has woken up to this, and they will they're not going to shut down their economy because of concerns about clean energy. So I assume this is a very temporary decision.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from late 2021 onward shows that China quickly reversed the coal-usage and energy‑intensity constraints that had contributed to power rationing and factory slowdowns, and it did not allow those climate/clean‑energy‑driven limits to cause a prolonged, multi‑year industrial shutdown.

  1. The 2021 problem really did stem partly from clean‑energy/dual‑control targets. In September–October 2021, many provinces restricted power to energy‑intensive, high‑emissions industries in order to meet strict “dual‑control” targets on total energy use and energy intensity, which were a key tool for meeting carbon and pollution goals. Analyses note that these dual‑control targets and their over‑implementation were a major driver of the widespread industrial power rationing in 2021. (jorae.cn)

  2. Beijing rolled those constraints back very quickly by pivoting hard to coal. Within weeks, central authorities ordered major coal‑producing regions (Shanxi, Shaanxi, Inner Mongolia) to restart and expand mines and to "release advanced production capacity" to ease the shortage, and eased conditions on mine extensions. (adamtooze.com) By November 2021, China’s coal output hit a record monthly high as miners were told to run at maximum capacity; official data show coal production in October–November 2021 at unprecedented levels and coal stocks at power plants rising rapidly as supply tightened constraints eased. (investing.com) For full‑year 2021, China’s coal production reached an all‑time record (about 4.07 billion tonnes), explicitly because the state “encouraged miners to ramp up their fossil fuel output to safeguard the country’s energy supplies.” (sej.org) This is the opposite of letting clean‑energy‑motivated coal limits persist.

  3. Policy design was changed so that those energy‑caps wouldn’t keep biting growth. Subsequent policy documents reworked the dual‑control system: a previous national cap on total energy consumption was scrapped, annual energy‑intensity targets were relaxed in favor of a more flexible five‑year goal, and no hard caps were placed on coal consumption or coal‑power capacity—explicitly to give more room to support economic growth and energy security while still pursuing long‑term decarbonization. (asiasociety.org) That institutional change is consistent with Sacks’s view that Beijing “woke up” and would not keep restrictive clean‑energy constraints that risked throttling industry.

  4. After 2021, China doubled down on coal for energy security instead of maintaining tight coal limits. In 2022–23, China approved roughly 218 GW of new coal‑fired power capacity and started construction on large amounts of new coal plants, making up the overwhelming majority of global coal‑power construction. (bworldonline.com) In 2024 alone, construction began on about 94.5 GW of new coal plants, the highest in nearly a decade. (reuters.com) Parallel analyses note that coal remains central to China’s energy security strategy and that coal‑fired capacity and coal‑mine development have continued to expand. (chinapower.csis.org) This sustained expansion further confirms that the late‑2021 coal restrictions were not allowed to persist as a binding clean‑energy constraint.

  5. There was no multi‑year, climate‑policy‑driven shutdown of large parts of China’s industrial economy. The 2021 power rationing and factory curbs lasted weeks to a few months and were largely resolved by the end of 2021 as coal supply and pricing policy were adjusted. (investing.com) Later disruptions to power supply (e.g., during the 2022 Yangtze drought) were handled by leaning more on coal as the "bedrock of energy security," not by maintaining coal‑usage caps that suppressed industry. (global.chinadaily.com.cn) Over 2022–2024, China’s industrial output and exports continued at large scale despite other headwinds (COVID policy, real‑estate downturn, external demand), and the main energy‑policy trend was ensuring reliability—often by increasing coal capacity—not intentionally shutting down industry for clean‑energy reasons.

Putting this together: the specific late‑2021 clean‑energy/dual‑control‑linked coal constraints were indeed rolled back quickly, and China chose to prioritize energy security and industrial continuity over keeping those limits in place. The feared scenario—multi‑year shutdown of significant portions of the industrial economy because Beijing stuck with those clean‑energy‑motivated coal caps—did not occur. Sacks’s prediction is therefore right.

economy
If supply chain bottlenecks and Covid‑related regulatory constraints are not substantially resolved, the US could experience a 1970s‑style stagflationary recession in 2022 (high inflation combined with stagnant or contracting real growth).
unless it gets fixed, it could absolutely cause a 1970s style stagflation type recession next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2022 shows that the U.S. did not experience a 1970s‑style stagflationary recession:

  • Inflation: Consumer inflation was very high in 2022, averaging about 8.0% for the year, the highest since the early 1980s. (theworlddata.com) This matches the “high inflation” part of the prediction.
  • Real growth: However, real GDP grew by about 2.1% in 2022, rather than showing stagnant or contracting output for the year. (bea.gov) While real GDP fell in Q1 2022 and was near‑flat in Q2, growth rebounded in the second half, leaving the year as a whole in expansion, not recession. (sidedumpindustries.com)
  • Unemployment: The unemployment rate returned to its pre‑pandemic low levels in 2022, averaging a little over 3% by quarter—very far from the elevated unemployment that characterized 1970s stagflation. (bls.gov)
  • Recession status: The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), which is the standard arbiter of U.S. business cycles, has not dated any new recession after the brief COVID recession ending in April 2020; subsequent years, including 2022, are treated as part of an ongoing expansion. (nber.org)

Because 2022 featured high inflation but continued real growth, low unemployment, and no officially recognized recession, the “1970s‑style stagflation type recession” that Sacks warned about did not occur. Therefore, the prediction is best judged as wrong.

economy
Given the 5%+ inflation rate reported in late 2021 and the emerging supply chain crisis, the US is on a trajectory that could produce a renewed stagflation episode (high inflation with weak growth) in the near term (within the next few years).
We're at something like a 5.1% inflation rate... This is a recipe for stagflation. 2.0View on YouTube
Explanation

Most standard definitions of stagflation require three things at the same time: high inflation, stagnant/negative real growth, and high unemployment.(britannica.com)

From 2022 through 2025, the U.S. clearly had high inflation for a time, but growth and the labor market never fit a stagflation profile:

  • Real GDP growth was positive and reasonably solid after the pandemic rebound: about 2.5% in 2022, 2.9% in 2023, and 2.8% in 2024; 2.0% in 2025.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Inflation peaked around 9.1% in June 2022 but then fell steadily; by late 2024 it was around 3%, and mid‑2025 readings were in the 2–3% range, much closer to the Fed’s target than to “stagflation” territory.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Unemployment stayed low by historical standards, around 3.5–3.7% in 2022–2023, rising only to roughly 4–4.4% in 2024–2025, still far below the high joblessness characteristic of past stagflation episodes.(en.wikipedia.org)

There was a brief two‑quarter GDP contraction in early 2022 while inflation was high, which led to talk of a “technical recession,” but even then job growth was strong and unemployment remained very low—conditions Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen and others explicitly contrasted with a typical recession or stagflation scenario.(wfae.org) Many analysts at the time emphasized that the U.S. had “two of the three ingredients for stagflation” (high inflation and weak growth) but not high unemployment, and therefore did not meet stagflation criteria.(investor.vanguard.com)

By 2024–2025, major central‑bank and market commentary was still treating stagflation mainly as a risk or a potential future scenario, not as something that had already occurred. The Cleveland Fed, for example, notes that the last major U.S. stagflation episode remains the mid‑1970s, not the 2020s.(clevelandfed.org)

Given the prediction’s time frame (“within the next few years” from late 2021) and the data through late 2025, the U.S. has not actually experienced a renewed stagflation episode. High inflation did materialize, but it was accompanied by continued real growth and relatively low unemployment. On that basis, Sacks’s forecast that the U.S. was on a trajectory to produce stagflation in the near term is best judged wrong.

Sacks @ 00:04:48Inconclusive
markets
Solana, then the #8 cryptocurrency by market cap, will rise to approximately the #3 position in overall cryptocurrency market capitalization at some future point, even if it does not overtake Ethereum.
there's a lot of people, I'd say smart money in Silicon Valley who are betting on a flippening where Solana could ultimately overtake Ethereum as the preferred platform. But even if it doesn't overtake Ethereum, you know it's the number eight cryptocurrency right now. You know, it could go. There's a lot of people betting it'll go to number three or you know, what have you.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available historical data show that Solana has not yet reached #3 by total cryptocurrency market capitalization, but the prediction did not specify any time limit, so it still could occur in the future.

Key points:

  • Around the time of the podcast (late 2021), Solana climbed from the #8 region up to #4. For example, on Nov. 7, 2021, Solana surpassed Cardano and Tether to become the fourth‑largest cryptocurrency by market cap, behind only Bitcoin, Ethereum, and Binance Coin. (cointelegraph.com)

  • In later bull runs, multiple independent reports again describe Solana flipping BNB and/or XRP to become #4, not #3. Cointelegraph (Feb. 13, 2024) notes Solana overtaking BNB to become the fourth‑largest cryptocurrency by market cap. (cointelegraph.com) KuCoin and several other outlets report the same "4th largest" milestone in mid and late 2024 as SOL’s market cap surged. (kucoin.com) Coin Republic likewise describes Solana dethroning BNB to become the fourth‑largest crypto in November 2024. (thecoinrepublic.com)

  • As of late 2025, aggregate rankings of top cryptocurrencies by market cap still place Solana below third place. A late‑October 2025 snapshot (based on CoinMarketCap data) lists Bitcoin #1, Ethereum #2, Tether #3, BNB #4, XRP #5, and Solana #6. (es.wikipedia.org) Current live data from CoinMarketCap and similar trackers around November 2025 show SOL typically in the #6–#7 range, not near #3. (coinmarketcap.com)

  • Separately, institutional analyses (e.g., Franklin Templeton’s note) explicitly talk about Solana’s potential to become the third‑largest crypto asset, indicating that this is still viewed as a forward‑looking scenario rather than something that has already happened. (crypto.news)

Because:

  1. The prediction’s condition (Solana reaching approximately #3 overall) has not occurred so far, and
  2. The prediction is open‑ended with no deadline ("at some future point"),

we cannot say it is definitively right or wrong as of November 30, 2025. It remains unfulfilled but still possible, so the fairest assessment is "inconclusive (too early)" rather than "wrong."

governmentmarkets
Following the Haugen whistleblower episode (as of October 2021), U.S. and/or other government agencies will initiate formal actions against Facebook that will result in financial settlements, with Facebook paying fines in order to resolve these actions.
This whole thing is just getting started. There are going to be they're going to be government actions, and there will be settlements from those government actions. And the and Facebook, as you well know, will pay any kind of fine to put this behind them.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that after the Frances Haugen whistleblower episode in October 2021, government authorities would bring formal actions against Facebook/Meta and that these would lead to settlements in which Facebook paid fines.

Evidence since then supports this:

  • Shortly after Haugen’s disclosures, Facebook told investors it was already facing “government investigations” related to a former employee’s allegations and release of internal company documents about its algorithms, advertising, and content enforcement, confirming the regulatory machinery had been set in motion. (ktvz.com)

  • In June 2022, the U.S. Department of Justice filed a lawsuit and simultaneously entered into a court‑approved settlement with Meta over discriminatory housing ads, under the Fair Housing Act. As part of the final judgment in United States v. Meta Platforms, Meta agreed to change its ad‑delivery algorithms and pay a civil penalty of $115,054, the statutory maximum—a clear example of a government enforcement action ending in a settlement and fine. (justice.gov)

  • In 2024, Texas sued Meta over unlawful capture and use of Texans’ biometric data (facial recognition on Facebook photos) and, in July 2024, reached a $1.4 billion settlement, the largest privacy settlement ever obtained by a single U.S. state. This is a classic government action (state AG enforcement) resolved by a monetary settlement paid by Meta. (texasattorneygeneral.gov)

  • European regulators have likewise brought multiple post‑2021 actions resulting in large fines against Meta: in May 2023 the Irish Data Protection Commission, following a binding European Data Protection Board decision, imposed a €1.2 billion GDPR fine on Meta Ireland for unlawful EU‑US data transfers; in December 2024 the same regulator imposed another €251 million fine over the 2018 Facebook data breach. These are formal regulatory actions culminating in financial penalties. (edpb.europa.eu)

  • In April 2025, the European Commission fined Meta €200 million under the Digital Markets Act for its “consent or pay” ad‑funding model—again a government enforcement action with a substantial fine. (pcgamer.com)

Meta’s own summarized history of legal actions now lists multiple post‑2021 government cases and resulting fines or settlements, including the DOJ housing‑ads settlement, major GDPR fines, and the Texas biometric settlement. (en.wikipedia.org)

These developments match Sacks’ forecast in all material respects: there were indeed new and escalated government actions after the Haugen episode, several of which ended in formal settlements or regulatory decisions forcing Meta/Facebook to pay monetary penalties to resolve them. Accordingly, the prediction is best classified as right.

economyventure
From 2021 onward, U.S. taxes and government spending will increase substantially, peacetime deficits and national debt will remain at or move to new record-high levels, and in hindsight a future assessment will view 2021’s high rate of unicorn creation as a ‘golden era’ relative to a worse economic/innovation environment that follows.
what I'm worried about is taxes are going up big time no matter what happens in Washington. Spending is going up big time. We now have peacetime deficits that are the biggest that they've ever been. The the the national debt, the peacetime national debt is the highest it's ever been...What I'm afraid of is we're going to look back at this year, the 1000 unicorns being minted and say, that really was the golden era. And everything happened after that. We really screwed up.View on YouTube
Explanation

Taxes and spending. After FY2021, federal tax collections and outlays did in fact move sharply higher and stay elevated. Federal tax revenue jumped to $4.9T in FY2022—about 19.6% of GDP, one of the highest shares ever recorded and well above the ~17% post‑war average—and remained historically high thereafter. (taxfoundation.org) Federal outlays stayed far above their historical norm: spending was 25.1% of GDP in 2022 and 23.4% in 2024 versus a 50‑year average near 21%, with nominal outlays rising from $6.27T (2022) to $6.75T (2024) and over $7T by 2025. (crfb.org)

Deficits and debt. Post‑COVID deficits never returned to traditional peacetime levels. The deficit was 5.5% of GDP in 2022, 6.3% in 2023, 6.4% in 2024, and about 5.9% in 2025—roughly double the 50‑year average of ~3.6%, and among the largest peacetime deficits on record. (en.wikipedia.org) Debt held by the public reached about 97–98% of GDP by 2023–24, while total gross federal debt climbed to roughly 123% of GDP in 2025—explicitly described as the highest in U.S. history and the first time debt has been sustained around 100% of GDP in peacetime. (fiscal.treasury.gov) These outcomes align with his concern about record‑level peacetime deficits and national debt persisting or worsening.

Unicorn “golden era.” 2021 is broadly documented as an extraordinary, peak year for unicorn formation. CB Insights and related analyses show that around 500–600 new unicorns were created in 2021, more than in the previous decade combined, roughly doubling the global herd to over 1,000 and leading many commentators to call 2021 “the year of the unicorn.” (netguru.com) After that, conditions deteriorated: North America and APAC “suffered a setback” in 2022, with new unicorn creation dropping sharply relative to 2021, and from 2023 through mid‑2025 only about 100‑plus new unicorns per year were being added—similar to pre‑boom years rather than 2021’s surge. (globaldata.com) Venture funding and exits also remained far below 2021 levels: by 2024 global VC investment was still about 55% under its 2021 peak, and annual exit value (~$149B in 2024) was a fraction of 2021’s ~$842B. (reuters.com) Analysts describe a large backlog of unicorns stuck in private markets, many valued at bubble‑era 2020–21 prices, reinforcing the idea that 2021 was a unique high‑water mark. (news.crunchbase.com)

Overall assessment. While most of the post‑2021 tax burden increase came from bracket creep, inflation, and revenue strength rather than explicit new tax-rate hikes, the facts match the spirit of Sacks’s forecast: (1) federal taxes collected and government spending both rose to and stayed at unusually high levels; (2) peacetime deficits and national debt remained near or moved toward record highs; and (3) 2021’s unicorn boom is now widely viewed as an exceptional peak followed by a materially tougher funding and exit environment, despite a later AI‑driven niche boom. On balance, the prediction has substantially come true.

politics
If the Republican Party continues to embrace the 'stolen election' myth through the 2022 election cycle, that issue will significantly harm Republican electoral performance in the 2022 U.S. midterm elections (i.e., it will be a major contributing factor to Republican losses or underperformance).
this election, the stolen election myth, has become an albatross for Republicans. They have to get off that. Um, I think it's ridiculous that's going to bring him down in 2022.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that if Republicans continued to embrace the 2020 "stolen election" myth through the 2022 cycle, it would be an albatross that would "bring them down" in the 2022 midterms (i.e., cause broad Republican losses or clear underperformance).

What actually happened in November 2022:

  • Republicans did win the U.S. House (albeit narrowly), gaining control from Democrats.
  • Democrats held the U.S. Senate and even slightly expanded their majority (51–49 with the Georgia runoff), but this is better characterized as a mixed or split result rather than a clear, across-the-board GOP collapse.
  • Historically, the president’s party typically loses more House seats in a first midterm than Democrats did under Biden; many analysts described 2022 as a Republican underperformance relative to expectations, but not as Republicans being broadly “brought down” or suffering a decisive electoral wipeout.
  • Post‑election analysis (e.g., in major outlets like the New York Times, Washington Post, and various election analysts) did argue that election‑denialism and Trump‑aligned, 2020‑obsessed candidates probably hurt Republicans in a number of key races, especially statewide contests and in swing districts, but the aggregate outcome still left the GOP with control of the House. That is inconsistent with the stronger claim that the “stolen election” myth would bring them down in 2022 overall.

So while election denial likely contributed to some important Republican underperformance in specific races, the broad empirical outcome (winning the House and only narrowly failing in the Senate) does not match the stronger forecast that this issue would bring Republicans down in the 2022 midterms. On balance, that makes the prediction wrong rather than right or ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
For roughly the next couple of decades after 2021, progressive Democratic candidates in U.S. cities and states they control will routinely frame their campaigns around opposition to Donald Trump and 'Trumpism,' branding their opponents as Trump-like or Trumpist regardless of the opponent's actual alignment, rather than primarily running on local governance issues (crime, homelessness, school quality).
what you've already seen in the days since the recall is that Gavin Newsom has now laid out the strategy for all progressives in like even from San Francisco to anywhere in the country of how they're going to run and what they're going to do is this that no matter how bad things get in terms of crime, in terms of homelessness, in terms of quality of schools in cities and states that they have complete control over. They're always going to campaign against Trump and Trumpism, and they're going to demonize and otherize whoever the candidate is on the other side as a Trumpist, whether they are or not, that's going to be the playbook from now on.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2021 shows some support for Sacks’s idea that Democrats in deep‑blue jurisdictions use Trump/MAGA branding against opponents, but it does not support his stronger claim that this would become the enduring playbook, displacing local‑governance issues.

Where the prediction fits reality (partially)

  • In the 2021 California recall, Gavin Newsom explicitly framed the race as a fight against “Republicans and Trump supporters” and “Trumpism,” branding the recall as the “Republican recall” and warning that “Trumpism is still on the ballot in California.” (foxnews.com)
  • In New York’s 2022 governor race—an overwhelmingly Democratic state—Kathy Hochul repeatedly tied Lee Zeldin to Trump and the “MAGA agenda,” calling his events a “MAGA Republican bus tour,” even as crime and public safety were the top voter concerns. (wamc.org)
  • In the 2022 Los Angeles mayor’s race, Karen Bass’s campaign and an allied group ran ads linking Rick Caruso to Trump, emphasizing his long Republican history and portraying him as Trump‑aligned in a heavily Democratic city. (foxnews.com)
  • In Chicago’s 2023 mayoral runoff, Brandon Johnson repeatedly portrayed Paul Vallas as effectively a Republican backed by donors who also supported Donald Trump and by “right‑wing extremists,” and his campaign was accused (by local GOP) of pushing fake “MAGA” Vallas signs. (chicago.suntimes.com)

These examples show that anti‑Trump / anti‑MAGA framing is indeed a recurring tactic used by progressive or mainstream Democratic candidates in blue jurisdictions, sometimes against opponents whose own records are more mixed or moderate than “Trumpist” branding suggests. That aligns with part of Sacks’s forecast.

Where the prediction fails

  • In the same LA mayor’s race, mainstream coverage and the candidates’ debate focused overwhelmingly on local concerns—homelessness, crime, corruption, and housing—rather than treating Trump as the central issue. Bass’s closing message emphasized solving homelessness, reducing crime, and making housing affordable, not Trump. (latimes.com) This undercuts the claim that campaigns in such cities would primarily be about Trumpism rather than local governance.
  • Chicago’s 2023 mayoral campaign was dominated by crime, schools, taxes, and policing. Johnson’s attacks on Vallas’s Republican/Trump ties were one line of attack layered onto a fundamentally local, crime‑and‑schools‑centered race, not a replacement for those issues. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • In San Francisco, some of the emblematic contests in this period—the 2022 school‑board recall, the 2022 recall of progressive DA Chesa Boudin, and the 2025 recall of Supervisor Joel Engardio—have been framed primarily around school reopening, competence, crime, homelessness, and quality‑of‑life concerns. Trump is largely absent from the pro‑recall messaging; instead, voters are said to be reacting to perceived local mismanagement and safety problems. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Even where Trump/MAGA rhetoric appears (e.g., Newsom’s recall, Hochul vs. Zeldin), it operates alongside, not instead of, issues like COVID policy, abortion rights, guns, crime, and cost of living. The campaigns are not simply “always campaigning against Trump” while ignoring local or policy specifics.

Assessment

  • Sacks predicted that from that point forward, progressive Democrats in jurisdictions they control would always campaign against Trump/Trumpism and would rely on branding any opponent as a Trumpist “whether they are or not,” effectively making that “the playbook from now on” instead of contesting local governance.
  • The record through late 2025 shows a more mixed reality: anti‑Trump/MAGA branding is an important and recurrent tool, but major state and city races in blue areas still hinge largely on, and are publicly framed around, local performance—crime, homelessness, schools, housing, and corruption.
  • Because we already see numerous high‑salience elections where local‑governance themes dominate and Trump plays a minor or secondary role, the strong version of his forecast (“they’re always going to campaign against Trump and Trumpism” rather than on local issues) has not materialized.

Given that, the fairest scoring is that the prediction, as stated, is wrong: it overstates the degree to which anti‑Trumpism has displaced local governance as the primary campaign frame in progressive‑run cities and states, even though elements of the behavior he described do occur regularly.

health
Miami will remain open for large in-person events (i.e., not subject to COVID-related shutdowns that would prevent a conference) during the period when the All-In hosts might schedule their summit in 2022.
Wherever people aren't going to go to Rome, you know, Miami. The good thing about Miami is we know it'll be open no matter what, right?View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows Miami stayed open for large in‑person events throughout 2022, with no COVID-related shutdowns that would have prevented a conference.

  1. Florida policy context. On May 3, 2021, Governor Ron DeSantis signed Executive Orders 21‑101 and 21‑102, suspending and invalidating all remaining local COVID‑19 emergency orders and restrictions, explicitly ending local mandates and lockdown-type measures statewide.(cbsnews.com) Subsequent summaries of his governorship note that from 2021 onward Florida restricted local governments’ ability to impose COVID‑19 mitigations, voided future local restrictions, and positioned the state as staying open (no new lockdowns, no vaccine‑passport requirements, etc.).(en.wikipedia.org) State-level reopening guidance for Florida places all counties in Phase 3, allowing businesses and entertainment venues to operate without capacity limits.(radio.wcmu.org) There is no record of Florida or Miami re‑imposing shutdowns on large events in 2022.

  2. Large events actually held in Miami in 2022. The All‑In Summit itself was held in Miami Beach at the New World Symphony from May 15–17, 2022, with roughly 700 attendees, confirming that the hosts were able to schedule and execute their conference in person.(en.wikipedia.org) Other major events also proceeded: Ultra Music Festival returned to Miami’s Bayfront Park on March 25–27, 2022, drawing about 165,000 attendees after being canceled in 2020 and 2021 due to COVID.(en.wikipedia.org) NBA games in Miami during the 2021–22 season were held with fans in attendance; at most, masks were required until late February 2022 but games were not shut down.(en.wikipedia.org) These examples indicate Miami was hosting large in‑person gatherings without government closures.

  3. Match to the normalized prediction. The normalized claim is that Miami would remain open for large in‑person events in 2022, without COVID‑related shutdowns that would prevent a conference. In reality, Florida policy removed local authority to re‑impose such shutdowns, and Miami in 2022 hosted multiple large events—including the All‑In Summit itself—without being blocked by COVID restrictions. While some venues or events may have had voluntary mask rules or other minor protocols, these did not constitute shutdowns preventing conferences. Therefore, the prediction is best scored as right.

David Sacks assesses roughly greater-than-even odds (slightly over 50%) that Elizabeth Holmes will be convicted at her Theranos criminal trial.
I think it's probably like a 50 over 50View on YouTube
Explanation

Elizabeth Holmes’s federal criminal trial concluded on January 3, 2022, with the jury finding her guilty on four counts (three counts of wire fraud and one count of conspiracy to commit wire fraud) and not guilty on four counts, with no verdict on the remaining three counts, which were later dismissed. She was subsequently sentenced to prison. These outcomes are documented in major news coverage and court summaries.

Sacks’s prediction was that there were greater-than-even (>50%) odds that she would be convicted at her Theranos criminal trial, not that she would be convicted on every single charge. Since the actual outcome included multiple felony convictions, his probabilistic forecast that she would be convicted at all was borne out by events.

Therefore, the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
The Texas SB8 abortion law will be overturned in court (i.e., will not remain in force indefinitely).
So they're pretty clear. This is going to get overturned.View on YouTube
Explanation

Texas Senate Bill 8 (the Texas Heartbeat Act) took effect on September 1, 2021 and bans abortions after detection of embryonic or fetal cardiac activity (around six weeks), enforced exclusively through private civil lawsuits rather than government officials. As of 2025 its status is still listed as “in force.” (en.wikipedia.org)

Litigation never produced the kind of court ruling Sacks predicted. The U.S. Supreme Court declined to block the law, allowing only a narrow challenge to proceed while keeping SB8 in effect. (congress.gov) In March 2022, the Texas Supreme Court held that no state officials are authorized to enforce SB8, meaning providers had no suitable government defendant to sue; following that, the Fifth Circuit ordered dismissal of challenges to SB8’s private-enforcement mechanism. The net effect was to leave the law intact and operational rather than overturn it. (texasattorneygeneral.gov)

After Dobbs (June 2022), Texas’s near‑total abortion ban is enforced through both Chapter 170A (the “trigger” law) and SB8’s civil‑enforcement scheme; contemporary reporting in 2025 still describes the Heartbeat Act as a core part of Texas’s abortion restrictions, not as a law that has been struck down. (houstonchronicle.com) There is no court decision overturning SB8 or removing it from force.

Because SB8 has not been overturned in court and remains in force more than four years after the prediction, the claim that “this is going to get overturned” is best scored as wrong.

politicsgovernment
California Governor Gavin Newsom will comfortably defeat the September 2021 recall election effort to remove him from office.
Gavin Newsom. The polling for him is now going through the roof, because all he has to do for the next ten days is talk about right to choose in this Texas bill. And he's going to cruise towards defeating the recallView on YouTube
Explanation

California held its gubernatorial recall election on September 14, 2021. Official results from the California Secretary of State and major news outlets show that the “No” vote on recalling Governor Gavin Newsom won by a large margin, approximately 61.9% “No” to 38.1% “Yes”, a spread of nearly 24 percentage points, which is widely characterized as a decisive or comfortable victory.

  • The California Secretary of State’s certified results show about 7.94 million “No” votes vs. 4.84 million “Yes” votes on the recall question, confirming Newsom was not removed from office.
  • Major coverage at the time (e.g., AP, NYT, LA Times) consistently described this as a solid/comfortable win, not a narrow escape.

Given that Sacks predicted Newsom would “cruise towards defeating the recall,” and Newsom in fact defeated the recall by a large, clear margin, the prediction is right.

Key sources (paraphrased):

  • California Secretary of State – certified 2021 gubernatorial recall election results (showing ~61.9% No vs. 38.1% Yes on the recall question).
  • Contemporary news summaries from major outlets confirming Newsom’s wide margin of victory and characterizing it as a decisive win.
politicsgovernment
In a future case, the Texas SB8 abortion law will be ruled unconstitutional, primarily on grounds related to its standing/enforcement mechanism rather than on the underlying abortion right.
I believe they will. I believe that this law will be found unconstitutional. Not necessarily because of abortion, but just because they're changing the legal definition of standing in a way that flies against everything we know about how the court system works.View on YouTube
Explanation

There has been at least one subsequent case in which Texas SB8 was held unconstitutional on grounds focused on its novel standing/enforcement mechanism rather than the underlying abortion right, which matches the prediction’s core claim.

Key state‑court ruling (matches the prediction most closely)

  • In Van Stean v. Texas Right to Life (Travis County, 98th Dist. Ct., Dec. 9, 2021), Texas state trial Judge David Peeples issued a declaratory judgment holding SB8’s enforcement mechanism unconstitutional. He found that SB8:
    • authorizes lawsuits by parties who have suffered no injury (a standing problem),
    • unconstitutionally delegates enforcement power to private parties, and
    • imposes a punitive $10,000 civil penalty without due process, under the Fourteenth Amendment. The ruling explicitly targeted SB8’s private “bounty” enforcement scheme and did not invalidate the abortion restriction on substantive abortion-rights grounds.(reason.com) Contemporary coverage described this as a judge ruling the Texas abortion law unconstitutional while noting that the decision did not stop the law’s practical operation statewide.(courthousenews.com)

Supporting federal ruling (also emphasizes the enforcement scheme)

  • In United States v. Texas, federal District Judge Robert Pitman (W.D. Tex., Oct. 6, 2021) issued a 113‑page order blocking enforcement of SB8, concluding that the law was facially unconstitutional and describing its private-enforcement design as a contrived attempt to evade judicial review and established abortion precedents.(en.wikipedia.org) The Fifth Circuit quickly stayed his injunction, and the Supreme Court later dismissed the case as improvidently granted, so this did not produce a lasting nationwide invalidation, but it is still a judicial ruling that SB8 was unconstitutional.

Why this is scored as “right,” with caveats

  • The prediction (normalized) was: “In a future case, the Texas SB8 abortion law will be ruled unconstitutional, primarily on grounds related to its standing/enforcement mechanism rather than on the underlying abortion right.” That has occurred: Judge Peeples’ decision squarely held SB8’s enforcement mechanism unconstitutional on standing/delegation/due‑process theories and explicitly framed the dispute as about civil procedure and enforcement, not about the substantive right to abortion.(reason.com)
  • However, these rulings have had limited practical and precedential effect. SB8 remained formally “in force” and functioned as intended until Texas’s broader post‑Dobbs criminal abortion bans took over, and Texas and other states have continued to copy the private-enforcement model in new anti‑abortion measures.(en.wikipedia.org) No high appellate court (state or federal) has yet issued a definitive, generally controlling decision striking down SB8’s enforcement mechanism across the board.

So, while the ultimate, system‑wide invalidation Sacks likely envisioned has not (yet) happened, the literal prediction that a future case would hold SB8 unconstitutional, on standing/enforcement‑mechanism grounds rather than on abortion rights themselves, has in fact come true.

techgovernment
Apple and Google’s mobile operating systems will face antitrust and regulatory scrutiny analogous to what Microsoft Windows faced, including remedies targeting their platform gatekeeping behavior.
So I just think that, you know, this is Microsoft and Windows all over again. Except there's two of them. Right. There's iOS and Android.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2021 shows both Apple’s iOS and Google’s Android have faced sustained, high‑level antitrust and regulatory scrutiny specifically focused on their platform gatekeeping role, in ways clearly analogous to the Microsoft Windows antitrust era.

Key points:

  1. Major U.S. antitrust cases targeting mobile platforms

    • The U.S. Department of Justice and state AGs filed an antitrust suit against Google’s Android app store (Google Play) in 2021, explicitly alleging monopolistic control over Android app distribution and in‑app billing—i.e., gatekeeping over the mobile software ecosystem, similar in structure to the Microsoft Windows/Internet Explorer case.
    • In March 2024, the U.S. DOJ and multiple states sued Apple for monopolizing smartphone markets through iOS restrictions, including limitations on app distribution, browser engines, and payment systems; the complaint repeatedly frames Apple as a platform gatekeeper and seeks remedies to open up iOS to more competition.
  2. EU antitrust findings and structural remedies

    • The European Commission had already fined Google in prior years over Android’s tying and default‑setting practices (e.g., search and browser defaults on Android), explicitly comparing the case structure to historical Microsoft tying cases; enforcement and appeals continued into the mid‑2020s, reinforcing scrutiny on Android’s gatekeeping role.
    • The EU Digital Markets Act (DMA), enforced from 2023–2024 onward, designates both Apple and Google as “gatekeepers” and imposes specific obligations: allowing alternative app stores and sideloading on iOS in the EU, loosening default app and browser restrictions, and limiting self‑preferencing in app stores. These are remedial measures directly aimed at their gatekeeper control over mobile ecosystems, strongly echoing the remedies and behavioral constraints imposed on Microsoft Windows.
  3. Clear focus on platform gatekeeping behavior

    • Across U.S. and EU actions, the theories of harm and remedies center on the same kind of conduct that defined the Microsoft Windows cases: controlling distribution channels (app stores), defaults and preinstallation, technical and contractual barriers to rivals (e.g., browser engines, payment systems), and leveraging OS dominance into adjacent markets.

Given this record—multiple high‑profile antitrust suits and regulatory regimes explicitly labeling Apple and Google as mobile "gatekeepers" and imposing or seeking remedies to open up their platforms—the prediction that iOS and Android would face Microsoft‑style antitrust scrutiny and gatekeeper‑focused remedies is substantially borne out.

techgovernment
Apple will eventually be forced (by regulation or market pressure) to allow sideloading of apps or alternative app stores on iOS devices.
So I think that is coming for Apple.View on YouTube
Explanation

Apple has in fact been forced by regulation to allow alternative app stores on iOS devices (at least in the EU), which matches the substance of Sacks’s prediction.

In January 2024, Apple announced changes to iOS and the App Store in the European Union to comply with the EU’s Digital Markets Act (DMA). These changes, delivered in iOS 17.4 starting March 2024, explicitly include new options for distributing iOS apps from alternative app marketplaces and APIs for creating such marketplaces.(macrumors.com) MacRumors’ coverage confirms that iPhone and iPad users in the EU can download and install apps outside the App Store through alternative app marketplaces.(macrumors.com)

Apple’s own and independent reporting emphasize that these options are limited to the EU and require both an EU-region Apple ID and physical presence in the EU, with access restricted or removed when users travel outside the bloc.(macrumors.com) Nonetheless, this still means that iOS devices now support alternative app stores under regulatory pressure, which is exactly the mechanism (“forced by regulation”) Sacks described. Subsequent reporting on the Epic Games Store operating as an iOS third‑party marketplace under the DMA regime further demonstrates that alternative app stores are now a practical reality on iOS in the EU.(theverge.com)

While the change is geographically constrained and tightly controlled by Apple, the core claim—that Apple would eventually be forced to allow sideloading or alternative app stores on iOS devices due to regulation or market pressure—has come true. Therefore the prediction is right.

techventure
The Callin app will publicly launch on 2021-09-02.
Yeah. So anyway, the whole world can listen to us drunk on call in in, uh, we're launching on September 2nd, so.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple independent sources state that Callin’s public launch occurred on September 2, 2021. David Sacks’ own launch blog post on Medium, dated September 2, 2021, explicitly says “Today is the public launch of Callin,” confirming that this was the day the app became publicly available on the Apple App Store. (medium.com) TechCrunch’s coverage likewise reports that Callin “launches” on September 2, 2021, alongside its $12M Series A announcement. (techcrunch.com) Forbes also runs a feature on the same date describing Sacks as “launching the ‘social podcasting’ platform Callin on the Apple App Store.” (forbes.com) Additional funding and news databases (Crunchbase, VC News Daily) list the product launch and funding announcement on September 2, 2021. (crunchbase.com) Together, these sources confirm that the Callin app’s public launch did indeed occur on 2021-09-02, matching the prediction.

politicseconomy
Within the coming years after the U.S. withdrawal from Afghanistan (starting in 2021), China will reach agreements with the Taliban government to build major transport infrastructure (e.g., a highway) in Afghanistan aimed at extracting and exporting the country's rare earth and other mineral resources to support China's economy.
China is going to Afghanistan right now and cutting deals with the Taliban to build a highway so they can get to the rare earth minerals which Afghanistan is rich in, and they're going to use the superhighway. They're going to build to get that out and feed their economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that, in the years after the 2021 U.S. withdrawal, China would cut deals with the Taliban to build a highway (major transport infrastructure) inside Afghanistan specifically to reach, extract, and export Afghan rare earth and other minerals to feed China’s economy.

What has happened so far:

  1. China–Taliban resource deals did materialize, but mainly as mining/oil contracts, not transport infrastructure. In January 2023, the Chinese company CAPEIC (a CNPC subsidiary) signed a long-term, hundreds‑of‑millions‑dollar oil extraction deal in the Amu Darya basin with the Taliban government, and Chinese firms have been negotiating over the Mes Aynak copper mine and other minerals.(en.wikipedia.org) A 2025 analysis notes that Chinese firms now control a large share of active extraction projects under Taliban “security‑for‑minerals” arrangements, especially for rare earths and lithium—but this still concerns mining operations, not new roads or railways.(rareearthexchanges.com)

  2. Afghanistan remains only marginally integrated into China’s Belt and Road transport network. A survey of Afghanistan–China relations notes that, as of 2023, Afghanistan’s security situation prevented it from becoming a major part of the BRI.(en.wikipedia.org) While there are long‑standing proposed rail corridors (e.g., Five Nations Railway Corridor, Trans‑Afghan Railway), they have moved slowly for years and are not yet built, let alone operating to evacuate Afghan rare earths.

  3. Post‑2021, China and the Taliban have agreed only at a high level to extend existing corridors, not to build the kind of dedicated mineral‑export “superhighway” Sacks described. In May 2025, China, Pakistan, and the Taliban government announced that the China–Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) would be extended into Afghanistan and that CPEC would be linked to the proposed Trans‑Afghan Railway.(en.didpress.com) These are framework political agreements about future connectivity; there is no evidence of concrete, financed Chinese road or rail projects inside Afghanistan that are being built or contracted specifically to move Afghan rare earth/mineral output to China.

  4. Key reporting indicates China is avoiding large infrastructure builds in Afghanistan, despite mining interest. A 2025 Washington Post report on the Taliban’s attempted highway through the Wakhan Corridor—envisioned as a route to China—notes that the Taliban are struggling to pave a short stretch with their own limited funds and explicitly states that, despite Taliban claims, China has “so far stayed away from undertaking large infrastructure projects” in Afghanistan.(washingtonpost.com) More generally, prior analyses of China’s role in Afghanistan stress that, beyond a few modest projects, Beijing has refrained from new large‑scale infrastructure there, even after signing a BRI MoU, due to security and political risks.(ecfr.eu)

Taken together, the core of Sacks’s prediction—that China would, in the near term, strike deals with the Taliban to build a major new highway/transport corridor inside Afghanistan whose primary purpose is to unlock and export Afghan rare earth and mineral wealth to China—has not occurred as of late 2025. China has signed notable mining and oil contracts and has talked about future corridor extensions, but it has not committed to or begun constructing the kind of dedicated, large‑scale Afghan transport infrastructure he described. Therefore, the prediction is best assessed as wrong.

health
SARS‑CoV‑2 (COVID‑19) will become endemic and persist indefinitely in the human population, similar to the common cold or seasonal flu, rather than being eradicated.
And the problem is COVID's going to be around forever. It's like the cold or the flu.View on YouTube
Explanation

Current scientific and public‑health consensus is that SARS‑CoV‑2 has become an endemic virus that continues to circulate globally, much like seasonal influenza and the common cold, and will persist for the foreseeable future rather than being eradicated.

  • The WHO and many national health agencies now describe COVID‑19 as being in an endemic phase in most regions, meaning the virus continues to circulate with predictable or recurring patterns instead of being eliminated.
  • No credible body expects eradication; instead, long‑term management strategies (vaccination updates, treatment protocols, and surveillance) are framed around ongoing, indefinite circulation.

Given that by late 2025 COVID‑19 is clearly still present worldwide and treated as a permanent part of the infectious‑disease landscape, the prediction that “COVID's going to be around forever, like the cold or the flu” has been borne out in practice.

techeconomy
The banking and finance industry will undergo a consolidation similar to Hollywood media studios, with legacy financial institutions increasingly acquired or eclipsed by large digital tech/fintech players over the coming years.
It seems like finance is going to go the same way that media did, where you start to see studios in Hollywood all get gobbled up by big tech players, sort of the final convergence of digital and analog. You're clearly going to see that in banking now too.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was that, like Hollywood studios, legacy banks would increasingly be “gobbled up” or eclipsed by large digital tech/fintech players over the ensuing years.

What actually happened 2021–2025:

  1. Bank consolidation was led by banks, not big tech/fintech.

    • In 2023, UBS rescued and acquired Credit Suisse in a government‑brokered deal – a giant bank buying another giant bank, with no tech acquirer involved. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In the 2023 U.S. regional banking crisis, First Republic was seized and sold to JPMorgan, and Silicon Valley Bank’s U.S. business went to First Citizens – again, large/traditional banks absorbing weaker banks. (fdic.gov)
    • Ongoing consolidation (e.g., PNC’s 2025 deal for FirstBank; NatWest acquiring most of Sainsbury’s Bank and a Metro Bank mortgage book) has also been bank‑to‑bank, not big tech buying banks. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. Fintechs did not start gobbling up major legacy banks.

    • A few fintechs bought small community banks mainly to obtain charters – e.g., SoFi’s $22.3M acquisition of Golden Pacific Bancorp and LendingClub’s earlier Radius Bank deal – but these are tiny relative to the global banking system and pre‑date or just coincide with the 2021 prediction. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The fintech sector then hit a “winter”: global fintech funding fell 32% in 2022 vs. 2021 and another 42% in 2023, leaving many fintechs capital‑constrained rather than in a position to acquire large banks. (spglobal.com)
  3. Big tech’s direct banking/credit pushes mostly stalled or retrenched instead of scaling into bank takeovers.

    • Google scrapped its Plex bank‑account plan in late 2021 and explicitly said it would focus on enabling banks rather than becoming a provider itself. (cnbc.com)
    • Meta’s Diem/Novi crypto and wallet initiatives were shut down by 2022 after heavy regulatory resistance. (cointelegraph.com)
    • Apple experimented with deeper finance (Apple Card, Apple Savings, Apple Pay Later) but then:
      • Moved to exit its consumer partnership with Goldman Sachs for Apple Card/Savings. (macrumors.com)
      • Discontinued its in‑house BNPL product Apple Pay Later in 2024, shifting installment loans back to banks and third‑party lenders like Affirm. (cnbc.com)
    • Amazon has expanded into lending in India by acquiring non‑bank lender Axio and gaining a direct‑lending license, but Axio is a modest fintech, not a major bank; this is a niche regional move, not a wave of global bank acquisitions. (reuters.com)
  4. Regulators have actively curbed big tech dominance in finance, not enabled a takeover of banks.

    • Central banks and the BIS have warned that big tech in finance raises serious concerns over market power and data concentration, prompting calls for entity‑based regulation. (bis.org)
    • The EU is moving to exclude large U.S. tech firms like Meta, Apple, Google, and Amazon from its new Financial Data Access (FiDA) regime specifically to prevent them from dominating digital finance. (ft.com)
    • Under the Digital Operational Resilience Act, EU regulators instead classify Amazon Web Services, Google Cloud, Microsoft, etc., as critical third‑party service providers to banks – powerful infrastructure vendors, not bank owners. (reuters.com)
    • In the U.S., the CFPB has moved to supervise major wallet and payment apps (Apple Pay, Google Pay, Venmo) similarly to banks, signaling a push to regulate them rather than let them quietly morph into bank‑like giants. (reuters.com)

Taken together, by late 2025 the financial sector has not “gone the same way media did” in the sense Sacks described. Consolidation has been driven by traditional banks absorbing other banks, while big tech and fintech players have mostly become partners, vendors, or niche lenders, often retreating from the most bank‑like activities under regulatory and economic pressure. There is no broad pattern of legacy banks being “gobbled up” by big tech/fintech analogous to his Hollywood‑studio analogy, so the prediction is best assessed as wrong given the evidence to date.

marketseconomy
In the coming wave of fintech consolidation, major online players such as Square, Stripe, and PayPal will be the primary long‑term winners, while traditional offline legacy banks will largely lose ground.
But who are the big winners in this wave of consolidation going to be? At the end of the day it's going to be square. It's going to be stripe. It might be it's going to be PayPal. It's going to be the big online companies, not the offline legacy banks.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks correctly anticipated a consolidation phase in fintech: global fintech investment fell sharply after 2021 and M&A has increasingly been used to rationalize the sector, with reports in 2024–2025 explicitly describing a consolidation wave and rising fintech M&A deal values, especially in payments and infrastructure. (kpmg.com) However, the distribution of winners has not matched his forecast.

  1. Mixed outcomes for the named online fintechs (Square/Block, Stripe, PayPal)

    • Stripe has indeed emerged as a major winner: after a valuation cut to about $50B in 2023, it rebounded to around $90–106B in 2025, above its 2021 peak, while processing $1.4T in payments in 2024 and operating profitably. (pymnts.com)
    • PayPal and Block (Square), by contrast, have lost a large portion of the equity value they had at the time of the prediction. PayPal’s market cap fell from roughly $220B in 2021 to about $59B in late 2025, and its share price is down about 75% from its 2021 high. (companiesmarketcap.com) Block’s market cap dropped from about $75B at end‑2021 to roughly $40B in 2025, despite joining the S&P 500 and giving optimistic long‑term guidance. (companiesmarketcap.com) These are still important companies, but they have not been clear “primary long‑term winners” relative to the broader financial sector.
  2. Legacy banks have not “largely lost ground” and in many ways are winning

    • Large incumbent banks remain vastly bigger and have grown in value since 2021. JPMorgan’s market cap rose from about $468B in 2021 to around $846B in 2025; Bank of America’s is near $392B in 2025, up from about $359B in 2021. (companiesmarketcap.com) U.S. banks collectively reported a 13.5% profit increase in Q3 2025, with strong capital and liquidity, indicating sector health rather than broad decline. (reuters.com)
    • Strategy reports show a nuanced picture: a Boston Consulting Group study notes that banks are losing some market share to fintechs, while McKinsey’s 2024 Global Banking Review emphasizes that traditional banks have recovered profitability and many neobanks remain fragile. (timesofindia.indiatimes.com) In checking accounts, digital banks/fintechs had 44% of new openings in 2024 (down from 47% in 2023), while megabanks regained share, suggesting incumbents are competing effectively rather than “largely losing ground.” (forbes.com) Overall, incumbents and card networks (e.g., JPMorgan, Bank of America, Visa, Mastercard) remain the dominant long‑term winners so far.
  3. Conclusion
    The consolidation wave call was directionally right, and Stripe has turned into a clear winner. But the stronger part of the prediction — that "it’s going to be Square, Stripe, [and] PayPal ... not the offline legacy banks" who are the primary long‑term winners — has not held up: Stripe is thriving, yet PayPal and Block have dramatically de-rated, while large legacy banks have increased in value and profitability and continue to dominate the system. Given this divergence, the prediction as stated is best judged wrong rather than merely premature or ambiguous.

politicstech
Within about a year of August 2021, "financial deplatforming" (payment/fintech firms cutting off users) will become a major, widely debated political issue in the United States, framed as the next wave of censorship.
I'm predicting right now that financial deplatforming is going to be the big hot potato, political hot potato over the next year. This is the next wave of censorship.View on YouTube
Explanation

Within a year of August 2021, there was some U.S. political conversation about “financial deplatforming,” but it did not rise to the level of a major, system‑wide political hot potato in the way Sacks described.

The main flare‑up in that 12‑month window was the 2022 Canadian Freedom Convoy: GoFundMe removed the convoy’s fundraiser and U.S. Republican officials (e.g., Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis and several state attorneys general) opened investigations and publicly attacked the move as fraud and censorship. Commentary from right‑leaning outlets framed this as “financial deplatforming” or “bank account deplatforming” and explicitly as a new tool of cancel culture or censorship, especially in response to Canada’s use of emergency powers to freeze convoy‑linked bank accounts.(cbsnews.com) However, this remained a fairly niche, partisan concern tied to a specific foreign protest, not a sustained, top‑tier political issue in U.S. domestic debates.

The broad, national fight Sacks envisioned—framed in terms of “debanking” and systemic financial censorship—only really took off later. Coverage notes that the term “debanking” gained mainstream traction after a 2024 Joe Rogan–Marc Andreessen episode brought alleged politically motivated account closures to wide attention.(en.wikipedia.org) In 2024–25, the issue became a recurring flashpoint: Republican‑led states passed and defended laws against perceived viewpoint‑based financial discrimination, Treasury and the OCC publicly pushed back, and President Trump issued an executive order directing regulators to crack down on discriminatory “debanking.”(reuters.com) That later wave matches Sacks’ substance and “next wave of censorship” framing, but it arrived roughly 2–4 years after his August 2021 prediction, not “over the next year.”

Because the core phenomenon he described did not become a major, widely debated U.S. political issue within about a year of August 2021—even though it did become one later—the prediction is best scored as wrong on its stated time horizon.

healthgovernment
Within roughly 2 weeks to 2 months of this July 30, 2021 episode, the U.S. CDC will officially change its COVID-19 policy/guidance regarding vaccinated people (e.g., on masking or transmission), aligning with the concerns discussed about Delta and vaccinated spread.
Even the CDC hasn't officially changed their policy yet. I mean, it's coming, right? We know it's coming. They've always been behind the curve. We've predicted the policy change on this show anywhere from two weeks to two months before they actually do it.View on YouTube
Explanation

The context of Sacks’s comment is the CDC’s mask / transmission guidance for vaccinated people in light of Delta (“there’s new information here… Even the CDC hasn’t officially changed their policy yet… it’s coming”).

In reality, the CDC had already made that policy change before this episode was released:

  • On July 27, 2021, CDC updated its Interim Public Health Recommendations for Fully Vaccinated People in response to the Delta variant, now recommending that fully vaccinated people wear masks in public indoor settings in areas of substantial or high transmission, and explicitly noting new evidence that vaccinated people infected with Delta can spread the virus. (stacks.cdc.gov)
  • This updated guidance is dated July 27/28, 2021 in CDC’s archived materials and contemporaneous summaries. (stacks.cdc.gov)
  • The All‑In E42 episode was published on July 30, 2021, i.e., three days after the CDC change. (glasp.co)

Sacks’s line about “we’ve predicted the policy change on this show anywhere from two weeks to two months before they actually do it” is presented as applying to the impending CDC shift he is describing (“it’s coming, right? we know it’s coming”), but by release time that shift had already occurred.

Within the two‑weeks‑to‑two‑months window after July 30, 2021, CDC did adjust vaccine-dosing policy (e.g., on August 13, 2021 ACIP/CDC recommended an additional mRNA dose for moderately to severely immunocompromised people, and on September 23, 2021 recommended certain Pfizer boosters). (pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov) However, these were about extra doses, not the mask/transmission guidance he was explicitly talking about, which had already been revised on July 27.

Because the key CDC policy change on vaccinated masking and Delta transmission happened before the episode rather than within the “two weeks to two months after” window Sacks implied, the prediction — as normalized here — is best scored as wrong.

healthscience
Following the COVID-19 vaccines, many additional medical products (vaccines and/or therapies) based on mRNA technology will be developed and brought to market in subsequent years.
I mean, I think what it what it shows is that these Covid vaccines are just the first product, the first breakthrough product of this mRNA technology, there's going to be a lot more.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2021 shows that mRNA COVID-19 vaccines were not a one‑off; multiple additional mRNA-based medical products have been developed and brought to market:

  • New mRNA COVID‑19 vaccines beyond the original Pfizer/Moderna shots

    • AWcorna (ARCoV), an mRNA COVID‑19 vaccine developed by Walvax/Abogen, received emergency use authorization in Indonesia in September 2022, adding another marketed mRNA COVID product. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Zapomeran (Kostaive, ARCT‑154), a self‑amplifying mRNA COVID‑19 vaccine, was approved in Japan in November 2023 and later authorized in the EU in February 2025, becoming the first approved self‑amplifying mRNA vaccine. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Moderna’s next‑generation mRNA‑1283 vaccine (mNEXSPIKE) was approved by the U.S. FDA on May 30, 2025 for adults ≥65 and high‑risk individuals 12–64, as a distinct lower‑dose, refrigerator‑stable mRNA COVID vaccine. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Regulators have repeatedly approved updated Pfizer–BioNTech and Moderna mRNA formulations (bivalent and variant‑specific boosters, and 2024–25/2025–26 formulas), each marketed as new vaccine products for evolving variants. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Non‑COVID mRNA vaccines (new disease areas)

    • Moderna’s mRESVIA (mRNA‑1345) for respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) was approved by the U.S. FDA in May 2024 for adults ≥60, with its indication expanded in June 2025 to high‑risk adults 18–59. It is widely described as Moderna’s second approved mRNA product and the first mRNA vaccine approved for a disease other than COVID‑19 in the U.S. (investors.modernatx.com)
    • The same RSV mRNA vaccine has also been approved in the EU and Australia, where regulators likewise emphasize it as the first non‑COVID mRNA vaccine in those regions. (news.modernatx.com)

In 2021, only the initial Pfizer–BioNTech and Moderna COVID‑19 vaccines were on the market. By late 2025, there are multiple distinct mRNA COVID vaccines (including self‑amplifying and next‑generation formulations) and at least one major non‑COVID mRNA vaccine (RSV) approved across several jurisdictions. This clearly matches the directional claim that the original COVID vaccines would be just the first breakthrough and that “there’s going to be a lot more” mRNA‑based medical products in the ensuing years.

Given this expansion from essentially two products to a portfolio spanning several companies, formulations, and at least two different diseases, the prediction that many additional mRNA-based medical products would be developed and brought to market after the COVID vaccines has been borne out.

sciencetech
The privately led space race efforts by companies such as Blue Origin, SpaceX, and Virgin Galactic will lead to significant engineering and scientific breakthroughs in the coming years, beyond the state of the art as of mid‑2021.
And I do believe there will be great engineering and scientific breakthroughs that come as a result of what they're doing with this new space race.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2021–2025 shows that the privately led “space race” among SpaceX, Blue Origin, and Virgin Galactic has in fact produced major engineering advances and enabled new scientific work beyond the mid‑2021 state of the art.

1. Clear engineering breakthroughs

  • SpaceX Starship: Since 2023, Starship—now the most powerful rocket ever built, powered by clusters of methane full‑flow staged‑combustion Raptor engines—has progressed from initial failures to a fully intact fourth test flight on June 6, 2024. That flight reached space, completed stage separation, survived re‑entry, and executed controlled splashdowns of both stages, a substantial leap beyond any capability that existed in mid‑2021. (theguardian.com) This is precisely the kind of large, reusable super‑heavy system Sacks was referring to.
  • Blue Origin New Glenn: Blue Origin advanced from only suborbital New Shepard flights in 2021 to flying New Glenn, a heavy‑lift, partially reusable orbital rocket first launched in January 2025 and now with two successful missions. New Glenn can loft ~45 metric tons to LEO and has a reusable first stage designed for many re‑flights; the second mission in November 2025 both deployed NASA’s ESCAPADE Mars probes and achieved the first successful booster landing, a major new engineering capability for the company and for commercial launch options beyond what existed in 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Deepening reusability across the sector: These developments—Starship’s large fully reusable architecture and New Glenn’s heavy‑lift, barge‑landed first stage—go significantly beyond the mid‑2021 baseline of Falcon 9 / New Shepard / unproven Starship prototypes, and they are explicitly motivated by competitive commercial goals.

2. Scientific and technological advances enabled by these systems

  • Suborbital research (Virgin Galactic & Blue Origin): Virgin Galactic’s Galactic 01 (June 2023), its first commercial flight, was a dedicated Italian Air Force research mission conducting 13 human‑tended and autonomous microgravity experiments in biomedical science, thermo‑fluid dynamics, and novel materials, all using the suborbital platform that didn’t exist in operational form in 2021. (en.wikipedia.org) Subsequent flights like Galactic 07 carried a mix of private astronauts and a national agency researcher, again using the vehicle as a microgravity lab. (virgin.com)
  • Blue Origin New Shepard science missions: New Shepard has evolved into a routine research platform: by 2025 it has flown over 175 scientific payloads above the Kármán line, including NASA‑sponsored technology tests such as precision lunar‑landing sensors and, notably in 2025, a flight that spun the capsule to simulate lunar gravity for about two minutes to test lunar‑surface technologies—something that previously required far more expensive facilities. (blueorigin.com)
  • Mars science via commercial heavy lift (ESCAPADE): Blue Origin’s New Glenn has now launched NASA’s twin ESCAPADE orbiters, which will study Mars’ magnetic environment and atmospheric loss—science missions that, by design, ride on this new commercial, reusable heavy‑lift system rather than bespoke government rockets. (apnews.com) While most of the scientific results will emerge after 2025, the missions themselves are a direct outcome of the private heavy‑lift race.

Given these concrete advances—large fully or partially reusable heavy‑lift systems that did not yet exist operationally in mid‑2021, and a growing stream of suborbital and interplanetary science enabled by them—the prediction that this new privately driven space race would produce “great engineering and scientific breakthroughs” in the following years has clearly been borne out.

health
From mid-2021 onward, essentially all unvaccinated people will eventually be infected with the COVID-19 Delta variant.
I think we're at the point now where if you're not vaccinated, you're going to get you're going to get the delta variantView on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that, from mid‑2021 onward, essentially all unvaccinated people would eventually be infected with the COVID‑19 Delta variant.

Evidence from seroprevalence and variant‑specific surveillance indicates:

  • By late 2021 and early 2022, Delta did become the dominant variant globally for a time and infected a large share of unvaccinated people, but not all. Estimates from multiple countries show substantial, but far from universal, infection or seroprevalence levels before Omicron arrived (often well below 100%, even when including both vaccinated and unvaccinated populations), leaving many people still uninfected by Delta when Omicron began to outcompete it.
  • Omicron (and its sublineages) rapidly displaced Delta in late 2021 and 2022, becoming the overwhelmingly dominant variant worldwide. This means that many people who avoided infection during the Delta wave but were later infected, were infected with Omicron or later variants rather than Delta.
  • There is no credible epidemiological evidence that nearly all unvaccinated individuals (let alone literally all) were ever infected with Delta specifically; instead, data consistently show a mix of: people infected with pre‑Delta strains, people infected with Delta, people infected only with Omicron or later variants, and some who (as of 2025) still show no evidence of infection.

Because the statement is strong and specific to the Delta variant ("if you're not vaccinated, you're going to get the delta variant"), and available data show large numbers of unvaccinated people who either remained uninfected through the Delta period or were first infected by later variants, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

health
By the near term following July 2021 (within a few months), the SARS‑CoV‑2 Delta variant will become the dominant COVID-19 strain in circulation in the United States, if it was not already at that time.
I mean, delta variants can become the main the dominant strain if it isn't already.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the CDC and contemporaneous reporting shows that the SARS‑CoV‑2 Delta variant did in fact become the dominant strain in the U.S. within a few months of July 2021.

Key points:

  • On June 15, 2021, CDC Director Rochelle Walensky stated that the Delta variant was expected to become the dominant strain in the U.S., noting it was already rapidly increasing as a share of cases.
  • CDC genomic surveillance data and multiple news summaries report that by early July 2021, Delta had already become the dominant variant nationally (surpassing 50% of sequenced cases), and by mid‑July 2021 it accounted for an even larger majority of U.S. infections.
  • Thus, Sacks’ prediction that “delta variants can become the main the dominant strain if it isn't already” was borne out almost immediately after (and arguably already at) the podcast’s release date of 9 July 2021.

Because the Delta variant did indeed become (and remain for some time) the dominant SARS‑CoV‑2 strain in U.S. circulation in the near term after July 2021, this prediction is right.

healthscience
At some future point after July 2021, a SARS‑CoV‑2 variant will emerge that constitutes a true 'breakthrough variant'—meaning it significantly evades existing vaccine protection beyond the partial reductions then observed, leading to substantially more infections among vaccinated people.
Now, these are not full breakthrough variants yet, but to Freiberg's point, it's just a matter of time.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since late 2021 indicates this prediction was essentially borne out, especially with the emergence and global spread of the Omicron lineage.

Key points:

  1. A substantially more immune‑evasive variant did emerge after July 2021.

    • Omicron (B.1.1.529), first reported in November 2021, showed markedly higher ability to evade neutralizing antibodies from vaccination and prior infection compared with earlier variants like Alpha and Delta. Multiple lab studies reported large drops in neutralization titers against Omicron for sera from people who had completed primary vaccine series (e.g., 20–40‑fold reductions compared with ancestral virus).
  2. Real‑world data showed much higher rates of infection among vaccinated people than with prior variants.

    • During Omicron waves, countries with high vaccination coverage (e.g., the UK, Israel, the U.S.) reported:
      • Large numbers of breakthrough infections in fully vaccinated individuals, far beyond what was seen with Alpha or early Delta.
      • Rapid declines in protection against infection and symptomatic disease a few months after primary vaccination, with two doses sometimes offering only modest and short‑lived protection against Omicron infection (though protection against severe disease, hospitalization, and death remained substantially higher than in unvaccinated people, especially with boosting).
    • Health agencies and observational studies consistently documented that Omicron caused a much larger share of cases among vaccinated people than previous variants had, largely due to immune escape plus waning immunity.
  3. This goes beyond the "partial reductions" in vaccine effectiveness seen by mid‑2021.

    • By July 2021, concerns about "breakthrough" were mostly about:
      • Modest drops in effectiveness against infection with Alpha/Delta compared with the ancestral strain.
      • Some breakthrough cases, but vaccines still preventing most infections in vaccinated populations.
    • With Omicron and its subvariants, many public‑health summaries explicitly characterized it as highly immune‑evasive, noting that prior vaccination or infection was much less effective at blocking infection, even though it still greatly reduced the risk of severe outcomes. This is qualitatively closer to what the predictor labeled a future “true breakthrough variant.”
  4. Does this match the normalized prediction?

    • The claim was: after July 2021, a SARS‑CoV‑2 variant will emerge that constitutes a true breakthrough variant—significantly evading existing vaccine protection beyond the partial reductions then observed, leading to substantially more infections among vaccinated people.
    • Omicron clearly:
      • Emerged after July 2021.
      • Showed substantially greater immune escape than Alpha/Delta.
      • Produced waves with many more infections among vaccinated people than earlier variants, even while vaccines (especially with boosters) still protected fairly well against severe disease.

Because the core of the prediction—a meaningfully more vaccine‑evading SARS‑CoV‑2 variant causing many more breakthrough infections—did happen with Omicron and its descendants, the prediction should be judged right in substance, even though vaccines continued to work well against severe disease and were not rendered useless.

marketsventure
Robinhood will successfully complete an IPO with a valuation in the roughly $50–70 billion range.
And now they're going to be able to IPO at like a 50, 60, $70 billion valuation.View on YouTube
Explanation

Robinhood did successfully complete its IPO on July 29, 2021, but the valuation was far below the predicted $50–70 billion range.

Multiple contemporaneous reports show that Robinhood priced its IPO at $38 per share, giving it an initial valuation of about $32 billion based on its basic share count.

  • CNBC: IPO priced at $38 per share, valuing Robinhood at about $32 billion. (cnbc.com)
  • Nasdaq/CoinDesk: IPO priced at $38 per share, implying a valuation around $32 billion. (nasdaq.com)

Analyses that consider a fully diluted share count put the valuation somewhat higher, roughly $36–40 billion, but still well below $50 billion. (techcrunch.com)

Since the prediction was specifically that Robinhood would IPO at “like a 50, 60, $70 billion valuation,” and the actual IPO valuation was in the low-30s billions (or high-30s billions on a fully diluted basis), the predicted valuation range did not come true.

healthgovernment
In the upcoming 2021–2022 school year, many U.S. public schools (especially in places like California) will not offer full five-day-a-week in-person instruction under normal conditions. Instead, they will either fall short of full-time in-person learning or will impose stringent measures such as mandatory masking for children, strict social distancing, and segregating unvaccinated children (e.g., making them sit at separate tables).
So I think you could be in a situation where we do not have they will call it school reopening, but we will not have five day a week in-person learning. And the schools, the public schools that have it are going to have all sorts of insane restrictions and conditions, like making kids who really aren't at risk for Covid, even even the Delta variant. They're going to force them to wear masks. They're going to enforce this ridiculous social distancing. They're talking about making the kids who aren't vaccinated sit at a separate table like the outcasts.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of the prediction diverged:

  1. Five-day in-person instruction:

    • National data from the U.S. Department of Education’s NCES show that by fall 2021, almost all public schools were offering full-time in‑person instruction and about 99% of 4th- and 8th‑grade public school students were attending school full-time in person. (nces.ed.gov)
    • California’s own data in June 2021 reported that 99% of school districts planned to fully reopen for in-person instruction in fall 2021, and large districts like LAUSD and SFUSD explicitly announced five‑days‑a‑week, full‑day in‑person schedules for 2021–22. (gov.ca.gov)
    • So the literal claim that “we will not have five day a week in‑person learning” in many public schools, especially in California, did not come true.
  2. Stringent mitigation measures (especially in California):

    • California’s K‑12 guidance for 2021–22 explicitly framed its goal as safe and full in-person instruction but required universal indoor masking for students and staff as a condition of that reopening, with enforcement protocols and quarantine/testing rules layered on top. (cdph.ca.gov)
    • CDC guidance at the same time recommended universal indoor masking for all K‑12 students and staff nationwide, regardless of vaccination status, to enable in‑person learning. (cdc.gov)
    • Many districts (e.g., SFUSD) reopened full‑time but with mandatory indoor masking, self‑screening, ventilation upgrades, and other COVID protocols—i.e., not “normal conditions” in the pre‑pandemic sense. (sfusd.edu)
    • Thus, the part of the prediction that said public schools that did open in person would impose strict measures like mandatory masking and other COVID safety protocols was broadly accurate.
  3. Segregating unvaccinated children (e.g., separate tables):

    • There were documented cases of schools requiring unvaccinated students to eat separately or follow distinct lunch arrangements (for example, a Jesuit high school in Boston that required unvaccinated students to eat behind plexiglass and California schools with specialized protocols that had unvaccinated or younger students eat in separate outdoor areas). (lifesitenews.com)
    • These policies existed but appear to have been isolated or localized, not a standard practice across “many” U.S. public schools.

Why “ambiguous”:

  • The quantifiable core of the prediction—that many U.S. public schools, especially in California, would not have five‑day in‑person instruction—was wrong, since the dominant reality in 2021–22 was full‑time in‑person schooling.
  • However, the conditional framing in the normalized version (“either fall short of full-time in-person or impose stringent measures”) is partially satisfied, because many schools—particularly in California—did operate full-time but under exactly the kind of stringent mitigation he described (especially universal masking and other restrictions).
  • Because the original quote leans strongly toward broad failure to restore five‑day in‑person learning, while the normalized paraphrase emphasizes the presence of strict conditions, and reality clearly supported one part but not the other, the overall accuracy is best characterized as mixed/ambiguous rather than cleanly right or wrong.
health
During the fall of 2021, the SARS‑CoV‑2 Delta variant will spread widely through parts of the United States with low vaccination rates, becoming prevalent in those under‑vaccinated regions.
It is going to, I think, sweep through areas of the country in the fall that aren't vaccinated.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from fall 2021 shows that the SARS‑CoV‑2 Delta variant did in fact sweep through under‑vaccinated parts of the United States and became the dominant strain there.

Key points:

  • By early July 2021, Delta was already surging in regions with low vaccination coverage, especially in parts of the South and Midwest, and health officials explicitly warned that areas with low vaccination rates would be hit hardest.
  • Through late summer and into fall 2021, the U.S. experienced a major “Delta wave,” with the highest case, hospitalization, and death rates concentrated in states and counties with lower vaccination rates (e.g., many parts of the Southeast and Mountain West). Analyses during that period consistently highlighted a strong geographic correlation between low vaccination uptake and intense Delta transmission.
  • By September–October 2021, Delta was the predominant variant in the U.S., and data and reporting showed it driving significant outbreaks specifically in under‑vaccinated communities, matching the prediction that it would “sweep through areas of the country in the fall that aren’t vaccinated.”

Because the prediction is specific (Delta will sweep through under‑vaccinated areas in fall 2021) and that is exactly what occurred, the prediction is right.

health
In fall 2021, the Delta variant of SARS‑CoV‑2 will widely spread ("sweep through") in U.S. regions with low COVID‑19 vaccination rates, causing a substantial wave of cases there.
It is going to, I think, sweep through areas of the country in the fall that aren't vaccinated.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from multiple sources shows that the Delta variant did, in fact, surge in the U.S. in late summer and fall 2021, and that the worst impacts were concentrated in regions with low vaccination rates.

Key points:

  1. Timing and geography of the Delta wave

    • CDC data and contemporaneous reporting show that the Delta variant drove a major U.S. COVID‑19 surge starting in July 2021 and extending into the fall, with substantial case waves in many states.
    • Southern and some Midwestern states—such as Florida, Louisiana, Mississippi, Arkansas, Missouri, and later parts of the Mountain West—experienced particularly severe waves during late summer and into fall 2021.
  2. Correlation with low vaccination rates

    • Throughout mid‑2021, those same states had below‑average vaccination coverage compared to the national mean. Public health analyses done at the time repeatedly highlighted that Delta surges were worst in areas with lower vaccination rates (often rural counties and states with lower overall uptake).
    • News and CDC commentary emphasized that Delta was "ripping through" or "sweeping through" under‑vaccinated communities, matching the gist of the prediction (rapid spread in low‑vax regions in that timeframe).
  3. Match to the prediction

    • Prediction: “In fall 2021, the Delta variant … will sweep through areas of the country that aren’t vaccinated.”
    • Outcome: By fall 2021, Delta had already driven large case waves in precisely such areas, and continued to circulate heavily there during that period. The direction, timing (late summer/fall 2021), and conditional factor (low vaccination) all align.

Given that Delta did cause a substantial wave concentrated in under‑vaccinated U.S. regions during late summer and fall 2021, this prediction is best classified as right.

politicsgovernment
Prosecutors will fail to flip Trump Organization CFO Allen Weisselberg into providing incriminating testimony that leads to criminal charges against Donald Trump personally; Trump will avoid criminal liability arising from this particular New York tax‑perk case.
they're trying to charge Westheimer, who's who's CFO, with basically receiving certain perks as compensation.View on YouTube
Explanation

The New York criminal case over the Trump Organization’s fringe‑benefits tax scheme (the “tax‑perk” case) indicted only three defendants in July 2021: the Trump Corporation, Trump Payroll Corporation, and Allen Weisselberg—not Donald Trump personally. 【2†cite†2search13】 Prosecutors alleged Weisselberg received about $1.76 million in untaxed perks such as free rent, car leases, and private‑school tuition. 【2†cite†2search13】

In August 2022, Weisselberg pleaded guilty to 15 felonies and agreed to testify against the Trump Organization as part of a plea deal. The two Trump entities were then convicted on all 17 counts in December 2022, and Weisselberg was sentenced in accordance with that cooperation agreement. 【2†cite†2search13】【1†cite†1search3】

However, contemporaneous reporting and later analysis make clear that prosecutors did not succeed in flipping Weisselberg into a cooperator who substantially implicated Donald Trump personally. The New York case history notes that prosecutors had hoped he would provide testimony against Trump but that he refused, heavily invoking the Fifth Amendment. 【2†cite†2search13】 A later overview of the Trump prosecutions similarly concludes that, although Weisselberg pled guilty and served time, he "never provided bombshell cooperation implicating Trump" himself. 【2†cite†2news11】

Crucially, Donald Trump was never charged as a defendant in the fringe‑benefits tax case (People v. Trump Corporation). His separate New York criminal prosecution and 2024 conviction involve a different matter entirely: falsifying business records in connection with 2016 hush‑money payments, not the earlier fringe‑benefits scheme. 【1†cite†1search13】【1†cite†1search18】

Because Weisselberg’s cooperation did not lead to criminal charges against Donald Trump personally in the tax‑perk case, and Trump incurred no criminal liability arising from that specific New York prosecution, Sacks’s prediction matches the eventual outcome.

politics
As of the 2024 U.S. presidential cycle, Ron DeSantis will be the early frontrunner for the Republican nomination.
DeSantis is definitely the early frontrunner.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from both polling averages and retrospective coverage indicates that Donald Trump, not Ron DeSantis, was regarded as the early frontrunner for the 2024 Republican nomination.

  • The 2024 U.S. election overview explicitly states that Trump "was considered an early frontrunner for the Republican presidential nomination," while describing DeSantis only as Trump’s main challenger, not the frontrunner. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Nationwide primary polls in late 2022 and early 2023 generally showed Trump leading DeSantis in multi‑candidate GOP primary ballots (e.g., many January 2023 polls have Trump in the mid‑40s to around 50% and DeSantis mostly in the high‑20s to low‑30s), indicating Trump held frontrunner status in the actual nomination field. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • DeSantis did outperform Trump in some head‑to‑head hypothetical matchups in late 2022 and early 2023, and some commentary framed him as a potential or early favorite, but this never translated into a sustained lead as the primary’s de facto frontrunner. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Conservative Political Action Conference (CPAC) straw polls from 2021–2023 consistently had Trump well ahead of DeSantis among activists (e.g., Trump 59–70% vs. DeSantis ~20–28%), reinforcing Trump’s status as the party’s leading figure. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • By mid‑2023, FiveThirtyEight’s national GOP primary polling average had Trump at about 52% and DeSantis at 15%, and when DeSantis suspended his campaign in January 2024, NPR and other outlets referred to Trump as “the frontrunner for the GOP presidential nomination,” while describing DeSantis only as an early favorite who failed to capitalize. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the broad polling data and contemporary characterizations consistently identify Trump—not DeSantis—as the early frontrunner in the 2024 GOP nomination race, the prediction that DeSantis would be "definitely the early frontrunner" did not come true.

politicsgovernment
Ron DeSantis will win re‑election as governor of Florida in 2022 by a large margin (a "sweep to victory").
now he's running for reelection in Florida in 2022. So that's on his plate. And but I think it looks like he's going to sweep to victory.View on YouTube
Explanation

Ron DeSantis did in fact win re‑election as governor of Florida in 2022, defeating Democratic nominee Charlie Crist with 59.37% of the vote to Crist’s 39.97%, a margin of about 19.4 percentage points. (en.wikipedia.org)

Multiple analyses, including election summaries and news coverage, explicitly describe this as a landslide and note it was the largest margin in a Florida gubernatorial race since 1982 and the largest for a Republican in state history, with DeSantis flipping traditionally Democratic counties such as Miami‑Dade and Palm Beach. (en.wikipedia.org)

Given the prediction that he would "sweep to victory" and win re‑election in 2022 by a large margin, and the actual nearly 20‑point landslide, this prediction was clearly borne out by the 2022 election results.

politics
Conditional on Ron DeSantis winning Florida’s 2022 gubernatorial election by a strong margin, he will become the de facto frontrunner for the 2024 Republican presidential nomination.
If he wins re-election in 2022 by a by a strong margin, I think he does become the putative frontrunner for 2024.View on YouTube
Explanation

The condition of the prediction clearly occurred, but the forecasted consequence did not.

  1. Condition was met:

    • Ron DeSantis won re‑election as Florida governor in 2022 in a landslide, taking about 59.4% to 40.0% over Charlie Crist, a margin of roughly 19.4 points, the largest for a Republican governor in modern Florida history. (en.wikipedia.org) This satisfies Sacks’s “wins re‑election in 2022 by a strong margin” condition.
  2. What actually happened to 2024 GOP frontrunner status:

    • After the midterms, Donald Trump announced his 2024 candidacy and was “considered an early frontrunner for the Republican presidential nomination.” (en.wikipedia.org)
    • While DeSantis was initially viewed as the main challenger and even had more favorable polling numbers than Trump by the end of 2022, Trump quickly re‑established and widened a dominant lead; by July 2023 FiveThirtyEight’s national GOP primary average had Trump at 52% and DeSantis at 15%. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • FiveThirtyEight’s launch analysis of its GOP primary polling average in April 2023 explicitly stated that the averages implied Trump was favored to win the nomination, with Trump at about 49% to DeSantis’s 26%. (fivethirtyeight.com)
    • Media and institutional language consistently referred to Trump, not DeSantis, as the “frontrunner” during the primary season; for example, coverage of DeSantis suspending his campaign in January 2024 describes him endorsing “frontrunner Donald Trump” for the GOP nomination. (news.wjct.org)
    • DeSantis ultimately suspended his 2024 campaign on January 21, 2024 and endorsed Trump, finishing with only nine delegates, confirming that he never displaced Trump as the de facto leader of the race. (en.wikipedia.org)
  3. Why this makes the prediction wrong, not just early or ambiguous:

    • Sacks’s claim was conditional but specific: if DeSantis won big in 2022, he would “become the putative frontrunner for 2024.” The condition (big win) happened, but DeSantis never became the commonly-recognized or data-backed frontrunner for the 2024 GOP nomination.
    • He was widely seen as the top alternative and “future of the party” — e.g., the New York Post’s “DeFuture” cover and reporting that his win made him a potential GOP frontrunner (theguardian.com) — but the polling averages, party behavior, and press framing all treated Trump as the frontrunner throughout the key period.

Because the trigger condition occurred but DeSantis never actually became the de facto or “putative” frontrunner in practice, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

government
Amazon’s petition to have FTC chair Lina Khan recused from antitrust matters involving Amazon will be denied; she will not be recused and will continue to oversee Amazon‑related cases.
There's no way this is going to fly. There's no way she's going to get recused.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that Amazon’s 2021 petition to recuse FTC Chair Lina Khan from Amazon matters did not succeed and that she continued to oversee Amazon‑related cases, matching Sacks’s prediction.

  • Amazon formally petitioned the FTC in June/July 2021 to have Khan recused from any antitrust investigations or proceedings involving Amazon. (retail.economictimes.indiatimes.com)
  • A subsequent letter from Sen. Elizabeth Warren and others argued there was no basis for Khan’s recusal under federal ethics law and FTC precedent, reinforcing that she should remain on Amazon matters. (warren.senate.gov)
  • Reporting on the later FTC Prime lawsuit notes explicitly that Amazon “tried and failed” to have Khan recused from regulating the company in 2021, indicating the recusal effort did not remove her. (washingtonpost.com)
  • In 2023, the FTC—with Khan as Chair and publicly speaking for the agency—filed a major consumer‑protection suit accusing Amazon of using dark patterns to push Prime subscriptions, with the FTC’s own release quoting Khan criticizing Amazon’s conduct. (ftc.gov)
  • Also in 2023, the FTC and 17 states brought a landmark antitrust suit against Amazon for allegedly maintaining monopoly power, again with Khan personally announcing and explaining the case as FTC Chair. (ftc.gov)

Taken together, these sources show Amazon’s recusal petition did not result in Khan stepping aside; she remained involved in key Amazon enforcement actions. That matches the prediction that “there’s no way she’s going to get recused,” so the forecast is right.

politicstech
During the current Congress (2021–2023), at least some of the six House‑passed bipartisan antitrust bills targeting large technology platforms will pass the U.S. Senate and be enacted into law, resulting in significant regulatory changes for big tech companies.
It's a huge priority. There's six bills that just got passed in the House and it's going to the Senate. And I do think this is one of the areas where you could actually get some bipartisan agreement in the Senate… that says to me that legislation is likely I think it's going to go through. I think we are going to see some some big changes.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks was talking about the six‑bill House Judiciary 'Big Tech' antitrust package (H.R. 3816, 3825, 3826, 3843, 3849, 3460) that cleared committee in June 2021 to rein in large online platforms such as Amazon, Apple, Facebook and Google. (ballardspahr.com)

During the 117th Congress (2021–2022), two of those six bills did in fact pass the Senate and become law:

  • The Merger Filing Fee Modernization Act (H.R. 3843) was passed by the House and then enacted as part of the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2023, signed on December 29, 2022. (congress.gov)
  • The State Antitrust Enforcement Venue Act (H.R. 3460) likewise passed the Senate (June 14, 2022) and was incorporated into the same omnibus spending law. (en.wikipedia.org)

These provisions substantially raised Hart‑Scott‑Rodino merger filing fees for large deals (up to $2.25 million, with an estimated $1.4 billion in extra funding over five years) and made it harder for dominant firms, including major tech platforms, to shift or consolidate state antitrust suits into more favorable venues—changes widely described as important, if modest, strengthening of antitrust enforcement against Big Tech. (mintz.com)

The other four bills in the package—including the platform‑specific American Innovation and Choice Online Act and Ending Platform Monopolies Act—never received final floor passage and expired at the end of the Congress. (congress.gov)

So while the eventual reforms were narrower than a full rewrite of platform conduct rules, Sacks’ core prediction that at least some of the package would clear the Senate during that Congress and produce meaningful new antitrust constraints relevant to Big Tech was borne out.

politicsgovernment
Eric Adams will win the 2021 New York City mayoral election and become the next mayor.
Look, I mean, Eric Adams is going to be the next mayor of New York City.View on YouTube
Explanation

Eric Adams won the 2021 New York City mayoral election held on November 2, 2021, defeating Republican nominee Curtis Sliwa with about 67% of the vote, and he was sworn in as the 110th Mayor of New York City on January 1, 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)

Since the prediction was that “Eric Adams is going to be the next mayor of New York City” (i.e., win the 2021 election and become mayor), and this is exactly what happened, the prediction is right.

politics
Crime will remain a dominant political issue across the United States for the next few years following mid‑2021.
crime is the huge issue, and I think it's going to reverberate throughout America for the next few years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Survey and electoral evidence shows that crime and public safety did remain a major political theme in U.S. politics for several years after mid‑2021, even if it was not always the single top issue.

  • In the 2022 midterms, Pew found about six-in-ten registered voters (60–61%) said violent crime was “very important” to their vote, putting it in the top tier of issues alongside the economy, gun policy, health care, and education.(pewresearch.org) Pew also noted that candidates nationwide released thousands of ads focused on violent crime.(pewresearch.org)
  • Multiple 2022 polls (Rasmussen and others) reported that around 80% of likely voters expected crime/violent crime to be an important issue in the elections, with roughly half calling it “very important.”(sharylattkisson.com)
  • Going into the 2024 presidential election, Pew found violent crime remained one of the leading issues, especially among Republicans: 76% of Trump supporters said violent crime was very important to their vote, ranking with the economy and immigration for that bloc.(pewresearch.org) A 2024 Rasmussen poll likewise found 79% of likely voters expected crime to be important in the presidential race, with 45% saying very important.(floridadaily.com)
  • Crime and public safety continued to shape state and local politics, e.g., California’s 2024 Proposition 36 (reversing parts of Prop 47 and increasing penalties for certain theft and drug crimes) passed by a large margin, signaling that crime policy was still salient to voters, and mayoral races in cities like Oakland and New York prominently featured public safety plans.(en.wikipedia.org)

Countervailing data show that when people are asked for the single “most important problem,” crime usually ranked below the economy, inflation, the government, and immigration (e.g., Gallup in 2023 found only 3% named crime as the top national problem).(news.gallup.com) By 2025, concern about crime as an “extremely/very serious” national issue had started to decline, though it still remained substantial.(washingtonpost.com)

However, the prediction only claimed crime would be a huge, reverberating issue for the next few years, not that it would remain the single dominant concern indefinitely. From 2021 through at least the 2024 cycle, crime and public safety consistently registered as a high-salience voting issue and a major theme in campaigns at the national, state, and local levels. On that basis, the prediction is best judged as right.

healthscience
Over time after June 2021, substantially more information will emerge about a cover‑up related to the Wuhan lab and COVID‑19 origins, and the revelations will increasingly implicate those involved ("get worse and worse").
What this database thing represents is, look, there was a cover up here, and that cover up has fingerprints and the information is leaking out. And we are seeing more and more information is going to come out. I actually disagree with you guys that we're not going to learn more about what happened. I think we're gonna learn a lot more, and it's gonna get worse and worse.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim was not that we’d get a definitive proof of a lab leak, but that over time, more evidence of a cover‑up around the Wuhan lab and COVID origins would leak out, making the situation look progressively worse for those involved. That trajectory has largely matched what actually unfolded from late 2021 through 2025.

Key developments since June 2021:

  1. More internal intelligence and declassification about a possible lab origin

    • The 2023 COVID‑19 Origin Act forced the Director of National Intelligence to declassify information about potential links between the Wuhan Institute of Virology (WIV) and COVID‑19, leading to a public ODNI report in June 2023. That report described an intelligence community split: several agencies favored a natural spillover, while the Department of Energy and FBI assessed a lab‑associated incident as “most likely,” though with low or moderate confidence. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In 2025, the CIA publicly shifted to say it now considers a lab origin “more likely,” again with low confidence, aligning its position with DOE and the FBI. (time.com)
      These shifts did not settle the origin question, but they added new, more detailed disclosures and expanded the official paper trail about lab‑leak concerns.
  2. Concrete evidence of record‑evasion and secrecy inside U.S. health agencies

    • Emails from Dr. David Morens, senior adviser to Anthony Fauci at NIAID, released by the House Select Subcommittee on the Coronavirus Pandemic, show him boasting that he “learned from our FOIA lady here how to make emails disappear” after a FOIA request and that he deleted earlier emails after forwarding them to Gmail. He also urged colleagues to send sensitive material only to his private account and wrote that officials were “smart enough to know to never have smoking guns…and if we found them we’d delete them.” (congress.gov)
    • Oversight materials and press reports describe this as part of a broader pattern at NIH/NIAID to evade FOIA and shield EcoHealth Alliance (which funded coronavirus work at WIV) and Fauci from scrutiny, prompting congressional investigations into a possible NIH/NIAID records‑destruction and transparency “conspiracy.” (oversight.house.gov)
      Even if some participants later called these emails “jokes” or denied intent, the documented conduct is exactly the kind of “fingerprints” of a cover‑up Sacks was talking about, and it only became public well after mid‑2021.
  3. Growing documentary evidence and investigations around the Wuhan lab itself

    • Congressional and investigative reports have assembled detailed chronologies showing that WIV’s publicly accessible virus‑sequence database was taken offline around September 12, 2019, and stayed offline, despite later public claims that it was only removed during the pandemic for cybersecurity reasons. These reports also highlight internal Chinese concerns about biosafety at WIV in mid‑ to late‑2019 and subsequent procurement of high‑end safety equipment, all presented as circumstantial evidence of an incident followed by efforts to hide data. (washingtonexaminer.com)
    • Combined with existing evidence that Chinese authorities censored early information about the Wuhan outbreak and have refused to restore access to key WIV records, this has fueled a sustained narrative of a Chinese‑side cover‑up that became more, not less, detailed after 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
  4. Re‑examination of how the “natural origin” narrative was promoted

    • The House held a hearing explicitly titled “Investigating the Proximal Origin of a Cover‑Up,” digging into whether Fauci and NIH officials influenced the highly cited “The Proximal Origin of SARS‑CoV‑2” paper that framed lab‑leak ideas as implausible, and whether early discussions among its authors were more open to a lab origin than the final publication suggested. (congress.gov)
    • These inquiries, backed by FOIA‑obtained emails, have deepened public suspicion that U.S. and international scientific messaging about origins was, at minimum, “managed” behind the scenes, even though the scientists involved insist their views changed for legitimate scientific reasons. (dailycaller.com)
  5. Ongoing uncertainty about the origin itself

    • The ODNI report and subsequent annexes emphasize that both lab‑associated and natural spillover origins remain plausible; most U.S. intelligence agencies still lean toward a natural origin, though with low confidence, and the report found no direct evidence that SARS‑CoV‑2 came from WIV. (gigazine.net)
    • Meanwhile, influential scientific work (e.g., Worobey and colleagues’ geospatial analysis of early Wuhan cases and animal‑market data) continues to argue that a wildlife market spillover fits the available evidence best. (vanityfair.com)
      So we still don’t know definitively how COVID‑19 began, and many of the “cover‑up” claims remain heavily contested and politically polarized.

Putting this together:

  • Sacks predicted that more information about a cover‑up around the Wuhan lab and COVID origins would continue to surface, rather than the story going static, and that these revelations would increasingly implicate those involved.
  • Since mid‑2021, there has indeed been a steady stream of new documents, declassified assessments, FOIA material, and congressional findings that:
    • Expose questionable record‑keeping and FOIA‑evasion practices by NIH/NIAID staff tied to EcoHealth and origin‑related communications. (congress.gov)
    • Add detail to concerns about WIV’s database removal, biosafety problems, and post‑2019 secrecy. (washingtonexaminer.com)
    • Reveal more about how U.S. intelligence agencies internally weighed and re‑weighed the lab‑leak hypothesis. (covidindex.science)

Even though the ultimate origin remains unresolved and many scientists still favor zoonosis, the narrow prediction—that “more and more information” pointing to some form of cover‑up would emerge over time, making the controversy more damaging for key actors—has clearly borne out. On that basis, the forecast is best judged as right, with the caveat that it was about the direction and volume of revelations, not about conclusively proving any specific lab‑leak scenario.

By the end of the summer of 2021 (roughly by late September 2021), David Sacks will weigh less than Jason Calacanis.
Guys, I'm on a I'm on a diet. I predict by the end of the summer, I'll be thinner than Jason.View on YouTube
Explanation

I couldn’t find any reliable public information (interviews, social media posts, news, or transcripts) from David Sacks, Jason Calacanis, or third-party sources that report or compare their body weights around late summer 2021.

Because their exact weights at that time are private and apparently never disclosed in a verifiable way, there is no factual basis to determine whether David Sacks actually weighed less than Jason Calacanis by the end of summer 2021. The prediction therefore cannot be evaluated from public data and remains ambiguous.

politicstech
In the several years following June 2021 (i.e., roughly through 2024), regulation and government treatment of big tech markets in the United States will become highly politicized, with significantly more partisan conflict and political maneuvering around big tech policy than existed before her appointment.
I think what we're in for over the next few years is potentially a hyper politicization, politicization of big tech markets.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2021–2024 shows U.S. treatment of Big Tech becoming a central and explicitly partisan battlefield, matching Sacks’s forecast of “hyper politicization” of Big Tech markets over the few years after Lina Khan’s appointment.

  • Congressional investigations framed as partisan conflict over Big Tech. In January 2023, House Republicans—on a near-straight party-line vote (221–211)—created the House Judiciary Select Subcommittee on the Weaponization of the Federal Government, explicitly empowered to investigate federal agencies’ interactions with Big Tech and alleged suppression of conservative speech.(axios.com) The subcommittee and its GOP majority repeatedly portrayed Big Tech and federal agencies as colluding to censor conservatives, culminating in a 2024 final report accusing the Biden administration of “weaponization” tied directly to content moderation and platform behavior.(judiciary.house.gov) This is not neutral market regulation; it is framed as partisan persecution and retaliation.

  • Subpoenas and rhetoric targeting Big Tech as partisan actors. In 2023, House Judiciary Chair Jim Jordan subpoenaed the CEOs of Alphabet, Amazon, Apple, Meta, and Microsoft as part of this "weaponization" probe, explicitly seeking documents on alleged collusion with the Biden administration to suppress speech.(thethinkingconservative.com) Coverage characterized these efforts as a partisan offensive accusing Big Tech of siding with Democrats—again, Big Tech policy treated as a core partisan grievance rather than a purely technocratic antitrust or consumer‑protection issue.

  • FTC and antitrust policy around Big Tech became a partisan flashpoint. Under Lina Khan (chair from 2021), the FTC aggressively pursued major tech firms and pushed structural antitrust reforms, which critics painted as ideologically driven and overreaching.(theguardian.com) In direct response, House GOP leadership later advanced a proposal to strip the FTC of its antitrust powers—explicitly framed by critics as a political move to weaken a regulator seen as hostile to large corporations, especially Big Tech.(washingtonpost.com) That kind of institutional retribution against a specific regulator over its Big Tech posture is a sign of heightened politicization.

  • Big Tech regulation and moderation rules became wrapped in broader culture‑war politics. Republican investigations and legislation, such as the Protecting Speech from Government Interference Act, were justified on the grounds that Big Tech was “out to get conservatives” and colluding with the Biden administration—language that makes tech policy part of the partisan identity struggle.(washingtonpost.com) Meanwhile, Democrats largely defended closer cooperation with platforms on misinformation and public health, and supported Khan’s more aggressive antitrust line, yielding consistently polarized messaging and votes.

  • Contrast with the pre‑2021 baseline. Before mid‑2021 there was already a growing, bipartisan “techlash” (e.g., cross‑party antitrust interest), but much of the formal antitrust and regulatory debate was still framed as competition or privacy policy with some bipartisan overlap. Post‑2021, Big Tech became a centerpiece of partisan narratives about censorship, election interference, and the legitimacy of federal institutions, with committees, subpoenas, and structural-agency proposals breaking sharply along party lines. The pattern from 2021–2024 therefore reflects not just ongoing concern about tech, but a significant escalation in partisan conflict and maneuvering around Big Tech policy.

Because, in the several years following June 2021, U.S. government treatment of Big Tech clearly evolved into a heavily partisan battlefield—through House investigations, rhetorical framing, and efforts to redefine or punish regulators tied to Big Tech enforcement—Sacks’s prediction that we were “in for…a hyper politicization…of big tech markets” over the next few years is best judged as right.

techgovernment
Following Lina Khan’s June 2021 confirmation, the U.S. political system (both left and right) will move toward treating large tech platforms that control core infrastructure (e.g., major app stores, cloud platforms, dominant social networks) as regulated common carriers, and within a few years there will be concrete U.S. regulatory or legislative actions that impose common-carrier-like obligations (e.g., nondiscrimination in access) on at least some of these big tech companies.
I think the words you're going to hear a lot okay are common carrier. Because what she seems to be saying is, look, if you're a tech monopoly that controls core infrastructure, we need to regulate you like a common carrier... And so I think there is I think the left and the right here can cut a deal where they regulate these guys, these big tech companies, as common carriers. I think that is what we're headed towards.View on YouTube
Explanation

Breaking the prediction into parts:

  1. Both left and right would move toward treating large tech platforms as regulated common carriers.

    • Since 2021, the common carrier framing for social media and platforms has primarily come from conservatives. Justice Clarence Thomas suggested that some digital platforms might be analogous to common carriers or public accommodations, encouraging regulation along those lines. (cnbc.com) Republican-led states like Florida and Texas then explicitly invoked common-carrier language in their 2021 social‑media laws (SB 7072 and HB 20). (wlf.org)
    • By contrast, Democrats’ major tech efforts under Lina Khan and in Congress have focused on antitrust and consumer protection (e.g., Amazon/merger suits, Open App Markets Act, American Innovation and Choice Online Act) rather than reclassifying platforms as common carriers. (en.wikipedia.org) Debates over Section 230 reform are bipartisan, but the goals diverge (Democrats typically pushing for more responsibility for harmful content, Republicans for less perceived "censorship"). (theverge.com)
    • There is no evidence of a bipartisan “deal” to treat app stores, cloud platforms, or dominant social networks as regulated common carriers; instead, the parties remain sharply split on whether forcing platforms to host more speech is desirable or constitutional.
  2. Within a few years, concrete U.S. regulatory or legislative actions would impose common‑carrier‑like obligations on at least some big tech platforms.

    • State laws: Texas’s HB 20 and Florida’s SB 7072 tried to impose must‑carry / nondiscrimination rules on large social‑media platforms and explicitly leaned on the idea that these platforms can be treated “similarly to common carriers.” (en.wikipedia.org) Those are concrete legislative actions and do mirror classic common‑carrier nondiscrimination duties.
    • But courts have largely pushed back. The Eleventh Circuit stressed that Congress has expressly distinguished “interactive computer services” (social‑media platforms) from common carriers in the Telecommunications Act, and that federal law protects platforms’ right to discriminate among messages—strong evidence that they are not common carriers. (law.justia.com) In Moody v. NetChoice (2024), the U.S. Supreme Court held that laws like the Florida and Texas statutes, which limit platforms’ ability to curate and moderate content, implicate the platforms’ own First Amendment editorial discretion and vacated the lower-court decisions, sending the cases back for more searching First Amendment analysis rather than green‑lighting the common‑carrier theory. (supreme.justia.com) As of late 2025, these laws remain heavily constrained and unsettled, not functioning as stable, widely accepted common‑carrier regimes for social media.
    • Federal level: There is still no federal statute or durable federal regulation that reclassifies major online platforms (social networks, app stores, cloud platforms) themselves as common carriers or that squarely imposes telecom‑style carriage obligations on them. Key bipartisan competition bills such as the Open App Markets Act and the American Innovation and Choice Online Act advanced in committee but did not become law; later reintroduced versions remain only proposals. (en.wikipedia.org) Child‑safety and age‑verification bills (e.g., KOSA, state youth‑online‑safety laws) regulate design and access for minors, not carriage‑style nondiscrimination for all users. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Separate FCC efforts to re‑impose net neutrality by reclassifying ISPs as Title II common carriers were short‑lived; the Sixth Circuit in 2025 ruled the FCC lacks authority for that reclassification, again undercutting a move toward broader common‑carrier treatment even in traditional telecom. (wired.com) Those efforts target carriers like broadband providers, not the app‑store and social‑media “platform monopolies” Sacks was talking about.

Bottom line: While some Republican‑led states enacted and defended laws that attempt to treat large platforms like common carriers, courts have not endorsed that model, and there is no bipartisan, system‑wide shift to regulating app stores, cloud platforms, or dominant social networks as common carriers. Federal law and Supreme Court doctrine currently point in the opposite direction, emphasizing platforms’ editorial rights and distinguishing them from common carriers. Given that more than four years have passed since June 2021 without the predicted bipartisan realignment or durable common‑carrier obligations for big tech platforms, this prediction is best judged as wrong.

health
SARS‑CoV‑2 (COVID‑19) will never be fully eradicated; it will remain an endemic virus circulating in the background indefinitely rather than reaching and staying at zero cases.
we wouldn't let you know all the special rules and restrictions lift until there were zero cases of Covid. And we all know that's never going to happen. Covid will always be around in the background.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 29, 2025, SARS‑CoV‑2 has not been eradicated and continues to circulate globally as an endemic respiratory virus.

  • The WHO states that COVID‑19 is now in a “post‑emergency phase” but continues to circulate, cause disease, and require ongoing management, rather than being eliminated or eradicated.
  • Major health authorities (e.g., CDC, WHO, and multiple peer‑reviewed reviews) now consistently describe COVID‑19 as endemic—meaning the virus continues to circulate in the population at a baseline level, with periodic surges, rather than going to and staying at zero cases.
  • No credible source reports global eradication (which would require zero transmission worldwide and is only achieved for very few diseases like smallpox). Instead, surveillance data and periodic waves of infection show continuing circulation year after year.

Because the prediction was that “Covid will always be around in the background” and that we would never reach a sustained state of zero cases, and because by late 2025 COVID‑19 remains widespread and endemic rather than eradicated, the prediction is right based on current evidence.

climate
The 2021 California wildfire season, relative to the time of recording in June 2021, will be extremely severe and "hellish" in terms of fire activity and impacts.
I think we are in for a really hellish fire seasonView on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the 2021 season shows that California did, in fact, experience an extremely severe, arguably “hellish” wildfire season.

Key points:

  • By the end of 2021, about 2.57 million acres burned in California across 7,396–8,800+ fires, with around 3,600+ structures damaged or destroyed and several fatalities and injuries. This area burned is described in official and summary sources as nearly 2.6 million acres, making 2021 the second‑largest wildfire year on record for California after 2020. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • CAL FIRE’s own 2021 season summary notes an “unusually early start”, an ongoing drought, historically low rainfall and reservoir levels, and states that by July 2021 more than three times as many acres had burned compared with the previous year by that date, with drought, extreme heat, and reduced snowpack “contributing to the severity of the fires.” It describes the state as facing “unprecedented fire conditions” in mid‑August as multiple large fires burned simultaneously. (fire.ca.gov)
  • The Dixie Fire alone burned about 963,000 acres, becoming the largest single (non‑complex) wildfire in recorded California history and the second‑largest wildfire overall in state history, destroying or heavily damaging entire communities (e.g., Greenville) and causing widespread smoke impacts across the western U.S. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The Caldor Fire burned roughly 222,000 acres, destroyed about 1,003 buildings, forced evacuation of more than 53,000 people, and is listed among the largest and most destructive wildfires in California’s recorded history. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • National reporting at the time characterized 2021 as another “damaging western wildfire season” with California as a major focus, driven by severe drought and periods of extreme heat, and highlighted Dixie and Caldor among the emblematic megafires of the year. (ncei.noaa.gov)

Relative to typical pre‑2010 seasons, the combination of record‑scale fires, extremely large burned area (second only to the record‑shattering 2020 season), multiple large destructive incidents, mass evacuations, and smoke and air‑quality impacts across states is consistent with describing 2021 as a “really hellish fire season.”

Given these outcomes, Sacks’s qualitative prediction that the 2021 California fire season would be extremely severe and “hellish” is best judged as correct.

politicsgovernment
California Governor Gavin Newsom and his allies will attempt to schedule or accelerate the 2021 recall election so that it occurs before the peak of the 2021 fire season in California.
Newsom is so worried about fire season that they're going to try and accelerate the recall election. So it happens before there was, you know, the conventional wisdom, the conventional wisdom.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that Gov. Gavin Newsom and his Democratic allies did move to accelerate the 2021 recall timeline, and that one stated strategic reason for an earlier, summertime election was to avoid the political fallout from late‑season wildfires.

Key points:

  • Before Democrats changed the law, the recall calendar pointed to a late October or early November 2021 election—i.e., during the traditional peak of California’s wildfire season.(everything.explained.today)
  • On June 28, 2021, Newsom signed SB 152, which removed a 30‑day budget‑review step and let the lieutenant governor call the recall much earlier, as soon as August 2021, while appropriating $250 million to run it.(everything.explained.today) Democratic leaders explicitly said this funding would “allow for an earlier recall election.”(calmatters.org) This is exactly the kind of procedural change needed to “accelerate” the recall.
  • After signatures were certified on July 1, Lt. Gov. Eleni Kounalakis set the election for September 14, 2021, which NPR and others noted was “much earlier than originally planned” (previous expectations were for November).(nprillinois.org) So the recall was pulled forward on the calendar.
  • Analyses of the recall law changes note that a late‑August or early‑September election would help Newsom by avoiding political fallout over fires, virus variants, or school reopenings, compared with a late‑October/November date; this is described as the strategic rationale advanced by Democratic state senator Steve Glazer when he pushed for an earlier election.(everything.explained.today) That explicitly includes wildfires as a key concern.
  • California’s wildfire season is generally understood to peak in the hot, dry months of August–October, and in 2021 the largest and most destructive fires (e.g., the Dixie Fire, burning July–October, and other major fires continuing through October) were indeed intense well after mid‑September.(en.wikipedia.org) Moving the recall from a likely late‑October/November date to mid‑September therefore shifted it earlier relative to the late‑season peak.

Nuance: The September 14 election still occurred during an active fire season (the Dixie Fire was already burning), and public reporting highlights multiple motives for the accelerated date—riding Newsom’s improving approval ratings and avoiding problems not only with wildfires but also COVID variants and school reopening.(nprillinois.org) However, the core of Sacks’s prediction—that Newsom and his allies would work to accelerate the recall so it occurred earlier in the fire season, partly out of concern about wildfire politics—matches what actually happened.

Because the legislative and scheduling moves clearly did accelerate the recall and contemporary analyses explicitly cite avoiding wildfire‑related fallout as one rationale, the prediction is best classified as right, even though fire season was not the only factor and the election did not precede all major 2021 fires.

Sacks @ 00:53:50Inconclusive
techmarkets
From roughly 2021 onward, major Hollywood studios and their content libraries acquired by large technology companies (e.g., Amazon, Apple, Google) will remain under big-tech ownership permanently, rather than being bought and sold every decade, and big tech will ultimately acquire and retain most of the remaining major Hollywood content libraries.
we're reaching an end state of digital convergence, where the, um, where, where content and the digital distribution are now reaching their kind of final state. And so I don't expect these studios, once they're owned by big Tech, to ever go anywhere. And I don't think they're going to be trading again every ten years. I think this is the end state. Um, Amazon wants this library for their streaming service. And I think that big tech is going to gobble up the rest of these libraries, and that's where they're going to stay.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary of what was predicted
Sacks argued that (a) once major Hollywood studios/content libraries are acquired by big‑tech platforms (Amazon, Apple, Google, etc.), they will effectively never change hands again (no more trading every ~10 years), and (b) big tech will ultimately "gobble up" most of the remaining major Hollywood content libraries and keep them.

What has actually happened (through Nov 30, 2025)

  • Amazon completed its acquisition of MGM in March 2022 and continues to own it; there has been no sign of Amazon flipping or selling MGM’s library. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Other major Hollywood studios and libraries (Disney, Comcast/NBCUniversal, Sony Pictures, Paramount Global, Lionsgate) have not been acquired by big‑tech platforms. Instead, the most significant post‑2021 reshuffling has been within legacy media and telecom:
    • AT&T spun off WarnerMedia and merged it with Discovery to form Warner Bros. Discovery in April 2022 – a media/telecom-to-media transaction, not a big‑tech takeover. (ir.wbd.com)
    • Warner Bros. Discovery later announced plans to split into two publicly traded entities, again a restructuring among traditional media assets, not a sale to big tech. (reuters.com)
  • Apple, Google, and others have invested heavily in original production and streaming, but as of late 2025 they have not acquired most of the legacy studio libraries.

Why this is not yet clearly right or wrong

  • The permanence part of the prediction (that once big tech owns a studio it will never trade again) cannot realistically be tested only a few years after Amazon–MGM closed; we have no counterexample yet, but also no proof this will hold over decades.
  • The “gobble up the rest” part has not materialized so far: outside of MGM, big tech has not acquired the other major Hollywood libraries. However, Sacks did not give a specific deadline, framing it instead as a long‑run “end state.” The absence of these acquisitions by 2025 is evidence against the speed or inevitability of his scenario, but it does not decisively falsify a multi‑decade structural prediction.

Because (1) no major big‑tech divestitures have occurred to clearly disprove the “they’ll never be traded again” claim, and (2) the time horizon for “big tech will ultimately gobble up the rest” is open‑ended, the available evidence is insufficient to declare the prediction definitively right or wrong at this point. Hence the result is inconclusive (too early).

Over time following 2021, large technology companies will acquire and control the majority of major Hollywood studios and their content output (i.e., "big tech will eat Hollywood").
Yeah. I mean, I think I think I think big tech is going to eat Hollywood.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of late 2025, Big Tech has not acquired or directly controlled the majority of the major Hollywood studios.

  1. The current “Big Five” major studios are Walt Disney Studios, Universal, Warner Bros., Sony Pictures, and Paramount Skydance. They are owned respectively by The Walt Disney Company, Comcast (via NBCUniversal), Warner Bros. Discovery, Sony Group, and Paramount Skydance Corporation—not by Amazon, Apple, Alphabet/Google, Meta, Microsoft, or Netflix.(en.wikipedia.org) These five together control over 80% of the 2024 North American box office, while Amazon MGM Studios holds only about 3.4%.(en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Since 2021, the only major studio acquisition by a large tech company has been Amazon’s purchase of MGM, completed in March 2022 and later folded into Amazon MGM Studios.(en.wikipedia.org) Industry references classify Amazon MGM as a mini‑major, not one of the Big Five majors, and its box‑office share remains far smaller than any of the Big Five.(en.wikipedia.org)

  3. Paramount did merge with Skydance in 2025 to form Paramount Skydance, but Skydance itself is a media/production company backed by investors, not a consumer tech platform on the order of Amazon, Apple, or Google; the resulting parent is still a traditional media conglomerate rather than “Big Tech.”(en.wikipedia.org)

  4. Where Big Tech has come to dominate is distribution and viewing time, not ownership of the legacy studios: by May 2025, streaming accounted for 44.8% of all U.S. TV usage, surpassing cable plus broadcast for the first time, with YouTube and Netflix leading overall TV streaming share and Amazon’s Prime Video also significant.(nielsen.com) But this is dominance of platforms, not of the underlying studio assets that produce most Hollywood films.

Because the Big Five studios remain primarily owned by traditional media conglomerates and only one mini‑major (MGM) has been acquired by a Big Tech company, Sacks’ normalized prediction that large technology companies would acquire and control the majority of major Hollywood studios and their content output has not materialized by November 30, 2025.

The University of California system’s suspension of SAT/ACT requirements for admissions, officially extended until at least 2025, will in practice become permanent; standardized test requirements for UC undergraduate admissions will never be reinstated.
they say they're not bringing back the requirements until at least 2025. And you can bet it's never going to return at all.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that the University of California not only extended its suspension of SAT/ACT requirements but has formally ended the use of standardized tests in undergraduate admissions and has maintained that stance through at least the 2026–27 application cycle.

Key points:

  • In May 2020, the UC Board of Regents voted to suspend SAT/ACT requirements through 2024, with the possibility of eliminating them entirely by 2025 if no suitable replacement test was found.(universityofcalifornia.edu)
  • In May 2021, UC settled the Smith v. Regents lawsuit by agreeing to a test‑free policy (no SAT/ACT consideration in admissions or scholarships) through at least 2025, preventing any reversion to test‑optional use of the exams.(publiccounsel.org)
  • In November 2021, the UC Board of Regents was told that faculty could not find any acceptable alternative test; UC leaders then announced a final decision to end standardized testing for admissions and not to develop a replacement test. Provost Michael Brown stated that “UC will continue to practice test‑free admissions now and into the future.”(forbes.com)
  • Coverage in 2021–2022 (EdSource, CBS Los Angeles, Times Higher Education and others) consistently describes UC undergraduate admissions as test‑free going forward, with no plans to bring back SAT/ACT requirements, though leaders left a narrow theoretical door open if some entirely new, equitable test were invented in the future.(edsource.org)
  • As of 2025, UC and CSU are still described in current reporting as "test‑free" systems; they do not consider SAT/ACT scores at all for undergraduate admissions, even as many private universities (e.g., Brown, Princeton, Stanford) have reinstated test requirements.(thecollegesage.com)

Sacks’ prediction was: from a supposedly temporary pause (“not bringing back the requirements until at least 2025”), standardized test requirements for UC undergrad admissions would in practice never return. By late 2021 UC had gone beyond a pause to a formally test‑free, no‑replacement policy, and by late 2025 there has been no reinstatement and active confirmation that admissions will remain test‑free for the foreseeable future.

While one can never prove “never” in a literal, infinite‑time sense, all institutional decisions and current policy confirm that the SAT/ACT requirement did not come back when the suspension window ended and has instead been effectively made permanent. Under the usual standards for evaluating such forecasts, this prediction is best classified as right.

Sacks @ 00:41:40Inconclusive
economygovernment
At the point when U.S. interest rates return to their historical average level, the annual federal interest expense on the national debt will consume roughly 30% of the U.S. federal budget.
when interest rates revert to the norm, the historical norm, interest expense on our debt will be 30% of the government budgetView on YouTube
Explanation

Available data show that net interest on the U.S. federal debt has risen sharply since 2021 but is still far below the ~30% share of the federal budget that Sacks predicted, and the key triggering condition (“when interest rates revert to the historical norm”) is itself ambiguous and arguably not yet fully met.

Key points:

  • Current interest share of the federal budget:

    • In FY 2023, net interest outlays were about 11% of total federal spending, according to CBO-based summaries. (americanactionforum.org)
    • In FY 2024, net interest reached roughly $880–$880+ billion, about 13% of all federal expenditures, making interest the third‑largest spending item after Social Security and health care. (pewresearch.org)
    • CBO’s January 2025 outlook projects net interest will be about 14% of federal outlays in FY 2025 and rise to “nearly 17 percent” of federal spending by 2035—still well below 30%. (americanactionforum.org)
  • Have interest rates “returned to their historical norm”?

    • The 10‑year Treasury yield averaged 3.96% in 2023 and 4.41% in 2024; a long‑run historical mean for the 10‑year is about 4.46% over more than a century, and about 5.9% if you start in 1962. (upmyinterest.com)
    • The average interest rate on federal debt held by the public was only 2.5% in 2023 and projected around 3.1% in 2024, with CBO assuming an average 3.5% over 2025–2054—higher than the ultra‑low 2010s, but still below many definitions of the long‑term “historical norm” that include the high‑rate 1970s–1980s. (pgpf.org)
    • Because much of the debt was issued at very low rates and rolls over slowly, the effective rate the government actually pays has not yet fully converged to long‑run averages, even though current market yields are closer to them.
  • Forward‑looking projections:

    • CBO and independent summaries generally project net interest to reach around 17% of federal outlays by the mid‑2030s, and interest costs around 5–6% of GDP by the 2040s–2050s; some analyses suggest interest could reach roughly one‑third of federal revenues by mid‑century, but not 30% of total spending. (americanactionforum.org)

Why this is “inconclusive” rather than clearly “wrong”:

  • Sacks framed the claim conditionally: when interest rates revert to their historical norm, interest will be ~30% of the budget. There is no explicit date, and “historical norm” (which rate, over which time window) is not precisely defined.
  • As of late 2025, net interest is only in the low‑teens percent of total outlays, not 30%. However, the average rate on the outstanding debt has not yet fully reached many commonly cited “normal” levels, and substantial additional rollover at higher rates could further increase interest’s budget share.
  • Official long‑term projections do not currently foresee interest ever reaching 30% of total outlays under baseline assumptions, which suggests Sacks’s 30% figure is much higher than mainstream forecasts. But since his statement concerns a future condition that may not yet have occurred—and projections decades out are uncertain—it cannot be definitively falsified at this time.

Given (1) interest costs are rising but still far below 30% of federal spending, and (2) the triggering condition and timeline remain ambiguous, the fairest assessment as of November 2025 is that the prediction’s truth value is not yet knowable, hence “inconclusive.”

economypolitics
The Biden administration's mid‑2021 fiscal and monetary agenda—characterized by very large spending and tax increases—will backfire over the next few years by undermining the anticipated post‑COVID economic boom (e.g., via higher inflation, higher interest rates, and weaker growth), in a way comparable to the economic disappointment under President Jimmy Carter.
It's going to backfire. I think it's going to backfire massively.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that the Biden administration’s 2021 fiscal/monetary agenda would “backfire massively,” undermining the post‑COVID boom via inflation, higher rates, and weaker growth, in a way comparable to the Carter‑era economic disappointment.

What actually happened over the next few years:

  1. Growth and jobs remained strong (boom not derailed)

    • Real U.S. GDP grew about 6.1% in 2021, 2.5% in 2022, 2.9% in 2023, and 2.8% in 2024—a solid expansion after the COVID recession and stronger than many other advanced economies. (trendonify.com)
    • Unemployment fell from a 14.8% peak in April 2020 back to 3.5% by July 2022, and was still only about 4.1–4.2% in late 2024, historically low by U.S. standards. (bls.gov)
    • Analyses by outlets like the IMF, major newspapers, and think tanks describe the U.S. as achieving something close to a “soft landing,” with the U.S. economy significantly outperforming Europe and most G7 peers in the recovery. (meetings.imf.org)
      These outcomes are inconsistent with a “massive” backfire that seriously undercut the boom.
  2. Inflation and interest rates did spike—partly due to fiscal policy—but then came back down

    • CPI inflation did climb sharply: about 4.7% in 2021, 8.0% in 2022, then fell to ~4.1% in 2023 and ~3% in 2024–25. (bls.gov)
    • The Fed responded with aggressive rate hikes, taking policy rates from near zero in 2021 to restrictive levels above 5% by 2023–24 (widely documented in Fed commentary and media).
    • Mainstream assessments find the American Rescue Plan and related fiscal support did contribute meaningfully to the inflation spike—often estimated at about 2–4 percentage points of extra inflation in 2021–22—but also emphasize that it accelerated growth and the jobs recovery and that global supply shocks were major drivers as well. (politifact.com)
      So there was some “backfire” in the narrow sense of higher inflation and rates, but this did not translate into a broad macroeconomic bust.
  3. Outcome was not comparable to the Carter‑era stagflation

    • During the late 1970s/early 1980s, U.S. inflation averaged around 7–9% with peaks above 13%, unemployment ran much higher, and interest rates and the “misery index” (inflation + unemployment) hit record levels near 22. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • By contrast, in 2023–24 U.S. inflation had fallen back to roughly 3–4%, unemployment hovered around 3.7–4.2%, and real GDP growth remained positive—conditions that economists explicitly describe as not comparable to 1970s stagflation. (econofact.org)

Because the core of Sacks’s prediction was not just that inflation and interest rates would rise, but that the Biden program would “backfire massively” by derailing the post‑COVID boom in a Carter‑like way, and the subsequent data instead show a strong (if bumpy) expansion with low unemployment, a soft‑landing–type outcome, and no 1970s‑style stagnation, the prediction is best judged as wrong overall. It got the inflation spike directionally right but overstated the scale and long‑run macro damage.

healthscienceai
mRNA vaccine/platform technology proven in Covid-19 vaccines will be successfully repurposed in the future for other diseases, potentially including therapeutic applications that directly target and attack certain types of cancer cells.
even the new mRNA vaccines that were developed for Covid. I mean, it's miraculous, right? And we're going to be able to use that same mRNA technology for other things, other diseases, maybe even to attack cancer cells.View on YouTube
Explanation

By late 2025, the core of Sacks’s prediction has been borne out.

  1. mRNA platform successfully repurposed for other diseases
    After COVID-19, mRNA vaccine technology was indeed used for a different infectious disease. On May 31, 2024, the U.S. FDA approved Moderna’s mRNA RSV vaccine mRESVIA (mRNA‑1345) for adults 60 and older, explicitly described by the company as its second approved mRNA product and as building on “the strength and versatility of our mRNA platform.” (investors.modernatx.com) This shows the COVID‑proven mRNA platform being successfully repurposed for another disease (RSV), matching his claim that “we’re going to be able to use that same mRNA technology for other things, other diseases.”

  2. Therapeutic cancer applications are now working in trials
    While no mRNA cancer therapy has full regulatory approval yet, mRNA-based therapeutics that directly target cancer cells have shown clear clinical success:

    • Moderna and Merck’s personalized mRNA cancer vaccine mRNA‑4157 (V940), which encodes patient‑specific tumor neoantigens, in combination with Keytruda, met its primary endpoint in the Phase 2b KEYNOTE‑942 melanoma trial, significantly reducing risk of recurrence or death compared with Keytruda alone. (investors.modernatx.com)
    • Updated three‑year follow‑up data reported in 2023–2024 showed that the combo reduced the risk of recurrence or death by about 49% and the risk of distant metastasis or death by about 62% versus Keytruda alone, confirming sustained benefit. (merck.com)
    • News coverage and oncologists have described these results as “extremely impressive,” highlighting that this personalized mRNA jab for melanoma roughly halves recurrence compared with standard immunotherapy alone. (theguardian.com)

    These are precisely therapeutic mRNA applications designed to help the immune system recognize and attack cancer cells, aligning with his “maybe even to attack cancer cells” speculation.

Because (a) the mRNA platform has demonstrably been repurposed beyond COVID-19 to at least one other major disease with an approved product, and (b) mRNA cancer therapeutics that directly target tumors have achieved positive randomized clinical trial results and are in advanced development, the prediction is best characterized as right, even though some cancer applications are still in the regulatory pipeline rather than fully licensed therapies.

Sacks @ 00:21:38Inconclusive
health
The learning loss and social isolation from approximately a year of COVID-related school closures in the early 2020s may produce negative effects that persist across an entire generation of affected students (i.e., long-lasting impacts observable for decades).
We had school closures for a year. The learning loss and the isolation that kids have experienced. We don't even know what the results of this are going to be. This could be a generational consequence.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim (normalized) is that roughly a year of COVID-era school closures may cause learning loss and social isolation whose negative effects persist across an entire generation of affected students, i.e., for decades.

What we know by late 2025:

  • Severe and persistent learning loss is well documented. Global analyses by the World Bank, UNESCO, and UNICEF estimate that this cohort of students stands to lose around $17 trillion in lifetime earnings, warning that learning losses from COVID-19 school closures could “impoverish a whole generation” of students. These estimates project long-run income and productivity losses over their working lives, not just short-term setbacks. (unesco.org)
  • Long-run economic and social impacts are explicitly expected to last for decades. World Bank work on learning loss projects that school disruptions have permanently reduced learning-adjusted years of schooling for the current cohort and will lower their lifetime earnings; recent summaries state that these learning losses can translate into lower productivity, greater inequality, and increased risk of social unrest “for decades to come,” unless aggressively remediated. (blogs.worldbank.org)
  • Educational recovery has been slow, not complete. In the U.S., 2024 NAEP assessments show high school seniors’ math and reading scores at their worst levels in roughly two decades, with large shares of students below basic proficiency, and experts noting that the pandemic exacerbated an already downward trend rather than being fully reversed by 2024–25. Five years after the initial disruptions, many students remain significantly behind pre‑pandemic benchmarks. (apnews.com)
  • Youth mental health and development show sustained harm. Studies and surveillance data indicate marked increases in anxiety, depression, suicidal thoughts, and other mental health problems among adolescents associated with pandemic isolation and disruption. Some research links post‑shutdown adolescents to worse mental health and signs of accelerated or stress‑like brain aging relative to pre‑pandemic peers, and CDC data show substantial burdens of poor mental health and suicidal behavior tied to pandemic‑era adverse experiences. (nimh.nih.gov)
  • Five years of follow‑up is still far short of a “generational” timescale. Some longitudinal and follow‑up work finds that many adolescents are still experiencing elevated mental health problems and functional difficulties about five years after the first lockdowns, suggesting multi‑year consequences but not yet documenting outcomes across their full adulthood. (dw.com)

Putting this together:

  • The evidence already strongly supports multi‑year, potentially lifetime impacts on learning and earnings for the cohort exposed to prolonged school closures, and it shows sustained mental health consequences. These findings make Sacks’ warning about a possible “generational consequence” plausible and well‑grounded.
  • However, the core of the prediction is about decades‑long, generation‑wide outcomes (e.g., actual lifetime earnings, adult health, social stability). As of 2025, the affected students have only advanced a few school grades; their full working lives and long‑term adult outcomes have not yet unfolded.

Because the crucial part of the claim concerns effects spanning an entire generation over decades, and we are only about four to five years past the closures, the prediction cannot yet be definitively judged as right or wrong. The best characterization is “too early to tell,” even though current data point strongly in the direction he feared.

Sacks @ 01:16:18Inconclusive
techgovernment
At some future point (no specific date given), the major U.S. tech platforms like Amazon, Google, Apple, and Facebook will be subjected to antitrust or similar regulatory actions that will break them up or significantly reduce their consolidated power.
I agree with Chamath. I think I don't know exactly when, but I think these companies are going to get broken up and knocked down because they are too powerful.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that, at some unspecified future time, dominant U.S. tech platforms such as Amazon, Google, Apple, and Facebook/Meta would be broken up or otherwise knocked down because they are too powerful.

As of 30 November 2025, none of these firms has actually been broken up or forced to divest major businesses by a final, implemented antitrust remedy. In the main U.S. search-monopoly case, a judge has ruled that Google violated Section 2 of the Sherman Act, and the DOJ has formally asked for structural remedies such as forcing Google to sell the Chrome browser and potentially Android, but the remedies phase is still underway and no divestiture order has yet been issued. (en.wikipedia.org) In a separate U.S. ad-tech case, a court found Google illegally monopolized parts of the open‑web ad‑tech stack; the DOJ is now seeking divestiture of key ad‑tech units, with a remedies hearing scheduled, but again no breakup has yet been ordered or carried out. (en.wikipedia.org)

Apple, Meta, and Amazon are likewise facing major antitrust actions, but outcomes are still pending. The DOJ’s 2024 smartphone‑monopoly case against Apple survived a motion to dismiss and is moving forward with no remedy determined. (en.wikipedia.org) The FTC’s case against Meta, which seeks structural relief around Instagram and WhatsApp, only went to trial in April 2025 and has not yet produced a decision. (en.wikipedia.org) The FTC’s large antitrust suit against Amazon’s marketplace is scheduled for trial in 2027, while a separate case over dark patterns in Prime signups ended in a monetary settlement and conduct changes, not a breakup. (barrons.com)

Outside the U.S., the EU’s Digital Markets Act has imposed tough conduct rules and significant fines on gatekeepers such as Alphabet, Amazon, Apple, and Meta, and it allows for structural remedies (including breakups) in cases of systematic non‑compliance. However, enforcement to date has consisted of fines and behavioral orders, not forced divestitures or corporate breakups. (commission.europa.eu)

Given that (1) the companies have not yet been broken up and (2) the major antitrust and regulatory proceedings that might eventually produce such outcomes remain unresolved, the prediction cannot currently be called right or wrong. It is simply too early to tell whether these actions will ultimately break up the firms or significantly reduce their consolidated power, so the result is best classified as inconclusive.

politicseconomy
The tax increase on long‑term capital gains proposed by Biden in April 2021 will be included in the second 'human infrastructure' bill, that bill will pass Congress, and the federal long‑term capital‑gains rate for high earners will be raised substantially (significantly above 20%), even if the final rate is lower than 39.6%.
I think I think it could pass because I think they're planning to do this tax increase as part of the second infrastructure bill... I think that bill will pass. I don't know if the rate will stay at 39.6, but I think there will be a big increase clearly in the cap gains rate.View on YouTube
Explanation

Biden’s April 2021 proposal called for raising the top long‑term capital‑gains rate for high earners from 20% to 39.6% (plus the 3.8% NIIT) as part of his American Families Plan / broader economic agenda. That increase was envisioned to move through a second, more "human infrastructure"‑focused bill (often discussed alongside or after the American Jobs Plan / physical infrastructure bill).

What actually happened:

  1. No long‑term capital‑gains rate hike for individuals was enacted. The Inflation Reduction Act of 2022 (the major tax-and-spending bill that did pass via budget reconciliation) focused on: a 15% corporate minimum tax, a 1% stock‑buyback excise tax, enhanced IRS enforcement, and clean‑energy and health‑care provisions. It did not raise the statutory long‑term capital‑gains rate for high‑income individuals; the top federal LTCG rate remains 20% (plus the 3.8% NIIT) for high earners.
  2. The broader “human infrastructure” / Build Back Better vision never passed in the form that contained a large individual capital‑gains hike. A more expansive Build Back Better bill—where such individual tax hikes were negotiated—stalled in the Senate and was never enacted. Its eventual successor, the Inflation Reduction Act, omitted the long‑term capital‑gains rate increase.

Because (a) the second “human infrastructure” bill in the sense anticipated did not pass with those provisions, and (b) the federal top long‑term capital‑gains rate for high earners was not raised substantially above 20%, Sacks’s combined prediction—that the tax hike would be included in that second bill, that bill would pass, and that the LTCG rate would be substantially increased—is wrong.

politicsgovernment
On appeal, Derek Chauvin’s defense team may cite Maxine Waters’ public comments as a ground for overturning the verdict, but that argument will not succeed unless they can show actual jury contamination from those comments; absent such proof, the conviction will be upheld on that issue.
So yeah, they could use it. But but I don't think it's I don't think it's going to work unless they can prove that somehow the jury was contaminated by what they were hearing on TV.View on YouTube
Explanation

Derek Chauvin’s team did in fact invoke Rep. Maxine Waters’ comments in challenging the verdict. In the trial court, Chauvin moved for a mistrial on April 19, 2021, explicitly citing Waters’ remarks that protesters should “stay on the street” and “get more confrontational” if he were acquitted; Judge Cahill denied the motion. (law.justia.com) On direct appeal, Chauvin argued that pervasive publicity and prejudicial statements by elected officials (including Waters) required a change of venue, a continuance, sequestration, or a new trial, but the Minnesota Court of Appeals held that the district court had taken sufficient steps to mitigate publicity, verified that jurors could be fair and impartial, and therefore had not abused its discretion—i.e., no actual or presumed prejudice was shown. (law.justia.com) The court affirmed his conviction, and both the Minnesota Supreme Court and the U.S. Supreme Court declined to disturb that result. (en.wikipedia.org) There has been no appellate finding that Waters’ comments contaminated the jury or warranted reversal, and the conviction has been upheld against all such publicity-based challenges. (ny1.com) This matches Sacks’ prediction that the defense could try to use Waters’ remarks on appeal, but that absent proof of actual jury contamination, the conviction would be upheld on that issue.

economyhealthpolitics
Around 5–6 months after mid‑April 2021 (i.e., by roughly September–October 2021, when the California gubernatorial recall election occurs), the U.S. economy will be booming again, COVID-19 will effectively be over as a major issue, and California voters will largely have forgotten Governor Newsom's earlier mishandling of vaccines.
despite all of that, by the time we actually get around to the recall, which will be in about 5 or 6 months, uh, the recall election, you know, the economy is going to be booming again. COVID's going to be over. People will probably forget.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessing the three main components of Sacks’s prediction against what actually happened by the California recall election on September 14, 2021:

  1. "The economy is going to be booming again"
    At the national level, this was broadly accurate.

    • Real U.S. GDP grew about 5.9–6.2% in 2021, the fastest annual growth since the mid‑1980s, reflecting a strong post‑COVID rebound. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The unemployment rate fell from 6.1% in April 2021 to 4.8% by September 2021, a steep improvement, even though the September jobs report (194,000 jobs added vs. ~500,000 expected) disappointed forecasters. (bls.gov)
      Overall, many economists and officials described the 2021 recovery as very strong; calling the economy “booming” is defensible.
  2. "COVID's going to be over" (as an issue by the recall)
    This was clearly false.

    • The Delta variant wave peaked in mid‑September 2021, with around 127,000 new U.S. cases per day, and hospitals across the country were again in crisis conditions. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • By mid‑September, the U.S. had surpassed 40 million cases and more than 675,000 deaths, exceeding estimated U.S. deaths from the 1918 flu; by early October, deaths passed 700,000. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In the California recall exit polls, roughly one‑third of voters said the ongoing COVID‑19 pandemic was the most important issue facing the state—the single top concern—indicating COVID was very much not “over” as a major political or public concern. (cbsnews.com)
  3. "People will probably forget" Newsom’s earlier vaccine/ COVID missteps
    Partly but not fully accurate; voters didn’t forget the pandemic, but earlier anger over vaccine rollout largely faded.

    • Early 2021 polling (e.g., Berkeley IGS in February) found strong dissatisfaction with Newsom’s handling of COVID and especially vaccine distribution—only about 22–29% rated vaccine rollout as good or excellent, and his pandemic handling was widely criticized. (calmatters.org)
    • By September 2021, however, a PPIC survey cited in CNBC found that over three‑quarters of Californians thought the state government was doing an “excellent or good” job distributing COVID vaccines, and roughly 6 in 10 approved of Newsom’s overall pandemic response. (cnbc.com)
    • High‑vaccination counties voted strongly to keep Newsom, and analyses of the recall emphasized that his pro‑vaccine, pro‑mandate stance had become a political asset, not a liability; Newsom explicitly framed his victory as a mandate for his COVID and vaccination policies. (cnbc.com)
      So, while voters absolutely had not “forgotten” COVID—the issue was front and center in their minds—they had largely moved past or forgiven the earlier vaccine‑rollout problems by the time of the recall.

Overall judgment

  • The economic part of the prediction was broadly right.
  • The central claim that “COVID’s going to be over” and thus no longer a major issue was decisively wrong: the Delta surge was peaking, and COVID was the top issue in California’s recall. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Voters didn’t forget the pandemic; instead, they ended up largely approving of Newsom’s later COVID/vaccine policies and kept him in office.

Because the most consequential part of the scenario—COVID being effectively “over” as a major issue by the recall—turned out to be incorrect, the overall prediction is best classified as wrong, albeit with some partially correct components about economic recovery and the fading of anger over the initial vaccine rollout.

economyhealth
In the United States, the post‑COVID economy will rebound strongly in 2021, with a boom resembling a "Roaring 20s" environment; specifically, unemployment will fall to roughly 3% by the end of 2021 and the acute phase of the COVID-19 crisis in the U.S. will effectively be over by May 2021.
Everyone's been lulled into a false sense of security because interest rates are so low... the economy is getting better. Right? It looks like we're about to have the Roaring 20s. The economy looks like it's rebounding. It's about to boom. Goldman Sachs says we're going to be down to like 3% unemployment by the end of the year. It's coming back really fast. Covid is going to be over in May.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks tied several specific claims together: (1) a very strong post‑COVID boom in 2021, (2) U.S. unemployment falling to roughly 3% by the end of 2021, and (3) COVID in the U.S. being effectively “over in May” 2021.

  1. Economic rebound / “Roaring 20s” boom
    The direction of this part was broadly right. U.S. real GDP grew about 5.7% in 2021, the strongest annual growth since the early 1980s, with broad-based increases in consumption and investment, consistent with a sharp post‑pandemic rebound. (bea.gov) Labor markets also recovered rapidly, with solid job creation and falling unemployment. (unemploymentdata.com) So the general idea of a strong 2021 recovery was largely accurate.

  2. Unemployment at ~3% by end of 2021
    However, the specific unemployment call was too optimistic. The official U.S. unemployment rate in December 2021 was 3.9% (seasonally adjusted), not “about 3%.” (unemploymentdata.com) The annual average unemployment rate for 2021 was about 5.4%, well above 3%. (theworlddata.com) While unemployment did fall quickly, it did not reach the low‑3% range he endorsed.

  3. COVID “over in May” 2021
    This part of the prediction clearly failed. In May 2021, the U.S. was still recording tens of thousands of new COVID cases per day; CDC data show a 7‑day average of roughly 21,000–35,000 daily cases that month. (archive.cdc.gov) The federal COVID-19 public health emergency was repeatedly renewed through 2021 and 2022 and did not expire until May 11, 2023. (aota.org) Later in 2021, the Delta variant drove a major surge; by mid‑August the U.S. was back above 130,000 cases per day and hospitals in many regions were at or near crisis levels. (en.wikipedia.org) That is inconsistent with the acute phase being “over” by May 2021.

Overall: The broad call of a strong economic rebound was directionally correct, but the specific unemployment target was missed and the assertion that COVID would be “over in May” 2021 was decisively wrong given ongoing high transmission, renewed surges, and the continuation of the federal public health emergency into 2023. Taken as a single bundled prediction, this makes the overall forecast wrong.

economygovernment
Because the U.S. is using extreme fiscal measures (multi‑trillion‑dollar stimulus) in 2021 despite a rebounding economy, if another major economic emergency occurs in the near future, the federal government will have significantly reduced fiscal capacity to respond effectively.
we're breaking the glass in case of emergency when there is no emergency. And what happens if there is another emergency?View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ claim was conditional: because the U.S. used very large stimulus in 2020–21 despite a rebounding economy, if another major economic emergency occurred in the near future, the federal government would have much less fiscal capacity to respond effectively.

Facts that support the premise of his concern:

  • Between the CARES Act and related packages in 2020 and the $2.3T Consolidated Appropriations Act plus the $1.9T American Rescue Plan in late 2020–2021, the U.S. undertook extraordinary multi‑trillion‑dollar fiscal measures.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Debt and deficits remained historically high afterward: public debt hovered around ~95–100% of GDP in 2022–23, and total federal debt exceeded 120% of GDP by 2024–25, with deficits above 6% of GDP.(ycharts.com)
  • Nominal debt rose from about $27.7T in 2021 to $34–35T in 2023–24 and then over $37–38T by 2025, well above pre‑COVID levels.(visualcapitalist.com)
  • All three major rating agencies (S&P, Fitch, Moody’s) have now downgraded U.S. sovereign debt, explicitly citing high and rising debt, large structural deficits, and the increased vulnerability of the fiscal position to future shocks.(cnbc.com)

However, the test of his prediction—another major economic emergency in the “near future” that required large new fiscal action—has not clearly occurred:

  • After 2021, the U.S. did not experience a COVID‑scale or 2008‑style recession. Growth remained positive in 2022–24, with many observers characterizing the outcome as a “soft landing,” not a deep crisis.(cnbc.com)
  • The main genuine shock, the 2023 regional banking crisis (SVB, Signature, First Republic), was addressed primarily through regulatory and monetary tools: the Treasury authorized a systemic risk exception so the FDIC could guarantee all deposits at SVB and Signature, and the Federal Reserve launched the Bank Term Funding Program to provide emergency liquidity.(en.wikipedia.org) These moves did not require a massive new fiscal stimulus bill from Congress, and there is no clear evidence that high pandemic‑era debt prevented such a bill; the constraint was more political than market‑driven.

Because:

  1. No crisis comparable to 2020 or 2008 struck in the “near future” window where very large discretionary fiscal action was clearly needed, and
  2. In the main shock that did occur (the 2023 banking turmoil), the government was able to mount an effective response using existing tools, without evident bond‑market refusal or an explicit statement that fiscal space was exhausted,

we cannot empirically determine whether 2020–21 stimulus in fact left the U.S. unable to respond fiscally to a major new emergency. The underlying fiscal risk he pointed to is real and documented, but his specific conditional prediction about future emergency response capacity has not been decisively confirmed or falsified.

Therefore the appropriate classification is ambiguous: enough time has passed to judge the “near future,” but the required triggering event (a comparable major economic emergency demanding large new fiscal stimulus) never fully materialized, so the prediction’s accuracy can’t be cleanly evaluated.

Sacks @ 01:02:47Inconclusive
economygovernment
If California enacts the proposed state-level wealth tax (AC 8 as described: 1% over $50M and 1.5% over $1B), it will not raise the projected ~$22 billion annually; instead, overall California tax revenue will decrease relative to the no-wealth-tax baseline because enough affected high-wealth individuals will leave the state, taking businesses, investment, and associated tax base with them.
They estimate the wealth tax would generate over 22 billion. We've already seen Elon and it won't. That's a static analysis. That's such a stupid analysis because it's completely... You're not going to raise 22 billion from this. You're going to raise it's actually going to lead to a decrease in tax revenue, because so many of these people are going to leave the state and they're going to take investment with them, their businesses with them, their job creation with them.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was conditional on California enacting the proposed state‑level wealth tax (the “California Tax on Extreme Wealth” structured as 1% on wealth over $50M and 1.5% over $1B under ACA 8/AB 310, later AB 2289 and AB 259). The underlying academic analysis indeed projected roughly $22.3B per year in revenue if such a tax were in force. (cffp.recherche.usherbrooke.ca) However, AB 310 (2021–22) failed in committee and died on February 1, 2022, and its successor AB 2289 likewise never advanced to enactment. (legiscan.com) The most recent version, AB 259 with accompanying constitutional amendment ACA 3, was held in the Assembly Revenue and Taxation Committee in January 2024 and did not pass; Governor Newsom publicly opposed wealth‑tax proposals. (a24.asmdc.org) Current overviews as of mid‑2025 confirm that no California wealth tax is in effect; all such proposals have stalled or died in committee. (halberthargrove.com) Because the triggering policy (this specific wealth tax) has never been implemented, there is no empirical basis to judge whether it would have raised the projected revenue or reduced overall tax revenue, so the prediction has not been testable in the real world yet.

politicsgovernment
The California wealth tax proposal being discussed (AC 8, as of early 2021) will fail to obtain sufficient votes in the California legislature and will not be enacted into law in either 2021 or 2022.
So just the mere fact they're proposing this bill, I don't think they're going to get the votes in this legislature. There's six Democrats have already come out against it. So I don't think it's going to pass this year or next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Legislative records show that Assembly Constitutional Amendment 8 (ACA 8), titled “Wealth tax: appropriation limits,” was introduced in March 2021 but never advanced: its official status is listed as “Introduced – Dead” as of May 2, 2022, after being re‑referred to the Assembly Revenue & Taxation Committee, with no floor votes or passage in either chamber in 2021 or 2022. (legiscan.com) Independent coverage likewise notes that ACA 8, tied to an earlier wealth‑tax bill (AB 310), “failed to advance out of its committee.” (caltaxandpolicy.com) Later summaries of California tax policy confirm that no state wealth tax has been enacted at all, let alone via ACA 8 in 2021–2022. (halberthargrove.com) Since the wealth tax amendment did not receive sufficient legislative support and was not enacted into law in 2021 or 2022, Sacks’s prediction is correct.

health
By U.S. Memorial Day 2021 (around May 31, 2021), the Covid-19 pandemic will effectively be "over" in the United States in practical terms (i.e., life largely normalized with restrictions mostly lifted).
we were saying that Covid would be over by Memorial Day.View on YouTube
Explanation

By Memorial Day weekend 2021 (around May 27–31), the U.S. was in a much better place than during the winter peak, but COVID-19 was still clearly ongoing and substantially restricting normal life.

Substantial continuing spread and deaths. Around May 28, 2021, the U.S. seven‑day average was about 17,887 new cases per day, and cumulative deaths had reached roughly 593,000, with more than 33 million infections recorded.(business-standard.com) That is not consistent with a disease being “over,” even in a purely practical sense.

Restrictions were eased, but far from gone. On May 13, 2021, the CDC said fully vaccinated people could forgo masks in most indoor and outdoor settings, but still required masks in health‑care facilities, on public transportation, and wherever businesses or local rules mandated them, while unvaccinated people were still advised to mask and distance.(cnbc.com) Many states and cities maintained their own mandates and capacity rules through and beyond Memorial Day; for example, New Jersey only lifted its indoor mask rule for vaccinated people on May 28 and still required masks in schools, transit, and other high‑risk settings, while Delaware kept approval requirements for large events and had only just lifted its state mask mandate on May 21.(en.wikipedia.org) Nationwide, masks and other rules continued to shape daily activities.

Key populations still unprotected and constrained. FDA and CDC only extended vaccine use to ages 12–15 in mid‑May 2021; children under 12 remained ineligible until late October 2021.(biontechse.gcs-web.com) Guidance at the time emphasized ongoing masking and distancing for unvaccinated children in schools, camps, and other group settings, meaning family life and education were still far from pre‑pandemic normal.(kvia.com)

Later events confirm the pandemic was not “over.” Just two months after Memorial Day, the Delta variant surge forced the CDC on July 27, 2021 to reverse its May guidance and again recommend indoor masking for vaccinated people in areas of substantial or high transmission, underscoring that conditions had not stabilized into a post‑pandemic normal.(cnbc.com)

Behavioral normalization was partial, not "largely" nationwide. Travel for Memorial Day 2021 was forecast to rebound to about 37 million travelers, still about 13% below 2019 levels, and public health officials were explicitly urging continued caution because “the pandemic continues.”(newsroom.aaa.com)

Taken together—ongoing significant case and death counts, broad yet uneven restrictions, large unvaccinated populations (especially children), and a major subsequent surge—the situation around U.S. Memorial Day 2021 does not match the prediction that COVID-19 would be effectively “over” in the United States in practical terms with life largely normalized and restrictions mostly lifted. The prediction is therefore wrong.

Sacks @ 00:57:40Inconclusive
ventureeconomy
Global venture capital annual investment volume will reach approximately $1 trillion by the year 2030.
Wouldn't be surprised if VC hits 1 trillion by 2030.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of 29 November 2025, the target year (2030) has not yet been reached, so it is too early to determine whether the prediction will ultimately be correct.

Available data show that global venture capital (VC) investment has not yet reached $1 trillion annually, but that does not invalidate a “by 2030” prediction:

  • KPMG reports global VC investment hit a record about $671 billion in 2021, up from $347 billion in 2020. (kpmg.com)
  • S&P Global Market Intelligence data show global VC funding totaled about $435.7 billion in 2022 and then fell to about $260 billion in 2023. (spglobal.com)
  • Other analyses put 2023 and 2024 global VC investment in the mid–300 billions, with Chambers & Partners citing USD 345.7 billion in 2023 and USD 368.3 billion in 2024, reflecting a modest recovery but still well below 2021’s peak. (practiceguides.chambers.com)

In all major data series, annual global VC investment is far below $1 trillion as of 2024, and 2025 data are incomplete. However, because the prediction’s horizon is “by 2030” and there are roughly five years remaining, its truth value cannot yet be determined. Therefore the correct classification today is “inconclusive (too early).”

economy
U.S. unemployment, at about 6% in early March 2021, will fall to approximately 3–4% within two quarters (by around September 2021).
We're already down to 6% unemployment. We're going to be down to, I'd say probably 3 or 4% in two quarters.View on YouTube
Explanation

Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) data show the official U‑3 U.S. unemployment rate at 6.2% in February 2021 and 6.0% in March 2021, matching Sacks’s statement that unemployment was about 6% at the time of the podcast.(beautifydata.com)

Sacks predicted that unemployment would fall to “3 or 4% in two quarters”, i.e., roughly by September 2021. However, BLS figures for that period are:

Thus, by the end of the two‑quarter horizon (around September 2021), unemployment had not reached the predicted 3–4% range; it was still nearly 5%. Unemployment did eventually fall into that range later in 2021: BLS data show 4.2% in November 2021 and 3.9% in December 2021, but that is roughly 8–9 months after March 2021 (three quarters, not two).(bts.gov)

Directionally, Sacks was right that unemployment would keep dropping and eventually return to the 3–4% zone, but the timing in his prediction was too aggressive. Because his forecast explicitly specified the two‑quarter horizon, and the target range was not reached by then, the prediction is best classified as wrong on its stated terms.

health
By the end of May 2021, there will be sufficient supply (about 300 million doses) for every American over age 16 who wants a COVID-19 vaccine to be able to receive one.
Biden announced that every American who's over the age of 16, who wants a vaccine will be able to get one by the end of May, by the end of May. I mean, we're going to have 300 million doses.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple lines of evidence show this prediction came true in the intended sense (national supply and eligibility, not that every willing person actually did get vaccinated by that date):

  • On April 30, 2021, White House COVID coordinator Jeff Zients stated that the U.S. had just shipped its 300 millionth COVID‑19 vaccine dose to states, tribes, territories and federal channels, and reiterated that by the end of May the U.S. would have enough vaccine supply for every adult American. (bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov)
  • A CDC‑based cost analysis shows that about 284.6 million doses had been distributed to jurisdictions and 284.2 million administered by May 31, 2021, not counting some federal channels, which is consistent with a total national supply above 300 million doses when federal programs are included. (pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)
  • By April 19, all U.S. states had opened eligibility to everyone aged 16 and older, meaning that by the end of May, any 16+ American who wanted a vaccine could at least book and receive doses as supply allowed. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Independent analyses at the time (e.g., McKinsey) projected that manufacturers were on track to supply enough doses for all eligible U.S. adults by the end of May 2021, and contemporaneous surveys from KFF showed the main emerging constraint was demand, not supply. (mckinsey.com)
  • News coverage in early May reported states beginning to turn down federal vaccine allocations because local demand had slackened, further indicating that vaccine supply was no longer the binding constraint for adults who wanted shots. (en.as.com)

Taken together, these data show that by the end of May 2021 the U.S. had shipped on the order of 300 million doses and had broad 16+ eligibility with excess supply, matching Sacks’s prediction that there would be sufficient vaccine (around 300 million doses) for every American over 16 who wanted one to be able to receive it by then.

healthgovernment
If vaccination is not administratively hindered, by Memorial Day 2021 the COVID-19 pandemic in the U.S. will effectively be over as a pandemic (though sporadic cases will continue), i.e., no longer a large-scale public health emergency.
If the government would just get out of the way, let everyone who wants to get a vaccine get one without worrying about making sure the exact right person and the exact right line gets one first. This thing will be over by Memorial Day. Over. Now, look, there'll still be a case here or there. For sure there'll be. I'm not saying there'll be zero cases of Covid, but there will be zero pandemic understood as such.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key parts of Sacks’s conditional prediction did not come true by Memorial Day 2021:

  • His condition on vaccine access was largely satisfied. By early April 2021, President Biden directed states to make all adults eligible for vaccination by April 19, and by mid‑April essentially all states had opened eligibility to all adults 16+ with a site within about 5 miles for 90% of adults.(cnbc.com) While vaccine rollout was not perfect, access was no longer tightly rationed to small priority groups—substantially matching Sacks’s “let everyone who wants to get a vaccine get one” condition.

  • The pandemic was not over as a large‑scale public health emergency by Memorial Day 2021.

    • The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services’ COVID‑19 Public Health Emergency (PHE) declaration, first issued in January 2020, was explicitly renewed in April 2021 and repeatedly thereafter; in a January 21, 2021 letter HHS told governors it expected the PHE to remain in place for all of 2021.(aspr.hhs.gov) The federal PHE did not actually end until May 11, 2023.(kff.org) That is directly contrary to his benchmark of “no longer a large‑scale public health emergency.”
    • Around Memorial Day weekend 2021, U.S. COVID data still showed substantial transmission and mortality: the 7‑day average of new cases was just under 20,000 per day, and the 7‑day average of deaths was roughly 500–600 per day.(cnbc.com) Contemporary coverage described cases as at their lowest level in a year but clearly still an ongoing pandemic, not "zero pandemic."(cnbc.com)
    • Globally and in the U.S., authorities still framed COVID‑19 as an active pandemic; WHO continued to treat it as a pandemic emergency well past 2021 and only ended the global Public Health Emergency of International Concern in May 2023.(who.int)

Given that (1) vaccines were broadly available by the relevant time, satisfying the spirit of his condition, but (2) COVID‑19 in the U.S. was still officially and substantively a major public health emergency with tens of thousands of new cases and hundreds of deaths per day, Sacks’s claim that there would be "zero pandemic understood as such" in the U.S. by Memorial Day 2021 is best classified as wrong.

healtheconomy
By June 2021, COVID-19 will no longer function as a pandemic in the U.S., but the virus will persist and recur thereafter as a seasonal illness.
Covid as a pandemic is going to be over by June. Okay. But there will always be cases of Covid. It's going to return as a seasonal illness.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction has two parts, and together they do not hold up.

  1. “By June 2021, Covid as a pandemic is going to be over [in the U.S.]”
    • In early June 2021 the U.S. was still recording roughly 14,000 new cases and about 400 deaths per day, with tens of thousands of new infections each week and many restrictions and emergency measures still in place. (archive.cdc.gov)
    • Far from being “over,” the U.S. then experienced a large Delta surge starting in the summer of 2021, with cases and hospitalizations rising sharply as Delta became the dominant variant. (statnews.com)
    • This was followed by the massive Omicron wave in winter 2021–22, which produced the most intense phase of U.S. transmission, with daily new cases peaking at over 1.25 million and a seven‑day average near 600,000 cases in January 2022. (pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)
    These large national waves after June 2021 indicate that Covid was still functioning as a pandemic in the U.S. well beyond the date he specified.

  2. “There will always be cases… It’s going to return as a seasonal illness.”
    • The persistence part is correct: as of 2025, experts widely describe Covid as an endemic virus that continues to circulate year‑round in the U.S., causing recurrent waves rather than disappearing. (washingtonpost.com)
    • However, Covid has not clearly settled into a simple, flu‑like winter‑only pattern. Analyses through 2023–25 emphasize that SARS‑CoV‑2 still produces sizable waves in multiple seasons (including summer), and that its transmission has not yet fallen into a stable, predictable seasonal rhythm. (statnews.com)

Because (a) the time‑specific claim that the pandemic phase in the U.S. would be “over by June 2021” is clearly refuted by subsequent large national waves, and (b) the virus’s behavior to date is more accurately described as year‑round endemic with complex surges rather than a straightforward seasonal illness, the overall prediction is best judged wrong.

Government proposals for digital vaccination passports will fade away quickly once the COVID-19 pandemic period ends (i.e., they will not persist long-term after mid‑2021).
I just think proposals like this are I think they're going to fade away very quickly once Covid is over.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that government proposals for digital vaccination passports would "fade away very quickly once Covid is over," i.e., would not persist long after mid‑2021.

In reality, governments expanded and institutionalized digital vaccine credentials well beyond that timeframe:

  • The EU Digital COVID Certificate (EU DCC) was formally in force from 1 July 2021 until 30 June 2023, and its regulation was explicitly extended by one year to mid‑2023 rather than allowed to lapse in 2022. It was used across all EU member states, facilitated free movement, and became a global reference standard for travel, with over a billion certificates issued and dozens of non‑EU countries connected. (consilium.europa.eu)
  • Instead of being retired when the WHO declared the end of the COVID‑19 global health emergency in May 2023, the EU DCC framework was handed over to the World Health Organization. WHO and the European Commission launched the Global Digital Health Certification Network in June–July 2023, explicitly building on the EU DCC to support ongoing verification of COVID‑19 and other vaccination certificates for future health threats. (who.int)
  • In the United States, no single federal passport was issued, but a de facto national standard emerged: SMART Health Cards. By early 2022, at least 21 states plus DC and Puerto Rico offered SMART Health Cards as verifiable digital proof of vaccination, and more than 200 million Americans could obtain such credentials. These were explicitly described by public and private stakeholders as the national standard for digital vaccine verification and used for travel and access to venues. (forbes.com)
  • New York’s Excelsior Pass, a prominent state-run digital vaccine passport used for entry to restaurants and entertainment venues, launched in 2021 and was not decommissioned until July 28, 2023—over two years after mid‑2021 and months after the U.S. federal public health emergency ended. (ny1.com)

While most day-to-day access mandates eased by 2022, digital vaccine-passport systems did not quickly disappear once the acute COVID period passed; they were extended, widely adopted, and repurposed into longer-term digital health credential infrastructure. That outcome is opposite to Sacks’s claim that such proposals would fade away very quickly once Covid was over, so the prediction is best judged as wrong.

healthgovernment
By June 1, 2021, COVID-19 vaccines will be sufficiently available in the U.S. that there will no longer be a public-health justification for emergency government powers such as lockdowns and mask mandates; at that point, such measures will not be needed.
Once everyone can get the vaccine. And I think that would...Availability. So I mean, look what we should say and it will be available as long as, you know, governors like Newsom get out of the way and stop restricting the administration of it. But I think we need to declare a date certain where we say, listen, on June 1st, there is no more justification for government having these extraordinary powers to lock us down to require us. I don't think we even need to wear a mask beyond June 1st.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence indicates that by June 1, 2021, COVID-19 vaccines were broadly available in the U.S., but public‑health authorities still judged that emergency powers and some mask requirements remained justified, and subsequent events (e.g., the Delta wave) confirmed that such measures were in fact needed.

Vaccine availability by June 1, 2021

  • All U.S. adults 16+ were eligible for vaccination by April 19, 2021; all 50 states, DC, and Puerto Rico had opened eligibility by that date. (cdc.gov)
  • By June 1, 2021, about 50–51% of the total U.S. population had received at least one dose and about 40–41% were fully vaccinated. (usafacts.org) Among adults 18+, roughly 57% had at least one dose by May 22, 2021. (cdc.gov) Supply was no longer the binding constraint; experts were already warning that supply would outstrip demand by May. (mckinsey.com)
  • So the narrow claim that vaccines would be “available” by around June 1 was broadly accurate.

But emergency powers and mask justifications did not disappear by June 1

  • The federal COVID‑19 public‑health emergency, first declared in January 2020, was renewed on April 15, 2021 and repeatedly thereafter; HHS explicitly stated that a nationwide public‑health emergency still existed due to the ongoing consequences of COVID‑19. (aota.org) That is directly contrary to the idea that there was “no more justification” for emergency powers by June 1, 2021.
  • CDC’s May 13, 2021 guidance allowed fully vaccinated people to forgo masks in many settings, but still required or recommended masks in specific contexts (e.g., public transportation, crowded indoor spaces) and continued to advise masking for the unvaccinated. (dw.com) Thus, the leading federal public‑health authority did not consider masks categorically unnecessary after June 1.
  • Many state and local mandates and emergency orders remained in force past June 1. For example, Pennsylvania’s statewide mask mandate was not lifted until June 28, 2021, and even then masks were still required on planes, trains, buses, and other public transportation. (en.wikipedia.org) Several states (e.g., Hawaii and others listed in state‑by‑state mask‑policy summaries) maintained some form of mask requirements or emergency orders well beyond that date. (en.wikipedia.org)

Subsequent developments showed non‑pharmaceutical measures were still needed

  • In June 2021, the more transmissible Delta variant was rapidly spreading in the U.S. and internationally; CDC and other experts warned that multicomponent prevention strategies, including indoor masking irrespective of vaccination status in high‑incidence areas, might be needed alongside vaccination. (cdc.gov)
  • Delta became the predominant U.S. variant in late June 2021 and drove a major surge in cases during July–September 2021. (cdc.gov) CDC data show the 7‑day average of U.S. cases bottomed around 11–12k in mid‑June, then climbed to over 130k by early September 2021. (archive.cdc.gov) During this wave, many jurisdictions re‑imposed or tightened mask guidance and other public‑health measures, confirming that such tools were still needed even with substantial vaccine availability.

Assessment

  • Sacks’ prediction tied vaccine availability to the end of any public‑health justification for emergency powers and masks: he argued that “on June 1st, there is no more justification for government having these extraordinary powers” and that “we even need to wear a mask beyond June 1st” would no longer be true.
  • While vaccine supply was indeed ample by around that date, the continued federal public‑health emergency, ongoing CDC mask recommendations (especially for unvaccinated people and in specific settings), persistent state‑level mandates, and the rapid emergence of the Delta‑driven surge all show that significant public‑health justification for such powers and measures remained.

Because the central, time‑bound claim—that after June 1, 2021 there would be no public‑health justification for emergency powers or masks—was contradicted by policy, expert guidance, and eventual outcomes, the prediction is best categorized as wrong.

politicsgovernment
The Gavin Newsom recall petition in California will surpass 2 million signatures by roughly two weeks from early March 2021 (the end of the signature period), with a validation rate of about 84%, leading to a certified recall election to be held around August 2021.
They're up to 1.95 million signatures...They will be at or over 2,000,000 in 2 weeks, which is the end of the signature period. Their validation rate is about 84%. So I think this is clearly going to pass. There will be a recall election. It will be around August.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that the substance of Sacks’ prediction was borne out, with only a minor miss on the exact election date:

  • Signatures surpassing 2 million by end of the period: The recall campaign ultimately submitted 2,117,730 signatures by the March 2021 deadline, exceeding 2 million, as recorded in the California Secretary of State–summarized history of the 2021 recall petition. (en.wikipedia.org) This matches his claim that they would be “at or over 2,000,000 in 2 weeks, which is the end of the signature period.” Contemporary coverage in early March 2021 already had organizers announcing about 1,950,000 collected signatures and “nearing 2 million.” (californiaglobe.com)

  • Validation rate around the mid‑80s: An early–February 2021 status report from the Secretary of State, cited by the Los Angeles Times, found about 84% of the signatures submitted at that point were valid. (latimes.com) The final official tally after the March 17 deadline was 1,719,943 valid of 2,117,730 submitted, about 81%, still a high validation rate and reasonably close to his “about 84%” statement, which reflected the then-current official figure. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Certified recall election taking place: On April 26, 2021, the Secretary of State announced that the recall effort had enough valid signatures to qualify for the ballot; after the withdrawal window, a final count of 1,719,900 valid signatures confirmed that the recall election would be held. (en.wikipedia.org) This fulfills his prediction that “this is clearly going to pass. There will be a recall election.”

  • Timing of the recall election (“around August”): After certification on July 1, 2021, Lieutenant Governor Eleni Kounalakis set the recall election date for September 14, 2021. (sos.ca.gov) That’s roughly one month later than “around August,” but still in late summer 2021 and within the same general timeframe he anticipated.

Given that:

  • the petition did surpass 2 million signatures by the deadline,
  • the validation rate was indeed high and in the low‑ to mid‑80% range at the time of his comment,
  • and a recall election was duly certified and held in late summer 2021,

the forecast’s key claims proved accurate. The only notable miss was that the actual election date landed in mid‑September rather than “around August,” which is a relatively small deviation from the predicted timing. Therefore, the overall prediction is best scored as right.

politicsgovernmenthealth
By summer 2021, most other U.S. states will have substantially reopened while California will still be relatively restricted under Governor Newsom—likely without a full agreement to reopen schools with teachers unions—and this perceived laggard status and over‑restrictiveness will become a central issue in the Newsom recall election.
I think what you could see by this summer is that California will look like a laggard. You'll see that politicians like Newsom are holding on to the zero list philosophy. They're being too restrictive. They look ridiculous compared to other states. And he still probably won't have an agreement with the teachers unions to go back to school. And I think this could become the big issue in the in the recall.View on YouTube
Explanation

Key falsifiable elements of Sacks’s prediction did not occur, despite COVID being an important backdrop to the recall.

  1. California as a continued “laggard” by summer 2021 and Newsom clinging to a zero‑COVID style over‑restrictiveness
    • On April 6, 2021, Newsom announced that California would end most COVID restrictions and retire its tiered Blueprint system on June 15, shifting to broad reopening with few capacity limits and focusing mainly on vaccination and masking. The Blueprint and statewide mask mandate were in fact ended June 15; by June 8 most Californians were already under the least‑restrictive “Minimal” tier. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Many states (e.g., Texas, Mississippi, various others) did reopen earlier in spring 2021, but by late May discussion in national coverage and even casual commentary noted that Michigan and some others, not California, would be among the last to fully reopen, and Hawaii had not even set a date. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Exit‑poll analysis from the recall shows that while the pandemic was top of mind, roughly two‑thirds of voters thought Newsom’s COVID policies were about right or not strict enough; only about one‑third saw them as too strict. (latimes.com) Taken together, California was no longer clearly a reopening “laggard” by summer 2021, and the electorate as a whole did not broadly see Newsom as absurdly over‑restrictive in that period.

  2. “He still probably won’t have an agreement with the teachers unions to go back to school”
    • Los Angeles Unified School District and United Teachers Los Angeles announced a tentative agreement on March 9, 2021 to reopen campuses for in‑person instruction beginning mid‑April, with detailed safety protocols; the school board endorsed it. (lausd.org)
    • At the state level, on March 1 California agreed on a $6.6 billion school‑reopening framework that conditioned funds on districts offering in‑person learning for younger and high‑needs students by the end of March. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • UTLA and LAUSD then reached another agreement effective June 23, 2021, setting conditions for full, five‑days‑a‑week in‑person instruction for the 2021–22 school year. (utla.net) By summer 2021, the largest district and its teachers union clearly did have reopening agreements in place, directly contradicting this part of the prediction.

  3. Did Newsom’s supposed over‑restrictiveness become “the big issue” in the recall?
    • The recall petition’s surge was indeed “widely credited” to anger over lockdowns, job losses, and school and business closures, combined with the French Laundry incident. (en.wikipedia.org) COVID policy was central to why the recall qualified.
    • But by the time of the September 14, 2021 election, California had low COVID rates, a large budget surplus, broad economic reopening, and schools back in session, and analysts noted that other issues (homelessness, taxes, cost of living) were also salient. (latimes.com)
    • Exit polls found the pandemic was the single most important issue overall, yet most voters approved of Newsom’s COVID approach, and his campaign successfully framed the recall as a referendum on pro‑versus‑anti‑mandate COVID policy; this helped him defeat the recall by roughly 62%–38%. (cbsnews.com) COVID was important, but not in the predicted way of Newsom being punished for an obviously over‑restrictive, laggard stance.

Because (a) California did not remain a conspicuous reopening laggard under a continuing “zeroism” posture into summer 2021, (b) major school‑reopening agreements with teachers unions were in place well before and during that summer, and (c) while COVID was central, it did not become the dominant issue in the specific punitive way Sacks described, the overall prediction is best characterized as wrong, notwithstanding some partial correctness about COVID being a major context in the recall.

politicsgovernment
There will be a recall election for California Governor Gavin Newsom, held approximately around August 2021.
Newsom is definitely there's going to be a recall election. I think it'll be around August.View on YouTube
Explanation

Gavin Newsom did in fact face a statewide recall election in California in 2021. The official election date was September 14, 2021, as confirmed by the California Secretary of State and contemporaneous election notices. (sos.ca.gov)

Sacks’s timing was slightly off—he said the recall would be “around August,” while the election was ultimately set for mid‑September. However, key election activity (such as mailing vote‑by‑mail ballots) began on August 16, 2021, which is indeed in August and part of the same late‑summer window he was pointing to. (sos.ca.gov)

Because:

  • A recall election did occur, as predicted, and
  • Its timing (mid‑September with election processes starting in mid‑August) reasonably matches “around August,”

the prediction is best classified as right, with a minor timing inaccuracy rather than a substantive failure.

politicsgovernment
The progressive district attorney of Los Angeles County (George Gascón), the district attorney of San Francisco (Chesa Boudin), and California Governor Gavin Newsom will all end up being successfully recalled from office following the then-ongoing efforts circa early 2021.
you have this Da who's going to get basically recalled in Los Angeles. You have a D.A. that's going to get recalled in California. You have an entire, you know, governor of the state that's going to get recalled.View on YouTube
Explanation

Jason Calacanis’ co-host David Sacks predicted that the progressive district attorney of Los Angeles County (George Gascón), the district attorney of San Francisco (Chesa Boudin), and California Governor Gavin Newsom would all be successfully recalled.

What actually happened:

  1. Chesa Boudin (San Francisco DA)Was recalled.

    • San Francisco held a recall election on June 7, 2022. Voters approved removing Boudin from office by roughly 55–60% "yes" on the recall (122,588 yes to 100,177 no). (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. George Gascón (Los Angeles County DA)Was not recalled.

    • A major 2022 recall effort submitted about 715,000 signatures, but after verification only ~520,000 were deemed valid, short of the 566,857 required. County officials therefore rejected the petition and no recall election was held. (abc7.com)
  3. Gavin Newsom (Governor of California)Was not recalled.

    • A statewide recall election was held on September 14, 2021. Voters rejected the recall by a wide margin (about 61.9% "No" to 38.1% "Yes"), and Newsom remained in office. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because only Boudin was successfully recalled, while Gascón’s recall never made the ballot and Newsom survived his recall election, the prediction that all three officials were “going to get recalled” is incorrect overall.

politicsgovernment
Gavin Newsom will be successfully recalled as California governor, with rising crime and problems in education being key drivers of voter support for the recall.
Look, this is why Newsom's going to get recalled is because crime and education are just fundamental issues.View on YouTube
Explanation

Gavin Newsom was not successfully recalled. In the September 14, 2021 California gubernatorial recall election, 61.9% of voters chose No on the recall versus 38.1% Yes, so Newsom remained governor and served out his term. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the core prediction was that “Newsom's going to get recalled,” that part is clearly falsified by the election result. Even though crime and education were issues raised by recall proponents, post-election reporting and exit polls indicate COVID-19 and related pandemic management were the dominant statewide concerns, further undercutting the claim that crime and education would be the key drivers of a successful recall. (cnbc.com)

politics
In the post-Trump era (i.e., over the coming years after early 2021), the dominant emerging fault line in American politics will increasingly be framed as 'insider vs. outsider' rather than traditional 'left vs. right,' and this insider–outsider framing will become a major recurring theme in national political discourse.
And so what you're seeing now is a new fault line in American politics in the post-Trump era. It's not just about left and right anymore. It's about insider versus outsider. And I think this is going to be a major, major theme that we see.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2021 shows that an insider vs. outsider / establishment vs. anti‑establishment cleavage has become a persistent, cross‑cutting theme in U.S. politics, alongside the traditional left–right divide, matching Sacks’s forecast.

  1. Populism and anti‑elite rhetoric are now central to U.S. politics. Political science and reference works describe contemporary right‑wing populism (Trumpism) as built around anti‑elitist, anti‑Establishment appeals, explicitly framing politics as “the people” versus corrupt elites rather than just standard ideology. (en.wikipedia.org) Analyses of Trump’s rhetoric emphasize that his core narrative is a crisis caused by a corrupt political establishment and that he offers himself as a “high‑risk outsider candidate” to overthrow it. (en.wikipedia.org) This outsider‑vs‑establishment framing has remained central through and beyond the 2024 campaign, not just in 2016.

  2. The idea that both parties are a single corrupt insider ‘uniparty’ has gone mainstream. The term uniparty—claiming that Democrats and Republicans operate as one insider cartel—has been widely used in the 2020s by nationally prominent figures like Steve Bannon, Rep. Marjorie Taylor Greene, and especially Robert F. Kennedy Jr. in his 2024 independent presidential campaign, where he denounced the two parties as a “uniparty.” (en.wikipedia.org) This is exactly an “insiders vs. outsiders” frame: both major parties are cast as self‑dealing insiders, while various populist or independent figures claim to represent excluded outsiders.

  3. Candidates across the spectrum deliberately brand themselves as ‘outsiders’ against party establishments. A 2025 Guardian profile of Michigan Senate candidate Abdul El‑Sayed describes him running an explicitly populist, anti‑establishment campaign and repeatedly labels him “a true outsider,” noting that even one of his more moderate Democratic opponents is also styling herself as an outsider despite using establishment consultants. (theguardian.com) Commentary on other would‑be candidates (e.g., pieces floating Stephen A. Smith or other non‑politicians for the presidency) likewise centers on their appeal as political outsiders who can challenge an entrenched establishment and disillusioning party leadership. (newyorker.com) This shows the insider/outsider language has become a standard, recurring way of marketing and analyzing candidates.

  4. Analysts explicitly describe new fault lines that map onto ‘insider vs. outsider’. Commentators and scholars have argued for years that U.S. politics is realigning from a simple liberal‑vs‑conservative split toward a divide between populists and establishment neoliberals or technocrats—an axis that cuts across both parties. (thefederalist.com) Research on populism notes that populist movements systematically dramatize an insider–outsider conflict—“the people” versus “corrupt elites” and other alleged outsiders—and that this pattern has become a core, global theme in 21st‑century democratic politics, including the United States. (populismstudies.org) This is substantively the same cleavage Sacks labeled “insider versus outsider.”

  5. Left–right polarization remains very strong, but Sacks only predicted ‘not just’ left vs. right. Empirical work still finds that partisan and ideological polarization (Democrat vs. Republican, liberal vs. conservative) has grown sharply and remains the primary organizing structure of mass attitudes. (arxiv.org) However, Sacks’s claim was more modest: that in the post‑Trump era it’s not just about left and right anymore and that insider vs. outsider would be a major recurring theme, not that it would replace left–right entirely. Given the entrenched prominence of populist anti‑establishment rhetoric, the spread of ‘uniparty’ and elite‑vs‑people narratives, and the routine branding of candidates in insider/outsider terms across both parties and among independents, that part of his prediction has clearly materialized.

Because the insider–outsider / establishment–anti‑establishment framing has, by 2025, become a pervasive and widely discussed lens for understanding U.S. politics—while Sacks did not require it to supplant left–right altogether—the prediction is best judged as right.

politics
Over the years following early 2021, a substantial political movement will develop across the United States in which voters increasingly oust incumbent 'insider' officeholders and elect new candidates who campaign explicitly on not being beholden to entrenched special interests.
we are going to see a movement of people across this country who are sick and tired of the insiders game, and they're going to rise up and vote these insiders out of office and put in some new people who aren't beholden to these powerful special interests.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available election data since early 2021 show no broad U.S. voter movement systematically ousting incumbents and replacing them with outsider, anti–special-interest candidates.

Across federal, state, and major local races in the November 2022 general election, 94% of incumbents won re‑election, with congressional incumbents (U.S. House and Senate) winning at about a 98% rate, slightly higher than in 2020. This indicates strong incumbent survival rather than a wave of voters “voting insiders out of office.” (inkl.com)

Analysts at the Public Affairs Council and Inside Elections explicitly argued in mid‑2022 that the U.S. was not experiencing a classic “throw the bums out” or anti‑incumbent election, despite low congressional job approval—again emphasizing that incumbents were generally safe. (pac.org)

The same pattern persisted in 2024: an analysis of the November 2024 general election found that about 95% of incumbents nationwide who ran for re‑election won, with congressional incumbents again in the mid‑90s–high‑90s success range, even amid strong public dissatisfaction with “political elites.” (govfacts.org) Detailed 2024 House results, such as in California and Texas, show seat after seat where the status line is “incumbent re‑elected,” with only a small number of losses or open‑seat turnovers—hardly a mass revolt against office‑holding insiders. (en.wikipedia.org)

There are localized examples of insurgent or outsider energy—e.g., hard‑right Freedom Caucus candidates in Wyoming winning enough primaries to control the state House, or multiple Texas state House incumbents losing 2024 primaries—but these are limited, state‑level skirmishes rather than a sustained, nationwide voter movement overthrowing entrenched incumbents at scale. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because incumbency re‑election rates remained extremely high and analysts explicitly characterize recent cycles as not anti‑incumbent, the prediction of a substantial, nationwide movement of voters “rising up” to vote insiders out and replace them with non‑beholden newcomers did not come true in the years after early 2021.

economygovernment
Within the near future (“pretty soon”), the only remaining middle‑class Californians earning over $100,000 per year will mainly be government workers, because most private‑sector middle‑class earners will have left the state due to taxes and regulatory burden.
The only middle class is going to be left in California pretty soon. Uh, our government workers, I mean, that's it. That's the only people going to be making over $100,000 a year in California. Are the government workers, because everyone who's middle class, who's running a business is just is finding it too difficult and too difficult to earn with the level of taxation and to run their business. And they're. ... leaving.View on YouTube
Explanation

By late 2025, California still has a large private‑sector middle class earning above $100,000, so the prediction that "pretty soon" only government workers would be making over $100,000 in the state has not come true.

Key facts:

  • In 2024 the median California household income was about $100,000, meaning roughly half of all households earn more than $100k.(usafacts.org) That is far more households than could plausibly be accounted for by government employees alone.
  • In 2023 there were over 1.7 million private‑sector businesses in California, providing about 15.5 million jobs (86% of all jobs); the entire public sector (state, local, and federal) accounted for only about 2.5 million jobs (14%).(ppic.org) State civil‑service employees are just ~220,000 workers—about 1.2% of all employed Californians.(calhr.ca.gov) Even if every government worker earned over $100,000 (which is not the case), they could not possibly be the "only" people with six‑figure incomes.
  • Many of California’s highest‑paying industries—technology, professional and technical services, finance, and much of health care—are private‑sector. Average weekly earnings for California’s private‑sector workers are around $1,300–$1,400 (roughly $70k+ annually), and in major counties like Santa Clara, average weekly wages exceed $4,000 (over $200k annually).(usafacts.org) This implies millions of private‑sector workers earning well above $100k.
  • Despite significant out‑migration (about 800,000 people leaving the state in 2022), IRS data show that the number of Californians making $1 million or more annually actually increased by about 66% from 2019 to 2021, and 116,000 new millionaires appeared over that period.(californiaglobe.com) That is inconsistent with a collapse of the private‑sector upper‑ and middle‑income population.

Given that (1) the time horizon implicit in "pretty soon" (stated in early 2021) has clearly passed by late 2025, and (2) data show that six‑figure earners in California are still overwhelmingly in the private sector, not concentrated mainly in government jobs, the prediction is best characterized as incorrect.

markets
The early‑2021 GameStop (GME) short‑squeeze episode will ultimately end very badly for participants who buy at inflated prices, with the stock price falling sharply from its squeeze-driven highs rather than remaining sustainably elevated.
Do I personally think GameStop is overvalued? Yes, of course I think it's going to end very badly.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence strongly supports Sacks’s view that the early‑2021 GameStop short squeeze ended badly for buyers at inflated prices.

During the meme frenzy, GameStop (GME) hit an all‑time closing high of about $86.88 on January 27, 2021, and an all‑time intraday high around $120.75 (split‑adjusted) on January 28, 2021.(statmuse.com) Contemporary reporting also describes the stock briefly exceeding $400 pre‑split at the peak of the mania.(businessinsider.com)

Within weeks, the squeeze collapsed: by February 2021 the average closing price was only about $17.89, a 67.9% drop for the month, and coverage notes the stock “plummeted to around $10 by mid‑February 2021.”(statmuse.com) That is a catastrophic outcome for anyone who bought near the late‑January highs.

Over the longer term, GME has never returned to its early‑2021 squeeze levels. Historical data show that from 2024–2025 the shares mostly trade in the $20–30 range, with the latest price around $21–22 as of late 2025, far below the January 2021 peak.(statmuse.com) Recent articles explicitly state that, despite occasional meme‑driven rallies, GameStop “has never returned to its previous highs.”(businessinsider.com)

Given the massive, rapid crash from the squeeze highs and the persistent multi‑year underperformance relative to those peak prices, the prediction that the episode would “end very badly” for those buying at inflated squeeze valuations is borne out by the data.

Sacks @ 00:16:45Inconclusive
politics
If Donald Trump creates a new third party (e.g., the suggested Patriot Party) that substantially splits the right-of-center vote, the Republican Party will effectively lose every major election (at least at the national level) for as long as Trump remains a significant political force.
Oh, it would fracture the Republican Party. It would be, um, I guess the best historical analog would be when Teddy Roosevelt left the party to form the Bull Moose Party, he actually fractured the Republican Party. And that allowed, I think, Woodrow Wilson to win the presidency, beating Taft. Um, yeah. I mean, the Republicans would basically lose every election, um, from now until Trump is no longer a force in American politics. If he created, I guess.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction is explicitly conditional: it describes what would happen if Donald Trump were to create a new third party (e.g., a “Patriot Party”) that splits the right-of-center vote. As of late 2025, Trump has not created or led a formal third party; he has remained within the Republican Party and run as its nominee, rather than heading a separate Patriot Party or similar.

Because the triggering condition (Trump forming a third party that fractures the GOP vote) never occurred, we can’t evaluate the stated consequence (“Republicans would basically lose every election… from now until Trump is no longer a force”). The scenario simply hasn’t happened, so the prediction can’t be judged as right or wrong.

Therefore, the correct classification is inconclusive (too early / untriggered condition) rather than right, wrong, or ambiguous in hindsight.

politicsgovernment
Under the Biden administration, the U.S. government will ultimately impose no meaningful restrictions or bans on TikTok’s operation in the United States; the Trump-era TikTok sanctions effort will effectively be abandoned.
Yeah, I think the sad reality is that the whole TikTok thing is going to get swept under the rug. I think there'll be no restrictions on TikTok.View on YouTube
Explanation

Under Biden, the TikTok issue was not “swept under the rug,” and the U.S. did impose meaningful restrictions and a sale‑or‑ban framework on TikTok.

Key facts:

  1. Revoking Trump’s specific EOs but keeping the national‑security focus. In June 2021, President Biden revoked Trump’s executive orders that attempted to ban TikTok and WeChat, but he replaced them with a new order directing the Commerce Department to systematically review and potentially restrict “connected software applications” tied to foreign adversaries. This continued, rather than abandoned, the security scrutiny of TikTok and similar apps.

  2. Federal device ban. On December 29, 2022, Biden signed the No TikTok on Government Devices Act into law, which prohibits TikTok on all federal government devices (with narrow exceptions). That is an explicit, nationwide legal restriction on where TikTok can operate within the federal system, not “no restrictions.” (en.wikipedia.org)

  3. Divest‑or‑ban national law specifically targeting TikTok. On April 24, 2024, Biden signed the Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act (PAFACA). The law:

    • Explicitly designates TikTok/ByteDance as foreign‑adversary‑controlled applications.
    • Requires ByteDance to divest TikTok’s U.S. operations by January 19, 2025 or face a ban.
    • Prohibits app‑store distribution, hosting, maintenance, and updates for such apps in the U.S. unless a “qualified divestiture” occurs. These are substantial legal restrictions on TikTok’s operation in the United States. (en.wikipedia.org)
  4. Supreme Court and enforcement posture. In January 2025, the U.S. Supreme Court upheld this law, confirming that the divest‑or‑ban regime is constitutional. The Biden administration chose not to personally carry out the final enforcement steps right before leaving office and instead left day‑to‑day enforcement timing to the incoming Trump administration, but the restrictive legal framework itself was crafted, signed, and defended by Biden’s team. (reuters.com)

Given that the Biden administration (a) signed a federal law banning TikTok on government devices and (b) signed and defended a statute that forces TikTok’s sale or a nationwide ban, the prediction that “there’ll be no restrictions on TikTok” and that the Trump‑era sanctions push would be “swept under the rug” is not borne out by events.

Therefore, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
The Gavin Newsom recall petition will obtain enough certified signatures to qualify, and the resulting recall election will be scheduled roughly 4–5 months after certification, likely around July 2021.
I think they will get there. I think they'll get there and then there and then the recall election would take place about 4 to 5 months after, uh, after that, there's a couple of months where it moves through the finance committee. The recall election has to be budgeted. And then, um, Newsom would have the opportunity to set a date within, I think, 60 to 80 days, roughly. So I think we're looking at July for a recall electionView on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that the recall petition did obtain enough certified signatures, but the timing of the recall election was substantially different from the prediction.

  • On 26 April 2021, the California Secretary of State announced that counties had reported 1,626,042 verified signatures for the Newsom recall, exceeding the 1,495,709 required and thus meeting the threshold to trigger a recall process.(sos.ca.gov)
  • On 1 July 2021, the Secretary of State formally certified the recall petition as sufficient, reporting 1,719,900 valid signatures.(sos.ca.gov)
  • That same day, the lieutenant governor set the recall election date for 14 September 2021, which was 76 days (about two and a half months) after certification, not 4–5 months, and not in July as forecast.(timesofsandiego.com)

So while the forecast correctly anticipated that the recall petition would qualify, it specifically predicted an election roughly 4–5 months after certification and "looking at July". In reality, the election was held in mid‑September 2021, about 2.5 months after certification. Because the core dated part of the prediction (July timing and 4–5 month lag) was wrong, the overall prediction is rated wrong.

techpolitics
Following the deplatforming of Trump in early January 2021, large tech platforms will continue to expand and exercise their censorship and deplatforming powers more broadly over time, rather than this being a one-off action.
we have now handed this enormous power to this big tech cartel. And it's not going to end here. This is not the end. It's the beginning.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since January 2021 shows that major platforms did broaden and systematize content moderation and deplatforming rather than treating Trump’s ban as a one‑off.

  • Shortly after Trump’s suspension, alternative network Parler was itself deplatformed by app stores and its hosting provider in early 2021, demonstrating that coordinated infrastructure‑level bans expanded beyond a single political figure. (arxiv.org)
  • YouTube repeatedly widened its rules: first extending its COVID‑19 vaccine misinformation ban to all vaccines in 2021, then introducing broad medical‑misinformation policies in 2023 that remove content contradicting health‑authority guidance and target a wide range of conditions and treatments. These policies have led to removals of major anti‑vaccine channels and large volumes of videos. (forbes.com)
  • Meta (Facebook/Instagram) formalized long suspensions and escalating sanctions for public figures, created a dedicated “Crisis Policy Protocol,” and embedded broader rules for restricting content that could contribute to civil unrest or election delegitimization—explicitly going beyond the singular Trump case. (about.fb.com)
  • The scale and persistence of moderation and deplatforming were significant enough that Texas passed HB20, an anti‑deplatforming law in 2021 aimed at curbing large platforms’ ability to moderate based on “viewpoint,” indicating that broad, ongoing content restrictions—not an isolated event—were occurring. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • By 2024–25, some platforms began loosening certain rules (e.g., Meta ending third‑party fact‑checking and narrowing enforcement; YouTube carving out more exceptions for “public interest” content; X under Elon Musk dismantling many prior policies), but these moves themselves confirm that a prior period of expansive moderation had been built up and was influential enough to provoke political and legal backlash. (techcrunch.com)

Taken together, the post‑January‑2021 trajectory shows several years of expanded, more formalized use of deplatforming and moderation powers across multiple major platforms. That means Sacks’s core claim—that Trump’s ban marked the beginning of a broader, continuing exercise of these powers rather than a one‑off—has largely been borne out, even though there has since been some partial retrenchment.

politicsgovernmentmarkets
Regardless of Mark Zuckerberg’s attempts to appease incoming U.S. political leadership in 2021, Facebook will eventually be broken up through antitrust or regulatory action.
So he is thinking about how do I mollify and appease these politicians who now have the power and can break me up? And I got news for him. It's too little, too late, it's too late, too late. Anyway. Facebook's done. You're going to get broken up anyway.View on YouTube
Explanation

As of November 29, 2025, Facebook’s parent company Meta Platforms, Inc. has not been broken up by antitrust or regulatory action:

  • The U.S. Federal Trade Commission’s antitrust case against Facebook/Meta (seeking, among other things, potential divestitures of Instagram and WhatsApp) has been ongoing for years, but no court-ordered breakup has occurred. News coverage and court updates consistently describe the case as pending litigation rather than a completed structural remedy.
  • Meta continues to operate Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp, and other businesses under a single corporate umbrella, and there has been no legally mandated corporate breakup, spin‑off, or forced divestiture imposed by U.S. or major foreign regulators.

Because the prediction was that Facebook “will… be broken up” and this has not happened by the current date, the prediction is wrong based on presently available public information.

(Note: Web search confirms there are active and past antitrust actions involving Meta/Facebook, but none has yet resulted in an actual breakup order or executed structural separation.)

politicsgovernment
Nancy Pelosi will lose the Speakership by around January 2023 (after the 2022 midterms) and will be effectively headed into retirement from top House leadership at that time.
I predict that she is set to not be speaker anymore in two years and headed for retirement.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is rated ‘right’

  • Pelosi lost the Speakership after the 2022 midterms, with the change occurring in early January 2023. Republicans narrowly won control of the U.S. House in the November 8, 2022 midterm elections, ending the Democratic majority that had made Nancy Pelosi Speaker. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Her term as Speaker ended on January 3, 2023. Nancy Pelosi’s second stint as Speaker ran from January 3, 2019, to January 3, 2023, at which point she was succeeded by Republican Kevin McCarthy as Speaker in the new Congress. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • She simultaneously exited top House leadership at that time. Pelosi also ended her long run as leader of the House Democratic Caucus on January 3, 2023, with Hakeem Jeffries taking over as Democratic leader. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • She remained in Congress but was effectively in post-leadership “retirement” from top roles. After January 2023 she served only as a rank‑and‑file member and honorary “speaker emerita,” having explicitly announced she would not seek any leadership role in the next Congress following the midterms. (cnbc.com)

Since the prediction was that Pelosi would no longer be Speaker around January 2023 after the 2022 midterms and would be effectively headed into retirement from top House leadership at that time, and both of those things occurred, the prediction is right.

Sacks @ 00:18:13Inconclusive
marketseconomy
Elon Musk will become the richest person in the world and, eventually, the first individual with a net worth of at least $1 trillion.
I think Elon seems to be on track to be, uh, not only the world's richest man, but the world's first trillionaire.View on YouTube
Explanation

Status of the prediction (as of Nov 29, 2025)

  1. “World’s richest man” part – This has already happened.

    • Multiple sources (Forbes/Bloomberg, summarized in reference works) state that Elon Musk has been the wealthiest person in the world since 2021, and as of 2025 his net worth is around $470–500 billion, making him the richest individual globally.【turn0search16】【turn0search23】
  2. “World’s first trillionaire” part – This has not happened yet.

    • The same sources put Musk’s net worth at about $500 billion in late 2025—roughly half a trillion, and note milestones like being the first person to exceed $300 billion, then $400 billion, then $500 billion, but not $1 trillion.【turn0search16】
    • Broader billionaire statistics show thousands of billionaires worldwide with a combined wealth of about $16.1 trillion, and name Musk (around $500 billion) as the wealthiest; no individual is listed anywhere near $1 trillion.【turn0search20】【turn0news15】
    • Contemporary analyses explicitly describe Musk as on track or projected to become the first trillionaire by around 2027, underscoring that this is still a future projection, not an accomplished fact.【turn0search0】【turn0search5】

Why the overall prediction is “inconclusive”

The prediction, in normalized form, was: Elon Musk will become the richest person in the world and, eventually, the first individual with a net worth of at least $1 trillion.

  • The first clause (richest person) has already come true.
  • The second clause (first trillionaire) has not yet occurred, but nothing in the current data rules it out for the future; in fact, several analyses treat it as plausible or even likely.

Because the prediction is about an open-ended future event (no deadline was specified) and it has neither occurred nor been rendered impossible, the correct assessment as of November 29, 2025 is:

Result: inconclusive (too early to tell whether he will indeed become the world’s first trillionaire).

markets
Disney+ will establish itself as a long‑term, major rival to Netflix in the global streaming market.
I don't know if they'll pass them, but they're now certainly going to be a major rival to them.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2020 shows Disney+ has in fact become a long‑term, major rival to Netflix in global streaming.

  • Rapid scale‑up close to Netflix from the start: By December 2020 (the month of the prediction), Disney+ had already reached about 86.8 million subscribers, and passed 94.9 million by early 2021, far ahead of its original targets. (en.wikipedia.org) Industry coverage at the one‑year mark was already calling Disney+ “Netflix’s biggest rival,” explicitly framing it as the primary competitive threat in the streaming wars. (thewrap.com)

  • Direct competition in total subscriptions: By August 2022, Disney’s streaming portfolio (Disney+, Hulu, ESPN+) reached 221 million subscriptions, slightly surpassing Netflix’s ~220.7 million at that time, cementing Disney as a peer‑scale competitor in global streaming. (en.wikipedia.org) Disney+ alone counted 161.8 million subscribers worldwide by the end of 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)

  • Sustained, large‑scale rival through 2025: As of late 2025, Netflix still leads the market with 300M+ subscribers, but Disney remains one of the only platforms in the same tier: Disney+ has about 131.6 million subscribers on its own, and Disney+ plus Hulu total roughly 195–196 million globally. (thewrap.com) Analyses of the 2025 streaming landscape typically list Disney+ alongside Amazon Prime Video and Max as Netflix’s main global rivals, with Disney+ holding around 12–14% share in major markets and ranking in the top few services by usage. (corestory.in)

Across a 5‑year window (2019–2025), Disney+ has maintained large global scale, is consistently discussed as one of Netflix’s primary competitors, and occasionally even edges Netflix in combined subscriptions when bundled with Hulu/ESPN+. That matches the podcast’s claim that Disney+ would be a major long‑term rival—even though, as the predictor hedged, it has not clearly surpassed Netflix overall.

healthgovernment
By sometime in 2021, public and platform deference to the World Health Organization (W.H.O.) on COVID‑related guidance will substantially fade, and the W.H.O. will no longer be widely treated as a key authority in public discourse or major platforms’ content policies.
I look forward to next year when nobody cares about the W.H.O. anymore.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from 2021 shows that the World Health Organization (WHO) remained a central reference point for both public discourse and major platforms’ COVID‑19 policies, contrary to the prediction that “nobody cares about the W.H.O. anymore” by sometime in 2021.

Key points:

  • YouTube explicitly grounded its COVID‑19 medical‑misinformation rules in WHO guidance. Its policy banned content that “contradict[s] expert consensus from local health authorities or the World Health Organization (WHO),” and this language was actively enforced in 2021—for example, in the takedown of UK MP David Davis’s speech about vaccine passports and other removals that cited the WHO clause verbatim. (bigbrotherwatch.org.uk)

  • Facebook/Meta in 2021 expanded removal of COVID‑19 and vaccine false claims “following consultations with leading health organizations, including the World Health Organization,” and labeled posts about vaccines with links to WHO information, positioning the WHO as a primary authoritative source in its COVID‑19 Information Center. (about.fb.com)

  • A 2022 longitudinal study of Twitter vaccine misinformation during 2021 treated the CDC and WHO explicitly as “authoritative sources” when comparing low‑credibility vs. mainstream information flows, indicating that in research and mainstream communication WHO was still regarded as a key authority, even though low‑credibility content sometimes got more reshares. (arxiv.org)

  • Major news coverage of variants in 2021 (e.g., Delta and Omicron) centered on WHO announcements; outlets like CNBC, Euronews, and others framed WHO’s designation of Omicron as a “variant of concern” as the pivotal trigger for government responses and travel restrictions, underscoring WHO’s continuing agenda‑setting role. (cnbc.com)

  • While some political and online communities were openly skeptical of the WHO, the organization was still structurally embedded in platform rules and official communications throughout 2021. Later rollbacks of strict COVID‑19 moderation by platforms happened mostly in 2023–2024, outside the prediction’s 2021 time frame and even then did not make WHO irrelevant. (apnews.com)

Because WHO remained widely treated as a key authority by large platforms and in mainstream public discourse through 2021, the prediction that by then “nobody cares about the W.H.O. anymore” is best judged as wrong.

politicsgovernment
In 2021, there will be a significant recall effort in California targeting state-level leadership (implicitly Governor Gavin Newsom), substantial enough to be characterized as a “big recall.”
this is why there could be a big recall next year in California.View on YouTube
Explanation

Rationale

  • The prediction was that in 2021 there would be a “big recall” in California targeting state-level leadership, implicitly Governor Gavin Newsom.
  • In reality, a statewide gubernatorial recall effort against Gavin Newsom did qualify and proceed in 2021:
    • A recall petition against Newsom was filed in February 2020; signatures were gathered through March 2021.
    • On April 26, 2021, the California Secretary of State announced that organizers had met the threshold of 1,495,709 verified signatures required to trigger a recall election (ultimately 1,719,943 valid signatures, about 13.8% of the 2018 vote). (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The recall was officially certified and the California gubernatorial recall election was held on September 14, 2021, a statewide contest involving millions of voters and 46 replacement candidates. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Newsom ultimately survived the recall, with about 61.9% voting “No” on removing him, but that does not negate the fact that there was a large, formal recall election. (en.wikipedia.org)

Given that a large-scale, formally qualified statewide recall election of the sitting governor indeed occurred in 2021, the prediction that there could be a “big recall next year in California” is accurately borne out by events.

Conclusion: The prediction is right.

politicstech
In 2021, the U.S. Congress will hold additional high‑profile public hearings in which major tech CEOs are grilled in a similar, highly theatrical manner to the 2020 hearings referenced.
there's going to be more of it next year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Multiple events in 2021 match sacks’s prediction that Congress would hold more high‑profile, theatrical hearings grilling major tech CEOs, similar to the 2020 hearings.

Key confirming example:

  • On March 25, 2021, the CEOs of Facebook (Mark Zuckerberg), Google (Sundar Pichai) and Twitter (Jack Dorsey) testified before two House committees in a widely covered hearing titled “Disinformation Nation: Social media’s role in promoting extremism and misinformation.” News coverage explicitly described the session as a marathon, six‑hour hearing where lawmakers “grilled” the CEOs over their platforms’ role in the January 6 Capitol attack and the spread of misinformation, with protesters outside the Capitol using giant cardboard cutouts portraying the CEOs as rioters—a clear sign of its theatrical, highly public nature. (theguardian.com)

Additional reinforcing example:

  • On April 21–22, 2021, a Senate Judiciary antitrust subcommittee held a high‑profile hearing on app‑store competition, where lawmakers “grilled” Apple and Google representatives over alleged anti‑competitive practices and market power in their app stores. This was widely reported as part of ongoing aggressive congressional scrutiny of big tech. (washingtonpost.com)

These 2021 hearings:

  • Involved major tech companies’ top leaders (including multiple CEOs in March 2021).
  • Were public, heavily covered, and politically charged.
  • Featured confrontational questioning and clear elements of political theater similar to the 2020 big‑tech CEO hearings.

Since such hearings did occur in 2021 and fit the described pattern, sacks’s prediction that “there’s going to be more of it next year” was fulfilled.

politics
If Rudy Giuliani continues prominently advancing election-fraud allegations through the Georgia Senate runoff period (through January 5, 2021), Republican candidates’ chances in the two Georgia runoff elections will be materially harmed compared to a scenario in which he exits the stage quickly.
the longer that Rudy stays on the stage making these crazy, wild allegations, the worse it gets for Republicans.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary
The prediction links a counterfactual (Giuliani exiting quickly) to election outcomes in Georgia. We can verify the factual premise (Giuliani’s continued prominence), but not the counterfactual effect on GOP chances with enough rigor to call it clearly right or wrong, so the outcome is ambiguous.


1. Did Giuliani “stay on the stage” through the Georgia runoff period?

Yes. Rudy Giuliani remained a leading public face of Donald Trump’s election‑fraud allegations well into December 2020 and up to the Georgia runoffs on January 5, 2021:

  • He led or fronted multiple post‑election lawsuits and public events alleging widespread fraud in several states in late November and December 2020.
  • He appeared at legislative-style hearings and press events pushing fraud claims, and continued to do media hits and public statements contesting the 2020 presidential result during December 2020, overlapping with the Georgia runoff campaign period.

So the if part of the prediction—Giuliani remaining publicly prominent with fraud claims during the runoff period—did happen.


2. What actually happened in the Georgia runoffs?

On January 5, 2021, Democrats Raphael Warnock and Jon Ossoff both won their Georgia Senate runoffs, flipping control of the U.S. Senate. Republican turnout in some strongly pro‑Trump areas underperformed relative to November 2020, and analysts have argued that Trump’s and his allies’ fraud rhetoric may have depressed GOP turnout or created confusion. But this is an inference, not a directly observable fact.


3. Why the prediction is not clearly verifiable

The prediction’s core claim is causal and counterfactual:

With Giuliani staying prominent, Republican chances in the Georgia runoffs will be materially worse than if he had exited quickly.

To judge this, we would need credible evidence about a hypothetical alternate world in which Giuliani quickly stopped advancing fraud claims while everything else stayed constant. In reality:

  • Many actors besides Giuliani (Donald Trump himself, Sidney Powell, Lin Wood, right‑wing media, etc.) were loudly promoting fraud narratives in Georgia, making it impossible to isolate Giuliani’s unique marginal effect.
  • Post‑election analyses and academic studies can suggest that fraud rhetoric in general may have hurt Republicans in Georgia, but they do not meaningfully disentangle Giuliani’s role from that broader ecosystem or quantify a “material” effect relative to a scenario where he disappeared early.
  • Different plausible models of voter behavior could support both of these stories: (a) Giuliani and fraud rhetoric hurt GOP chances, or (b) other factors (Democratic mobilization, demographic trends, campaign strategy) were decisive and Giuliani’s marginal impact was negligible.

Because the claim rests on an unobservable counterfactual and Giuliani was just one of multiple prominent messengers, we cannot definitively determine whether his continued prominence materially worsened Republican odds relative to an early exit.

Conclusion: The premise (Giuliani stayed very visible) is true; the outcome (GOP lost the runoffs) is known; but the specific causal comparison the prediction makes cannot be reliably confirmed or falsified. Therefore the prediction’s accuracy is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
Before the January 5, 2021 Georgia runoff elections, leading congressional Republicans will publicly move to curtail or repudiate Rudy Giuliani’s post-election legal and media efforts, effectively pushing him off center stage.
I think it’s coming, it’s coming.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available evidence shows that some prominent Republicans did publicly criticize Trump’s post‑election legal efforts, but there was no broad move by leading congressional Republicans to curtail or repudiate Rudy Giuliani specifically, nor was he pushed off center stage before the January 5, 2021 Georgia runoffs.

Key points:

  1. Giuliani stayed the face of Trump’s effort well past January 5. He continued leading strategy sessions and working with allies at the Willard Hotel “command center” in December, and remained central to the broader attempt to overturn the election into early January 2021, including planning around the January 6 certification fight. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. Criticism from within the GOP was scattered and often generalized, not a coordinated congressional repudiation of Giuliani. Some Republicans criticized the legal team or the fraud claims:

    • Former New Jersey governor Chris Christie (not a member of Congress) called Trump’s legal team, including Giuliani, a “national embarrassment” and urged Trump to stop the challenges. (uproxx.com)
    • Sen. Joni Ernst slammed Sidney Powell’s conspiracy claims as “absolutely outrageous” and “offensive,” but framed it as a rebuke of Powell and the broader claims, not a specific move to sideline Giuliani. (iowastartingline.com)
    • Sen. Ben Sasse, in a December 31 statement, denounced the project to overturn the election as a “dangerous ploy” and “swampy politics,” criticizing the fundraising and legal challenges generally, not Giuliani personally. (ottawa.citynews.ca)
  3. Congressional leadership did not publicly move to shut Giuliani down. Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell acknowledged Biden’s win on December 15 and privately urged senators not to join House objections to Electoral College results, but he did not publicly single out Giuliani or call for his removal from the effort. Meanwhile, figures like Josh Hawley and others still backed objections to the electoral count, aligning with the broader challenge Giuliani was fronting. (en.wikipedia.org)

  4. Internal dissatisfaction with Giuliani did not translate into congressional action. Reporting indicates Trump himself and some allies worried Giuliani and other lawyers were “fools” making him look bad, yet Giuliani remained Trump’s point man on the election challenge. These were White House/political complaints, not moves led by congressional Republicans to remove him from center stage. (cnbc.com)

Given that Giuliani remained the public and strategic leader of the post‑election effort through and beyond the Georgia runoffs, and that congressional Republican criticism was limited, fragmented, and not clearly aimed at curtailing Giuliani’s role, the prediction that “leading congressional Republicans” would publicly move to sideline him before January 5, 2021 did not come true.

politicsgovernment
In the 2022 U.S. midterm elections (two years from this Dec 2020 recording), Republicans will win back the majority in the House of Representatives and Nancy Pelosi will cease to be Speaker as a result.
They did win the they did... The Republicans won like 10 or 12 seats in the House. They've almost got the majority back in the House. They almost certainly will win back the House and retire Nancy Pelosi in two years during the midterm election. I'll put money on that right now.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment
The prediction was that in the 2022 U.S. midterm elections, Republicans would:

  1. Win back the majority in the U.S. House of Representatives, and
  2. As a result, Nancy Pelosi would cease to be Speaker of the House.

What actually happened

  • In the November 8, 2022 midterm elections, the Republican Party won a majority of seats in the U.S. House of Representatives for the 118th Congress.
  • Nancy Pelosi, a Democrat, had been Speaker of the House in the 116th and 117th Congresses. After Republicans gained the majority, she did not stand for the speakership in the 118th Congress and was succeeded by Republican Kevin McCarthy, who was elected Speaker on January 7, 2023.
  • Therefore, as a consequence of Republicans winning the House, Pelosi ceased to be Speaker.

Conclusion Both specific elements of the prediction came true: Republicans won back the House majority in the 2022 midterms, and Nancy Pelosi stopped being Speaker as a result. Thus the prediction is right.

Sacks @ 00:24:52Inconclusive
healthscience
For a future highly lethal, fast-spreading virus, mRNA vaccine technology will enable creation of a matching vaccine candidate essentially within a day of obtaining the pathogen’s genome sequence; remaining delays would be due primarily to human trials and regulatory testing.
We could have a vaccine the next day, you know, like, you could we could have a very real.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2020 strongly suggests that mRNA platforms can generate a vaccine design within days of obtaining a pathogen’s genome, and that most remaining delay is indeed due to manufacturing scale‑up, clinical trials, and regulation. For SARS‑CoV‑2, Moderna has stated that its successful vaccine candidate mRNA‑1273 was designed in about two days once the viral genetic sequence was available, and the company went from sequence to a clinical‑grade batch ready to ship for human trials in 42 days, with first‑in‑human dosing starting in March 2020 and later phase II/III trials following over subsequent months. (symposeum.us) This experience broadly validates Sacks’ claim about what the technology can do and about where the bottlenecks lie. However, his prediction is explicitly about a future highly lethal, fast‑spreading pathogen. Since late 2020 there has not been a new, clearly distinct pandemic‑scale virus of that kind; the most notable concern has been H5N1 bird flu spreading in U.S. dairy cattle and sporadically infecting humans, for which Moderna and others have developed mRNA vaccine candidates that entered clinical trials in 2024–2025, again with the main time cost in trials and regulatory work. (reuters.com) Public sources, though, do not give day‑by‑day design timestamps for these newer candidates, and the specific scenario he described (a brand‑new, highly lethal, rapidly spreading virus emerging after his prediction) has not yet occurred. Because the crucial condition for testing his forecast has not really been met, and we lack direct evidence that a future vaccine was locked in literally within one day of sequence, the safest assessment is that it is too early to say whether his prediction was fully correct or not.

If income share agreements (ISAs) prove successful, then over time (no explicit date given, but implied over the coming years) each economically valuable trade will be served by its own ISA-based school, with the skills training for those trades migrating out of traditional universities. As a result, the remaining functions of traditional colleges will be largely limited to fields and activities that do not measurably increase earning power.
I think where this goes, if these ISAs are successful, is that every trade that's valuable will get its own Isa type school, and then that gets peeled out of a university education. So what's left for colleges to do is basically, you know, all the stuff that doesn't add value.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary: As of late 2025, income share agreements (ISAs) have not become broadly successful or dominant in workforce training, nor have economically valuable trades generally moved to ISA-based schools. Traditional colleges remain central for high-earning fields. The trajectory of ISAs since 2020 has been contraction and regulatory pushback, not the expansion underlying Sacks’s scenario.

1. ISAs have struggled rather than “proved successful” at scale

  • The Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB) ruled in 2021 that ISAs are essentially private education loans and must comply with Truth in Lending Act requirements, signaling heightened regulatory scrutiny of the entire ISA model. (consumerfinancemonitor.com)
  • A prominent early ISA program, Purdue University’s Back a Boiler (often cited as a flagship), stopped accepting new applicants and was effectively suspended by 2022; Purdue’s own site now states the program “is not accepting new applicants.” (purdue.edu)
  • A 2023 bootcamp-market report notes “the fall of ISAs”: fewer than a quarter of coding bootcamps still offered ISAs, and only four of roughly 15 accredited colleges and universities that experimented with ISAs in the late 2010s had not paused or ended their programs as of 2022. (careerkarma.com)
  • Major ISA-heavy providers have faced enforcement actions. Bloom Institute of Technology (Lambda School), a high-profile ISA bootcamp, was fined by the CFPB in 2024 for deceptive practices, with students released from ISAs and the company and CEO banned from consumer lending. (en.wikipedia.org)

Collectively, these developments show ISAs have encountered serious headwinds rather than the broad, sustained success Sacks implicitly assumed.

2. Training for valuable trades has not broadly migrated to ISA-based schools

  • Some niche trade and tech programs (e.g., welding or specific tech bootcamps) use ISAs, but they represent a small, scattered set of providers, not “every trade that’s valuable.” (citybiz.co)
  • The same bootcamp report emphasizes that ISA use is now a minority financing option even in the bootcamp segment, and that most traditional institutions that tried ISAs have exited. (careerkarma.com)

3. Traditional colleges still dominate economically valuable fields

  • Bachelor’s degrees in computer and information sciences more than doubled over the last decade, reaching about 112,720 U.S. bachelor’s earners in 2022–2023, almost all from conventional colleges and universities. (studentclearinghouse.org)
  • Overall U.S. bachelor’s degree production remains above 2 million per year, with strong representation in high-earning majors like business, engineering, health professions, and computer science, indicating that universities remain the primary pipeline into lucrative careers. (nu.edu)
  • There is no evidence that “what’s left for colleges to do” is merely “the stuff that doesn’t add value”; on the contrary, high-earning fields are still core to university offerings and are growing in some cases. (studentclearinghouse.org)

Conclusion: Sacks’s forecast was that if ISAs became successful, then over time each economically valuable trade would develop its own ISA-based school, those functions would be “peeled out” of universities, and colleges would be left mainly with low–economic-value activities. By late 2025:

  • ISAs have not become broadly successful; many early programs have been paused or dismantled, and regulators have tightened oversight. (consumerfinancemonitor.com)
  • Economically valuable training remains largely inside traditional colleges and universities, which continue to confer the overwhelming majority of credentials in high-earning fields. (studentclearinghouse.org)

Given both the lack of ISA success and the absence of the predicted structural shift in higher education, this prediction has not come true and is best classified as wrong rather than merely “too early to tell.”

economyhealth
Assuming Covid-19 vaccines are rolled out and substantially curb Covid within 3–5 months from late November 2020 (i.e., by roughly March–May 2021), the U.S. economy will rebound very strongly and the year 2021 overall will be a "great" year economically.
I do think the economy is going to bounce back really strong next year because of the vaccines. Right. I think you got to say that if these vaccines and Covid in the next three, four, five months, 2021 is going to be a great year.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction tied a strong 2021 economic rebound to successful vaccine rollout that would "end COVID" within about 3–5 months from late Nov 2020.

What actually happened with COVID and vaccines (Mar–May 2021)

  • By May 22, 2021, 57% of U.S. adults had received at least one COVID-19 vaccine dose, and eligibility had been opened to all adults a month earlier; by May 26, roughly half of U.S. adults were fully vaccinated. (cdc.gov)
  • Cases and hospitalizations fell sharply from the January 2021 winter peak into late winter and spring, reflecting a substantial curbing of the initial winter wave, though not elimination of the virus. (abc7news.com)
  • However, COVID was not "ended" within 3–5 months: the Delta variant became dominant by early July 2021 and drove a major resurgence in cases, hospitalizations, and deaths later that year. (cdc.gov)

Economic outcomes in 2021

  • Real U.S. GDP grew 5.7% in 2021 after a 3.4% contraction in 2020, the fastest annual growth since 1984 and widely described as a sharp, historic rebound. (bea.gov)
  • The economy added about 6.4 million jobs in 2021, and the unemployment rate fell from 6.7% in December 2020 to 3.9% in December 2021, returning close to pre-pandemic levels. (washingtonpost.com)
  • This strong real growth was accompanied by supply-chain problems and the beginnings of the high inflation that would peak in 2022, so the year was not problem-free, but by standard macro indicators 2021 was a very strong recovery year.

Assessment

  • The conditional epidemiological assumption (that vaccines would effectively "end" COVID within 3–5 months) was too optimistic, but vaccines did substantially curb the initial winter wave by spring 2021.
  • The core economic forecast—that 2021 would be a "great" year economically with a very strong rebound—was borne out by GDP growth, job gains, and falling unemployment.

On balance, given that the main claim being evaluated is the strength of the 2021 economic rebound contingent on reasonably successful vaccine rollout, this prediction is best judged as right, though its timeline and optimism about fully ending COVID were overstated.

healtheconomy
Once Covid-19 vaccines become available (starting in late 2020/early 2021), conditions in the United States will improve, and the year 2021 will be significantly better overall than 2020.
I do think it's going to get better as soon as these vaccines come to market. So I do think 2021 will be a much, much better year.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment

The prediction was that once COVID-19 vaccines became available (late 2020 / early 2021), conditions in the United States would improve and 2021 would be “a much, much better year” than 2020.

Key facts:

  • Vaccine availability and rollout

    • The first COVID-19 vaccine (Pfizer–BioNTech) received FDA Emergency Use Authorization on December 11, 2020; Moderna followed on December 18, 2020, and Johnson & Johnson in February 2021.
    • By mid-April 2021, all U.S. adults were eligible for vaccination, and by the end of 2021, a majority of U.S. adults had been fully vaccinated.
  • Public health and social conditions vs. 2020

    • 2020 saw the initial pandemic shock: widespread lockdowns, school and business closures, extremely limited testing early on, and no vaccines.
    • In 2021, after vaccine rollout, many U.S. states substantially relaxed restrictions, schools and universities widely reopened for in‑person learning, travel and entertainment resumed to a large extent, and economic activity rebounded strongly compared with 2020.
    • While variants such as Delta did cause serious waves and 2021 still involved significant illness and death, the overall level of social and economic normalcy and available medical protection was clearly higher than in 2020.

Conclusion

The prediction was not that the pandemic would be over, but that conditions would improve once vaccines came to market and that 2021 would be significantly better than 2020 overall in the U.S. That is broadly what occurred (greater medical protection, fewer restrictions, and substantial economic and social recovery compared with 2020), even though COVID remained a major problem.

Result: right – The general direction and qualitative comparison (2021 much better than 2020 in the U.S. once vaccines arrived) was borne out by subsequent events.

politicsgovernment
Post‑election 2020 legal challenges by the Trump campaign will almost all fail, and Joe Biden will in fact take office as the next U.S. president on Inauguration Day 2021.
I think there's a series of court challenges we can talk about. I think that they're unlikely to prevail. Very, very unlikely. I think Joe Biden will be the next president.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was that (1) the Trump campaign’s post‑election 2020 legal challenges would almost all fail, and (2) Joe Biden would in fact take office as the next U.S. president on Inauguration Day 2021.

  1. Outcome of Trump’s post‑election lawsuits
    After the 2020 election, Trump’s campaign and allies filed 62 lawsuits in multiple states challenging election procedures, vote counting, and certification. Nearly all of these suits were dismissed or dropped for lack of evidence or standing; only a single narrow ruling in Pennsylvania, about the deadline for first‑time voters to provide ID to cure their ballots, initially went in Trump’s favor and did not affect the overall result. (en.wikipedia.org) This matches Sacks’s claim that the legal challenges were “very, very unlikely” to prevail and that they would overwhelmingly fail.

  2. Whether Joe Biden became president on Inauguration Day 2021
    Joe Biden was inaugurated as the 46th president of the United States on January 20, 2021, and his presidency ran from January 20, 2021, to January 20, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org) That is exactly the Inauguration Day and office‑taking Sacks was forecasting.

Because the lawsuits did indeed almost all fail and Biden did take office on January 20, 2021, the prediction is right.

politics
Around the 2024 election cycle, Donald Trump will publicly and repeatedly assert that the 2020 presidential election was "stolen" from him, citing the timing of COVID‑19 vaccine announcements as part of his justification.
on this news alone, Trump in four years will be able to claim on some level that this was a stolen election.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence clearly supports parts of the prediction but not the whole normalized version.

1. Did Trump, by the 2024 cycle, publicly and repeatedly claim the 2020 election was stolen/rigged? Yes. After the 2020 election Trump repeatedly asserted that it was "rigged" or "stolen," and he never stopped. A tally of his false statements during the transition period shows dozens of uses of "rigged" and "stolen," and later reporting notes that he continued to insist the 2020 election was stolen in subsequent years. 【9search29】 The article on attempts to overturn the 2020 election likewise notes that he kept claiming massive fraud, saying it was the "crime of the century" and asserting "I say I won the election" into 2022 and beyond. 【9search28】 FactCheck.org’s review of his January 20, 2025 inaugural remarks records him again calling 2020 "totally rigged." 【1search3】 PolitiFact describes him as running in 2024 "on the myth that he won in 2020," quoting him in a June 2023 Fox News interview saying, "First of all, I won in 2020 by a lot." 【1search4】 PBS and PolitiFact coverage of his 2024 win likewise emphasize that the "Big Lie" about a stolen 2020 election remained central to his politics. 【0search1】 Taken together, this clearly satisfies the stolen/rigged-election portion of the prediction.

2. Did he tie this to the timing of COVID‑19 vaccine announcements? Immediately after Pfizer’s November 9, 2020 announcement that its COVID‑19 vaccine appeared more than 90% effective, Trump claimed without evidence that Pfizer and the FDA waited until after the election for political reasons. In tweets on November 9–10 he wrote that Pfizer and others would "only announce a Vaccine after the Election" and that "the @US_FDA and the Democrats didn’t want to have me get a Vaccine WIN, prior to the election, so instead it came out five days later.” 【4view0】【10search2】 FactCheck.org and AP both document these claims in detail. 【4view0】【5view0】 A related AP fact check quotes another tweet where he warned of "MASSIVE BALLOT COUNTING ABUSE" and added, "just like the early vaccine, remember I told you so!" explicitly pairing his vaccine-timing grievance with his election-fraud narrative. 【5view0】 The Washington Post reported that these accusations against FDA and Pfizer were seen inside the administration as likely to "fuel baseless conspiracy theories that the election was stolen from Trump." 【10search0】

So, in late 2020, Trump clearly did what Sacks anticipated in spirit: he used the post‑election Pfizer timing as part of a broader story that the system was conspiring against him and that the election was illegitimate.

3. Was that vaccine‑timing argument a repeated talking point around the 2024 election cycle? Here the evidence is much weaker. Coverage of Trump’s 2023–24 campaign and his broader rhetoric emphasizes his claims about mail-in ballots, voting machines, and generalized fraud, not repeated references to Pfizer’s November 2020 announcement as a core justification for saying the election was stolen. 【9search28】【0search1】【1search4】

The Pfizer-timing allegation itself has persisted within his political orbit: in 2025, the House Judiciary Committee (run by Trump allies) subpoenaed former Pfizer vaccine chief Philip Dormitzer to investigate whether Pfizer delayed trial results until after the 2020 election, explicitly framing the issue as possible election interference. 【8view0】【3news5】 That shows the suspicion remained politically salient, but news reports do not clearly document Trump personally and repeatedly using vaccine timing as a standard part of his 2024 stolen-election narrative the way he invoked other fraud claims.

4. Overall assessment

  • Clearly true: By and during the 2024 election cycle, Trump was publicly and repeatedly claiming that the 2020 election was rigged/stolen, and this claim was central to his 2024 campaign and subsequent presidency. 【9search28】【1search3】【1search4】
  • Clearly true (but earlier in time): In November 2020 he explicitly alleged that Pfizer and the FDA timed vaccine news to hurt his reelection chances, and he linked this "early vaccine" grievance to impending "massive ballot counting abuse," tying vaccine timing into his broader narrative of being cheated. 【5view0】【10search0】
  • Not clearly supported: That, specifically around the 2024 election cycle, he "publicly and repeatedly" invoked the vaccine timing as a key justification for his stolen-election claims. Available reporting on his 2024 rhetoric does not highlight this as a recurring theme. 【9search28】【0search1】

Because one part of the normalized prediction (repeated stolen-election claims) is strongly borne out while the other part (their being tied, repeatedly and specifically in the 2024 cycle, to vaccine announcement timing) is not well documented, the fairest overall judgment is "ambiguous" rather than fully right or fully wrong.

healtheconomy
By summer 2021, COVID‑19 will largely cease to be a major active concern in day‑to‑day life ("a distant bad memory"), after 1–2 quarters of transition, and social life and the global economy will snap back quickly, with a pronounced surge in partying and in‑person socializing for several months once vaccines, treatments, and testing are widely available.
Yeah, I guess, I guess I am. I think COVID's going to be a distant memory by next summer. I think we'll have 1 to 2 quarters of transition, but I think that once the vaccines are widely available, plus the treatment and the testings for the people who slipped through the cracks, um, yeah, I tend to think things are going to snap back very fast and Covid will just be this bad memory, a very distant bad memory. And I think, in fact, I think things may bounce back the other way. Um, everyone having been cooped up and afraid of getting some life threatening illness are going to come out of this really wanting to party. I think the whole world's going to be like Tel Aviv for, you know, a few months or something.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evaluation timeframe

  • The prediction was made in November 2020, about conditions "by next summer" (i.e., Northern Hemisphere summer 2021) and the following few months.

1. Was COVID-19 a “distant bad memory” and no longer a major active concern by summer 2021?

  • On 15 July 2021, the WHO Emergency Committee explicitly concluded that the COVID‑19 pandemic still constituted a Public Health Emergency of International Concern (PHEIC) and advised continuing intensive global response measures. (who.int)
  • WHO situation reports from July 2021 show ~3.8 million new cases and ~69,000 deaths in a single week globally, with cases and deaths rising again, driven by variants such as Delta. (who.int)
  • In the U.S., the highly transmissible Delta variant became dominant by early July 2021, leading to a major surge in cases; CDC reinstated indoor masking recommendations for vaccinated people by July 27, 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Many regions (e.g., Eastern Mediterranean) were still in community transmission with millions of cumulative cases and hundreds of thousands of deaths as of late July 2021. (emro.who.int)

Given that the disease was surging, emergency status was formally maintained, and new restrictions were being reintroduced, COVID-19 clearly had not become a distant memory or ceased to be a major concern in daily life by summer 2021.

2. Did we just have 1–2 quarters of transition before normalcy?

  • International bodies in 2021 were already warning of a “long, uneven and uncertain ascent” and a “Great Divergence” in recovery, not a brief 3–6 month transition back to normal. The IMF’s 2021 analysis projected that over 150 economies would still have per‑capita incomes below 2019 levels in 2021, with substantial output losses persisting through at least 2025. (imf.org)
  • Subsequent waves (notably Omicron starting late 2021) and the fact that WHO did not lift the PHEIC designation until May 2023 confirm that the disruptive phase of the pandemic lasted years, not 1–2 quarters. (paho.org)

So the duration and intensity of the pandemic’s impact were significantly underestimated.

3. Did social life snap back with a big partying/dating surge?

  • There was a pronounced short‑term rebound in some high‑income, highly vaccinated places, especially in the U.S.:
    • The phrase “Hot Vax Summer” became widely used in 2021 to describe expectations of a surge in dating, partying, and in‑person socializing after vaccination; media and social‑media usage of the term peaked in summer 2021. (covidlexicon.net)
    • Dating apps and nightlife in many U.S. cities saw strong activity as restrictions briefly eased.
  • However, this surge was localized and short‑lived, and was followed quickly by renewed concern and restrictions as Delta cases and hospitalizations climbed again in mid‑ to late‑summer 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)

This means the “everyone will want to party” part had some truth in specific contexts, but it did not characterize the whole world or mark an enduring end to COVID‑related worries.

4. Did the global economy “snap back very fast”?

  • While there was a rebound in global GDP in 2021, leading institutions emphasized that the recovery was partial, uneven, and scarring:
    • The IMF’s 2021 reports stress that recoveries were “diverging dangerously” across and within countries, with tourism‑dependent and low‑income economies lagging badly and facing long‑lasting damage. (imf.org)
    • The majority of countries were expected to remain below their pre‑pandemic income trajectories for years.

So the idea of a rapid, broad‑based global snap‑back was overly optimistic.

Overall judgment

  • Core claims that COVID would be a distant memory by summer 2021 and that only 1–2 quarters of transition would be needed are clearly falsified by the ongoing global emergency status, major new waves, continued restrictions, and prolonged economic and social disruption.
  • A narrow sub‑prediction—a temporary surge in partying/dating as vaccines rolled out in some rich countries—was directionally correct, but this does not rescue the overall forecast, which was about the end of COVID as a major concern and a quick, broad return to normal.

Conclusion: the prediction is mostly wrong in its main substance and timing, despite getting one secondary effect (a brief partying rebound) partly right.

politicshealth
Within a few years after 2020 (by the mid‑2020s), COVID‑19 will be so far in the past that many people will look back and question why it caused such political damage to Trump and why society was so afraid of it.
a few years from now, people could ask, wait, why? Why was it again that Trump lost, you know, um, you know, this Covid thing will be it will be so in the rear view mirror that we'll wonder why we were so afraid of it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary of the prediction
Sacks suggested that a few years after 2020, COVID-19 would be so far in the rear‑view mirror that:

  1. People would see it as something we were overly afraid of, and
  2. They would even question why it caused so much political damage to Trump (i.e., why he lost).

By late 2025, enough time has passed to judge this. The evidence shows parts of the prediction came true (COVID largely normalized for many people) while the hindsight minimization he anticipated is only partial and strongly partisan, and mainstream analysis still treats COVID as a central, legitimate reason for Trump’s loss. Hence the overall call is mixed/ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.


1. Is COVID “in the rear‑view mirror” for many people by the mid‑2020s?

Yes, largely.

  • Emergency phase ended and daily life normalized: The U.S. federal COVID‑19 public health emergency and associated flexibilities officially expired on May 11, 2023, marking an end to the formal emergency phase and a shift to treating COVID more like an endemic respiratory illness. (oig.hhs.gov)
  • Public concern has dropped sharply: A large Pew survey conducted in October 2024 found that only 21% of Americans see the coronavirus as a major threat to U.S. public health, down from 67% in 2020. A majority (56%) say COVID-19 is now “not something we really need to worry about much,” and just 4% report regularly wearing masks. (pewresearch.org)
  • Many think the pandemic phase is over: A 2025 YouGov poll reports that 51% of Americans say COVID-19 is no longer a pandemic; most describe their own infections as mild or moderate. (today.yougov.com)

On this narrow point—COVID as a dominating, day‑to‑day fear—Sacks’ intuition was substantially correct: for much of the public, COVID has moved into the background of ordinary life.


2. Do people now feel “we were too afraid” and that restrictions were excessive?

Partly, but in a strongly partisan and not overwhelming way.

  • Enduring sense of seriousness and harm: The same Pew work finds that about three‑quarters of Americans say the pandemic took at least some toll on their lives, and large majorities know someone who was hospitalized or died. 84% in an Axios–Ipsos poll agree COVID has permanently changed their lives. (pewresearch.org)
  • Most still see COVID as more serious than a cold/flu: As of late 2024, 56% say COVID-19 is worse than a cold or flu; 40% say it’s no worse. Similarly, 39% say we’re not taking it seriously enough, while 56% say it’s not something we need to worry about much. (pewresearch.org)
    → That is not a dominant consensus that fear was irrational; opinion is split.
  • Clear partisan split on whether we overreacted: When asked about past restrictions, 62% of Republicans say there should have been fewer restrictions, versus only 15% of Democrats; most Democrats say rules were about right or should have been stronger. (pewresearch.org)
    → So there are “many people” (especially on the right) who now think the response went too far, but that view is far from universal.

So Sacks was partly right that a sizeable chunk of the population would later see the fear and restrictions as excessive—but that attitude is heavily partisan and counterbalanced by large groups who still regard COVID as a serious disease and think the response was broadly justified.


3. Do people now question why COVID hurt Trump politically / why he lost?

No, mainstream evidence still treats COVID—and his handling of it—as a central, obvious factor in his defeat.

  • Academic studies: Peer‑reviewed political science research finds that COVID‑19 significantly reduced Trump’s electoral support, especially where health or economic impacts were salient. One Cambridge University Press article shows that information about the economic downturn and poor public‑health performance during COVID measurably depressed support for Trump. Another study using county‑level data concludes that higher COVID case counts decreased support for Trump and that, under plausible counterfactuals with fewer cases, he likely would have performed better electorally. (cambridge.org)
  • Campaign and Republican diagnostics: Trump’s own campaign pollster Tony Fabrizio concluded in a post‑election autopsy that Trump lost largely because voters disapproved of his handling of the pandemic; voters who rated COVID as a top issue broke heavily for Biden. This assessment was echoed in reporting by outlets like The Washington Post and CNN. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Ongoing media and political narratives: Retrospective analyses of the 2020 race—from mainstream magazines and 2024 election‑cycle coverage—continue to highlight COVID as the dominant challenge of Trump’s last year in office and a key reason he lost (especially his dismissiveness about the virus as deaths mounted). Biden and his allies still invoke Trump’s pandemic mismanagement in their narratives, indicating that the link between COVID and Trump’s loss remains widely accepted rather than puzzling. (time.com)

While some Trump supporters reject the legitimacy of the 2020 result and blame fraud, that is not the same as widespread confusion over why COVID hurt him. The prevailing scholarly and media consensus remains that the pandemic and his response to it were central, not mysterious, drivers of his defeat.


Overall assessment

  • Accurate elements:
    By the mid‑2020s, COVID is no longer an acute, top‑of‑mind fear for most Americans; the emergency phase is over and daily life is largely normalized.

  • Inaccurate or only partially realized elements:
    There is no broad, cross‑partisan sense that we were irrationally afraid, nor is there widespread puzzlement about why COVID politically damaged Trump. Many—especially Democrats and independents—still see COVID as a serious disease that justifiably shaped their 2020 vote, and mainstream analysis continues to treat Trump’s pandemic handling as an obvious, primary cause of his loss.

Because one core part of the prediction (normalization) came true while the stronger claim about hindsight minimization of fear and Trump’s loss did not clearly materialize beyond partisan subgroups, the fairest single label is “ambiguous” rather than fully right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
Donald Trump will continue his election court challenges for a few weeks and effectively end them (i.e., the contest of the result will be over) by Thanksgiving 2020, with courts ultimately ruling against him or throwing out his challenges.
I think he has to run out these court challenges, which will take a few weeks, but I predict by Thanksgiving... I see the court ultimately ruling against him or throwing it out.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks predicted that:

  1. Donald Trump would pursue election court challenges for a few weeks after the election but effectively end them by U.S. Thanksgiving 2020 (November 26, 2020), meaning the contest of the result would be over by then.
  2. Courts would ultimately rule against Trump or throw out his cases.

What actually happened:

  • Trump and his allies continued significant legal efforts after Thanksgiving. For example, on November 27, 2020 (the day after Thanksgiving), the Third Circuit Court of Appeals rejected the Trump campaign’s attempt to undo Pennsylvania’s vote certification, showing the campaign was still actively litigating key challenges beyond Thanksgiving. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Trump’s broader effort to overturn the election ran from early November well into December 2020 and January 2021, involving dozens of lawsuits, pressure on state officials, and attempts to get the Supreme Court to intervene; this was not effectively “over” by Thanksgiving. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • A major post-Thanksgiving legal push was Texas v. Pennsylvania, filed December 8, 2020, at the U.S. Supreme Court, seeking to invalidate Biden’s wins in four states. The Court dismissed the case on December 11, 2020 for lack of standing—another prominent defeat, but clearly showing that the legal contest continued well beyond Thanksgiving. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Overall, Trump and his allies filed 60+ lawsuits related to the 2020 election and did not win any that could change the outcome; courts repeatedly dismissed or ruled against them, matching the part of Sacks’ prediction that courts would ultimately rule against Trump’s side. (en.wikipedia.org)

Assessment:

  • The timing and “end by Thanksgiving” component of the prediction was clearly wrong: high‑profile court challenges and broader legal/political efforts to overturn the election were still very much active in December and even into January. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The courts‑will‑rule‑against-him component was correct, but it was coupled to the stronger claim that the contest would effectively be over by Thanksgiving.

Because the key claim about when Trump’s challenges would effectively end was false, the prediction as stated is best judged wrong overall, despite being right that the courts would ultimately reject his efforts.

politics
If Donald Trump chooses to run for president in the 2024 election, he will likely win the Republican Party’s presidential nomination in 2024.
if he wants to run four years from now, um, I think he probably gets the Republican nomination again.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment

  • Conditional prediction: If Donald Trump chooses to run for president in 2024, he will probably win the Republican Party’s presidential nomination.
  • Reality:
    • Trump did choose to run in the 2024 election, formally announcing his candidacy on November 15, 2022. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • He then won the 2024 Republican primaries decisively, securing far more than the required delegates. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Trump was officially nominated as the Republican presidential candidate at the 2024 Republican National Convention in Milwaukee (July 15–18, 2024). (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the condition (he chooses to run) was met and the predicted outcome (he gets the Republican nomination again) occurred, the prediction is correct.

Conclusion Donald Trump ran in 2024 and became the Republican Party’s presidential nominee; therefore Sacks’s prediction is right.

politics
In the coming years, Donald Trump will become a kingmaker in Republican politics by launching a Fox News competitor combined with a Tea Party–style grassroots movement, such that Republican candidates will generally need his endorsement or face primary challenges from Trump-aligned candidates.
I think. I think he will become a kingmaker. And Republican politics, he will launch a competitor to Fox News, but it will also be Fox News hybridized with a grassroots movement like the Tea Party. And every Republican will need to go get his endorsement or they will be primaried by the Trump party.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary Sacks predicted that, in the years after 2020, Donald Trump would (1) become a Republican kingmaker whose endorsement shapes primaries and (2) build a Fox‑News‑style media vehicle fused with his grassroots movement, so that Republicans risk primary challenges if they cross him. Both dynamics largely materialized, even though some details (like literally replacing Fox or every Republican needing his endorsement) were overstated.

1. Kingmaker status and primary leverage

  • High-impact endorsement record. Analyses of the 2022 and 2024 cycles show Trump endorsements are both numerous and highly successful in GOP primaries. Ballotpedia/Axios and other trackers found his endorsees won around 90–95% of their 2022 primaries, with similar high win rates for 2024, especially among non-incumbents in contested races. Commentators explicitly described him as a GOP kingmaker whose backing is often decisive. (spectrumlocalnews.com)

  • Republicans seeking or fearing his endorsement. Studies of 2022 primaries show Trump-endorsed candidates almost always won, and a large share of GOP candidates highlighted Trump or “MAGA/America First” branding in their materials, strongly suggesting they saw alignment with him as electorally valuable. (brookings.edu) Senior Republicans and analysts repeatedly note that his support is something most Republican candidates want, and that his backing can make or break a primary campaign.

  • Primary threats against dissidents. Trump has repeatedly used or threatened primary challenges to discipline Republicans who cross him. High‑profile examples include:

    • Liz Cheney, who lost her 2022 Wyoming primary in a landslide to Trump‑backed Harriet Hageman after leading the Jan. 6 committee and voting to impeach him. (theguardian.com)
    • Georgia officials Brian Kemp, Brad Raffensperger and Chris Carr, all targeted by Trump for certifying Biden’s 2020 win; Trump backed challengers against them in 2022 (Perdue, Hice, Gordon). (gpb.org)
    • Ongoing or threatened challenges against figures like Rep. Thomas Massie and Sen. Thom Tillis, where Trump or his allies openly float primary opponents as punishment for insufficient loyalty. (apnews.com)
      In parallel, Sen. Lisa Murkowski has publicly said many GOP lawmakers are “afraid” of retaliation from Trump if they oppose him, explicitly mentioning fears of being primaried. (nypost.com)
  • But not literally ‘every’ Republican. There are notable exceptions where Republicans have survived or thrived without Trump’s endorsement or even against his wishes:

    • Georgia Gov. Brian Kemp crushed Trump‑backed David Perdue by ~50 points in the 2022 GOP primary and went on to win re‑election. (gpb.org)
    • Georgia Secretary of State Brad Raffensperger beat Trump‑endorsed Jody Hice outright in the 2022 primary. (cnbc.com)
    • Sen. Lisa Murkowski won re‑election in Alaska in 2022 despite Trump’s active opposition and endorsement of Kelly Tshibaka. (cnbc.com)

    These counterexamples show that Sacks’s phrase “every Republican will need to go get his endorsement or they will be primaried” is too absolute. However, the broader pattern—Trump’s endorsement is highly prized, and many Republicans fear or face MAGA-aligned primary challengers if they oppose him—is accurate.

2. Fox‑News‑style media plus grassroots movement

  • Creation of a Trump-centric media platform. In 2021–2022, Trump founded Trump Media & Technology Group (TMTG) and launched Truth Social, a social network explicitly positioned as a pro‑Trump, “free speech” alternative to mainstream platforms. Major references (including Britannica and multiple language Wikipedias) describe Truth Social as a Trump‑owned Twitter‑like platform built in response to his bans from mainstream social media and heavily centered on his political movement. (en.wikipedia.org) TMTG itself markets Truth Social as the home for millions who have “rejected the pervasive censorship regime,” i.e., the core MAGA base. (tmtgcorp.com) That’s very close to “Fox News hybridized with a grassroots movement.”
  • Expansion into streaming ‘news TV’ via Truth+. Beginning in 2024, TMTG rolled out Truth+, a live TV streaming platform integrated into Truth Social. Company releases and outside coverage describe Truth+ as an ultra‑fast TV streaming service carrying “pro‑freedom news networks like Newsmax, Real America’s Voice, OAN, and more,” plus a library of “non‑woke” content, marketed as an alternative to mainstream media. (globenewswire.com) This is essentially a Trump‑branded distribution hub for right‑wing cable news and commentary, tightly linked to his own social platform and movement.
  • But not a full replacement or direct peer to Fox. Where Sacks overshot is in implying Trump would supplant Fox with a direct competitor on the same scale. Fox News remains overwhelmingly dominant in cable news: it has led all cable outlets in ratings for years, captured well over half of the cable news audience in 2024, and in 2025 is even challenging or surpassing the broadcast networks in prime‑time viewership. (press.foxnews.com) Truth Social/Truth+ have modest user bases and large financial losses; Politico reports TMTG lost over $400 million in the most recent year despite a meme‑stock valuation. (politico.com) So Trump did build a Trump‑centric media ecosystem that carries news and harnesses his grassroots—but it hasn’t displaced Fox as the premier right‑wing TV outlet.

3. Overall assessment

Taken together:

  • Trump did become a central kingmaker in GOP politics, with a powerful, widely sought endorsement and a demonstrated willingness to sponsor or threaten primary challenges against Republicans who defy him.
  • He did build a media vehicle—Truth Social plus the Truth+ streaming platform—explicitly tied to his MAGA grassroots movement and hosting pro‑Trump news content, serving as an alternative information ecosystem alongside Fox.
  • The prediction’s language about “every” Republican needing his endorsement and about a full‑blown Fox replacement is overstated; some Republicans have survived without him, and Fox remains the dominant right‑leaning TV network.

But the core strategic picture Sacks sketched—Trump using a proprietary media platform plus a Tea‑Party‑style base to act as a GOP kingmaker whose favor or wrath shapes Republican primaries—has clearly come to pass. Hence the prediction is best classified as right, with some exaggeration in scope and absolutism rather than in direction.

politicsgovernment
Donald Trump’s postelection lawsuits will mostly or entirely fail, and if the election dispute reaches the U.S. Supreme Court, the Court will rule against him; at that point Trump will accept the result (even if he does not formally concede).
I expect that the obstacles he has to overcome are too large and he will lose these lawsuits. It might go to the Supreme Court... I think that, you know, Trump will accept the result. He may not concede, but he will accept the result when it comes from the Supreme Court.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary of prediction
Sacks predicted in November 2020 that:

  1. Trump’s postelection lawsuits would mostly or entirely fail.
  2. If the dispute reached the U.S. Supreme Court, the Court would rule against him.
  3. At that point Trump would accept the result (even if he did not formally concede).

1. Lawsuits outcome

  • The Trump campaign and allies filed dozens of postelection lawsuits in multiple states; virtually all were dismissed or withdrawn, with no court finding outcome-changing fraud.
    → This part of the prediction was right.

2. Supreme Court outcome

  • Key efforts to get the Supreme Court to overturn or invalidate results (e.g., Texas v. Pennsylvania and emergency applications in Pennsylvania cases) were rejected; the Court declined to hear them or dismissed for lack of standing, and did not grant the relief Trump sought.
    → The Court effectively ruled against Trump’s position; this part was right.

3. Did Trump “accept the result”?
This is where interpretation becomes ambiguous:

  • Trump never formally conceded and repeatedly and publicly asserted that the 2020 election was “rigged” or “stolen,” including after the Supreme Court rejections and after leaving office.
  • He nevertheless did leave office on January 20, 2021, and the constitutional transfer of power to Joe Biden occurred on schedule, with the Trump administration cooperating on some key transition mechanics (e.g., GSA ascertainment in late November 2020, eventual use of transition resources).

Whether that counts as “accepting the result” depends on how you read Sacks’s words:

  • If “accept” means de facto compliance with the Supreme Court outcome and the Electoral College result (i.e., no extra-constitutional attempt to stay in power once all legal avenues closed), then the prediction is substantially correct.
  • If “accept” means acknowledging the legitimacy of the election outcome (stopping claims of fraud and publicly recognizing Biden as the rightful winner), then the prediction is wrong; Trump has continued to deny the legitimacy of the 2020 result.

Because Sacks explicitly allowed for “he may not concede, but he will accept the result,” and Trump’s subsequent behavior mixed formal compliance with persistent rejection of legitimacy, it is not possible to score this with a single clear label without importing a subjective definition of “accept.”

Conclusion

  • Lawsuits mostly/entirely failed: right.
  • Supreme Court, if reached, would rule against Trump: right.
  • Trump would “accept the result”: depends on whether you focus on behavioral compliance (yes) or public acknowledgment/legitimacy (no).

Given this definitional ambiguity around “accept the result,” the overall assessment is ambiguous.

politicsgovernment
If the 2020 presidential election dispute reaches the U.S. Supreme Court, the Court’s decision against Trump will be by a margin of at least 7–2, and possibly 8–1 or 9–0.
I believe if it gets to the Supreme Court, it will be at least 7 to 2, if not eight 1 or 9 zeroView on YouTube
Explanation

The condition of the prediction was met: the post‑election effort to overturn or invalidate the 2020 presidential result did reach the U.S. Supreme Court, most prominently in Texas v. Pennsylvania, which sought to throw out results in four Biden‑won states.

On December 11, 2020, the Court denied Texas’s motion for leave to file a bill of complaint for lack of standing, ending the case. Seven justices explicitly denied leave; Justices Alito and Thomas wrote separately that they would allow Texas to file the complaint but said they “would not grant other relief” and expressed no view on other issues. That means:

  • On the jurisdiction/standing question, the split was effectively 7–2 against Texas/Trump (Alito and Thomas differing only on procedure). (en.wikipedia.org)
  • On the actual relief Trump and Texas wanted (blocking or overturning the election results), all nine justices rejected it—Alito and Thomas expressly said they would give Texas no relief, and the other seven denied the case outright. (reason.com)

Sacks predicted that if the dispute reached the Supreme Court, the decision against Trump would be at least 7–2 and possibly 8–1 or 9–0. The real outcome was at least 7–2 against Texas/Trump on the key threshold issue and functionally 9–0 against granting them any relief, which fits his predicted range. Therefore, the prediction is right.

politicsmarkets
D predicts that Donald Trump will win the 2020 U.S. presidential election, aligning with betting-market odds on election night 2020.
I'm gonna go with what the markets are saying, which is Trump.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did not win the 2020 U.S. presidential election. Major news organizations and the official electoral vote count confirm that Joe Biden won both the popular vote and the Electoral College, securing 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232, and was subsequently inaugurated as the 46th president on January 20, 2021.

Because the prediction by sacks was that Trump would win (“I’m gonna go with what the markets are saying, which is Trump.”), and the actual outcome was a Biden victory, this prediction is wrong.

politicstechgovernment
D predicts that if Republicans retain control of the U.S. Senate and/or the presidency after the 2020 election, they will politically target Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey as the primary symbol of alleged tech censorship, likely via hearings, investigations, or public campaigns during the subsequent term.
if the Republicans hold on to the Senate, um, and or the presidency, I think you're going to see Jack Dorsey become the poster child for this new censorship that they're going to target.View on YouTube
Explanation

The prediction was explicitly conditional: if Republicans retained control of the U.S. Senate and/or the presidency after the 2020 election, they would then turn Jack Dorsey into the main symbol of tech censorship in the subsequent term.

In reality, Joe Biden and Kamala Harris won the 2020 presidential election, defeating the incumbent Republican ticket of Donald Trump and Mike Pence. Democrats also ultimately secured effective control of the Senate for the 117th Congress (2021–2023) after the Georgia runoffs and the January 20, 2021 swearing‑in of Ossoff, Warnock, and Vice President Harris, giving Democrats the majority via the vice president’s tie‑breaking vote. Republicans therefore did not retain the presidency or a lasting Senate majority for the post‑2020 term described in the prediction. (en.wikipedia.org)

Republicans had already been aggressively attacking Dorsey and Twitter over alleged censorship in late 2020, including high‑profile Senate Commerce and Judiciary hearings where GOP senators focused on Twitter’s handling of the New York Post and broader claims of anti‑conservative bias. These hearings clearly cast Dorsey as a central face of alleged censorship, but they occurred during the pre‑election and lame‑duck period of the existing GOP Senate majority, not in a new term contingent on Republicans retaining the Senate or presidency. (judiciary.senate.gov)

Moreover, Dorsey resigned as Twitter CEO on November 29, 2021, and was replaced by Parag Agrawal, further limiting the relevance of the specific scenario envisioned (ongoing Republican control plus Dorsey as Twitter CEO throughout the subsequent term). (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the key condition of the forecast (Republicans holding the Senate and/or presidency for the next term) did not occur, we cannot observe whether the predicted behavior would have followed in that counterfactual world. For evaluation purposes, that makes the forecast ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

politicsgovernment
Conditional on Joe Biden winning the presidency by a very narrow electoral margin (on the order of ~2 electoral votes) and Republicans retaining control of the U.S. Senate in the 2020 election, the U.S. will experience a relatively calm four‑year period (2021–2025) of divided government in which partisan political tensions and national “temperature” decline, major new legislation is limited, and most people can largely “ignore Washington” for those four years.
this scenario which I've we've called the soft landing, where let's say you had a Biden victory by two electoral votes. The Republicans hold on to the Senate… It could be a really good situation for the country for the next four years. You know, temperature would go down… I think we would get what we want, which is the ability to ignore Washington for four years.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is scored as ambiguous

  1. The prediction was explicitly conditional on a scenario that did not occur.
    Sacks framed this as a “soft landing” scenario where: (a) Joe Biden wins the presidency by about two electoral votes, and (b) Republicans retain control of the U.S. Senate. In reality, Biden won the Electoral College 306–232, a 74‑vote margin, not a razor‑thin ~2‑vote win. (archives.gov) After the January 5, 2021 Georgia runoffs, Democrats won both Senate seats, producing a 50–50 Senate with Vice President Harris giving Democrats effective control—so Republicans did not hold the Senate during Biden’s first two years. (en.wikipedia.org) Because the specific antecedent (“Biden by ~2 EV + GOP Senate”) never happened, we cannot directly observe whether his forecast about that particular configuration would have been right.

  2. The 2021–2025 period we actually got looked very different from his described ‘soft landing’.
    In the real timeline, unified Democratic control in 2021–2022 produced several large, contentious laws (e.g., the American Rescue Plan, the Bipartisan Infrastructure Law, the Inflation Reduction Act, and the CHIPS and Science Act), i.e., not “limited” major legislation. (en.wikipedia.org) Political tensions also remained high or worsened: the January 6, 2021 Capitol attack and its long aftermath kept national politics highly salient, not something most people could “ignore,” and surveys through 2022–2024 show deep, persistent polarization and widespread frustration with politics. (en.wikipedia.org) Those facts strongly contradict the spirit of his “temperature would go down, we could ignore Washington” narrative—but they occur under a different institutional setup than the one he conditioned on.

  3. Why this leads to an ‘ambiguous’ verdict rather than ‘right’ or ‘wrong’.
    Formally, Sacks’ claim was a counterfactual: if Biden barely squeaked by in the Electoral College and Republicans kept the Senate, then politics over the next four years would be relatively calm, with limited legislation and lower partisan temperature. Because that antecedent never came to pass, we cannot empirically test his core proposition about that exact divided‑government configuration. At the same time, the real 2021–2025 period does not resemble his forecasted “soft landing,” but that’s evidence against his broader intuition, not a clean falsification of the specific conditional claim. Hence the most accurate scoring under your scheme is “ambiguous”: enough time has passed, but the required condition never occurred, so the prediction’s truth value cannot be definitively determined from observed outcomes.

politicsgovernment
The determination of the winner of the 2020 U.S. presidential election will hinge primarily on the results in Pennsylvania and Michigan; the vote counting in those states will take multiple days beyond Election Night to complete, and the outcome is likely to be contested in court.
This is going to come down to Pennsylvania and Michigan, and it's going to take days to do those counts, and we're probably going to end up in the courts.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment of the prediction
Overall, sacks’ prediction is substantively right, though somewhat oversimplified about which states were decisive.

  1. “This is going to come down to Pennsylvania and Michigan”

    • Pennsylvania and Michigan were indeed central to the outcome. They were part of the former Democratic “blue wall” that Trump flipped in 2016 and Biden needed to win back. Biden did flip both states in 2020.(local10.com)
    • When AP and major outlets called Michigan for Biden on the evening of Wednesday, November 4 (the day after Election Day), Biden’s electoral vote total rose to 264, putting him “one state away” from victory and sharply narrowing Trump’s path.(fox17online.com)
    • Four days after Election Night, on Saturday, November 7, major networks and news organizations called the national race for Biden based on his lead in Pennsylvania and the remaining ballots there, explicitly noting that the outstanding Pennsylvania vote made it essentially impossible for Trump to catch up.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Other states (notably Wisconsin, Arizona, Georgia, and Nevada) were also close and important, so it didn’t only come down to Pennsylvania and Michigan—but those two Rust Belt states were correctly identified as pivotal parts of Biden’s path.
  2. “It’s going to take days to do those counts”

    • Michigan: Absentee ballots were still being processed into the early morning of November 4, and AP didn’t call Michigan for Biden until 5:56 p.m. EST on Wednesday, November 4—roughly a full day after polls closed.(local10.com)
    • Pennsylvania: Because of a huge volume of mail ballots and state rules preventing early processing, Pennsylvania’s count stretched over several days. Media organizations did not call Pennsylvania—and thus the presidency—until the morning of Saturday, November 7, four days after Election Night, explicitly citing the ongoing count there.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Official certification in Pennsylvania was not completed until November 24, underscoring how long counting and canvassing continued.(inquirer.com)
    • So the prediction that counting in these states would extend well beyond Election Night was accurate, especially for Pennsylvania.
  3. “We’re probably going to end up in the courts”

    • After the election, the Trump campaign and its allies filed dozens of lawsuits across several states, with Pennsylvania and Michigan among the most litigated.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Pennsylvania alone saw numerous post‑election suits by the Trump campaign and Republican allies challenging various aspects of mail‑in ballot rules and counting; all were ultimately dismissed or dropped.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Michigan likewise had multiple lawsuits filed to halt or overturn certification, including cases such as Donald J. Trump for President v. Benson and King v. Whitmer, all of which failed.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • At the national level, Texas filed Texas v. Pennsylvania in the U.S. Supreme Court seeking to invalidate the results in Pennsylvania, Michigan, and other states; the Court dismissed the case for lack of standing.(en.wikipedia.org)
    • Thus, the outcome was heavily contested in court, exactly as predicted, even though the litigation did not change the result.

Conclusion
Sacks correctly anticipated that:

  • Pennsylvania and Michigan would be central battlegrounds in determining the winner,
  • vote counting there would extend past Election Night by at least a day (Michigan) and several days (Pennsylvania), and
  • the result would likely be fought in the courts, particularly in those states.

While the prediction slightly overstates that only Pennsylvania and Michigan would matter, and Michigan’s projection came relatively quickly compared to Pennsylvania, the core forecast matches what actually happened. Therefore, the prediction is best judged as right.

politicsgovernment
As of the moment of speaking (late on election night, Nov 3–4, 2020), the presidential race outcome is approximately a 50/50 coin flip, with the conditional structure that Donald Trump must ultimately carry Georgia, Michigan, and Pennsylvania all three to win the presidency, while Joe Biden will win the presidency if he carries at least one of those three states, assuming current calls in Wisconsin and Arizona hold.
I think this thing is back to a coin flip. I mean, Trump now has to win Georgia, Michigan and Pennsylvania in order to win the presidency. If Biden wins any one of those three states, he wins.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks said, late on election night (Nov 3–4, 2020), that the race was “back to a coin flip” and that, with Wisconsin and Arizona then called for Biden, Trump would need to win Georgia, Michigan and Pennsylvania to take the presidency, while Biden would win if he carried any one of those three. In the final certified results, Biden won Arizona, Wisconsin, Georgia, Michigan and Pennsylvania and thus the presidency, 306–232 in the Electoral College, and under that final map it is straightforward to verify that if Arizona and Wisconsin stay with Biden, then Trump can only reach 270+ electoral votes by sweeping all three of Georgia (16 EV), Michigan (16 EV) and Pennsylvania (20 EV), whereas Biden reaches at least 270 if he wins even one of them. (en.wikipedia.org) This exactly matches the conditional structure Sacks described, and Biden’s actual path to victory—holding Arizona and Wisconsin and winning all three of those states—fell within the scenario he laid out. While his “coin flip” description of the live odds is not directly falsifiable and markets at different moments that night put each candidate well above 50%, some prediction markets around that time in fact traded in a range reasonably close to even money between Trump and Biden. (newsmax.com) Because the concretely testable part of his forecast (the electoral-vote pathways conditional on state outcomes) was accurate and the actual outcome satisfied the condition he attached to a Biden win, this prediction is best scored as “right.”

politicsgovernment
As of that moment on election night, David predicts: (1) the probability of a Biden victory is roughly 51% vs. 49% for Trump; (2) the resolution of the election result will likely take at least three more days; (3) there will probably be multiple court cases; (4) it is possible that the winner will remain unknown until sometime in December 2020; and (5) resolving the election result may require another U.S. Supreme Court case.
So, I mean, the reality is, I think this thing I mean, I think it's probably at the end of the day, 51 49 in favor of Biden right now, but we probably have at least three more days and maybe a bunch of court cases. Yeah. This could this could be really bad. I mean, we may not know who the winner is till December, and this may require another Supreme Court case.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evaluating the components of the prediction:

  1. “51–49 in favor of Biden right now”
    This is framed as a slight probabilistic edge, not a guarantee. Joe Biden did, in fact, ultimately win the 2020 U.S. presidential election, so viewing him as a narrow favorite on election night was directionally correct given the outcome. Major networks and the AP projected Biden the winner on November 7, 2020, after calling Pennsylvania for him. (adweek.com)

  2. “We probably have at least three more days”
    Election Day was Tuesday, November 3, 2020, and major outlets did not project a winner until Saturday, November 7—four days later—matching the forecast that it would take at least about three more days to resolve publicly. (adweek.com)

  3. “Maybe a bunch of court cases” / “probably … multiple court cases” (normalized)
    After the election, Trump’s campaign and Republican allies filed dozens of lawsuits—over 60 by many counts, and over 80 by some tallies—challenging various aspects of the results in multiple states. (en.wikipedia.org) This clearly satisfies the prediction of “a bunch” / multiple court cases.

  4. “We may not know who the winner is till December”
    This was explicitly framed as a possibility (“may not know”), not a confident forecast. In reality, major news organizations called the race for Biden on November 7, 2020, and he was widely treated as president‑elect from that point onward; the winner was not genuinely in doubt into December, even though formal processes (state certifications, Electoral College vote on December 14) continued. (adweek.com) This tail‑risk scenario did not occur, but it was couched as a contingent possibility rather than a mainline prediction.

  5. “This may require another Supreme Court case”
    Again framed as “may.” There were indeed election‑related cases and motions at the U.S. Supreme Court, notably Texas v. Pennsylvania, filed December 8, 2020, which sought to invalidate Biden’s wins in several states; the Court dismissed it on December 11, 2020. (en.wikipedia.org) While the Court did not ultimately resolve the election in the way Bush v. Gore did in 2000, the prediction that the post‑election fight might reach the Supreme Court was borne out (even if the Court’s role proved limited and non‑decisive).

Overall assessment
The concrete, time‑bound parts of the forecast—Biden as a slight favorite, a resolution taking at least about three more days, and the emergence of numerous post‑election court cases (including at the Supreme Court level)—all aligned with what actually happened. The more dramatic scenarios (winner unknown until December, election requiring Supreme Court resolution) were described as possibilities, not firm predictions, and the Supreme Court did in fact become involved, albeit without changing the outcome.

Given that the central, non‑hedged components were accurate and the rest were framed as contingent risks, the overall prediction is best characterized as “right” rather than wrong or inconclusive.

healtheconomy
As of mid‑October 2020, the COVID‑19 crisis is entering its final phase and will substantially wind down in severity and societal impact over the ensuing months, aided by effective treatments such as monoclonal antibodies and remdesivir.
it feels to me like we are really winding down on the whole the whole Covid thing.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction was wrong

  1. The pandemic did not wind down in the ensuing months after October 2020. In the U.S., the deadliest wave up to that point hit immediately afterward: CDC data show the 7‑day average of new COVID‑19 deaths peaked on January 11, 2021, and by March 17, 2021, the U.S. had recorded over 535,000 deaths. (archive.cdc.gov) Globally, cases and deaths continued to climb through 2021, reaching about 292 million reported cases and 5.43 million deaths by January 1, 2022, and more than 652 million cases and 6.7 million deaths by late December 2022. (emro.who.int) The Omicron wave (Dec 2021–Feb 2022) then produced the largest U.S. case surge, with ~30 million cases and ~170,000 deaths in just three months. (mdpi.com)

  2. The crisis phase lasted years, not months. The World Health Organization did not declare the end of COVID‑19 as a Public Health Emergency of International Concern until May 5, 2023—over 2.5 years after the October 2020 podcast. (who.int) Even after the emergency status ended, WHO and regional offices emphasized that COVID‑19 remained a significant ongoing health burden, requiring long‑term management. (paho.org)

  3. Remdesivir and monoclonal antibodies did not dramatically end the crisis. WHO’s large Solidarity trial and related analyses concluded that remdesivir has little or no effect on overall COVID‑19 mortality, contradicting hopes it would substantially change outcomes. (who.int) While some monoclonal antibodies helped in early variants, many lost effectiveness as the virus evolved; by late 2024 the FDA had fully revoked emergency authorizations for several major COVID antibody products because circulating variants were resistant and the drugs were no longer in use. (reuters.com)

Overall, the COVID‑19 crisis intensified after mid‑October 2020 and only gradually shifted into a more endemic, manageable phase over several years, driven largely by vaccination and accumulated immunity rather than a rapid wind‑down over the “ensuing months” via remdesivir and monoclonal antibodies.

politics
Chamath predicts that, based on October 2020 polling, the 2020 U.S. election is tracking toward a Biden landslide and that Donald Trump has insufficient time remaining before Election Day (November 3, 2020) to significantly change the polling trajectory.
it looks like a by and landslide. I, um, and I guess that makes sense. I think Trump's running out of time to change the polls.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is rated “wrong”

  1. No Biden “landslide” in the actual 2020 result

    • Final outcome: Joe Biden won 306 electoral votes to Donald Trump’s 232, the exact reverse of Trump’s 2016 total. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Popular vote: Biden 51.3% vs. Trump 46.8%, a margin of about 4.5 percentage points. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Political science and media usage of “landslide” generally implies an overwhelming or unusually large margin; there is no fixed threshold, but it connotes a decisive blowout well beyond a typical competitive race. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • A 4.5‑point popular‑vote margin and a 306–232 Electoral College result (with several tipping‑point states decided by less than 2 points) are widely regarded as a solid but not overwhelming win. This falls short of what most observers would call a “landslide.”
  2. Trump did significantly cut Biden’s polling lead after mid‑October
    The prediction added that Trump was “running out of time to change the polls,” implying the October polling picture would mostly hold.

    • Around three weeks before Election Day (mid‑October 2020), national polling averages had Biden ahead by about 10 points (e.g., RealClearPolitics and FiveThirtyEight both had Biden +10.6 on Oct. 13). (reddit.com)
    • In the final days before the election, a composite of major polling averages showed Biden ahead by roughly 7.9 points nationally (51.4% to 43.5%). (en.wikipedia.org)
    • The actual popular‑vote margin was Biden +4.5. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • From mid‑October to the vote count, Trump effectively narrowed Biden’s advantage by about 5–6 points relative to early/mid‑October polling, which is a substantial shift in the trajectory, even though it wasn’t enough to win.

Conclusion
The prediction contained two key claims:

  • The race was “tracking toward a Biden landslide.”
  • Trump had too little time left to significantly change the polls.

Biden’s eventual victory was neither a landslide by common standards nor a freezing of the mid‑October polling picture; Trump did meaningfully erode Biden’s lead before Election Day, though he still lost. Therefore, taken as stated, the prediction is wrong.

politicsgovernment
Chamath estimates a 20% probability that if Donald Trump loses the 2020 election, he will resign during the lame-duck period and arrange for Mike Pence to pardon him.
During the lame duck, during the lame duck period, if he lost, maybe 20%.View on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did not resign during the lame-duck period after losing the 2020 election, nor did Mike Pence become president and issue Trump a pardon.

Key facts:

  • Joe Biden won the 2020 U.S. presidential election, and Donald Trump served out his full term until January 20, 2021, when Biden was inaugurated and Trump’s presidency ended normally; Trump never resigned from office during the transition period.
  • Mike Pence never assumed the presidency and therefore never had the opportunity to issue a presidential pardon to Trump.
  • No record exists of Trump receiving any presidential pardon (from himself, Pence, or anyone else) for federal crimes in connection with his term.

Because the prediction required both (1) resignation during the lame-duck period and (2) a subsequent Pence pardon for Trump, and neither occurred, the prediction is wrong.

politicshealth
If Trump recovers from COVID-19 within about a week and appears physically strong, he will publicly claim that an effective cure already exists, downplaying the need for a vaccine and using this narrative to attempt to flip criticism and gain political advantage in the weeks before the 2020 election.
I think if I think, politically speaking, I think there's a lot of upside here for Trump. If he does get better in a week. I mean, if these polyclonal antibodies work, then. And he emerges from the white House, you know, fit as a fiddle in a week, he's going to say, the cure is here. You know, I was right. You don't even need a vaccine. The cure is here. It's over. And, um, and all the I told you so's might might flip around.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment

Overall, the conditional prediction substantially came true:

  1. Condition (“if he recovers in about a week and looks strong”) was met.

    • Trump was hospitalized Oct 2–5, 2020, then returned to the White House after three days. By Oct 7 he released a video saying he felt “perfect” and describing a rapid turnaround after receiving Regeneron’s antibody cocktail.(factcheck.org) This is roughly one week from onset/diagnosis and matches the “recovers in about a week” scenario.
  2. He publicly claimed that an effective cure already existed.

    • In multiple videos and interviews on Oct 7–8, Trump explicitly called the Regeneron monoclonal-antibody treatment a “cure,” saying it wasn’t just a therapeutic because it “just made me better,” and promised to make it available “free” to Americans.(forbes.com) Fact-checkers and news outlets repeatedly noted that no proven cure for COVID-19 existed at that time.(abcnews.go.com)
  3. He used this narrative for political advantage in the weeks before the 2020 election.

    • Commentary at the time described this as a deliberate “cure” gambit to compensate for the lack of a pre‑election vaccine, emphasizing his personal recovery and the supposed miracle treatment as an October surprise.(washingtonpost.com)
    • At the final presidential debate on Oct 22, Trump again highlighted the antibody treatment as essentially a cure that got him “better very fast,” using it to underscore his handling of COVID-19 shortly before Election Day.(abcnews.go.com)
  4. “Downplaying the need for a vaccine” – partially, but recognizably, yes.

    • In the same period, Trump said getting the antibody treatments to hospitals was “more important to me than the vaccine,” explicitly elevating the supposed cure over vaccination.(israelnationalnews.com) That clearly downplays the centrality of vaccines, in line with the prediction’s logic (even though he continued to tout that vaccines were coming soon and did not literally say “you don’t even need a vaccine”).(debates.org)

Conclusion

The specific wording “you don’t even need a vaccine” was not documented verbatim, and Trump continued to promote forthcoming vaccines. However, the core predicted behavior did occur: after a rapid recovery, he publicly portrayed his treatment as a present‑day cure, framed it as more important than a vaccine, and tried to leverage that story to flip criticism and gain political advantage in the closing weeks of the 2020 campaign. That is close enough in substance to rate the prediction as right rather than ambiguous.

healthpolitics
Forecast of Trump’s COVID-19 course and political impact (from 3 Oct 2020): ~50% probability that his illness effectively resolves in about one week and benefits him politically; ~40% probability that he has a longer 3–4 week course that limits campaigning and hurts him electorally; ~5–10% probability of a more serious outcome (e.g., critical illness or death).
I think the most I think the most likely outcome here is that because he's got the best care, um, he's you know, it's probably like at least 50% that this is over for him in about a week. Um, and it redounds to his political advantage. I think there's probably a 40% chance that, you know, he's got more like a 3 or 4 week case, which I think would hurt him because he wouldn't be able to campaign. And then there's maybe like a 5 or 10% chance of something more serious.View on YouTube
Explanation

Trump’s actual COVID-19 course and its electoral effects don’t match any of the three scenarios Sacks laid out.

Medical course:

  • Trump announced his positive test on October 2, 2020, was hospitalized October 2–5 at Walter Reed, and returned to the White House October 5.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • By October 7–8, his physician reported he was fever‑free for several days, symptom‑free for over 24 hours, and expected to be safe to resume public engagements around October 10.(aljazeera.com)
  • He held his first full campaign rally in Sanford, Florida, on October 12, just 10 days after the diagnosis announcement and a week after hospital discharge.(washingtonpost.com)
    This is closer to a ~1–1.5 week disruption, not the 3–4 week limitation envisioned in his 40% scenario, and far from the “more serious” (ICU/ventilator/death) 5–10% scenario.

Political impact:

  • After the first debate and Trump’s COVID diagnosis, national and swing‑state polling showed Biden’s lead stable or expanding, not a Trump boost. For example, CNBC/Change Research and other averages saw Biden’s margin in key swing states and nationally tick up in the week after the diagnosis.(cnbc.com)
  • One Franklin Pierce/Boston Herald poll found Biden’s national lead widening from 5 points pre‑diagnosis to 21 points immediately afterward.(newsweek.com)
  • Trump ultimately lost the 2020 election, and research on COVID and the 2020 vote finds that higher local COVID case counts reduced Trump’s vote share, indicating the pandemic—including perceptions of his handling of it—hurt him electorally.(pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)

Putting this together:

  • Reality combined a short illness (near his 50% medical timeline) with no clear political benefit and likely net harm, contrary to the “redounds to his political advantage” part of that scenario.
  • His 40% scenario (3–4 week case that prevents campaigning) did not occur, as he was back to large rallies within about 10 days.(washingtonpost.com)
  • The 5–10% serious‑outcome scenario also did not materialize.

Because the real world outcome (short course + neutral/negative political impact) is not one of the structured scenarios he assigned substantial probability to—especially his main 50% case tying a quick recovery to political advantage—the prediction is best judged wrong rather than ambiguous or inconclusive.

politics
If Trump is unable to hold his usual in‑person campaign rallies during the remainder of the 2020 election cycle, this will likely shift the national vote margin by a few percentage points against him and could be sufficient to cause him to lose the election.
I think he needs to be able to campaign and hold these rallies. I think that's an essential part of his, uh, election strategy... so yeah, I think if he can't do rallies, I think, you know, that could easily swing the election a couple of points and cause him to lose.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is hard to score

Sacks’ claim was conditional:

If Trump is unable to hold his usual in‑person campaign rallies during the remainder of the 2020 election cycle, this will likely shift the national vote margin by a few percentage points against him and could be sufficient to cause him to lose the election.

To evaluate it, we need to know:

  1. Was Trump actually unable to hold his usual in‑person rallies for the remainder of the campaign?

    • After testing positive for COVID-19 on October 2, 2020, Trump canceled in‑person campaign events for a short period while quarantining and being treated. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • However, he resumed in‑person rallies on October 12, 2020, one week after being discharged from the hospital, and then held frequent large rallies in battleground states—often multiple rallies per day—through Election Day. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • So the strong condition "unable to hold his usual in‑person campaign rallies during the remainder of the election cycle" did not really occur; his rally schedule was briefly paused, then returned in force.
  2. Did Trump lose by “a few percentage points”?

    • Joe Biden won 51.3% of the national popular vote to Trump’s 46.8%, a margin of about 4.5 percentage points, and won the Electoral College 306–232. (pollbludger.net)
    • That outcome matches the “few percentage points” loss Sacks described, but it happened even though Trump did resume large rallies.
  3. Can we attribute that margin to an inability to hold rallies?

    • Because Trump was not actually prevented from holding his typical late‑campaign rallies (he held many after October 12), we are left with a counterfactual causal claim: if he had truly been unable to hold such rallies, would his margin have been even worse (or is that what caused the existing margin)?
    • Available analyses discuss COVID, Trump’s diagnosis, and broader issues as electoral liabilities, but they do not isolate the effect of a hypothetical total loss of rallies relative to the actual world where he still held many. (en.wikipedia.org)

Because the key condition of the prediction (no usual in‑person rallies for the rest of the campaign) did not actually hold, we cannot cleanly test whether that scenario would have shifted the vote margin by a few points and caused or cemented his loss. Enough time has passed, but the world we observed is not the world the prediction was about.

Conclusion: The prediction is about a counterfactual scenario that never fully happened, so its correctness cannot be determined from the real‑world outcome.

Therefore, the appropriate label is:

  • result: ambiguous
politicsgovernment
Given Biden’s debate performance demonstrating basic mental competence and centrism, he will be more electorally successful in the 2020 general election than a more progressive Democrat such as Elizabeth Warren would have been in the same race.
now that we know he's not senile, I think he's he is the the Democrats most electable candidate because he is more centrist than certainly an Elizabeth Warren or some of the other candidates that you mentioned.View on YouTube
Explanation

There is no definitive way to verify the counterfactual claim that Biden was more electable than Elizabeth Warren (or other progressives) against Trump in 2020, so the prediction cannot be cleanly marked right or wrong.

What we can say with evidence

  1. Biden’s actual performance in 2020

    • Joe Biden won the 2020 presidential election, defeating Donald Trump with 306–232 electoral votes and about a 4.5‑point popular vote margin (51.3% to 46.8%).
    • That clearly shows he was electable, but doesn’t by itself prove he was more electable than any other Democrat.
  2. Warren and other progressives never faced Trump

    • Elizabeth Warren lost the Democratic primary to Biden and never became the nominee, so we have no direct election result to compare against Biden’s 2020 performance. Any comparison of their hypothetical general‑election performance is an ex‑ante modeling or pundit judgment problem, not an empirical one.
  3. Polling/electability debates are not conclusive

    • While there were 2019–2020 polls testing Warren and others against Trump, such early head‑to‑head polling is not a reliable ground truth of what would have happened in November 2020, given campaign dynamics, COVID, economic shock, and events like the BLM protests — all of which unfolded in ways that would likely have interacted differently with a different nominee.
    • Political science literature generally treats such counterfactual matchups as inherently uncertain; small differences in early polls or models do not allow us to say with confidence that candidate A would definitely have done better/worse than candidate B.

Why the prediction is “ambiguous”

The core of the prediction is a counterfactual electability claim: that Biden’s demonstrated basic competence and centrism made him the most electable Democrat and that he would do better than a more progressive nominee like Warren. Biden did win, but we cannot observe the alternative world where Warren (or another progressive) was the nominee. Existing data (primary outcomes, head‑to‑head polls, models, pundit analyses) do not provide a decisive, widely accepted answer about whether Warren would have done better, worse, or about the same.

Because the key comparative claim (“more electorally successful than Warren in the same race”) is inherently untestable with real‑world results, the prediction is not verifiable or falsifiable in a strict sense. Therefore, the fairest classification is:

  • Result: ambiguous – the necessary counterfactual evidence to judge it right or wrong does not and cannot exist.
politicsgovernment
If Democrats win both the presidency and the Senate in 2020, the first roughly two years of the Biden administration will see the passage and signing of a substantial volume of legislation; if instead Republicans retain the Senate while Biden wins, legislative gridlock will prevail and the Biden presidency will be comparatively less consequential in policy terms.
I think it will matter a lot if the Democrats win the Senate as well as the presidency, because then they will have one party control and they can pass much legislation as they want. And I think a lot of things will get signed. And I think the Biden presidency could be very consequential, at least for two years... If the Republicans hold on to the Senate, but Biden wins the presidency. I agree with you that it's not going to be a tremendously consequential election because we'll have gridlock and divided government again.View on YouTube
Explanation

What actually happened

  • In the 2020 elections, Democrats won the presidency and—after the January 5, 2021 Georgia runoffs—effective control of the U.S. Senate with a 50–50 split and Vice President Harris as tie‑breaker, alongside control of the House.
  • During approximately the first two years of Biden’s term (January 2021–January 2023), a large set of significant laws were passed and signed, including among others:
    • American Rescue Plan Act of 2021 (major $1.9T COVID relief and social spending package).
    • Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act (2021), a roughly $1.2T infrastructure bill.
    • Inflation Reduction Act of 2022, with major climate, health‑care, and tax provisions.
    • CHIPS and Science Act of 2022, subsidizing domestic semiconductor manufacturing.
    • PACT Act expanding health benefits for veterans exposed to toxic burn pits.
    • Bipartisan Safer Communities Act, the most significant federal gun‑safety legislation in decades.

Contemporary political reporting and academic commentary widely described Biden’s first‑two‑year legislative record as one of the most substantial for a modern president, especially given the narrow margins in Congress.

Comparing to the prediction

Sacks’ prediction was conditional and qualitative:

  1. If Democrats win presidency + Senate, there will be one‑party control and they can pass much legislation; Biden’s first ~two years would be very consequential.
  2. If Republicans hold the Senate while Biden wins, we’d see gridlock and a less consequential presidency.

The world that actually occurred is case (1). In that world, there was unified (though narrow) Democratic control and a substantial volume of major legislation was in fact passed and signed in the first two years, and Biden’s presidency is widely regarded as consequential in policy terms compared with the gridlock scenario.

Because the realized conditional outcome matches his described consequences, the prediction is right.

politicsgovernment
If Democrats hold both chambers of Congress during a Biden presidency, Biden will generally sign into law the major legislation that a Democratic Congress passes, rather than frequently vetoing or blocking their agenda.
I think at the end of the day, if the Democrats win Congress, he'll sign whatever they they pass.View on YouTube
Explanation

During Joe Biden’s presidency, Democrats held effective control of both the House and the Senate in the 117th Congress from January 20, 2021, until January 3, 2023, giving them a governing trifecta. (en.wikipedia.org)

In that period, Congress passed and Biden signed into law all of the major Democratic-led legislative packages that managed to clear both chambers, including:

  • The American Rescue Plan Act of 2021 (COVID relief), passed on party-line votes and signed March 11, 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act (“bipartisan infrastructure law”), enacted in 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • The CHIPS and Science Act, signed August 9, 2022. (bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov)
  • The Inflation Reduction Act of 2022, the core climate/health and tax package. (en.wikipedia.org)

Official veto records from the U.S. Senate and compiled veto lists show that Biden issued no vetoes at all during the 117th Congress; his vetoes begin only in 2023, after Republicans captured the House in the 118th Congress. (senate.gov) Those later vetoes were almost entirely aimed at Republican-led congressional disapproval resolutions targeting his administration’s regulations, not at blocking a Democratic Congress’s legislative agenda. (en.wikipedia.org)

Some ambitious progressive priorities (for example, the larger original Build Back Better framework and certain voting-rights or filibuster-reform efforts) failed because they could not secure unanimous Democratic support in the Senate, particularly from moderate Democrats; such proposals never passed both chambers, so Biden was never in a position to veto them. (en.wikipedia.org) These are therefore not counterexamples to the claim that he would sign what a Democratic Congress actually passes.

Given that (1) Democrats did control both chambers for the first two years of Biden’s term, (2) Biden signed the major legislation that Democratic leaders were able to move through Congress, and (3) he did not make a practice of vetoing or otherwise blocking bills passed by that Democratic Congress, Sacks’s prediction—that Biden would essentially "sign whatever [Democrats] pass" if they won Congress—has been borne out by subsequent events.

techeconomy
In the years following 2020, U.S. tech companies will increasingly relocate or expand out of San Francisco, leading to a broad dispersion of tech firms across many regions of the United States instead of being heavily concentrated in the Bay Area.
I think, you know, I guess, you know, because of what San Francisco has done in terms of driving out companies. I think companies are going to be, you know, tech companies are going to be all over the US now.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2020 supports the claim that many U.S. tech companies have reduced their concentration in San Francisco and expanded across a broader set of U.S. regions.

  1. Companies reducing SF footprint and decentralizing
  • A 2021 analysis by sf.citi (a San Francisco tech industry group) documented a significant migration of tech companies and workers out of San Francisco, finding that most surveyed tech companies had already downsized or planned to downsize Bay Area offices, and many expected a substantial share of their Bay Area workforce to remain permanently remote. The report explicitly described an ongoing tech exodus and a trend toward decentralization of the industry footprint away from San Francisco. (sfciti.org)
  • A related sf.citi event report in March 2021 noted that the Bay Area’s dominance as the single main tech cluster was already weakening before COVID, and that the pandemic accelerated a shift toward more distributed or hub‑and‑spoke office footprints, with more tech offices in more U.S. cities (e.g., founders planning multiple hubs rather than a single SF HQ). (sfciti.org)
  1. Headquarters moves and major expansions out of California/Bay Area
  • Brookings (2022) highlighted that several major tech firms moved corporate headquarters from California to other metros during the pandemic period, including Palantir to Denver, Hewlett Packard Enterprise to the Houston area, Oracle and Tesla to Texas, and noted large new Google and Apple engineering offices in other states. (brookings.edu)
  • A 2025 Business Insider report found that since 2020 more than 200 companies have relocated their headquarters to Texas, with over half coming from California. It specifically lists high‑profile tech and tech‑adjacent moves such as Tesla, Oracle, SpaceX, and Coinbase choosing Texas for headquarters or major bases, reflecting a sustained post‑2020 relocation trend away from California’s traditional hubs. (businessinsider.com)
  1. Growth of new and expanding tech hubs across the U.S.
  • Brookings’ geographic analysis of the tech sector concludes that while pre‑pandemic growth was highly concentrated in a few coastal superstars (including San Francisco and San Jose), the pandemic years began to distribute more tech activity into a wider set of places. Employment growth slowed in some top superstars and increased in numerous midsized and smaller markets, suggesting a partial shift from extreme concentration toward a more geographically dispersed pattern. (brookings.edu)
  • A 2022 Fortune analysis of tech job data found that, although California and New York still led in total tech employment, the fastest tech job growth during the pandemic occurred in a wide range of other states (such as Tennessee, Idaho, Utah, North Carolina, Texas) and in cities like Houston, Orlando, and Charlotte, showing that tech employment growth was increasingly scattered across the country rather than confined to the Bay Area and a few coastal hubs. (fortune.com)
  • A 2025 employment intelligence report described Austin, Miami, Denver, and Nashville as major emerging tech employment centers, collectively adding 127,000 tech jobs in 2024 and growing nearly 90 percent faster than traditional hubs. It notes major firms such as Tesla, Apple, Google, and Meta building significant engineering operations in these emerging markets, along with a sharp rise in venture capital investment in nontraditional hubs, emphasizing conscious geographic diversification by companies and investors. (thebigjob.com)
  1. Overall assessment relative to the prediction
  • Sacks’s prediction did not say San Francisco would cease to matter; it claimed that, because of SF’s policies and broader conditions after 2020, tech companies would increasingly be located all over the U.S. rather than being so heavily concentrated in the Bay Area.
  • The post‑2020 evidence shows: (a) a documented reduction in SF’s share of offices and workers as many firms go remote‑first or downsize there, (b) multiple headline firms relocating headquarters or substantial operations from California to other states, and (c) rapid growth and deepening tech ecosystems in a broad range of U.S. metros (Austin, Miami, Denver, Nashville, Houston, smaller interior cities), all while SF remains important but less uniquely dominant.

Taken together, these trends match the direction and essence of the prediction: in the years after 2020, U.S. tech employment, investment, and corporate footprints have become more geographically dispersed across many regions of the country, with significant growth and relocation outside San Francisco and the Bay Area. Therefore, the prediction is best characterized as right.

politicsmarkets
As of early October 2020, Joe Biden has roughly a 70% probability of winning the November 2020 U.S. presidential election, in line with prediction/betting market odds.
the betting line is, is like somewhere in the 60 to 70% range. And so you'd have to say that the betting markets are probably, you know, pretty accurate. I guess, you know, probably there's a 70% chance of him winning.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available data on prediction and betting markets in early–mid October 2020 shows Joe Biden was indeed trading in roughly the 60–70% implied probability range that Sacks described. For example, a Forbes piece on October 7, 2020 reported prediction market PredictIt giving Biden a 65% chance of victory, and noted this was an increase from the previous week. (forbes.com) Another Forbes article on November 2, 2020 stated that PredictIt had Biden “near-70% highs earlier this month,” indicating Biden’s odds had recently been around the 70% level in October. (forbes.com) A Smarkets exchange update on October 21, 2020 reported Biden at a 63% chance at that time and noted his lead had recently reached 71% versus Trump’s 29%, again consistent with the 60–70% range Sacks referenced. (prnewswire.com)

Sacks’s claim, normalized as “As of early October 2020, Joe Biden has roughly a 70% probability of winning, in line with betting market odds,” therefore matches independent reporting on those markets at that time. In addition, Biden did go on to win the 2020 U.S. presidential election, securing 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232 and being inaugurated as the 46th president on January 20, 2021. (cnbc.com) Taken together, his characterization of the odds was accurate relative to contemporaneous markets, and the higher-probability outcome he pointed to (a Biden win) is what actually occurred, so this prediction is best classified as right.

politicsmarkets
As of early October 2020, Donald Trump’s true probability of winning the November 2020 U.S. presidential election is somewhat higher than the roughly 30% chance implied by betting markets.
Yeah. And it's probably bigger than 30%. Yeah. It's probably bigger slightly bigger than what the betting markets are giving him credit for.View on YouTube
Explanation
  • Around the time of the podcast (immediately after the first debate and Trump’s COVID diagnosis), major betting and prediction markets generally implied something in the ballpark of a 30–40% chance for Trump. For example:

    • A Reuters report on October 1, 2020 noted that on Smarkets, Biden was around a 63% favorite after the first debate, implying Trump in roughly the high‑30s/low‑40s. (timesofindia.indiatimes.com)
    • A mid‑October Guardian summary of online bookmakers put Biden around 69% and Trump about 32%. (theguardian.com)
    • Crypto and exchange markets like Polymarket and FTX generally priced Trump in the low‑30s to high‑30s percent range in the weeks leading up to the election. (decrypt.co)
  • Expert statistical models at the time disagreed strongly with those market odds:

    • FiveThirtyEight’s model, for instance, gave Trump only about a 12% chance by October 22, 2020. (fivethirtyeight.com)
    • The Economist’s model around late October put Trump as low as 4–14%. (decrypt.co)
  • After the fact, several analyses argued that 2020 election prediction markets showed systematic irrationalities and arbitrage opportunities, particularly in the way they priced Trump even after it was clear Biden had won key states. (asteriskmag.com) However, these critiques focus on inefficiencies and bias; they do not pin down a consensus, ex‑post “true” pre‑election win probability for Trump.

  • Because:

    1. The “true probability” of a one‑off event (Trump winning in 2020) is inherently unobservable;
    2. Credible models at the time spanned a wide range (roughly 5–40%) for Trump’s chances; and
    3. Post‑election research has shown that both polls and markets had notable flaws without definitively establishing that Trump’s real odds must have been above or below the ~30% level,

    we cannot rigorously determine whether Sacks was correct that Trump’s true winning probability was “somewhat higher” than the ~30% implied by markets.

Conclusion: The claim is about an unobservable quantity (true probability) in a context where contemporary and retrospective analyses diverge. Even with the benefit of hindsight, there is no objective way to say that the real probability was definitively above or below 30%. Therefore the prediction’s accuracy is ambiguous rather than clearly right or wrong.

healthgovernment
From September 2020 onward, the United States will not re‑enter broad, government‑mandated COVID "second lockdowns" comparable to the initial spring 2020 lockdowns; in particular, red states will not implement such renewed comprehensive lockdowns, and nationally the country will not "go back into lockdowns."
There's not going to be a second lockdown. It doesn't make any sense. And even if there were, people aren't going to support it. Um, certainly any of the red states aren't going to do it. I guess the blue states may. They still haven't, you know, sort of unlockdown. So maybe that gets more protracted in places like California. But, um, but we're not going to go back into lockdowns and people won't support it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is judged wrong

Claim (normalized): From September 2020 onward, the U.S. would not re‑enter broad, government‑mandated COVID "second lockdowns" comparable to spring 2020; red states in particular would not implement renewed comprehensive lockdowns, and nationally the country would not "go back into lockdowns."


1. Blue‑state “second lockdowns” clearly did occur

After the podcast date (19 Sep 2020), several large states re‑imposed stay‑at‑home or very close to stay‑at‑home orders affecting tens of millions of people:

  • California: On December 3, 2020, Governor Newsom announced a Regional Stay Home Order. When a region’s ICU capacity dropped below 15%, all individuals in that region were ordered to stay home except for permitted work and essential errands; private gatherings were prohibited; most sectors were closed except critical infrastructure and limited‑capacity retail. This applied to regions including Southern California and the Bay Area and covered the majority of the state’s population for weeks.(riversideca.gov)
  • Oregon: On November 13, 2020, Governor Kate Brown put the entire state under a two‑week “freeze” with strict limits on social gatherings and a shutdown of on‑site service for many businesses; contemporaneous coverage explicitly referred to this as a “second lockdown.”(capitalpress.com)
  • Washington state: On November 15, 2020, Governor Inslee imposed new statewide restrictions that banned most indoor social gatherings with people outside the household, prohibited indoor restaurant dining, and closed indoor operations for gyms, movie theaters, and other venues. These were significant, renewed lockdown‑style measures in response to the winter surge.(en.wikipedia.org)

These were broad, government‑mandated restrictions, described officially as Stay Home / Stay‑at‑Home Orders, and in scope and severity they were clearly comparable to the initial spring lockdowns in those states, even if not identical in every detail.

Given that the prediction was phrased as "There’s not going to be a second lockdown... we’re not going to go back into lockdowns," this national‑level assertion is falsified by what happened in multiple large U.S. states.


2. Red states mostly avoided renewed full stay‑at‑home orders, but that doesn’t rescue the overall claim

It is true that many Republican‑led states did not re‑impose statewide stay‑at‑home orders after reopening from the first wave:

  • States like South Dakota never adopted a statewide stay‑at‑home order at all and continued to resist lockdowns.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Texas and Mississippi had stay‑at‑home orders only in spring 2020; later surges were managed with partial restrictions (e.g., capacity limits, mask mandates) rather than a second full lockdown.(en.wikipedia.org)

So the narrower sub‑claim that "certainly any of the red states aren’t going to do it" was largely borne out in practice. However, the normalized prediction and the original quote go further, asserting that the U.S. as a whole would not go back into lockdowns.

Because multiple populous states did in fact implement second stay‑home/lockdown orders, the overall prediction—framed as “there’s not going to be a second lockdown” and “we’re not going to go back into lockdowns” in the United States—is incorrect, even though the red‑vs‑blue nuance was partly accurate.

health
Over the months following September 2020, rapid COVID antigen tests using small handheld readers and disposable swabs will roll out widely in the U.S. via private adoption (e.g., stores and restaurants), not through a coordinated government mandate; early adopters will use them at entry, and a de facto system of recent-test proof (receipts/vouchers) will emerge so individuals do not have to be swabbed repeatedly each day.
I think they will be everywhere. And, uh, you know, I don't think it'll be a government mandated thing. So I don't think the government will get its act together, but it'll be the kind of thing where you go shopping at a store or whatever, and they'll be early adopters or a restaurant, they'll start using it. People will realize, well, wait, I don't want to get swabbed three times a day, so then they'll get some sort of like receipt or voucher they can take with them to the next place.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary The core scenario—ubiquitous rapid antigen entry testing at stores and restaurants, with a de facto recent-test “receipt/voucher” system—did not materialize in the U.S. in the months after September 2020, even though rapid antigen tests themselves did become available.

What did happen

  • The FDA authorized multiple rapid antigen tests for home use starting in December 2020 (e.g., Ellume’s fully over‑the‑counter test and Abbott’s at‑home BinaxNOW), and manufacturers ramped up production through 2021. (fda.gov)
  • Abbott’s BinaxNOW card test and NAVICA app were marketed with the idea of a digital health pass for negative results, showing that some tech to generate test-based passes existed. (abbott.mediaroom.com)
  • However, policy analyses at the time describe no coherent national strategy to use rapid antigen tests for broad routine screening; states mainly used them for diagnosing symptomatic people or targeted high‑risk settings (prisons, clinics, certain workplaces), not as universal entrance checks at retail or dining. (stateline.org)

What did not happen (contradicting the prediction)

  • No widespread entrance testing at stores/restaurants. In practice, U.S. mitigation for everyday venues centered on masks and capacity limits early on, and later shifted to proof of vaccination, not point-of-entry rapid testing. Major cities (e.g., New York City, San Francisco, Los Angeles, New Orleans) required proof of vaccination—and only occasionally allowed a recent negative test as an alternative—for indoor dining, gyms, and entertainment, but did not implement routine on‑site swab-and-read testing for every customer. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • No ubiquitous “test receipt/voucher” norm for daily life. While apps like NAVICA or various travel/event apps could display negative test results, there is no evidence that a general, society‑wide system emerged where ordinary shoppers or diners routinely presented a same‑day rapid test receipt in lieu of being swabbed at each door. Such passes were niche (e.g., some travel and special events), not the standard mechanism for entering most private businesses.
  • Rapid tests were not cheap or abundant enough for mass daily screening. Analyses noted limited federal up‑front investment and relatively high per-test costs in the U.S., which hindered mass, frequent screening compared with some European countries that offered very cheap or free rapid tests. (kff.org)

Evaluation against the specific claims

  • "They will be everywhere" / used broadly at entry to stores and restaurants: Did not occur. Rapid tests became widely sold but were not a routine gatekeeping step for most retail or dining venues.
  • "Not ... government mandated" but driven by private early adopters: Federal government did not build a unified rapid-testing entrance system, but private adoption at doors remained rare, confined mostly to select workplaces, travel-related contexts, or special events.
  • "Receipt or voucher" so people don’t get swabbed multiple times per day: Although some apps could show test results, the envisioned daily-life ecosystem of negative-test vouchers as a common alternative to repeated swabbing at multiple venues never became standard practice.

Because the key, distinctive elements of the prediction—ubiquitous point-of-entry rapid testing at everyday businesses and a de facto recent-test pass system—did not come true, the prediction is best classified as wrong.

healtheconomy
By summer 2021, COVID-19 will be a "distant memory" in practical terms in the U.S.: case rates will have dropped substantially, and people will largely have returned to pre‑pandemic activities (e.g., attending sports games and public events) at levels similar to summer 2019/2020, with only limited transitional measures like rapid testing in place for a few additional months.
for all of these reasons, I think COVID's going to be a distant memory by next summer, I really do. I think, um, I think... I think people will largely be back, um, to what they were doing last summer or by next summer.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary of the prediction

Sacks predicted in September 2020 that by summer 2021 in the U.S., COVID-19 would be a “distant memory” in practical terms, with people “largely…back to what they were doing last summer or by next summer.” That implies:

  • Substantially lower, non‑salient case rates
  • Pandemic no longer a central concern
  • Broad return to pre‑pandemic‑style activities, with only limited transitional measures

What actually happened by summer 2021

  1. Major Delta wave and high case counts

    • By June–August 2021, the highly transmissible Delta variant had become the dominant strain in the U.S.; by July 7, 2021, CDC data showed Delta had surpassed Alpha as the main variant. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • By August 1, 2021, the U.S. had surpassed 35 million cumulative cases, and Delta accounted for 99% of new cases by August, driving a large summer surge and putting intense pressure on hospitals in many states. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In mid‑August 2021, weekly new infections reached over 900,000 nationally (about 130,000 per day), comparable to major prior peaks and clearly not a “distant” issue. (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. Hospitals under severe strain

    • The Delta wave produced a hospital crisis in many parts of the U.S. during July–September 2021, with ICUs over 90% full in multiple states and some regions effectively running out of ICU capacity. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • This level of strain is inconsistent with COVID having faded into the background of daily life.
  3. Ongoing public‑health measures and concern

    • On July 27, 2021, the CDC re‑instated guidance recommending that fully vaccinated people wear masks in public indoor settings in areas of substantial or high transmission, in direct response to Delta. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • This reversal indicates that, far from being a “distant memory,” COVID was still driving major policy changes and public anxiety well into summer 2021.
  4. Activities and events were not fully back to normal

    • While many activities (e.g., some sports events, travel, dining) had partially resumed with vaccines, they were often accompanied by capacity limits, masking, or proof‑of‑vaccination/testing requirements, and were periodically disrupted or re‑restricted as the Delta wave grew. This pattern is visible in state‑level chronicles: for example, Arkansas and Minnesota saw rising summer cases, renewed mask rules in certain settings, and concerns about school, camp, and youth‑related outbreaks by August 2021. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Nationally, case and hospitalization trends in mid‑2021 still followed strong waves (e.g., May–September 2021 cycle), not a stable, low‑concern background level. (acsh.org)

Evaluation

By summer 2021 in the U.S., COVID-19 was:

  • Driving a major Delta wave with very high case counts and hospital strain
  • Prompting renewed CDC masking guidance and other mitigation steps
  • Still a central social, political, and personal concern

Although vaccines allowed some resumption of activities, the situation did not match the prediction that COVID would be a “distant memory” in practical terms with a broad, near‑normal return to pre‑pandemic life. The pandemic remained salient and disruptive.

Verdict: wrong.

In the post‑COVID period (starting roughly 2021 onward), office usage patterns will shift in a lasting way: many companies will treat offices more like co‑working hubs where employees come in around three days per week and work from home the remaining days, establishing permanent flexibility rather than a full, permanent work‑from‑home model.
I think offices will become a little bit more like co-working spaces for a single company, where people come in three days a week and work from home a couple days a week. I think there'll be a permanent flexibility, but but I also think that people want to get back to work and they want back to offices and they want to interact with people. And I think everyone's going to be excited to do that again. It's not like everyone's just going to be working from home forever.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment Available data on post‑COVID work patterns through 2024–2025 matches the core of Sacks’ prediction for office workers:

  • Hybrid as the dominant model for remote‑capable jobs. Gallup and related analyses find that, among employees whose jobs can be done remotely, roughly half work hybrid and around a quarter to a third are fully remote, with the remaining minority fully on‑site. This is a complete reversal of 2019 patterns and has stabilized rather than reverting to pre‑COVID norms.【0search3】【0search9】
  • Typical cadence ~2–3 days in the office. Gallup reports hybrid workers now average about 2.6 days per week on‑site, with the biggest growth in workers coming in three days per week. Most hybrid employees cluster at two to three office days, not one extreme or the other, aligning closely with “come in three days a week and work from home a couple days a week.”【0search4】【0news17】
  • Offices functioning more like hubs than full‑time desks. Badge‑swipe and occupancy data show U.S. office use has plateaued well below 2019 levels (national occupancy around the 50% range; San Francisco ~45%), indicating offices are no longer filled five days a week but used more as periodic collaboration hubs.【0search2】【0news14】
  • Flexibility is now structurally embedded. Surveys of employers and job postings show that hybrid/remote options are widely offered and persist across years: by 2025, about a quarter of new U.S. job ads are hybrid and ~12% fully remote, while fully in‑office postings have dropped significantly compared with early 2023. Employers and researchers describe hybrid as the “new normal,” with executives expecting even more hybrid/remote by 2028, not a return to 2019.【0search1】【0search7】【0search9】
  • Not “everyone working from home forever.” Across the entire U.S. workforce (including non‑office jobs), early‑2025 data show roughly 61% fully on‑site, 26% hybrid, 13% fully remote. Even for remote‑capable roles, fully remote workers remain a minority. This supports Sacks’ point that the outcome would not be universal permanent work‑from‑home.【0search0】【0search2】

There are countertrends—some employers and especially the federal government have pushed back toward more in‑office mandates—but nationally, hybrid remains the prevailing pattern for remote‑capable office work, with 2–3 in‑office days and durable flexibility.【0search5】【0news12】

Conclusion The central components of Sacks’ prediction—lasting, structural hybrid work with ~three office days per week, offices used more like co‑working hubs, and no universal permanent WFH regime—are well supported by post‑2021 data. On balance, the prediction is right.

politicshealth
In the 2020 U.S. presidential election, Donald Trump’s stance on COVID policy (opposition to renewed or "permanent" lockdowns and support for reopening) will be a net electoral advantage for him relative to Democrats advocating renewed lockdowns, and this contrast will help Trump’s chances of winning.
at this point, I would think, I think that Covid is Covid policy is a net plus for Trump in this campaign because, the other side of it is, um, is these permanent lockdowns... and so, you know, again, I think this this idea of permanent lockdowns, if that is the alternative to Trump, will help Trump win.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary of prediction vs. outcome

  • Sacks predicted that Trump’s COVID policy stance (against renewed/permanent lockdowns, for reopening) would be a net electoral plus for him and would help him win in 2020, especially contrasted with Democrats supposedly favoring “permanent lockdowns.”
  • In reality, Joe Biden won the 2020 presidential election, with 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232, and a popular vote margin of about 4.5 percentage points (51.3% to 46.8%).

What political science and polling evidence show
Multiple post‑election analyses indicate that COVID and Trump’s handling of it were, on balance, a liability rather than an asset:

  1. Approval of Trump’s COVID handling was consistently net negative by late summer and fall 2020. Public polling through September–November 2020 showed more voters disapproving than approving of his handling of the pandemic, and this disapproval was strongly associated with voting against him (shown in major poll aggregations and postelection surveys).
  2. Issue salience & vote choice: Exit polls and large‑N surveys (e.g., AP VoteCast, major media/academic analyses) found that:
    • Voters who prioritized the coronavirus pandemic as the most important issue broke heavily for Biden.
    • Voters who supported quicker reopening and were less worried about COVID tended to support Trump, but they were numerically smaller than the group worried about the virus and supportive of stronger public‑health measures.
  3. County‑ and state‑level data: Research using county‑level death/case data generally finds that higher COVID impact correlated with relative declines in Trump’s vote share compared to 2016, especially in suburban and swing areas, implying the pandemic environment and his response hurt rather than helped him electorally.

Evaluating the exact claim
The prediction has two linked components:

  1. “COVID policy is a net plus for Trump in this campaign” – This is contradicted by:

    • National polling showing a net negative approval of Trump’s COVID response.
    • Issue‑priority voters concerned about the pandemic breaking strongly for Biden.
    • Empirical work showing worse COVID conditions were associated with weaker Trump performance vs. 2016.
  2. “This idea of permanent lockdowns, if that is the alternative to Trump, will help Trump win” – In practice:

    • Biden did not run on “permanent lockdowns” but on a more aggressive federal COVID response (testing, masking, stimulus, guidance) coupled with reopening once controlled.
    • Voters worried about health risks and dissatisfied with Trump’s approach were large enough, in key swing states, to deny him reelection.
    • Whatever limited relative benefit Trump may have gained among anti‑lockdown / pro‑reopening voters was insufficient to offset the larger group motivated against him by his COVID handling, so it did not “help Trump win.”

Because:

  • Trump lost the 2020 election, and
  • The best available evidence indicates his COVID stance was, on balance, electorally harmful or at best not a net plus,

the prediction that COVID policy would be a “net plus for Trump” and would help him win is incorrect.

Conclusion

  • Result: wrong – Trump’s COVID policy stance did not become a net electoral advantage that helped him win; instead, he lost the 2020 election, and analyses broadly indicate that his handling of COVID hurt rather than helped his electoral chances.
politicsgovernment
In the United States, no significant new federal gun control legislation will be enacted for approximately one generation (on the order of 20–30 years) following the time of this statement in September 2020.
Well, let me make a prediction right now. There's not going to be any new gun control legislation for a generation.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that new federal gun control legislation has been enacted in the United States since September 2020, contradicting Sacks’s prediction of “no new gun control legislation for a generation.”

Key facts:

  1. Bipartisan Safer Communities Act (BSCA)

    • Passed by Congress and signed into law by President Joe Biden on June 25, 2022.
    • Widely described in major outlets and by the White House as the first significant federal gun safety/gun control law in nearly 30 years.
    • Provisions include, among others:
      • Enhanced background checks for gun buyers under 21.
      • Funding incentives for states to implement red-flag laws or other crisis intervention programs.
      • Closing the so‑called “boyfriend loophole” by expanding firearm prohibitions for certain domestic-violence offenders.
      • New penalties for straw purchasing and gun trafficking.
    • These measures clearly regulate the acquisition and possession of firearms and are thus treated as federal gun control/safety legislation.

    See detailed descriptions of the BSCA and its characterization as major gun safety legislation in contemporaneous reporting and government summaries.

  2. Implication for the prediction

    • The prediction (September 2020) was that there would be no new gun control legislation “for a generation” (roughly 20–30 years).
    • The BSCA was enacted less than two years later (June 2022), well within that time window.
    • Because a substantial, widely recognized federal gun control law was passed, the core claim that there would be no such legislation over that period has already been falsified, even though the full 20–30 years have not elapsed.

Therefore, the prediction is wrong: at least one major piece of federal gun control legislation has in fact been enacted since the statement was made.

politicshealth
David Sacks agrees with and endorses Jason Calacanis’s forecast that, heading into the late‑September and October 2020 presidential debates, COVID deaths will be significantly lower, schools will be reopening, and conditions will favor Trump’s narrative that he handled COVID successfully.
That to me seems like the trajectoryView on YouTube
Explanation

Bottom line: Some surface conditions moved in the direction Sacks described (notably partial school reopenings and deaths down from their midsummer peak), but by the late‑September and October 2020 debate period COVID was still severe and politically damaging to Trump. Polls show the environment clearly did not favor a narrative that he had handled COVID successfully.

1. COVID deaths and overall situation

  • The U.S. passed 200,000 cumulative COVID deaths on September 22, 2020, just a week before the first presidential debate, with CDC projections in mid‑October expecting deaths to reach 230,000–250,000 by mid‑November. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Reuters reporting at the time noted that as of September 24, 2020, the U.S. had topped 7 million cases and was still seeing over 700 deaths per day, with a growing outbreak in the Midwest. (hurriyetdailynews.com)
  • By late October, the country was described as entering a “fall surge” with nearly half a million new cases added in a single week (Oct 20–27). (wishtv.com) This is inconsistent with a broadly perceived “mission accomplished” COVID environment heading into and through the debates.

2. Schools reopening

  • On this narrow point, the forecast was directionally right: a large share of districts did reopen in some form. A later synthesis of Burbio, AEI’s Return to Learn tracker, and other datasets found that about 40.3% of U.S. school districts were offering fully in‑person learning in September 2020, with many others hybrid. (arxiv.org) However, major blue‑state urban systems remained largely remote or hybrid, so the national picture was mixed rather than a clear, across‑the‑board reopening.

3. Did conditions favor Trump’s “I handled COVID successfully” narrative? Polls around the debates show the opposite:

  • National job approval on COVID:
    • KFF’s late‑August/early‑September 2020 tracking poll found a majority (about 55%) disapproved of Trump’s handling of the coronavirus, despite a modest uptick from July. (kff.org)
    • A Washington Post/ABC News poll conducted Sept 21–24 (just before the Sept 29 debate) found only 40% approved vs 58% disapproved of his handling of the health crisis. (washingtonpost.com)
    • An NPR/PBS NewsHour/Marist poll Oct 8–13, 2020 found 38% approval vs 59% disapproval on his pandemic handling. (maristpoll.marist.edu)
  • Who was trusted more on COVID:
    • The Sept 21–26 Washington Post/ABC News national poll found registered voters trusted Biden over Trump on handling the coronavirus, 53% to 41%. (washingtonpost.com)
    • In late‑October Washington Post/ABC battleground polling, voters in Michigan and Wisconsin trusted Biden more than Trump on the coronavirus outbreak by 14–20‑point margins. (washingtonpost.com)
  • Debate context and Trump’s own infection:
    • The first presidential debate was on September 29, 2020. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • On October 2, 2020, between the first and (planned) second debates, Trump announced that he and the First Lady had tested positive for COVID‑19 and was hospitalized at Walter Reed, putting a spotlight on the ongoing uncontrolled spread rather than on a successful containment narrative. (history.com)
    • The October 15 debate was canceled due to COVID concerns, and the final debate on October 22 also occurred against the backdrop of a documented national “fall surge.” (en.wikipedia.org)

Taken together, while some of the factual predicates (partial school reopening, deaths off their July–August peak) were partially accurate, the core prediction—that these conditions, heading into the late‑September and October debates, would create an environment favorable to Trump’s claim that he had handled COVID well—was decisively falsified by contemporaneous polling, Trump’s own infection, and the worsening fall surge. Hence the prediction is best classified as wrong.

politics
David Sacks predicts that Donald Trump will win the 2020 U.S. presidential election (stated in early September 2020).
I would, uh, I predict Trump at this momentView on YouTube
Explanation

Donald Trump did not win the 2020 U.S. presidential election, so David Sacks’s prediction was incorrect.

Official and major media tallies show that Joe Biden won both the popular vote and the Electoral College, and was inaugurated as the 46th President of the United States on January 20, 2021. Trump received 232 electoral votes versus Biden’s 306, and Biden secured over 81 million popular votes to Trump’s roughly 74 million.

Because the prediction was specifically that Trump would win the 2020 election (made in early September 2020) and the final certified outcome was a Biden victory, the prediction is unambiguously wrong.

techgovernment
Following the July 2020 House antitrust hearings, the major US tech platforms will substantially reduce their acquisition activity due to fear of regulatory challenge, producing a sustained chilling effect on M&A that will materially harm the Silicon Valley startup ecosystem (fewer startup exits via acquisition) in subsequent years.
the big four tech companies have to be looking at these hearings, and now they're going to be second guessing every acquisition they want to make, and it's going to have a chilling effect. And I think that's a disaster for Silicon Valley.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary The prediction overstated both the scale and the persistence of any antitrust‑driven pullback. There is evidence of some regulatory “chill” on certain startup deals and a temporary dip in Big Tech startup acquisitions around 2023, but acquisition activity by the major platforms did not stay substantially reduced, nor did Silicon Valley suffer the kind of sustained, regulation‑driven “disaster” implied.


1. Did the major platforms “substantially reduce” acquisition activity?

Immediate and medium‑term behavior (2020–2022) contradicts a sharp pullback:

  • Post‑hearing, Big Tech continued to pursue very large deals. Examples include Microsoft’s acquisition of Activision Blizzard for ~$69B (announced 2022, closed 2023) and other mega‑deals that required intensive regulatory review but still went through.(en.wikipedia.org)
  • Sector‑wide, 2021–2022 were boom years for tech M&A overall; PwC/Dealogic data show that $500M+ tech, media & telecom deals were actually more numerous under Biden than under Trump, and median time to close rose by only one day (76→77 days), indicating no broad freeze in large deals.(theregister.com)

There was a notable dip around 2023, but it was not permanent and had broader causes:

  • Global TMT M&A value fell 46% and deal volume 26% in 2023 vs 2022, driven largely by higher interest rates and weaker growth, with regulatory scrutiny cited as one of several contributing factors.(verdict.co.uk)
  • A Crunchbase analysis in mid‑2023 found that the five most valuable U.S. tech companies (Apple, Microsoft, Google, Amazon, Nvidia) had made just five known startup acquisitions year‑to‑date, putting 2023 on pace for the smallest number of startup acquisitions in years.(news.crunchbase.com) This supports a temporary reduction, especially for small startup deals.

But by 2024–2025, Big Tech was again very active in M&A:

  • One 2024 summary estimated that the five major tech firms collectively spent over $127B on acquisitions and strategic investments in 2024, a ~340% increase over pre‑pandemic levels, with 73% of that focused on AI‑related technologies.(konceptual.ai)
  • Alphabet/Google went on to announce its largest acquisition ever—the $32B purchase of Wiz in 2025—after an earlier attempt at a ~$23B deal was shelved due to antitrust concerns, showing that even intense scrutiny did not stop it from pursuing huge M&A.(reuters.com)

Taken together, this is inconsistent with the claim that the major platforms, in general, would sustainably reduce acquisitions. There was a cyclical slump and some hesitation around certain contested deals, but not a lasting withdrawal from M&A.


2. Was there a “sustained chilling effect” on M&A that harmed the startup ecosystem via fewer acquisition exits?

Evidence that antitrust policy increased friction and chilled some startup deals:

  • Legal and academic analyses document that, under Lina Khan (FTC) and Jonathan Kanter (DOJ), challenges to startup acquisitions rose sharply: only three startup acquisitions were challenged between 2012–2019 vs fourteen between 2020–2023. High‑profile cases or threats of suit led parties to abandon deals like Adobe/Figma, Qualcomm/Autotalks, Sanofi/Maze—and an earlier Google/Wiz attempt. These analyses explicitly describe a “chilling effect” spreading across Silicon Valley, making acquisitions by large incumbents riskier and less attractive as an exit path.(corpgov.law.harvard.edu)
  • A related NYU‑Law–based policy piece similarly argues that expanded merger review and higher uncertainty have made acquisitions more costly, lengthier, and less appealing, and warns that this can reduce capital flowing into the startup sector by weakening M&A as an exit option.(pulseforinnovation.org)

But the broader startup‑exit slump has larger macro causes and isn’t uniquely driven by Big Tech pullback:

  • PitchBook data cited by Reuters show that global VC exit value in 2023 fell to a six‑year low ($234.3B), with U.S. VC exits at their weakest since 2016, reflecting high interest rates, a frozen IPO market, and risk‑off investor sentiment.(reuters.com) These macro factors affected all exit routes, not just Big Tech acquisitions.
  • At the same time, FTC statistics and subsequent commentary indicate that the share of deals receiving intensive merger scrutiny (second requests) has stayed around 1–2% over the last decade, and that the perception of a broadly hyper‑aggressive FTC is driven by a few very high‑profile cases rather than a systemic clampdown on most deals.(forbes.com)

So while there is credible evidence of a non‑trivial antitrust‑driven chill on some startup M&A—especially high‑profile or strategically sensitive deals—the data do not support the prediction of a broad, sustained collapse of acquisition exits uniquely attributable to the 2020 antitrust push.


3. Overall assessment relative to Sacks’s prediction

Sacks predicted that the July 2020 House antitrust hearings would cause the big platforms to systematically second‑guess “every acquisition,” triggering a lasting chill in M&A and a “disaster” for the Silicon Valley startup ecosystem via fewer acquisition exits.

What actually happened:

  • Big Tech continued to do major acquisitions in 2020–2022 and then resumed very large and numerous deals again by 2024–2025, including record‑setting transactions. There was a dip in small/startup acquisitions around 2023, but it was not permanent, nor did Big Tech exit the M&A market.(verdict.co.uk)
  • Startup exits (IPOs + M&A) did fall sharply in 2022–2023, but largely in tandem with rising rates and a depressed IPO market. Antitrust policy contributed to the difficulty of some specific deals and created real uncertainty, yet the overall pattern of exits is better explained by a broad funding and macro downturn than by a Big Tech acquisition strike alone.(reuters.com)

Because Big Tech did not maintain a long‑term, across‑the‑board reduction in acquisitions, and because the startup ecosystem’s challenges cannot be cleanly or primarily attributed to that kind of M&A freeze, the core prediction—of a sustained, regulation‑driven collapse in platform acquisitions that would be a “disaster for Silicon Valley”—has not clearly materialized.

Hence the prediction is best classified as wrong, albeit with a kernel of truth that antitrust developments did create some localized chilling effects on specific startup deals and contributed at the margin to a more challenging exit environment.

politics
Sacks predicts, as of July 31, 2020, that Joe Biden is on track to win the November 2020 U.S. presidential election, with Trump as a “huge underdog.”
It's still it's it's still it's still to me. I mean, Trump has got to be the huge underdog here. I mean, right now it looks like Biden's going to win.View on YouTube
Explanation

Outcome check

  • The prediction (July 31, 2020) was that Joe Biden was on track to win the November 2020 U.S. presidential election and that Donald Trump was a “huge underdog.”
  • In the actual 2020 U.S. presidential election held on November 3, 2020, Joe Biden won both the popular vote and the Electoral College, defeating incumbent President Donald Trump. Biden received 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232 and a popular vote margin of over 7 million votes.

Assessment

  • The core claim is probabilistic/forward-looking: that as of late July 2020, Biden was likely to win and Trump’s chances were low.
  • The eventual outcome (Biden winning) matched the predicted direction of the race; the “huge underdog” characterization is consistent with polling averages at that time, which showed Biden with a significant national lead. (This is an inference from the widely reported polling context in mid-2020.)

Conclusion

  • Because Biden did in fact win the 2020 election, the directional prediction that Biden was on track to win and Trump was a heavy underdog is substantively correct.

Therefore:

  • result: right
politicsgovernment
Sacks predicts that, as of late July 2020, the 2020 U.S. presidential election is on track to be a non‑close race, likely a Biden “blowout,” which in turn will prevent a post‑election constitutional or legitimacy crisis.
I don't think the election is right now. It's not trying to be close at all. It's trying to be a blowout. And so I think we'll avoid the the crisis because it's not close. And it looks like Biden's going to run away with it.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is wrong

Sacks made two linked claims:

  1. The 2020 election would not be close, but a Biden “blowout” where he would “run away with it.”

    • Final results: Joe Biden won about 51.3% of the popular vote to Donald Trump’s 46.9%, a margin of roughly 4.5 percentage points and about 7.1 million votes. (pewresearch.org)
    • In the Electoral College, Biden won 306–232. (presidency.ucsb.edu)
    • Key tipping‑point states (e.g., Wisconsin, Arizona, Georgia) were decided by 0.6 percentage points or less; if Trump had flipped all three, the Electoral College would have been 269–269. (pollbludger.net)
    • Analysts widely characterized this as a decisive but relatively modest victory, not a landslide akin to, for example, Reagan in 1984.

    Given the narrow margins in pivotal states and the single‑digit national margin, the outcome was not the kind of overwhelming “blowout” or runaway race that would normally render disputes moot.

  2. Because it wouldn’t be close, the U.S. would “avoid the crisis” (a post‑election constitutional/legitimacy crisis).
    In reality, the aftermath produced exactly the sort of crisis he thought would be avoided:

    • Trump and allies launched a sustained campaign to overturn the results, filing around 60 lawsuits and pressuring state and federal officials to discard or reverse certified outcomes. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • On January 6, 2021, a pro‑Trump mob attacked the U.S. Capitol in an attempt to disrupt and delay the Electoral College vote count and pressure Congress and Vice President Pence to overturn Biden’s victory. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Congress’ certification of the electoral votes was temporarily halted by violent disruption and only completed later that night, after the building was secured. (theguardian.com)
    • The House established the January 6th Committee, which concluded that January 6 was the culmination of a multi‑part effort by Trump to overturn the election and described it as an attempted coup, leading to legislative reforms (e.g., the Electoral Count Reform and Presidential Transition Improvement Act of 2022) specifically intended to prevent a repeat of this crisis. (en.wikipedia.org)

The combination of a relatively narrow, contestable outcome in pivotal states and an unprecedented attempt by the incumbent to overturn the result did produce a major legitimacy and constitutional crisis, including violence aimed at stopping the peaceful transfer of power.

Because (a) the election was not a clear “blowout” and (b) the post‑election period did feature exactly the kind of crisis he said would be avoided, Sacks’ prediction is best classified as wrong.

politicseconomy
Sacks predicts that, despite the then‑current impasse and congressional recess in mid‑2020, Congress and the administration will eventually pass another COVID‑19 relief bill that includes some form of unemployment extension or stimulus.
I think they will eventually pass a bill.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is judged right

  • The prediction (July 31, 2020) was that, despite the then‑current stalemate in Congress over further COVID‑19 relief, “they will eventually pass a bill” that includes additional unemployment or stimulus support.
  • On December 27, 2020, the U.S. Congress and President Trump enacted the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2021, a roughly $900 billion COVID-19 relief package. It included:
    • A $300 per week federal unemployment supplement for several months.
    • New direct stimulus checks of up to $600 per adult and $600 per child. These are exactly the kinds of unemployment extensions and stimulus the prediction was referring to.
  • Subsequently, on March 11, 2021, President Biden signed the American Rescue Plan Act, which again provided:
    • Another round of direct stimulus checks up to $1,400 per person.
    • Extended and enhanced unemployment benefits (including the $300/week supplement and longer eligibility).

Because Congress and the administration did in fact pass further major COVID‑19 relief bills with both unemployment extensions and stimulus payments after the July 2020 impasse, the prediction that “they will eventually pass a bill” of this nature is fulfilled.

politicsconflict
Historians looking back on 2020 will judge the formal beginning and recognition of a new US–China "Cold War II" as the most historically important development of that year, surpassing other 2020 events in perceived long‑term significance.
I think that the most newsworthy and historically important event will be the beginning of this and the recognition that we are now in Cold War two.View on YouTube
Explanation

Available retrospective accounts overwhelmingly treat the COVID‑19 pandemic, not the onset of a US–China “Cold War II,” as the defining and most historically important development of 2020.

  1. How 2020 is framed in histories and retrospectives

    • General overviews of the year 2020 describe it as beginning the decade “with the COVID‑19 pandemic,” emphasizing its global social and economic disruption, lockdowns, and the worst recession since the 1930s, with other events presented as secondary. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Academic and professional reflections on 2020 similarly say the year “has been heavily defined by the COVID‑19 pandemic,” again foregrounding the pandemic as the central historical fact of the year. (journals.cambridgemedia.com.au)
    • Dictionary.com’s Word of the Year choice for 2020 explicitly states that pandemic “defined the context for all the many other consequential events of the year,” underscoring that COVID‑19 shaped how virtually every other development in 2020 is remembered. (prnewswire.com)
    • Books and long‑form histories of 2020, such as Lawrence Wright’s The Plague Year: America in the Time of COVID, also frame 2020 primarily as “the tragic year… fighting against the COVID‑19 pandemic.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  2. Status of the ‘Cold War II’ / US–China framing

    • The idea of a Second Cold War / Cold War II involving the US, China, and/or Russia is widely debated. Some analysts and historians (e.g., Niall Ferguson) argue that a second cold war with China exists and has been underway for several years, but they do not single out 2020 as a unique formal starting point. (hoover.org)
    • Others explicitly reject the Cold War analogy, arguing that US–China competition does not constitute a new cold war at all. Thomas J. Christensen’s “There Will Not Be a New Cold War” is a prominent example. (foreignaffairs.com)
    • Even within 2020 commentary, Chinese foreign minister Wang Yi spoke of relations being on the “brink of a new Cold War,” while multiple scholars in the same period argued that US–China rivalry would not be or become a Cold War, illustrating a lack of consensus that 2020 marked a clearly recognized “Cold War II.” (en.wikipedia.org)
  3. Comparison of perceived historical importance

    • By 2025, early historiography and public memory consistently cast COVID‑19 as the epoch‑making event of 2020, with lasting effects on global health, demography, economics, politics, and everyday life. It is treated as the context in which other developments—including US–China tensions—occurred. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In contrast, while there is growing literature on intensifying US–China rivalry and talk of a “new Cold War,” these works rarely describe “the beginning and recognition of Cold War II in 2020” as the single most historically important event of that year, nor is there a consensus that 2020 is the formal start date.

Because (a) the dominant historical and cultural record so far clearly identifies the COVID‑19 pandemic as the central event of 2020, and (b) the notion of a 2020‑dated, widely recognized “Cold War II” is both contested and not treated as the primary defining event of that year, the prediction that future historians would judge the beginning/recognition of US–China Cold War II as the most historically important development of 2020 is not borne out by current evidence.

politicstech
TikTok will likely be prohibited from operating in the United States market (e.g., via a ban or forced shutdown of its US service) at some point following this July 2020 conversation.
I think there's a very good chance that they will get shut down in the US.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that TikTok was, in fact, prohibited from operating in the U.S. market—via a law-triggered shutdown of its U.S. service—after the July 2020 conversation.

Key points:

  1. Congress passed a specific TikTok ban-or-divest law. In April 2024, the Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act was signed into law. It explicitly targeted ByteDance/TikTok and required that such “foreign adversary controlled applications” be divested or else banned from U.S. app stores and hosting services by January 19, 2025. (en.wikipedia.org)

  2. On January 19, 2025, the U.S. TikTok ban formally took effect and TikTok shut down service in the U.S. Multiple outlets report that at 12:01 a.m. EST on January 19, 2025, TikTok was officially shut down in the United States under that law. U.S. users saw a message stating that a law banning TikTok had been enacted and that they could not use TikTok "for now." (britannica.com) Apple and Google removed TikTok from their U.S. app stores at that time, and related ByteDance apps such as CapCut also went offline in the U.S. (9to5mac.com)

  3. The shutdown was a direct consequence of a legal prohibition on TikTok’s operation in the U.S. The law barred app distributors and hosting providers from distributing, maintaining, or updating TikTok in the United States, which effectively prohibited its legal operation in the U.S. market and prompted the app to go dark for U.S. users. (en.wikipedia.org)

  4. Service was later restored, but the prediction only required that a ban/forced shutdown occur at some point. After Donald Trump took office, he issued an executive order delaying enforcement, and TikTok restored service in the U.S. while negotiations for a U.S.-controlled ownership structure proceeded. (theguardian.com) Nonetheless, the prediction was that TikTok would likely be prohibited from operating in the U.S. market at some point—not that such a prohibition would be permanent.

Because TikTok was in fact legally banned and its U.S. service shut down under that ban (even though later temporarily restored), the prediction that it would be “shut down in the US” / “prohibited from operating in the United States market” did come true.

politicsconflictgovernment
If the United States fails to make an unambiguous, credible security commitment to defend Taiwan, China will exploit that perceived hesitation by taking more aggressive actions against Taiwan (potentially including attempts to coerce, blockade, or annex it).
I think we have to be extremely clear that Taiwan is a red line for us, and that we're committed to the security of Taiwan, because if we show any hesitation or weakness there, they will they will seize on that.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment of the conditional prediction
Sacks argued that if the U.S. did not make an unambiguous, credible security commitment to defend Taiwan, China would "seize on" that hesitation and become more aggressive toward Taiwan (coercion, blockade-style pressure, etc.).

  1. U.S. commitment remained deliberately ambiguous, not a clear red line.

    • The U.S. has still not created a formal mutual-defense treaty or explicit, legally binding pledge to defend Taiwan; its formal policy remains one of strategic ambiguity under the Taiwan Relations Act and the One China policy.(cnbc.com)
    • President Biden has several times verbally said the U.S. would defend Taiwan militarily, but each time the White House quickly clarified that official policy had not changed, preserving ambiguity rather than establishing a clear "red line."(cnbc.com)
      This matches Sacks’s condition: Washington did not move to a fully unambiguous, credible defense guarantee.
  2. China has markedly escalated coercive and military pressure on Taiwan.
    Since the podcast in July 2020, China has:

    • Increased PLA air incursions into Taiwan’s ADIZ from hundreds per year in 2020 to well over a thousand annually by 2022–23 and new record levels in 2024–25, with frequent crossings of the Taiwan Strait median line.(theguardian.com)
    • Conducted large-scale live‑fire and encirclement drills around Taiwan after 2022 (e.g., following Nancy Pelosi’s visit), widely described as rehearsals for blockade or invasion operations.(cnbc.com)
    • Intensified gray‑zone tactics—near‑daily air and naval activity, cyber attacks, disinformation campaigns, and physical interference with undersea cables—explicitly aimed at coercing and exhausting Taiwan without open war.(lemonde.fr)
      These are precisely the kinds of coercive and quasi‑blockade behaviors Sacks warned about, even though full-scale annexation or a formal blockade has not occurred.
  3. China has explicitly “seized on” narratives of U.S. weakness/unreliability.
    Chinese state media and officials have repeatedly used episodes like the U.S. withdrawal from Afghanistan to argue that the U.S. is a weak, unreliable partner that would abandon Taiwan, pairing this messaging with nearby PLA drills.(cnbc.com) Analysts describe this as Beijing exploiting perceived U.S. hesitation and decline to pressure Taiwan and test U.S. resolve—exactly the mechanism Sacks described.

  4. Why this is scored as “right” rather than “ambiguous.”

    • The condition of the prediction (continued lack of an unambiguous U.S. defense guarantee) clearly holds.(cnbc.com)
    • The consequence—China “seizing on that” through more aggressive actions short of invasion (coercion, encirclement drills, record incursions, and psychological operations questioning U.S. resolve)—has plainly occurred and intensified since 2020.(fpri.org)
    • While we cannot mathematically prove causality, open-source evidence shows Beijing explicitly linking U.S. perceived weakness/unreliability to its messaging and drills around Taiwan, which is strong qualitative support for Sacks’s claim.

Because both the antecedent (no clear U.S. red line) and the predicted reaction (China exploiting that by ramping up coercive and military pressure on Taiwan) are borne out by events from 2020–2025, this prediction is best evaluated as “right.”

Sacks @ 00:45:40Inconclusive
politicsgovernment
From 2020 onward, US policy toward China will remain broadly hawkish and competitive on a bipartisan basis, forming a durable long‑term (multi‑decade) strategic stance similar in continuity to US containment policy toward the Soviet Union during the original Cold War.
it does seem like finally, as a country, I think we are kind of getting our act together on China.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary: From mid‑2020 through late 2025, U.S. policy toward China has clearly become more hawkish and competitive and has remained broadly bipartisan, matching the direction of the prediction. However, the prediction explicitly concerns a durable multi‑decade strategic stance, and only ~5 years have passed. That is not enough time to judge whether this will truly be a long‑term, Cold‑War‑style framework. Therefore the correct status is inconclusive (too early), even though evidence so far is supportive.


Evidence that U.S. policy since 2020 has been hawkish and bipartisan

  1. Trump‑era trade and tech restrictions continued under Biden

    • The Biden administration has largely kept in place Trump‑era tariffs on Chinese goods rather than rolling them back, signaling continuity in a tougher economic stance.
    • Biden officials have repeatedly framed the U.S.–China relationship as one of strategic competition, not partnership, and pursued industrial and technology policy with China explicitly in mind.
  2. CHIPS and Science Act of 2022 (bipartisan industrial policy aimed at competing with China)

    • The CHIPS and Science Act, passed in 2022 with bipartisan support, provides large subsidies to domestic semiconductor manufacturing and research, explicitly justified in part as necessary to compete with China and reduce dependence on Chinese‑linked supply chains.
  3. Sweeping export controls on advanced chips to China (2022–2023)

    • In October 2022 (and tightened in 2023), the U.S. imposed far‑reaching export controls on advanced semiconductors and chipmaking equipment to China, with the explicit goal of slowing China’s military‑relevant technological development. This is widely described by analysts as one of the most significant escalations in tech‑related containment policy since the end of the Cold War.
  4. Congressional actions on security, Taiwan, and tech platforms

    • Congress has passed or advanced numerous bipartisan measures critical of China, on issues such as human rights (Xinjiang, Hong Kong), Taiwan security support, and restricting Chinese technology platforms (e.g., legislation targeting TikTok’s ownership structure drew substantial bipartisan support in 2023–2024).
    • Hearings and committees (such as the House Select Committee on the Strategic Competition between the United States and the Chinese Communist Party) have been explicitly framed around long‑term strategic competition with the CCP, with participation from both parties.
  5. Rhetoric from both parties framing China as the primary long‑term rival

    • Official national security documents under the Biden administration describe China as “the pacing challenge” and the primary long‑term strategic competitor, and leading Republicans generally argue for an even tougher stance. The disagreement is over how hawkish to be, not whether to treat China as a rival.

Taken together, these actions and documents show that from 2020 to 2025 the U.S. has indeed maintained a broadly hawkish, competitive, and bipartisan strategic orientation toward China.


Why the prediction is still too early to fully judge

The normalized prediction is:

From 2020 onward, US policy toward China will remain broadly hawkish and competitive on a bipartisan basis, forming a durable long‑term (multi‑decade) strategic stance similar in continuity to US containment policy toward the Soviet Union during the original Cold War.

Key elements that require more time to assess:

  1. “Durable long‑term (multi‑decade)”: Only about five years (2020–2025) have elapsed. Cold War containment lasted roughly four decades. Whether today’s bipartisan consensus persists through multiple changes of administration and evolving economic/strategic conditions is inherently unknowable this early.

  2. “Similar in continuity to US containment policy toward the Soviet Union”: To evaluate that analogy, we would need to see whether the U.S. maintains a relatively stable strategic line over at least several successive presidential terms and major geopolitical shocks. That standard cannot be met with current data.

  3. Possibility of future shocks or realignments: Domestic political changes in the U.S., changes in Chinese behavior, major conflicts/crises, or economic shifts could all push policy toward either renewed engagement or more radical confrontation. With such path‑dependent uncertainty, assessing a multi‑decade forecast after just a few years would be premature.

Because the core of the prediction is about enduring, decades‑long continuity, and we are only partway into that horizon, the fairest and most accurate classification is “inconclusive (too early)”, albeit with current evidence indicating that the forecast has been directionally accurate so far.

politicsgovernment
Maintaining a low-visibility, low-comment ‘basement’ strategy through the 2020 campaign will continue to be effective for Joe Biden, sustaining or increasing his lead over Donald Trump up through the election.
Biden Biden's strategy is working... his strategy is basically to say nothing to be, you know, to hide in his basement... but it's working because even though he's a cipher... he's basically a protest vote against Trump.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from the 2020 campaign indicates that Biden’s relatively low‑visibility, home‑based (“basement”) strategy remained effective and that he sustained a clear lead over Trump through Election Day.

  • Strategy and style of campaign: Contemporary coverage described Biden’s low‑key, largely home‑centered campaign as an intentional contrast with Trump; the Guardian noted in June 2020 that, despite Republican mockery of him “hiding out in his basement,” Biden’s low‑key approach to campaigning is paying off, with strong national and battleground-state leads. (theguardian.com) PolitiFact separately documented that the Trump campaign kept attacking Biden for supposedly staying in his basement, confirming that this was widely seen as his signature strategy even into the fall. (politifact.com) Washington Post reporting from July 2020 shows Biden explicitly defending frequent appearances from his house and emphasizing virtual outreach, reinforcing that this cautious, low‑visibility style persisted deep into the campaign. (washingtonpost.com)

  • Polling from prediction date (July 2020) to Election Day: National polling averages in early June and July 2020 already showed Biden with a sizable lead, roughly 7–8 points over Trump. (cnbc.com) Through late September and mid‑October, CNBC and other aggregators reported that Biden continued to hold a stable national advantage of about 7–10 points, with RealClearPolitics and FiveThirtyEight showing him consistently ahead. (cnbc.com) On the eve of the election (November 2, 2020), Biden still held a strong national lead—around 6.5–8.4 points in major polling averages—despite some tightening in key swing states. (cnbc.com) At no point after July did Trump surpass Biden in the major national polling aggregates; Biden’s lead persisted, even if its exact size fluctuated.

  • Election outcome: In the final certified results, Biden won the national popular vote 51.3% to 46.9%, a margin of about 4.5 percentage points, and secured 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232. (pewresearch.org) This confirms that, in electoral terms, his campaign approach did not undermine his advantage; he converted his sustained polling lead into both a popular‑vote and Electoral College victory.

  • Comparing to the prediction’s wording: The prediction was that continuing a low‑visibility, basement‑style strategy would keep working, such that Biden would sustain or increase his lead over Trump “up through the election.” The record shows:

    • Biden’s strategy remained comparatively low‑key and home‑based through 2020, especially relative to Trump’s rally‑heavy schedule. (theguardian.com)
    • Biden maintained a clear national lead from July 2020 through Election Day; while the margin narrowed somewhat in the final days, it never disappeared, and Trump never overtook him in the major national polling averages. (cnbc.com)
    • Biden ultimately won by a solid popular‑vote margin and a comfortable Electoral College count. (pewresearch.org)

Because the core claim—that sticking with this low‑visibility approach would remain effective at keeping Biden ahead of Trump through the election—matches both the polling trajectory and the final result (even if the lead slightly narrowed rather than strictly increased), the prediction is best judged as right overall.

politics
Donald Trump’s only viable path to winning the 2020 election is to successfully persuade a large share of voters that electing Joe Biden would lead to extreme outcomes such as toppling American founding symbols (e.g., Mount Rushmore) and dismantling capitalism; absent that framing, he will likely lose.
the way for Trump to win the election... is to to make the alternative to trump the destruction of Mount Rushmore... If Trump can somehow convince the American public that the election of Joe Biden means the ripping down of George Washington and Abraham Lincoln and and Mount Rushmore and the destruction of of capitalism, um, that is the way for him to win.View on YouTube
Explanation

In July 2020, Sacks argued that Trump’s only real path to reelection was to convince voters that a Biden victory meant extreme outcomes like tearing down national monuments and destroying capitalism; otherwise, he was likely to lose.

What actually happened:

  • Trump’s 2020 campaign rhetoric did center on portraying Biden and the “radical left” as a threat to American heritage and way of life. In his July 3, 2020 Mount Rushmore speech, Trump warned of a “left-wing cultural revolution” and a “merciless campaign to wipe out our history” and to tear down statues and symbols of figures such as Washington, Jefferson, Lincoln, and Roosevelt.(en.wikipedia.org) He repeatedly claimed Democrats would “destroy” the suburbs and that “no one will be safe in Biden’s America,” framing Biden’s election as existentially dangerous.(wral.com) This closely matches the kind of framing Sacks described.
  • Despite this messaging, Trump lost decisively: Biden won 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232 and took the popular vote by about 7 million votes (51.3% to 46.8%).(en.wikipedia.org) There is no evidence that a large share of the broader electorate was persuaded that Biden’s election would literally mean the destruction of monuments or capitalism; Biden was generally perceived as a mainstream Democrat.

The falsifiable core of the normalized prediction is that, absent successfully convincing a large share of voters of such extreme consequences, Trump was likely to lose. In reality, Trump did not achieve that level of persuasion and he did lose the 2020 election. The portion of the quote saying that if Trump could truly convince the public of those stakes, he would win is counterfactual and therefore untestable, but the directional forecast about his likely defeat without that success was borne out by events.

Given that the election outcome aligned with the prediction’s main probabilistic claim, and that Trump’s strategy did in fact hinge on the kind of framing Sacks identified, this prediction is best judged as right overall.

health
In the 2020–2021 school year, many schools will initially reopen with elaborate plans (pods, reduced class sizes, etc.), but once a single COVID-19 case appears in a school community, those schools will rapidly shut down again, leading to a chaotic stop-start experience for families.
we're going to send our kids back, but I expect it to be a little bit of a shit show. I think that the schools will reopen and they'll they'll do all this planning... And then somebody's going to they'll be like one case... and then all of a sudden they're going to shut down again.View on YouTube
Explanation

What the prediction claimed

Sacks predicted that in the 2020–21 school year:

  1. Many schools would reopen with elaborate mitigation plans (pods, reduced class sizes, etc.).
  2. As soon as there was one COVID case in a school community, they would quickly shut down again.
  3. This would make the year a broadly chaotic, stop‑start experience for families.

What actually happened in U.S. K‑12 schools

  1. Reopening with elaborate plans – partly right
    • Districts did create detailed reopening plans with cohorts, small classes, staggered schedules, and other mitigation measures—examples include Detroit’s 2020–21 plan (class-size caps, staggered starts, distancing, etc.) and similar “small cohort” models in New York and other districts. (fox2detroit.com)
    • However, on the first day of the 2020–21 school year, almost half of tracked U.S. districts opened fully remote, and among the 100 largest districts, 74% chose remote‑only—meaning large numbers of students never “went back” in the fall at all. (edweek.org)

  2. Do schools that reopen shut after a single case? Mostly no
    • A national CDC analysis found that from late July 2020 through June 2021, about 16,890 schools experienced 19,273 COVID‑related unplanned closures. The U.S. has roughly 130,000 K‑12 schools, so only about 13% of schools had any COVID‑closure that year, and most of those had just one closure; only 12.1% of affected schools closed 2–7 times. (wwwnc.cdc.gov)
    • In Florida—one of the states that fully reopened early—CDC data show tens of thousands of school‑related student and staff cases, but only 28 schools in 12 counties closed temporarily in fall 2020, with a median closure of four days, plus partial classroom closures in 226 schools. This indicates that most schools did not automatically close the whole building after the first detected case. (cdc.gov)
    • Nationally, closures were generally attributed to clusters of cases, broader community transmission, or state/local mandates—not a hair‑trigger response to a single infection. (wwwnc.cdc.gov)

  3. Was the year dominated by stop‑start chaos? Mixed, not universal
    • Many large urban districts (e.g., in Chicago, Philadelphia, Boston, San Diego, D.C.) delayed reopening and stayed remote for much of the year, rather than reopening and then immediately shutting again. Reporting in late 2020 describes these districts repeatedly postponing initial reopening plans as community cases rose, rather than cycling in and out after opening. (washingtonpost.com)
    • For big‑city systems serving about 15% of U.S. public school students, an Education Week tracker shows that as of May 24, 2021, most were finally open for wide‑scale or limited in‑person learning, implying that many students spent a large portion of 2020–21 either fully remote or in a relatively stable hybrid mode—not in constant open/close cycles. (edweek.org)
    • Some local leaders explicitly tried to avoid the stop‑start pattern Sacks described. For instance, Fresno Unified’s superintendent in early 2021 said the district would wait for better local conditions before reopening, specifically because “we can’t do this ‘start then stop, start and stop’,” and wanted students to stay in once they returned. (abc30.com)
    • That said, the CDC closure data do show that millions of students in certain states experienced one or more temporary COVID‑driven closures, and a minority of schools had multiple closures, so some communities did live through genuine stop‑start disruption. (wwwnc.cdc.gov)

Overall assessment

Sacks correctly anticipated that:

  • Schools would invest in detailed mitigation plans with small cohorts and adjusted schedules.
  • COVID cases in school communities would trigger some reactive closures and disruption.

However, the central mechanism and scale he predicted—schools widely reopening in fall 2020 and then quickly closing again at the first detected case, producing a generally stop‑start year for families—did not match the dominant U.S. pattern:

  • Many large districts did not reopen in person at the start of the year at all, instead remaining remote for months. (edweek.org)
  • Where schools did reopen, full‑school shutdowns were relatively rare compared to the number of schools and cases, and were usually tied to multiple cases or community surges rather than a single case. (cdc.gov)

Because the key claim—that reopening schools would typically slam shut again after a single case, making the 2020–21 school year broadly stop‑start—is largely inconsistent with the available data, the prediction is best classified as wrong overall, despite capturing a few elements (elaborate planning and some localized disruption).

health
From mid-2020 onward, the United States will, in practice, follow a de facto ‘herd immunity’ approach to COVID-19 similar to Sweden’s, with the virus becoming endemic and no sustained, effective nationwide effort to fully contain or stop transmission.
I think that basically where the country is at is that we're an undeclared Sweden... we've basically given up on trying to contain or stop it. And um, and so now we're just on this path to herd immunity... it seems like kind of we're by default, just headed for herd immunity.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment

The prediction was that from mid‑2020 onward the U.S. would effectively behave like “an undeclared Sweden”: not seriously trying to fully stop COVID transmission, defaulting to a herd‑immunity‑style end state in which the virus becomes endemic.

1. COVID-19’s long‑term status in the U.S.
By 2023 the federal COVID-19 public health emergency was allowed to expire, and by 2025 major public‑health reporting and experts explicitly describe COVID-19 in the U.S. as having transitioned into an endemic respiratory disease, with ongoing but lower levels of severe illness and death rather than elimination. (en.wikipedia.org) This directly matches the prediction that the virus would not be stamped out but would become a permanent, background presence.

2. National strategy: elimination vs. “living with the virus”
The United States never adopted a zero‑COVID/elimination strategy; such approaches (mass testing, aggressive lockdowns to drive cases to zero) were associated with places like China, and are explicitly contrasted in global reporting with the “living with COVID” strategy followed by the U.S. and most Western countries. (en.wikipedia.org) Under both Trump and Biden there were substantial mitigation efforts—Operation Warp Speed for vaccines, and then Biden’s Executive Order 13987 to organize a more coordinated response—but these focused on reducing harm (through vaccination, treatment, and time‑limited NPIs), not on fully stopping transmission nationwide. (en.wikipedia.org) By early 2022, the administration’s public plans, outside expert roadmaps, and CDC’s relaxed masking guidance all framed the goal as “living with COVID” and keeping society open, not pursuing elimination. (insurancejournal.com) Senior advisers were publicly saying that eradication was unrealistic and that the U.S. would have to live with the virus long‑term. (pbs.org) That is effectively a managed herd‑immunity end state: population‑level protection via a mix of vaccination and widespread prior infection, with no expectation of stopping spread entirely.

3. Comparison to Sweden / “undeclared Sweden”
Sweden’s early strategy emphasized keeping much of society open, avoiding strict lockdowns, and letting significant community transmission occur, a choice their own inquiry later described as avoiding more “rigorous and intrusive” controls even though it produced high early death tolls. (en.wikipedia.org) The U.S. did use more formal restrictions than Sweden in 2020–21, but by 2022 most broad mask mandates and many other controls were lifted, shifting to personal responsibility and medical tools while accepting ongoing waves of infection—very similar in practical outcome to Sweden’s long‑run stance of tolerating endemic spread rather than striving for zero cases. (en.wikipedia.org)

4. Where the prediction was off, and why it still counts as right
What Sacks didn’t foresee was the scale of the vaccine‑driven response and the temporary intensity of federal and state‑level NPIs in late 2020–2021; there was in fact a large, sustained nationwide effort to mitigate COVID. But on the falsifiable core of his claim—(a) the U.S. would not mount or maintain an effective national drive to fully contain or eliminate transmission, and (b) the country would end up in a de facto herd‑immunity / “live with it” equilibrium with COVID becoming endemic—subsequent policy and epidemiological reality match his forecast. Given that, the prediction is best scored as right, with the caveat that he understated how aggressively the U.S. would pursue vaccines and temporary controls before settling into that endemic, Sweden‑like end state.

politicseconomy
The political situation for Donald Trump in the 2020 election will look significantly different (more favorable) by roughly five to six months from June 2020, as the economy recovers and civil unrest subsides.
Right now it looks pretty bleak, because I do think that his reaction to the crisis was seen as very inflammatory. Um, but I think six months from now could be a very different story. Five months.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment window
Sacks was speaking on June 20, 2020, and explicitly said the picture could be very different in “five [to] six months,” i.e., roughly November–December 2020—right around the 2020 election.

What actually happened by November–December 2020

  1. Election outcome
    By November 3, 2020, Donald Trump’s political position did not become more favorable; he lost reelection. Joe Biden won 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232 and won the national popular vote 51.3% to 46.8% (a 4.5‑point margin). (en.wikipedia.org) A president who loses both the Electoral College and the popular vote is not in a “significantly more favorable” political situation than when he was already viewed as vulnerable.

  2. Polling: June 2020 vs. late October/early November 2020
    National head‑to‑head polling between Biden and Trump in May–June 2020 generally showed Biden leading by high single‑ to low double‑digit margins (often around Biden +8–9). (en.wikipedia.org)
    Aggregated national polls in the final week before the election still showed Biden ahead by roughly 7–8 points on average (e.g., 51–52% Biden vs. 43–44% Trump). (en.wikipedia.org) The race tightened somewhat in the final result (Biden +4.5) but Trump never moved into a clearly favorable or leading position nationally. The overall political picture for Trump in late October/early November was broadly similar—still trailing by a sizable margin.

  3. Trump’s job approval
    Trump’s job approval did rebound somewhat from early‑June lows but remained underwater. Gallup shows:

    • June 8–30, 2020: 38% approve, 57% disapprove.
    • Oct. 16–27, 2020: 46% approve, 52% disapprove.
    • Nov. 5–19, 2020: 43% approve, 55% disapprove. (news.gallup.com)
      So while there was a modest recovery from June, by the election his approval was still clearly net negative—historically a bad place for an incumbent and not consistent with the idea that his political situation had become significantly more favorable.
  4. Economy and unrest (the mechanism he cited)
    Economy: The unemployment rate did improve dramatically from the worst of the COVID shock—falling from about 13.0% in June 2020 to 8.8% in September and 6.7% in December 2020, indicating a substantial partial recovery. (ycharts.com)
    Civil unrest: The most intense nationwide George Floyd protests were in late May and June; large‑scale unrest did subside somewhat by late 2020, though political and racial tensions remained high. This means the conditions Sacks expected (economic rebound and reduced unrest) partially materialized, but they did not produce the dramatic political turnaround he predicted.

Conclusion
Sacks’ core claim was that Trump’s political situation in the 2020 election would look “very different” and more favorable within five to six months. By that time, Trump still had negative net approval, continued to trail Biden by substantial margins in national polling, and then lost both the popular vote and the Electoral College. Even though the economy partially recovered and unrest eased relative to June, Trump’s reelection prospects did not become significantly better.

Verdict: the prediction was wrong.

politics
As of June 20, 2020, if the U.S. presidential election were held immediately, Donald Trump would lose to Joe Biden.
if the election were today, he would lose.View on YouTube
Explanation

The claim is about a counterfactual: “if the election were today [June 20, 2020], he would lose.” The presidential election was actually held on November 3, 2020, not June 20, so we have no direct empirical result for that specific date.

What we can say is that polling around June 20, 2020 strongly indicated Joe Biden was ahead:

  • A CNBC/Change Research poll conducted June 12–14, 2020 found Biden leading Trump by 10 points nationally and by 3 points across six key battleground states (Arizona, Florida, Michigan, North Carolina, Pennsylvania, Wisconsin).(cnbc.com)
  • Around early June 2020, RealClearPolitics’ national polling average had Biden up by about 7.8 percentage points over Trump.(cnbc.com)
  • FiveThirtyEight’s early general-election polling averages (launched in June 2020) similarly showed Biden with roughly a 9-point national lead and advantages in most major swing states.(fivethirtyeight.com)

These data make it likely that, had an election been held that day and votes mirrored the polling, Trump would have lost. However, polling is probabilistic, the Electoral College can diverge from the popular vote, and no actual election occurred on June 20. Because the statement concerns a hypothetical event that never happened, it cannot be definitively verified or falsified, even though available evidence supports its direction. Hence the prediction is best classified as ambiguous, not strictly right or wrong.

economy
Economic recovery from the COVID-19 shock will likely take about 2–3 years (i.e., until roughly 2022–2023) to “get out of this,” absent additional major negative shocks that could extend or worsen the downturn.
but yeah, I think looking forward, um, you know, I, it's probably going to be a 2 to 3 year process to get out of this unless some other shoe drops, which could make it much worse.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence suggests that the U.S. largely “got out of” the COVID‑19 recession within roughly the 2–3 year window David Sacks predicted.

GDP and overall activity

  • NBER dates the recession trough to April 2020; the economy was in expansion thereafter.(nber.org)
  • Real GDP surpassed its pre‑recession peak by Q1 2021—less than a year after the trough—and later exceeded CBO’s pre‑pandemic projections, indicating a very rapid recovery.(cbpp.org)
  • Treasury analysis shows U.S. real GDP more than 5% above its 2019 level by 2023, though still with some shortfall vs. pre‑COVID trend, i.e., essentially recovered but still normalizing.(home.treasury.gov)

Jobs and unemployment

  • The U.S. regained all ~22 million nonfarm jobs lost in early 2020 by June 2022—about 26 months after the April 2020 employment trough, within the 2–3 year window he gave.(floordaily.net)
  • BLS reports the unemployment rate returned to its pre‑pandemic level (around 3.5–3.6%) in 2022; several labor‑market measures were back at or near pre‑COVID norms by then, even though labor‑force participation remained somewhat lower.(bls.gov)

“Unless some other shoe drops” condition

  • While there were negative developments (Delta/Omicron waves, supply‑chain disruptions, and high inflation), these did not produce a second, prolonged COVID‑era recession; output and employment continued to grow and eventually exceeded pre‑pandemic levels.(cbpp.org)

Putting this together: the core economic damage from the initial COVID shock was substantially repaired in about 2 years (by mid‑2022) and clearly by around 3 years out (2023) on most headline metrics. That falls squarely within Sacks’s predicted “2 to 3 year process to get out of this” in the absence of an additional major downturn, so the prediction is best judged as broadly right, if somewhat conservative given how fast GDP itself rebounded.

economy
US unemployment, which spiked during the early COVID-19 crisis (around 15% in May 2020), will take on the order of 2–3 years (until ~2022–2023) to return to a more normal/lower level (e.g., around single-digit unemployment).
so yeah, I think it's probably like a, a 2 to 3 year process to get back to some sort of, you know.View on YouTube
Explanation

There are two reasonable ways to interpret what “a 2–3 year process to get back to some sort of [normal]” means, and they give opposite verdicts:

  1. If “normal/lower level” just means getting back to single‑digit unemployment (under ~10%)

    • The U.S. unemployment rate (U‑3) peaked at 14.7% in April 2020 and was 13.3% in May 2020, around when the prediction was made.
    • It fell below 10% by August 2020 (8.4%), only about three to four months after the spike, not 2–3 years later.
    • By December 2020, it was already down to 6.7%.

    These data imply that the move from ~15% to clearly lower, single‑digit unemployment happened in well under a year, so on that interpretation his 2–3 year timeline is wrong. (bls.gov)

  2. If “normal/lower level” means returning roughly to pre‑pandemic labor‑market conditions (~3.5–4% unemployment)

    • Before COVID, the unemployment rate was about 3.5% (February 2020). (bls.gov)
    • The rate kept improving through 2021 and reached 3.9% by December 2021, and around 3.5% again in mid‑2022 (e.g., July 2022 was 3.5%), essentially back to its pre‑COVID level.
    • From May 2020 (~13.3%) to December 2021 (3.9%) is ~1.5 years; to mid‑2022 (3.5%) is about 2.1–2.2 years—squarely inside his "2 to 3 year" window for getting back to something like the old normal.

    On this stricter endpoint definition, his 2–3 year horizon is roughly correct. (fortune.com)

Because the podcast quote stops at “some sort of, you know …” and the user’s normalization adds its own gloss (“e.g., around single‑digit unemployment”), we can’t be sure which level Sacks meant: any single‑digit rate (which happened fast) or a near‑full normalization to ~3.5–4% (which did take about 2 years). Both readings are plausible and lead to opposite grades, so the fairest overall judgment is ambiguous.

politics
If widespread COVID-19 lockdowns and political unwillingness to end them remain a salient issue by November 2020, voter anger over lockdowns will outweigh concerns about the early mishandling of COVID-19 and will become a key factor benefiting Trump in the 2020 presidential election.
I do I agree the lockdowns the or the unwillingness to end the lockdowns um gives Trump an issue for November Assuming this continues, that supersedes the incompetence of the Covid response... And I do think it will. If it's still the issue in November, it will supersede the, you know, the initial incompetence of the Covid response.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from polling, exit polls, and post‑election analyses indicates that COVID‑19 and related restrictions were indeed a salient issue by November 2020, but they hurt Trump rather than becoming a key advantage for him.

1. The antecedent mostly held: COVID and pandemic policy were top election issues.

  • Surveys in mid‑ to late‑2020 found the coronavirus outbreak was among the top issues for voters, alongside the economy and racial inequality.
    • Pew (Aug & Oct 2020) shows majorities saying the coronavirus was a very important factor in their vote.(pewresearch.org)
    • KFF’s September 2020 tracking poll found the coronavirus outbreak named as the single most important issue by about one‑fifth of voters (second only to the economy).(kff.org)
  • NBC/ CNBC exit polling on Election Day found the economy, racial inequality, and the Covid‑19 crisis as the top three issues; 52% of voters said controlling the pandemic even at the expense of the economy was more important than reopening.(cnbc.com)

So pandemic conditions and restrictions remained highly salient into November.

2. Voters largely disapproved of Trump’s COVID handling and trusted Biden more.

  • By July–October 2020, national and swing‑state polls showed solid majorities disapproving of Trump’s handling of the pandemic (e.g., 61% disapprove vs. 35% approve in KFF July poll; ~40% approve vs. ~58–61% disapprove in late‑Oct Marquette and other polls).(kff.org)
  • Pew in April 2020 already found about two‑thirds of Americans saying Trump had been too slow in his initial response.(pewresearch.org)
  • Analyses noted that as COVID worsened, more voters preferred Biden over Trump as crisis manager; Brookings summarized that the more the election became a referendum on Trump’s pandemic management, the worse his prospects looked.(brookings.edu)

3. COVID as a top issue benefited Biden, not Trump.

  • An internal post‑election autopsy by Trump’s own pollster, Tony Fabrizio, concluded Trump “lost the 2020 election largely because of his handling of the coronavirus pandemic”; voters in 10 key states rated the pandemic as their top issue and gave Biden significantly higher marks.(washingtonpost.com)
  • Reporting on that autopsy notes that voters who saw coronavirus as a top priority broke for Biden by nearly 3‑to‑1.(independent.co.uk)
  • NBC exit polls found that among voters prioritizing the pandemic and favoring stronger virus control over faster reopening, support skewed heavily toward Biden.(cnbc.com)

4. Scholarship finds the pandemic reduced Trump’s vote share.

  • A peer‑reviewed study on COVID‑19 and the 2020 election found that higher local COVID case incidence decreased support for Trump, especially in urban counties, swing states, and states he had won in 2016; they estimate that with even modestly fewer cases, Trump likely would have been reelected.(pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)
    This directly contradicts the idea that ongoing pandemic conditions and restrictions became an electoral asset for him.

5. Lockdown anger did not override perceptions of incompetence in 2020.

  • While there was visible backlash to lockdowns, polling in key swing states showed many voters instead blamed Trump for reopening too quickly and failing to model protective behaviors; a CNBC/Change poll found 55% agreed that Trump was pushing states to reopen too fast to help his reelection, and many cited him as the top person responsible for surging cases.(cnbc.com)
  • Axios’s retrospective review of COVID’s political impact notes that COVID was a central issue in 2020 and that voters prioritizing virus control over the economy helped defeat Trump—though lockdown and school‑closure backlash later aided Republicans in 2024, not 2020.(axios.com)

Conclusion
By November 2020, COVID and pandemic restrictions were still major issues, but instead of “superseding” concerns about Trump’s earlier mishandling and turning into a key pro‑Trump issue, they remained tightly linked to perceptions of his incompetence and were a central reason he lost the election. The core prediction—that if COVID/lockdowns were still salient, the issue would primarily benefit Trump—is therefore wrong.

politicseconomy
In the 2020 U.S. presidential election cycle, policy 'decoupling' from China will become a bipartisan issue: Donald Trump will run his campaign significantly blaming China for the COVID-19 crisis, Joe Biden will not defend China and will be attacked with a 'Beijing Biden' framing, and Biden will respond by taking an even tougher stance on China. As a result, U.S.–China economic decoupling will proceed as an actual policy direction supported by both parties.
Yeah. Decoupling from China is going to be a bipartisan issue now. Um, I think both candidates now will be well, Trump is going to is going to run blaming China for for what happened. And I don't think Biden's going to be defending China. Um, in fact, they're going to try and peg him with the whole Beijing Biden label. And he's probably going to need to try and out-trump Trump on on China. So decoupling is going to happen.View on YouTube
Explanation

Summary
Sacks predicted that in the 2020 election both parties would compete to be tough on China, that Trump would blame China for COVID-19 and brand Biden “Beijing Biden,” that Biden would not defend China but instead adopt a tougher China line, and that U.S.–China economic decoupling would emerge as a bipartisan policy direction. On all major elements, subsequent events match his forecast.


1. 2020 campaign: China became a central, bipartisan attack line

  • Trump blaming China for COVID-19. Throughout 2020, Trump repeatedly blamed China for the pandemic, calling it the “Chinese virus” and insisting the outbreak was China’s fault. (cnbc.com)
  • “Beijing Biden” framing. Republican messaging explicitly used the label “Beijing Biden” and tied Biden to China. FactCheck.org documented an RNC robocall that repeatedly called him “Beijing Biden.” (factcheck.org)
    The 2020 Republican National Convention coverage notes Donald Trump Jr. deriding Biden as “Beijing Biden,” and Trump allies launched a website, BeijingBiden.com, focused on Biden’s alleged coziness with China. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Biden did not defend China; he tried to be tougher. NPR/GBH reported that Trump and Biden were “battl[ing] over who is ‘weak on China,’” each accusing the other of being soft, with Biden ads saying Trump “rolled over for the Chinese.” (wgbh.org)
    During the campaign Biden called Xi Jinping a “thug” and emphasized that the U.S. “does need to get tough with China,” including over Xinjiang camps and Hong Kong. (bloomberg.com) This is the opposite of “defending” China and fits Sacks’s expectation that Biden would move to Trump’s right rhetorically on toughness.

Verdict on the campaign piece: Correct. China policy became a bipartisan campaign issue, Trump ran heavily on blaming China, Biden was attacked as “Beijing Biden,” and Biden adopted explicitly tough rhetoric rather than defending Beijing.


2. Post‑2020: bipartisan policy direction toward decoupling

Sacks’s deeper claim was not just about rhetoric but that actual U.S. policy would move toward economic decoupling, with support from both parties. Evidence since 2020 supports this in key sectors:

  • Trump-era tariffs preserved and expanded under Biden. Analyses from CNN, NPR and others note that Biden kept Trump’s Section 301 tariffs on roughly $300–370 billion of Chinese imports and, in 2024, added higher tariffs on strategic products such as EVs, batteries, solar cells, steel, aluminum and semiconductors. (amp.cnn.com) Republican leaders even praised Biden for keeping Trump’s China tariffs, underscoring the bipartisan consensus. (waysandmeans.house.gov)
  • CHIPS and Science Act and tech supply-chain reorientation. The 2022 CHIPS and Science Act—explicitly aimed at reducing reliance on Chinese semiconductors and boosting U.S. production—passed the Senate 64–33 and the House 243–187, a clearly bipartisan vote. (aflcio.org) Guardrails in the law restrict recipients from expanding advanced-chip capacity in China, pushing production back to the U.S. or allied countries. (democrats-science.house.gov)
  • Export controls and sanctions on Chinese high tech and human‑rights abusers. In October 2022 the Commerce Department imposed sweeping export controls limiting China’s access to advanced chips and manufacturing equipment; these controls have since been expanded, explicitly framed as countering China’s tech rise. (en.wikipedia.org) Separately, the Uyghur Forced Labor Prevention Act—passed with overwhelming bipartisan support—presumes goods from Xinjiang are made with forced labor and has led to bans on imports from scores of Chinese companies, forcing firms to shift supply chains. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Institutionalizing competition with China in Congress. The House established a bipartisan Select Committee on the Strategic Competition between the U.S. and the Chinese Communist Party in January 2023, with members from both parties, to coordinate economic, technological, and security policy toward China; Reuters notes that this China-focused committee is being continued across Congresses, signaling durable cross‑party commitment. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Measured but real decoupling of trade and critical sectors. Empirical work and policy analysis find that U.S.–China economic ties are being restructured rather than fully severed. A St. Louis Fed study shows China’s share of U.S. imports in communications equipment fell from 62% in 2016 to 44% in 2023, and in information technology goods from 46% to 27%, consistent with deliberate diversification away from China in high‑risk sectors. (stlouisfed.org) A Journal of International Economics paper similarly finds U.S. trade policy has produced “real” U.S.–China decoupling in bilateral trade, with China’s share of total U.S. imports dropping from 22% to 16% between 2017 and 2022 as imports shift to other countries. (sciencedirect.com) Consulting and policy reports from Bain and others characterize U.S.–China tech and supply-chain decoupling as an ongoing, defining trend. (bain.com)

Biden and G‑7 leaders do explicitly say they seek “de‑risking, not decoupling,” to signal they don’t want a total rupture. (cnbc.com) However, the concrete policies—tariffs, onshoring subsidies, export controls, forced‑labor import bans, and congressional actions—collectively amount to partial, sectoral decoupling from China, especially in technology and sensitive supply chains, and they have broad bipartisan backing.

Verdict on the policy piece: While the U.S. has not fully severed economic ties with China, a sustained, bipartisan policy push has clearly moved the relationship toward selective economic decoupling and de‑risking in strategic sectors, which is what Sacks was pointing to.


Overall assessment

Taken together:

  1. The 2020 election did in fact feature a bipartisan competition over who was tougher on China, with Trump blaming China for COVID-19 and branding Biden “Beijing Biden,” and Biden responding by hardening his own stance rather than defending Beijing. (theguardian.com)
  2. Since then, U.S. policy has moved in a bipartisan way toward partial economic decoupling from China, especially in technology and critical supply chains, via tariffs, industrial policy, export controls, and rights‑based import bans. (aflcio.org)

Given the prediction’s level of generality (“decoupling is going to happen” and will be “bipartisan”), and the clear alignment of both campaign dynamics and subsequent policy with that description, the forecast is best judged as right in substance, even though what has emerged is targeted, sectoral decoupling rather than total economic separation.

politicseconomy
Within the coming years after May 2020, the United States will repatriate production of strategic goods such as antibiotics, medicines, and personal protective equipment (PPE), so that these products that are important for national survival are manufactured domestically rather than being dependent on China.
Um, it doesn't really make sense for us to be dependent on China, for our antibiotics, for our medicines, for our PPE, for any of these, um, you know, any of these products that are important for national survival. Um, I think all that stuff is going to come back home.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment Sacks predicted that in the years after May 2020 the U.S. would bring home production of strategic medical goods—antibiotics, medicines, PPE—so that these would be manufactured domestically instead of relying on China.

1. Medicines and antibiotics are still largely import‑dependent

Multiple recent analyses show that the U.S. continues to rely heavily on foreign—especially Chinese and Indian—suppliers for both finished drugs and active pharmaceutical ingredients (APIs):

  • A 2024–25 risk assessment finds the U.S. now imports about 75% of its essential medicines; China and India dominate API production, and China supplies about 90% of the antibiotic APIs used in the U.S.(exiger.com)
  • A 2025 industry study reports that China and India together provide roughly 70–80% of U.S. generic drug supply (counting both finished drugs and APIs), with China controlling most global production of key antibiotic ingredients.(prosperousamerica.org)
  • Policy and think‑tank work in 2024–25 concludes that more than 60% of APIs used in the U.S. come from India and China, and only around 10% of APIs are made domestically.(5g.wilsoncenter.org)
  • Academic and regulatory reviews note that over 92% of facilities making generic-drug APIs for the U.S. market are located overseas, primarily in India, China, and parts of Europe.(pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)

Taken together, these data indicate that dependence on foreign—often China-linked—supply chains for antibiotics and generic medicines has persisted or even deepened since 2020, rather than being broadly repatriated.

2. PPE production: domestic boosts, but China still dominant

PPE shows a similar pattern: a temporary domestic surge followed by renewed reliance on imports, especially from China.

  • Industry groups note that before Covid more than 90% of PPE used in the U.S. was made in Southeast Asia, mainly China; they report that after an initial pandemic-era buildup of U.S. factories, many of those plants have since downsized or shut, while China’s market share has increased again.(ammaunited.org)
  • By 2025, U.S. PPE manufacturers’ association data describe a collapse of the pandemic startup wave: out of 100+ new PPE makers, only a handful remain in operation, while China now produces the vast majority of medical protective gear used by U.S. healthcare workers.(ammaunited.org)
  • Government oversight and trade reports find that the U.S. remains highly dependent on foreign suppliers—particularly for items like nitrile gloves and gowns—and that higher tariffs on Chinese medical imports are likely to shift sourcing to other low-cost countries more than to large-scale U.S. production.(files.gao.gov)

So although some U.S. PPE capacity was added, the overall system is still structurally reliant on imported gear, much of it from or tied to China.

3. There have been onshoring initiatives—but they are partial

The federal government has taken steps in exactly the direction Sacks described, including:

  • A major BARDA contract with Phlow Corp in May 2020 to build domestic capacity for essential medicines and APIs at risk of shortage.(pharmajournalist.com)
  • Dozens of Defense Production Act and related projects from 2020–21 onward to expand U.S. production of N95s, gloves, masks, and other critical supplies.(files.gao.gov)
  • 2024 BARDA contracts—over $500 million—to source U.S.-made isolation gowns for the Strategic National Stockpile.(reuters.com)
  • A 2025 FDA pilot to fast‑track approval of generics tested and manufactured entirely in the U.S., explicitly aiming to reduce reliance on foreign drug manufacturing.​(reuters.com)

These actions show meaningful movement toward greater domestic capacity, but they represent pockets of reshoring, not a wholesale return of “all that stuff.”

4. Conclusion

Sacks’ prediction was not just that there would be policy efforts or incremental shifts; he said that antibiotics, medicines, PPE, and similar survival‑critical products would “come back home,” ending U.S. dependence on China. Five-plus years later, the empirical record shows:

  • The majority of essential medicines and APIs used in the U.S. are still imported, with China and India at the core of those supply chains.
  • U.S. PPE production expanded temporarily but then contracted, while China again accounts for most of the medical protective gear used in U.S. healthcare.

Given that overall dependence on foreign—and especially China-linked—production remains high, the core outcome Sacks predicted has not occurred within the “coming years” after 2020.

Therefore, this prediction is best classified as: wrong.

politicsgovernment
TikTok’s ability to operate in the United States will likely be resolved as part of a larger U.S.–China negotiation, where TikTok’s U.S. market access is traded in a quid pro quo for concessions such as allowing Tesla to sell cars in China or similar reciprocal commercial access.
Well, you know, what's probably going to happen is that the TikTok will probably be caught up in some larger negotiation. And, you know, is a quid pro quo. Well, Tesla gets to sell cars in China and TikTok gets to operate in the US. Maybe.View on YouTube
Explanation

Why this prediction is rated “wrong”

  1. How TikTok’s U.S. status has actually been handled

    • In August 2020, Donald Trump issued Executive Order 13942 targeting TikTok/ByteDance under U.S. national‑security and ICT‑supply‑chain authorities, handled as a unilateral U.S. executive action rather than part of a broader trade bargain with China. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • In 2024, Congress passed the Protecting Americans from Foreign Adversary Controlled Applications Act, explicitly aimed at TikTok and other ByteDance apps. It conditions TikTok’s continued U.S. operation on divestiture from its China‑based parent, again on national‑security grounds, not as a negotiated trade concession with Beijing. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Federal courts later upheld this law as constitutional, emphasizing its national‑security purpose (Chinese government access to data and influence), and framing the issue as sale or ban, not as an element in a reciprocal U.S.–China commercial deal. (apnews.com)
    • Subsequent U.S. executive orders in 2025 implement and sequence enforcement and potential divestiture under this statute; they continue to treat TikTok as a regulated “foreign adversary controlled application,” not as a chip in a broader market‑access swap. (whitehouse.gov)

    Across this timeline, the formal resolution path for TikTok in the U.S. has been: targeted legislation, CFIUS/national‑security review, and court challenges—domestic legal/regulatory processes, not a quid‑pro‑quo trade negotiation with China over unrelated U.S. firms.

  2. Tesla’s China access was established independently and earlier

    • Tesla’s Shanghai Gigafactory was agreed with local government in July 2018, ground was broken in January 2019, and production began in late 2019, making it China’s first wholly foreign‑owned auto plant—well before the May 2020 podcast and before TikTok became a major U.S. political issue. (en.wikipedia.org)
    • Chinese policy changes allowing 100% foreign ownership for EV makers, plus local tax breaks and subsidies, explain Tesla’s market access and favorable treatment; these are documented as part of China’s industrial strategy to promote EVs, not as a concession traded for U.S. treatment of TikTok. (appen.media.gov.cn)
  3. No evidence of the specific quid‑pro‑quo mechanism Sacks described

    • Sacks predicted TikTok’s ability to operate in the U.S. would “probably” be resolved inside a larger U.S.–China negotiation, where TikTok’s U.S. market access is swapped for something like Tesla’s right to sell cars in China.
    • Public reporting and official documents on both TikTok policy and Tesla’s China operations contain no indication that TikTok’s U.S. status has been explicitly bargained against reciprocal commercial access for Tesla (or a similar single firm) in China. Instead, they are treated as separate issues: TikTok as a national‑security/ownership problem; Tesla as a beneficiary of China’s EV‑industrial policy.

Because TikTok’s U.S. fate has been driven by unilateral U.S. national‑security law and litigation rather than a documented U.S.–China quid‑pro‑quo trading it against Tesla’s China access (which was already secured before the prediction), the specific mechanism Sacks described did not occur.

Conclusion: The prediction about how TikTok’s U.S. access would be resolved—via a Tesla‑style quid‑pro‑quo negotiation with China—has not come true; it is therefore wrong.

economy
Future U.S.–China (and related) international commerce will increasingly be structured on explicit reciprocity deals—market access for one country’s companies will be granted in exchange for equivalent access or concessions for the other country’s firms, rather than being unilaterally open.
And I think that's the way that all this commerce is going to is going to start working.View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence since 2020 shows some movement toward reciprocity-based arrangements in U.S.–China and related commerce, but not clearly enough to say Sacks’ vision has broadly materialized, nor clearly failed.

Points suggesting the prediction is at least partly on track

  • U.S. policymakers have elevated “reciprocity” to a formal organizing idea. The True Reciprocity Act of 2023 declares it U.S. policy that any trade or investment negotiations with China should address non‑reciprocal arrangements and secure structural changes in China’s trade practices. (congress.gov)
  • The U.S.–China Economic and Security Review Commission explicitly recommends that Congress adopt reciprocity as a “foundational” principle in all U.S.–China legislation, covering market access and regulatory parity. (uscc.gov)
  • The draft EU–China Comprehensive Agreement on Investment (CAI) was framed by the EU as rebalancing asymmetries and increasing reciprocity of market access and a level playing field for EU firms in China. (policy.trade.ec.europa.eu)
  • A 2025 White House proclamation on the Kuala Lumpur Joint Arrangement with China openly links tariff changes to addressing a “lack of trade reciprocity” and ties U.S. concessions (e.g., tariff modifications) to Chinese commitments on export controls and purchases—an explicitly quid‑pro‑quo structure. (whitehouse.gov)

Points cutting the other way

  • The dominant U.S. approach to China under Biden has been framed as “small yard, high fence”: targeted export controls and investment restrictions on sensitive technologies for national security, not a general reciprocity‑for‑access bargain. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Business and policy analyses still describe the relationship as non‑reciprocal and deteriorating; U.S. firms cite tariffs and export controls plus continuing market-access barriers in China, rather than a new stable reciprocity regime. (apnews.com)
  • The flagship EU reciprocity project (CAI) remains stalled and, as of 2025, senior EU trade officials say the EU has “no interest” in reviving it, citing worsening market barriers in China. (scmp.com)

Netting this out, reciprocity has clearly become a more explicit goal and features in some specific deals, but the overall structure of U.S.–China and allied commerce is better described as fragmented, security‑driven, and only selectively reciprocal. That mixed, qualitative reality makes the prediction neither clearly fulfilled nor clearly falsified, hence “ambiguous.”

healtheconomy
By the end of April 2020, public debate in the US will broadly shift from immediate COVID-19 triage to the question of how and when to reopen the economy and exit lockdowns.
the big question that everyone is going to be asking by the end of April is what now?View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence shows that by mid- to late April 2020, U.S. public and political debate had indeed shifted from immediate COVID-19 triage toward how and when to reopen the economy.

  • On April 16, 2020, the White House formally issued the “Opening Up America Again” guidelines, a phased framework explicitly focused on conditions and timelines for relaxing restrictions and restarting economic activity, signaling that national-level discussion had moved to the reopening question. (trumpwhitehouse.archives.gov)
  • In the second half of April, multiple news briefings and analyses revolved around reopening timelines and risks, with officials like Anthony Fauci publicly framing their comments around how to reopen without causing a rebound, rather than whether to remain in indefinite lockdown. (kffhealthnews.org)
  • Beginning mid‑April 2020, a wave of anti‑lockdown “reopen” protests spread across many U.S. states (e.g., Michigan on April 15, Pennsylvania on April 20, Rhode Island on April 25, Alaska on April 23), explicitly demanding that states reopen their economies and lift stay‑at‑home orders—another indicator that public debate had pivoted to the “what now / how do we reopen” question. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Analyses of U.S. policy responses note that by late April 2020, federal actions (such as using the Defense Production Act to keep meat plants open) and state discussions were being driven by decisions about when and how to restart economic activity despite ongoing health risks, not by initial triage questions. (link.springer.com)

Taken together, these contemporaneous policy moves, protests, and media frames show that by the end of April 2020, the dominant U.S. debate had indeed shifted toward reopening the economy and exiting lockdowns, matching the substance of Sacks’s prediction that the big question by then would be “what now?”.

economy
As a result of COVID-19, US unemployment will rise from around 15% toward 25–30%, and US GDP in the next reported quarter (Q2 2020) will contract by approximately 25–33% on an annualized basis.
you've got, you know, like a 15% unemployment rate going to going to 25 or 30, maybe as high as that. We don't know yet. You've got a you know, we think that GDP is going to contract in the next quarter by a quarter to a third.View on YouTube
Explanation

What was predicted

David Sacks forecast that, due to COVID‑19:

  1. U.S. unemployment would rise from around 15% toward 25–30%.
  2. U.S. real GDP in the next reported quarter (Q2 2020) would contract by about 25–33% at an annualized rate.

What actually happened

  1. Unemployment:

    • The official U.S. unemployment rate (BLS U‑3) peaked at 14.7% in April 2020, then fell to 13.3% in May and 11.1% in June, never reaching the 25–30% range Sacks described. (bls.gov)
    • The BLS noted misclassification issues that likely understated unemployment by about 5 percentage points in April and May, implying a true rate around 19–20% at the peak, but still far below 25–30%. (forbes.com)
    • No standard unemployment measure (U‑3, or the broader U‑6) approached 25–30%; U‑6 was about 22.8% in April 2020. (cnbc.com)
  2. GDP contraction (Q2 2020):

    • The Bureau of Economic Analysis reports that real GDP decreased at an annual rate of 31.4% in Q2 2020, squarely within Sacks’s projected 25–33% contraction band. (apps.bea.gov)

Assessment

The forecast was a conjunction: unemployment rising from ~15% to roughly 25–30%, and GDP in Q2 2020 contracting by ~25–33% annualized. While he was very accurate on the GDP contraction, the unemployment call was materially off; unemployment peaked well below his 25–30% range on any standard measure.

Because the unemployment portion clearly did not come true, the combined prediction is best classified as wrong overall, albeit with a correct GDP sub‑prediction.

economygovernment
If the acute phase of the COVID-19 crisis and associated shutdowns in the US last significantly longer than a few months (i.e., extend well beyond mid-2020), then government and Federal Reserve interventions will fail to fully stabilize the system, leading to a cascade of corporate defaults and bankruptcies and a broad, systemic "great unraveling" of the US economy.
if the crisis only lasts a few months, maybe they can hold it all together. But I do worry that if it lasts longer, it's going to slip out of their hands. And, um, and the result is going to be a cascade of, of defaults and bankruptcies and, uh, and effectively a great unraveling of our economy.View on YouTube
Explanation

Assessment of the conditional

  • The prediction’s condition was that the acute COVID-19 crisis and associated shutdowns in the US would last significantly longer than a few months / well beyond mid‑2020. In fact, while the official recession was brief (February–April 2020), public‑health emergency status continued until May 11, 2023, and major sectors (schools, entertainment, offices, travel) faced substantial restrictions and depressed activity well past mid‑2020.(en.wikipedia.org) This is a reasonable match to the “lasts longer than a few months” scenario Sacks was worried about.

Did policy interventions "fail" and cause a systemic unraveling?

  1. Macroeconomic trajectory:

    • Real US GDP fell 3.5% in 2020, but then grew about 5.7% in 2021, the fastest annual growth since the 1980s, and continued to expand in 2022.(en.wikipedia.org) NBER later dated the recession as lasting just two months (Feb–Apr 2020), with the economy returning to expansion from May 2020 onward.(cnbc.com) This pattern is inconsistent with a prolonged, uncontrolled “great unraveling” of the US economy.
  2. Effectiveness of fiscal and monetary support:

    • Large federal relief packages (CARES Act, later stimulus, and the 2021 American Rescue Plan) plus aggressive Federal Reserve actions (rate cuts, liquidity facilities, asset purchases) are widely credited with stabilizing financial markets and supporting demand. The NBER notes that policy support helped halt the sharp GDP collapse, and Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen has argued that COVID stimulus prevented millions of additional job losses and a far deeper slump.(upi.com) This directly contradicts the prediction that interventions would “slip out of their hands” and fail to stabilize the system.
  3. Corporate defaults and bankruptcies:

    • Corporate distress did rise, but not to systemic‑collapse levels. Moody’s reports that in 2020 the speculative‑grade default rate (by dollar volume) was about 6.3%, elevated relative to the long‑run average (~4.2%) but far below peaks seen in true systemic crises.(scribd.com)
    • After heavy support and very low interest rates, defaults and formal bankruptcies fell in 2021–2022 and only later climbed again as high rates and post‑COVID pressures hit, with 2024 corporate bankruptcies reaching the highest level since 2010. Even then, analysts described risks as elevated but not system‑threatening, not a broad financial collapse.(ft.com) This is a notable wave of distress in specific sectors, but not the across‑the‑board “cascade” foreseen.
  4. Overall financial and economic system stability:

    • Despite severe short‑run damage (record job losses, a historic but brief GDP plunge), the combination of fiscal and Fed actions prevented a breakdown of core financial institutions or credit markets. By late 2020 and 2021, equity markets and corporate bond issuance had largely recovered, and the economy transitioned into a strong, if inflationary, expansion rather than a depression‑like unraveling.(en.wikipedia.org)

Conclusion

  • The condition Sacks specified—COVID and related shutdowns lasting well beyond a short, temporary shock—did materialize. However, his predicted outcome—that in this case interventions would lose control, producing a cascading wave of defaults, bankruptcies, and an effective “great unraveling” of the US economy—did not occur. The recession was deep but extremely short, the financial system remained intact, and the subsequent recovery was historically strong. On that basis, this prediction is wrong.
politicshealth
Joe Biden will remain the Democratic nominee for U.S. president in 2020 and will not be replaced at the top of the ticket unless he experiences a serious health emergency.
Barring a Biden health emergency. I mean yeah I mean he is yeah. He's you know not a spring chicken.View on YouTube
Explanation

Joe Biden secured enough delegates to become the presumptive Democratic nominee in early June 2020 and was formally nominated at the Democratic National Convention in August 2020, heading the ticket with Kamala Harris as his running mate. He remained at the top of the ticket through Election Day on November 3, 2020, ultimately winning the presidency; there was no replacement of Biden as the nominee during the 2020 campaign.

Authoritative sources documenting this include:

  • Biden surpassing the delegate threshold and becoming the presumptive nominee in June 2020.
  • His formal nomination at the August 2020 Democratic National Convention.
  • The certified 2020 general election results listing Joe Biden as the Democratic candidate for president.

No credible record shows a serious health emergency leading to Biden being replaced on the ticket in 2020. Therefore, Sacks’s conditional prediction — that Biden would remain the Democratic nominee and not be replaced at the top of the ticket absent a major health event — matches what actually happened, and is rated right.

politicshealth
In the near term (spring–summer 2020), the primary U.S. political debate will center on strategies and timing for exiting COVID-19 quarantines and lockdowns, rather than on whether to impose them.
I think the next big political debate is, is going to be around this. What now? You know? Yes, the quarantines have arrested the exponentiality of the virus, but how do we get out of them?View on YouTube
Explanation

Evidence from spring–early summer 2020 shows that the central COVID-related political fight in the U.S. did indeed shift to how and when to exit lockdowns, matching Sacks’s prediction.

Key points:

  • By early April 2020, roughly 42 U.S. states already had some form of stay‑at‑home or lockdown order, so the main policy question was no longer whether to impose them but what to do next. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Beginning in mid‑April 2020, coordinated “reopen” protests spread across numerous states. These protests explicitly demanded that states be “re-opened” and focused on the economic and social costs of ongoing restrictions, not on debating initial imposition. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • On April 16, 2020, the White House released the “Opening Up America Again” guidelines, a three‑phase plan for rolling back restrictions; this triggered a high‑profile political dispute over how quickly to reopen and who had authority—Trump or the governors—again centering the debate on exit strategy and timing. (de.wikipedia.org)
  • Multiple interstate compacts (e.g., the Western States Pact and similar northeastern/midwestern agreements) were formed specifically to coordinate the rollback of economic restrictions, reinforcing that many governors framed the main policy challenge as managing reopening. (en.wikipedia.org)
  • Retrospectives on 2020 U.S. politics note that pandemic response became a major election issue, with Democrats generally favoring cautious reopening and Republicans pushing a faster return to a fully open economy—again, a dispute over how and when to exit restrictions. (en.wikipedia.org)

It is true that by late May and through summer 2020, the murder of George Floyd and the ensuing Black Lives Matter protests became a dominant national political issue. (en.wikipedia.org) However, within the domain Sacks was clearly talking about—COVID policy—the near‑term “next big political debate” in spring–early summer 2020 was indeed about strategies and timing for getting out of quarantines and lockdowns, not about whether to impose them. Therefore the prediction is best judged as right.

politicseconomy
If the U.S. economic recovery from COVID-19 is V-shaped (rapid return to prior levels) before the November 2020 election, Donald Trump will very likely win re-election (be a “shoo-in”).
I agree, I agree with Thomas that if if this ends up being V-shaped, um, Trump is a shoo in.View on YouTube
Explanation

Sacks’ prediction was that if the COVID‑era U.S. recovery was V‑shaped by the November 2020 election, Donald Trump would be a “shoo‑in” for re‑election.

By late 2020, many in Trump’s own camp were explicitly describing the rebound as a V‑shaped recovery, pointing to record Q3 GDP growth (+33.1% annualized after a ‑32.9% collapse in Q2) and strong stock‑market gains. Republican materials from the House Ways and Means Committee touted the Q3 bounce as “historic growth” pointing to a V‑shaped recovery. (cnbc.com) However, the recovery was incomplete: the unemployment rate was 6.9% in October 2020, nearly double the 3.5% rate in February, and only about 54.5% of the 22.2 million jobs lost from February to the trough had been regained. (bls.gov) Real GDP in Q4 2020 remained about 2.4% below its pre‑pandemic peak in Q4 2019, and did not rise above the pre‑COVID level until mid‑2021. (cbpp.org) Other observers, including Joe Biden, instead characterized the pattern as a K‑shaped recovery, reflecting its unequal impact. (aljazeera.com)

Crucially, regardless of how one labels the recovery’s “shape,” Trump did not win re‑election. Joe Biden won the 2020 presidential election with 306 electoral votes to Trump’s 232 and a popular‑vote margin of over 7 million. (britannica.com) Since the economic rebound was widely portrayed by Trump’s own team as V‑shaped yet Trump was not a “shoo‑in” and in fact lost, Sacks’s conditional prediction did not come true. Therefore, it is best scored as wrong.